Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) - 23445509

ttt
GUIDING
ENGINEERING
MANUAL
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu.
Royal Commission in Jubail

GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Rev. 1

SECTION 1.1 GENERAL Rev. 1
1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND
1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL
1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS
1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL
1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL STANDARD DETAILS
SECTION 1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION Rev. 1
1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION
1.2.1 CHAPTER 1
1.2.2 CHAPTER 2
1.2.3 CHAPTER 3
1.2.4 CHAPTER 4
1.2.5 CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 2 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES Rev. 1
SECTION 2.1 GENERAL Rev. 1
2.1 GENERAL
SECTION 2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS Rev. 1
2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
SECTION 2.3 SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS Rev. 1
2.3 SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS
SECTION 2.4 REFERENCES Rev. 1
2.4 REFERENCES
CHAPTER 3 CODES AND PERFORMANCE STANDARDS Rev. 1
SECTION 3.1 BUILDING CODES Rev. 1
3.1.1 GENERAL BUILDING CODES AND ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
3.1.2 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
SECTION 3.2 DEVELOPMENT CODE Rev. 1
3.2.1 GENERAL
3.2.2 COORDINATION WITH DEVELOPMENT CODE
3.2.3 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL MASTER PLANS
3.2.4 SETBACK REQUIREMENTS
3.2.5 PARKING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 3.3 ACCESSIBILITY Rev. 1
3.3.1 GENERAL
3.3.2 SITE ACCESSIBILITY
3.3.3 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY
Sunday, September 20, 2020 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 3.4 SUSTAINABILITY Rev. 1
3.4.1 GENERAL
3.4.2 SUSTAINABLE “GREEN” DESIGN
3.4.3 ASHRAE
3.4.4 ENERGY
3.4.5 WATER CONSERVATION
SECTION 3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION Rev. 1
3.5.1 GENERAL
3.5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY SYSTEM AND RCER
3.5.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS AND PROJECT PERMITTING
3.5.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
3.5.5 POLLUTION PREVENTION
3.5.6 PETROLEUM AND CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE
3.5.7 SITE CLEANUP AND REMEDIATION
SECTION 3.6 SAFETY STANDARDS Rev. 1
3.6.1 GENERAL
3.6.2 SAFETY IN DESIGN
CHAPTER 4 PROJECT SUBMISSION STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS Rev. 1
SECTION 4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS Rev. 1
4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 4.2 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS Rev. 1
4.2.0 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
4.2.1 GENERAL
4.2.2 DRAWINGS
4.2.3 SPECIFICATION STANDARDS
4.2.4 COST ESTIMATE STANDARDS
4.2.5 CALCULATIONS
4.2.6 SCHEDULES OF QUANTITIES
4.2.7 RFP DOCUMENTS
4.2.8 REVIEW/APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES
SECTION 4.3 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS Rev. 1
4.3.0 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS
4.3.1 GENERAL
4.3.2 PRELIMINARY STUDIES
4.3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL (ASSESSMENTS, STUDIES AND PERMITTING)
4.3.4 SUSTAINABILITY REPORT
4.3.5 VALUE ENGINEERING
4.3.6 DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBRs)
4.3.7 LAND ALLOCATION REQUESTS
4.3.8 LIFE CYCLE COSTING AND DESIGN SERVICE LIFE
4.3.9 RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING
4.3.10 THIRD PARTY CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND INTERFACE CONTROL
DOCUMENT)

4.3.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROCEDURES
4.3.12 BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
4.3.13 CONTRACTUAL RESTRICTIONS
4.3.14 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 4.4 FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS Rev. 1
4.4.1 SURVEYING
4.4.2 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
4.4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS AND STUDIES
4.4.4 DECONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
4.4.5 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT
SECTION 4.5 CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS Rev. 1
4.5.0 CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS
4.5.1 GENERAL
4.5.2 DESIGN CHANGE NOTICES
4.5.3 LABOR ACCOMMODATIONS
4.5.4 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
4.5.5 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
4.5.6 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
4.5.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
4.5.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
4.5.9 STARTUP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING
4.5.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (INITIAL ACCEPTANCE)
4.5.11 DOCUMENTATION AND ARCHIVING
CHAPTER 5 DESIGN GUIDELINES Rev. 1
SECTION 5.1 DESIGN GUIDELINES Rev. 1
5.1.1 GENERAL
5.1.2 SAUDI ARABIAN GOODS AND SERVICES
5.1.3 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
5.1.4 THIRD PARTY REQUIREMENTS
5.1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
5.1.6 LOCAL CLIMATE CONDITIONS
SECTION 5.2 STRUCTURAL Rev. 1
5.2.0 STRUCTURAL
5.2.1 BUILDING STRUCTURES
5.2.2 HIGH RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES (HEIGHT > 18 METERS)
5.2.3 NON-BUILDING STRUCTURES
5.2.4 TRANSPORTATION STRUCTURES
5.2.5 FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES
5.2.6 CORROSION PROTECTION
SECTION 5.3 ARCHITECTURAL Rev. 1
5.3.0 ARCHITECTURAL
5.3.1 GENERAL ARCHITECTURE
5.3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR BUILDINGS

5.3.3 BUILDING DEVELOPMENT
5.3.4 BUILDING COMPONENTS
5.3.5 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE
SECTION 5.4 MECHANICAL Rev. 1
5.4.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION
5.4.2 PLUMBING
5.4.3 HVAC
SECTION 5.5 ELECTRICAL Rev. 1
5.5.1 ELECTRICAL
5.5.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
5.5.3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
SECTION 5.6 CIVIL, SITEWORK, AND ROADWAYS Rev. 1
5.6.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT DESIGN
5.6.2 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION
5.6.3 STREETS AND ROADWAYS
5.6.4 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
SECTION 5.7 UTILITIES Rev. 1
5.7.0 UTILITIES
5.7.1 POTABLE WATER
5.7.2 SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL SEWER SYSTEM
5.7.3 RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM (IRRIGATION)
5.7.4 SEA WATER COOLING
5.7.5 FUEL GAS
5.7.6 ELECTRICAL
5.7.7 COMMUNICATIONS
5.7.8 HYDRONIC COOLING
5.7.9 PIPELINE CORRIDORS
SECTION 5.8 COASTAL MARINE Rev. 1
5.8.1 GENERAL
5.8.2 NATURAL CONDITIONS
5.8.3 LAND RECLAMATION
5.8.4 BREAKWATERS, JETTIES, QUAY WALLS AND REVETMENTS
5.8.5 DREDGING
5.8.6 SHORELINE PROTECTION
SECTION 5.9 ENVIRONMENTAL Rev. 0
5.9.1 GENERAL
5.9.2 AIR
5.9.3 WATER AND WASTEWATER DISCHARGES
5.9.4 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT AND RECYCLING
5.9.5 NOISE MANAGEMENT
5.9.6 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

SECTION 5.10 GEOTECHNICAL Rev. 1
5.10.1 GENERAL
5.10.2 GEOTECHNICAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 5.11 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION Rev. 1
5.11.1 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION
5.11.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION
5.11.3 PLANT MATERIALS
5.11.4 LANDSCAPE DESIGN PRINCIPLES
5.11.5 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
5.11.6 SITE FURNISHINGS & ELEMENTS
5.11.7 PLAZAS, SQUARES, AND PARKS
5.11.8 HARDSCAPE DESIGN
5.11.9 STANDARD NOTES
5.11.10 TABLES

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
1 2020 General update TJC BAN BAN MRC OMQ

0 2016 Issued for use SI OMQ - MAA GAO
Revision Date Description Originator Checker Chief MoE DoE

Royal Commission for Jubail & Yanbu
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page No.
1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND ................................................................................ 1

A. Purpose ......................................................................................................................... 1
B. National and Regional Framework ................................................................................ 1
C. Master Plans .................................................................................................................. 1
D. Industrial Cities .............................................................................................................. 2
E. The Community Plan ..................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL ..................... 4
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4
B. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 4
C. Related Sections ........................................................................................................... 4
1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ................................................................................... 5
A. Responsibilities and Coordination ................................................................................. 5
B. Document Submittal ...................................................................................................... 7
C. Quality Management System ........................................................................................ 7
D. Order of Precedence for Technical Conflicts ................................................................. 7
E. Procedures .................................................................................................................... 7
1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS...................................................................................... 9
A. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 9
1. All projects are to align with the following regulatory documents: ................................. 9
1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL .................................................................................... 10
A. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 10
1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ........................................... 11
A. Standard Specifications ................................................................................................ 11
1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL STANDARD DETAILS .. 12
A. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 12
B. Standard Details ........................................................................................................... 12
FIGURE 1.1.A: JUBAIL INDUSTRIAL CITY DISTRICT MAP .......................................................... 13
FIGURE 1.1.B: RAS AL-KHAIR DISTRICT MAP............................................................................. 14
RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Rev. 1 1.1 - i
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND
1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND
A. Purpose
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail is currently engaged in the expansion and development
of Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities. In Jubail, the Royal Commission is engaged
in expansion of the city to meet future demands from existing and new industries in Jubail
1 and Jubail 2 Industrial Areas. In Ras Al-Khair, the Royal Commission is engaged in
development of the city by building the infrastructure to support existing and future
mineral industries to be built in the city.
B. National and Regional Framework
1. This Section provides important background information concerning the Royal
Commission and the industrial cities under its jurisdiction (specifically, Jubail Industrial
City and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City), and the significant urban planning and
infrastructure development context for the cities, for Consultant’s consideration in
preparation of engineering services.
2. In 1975, the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) completed its Second Development Plan for
economic diversification and industrialization. The central focus of the Plan was the
development of hydrocarbon-based and energy-intensive industries, including the
production, refining, and manufacturing of fuels, petrochemicals, steel and aluminum.
Two cities were established to implement the Kingdom’s industrialization aspirations,
including one in Jubail in the Eastern Province and one in Yanbu in the Western
Province.
3. The Royal Commission in Jubail and Yanbu (RCJY) was established in 1975 to develop
the infrastructure required to transform Jubail and Yanbu into planned industrial cities and
today, the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) continues to be responsible for planning
and implementing infrastructure plans and well-integrated public services for the
development of Jubail. The mission of the RCJY is to, “Plan, promote, develop and
manage Petrochemicals and Energy intensive industrial cities through successful
customer focus and partnerships with Investors, employees, communities and other
stakeholders.” Accordingly, Jubail Industrial City (JIC) is now a well-established, world-
scale petrochemical industrial center. It is Saudi Arabia's leading center for foreign joint
venture capital and overall investment. Its vision is to be the best choice for investors in
petrochemical and energy-intensive industries and the leading contributor to the
Kingdom’s growth.
4. Due to the success that has been achieved by RCJ, in 2009, the Saudi Arabian
Government assigned the task of administration, management and development of Ras
Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) to the RCJ. Ras Al-Khair Industrial City, located
approximately 80 km North West of JIC, is planned to be a leading minerals and metal
related industrial city in the region and the world. The vision for Ras Al-Khair Industrial
City is, “To be the center of excellence for metal and mineral industries by building a
world class complex that employs latest technologies and creates integrated industries
that leverage key resources of the Kingdom.”
C. Master Plans
1. The Jubail Industrial City Master Plan is the key strategic document for guiding the city’s
long-term growth and development. It was originally prepared in 1978, updated in 1984
and 1999. The city’s rapid rate of development and current and forecasted outlook for the
oil and gas economy, led to the Master Plan Update in 2010. The plan outlook over the
projected horizon year of 2030 is to transform JIC into a “Complete and Sustainable City”
that has diversity of function, population, and housing choices.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 1
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
2. In 2009, the first draft of Ras Al-Khair Industrial City, Initial Master Plan was prepared,
and ever since it has been undergoing updates with the latest being in 2011.
D. Industrial Cities
1. Originally conceived as part of the 1978 Jubail Master Plan (MP), Jubail 1 (J1) has been
the focus of JIC‘s industrial activity for over the years. It basically consists of three
industrial zones including Support and Light Manufacturing Industries, Secondary
Industries, and Primary Industries. Due to the rapid development of J1, a new
development area, Jubail 2 (J2), was identified as being required in the 1999 Master Plan
Update (MPU). In general, these industries convert natural resources, together with
certain required imports, to basic products. These products are intended to be utilized by
other Primary Industries or by the Secondary Industries for further in-Kingdom
conversion. Primary Industries are generally characterized by their relatively large
demands for infrastructure and utilities. Secondary Industries are mainly specialty
petrochemicals and plastics and include enterprises that utilize – as their main feedstock
– primary industry output for conversion to downstream products. Light Manufacturing
Industries generally utilize the outputs of the existing or planned Primary and Secondary
Industries to produce finished goods for use in construction of industrial plants,
community development and for export. As the name implies, Support Industries provide
the goods and services necessary for construction and on-going support of the Primary,
Secondary and Light Manufacturing Industries. Jubail 2 leasable land is over 5,000
hectares.
2. The Ras Al-Khair Industrial City is located approximately 80 km to the northwest of JIC.
The new mineral city is proposed to include energy intensive developments related to
aluminum and phosphate production. An aluminum smelter and a phosphate plant are
both in production at Ras Al-Khair Industrial City. The total area to be developed in RIC is
approximately 5,335 hectares.
3. The Royal Commission in Jubail’s Urban Development Department has developed
additional Master Planning documents, including Northern Corridor Buffer Zone (NCBZ)
Master Plan, City Center Master Plan, West of Abu-Hadriah City Plan, and Jubail Airport
Master Plan. See Section 3.2 for zoning regulations.
E. The Community Plan
1. The 80 km2 peninsula shaped community area of Jubail Industrial City is situated in
unique location north of the industrial park. In the middle of it to the north lies a sea bay
called "Khaleej Mardumah" that divides the area into two "butterfly" shaped sections. A
cape extends from its right half toward the east into the Arab Gulf water forming a
continuous 45 km long coastal area of natural beauty. The city commercial and social
center is in the peninsula entrance which is separated from the industrial park by a wide
desert strip. Choosing the community area took into consideration natural factors of the
city, the most important being wind direction. The community area is divided into eight
equal districts where four of them are located to the east of Khaleej Mardumah, while the
other four districts are located to the west of it. JIC City Center is in the middle of these
districts to form in the end the "butterfly" design idea of the community area.
2. The community area districts were planned on the modern style which combines the
Islamic morals and KSA old traditions on one hand and the advanced modern Standard
of living on the other hand. Each of the "1000 ha" districts is home for "31 to 38 thousand
people," as per the City Master Plan. These districts are connected to each other by a
network of roads separated by green strips of parks, recreational playgrounds, and some
joint educational services.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 2
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
3. There is a clear hierarchy in the urban formation for each district as it is divided into four
or five residential sectors each is inhabited by "7,000 to 10,000" people. The sector
consists of several neighborhoods with resident population ranging from 2250 to 2750
per neighborhood. The neighborhood is the smallest unit in the district and it includes all
of utilities, facilities, and public services such as mosques, schools, health centers, and
commercial, social, and recreation centers to reduce pressure on the main city center,
prevent traffic jams, and ease residents so that the distance from any residential unit to a
district center would not take more than 10 minutes walking.
4. The districts of Jubail Industrial City (JIC) are characterized by low population density of
about 12 residential units per hectare, consisting of a mixture of attached and detached
residential units and block buildings in sector centers within a homogeneous urban
texture.
5. Today, Fanateer and Deffi are the oldest permanent districts in JIC. A large part of
Jalmudah district has already been developed. Mutrafiah and Mardumah districts are
being developed. Finally, Reggah district is currently being planned. Those developed
districts accommodate approximately 120,000 people. The RCJ has been working
actively to develop new districts to accommodate the population growth.
6. Refer to FIGURE 1.1.A at the end of this Section for the Jubail Industrial City District
Map. Refer to FIGURE 1.1.B at the end of this Section for the Ras Al-Khair District Map.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 3
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL
1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL
A. General
1. The requirements within this Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) are for use by
Architectural/Engineering (A/E) and Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors for
all projects in Jubail Industrial cities under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission in
Jubail. The requirements are for the preparation of deliverables such as the project
engineering manual, calculations, engineering studies, drawings, and specifications.
2. To ensure uniformity throughout the project, and for compatibility within the Royal
Commission in Jubail limits of jurisdiction, these requirements provide the framework
within which all the Royal Commission in Jubail Consultants, A/E Contractors, EPC
Contractors and all others designing and constructing facilities shall perform their works,
including designers operating within a Procure and Construct (PC) contract.
3. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Section, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is
responsible for the design and the Contract Package they provide.
B. Applicability
1. This and all other Chapters of the Guiding Engineering Manual apply to all the Royal
Commission in Jubail Consultants, A/E or EPC Contractors, and all others designing and
constructing facilities within Jubail, Ras Al-Khair, and all other sites that the Royal
Commission in Jubail has jurisdiction. Applicable for all designs commencing after the
date of the latest revision of any section of this GEM.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with all requirements given in the
Engineering Manual. Any conflict or any proposed deviation or non-compliance with this
manual shall be identified and submitted in writing for the Royal Commission’s evaluation
and written approval. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor may be allowed to deviate from
the Guiding Engineering Manual if engineering justification is provided.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall note that the Standards identified in this manual are
for reference only. The mere compliance with the Standards or declaration of deviations
from the Standards does not relieve the A/E and/or EPC Contractor from the obligation to
make sure that the work performed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is fit for the
intended use and meets the generally acceptable criteria for quality and safety. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor are the Design Authority and as such, shall be responsible for the
quality of Work and services performed by them as per the conditions of the Contract.
C. Related Sections
1. Refer to Chapter 2 for Definitions and References, including units and conversions.
2. Refer to Section 3.1 for Building Codes and other references as applicable.
3. Refer to Subsection 5.1.3 for Standards of Quality.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 4
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
A. Responsibilities and Coordination

1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are responsible to the Royal Commission in Jubail for the
completion of the work per their contract. The Royal Commission in Jubail is responsible
to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for oversight and general coordination of the work to
align with this manual. Each party’s responsibility is generally identified as follows.
2. Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractor
responsibilities:
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall guarantee and be responsible for the
professional quality, technical accuracy, completeness, and coordination of the work
in order that the Royal Commission in Jubail may rely upon the work for subsequent
procurement, construction, and implementation in the areas where the RCJ has
jurisdiction.
b. Each A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be required to coordinate and cooperate with
other A/E and/or EPC Contractors as well as project stake holders with whom he
has interfaces. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall work with the Royal Commission in
Jubail to define and clarify project limits and coordination between interfacing work
of other A/E and EPC Contractors.
c. Compliance with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations, and applicable Codes and
Standards is mandatory. Refer to Chapter 3 for more information.
3. Royal Commission in Jubail responsibilities:
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail shall conduct general coordination of the work of
the various A/E and/or EPC Contractors within Jubail Industrial City and the Royal
Commission in Jubail jurisdiction limits, in order to secure uniformity of design that
meets the requirements of the Royal Commission in Jubail.
b. The Royal Commission in Jubail will provide the A/E and/or EPC Contractors with
design guidance per the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM). The RCJ also
provides procurement, installation, and testing requirements in the form of Standard
Specifications, and design details in the form of Standard Details. The Royal
Commission in Jubail will be responsible for keeping these documents up to date
and informing the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of modifications in writing.
c. Design criteria, calculations, drawings, specifications, schedules, estimates, and
other products of the engineering process and prepared by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor will be reviewed for compliance with this manual by the Royal
Commission in Jubail at intervals aligning with the document submittal schedule.
4. Duties of a Designer:
a. Whether working for the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, a Designer is someone who
has a trade or business that involves them in preparing designs for construction
and/or arranging for their employees or other people under their control to prepare
designs for construction.
b. The Designer is responsible for documenting the Design Criteria and Basis of
Design as part of the Design Basis Report (DBR). DBRs are described in detail in
Section 4.3.6 and are submitted in accordance with the Stage Submittal Schedule
listed in Section 4.2.C.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 5
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
c. Information from the Designer shall be brief, clear, and precise so that it is suitable
for use and review by other users/designers. The Designer shall coordinate and
cooperate with other designers as well as project stake holders with whom he has
interfaces.
d. Where many Designers are involved on a Project, the Design Team is encouraged
to appoint a Lead Designer to coordinate and oversee the Project’s Designers.
e. Early in the Design stages, Designers are expected to consider not only the design
of a structure, network or system but the ease and safety of that building’s or
facilities operation and maintenance.
f. For Procurement and Construction (P&C) Contracts the Designer shall provide
comprehensive, and complete design details that have been coordinated among all
disciplines, RCJ and stakeholders. Transferring of design to vendors, suppliers or
construction contractors is not permitted except under special waiver’s defined by
RC on a task-by-task basis. A safe, workable, practical,
buildable/erectable/installable solution with methodology is to be provided for all
systems. After P&C Contract Award the Construction Contractor(s) may submit
alternative proposals of buildable/erectable/installable solutions for RCJ
consideration.
g. For Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Contracts the Designer shall
provide a level of details equivalent to 60% construction design of "a" above unless
otherwise specified by the RCJ task release. A safe, workable, practical,
buildable/erectable/installable concept solution with methodology is to be provided
for all systems. After EPC Contract Award, the Construction Contractor(s) and their
A/Es may submit alternative detailed proposals of buildable/erectable/installable
solutions for RCJ consideration.
h. For Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Contracts for SEC related
work, the Designer shall provide a level of detail similar to "g" above and perform
necessary coordination with Saudi Electric Company (SEC) starting at 30%.
i. The Designer is expected to design in a way that reduces or eliminates hazards and
the likely risks from hazards. Refer to Section 3.6.2 Safety in Design for more
information.
j. The designer shall build off Item 4b, above, and provide: Design philosophy/
strategy, design criteria, constructability methodologies, include design for safety,
installation /implementation methodology, hazard/ risk assessment/ analyses,
calculations, drawings, specifications, schedules, estimates,
k. The Designer is not expected to:
1) Take into account or provide information about unforeseeable hazards and
risks. This does not mitigate the consideration and professional due diligence
required to be performed and undertaken by the Designer under Item-4f
2) Design for potential future uses of structures that cannot be reasonably
anticipated. This does not mitigate the consideration and professional due
diligence required to be performed and undertaken by the Designer under
Item-4f.
3) Specify construction methods (except where the design assumes or requires
a particular construction or erection sequence). This does not mitigate the
consideration and professional due diligence required to be performed and
undertaken by the Designer under Item-4f.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 6
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
4) Exercise any health and safety management function over Contractors or

others.
B. Document Submittal
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required by the Royal Commission in Jubail to submit
documentation progress at 10%, 30%, 60%, 90%, and 100% complete. Detailed
guidance is provided in Section 4.2 of this manual.
C. Quality Management System
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor, their sub-Consultants, suppliers, and sub-tiers thereof
shall establish and implement a Quality Management System (QMS) that complies with
the International Organization of Standards (ISO) 9001:2015 and an Environmental
Management System that complies with ISO 14001:2015 and meets the minimum quality
and environmental requirements set by the Royal Commission in Jubail. The systems
shall be capable of demonstrating that all the quality and environmental requirements of
the Contract are being complied with.
2. Note, the third party registration of assessed capability (i.e. approval to ISO 9001:2015
and 14001:2015 Standards) will not be considered sufficient to demonstrate that the
minimum requirements set by the Royal Commission in Jubail have been satisfied. Such
registration will, however, be considered as a significant contributing factor in assessing
the capability of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to meet the Royal Commission in Jubail’s
quality and environmental requirements.
D. Order of Precedence for Technical Conflicts
1. The general hierarchy or orders of precedence for conflict resolution for RCJ Projects
apart from seeking advice from Senior Royal Commission in Jubail Management are as
follows:
a. Royal Decrees and Codes published by the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
b. Environmental Regulations, Safety and Security Directives (SSD)/(HCIS), and
relevant Environmental Impact Assessments.
c. Royal Commission in Jubail Master Plans
d. Design requirements published by third party utilities
e. RCJ GEM
f. Standard Specifications and Standard Details
g. Project-specific design including specifications and drawings
E. Procedures
1. The following list of procedures is provided as information only
Number Title
IC-TA-ED-03-02 Preparation of Plans and Technical Studies
IC-TA-ED-01-01 Engineering Input Required to Request For Proposal (RFP) In Technical Service (TS)
Contract
IC-TA-ED-01-02 Task Order Release in Technical Services (TS) Contract
IC-TA-ED-01-03 Design Management

Rev. 1 1.1 - 7
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
Number Title
IC-TA-ED-01-04 Engineering Input Required for Request For Proposal (RFP) In Engineering,
Procurement And Construction (EPC), And Procurement & Construction (P&C)
Contracts
IC-TA-ED-01-06 Design Change Notice (DCN)
IC-TA-ED-01-07 Technical Service (TS) Contract Invoicing
IC-TA-ED-01-08 Technical Services Contract Backcharge
IC-TA-ED-01-09 Penalty Assessments
IC-TA-ED-01-10 Technical Services Contract Closeout
IC-TA-ED-01-12 Technical Service Contract Change Orders & Administrative Contract Adjustments
IC-TA-ED-02-01 Design Review
IC-TA-ED-02-03 Lessons Learned
IC-TA-ED-03-01 Development And Implementation Of Technical Requirements
IC-TA-ED-03-03 Technical Management Of Design, Construction And 3d Modeling Activities For
The Pipeline Corridor
IC-TA-ED-03-04 Corrosion Control Services

Rev. 1 1.1 - 8
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS
1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS
A. Applicability
1. All projects are to align with the following regulatory documents:
a. Royal Commission in Jubail high level regulations, Royal Decrees.
b. Environmental Regulations, Safety and Security Directives (SSD)/(HCIS), and
relevant Environmental Impact Assessments.
c. Royal Commission in Jubail Guiding Engineering Manual, Specifications, and any
agreed exceptions/exclusions/deviations with Royal Commission in Jubail Senior
Management and third-party utility providers and stakeholders.
d. Royal Commission in Jubail Master Plans, Master Plan Updates, and associated
studies.
e. Other plans developed by the Royal Commission in Jubail’s Urban Development
Department. Refer to Section 3.2 for more detailed information.
f. Building Codes and performance Standards as referenced in Chapter 3.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 9
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL
1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL
A. Applicability
1. This manual is updated by the Royal Commission in Jubail continuously in response to
lessons learned, code updates, and other events that improve the safety and quality of
projects.
2. Notification of updates are provided in the form of Engineering Bulletins:

Rev. 1 1.1 - 10
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Standard Specifications
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail issues Standard Specifications for a wide range of
construction and procurement activities. They are designed to ensure uniformity, quality,
safety, and economy as required by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
2. The 50 Division CSI MasterFormat is the standard for the numbering and titles of all
Specification sections. Refer to Subsection 4.2.3 for further detail on specification
standards.
3. Sections within the Standard Specifications may be incorporated into the Project
Engineering Manual by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor as applicable. However, it is
understood that each project may have different requirements that the Standard
Specifications may not fully address. New and modified sections shall be submitted to
the Royal Commission in Jubail as an element of design review.
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor identifies the numbers and titles of applicable
sections at 10% Submittal to establish the design basis.
b. The fully developed, 3-part sections must be received by the 30% Submittal for
Royal Commission in Jubail review and approval. Modifications received after the
30% Submittal will be reviewed only at the discretion of the Royal Commission in
Jubail.
c. Specifications are approved as needed on a project-by-project basis. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor is not to assume that specifications approved on one project
may be applied in whole or in part to another project.
4. When the A/E and/or EPC Contractor modifies a section that is approved by the Royal
Commission in Jubail, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor retains responsibility for this work.
Refer to Subsection 4.2.3 for further detail on specification standards.
5. Updates of the RCJ Standard Specifications are announced using Engineering Bulletins.
The updates generally apply to future projects unless otherwise stated in the Bulletin.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 11
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
SUBSECTION 1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL STANDARD
DETAILS
1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL STANDARD DETAILS
A. Overview
1. Generally, Standard Details are issued by the Royal Commission in Jubail in the forms of
drawings and corresponding explanatory notes for specific construction details, design
aids, and specific lists of equipment.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor uses applicable Standard Details in preparing his
Contract Package. These are of the following types:
a. Standard Drawings.
b. Drafting Guidelines.
c. Sample Drawings.
d. Specific Equipment Lists.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor remains totally responsible for the design provided by
him.
B. Standard Details
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor review Standard Drawings for applicability in preparing
the Contract Packages.

Rev. 1 1.1 - 12
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
FIGURES
FIGURE 1.1.A: JUBAIL INDUSTRIAL CITY DISTRICT MAP

Rev. 1 1.1 - 13
SECTION 1.1 GENERAL
FIGURES
FIGURE 1.1.B: RAS AL-KHAIR DISTRICT MAP

Rev. 1 1.1 - 14
SECTION 1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
5. General Requirements .................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
8. Related Sections ........................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
1. Not Applicable................................................................................................................ 1
1.2.1 CHAPTER 1................................................................................................................... 1
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 CHAPTER 2................................................................................................................... 2
A. Definitions and References ........................................................................................... 2
1.2.3 CHAPTER 3................................................................................................................... 2
A. Codes and Performance Standards .............................................................................. 2
1.2.4 CHAPTER 4................................................................................................................... 2
A. Project Submission Standards and Requirements ........................................................ 2
1.2.5 CHAPTER 5................................................................................................................... 2
A. Design Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 2

Rev. 1 1.2 - i
1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) shall serve as a framework for all projects
under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ). This Section
provides the A/E and/or EPC Contractors with an overview of the Manual
Organization.
2. Applicability
a. The chapter definitions contained in this Section provide a general understanding of
the content contained therein. For more thorough information, see the introductions
at the beginning of each chapter and Subsection.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Section 2.2, Definitions and Abbreviations.
4. Abbreviations
5. General Requirements
a. Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations
and applicable Codes and Standards. For information regarding the applicable
Codes and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. For information regarding Standards and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to
Section 3.1, General Building Codes and Additional Standards.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Chapter 2 for Definitions and References, including units and conversions.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for Codes and Performance Standards.
c. Refer to Chapter 4 for Project Submission Standards and Requirements.
d. Refer to Chapter 5 for Design Guidelines.
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and take action on all design reports,
drawings and specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable
1.2.1 CHAPTER 1
A. Introduction
1. Chapter 1 contains the overall description and applicability of the Guiding Engineering
Manual (GEM). This chapter also identifies regulatory documents and general
requirements for the project’s specifications and drawings.

Rev. 1 1.2 - 1
1.2.2 CHAPTER 2
A. Definitions and References

1. Chapter 2 contains general definitions, abbreviations and references; as well as the
requirement to utilize SI units.
1.2.3 CHAPTER 3
A. Codes and Performance Standards

1. Chapter 3 defines the Codes, regulations and Standards that apply to all of the projects
that are under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission in Jubail. This chapter also
identifies additional design requirements for Accessibility, Sustainability, Environmental
and Safety.
1.2.4 CHAPTER 4
A. Project Submission Standards and Requirements

1. Chapter 4 contains the submission requirements that the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall adhere to for the Design & Construction Phases of every project. Chapter 4 also
contains requirements for Surveying and Geotechnical investigations.
1.2.5 CHAPTER 5
A. Design Guidelines
1. Chapter 5 contains the design guidelines for each design discipline; as well as,
containing the requirements for Saudi Arabian Goods and Services, Standards of Quality,
Third Party Requirements, Security Requirements and Local Climate Conditions.

Rev. 1 1.2 - 2
CHAPTER 2
DEFINITIONS AND
REFERENCES


CHAPTER 2 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES
SECTION 2.1 GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1

Rev. 1 2.1 - i
SECTION 2.1 GENERAL
2.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. General definitions and references are to be used by Architectural/Engineering (A/E)
and/or Engineer, Procure and Construct (EPC) Contractors for projects under the
jurisdiction of the RCJ in the preparation of the Engineering Manual. In order to ensure
uniformity throughout the project and for compatibility within the Royal Commission in
Jubail jurisdiction limits, these definitions and references shall provide the framework
within which all the Royal Commission in Jubail’s Consultants, A/E and/or EPC
Contractors and all other designing and constructing facilities shall perform their
works.
2. Applicability
a. General definitions and references provide a reference basis, highlighting certain
specific requirements of the Royal Commission in Jubail and shall emphasize the
utilization of Saudi Arabian goods and services.
b. Specific definitions and references are included in the Building Codes, Guideline
Specifications and Standard Drawings. In addition, the relevant Sections of the
updated Community Plan, Support Industry and Secondary Industry Master Plans
include other definitions and references that shall be adhered to by all designers of
community facilities.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Subsection 2.2.A.3.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Subsection 2.2.A.4.
a. Not Applicable.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding Codes and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section
3.1.
7. Standards
a. For information regarding Standards and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to
Section 3.1.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Sections 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 for simple definitions, abbreviations, SI units and
conversions and references.
9. Approvals
drawings and specifications, reference Section 1.1.

Rev. 1 2.1 - 1
SECTION 2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 2
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 7
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 7
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 7
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 7
1. Not Applicable................................................................................................................ 7

Rev. 1 2.2 - i
2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section contains general definitions and abbreviations found in the manual.
b. Definitions and abbreviations apply to the following Chapters:
1) Chapter 1: Introduction
2) Chapter 2: Definitions and References
3) Chapter 3: Codes and Performance Standards
4) Chapter 4: Project Submission Standards and Requirements
5) Chapter 5: Design Guidelines
2. Applicability
a. The definitions and abbreviations contained in this Section apply to professionals,
organizations, and authorities.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to design specific definitions and abbreviations in Chapters 3, 4 and 5.
b. The following list of definitions applies to Architectural Sections.
1) “Form” The size and shape of mass. Individual forms shall be designed to
complement one another and the environment.
2) “Function” The use of a space or area. Function is gauged by the degree to
which the space works in its intended purpose.
3) “Axis” An axis is a linear progression of space connecting two or more dominant
features.
4) “Terminus” A terminus is the end of an axis and is typically defined by a
dominant feature such as a building.
5) “Code” Legally binding rules enacted by an Authority that provide minimum
requirements for materials, design, and detailing of systems, equipment, and
components, to ensure acceptable performance levels and protect public
safety and health.
6) “Standards” A document established by consensus and approved by a
recognized body of experts that provides, for common and repeated use, rules,
guidelines or characteristics for activities or their results, aimed at achievement
of the optimum degree of order in a given context (economy, safety, quality,
etc..). Standards referenced by codes (incorporated by reference) become part
of the code and thus are legally enforceable.
7) “Regulations” Are Authority imposed requirements, which specify product,
process or service characteristics, including the applicable administrative
provision, with which compliance is mandatory, such as building codes.
8) “Commissioning” The process of ensuring that all systems, subsystems, and
components of new/rehabilitated facilities and systems are designed, installed,
inspected, tested, and operated according to the design, installation,
inspection, testing, and operational requirements of the project, as specified by
the RCJ/Owner and as designed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. In this

Rev. 1 2.2 - 1
broad sense, commissioning and commissioning activities are applicable to all

phases of the project from design to handover.
4. Abbreviations
a. The following abbreviations is a list that apply to all Sections:
1) A/E: Architect/Engineer
2) AC: Actual Cost
3) ACWP: Actual Cost of Work Performed
4) ADAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines
5) AEP: Aggregate Exposure Protection
6) AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction
7) AEM: Area Engineering Manager
8) AR’s: Annual Reviews
9) BAC: Budgeted Cost at Completion
10) BCWP: Budgeted Cost of Work Performed
11) BLDG: Building
12) BoD: Board of Directors
13) BOQ: Bill of Quantities
14) BU: Business Unit of MARAFIQ
15) BCWS: Budgeted Cost of Work Scheduled
16) CAPEX: Capital Expenditure Project
17) CB: Circuit Breaker
18) CCDCU: City Center District Cooling Utility
19) CCO: Contract Change Order
20) CCTV: Closed Circuit Television
21) CFR: Contract Formulation Report
22) CoD: Concept of Design
23) COM: Council of Ministers
24) COO: Chief Operating Officer
25) CPI: Cost Performance Index (CPI = EV/AC)
26) CSA: Conditional Site Allocation
27) CSI: Construction Specification Institute
28) CSR: Construction Service Road
29) C Contracts: for Eventual Construction Award / Schedules Prepared by
Project Controls
30) CV: Cost Variance (CV = EV - AC)
31) DBR: Design Basis Report
32) DCN: Design Change Notice

Rev. 1 2.2 - 2
33) DoE: Director of Engineering

34) DG: Director General
35) D&P: Design & Project Department of MARAFIQ
36) DRM: Design Review Meeting
37) DX: Direct Expansion
38) EAC: Estimated Cost at Completion
39) EGL: Existing Grade Level
40) ECD: Environmental Control Department
41) EDD: Economic Development Department
42) EDMS: Electronic Document Management System
43) EIA: Environmental Impact Assessment
44) EIS: Environmental Impact Studies
45) EoI: Expression of Interest
46) EoT: Extension of Time
47) EP: Eastern Province
48) EPC: Engineer, Procure and Construct
49) EPCD: Environmental Protection Control Department
50) EPPR: Engineering Procurement Progress Report or
Engineering Progress and Performance Report
51) EPS: Enterprise Project Structure
52) EPtC: Environmental Permit to Construct
53) ESPD: Electrical / Site Preparation & Development (Also known
as Industrial)
54) ETC: Estimate to Complete
55) ETS: Energy Transfer Station
56) EV: Earned Value
57) FAC: Final Acceptance Certificate
58) FCD: Field Change Notice
59) FD/FA: Fire Detection/ Fire Alarm
60) FFE: Furniture Fixtures & Equipment
61) FGL: Finish Grade Level
62) FOC: Fiber Optic Cable
63) FP: Facility Planning
64) FPD: Facility Planning Department
65) GACA: General Authority for Civil Aviation
66) GBCI: Green Building Certification Institute
67) GBU: Global Business Unit

Rev. 1 2.2 - 3
68) GDR: Geotechnical Design Report

69) GEM: Guiding Engineering Manual
70) GFA: Gross Floor Area (m2)
71) GUD: General Utilities Department
72) HCIS: High Commission for Industrial Security
73) HDD: Horizontal Directional Drilling
74) HVAC: Heating Ventilation and Air-Conditioning
75) I/A: Initial Acceptance
76) IAC: Initial Acceptance Certificate
77) IAI: Initial Acceptance Inspection
78) IBC: International Building Code
79) ICC/ANSI: International Code Council/ American National Standards
Institute
80) IFC: International Fire Code or Issued for Construction
81) IECC: International Energy Conservation Code
82) IESNA: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
83) IIDD: Industrial Investment Development Department
84) IMC: International Mechanical Code
85) IPC: International Plumbing Code
86) IRR: Irrigation
87) ISF: Industrial Security Facility
88) ISS: Industrial Security Staff
89) ITP: Inspection Test Plan
90) IWMF: Industrial Waste Management Facility
91) JCP: Jubail Commercial Port
92) JIC: Jubail Industrial College
93) JIC Jubail Industrial City
94) JTI: Jubail Technical Institute
95) JUC: Jubail University College
96) KFIP: King Fahad Industrial Port
97) KPI: Key Performance Indicator
98) KRT: Kuwait / RasTanura Pipeline
99) LAN: Local Area Network
100) LAR: Land Access Request (RCJ Internal Document)
101) LCC: Life Cycle Cost
102) LEED: Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

Rev. 1 2.2 - 4
103) L&I: Landscaping and Irrigation

104) LRD: Link Road Bridge
105) LUP: Land Utilization Permit (obtain Permit from Stakeholder
like ARAMCO)
106) LUR: Land Utilization Request
107) MAA: Maximum Authorized Amount (Estimate + 10% - From
RCJ) / Order of Magnitude (RoM – from SABCO)
108) MAC: Ma’aden Aluminum Company
109) MARAFIQ: Power & Water Utility Company in Jubail and Yanbu
110) MEL: Master Equipment List
111) MoF: Minister of Finance
112) MoI: Minister of Interior
113) MoL: Ministry of Labour
114) MoP: Manager of Project Controls
115) MoT: Ministry of Transport
116) MoU: Memorandum of Understanding
117) MPU: Master Plan Update
118) MS: Microsoft
119) MTO: Material Take Off
120) MSR: Material Services Requisition
121) NCBZ: Northern Corridor Buffer Zone
122) NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
123) NOC: Notice of Completion
124) Node 3: Engineering Package Sent to Supply Management
125) NTP: Notice to Proceed
126) O&M: Operations & Maintenance
127) OBS: Organization Breakdown Structure
128) OoM: Order of Magnitude
129) PAP: Permit Application Package
130) P&C: Procurement & Construction
131) PESSM: Pre-Engineered Steel Shade Structure Manufacturers
132) .Pdf: Portable Document File (Adobe)
133) PPT: Power Point Presentation
134) PSIA: Power Supply Implementation Agreement
135) PSTS: Power Supply Technical Scope
136) PTS: Project Technical Scope
137) PV: Planned Value

Rev. 1 2.2 - 5
138) QA/QC: Quality Assurance/ Quality Control

139) RCJ: Royal Commission in Jubail
140) RCJY: Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu
141) RCJYMP: Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu Management
Procedure
142) RC: Royal Commission
143) RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
144) RFC: Request for Change
145) RFP: Request for Proposal
146) RIC: Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
147) RIV: Rapid Intervention Vehicle
148) RMI: Risk Management International
149) ROAT: Record of Assets Transfer
150) RTC: Record of Transfer of Custody
151) SABIC: Saudi Arabia Basic Industries Corporation
152) SAR: Saudi Railway/Site Allocation Request
153) SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
154) SBC: Saudi Building Code
155) SCTA: Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities
156) SDR: Systems Design Report
157) SEAPA: Saudi Ports Authority
158) SEC-EOA: Saudi Electricity Company – Electrical Operating Area
159) SFF: Security Forces Facility
160) SLA: Service Level Agreement
161) SOQ: Schedule of Quantities
162) SOQP: Schedule of Quantities & Prices
163) SOW: Scope of Work
164) SPI: Schedule Performance Index (SPI = EV/PV)
165) SSOC: Six Sigma Operating Committee
166) SV: Schedule Variance (SV = EV - PV)
167) SVA: Security Vulnerability Assessment
168) SWCC: Saline Water Conversion Corporation
169) SWRO: Saline Water Reverse Osmosis
170) SWW: Sanitary Waste Water
171) TIA: Traffic Impact Assessment
172) TOL: Turn-on Letter

Rev. 1 2.2 - 6
173) TQ: Technical Queries

174) TS: Technical Submittals
175) TSP: Technical Studies & Planning
176) TSD: Technical Services Department of MARAFIQ
177) TSE: Treated Sanitary Effluent
178) TV: Television
179) TWO’s: Technical Work Orders
180) T Contracts: Technical Services (Engineering) / Schedules Prepared
by Engineering / Schedule Updated once a Month
181) UMP: Unified Management Procedure
182) UPD: Urban Planning Department
183) USGBC: United States Green Building Council
184) VAC: Cost Variance at Completion (VAC = BAC - EAC)
185) WAS: Waad Al Shamal
186) WPCR: Work Plan Change Requests (Planning & Budget Assign
the Contract Number)
187) WPCR (A): Work Plan Change Requests Approved
188) WPCR (C): Work Plan Change Requests Canceled
189) WPCR (I): Work Plan Change Requests In Process
a. Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. Refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. Refer to Section 3.1.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to specific Section
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and act on design reports, plans and
specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable

Rev. 1 2.2 - 7
SECTION 2.3 SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3 SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS ................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. SI Units of measurement ............................................................................................... 1

Rev. 1 2.3 - i
2.3 SI UNITS AND CONVERSIONS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The directives contained herein have been compiled for the purpose of establishing
and defining Standards for the utilization, appearance, and conversion of units to be
used for the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by
Architecture/Engineering (A/E) or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
2. Applicability
a. The Standards and guidelines outlined in Section 2.3 are to be applied by the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor on all projects under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. By Royal Decree, the Consultant shall use the National Institute of Standards and
Technology’s (NIST) Guide for the Use of the International System of Units (SI).
c. The Consultant shall provide Imperial equivalents in parenthesis if requested by the
RCJ.
3. Definitions
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall refer to the NIST Guide for the Use of the
International System of Units for all applicable definitions.
4. Abbreviations
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Section:
1) NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology
2) SI: International System of Units
c. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall refer to the NIST Guide for the Use of the
International System of Units for all applicable abbreviations.
a. Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. Not Applicable
7. Standards
a. Refer to Chapter 4, Project Submission Standards and Requirements, for related
Standards.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 4.2.2, Drawings, for additional guidelines.
9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review all project submissions to ensure compliance to Section 2.3.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable
C. SI Units of measurement

Rev. 1 2.3 - 1
1. SI base, supplementary, and derived units of measurement occurring in this manual

include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. SI Base Units
Unit Symbol Quantity

Meter
a. m Length
(Metre)
b. Kilogram kg Mass
c. Second s Time
d. Ampere A Electric current
Thermodynamic
e. Kelvin K
temperature
f. Mole mol Amount of substance
g. Candela cd Luminous intensity
b. SI Supplementary Units
Unit Symbol Quantity

a. Radian rad Plane angle (2D angle)
b. Steradian sr Solid angle (3D angle)
c. SI Derived Units
Unit Symbol In SI Units Quantity

Mechanics
a. Pascal Pa kg·m-1·s-2 Pressure, Stress
b. Joule J kg·m2·s-2 Energy, Work, Heat
c. Watt W kg·m2·s-3 Power
d. Newton N kg·m·s-2 Force, Weight
Electromagnetism
e. Tesla T kg·s-2·A-1 Magnetic Field
f. Henry H kg·m2·s-2·A-2 Inductance
g. Coulomb C A·s Electric Charge
h. Volt V kg·m2·s-3·A-1 Voltage
i. Farad F kg-1·m-2·s4·A2 Electric Capacitance
j. Siemens S kg-1·m-2·s3·A2 Electrical Conductance
k. Weber Wb kg·m2·s-2·A-1 Magnetic Flux

Rev. 1 2.3 - 2
Unit Symbol In SI Units Quantity

l. Ohm Ω kg·m2·s-3·A-3 Electric Resistance
Optics
m. Lux lx cd·sr·m-2 Illuminance
n. Lumen lm cd·sr Luminous Flux
Radioactivity
o. Becquerel Bq s-1 Radioactivity
p. Gray Gy m2·s-1 Absorbed Dose
q. Sievert Sv m2·s-1 Equivalent Dose
Other
r. Hertz Hz s-1 Frequency
s. Katal kat mol·s-1 Catalytic Activity

Rev. 1 2.3 - 3
SECTION 2.4 REFERENCES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.4 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
1. Not Applicable................................................................................................................ 1

Rev. 1 2.4 - i
SECTION 2.4 REFERENCES
2.4 REFERENCES
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining each discipline’s code, Standards, and guideline references to be used
for the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by
Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC)
Contractors.
2. Applicability
a. The references outlined in Section 2.4 are to be utilized, followed, and adhered to by
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor on all projects under the jurisdiction of the RCJ
throughout the design and construction of the project.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to General Requirements, Codes, and Standards below for additional
abbreviations.
a. The design of all RCJ projects shall conform to the requirements within the Royal
Commission for Jubail & Yanbu Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM). These are
applicable to all disciplines. Engineering bulletins notify active A/E firms of changes
in technical requirements.
6. Codes
a. The design of all RCJ projects shall conform to the Kingdom’s published codes.
Refer to Section 3.1, Codes and Performance Standards, for code hierarchy:
7. Standards
a. The design of all RCJ projects shall conform to the standards identified in the GEM
and other standards identified in approved design documents such as specifications,
drawings, and Design Basis Reports (DBRs).
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Chapter 2 for Definitions and References, including units and conversions.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for Codes and Performance Standards.
c. Refer to Chapter 4 for Project Submission Standards and Requirements.
d. Refer to Chapter 5 for Design Guidelines.
9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review all project submissions to ensure compliance to Section 2.4.
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable

Rev. 1 2.4 - 1
CHAPTER 3
CODES AND PERFORMANCE

STANDARDS


CHAPTER 3 CODES AND PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
SECTION 3.1 BUILDING CODES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.1.1 GENERAL BUILDING CODES AND ADDITIONAL STANDARDS ............................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 3
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 3
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 3
1. Not Applicable. .............................................................................................................. 3
C. References .................................................................................................................... 3
3.1.2 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 4
A. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 4

Rev. 1 3.1 - i
SUBSECTION 3.1.1 GENERAL BUILDING CODES AND ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
3.1.1 GENERAL BUILDING CODES AND ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The purpose of this Section is to identify the Codes and Standards that establish the
minimum requirements to safeguard the public health, safety and general welfare in
the design and construction of the built environment.
2. Applicability
a. The Saudi Building Codes shall be the prevailing documents, as required by Royal
Decree and the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ), to be used in conjunction with the
current Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM). The A/E and/or the EPC Contractor
reviews the Standard Specifications and the Standard Drawing Details provided by
the RCJ for applicability and submits project-specific versions for approval.
b. In all cases, the RCJ reserves the right to require the use of specific Codes and
Standards for systems and facilities for which continuity of practice is considered
necessary for safe and efficient operation.
c. In cases of apparent or perceived conflicts between the Codes and the GEM, the more
stringent requirement shall apply.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to design specific definitions in Chapters 3, 4 and 5.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2
1) ANSI American National Standards Institute
2) CIE Commission Internationale De L’eclairage (International
Commission on Illumination)
3) HCIS High Commission for Industrial Security
4) IBC International Building Code
5) IEC International Electro-technical Commission
6) IENSA Illumination Engineering Society of North America
7) IMC International Mechanical Code
8) ITU International Telecom Unit
9) NFPA National Fire Protection Association
10) SBC Saudi Building Code
11) TIA/EIA Telecommunication Industries Association/Electronics Industries
Alliance
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes

Rev. 1 3.1 - 1
a. Compliance with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations and applicable Codes and
Standards is mandatory. Technical conflict resolution shall be performed per
Subsection 1.1.3.D, Order of Precedence for Technical Conflicts.
b. In the absence of published Saudi Arabian Codes and Standards, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall use Codes, Standards and publications published by the
organizations listed in each Part of this Engineering Manual as well as the Building
Codes referenced in this Section.
c. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor may propose other International Codes and
Standards, provided two different types of Codes and Standards are not mixed for the
same building or facility. Proposals shall be accompanied by an English language
translation of the Codes or Standards, but their use shall not be allowed unless
accepted in writing by the RCJ.
d. Unless otherwise directed by the RCJ, use the latest edition of all Codes. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall seek approval, in writing, from the RCJ should conflicts
between codes be present.
e. Code Hierarchy:
1) Royal Decrees
2) Saudi Building Codes
(a) Saudi Building Code – General SBC 201-CR
(b) Saudi Loading Code SBC 301-CR
(c) Saudi Construction Code SBC 302-CR
(d) Saudi Soils & Foundation Code SBC 303-CR
(e) Saudi Concrete Structures Code SBC 304-CR
(f) Saudi Masonry Structures Code SBC 305-CR
(g) Saudi Steel Structure Code SBC 306-CR
(h) Saudi Electrical Code SBC 401-CR
(i) Saudi Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR
(j) Saudi Energy Conservation Code – Commercial SBC-601-CR
(k) Saudi Energy Conservation Code – Low Rise SBC-602-CR
(l) Saudi Sanitary Code SBC 701-CR
(m) Saudi Private Sewage Disposal SBC 702-CR
(n) Saudi Fire Code SBC 801-CR
(o) Saudi Green Building Code SBC 1001-CR
3) Higher Commission for Industrial Safety (HCIS) (as applicable)
(a) Safety and Fire Protection Directives for Industrial Facilities (SAF)
f. All construction shall conform to the Building Codes and Building Requirements
adopted by the Kingdom and the Royal Commission. In addition, all construction shall
conform to Planning and Zoning Regulations adopted by the RCJ in its "Planning
Manual." Refer to Section 3.2 for Adopted Master Plans.

Rev. 1 3.1 - 2
g. Some projects may be subject to the additional requirements of the Safety and Fire
Directives for Industrial Facilities, depending on the location and specific
circumstances of the project.
h. Accessibility
1) Refer to Section 3.3.
i. Life Safety
1) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3. H
2) Refer to Chapters 3, 4 and 5 for design specific requirements.
j. The foregoing Codes are comprehensive and detailed documents. They cover a wide
range of building types, occupancies, and hazards. Their purpose is to establish
minimum Standards to safeguard life, health, property, and public welfare. They are
not intended to impose bureaucratic or financial burdens or set Standards of elegance,
lifestyle, or quality. Good design and practice may require the designer to exceed
these minimum standards.
k. The provisions of the adopted Codes shall not be construed to prohibit the use of any
material or method not specifically included therein, provided that the material or
method may be shown to be satisfactory for the intended purpose. The Royal
Commission may approve such materials or methods where the A/E and/or the EPC
Contractor finds that they meet the intent of the code, or the A/E and/or the EPC
Contractor may prescribe requirements for their use to assure that acceptable
Standards are met.
7. Standards
a. Refer to Subsection 3.1.2 Additional Standards.
8. Related Sections
a. Section 2.4, References
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and take action on design reports, plans and
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable.
C. References
1. Refer to Subsection 4.3.2 for detailed code analysis.

Rev. 1 3.1 - 3
SUBSECTION 3.1.2 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
3.1.2 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
A. Standards
1. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as appropriate.
2. References in the SBC Codes shall be the edition referenced therein. In all other cases,
unless otherwise directed by the RCJ or identified in Chapter 5, use the latest edition of all
Standards.
3. Additional Standards:
a. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
b. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
c. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
d. ACI American Concrete Institute
e. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
f. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
g. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
h. CIE International Commission on Illumination
i. IENSA Illumination Engineering Society of North America
j. SDI Steel Deck Institute
k. AWC American Wood Council
l. TMS The Masonry Society
m. Crane Manufacturers Association of America
n. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design
o. NDS Navigation Data Standards
p. API American Petroleum Institute
q. AWWA Standards – American Water Works Association
r. FHWA Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
s. ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
t. IEC International Electro-technical Commission
u. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineer
v. ISO International Organization for Standardization

Rev. 1 3.1 - 4
SECTION 3.2 DEVELOPMENT CODE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 2
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
10. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
B. Function of Zoning ......................................................................................................... 2
C. Urban Planning Department and Master Plan Updates ................................................ 2
3.2.2 COORDINATION WITH DEVELOPMENT CODE ......................................................... 3
A. JIC Development Code ................................................................................................. 3
3.2.3 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL MASTER PLANS ...................................................... 4
A. Coordination Requirements ........................................................................................... 4
B. Conflicts ......................................................................................................................... 4
3.2.4 SETBACK REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 5
3.2.5 PARKING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 6

Rev. 1 3.2 - i
SUBSECTION 3.2.1 GENERAL
3.2.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining procedures, Standards, and requirements for zoning on Royal
Commission in Jubail (RCJ) projects prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E)
and/or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
2. Applicability
a. The zoning regulations outlined in Section 3.2 shall be used by A/E and/or EPC
Contractors on all projects under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. Exclusions or deviations from these requirements must be approved by the RCJ, in
writing, prior to executing any work not in alignment with this document.
3. Definitions
b. “Smart Code” Planning and zoning document based on environmental analysis. It
addresses all scales of planning, from the region to the community to the block and
building.
c. “Form Based Code” A land development regulation that fosters predictable built
results and a high-quality public realm by using physical form (rather than separation
of uses) as the organizing principle for the code. A form-based code is a regulation,
not a mere guideline, adopted by a city.
4. Abbreviations
1) ASP: Area Specific Plan
2) DGL: Design Guideline
3) FBC: Form Based Code
4) GIS: Geographic Information Section
5) MPA: Master Planning Amendment
6) MPS: Master Planning Section
7) MPU: Master Plan Update
8) SS: Survey Section
9) UPD: Urban Planning Department
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes
a. Refer to the Jubail Industrial City Development Code, T08-T10-G65-20TV-GA-008-
0, 10 Sha’aban 1440 (H), 15-April-2019 (G).

Rev. 1 3.2 - 1
7. Standards
a. Not applicable
8. Related Sections
a. Not applicable.
9. Approvals
a. Zoning is governed and enforced by the Urban Planning Department (UPD).
10. Commissioning
a. Not applicable.
B. Function of Zoning
1. Zoning is a tool that imposes controls and regulations upon the use of land that are
implemented using municipally enacted regulations approved by municipal governments.
2. Zoning is intended to convey the specific use(s) that are permitted to occur on properties.
C. Urban Planning Department and Master Plan Updates
1. The Urban Planning Department (UPD) is responsible for updating the original 1978 JIC
Master Plan through Master Plan Updates (MPU) and/or Master Planning Amendments
(MPA).
2. Master Plan Policies for Land Use and Development are administered by UPD.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must coordinate with the UPD on all zoning requirements
unless otherwise directed in writing by the RCJ.

Rev. 1 3.2 - 2
SUBSECTION 3.2.2 COORDINATION WITH DEVELOPMENT CODE
3.2.2 COORDINATION WITH DEVELOPMENT CODE
A. JIC Development Code

1. The Development Code has been prepared by the Urban Planning Department as an
integral part of the Master Planning Process for Jubail Industrial City. It is the primary
guideline for determining the use of land and for individual site planning. It represents a
major link between the Master Plan and physical development within Jubail Industrial City.
2. The Development Code describes the uses allowed in each zone district and related
administrative procedures. The Zoning Maps overlay the zone districts on maps of Jubail
Industrial City and are an integral part of the Development Code.
3. Zoning regulations and development codes are part of a series of municipal regulations
and Codes that regulate and control development in Jubail Industrial City. Others include
Land Development Regulations (Subdivision Regulations), the Technical Codes, and
Environmental and Health Regulations. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate
with all available development guidelines and regulations as directed by the RCJ.
4. A/E and/or EPC Contractor to confirm zoning requirements on each project.

Rev. 1 3.2 - 3
SUBSECTION 3.2.3 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL MASTER PLANS
3.2.3 COORDINATION WITH JUBAIL MASTER PLANS
A. Coordination Requirements
1. All A/E and/or EPC Contractor work completed for the RCJ shall be coordinated with the
most current MPU.
2. Master Plan Hierarchy:
There is one Master Plan for Jubail Industrial City. This plan is maintained by the UPD.
District Plans and Area Specific Plans complement the Master Plan. District Plans are
primarily residential.
Each District Plan is administered with Design Guidelines (DGL).
Furthermore, Smart Codes and Form Based Codes are provided per District and/or Area.
B. Conflicts
1. All conflicts between the MPU, the GEM, Master Plan, Site Development Regulations, or
the JIC Development Code shall be resolved by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor in writing
before commencing work.
2. All conflicts with the Development Code shall require direction from the UPD Director.

Rev. 1 3.2 - 4
SUBSECTION 3.2.4 SETBACK REQUIREMENTS
3.2.4 SETBACK REQUIREMENTS
A. Setback Requirements are distances specified to provide adequate space between new
construction and existing buildings, roadways, and adjacent property lines.
B. Consult the UPD for all setback requirements.

Rev. 1 3.2 - 5
SUBSECTION 3.2.5 PARKING REQUIREMENTS
3.2.5 PARKING REQUIREMENTS
A. Parking Requirements shall address problems associated with an undersupply of parking and
ensure the A/E and/or EPC Contractor provides at least a certain number of off-street parking.
B. Consult the Master Plans and the Urban Planning Department for all parking requirements.
C. See Architectural Chapter 5, Subsection 5.3.1.

Rev. 1 3.2 - 6
SECTION 3.3 ACCESSIBILITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
C. Signage.......................................................................................................................... 2
1. Mounting Location and Height ....................................................................................... 2
2. Interior Signage Adjacent to Doors ............................................................................... 2
3. Exterior Signage ............................................................................................................ 2
3.3.2 SITE ACCESSIBILITY ................................................................................................... 3
A. Residential Pedestrian Access ...................................................................................... 3
B. Commercial Pedestrian Access..................................................................................... 3
C. Industrial Pedestrian Access ......................................................................................... 3
D. Parking........................................................................................................................... 3
1. Facility Parking .............................................................................................................. 3
2. Entrance to Parking Lot ................................................................................................. 3
3. Number of Accessible Spaces....................................................................................... 3
4. Space Location .............................................................................................................. 4
5. Parking Identification and Dimensions of Spaces ......................................................... 4
6. Van Accessible Parking Space...................................................................................... 4
7. Passenger Loading Zone .............................................................................................. 4
8. Curb Ramp Placement .................................................................................................. 5
9. Medical Facilities ........................................................................................................... 5
10. Valet Parking ................................................................................................................. 5
E. Walks, Curbs, and Ramps ............................................................................................. 5
1. Ground and Floor Surfaces ........................................................................................... 5

Rev. 1 3.3 - i
2. Changes in Surface Level ............................................................................................. 5

3. Sidewalk Widths ............................................................................................................ 5
4. Gratings ......................................................................................................................... 5
5. Width of Curb Ramps .................................................................................................... 5
6. Sides of Curb Ramps .................................................................................................... 5
7. Ramp Slope ................................................................................................................... 6
8. Landings ........................................................................................................................ 6
9. Ramp Handrails ............................................................................................................. 6
10. Handrail Location ........................................................................................................... 6
11. Protective Edges on Ramps .......................................................................................... 6
12. Temporary Ramps ......................................................................................................... 6
13. Ramps at Door Entrances ............................................................................................. 6
F. Entrances, Corridors, and Stairs ................................................................................... 8
1. Marked Route ................................................................................................................ 8
2. Signage at Entrances .................................................................................................... 8
3. Doorway Width .............................................................................................................. 8
4. Door Opening Force ...................................................................................................... 8
5. Doormats ....................................................................................................................... 8
6. Door Hardware .............................................................................................................. 8
7. Doors in Series .............................................................................................................. 8
8. Automatic and Power Assisted Doors ........................................................................... 8
9. 9. Revolving Doors and Turnstiles ............................................................................... 8
10. Threshold ....................................................................................................................... 9
11. Framed Glass Doors ..................................................................................................... 9
12. Stair Risers, Treads and Nosings .................................................................................. 9
13. Location of Handrails ..................................................................................................... 9
14. Handrail Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 9
15. Suspended Stairs .......................................................................................................... 9
16. Protruding Objects ......................................................................................................... 9
G. Public Restrooms .......................................................................................................... 9
1. Restroom Identification .................................................................................................. 9
2. Restroom Entrance ....................................................................................................... 10
3. Restroom Mirror ............................................................................................................ 10
4. Lavatory Heights ........................................................................................................... 10
5. Protective Pipe Covering .............................................................................................. 10

Rev. 1 3.3 - ii
6. Lavatory Space ............................................................................................................. 10

7. Faucet Controls ............................................................................................................ 10
8. Dispensers in Restroom ............................................................................................... 10
9. Stall Door ...................................................................................................................... 10
10. Standard Toilet Stall Size ............................................................................................. 11
11. Alternate Stall Size ....................................................................................................... 11
12. Dispensers in Commode Stall ...................................................................................... 11
13. Urinals ........................................................................................................................... 11
14. Water Closet Seat ........................................................................................................ 11
15. Grab Bars ..................................................................................................................... 11
16. Flush Controls............................................................................................................... 11
17. Clear Width for Toilet Room Doors and Floor Space ................................................... 12
H. Public Telephones and Water Fountains ..................................................................... 12
1. Telephone Mounting ..................................................................................................... 12
2. Access .......................................................................................................................... 12
3. Directory Access ........................................................................................................... 12
4. Auditory Amplification ................................................................................................... 12
5. Text Telephone ............................................................................................................. 12
6. Access to Water Fountain ............................................................................................ 13
7. Height ........................................................................................................................... 13
8. Hand Controls ............................................................................................................... 13
9. Existing Water Fountain ............................................................................................... 13
I. Meeting Rooms ............................................................................................................ 13
1. Accessible Rooms ........................................................................................................ 13
2. Location ........................................................................................................................ 13
3. Accessible Route .......................................................................................................... 13
4. Door Width .................................................................................................................... 13
5. Thresholds .................................................................................................................... 13
6. Amplifier and Sound System Equipment ...................................................................... 13
7. Floor .............................................................................................................................. 13
8. Seating for People using Wheelchairs ......................................................................... 14
9. Table Placement ........................................................................................................... 14
10. Table Height ................................................................................................................. 14
11. Listening System .......................................................................................................... 14
12. Temporary Ramp .......................................................................................................... 14

Rev. 1 3.3 - iii
13. Microphones ................................................................................................................. 14

J. Restaurants .................................................................................................................. 14
1. Entrance ....................................................................................................................... 14
2. Tables ........................................................................................................................... 14
3. Cafeteria/Buffet Lines ................................................................................................... 14
4. Menus ........................................................................................................................... 15
5. Lounge .......................................................................................................................... 15
6. Fixed Tables ................................................................................................................. 15
K. Guest Rooms ................................................................................................................ 15
1. Room Numbers ............................................................................................................ 15
2. Keys .............................................................................................................................. 15
3. Door .............................................................................................................................. 15
4. Bed Spacing ................................................................................................................. 15
5. Telephones ................................................................................................................... 15
6. Amplified Telephones ................................................................................................... 15
7. Protruding Objects ........................................................................................................ 15
8. Switch Access............................................................................................................... 15
9. Closet and Towel Racks ............................................................................................... 15
10. Space for Wheelchairs ................................................................................................. 16
11. Mirrors ........................................................................................................................... 16
12. Lavatory Clearance ...................................................................................................... 16
13. Exposed Hot Water and Drain Pipes ............................................................................ 16
14. Water Closet Seat ........................................................................................................ 16
15. Grab Bars ..................................................................................................................... 16
16. Faucet Controls ............................................................................................................ 16
17. Shower and Tub Combinations .................................................................................... 16
18. Grab Bars ..................................................................................................................... 16
19. Bath Tub Bench ............................................................................................................ 16
20. Shower Stall and Flexible Shower Hose ...................................................................... 16
21. Number of Accessible Rooms ...................................................................................... 16
22. Sleeping Accommodations for Persons with Hearing Impairments ............................. 17
L. Hazards and Emergency Procedures .......................................................................... 17
1. Hazardous Vehicular Area ............................................................................................ 17
2. Standard Warnings at Subsurface Pools ..................................................................... 18
3. Emergency Exits ........................................................................................................... 18

Rev. 1 3.3 - iv
4. Audible and Visual Alarm Signals ................................................................................ 18

5. Area of Rescue ............................................................................................................. 18
M. Elevators and Automated Teller Machines ................................................................... 18
1. Elevators ....................................................................................................................... 18
2. Signal Identification ...................................................................................................... 18
3. Accessible Routes ........................................................................................................ 19
4. Call Buttons/Floor Buttons ............................................................................................ 19
5. Elevator Car Dimensions .............................................................................................. 19
6. Leveling ........................................................................................................................ 19
7. Space Between Elevator and Floor .............................................................................. 19
8. Floor Protective Re-Opening Device ............................................................................ 19
9. Handrails ....................................................................................................................... 19
10. Controls, Call Buttons and Alarms................................................................................ 19
11. Automated Teller Machines (ATM) ............................................................................... 19
3.3.3 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY ......................................................................................... 20
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 20

Rev. 1 3.3 - v
3.3.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Accessibility addresses the integration of design and construction to promote equal
access to persons with disabilities to and through sites and buildings.
b. Accessible design responds to the physical conditions of each site and building to
allow equal access for accessing and using sites and/or buildings.
2. Applicability
a. These general accessibility Standards are intended to provide the requirements and
design guidance for A/E and/or EPC Contractors for Site and Building Accessibility
on all projects.
3. Definitions
a. “Universal Design” A broad-spectrum of ideas meant to produce buildings, products
and environments that are inherently accessible to older people, people without
disabilities, and people with disabilities.
b. “Accessibility” The degree to which a product, device, service, or environment is
available to as many people as possible.
c. “Visitability” Similar to Universal Design in general intent, but more focused in scope.
Visitability features make buildings easier for people who develop a mobility
impairment to visit friends and extended family rather than having to turn down
invitations, or not be invited at all.
d. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional Definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
b. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
c. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
d. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional abbreviations.
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors are required to design all projects to at least meet
the accessibility requirements of the adopted building code and its referenced
standards.
b. A/E’s and or EPC Contractors shall also comply with the addition requirements of
this Section.
6. Codes
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations,
and applicable Codes and Standards. Refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Section:
1) ADA

Rev. 1 3.3 - 1
2) ICC/ANSI A117.1
3) ADAAG (ADA Standards for Accessible Design)
4) “Universal Accessibility Built Environment (UABE) Guidelines for the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia 1431 H-2010 G” by the Prince Salman Center for Disability
Research: http://accessibility.pscdr.org.sa/read-en/
5) Refer to Chapter 3 for additional performance Standards.
8. Related Sections
a. Not applicable.
9. Approvals
plans and specifications, reference Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for the RCJ’s commissioning requirements.
C. Signage
1. Mounting Location and Height
a. Provide adequate signage placed in standardized, appropriate locations throughout
the building or facility. (Signs can be used to designate permanent rooms or spaces,
or provide direction and information)
b. Provide signage which designates permanent rooms or spaces use raised letters
and numerals which are also accompanied by Braille characters.
c. Provide signage which designates permanent rooms or spaces mounted at a height
of 1525mm from floor surface to the centerline of sign.
2. Interior Signage Adjacent to Doors
a. Provide interior signage located on the walls adjacent to the latch side of the doors.
b. Provide door signage mounted 1525mm above the floor surface to the centerline of
the sign.
3. Exterior Signage
a. Provide exterior signage available at non-accessible entrances and along walks that
provides directions to the accessible routes and entrances.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 2
SUBSECTION 3.3.2 SITE ACCESSIBILITY
3.3.2 SITE ACCESSIBILITY
A. Residential Pedestrian Access

1. Sites shall be designed to be accessible to pedestrians with mobility limitations.
2. Access points shall be designed in accordance with ADA requirements.
3. The distance from public right of way to the building exterior doors shall not exceed 15 m.
B. Commercial Pedestrian Access
2. Designs shall provide at least two ingress/egress points from public right of way to the
site.
3. Designs shall provide at least two points from within the site to building exterior doors.
a. This includes single and family entrances, for example the site may have two access
points leading to separate entrances.
6. Emergency exits shall provide accessible paths to the right-of-way or assembly area..
C. Industrial Pedestrian Access
2. Designs shall provide at least one ingress/egress point from public right of way to the
site.
3. Designs shall provide at least two points from within the site to building exterior doors.
6. Emergency exits shall provide accessible paths to the right of way or assembly area..
D. Parking
1. Facility Parking
a. Provide parking spaces designated for individuals with disabilities.
b. Provide parking spaces designated with the International Symbol of Accessibility
2. Entrance to Parking Lot
a. Provide International Symbols of Accessibility used to designate the reserved
parking spaces clearly visible at the entrance to the parking area.
3. Number of Accessible Spaces
a. Provide parking area have the minimum number of accessible spaces specified in
the table below.
Total Parking Spaces Designated Accessible Parking

1 to 25 1

Rev. 1 3.3 - 3
Total Parking Spaces Designated Accessible Parking

26 to 50 2
51 to 75 3
76 to 100 4
101 to 150 5
151 to 200 6
201 to 300 7
301 to 400 8
401 to 500 9
501 to 1000 2% of total
1001 and over 20 plus 1 for each 100 over 1000
Note: One on every 8 parking spaces, but not less than one, shall be designated “van
accessible”
4. Space Location
a. Provide accessible parking spaces on the shortest possible accessible route to an
accessible building entrance.
b. Provide the parking spaces located on level terrain with surface slopes that do not
exceed 2% in all directions. (2% slope = 2cm change in vertical elevation over a
100cm horizontal distance)
5. Parking Identification and Dimensions of Spaces
a. Provide a sign showing the international symbol of accessibility located above grade
and visible when a vehicle is parked in the designated space.
b. Provide parking spaces a minimum of 2440mm wide.
c. Provide an access aisle adjacent to the parking space having a minimum width of
1525mm
d. Provide accessible parking spaces not located adjacent to the accessible entrances
have signage that indicates the direction to these entrances.
6. Van Accessible Parking Space
a. Provide accessible parking spaces for vans have adequate vertical and horizontal
clearance (Minimum 2490mm high and minimum 405mm wide to accommodate
both parking space and access aisle).
b. Provide e at least one parking space designated “Van Accessible” with signage and
space a minimum 2440mm wide access aisle.
c. Provide at least one van accessible space for every eight accessible parking
spaces.
7. Passenger Loading Zone
a. Provide the passenger loading zone with an unobstructed access aisle at least
1525mm wide and 6096mm long adjacent and parallel to the vehicle pull-up space.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 4
8. Curb Ramp Placement

a. Provide curb ramps provided wherever an accessible route crosses a curb.
b. Provide curb ramps with a maximum slope of 1:12 and minimum width of 915mm.
c. If the curb ramp crosses a pedestrian route and is not protected by handrails or
guardrails, provide flared sides with a maximum slope of 1:10.
9. Medical Facilities
a. For facilities providing medical care or similar services for persons with mobility
impairments:
1) Provide 10% of the total spaces reserved for persons with disabilities at
outpatient facilities.
2) Provide 20% of the total spaces reserved for persons with disabilities at
facilities specializing in treatment of persons with mobility impairments.
10. Valet Parking
a. If valet parking is available, provide the passenger loading/unloading zone on an
accessible route complying with Section 7 above
E. Walks, Curbs, and Ramps
1. Ground and Floor Surfaces
a. Provide ground, walk, and floor surfaces along accessible routes stable, firm and
slip-resistant under all weather conditions.
2. Changes in Surface Level
a. Provide all ground and floor surfaces free of abrupt changes in surface level that do
not exceed 6mm in height.
b. Where vertical elevation changes are between 6and 12mm in height, provide the
level change beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2.
c. Do not provide ramps with vertical elevation changes greater than 112mm in height.
3. Sidewalk Widths
a. Provide ramps with a minimum clear width of 915mm with an occasional space of
1525 x 1525mm located at reasonable intervals not exceeding 60m which is used
for turning and passing.
4. Gratings
a. Provide gratings located on walking surfaces designed so that openings do not
exceed 6mm in one direction.
Note: If gratings have elongated openings, the openings must be placed so that the long
dimension is perpendicular to the direction of travel.
5. Width of Curb Ramps

a. Provide curb ramps a minimum of 915mm wide, exclusive of flared sides.
Note: Curb ramps shall not extend into traffic lanes.
6. Sides of Curb Ramps

Rev. 1 3.3 - 5
a. If curb ramps cross the walking path of pedestrians, provide curb ramps with flared
sides with maximum slope of 1:10 (one cm vertical rise to every 10 cm of horizontal
distance).
7. Ramp Slope
Provide maximum slope of all ramps 1:12 (1cm of vertical rise to every 12cm of horizontal
distance)Note: Any part of an accessible route having a slope exceeding 1:20 is
considered a ramp and must comply with the requirements stated in Part 7, 8, 9, 10
and 11 of this Section.
8. Landings
a. Provide ramps and curb ramps with a 1525mm long level landing at the top and
bottom.
b. Provide ramps with a 1525mm level landing at locations where ramps change
direction (switchback) or at intervals of 760mm vertical rise.
9. Ramp Handrails
a. Provide ramps with a vertical elevation change (rise) greater than 150mm or
horizontal run greater than 1830mm with handrails on both sides.
10. Handrail Location
a. Locate the top surface of all handrails mounted between 865mm and 915mm above
ramp surface.
b. If wall mounted, provide the clear space between the handrail and the wall 38mm
(See figure in Section F, Part 14)
c. Provide the diameter of the handrail 32mm to 38mm or provide an equivalent
gripping surface.
11. Protective Edges on Ramps
a. For ramps and landings with drop-offs provide edge protection which is a minimum
of 50mm high on all exposed sides of the ramp or landing.
12. Temporary Ramps
a. Provide temporary ramps meeting standard ramp requirements. (See items 7, 8, 9,
10 and 11 in this Section)
b. Provide temporary ramps that are securely anchored.
13. Ramps at Door Entrances
a. Provide ramps at door entrances with adequate maneuvering clearances for a
person using a wheelchair (Refer to the diagrams provided on next page)

Rev. 1 3.3 - 6

Rev. 1 3.3 - 7
F. Entrances, Corridors, and Stairs

1. Marked Route
a. Provide at least one accessible route from the accessible parking areas or
passenger loading zones to the accessible building entrance having a minimum
clear width of 915mm
b. If the entrance is not visible from the parking or loading areas, mark the accessible
routes to the entrance clearly with appropriate signage.
2. Signage at Entrances
a. Provide International Symbol of Accessibility displayed at all accessible entrances
This is not required but helpful.
b. Make provision for a signaling device if the primary entrances must be locked during
certain hours for security purposes.
3. Doorway Width
a. Design the primary accessible entrance with a minimum clear opening (free of
protrusions and obstructions) of 813mm
b. Design the push and pull side of doors with minimum maneuvering clearances
conforming with the figure referred to in Section E Walks Curbs and Ramps, Part 13
(Exception: Automatic or power assisted doors)
c. Provide a minimum of 1525 x 1525mm of level space centered on the front of the
accessible entrance.
4. Door Opening Force
a. For doors at accessible, exterior entrances the opening force is not specified in
ADAAG. Please refer to the Saudi Building Code.
b. Specify hardware for interior doors to be opened with 2.25, or less, kgs of force.
5. Doormats
a. Doormats to be stationary, flat, or recessed and less than 12mm thick.
6. Door Hardware
a. Specify handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible
doors easily grasped with one hand, and require no tight grasping, pinching, or
twisting of the wrist to operate.
b. Specify hardware required for accessible door passage mounted no higher than
1220mm from the finished floor surface.
7. Doors in Series
a. Provide approximately 1220mm, plus the width of in-swinging door(s), between two
doors in a series to allow backing and turning space for a wheelchair or other
mobility aid to clear the in-swinging door.
8. Automatic and Power Assisted Doors
a. Specify automatic and power assisted doors operate in a manner and direction
which do not present a hazard.
9. 9. Revolving Doors and Turnstiles

Rev. 1 3.3 - 8
a. Provide an accessible door adjacent to all revolving doors and turnstiles

10. Threshold
a. Design thresholds at exterior doors flush with the floor surface.
b. For thresholds are higher than 12mm, detail them so they are beveled on both sides
to a slope of 1:2.
c. If thresholds on exterior sliding doors exceed 3/4 inches in height, are they beveled
on both sides at a slope of 1:2.
11. Framed Glass Doors
a. For framed glass swinging doors are on accessible routes, Specify a kick plate at
least 10 inches high mounted on the bottom of the push side of the door. This
feature is not required by ADAAG. This is a safety feature for people using
wheelchairs to prevent their footrest from striking the glass.
12. Stair Risers, Treads and Nosings
a. For all stairs and steps:
1) Detail risers closed and with uniform height. (Riser height: maximum 175mm,
minimum 100mm).
2) Detail treads have a uniform depth of 280mm or more.
3) Detail nosings to project no more 32mm and are the undersides free of
abrupt, sharp angles.
4) Design stair treads have non-slip surfaces.
13. Location of Handrails
a. Design handrails on sides of all stairs to extend at least 300mm beyond the top riser
and 300mm plus the width of one tread beyond 965mm above the tread.
14. Handrail Dimensions
a. Provide handrails 32 to 38mm in diameter and easy to grasp.
b. Provide a clear space of exactly 38mm between the handrail and the wall.
15. Suspended Stairs
a. Design all suspended (open) stairs provided with sufficient warning devices, for
example, railings, planters, etc., to alert people who are visually impaired. This
situation could constitute an overhead hazard
16. Protruding Objects
a. Locate protruding and hanging objects (such as telephones, water fountains, signs,
etc.) with their leading edge 686mm to 2032mm above the floor, protrude no more
than 100mm into the path of travel.
b. Design walks, halls, corridors, passageways, aisles or other circulation spaces have
a minimum head clearance of 2032mm.
G. Public Restrooms
1. Restroom Identification

Rev. 1 3.3 - 9
a. Provide an accessible restroom for each gender clearly marked with an International
Symbol of Accessibility mounted 1525mm above the finish floor to the centerline of
the sign.
b. Design the restroom identified with a sign having raised characters and Braille
mounted on the latch side of the door no higher than 1525mm above the finished
floor.
2. Restroom Entrance
a. Provide restroom entrances with a clear opening (free of protrusions and
obstructions) of 813mm and maneuvering clearance adjacent to the push and pull
side of doors conforming to Section E, Part 13
3. Restroom Mirror
a. Mount the mirror 1016mm from the floor to the bottom edge of the reflective surface.
4. Lavatory Heights
a. Mount the lavatory so that the counter (rim) surface is no higher than 864mm from
the floor surface.
b. Provide a clearance space of at least 737mm measured from the bottom of apron to
the floor.
c. Mount the drain pipe so that there is at least 230mm of clearance from the floor
surface.
5. Protective Pipe Covering
a. Specify insulation or other protective covering used on hot water and drain pipes
under the lavatory to prevent contact.
6. Lavatory Space
a. Provide clear floor space (762 x 1220mm) provided in front of the lavatory which
includes an extension of this space under the lavatory of 432mms minimum (483mm
maximum) to allow for forward approach.
7. Faucet Controls
a. At accessible lavatories, specify faucets controlled by a hand lever, push button, or
electronic control which is easily operated by one hand, not requiring tight grasping,
pinching, or twisting and requiring a maximum of 2.25 kg of force or less for
operation.
b. Note: Self-closing valves should stay open for a minimum of 10 seconds.
8. Dispensers in Restroom
a. Mount restroom dispensers and accessories so that there is no more than 1220mm
to the highest control or operable part.
Note: Dispensers which can be reached from a parallel (side) approach may be mounted
so that there is no more than 1372mm to the highest operable control or part of the
dispenser.
9. Stall Door
a. At least one restroom stall available to have a clear opening (free of protrusions and
obstructions) of 813mm.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 10
b. Does stall door swing outward. Note: For end-of-row wheelchair accessible toilet
stalls, the door may swing inward if sufficient maneuvering space is provided inside
the stall. See ADAAG Fig 30(a-1).
10. Standard Toilet Stall Size
a. The standard, accessible stall provides a minimum depth of 1422mm and a width of
1525mm for wall mounted water closets. Note: Add 75mm to the depth if the water
closet is floor mounted.
11. Alternate Stall Size
a. Where a standard, accessible stall is technically infeasible, an alternate stall shall be
provided. If the stall has a wall-mounted water closet, design it to have a minimum
depth of 1675mm.
Note: Add 75mm to the stall depth if the water closet is floor mounted.
b. For alternate stalls allowing a forward approach to the water closet, provide a
minimum width of 915mm and grab bars mounted on both sides of the stall.
c. For alternate stalls allowing a side approach to the water closet, provide a minimum
width of 1220mm and grab bars mounted to the side and rear of the water closet.
d. Locate the center of the water closet a minimum of 460mmfrom the near side wall or
partition.
e. At conditions with six or more stalls, provide one additional stall provided which is
915mm wide with out-swinging door, grab bars on both sides, and is the seat of the
water closet 432 to 483mm from the floor.
12. Dispensers in Commode Stall
a. Locate toilet paper and seat cover dispensers within easy reach of a person using
the water closet.
b. Specify toilet paper dispensers to permit delivery of a continuous flow of paper and
are located within reach at a minimum height of 483mm above the floor.
13. Urinals
a. Provide the men’s restroom have at least one stall-type or wall-hung urinal with an
elongated rim which is mounted at a maximum of 432mm above the floor.
14. Water Closet Seat
a. Locate the top of the water closet seat 431 to 483mm from the floor surface.
15. Grab Bars
a. When a side transfer in a stall is required, provide two grab bars (a 1067mm long
bar to the side and a 915mm long bar to the back) mounted at 840 to 915mm from
the floor surface provided.
b. For alternate stalls (see item 11 above) provide two grab bars 42 inches in length
located on both sides of the stall and mounted 33 to 915mmes from floor surface.
c. Specify the diameter of each grab bar 32 to 38mm, Detail the space between the
wall and each grab bar 38mm, and each grab bar able to support 113.5 kg.
16. Flush Controls

Rev. 1 3.3 - 11
a. Locate the flush controls mounted no higher than 1118mm above the floor surface
on the wide side of the toilet area.
b. Specify flush controls operable with one hand, not requiring tight grasping, pinching,
or twisting of the wrist or more than 2.25 kg of force.
17. Clear Width for Toilet Room Doors and Floor Space
a. Provide a minimum door clear width of 813mm. ADAAG does not specify toilet room
dimensions. However, adequate clear floor space is required for approach and use
at fixtures and adequate turning space must be provided. See #6 - Lavatory Space
and the clearances required adjacent to the water closet in #10—Standard Toilet
Stall Size.
b. Provide adequate space allowed for a wheelchair to make a 180-degree turn.
[Minimum space of 1525mm diameter or a “T-shaped” space as shown in ADAAG
Fig 3(b)].
H. Public Telephones and Water Fountains
1. Telephone Mounting
a. If public telephones are provided, provide at least one accessible with phone dial
and coin receiver no higher than 1220mm (for forward approach) or 1320mm (for
parallel approach). If there occurs any obstruction, then the allowable height shall be
1170mm (for side reach) or 1120mm (for forward reach).
b. Provide a min height of 225mm (for side reach).
c. Specify a cord at least 735mm long.
2. Access
a. Design or provide telephone enclosures with a minimum clear path width for forward
approach of 760mm. Provide a clear space of 760 x 1220mm at telephones.
3. Directory Access
a. Provide phone directories usable at wheelchair level.
b. Specify operation directions available in Braille and/or large print.
4. Auditory Amplification
a. Telephone shall be equipped with volume controls, capable of min. 12dbA and a
max. of 18dbA
b. Specify telephones equipped with an amplifier (25% of total phones but never less
than one must have amplification).
5. Text Telephone
a. Design for four or more public telephones, that is at least one is a public text
telephone (TT).
Note: Text Telephones are also known as Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
or Tele-Typewriters (TTY).
b. Specify or provide signage for text telephones identified by the symbol shown below.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 12
6. Access to Water Fountain

a. If free-standing or built-in water fountains do not have a clear, open space under
them, provide a clear floor space of 762 x 1067mm for parallel approach plus space
for maneuvering.
b. Specify the spout of the drinking fountain located in the front of the unit with a water
flow trajectory 100mm minimum in height that is parallel or nearly parallel to the front
of the unit.
7. Height
a. Locate and mount the water fountain available so that it is provides a minimum
clearance of 686mm and depth of 432 to 483mm so that it can be approached and
used by a person in a wheelchair.
b. Specify the width of the water fountain at least 762mm.
c. Locate the maximum height of the water spout 915mm, or less.
8. Hand Controls
a. Locate the controls on the water fountain located on the front or on the side near the
front, with the controls able to be operated with one hand, not requiring tight
grasping, pinching, or twisting, and can the controls be operated with 2.25 kg of
force or less.
9. Existing Water Fountain
a. Specify dispenser with drinking cups provided when water fountain exceeds
recommended height
I. Meeting Rooms
1. Accessible Rooms
a. All meeting rooms are to be accessible.
2. Location
a. To the extent possible, locater meeting rooms prevent unnecessarily long travel
distance from the accessible building entry.
3. Accessible Route
a. Provide hallways and corridors with a clearance of 915mm with an occasional space
allowance for turning and passing at intervals not exceeding 61M
4. Door Width
a. Provide the doors to meeting rooms have a clear opening of 813mm.
5. Thresholds
a. Detail thresholds of interior doors have a maximum edge height of 6mm. (See
Section F, Part 10)
6. Amplifier and Sound System Equipment
a. Provide an amplifier and sound system equipment available with individual or
lavaliere microphones. Note: This is not a requirement but is often helpful.
7. Floor

Rev. 1 3.3 - 13
a. Design the meeting room floor non-slip, level, and negotiable by persons in
wheelchairs and other mobility aids.
8. Seating for People using Wheelchairs
a. Provide adequate seating space for people using wheelchairs.
(For forward or rear access, total space 1220mm deep by 1676mm wide or for side
access, 1525mm deep by 1525mm wide.)
b. Provide the spaces for people using wheelchairs dispersed throughout the room
within easy viewing (line of sight) of the stage.
c. Provide the spaces for people using wheelchairs or other mobility aids near
accessible exits.
9. Table Placement
a. If tables are used in the meeting rooms, provide a 915mm aisle clearance and a
762mm wide space at the table for wheelchair access.
10. Table Height
a. Specify or provide tables with a clear opening for knee space of at least 686mm in
height, 762mm in width, and 483mm in depth.
b. Provide the top surface of the table 711 to 864mm from floor surface.
11. Listening System
a. If requested, participants are to be provided with interpreter services or a listening
system and are to be seated within 15.25M of the stage for viewing.
12. Temporary Ramp
a. Provide a temporary ramp for the podium or head table available.
Note: Maximum slope of ramp is 1cm vertical rise in every 12 cm of horizontal
distance.
13. Microphones
a. Provide accessible and flexible microphones.
J. Restaurants
1. Entrance
a. Provide entrances to food service establishments have a door with a 813mm clear
opening, single effort door pull, and negotiable thresholds of 6mm or less in height
and beveled at a slope of 1:2.
2. Tables
a. Provide accessible tables. (A 762mm width for individual seating, 686mm minimum
knee clearance, and minimum 483m depth under the table)
b. Are tables placed to provide a 915mm wide aisle clearance.
c. Provide 28-864mm from the floor to the top of the table.
3. Cafeteria/Buffet Lines

Rev. 1 3.3 - 14
a. Provide accessible cafeteria/buffet lines—at least 915mm clear opening with

adequate turning space at corners.
b. Provide tray slides mounted at a maximum of 864mm above the floor.
4. Menus
a. Provide restaurant \ menus in Braille and large print.
5. Lounge
a. Provide accessible lounge entrance, tables and aisles.
6. Fixed Tables
a. Where fixed tables are provided, provide at least 5 percent, but not less than one
table, accessible.
Note: The required number of accessible fixed tables or counters shall be
proportionally distributed between smoking and non-smoking areas.
K. Guest Rooms
1. Room Numbers
a. Provide guest rooms numbered in consecutive sequence (100, 102, 104, etc.) and
are with numbers raised for tactile identification.
2. Keys
a. Provide room keys available with a large fixed handle for easy handling.
3. Door
a. Provide entry, bathroom, and closet doors with a clear opening of 813mm with
maximum threshold height of 1/2 inch with beveled edges of 1:2 slope as necessary.
(See Section F, Part 10)
4. Bed Spacing
a. Provide a minimum clear opening of 915mm by at least one side of the bed.
5. Telephones
a. Provide one telephone in the room which is accessible from the bed.
6. Amplified Telephones
a. Provide amplified telephones and text telephones available for guests.
7. Protruding Objects
a. Provide rooms free of wall mounted protruding objects such as televisions, hanging
lamps, etc.
8. Switch Access
a. Provide light switches, heating, cooling, drapery controls, and other similar items
accessible and placed so that they will allow access by forward or parallel approach
in a wheelchair or other mobility aid.
b. Provide tactile instructions available on controls.
9. Closet and Towel Racks
a. Provide towel and closet racks mounted at a maximum height of 1220mm.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 15
10. Space for Wheelchairs

a. Provide guest rooms and bathrooms to allow sufficient turning space for wheelchairs
(1525mm diameter space is preferred).
11. Mirrors
a. Mount mirrors within 1016mm of the floor to the bottom of the reflective surface.
12. Lavatory Clearance
a. Is the lavatory mounted at least 737mm from the floor to provide knee clearance, at
a maximum height of 864mm to the top surface of the lavatory, and is the bottom of
the drainpipe at least 230mm from the floor surface.
b. See Section G – Public Restrooms.
13. Exposed Hot Water and Drain Pipes
a. Provide insulation or protective covering used on drain and hot water pipes under
the lavatory to prevent contact.
14. Water Closet Seat
a. Specify the top of the water closet seat between 432 to 483mm from the floor
surface.
15. Grab Bars
a. Provide grab bars of sufficient length and height (838 to 915mm) mounted adjacent
to the water closet having a diameter of 32 to 38mm, with a 38mm space between
the grab bar and the wall, and are the grab bars able to support 113 kg.
16. Faucet Controls
a. Provide faucets controlled by a hand lever, push button, or electronic control which
is easily operated by one hand, not requiring tight grasping, pinching, or twisting and
operable with 2.25 kg of force or less.
17. Shower and Tub Combinations
a. Provide shower and tub combinations with curtains rather than glass doors.
18. Grab Bars
a. Provide grab bars of sufficient length, height and strength mounted in tub or shower.
b. Provide grab bars with a diameter of 813 to 38mm, and a 38mm space between the
grab bar and the wall, and with the grab bars able to support 113 kg.
19. Bath Tub Bench
a. Provide a bench available for use in the tub.
20. Shower Stall and Flexible Shower Hose
a. Provide the floor space in the shower stall at least 915 x 915mm.
b. Provide the shower spray unit with a flexible hose of at least 1525mm long and so
the shower head can be used as both a hand-held and fixed unit.
21. Number of Accessible Rooms
a. Provide accessible guest rooms available that comply with the table below.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 16
Rooms with Roll-in

Number of Rooms Accessible Rooms
Shower
1 to 25 1 —–
26 to 50 2 —–
51 to 75 3 1
76 to 100 4 1
101 to 150 5 2
151 to 200 6 2
201 to 300 7 3
301 to 400 8 4
4 plus one for each
401 to 500 9 additional 100 over
400
501 to 1000 2% of total
20 plus 1 for each 100
1001 and over
over 1000
22. Sleeping Accommodations for Persons with Hearing Impairments

a. Provide number of rooms with Visual Alarm Notification Devices and Text
Telephones comply with the following table.
Rooms with Visual Alarms

Number of Rooms/Suites
and Text Telephones
1 to 25 1
26 to 50 2
51 to 75 3
76 to 100 4
101 to 150 5
151 to 200 6
201 to 300 7
301 to 400 8
401 to 500 9
501 to 1000 2% of total
20 plus 1 for each 100 over
1001 and over
1000
L. Hazards and Emergency Procedures

1. Hazardous Vehicular Area
a. Provide boundary between the pedestrian and vehicle area marked with some type
of tactile warning if not separated by curbs, rails or similar element.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 17
Note: Truncated domes having a diameter of 23mm, height of 5mm, center-to-center

spacing of 60mm, and of a color which contrasts with the walk surface may be used
as a tactile warning.
2. Standard Warnings at Subsurface Pools
a. Provide standardized textured surfaces for tactile warnings (i.e. rails, walls, curbs, or
truncated domes) present at subsurface pools.
3. Emergency Exits
a. Provide all emergency exit doors clearly marked, and with a a minimum opening of
813mm.
b. Provide exit doors equipped with tactile symbols to designate their location.
4. Audible and Visual Alarm Signals
a. Provide all audible alarms accompanied by visual alarms.
b. Specify audible alarms to produce a noise which exceeds the ambient noise level by
at least 15 decibels.
c. Specify visual alarms xenon strobe type (or equivalent) with intensity of 75 candela
and a flash rate of 1 per second minimum and 3 per second maximum.
d. Specify visual alarms not more than 15.25M apart and mounted 2032mm above
highest floor level or 150mm below the ceiling, whichever is lower.
5. Area of Rescue
a. Except in fully sprinkled buildings, provide an area of rescue assistance that meets
one of the following seven requirements specified in ADA Accessibility Guidelines
and is it identified by a sign.
1) Portion of a stairway landing within a smoke-proof enclosure.
2) Portion of an exterior exit balcony located adjacent to an exit stairway.
3) Portion of a one-hour fire restrictive corridor located adjacent to an exit
enclosure.
4) Fire-resistive vestibule located adjacent to an exit enclosure.
5) Portion of a stairway landing within an exit enclosure which is vented and
separated from the interior of the building with fire resistive doors (not less
than one hour).
6) An area or room separated from portions of the building by a smoke barrier.
7) An elevator lobby with shafts that are pressurized once activated by smoke
detectors.
M. Elevators and Automated Teller Machines
1. Elevators
a. For facilities that have a passenger elevator provide elevator access to all levels of
the facility.
2. Signal Identification
a. Provide both visual and audible signals used to identify direction of elevator travel
(for example, for audible alarms, one sound for UP and two sounds for DOWN).

Rev. 1 3.3 - 18
3. Accessible Routes
a. Provide the accessible elevators on a normally used accessible route.
4. Call Buttons/Floor Buttons
a. Provide call buttons in lobbies and halls mounted at 1067mm (on center) above the
floor with no access obstructions.
b. Provide raised and Braille floor destinations on both elevator jambs 1525mm above
the floor surface.
5. Elevator Car Dimensions
a. Specify the elevator with a minimum inside dimensions of 1372 x 2032mm and a
clear door opening of 915mm.
Note: If the elevator door is not on center of the elevator entrance, the interior dimensions
should be 1372 x 1727mm.
6. Leveling
a. Specify the elevator to stop within 12mm of the outside floor surface on each level.
7. Space Between Elevator and Floor
a. Provide the open space between the outside floor surface and the elevator platform
no greater than 32mm.
8. Floor Protective Re-Opening Device
a. Provide the elevators equipped with a safety system that automatically opens the
door when it becomes obstructed by an object or person.
9. Handrails
a. Specify the elevator interior have handrails mounted 864 to 915mm above the floor
and with a clear space of 38mm between the rail and the wall.
10. Controls, Call Buttons and Alarms
a. Provide controls, call buttons, and alarm buttons at least 19mm in diameter with
Braille and raised lettering located to the left of each control or button.
b. Provide all controls or buttons on the elevator control panel mounted no higher than
1220mm above the floor.
11. Automated Teller Machines (ATM)
a. Provide sufficient clear floor space (762 x 1220mm) adjacent to the ATM to allow for
forward or parallel approach by a wheelchair.
b. Design maximum height of all operable controls or buttons 1220mm for a front
approach or 1372mm for a parallel approach by a wheelchair.
c. Provide instructions and information for use of the ATM accessible to persons with
visual impairments.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 19
SUBSECTION 3.3.3 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY
3.3.3 BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY
A. General
1. Building Accessibility is a requirement of all new work within the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
Accessible design as it relates to buildings covers a wide range of components and
topics including but not limited to:
a. Smooth, ground level entrances with ramps as needed.
b. Surface textures that require low force to traverse on level, less than 2 kg force per
54 kg rolling force.
c. Surfaces that are stable, firm, and slip resistant per ASTM 2047.
d. Doors complying with minimum and maximum sizes along required egress paths.
e. Functional clearances for approach and use of elements and components.
f. Lever handles for opening doors rather than twisting knobs.
g. Single-hand operation with closed fist for operable components including fire alarm
pull stations.
h. Components that do not require tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist.
i. Components that require less than 2 kg of force to operate.
j. Light switches with large flat panels rather than small toggle switches.
k. Buttons and other controls that may be distinguished by touch.
l. Bright and appropriate lighting, particularly task lighting.
m. Contrast controls on visual output.
n. Clear lines of sight to reduce dependence on sound.
o. Signs with light-on-dark visual contrast.
p. Labels on equipment control buttons that is large print.
q. Operable parts being within prescribed reach ranges.

Rev. 1 3.3 - 20
SECTION 3.4 SUSTAINABILITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.4.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Concept ......................................................................................................................... 1
2. Triple Bottom Line ......................................................................................................... 1
3. Goal ............................................................................................................................... 1
4. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
5. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
6. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 2
7. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 3
9. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 3
10. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 4
12. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 5
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 5
3.4.2 SUSTAINABLE “GREEN” DESIGN ............................................................................... 6
A. Sustainable Design ........................................................................................................ 6
B. LEED (Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design) ................................................ 6
C. CEEQUAL (Civil Engineering Environmental Quality Assessment and Awards Scheme)
8
3.4.3 ASHRAE ....................................................................................................................... 11
A. ASHRAE ....................................................................................................................... 11
3.4.4 ENERGY....................................................................................................................... 12
A. Energy Efficiency .......................................................................................................... 12
3.4.5 WATER CONSERVATION ........................................................................................... 13
A. Water Conservation ...................................................................................................... 13

Rev. 1 3.4 - i
3.4.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Concept
a. Sustainable Design addresses the design and construction integration to promote
higher performing buildings that reduce the building’s impact on the environment.
b. Sustainable design is not a one-time treatment or product, it is a process that
applies to buildings, sites, interiors, operations, and the community. The process
flows throughout the entire life-cycle of a project, beginning at the inception of a
project idea and continuing seamlessly until the project reaches the end of its life
and its parts are recycled, re-used, or discarded.
2. Triple Bottom Line
a. The success of sustainable design rests on the concept of the Triple Bottom Line.
That is, sustainable design incorporates a long-term view for assessing potential
effects and best practices for three kinds of resources:
1) People (Social Capital). All the costs and benefits to the people who design,
construct, live in, work in, and constitute the local community and are
influenced, directly or indirectly, by a project.
2) Planet (Natural Capital). All the costs and benefits of a project on the natural
environment, locally and globally.
3) Profit (Economic Capital). All the economic costs and benefits of a project for
all stakeholders, not just the project owner.
3. Goal
a. The goal of the Triple Bottom Line is to ensure that projects create value for all
stakeholders, not just a restricted few.
4. Introduction
a. Sustainable design responds to economic, environmental, and cultural conditions with
respect to the local, regional, and global context. Sustainable design and construction
practices significantly reduce or eliminate the negative impact of buildings on the
environment and occupants by addressing the following:
1) Location and Transportation Net
2) Sustainable site planning
3) Green infrastructure
4) Conservation of water and protection of water quality
5) Energy and Atmosphere
6) Conservation of materials and resources
7) Indoor environmental quality
8) Optimization of operational and maintenance practices
9) Regional priorities, as applicable
10) Innovation in design
5. Applicability

Rev. 1 3.4 - 1
a. These general energy conservation and environmental Standards are intended to

provide a framework for A/E and/or EPC Contractors as they pursue the sustainability
goals identified by the RCJ.
6. Definitions
a. “Building Commissioning” A quality assurance process for design and during and after
building construction to ensure that appropriate systems and components are
installed, tested and maintained according to design requirements.
b. “Carbon Footprint” The total set of greenhouse gas emissions caused by an
organization, event, product or person.
c. “Chain-of-Custody Certificates” Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that
wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by a Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC)-accredited body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, “FSC
Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.” Certificates shall include evidence that
manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
d. “Construction Waste Management” Developing and implementing a construction
waste management program shall be part of the standard scope for all projects. At a
minimum, the plan shall identify the non-hazardous materials to be diverted from the
waste stream through salvage or recycling activities and state whether materials will
be sorted on-site or comingled.
e. “Ecosystem” The complex of a community of organisms and its environment
functioning as an ecological unit.
f. “Ecological Footprint” Measure of human demand on the Earth’s ecosystems.
g. “Greenhouse Gas” An atmospheric gas that absorbs and emits radiation within the
thermal infrared range, a process that elevates the average surface temperature of
the Earth. The primary greenhouse gases in the Earth’s atmosphere are water vapor,
carbon dioxide, methane, nitrous oxide and ozone.
h. “Greywater” Wastewater generated from domestic activities such as laundry,
dishwashing, and bathing, which may be recycled on-site for uses such as landscape
irrigation and flushing toilets.
i. “Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA)” Method for assessing the total cost of facility
ownership, considering first costs as well as operations and maintenance expenses.
j. “Low-VOC” Materials with Volatile Organic Compound emissions that comply with
established limits, thus supporting indoor air quality.
k. “Recycled Content” The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be
determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the
cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value.
1) “Post-consumer” material is defined as waste material generated by
households or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their roles
as end users of the product, which may no longer be used for its intended
purpose.
2) “Pre-consumer” material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream
during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as
rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being
reclaimed within the same process that generated it.

Rev. 1 3.4 - 2
l. “Regional Materials” Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as

well as manufactured, within 800 km of project site. If only a fraction of a product or
material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that
percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.
m. “Peak Shaving” The process of shifting electrical demand from peak times to times
with lower demand
n. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional definitions.
7. Abbreviations
a. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
b. CEEQUAL: Civil Engineering Environmental Quality Assessment and Award
Scheme
c. ICC: International Code Council
d. EGBC: Emirates Green Building Council
e. FSC: Forest Stewardship Council
f. GHG: Greenhouse gas
g. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
h. LEED: Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
i. LCCA: Life cycle cost analysis
j. MENA GBC: Middle East and North Africa Green Building Council
k. NEC: National Electric Code
l. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
m. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National
Association
n. USGBC: U.S. Green Building Council
o. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound
p. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional abbreviations.
a. Within the context of the project requirements, schedule, and budget, RCJ desires the
A/E and/or EPC Contractors to create their project designs in accordance with the
Sustainable Design concept contained herein. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall
create Sustainable Goals as a part of their 10% Submission as well as a Sustainability
Report as a part of their 30% Submission.
9. Codes
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations,
and applicable adopted Codes and their referenced Standards. For information
regarding the applicable Codes and the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section
3.1.
b. Additionally, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with the following
regulations:

Rev. 1 3.4 - 3
1) Ministry of Water & Electrical Requirements

2) SASO – Minimum Energy Performance Requirements
3) RCJ Urban Planning Sustainability Requirements
10. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Section:
1) LEED v4.1: Unless direct otherwise, projects will be designed and documented
according to the requirements of the USGBC’s LEED Green Building Program.
Standards referenced by LEED include, but are not limited to the standards
listed below. Reference the LEED Guidelines for determining the required
edition and other referenced standards. ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005: The
Commissioning Process
2) International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP)
3) ASHRAE 90.1-2020 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings
(a) Establishes minimum requirements for energy efficient building design.
(b) Applies to building envelope, HVAC, hot water, and lighting.
4) International Green Construction Code (IGCC)
(a) Seeks to decrease energy usage and carbon footprints.
(b) Addresses site development and land use, including preservation of
natural and material resources.
(c) Emphasizes building performance.
5) ASHRAE 189.1 Standard for Design of High-Performance Green Buildings
(a) Identifies an alternate method to the IGCC for achieving sustainable
building design.
6) Resource Conservation Standards / Environmental Quality Standards
(a) ASTM E2635-08 Standard Practice for Water Conservation in Buildings
Through In-Situ Water Reclamation
b. LEED Rating System
1) States the basic intent, requirements, and documentation submittals necessary
to achieve each prerequisite and voluntary credit.
2) Projects earn one or more points toward certification by meeting or exceeding
each credit’s technical requirements.
3) All prerequisites must be achieved to qualify for certification, regardless of other
points.
4) Points add up to a final score that relates to one of four possible levels of
certification: Certified, Silver, Gold or Platinum.
5) Projects are strongly encouraged to pursue the required number of points, plus
ten percent to assure certification success; not all credits pursued may be
successful in the end.
11. Related Sections

Rev. 1 3.4 - 4
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for Commissioning Requirements.

12. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and act on all design reports, plans and
B. Commissioning
1. Commissioning is a part of the standard scope of all projects. Commissioning is a quality-
focused process that begins with review of decisions made in design and continues to
verify proper installation, operation, and maintenance throughout construction into
operation. Energy efficiency, indoor environmental quality and equipment are primary
areas of concern for basic commissioning services. The four stages of involvement on a
new construction project are as follows:
a. Pre-Design
b. Design
c. Construction
d. Operations
2. Basic commissioning is a LEED prerequisite. Enhanced commissioning is strongly
encouraged.
3. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for the RCJ’s commissioning requirements.

Rev. 1 3.4 - 5
SUBSECTION 3.4.2 SUSTAINABLE “GREEN” DESIGN
3.4.2 SUSTAINABLE “GREEN” DESIGN
A. Sustainable Design
1. Sustainable Design is a methodology of reducing the carbon-footprint of buildings by
consciously designing buildings to make the built environment have less impact on us and
our planet. Sustainable design Standards and project design guides are also increasingly
available and are vigorously being developed by a wide array of private organizations and
individuals. There is also a large body of new methods emerging from the rapid
development of what has become known as 'sustainability science' promoted by a wide
variety of educational and governmental institutions. The design solutions will be project
specific but will evaluate and include many, if not all, of the following topics.
a. Low-impact materials: Choose non-toxic, sustainably produced, or recycled materials
which require little energy to extract, process, and deliver.
b. Energy efficiency: Use manufacturing processes and produce products which require
less energy
c. Durable design: Reducing consumption and waste of resources by increasing the
durability of relationships between people and products, through design.
d. Design for reuse and recycling: "Products, processes, and systems shall be designed
for performance in a commercial 'afterlife'." Cradle-to-Grave and Cradle-to-Cradle
analysis will inform design decisions in this category. Utilizing life-cycle assessment
to predict and reduce impacts for total carbon footprint are now increasingly required.
e. Biomimicry: "Redesigning systems on biological lines and enabling the constant reuse
of materials in continuous closed cycles." Living Buildings and Net Zero Buildings may
require this type of design thinking.
f. Water Use Reduction: Create water harvesting systems, controlling water use in
buildings and the use of grey or black water on site are all methods used to reduce
the amount of water brought onto the site.
g. Renewability: Materials shall come from nearby (local or bioregional), sustainably
managed renewable sources that may be composted when their usefulness has been
exhausted.
h. Robust eco-design: Consider design principles that minimize resource consumption
and pollution sources when designing products.
i. Sustainable infrastructure: Use programs such as CEEQUAL to internally assess and
independently verify how well clients, design teams and/or construction teams
address environmental, sustainability, and social issues on projects.
B. LEED (Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design)
1. LEED is a third-party certification product, of the United States Green Building Council, for
certifying Green Buildings. Although the RCJ has not officially adopted LEED as a
certification requirement for all of its projects, the RCJ does pursue LEED certification on
selected projects, and intends to use LEED as a method to determine if a project shall
pursue certification on a project-by-project basis. The LEED methodology also gives the
RC a means of evaluating the sustainability design results for each project. The A/E and/or
EPC Contractors shall submit the sustainable design strategies and goals at the 10% level,
including a project specific LEED scorecard and an updated sustainability report at the
30% level. If the project has not already been designated for pursuing certification, the
RCJ will then determine if LEED Certification will be pursued on a project by project basis.

Rev. 1 3.4 - 6
LEED is a point-based system that has prerequisites and credits in the following
requirements and categories:
a. Integrative Process - requirements promote reaching across disciplines to
incorporate diverse team members during the pre-design period. Note that this is a
prerequisite, not a credit, for health care facilities.
b. Location and Transportation - credits reward projects within relatively dense areas,
near diverse uses, with access to a variety of transportation options, or on sites with
development constraints.
c. Sustainable Sites - credits encourage strategies that minimize the impact on
ecosystems and water resources.
d. Water Efficiency - credits promote smarter use of water, inside and out, to reduce
potable water consumption.
e. Energy & Atmosphere - credits promote better building energy performance through
innovative strategies.
f. Materials & Resources - credits encourage using sustainable building materials, use
of recycled materials and reducing waste.
g. Indoor Environment Quality - credits promote better indoor air quality and access to
daylight and views.
h. Innovation in Design - credits address sustainable building expertise as well as design
measures not covered under the five LEED credit categories.
i. Regional Priorities - address regional environmental priorities for buildings in different
geographic regions.
j. Information regarding the prerequisites and credits may be found at www.usgbc.com.
Specific information regarding each prerequisite and credit is in the LEED Reference
Guide for Building Design & Construction.
k. Many credits may earn multiple points.
2. As a part of every project for the RCJ, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor are required to submit
Sustainable Design goals in a pre-design submission and the 10% submission, and a
Sustainable Design Report in the 30%.
a. Pre-design Activities and Submission
1) All projects that meet the LEED Minimum Project Requirements will conduct a
workshop with all stakeholders prior to beginning design. These goals would
identify the sustainable design components and practices that the design
team intends to include in the project.
2) These goals shall be submitted in the form of meeting minutes and
summarized by a LEED Scoresheet in the 10% submission. For the 10%
submission, the RCJ requires that all the applicable LEED v4 pre-requisites
be included in the goals for the project:
3) The workshop must be led by a currently credentialled LEED AP BD+C
person from the RC or the A/E or EPC Contractor.
4) An agenda, attendance sign-in sheet, minutes, and all related documents
must be preserved, and included as an appendix to the 10% Phase
sustainability report.

Rev. 1 3.4 - 7
b. 10% Submission Requirements: At the outset of a project, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor will establish Sustainable Design Goals for the project.
1) Submit agendas, sign-in sheets, and minutes of any sustainability meetings and
workshops subsequent to the initial goal-setting pre-design workshop.
2) Submit a revised LEED (or CEEQUAL) checklist, and a narrative of any
changes.
3) Submit any other relevant documentation, studies, presentations, or research.
c. 30% Submission: During the 30% phase of every project, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall create a Sustainability Report.
1) Submit agendas, sign-in sheets, and minutes of any sustainability meetings
and workshops after the 10% Submission.
2) Submit a revised LEED (or CEEQUAL) checklist, and a narrative of any
changes.
3) Submit Schematic information regarding the impact of implementing the
selected LEED (or CEEQUAL) credits, including draft life cycle cost analysis.
C. CEEQUAL (Civil Engineering Environmental Quality Assessment and Awards Scheme)
1. CEEQUAL is a third-party sustainability rating and award system focusing on site
preparation, site development and infrastructure projects.
The CEEQUAL Award Scheme is based on a self-assessment carried out by a trained
CEEQUAL Assessor that is then externally and independently verified by a CEEQUAL-
appointed Verifier.
Although the RCJ has not officially adopted a policy to seek CEEQUAL awards for all
infrastructure projects, the RCJ does intend to benefit from Award Scheme and use it
throughout a project’s duration as a checklist, and as part of the specification for delivery
of high environmental quality.
Therefore, the A/E shall use it as a tool to aid decision-making on environmental issues
related to the design, construction and operation of the project, to develop Sustainability
Goals for the project, and to produce the Sustainability Report. EPC Contractors shall use
it to fulfil their obligation to deliver the permanent works to the required environmental
quality.
2. The CEEQUAL scheme complements any statutory requirement or voluntary decision to
undertake an Environmental Impact Assessment or prepare an Environmental Statement
or Environmental Commentary.
CEEQUAL does not assess the environmental need for the project nor its social
acceptability, but supports clients, designers and contractors in dealing positively with
environmental quality and associated social issues relevant to the project, and helps to
integrate such thinking into the design and construction processes.
This integration includes issues such as protection of the surrounding natural environment,
mitigation measures, landscape design, nature and source of construction materials, use
of recycled materials, energy consumption, and environmental management of the civil
engineering or public realm project site. The CEEQUAL question set can thus be used to
influence the issues that are addressed in regulatory Environmental Impact Assessments
or less-formal environmental commentaries on project proposals.

Rev. 1 3.4 - 8
CEEQUAL can also be used to demonstrate that actions proposed or recommended in an

Environmental Impact Assessment or environmental commentary have actually been
delivered on the project.
3. The following are the twelve (12) sections of the Scheme comprising the question set. The
sections have been weighted by CEEQUAL, and these weightings are embedded in the
scores awarded for each question.
a. Project Management – which covers the need for environmental risk assessments
and active environmental management, training, the influence of contractual and
procurement processes, delivering environmental and social performance,
construction issues, minimizing emissions.
b. Land Use – which covers design for minimum land-take, legal requirements, flood
risk, previous use of the site, land contamination and remediation measures.
c. Landscape – which covers covering consideration of landscape issues in design,
amenity features, local character, loss and compensation or mitigation of landscape
features, implementation and management, and completion and aftercare.
d. Ecology & Biodiversity – which covers impacts on sites of high ecological value,
protected species, conservation & enhancement, habitat creation measures,
monitoring and maintenance.
e. The Historic Environment – which covers baseline studies and surveys, conservation,
and enhancement measures to be taken if features are found, and information and
public access.
f. Water resources and the Water Environment – which covers control of a project’s
impacts on, and protection of, the water environment, legal requirements, minimizing
water usage, and enhancement of the water environment.
g. Energy and Carbon – which covers life-cycle energy and carbon analysis, energy and
carbon emissions in use, and energy and carbon performance on site, but not
embodied energy, which is in Section 8.
h. Material Use – which covers minimizing environmental impact of materials used,
minimizing material use and waste, responsible sourcing of materials including
selection of timber, using re-used and/or recycled material, minimizing use and
impacts of hazardous materials, durability and maintenance, and future de-
construction or disassembly.
i. Waste Management – which covers design for waste minimization, legal
requirements, waste from site preparation, and on-site waste management.
j. Transport – which covers location of a project in relation to transport infrastructure,
minimizing traffic impacts of a project, construction transport, and minimizing
workforce travel.
k. Effects on Neighbors – which covers minimizing operation and construction-related
nuisances, legal requirements, nuisance from construction noise and vibration, and
from air and light pollution, and visual impact, including site tidiness.
l. Relations with the Local Community and other Stakeholders – which covers
community consultation, community relations programs and their effectiveness,
engagement with relevant local groups, and human environment, aesthetics, and
employment.
4. The available CEEQUAL Awards are:
a. the Whole Project Award (WPA), applied for jointly by or on behalf of the Client,
Designer and Principal Contractor(s)
b. the WPA with an Interim Client & Design Award (the stage in the design process at
which the Interim Assessment is undertaken can be chosen by the applicant to best
suit their needs and procurement process)
c. the Client & Design Award, applied for jointly by the Client and Designer

Rev. 1 3.4 - 9
d. the Design-Only Award, applied for by only the principal Designer

e. the Construction-Only Award, to be applied for by the Principal Contractor(s)
f. Design & Construction Award for project teams that do not include the client, on
design & construct and other partnership contracts.
The Client & Design Award is available before construction has started as an award for a
client and designer, perhaps in a situation where the contractor has not yet been appointed
or does not wish to participate in a Whole Project Award. An Interim Client & Design Award
is available on the way to a Whole Project Award. In this circumstance the Interim Award
is superseded once the project is finished and Whole Project Award completed.
The Design-only, Construction-only and Design & Construction awards are offered for
situations where the client does not wish to participate in a Whole Project Award or where
the individual team members wish to apply separately for an award that is related directly
to their own contribution to a project.
5. There are four grades for all of the types of Awards: ‘Pass’, ‘Good’, Very Good’ and
‘Excellent’. The percentage scores necessary for these grades of award are:
a. Pass = over 25%
b. Good = over 40%
c. Very good = over 60%
d. Excellent = over 75%.
The CEEQUAL assessment has been designed to reward efforts that go beyond the legal
minima, striving for environmental best practice and “going the extra mile”. Therefore a
‘Pass’ at above 25% suggests that the project’s environmental performance is
approximately 25% of the way from minimum legal compliance to the pinnacle best practice
represented by the highest achievable score.
6. The timing of both the scoping and the assessment is important to the success of the
assessment and the level of Award achievable. Although it is possible for an Award to be
applied for after completion of the applicant project (a retrospective award), the
recommended process will involve:
a. Task formulation – pre-10% submission: a decision by the RCJ to consider CEEQUAL
at an early stage in the project’s development; preferably during the Task formulation
but no later than the 10% (concept) design phase.
b. 10% Submission:
1) The scoping-out process by the A/E to determine whether particular questions
do not apply. For this scoping-out information about contamination, results of
archaeological investigations, ecological assessments etc. would have to be
available in order to decide whether these issues could be disregarded, and the
questions scoped out. Therefore, the scoping-out process shall be completed
during the 10% design phase.
2) After the scoping-out-process the A/E will establish Sustainable Design Goals
for the project. These goals would identify the sustainable design components
and practices that the design team intends to include in the project. These
goals shall be submitted in the form of a CEEQUAL Scoresheet during the 10%
submission. The Scoresheet shall address the 12 sections of the Scheme
identified by CEEQUAL.
c. 30% Submission:
1) During the 30% phase of every project the A/E or EPC Contractor shall create
a Sustainability Report. The requirements for this report may be found in
Subsection 4.3.4.

Rev. 1 3.4 - 10
SUBSECTION 3.4.3 ASHRAE
3.4.3 ASHRAE
A. ASHRAE
1. ASHRAE, the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,
utilizes the ASHRAE Green Guide to assist designers on methods to save energy through
integrated design.
2. ASHRAE Requirements: All projects within the jurisdiction of the RCJ must use the
requirements of Climate Zone 1: Hot & Humid in the version of ASHRAE 90.1 referenced
by LEED and/or the adopted Code for the design of all building systems including but not
limited to HVAC Systems, Automated Controls, Glazing, and Building Envelopes.
Coordinate designs of these systems with all disciplines.

Rev. 1 3.4 - 11
SUBSECTION 3.4.4 ENERGY
3.4.4 ENERGY
A. Energy Efficiency
1. The RCJ is committed to implementing Energy Efficiency in the designs of new projects.
Although energy resources are not currently expensive in Saudi Arabia, the long-term goal
is efficient use of resources and diversification of energy supply. As such, energy efficiency
strategies need to be identified and implemented on all projects.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall identify which energy efficiency strategies will be
utilized for each project. These strategies may include:
a. Integrated Design and Load Reduction Strategies
1) Building solar orientation
2) Energy efficient lighting systems
3) Energy efficient office equipment (plug loads)
4) Efficient building envelop
b. Design Building Envelop to Optimize Energy Efficiency
1) Provide thermal breaks in window frames
2) Provide high performance durable weather stripping to minimize infiltration
3) Select glazing with high performance energy characteristics (U value, VLT
and SC
4) Use shading devices and light shelves to minimize solar heat gain
5) Specify effective building envelop insulation to minimize heating and cooling
loads
6) Glass on South, East and West façades shall be highly protective against
solar heat gains
7) Detail building envelop to minimize infiltration, thermal bridging, and to
prevent moisture build-up within the walls due to condensation
c. Highly Efficient and Optimized HVAC Systems
1) Heat Recovery
2) Use of Variable Frequency Drives for pumps and fans
3) Passive Ventilation Design
4) High efficiency HVAC equipment
5) Implement Demand Control Ventilation for variable occupancies
d. Utilizing Renewable Energy Sources
1) Solar Energy
2) Wind Energy
e. Solar Hot Water Systems

Rev. 1 3.4 - 12
SUBSECTION 3.4.5 WATER CONSERVATION
3.4.5 WATER CONSERVATION
A. Water Conservation
1. Water Conservation is critical in Saudi Arabia and is a major issue for the RCJ in all of its
developments. As the primary water supply to Jubail, Ras Al-Khair and the surrounding
areas are provided by desalinated water, the costs of water are high and its efficient use is
paramount. As such, water conservation strategies need to be identified and implemented
on all projects.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall identify which water conservation strategies will be
utilized for each project. These strategies may include:
a. Commissioning new water infrastructure
b. Rain harvesting
c. Grey water reuse
d. Black water reuse
e. Low flow fixtures
f. Capture and reuse of condensate drain from HVAC cooling systems
g. No potable water use for landscaping, use TSE water

Rev. 1 3.4 - 13
SECTION 3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.5.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 2
6. Codes and Standards .................................................................................................... 3
7. Related Sections and Subsections ................................................................................ 4
8. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 4
9. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 4
3.5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY SYSTEM AND RCER .......................................... 5
A. Royal Commission Environmental Regulations ............................................................ 5
1. Overview ........................................................................................................................ 5
3.5.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS AND PROJECT PERMITTING ........................... 6
A. Environmental ................................................................................................................ 6
1. The Environmental Permit Program .............................................................................. 6
2. Environmental Screening Questionnaire (ESQ) ............................................................ 7
3. Permit Application Package (PAP) ................................................................................ 7
4. Best Available Techniques (BAT) Analysis ................................................................... 8
B. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards ..................................... 8
1. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards: .................................... 8
2. Saudi National PME Standards: .................................................................................... 8
C. Archeological / Cultural Resource Clearances ............................................................. 16
1. Pre-Project Planning ..................................................................................................... 16
2. Further Investigations ................................................................................................... 16
3. Notification of Finding ................................................................................................... 16
3.5.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE ................................................................... 17
A. Hazardous Materials Management .............................................................................. 17
1. Description .................................................................................................................... 17
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Materials ................................................................................ 17
3. Hazardous Materials Inventory ..................................................................................... 17
4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Materials .................................... 18

Rev. 1 3.5 - i
5. Transportation of Hazardous Materials ........................................................................ 18

6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal ................................................................................. 18
7. Building and Construction Hazardous Materials .......................................................... 19
B. Hazardous Waste Management ................................................................................... 19
1. Description .................................................................................................................... 19
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Wastes .................................................................................. 19
3. Hazardous Waste Inventory ......................................................................................... 20
4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Waste ........................................ 20
5. Transportation of Hazardous Waste ............................................................................. 20
6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal ................................................................................. 20
3.5.5 POLLUTION PREVENTION ......................................................................................... 22
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 22
1. Basic Understanding .................................................................................................... 22
2. Design ........................................................................................................................... 22
B. Life Cycle Assessments (LCA) ..................................................................................... 22
1. LCA Implementation ..................................................................................................... 22
C. Material Reduction, Substitution, and Elimination ........................................................ 22
1. Reduction...................................................................................................................... 22
2. Substitution ................................................................................................................... 22
3. Elimination .................................................................................................................... 23
D. Material Reuse.............................................................................................................. 23
E. Material Recycling ........................................................................................................ 23
1. Recycling ...................................................................................................................... 23
2. Upcycling ...................................................................................................................... 23
3. Downcycling.................................................................................................................. 23
4. Objectives ..................................................................................................................... 23
F. Energy Use ................................................................................................................... 23
1. Wasted Energy ............................................................................................................. 23
G. End-of-Pipe Controls .................................................................................................... 24
1. Air Discharges .............................................................................................................. 24
2. Water Discharges ......................................................................................................... 24
3. Solid Waste................................................................................................................... 24
H. Decommissioning, Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal ...................................... 24
3.5.6 PETROLEUM AND CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE ...................................................... 25
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 25
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 25

Rev. 1 3.5 - ii
B. Codes and Standards ................................................................................................... 25

1. Applicable Codes and Standards ................................................................................. 25
3.5.7 SITE CLEANUP AND REMEDIATION ......................................................................... 26
A. Contaminated Site Material Removal ........................................................................... 26
1. Requirements ............................................................................................................... 26
B. Asbestos Cement (AC) Pipe and Material Removal .................................................... 26
1. Applicable Codes and Standards ................................................................................. 26
2. General Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 26
3. Safe Work Procedure Checklist.................................................................................... 26
4. Required PPE ............................................................................................................... 27
5. Established Controlled Zone ........................................................................................ 27
6. Tools ............................................................................................................................. 27
7. Wet Methods................................................................................................................. 27
8. Disposal and Decontamination Procedures ................................................................. 28
C. Wastewater Disposal .................................................................................................... 28

Rev. 1 3.5 - iii
3.5.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Section 3.5 provides guidance for Codes and Performance Standards related to
environmental protection and preservation. The Codes, Standards, and Guidelines
apply to:
1) Environmental Regulations and Project Permitting
2) Construction Phase Environmental Controls
3) Hazardous Materials
4) Pollution Prevention
5) Petroleum and Chemical Bulk Storage
6) Site Cleanup and Remediation
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to all projects within the cities under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
3. Definitions
a. “Asbestos Containing Material” Any material that contains or partly contains any
amount of asbestos fibers.
b. “Berm” Shaped dike or mound of material that separates two areas. When used for
containment the berm construction shall be impervious to material that it is
separating.
c. “Construction and Demolition Waste” (Debris) Concrete, brick, asphalt, and other
such building materials discarded in the construction or demolition of a building or
other alteration to property.
d. “Contaminant” Substance that is identified by the RCJ as having a regulatory
standard outlined in the Royal Commission Environmental Regulations (RCER).
e. “Cultural Resource” Historic physical objects such as remains, architecture, artwork,
or other items as designated by the Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities.
f. “Developer” Team responsible for planning, design, construction, and operation of
the proposed project.
g. “Geotextile” Permeable fabrics that when used with soil, can separate, filter,
reinforce, protect, or drain.
h. “Hazardous Material” Materials harmful to human health and/or the environment that
is solid, semi-solid, liquid, or gas and may include hazardous wastes. Also refer to
definition in RCER VOLUME I Section 4, Hazardous Materials Management.
i. “Impacted” Affected by an environmental contaminant(s) at a level equal to or
greater than that specified in RCER Volume I Tables.
j. “Impermeable” Not allowing a fluid to pass through.
k. “In-situ” Meaning to leave or treat in place, usually referring to earth material (soil,
groundwater, sediment) during construction or contaminants during remediation.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 1
l. “Landfill” A place, location, tract of land, area, or premises used for the disposal of
solid wastes. The term is synonymous with “solid waste disposal site” and is also
known as garbage dump and trash dump.
m. “Life Cycle” A series of stages through which a material or project passes from the
beginning of its existence to the end.
n. “Life Cycle Assessment” An assessment that analyzes and quantifies the life
cycle(s) of a material, facility, or process during its production, use, and disposal.
o. “Migrate/Migration” The movement of hazardous substances or petroleum products
in any form, including, for example, solid and liquid at the surface or subsurface, and
vapor in the subsurface.
p. “Mitigate” An act to make impacts less severe.
q. “Pollutant” A substance, condition, or energy introduced into the environment that
has undesired effects, or adversely affects the usefulness of a resource.
r. “Project Charter” A physical document that defines project scope, objectives,
participants, roles, responsibilities, authority, and other references that define the
project.
s. “Release” Any spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying, discharging,
injecting, escaping, leaching, dumping, or disposing into the environment (including
the abandonment or discarding of barrels, containers and other closed receptacles
containing any hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant).
t. “Secondary Containment” Safeguarding method used to prevent unplanned releases
of compounds into uncontrolled areas and which is external to and separate
from primary containment.
u. “Solid Waste” Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water
supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials
including solid, liquid, semi-solid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from
industrial, commercial, mining and agriculture operations and from community
activities.
v. “Source” The point of emission or discharge of a pollutant or effluent.
w. “Stage” A temporary location for storage of earthwork on a site with the future intent
to use, transport, or dispose of the material.
x. “Wastewater” Water that (1) is or has been used in an industrial or manufacturing
process, (2) conveys or has conveyed sewage, or (3) is directly related to
manufacturing, processing, or raw materials storage areas at an industrial plant.
4. Abbreviations
a. AC: Asbestos Cement
b. ACEEE: American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy
c. ACM: Asbestos Containing Material
d. AST: Aboveground Storage Tank
e. BAT: Best Available Technique
f. CFR: Code of Federal Regulations (USA)
g. EERP: Environmental Emergency Response Plan

Rev. 1 3.5 - 2
h. EIA: Environmental Impact Assessment

i. EMRP: Excavated Material Resource Plan
j. EPtC: Environmental Permit to Construct
k. EPCD: Environmental Protection and Control Department
l. EPP: Environmental Permitting Program
m. EPtO: Environmental Permit to Operate
n. ESQ: Environmental Screening Questionnaire
o. GEM: Guiding Engineering Manual
p. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
q. HMTP: Hazardous Material Treatment Plan
r. HWTP: Hazardous Waste Treatment Plan
s. HMDP: Hazardous Material Disposal Plan
t. HWDP: Hazardous Waste Disposal Plan
u. ICE: Internal Combustion Engine
v. ISSD: Royal Commission Industrial Security and Safety Department
w. LCA: Life Cycle Assessment
x. NESHAP: National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (USA)
y. PP: Pollution Prevention
z. PAP: Permit Application Package
aa. PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyl
bb. PME: Presidency of Meteorology and Environment
cc. PPE: Personal Protective Equipment
dd. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
ee. RCJ: Royal Commission for Jubail
ff. RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations – Most Current Version
gg. SCTA: Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities
hh. SDS: Safety Data Sheet
ii. SPCC: Spill Prevention, Countermeasure, and Control
jj. USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
kk. UST: Underground Storage Tank
a. Projects shall comply with all applicable requirements and regulations of the RCJ.
6. Codes and Standards
a. Refer to Subsection 3.5.2 Environmental Regulatory System and RCER.
b. Refer to applicable US Code of Federal Regulations.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 3
7. Related Sections and Subsections

a. RCER Volume I - Regulations and Standards
b. RCER Volume II – Environmental Permit Program
c. RCER Volume III – Penalty System
d. Chapter 2 Definitions and References
e. Section 4.2 Submission Requirements
f. Subsection 4.3.8 Life Cycle Costing and Design Service Life
g. Subsection 4.3.9 Risk Management and Emergency Planning
h. Subsection 4.5.6 Environmental Compliance During Construction
i. Subsection 5.1.6 Local Climate Conditions
j. Subsection 5.2.1.G.3 Culverts and Drainage Structures
k. Subsection 5.3.2.K Waste Collection Requirements
l. Subsection 5.3.2.L Screening of Waste, Utilities, and Service Areas
m. Subsection 5.6.1.E Erosion and Sediment Controls
n. Subsection 5.6.2.B.3.f Noise Barriers
o. Subsection 5.7.2 Wastewater
p. Subsection 5.9.2 Air
q. Subsection 5.9.4 Solid Waste Management and Recycling
8. Approvals
a. The RCJ has approval authority through the Environmental Permit Program.
9. Commissioning
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for the RCJ’s commissioning requirements.
b.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 4
SUBSECTION 3.5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY SYSTEM AND RCER
3.5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY SYSTEM AND RCER
A. Royal Commission Environmental Regulations

1. Overview
a. The industrial cities under oversight by the RCJ are governed by a three-part
environmental regulatory system of documents that consists of Volume I –
Regulations and Standards, Volume II – Environmental Permit Program, and
Volume III – Penalty System. This regulatory system is in place to protect the
environment and regulate community, industrial, and other services in these cities.
Projects located within these cities are required to adhere to these regulations.
b. Volume I – Regulations and Standards is divided into eight Sections that cover in
detail the information and regulations related to the Environmental Regulatory
System, Air Environment Discharges, Water Environment Discharges, Hazardous
Materials Management, Waste Management, Dredging, Noise, and Reporting and
Record Keeping. Nearly all projects will encounter regulations that shall affect the
design, construction, and operation of a project. The most common areas of impact
for new projects or modification of existing facilities will be discharges to air, and
water, traffic, and noise generation, but other environmental impacts may also apply.
c. Volume II – Environmental Permit Program is an overview of the Environmental
Permitting Program (EPP), and Permit Application Package (PAP). Volume II also
contains valuable information on completing an Environmental Screening
Questionnaire (ESQ), Best Available Techniques (BAT) Analysis, Environmental
Impact Assessment (EIA), Environmental Emergency Response Plan (EERP), and
Groundwater Monitoring.
d. Volume III – Penalty System includes the description and application of the penalty
system. It contains information on calculating penalties, fixed fines and variable
fines.
e. Refer to the RCER Volumes I, II, and III for more detailed information on the system,
regulations, permitting, and penalties.
f.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 5
SUBSECTION 3.5.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS AND PROJECT PERMITTING
3.5.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS AND PROJECT PERMITTING
A. Environmental
1. The Environmental Permit Program
a. The permitting program for cities under the oversight of the RCJ is referred to as the
Environmental Permit Program (EPP). The EPP governs all applications, reviews
and approval procedures associated with obtaining the "Environmental Permit to
Construct" (EPtC) and "Environmental Permit to Operate" (EPtO), which are
required for facilities within the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. All communications with third parties shall be coordinated with the RCJ.
1) Further information on the EPP can be found in Table 3.5.3.A, below, and in
RCER Volume II, Introduction Section 1.
c. Program Process
1) While the project is in its concept and planning phase, a project charter and
schedule shall be created to establish a foundation for the project details,
ensuring that environmental responsibility is a priority. It is important to
generate these documents early in the project with the goal to limit scope and
schedule changes as the project progresses through to completion.
Preliminary engineering shall also be performed during this time in order to
accurately complete and submit the ESQ to the RCJ.
2) Upon RCJ review of the ESQ and approval of preliminary engineering, the
developer must begin preparing permit applications and supplemental
information that have been identified by the RCJ as well as begin facility
design. If the RCJ requests environmental studies be performed it is the
developer’s responsibility to ensure the studies are completed and the
environmental report submitted to the RCJ for review. Iterations with the RCJ
for environmental submittals and design may be necessary to reach 90%
design approval. Once the 90% design has been approved by the RCJ, and
all other requirements have been met, the EPtC will be issued and
construction may begin.
(a) Full explanation of the EPtC is in found in RCER Volume II Introduction
Subsection 1.3.1.
3) When construction is nearing completion, the Construction Contractor shall
apply for the EPtO for the facility. The RCJ will perform a site inspection to
confirm compliance to permits and will issue the EPtO if no issues are found.
(a) Full explanation of the EPtO is in found in RCER Volume II Introduction
Subsection 1.3.2.
4) Environmental Permit Program (EPP)
TABLE 3.5.3.A: ENVIRONMENTAL PERMIT RESPONSIBILITIES
Project Planning / Approval stages

1 The Applicant shall complete the ESQ
2 The Applicant shall complete the PAP based on ESQ
3 The RCJ will review and comment on the PAP and ESQ

Rev. 1 3.5 - 6
Project Planning / Approval stages

The RCJ will decide if an EIA is required and which additional
4
areas to discuss further
5 The Applicant shall prepare and submit an EIA Scope of Work
6 The RCJ will review and comment on the EIA Scope of Work
7 The Applicant shall complete a BAT analysis
8 The Applicant shall complete the approved EIA and EERP
9 The RCJ will review the EIA and EERP
10 The RCJ will decide if studies are complete
11 The RCJ will issue an EPtC
The Applicant shall install construction phase environmental
12
controls
The Applicant shall continue to meet all environmental
13
requirements during construction and completion of project
14 The RCJ will issue an EPtO
2. Environmental Screening Questionnaire (ESQ)
a. The ESQ is completed by the project applicant and is designed to provide the RCJ
with an overview of the project. The ESQ requires information on the process
design, material stocks and flows, energy, fuel, environmental discharges, and
general operations of the proposed project. This information is used by the RCJ
reviewers to determine if the project in question shall be considered a Type I, II, or III
facility, as defined in RCER Volume II, and if a PAP is required. In the case of the
designation of a Type I or Type II facility, the RCJ shall determine if preparation of
an EIA is required.
1) Further information on permitting for facility types is found in RCER Volume II-
A, Introduction Subsection 1.2.
2) Construction and modification projects for industrial facilities are required to
submit an Industrial Site Allocation Request Form, as found in RCER Volume
II-A, Introduction Appendix A along with the ESQ.
3. Permit Application Package (PAP)
a. If deemed necessary, after the RCJ has designated the facility type, the applicant
shall prepare and submit a PAP or required permit applications.
1) Instructions on how to fill out the PAP are found in RCER Volume II-A-
Introduction Section 2.
2) Permit applications for the PAP can be found in RCER Volume II-B through F.
b. An EERP shall be included in the PAP if the project is within the guidelines stated in:
1) RCER Volume II-A-Introduction Appendix D.
c. An EIA is also required to be submitted with the PAP for Type I and II facilities.
1) Information, instructions, and guidelines for the EIA are found in RCER
Volume II-A-Introduction Appendix C.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 7
d. After the RCJ confirms in writing that the permit application(s) and analyses are
complete, an EPtC is issued and upon construction completion the EPtO is issued.
These permits shall be pursuant to the RCER and with conditions as deemed
appropriate by the RCJ.
e. Information and regulations for the EPtC can be found in RCER Volume I
Subsection 1.2, Environmental Permit to Construct Regulations.
f. Information and regulations for the EPtO can be found in RCER Volume I
Subsection 1.3, Environmental Permit to Operate Regulations.
4. Best Available Techniques (BAT) Analysis
a. Project applicants are required to complete a BAT analysis for facilities with specific
discharges to the environment pursuant to RCER Volume I Clauses 1.1.11, 1.1.12,
and 1.1.13.
b. These discharges and information on completing a BAT analysis can be found in
RCER Volume II-A-Introduction Appendix B.
B. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards
1. Other Recognized Environmental Regulations and Standards:
a. In the event the RCER, or their amended version, do not specify a standard for a
specific emission source, discharge or environmental management practice, then
the Royal Commission shall use for reference other recognized regulations as a
basis for technical justification in the following order:
1) Saudi National PME Standards
2) U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA)
3) U.S. State environmental protection rules and guidelines
4) European Union members environmental rules and guidelines
5) Other internationally recognized and accepted regulatory bodies
2. Saudi National PME Standards:
a. In 2012 the PME developed twenty (20) Environmental Reference Standards to
represent the National Environmental Guidance Documents for KSA. The reference
standards revise the current General Standards for the Environment issued by the
PME. The PME Reference Standards complement, but to do not take precedence
over, the RCER:
b. Material recovery and recycling of waste
1) The document relates to the recovery and recycling of waste materials and
follows the internationally recognized waste management ‘hierarchy’ of:
(a) prevention (incorporating waste avoidance and waste reduction)
(b) recycling (incorporating reuse, recovery, and waste utilization)
(c) treatment
(d) disposal (as the last resort)
c. Mobile source emissions
1) This standard introduces emission limits for individual pieces of equipment
used outdoors and aims to protect, maintain and improve the Kingdom’s

Rev. 1 3.5 - 8
quality of life, human health, occupational health and natural ecosystems

including croplands, forests and deserts whilst maintaining appropriate
economic and social development.
2) This standard refers to air emissions from non-road engines, equipment and
vehicles. This includes sources such as mobile generators, agricultural
machinery and large earth-moving equipment.
3) This standard includes emission limits for diesel (compression-ignition)
engines, small and large petrol (spark-ignition) engines, and other
recreational vehicles not included in SASO standards.
4) This standard does not include emissions from road vehicles, marine vessels,
locomotives, and aircrafts
5) This standard sets out emission limit values depending on engine type and
capacity.
d. Environmental noise
1) The purpose of the General Environmental Standard for Noise.is to provide a
basis for statutory control to restrict and reduce the nuisance caused by
environmental noise. The framework does not address the issue of
occupational noise which falls under the jurisdiction of National Health and
Safety Law.
2) This standard relates to the following types of environmental noise:
(a) community noise
(b) noise from industrial units in areas set aside primarily for industrial
facilities
(c) noise from construction activities
(d) noise from vehicles (including motorized vessels and recreational craft);
and
(e) noise from equipment used outdoors.
3) The standard does not extend to noise from public transportation, including
highways, railways, and noise from commercial and private aircraft, including
helicopters, both in flight and operating on the ground.
e. Control of emissions to air from stationary sources
1) The objective of this standard is to set out point source air quality Standards
for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for sustainable management of air quality
within the Kingdom.
2) This standard introduces emission limits for individual facilities and assists in
the protection of the Kingdom’s public health, occupational health and natural
ecosystems, including cropland, forest, desert and wetlands whilst allowing
economic and social development.
3) This standard shall obligate operators to apply effective process controls or
best available pollution abatement techniques to meet emission limit criteria.
4) This standard will establish individual facility monitoring program that provide
information to both operator and regulator and facilitate more effective
pollution control activities.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 9
5) These standards apply to any facility, site, or premises whose activities give
rise to air emissions from a stationary source.
6) The scope of this standard does not include emissions from residential
properties, natural events, or mobile pollutant sources.
f. Prevention of major accidents
1) This standard is aimed to prevent major accidents, such as the release of
toxic materials, the release of flammable materials, fires, explosions, major
structural failures, and those which involve dangerous substances.
2) Where accidents do occur, this standard sets out a framework and controls
for the mitigation of the impact on human health and the environment.
3) This standard applies to all facilities irrespective of size or location, that
produces, processes, uses, stores, or otherwise handles dangerous
substances in quantities equal to or in excess of those specified in the
Standard.
g. Storage and material reclamation facilities- Design & Operation
1) The Standard for Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities Design and
Operation has effect for purposes connected with the regulation of waste and
hazardous waste, and for the purposes of the:
(a) design of new Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities which accept
waste of all types from across the KSA whether a material or substance
is inert, non-hazardous or a hazardous waste.
(b) operation of Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities to ensure that
the site is managed in a manner which will have least possible impact
upon the neighboring environment or human health; and accordingly the
Storage and Material Reclamation Facilities Design and Operation
Standard shall be recognized and used for those purposes.
2) The Standard guides those developing and operating Storage and Material
Reclamation Facilities to:
(a) understand the best practice requirements with respect to Storage and
Material Reclamation Facility (MRF) design and operation
(b) develop new storage and MRF sites with due regard to international best
practice; and
(c) understand the necessary site development requirements for storage
and MRF sites dealing with different waste types.
3) The Standard is intended for use as a default position for Storage and MRF
design and operation. The Standard applies to all new Storage and MRFs
pre-development. However, existing storage and MRF operators must, as far
as practicable, implement the relevant best practice measures contained
within this Standard.
4) This Standard sets out the design parameters and operational requirements
for Storage and MRFs in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
5) This Standard does not apply to the:
(a) management of Radioactive waste
(b) management of liquid wastes; or

Rev. 1 3.5 - 10
(c) management of sludges, including sewage sludges and sludges from

dredging operations.
6) This Standard does not provide detailed information or guidance on the
operation of different facilities, but instead concentrates on setting out the
Standards for the design and operation of generic Material Reclamation
Facilities (MRFs) and Treatment, Storage, and Disposal (TSD) Facilities
h. Thermal treatment and incineration – Design & Operation
1) The Standard applies to all new incineration plant pre-development. However,
existing incineration plant operators must, as far as practicable, implement the
relevant best practice measures contained within this Standard.
through to site closure for non-mobile thermal treatment and incineration
processes in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
3) This Standard applies to mass burn incineration techniques, waste to energy
facilities and the advanced thermal treatment processes of pyrolysis and
gasification.
i. Waste acceptance criteria
1) This standard applies to waste Generators and TSD facility operators.
2) This standard extends to all waste types including hazardous, non-hazardous,
and inert waste.
3) This standard provides Waste Acceptance Criteria (WAC) and Waste
Acceptance Procedures (WAP).
4) Where all the limit values for WAC are met, the waste will be acceptable for
final disposal at a hazardous waste landfill site. Where the limit values are not
met, then the waste must be treated to bring it within the required acceptance
limits, or an alternative disposal route must be sought.
5) A waste material identified as a hazardous waste in the Waste Classification
Standard will not necessarily be accepted into a hazardous waste landfill.
Waste classification and WAC are not linked. The Waste Classification
Standard classifies the waste, whereas the WAC Standard defines what class
of landfill a waste is eligible for.
6) This standard outlines a nationally consistent approach for KSA for the
disposal of waste to landfill. It provides WAC for three classes of landfills
(hazardous, non-hazardous, and inert), including concentration limits covering
a greater range of contaminants than those specified in the Waste
Classification Standard.
7) Under this standard, hazardous wastes will only be accepted at hazardous
waste landfills after it has been treated or stabilized to minimize hazards and
then disposed of at landfills that offer an appropriately high standard of
environmental protection.
8) There are three kinds of WAC including leaching limit values, limit values for
other parameters and a list of inert wastes which may be accepted without
testing.
9) There are a number of special provisions relating to stable, non-reactive
hazardous wastes, asbestos and gypsum wastes, and underground storage.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 11
j. Waste Classification
1) These Standards guide those generating, storing and handling wastes in
assessing their classification in terms of:
(a) The origin of the waste: whether waste is industrial, commercial or
municipal.
(b) The physical form of the waste: whether waste is a liquid or a solid
(gaseous waste is outside the scope of this standard).
(c) The character of the waste: whether waste is hazardous, non-hazardous,
or inert.
(d) The type of hazardous waste: whether it is a listed hazardous waste,
contains a hazardous constituent or displays a hazardous property.
2) The assessment of waste will enable Waste Handlers to determine the overall
manageability of the waste to ascertain the level of control necessary and
allow for responsible practice to meet any associated environmental
obligations.
3) This Standard defines and classifies waste to be managed in KSA with
respect to the form of the waste material and its associated impact on human
health or the environment.
4) This Standard is relevant to all waste types currently produced within KSA as
well as any other waste streams which may be produced throughout the
period of operation of this Standard.
5) This standard does not apply to the following waste streams:
(a) Discharges of industrial and municipal wastewater to central treatment
works or directly to the environment – The Industrial and Municipal
Wastewater Discharges and Ambient Water Quality Standards control
and manage wastewaters discharges.
(b) Radioactive waste, other than that produced during healthcare treatment
procedures.
k. Drinking water quality
1) With the exception of bottled or packaged water, the standards shall apply to
any water intended for drinking irrespective of the source (municipal supplies,
rainwater tanks, boreholes etc.) or where it is consumed (including the home,
restaurants, camping areas, shops).
2) These standards do not address water used for specialized purposes such as
renal dialysis and some industrial purposes where water of a higher quality
may be required.
3) The quality of drinking water shall be regulated up to the point at which the
distribution system enters the boundary of a private property. The quality of
water should however be measured from the point of use (e.g. a kitchen tap).
4) Where more than one agency manages the water supply. Each individual
agency will be responsible for the quality of drinking water within and up to the
boundary of its network and the quality of drinking waters arising from its
actions.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 12
5) These standards do not apply to private water supplies on the condition that
the volume of that supply does not exceed 10m3 per day on an annual
average.
l. Biological Treatment – Design & Operation
1) This Standard applies to all new biological treatment pre-development.
for biological treatment facilities in the KSA.
3) This Standard applies to commercial and/or publicly operated biological
treatment facilities. The provisions of this Standard are therefore not
applicable to domestic biological processes such as home composting
initiatives operated by householders at their place of residence.
m. Waste regulatory control and compliance
1) This standard applies to all Generators, Transporters and TSD Facility
operators in KSA.
2) This standard extends to all waste types including hazardous, non-hazardous,
and inert waste.
n. Waste handling and storage
1) This standard guides those handling and storing waste in good operating
practices, in managing effective waste storage and segregation systems, and
in detecting, containing and cleaning up any leaks that may occur.
2) This standard applies to Waste Handlers who handle and store waste from
the point of generation through to the storage of waste where it is held at a
facility prior to its onward transfer for recycling, treatment, or disposal. This
Standard must therefore be read in conjunction with the specific requirements
for dedicated storage facilities which are detailed further in the Waste Storage
and Material Recycling Facilities – Design and Operation Standard.
3) The handling and storage of waste at recycling, treatment and disposal
facilities are covered in the design and operation waste standards for these
facilities that accompany this series of Waste Standards.
4) This Standard does not detail the requirements of protecting employees from
the effects of handling hazardous wastes in the workplace such as risk
assessments, monitoring, PPE, or ventilation systems. These requirements
must be complied with separately as per health and safety related Standards.
o. Waste training and assessment of technical competence of operators
1) This standard is to be applied by PME or other PME approved body with
responsibility for assessing the technical competence of designated facility
operators.
2) The standard extends to all TSD Facilities required to be licensed under the
Waste Regulatory Control and Compliance Standard
3) This standard does not apply to industrial wastewater facilities, sewerage
systems and waterworks treating liquid wastes, or to facilities used solely for
the disposal of liquid municipal or industrial wastes.
p. Waste transportation

Rev. 1 3.5 - 13
1) This Standard utilizes the waste classification and definitions as stated in the
provisions of the Waste Classification Standard and does not extend to
provisions covering radioactive waste or explosives.
2) For the purposes of this Standard, three main modes of transport have been
addressed, namely, transport by road, rail and sea.
3) This Standard does not apply to the on-site transportation of waste within a
facility’s property boundary.
4) This Standard incorporates the international requirements for dangerous
goods and substances in relation to the transportation of hazardous waste to
ensure consistency is achieved.
5) Requirements relating to the packaging, labelling, loading, stowage,
placarding and transportation of hazardous or dangerous substances apply as
much to hazardous wastes as they do to pure chemical substances. There
are also certain provisions that apply to hazardous wastes which take account
of problems encountered in dealing with dangerous goods for transportation.
6) Waste classifications detailed in this Standard are specifically for the
purposes of labelling and packaging for transportation and, as such, are
distinct from the classification of waste as detailed in the Waste Classification
Standard.
7) This Standard makes provision for vehicle specifications, which have been
determined for minimum requirements to ensure the safety of hazardous
waste transport operation.
8) Transboundary waste movement provisions in this Standard are in line with
multilateral environmental requirements to establish a framework of control, in
relation to international recognized practice, whereby waste is disposed of in
a controlled manner. The provisions aim to prevent the unauthorized disposal
of international waste shipments and the unregulated recovery of waste
shipments, without hindering the legitimate trade in waste
q. Landfill – Design & Operation
through to site closure and aftercare for solid waste landfill in the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
2) This Standard does not apply to the:
(a) management of radioactive waste
(b) management of liquid wastes
(c) spreading of sludges, including sewage sludges and sludges from
dredging operations for the purposes of fertilization or land improvement;
or
(d) remediation of existing landfill sites.
r. Industrial and municipal wastewater discharges
1) Discharges shall include any liquid effluents or process water which is not
classified as clean unpolluted surface runoff including storm water. This may
include but is not restricted to:
(a) waste chemicals, including oils

Rev. 1 3.5 - 14
(b) liquid process wastes

(c) detergents
(d) condensate water
(e) cooling water
(f) biodegradable substances
(g) wash water
(h) ballast water
(i) liquid wastes or wash waters, domestic sewage, wastewater discharged
using sinks, basins, or toilets
(j) contaminated mine or quarry water
(k) all sanitary wastewaters; and
(l) treated effluents from CTW (municipal and industrial),
(m) Desalination reject water.
2) These standards shall apply to any installation, site or premises that produce
discharges as defined in the Standard. These standards control discharges
into Central Treatment Works (CTW), unplanned emergency events
(overflows) and discharges to coastal waters, surface water, land, and wadis.
3) It is the responsibility of the CTW to ensure that the final discharge from their
facility does not exceed any of the prescribed concentrations and values in
Appendix B of the Standard when processing domestic, commercial, and / or
industrial wastewater.
4) Sanitary Wastewater discharges from offshore facilities shall be governed by
the relevant regional marine discharge requirements
s. Best practicable environmental option (BPEO) for waste disposal
1) For each waste stream, as classified in the Waste Classification Standard,
there are a variety of alternative approaches available to ascertain the BPEO
for waste disposal.
2) The BPEO for a waste stream may vary determined by local circumstances
affecting the practicality, cost, and environmental and social benefits that take
into account national objectives for sustainable waste management. The
choice is therefore complex and considers many different factors when
recommending the preferred BPEO
t. Ambient air quality
1) This standard relates specifically to the ambient air quality.
2) This standard prescribes limit values for ambient air quality parameters.
3) This standard establishes the responsibilities of the Competent Agency with
regards to managing ambient air quality in the Kingdom.
u. Ambient water quality
1) These Standards refer to the safety, aesthetic, physical and chemical aspects
of ambient waters for the protection of human uses and the environment
including ecology and recreation.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 15
2) these standards apply to all coastal and underground waters and include any
surface freshwater that may be present permanently or temporarily.
C. Archeological / Cultural Resource Clearances
1. Pre-Project Planning
a. To avoid unnecessary interruptions during construction, and to prevent damage to
existing historic, archeological, and cultural resource sites, applicants are
encouraged to plan accordingly. Appropriate identification of cultural resources shall
be conducted at the planning phase of a project. The Saudi Commission for
Tourism and Antiquities (SCTA) is the government agency responsible for the
inventory and protection of the archeological treasures and rare historic sites of
ancient civilizations across the Kingdom. The SCTA is the national authority
responsible for assessing how planning and development projects could impact the
archaeological and cultural resources. The applicant shall provide information to the
RCJ to allow them to assess potential impacts. The RCJ will notify the SCTA, as
necessary.
b. Applicants shall review historical information sources, consult with the RCJ, seek
information from knowledgeable parties, and conduct additional studies as
necessary or requested. Sites include not only visible architecturally significant
sites, but also early human habitation sites, monuments, culture, and underwater
and other non-visible sites.
2. Further Investigations
a. Depending on the results of the pre-project planning background review, the RCJ
may request further studies or may ask the applicant to seek ways to avoid,
minimize or mitigate the adverse impacts of the project to the archeological and/or
cultural resource site(s). Further conditions for construction may be required by the
RCJ.
3. Notification of Finding
a. If a historic site or object is encountered during construction or operation of a facility,
intrusive or destructive work in the area shall stop immediately and the RCJ and the
SCTA shall be notified immediately to address the finding.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 16
SUBSECTION 3.5.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
3.5.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Hazardous Materials Management

1. Description
a. This Subsection pertains to the management of materials defined as hazardous that
are used in, but are not limited to, manufacturing and industrial processes.
Hazardous wastes, a subset of hazardous materials, are described in this
Subsection 3.5.5.B below.
b. A Hazardous material is defined as any material in a quantity or concentration that, if
improperly managed, can pose a hazard to public health or the environment. It can
occur in several forms such as solid, semi-solid, sludge, liquid, or gas.
1) Hazardous materials are classified in RCER Volume I Section 4, Hazardous
Materials Management. Hazardous materials types include explosives,
gases, flammable liquids and solids, oxidizing agents, organic peroxides,
poisons, biohazards, radioactive and corrosive substances, and hazardous
wastes.
c. In all situations, the hazardous materials need to be safely characterized and
identified, properly managed, isolated, classified, and transported to an appropriate
facility for treatment, storage, and disposal.
1) Hazardous Material Classification relates to the following characteristics
which are described in the referenced documents:
(a) Ignitability
(b) Corrosivity
(c) Reactivity
(d) Toxicity
(e) Radioactivity
(f) Biohazard Ranking
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Materials
a. All portions of the life cycle of hazardous materials require safe handling, proper
procedures, documentation, and coordination/approvals from the RCJ.
b. The general life cycle of hazardous materials includes:
1) Generation (or discovery of existing hazardous material)
2) Classification of level of hazard
3) Isolation, containerization, and protection
4) Transportation to approved facility
5) Application at approved facility
6) Treatment at approved facility
7) Disposal (if hazardous material cannot be reused or recycled)
3. Hazardous Materials Inventory

Rev. 1 3.5 - 17
a. The operator of a facility shall maintain current SDSs on all containers of hazardous
materials.
b. The operator of a facility shall also maintain an active and complete inventory list,
(electronic and paper), of all stored hazardous materials in accordance with RCER,
Volume 1 Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Materials
a. Immediately upon generation or discovery of hazardous materials, they shall be
isolated and contained to prevent impact to the environment or harm to humans or
wildlife.
5. Transportation of Hazardous Materials
a. All hazardous materials that are moved from one location to another must be carried
in a safe manner by a licensed transporter with proper documentation. All hazardous
materials shall adhere to the following Transportation Standards.
1) The transportation requirements include, but are not limited to proper
containerization, truck or rail car placard marking, notifications to the RCJ,
Hazardous Material Manifests, and other shipping documentation.
2) The requirements for transportation of hazardous materials are described in
RCER Volume I Section 4.4, Hazardous Material Transportation Regulations.
For Hazardous Material Manifest requirements, refer to US 49 CFR Part 172
Subpart C.
3) In the event of an accident involving the transportation of hazardous
materials, the facility shall immediately notify the RCJ Industrial Security and
Safety Department (ISSD) and the Environmental Protection and Control
Department (EPCD) in the event of an accident, spill or discharge involving
hazardous materials within the Industrial City.
6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal
a. Industrial and hazardous materials that are disposed of illegally shall be retrieved by
the generator. Applicable fines and related costs shall be paid by the generators in
accordance with RCER.
b. The technology used to treat hazardous materials shall be proposed in writing by the
material generator for consideration by the RCJ. The generator shall review current
BAT and propose a method in a Hazardous Material Treatment Plan (HMTP). The
RCJ has the right to request feasibility reports, laboratory analyses, and the
proposed treatment methods prior to approval of the treatment. If approved,
progress reports and analytical testing are required to review the progress of the
treatment until deemed complete by the RCJ. Upon completion, the RCJ has the
right to require the residual hazardous material to be placed in an approved landfill.
The success level of the treatment shall determine if the hazardous material is
placed in a Class I or Class II landfill (or other appropriate facilities) as defined by
the RCER Volume I Section 5, Waste Management.
c. The Hazardous Material generator may also request permission for placement in an
approved class I landfill if no treatment method exists for the material. The
Generator shall prepare a Hazardous Material Disposal Plan (HMDP) for review by
the RCJ. The HMDP shall review containment requirements, compatibility with
landfill liners and any potential long-term issues. The RCJ shall review the report
and reserves the right to require stricter methods of disposal based on analytical
testing results.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 18
7. Building and Construction Hazardous Materials

a. Prior to any demolition of, or modifications to, existing facilities, surveys (including
sampling and analysis) for existence of hazardous materials such as ACM, lead
paint, mercury, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) shall be completed by
qualified personnel and documented as part of the project design. Design and
execution of any required abatement work shall be completed by qualified
environmental professionals and licensed contractors.
B. Hazardous Waste Management
1. Description
a. A Hazardous waste is defined in RCER Volume I, Section 5, Waste Management.
1) The definition of Hazardous Waste is given in RCER Volume I, Section 5 as
any solid, semi-solid, liquid, or contained gaseous waste, or combination of
such wastes, which may because of its quantity, concentration, physical or
chemical characteristics pose a hazard or potential hazard to human health or
the environment when improperly treated, stored, transported, disposed of or
otherwise managed.
2) Hazardous wastes are broken into four categories:
(g) Listed Wastes: These wastes have been identified by agencies such as
the US EPA as being hazardous. See USEPA Regulations 40 CFR
261.31-33.
(h) Characteristic Wastes: These wastes do not meet the above listed
thresholds but exhibit ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity and/or toxicity.
(i) Universal Wastes: These wastes include mercury containing equipment
(fluorescent bulbs and thermostats), batteries and pesticides.
(j) Mixed Wastes: These wastes include both radioactive and hazardous
waste components.
3) Refer to RCER Volume I Section 5.1, Waste Classification for four types of
waste including: Hazardous, Non-Hazardous Industrial Waste, Municipal
Waste and Inert. Additionally, refer to USEPA Regulations that identify solid
wastes and their specific definitions as specified in the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA): US 40 CFR Part 261 Subpart C.
b. In all situations, hazardous wastes need to be safely characterized and identified,
properly managed, isolated, classified, and transported to an appropriate facility for
treatment, storage, and disposal.
2. Life Cycle of Hazardous Wastes
a. All portions of the life cycle of hazardous wastes require safe handling, proper
procedures, documentation, and coordination/approvals from the RCJ.
b. The general life cycle of hazardous waste includes:
1) Generation (or discovery of existing hazardous waste)
2) Classification of level of hazard
3) Isolation, containerization, and protection
4) Transportation to approved facility

Rev. 1 3.5 - 19
5) Treatment at approved facility (within 180 days of generation)

6) Disposal
3. Hazardous Waste Inventory
a. The operator of a facility shall maintain current SDSs on all containers of hazardous
waste.
b. The operator of a facility shall also maintain an active and complete inventory list,
(electronic and paper), of all stored hazardous waste in accordance with RCER,
Volume 1 Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
4. Temporary Storage and Confinement of Hazardous Waste
a. Immediately upon generation or discovery of hazardous waste, they shall be isolated
and contained to prevent impact to the environment or harm to humans or wildlife.
There are also specific time limit requirements (180 days maximum) that are
described in the RCER, Volume 1, Section 5, relating to completion of the handling,
transport, and disposal process for hazardous wastes.
5. Transportation of Hazardous Waste
a. All hazardous wastes that are moved from one location to another must be carried in
a safe manner by a licensed transporter with proper documentation. All hazardous
wastes shall adhere to the following Transportation Standards, (for example, all
hazardous waste must have a Hazardous Waste Manifest for approved
transportation). See RCER, Volume 1, Section 5.
1) The transportation requirements include, but are not limited to proper
containerization, truck or rail car placard marking, notifications to the RCJ,
Hazardous Waste Manifests, and other shipping documentation.
2) The requirements for transportation of hazardous wastes are described in
RCER Volume I, Section 5.2, Waste Manifest Regulations and 5.3, Waste
Transportation Regulations. For Hazardous Waste Manifest requirements,
refer to US 49 CFR Part 172 Subpart C.
3) In the event of an accident involving the transportation of hazardous wastes,
the facility shall immediately notify RCJ Industrial Security and Safety
Department (ISSD) and the Environmental Protection and Control Department
(EPCD) in the event of an accident, spill or discharge involving hazardous
wastes within the Industrial City.
6. Treatment, Storage and Disposal
a. Treatment at an approved facility within 180 days of generation is the primary
method of handling hazardous wastes.
1) Hazardous wastes that are disposed of illegally shall be retrieved by the
generator. Applicable fines and related costs shall be paid by the generators
in accordance with RCER.
b. The technology used to treat the hazardous wastes shall be proposed in writing by
the material generator for consideration by the RCJ. The generator shall review
current BAT and propose a method in a Hazardous Waste Treatment Plan (HWTP).
The RCJ has the right to request feasibility reports, laboratory analyses, and the
proposed treatment methods prior to approval of the treatment. If approved,
progress reports and analytical testing are required to review the progress of the
treatment until deemed complete by the RCJ. Upon completion, the RCJ has the

Rev. 1 3.5 - 20
right to require the residual hazardous waste to be placed in an approved landfill.

The success level of the treatment shall determine if the hazardous waste is placed
in a Class I or Class II landfill (or other appropriate facilities) as defined by the RCER
Volume I Section 5, Waste Management.
c. The Hazardous Waste generator may also request permission for placement in an
approved class I landfill if no treatment method exists for the material. The
Generator shall prepare a Hazardous Waste Disposal Plan (HWDP) for review by
the RCJ. The HWDP shall review containment requirements, compatibility with
landfill liners and any potential long-term issues. The RCJ shall review the report
and reserves the right to require stricter methods of disposal based on analytical
testing results.
d. The disposal regulations for Industrial & Hazardous Waste Treatment are located in
RCER Volume I Section 5.4. Disposal regulations for Non-Hazardous Industrial
Waste are located in Volume 1, Section 5.6.
e.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 21
SUBSECTION 3.5.5 POLLUTION PREVENTION
3.5.5 POLLUTION PREVENTION
A. General
1. Basic Understanding
a. Pollution prevention (PP) is concerned with avoiding the creation of pollution and
waste, rather than trying to clean it up or manage it after the fact.
b. Pollution prevention is essential on all projects and it is beneficial to all aspects of
the environment. Designers are required to incorporate PP into all project designs.
1) Some examples of the benefits of PP are:
(a) Minimizes or avoids the creation of pollutants
(b) Accelerates the reduction and/or elimination of pollutants
(c) Minimizes health risks; and
(d) Avoids costly future cleanup and disposal.
2. Design
a. Consider the following topics in the following paragraphs for pollution prevention
during concept design, process development, and project development.
B. Life Cycle Assessments (LCA)
1. LCA Implementation
a. These assessments are created to quantify inputs, internal processes, and outputs
for a facility and are useful for industrial applications. Having accurate knowledge of
an industrial facility allows processes to be targeted for PP measures. Used
properly, an LCA with application of PP technologies and techniques during the
planning phase of a project has the potential to make the EPP less complicated.
b. Many questions in the ESQ pertain to aspects of an LCA, making it beneficial to
perform a thorough LCA before filling out an ESQ to start the EPP.
c. More detailed information on LCAs and implementation thereof can be found in the
USEPA National Risk Management Research Laboratory’s Life Cycle Assessment:
Principles and Practice.
C. Material Reduction, Substitution, and Elimination
1. Reduction
a. The first step in PP is to reduce the material inputs to the process based on LCA
findings. Waste-generating processes within the facility shall be targeted for process
modifications that reduce input materials and subsequently reduce waste
generation.
2. Substitution
a. After material input reduction, the next step is to substitute hazardous materials with
less- or non-hazardous materials that have less stringent regulations. There are
many naturally derived substitutes that have the potential to perform industrial
functions as well as chemically derived materials.
b. Example: Dyeing products with chemically created dye produces wastewater that
may need to be pre-treated before discharge to wastewater treatment plants.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 22
Chemical dye may potentially be replaced with a natural dye that may require little to
no pre-treatment onsite before discharge.
3. Elimination
a. A step beyond reduction and substitution can be eliminating materials from a
process entirely. Thorough analysis of industrial processes can sometimes yield
information suggesting that some material inputs are unnecessary for a specific
process.
D. Material Reuse
a. Reusing materials might reduce required raw material stock and waste generation. If
the reused material still meets Standards, Specifications and Regulations, this
option shall be considered when planning, designing and operating a facility.
E. Material Recycling
1. Recycling
a. Recycling occurs when the use of a process-specific material is complete, and it is
reformed to perform the same or equivalent function. The most desirable materials
and processes are ones where a material and application can be recycled
indefinitely without loss of quality.
b. Example: Used shoe rubber reformed to create shoe rubber for new shoes.
2. Upcycling
a. Upcycling occurs when a material at the end of its process-applicable life is
reformed to serve a purpose that is considered of higher quality than its prior use.
b. Example: Used shoe rubber reformed to serve as a material stock for industrial
product production.
3. Downcycling
a. Downcycling occurs when a material at the end of its process-applicable life is
reformed to serve a purpose that is considered lower quality than its prior use.
b. Example: Used shoe rubber reformed to create an athletic surface for walking or
running.
4. Objectives
a. An industrial facility pursuing recycling objectives shall strive for true recycling or
upcycling. In this way material inputs and waste generation are minimized with the
highest objective of the facility being to operate as a closed loop system.
F. Energy Use
1. Wasted Energy
a. Industrial processes use a large amount of energy. Identifying processes requiring
significant energy and addressing inefficiencies decreases energy production at
electricity generation facilities and thus decreases the pollution that the industrial
plant is indirectly creating. If electrical generation is onsite, fuel inputs and onsite
point source pollution can be reduced.
b. Areas to be considered to reduce energy demand:
1) Lighting

Rev. 1 3.5 - 23
2) Motors
3) Utility Services (compressed air, cooling water, etc.)
4) HVAC
5) Refrigeration
6) Insulation
c. The American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy (ACEEE) provides
publications, workshops, and further information on energy-efficient industries.
G. End-of-Pipe Controls
1. Air Discharges
a. Refer to Subsection 5.9.2, Air Environment for design guidance on air discharge
pollution controls for reduction of airborne contaminants to meet applicable
Standards and Regulations.
b. Refer to RCER Volume I Section 2, Air Environment.
2. Water Discharges
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.2, Sanitary Sewer System for design guidance on
wastewater treatment systems to reduce discharge contaminants to meet applicable
Standards and Regulations.
b. Refer to RCER Volume I Section 3, Water Environment.
3. Solid Waste
a. Refer to Subsection 5.9.4, Solid Waste Management and Recycling for design
guidance on post-process solutions for solid waste.
b. Refer to RCER Volume I Section 5, Solid Waste Management.
H. Decommissioning, Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal
a. Site Cleanup and Remediation
b. Refer to Subsection 3.5.7, Site Cleanup and Remediation, and Subsection 4.5.6.I.5,
Decommissioning, for guidance
c. Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal
d. Refer to Subsection 4.4.4, Deconstruction, Demolition and Removal, for guidance.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 24
SUBSECTION 3.5.6 PETROLEUM AND CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE
3.5.6 PETROLEUM AND CHEMICAL BULK STORAGE
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The prevention of leaks and spills of petroleum products and hazardous materials is
important to the RCJ for the protection of public health and welfare and the
environment. The owners of facilities are responsible for design and construction of
proper facilities and for implementing procedures to prevent spills or leaks in
accordance with the RCJ requirements.
b. In general, the requirements include such provisions as secondary containment,
leak detection, corrosion protection and periodic testing. These requirements are
described in the RCER Volume I Section 4.3 Hazardous Materials Storage and
Handling Regulations, and Section 4.5 Underground Storage Tank Regulations.
B. Codes and Standards
1. Applicable Codes and Standards
a. The Codes, Standards and recommended practices of the following industry
organizations shall be referenced for applicable design guidance and criteria. There
might be others not specifically listed that may apply depending on the specific
facility and equipment. Recognized national and international Standards and
practices shall be adhered to.
1) American Petroleum Institute (API) 1220 L Street, NW, Washington, DC
20005-4070
2) Fiberglass Tank and Pipe Institute (FTPI) 11150 South Wilcrest Drive, Suite
101, Houston, TX 77099-4343
3) Petroleum Equipment Institute (PEI) P. O. Box 2380, Tulsa, OK 74101-2380
4) Steel Tank Institute/Steel Plate Fabricators Association (STI/SPFA) 944
Donata Court, Lake Zurich, IL 60047
5) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062-
2096
6) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
MA 02169-7471
7) NACE International (NACE) 1440 South Creek Drive, Houston, TX 77084-
4906
8)

Rev. 1 3.5 - 25
SUBSECTION 3.5.7 SITE CLEANUP AND REMEDIATION
3.5.7 SITE CLEANUP AND REMEDIATION
A. Contaminated Site Material Removal

1. Requirements
a. See RCER Section 4.3, Hazardous Material Storage and Handling Regulations,
Section 4.4, Hazardous Material Transportation Regulations, and Section 5, Waste
Management.
b. Contaminated site material removal requires approval of the RCJ. An application for
removal of the contaminated site material shall include the following information:
1) Waste name
2) Waste quantity
3) Date of waste material production
4) Physical and chemical properties
5) Source of generation
6) Proposed recycle option review
7) Treatment or disposal method
8) Proposed waste management facility
9) Name of RCJ authorized waste transporter
c. The RCJ will evaluate the application and may request further information.
d. If the RCJ grants approval, a manifest for the transportation of the waste materials
shall be issued.
e. The transportation, treatment and disposal shall meet the requirements of RCER
Volume I Sections 5.2, Waste Manifest Regulations, 5.3, Waste Transportation
Regulations, and 5.4, Industrial and Hazardous Waste Treatment and Disposal
Regulations, and Section 8, Reporting and Record Keeping.
B. Asbestos Cement (AC) Pipe and Material Removal
1. Applicable Codes and Standards
a. OSHA’s Asbestos Standard for Construction, US 29 CFR 1926.1101
b. Work Practices for Asbestos-Cement Pipe, American Water Works Association,
Denver, CO, 1995
2. General Guidelines
a. The Guidelines listed below shall be followed for work with AC pipe; however,
applicable Codes and Standards take precedent.
b. Supervisor Qualifications and related field experience are necessary to perform AC
pipe removal work.
c. Each worker shall undergo a medical examination before the start of, and at the end
of AC pipe removal work.
3. Safe Work Procedure Checklist

Rev. 1 3.5 - 26
a. The Supervisor shall generate, use, follow and document safe work procedures on a
checklist that addresses at a minimum the practices in this Subsection.
4. Required PPE
a. Required PPE must be provided to employees on the work site working with AC pipe
and meet requirements of the recommended practices.
5. Established Controlled Zone
a. A controlled zone shall be established for work involving AC pipe.
b. The controlled zone perimeter shall be a minimum of two meters from the leading
edge of any excavation for AC pipe.
c. The controlled zone perimeter shall be marked with cones or barricades and danger
tape shall connect them.
d. “Authorized Personnel Only” signs shall be set along the perimeter and ensure that
only properly outfitted authorized personnel enter the zone.
e. Any personnel or equipment leaving the controlled zone must be subjected to
decontamination.
6. Tools
a. No power tools are permitted for work on AC pipe, only approved hand tools (listed
below) are allowed. Water shall be constantly sprayed on the AC pipe while using
tools.
b. Snap Cutters
1) These operate by means of cutting wheels mounted in a chair wrapper
around the pipe barrel. Hydraulic pressure, applied by means of a remote,
pneumatically- or manually operated pump, squeezes the cutting wheel into
the pipe wall until the cut is made.
c. Roll Cutters
1) These cut the AC pipe as the cutting edge of the rollers are tightened down
and pressure is applied manually to the cutters as the cutter is rotated around
the pipe. The cutting wheels shall be wiped before use to remove material
that could bind to asbestos and washed after use to remove fibers attached to
the cutters.
2) Wash water must be properly contained and disposed.
d. Bristle Brush
1) Used to smooth the cutting surface.
e. Cold Chisel and Hammer for Coupling Removal
1) An attempt to remove intact sections of AC pipe that do not require coupling
removal shall be made. If a coupling must be removed, the top shall be
gradually split lengthwise using a chisel and hammer. After the top has been
split, the bottom shall be split with a lever tool such as a crowbar or similar
tool. Couplings must be appropriately stored immediately upon extraction.
7. Wet Methods

Rev. 1 3.5 - 27
a. Potable water shall be used to prevent the release of airborne asbestos fibers. A
spray type applicator shall be used to wet the pipe before work, during work, and
until pipe is properly stored to prevent release of fibers to the air.
8. Disposal and Decontamination Procedures
a. All tools shall be washed with water before and after use on AC pipe. After use,
equipment shall be cleaned while still in the controlled zone.
b. Removed AC pipe and debris shall be wetted, collected, and placed in asbestos
disposal bags.
c. Disposable coveralls and other non-washable PPE shall be placed in asbestos
disposal bags while in the controlled zone.
d. Proper bagging shall consist of placing AC pipe and debris in a yellow labeled
hazardous waste bag and sealing the top with duct tape. This bag shall be placed in
a clear bag to verify double bagging. The second bag shall also be sealed with duct
tape.
e. Asbestos Containing or Contaminated Material is classified as a hazardous waste
and shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable Regulations in RCER
Volume I Section 4 Hazardous Material Management and Section 5 Waste
Management.
C. Wastewater Disposal
a. Requirements
1) Prohibited discharge includes direct disposal of untreated or partially treated
wastewater to any location other than a wastewater treatment facility
(including Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facilities and Sanitary
Wastewater Treatment Facilities).
2) Sanitary wastewater shall be properly treated at an approved operational
wastewater treatment plant via methods approved in RCER Volume I Section
3.8, Sanitary Wastewater Discharge Regulations.
3) Facilities that generate treated sewage effluent shall apply to the RCJ for
permission to transport and dispose of the effluent at an approved wastewater
treatment facility. RCER Volume I Section 3.8, Sanitary Wastewater
Discharge Regulations governs the handling and disposal of wastewater.

Rev. 1 3.5 - 28
SECTION 3.6 SAFETY STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.6.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
1. Reference ...................................................................................................................... 1
3.6.2 SAFETY IN DESIGN ..................................................................................................... 3
A. Safety in Design ............................................................................................................ 3
B. Duties of a Designer for Safety...................................................................................... 4

Rev. 1 3.6 - i
3.6.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Safety in design is a process that encourages designers to "design out" health and
safety risks during design development. The concept supports the view that along with
quality, program, and cost; safety is determined during the design stage.
2. Applicability
a. These general safety Standards are intended to provide the requirements and design
guidance for A/E and/or EPC Contractors for safety in design on all projects.
3. Definitions
a. "Employer" A person engaged in a business affecting commerce that has employees.
b. "Employee" An employee of an employer who is employed in a business of his
employer which affects commerce.
c. "Commerce" Trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, or communication among
multiple entities.
d. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
b. HSE: Health and Safety Executive
c. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional abbreviations.
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall design all projects to meet the accessibility
requirements as described in the Standards below.
6. Codes
a. The A/E and/or Contractor shall comply with Saudi Arabian laws, regulations and
applicable Codes and Standards. For information regarding the applicable Codes and
the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. For the design of project elements that are not prescribed directly in the Codes
identified in Section 3.1, the following is a list of Standards will apply:
1) OSHA
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for Commissioning Requirements.
9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and act on all design reports, plans and specifications, reference
Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. Reference

Rev. 1 3.6 - 1

Rev. 1 3.6 - 2
SUBSECTION 3.6.2 SAFETY IN DESIGN
3.6.2 SAFETY IN DESIGN
A. Safety in Design
1. Designing for safety is a requirement of all new work under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
Safety as it relates to design covers a wide range of components and topics including but
not limited to:
a. Asbestos
b. Brownfields
c. Carcinogens
d. Chemical Hazards and Toxic Substances
e. Computer Workstations
f. Confined Spaces
g. Crane, Derrick, and Hoist Safety
h. Demolition
i. Extremely Low Frequency Radiation
j. Electric Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution Industry
k. Emergency Preparedness and Response
l. Ergonomics
m. Fall Protection
n. Fiberglass
o. Fire Safety
p. Formaldehyde
q. Green Roofs
r. Hazardous Waste
s. Healthcare
t. Highway Work Zones and Signs, Signals, and Barricades
u. Indoor Air Quality
v. Laboratories
w. Lead
x. Mold
y. Occupational Heat Exposure
z. Occupational Noise Exposure
aa. Oil and Gas Well Drilling, Servicing and Storage Tanks
bb. Personal Protective Equipment
cc. Radiation
dd. Radon

Rev. 1 3.6 - 3
ee. Scaffolding
ff. Sealant & Waterproofing
gg. Waste Management and Recycling
hh. Welding, Cutting, and Brazing
2. Hierarchy of promoting safety:
a. Avoid risks.
b. Evaluate risks that cannot be avoided.
c. Combat risks at the source.
d. Adapt the work to the individual to reduce effect of the risks on health.
e. Adapt the technical process.
f. Replace the dangerous by the non- or less dangerous.
g. Develop a prevention policy to cover various factors relating to the work
environment.
h. Provide collective protective measures, then individual protective measures.
i. Provide appropriate instructions to employees.
B. Duties of a Designer for Safety
1. With regards to safety, Designers are responsible for:
a. Being competent and adequately resourced to address the health and safety issues
likely to be involved in the design.
b. Taking reasonable steps to make clients aware of their duty with regards to safety
before starting design.
c. Avoiding foreseeable risks to those involved in the construction and future use of the
structure, and in doing so, eliminate or reduce hazards and the likely risks
associated with those hazards.
d. Providing information to the RCJ in writing about remaining hazards or risks
associated with the design.
e. Coordination of design work with other Designers and stake holders to improve
management and control of hazards and risks. Regular reviews with the Design
Team are required.
f. Creating a design that may be constructed, maintained, used, and/or demolished
with reasonable safely.
g. Applying health and safety requirements of applicable Codes and Standards.
h. Providing permanent and safe means of access without fall arrest/restraint
equipment to support regularly planned maintenance activities unless not possible
for a documented reason. This includes avoiding access by means of removing
ceiling tiles.
2. With regards to safety, Designers are NOT responsible for:
a. Considering, addressing, or providing information on hazards or risks that cannot be
foreseen.

Rev. 1 3.6 - 4
b. Creating a “zero risk” design.

c. Exercising any health and safety management function over Contractors or others.
3. Design hazards or risks must be weighed against other relevant design considerations
including cost, purpose, aesthetics, constructability, maintainability, environmental impact,
etc.
4. Where identified hazards or risks cannot be eliminated, they are to be reduced as much as
practical weighing other design considerations. Methods for achieving this reduction may
include reducing the likelihood of harm, the potential severity of harm, the number of people
exposed to harm, and/or the frequency or duration of exposure to harm.
5. The greater the degree of risk, the greater effort the Designer shall expend to eliminate or
reduce that risk.
6. If a design contains a specific or unusual hazard or risk that may not be apparent to a
reasonably trained or competent person, the Designer must provide written information
explaining the hazard or risk to the RCJ as part of the:
a. Design Basis Report (DBR). DBRs are described in detail in Section 4.3.6 and are
submitted in accordance with the Stage Submittal Schedule listed in Section 4.2.C.
b. Design documentation as notes on drawings and/or written information provided with
the design.
7. Principles of Prevention: This requires the Designer to first attempt to eliminate hazards
and then to reduce the remaining risks following the “E.R.I.C.” method:
a. E – Eliminate: If an identified hazard that is not a mandatory requirement or specific
obligation may be eliminated, it shall be eliminated so far as reasonably practical.
b. R – Reduce: Reduce remaining risks associated with the hazard so far as
reasonably practical.
c. I – Inform: Provide information on the risks.
d. C – Control: Typically, control is a responsibility that resides with the Contractor or
client in the field.

Rev. 1 3.6 - 5
CHAPTER 4
PROJECT SUBMISSION
STANDARDS AND
REQUIREMENTS


CHAPTER 4 PROJECT SUBMISSION STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 2
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 2
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 3
C. Using this Chapter ......................................................................................................... 3
1. Submission Requirements (Section 4.2) ....................................................................... 3
2. Design Phase Requirements (Section 4.3) ................................................................... 3
3. Field Investigations and Existing Conditions (Section 4.4) ........................................... 4
4. Construction Phase Requirements (Section 4.5) .......................................................... 4

Rev. 1 4.1 - i
4.1 STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining procedures, Standards, and requirements to be used for the Royal
Commission in Jubail (RCJ) Project Submissions prepared by
Architecture/Engineering (A/E) or Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Submission requirements in Section 4.2, Design Phase
requirements in Section 4.3, Survey and Geotechnical requirements in Section 4.4,
and Construction Phase requirements in Section 4.5.
2. Applicability
a. The Standards and guidelines outlined in Chapter 4 are to be used by A/E and/or EPC
Contractors on all project submissions under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
b. Chapter 4 is to be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor as a collection of
requirements that govern the design process, documentation, submission, and
review.
c. Exclusions or deviations from these requirements must be approved by the RCJ, in
writing, prior to executing any work not in alignment with this document.
3. Definitions
b. “Core Group” The RCJ Engineering Department multidiscipline team (Civil,
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Telecommunication, and Controls)
that provides expertise for a wide variety of tasks such as planning, design, document
review, construction support, etc.
c. “Chief” The RCJ Manager of each discipline Section in the Core Group, for example,
Chief Architect or Chief Mechanical.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for General Abbreviations
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Chapter and/or Jubail Management
Procedures referenced in this Chapter:
1) ACM: Area Construction Manager
2) AEM: Area Engineering Manager
3) APE: Area Project Engineer
4) BEDD: Basic Engineering Design Data
5) BOQ: Bill of Quantities (same as Schedule of Quantities, SOQ)
6) CAS: Contract Administration Supervisor
7) CCO: Contract Change Order
8) CG: Core Group
10) DCN: Design Change Notice

Rev. 1 4.1 - 1
11) FCD: Field Change Design

12) FCS: Facility Contract Supervisor
13) HCIS: High Commission of Industrial Security
14) ICD: Interface Control Document
15) ISD: Industrial Security Department
16) LAR: Land Allocation Request
17) MoC: Manager of Construction
18) MoE: Manager of Engineering
19) MTO: Material Take Off
20) NCS: National CAD Standard
21) PDMC: Project Document Management Center
22) PE: Project Engineer
23) PFE: Project Field Engineer
24) P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram
25) QA/QC: Quality Assurance / Quality Check
26) QMS: Quality Management System
27) RFE: Responsible Field Engineer
28) RFP: Request for Proposal
29) RPE/A: Resident Project Engineer/Architect
30) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
31) SDR: System Design Report
32) SOQ: Schedule of Quantities (same as Bill of Quantities, BOQ)
33) TQM: Technical Quality Manager
a. Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. Not Applicable
7. Standards
a. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as
appropriate.
8. Related Sections
a. Chapter 1 Introduction
b. Subsection 3.1.1 Building Codes
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and act on all project submissions, reference
Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.

Rev. 1 4.1 - 2
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Using this Chapter
1. Submission Requirements (Section 4.2)
a. Design submissions to the RCJ are expected to be developed and processed in an
organized and auditable manner. CAD drawing guidelines have been provided in
alignment with the National CAD Standards. RCJ-specific title blocks, paper sizes,
and guidelines on file composition have been provided, along with detailed guidance
by discipline.
b. Requirements have also been provided for non-drawing deliverables, such as
specifications, cost estimates, and calculations.
c. Requests for Proposals (RFPs) are also required to be completed by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor as part of the design submission. Detailed information has been
provided on the process.
d. The RCJ will review and comment on progress at each stage of the design process.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will be required to respond to these reviews as
outlined in this Chapter.
2. Design Phase Requirements (Section 4.3)
a. This Section further details required processes and documentation for the design
phase such as studies, reports, and analyses. Delivery of these items is governed by
Section 4.2 and the detailed breakdown contained within the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor Technical Contract.
b. Preliminary studies – such as environmental assessments and sustainability reports
– are a pre-cursor to conceptual design and must be documented in accordance with
this Chapter.
c. The Value Engineering process is defined and is to be included as needed on the
Project.
d. Design Basis Reports (DBR) are the product of preliminary studies and conceptual
analysis and form the basis for the design process and decisions. Though this
document is submitted early in the process, it is updated throughout to reflect
modifications. DBRs are project specific and customized per project.
e. Life Cycle Costs are to be evaluated to help make decisions that affect the Cost
Estimate and Value Engineering. The RCJ seeks a balance between efficient first
costs and effective life, operation, and serviceability of the final product.
f. Every design must consider the role of Risk Management and Emergency Planning
as a driver for decisions. Projects are to be designed as safe from numerous situations
and/or include provisions to provide safety.
g. Projects typically abut, adjoin, border, or overlap other RCJ projects or utilities
governed by other entities. These interfaces must be reviewed and managed using
the Interface Control Document (ICD) to track how such factors affect and are
accommodated by the design.
h. All design work must be Quality Checked. The RCJ requires documentation of these
reviews and reserves the right to conduct additional internal reviews.
i. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is also responsible for documenting the Project’s
Bidding and Procurement Requirements.

Rev. 1 4.1 - 3
j. The RCJ may require additional or special procedures not covered in this Chapter or
the GEM. The RCJ reserves the right to identify in writing additional items in the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor’s Technical Contract.
3. Field Investigations and Existing Conditions (Section 4.4)
a. This Section provides guidelines for the performance of field and office survey work
which shall apply to all survey work.
b. The general state of the practice on the scope and specific elements of typical
geotechnical investigation programs, analyses, and designs required for the
construction of facilities is presented as well as the latest methodologies in the
planning, execution, and interpretation of the various investigation methods, and the
development of appropriate soil and rock parameters for engineering applications.
c. Guidance for Project Submission Standards and Requirements related to
environmental investigations and studies are provided.
4. Construction Phase Requirements (Section 4.5)
a. The RCJ requires that the A/E and/or EPC Contractor that designs the Project be
involved in a review and interpretation capacity during construction.
b. During construction, the A/E will not interact with the Contractor but will interface with
the RCJ and provide interpretation, response to queries, and design modifications as
directed by the RCJ and described in this Subsection.

Rev. 1 4.1 - 4
SECTION 4.2 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2.0 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Stage Submissions ........................................................................................................ 1
4.2.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 6
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 6
4.2.2 DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 7
A. CAD Guidelines ............................................................................................................. 7
1. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 7
2. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 7
3. Drawing File Composition .............................................................................................. 7
4. Drawing Settings ........................................................................................................... 8
5. Reference Files, Support Files, and External References (XREFS) ............................. 8
6. Drafting Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 9
7. Drawing Sizes ................................................................................................................ 9
8. General Drawing Arrangement ..................................................................................... 11
9. Title Block ..................................................................................................................... 12
10. CAD Layer Standards ................................................................................................... 12
11. Drawing Conventions ................................................................................................... 15
12. Civil Engineering Drawing Requirements ..................................................................... 16
13. Landscape and Hardscape Drawing Requirements ..................................................... 23
14. Structural Engineering Drawing Requirements ............................................................ 24
15. Architectural Drawing Requirements ............................................................................ 27
16. Fixtures, Furnishings, and Equipment (FFE) Drawing Requirements .......................... 30

Rev. 1 4.2 - i
17. Mechanical Drawing Requirements .............................................................................. 30

18. Electrical Drawing Requirements ................................................................................. 34
19. Control Systems and Instrumentation Drawing Requirements .................................... 38
20. Telecommunications Drawing Requirements ............................................................... 41
21. Sample Schedules ........................................................................................................ 43
B. Submittal Organization ................................................................................................. 44
C. Sheet Numbering .......................................................................................................... 47
D. Typical Drafting Symbols .............................................................................................. 47
4.2.3 SPECIFICATION STANDARDS ................................................................................... 51
A. Standard Specifications ................................................................................................ 51
B. Operations and Maintenance Manual .......................................................................... 51
4.2.4 COST ESTIMATE STANDARDS ................................................................................. 52
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 52
B. Overhead ...................................................................................................................... 52
C. Escalation ..................................................................................................................... 52
D. Contingency .................................................................................................................. 52
E. Lifecycle ........................................................................................................................ 52
4.2.5 CALCULATIONS .......................................................................................................... 53
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 53
B. Content ......................................................................................................................... 53
C. Computer Aided Calculations ....................................................................................... 53
4.2.6 SCHEDULES OF QUANTITIES ................................................................................... 56
A. Schedule of Quantities and Prices ............................................................................... 56
B. Material Take Off .......................................................................................................... 56
4.2.7 RFP DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................... 57
A. A/E Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 57
4.2.8 REVIEW/APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES ....................................... 58
A. Submissions ................................................................................................................. 58
B. Reviews ........................................................................................................................ 58

Rev. 1 4.2 - ii
SUBSECTION 4.2.0 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
4.2.0 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining submission requirements to be used for the Royal Commission in Jubail
(RCJ) Project Submissions prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or
Engineer, Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Design Phase requirements (Section 4.3), Field
Investigations and Existing Conditions (Section 4.4), and Construction Phase
requirements (Section 4.5).
2. Applicability
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to Section 3.5 for environmental-related submission abbreviations
c. Refer to Section 4.1 for Chapter 4 abbreviations
Not Applicable
6. Codes
a. A Life Safety Analysis is required to be submitted as part of the design deliverables.
7. Standards
a. Standards Specific to Discipline – see References in Sections of GEM as appropriate.
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Sections related to Chapter 4
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and act on all project submissions, reference
Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Stage Submissions
1. All Projects under the Royal Commission’s jurisdiction will have required submission
stages. The information contained in this Section is to be an overview of those
submissions. Detailed submission requirements are designated within each A/E and/or
EPC Contractor’s Technical Contract.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 1
2. Submission requirements apply to all design disciplines under contract to perform the work
including but not limited to Civil, Landscape, Structure, Architecture, Interiors/FF&E,
Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Control/Instrumentation, and
Telecommunications.
3. Documents submitted at each stage will be reviewed by the RCJ. Comments will be
returned to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for reconciliation and inclusion into the next
submission stage. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must receive written direction to
proceed from the RCJ prior to commencing work on subsequent stages.
4. A Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC) Review must be completed at every stage.
Documentation that this check was completed must be submitted as part of the stage
submission. Refer to Subsection 4.3.11 for additional QA/QC information.
5. The stage submissions may occur at 10%, 30%, 60%, 90%, and 100% of completion,
which are generally defined by the RCJ as follows:
a. 10% Stage Submittal:
1) Quality hold point for design, pending Royal Commission Senior Management
Approval
2) This stage typically includes:
(a) Design Presentations
(b) Preliminary Design Basis Report
(c) Preliminary Life Safety Analysis
(d) Sustainability goals outlined including LEED checklist
(e) Preliminary layout drawings, elevations, and Sections
(f) Conceptual framing layout
(g) List of specifications to be included in final document
(h) Initial cost estimate
(i) Site condition and geotechnical report
(j) Preliminary interface points
(k) Preliminary code review
b. 30% Stage Submittal:
1) Quality hold point for design. A/E and/or EPC Contractor to close comments
from 10% stage and reach Code 2 status: Submittal/Design May Proceed
with Incorporation of Comments for Next Submittal.
(a) Completed Design Basis Reports
(b) Completed Permit Application Package (PAP)
(c) Updated Sustainability Report
(d) Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) scoping and initial work (as
needed)
(e) Refined layout drawings, elevations, Sections, and framing

Rev. 1 4.2 - 2
(f) Preliminary interior components of circulation, elevations, ceilings, fixtures

furniture and equipment (FFE), signage, and details
(g) Envelope development and details
(h) Preliminary structural, mechanical, electrical, telecommunications,
controls, plumbing, and fire protection plans, Sections, diagrams, details,
and calculations
(i) Preliminary schedules
(j) Preliminary project specifications
(k) Material Take Off (MTO)
(l) Preliminary documents for the Request for Proposal (RFP)
(m) Updated cost estimate
(n) Preliminary Interface Control Documents (ICDs)
(o) Final code review
(p) Color and Materials Boards, to indicate three proposed color/material
schemes for the building and major interior spaces.
c. Response to 30% RCJ Comments:
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor have 15 days from receipt of RCJ Comments
on the 30% submission to respond in writing to the comments. These
responses will be added to the same form given to the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor containing the RCJ Comments.
d. 60% Stage Submittal:
1) Mandatory Design Review Workshop
2) Intermediate stage review as determined by the RCJ
3) This stage is typically used for technical quality reviews as needed and design
revisions based on Value Engineering (VE) workshops and reports. Otherwise,
all previously submitted elements shall be 60% substantially complete by this
point.
4) Updated and expanded Color and Materials Boards, to indicate the selected
color/material scheme for the building and the major interior spaces.
e. 90% Stage Submittal:
1) Full detailed design. Quality hold point for A/E and/or EPC Contractor to close
all previous comments.
(a) Final and complete plans, Sections, elevations, details, diagrams,
schedules, and calculations for all disciplines
(b) Final project specifications
(c) Final RFP Documents
(d) Final cost estimate
(e) Final MTO

Rev. 1 4.2 - 3
(f) Coordination between design disciplines completed

(g) Environmental Permit to Construct (EPtC) obtained
(h) Evidence of third-party (interfacing utility) approvals
(i) Complete ICDs and interface integration into design
(j) Updated Sustainability Report. LEED checklist incorporated into the
Specifications.
f. 100% Stage Submittal:
1) Full and final compliance documents
2) This stage is typically used for the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to resubmit all
previously submitted documentation with all RCJ comments closed and
incorporated.
g. The submittal stages described above are generically shown for all disciplines in
TABLE 4.2.A as follows:
TABLE 4.2.A GENERIC SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
10% 30% (60%) 90% 100%
Design Presentations Final within 15 days of A/E or EPC Contractor’ s receipt of RCJ Comments.
QA/QC Review /
Include Include Include
A/E and/or EPC Contractor to respond in writing to all 30% RCJ
Documentation
Design Basis Reports (DBR) Prelim Final
Code Review Prelim Final
Permit Application Package Prelim Final
Sustainability Report Prelim Updated
Response to Value Engineering
60% Design Review Workshop
EIA (as needed) Prelim Refine Final

or Other Intermediate Review
Final Compliance Documents

Drawings Prelim Refine Final
Plan Layout Prelim Refine Final
Comments
Elevations Prelim Refine Final

Sections Prelim Refine Final
Framing Prelim Refine Final
Interior Prelim Final
Diagrams Prelim Final
Details Prelim Final
Envelope Prelim Final
FF&E Package Prelim Final
Calculations Prelim Final
Schedules Prelim Final
Specifications List Prelim Final
Material Take Off (MTO) Prelim Final
Cost Estimate Prelim Refine Final

Rev. 1 4.2 - 4
10% 30% (60%) 90% 100%

Request for Proposal (RFP)
Prelim Final
documents
Interface Control Documents
List Prelim Final
(ICD)
Coordination Final
Environmental Permit to
Prelim Final
Construct
Third Party Approvals Final
Site condition / Geotech
Final
report

Rev. 1 4.2 - 5
4.2.1 GENERAL
A. Introduction
1. This Section is intended to represent the general submission requirements for all projects
under the Royal Commission in Jubail jurisdiction.
2. A schedule of Contract Deliverables by submittal stage has been provided in Subsection
4.2.C which is intended to be used as a guide in concert with A/E and/or EPC Contractor
Technical Contracts.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 6
SUBSECTION 4.2.2 DRAWINGS
4.2.2 DRAWINGS
A. CAD Guidelines
1. Applicability
a. The intent of these CAD Guidelines is to assure that all Project Drawings are accurate,
have a uniform appearance, reflect high quality workmanship, avoid complications
due to differing drafting styles and CAD software, and to ensure delivery of consistent
digital Plans and other contractually required electronic data submittals.
b. CAD Managers at the A/E and/or EPC Contractor office need to follow these
guidelines to ensure that the firm’s output is of a consistent high quality, no matter
who within their organization produced a particular drawing, or when.
c. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall meet with the RCJ’s Construction Resident
Engineer/Field Engineer to discuss specific CAD requirements for the Project at the
initial negotiation meeting so that the RCJ may furnish the reference/existing drawings
that will benefit the design team.
d. Although these CAD Guidelines are primarily designed for use on computer-
generated drawings, the symbols and line types shall also be used on manually drawn
plans, if the need arises, to maintain consistency.
2. Definitions
a. “As-built drawings” Incorporate all revisions, field changes and as-built surveys that
occur during the construction phase of the work. Also refer to Jubail Program
Procedure No. 4403 - "As-Built" Drawings.
b. “Design drawings” Design Drawings are those drawings that are not ready for
construction use.
c. “Contract drawings” Contract Drawings are those drawings intended for construction.
d. “Engineering sketches” An engineering sketch is a drawing used to establish design
concepts and requirements and does not require the full approval and control
procedures of design drawings that are to be issued for fabrication or construction;
therefore, sketches shall never be used for fabrication or construction purposes.
Sketches shall be provided in standard drawing format, complete with title block and
sketch numbers assigned.
e. “Project drawings” Engineering Sketches, Design/Contract Drawings, and As-built
Drawings.
f. “Project name” The Project name implies the title of the project with “Arabic
Translation” provided by the RCJ. No other designation or definition shall be used.
g. “Shop drawings” The Drawings submitted by a Contractor, depicting the
construction/fabrication details of elements, and which are, upon approval, used for
the actual work on site.
3. Drawing File Composition
a. Prior to delivery to the Royal Commission in Jubail, CAD files containing multiple
drawing sheets shall be broken down into separate drawings containing single sheets.
Each CAD file shall contain only one drawing and one title block per file.
b. All drawings shall be purged of empty, unused, or non-essential drawing data prior to
submittal. This includes all unused layers, line types, blocks, fonts, and entities. CAD

Rev. 1 4.2 - 7
drawings shall not contain any frozen layers. All unused entities on frozen layers shall
be erased, and the empty layers purged.
c. CAD drawings shall not contain multiple overlaid lines or lines with multiple segments
unless the overlaid lines or adjacent line segments are assigned to different layers.
4. Drawing Settings
a. The typical settings in Table 4.2.A below will be used in all drawings. If files are not
received from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor in the following format, final close out of
the project and final payment will be delayed until the A/E or EPC Contractor has
made the modifications to the files.
TABLE 4.2.A: TYPICAL DRAWING SETTINGS

MENU Acad
VIEWRES 500
BLIPS Off
UCSICON Off
COORDINATES On
GRID Off
SNAP Off
COLOR By Layer
LINETYPE By Layer
Decimal <MILLIMETERS>
UNITS <270> Direction for angle 0.00 (12 o’clock)
<Y> Angles measured clockwise
5. Reference Files, Support Files, and External References (XREFS)

a. If xrefs are included in submitted CAD files complete documentation, the path
established in the original drawing must be provided. Xrefs shall not be “bound” to
drawings prior to delivery. Layers containing xrefs inserted as blocks shall conform to
these RCJ guidelines. If requested by the RCJ, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
provide a technician, on site, to de-bug any xref insertions that may occur.
b. Reference files may consist of prototype data files, standard borders, project logos,
standard border text, and background drawings. All disciplines and agencies related
to the Project shall use these files as provided, without modification to name or
contents. Only the person providing the master source of the Reference files shall
modify them.
c. Drawings created using non-standard fonts, line types and hatch patterns could result
in content discrepancies in the delivered drawing set. To ensure the integrity of the
drawing set, and minimize potential problems:
1) Use the appropriate metric AutoCAD specific support files:
(a) Linetypes file: acadiso.lin
(b) Hatch file: acadiso.pat
2) Only native fonts, line types and hatch patterns installed as standard features
during software installation shall be used.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 8
3) Custom fonts, line types and hatch patterns, including those provided by third
party software shall not be used.
d. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide all support files wherever non-standard
entities have been utilized in the drafting process, including any plug-ins or routines
to generate schedules, areas, etc.
6. Drafting Guidelines
a. Drafting shall demonstrate a consistency in line weights, colors, line types/styles, text,
and standard sheet sizes regardless of the CAD application used, or manual drafting.
To obtain consistency, it is necessary to create tables that define the relationships
between the CAD drawing in the display and the finished plot. This includes the
mapping of drawing elements to plot elements using the proper pen tables, color
tables, and character tables. In addition, there must be consistency in the size of the
printed areas for standard sheet sizes.
b. Project Drawings for all disciplines shall adhere to the following:
1) The United States National CAD Standard® (NCS) which is comprised of The
American Institute of Architect's (AIA) CAD Layer Guidelines, the Construction
Specification Institute's Uniform Drawing System (Modules 1-8), and the
National Institute of Building Sciences Plotting Guidelines.
2) Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO), Standards Nos. 16 and 17.
3) The International System of Units (SI).
c. In terms of drafting scale, all drawings and details shall be drawn to REAL WORLD
DIMENSIONS.
d. To ensure the integrity of the original drawing when viewing or printing, it's essential
that CAD entities are created following these Standards:
1) Entity colors shall be defined by layer, not by entity.
2) Blocks shall be defined (created) on layer 0 (zero).
3) All attributes shall be defined on layer 0 (zero).
e. Model and Paper Space Usage
1) Sheet border, title block, attribute block, consultant’s stamp, logos and all other
components of the Sheet File shall be located in paper space. All graphic
representations of the project or facility and all related notes, dimensions,
symbols, etc., shall be constructed in model space.
2) Place title blocks, attribute block, schedules and general notes at full-scale in
paper space, whenever possible.
3) Label scaled viewports with the appropriate scale in paper space.
4) Do not place or draw model-related blocks, tags and objects in paper space.
5) Draw all model space objects at full scale.
6) Scale objects using paper space viewports - zoom viewports to the appropriate
scale.
7. Drawing Sizes
a. The various paper sizes and their suggested typical use are provided for reference in
Table 4.2.B. Consultants shall however note that all plotted Project Drawings shall be

Rev. 1 4.2 - 9
limited to four ANSI standard paper sizes: A, B, D and E. A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall obtain the RCJ instructions regarding paper sizes to be used for the hard copy
submittals.
TABLE 4.2.B: SHEET SIZES
ANSI ISO Architectural
Size mm Size mm Size mm Typical Use

# # #
(inches) (inches) (inches)
A 216 x 279 A4 210 x 297 A 229 x 305 Project book, Supple-

(8.5 x 11) (8.3 x 11.7) (9 x 12) mental Drawings, Mock-
up Sheets.
B 279 x 432 A3 297 x 420 B 305 x 457 Reduced Drawings from
(11 x 17) (11.7 x 16.5) (12 x 18) ‘D’ Size and A1 originals.
Supplemental Drawings,
Mock-up Sheets.
C 432 x 559 A2 420 x 594 C 457 x 610 Not Allowed per RCJ
(17 x 22) (16.5 x 23.4) (18 x 24)
D 559 x 864 A1 594 x 841 D 610 x 914 Projects accommodating

(22 x 34) (23.4 x 33.1) (24 x 26) preferred plan scale.
E 864 x 1118 A0 841 x 1189 E 914 x 1219 Large projects
(34 x 44) (33.1 x 46.8) (36 x 48) accommodating preferred
scale. Mapping and GIS.
- - - - E1 762 x 1067 Alternate size for projects
(30 x 42) accommodating preferred
plan scale.
b. See Figure 4.2.A and Table 4.2.C for effective sheet size with metric scales. All
Design/Contract Drawings shall be "E" size unless otherwise directed by RCJ.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 10
FIGURE 4.2.A: EFFECTIVE SHEET SIZE
25
32
13 TYP. 3
25 B 160 SIDES
TITLE
BLOCK
25
TABLE 4.2.C: EFFECTIVE SHEET SIZES: (A X B)
Effective Drawing Space (In

Meters)
SCALE A B
1 : 50000 39355 44375
1 : 25000 19678 22188
1 : 5000 3935.5 4437.5
1 : 2000 1575 1775
1 : 1000 787.5 887.5
1 : 500 393.55 443.75
1 : 100 78.75 88.75
1:75 57.82 65.95
1 : 50 39.36 44.38
8. General Drawing Arrangement

a. All plan sheets must share the same configuration and location on the drawing sheet.
The RCJ will provide a base layout and 0,0 insertion point for plan drawings.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 11
9. Title Block
a. The RCJ shall provide a drawing title block in .dwg format. Do not explode and/or
modify the title block. Refer to Figure 4.2.B for a Typical Project Title Block.
b. All English lettering shall be vertical, capital Romans or Simplex.
c. The equivalent Arabic terms for the following spaces shown on the Typical Standard
Title Block per Figure 4.2.B shall also be provided:
1) Consultant Contract Number
2) Major Component or Element of Project
3) Particular Features and Type of Drawing
4) Program-Project-Facility Code
5) Contract Number
d. For the revisions attribute block, refer to Figure 4.2.B for the Typical Project Title
Block.
e. The initials of the name of the designer, drafter, checker QA/QC Manager shall be
shown on the Drawing. Refer to Figure 4.2.B.
f. The date shall be shown on all Drawings. The date shall be listed in the following
manner: JUL 2015. The month shall be abbreviated to three letters as follows:
JAN January
FEB February
MAR March
APR April
MAY May
JUN June
JUL July
AUG August
SEP September
OCT October
NOV November
DEC December
g. The Drawing Title shall be centered and shall include no more than 5 lines as follows:
1) Lines 1 and 2 shall show the basic Project component or element.
2) Lines 3, 4 and 5 shall be used to indicate in more detail particular features and
type of Drawing. For example, Plan and Profile Drawings shall show the limiting
crossroads and the limiting stations. Titles shall agree with the Drawing control
log.
3) See Figure 4.2.B for the Typical Project Title Block.
10. CAD Layer Standards
a. The RCJ requires the use of the AIA CAD Layer Guidelines, as described in this sub-
section. If the A/E or EPC Contractor does not use the AIA CAD Layer Guidelines, the

Rev. 1 4.2 - 12
RCJ needs a list of layer names and the use of each as part of the A/E or EPC
Contractor’s electronic package submittal.
b. If novel layers must be created for a specific use on a project, they will follow the AIA
CAD Layer Guidelines naming convention of Discipline Designators, Major Group,
Minor Group, and Status (Phase).

Rev. 1 4.2 - 13
FIGURE 4.2.B: TYPICAL TITLE BLOCK

Rev. 1 4.2 - 14
11. Drawing Conventions

a. The following drawing conventions are detailed in the United States National CAD
Standard® (NCS) per the Uniform Drawing System (UDS) and are to be applied
consistently across disciplines:
1) Drawing Set Organization
2) Sheet Organization
3) Schedules
4) Drafting Conventions
5) Terms and Abbreviations
6) Symbols

Rev. 1 4.2 - 15
7) Notations
8) Code Conventions (as it applies to identifying necessary regulatory information
to be shown on documents)
b. Notes, references, etc., that apply to entire disciplines or multiple sheets, details, or
subjects shall only be shown on a General or Main Drawing. There will be no repetition
of note descriptions from sheet to sheet. All drawings that use the same notes shall
include the following text: “FOR GENERAL NOTES AND REFERENCES, SEE
DRAWING NO. ______”
c. All Drawings that contain plan views shall also contain a key plan. The appropriate
area of the key plan shall be crosshatched.
d. Arrange sections and other views to show the work clearly in relation to column lines,
steel framing, and finish floor elevations.
e. Except where required by other considerations, section cut lines on plan views shall
be shown looking up or to the left. Full height or full-length sections shall be used
where practical. View-directions of developed elevations shall be clarified (North,
East, South, or West).
f. Sectional plans shall be cut looking down. Orientation of sections shall be consistent
with the reference view and the general plan orientation.
g. Standard NCS symbols and hatch patterns shall be used to identify materials,
components, etc., as needed.
h. General Drawings contain index, general notes, and symbols. Control Drawings are
overall plans of a design package indicating building location and orientation. General
and Control Drawings may be combined when Project size and volume of information
permits.
i. All drawings on a sheet shall be numbered sequentially left to right, top to bottom.
j. Blocks and Cells:
1) If blocks and cells are used, they are to be consistent throughout the project
without deviation.
2) Raster images are not acceptable. Any and all images are to vector based.
3) At a minimum, the following elements shall be blocks: symbols, doors, water
closets, windows, equipment, plumbing and bath fixtures, electrical devices,
hardware, mechanical equipment, furniture, all tags/marks, room numbers,
scales, and north arrows.
k. Scale:
1) Every drawing shall have the scale identified on the drawing. A graphic scale
is also to be provided.
2) Metric drawing scales in multiples of 1:2, 1:5, and 1:10 shall be used as
standard. Scales for particular types of drawings are outlined in the respective
discipline drawing requirements within this Section.
12. Civil Engineering Drawing Requirements
a. The Project Civil Engineering Drawings in the following categories shall conform to
the general procedures stated in this Section:
1) Site Work

Rev. 1 4.2 - 16
(a) General Civil Notes

(b) Topography
(c) Alignments; Roadway, Railway, and Runway
(1) Alignment Data
(2) Stationing
(d) Site Development
(1) Grading Plans
(2) Typical Cross Sections
(3) Typical Details
(4) Subdivision mapping
(e) Drainage
(1) Channels and Culverts
(2) Drainage Details
(3) Cross Sections
2) Bridges
(a) Approaches
(b) Bridge Plan and Elevation
(c) Foundation Plans
(d) Structural Layout
(e) Structural Details
b. The General Civil Notes sheet shall include notes, symbols, and abbreviations that
pertain in general to Civil Engineering.
c. Plan and Scale – The upper half of the sheet shall be a plan of scale 1:1000 or 1:500.
The lower half of the sheet to be used for the vertical profile as referenced in
Subsection 4.2.2.A.12.h ‘Profile Grid.’
d. Stationing
1) Stationing shall be indicated in relation to the scale as follows:
1:10000 Each 1000 M

1:5000 Each 500 M
1:1000 Each 100 M
2) The station shall be identified by a tick mark 6 mm long. The numerals shall be
5 mm high.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 17
STATIONING SAMPLE:
3) Station equalities shall be shown as a 3 mm open square. The equation shall

be shown on a line drawn perpendicular to the stationed line thus:
(a) RL 32+750 M BK
(b) RL 32+755 M AH
e. Roadways – Where perimeter roads, access roads, etc., are to be constructed, these
shall be shown by solid lines defining the edges of the proposed alignment. The
centerlines of roads or structures shall be shown where applicable.
f. Utilities – When a set of drainage plans is to be prepared, the plan and profile sheets
need show only utilities that have a major effect on the runways, roadways, or
structures.
g. Match Lines and Profiles
1) Each sheet shall bear match lines at each end, drawn perpendicular to the
alignment, preferably at a full station.
2) The match lines shall be labeled "MATCH LINE-STA 25+000 M" in letters and
numbers 5 mm high.
3) For Match Line Profiles, elevation of the profile grade shall be shown.
h. Profile Grid – The vertical scale of the profile shall be 1:100 and every meter interval
shall be labeled. Stationing labels shall be entered at the bottom of the profile grid
every 100 mm in actual length. Thus, for scales of 1:1000, 1:5000, and 1:10000 the
distances shall be 100, 500, and 1000 m, respectively. The numbers for stationing
and elevations shall be 5 mm high.
i. Runway and Roadway Profiles
1) The profile shall be shown by a single solid line, the top edge of which defines
the top of runway profile.
2) Significant points designating changes in grade shall be shown by an open
circle of 3 mm diameter. These points shall be identified by a fine vertical line
drawn to the circle showing the station and the pertinent abbreviation:

Rev. 1 4.2 - 18
3) Profile tangent intersections shall be identified by open 3 mm triangles. A

vertical line shall be drawn to the triangle, and the station, abbreviation (PIVC),
and elevation shall be shown thus:
(a) Ground Line – The profile of the existing ground along the centerline of the
runway, road, etc., shall be shown by a freeform, broken line, and shall be
labeled "EXISTING GROUND."
(b) Utilities – The utility lines shown in plan are to be also shown in profile,
where they cross the runway or roadways.
j. Alignment Data – These sheets shall be arranged in tabular form showing all
horizontal points. The tables shall be arranged by runway, taxiway, etc., and read from
the top to the bottom of the page. Table headings are in Table 4.2.D below:
TABLE 4.2.D: TABLE HEADINGS FOR ALIGNMENT DATA
Station
Y X R  L E TS LS AS
Point
Where:
Y and X = coordinates
R = radius of curvature
 = intersection angle
L = total curve length
E = superelevation in mm
TS = total curve tangent
LS = length of spiral

Rev. 1 4.2 - 19
AS = spiral intersection angle

k. Roadway and/or Runway Sections
1) Identifying Symbols and Titles – Road and runway alignment sections shall not
be indicated on the plan by a section symbol, but shall be identified by station
below the section detail as follows: STATION 32 + 750 M
2) Orientation – Cross-sections shall be taken looking up stations on line. When
more than one cross-section is drawn on one sheet, the cross-section shall be
oriented so that the section stations increase from the bottom to the top of the
sheet.
3) Typical Cross-Sections – These shall be shown at appropriate points along the
roadway. They shall include the roadway, shoulders, and other miscellaneous
typical details. The scale shall be: 1:50 or 1:20.
4) Special Cross-Sections – These shall be provided in areas where they will be
useful in clarifying construction details. These sections shall be drawn at a scale
of 1:100, 1:40 or 1:20.
l. Typical Details – Typical details shall eventually become Project Standards. They
shall include runway, taxiway, apron, roadway, and miscellaneous civil details. The
scale shall be 1:50 or 1:20.
m. Drainage – Drainage layout sheets shall include detailed layout information for all new
utilities. These sheets shall be plan and profile sheets with 1:500 horizontal scale and
1:100 vertical scale and shall be referenced by number to the layout index.
n. Utility Lines – The location shall be shown by a 6 mm long-dashed line, broken in 25
mm lengths, with a single letter code designating the type of utility, at 100 mm
intervals.
o. Drainage Details – these details shall include typical and special details with scales
ranging from 1:500 to 1:200. Typical details will become Project Standards.
p. Subdivision Mapping
1) General – A subdivision is a parcel of land which has been divided into lots and
blocks along with street or road right-of-ways and any other tracts which have
been reserved for special use.
2) A map of the subdivision shall be prepared by the designer of the subdivision.
This map shall be prepared in accordance with the following specifications, the
intent of which is to insure that conformity of maps is maintained, and mapping
information is in such a form that it may be utilized in geo-location for a
database retrieval and storage system.
3) There is no intent in this Section to require that all subdivisions be similar in
layout, land use or configuration, but certain standard guidelines for elements
of the presentation are standardized to maintain minimum city planning and
architectural control. The guidelines are enumerated and discussed as follows:
(a) All subdivision maps shall be plotted on "E" size. Line work shall vary in
width from very fine to heavy in the following ascending order:
(1) Dimension lines, center lines, tangent lines, radii lines and plant grid
lines at 100 m interval.
(2) Building lines and public structure lines.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 20
(3) Lot lines.

(4) Right-of-way lines and Block lines.
(5) Sector Lines (in Community only).
(6) Section or District lines.
(7) Area lines.
(b) All subdivision Drawings shall be oriented so that Plant North shall be up
and parallel to the end margin of the sheet. A dual north arrow shall be
provided and labeled with both plant North and true North with the angle
inscribed between. The bearing to Mecca shall also be shown.
(c) The scale of subdivision maps shall be 1:500. Subdivisions of only large
tracts, such as the primary industries in the Industrial Area may be plotted
at 1:1000. Where this scale is not sufficiently large enough to show all
detail, a larger scale (i.e., 1:200, 1:100, etc.) may be used.
(d) Every map sheet shall have a Key Map of sufficient scale locating the
individual sheet.
(e) Match lines between sheets, shall be along streets, other right-of-ways,
canals, railroads, lot lines or other physical barriers. Preferably entire
Blocks shall be shown.
(f) All boundaries (lots, rights-of-ways, blocks and public lands) shall be
mathematically closed.
(g) All boundary lines shall be dimensioned in meters, including curves and
segments of curves. Curve data shall include but not be limited to radius,
delta angle, length of curve, long chord, and tangent length. Curve data
may be identified and placed in tabular form.
(h) All right-of-ways shall be of constant width throughout their length, or at
least large segments if right-of-ways are very long.
(i) All computations shall be in plant grid, every corner, change in direction,
line intersection, point of curve, point of tangent and point of compound
curvature shall have coordinates. Coordinates shall be shown on the map
at all block corners. Every point having coordinates shall be numbered on
the map and identified with coordinates in tabular form on the map or on
documents other than the map.
(j) Monuments shall be established at all Block corners and Section and
District corners. All lot corners and intermediate changes in direction shall
be staked using iron rods or other durable material at least 20 mm in least
dimension and being 1 m in length.
(k) Control monuments of substantial construction shall be established on
plan and placed on site at the intersection of street center lines and Block
corners in sufficient numbers and locations, that if 25% of the monuments
were destroyed, it would still be possible to replace control within any area
so that any property point within the area may be replaced.
(l) The area of each lot shall be provided in square meters.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 21
4) Figure 4.2.C shows a sample subdivision map for reference purposes only.
FIGURE 4.2.C: SAMPLE SUBDIVISION MAP
COWI
Alrabiah
In As so ciatio n with

Rev. 1 4.2 - 22
13. Landscape and Hardscape Drawing Requirements

a. All Project Landscaping Drawings shall adhere to the Drafting Guidelines specified in
this Section.
b. Drawings shall be categorized by type of information and level of detail and numbers
assigned in accordance with the Project numbering system. Depending on complexity
and Project requirements, all or part of the Drawings on the following list shall be
included. The general order shall be adhered to for uniformity; inapplicable drawings
shall be omitted from the sequence shown and types of information combined when
drawing compatibility permits.
1) Landscaping Plans
2) Plant Irrigation Plans
3) Plant Installation Details
4) Plant Schedule
5) Applicable notes from GEM Table 5.6.4-C “Standard Landscape and Planting
Notes”
c. Landscaping Plans:
1) shall be drawn at appropriate scale for legibility and to bid
2) shall indicate the following:
(a) Existing vegetation to remain
(b) Existing site conditions to remain
(c) Proposed site conditions (Site Plan)
(d) Proposed new landscape material with key call outs indicating botanical
name
(e) Plant Schedule with common and botanical names, container or box size,
form and special notes.
(f) Required Landscape buffers
(g) Required Screening
(h) Utilities: (lighting and conduits, joint utility trenches, transformers, vaults,
gas, water, sewer, storm drainage lines, manholes, easements)
(i) Planting details, Plant schedule, Applicable Standard Notes
(j) Fences and walls
d. Plant Irrigation Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a maximum scale of 1:30
2) Shall indicate the following:
(a) Location of water supply
(1) Recycled Domestic Waste Water
(2) Potable Water (if required)
(b) Irrigation controllers

Rev. 1 4.2 - 23
(c) Pressure booster pumps, flow sensors, master valves

(d) Valves and circuits
(e) Main lines
(f) Sprinkler heads and type of head
(g) Sleeving
(h) Quick couplers, gate/isolation valves
(i) Drip irrigation
(j) Pipe, valve, and sleeve sizes
(k) Underground systems and type
e. Details:
1) Shall be at a scale of 1:5, 1:2, or 1:1 as required to indicate detailed construction
requirements forinstalling plant material and plant irrigation elements.
f. Schedules and Notes:
1) Plant material schedules shall list the types of plants (latin and common
names), size of plants, and quantities of plants required for the project. Notes
shall indicate other specific requirements to the project.
(a) Irrigation schedules shall list requirements controllers, valves, sprinkler or
drip zones, and underground irrigation systems with type. Notes shall
indicate other specific requirements to the project. Irrigation watering
schedule shall show each valve, run time per week and gpm at peak
season. Pressure calcaluations at critical valve and maximum l/min
system demand.
14. Structural Engineering Drawing Requirements
a. The Project Structural Engineering Drawings in the following categories shall conform
to the general procedures stated in this Section:
1) Index of Drawings
2) General Structural Notes and Symbols
3) General Structural Arrangement
4) Foundation
5) Concrete Outline
6) Concrete Reinforcement
7) Structural Steel
8) Roof Structural
9) Precast Concrete
10) Concrete Masonry
11) Miscellaneous Metal Work
12) Standard Details
b. General Structural Notes

Rev. 1 4.2 - 24
1) The general structural notes shall include notes, symbols, and abbreviations
that pertain to the structural Drawings only.
c. Structural Layout Drawings
1) Allow for a minimum of 25 mm clearance between the borderline and layouts.
The right hand side shall be reserved for notes, key plan, north arrow, etc.
2) All plans shall be labeled, i.e. "FOUNDATION PLAN," "SLAB ON GRADE
PLAN ," "PLAN AT ELEV. 6.95 m."
3) All partial plans shall be located with respect to column lines. Columns shall be
identified on all plan views. Columns shall be in numerical order from west to
east and in alphabetical order from north to south. Do not use the letters I, and
O.
4) All concrete and masonry walls shall be shown on Structural Drawings.
Architectural features shall be shown only where necessary.
d. Recommended scales in Table 4.2.E below shall be used for Structural Drawings
unless otherwise approved by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
TABLE 4.2.E: RECOMMENDED SCALES FOR STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

Structural Plans 1:200 or 1:100
Concrete and/or Masonry Sectional Elevation 1:200, 1:100, or 1:50
Concrete and/or Masonry Section and Details 1:50, 1:20, or 1:10
Steel Sectional Elevation 1:200, 1:100, or 1:50

Steel Sections and Details 1:20, 1:10, or 1:5
e. Structural Steel Drawings

1) Single lines for structural steel members shall be used, and a portion of the
member shown only where necessary for member orientation or clarity at
connections.
2) Structural shapes may be from any international source, such as American
Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), British Standards (BS), German Institute
for Standardization (DIN), etc. However, AISC equivalent designations shall be
used in parentheses when other sources are used.
3) All plate sizes shall be dimensioned in millimeters.
4) All welding and symbols shall be in accordance with American Welding Society
(AWS) Standards, except welding sizes shall be in millimeters.
5) Steel framing plans shall show the major floor openings or concrete outline (if
required) with dotted lines.
6) Top of steel (TOS) datum elevations shall be indicated on framing plans by
note. Deviations from the datum elevation shall be marked on the individual
beam(s) as plus or minus variations.
f. Concrete Drawings

Rev. 1 4.2 - 25
1) Reinforced concrete walls and concrete masonry walls shall be dimensioned

and detailed on the concrete Drawings.
2) Other partition walls shall be located on the architectural Drawings. Details and
engineering data shall be shown on the structural Drawings.
3) Structural anchors and expansion bolts shall be shown on the concrete
Drawings and/or standard detail Drawing.
4) All requirements for reinforcing steel shall be clearly shown. Reinforcing steel
shall be shown in elevation or plan by heavy solid lines and in section by a solid
dot. Size, grade, spacing and mark shall be shown once only, on either the plan
or on the elevation, and identified by mark only on the remaining views.
5) Special treatment of reinforcing steel shall be clearly shown by note.
Example: BEND REINFORCING STEEL TO CLEAR PIPE.
6) Concrete structures shall be dimensioned to the nearest 5 mm.

7) Floor openings shall be shown on the concrete floor plans. Dimensions shall
be shown on the concrete outline Drawings.
8) Penetration in concrete walls shall be shown on the concrete outline Drawings.
If the number of openings is limited, their centerline elevations and dimensions
may be shown on the plans. Partial or full elevation of the wall shall be shown
whenever the required work may not be fully described in the Concrete Outline
or plan Drawings.
9) Temporary openings for equipment installation and knockout panels for
equipment removal shall be shown.
10) Openings through concrete block walls shall be shown on the Architectural
drawings.
g. Precast Concrete
1) Wherever feasible and economically viable, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall utilize precast elements in their design. Whenever feasible, precast
elements already manufactured in-Kingdom shall be utilized, taking into
consideration Saudi material availability and manufacturing capability.
2) All drawings shall be prepared basically as outlined above for concrete
drawings, as qualified:
(a) Structural components shall reflect the "modular concept", i.e. variation of
dimensions and details shall be minimized, and conversely, repetition of
dimensions and utilization of identical building components shall be
maximized.
(b) Connection details to be completely detailed using corrosion resistant
materials.
(c) Locate lifting inserts for major components for handling and lifting
purposes.
(d) Provide schedules, details, and elevations for the precast concrete with
dimensions.
h. Concrete Masonry

Rev. 1 4.2 - 26
1) Layout plan and/or wall runs using modular lengths of concrete masonry units
(CMU) to avoid cutting.
2) Dimension all CMU using nominal sizes.
3) Identify shear walls in plan.
4) Indicate type bond to be used for courses of CMU, i.e., running, stack, etc.
5) Show complete details for all vertical and/or horizontal reinforcement.
6) Show all details for interfaces with reinforced concrete and/or structural steel
frames and clearly detail each type connection.
7) Locate and detail all construction and expansion joints.
i. Miscellaneous Metalwork
1) The following listing of items are considered to be representative of
miscellaneous metalwork. This list is not exhaustive. These type of items shall
be completely detailed or described on the Drawings.
(a) Anchor bolts
(b) Handrails
(c) Steel stairs
(d) Floor plates and/or trench covers
(e) Grating
(f) Vertical and ships ladders
(g) Equipment support frames
(h) Hatches and/or roof scuttles
15. Architectural Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Architectural Drawings shall adhere to the Drafting Guidelines specified in
this Section.
b. Drawings shall be categorized by type of information and level of detail and numbers
assigned in accordance with the Project numbering system. Depending on complexity
and Project requirements, all, or part of the Drawings on the following list shall be
included. The general order shall be adhered to for uniformity; inapplicable drawings
shall be omitted from the sequence shown and types of information combined when
drawing compatibility permits.
1) General/Control Drawings
2) Site Plans
3) Life Safety Analysis and Life Safety Plans
4) Floor Plans
5) Roof Plans
6) Exterior Elevations
7) Building Sections
8) Wall Sections

Rev. 1 4.2 - 27
9) Reflected Ceiling Plans

10) Enlarged Plans
11) Interior Elevations
12) Detail Plans
13) Details
14) Schedules
c. Site Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale 1:200.
2) Shall indicate the location of the building relative to the project grid coordinate
system, the design package (building) boundary limits, and plan indications of
landscape and site work included in the Project.
d. Life Safety Analysis:
1) The life safety analysis shall, at the very minimum, include the gross footprint
of the building, the height above average grade elevation, the construction
type, the occupancy group(s), and whether the building has an automatic fire
sprinkler system,
2) Life safety plans shall be drawn at the same scale as the floor plans.
3) Life safety plans shall indicate egress travel distances relative to permitted
common paths and total permitted travel distances.
4) Show egress loads and egress capacities of egress components.
5) Provide the area, the occupancy factor, and the calculated occupancy load of
each occupied space. 6) Indicate all fire epeparations (vertical and
horizontal), and the required fire-ratings for each.
e. Floor Plans:
1) Shall be drawn to a scale of 1:50, 1:100, or 1:200, and shall indicate general
wall and partition layouts and openings, door swings, floor finishes and finish
floor elevations.
2) Column indications and section indications shall correspond to structural
Drawings.
3) Door types, window types, building sections, exterior elevations, and interior
elevations shall be keyed on building plans.
4) The location of all fire-rated walls or partitions required by applicable code and
the hourly rating shall be identified.
5) Include simple site context within 2-4 meters of the building.
f. Enlarged Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 1:50 and shall indicate wall or partition
thickness and construction, flooring materials, location and outline of counters
and/or cabinets, or other architectural elements as required to explain
construction or fabrication requirements.
2) Detail plans, elevations, and construction details shall be keyed on area plans.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 28
3) All area plans must be located with respect to column lines.

g. Detail Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 1:25 and shall be used only to
described construction or fabrication requirements for architectural elements
that may not be sufficiently described in area plans.
h. Reflected Ceiling Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at the same scale as floor plans.
2) Shall indicate ceiling finishes, layouts of ceiling systems, sprinkler heads, and
locations and outlines of major lighting fixtures.
3) Ceiling details shall be keyed on reflected ceiling plans.
i. Roof Plans:
1) Shall be drawn at the same scale as floor plans.
2) Shall indicate roof spot elevations, type of roof construction, location of drains,
scuppers, and/or downspouts, and roof slope direction.
3) Roof details shall be keyed on roof plans.
4) Where drawing scales, volume of information, and compatibility of drawings
permit, roof plan and site plan shall be combined in the same drawing.
j. Building Sections:
1) Shall be drawn at the same scale as exterior elevations, and shall reference
wall thickness, general dimensions, finish floor elevations, and column line
locations.
2) Wall sections and details shall be keyed on building sections.
k. Wall Sections:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of 1:25 or 1:20 to describe construction requirements
for all building wall conditions.
2) Shall indicate materials, finish, construction thicknesses, and finish floor
elevations.
3) All wall sections must be located with respect to column lines.
l. Exterior Elevations:
1) Shall be drawn at the same scale as the floor plan.
2) Dimensions on exterior elevations shall not duplicate dimensions shown on
plans or sections.
3) Exterior material finishes, exterior details, building signage locations, and
building sections shall be keyed on exterior elevations.
m. Interior Elevations:
1) Shall be drawn at a scale of 1:50.
2) Shall describe wall and partition finishes and location and appearance of
architectural elements.
3) All interior elevations shall be keyed on building plans.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 29
4) Dimensions on interior elevations shall not duplicate dimensions shown on

plans or sections.
5) Interior details shall be keyed on interior elevations.
n. Details:
1) Shall be drawn to a scale of 1:5, 1:2, or 1:1 as required to indicate detailed
construction requirements for architectural elements.
2) Shall reference materials, finishes, construction thicknesses, special
conditions, and fabrication instructions.
3) Where volume of information on a sheet permits, details shall be included with
drawings on which the details are keyed.
o. Schedules:
1) Shall list requirements for doors, windows, hardware, louvers, and room
finishes.
2) All schedules shall be keyed to reference symbols on either plans or elevations.
16. Fixtures, Furnishings, and Equipment (FFE) Drawing Requirements
a. All FFE information documented by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be fully
coordinated with the permanent building construction.
b. Required drawings to document the Project FFE include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and schedules to fully describe the design intent.
c. Drawing scales are to match those used for Architectural.
d. Materials and hardware components shall be identified and scheduled.
e. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for submitting specification sheets for
actual selected products including Manufacturer, model number, photograph, and a
description of optional items or finish selections.
f. For detailed FF&E procedures and deliverables required by the RCJ, the A/E or EPC
Contractor shall reference the “Engineering FF&E Internal Procedure Work
Instruction” document from the RCJ (Document No. RCJ-GEX-3WI-G01-G0022).
17. Mechanical Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Mechanical Engineering Drawings shall follow the organization, scale, and
other requirements for architectural drawings except as otherwise specified in this
Section.
b. Plumbing
1) Plumbing drawings: shall include plumbing floor plans and isometric diagrams
of the piping. There shall be no Process and Instrumentation Diagrams
(P&ID's). Pipe diameters shall be given in the International System of Units (SI)
only.
2) Plumbing Floor Plans: The designer shall enlarge each toilet core to a scale of
1:50 and the small scale plan shall have a note saying, "FOR PIPING SEE
LARGE SCALE PLAN." Do not repeat the piping on the small scale plan.
3) Piping Diagrams

Rev. 1 4.2 - 30
(a) All piping (hot water, cold water, domestic waste and vent systems) shall
be shown in diagrammatic form. These diagrams shall be shown with all
the Plumbing fixtures including floor drains, floor sinks, oil and grease
separators and sand traps.
(b) Depending on the systems complexity, separate diagrams will be required
for each plumbing system.
(c) The diagrams shall show core isolation valves, hose bibbs, fixture stop
valves, traps, meters, shock absorbers, and the interface at public
systems.
c. Fire Protection
1) Fire protection drawings shall show all applicable fire protection components
such as wet standpipes, dry standpipes, sprinkler systems and deluge spray
systems. Smoke detectors, and fire alarm systems shall be shown on electrical
drawings.
2) Each sprinkler shall be located on the floor plan of the fire protection drawing.
Sprinkler location shall also be shown on the Architectural reflected ceiling
plans.
d. HVAC
1) Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning shall be in accordance with the HVAC
Engineering Standards as described in the ASHRAE and SMACNA Guides.
2) All work, equipment and material shall be governed by the applicable Sections
of Codes, Standards and guides.
3) High-Velocity, High-Pressure Ducts
(a) The specification shall call for a different type of construction when the air
in the duct is at a pressure of 748 Pa or more, or when its velocity exceeds
10 m/s. It is consequently necessary to show on the drawing which ducts
are HVHP and which are LVLP.
(b) It is permissible to use both types of construction in the same run of
ductwork if the pressure is different.
(c) Equipment Rooms and Areas: All equipment rooms shall be enlarged to
at least 1:50 and all sections, elevations, and details included.
4) Flow Diagrams: Systems flow diagrams for air and water systems shall be
included, showing major equipment and flow medium and its quantities.
e. Designer's Check List: The following list of items shall be thoroughly checked by the
designer at the completion of each project:
1) Check to ascertain that every mechanical component on the project has been
detailed on the drawings.
2) Check every detail to see if the schedule thereon has been completed and is
accurate.
3) Check each room in the building to be sure that it has been adequately heated,
cooled, and ventilated.
4) Check to be sure that adequate space has been provided to pull the tubes for
boilers, chillers, convertors, or hot water generators.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 31
5) Check to see if vibration eliminators have been properly indicated for each
piece of rotating equipment.
6) Check to see if adequate space has been provided to service all equipment.
7) Check to see if any ladders or catwalks are required for each piece of major
equipment.
8) Check all duct runs to be sure that the duct shown will fit into the available
space and does not interfere with pipes, lights, or structural members.
9) Check all pipe runs to be sure that the pipe will fit into the available space and
does not interfere with ducts, lights, or structural members.
10) Check to see if adequate combustion air openings have been provided in boiler
rooms.
11) Check the flue size and height to see if adequate draft has been provided.
12) Check the boiler pressure rating to see if it is adequate for the static height of
the building.
13) Check the expansion tank calculation to be certain it is large enough and is
properly located in relation to the pump.
14) Check the piping system to see if adequate expansion loops and anchors have
been provided and detailed.
15) Check runouts to room terminal units to see if pipes may sleeve spandrel
beams or other obstructions.
16) Check project plans to see if the location of all ducts and pipes has been
indicated.
17) Check the project door schedule to see if all doors requiring ventilation
openings have been adequately undercut or louvered.
18) Check to see that there are no exhaust fans or return air openings in a room
were combustion is occuring.
19) Check to see that the control air compressor is shown on all pneumatic control
design drawings.
20) Check to see that all motors and motors starters are shown in the motor and
motor control schedule.
21) Check to see if temperature control diagrams have been shown for all
equipment requiring automatic control.
22) Check all ceilings to be sure that air outlets do not interfere with lights.
23) Check to see if sufficient valves have been placed in the system to allow
isolation of risers and mains for service and drain down.
24) Check head room available for all ceiling hung units such as unit heaters.
25) Check to be sure that all air flows shown balance. Check room by room balance
and check room totals against flow shown for air handling units and fans.
26) Check to see if fire dampers have been shown in accordance with the local
Codes and ordinances.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 32
27) Check acoustical requirements of the project to see if all required duct lining
and sound traps have been provided to give the required attenuation of noise.
28) Check to see that all pipes are continued to point of connection.
29) Check to see if all motors and other electrical information has been given to the
electrical designer.
30) Check the specifications for completeness and accuracy.
31) Check the project drawings to see that all room names and numbers and
column numbers have been properly included.
32) Check the design drawings for completion of the job name title blocks, and
required signatures.
33) Water and air balance and measuring fittings.
f. Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P & IDs)
1) The purpose of the P & ID is to translate the process and operational
requirements, as established in the process Flow diagrams or otherwise, into a
design concept that shows basic equipment, piping and control requirements
which provide the basis for engineering and detail design of a functional
system.
2) Content:
(a) The process and instrumentation diagram must clearly present and
identify all pieces of operational equipment and control elements and show
all piping and other relationships that define the particular process or
operation covered by the P&ID, as follows. Each piece of equipment to
include:
(1) Service Names.
(2) Equipment Numbers.
(3) Number of units operating or standby.
(4) Sizes, duties or capacities.
(5) Material of construction.
(6) Insulation for thermal or personnel protection.
(7) Sizes and types of equipment connections if different from associated
piping.
(b) Process and Utility Piping, to include:
(1) Valves, manifolding, blinds, hoses and flow directions.
(2) Identification of main flow streams by heavy lines and auxiliary flow
streams by medium lines.
(3) Identification of flows from or to another P&ID.
(4) Special piping items such as expansion joints, strainers and special
valves.
(5) Identification of all sumps and sump sizes.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 33
(6) Pipeline identification including facility number, line size and piping
material specification.
(7) Piping reducers (not shown at main line branches), line and
equipment drains, vents, sample points, traps, separators, relief
valves, equipment seal water and/or water purge connections, all with
sizes indicated.
(8) Insulation for thermal or personnel protection, steam or electric heat
tracing.
(c) Instrumentation, to include:
(1) Process control instrumentation, using symbols and letters shown in
the International Society of Automation (ISA) S5.1.
(2) Instrument signal lines (pneumatic, electric, capillary or other).
(3) Control Valves and Actuators with bypass manifolds.
(4) Block valves for pressure tops.
(5) Instrumentation purchased with equipment packages that require
field mounting, piping or wiring.
(6) Instrument numbers.
(7) Control, safety and relief valve sizes and fail positions.
(8) Interlocks shown in simplified form.
(d) General
(1) Appropriate notes, reference drawings, and key.
18. Electrical Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Electrical Engineering Drawings shall be in accordance with the general
drawing procedure of this document.
b. The drawings shall show in sufficient detail for bidding and construction purposes such
features of lighting, motor, grounding, cable, and raceway installation considered
essential to system physical, function and circuitry characteristics and the interfaces
with other disciplines.
c. The design drawings shall include:
1) Single line diagrams, showing: primary and secondary power distribution
systems; normal, stand-by, emergency and special power supply systems;
switch gear, equipment and cable sizes and ratings; power and lighting
systems; main and secondary distribution panels; and protective and control
devices. Where appropriate a protection and relay three line drawing shall be
provided. Plan and profile drawings of the cable layouts shall be provided
identifying other (crossing) utilities.
2) Layout drawings, showing: switchgear and equipment locations and room
layouts; primary and secondary power cable and raceway size and routing;
lighting panel, fixture and switch locations; distribution panel, motor control
center, motor, receptacle and miscellaneous power equipment locations and
sizes; grounding grids and local connections, all in sufficient detail to permit
coordination of the work with that of other disciplines and for construction.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 34
3) Schematic, control, wire connection and riser diagrams; detail, typical and
standard drawings, showing necessary installation to supplement data
described above and in the specification to provide sufficient information for
bidding and construction of the complete electrical work.
4) Cable and conduit, lighting panel schedules shall be provided.
d. Provisions for Special Services
1) Certain provisions for special services will be included in the electrical
drawings. These services pertain to the telecommunication and control systems
design groups and in general involve the following systems:
(a) Telephone
(b) Public address
(c) Fire and life safety
(d) Security
(e) Surveillance
(f) Master clock
(g) Process equipment and control
(h) Environmental equipment and control
(i) Directional signals
2) Raceway, wiring and physical location of electrical connections to equipment
and devices for the above services will be indicated on the electrical layout
drawings. The connections will be shown in the form of riser diagrams in
sufficient detail for the material take-off and for determining routing of the
raceway installation. The location of the equipment and instruments, type and
size of wiring and the block diagrams of interconnections will be marked by the
pertinent design groups on the electrical coordination prints, or sketches, for
inclusion in the electrical drawing package.
e. Electrical Standard Drawings, Details, Notes and Symbols
1) Installation arrangements, details and methods which are standard industry
practice and typical for use on the project, are to be identified, developed and
produced as standard or typical drawings for use in the individual packages, as
necessary.
2) Symbols: per Uniform Drawing Standards (UDS).
3) The electrical symbols, abbreviations, and notes of typical or repetitive nature
shall be shown on general or standard electrical drawings.
f. Single Line Diagrams
1) The single line shall include the interface with the supply service; the main
substation; stand-by generation plant; high and medium voltage switchgear;
and distribution circuits. Local substations and loads shall be indicated on the
diagram by a block identifying the substation and load size.
2) Single line diagrams shall also be prepared to detail each local substation
indicating the primary switches and circuit breakers, transformers, secondary
main and tie breakers, bus connections, feeder breakers, meters, relays,

Rev. 1 4.2 - 35
protective devices, motor control centers, power distribution panels, and

auxiliary power services such as Alternating Current (AC) and Direct Current
(DC) lighting and control power sources.
g. Layout Drawings
1) Arrangement
(a) Layout drawings showing area plan views shall contain an overall key
plan. The appropriate area shall be cross hatched on the key plan to
provide quick reference to the area covered in the particular drawing. A
project north arrow shall be placed on the drawing for orientation.
(b) Column lines shall be shown and identified on all plan views. Partial plans
shall be located with respect to column lines. Sections and other views
shall be arranged to clearly show work in relation to column lines and floor
elevations.
(c) Except where required for clarity, sections shall be cut looking to the top
or to the left of the basic plan view sheet. Full height or full length sections
shall be used where practical. View-directions of developed elevations
shall be identified.
(d) Sectional plans shall be cut looking down. orientation of-sections shall be
consistent with the reference view and the general plan orientation. The
scale shall be 1:50 or larger.
2) Dimensions
(a) Symbols identifying electrical equipment and apparatus shall have
horizontal dimensions shown on plan view only, except in the event clarity
is lost by this method. Vertical dimensions and elevations shall be shown
on all sections and elevations.
(b) Location of electrical equipment and raceways.
(c) Dimensions shall be shown by dimensions preferably from adjacent
column lines or floors and alternatively from adjoining major structures or
equipment.
(d) Repetition of dimensions within a single sheet shall be avoided. Where
necessary, dimensions of lines crossing matchlines shall be made to the
matchline to avoid overlapping of dimensions on matching sheets.
Dimensions Not To Scale shall be identified by "NTS."
(e) Every effort shall be made to produce drawings to scale.
(f) Dimension arrows shall be small, sharp and neat. Dimension figures shall
be lettered parallel to and above the dimension line and arranged to read
from the bottom border or right hand border.
3) Electrical Equipment and Raceway Layout
(a) Major electrical equipment such as switchgear, load centers, motor control
centers, transformers and raceways, shall be shown on electrical layout
drawings for the pertinent buildings. Items outside of the buildings such as
underground distribution including primary and secondary power, street
lighting, telecommunications and control cable shall be shown on general
utility drawings. Equipment and raceway numbers (except for lighting)
shall be indicated on the drawings.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 36
(b) Cable trays, enclosed wireways and underground ducts will be shown on
the layout drawings with appropriate notations as to their type, size,
configuration and general location with respect to building lines and
grades.
(c) Conduits for power and power control cables shall be shown on the layout
drawings whether run exposed or embedded. The conduit runs may be
shown partially in a diagramatic form but in sufficient detail to show
location of connections at the motors and at the motor controllers. The
conduit runs between the motors and the remote controllers or power
source, may be shown as a complete run or a partial run, assuming that,
a suitable description of the destination of the "home runs," such as to
motor control centers or distribution panels, will be given.
(d) Conduits for lighting, convenience outlets and special service receptacles
will be shown on the layout drawings only where embedded in floor, wall
or ceiling. No exposed or hidden runs (such as above hung acoustical
ceilings) will be shown.
(e) Rules and Codes pertaining to the conduit type, size and installation and
the number, type and size of wires that may be intalled within the conduits
and methods of connection at the fixtures and devices, will be shown in
the standard drawings, specifications and design criteria, as applicable.
Where sizes, routing and destinations are shown on the drawings they
may be shown either directly on the layouts or in the raceway schedules,
whichever is considered more expeditious and appropriate. However,
once the method for describing these conduit runs has been decided it
shall be consistent within a given design package.
4) Lighting Layout Drawings
(a) All lighting fixtures, lighting panels, switches, and circuity shall be shown
on the drawings. When conduits are shown the number of wires in each
raceway shall be indicated with short diagonal lines crossing the raceway
and two lengths shall be used. The longer (about 6 mm) shall indicate the
number of phase wires and the shorter (about 3 mm) shall indicate the
number of neutral wires. Lighting panel designation and circuit number
shall be shown for each fixture, switch, and outlet served by the particular
panel and circuit.
(b) A lighting fixture symbol, identified and described in the "Lighting Fixture
Schedule" shall be shown for each fixture or group of fixtures on the
lighting layout drawings.
5) Power Layout Drawings
(a) All distribution panels transformers, switches, disconnets switches,
convenience outlets and circuity shall be shown on the drawings. When
conduits are shown the number of wires in each raceway shall be indicated
with short diagonal lines crossing the raceway and two lengths shall be
used. The longer (about 6 mm) shall indicate the number of phase wires
and the shorter (about 3 mm) shall indicate the number of neutral wires.
Power panel designation and circuit number shall be shown for each
device, disconnect switch, and outlet served by the particular panel and
circuit.
6) Arrangement Drawings and Details

Rev. 1 4.2 - 37
(a) These drawings shall be prepared for electrical equipment rooms,

substations and any other areas where equipment location, arrangement
and other requirements, such as access and environmental conditions are
to be considered in detail.
h. Schematic Diagrams
1) Schematic diagrams showing connections between devices and illustrating the
scheme of operation shall be prepared for switchgear, generators, motor drives
and control devices where it is deemed necessary for the proper description
and coordination. Wherever possible, typical diagrams shall be used. All
connections shall be numbered.
2) Control circuitry for motors and major electrical equipment shall be shown
using, wherever possible, typical schematic diagrams of control and block dia-
grams to indicate connecting raceways and wiring. Where necessary, the
typical schematic control diagrams may be supplemented with dissimilarity
tables and tables showing interlocking between the motors and control devices.
A typical schematic control diagram will be cross-referenced to the particular
motor by notation in the equipment list on the layout drawings, or in the single
line diagram drawing, whichever method is considered best for a given design
package.
i. Connection Diagrams (When Required)
1) Riser diagrams shall be prepared if necessary to supplement the layout
drawings in showing various systems. These would typically be fire alarm, tele-
phone, public address, security and systems controls.
j. Schedules (When Required)
1) Circuit schedules shall list all power, control, instrumentation, and
telecommunication cable showing origin, termination and cable description,
including number of conductors and conductor sizes. Lighting wires shall not
be shown in the circuit schedule.
2) Raceway schedules shall designate all raceways, showing their size, type,
origin and terminations.
3) Panel (lighting and power) schedules shall depict each panel in tabulation-form,
indicating type and size of main bus, main and branch circuit breakers, voltage,
phases, circuit'numbers and. service designation, watts per phase and total
watts.
19. Control Systems and Instrumentation Drawing Requirements
a. The Project Control Systems and Instrumentation Drawings shall conform to the
general procedures stated in the preceding text except if otherwise specified in this
Section.
b. Piping and Instrument Diagram (P&ID)
1) P&ID is a diagram which shows the interconnection of process equipment and
the instrumentation used to control the process. In the process industry, a
standard set of symbols is used to prepare drawings of processes. The
instrument symbols used in these drawings are generally based on
International Society of Automation (ISA) Standard S5. 1.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 38
2) P&IDs play a significant role in control system. It provides a basis for the
development of system control functionality, define the total instrumentation
and control requirements.
3) P&ID shall be jointly developed by process, mechanical and C&I.
c. Control System Architecture / Overall Riser Diagram
1) Control system architecture depicts the architecture of the plant control systems
and the interfaces amongst the systems required for overall operation of
process plant.
2) The required Control System is determined by the level of
functionality, complexity and safety of a plant. This may comprise of process
control system, safety instrumented system, building automation system, fire
alarm system, fire suppression system, SACDA control system.
3) Control system architecture drawings shall also show supervisory level
equipment such as operator workstation, engineering workstation, large screen
display, Instrument asset management server, historian server, cyber security
server, control panel type, interface with other third party systems, fire and gas
system and also network equipment.
4) Control system architecture shall clearly define the locations, i.e. main
locations, remote I/O locations, indoor/outdoor location, control room/building
limit.
5) The major control, Ethernet and communication cables are to be shown and
specified.
6) The control system architecture is conceptual in nature and is used for
specifying the requirements of the control system to the PCS/SCADA Supplier.
This drawing is provided as supporting documentation for the process control
system requisition.
d. Instrument Schedules or I/O Summaries
1) Where applicable the following information shall appear on the Instrument
Schedules:
(a) Instrument identification number
(b) Service
(c) P & ID drawing number
(d) Data sheet number
(e) Location (panel or field)
(f) Location plan number
(g) Installation detail number
(h) Material requisition number
(i) Electrical schematic drawing number
(j) Instrument type
(k) I/O type
(l) Control system

Rev. 1 4.2 - 39
(m) Signal level

(n) Instrument range
(o) Calibration range
(p) Alarm setting points
e. Data Sheets
1) Sufficient information shall be provided on instrument data sheets for
procurement of instruments. The following shall be included in the information:
(a) Instrument identification number, service, and function
(b) Process conditions (normal, maximum and minimum)
(c) Scales
(d) Charts
(e) Materials
(f) Signal levels
(g) Power sources
(h) Calibration
(i) Material requisition number
(j) Accessories
(k) Manufacturer and model number. (This information is to be completed
after award)
f. Installation Details
1) Sufficient information shall be provided to ensure proper field installation
including:
(a) Size of process connection
(b) Elevation of instrument with respect to sensing tap locations
(c) Material lists and material quantities
(d) Cable Block Diagram
(e) Cable Schedule
(f) Cable tray layout or cable conduit schedule.
g. Loop Diagrams
1) Loop diagrams shall be provided to show the interconnections and working
relationships of individual components with complex control loops.
2) Typical control loop drawings shall, generally, be provided for simple repetitive
control loops.
3) Loop diagrams may be either pneumatic or electronic, however, if electronic,
they shall not replace the electrical schematic, or connection diagrams, but
shall supplement such drawings.
h. Control Panels

Rev. 1 4.2 - 40
1) Control panel drawings shall show overall size, cross-sections, general

arrangement of equipment and legend plates, but shall not include structural
fabrication information except where critical to appearance or functional details.
2) A key plan shall be provided to show panel location relative or other panels,
building features, etc.
i. Logic Diagrams
1) Logic diagrams shall be used as a means of communication for complex control
circuits. Simple repetitive control circuits shall not require logic diagrams.
2) Logic diagrams shall be developed prior to the preparation of associated
elementary electrical diagrams.
j. Location Plans
1) Location plans shall show the locations of individual sensing elements, control
elements and valves, pneumatic terminal boxes, and local control panels as
required for field location and installation. Elevation of taps and components, if
critical, shall be shown. The areas covered by these locations shall conform
whenever possible to similar location drawings for electrical and mechanical
systems or to master plan divisions developed for the project areas.
2) Indication shall be given on the drawing of the type of electrical connection
required, i.e. power supply, control signal, instrumentation (4 to 20 mA),
instrumentation low level (e.g. thermocouple, RTD, MV etc).
20. Telecommunications Drawing Requirements
a. All Project Telecommunications Drawings shall adhere to general organizational and
project drafting Standards.
b. Organization
1) The drawings shall be categorized by systems or subsystems and numbered
in accordance with the project numbering system. Depending on complexity
and project requirements, system or subsystem drawings may include all or a
part of the drawings in the following list. The general order shall be adhered to
for uniformity. Inapplicable drawings shall be omitted from the sequences
shown.
(a) Block Diagram of the Telecommunication systems
(b) System or Subsystem Functional Block and Level Diagrams
(c) System or Subsystem Site Plans
(d) System or Subsystem Equipment Layouts
(e) System or Subsystem Grounding Details
(f) Underground Cable Routing Key Diagram
(g) Cable Schematics
(h) Cable Building Entrance and Termination Details
(i) Cable Building Vault Layout and MDF Layout
(j) Duct Plan
(k) Hardware Details

Rev. 1 4.2 - 41
c. General Notes: The general telecommunications notes shall include all notes,
symbols, and abbreviations pertaining to telecommunications engineering.
d. Systems Block Diagram: The telecommunications systems block diagram is an overall
system block diagram.
e. Functional Block and Level Diagram
1) The functional block and level diagram shall show major components or
functions of a system indicated by blocks of variable sizes and shapes and the
interconnecting path of the signal or electrical flow indicated by arrowheads on
connecting lines.
2) Internal connections within the major items are usually omitted.
3) For convenience or clarity, partial internal connections, schematic, or circuit
functions information may be included.
4) Between each block shall be shown the proposed or expected level and circuit
impedance. The level will normally be shown in dBm or dBmO.
f. Layout Plans: The telecommunications site plan shall contain a plan view of the instal-
lations, locations, and dimensions of major equipment, and buildings, location of
survey markers, and if applicable, antenna azimuths and take-off angles.
g. Equipment Location
1) The equipment location shall contain a plan view of a room or an area. The
drawing shall reference wall thickness, direction-of door swing, access
openings, location and height of all partitions, columns, and sufficient
dimensions to establish spatial limits in all directions.
2) All telecommunications equipment shall be shown to scale and identified in the
equipment list.
h. Grounding
1) The grounding system shall contain installation information for connections or
terminations of a general grounding system.
i. Cable Key Diagram
1) The underground cable routing key diagram shall be superimposed on an Area
Plan Layout. It shall show an overview of the cable routing from distribution
frame to various terminations.
2) Direct burial of cable may only be used with the express permission of the Royal
Commission in Jubail.
j. Cable Schematic
1) The cable schematic may include several sheets. The following includes, but is
not limited to, information that shall be shown:
(a) Cable lengths, cable types, cable sizes and gauges plus numbers and
counts
(b) Termination points and facility or building number
(c) Terminal counts and types of terminals
(d) Location of load coils if necessary

Rev. 1 4.2 - 42
(e) Location of any MDF or IDF

(f) In some cases it will be necessary to show details of complex splicing
k. Cable Termination
1) The cable building entrance and termination details shall show the details
necessary to terminate cables on terminal blocks.
2) At locations other than buildings, structural details for the support of items or
structures to mount the terminating device shall be provided together with the
details of the device.
l. Cable Vault and MDF Layout
1) The cable vault and MDF layout shall show location layout racking, cabling,
splicing, steps and access ports. The drawing may show the relationship of the
vault to the building, an elevation view showing length, width, headroom and
duct arrangements.
2) Main distributing frame drawing may show the placement, layout, arrangement
and numbering of wall or floor type main, intermediate and combined
distributing frames.
m. Duct Plan: The duct plan shall be a map type drawing (true to scale) of as many streets
as required, showing:
1) Interface cabinet with coordinates (not more than one per drawing set)
2) Cross connection cabinet(s)
3) Distribution point locations
4) Line of duct route
5) Number of ducts and formation in each section
6) Position, type, identification number and coordinates of each jointing chamber
7) Center-to-center distances between jointing chambers
8) Distance of duct rote center line from property line, center line of road or other
designated bench mark
n. Hardware Details: Detail drawings shall include sufficient information to clearly define
type, mounting, etc., as needed for purchase and installation.
21. Sample Schedules
a. Door and Frame Schedule: Table 4.2.F shows a sample of Door and Frame Schedule.
TABLE 4.2.F: SAMPLE DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE
DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE

Door
Fire
Size Rating Hardware
Mark W H Thk. Material Glazing Label Group Notes

Rev. 1 4.2 - 43
b. Window Schedule: Table 4.2.G shows a sample Window Schedule
TABLE 4.2.G: SAMPLE WINDOW SCHEDULE
WINDOW SCHEDULE
Size
Mark W H Type Material Hardware Group Notes
B. Submittal Organization
1. All drawing information shall be submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail as described
below. All drawing information submitted shall be in accordance with the Drawing
Standards specified in this document and must comprise stamped and signed record
drawings.
2. Submissions to the RCJ by the A/E and/or EPC Contractors fall into formal and informal
submissions.
a. Informal Submissions may be made at any time during the process that the A/E and/or
EPC Contractors determine is appropriate with the RCJ for an interim review. Initially
these Design Drawings are not ready for construction issue. At this stage these
drawings may be issued as "Issued for Review," "Issued for Coordination" or "Issued
for Information.” The revisions shall be indicated alphabetically A, B, C, etc. and dated
at each revision.
b. Formal Submissions are for when completed Contract Drawings are issued for
construction. When the Design/Contract Drawing is "Issued for Construction,"
Revision 0 shall be indicated with subsequent revisions indicated numerically as 1, 2,
3, etc. Each revision shall be dated. Contract Drawings shall be approved by the RCJ
and issued as follows:
1) Delete all reference to revisions for preliminary issues
2) Assign the revision "0" (zero)
3) Fill in the revision description block "Issued for Construction" and complete
sign-off
c. A reproducible record copy (reproducible hard-copy) of every Drawing issued, except
those issued for interim review, must be made by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for
the permanent reference file.
d. All plotted drawings, when submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail, shall be
neatly fan-folded to a same size, and kept sequentially within each package.
e. Where applicable, issued prints shall be stamped to indicate the purpose of
restrictions on release of the drawing. Canceled, superseded, or superseding
drawings shall be clearly and boldly indicated on the Drawing and recorded in the form
of a revision note, such as “VOID - SUPERSEDED BY DWG. NO._____”, or
“SUPERSEDED DWG. NO._____.” File names and Drawing numbers of superseded
and voided drawings shall not be reused.
3. Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC) for CAD Documentation
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for checking the CAD documentation
for compliance with the Standards identified in this Engineering Manual. A signed and

Rev. 1 4.2 - 44
dated statement of compliance from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must be included
with the “Issued for Construction” (IFC) drawings.
b. The Construction Contractor prepares the as-built drawings. At the close of the
project, the Royal Commission in Jubail’s Construction Resident Engineer/Field
Engineer will conduct an audit that will include comparing the IFC CAD documents
with the built project. A visual examination of the IFC drawings will be conducted to
ensure but not limited to the presence, location, and approximate dimensional
accuracy of all significant features including, doors, windows, walls, columns, stairs,
ramps, and other general floor-plan layout items. Obvious errors or omissions will be
noted on a review sheet. Depending on the results of the visual audit, the Royal
Commission in Jubail’s Construction Resident Engineer/Field Engineer may conduct
field verification of actual dimensions to compare with the CAD drawings. The
Construction Contractor is required to resolve all issues identified by the RCJ
Construction Engineer review.
4. In addition to the electronic copies of the Drawings, the electronic data deliverable package
shall include the files mentioned below. Files as described below and related notes or
specifications, if any, to be included in the deliverables are to be submitted in Adobe .pdf
format as well as a printed copy.
a. Letter size prints of each drawing file to be used for reference (no scale required)
b. File Description Sheets
c. Layering Documentation
d. QA/QC Documentation
e. Plot Style or plot configuration document as requested
f. Readme file as defined in Subsection 4.2.2.B.8.e
5. Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) documentation shall be in accordance with
Subsection 4.3.11.
6. It is the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to organize drawing information
coherently and maintain reasonable file sizes.
7. Graphic/Drawing Files
a. The two types of drawing files to be included in the deliverables are Sheet Files and
Model Files unless otherwise directed by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
1) A Sheet File is a single plot ready file. They are to be completely formatted and
plot ready. One Sheet File is required for each drawing sheet included in the
construction document set. Sheet Files shall be formatted utilizing paper space.
Plotting shall be set to plot a layout with a plot scale formatted to match the
hardcopy submittals. Each sheet file must have all external-referenced
drawings bound to it.
2) A Model File describes a subset of a building’s geometry and its physical
components: walls, doors, windows, columns, beams, outlets, ducts, etc. A
Model File is always drawn at 1 = 1.
b. Any reference files pertinent to the content of the Model or Sheet File constitutes
required data and is to be included on the File Description print out. Drawings using
reference files are to list referenced files on the title block layer as well as on the File
Description sheet. This list shall give an account of dependent files for the complete
document. This information shall also be added to the file description for Model or

Rev. 1 4.2 - 45
Sheet files. In all submittals reference files shall be in the same directory as the
dependent files and shall NOT include path names in the reference file attachment.
Refer to Subsection 4.2.2.A.5.d for more information about referenced files and xrefs.
c. Files submitted in AutoCAD, version approved by the RCJ, must be convertible to
MicroStation without the loss of data which includes Line weights, Colors, or Layering.
The accurate translation of files submitted by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and, if
necessary, any required corrections, will be the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor.
8. File Transmittal
a. Electronic files shall be delivered on CD ROM in plastic cases, formatted using the
Windows platform.
b. Electronic files submitted on floppy disks, flash disks, zip drives, etc. are not accepted.
c. All electronic file submittals shall be checked using latest anti-virus software prior to
delivery to the Royal Commission in Jubail.
d. CD ROM labeling for typical drawing files shall be as shown in Figure 4.2.D below:
FIGURE 4.2.D: CD ROM LABELING
Royal Commission
for Jubail
<Project Name & No.>
<Submittal
<Date> Stage >
Drawings:
<Discipline>
Disc 1 of 3
<Company Name>
<Telephone #>
<E-mail address>
<Website>
e. A readme file shall be included on disk number 1 that contains the above information
along with an index of drawings that includes drawing file name, drawing title, drawing
number within the set, scale, drawing date, and xref listing and their paths. A hard
copy of this readme file shall be delivered with the disks.
f. The content of electronic drawings must match the delivered original hard copy set.
To ensure the integrity of the electronic drawing set upon delivery to the Royal
Commission in Jubail, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall:

Rev. 1 4.2 - 46
1) Ensure the drawings adhere to the guidelines presented in this document.

Review the procedures for preparing drawings for submittal as detailed in the
preceding paragraphs.
2) Include a hard copy index containing filenames and sheet numbers for each
submittal. This ensures the completeness of the drawing set and assists in
archival procedures.
3) Include a transmittal sheet with all submittals indicating the Royal Commission
in Jubail’s Project Number, Project Name and complete listing of all materials
submitted.
4) Include hard copy half-scale prints of all drawing submittals, when so directed.
5) Include plot configuration files whenever possible. A copy of the Plot Style (.ctb
or .stb) shall be submitted. The .plt files shall be submitted when requested.
g. The receipt of electronic drawings alone does not alleviate the responsibility of the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor for providing hard copy documentation to the Royal
h. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Construction Record Drawings shall include
updated drawings reflecting revisions issued during construction. The Contractor’s
As-Built Documentation shall be, both in electronic and hardcopy format, submitted to
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for approval. These as-built documents shall, upon
approval, be submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail for review. Further definition
of As Built drawings is provided in Subsection 4.5.7.
9. No compressed files will be acceptable on the CD ROM. To reduce disc space
requirements, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall keep drawing sizes to the minimum.
C. Sheet Numbering
1. The first sheet of a multi sheet drawing shall always contain the complete Title Block, List
of Drawings, Revision Block, and General Notes.
2. All sheets of multi sheet drawings shall be of the same size.
3. Sheet numbering for all sheets shall include the total number of sheets as SHEET 1 OF 1,
SHEET 1 OF 2, etc. Numbering of continuation sheets shall be limited to stating the
specific sheet number (e.g. SHEET 2, SHEET 3) without specifying the total number of
sheets.
D. Typical Drafting Symbols

1. General
Comply and follow the illustrations of these drafting symbols when drafting a drawing.
a. Dimension-1
b. Dimension-2

Rev. 1 4.2 - 47
c. Leader-1
d. Leader-2
e. Detail
f. Sub Title
g. Section Title
h. Title for Standard Detail

Rev. 1 4.2 - 48
i. Reference to Standard Detail
j. Reference to Details
k. Section Arrow
l. Elevation Arrow
m. Elevation Symbol for Plan
n. Elevation Symbol for Section

Rev. 1 4.2 - 49
o. Setting Out Point Coordination

Rev. 1 4.2 - 50
SUBSECTION 4.2.3 SPECIFICATION STANDARDS
4.2.3 SPECIFICATION STANDARDS
A. Standard Specifications
1. The RCJ provides Standard Specifications for A/E and/or EPC Contractor review for
applicability as described in Subsection 1.1.6. The procedure for modifying or excluding
Sections is also described in Subsection 1.1.6.
2. Use CSI MasterFormat for the numbering and titling of specifications.
3. Use the 3-part CSI SectionFormat for the format and content of specifications.
B. Operations and Maintenance Manual
1. All specifications shall include provisions for the supply of manuals outlining assembly,
operation, and maintenance procedures for all equipment, furnishings, appliances, and
finishes. Translations into the Arabic language shall be provided for all such publications.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 51
SUBSECTION 4.2.4 COST ESTIMATE STANDARDS
4.2.4 COST ESTIMATE STANDARDS
A. General
1. Cost estimates are to be submitted according to the Contract Deliverables by submittal
stage per Subsection 4.2.C as well as required per individual A/E and/or EPC Contractor
Technical Contract.
2. Cost estimates submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail must have backup
documentation. Quotations shall not be more than three (3) months old.
3. A/E and/or EPC Contractors must remain aware of current market rates for labor and
materials. Material rates may be compared to the outside market (e.g.: London exchange)
as these are world-wide trends.
4. Estimates must use up-to-date information for materials, labor, and transportation.
5. Estimated prices submitted by A/E and/or EPC Contractors are not meant for competitive
bidding – they must be reasonable and justifiable.
6. All estimates shall be cross-checked for consistency.
7. All calculations and formulas shall be limited to two (2) significant figures to the right of the
decimal place.
B. Overhead
1. Overhead charges are to be calculated and not presumed as a lump sum percentage.
Example: Labor costs may be based on the organization chart included in the contract
proposal document
C. Escalation
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must use current data as a base and allow for escalation
of cost to the midpoint of the construction contract. The Royal Commission in Jubail will
provide the percentage to be used for calculating escalation cost.
D. Contingency
1. At the 30% design stage (or earlier), the A/E and/or EPC Contractor may use contingency
factors to allow for a lack of vendor quotations.
2. Contingency factors shall approach zero (0) as vendor quotations become firmer later in
design.
3. Contingency is applied to cost only and not estimated quantities.
4. If wastage is to be considered for an item, it shall be carried out in the cost breakdown and
not the quantities.
E. Lifecycle
1. Estimates shall include the effects of any value analysis recommendations required by the
Royal Commission in Jubail as a result of a value analysis-life cycle cost analysis.
2. Refer to Subsection 4.3.8 for more detailed information on life cycle cost analyses.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 52
SUBSECTION 4.2.5 CALCULATIONS
4.2.5 CALCULATIONS
A. General
1. All calculations used for design shall be submitted according to the Contract Deliverables
by submittal stage per Subsection 4.2.C and as required per the Saudi Building Code, and
the individual A/E and/or EPC Contractor Technical Contract. See Section 2.4, References,
for additional Codes and Standards by discipline.
2. Calculations are to be grouped by discipline and subject matter. A cover sheet is required
to precede each group and contain the following information:
a. Name of Company, Organization, or Consultant submitting the calculations
b. Contract title and number
c. Discipline and subject
d. Name, date, and signature of designer and checker
e. Name of discipline supervisor, his signature, and date of approval
f. List of references used such as Codes, Standards, textbook, etc.
g. Index that itemizes all major parts of the design
3. Calculations must be prepared in SI units. Conventional units are only permitted when
calculations are made in compliance with a code or using a computer program that has not
yet been matriculated to SI units. Regardless, end results shall be in SI units. Calculations
completed in conventional units must be converted.
4. All calculations must be clear, concise, and easily followed.
B. Content
1. Submitted calculation sheets shall contain or present the following information:
a. List of all design parameters and assumptions used
b. List of all information used in the calculations with proper referencing
c. Example: soil bearing capacity = 100 kPa, see foundation and subsurface
investigation report by __________, dated __________, page _____.
d. Subject and calculation number
e. Each sheet is to be numbered “Sheet No. _____ of _____”
f. Include the designer’s initial on every sheet
2. Anytime a previously calculated value is used in another set of calculations, it shall be
referenced with a page number of where it was previously made.
3. Include sketches as necessary.
4. Highlight all conclusive calculation results so that the checker may follow it with ease.
C. Computer Aided Calculations
1. The following are mandatory requirements for use of any computer software employed in
the preparation of calculations:
a. For commercially purchased software used in the analysis, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall submit a signed and dated statement that it is an up-to-date legally

Rev. 1 4.2 - 53
licensed copy of the software and properly installed on computer equipment that
meets the software vendor’s requirements.
b. If the design software is developed for the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s own use it is
necessary to submit a signed and dated statement of verification. Statements of
verification and validation with supporting documentation are required for all design
software on Royal Commission in Jubail projects as follows:
1) Verification: documentation that the software gives correct answers as judged
against standard problems with hand calculated solutions or against similar
software.
2) Validation: signed statements that the software is being properly applied to the
problems it was intended to solve.
3) Verification and validation shall pre-date the first use of the software on the
Project.
c. Calculation printouts shall be organized and shall include enough narrative to explain
what is being presented along with a summary of the results. A binder of computer
printouts without this narrative will not be accepted.
2. If structural engineering design software is used, the calculations shall include the
following:
a. Description of the software used in the analysis
b. Explanation of any non-industry standard vocabulary used in the software
c. Idealization of the structure or a brief explanation on how the structure is
mathematically modeled
d. Model showing the node, members, and element numbering and loads for each load
case
e. Input file and load analysis showing how the joint, member, and element loads are
calculated
f. Output summary showing the member forces, joint displacements, and support
reactions. If necessary, the governing forces and stresses shall be identified in the
output data
g. Design conclusion or the summary of adopted design results
h. Example: In a reinforced rectangular concrete beam design, the width and depth of
the section, size and number of longitudinal reinforcing bars, and size and spacing of
stirrups
3. Checking of Calculations:
a. All calculations prepared by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be checked for
completeness, accuracy, numerical and geometrical correctness, resolutions for
interfaces and for any details affecting quality, constructability, and function of the end
product.
b. This checking is a distinct form of review and shall be performed by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor for all documents regardless of whether the document is selected by
the Royal Commission in Jubail for review.
c. Checking is also part of the regular design process and shall be performed by
individuals with equal or senior professional experience and competence to the

Rev. 1 4.2 - 54
originator of the document. No calculations shall be computed and checked by the

same person.
d. Calculation checkers and their work shall be identified and documented with dates.
e. Special attention shall be paid to the identification of interfaces and interferences to
their coordination including proper sequencing of construction and to the solution
between interfering Contract Packages and prepared by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractors.
4. Approval of the Calculations by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor:
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall designate an Engineering Supervisor or a
Project Manager who shall be accountable for all calculations and calculation
checking.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Engineering Supervisor or Project Manager shall
assign senior discipline engineers to perform all checking activities, supervise work to
assure compliance with requirements herein, review the design work and check the
engineering work to his satisfaction, and finally, provide written approval prior to
calculation being submitted to the Royal Commission in Jubail for review.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 55
SUBSECTION 4.2.6 SCHEDULES OF QUANTITIES
4.2.6 SCHEDULES OF QUANTITIES
A. Schedule of Quantities and Prices

1. The Schedule of Quantities and Prices (SOQP) shall be included in the Request for
Proposal (RFP) documents.
2. The SOQP shall be divided into divisions that follow the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI) 50 Division Standard for numbering and titles. The RCJ provides an SOQP
template and standard descriptions that define the work and material included for each pay
item. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor forwards proposals for items not covered by RCJ-
provided template/descriptions to the RCJ for approval.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for providing building system estimates,
detailed component estimates, and material take off (MTO) information for all elements
within the Project. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is additionally responsible for estimating
the man hours to construct the Project based on the design documentation.
4. The supporting information, generated by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, is for the RCJ’s
reference only. The bidding Contractors will see the quantities but not the estimate pricing.
B. Material Take Off
1. The Material Take Off (MTO) shall be included with every design submittal from the A/E or
EPC Contractor at 30%, 60%, 90% and 100% complete stage.
2. The AE or EPC Contractor shall include a Schedule of Floor Areas in the MTO.
3. The MTO shall be assembled with a QA/QC signature sheet; a clear index page;
numerically ascending page numbers; Pay Item numbers and Titles (which are to be
repeated in the SOQP); and measurement calculations for each Pay Item - fully cross
referenced against either Drawings, Specifications or Computer Aided Design summary
sheets.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 56
SUBSECTION 4.2.7 RFP DOCUMENTS
4.2.7 RFP DOCUMENTS
A. A/E Responsibilities
1. Per the requirements of the A/E Technical Contract, the A/E completes various elements
to be included in the RFP, which may include the following:
a. Scope of work
b. Design calculations
c. Drawings and specifications
d. Schedule of Quantities and Price
e. Estimated man hours and preliminary construction schedule
2. The RFP document itself is created by the RCJ with the information provided by the A/E.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 57
SUBSECTION 4.2.8 REVIEW/APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES
4.2.8 REVIEW/APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES
A. Submissions
1. Design submissions are to be provided to the RCJ in alignment with the Contract
Deliverables by submittal stage table in Subsection 4.2.C as well as required by the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor’s Technical Contract.
2. Submitted drawings shall conform to guidelines identified in this manual including all
drafting guidelines in Chapter 4.
B. Reviews
1. Design Reviews – both internal, within the A/E and/or EPC Contractor firm, and external
by the RCJ, are governed by established procedures that define the personnel
responsibilities, process, review items, and quality checking required.
2. Review of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor drawings or documents by the RCJ shall not
relieve the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of any of its obligations to meet all the requirements
of the Contract nor relieve the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of the responsibility for the
correctness of such drawings and documents. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall make
any changes that are necessary to make the work conform to the provisions and intent of
the Contract.
3. Under no circumstances shall the requirement for reviewing the submitted Design drawings
be waived.
4. Standard review process of submittals made by A/E and/or A/E EPC Contractors requires
RCJ reviewers to make comments and assign codes on standard review forms, which are
then transmitted to the A/E and/or A/E EPC Contractor for responses. Depending on the
assigned review code, A/E and/or A/E EPC Contractor’s compliance is verified in a
resubmittal of the reviewed package or in the package submitted for the following stage.
At the discretion of the RCJ, the following nonstandard process may be requested for some
reviews.
a. Drawing reviewed by the RCJ’s Reviewer will be labeled “Review Print”, dated, and
initialed by the Reviewer and shall be used for review purposes only. While a drawing
is in review with the RCJ reviewer, no changes are to be made to that drawing without
full coordination with the Reviewer.
b. The RCJ’s Reviewer will review the drawing’s conformance to this manual and all
drafting guidelines identified in Chapter 4. The Reviewer will not propose changes to
arrangements, methods of presentation, or details unless they conflict with this
manual.
c. The RCJ’s Reviewer comments will be in the following format:
1) Red Pen: written comments for correction
2) Yellow Highlighter: correct work that has been checked
3) Red Highlighter: work that requires changes, additions, and/or deletions
(typically including red pen comments)
d. Upon receipt by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
scan the Reviewer’s marked up original hardcopy for record. Once changes have
been revised on the digital drawing, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall highlight
those items in green. Once all items are highlighted in green, the individual from the

Rev. 1 4.2 - 58
SUBSECTION 4.2.8 REVIEW/APPROVAL PROCEDURES AND MILESTONES
A/E and/or EPC Contractor who completed the revision work will sign and date the
hard copy adjacent to the Reviewer’s signature and scan for record.
e. Once the reviewer is satisfied that the drawings are in conformance with this manual,
the Reviewer will request the corrected drawing be resubmitted for record. This
drawing will be reviewed by the Reviewer’s supervisor for general conformance to this
manual.

Rev. 1 4.2 - 59
SECTION 4.3 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.3.0 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Using this Section .......................................................................................................... 1
4.3.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 2
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
4.3.2 PRELIMINARY STUDIES .............................................................................................. 3
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
4.3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL (ASSESSMENTS, STUDIES AND PERMITTING) ....................... 4
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4
B. References .................................................................................................................... 4
4.3.4 SUSTAINABILITY REPORT.......................................................................................... 5
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 5
B. Submission Requirements ............................................................................................. 5
4.3.5 VALUE ENGINEERING ................................................................................................. 6
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 6
B. Phasing .......................................................................................................................... 6
4.3.6 DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBRS) ............................................................................. 7
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 7
B. DBR Contents ................................................................................................................ 7
C. Submission, Review, and Approval ............................................................................... 8
4.3.7 LAND ALLOCATION REQUESTS ................................................................................ 9
A. Definition ........................................................................................................................ 9
B. A/E Responsibilities ....................................................................................................... 9
4.3.8 LIFE CYCLE COSTING AND DESIGN SERVICE LIFE .............................................. 10

Rev. 1 4.3 - i
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 10
B. Phasing ......................................................................................................................... 10
4.3.9 RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING .............................................. 11
A. Civil Defense and Industrial Safety............................................................................... 11
B. Process Safety Management ....................................................................................... 11
C. Environmental Risk Management Planning ................................................................. 11
4.3.10 THIRD PARTY CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND INTERFACE
CONTROL DOCUMENT) ............................................................................................. 13
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 13
B. Interface Control Document (ICD) ................................................................................ 13
4.3.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROCEDURES ......... 15
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 15
B. Process ......................................................................................................................... 15
4.3.12 BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS................................................... 16
A. Alternates – Contractor requirements shall be defined in project specifications .......... 16
B. Allowances – Contractor requirements shall be defined in project specifications ........ 16
C. Substitutions – Contractor requirements shall be defined in project specifications ..... 16
D. A/E Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 16
4.3.13 CONTRACTUAL RESTRICTIONS ............................................................................... 17
A. Contract Modifications .................................................................................................. 17
B. Work Restrictions ......................................................................................................... 17
4.3.14 SPECIAL PROCEDURES ............................................................................................ 18
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 18

Rev. 1 4.3 - ii
SUBSECTION 4.3.0 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS
4.3.0 DESIGN PHASE REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining design phase requirements to be used for the Royal Commission in
Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E) or Engineer,
Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Drawing requirements in Subsection 4.2.2, Field
Investigations and Existing Conditions in Section 4.4, and Construction Phase
requirements in Section 4.5.
2. Applicability
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Chapter 4 abbreviations
Not Applicable
6. Codes
Not Applicable
7. Standards
1. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as
appropriate.
8. Related Sections
1. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Sections related to Chapter 4
9. Approvals
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and act on all project submissions,
reference Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Using this Section
This Section further details required processes and documentation for the design phase and the
role the A/E and/or EPC Contractor design team plays in establishing a basis for the Project,
analyzing Project needs, evaluating options, and checking the results. This Section is intended
to be general for all disciplines. Refer to Chapter 5 for discipline-specific information.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 1
4.3.1 GENERAL
A. Introduction
1. Section 4.3 covers the requirements to be met by A/E and/or EPC Contractors in the design
of Projects for the Royal Commission in Jubail (RCJ) and within their jurisdiction. Additional
requirements may be included in the A/E and/or EPC Contractor Technical Contract.
2. Any exceptions or deviations from these requirements shall be submitted to the RCJ for
review. Only once written approval from the RCJ is received shall such modifications be
considered acceptable for the specified Project.
a. Exceptions or deviations are at the RCJ’s discretion and those permitted on one
Project may or may not be approved on other Projects.
b. All modifications must be clearly identified in the Design Basis Report, refer to
Subsection 4.3.6.
3. The design requirements are for reference only. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is not
relieved of the obligation to ensure that the work performed by them is fit for its intended
use and meets generally applicable criteria for quality and safety. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor are the Design Authority and as such, shall be responsible for the quality of
work and services performed by them as per the conditions of the Technical Contract.
4. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall give due consideration to good design practice that
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Design criteria
b. Material availability
c. Rapid construction (if applicable)
d. Maintainability
e. Energy and water conservation
f. Public safety and protection of property
g. Standardized components / equipment
h. Acoustics control
i. Corrosion protection and control
j. Third party approvals
k. End user document verification
l. Reference and as-built drawings
m. Existing facilities
1) Safety plan extension/improvement
2) Existing structure stability
3) Phasing and construction sequence
4) Conformance with existing
5) Demolition work

Rev. 1 4.3 - 2
SUBSECTION 4.3.2 PRELIMINARY STUDIES
4.3.2 PRELIMINARY STUDIES
A. General
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall conduct preliminary studies to validate the Project
scope and budget as defined in the Technical Contract. The intention is to generate high-
level information that will be the foundation for detailed design development for the Project.
These studies may include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Feasibility studies / reports
b. Master planning
c. Programming, space planning
d. Traffic and other site analyses
e. Concept design
f. Cost estimate / validation
g. Code Analysis
h. Water Usage Projections

Rev. 1 4.3 - 3
SUBSECTION 4.3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL (ASSESSMENTS, STUDIES AND PERMITTING)
4.3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL (ASSESSMENTS, STUDIES AND PERMITTING)
A. General
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail has always been recognized as a leader in environmental
performance management and has encouraged industrial growth in the industrial cities
while maintaining a fine-tuned balance and harmony between the environmental protection
and heavy industrialization. The RCJ continues to refine its environmental management
system to better support decision making and to enhance the ability to protect the
environment and the public health.
2. The industries and environment co-exist in an integrated fashion through transparency and
accountability with increasing use of cleaner and energy efficient technology, reducing
potential environmental impacts, influencing positively on local community, and upholding
the highest ethical standards.
3. Within the Royal Commission in Jubail jurisdiction, environmental processes are governed
by the Royal Commission in Jubail Environmental Regulations document.
4. Aspects of the environment to consider include, but are not limited to:
a. Air Environment
b. Water Environment
c. Hazardous Materials Management
d. Waste Management
e. Dredging
f. Noise
B. References
See Subsection 4.4.3 Environmental Investigations and Studies for more detailed information.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 4
SUBSECTION 4.3.4 SUSTAINABILITY REPORT
4.3.4 SUSTAINABILITY REPORT
A. General
1. A/E and/or EPC Contractors are required to monitor sustainable features, products, and
systems designed into Projects and submit reports and supporting evidence throughout
the design process as documentation.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is to satisfy these two requirements:
a. Producing a sustainable project objectively supported by documented life cycle
analysis and a triple bottom line goal setting.
b. Following the steps required and having the documentation in hand supporting an
effort to procure LEED certification if the RC chooses to do so.
B. Submission Requirements
1. Section 3.4 identifies detailed requirements for sustainability and documentation on
projects within the RCJ’s jurisdiction.
2. The DBR and the Sustainability Report are complementary, and each must be reflected in
the other.
3. Pre-design: Provide the specified documentation of the goal-setting workshop. Refer to
Section 3.4.
4. 10% Stage: Identify the Project’s sustainability goals in a report
a. A LEED Checklist must be submitted as part of the documentation. For
infrastructure projects a CEEQUAL Checklist or score sheet is to be submitted in
lieu of the LEED Checklist.
5. 30% Stage Provide information on how the Project design intends to achieve the
sustainability goals in a report
a. For infrastructure projects a CEEQUAL Checklist or score sheet can be submitted in
lieu of the LEED checklist.
b. Identify any additional first or life-cycle costs that may be incurred by implementing
each item
c. Each sustainability effort must be approved, in writing, by the RCJ in order to proceed
with them into detailed design beyond 30% design.
6. 100% Stage Final design report indicating what sustainability measures were implemented
in the design

Rev. 1 4.3 - 5
SUBSECTION 4.3.5 VALUE ENGINEERING
4.3.5 VALUE ENGINEERING
A. General
1. Value Engineering (VE) is carried out when the design cost of a project is more than its
budgeted cost or when the A/E and/or EPC Contractor identifies areas for value
improvement. The goal is to optimize a project’s value by reducing its life cycle cost while
preserving basic functions and program requirements.
2. VE may be accomplished with alternate products, systems, or design strategies to affect
constructability, suitability, functionality, material availability, safety and reliability,
operations, maintenance, etc.
3. If VE efforts propose alternate strategies that conflict with Royal Commission in Jubail
Standards and Guidelines, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall have these conflicts
approved by the RCJ in writing prior to proceeding with any design modifications.
Complete justification of each recommended strategy is required, including benefits, risks,
effect on other disciplines, life cycle cost analysis, and impact on possible LEED
certification.
B. Phasing
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will hold VE workshops at the 10% stage as needed to
improve the Project value.
2. A Value Engineering Report shall be submitted after the 30% stage submittal. This report
shall include a list of proposed VE efforts, complete technical explanation/impact of each
item, closure of all comments, proposed savings, and the RCJ’s approval of any proposed
items that deviate from the RCJ’s standards and guidelines.
3. VE is not to be carried out after the 30% stage (or 60% stage if applicable) of the Project.
VE after the 30/60% stage will not be included unless otherwise identified in the A/E and/or
EPC Technical Contract.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 6
SUBSECTION 4.3.6 DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBRs)
4.3.6 DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBRS)
A. Introduction
1. A Design Basis Report (DBR) is a document compiled by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
to convey the background, intent, references, and precedents used to design each
operational system and infrastructure component required for a design Project. The
objective of the DBR is to identify the Project objectives and parameters as well as define
all design requirements and constraints.
2. The DBR shall not be a copy of the GEM or other reference documents. DBRs are Project
specific and must be customized per Project. The DBR is not a description of the design
solution, but rather a statement of the design problem and the constraints.
3. The DBR and Sustainability Report complement each other, and therefore, each must
reflect the other.
B. DBR Contents
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize the Royal Commission in Jubail’s basic DBR
format and shall modify and augment it to address unique Project needs.
2. Every DBR shall contain the following descriptive items:
a. Introduction
1) Project overview (background, purpose, related and adjacent work)
2) Supporting documents
b. Scope of Work
1) Assumptions
2) Any relevant additional analysis or assessments
3) Risk assessment
c. Design Criteria
2) Referenced Regulations, Codes, Standards, and Guidelines
a. Basis of Design (discipline, system, and/or component specific)
1) Introduction (description)
2) Basis narrative for each component / assembly / system
(a) Number of occupants/capacity
(b) Primary activity and secondary activities
(c) Special requirements for the space
(d) Relationships to other spaces (adjacencies).
(e) Approximate net area of each space based on the above.
(f) Approximate gross area based on the net area plus walls, circulation, and
infrastructure.
b. Appendices, Abbreviations, and Definitions as needed
c. Any RCJ approved modifications of, exemptions to, or deviations from the RCJ
Standards and requirements as defined in the GEM, Standard Specifications, and
Standard Details.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 7
SUBSECTION 4.3.6 DESIGN BASIS REPORTS (DBRs)
3. At a minimum, each DBR shall demonstrate that the A/E and/or EPC Contractor has:
a. Analyzed and defined all functional requirements.
b. Analyzed and defined the performance targets.
c. Considered the integration of all systems, sub-systems, and components and fully
identified and defined all interfaces.
d. Identified and mitigated risks and constructability issues related to the design.
e. Developed all relevant preliminary design drawings (e.g.: general arrangements,
location plans, schematics, single line diagrams, etc.).
f. Performed and recorded any studies required to support and or validate the design
basis.
g. Identified and assessed all Environmental, Safety, and Health issues related to the
design including the sustainability of the system or component over its lifetime.
h. Identified and stated all the operational and maintenance documentation required for
the system or component.
i. Identified and considered the input of third-party stakeholders and obtained approvals
as required.
C. Submission, Review, and Approval
1. Each DBR shall be preceded by a standard cover sheet issued by the Royal Commission
in Jubail that lists project information and revisions/approvals for the document. The DBR
is a controlled document that contains the signatures of all preparers, reviewers, and
approvers at each stage of design.
2. As the DBR is the foundation of the design, a draft must be submitted before beginning
design. The DBR must be essentially completed and submitted at the 10% stage.
3. Each DBR shall be revised and maintained throughout the total life of the Project – from
inception to completion – and capture all revisions to the design problem, functions, or
relationships. The source and reason of each revision is to be identified for retention as a
record of the Permanent Work.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 8
SUBSECTION 4.3.7 LAND ALLOCATION REQUESTS
4.3.7 LAND ALLOCATION REQUESTS
A. Definition
1. A Land Allocation Request (LAR) is required to record, update, and control the allocation
of land used for any purpose – either temporary or permanent – within the Royal
Commission in Jubail jurisdiction.
2. Land allocation is administered by UPD, GIS Section.
B. A/E Responsibilities
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor assesses the need for an LAR and defines the area
required for the Project. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will provide the RCJ with support
material for the RCJ to complete and submit and LAR.
2. At the completion of the LAR process, a parcel of land may be allocated for the specific
Project. If a request is denied, a resubmittal may achieve approval with exceptions, revised
time frame, alternate location, etc.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 9
SUBSECTION 4.3.8 LIFE CYCLE COSTING AND DESIGN SERVICE LIFE
4.3.8 LIFE CYCLE COSTING AND DESIGN SERVICE LIFE
A. General
1. Life Cycle Costing is a process by which competing systems and design options are
evaluated for cost effectiveness. Though one system may carry a higher first cost than
another, when considered in conjunction with other systems it may make the entire project
cost less or operate at a lower cost. The intent is to look at how systems work together as
well as holistic costs.
2. Design Service Life identifies the expected life of components and systems. The life cycle
cost analysis requires an evaluation of designed components, their designed life, and the
impact that lifespan will have on operations. Though a component may have a low first
cost, it may become prohibitively expensive if it needs to be replaced often due to a low
design service life.
B. Phasing
1. Life Cycle Costing analyses and Design Service Life evaluations are to occur only at the
30% and 60% (if applicable) phases of the project.
2. Wholesale modifications to systems and components after these phases will have a
significant impact on the design process efficacy and will not be included unless specifically
identified by the Royal Commission in Jubail in the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Technical
Contract.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 10
SUBSECTION 4.3.9 RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING
4.3.9 RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING
A. Civil Defense and Industrial Safety

1. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall incorporate in their design the High Commission of
Industrial Security (HCIS), Department of the Saudi Arabian Ministry of the Interior
“Security Directives for Industrial Facilities” requirements for civil defense and industrial
safety where applicable.
2. Areas of interest to the HCIS include by are not limited to:
a. Air raid shelters
b. Fire resistance of building materials
c. Spacing and isolation of high-risk facilities
d. Fire-fighting systems
e. Stand-by fire water systems
f. Fire exits from structures
g. Electrical wiring and color coding
h. Dikes and drainage systems for flammable liquids
i. Civil defense warning system
j. Fire alarm systems within facilities
k. Lightning protection systems
l. Earthquake design criteria
m. Industrial safety
n. Operating manuals for safety-related systems
o. Communications system
p. Emergency power systems
q. Security systems
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals from the HCIS for the
assessment and mitigating/counter security measures to be implemented as part of the
works. Where necessary the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall employ specialist sub-
consultants as required by the HCIS to perform the security vulnerability/risk assessments
and design of mitigation/counter measures.
B. Process Safety Management
1. OSHA PSM Standard
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall investigate the applicability of US OSHA
Process Safety Management (PSM) Program and update the Risk Management Plan
accordingly. Refer to PSM requirements under USA 29 CFR1910.119.
C. Environmental Risk Management Planning
1. PME Major Accident Prevention Standard

Rev. 1 4.3 - 11
SUBSECTION 4.3.9 RISK MANAGEMENT AND EMERGENCY PLANNING
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall investigate the applicability of the PME Major
Accident Prevention Standard and update the Risk Management Plan accordingly. Refer
to Subsection 3.5.3.B.2, Saudi PME National Standards, for guidance.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 12
SUBSECTION 4.3.10 THIRD PARTY CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND INTERFACE
CONTROL DOCUMENT)
4.3.10 THIRD PARTY CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND INTERFACE CONTROL

DOCUMENT)
A. General
1. Refer to Subsection 5.1.4 for the definition and requirements of Third Parties.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate and include all provisions necessary to
ensure that interfaces with third parties are successfully served and maintained throughout
the execution of the Project.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate all studies, reports, and design
documentation to propose tie-in locations for all utilities to the new facility or facilities with
the concerned utility agencies (see Subsection 5.1.4 for Third Party Requirements).
Furthermore, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor will work with the Royal Commission in Jubail
to obtain the necessary approvals from the concerned third parties to complete the design.
B. Interface Control Document (ICD)
1. This document is prepared by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and is a collection of
information intended to document, control, and manage third party interfaces for the
Project.
2. Third Party Requirements are described in detail in Subsection 5.1.4.
3. All ICDs shall be complete and submitted as part of the 30% stage and are to be updated
and attached to the Issued for Bid and Issued for Construction documents.
4. List of Interfaces – a list of each interface with a unique identifier and appropriate
information necessary for the procurement and installation of the permanent work that is
affected by the interface, either directly or indirectly. Appropriate information shall cover
but not be limited to, the following types of information:
a. Contract and drawing references to as-built work
b. Drawings that show the physical limits and levels of the works to be constructed
c. Tolerance and geometric requirements of interface work
d. Construction tolerances that shall be incorporated into the work
e. Interface points with neighboring structures and systems
f. Sizes and capacities needed at interface points
g. Design loads and capacities of interface elements
h. Vendor and supplier information at the interface point
i. Roles and responsibility at the interface control point
5. Interface Points – defined wherever the permanent work requires interaction with the
following:
a. Existence of, connection to, and/or functional compatibility with existing fully
operational (verified by a site visit) infrastructure
b. Work in progress from other Royal Commission in Jubail contracts
c. An outside entity (third party) and/or a dependency on work to be completed by others
d. Any facility outside the scope of the design

Rev. 1 4.3 - 13
SUBSECTION 4.3.10 THIRD PARTY CONTRACT INTERFACE COORDINATION (AND INTERFACE
CONTROL DOCUMENT)
6. Interface Drawings – each uniquely identified interface shown on a drawing where the
interface appears, tagged by the unique identifier to reference back to the List of Interfaces.
7. Dependency Matrix – a form provided by the Royal Commission in Jubail, this document
allows the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to record all scope, contract dependencies, and
interfaces. This document is started at project inception and maintained throughout the
design process. Information in this document will be used to develop ICDs and the detailed
design.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 14
SUBSECTION 4.3.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROCEDURES
4.3.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROCEDURES
A. General
1. The quality of work expected from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall, at a minimum,
conform to Royal Commission in Jubail Standards, guidelines, requirements, and
specifications.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall nominate a Quality Control Manager that is
responsible for all quality matters on the designated Project. Sub-consultants, suppliers,
and sub-tiers thereof shall each also be required to nominate a Quality Control
Representative for the Project.
3. The Quality Control Manager and each Quality Control Representative will be responsible
for establishing and implementing a Quality Management System (QMS) as defined in
Subsection 1.1.3.C.
B. Process
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall perform quality checks internal to his own
organization before submitting it for review by the Royal Commission in Jubail, defined as
follows:
a. The review shall be completed by independent personnel within the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor’s organization and overseen by a senior manager that is not associated
with the team performing the work.
b. Checked work shall be signed as such by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Authorized
Representative and co-signed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s QA/QC Manager
prior to its submission to the RCJ. In addition, the checked work shall include
evidence of checked documents, drawings, preliminary calculations, etc. to
demonstrate the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s overall compliance and adherence to
this procedure.
c. If an independent organization other than the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is used for
the quality check, then a letter on the company letterhead from the independent
organization is to be provided with a signature from that company’s management.
2. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall maintain a database for the storage and control of
QA/QC information that will allow the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to control and retain all
documents such as drawings, specifications, calculations, reports, audits, requests, etc.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor, his sub-consultants, suppliers, and sub-tiers thereof shall
make available for audit all records necessary to demonstrate to the Royal Commission in
Jubail that the design services have been executed in accordance with the Contract.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 15
SUBSECTION 4.3.12 BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
4.3.12 BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Alternates – Define contractor requirements in project specifications

B. Allowances – Define Contractor requirements in project specifications
C. Substitutions – Define Contractor requirements in project specifications
D. A/E Responsibilities
1. During the bidding process, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for responding
to bidder questions and preparing addenda, as required, and directed by the RCJ. The A/E
will not have direct contact with the bidders.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 16
SUBSECTION 4.3.13 CONTRACTUAL RESTRICTIONS
4.3.13 CONTRACTUAL RESTRICTIONS
A. Contract Modifications
1. Contract modifications may come in the form of Design Change Notices (DCN), Technical
Queries (TQ), Technical Submittals (TS), or as otherwise directed in writing by the RCJ.
2. The A/E is required to produce documentation for RCJ production of DCNs as described
in Subsection 4.5.2.
B. Work Restrictions
1. The A/E has limited responsibility and Contractor contact during construction. The A/E will
interface with the RCJ only and produce information for DCNs and/or respond to a
Contractor TQ or TS at the RCJ’s discretion.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 17
SUBSECTION 4.3.14 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
4.3.14 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
A. General
1. The Royal Commission in Jubail reserves the right to identify Special Procedures on a
project-by-project basis. Special Procedures identified for one project may or may not be
applied to other projects.
2. Any special procedures shall be outlined in the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s Technical
Contract prior to beginning work.

Rev. 1 4.3 - 18
SECTION 4.4 FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4.1 SURVEYING.................................................................................................................. 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 3
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 4
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 4
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 4
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 4
C. General Requirements .................................................................................................. 5
1. Land Surveyor ............................................................................................................... 5
2. Land Surveying Manager .............................................................................................. 5
3. Bathymetric and Hydrographic Surveying Manager ...................................................... 5
4. Senior Surveyor ............................................................................................................. 5
5. Instrument man/Rodman ............................................................................................... 5
D. Coordinate System ........................................................................................................ 5
1. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 5
2. Type of Coordinate Systems ......................................................................................... 5
E. Elevations and Survey Datum ....................................................................................... 6
1. Datum ............................................................................................................................ 7
2. Measurements ............................................................................................................... 7
3. Field Notes..................................................................................................................... 7
F. Hydrographic and Tidal Data ......................................................................................... 8
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 8
2. Standard References ..................................................................................................... 8
3. Survey Coverage ........................................................................................................... 8
4. Survey Equipment ......................................................................................................... 9
5. Survey Procedures ....................................................................................................... 10
G. Construction Staking .................................................................................................... 12
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 12

Rev. 1 4.4 - i
2. Pre-construction ........................................................................................................... 13
3. Construction.................................................................................................................. 18
4. Post - Construction, As-built Surveys and Record Drawings ....................................... 27
H. Utility Rights of Way ..................................................................................................... 29
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 29
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 29
3. Establishing Rights-of-Way .......................................................................................... 29
4. Finalizing Rights-of-Way ............................................................................................... 30
I. Digital Terrain Modeling (DTM) .................................................................................... 31
1. Synonyms ..................................................................................................................... 31
2. DEM .............................................................................................................................. 31
3. DTM Sources ................................................................................................................ 31
4. Methods ........................................................................................................................ 31
5. Accuracy ....................................................................................................................... 31
6. DTM Requirements for all Projects: ............................................................................. 31
J. Surveys ......................................................................................................................... 32
1. Aerial Survey ................................................................................................................ 32
2. Satellite Survey ............................................................................................................. 38
3. Bathymetric Surveys ..................................................................................................... 38
4. Geodetic Control Surveys ............................................................................................. 42
5. Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Control Surveys ...................................................... 42
6. Precise, Primary and Secondary Vertical Control Surveys .......................................... 44
7. Cadastral Control Surveys............................................................................................ 44
8. Cadastral Lot Surveys .................................................................................................. 44
9. As Built and Topographic Surveys ............................................................................... 48
10. Verifying Surveys by Others ......................................................................................... 50
11. Monitoring Large Area Subsidence .............................................................................. 50
12. Monitoring Horizontal and Vertical Movement of Structures ........................................ 51
13. Monitoring and Evaluating Ground Water Elevations and Data ................................... 53
14. New Witness Posts ....................................................................................................... 54
15. Fundamental Benchmark ............................................................................................. 55
16. Geodetic Control Pillar .................................................................................................. 55
17. Second and Third Order Control Monuments .............................................................. 55
18. First, Second, and Third Order Control Plaques .......................................................... 56
19. Boundary Marker .......................................................................................................... 56

Rev. 1 4.4 - ii
20. Bronze Cadastral Survey Plaque ................................................................................. 56

21. Lot Monuments ............................................................................................................. 56
22. Underwater Surveys ..................................................................................................... 56
4.4.2 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION ............................................................................ 59
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 59
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 59
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 59
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 59
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 60
5. General Requirements ................................................................................................. 61
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 62
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 62
8. References ................................................................................................................... 64
B. Geotechnical Investigation ........................................................................................... 67
1. Background................................................................................................................... 67
2. Boring Requirements .................................................................................................... 70
C. Groundwater Conditions ............................................................................................... 76
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 76
2. Assessment of Groundwater Conditions ...................................................................... 76
3. Groundwater Measurement – Water Levels (Pressures) ............................................. 76
4. Groundwater Measurement – Hydraulic Conductivity .................................................. 77
D. Geotechnical Equipment .............................................................................................. 77
1. General Field Equipment .............................................................................................. 77
2. Personal Protective Equipment .................................................................................... 77
3. Drilling Equipment ........................................................................................................ 77
4. Sampling Equipment .................................................................................................... 79
5. Rock Core Sampling ..................................................................................................... 79
6. In-Situ Field Testing Equipment ................................................................................... 80
7. Laboratory Testing Equipment ..................................................................................... 80
E. Laboratory Testing ........................................................................................................ 80
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 80
2. Sample Selection .......................................................................................................... 80
3. Index and Classification Tests ...................................................................................... 81
4. Engineering Property Tests .......................................................................................... 83
F. Geophysical Testing ..................................................................................................... 85

Rev. 1 4.4 - iii
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 85
2. Geophysical Testing Methods ...................................................................................... 85
3. Conducting Geophysical Testing .................................................................................. 87
4. Reporting ...................................................................................................................... 87
G. In-Situ Testing............................................................................................................... 88
1. In-Situ Tests.................................................................................................................. 88
H. Off-Shore Geotechnical Investigations ......................................................................... 91
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 91
2. Useful Resources ......................................................................................................... 91
3. Key considerations ....................................................................................................... 92
4. Types of Investigation ................................................................................................... 92
5. Geophysical Investigation Techniques ......................................................................... 93
6. Geotechnical Investigation Techniques ........................................................................ 94
7. Vessels, Platforms and Deployment Systems for Investigation ................................... 94
8. Positioning .................................................................................................................... 94
9. Offshore Laboratory Testing ......................................................................................... 95
10. Offshore In-situ Tests ................................................................................................... 95
4.4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS AND STUDIES .............................................. 96
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 96
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 96
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 96
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 96
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 97
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 98
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 98
8. Related Sections .......................................................................................................... 98
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 99
B. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) ..................................................................... 99
1. Purpose and Summary ................................................................................................. 99
C. Environmental Site Assessment for Recognized Concerns and Conditions ............... 100
1. Environmental Site Assessment Report Standard ...................................................... 100
D. Geo-environmental Investigations (Surface and Subsurface Sampling Protocols) .... 106
1. Work Plan .................................................................................................................... 106
2. Examples of Investigations .......................................................................................... 109

Rev. 1 4.4 - iv
3. Investigation Report ..................................................................................................... 113

4.4.4 DECONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL ............................................... 115
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 115
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 115
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 115
3. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 115
4. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 115
5. General Requirements ................................................................................................ 115
6. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 115
7. Standards .................................................................................................................... 115
8. Related Sections ......................................................................................................... 115
9. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 116
B. Pre-Demolition Surveys ............................................................................................... 116
1. Asbestos Containing Material ...................................................................................... 116
2. Lead Based Paint ........................................................................................................ 116
3. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Survey and Sampling ............................................. 116
4. Universal Wastes and Other Materials ........................................................................ 116
C. Waste Handling and Disposal ..................................................................................... 116
1. Basics .......................................................................................................................... 116
D. Underground Storage Tank Removal .......................................................................... 116
1. Underground Storage Tank (UST) Closure ................................................................. 116
2. Tank Location Restoration ........................................................................................... 117
4.4.5 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT ............................................ 118
A. Purpose ....................................................................................................................... 118
1. Collect and Summarize Data ....................................................................................... 118
2. Summary ..................................................................................................................... 118
B. Report Content ............................................................................................................ 118
1. Executive Summary ..................................................................................................... 118
2. Introduction/Site Background ...................................................................................... 118
3. Methodology ................................................................................................................ 118
4. Previous Investigations ................................................................................................ 118
5. Investigation(s) Conducted for Project ........................................................................ 118
6. Summary of Conditions and Conclusions ................................................................... 118
7. Recommendations ....................................................................................................... 119
8. Tables, Figures, Appendices ....................................................................................... 119

Rev. 1 4.4 - v

Rev. 1 4.4 - vi
SUBSECTION 4.4.1 SURVEYING
4.4.1 SURVEYING
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides guidelines for the performance of field and office
survey work.
b. The guidelines apply to all survey work.
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection 4.4.1 applies to surveying of new projects.
b. This Subsection 4.4.1 also applies to developed areas and existing
infrastructure.
3. Definitions
a. Digital Elevation Model (DEM): A term generally used for the representation of
the earth in any form, such as rectangular grids, lattices, triangulated networks,
irregular spot heights or breaklines.
b. Digital Terrain Modeling (DTM): Like DEM but incorporates the elevation of
significant land features (breaklines and spot elevations) at irregular spacing to
depict the character of the terrain more accurately.
c. “Azimuth” The direction of a line through a point with respect to the meridian
through the point expressed as the clockwise angle from north. Except where
the line is along a meridian or the equator, the azimuth of a straight line changes
as the point moves along the line.
d. Glossary of Surveying and Mapping Terms based on United States Bureau of
Land Management US BLM:
http://www.blm.gov/cadastral/Glossary/glossary.htm#
e. “Northing” Second measurement of a grid reference used to specify the location
of a point on a rectangular coordinate system. The distance measured
northward from the origin of a rectangular coordinate system (corresponds to a
“Y” coordinate in a Cartesian system).
f. “Easting” First measurement of a grid reference used to specify the location of
a point on a rectangular coordinate system. The distance measured eastward
from the origin of a rectangular coordinate system (corresponds to an “X”
coordinate in a Cartesian system).
g. “Elevation” a value determined by measuring the height of a point relative to the
datum
h. “Latitude” It is the angular position of a place north or south of the equator.
Positive values in the Northern hemisphere, negative in the South (i.e., the
South Pole has latitude = - 90°).
i. “Longitude” The angular location of a place on the Earth's surface measured
east or west of the Prime meridian through Greenwich. Longitudes West are
positive, East are negative.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 1
j. “Lot” The smallest piece of land to be used for a specific purpose, i.e., the lot to
be occupied by a house, an apartment house, a business establishment, a
mosque, pump station, reserve tract, etc.
k. “Lot Line” Any line bounding a lot as herein defined.
l. “Monument” A boundary or position marker.
m. “Neighborhood Center” An area containing commercial and public facilities for a
catchment area of approximately 10,000 to 15,000 people.
n. “Parcel” A unit of land, or tract of land in a subdivision with specified location
and boundaries, which is used or developed as a unit for a specific purpose.
o. “Plant Grid (PG)” A plane grid system established by the RCJ. All land and
facilities shall be located based on the PG system or any authorized agency’s
system.
p. Rectangular northing and easting coordinates of any point give its positions with
respect to an arbitrarily selected pair of mutually perpendicular reference axes.
The Northing coordinate is the perpendicular distance, in meters, from the point
to the Easting axis; the Easting coordinate is the perpendicular distance to the
Northing axis.
q. “Reserve tracts” Are lots (or blocks) for future use, which use is unknown or
cannot be defined at the time of subdividing; i.e., land which may be needed at
a future date – for example expansion of a park, school grounds, commercial
development, etc.
r. “Right-of-way” Public land reserved for roads, sidewalks, pedestrian and bicycle
paths, drainage and utility corridors, and pipelines.
s. “Subdivision” A group of one or more blocks which lie within a geographically
defined area, and where one or more of the blocks have been divided into lots,
each lot to be used for a separate purpose.
t. “Theodolite” A precision instrument for measuring angles to vertical and
horizontal planes. Consists, in its most basic form, of a telescope which can
rotate horizontally and vertically allowing readings to be taken from a calibrated
circle. The instrument must be centered over a fixed (control) point.
u. “Traverse” A sequence of line segments of known length and direction that begin
and end at the same point (closed loop) or begin and end at points whose
relative positions have been determined by other surveys.
v. “Triangulation” Using a network of triangles to accurately plot positions.
w. “True Coordinate Position” The position of a point as determined by field survey
originating from a known control survey marker of Royal Commission or any
authorized agency, and performed to the precision and adjusted, as required for
second order surveys.
x. “Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)” A grid system based upon the
Transverse Mercator projection. The UTM grid extends North-South from 80°N
to 80°S latitude and, starting at the 180° Meridian, is divided eastwards into 60,
6° zones with a half degree overlap with zone one beginning at 180° longitude.
The UTM grid is used for topographic maps and geo-referencing satellite
images.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 2
y. “Vertical Datum” A vertical datum is a surface of zero elevation to which heights

of various points are referred in order that those heights are in a consistent
system.
1) The official datum shall be the Royal Commission Datum based on the
published elevation of existing fundamental vertical control benchmarks,
current at the time of the survey.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.
1) AMG: Automated Machine Guidance
2) ASB: As Built
3) CUBE: Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetric Estimator
4) DEM: Digital Elevation Model
5) DTM: Digital Terrain Modeling
6) E: East
7) F.C.: Field Change
9) GNSS: Global Navigation Satellite System
10) GPS: Global Positioning System
11) IHO: International Hydrographic Organization
12) km: Kilometer
13) m: Meter
14) MBES: Multi-Beam Echo Sounder
15) MnDOT Minnesota Department of Transportation
16) N: North
17) NGS: National Geodetic Surveying (US)
18) NSPS: National Society of Professional Surveyors
19) PCC: Portland Cement Concrete
20) PG: Plant Grid
21) PPE: Personal Protective Equipment
23) RICS: Royal Chartered Institute of Surveyors
24) RTK: Real Time Kinematic
25) S: South
26) SGS: Saudi Geological Survey
27) SBES: Single-Beam Echo Sounder

Rev. 1 4.4 - 3
28) TPU: Total Propagated Uncertainty

29) USGS; United States Geological Survey
30) UTM; Universal Transverse Mercator
31) W: West
a. Survey works shall be undertaken in accordance with the specified requirements
as detailed in the Contract Specification for Geotechnical Surveys and
Environmental Works. The following is a list of sources of information and
manuals that are referred to in this Section.
1) Saudi Geological Survey
(a) http://www.sgs.com/
2) Royal Chartered Institute of Surveyors
(a) http://www.rics.org/s
3) US Geological Survey
(a) http://www.sgs.com/
4) MnDOT Surveying and Mapping Manual
(a) http://www.dot.state.mn.us/surveying/manuals.html
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1
b. Saudi Arabia Survey Licensing Code
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Section, refer to Chapter
3 for a list of additional Standards.
1) NGS - National Geodetic Survey
(a) https://www.ngs.noaa.gov/
2) NSPS Model Standards for Construction Layout Surveys
(a) http://www.truenorthsurvey.com/wp-
content/uploads/2010/04/NSPS-Standards-Construction-Layout-
Surveys.pdf
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 5.6 for Civil, Sitework and Roads.
b. Refer to Section 5.7 for Utilities.
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission will review and approve all design reports, plans and
specifications refer to Section 1.1.
B. Commissioning
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for commissioning requirements.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 4
C. General Requirements
1. Land Surveyor
a. As a minimum the Land Surveyor shall hold a Bachelor of Science degree in
civil engineering, or other approved degree in surveying
2. Land Surveying Manager
a. All land survey works shall be managed by the Land Surveying Manager and
shall have a minimum of ten (10) years acceptable experience, University level
education in surveying of the types to be encountered on this site and
professional competency from an accredited institute for surveying works, At
least five (5) years must have been in responsible charge of survey crew and
five (5) years of experience in the Middle East.
3. Bathymetric and Hydrographic Surveying Manager
a. All bathymetric and hydrographic survey works shall be managed and overseen
by a Bathymetric and Hydrographic Surveying Manager and shall have a
minimum of ten (10) years acceptable experience, University level education in
surveying of the types to be encountered on this site and professional
competency from an accredited institute for surveying works, At least five (5)
years must have been in responsible charge of survey crew and five (5) years
of experience in the Middle East.
4. Senior Surveyor
a. All survey works shall be undertaken by Senior Surveyors shall have a minimum
of seven (7) years acceptable experience, University level education in
surveying of the types to be encountered on this site and professional
competency from an accredited institute for surveying works. At least five (5)
years must have been in responsible charge of survey crew. Three (3) years of
experience in High Order surveying is required and GPS System.
b. A Senior Surveyors shall have experience in the performing Geodetic Horizontal
Control Surveys and High Order Vertical Control Survey and GPS System or
have experience in the performance of off-shore Hydrographic Surveys. He shall
know how to operate and perform field checks of calibration and field
adjustments of all instruments assigned to his crew.
5. Instrument man/Rodman
a. Instrument man/Rodman (Surveyor) shall be skilled in the operation and basic
care of all instruments and GPS System assigned to the survey crew of which
he is a permanent or temporary member.
D. Coordinate System
1. Definitions
a. See definition for Rectangular Northing and Easting coordinates.
2. Type of Coordinate Systems
a. Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM):
1) Saudi Arabian National Geodetic Network (SA.NGN) is based on Zone
39 of the Universal Transverse Mercator Projection System. The origin of
the survey is at Ain Al Abd and the accepted origin data is as follows:

Rev. 1 4.4 - 5
(a) Geodetic Latitude = 28 14' 06.171" (N)

(b) Geodetic Longitude = 48 16' 20.096" (E)
(c) Deviation of the vertical
(1) In the meridian = +0.08"
(2) In the prime vertical = +0.075"
(d) Geoid-Spheroid separation: N = -8.4 meters
(e) Spheroid (International) = HAYFORD 1910
(1) Parameters
(i) a = 6378388 meters
(ii) F = 1/297
The above Spheroid and origin information constitutes the
"Ain Al Abd" (1970) Datum.
2) All offsite work shall be tied into the UTM Grid based on Hayford 1910
International Ellipsoid - Datum AIN Al ABD 1970, Saudi Arabia) Zone 39
(i.e. Ras Al-Khair Industrial City, Jubail- Ras Al-Khair Highway, Jubail-
Dammam Mainline Railroad, offsite freeway, offsite environmental
sampling station, etc.)
b. The Plant Grid System:
1) The entire site of Jubail Industrial City (Jubail1 and Jubail2) is covered by
a Plant Grid (PG) which is a plane grid. This grid is laid out so that it is
generally parallel or perpendicular to the blocks, lots and corridors within
true north.
2) The most southerly grid line of the PG is south of the southeasterly
corner of Jubail Industrial City (Madinat Al-Jubail Al-Sinaiyah) increasing
increments of 1,000 m (1 km), with the most northerly grid line having the
coordinate designate of N 64,000. Similarly, the most easterly grid line
approximates the north end of the most easterly boundary line of Jubail
Industrial City (Madinat Al-Jubail Al-Sinaiyah), said point lying east of the
Open Sea Tanker Terminal, and with this grid line having the coordinate
designation of E 84,000. The grid lines proceed westerly in decreasing
increments of 1,000 m, with the most westerly grid line (which lies
generally about six kilometers west of the Tapline Road) having the
coordinate designation of E 40,000
3) All land and facilities within Jubail Industrial City (Madinat Al-Jubail Al-
Sinaiyah). Shall be located by coordinates based on the PG. No other
coordinates system or any other system shall be used for any purpose
whatsoever within the boundaries of this site.
4) All surveys shall use degrees (°) for azimuth and angles, and meters for
both vertical and horizontal measurement.
5) All off-site control shall be in UTM, and all on-site control shall be in PG.
The only interface between these two shall be the intersections of offsite
street, street, and railroad centerline within the boundary lines of Jubail
Industrial City. These points shall have both PG and UTM coordinates
E. Elevations and Survey Datum

Rev. 1 4.4 - 6
1. Datum
a. The official datum shall be the Royal Commission Datum based on the published
elevation of existing fundamental vertical control benchmarks, current at the
time of the survey.
b. The official datum in RIC shall be the Royal Commission Datum based to
Ma'aden vertical control benchmark 0 MSL.
2. Measurements
a. Elevations can be measured using the following methods. The project accuracy
requirements and specific equipment manufacturer’s specifications will
determine what method(s) are acceptable for the task.
1) Differential levels using a digital level, spirit level or auto-level and
graduated rod.
2) Trigonometric levels calculated using measured vertical angles, such as
measurements with a theodolite or total station, and measured horizontal
distances.
3) Global positioning using two or more GPS receivers.
b. Elevations shall be measured relative to a project benchmark with a known
elevation. Prior to using the benchmark, the surveyor shall:
1) Verify and use the official published elevation of the benchmark, current
at the time of the survey.
2) Determine if the benchmark was set with methods and procedures
necessary to meet the required tolerances of the new measurements,
such as fundamental, second order, third order as described in
Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
(a) Methods and procedures for establishing vertical control
monuments are described in Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
3) Inspect the benchmark to ensure that it has not been disturbed.
4) Check the elevation of at least one other project benchmark to verify:
(a) The survey instrument is calibrated
(b) The benchmarks have not been disturbed
5) Check the elevation of at least two other points or features with a known
elevation relative to the benchmark to determine if the new
measurements will be consistent with the other site plan elevations,
where applicable.
3. Field Notes
a. Daily field notes shall include:
1) The date of the survey
2) The elevation benchmark name and/or identifier used for the survey
3) The benchmark elevation
4) The condition of the benchmark at the time of the survey

Rev. 1 4.4 - 7
5) Any other notes of significance to the project such as if the benchmark is

in danger of being disturbed or destroyed due to construction or other
site conditions.
6) Electronic/digital field notes are encouraged and shall be used when
working with data collectors. The use of day files for electronic note
keeping shall be used. The instrument number, party chief and crew
members shall be inputted as electronic notes. The time stamp function
shall always be on.
F. Hydrographic and Tidal Data
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidelines for the performance of hydrographic surveys in
port and harbor areas and offshore locations up to a depth of 30 m.
Hydrographic surveys are generally undertaken for the following purposes:
1) To maintain safe navigation conditions for vessels, by ensuring adequate
under-keel clearances
2) To provide control for dredging operations
3) To allow monitoring of silt accumulation
4) To locate existing structures, objects, and obstructions
5) To provide base mapping for design of proposed construction projects
2. Standard References
a. Hydrographic surveys will generally conform to accepted international and
national Standards, including but not limited to the following:
1) International Hydrographic Organization, Special Publication No. 44, 5 th
edition, IHO Standards for Hydrographic Surveys
2) FIG Publication No. 56, Guidelines for the Planning, Execution and
Management of Hydrographic Surveys in Ports and Harbours
3) US Corp of Engineers Manual No. 1110-2-1003, Engineering and Design
– Hydrographic Surveying
3. Survey Coverage
a. The required coverage of a hydrographic survey will be dictated by the end-use
of the data and by cost. The A/E shall determine which of the two survey
coverage options shall be utilized:
1) Cross-section surveys, at a pre-defined spacing, normally carried out
using a single-beam echo sounder (SBES). This method is most
effective in shallow draft projects or in deep draft areas with relatively
uniform sea-bed topography. Cross section surveys also provide a more
rapid end-product and are typically the most economical procedure.
2) Full-coverage surveys, using a multi-beam echo sounder (MBES), to
achieve complete bottom coverage. MBESs can provide bottom
coverage up to several times the depth of water and sufficient survey
lines are run to ensure complete coverage. This method is typically used
for deeper water projects where under-keel clearance is critical, for
dredging maintenance and for investigation of underwater structures or

Rev. 1 4.4 - 8
obstructions. MBES surveys are more demanding and time consuming

and therefore more expensive.
4. Survey Equipment
a. Survey equipment used during most surveys will fall into three main categories:
depth measurement, position fixing and water level (tidal data). In addition, for
MBES, the behavior of the survey vessel can be significant, requiring the
integration of motion sensor equipment. All equipment shall allow for continuous
recording of survey information to suitable electronic data loggers.
1) Depth Measurement Equipment
(a) Depths are usually measured using SBES or MBES equipment.
These may be supplemented by side-scan sonar equipment to help
detect smaller objects.
2) Single-Beam Echo Sounders (SBES)
(a) To ensure that the equipment records the correct depths, the SBES
must be calibrated, using a bar check procedure, before and after
each segment of survey, or at a minimum on a daily basis, to
correct for potential errors due to speed of sound in the water
column and to set the correct depth of the SBES transducer.
Similarly, a bar check must be carried out if any modifications are
made to equipment or equipment mountings.
3) Multi-Beam Echo Sounders (MBES)
(a) MBES equipment shall be calibrated using a ‘patch test’ to
determine:
(1) The mount angles of the multi-beam transducer relative to the
vessel’s axes (roll, pitch and heading).
(2) The latency (or time lag) between the MBES data and the
position-fixing data.
(b) Good practice would also involve the use of a reference surface (i.e.
an area of sea floor), where repeatable measurements can be
made and compared, to identify systematic errors.
4) Motion Sensor Equipment
(a) Motion sensor equipment (accelerometer) shall be used in
conjunction with MBES measurements to improve the quality of
sounding data, by correcting for variations in the vessel’s pitch, roll
and heading. As a lower-cost alternative, real-time kinematic (RTK)
GPS or GNSS measurements can be used in correcting for vessel
motion, although the resultant accuracy is limited by the GPS
update rate.
5) Position-fixing Equipment
(a) For most applications, the preferred method of horizontal control will
be GPS or GNSS equipment in differential or RTK mode. In certain
circumstances (e.g. if insufficient satellites are available or local
conditions interfere with GPS reception), an auto-tracking total
station instrument may be used.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 9
6) Tide Gauge Equipment

(a) Sea level measurements (i.e. water depth correlated to time of day)
are needed to relate the hydrographic survey data to a defined
vertical datum (chart datum). Typical methods for obtaining sea
level information are:
(1) Automatic recording tide gauge (preferred option). This
equipment must be regularly calibrated against a staff gauge
to ensure its accuracy.
(2) Manual tide pole (or staff gauge). If this method is used, the
frequency of measurement of the gauge must be such as to
provide an adequate representation of the tide curve.
(3) Direct GPS RTK measurement of water level. If this method is
used, then the GPS measurements shall be regularly
correlated with conventional tide gauge measurements, to
verify consistency.
5. Survey Procedures
a. Control
1) Survey control points and benchmarks will be installed, or existing
control points utilized, in accordance with established procedures and
relative to coordinate systems and datum’s outlined above. Horizontal
control shall also be based on King Fahd Industrial Port project datum
and tied to the Royal Commission Datum (RCD).
b. Planning
1) The project survey specification shall address the density of bottom
coverage required. This in turn will affect the choice of survey
methodology to be adopted (i.e. cross section survey or full bottom
coverage) and will determine survey line spacing. Planning will include
direction of, and intervals between, cross sections. With MBES systems
this will be affected by water depth and the cross section spacing must
allow for an overlap of data if full bottom coverage is required. Typically,
for MBES surveys the equipment shall be restricted to obtain data up to
45° to 50°each side of the nadir. A minimum overlap of 20% is
recommended between adjacent sections.
c. Tidal Measurements
1) Tidal measurements will be made continuously throughout the duration
of the survey. If an existing tide gauge (automatic recording or manual
observation) is available, then its height needs to be verified relative to
the project survey datum. If not, then a tide gauge will be installed at a
suitable location as close to the work area as possible. For complex tidal
areas, multiple gauges may be appropriate. Automatically-recording tide
gauges are recommended. If manual tide gauges are the only ones
available, then careful consideration needs to be given to the frequency
of recording, to ensure that the tidal curve is accurately determined.
Regular monitoring of the tide gauge elevation is required to verify that
outside factors are not affecting the measurements.
d. Positioning System

Rev. 1 4.4 - 10
1) If possible, the on-board positioning system will be installed co-axial to

the echo sounding transponder. If this is not practicable, a survey of the
vessel shall be carried out to determine the relative locations of the
positioning system, echo sounding transponder and any other data
collecting equipment. The selected positioning system must be capable
of continuous recording of the vessel’s location. If MBES is used for
soundings, then motion control equipment must be installed and
recorded together with the sounding data.
e. Soundings
1) Soundings will be run in accordance with the planned cross section
layout, as described in paragraph 4.4.1.F.3 for surveys extending over
multiple days, there shall be an overlap of soundings between daily
mobilizations.
f. Ancillary Survey Data
1) Specific projects may require additional types of survey data collection,
not covered by this document, including:
(a) Side scan sonar surveys, used to create an image of the sea floor
for detection of debris and obstructions
(b) Current measurements
(c) Water temperature profiling
(d) Sub-bottom profiling, used to indicate shallow structure of the
seabed
(e) Magnetometer surveys, used in the detection of seafloor or sub-
floor objects.
g. Additional Calibrations
1) In addition to the various equipment calibrations mentioned above, it is
considered good practice to carry out the following checks, preferably
daily:
(a) An independent static GPS check of the vessel’s derived position,
as determined by on board GPS or auto-tracking total station,
relative to a control point on shore. This will provide a confidence
level in the performance of the vessel’s positioning system.
(b) A dynamic check against a distinctive bottom feature, for which a
known location has previously been derived. This may reveal latent
errors not apparent during the static check. Bottom features used
for this purpose shall be in relatively shallow water (less than 10m)
to avoid a large echo sounder footprint and ensure that resolution of
the target feature is commensurate with the positioning system
being used.
h. Data Processing
1) Survey data will be processed using approved software that combines
soundings, positions, tidal data, and motion sensor data.
2) Processing will involve the preparation of a clean data set, which
eliminates erroneous data, based on the various check measurements

Rev. 1 4.4 - 11
built into the survey, including elimination of any tidal data errors
revealed by the practice of running survey check lines.
3) Data sets from modern sounding equipment are very large and need to
be carefully managed. Software packages can smooth the survey data,
but this shall be avoided, unless the magnitude of the difference between
‘raw’ and ‘smoothed’ data is clearly identified.
4) Processing software shall preserve data integrity and be capable of
shoal bias thinning (i.e. the production of a ‘thinned’ data set that
maintains the accuracy of the survey while reducing the amount of data
that needs to be manipulated). This is especially applicable to SBES
surveys.
5) For survey data intended to produce hydrographic charts, it is
recommended that a Combined Uncertainty and Bathymetric Estimator
(CUBE) surface is produced.
6) For data intended for volumetric calculations, a grid of average depths
will generally be required (a grid is not recommended for other uses, as it
does not preserve actual sounding locations or depths).
i. Data Analysis
1) An assessment shall be made of the accuracy achieved during the
hydrographic survey, to provide a confidence level in the charts,
sounding sheets or other deliverables provided. The sources of all
individual errors need to be derived from the various calibrations
conducted during the survey, then statistically combined to derive the
‘Total Propagated Uncertainty’ (TPU) for the data set.
j. Deliverables
1) Deliverables will include paper copies and digital data.
(a) Paper deliverables will include charts, plans and a comprehensive
survey report detailing methodology, results, and accuracies.
(b) Digital data shall include point information for all soundings,
together with located features and tidal data. Soundings shall be
provided in ASCII format, using WGS84 latitude and longitude with
depths below chart datum. Line information and point relating to
survey features other than soundings shall be provided in an
AutoCAD compatible format.
G. Construction Staking
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidelines for performing construction staking and layout
as required to establish horizontal and vertical positions of contract
improvements. The guidelines apply to all construction survey work within the
Royal Commission’s boundaries regardless of the responsible parties be they
the controlling jurisdiction’s forces, Contractor’s forces, or sub contracted
surveyors.
b. The responsible party for construction staking must be performed under the
supervision of the surveyor, as identified in subsection 4.4.1.C.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 12
c. These guidelines for establishing lines, grades and construction stakes are
minimum Standards; additional contractual requirements or tolerances may be
shown on plans or included in special provisions for the work.
d. Surveyors shall only concern themselves with the direct interpretation of the
construction plans. It is not the responsibility of the Surveyor or the surveyor’s
staff to correct or revise erroneous architectural or engineering drawings. If the
approved design plans are found to lack sufficient information for proper layout,
the Surveyor shall immediately notify his client, the RCJ, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor responsible for the project.
2. Pre-construction
a. Pre-construction Conference
1) Prior to the commencement of construction activities, a conference shall
be held with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, the RCJ’s project manager,
and surveying personnel. This meeting is of importance to the
construction surveyor to plan and organize respective duties that
conform to the Contractor’s planned sequence of operations to avoid any
unnecessary delays or inconveniences. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
will outline the working schedule and methods of operations and discuss
construction details. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be asked to
furnish the party chief a list showing the priority of staking needs. The
Contractor shall be advised of the requirement to give at least 24-hour
notice for any deviation from the list.
2) The pre-construction meeting will determine who will authorize and
control requests for survey and receive survey data and field notes.
b. Safety
1) It is the Surveyor’s responsibility to adopt the project health and safety
plan and or provide an acceptable safety plan to ensure safety of survey
crew.
2) The survey crew will attend specific site safety orientations per project
requirements.
3) Each survey vehicle will have a first aid kit and working fire extinguisher.
4) Each survey crew member will be outfitted and adhere to wearing the
PPE (personal protection equipment) required by the RCJ, EPC
Contractor, A/E, or survey company, whichever is more stringent.
c. Survey Instrument Selection
1) Conventional or GPS survey instruments or a combination thereof may
be used to meet the tolerances outlined in these construction staking
guidelines.
2) Calibration certificates on applicable survey instruments will be made
available prior to construction to ensure equipment is in good working
order.
(a) Levels will be checked for calibration using the two-peg test; notes
of the procedure will be provided prior to work. Levels shall be
tested at weekly intervals and prior to layout of critical work.
3) GPS is not to be used to establish positions for the following:

Rev. 1 4.4 - 13
(a) Structure layout horizontal or vertical positions.

(b) Concrete pavement vertical positions.
(c) Concrete curb, gutter, and barrier vertical positions.
d. Pre-Construction Surveys
1) Pre-construction surveys incidental to construction staking may include
but are not limited to:
(a) Location of existing survey control monuments and boundary
markers for their referencing and perpetuation if disturbed by
construction activities.
(b) Location of manholes or valves within construction areas to be
adjusted to future grades.
(c) Verification of location and grade where new improvements tie into
existing conditions.
e. Survey Control
1) It is the responsibility of the surveyor to locate, verify, and document the
accuracy of all existing control points before using them for construction
staking control work. The surveyor must notify the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor in writing of any discrepancies before using those points.
2) The elevations, dimensions, and horizontal alignment of structures,
earthwork, and roadways must be checked for plan errors, compatibility,
and consistency with existing field conditions. If any discrepancy is
discovered, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must immediately be
informed. New grades must be established from the approved plan with
adjustments to match existing roadway features as approved by the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor.
3) The Surveyor will always consult with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
before doing any staking or computations. Data availability, project
staging, or plan changes are all considerations that shall be discussed
before starting initial layout.
4) All field adjustments must be approved by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor. The surveyor shall always check with the A/E for changes to
the approved plans before doing any staking or grade computations.
5) Vertical Control and Bench Level Circuits (Benchmarks)
(a) This activity consists of locating the existing benchmarks set during
the preliminary phases of the project, verifying their accuracy,
correcting errors if necessary, transferring benchmarks to new
locations to prevent conflict with construction, and establishing new
benchmarks as needed.
(b) Additional benchmarks must be set so as not to conflict with the
construction operations. They shall be set with a spacing not to
exceed 150 m or other spacing required by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor.
(c) Additional benchmarks must be of suitable material to endure the
duration of construction.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 14
(d) Additional benchmarks shall be set in locations that will be

convenient for future work. It is also beneficial to alternate on left
and right sides of the roadway, particularly when work is to be done
under traffic conditions.
(e) Benchmark number and elevation shall be written on the guard
stake or directly on the benchmark. All additional benchmarks set
must be recorded (number or name, description, location, and
elevation) in the field book that is to be kept in the field office when
not in use.
(f) Good guidelines for locating benchmarks are:
(1) At each end of large structures.
(2) At points of change from cut to fill.
(3) At high and low points.
(4) Locations that are handy for cross sectioning of side hills.
(5) Any time there is a difference of 8 m in elevation in rolling
terrain.
(g) Before starting a bench level circuit (bench loop), the level must be
checked for accuracy. Along with peg testing the level (instrument),
also check the tripod head and shoes and level rod tape and shoes
for wear. If using a total station for setting benchmarks, ensure that
the instrument is calibrated. This information shall be recorded in
the field notes.
(h) To verify or establish elevations for benchmarks, they must be
looped with a minimum of three benchmarks in the loop (two
known).
(i) Minor errors in benchmark elevations shall be corrected in a
manner that will not materially affect the work and brought to the
attention of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
(j) Major errors or apparent discrepancies found affecting other
benchmarks, existing plan information, and future work must be
immediately brought to the attention of the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor for correction or interpretation before proceeding with the
work.
6) Horizontal Control
(a) Horizontal control begins with field-locating the control points,
traverse points, section corners, etc., set by the original survey.
These points will be noted on the plans along with field ties or can
be obtained from the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. From these
control points, the horizontal alignment for construction is
established.
(b) Additional control usually needs to be set outside the construction
limits and there are special requirements for machine control
grading projects. Consideration must be given to future use of these
control points to prevent loss during the life of the project, provide
for easy access, recovery, and inter-visibility.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 15
(c) Care shall be taken when establishing these reference points to

assure their accuracy. When a control point is disturbed or
destroyed, new monumentation for the point must be set and new
coordinates established before any staking is accomplished in the
area controlled by the disturbed or destroyed point. A new point
number shall be used, and the field notes shall be updated to note
the disturbed or destroyed point, the new point, and their locations.
(d) When the project is staked using coordinates, the staking must be
performed using the project control coordinates found in the plan or
provided by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Verify that the
coordinates provided are correct by checking the units, datum, and
coordinate system used on the project. Verify filed coordinates by
performing independent checks made from different control point
setups. Consult with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor regarding the
frequency and areas of the project that horizontal control needs to
be maintained.
(e) All additional control points established are to be documented in the
field book with the point description, location, coordinates (ground
values), and station/offset for use during the life of the construction
project. They will be marked in the field for easy recovery. Crossed
lath with fluorescent pink ribbon and the control point number legibly
written is a standard practice.
f. Field Notes
1) Field notes are the written record of pertinent information, layout,
measurements, and observations of the project. They shall be kept
according to uniform practices and conform, as a minimum, to the
following general requirements:
(a) Neatness - Use a sharp pencil of at least 3-H hardness. Avoid
crowding the information and keep the book as clean as possible.
(b) Legibility - Use standard symbols and abbreviations to keep notes
compact. Use plain lettering to avoid confusion.
(c) Clarity - Plan work ahead so that data can be clearly indicated. Do
not make ambiguous statements. Line up descriptions and make
sketches for clarity. Record data in a consistent way. Assume that
the person who will use your notes has no familiarity with the work.
(d) Completeness - Show all pertinent measurements and
observations. Use a degree of accuracy consistent with the
operation. If in doubt about the need for the data, record it. Review
data before leaving the field. All entries must include:
(1) The date and weather conditions.
(2) Title of task.
(3) Names of all persons in the survey crew and their
assignments.
(4) The title page must be completed as the book or project is
started. The District’s return address must be noted on the title

Rev. 1 4.4 - 16
page in case the book is lost. The book must be adequately

indexed, pages numbered and cross-referenced to contents.
(e) Permanence - All entries shall be made directly into bound books.
At the completion of the project, the books shall be filed as part of
the permanent record in keeping with Department policy.
(f) Accuracy - Record exactly what was done at the time it was done
rather than depending on memory later. Never erase in a field book.
If an item is incorrectly entered, draw a line through the item and
insert the corrected value immediately above. When it is necessary
to add data to notes previously prepared, the additional item shall
be dated and initialed. Always enter notes directly into the record.
(g) Self-checking - Notes shall be kept so that the work can be checked
without returning to the field. Any person familiar with the project
shall be able to verify the accuracy of the work from the information
contained in the notes.
(h) Electronic/digital field notes are encouraged and shall be used
when working with data collectors. The use of day files for electronic
note keeping shall be used. The instrument number, party chief and
crew members shall be input as electronic notes. The time stamp
function shall always be turned on.
g. Staking Requests
1) A staking request form is to be submitted by the authorizing party to the
surveyor containing the following information:
(a) Project information
(b) Priority
(1) If no priority is listed, the work will be performed in the order
listed.
(c) Type of Staking
(1) Slope Stakes
(2) Curb Stakes
(3) Drainage
(d) Stakes are either Original or Reset
(e) Location, Alignment, Beginning and Ending Stations, Drainage
Structures, etc.
(f) Date that the site will be ready for stakes
(g) Date when the Contractor intends to begin work using the stakes
(h) A Comments Section indicating requested offsets for the reference
points, and any other relevant instructions.
(i) Requestor’s signature and date of request
(j) Reasonable notice is required so that the survey work can be
planned and coordinated in accordance with the project schedule.
The surveyor shall be notified by staking request at least 2 working

Rev. 1 4.4 - 17
days before the survey services will be required. Requested survey

services of greater difficulty may require more than the standard 2
working day notice.
3. Construction
a. Original Ground Measures
1) Cross section measures of original ground shall be taken at each 20 m
station as indicated on the Drawings. Intermediate stations shall be
measured by cross section wherever grade breaks occur. Additional
cross sections shall be taken at stations to include quantities
measurement of retaining walls, drainage structures, etc. Elevation shots
for original ground cross sections shall be taken at the centerline of
construction according to the Drawings and as a minimum, at the
following points perpendicular to and on each side of the centerline:
(a) grade breaks
(b) edge of pavement
(c) curb and gutter
(d) shoulder of road
(e) toe of slope
(f) centerline of ditch
(g) top of bank
(h) All other physical features within the project limits.
(i) In areas where overbreak or slides are anticipated, sections shall be
extended out from centerline to include the anticipated disturbed
ground area.
b. After Excavation Measures
1) Cross sections shall be taken at the same stations as the original ground
cross sections. Elevation shall be for the bottom, sides and top of
excavation at the following points on each side and perpendicular to the
centerline:
(a) centerline
(b) grade breaks
(c) toe of excavation
(d) top edge of cut
(e) Original ground at a minimum of 3.0 m beyond the limits of
excavation.
2) Work not meeting these requirements shall not be accepted by the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor for payment.
c. Slope Stakes
1) Slope stakes shall be required for each cross section station and at
additional intervals such as points of curvature and tangency of curves,
street intersections, vertical curve intermediate stations to include the

Rev. 1 4.4 - 18
high or low point of the curve, and at grade breaks. The stakes are to be
set at points where the cut or fill slopes intersect the surface of original
ground.
2) Staking notes shall record the location of the slope stake in relation to
the construction centerline, the existing elevation shot at the catch point,
the planned elevation that the slope stake is identifying, what level of the
design prism the catch point is identifying such as top of unclassified fill,
top of sub-base, etc., the percent of slope for cut/fill, the distance to point
slope staked, and the station of the slope stake.
3) The information to be shown on a slope stake is as follows:
(a) Distance from the catch point to the point being staked.
(b) Percent of slope of the cut/fill.
(c) Amount of cut/fill.
(d) Stake’s location in reference to the centerline.
(e) Centerline station of the slope stake written on the back of the
stake.
4) A reference stake shall be set for each slope stake. The reference stake
shall be set a minimum of 3.0 m and a maximum of 5.0 m beyond the
slope stake. The reference stake shall re-state the slope stake
information in the event the slope stake is disturbed or destroyed. A hub
shall be driven flush with the ground at the reference stake and all
elevations and distances referenced to the hub.
d. Grade Stakes
1) Cut or Fill Stakes
(a) Vertical cut/fill stakes shall be used where the design prism does
not contain sloped shoulders and ditches and a slope stake would
not be needed. The cut/fill stake shall be comprised of a standard
13 mm steel stake driven flush with ground surface and
accompanied by a site map with the following information written on
it:
(1) Rebar number (#)
(2) amount of cut or fill
(3) distance to the point of cut/fill from the steel stake
(4) description of the cut or filled type, i.e. subgrade, top classified
(5) offset distance from construction centerline to the cut/fill point
(6) centerline station of cut/fill point
(7) Elevation of the top of steel stake.
(b) Cuts shall be given to the nearest 10 mm. Elevations of the top of
hubs shall be given to the nearest 10 mm. Stakes shall be required
at each 10 m station identified on the Drawings and at additional
intervals such as points of curvature and tangency of curves, street
intersections, vertical curve intermediate stations to include the high
or low point of the curve, and at grade breaks. A record of the

Rev. 1 4.4 - 19
cut/fill, the design grade, the distance offset from centerline, the
centerline station and the type of cut/fill being staked shall be
written in the survey field book.
2) Finish Grade
(a) Grade hubs shall be set to verify that the road prism is at the correct
elevation prior to the placement of leveling course material. Wooden
hubs, painted or topped with colored whiskers, shall be set at the
top of classified fill, within one hundredths of a meter tolerance
(0.01 m). Stationing shall be 20 m on tangent and 10 m on curves
unless the A/E and/or EPC Contractor approves otherwise. All
grade breaks, vertical curve intermediate points to include the
high/low point of the curve, PC and PT of horizontal curves, and
street intersections shall be staked.
(b) Hubs shall be established on the centerline of the road prism as a
minimum where poured curb and gutter is incorporated into the
designed road prism. Otherwise, hubs shall be established at the
shoulder of the designed road prism, as well as the centerline of the
road prism.
(c) When parking aprons are staked, hubs shall be set on a 20 m grid
pattern unless approved otherwise by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor. The field book shall contain the centerline station, the
design finish grade elevation of the point staked, the elevation of the
hub, and a description of the material being staked.
e. Drainage Facilities
1) The location, type, size, length, and invert elevations for drainage
facilities are given on the Drawings. Minor changes in locations and
grades to meet existing field conditions may be made where necessary,
but only with the approval of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. If the
planned design grade is found to be unworkable in the field, the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall be notified immediately and all grade
staking of the facility shall cease until further notice from the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor.
2) Storm Drains, Cleanouts, Outfalls, Catch Basins, Oil and Grease
Separators, Manholes and Culverts
(a) A ground line profile shall be run directly above the centerline of the
pipe and recorded in the field book before trenching occurs. The
line and grade for storm drainpipe shall be given from reference
hubs offset from each manhole, catch basin, angle point, outfall, or
cleanout. Reference hubs for culvert installation shall be offset from
the pipe ends on the extended centerline of the culvert. One
reference hub is required at each end of a culvert. Guard stakes
shall be provided for each hub and shall identify the following
information:
(1) station
(2) size, length and type of pipe
(3) the amount of cut or fill from the top of the hub to the invert at
the end of the pipe

Rev. 1 4.4 - 20
(4) The horizontal distance from the reference hub to the center of
a manhole, cleanout, catch basin, angle point in a pipe, outfall,
or end of a culvert pipe.
3) For each structure, the field book shall show the location, type, and size
of the structure with a staking diagram showing all distances and
pertinent elevations. Two (2) reference hubs shall be set for each
manhole, cleanout, catch basin, angle point, and outfall. The reference
hubs shall be offset no greater than 10m from the facility they are
referencing.
4) Headwalls
(a) Headwalls for storm drains and culverts shall be staked by setting a
hub accompanied by a guard stake on each side of the storm drain
or culvert. The hubs shall be on line with the face of the headwall, or
as directed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. An elevation shall be
established on the hubs and written on the guard stake along with
the offset distance to the center of the headwall.
5) Dikes and Ditches
(a) Dikes/ditches shall be staked to the alignment, grade and slopes
shown on the Drawings. Dikes/ditches shall be slope staked to the
shoulder or flow line of the improvement with distances referenced
to the improvement centerline. The criteria outlined under – Slope
Stakes shall govern the establishment of slope stakes for this Work.
6) Riprap and Slope Protection
(a) All rip rap and slope protection shall be staked as soon as possible
after the pipe, fill, channel change or dike has been constructed.
Slope stakes shall be set if needed. Refer to Subsection
4.4.1.G.3.c.
7) Curb and Gutter
(a) Reference stakes are typically set at even 10 m stations. All grade
breaks, PVCs, PVTs, low points and high points on vertical curves
shall also be staked. A hub and tack shall be set at an offset
distance of one meter to the top back of curb. A lath will be set
behind the hub and tack with the offset distance marked below the
offset and the station marked on the back of the lath. The cut and fill
will be to the top back-of-curb within 10 mm. All radius points at
curb returns will be staked and additional stakes set breaking up the
arc of the curve between curb returns. If valley gutters are to be
built, they shall be staked and referenced.
f. Water Systems
1) Pipe offset stakes are typically set at 20 m intervals with cuts to invert of
pipe as indicated on the plans. Two offset hubs and lath shall be set for
each tee, hydrant, water service, valve, or other water appurtenance,
along with angle points and grade breaks in the alignment. The lath shall
identify the feature being staked and state the elevation of the hub, the
offset distance to the center of the feature, and the station of the feature
as shown on the Drawings. The offsets shall be set at a reasonable
distance to protect them from disturbance.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 21
2) An original ground line profile directly above the water line shall be run
prior to excavation and recorded in the field book. The ground line profile
refers to the elevation of the ground directly above the centerline of pipe
and the grade line refers to the elevation of the bottom of pipe, except
where otherwise noted. The field notes shall record the profile, the hub
elevations, offset of the hubs, and the station of the feature being staked.
g. Sanitary Sewer Systems
1) Pipe offset stakes are typically set at 10 m intervals with cuts to invert of
pipe as indicated on the plans. A minimum of two reference hubs shall
be set for each manhole, outfall, or cleanout. Guard stakes shall be
provided for each hub showing the information necessary to construct
the facility. The minimum information to be shown on the reference
stakes and in the field book is as follows:
(a) Sewer alignment station of referenced point
(b) Size and type of pipe
(c) Cut or fill from the hub to the pipe invert
(d) Offset distance from the hub to the centerline of pipe or center of
the structure
2) An original ground line profile directly above the sewer line shall be run
prior to excavation and recorded in the field book. The ground line profile
refers to the elevation of the ground directly above the centerline of pipe
and the grade line refers to the elevation of the bottom of pipe, except
where otherwise noted.
3) The field notes shall record the profile, the hub elevations, offset of the
hubs, and the station of the feature being staked.
h. Bridges
1) Set stakes, nails, or other devices to control the location and elevation of
the various parts of bridges and progressive phases of construction.
Provide horizontal and vertical control for all elements of bridge
construction. Stake drainage facilities, electrical and telecommunication
conduits and duct banks, light poles, water and sewer pipes, pedestrian
and bicycle facilities, traffic signal and sign supports, illumination
devices, and other items shown or identified that are to be integrated into
the construction of the bridge.
2) Bridge Survey Control Stations - Use the smallest number of original
Project control stations as is practical for establishing positions and
reference points for bridge construction on one bridge. Use of multiple
control stations will increase the probability of incorporating error into the
construction. Use control stations that are as closely related
mathematically as practical. The Contractor may establish additional
control stations as necessary to complete the survey work. Additional
control stations shall be established in such a manner as to provide the
accuracy needed to meet the required tolerances.
3) Original Project control stations shall be used only after the following
evaluation is completed for each bridge:

Rev. 1 4.4 - 22
(a) Supply a list of original Project horizontal and vertical control

stations intended by the Contractor to be used in establishing
positions on a given bridge.
(b) Measure relative positions of original Project horizontal control
stations intended to be used.
(c) Measure elevation differences between original Project vertical
control stations intended to be used.
(d) Supply horizontal and vertical measurement data to the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor.
(e) Compare measured values with those computed from original
horizontal network coordinates and vertical network elevations.
(f) Any discrepancy of concern to either the A/E and/or the EPC
Contractor will be resolved before that combination of control
stations is used.
4) Layout Marks and Reference Points - Substructure
(a) Stake, reference, or otherwise identify locations, orientations, and
elevations necessary for placement of substructure components,
including but not limited to cofferdams, pilings (including batter),
drilled shafts, footings, columns, abutments, caps, cross beams,
bearing devices, temporary supports or falsework, and excavations
and embankments associated with any of the above.
(b) Verify and document the locations, elevations, and spatial
relationships with adjacent substructure components. On bridges
where prefabricated beams will be used, measure and document
span lengths between bearing devices at each beam location as
soon as practical. Supply a copy of such documentation to the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor for review before the next stage of
construction.
(c) Compute the final elevations after studying the plans, specifications,
and shop drawings. Adjust the grades as needed to compensate for
camber of prefabricated beams, chording of beams across the low
side of superelevations, width of flat beams on superelevated
surfaces, and any other factor resulting from design or construction
methods.
5) Layout Marks and Reference Points - Superstructure
(a) Stake, reference or otherwise identify locations, orientations, and
elevations necessary for placement of superstructure components
including but not limited to beams, girders, diaphragms, earthquake
restraints, deck, rails, structure mounted traffic control and
illumination devices, and concrete forms, temporary supports and
falsework associated with any of the above.
(b) Stake alignment of structure as needed at each stage of
construction. Stake alignment of poured-in-place items at 5 m
stations or as established by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Stake
alignment for the following items as needed to maintain the
horizontal tolerance defined in this manual :

Rev. 1 4.4 - 23
(1) Outside edge of girder(s)

(2) Face(s) or centerline(s) of internal girders or stem walls
(3) Edge of deck
(4) Alignment of grade breaks
(5) Pedestrian and bicycle facilities
(6) Rails and railings
(c) Stake grades at each stage of construction. Stake grade of poured-
in-place items at 5m stations, or as established by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor. Apply corrections to design grades based on the
dynamics of the evolving structure. Corrections that may be
required depend upon the design of the bridge and the construction
methods employed. Provide correction values to the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor at least 15 working days prior to incorporating into
the structure. The following list is examples of possible corrections:
(1) Design camber (upward adjustment to compensate for
anticipated deflection)
(2) Structural deflection (deflection of the bridge under its own
increasing weight)
(3) Post tensioning lift (upward movement of the bridge under post
tensioning forces)
(4) Structural shifting (dynamics of the bridge under eccentric
loading).
(5) Falsework deflection (deflection of falsework beams under
increasing weight)
(6) Falsework crush (compression of falsework supports under
increasing weight)
(7) Form crush (compression of forms under increasing weight)
(8) Equipment deflection (deflection of deck finishing machine or
deck rails)
(9) Other adjustments to staked value to achieve the design grade
6) Bridge Deck Grades - Set stakes or other devices to control the deck
grade elevations. The exact process will depend upon the type of deck
and the equipment being used.
7) Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Deck - The surveyor and survey crew
leader shall attend the deck pre-placement conferences as required for
each deck placement.
(a) Control of a PCC deck may involve significant work with the deck
placement crew to establish control for a deck finishing machine.
Rails for supporting the deck finishing machine are generally set up
on either side of the deck. Each rail is held up by adjustable
supports every 1.5 meters. Adjust the rail at each support to the
desired grade while the rail is supporting the weight of the finishing

Rev. 1 4.4 - 24
machine. Corrections may need to be applied as previously

mentioned.
8) Asphaltic Concrete (AC) Deck - Control of an AC deck will not generally
involve as many variables as PCC. An AC deck serves as a wearing
surface, but not a structural component. Asphaltic concrete will
frequently be used as filler to create the desired super-elevations when
flat beams form the superstructure. Stake control of the finish grade like
any asphalt finish grade. Under some circumstances, design camber and
structural deflection may need to be considered.
i. Building Layout may include but not limited to:
1) Provide finish floor benchmark.
2) Staking for sub-basement rough grade
3) Stake and grade building corners for pad excavation and construction.
Provide finish pad grade stakes on pre-determined grid from A/E and/or
EPC Contractor. As-built finish pad grades; provide to A/E and/or EPC
Contractor for review.
4) Provide offsets to building corners and gridlines along each edge of
building.
5) Provide offsets to centerline of building steel columns.
6) Provide staking for, shear walls, retaining walls and elevator cores.
7) Provide anchor bolt layout, check template layout, check post concrete
pour anchor bolt locations; provide as-built comparison to plan locations
within 1 week of footing being poured.
8) Horizontal control lines for x and y axis for each floor
9) Vertical control benchmark for each floor
j. Miscellaneous Construction
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide sufficient stakes for
adequate control of all structures and incidental construction not
specifically covered above. A staking diagram with respect to centerline
and measurements for pay quantities shall be maintained in the field
notes. Other items such as horizontal and vertical control shall be shown
in the field book and shall be governed by procedures established in this
GEM.
k. AMG (Automated Machine Guidance)
1) Under the Construction Staking Subgrade bid item the surveyor may
substitute global positioning system (GPS) machine guidance for
conventional subgrade staking on all or part of the work. The A/E and/or
EPC Contractor may require the surveyor to revert to conventional
subgrade staking methods for all or part of the work at any point during
construction if, in the A/E's and/or EPC Contractor’s opinion, the GPS
machine guidance is producing unacceptable results.
2) No subgrade stakes are required for work completed using GPS
machine guidance. Coordinate with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
throughout the course of construction to ensure that work performed

Rev. 1 4.4 - 25
using GPS machine guidance conforms to the contract tolerances and

that the methods employed conform to the Contractor's GPS work plan
and accepted industry Standards. Address GPS machine guidance
issues at weekly progress meetings.
3) GPS Work Plan - Submit a comprehensive written GPS work plan for
department review at least 5 business days before the preconstruction
conference. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will review the plan to
determine if it conforms to the contract. Construct the subgrade as the
Contractor's GPS work plan provides. Update the plan as necessary
during construction of the subgrade.
4) The GPS work plan shall discuss how GPS machine guidance
technology will be integrated into other technologies employed on the
project. Include, but do not limit the contents to, the following:
(a) Designate which portions of the contract will be done using GPS
machine guidance and which portions will be done using
conventional subgrade staking.
(b) Describe the manufacturer, model, and software version of the GPS
equipment.
(c) Provide information on the qualifications of Contractor staff. Include
formal training and field experience. Designate a single staff person
as the primary contact for GPS technology issues.
(d) Describe how project control is to be established. Include a list and
map showing control points enveloping the site.
(e) Describe site calibration procedures. Include a map of the control
points used for site calibration and control points used to check the
site calibration. Describe the site calibration and checking frequency
as well as how the site calibration and checking information are to
be documented.
(f) Describe the A/E and/or EPC Contractor's quality control
procedures. Describe procedures for checking, mechanical
calibration, and maintenance of equipment. Include the frequency
and type of checks performed to ensure that the constructed
subgrade conforms to the contract plans.
5) Equipment
(a) Use GPS machine guidance equipment to meet the requirements of
the contract.
(b) Perform periodic sensor calibrations, checks for blade wear, and
other routine adjustments as required to ensure that the final
subgrade conforms to the contract plans.
6) Geometric and Surface Information
(a) Develop and maintain the initial design surface DTM for areas of the
project employing GPS machine guidance. Confirm that the design
surface DTM agrees with the contract plans.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 26
(b) Provide design surface DTM information to the department in

LandXML, Bentley InRoads Version 8i or other A/E and/or EPC
Contractor-approved format.
7) Managing and Updating Information
(a) Notify the department of any errors or discrepancies in department-
provided information. The department will determine what revisions
may be required. The department will revise the contract plans, if
necessary, to address errors or discrepancies that the Contractor
identifies. The department will provide the best available information
related to those contract plan revisions.
(b) Revise the design surface DTM as required to support construction
operations and to reflect any contract plan revisions the department
makes. Perform checks to confirm that the revised design surface
DTM agrees with the contract plan revisions. Provide a copy of the
resultant revised design surface DTM to the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor in LandXML, Bentley InRoads Version 8i or other A/E
and/or EPC Contractor-approved format. The department will pay
for costs incurred to incorporate contract plan revisions as extra
work.
8) Site Calibration
(a) Designate a set of control points, including a total of at least 6
horizontal and vertical points or 2 per km, whichever is greater, for
site calibration for the portion of the project employing GPS
machine guidance. Incorporate the department-provided control
framework used for the original survey and design.
(b) Calibrate the site by determining the parameters governing the
transformation of GPS information into the project coordinate
system. Use the full set of plan control points for the initial site
calibration. Provide the resulting site calibration file to the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor before beginning subgrade construction
operations.
9) Daily Calibration Checks
(a) In addition to the site calibration, perform site calibration checks.
Perform these checks at individual control points not used in the
initial site calibration. At a minimum, check the calibration at the
start of each day as described in the A/E and/or EPC Contractor's
GPS work plan. Report out-of-tolerance checks to the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor. The measured position must match the
established position at each individual control point within the
following tolerances:
(1) Horizontally to 30mm or less.
(2) Vertically to 20mm or less.
(b) Discuss the previous week’s daily calibration check results at the
weekly progress meeting for monitoring the GPS work.
4. Post - Construction, As-built Surveys and Record Drawings

Rev. 1 4.4 - 27
a. As-built survey measurements shall be required for all constructed facilities and
improvements to confirm the dimensions, lines, grades, locations, or materials
as shown on the Drawings. Survey measurements shall be taken, field notes
shall be kept, and accuracy shall be attained in accordance with this Division.
As-built information shall be marked on a clean set of full-size paper copy
Drawings and be submitted to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor at the completion
of construction activity. When Record Drawings are to be submitted on the
original Mylar Drawings, the as constructed changes are recorded on the paper
copy and shall be transferred to the mylar copy and both the paper copy and
mylars submitted to the A/E. The Drawings shall be clearly stamped "Record
Drawings." No final project payment will be made to the Contractor until the
Record Drawings have been submitted to and approved by the A/E.
b. The following abbreviations shall be used on the Record Drawings to denote a
deviation from the Drawings:
1) ASB "As-Built" - The actual horizontal, vertical, dimension, or quantity
measured by survey after it has been constructed.
2) F.C. "Field Change" - Revision or change of original design made in the
field.
3) "DELETED" - Not constructed.
c. Minimum requirements for construction of Record Drawings:
1) When original Mylar Drawings are used for Record Drawing purposes, all
As-built information shall be in drafting ink and all information shall
conform in size, type, and scale to the original. No stick-on information
adhesives shall be accepted on the original mylars submitted for filing of
Record Drawings.
2) When paper copies are used for record Drawing purposes, As-built Work
shall be marked in red ink or red pencil to clearly identify the changes to
the original design.
3) A straight line drawn through stationing, elevations, and notes shall show
a change, deletion, or omission and shall be followed with the
appropriate symbol.
4) Storm sewer, water, sanitary sewer, gas lines, or any construction that
has been deleted or relocated will be crosshatched.
5) Crossed out information shall remain legible.
6) The scale of new gas lines, water, sewer, or any new construction not
shown shall conform to the scale of the drawings.
7) Reference information used to prepare Record Drawings, such as
change orders, and field books, shall be noted on the drawings.
8) Profile changes will be made with elevations or stationing only. The
profile line need not be re-drawn unless the change is significant.
9) As-builts for water, sewer, gas lines, and storm drain systems shall be
accurate within 9 mm vertically and 150 mm horizontally.
10) As-built Information shall be referenced to existing subdivision survey
control and/or monumented centerline of the right-of-way control.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 28
11) As-builts for structures shall be accurate to within 13 mm vertically and

horizontally.
12) The name of the Record Drawing preparer, the employer, and the date of
the preparation shall appear in the appropriate title block on each Record
Drawing sheet.
H. Utility Rights of Way
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides for the definition, use, and identification of Utility Rights-
of-Way, existing or to be established for the project.
2. Definitions
a. Rights-of-Way
1) The right to pass through the property owned by another.
2) The strip of land subject to a non-owner right to pass through.
3) Public right-of-way: the right of passage held by the public in general to
travel on roads, freeways, and other thoroughfares.
(a) A right-of-way may be established by contract, by long standing
usage, or by public authority.
(b) Also termed a public right-of-way
(1) Refer to Black’s Law Dictionary, Eighth Edition
b. Easements
1) An interest in land owned by another, consisting in the right to use or
control the land, or in an area above or below it, for a specific limited
purpose.
(a) The primary recognized easements are
(1) A right-of-way
(2) A right of entry for any purpose relating to the dominant estate
(3) A right to the support of land and buildings
(4) A right of light and air
(5) A right of water
(6) A right to do some act that would otherwise amount to a
nuisance
(7) A right to place or keep something on the servient estate
(b) Also termed a private right-of-way
(1) Refer to Black’s Law Dictionary
3. Establishing Rights-of-Way
a. Right-of-Way for Existing Utilities
1) To establish a right-of-way for an existing utility that is not within a right-
of-way, the following shall be done:

Rev. 1 4.4 - 29
(a) The existing utility shall be field surveyed to determine the location,
course and/or depth of the utility. (Refer to Post-Construction, As-
built Surveys, and Record Drawings Subsection 4.4.1.G)
(b) The field data shall be submitted to the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
for confirmation and adherence to accuracy Standards. Once
complete:
(1) the right-of-way width and length shall be determined
(2) the right-of-way shall be added to the project drawings and/or
to the Record Drawings and shall clearly state the purpose of
the right-of-way
(3) the ownership of the land affected by the utility shall be
determined
(4) the appropriate documentation shall be prepared to establish
the right-of-way, showing the purpose of the right-of-way, the
legal description of the right-of-way tied to the project control
network, to whom the right-of-way is granted (grantee), and
the ownership of the land (grantor)
(5) the necessary signatures and acknowledgements shall be
affixed to the documents
(6) the documents shall be recorded with the appropriate
governmental agencies.
b. New Rights-of-Way
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the location, width,
course, direction, depth and/or length of the new utility, using various
criteria, which shall include but not be limited to:
(a) the purpose of the utility within the right-of-way
(b) the depth or height of the utility
(c) the terrain across which the utility will pass
(d) the ownership of the land across which the utility will pass
(e) design elements of the project which may obstruct the utility
2) The appropriate documentation shall be prepared to establish the right-
of-way, showing the purpose of the right-of-way, the legal description of
the right-of-way tied to the project control network, to whom the right-of-
way is granted (grantee), and the ownership of the land (grantor).
3) The necessary signatures and acknowledgements shall be affixed to the
documents.
4) The documents shall be submitted for record and stored with the RCJ.
4. Finalizing Rights-of-Way
a. Once the location of the rights-of-way are determined and established by
document:

Rev. 1 4.4 - 30
1) Provide stakes and monuments in the field, per the specifications

governing the type and construction of monuments, as determined by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
2) Annotate the design drawings and/or the As-built drawings.
I. Digital Terrain Modeling (DTM)
1. Synonyms
a. Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
b. Digital Surface Model (DSM)
2. DEM
a. DEM shall serve as the base information for the development of the DTM and
shall be presented as the digital cartographic representation if the earth in
rectangular grid, lattice, triangular network, spot heights or breaklines.
3. DTM Sources
a. Existing Local DTM
1) Where available the RCJ shall provide available DTM’s based on
completed surveys.
b. New Local job or Contract Specific DTMs
1) The local or job specific DTMs are collected locally as directed by the
RCJ and can be as small as a single lot or several hectares or kilometers
in size.
4. Methods
a. Several methods are available for collecting a DTM, including the following:
1) Lidar, Aerial photogrammetry, Radar
2) Real Time Kinematic GPS, Total Stations, Scanning
3) Topographic Maps
4) Doppler Radar, Focus Variation, Range Imaging
5. Accuracy
a. The accuracy of the DTM horizontally and vertically is affected by several
factors, including but not limited to the following: Method, equipment, weather,
personnel.
b. When developing a DTM, qualified personal or subcontractors shall be used.
c. Once the DTM surface is created it shall be checked in the Field for accuracy.
6. DTM Requirements for all Projects:
a. Less than 1.0 hectare or single lot developments
1) Topographic survey shall be collected on all small lot developments to
ensure accurate design tie in locations and quantities.
(a) On small lot or parcels, it would be recommended to use a field
survey crew to obtain the desired grid and critical points for use in a
DTM for the site.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 31
b. Large project sites

1) The DTM requirements for a larger project will be dependent on whether
it is a commercial site, larger residential or rural area.
(a) Methods for the larger sites will be dependent on the required
accuracy as required by the RCJ.
c. Quality Control
1) All DTM’s shall be checked for accuracy by taking ground field survey
shots on a minimum of 10 percent of areas in the DTM. Critical point
locations shall also be checked like curb tie-ins, driveways, building
fronts, etc.
2) Third party DTM’s
(a) If a DTM is provided from a third party or other sources, a 15
percent check shall be made to verify the accuracy of the provided
DTM surface.
J. Surveys
1. Aerial Survey
a. Introduction - Photogrammetric surveys establish targeted, and occasionally
non-targeted, photo control on the ground to relate aerial photographs to a
project’s horizontal and vertical datum. The photo control is used by the
Photogrammetrist to create topographic and planimetric maps for Design,
Environmental, Traffic, Hydrology, Planning, and other functional units within
RCJ boundaries.
b. Field Surveys
1) All photo control surveys shall be conducted in accordance with all of the
pertinent requirements of Subsection 4.4.1 and comply with the
requested survey precision requested by the Photogrammetrist.
2) All “pre-mark” photo control targets shall be in place before photography
is acquired.
3) It is recommended that all photo control surveys be completed before
photography is acquired.
c. Placement of Photo Control
1) Setting Photo Control Targets
(a) Wherever possible, the photo control targets shall be set on
pavement or other hard surfaces. The targets shall be painted with
flat black and flat white paint. If it is not possible to set a target on a
paved surface or other hard surface, then a cloth target shall be set.
(b) When the location of the target is likely to be disturbed by
vandalism, construction, agricultural or other activities, a durable
reference monument shall be set, and the target placed accurately
on this mark.
2) Photo Control Target Placement Tolerance
(a) Each flight plan shall list a positional tolerance that limits the
movement of the proposed photo control target from the flight plan

Rev. 1 4.4 - 32
location. This is especially important with respect to the wing points.

Properly positioned wing points are critical to the aero-triangulation
process. In general, the wing points may be moved parallel to the
flight line, but shall avoid moving the wing points perpendicular to
the flight line as the wing point may then fall outside the
photography or too close to the middle of the photography, reducing
the wing point’s effectiveness.
(b) Photo center (i.e. flight line) control monuments are established as
close to the center of the flight line as possible. Their location and
configuration are dependent upon the flight height. For highway
work the closest to the flight line center that is most often
achievable on the ground is on the shoulder of the highway.
Whenever possible, Jubail Industrial City primary control
monuments that have been previously established on the ground by
a primary control survey shall be used for all photo center control
monuments. This allows the photo control survey to be horizontally
and vertically referenced and tied directly to the primary control
established on the ground as the framework for the survey control
network without having to install additional monuments. This also
greatly reduces the amount of field surveying needed to establish
photo ground control since the primary control monuments need
only to be targeted.
(c) Photo wing control monuments are established at the extreme right
or left outer edge of the flight line in the overlapping photos. These
points allow the control to be passed from one photo to another.
Their location and configuration are dependent upon the flight
height.
(d) If the limits shown on the flight plan must be exceeded, the Aerial
Mapping Contractor and Engineer shall be contacted to determine
the best location for alternate photo control.
3) Photo Control Target Location Tips
(a) The care exercised in targeting and positioning the photo control
affects all subsequent photogrammetric processes and the final
delivered products.
(b) The planned location of the photo control provided with the flight
plan will direct the general area where the targets are to be placed.
Once in the general area, the positional tolerance given on the flight
plan and the following tips shall be used to select the final target
locations.
4) Tips on selecting locations for the setting of photo control targets:
(a) Use the flight plan to anticipate the position of the aircraft and avoid
tall objects between the plane and the targets. Stand on the
proposed target locations and imagine the plane traveling along the
flight line while looking for obstructions.
(b) Avoid tall objects that could obstruct the image of the target in one
or more exposures. If there are unavoidable tall objects near a
target, then move the target within the tolerances indicated on the

Rev. 1 4.4 - 33
flight plan or set additional targets to ensure that the area will be
properly controlled for the subsequent photogrammetric processes.
(c) Avoid shaded areas. Visit the tentative target locations at the
approximate time photography is to be obtained. Relocate the target
to a sunny spot if there are shadows in the planned location. Set
additional targets if needed.
(d) Avoid overhead wires. It is difficult for the Photogrammetrist to
measure the elevation of the photo control when there are wires
suspended above the targets.
(e) Remove grass from under cloth targets so that the growth of the
grass does not distort the cloth target between the time it was set
and the date of photography. Check the cloth target for “ballooning”
caused by growing vegetation immediately prior to ordering
photography.
(f) Choose a level spot if available. A hard surface that will accept paint
is ideal, as painted targets are more durable.
5) Orientation of the photo control targets shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a) Photo control targets shall be placed so that the legs are aligned
perpendicular and parallel to the flight line.
(b) Photo control targets must be placed on a steep slope, the target
shall be oriented so that two of the legs that form a straight line lie
along the slope at approximately the same elevation.
d. Target Specifications
1) The Figure 4.4.1.A shall be used as a guideline for target dimensions
unless specifically directed otherwise by flight plan directions from the
Photogrammetrist.
2) Where the white targets are similar in color or do not contrast with the
underlying surface they shall be outlined with flat black paint or black
roofing paper or similar material to create contrast and aid in identifying it
on the aerial photograph.
3) Painted targets may be used on local or private roads where permission
has been granted from the appropriate authority or owners.
4) Due care must be taken to ensure that materials used for targets will not
damage the environment or cause any harm to humans, animals or
machinery. Plastic targets must not be used in livestock areas.
5) All mapping control target material and fastenings (i.e. pins, wire, nails
etc.) must be removed from the field as soon as possible after the aerial
photography has been captured to minimize the impact on property
owners. However, preplanned control points (but not target material)
may be retained in urban areas if they are suitable for future works.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 34
FIGURE 4.4.1.A TARGET DIMENSIONS
NJDOT Minimum Guidelines for Aerial Photogrammetric Mapping BDC98PR-009
e. Accuracy Requirements
1) All photo control horizontal and vertical surveys shall meet the positional
accuracy as specified by the Photogrammetrist and conform to
f. Airborne GPS Surveys
1) It is the responsibility of the Aerial Mapping Contractor to:
(a) Coordinate the use of the Airborne GPS Surveys (ABGPS) for the
project.
(b) Coordinate the schedule of the ABGPS project.
(c) Coordinate the required target control layout, dimensions and
accuracy specifications.
(d) Coordinate the placement of check points to be targeted on the
control scheme for the project.
2) It is the responsibility of the Land Surveyor to:
(a) Set and survey, if needed, the monuments for the base stations.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 35
(b) Ensure that the provisions of this appendix are met when
performing ABGPS surveys.
(c) Facilitate communication during the flight.
3) ABGPS Control Requirements
(a) The Land Surveyor shall perform the ABGPS field survey to the
following requirements:
(b) The base stations horizontal coordinates shall be produced from
Jubail Industrial City control monuments established by Primary
Control Survey procedures.
(c) The photo control horizontal coordinates shall be produced from
Jubail Industrial City control monuments established by Primary or
Secondary Control Survey procedures.
4) Base Station Location Requirements
(a) The base station locations shall be based upon the following
criteria:
(1) One Station within 1 km of the Airport to be used for a static
initialization of the airplane GPS equipment.
(2) One Station within 1 km of each end of the project.
(3) Additional Stations a maximum of 40 km spacing throughout
the project.
(4) GPS suitability.
5) Equipment Requirements
(a) Base-Station Equipment Requirements - Surveys shall provide the
following equipment for use at each base-station location:
(1) A dual frequency GPS or GNSS Receiver
(2) A data logger capable of logging data at 2 hertz or better and
that has adequate memory for logging data for up to 6 hours.
(3) A Geodetic Antenna.
(4) Batteries sufficient to power the GPS or GNSS equipment for
up to 6 hours.
(5) A fixed height tripod.
(b) Airborne Equipment Requirements - The following equipment is
required for use in the aircraft:
(1) A dual frequency GPS or GNSS receiver.
(2) A data logger capable of logging data at 2 hertz or better and
that has adequate memory for logging data for up to 6 hours.
(3) An event marker.
(4) Batteries sufficient to power the GPS or GNSS equipment for
up to 6 hours.
(5) All necessary cables and adaptors.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 36
6) Aircraft Equipment Setup

(a) The Land Surveyor shall approve the aircraft antenna and camera
system prior to use on an ABGPS project. The aerial photography
Contractor shall provide the Land Surveyor with the GPS or GNSS
antenna specifications and offset survey data.
(b) The Land Surveyor and Aerial Photography Contractor shall
coordinate the following connections per the aircraft specific
checklist provided by the Engineer:
(1) Connect GPS receiver to the GPS antenna data only splitter
port, the data collector, the event marker, and the battery.
(2) Connect the event marker to the camera.
(3) If the receiver has a built-in event marker then the Land
Surveyor and Aerial Photography Contractor shall make a
direct connection between the camera and the appropriate port
or jack on the GPS or GNSS receiver.
7) Pre-flight Check
(a) The Land Surveyor and Aerial Photography Contractor shall verify
the following for the aircraft GPS or GNSS equipment:
(1) Sufficient battery power for the ABGPS project.
(2) The GPS or GNSS satellite configuration and the reception of
all signals.
(3) The activation of the camera shutter causes events to be
logged in the GPS or GNSS receiver.
8) Pre-flight Static initialization
(a) The Land Surveyor shall collect GPS or GNSS data for 20 minutes
prior to the flying of the project for a preflight static initialization and
again verify that the activation of the camera shutter causes events
to be logged. Also, they shall note the camera event number and
the GPS or GNSS receiver event number.
9) ABGPS Flight
(a) The aerial photography Contractor shall fly the flight paths shown
on the approved flight plan. Each flight line will be flown twice to
minimize the risk of having to repeat the project due to image errors
or loss of GPS or GNSS signal lock.
10) Post-flight check
(a) The Land Surveyor and Aerial Photography Contractor shall verify
that the camera events were logged in the GPS or GNSS receiver
after the ABGPS flight. If there is a discrepancy in the number of
photographs taken compared to the number of events logged, the
discrepancy shall be noted.
11) Post-flight Static initialization

Rev. 1 4.4 - 37
(a) The Land Surveyor shall continue to collect GPS or GNSS data for
an additional 20 minutes after the ABGPS flight for a post-flight
static initialization.
12) Deliverable data to A/E and EPC Contractor or RCJ
(a) ABGPS Receiver Data
(b) Base-station Receiver Data
(c) Ground Control Data
(d) Mapping Epoch Coordinates
(e) Mission Epoch Coordinates
13) Post-mission GPS or GNSS Processing and Data Analysis
(a) The Land Surveyor will post process the kinematic data and confer
with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor the results of the GPS or GNSS
processing.
2. Satellite Survey
a. Definition
1) Satellite surveying is a form of surveying and mapping that uses
information derived from various satellite constellations, together
referred to as GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System), consisting of
the U.S. Global Positioning System (GPS), the Russian GLONASS, the
European Union’s Galileo and the Chinese BeiDou systems, to provide
spatial location on or above the surface of the earth.
b. GNSS Standards and Specifications
1) GPS at: https://www.ngs.noaa.gov/PUBS_LIB/GeomGeod.pdf
2) GLONASS at: http://www.nis-glonass.ru/
3) Galileo at: http://www.esa.int/Our_Activities/Navigation/The_future_-
_Galileo/Galileo_satellites
4) BeiDou at: http://www.beidou.gov.cn/
3. Bathymetric Surveys
a. Introduction – Bathymetric surveys may include, but not be limited to:
1) Surveys of original ground or seabed in water depths between
approximately one (1) meter to thirty (30) meters.
2) Surveys and as-built mapping of dredged channels.
3) Monitoring of siltation.
4) Locations and elevations of underwater structures or objects.
b. All work will conform to the general requirements for hydrographic surveys
required above.
c. All survey work will be related to Plant Grid or UTM, as directed.
d. For safety considerations, all work will be carried out during daylight hours,
unless otherwise permitted.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 38
e. An assessment must be carried out regarding prevailing water and weather

conditions, before embarking on any water-based survey work.
f. Survey Procedures
1) For surveys in up to 1 meter of water depth, conventional survey
techniques can be applied, providing that safe water and underfoot
conditions apply.
(a) Horizontal position and elevation will be obtained simultaneously by
total station measurements from known control points or by
differential or RTK (Real-Time Kinematic) GPS or GNSS
positioning.
(b) Survey data shall be recorded in a dedicated data logger, in real
time.
(c) To ensure full coverage of the required area, it is recommended that
cross sections are carried out at a pre-determined spacing
(minimum 25 meters).
(d) Survey points will be plotted and depth contours (isobaths)
interpolated at agreed vertical intervals (typically 0.25 meters for
most applications, but this may be increased to 0.5 meters for non-
critical areas, subject to agreement by RCJ).
(e) Existing sea bed conditions and approximate depth of silt shall be
recorded.
(f) There will be no requirement to record tidal data, although
approximate water level at the time of survey shall be noted.
2) For surveys in depths of 1 meter or more, survey equipment and
personnel will need to be located on a floating platform or boat, entailing
the following requirements for horizontal positioning, soundings, tidal
data and motion control:
(a) Horizontal position by total station measurements from known
control points:
(1) Horizontal position by total station will be restricted to close
inshore work
(2) For total station measurements, the point of measurement
must be coaxial with the echo-sounder transponder, to enable
simultaneous recording of horizontal and vertical
measurements.
(3) Both total station measurements and soundings must be
accurately time-related to combine horizontal positions with
observed depths.
(b) Horizontal position by GPS or GNSS measurements:
(1) Wherever practicable, to reconcile horizontal and vertical
measurements the GPS equipment and echo-sounder
transponder shall be installed co-axially.
(2) If co-axial mounting is not possible, then a minimum of two
GPS receivers shall be installed and spaced in such a way as

Rev. 1 4.4 - 39
to provide a strong geometric relationship with the transponder

location.
(3) Pre-survey determination of the relative locations of GPS
receivers and transponder on the vessel will be required during
each installation of the equipment.
(4) GPS observations shall be continuously recorded (preferred
10Hz).
(5) An independent daily check of the on-board GPS receiver shall
be carried out using a separate GPS receiver or total station,
to verify performance of the vessel’s position-fixing system.
(6) Regular dynamic checks of the GPS shall also be made
against a distinctive and permanent site feature (preferably in
water of less than 10-meter depth).
(c) Depth measurement using Single-Beam Echo Sounders (SBES):
(1) SBES equipment will typically be used in situations where full
sea-bed coverage is not required.
(2) Soundings will be obtained in the form of cross sections, at a
pre-determined spacing.
(i) For depths less than 10 meters, the maximum spacing of
cross sections shall be the lesser of 3x average depth or
25 meters.
(ii) For depths between 10 meters and 30 meters, the
maximum spacing of cross sections shall be 50 meters.
(3) Equipment must be calibrated using a standard ‘bar check’
routine.
(4) Bar checks must be carried out before and after each survey
mission, or, at a minimum, daily.
(5) The echo sounder must be accurately positioned relative to the
position-fixing equipment (see (b) above).
(d) Depth measurement using Multi-Beam Echo Sounders (MBES)
(1) MBES equipment will typically be used when full seabed
coverage is required.
(2) MBES coverage shall be limited to between 45° and 50° each
side of the nadir.
(3) MBES cross sections shall be spaced to provide at least 20%
overlap, to ensure full seabed coverage.
(4) Equipment must be calibrated using a Patch Test, to
determine the mount angles of the transducer(s) relative to the
vessel’s axes (roll, pitch and heading).
(5) Wherever practicable, the equipment shall be tested using a
reference surface (i.e. a suitable area of sea floor that has
been previously surveyed), where repeated measurements
can be compared to identify systematic errors.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 40
(6) For optimum results, motion sensor equipment shall be used

to correct for variations in pitch, roll and heading of the vessel
(otherwise the GPS measurements can fulfill this purpose, but
accuracy may be compromised due to the GPS update rate).
(e) Tidal Measurements
(1) All surveys carried out within tidal areas must be corrected for
tidal variation.
(2) Unless otherwise agreed, a continuously recording tide gauge
must be used for all bathymetric surveys.
(3) The tide gauge must be situated to provide representative tidal
information for the survey area.
(4) The elevation of the tide gauge must be verified relative to the
project datum.
(5) If an automatically-recording tide gauge is unavailable, a
manual tide gauge will be installed. Manual recording of tidal
data must be of sufficient frequency to accurately depict the
tidal curve.
g. Survey Accuracies
1) For engineering surveys or for shallow water harbors, berths and
associated critical channels, with minimum under-keel clearances:
(a) Soundings – 1 meter horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical
(b) Features – 0.5 meters for horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical
2) For non-shallow water harbors, berths and associated critical channels,
with minimum under-keel clearances:
(a) Soundings – 1 meter horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical.
(b) Features – 1 meter for horizontal and ±0.1 meters vertical
h. Survey Processing
1) Survey data processing will combine soundings, positions, tidal data and
motion sensor data, into a single data set.
2) A clean data set will be required, eliminating any erroneous data
revealed by the various check measurements.
(a) Data smoothing will not be acceptable, without prior agreement.
Data smoothing, if agreed, must clearly identify the magnitude of
discrepancies between raw and smoothed data.
(b) Large data sets may be thinned using ‘shoal bias thinning’, provided
the accuracy of the survey data is maintained.
(c) For data that will be used for chart preparation, a Combined
Uncertainty and Bathymetric Estimator (CUBE) surface will be
provided.
(d) For volumetric calculations, a data set comprising a grid of average
depths will be required (grid spacing to be agreed on a project by
project basis).

Rev. 1 4.4 - 41
3) A survey report will be required, including the following:

(a) Discussion of the methods used for the survey
(b) Analysis of the results, with an assessment of accuracies achieved
(c) Identification and quantification of all potential error sources, with
derivation of the Total Propagated Uncertainty (TPU) for the data
set.
i. Deliverables
1) Hard copies of all plans and charts
2) Daily logs and reports
3) Evidence of equipment calibrations
4) Digital files including all soundings, located features and tidal data
4. Geodetic Control Surveys
a. Geodetic Control survey
1) The boundary of Jubail Industrial City.
2) Accuracy of Geodetic Control Surveys
(a) http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/tech_pub/1984-stds-specs-
geodetic-control-networks.htm
3) Survey shall be used to locate all onshore boundaries of Jubail Industrial
City, as well as the boundaries of the following areas:
(a) Community Area
(b) Existing Industrial Area
(c) Airport Area
(d) New Industrial Area
(e) Rural Surveys as Required
4) As required, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor will obtain data on various
stations of the National Geodetic Network established by the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia, on the ARAMCO UTM coordinate system.
5) The Consultant will establish, maintain, and expand as per project
specifications where necessary, the Geodetic Horizontal Controls and
the Precise Vertical Control as required by the Royal Commission Jubail.
6) Monuments shall be placed at all corners, angle points and at
approximately 100 m intervals on tangents along these boundaries.
Every Geodetic monument shall have geographic coordinates, UTM
coordinates with scale factor, and Plant Grid coordinates.
5. Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Control Surveys
a. Primary Control Surveys
1) Primary Control Surveys are used to establish the initial Control for:
(a) The Boundaries of Sections and Districts

Rev. 1 4.4 - 42
(b) Airports Primary and Secondary Control (PAC,SAC)

2) Survey shall be used within Community Area to locate the boundaries of
Districts that are developed. The boundaries shall be established and
monumented on each corner (on land only), and all angle points along
the boundary. Each point established shall be identified in Plant Grid
coordinates.
3) Within Community Area, Airport Area and New Industrial Area all section
boundaries shall be established and monumented at each corner, along
the boundary lines (on land only), using primary order surveying. Each
point established shall be identified in Plant Grid coordinates.
4) All monuments established by primary order surveying shall have
elevations established using Precise Leveling accuracy methods.
b. Secondary Control Surveys
1) Secondary Control Surveys are to establish:
(a) Intersections of Street Centerlines
2) Survey shall be used for further subdivision of Sections and Districts.
Within Community Area, all sector boundaries, street centerlines and
intersections shall be established and monumented, as well as block
boundaries, using secondary order surveying. All points so established
shall have Plant Grid coordinates.
3) Secondary order surveying shall be used for further subdivision of
Existing Industrial Area, Airport Area and New Industrial Area. For each
of these Districts, each street centerline and centerline intersection shall
be established and monumented. A minimum of two monuments shall be
established within each primary industrial site. All other Districts,
including Support and Secondary Industries, shall have each block
monumented, with Plant Grid coordinates established for each point.
4) Each point, so established, shall have an elevation established in
accordance with Primary Leveling criteria.
c. Tertiary Horizontal Control Surveys
1) Tertiary horizontal Control Survey are to establish:
(a) Lot Lines
(b) Construction Surveys
(c) Local Project Control, etc.
2) Survey shall be used for the final subdivision of blocks into lots, plots or
parcels for final usage. This covers all lot or plot boundaries within
Community Area which shall be established and monumented.
3) Each point shall have coordinates in Plant Grid. All the Royal
Commission facilities (i.e., pump stations, storage reservoirs, rest areas,
O & M Centers, etc.) shall have their boundaries established and
monumented.
d. Accuracy Requirements
1) Standards and Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks

Rev. 1 4.4 - 43
(a) http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/tech_pub/1984-stds-specs-
geodetic-control-networks.htm
6. Precise, Primary and Secondary Vertical Control Surveys
a. Benchmarks shall be installed where required as per the project specifications.
b. Benchmarks shall be established using differential leveling methods.
c. The order of accuracy shall be as required by the Royal Commission Jubail per
project specifications.
1) Geodetic Leveling Class and Accuracy Standards and Methods:
(a) http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/FGCS/tech_pub/Fgcsvert.v41.specs.pdf
d. Monuments shall be set and constructed in accordance with the latest revision
of drawings as approved by the Royal Commission.
e. Equipment (Digital and Conventional Levels)
1) Use per manufacturer’s specifications.
2) Use all levels with methods as referenced in this Subsection
4.4.1.J.6.c.1)(a).
7. Cadastral Control Surveys
a. Introduction - Cadastral surveying is that branch of surveying which is
concerned with the survey and demarcation of land for the purpose of defining
parcels of land for registration in a land registry.
b. Every cadastral control survey shall be carried out in strict compliance with these
guidelines.
c. Before commencing a cadastral control survey, existing survey data relating to
the survey is to be obtained by consulting the records of the Authority or, if he is
so directed by the Authority.
d. Cadastral Project Control - A network or series of control points that are
established per procedures outlined in Subsection 4.1.1.J.5. The Cadastral
Project Control is adjusted independently of other cadastral measurements.
1) Standards for the Positional Accuracy of Cadastral Surveys When Using
Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS), February 23, 2009,
Cadastral Survey, Bureau of Land Management, Department of the
Interior, Washington, DC
2) Geo Information in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Municipal
and Rural Affairs, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, 2010
3) Modernization of Saudi Cadastre Alrajhi, M., and Hawarey, M. Ministry of
Municipal and Rural Affairs, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia
4) Boundary and Surveys Maps Act, Chapter 25, 02/07/2007, Singapore
Attorney General’s Chambers
5) Cadastral Survey Guidelines, Government of South Australia, July 2014
8. Cadastral Lot Surveys
a. Survey Evidence

Rev. 1 4.4 - 44
1) A surveyor must, before carrying out a cadastral survey, obtain all

information that is likely to provide evidence of the boundaries of land to
be surveyed; and that is reasonably accessible.
2) A surveyor must, in carrying out a cadastral survey, locate all existing
survey marks, reference marks, improvements and natural features likely
to provide evidence of the boundaries of the land; and connect the
survey to all existing surveys of land in the vicinity likely to provide
evidence of the boundaries of land by:
(a) connecting to at least 2 apparently sound survey marks or reference
marks placed or accepted in the existing survey; or
(b) if there are not 2 apparently sound survey marks or reference marks
to which the survey may be connected - by connecting to such
apparently sound survey marks as are available and to
improvements in a manner that enables the existing survey to be re-
established.
3) If significant differences in the data from an existing survey are revealed
then perform further work as may be necessary to establish whether or
not the difference results from an error in measurement in the existing
survey, the placement or acceptance of the survey mark in the existing
survey or the siting of the improvement.
b. Marking of Boundaries
1) The boundaries in a cadastral survey must be marked with acceptable
monuments together with any additional markings as are necessary to
assist in locating the corners and the direction of boundaries.
2) The line identification and marking must be implemented in a manner so
that the defined boundary can be readily identified.
c. Survey Boundaries
1) The cadastral survey must relate to the boundaries referred to in the
documents of title of the subject land and adjoining parcels of land.
d. Field Requirements of a Cadastral Survey
1) A datum must be adopted and verified in accordance with a previous
cadastral survey or plan.
2) If an abstract of field records is to be lodged, bring the bearing and co-
ordinate datum on to the datum as called for in Cadastral Control
Surveys, per Subsection 4.4.1.J.7.d.
3) If a connection is shown on the document of title, measure that
connection unless the position of the subject land can be satisfactorily
determined otherwise.
4) Connect the cadastral survey to relevant permanent marks, primary
cadastral marks and other relevant survey marks.
5) Locate and clearly describe any feature on or near the boundaries of the
subject land likely to affect those boundaries.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 45
6) Locate and clearly describe any feature within the subject land the
description and position of which is necessary for the purpose of the
survey.
7) Determine the length and bearing of each surveyed boundary of the
subject land and independently check the accuracy of each
determination.
8) Ensure that an irregular boundary is determined at all conspicuous
changes in direction at such intervals as are necessary to accurately
determine the boundary.
9) If the survey of a subdivision is connected to a minimum of two
permanent marks or primary cadastral marks and one reference mark in
situations where they are unlikely to be disturbed, the placement of any
further permanent or primary cadastral marks within the subdivision may
be postponed if the construction of roads or buildings or other works are
to be undertaken which are likely to displace those permanent marks or
primary cadastral marks during construction.
10) If the placement of further marks is postponed a supplementary abstract
of field records showing the details and connections to the marks placed
must be lodged within one month after completion of construction.
e. Information to be recorded in the field records:
1) the recording of cadastral survey information gathered in the field is
undertaken in a systematic manner and is readily comprehensible; and
information in the field records includes:
(a) A list identifying the survey instruments used and their calibrations.
(b) All measurements made in the field and all corrections applied.
(c) Sufficient information to prepare an abstract of field records.
(d) All field records are kept to be readily available for submission to or
perusal by any person duly authorized by the Deputy Ministry of
Land Surveying.
2) the information to be recorded schematically on an abstract of field
records of a cadastral survey provides:
(a) Clear details of the cadastral survey datum and relationship to the
property boundaries.
(b) The method of marking the perimeter boundaries of the property
under survey.
(c) Any relevant information external to the property under survey
which has aided in the determination of property boundaries and the
relationship with existing and new survey marks.
3) the information to be recorded on cadastral survey plan provides:
(a) That a plan of survey is prepared using conventional signs and
symbols as accepted by the controlling jurisdiction.
(b) The plan clearly portrays all relevant information which relates to
the property boundaries, road alignments and any registered

Rev. 1 4.4 - 46
easements or reservations or conditions in the nature of an

easement which relate to the land under survey.
4) Certification of Abstract of Field Records and Survey Plan.
(a) The first sheet of an abstract of field records of a cadastral survey
must show a certification as follows:
(1) CERTIFICATE BY SURVEYOR FOR ABSTRACT OF FIELD
RECORDS
I, (insert full name) of (insert office address) certify that this
abstract of field records correctly represents the results of
the survey effected under my direction and supervision and
marked on the ground in accordance with the (insert
appropriate statute), that the survey accuracy accords with
that required for Cadastral Land Surveys as defined in
regulation (insert appropriate statute) and that this abstract
of field records correctly represents the adopted boundaries
and the related features existing on (insert date).
Date: (insert date of certificate)
(signature)
(insert title)
(insert appropriate statute)
(b) If a plan references the details of a cadastral survey carried out for
the purpose of making that plan, the surveyor must endorse it with a
certification referenced as follows:
(1) CERTIFICATE BY SURVEYOR FOR PLAN
I, (insert full name) of (insert office address) certify that this
plan has been prepared from a survey made under my
direction and supervision in accordance with the (insert
appropriate statute), and completed on the (insert date of
completion), that this plan is accurate and correctly
represents the adopted boundaries and the survey
accuracy accords with that required for Cadastral Land
Surveys as defined in regulation (insert appropriate
statute).
Date: (insert date of certificate)
(signature)
(insert title)
(insert appropriate statute)
5) Reports to accompany an abstract of field records or survey plan may
include:
(a) The relevant facts concerning abuttals and encumbrances, existing
occupation details, relationship with other relevant cadastral
surveys and the way the boundaries of the property under survey
have been determined.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 47
(b) Provide details on the date of calibration of measuring equipment

used in the cadastral survey.
(c) The appropriate marking out or definition of the roads, reserves,
boundaries, lots, and common property has been made.
(d) The connection of the survey to permanent marks, primary
cadastral marks and reference marks as required or postponed in
accordance with item (9).
(1) Survey (Cadastral surveys) Regulations, SR No. 56/2005,
Version April 18 2008, National Mapping Council of Australia
f. Entry to Land / Property for the purpose of conducting Cadastral Lot Surveys
shall follow the procedures outlined below:
1) The surveyor shall give the occupant / owner a written notice of his
intention to enter the land / property to do the survey at least 3 working
days in advance.
2) At the appointed time, the surveyor or his approved assistant shall
explain to the occupant / owner his intention of entering the land to do
the survey. He shall produce an authority card on first entering and
whenever subsequently requested to do so.
3) If the surveyor or his approved assistant surveyor is denied entry, he
shall not force his way into the land but rather seek the help of the owner
who engages him to perform the survey to speak to the occupant / owner
who has denied entry, to gain access for the Surveyor. Refer to:
Singapore Land Authority CS Circular No. 3/2004.
9. As Built and Topographic Surveys
a. As-built, topographic, spot height and contour surveys shall be carried out using
accepted horizontal and vertical survey control as described in Subsections
4.4.1.D and 4.4.1.E. Automated data capture methods shall be used, and final
maps also presented in a format compatible to Royal Commission systems and
software.
b. Planimetric Mapping Information
1) The absolute paper plan position of any well-defined point of detail shall
be correct to within ± 0.3 mm RMSE (Root Mean Square Error) at the
plan scale, when checked from the nearest control station.
c. Height Information
1) Ground survey spot levels on hard surfaces shall be correct to ± 10 mm
RMSE and elsewhere to ± 50 mm, except on ploughed or otherwise
broken surfaces in relation to the nearest control station.
2) Height information shall be provided
(a) either as an elevation to depict details true to ground,
(b) or as spot heights throughout the survey area,
(c) or as height of detail, i.e. from ground terrain to top level of the
details, e.g. height of a lamp post.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 48
3) Elevations shall be surveyed such that the ground terrain of a feature

which attached or intersected with the ground is derived. Thus, when
using reflectorless Total Station, correct location(s) of detail point(s) must
be surveyed to feature from the ground terrain. For instance, the base of
a streetlamp pole shall be surveyed instead of random point on the pole.
4) Generally, spot heights shall be taken at intervals of not more than 15 m
to allow capturing of possible discontinuities of terrain. Spot heights shall
be taken on all roads, at intersections, building corners, edges of
carriageways, invert of drains, footpaths, bridges, fire hydrants, other
salient ground features and at all changes in grade.
d. Level of details to be surveyed
1) All visible details shall be surveyed. Where relevant, indicate features
that are considered encroachments. If encroachment survey is to be
carried out, it shall be done according to cadastral survey Standards.
2) Saplings and trees where required shall be surveyed and described.
Generally, trees with girth 100mm and above (measured 1 m above
ground level) shall be surveyed.
3) List of features to be located and shown:
(a) Property and right-of-way monuments
(b) Visible boundary features, e.g. walls, fences, hedges
(c) Roads, tracks, footways, paths
(d) Buildings and ancillary facilities and structures
(e) Utility structures and above-ground evidence of underground utility
lines
(f) Overhead lines drape, low points and level at insulator or support
(g) Landscape and vegetation
(h) Water features
(i) Earthworks
(j) Railway features
(k) For sewer manholes, electrical / telecommunication manholes and
inspection chambers, the cover levels and invert levels shall be
surveyed if accessible. The type of manhole and inspection
chamber, pipe or conduit size and material, and direction of flow
shall be reflected in the plan.
(l) For drains, invert levels and coping/top and linear features such as
berms, roads and fences levels shall be surveyed generally at 5 m
interval. For cascading drain, the coping and invert levels shall be
surveyed. Covered drains with iron grating shall be surveyed. pipe
size and material, and direction of flow shall be reflected in the plan.
(m) Above-ground electric boxes, lamp/cable posts with numbers,
exposed/overhead cables, etc. shall be surveyed.
(n) Above-ground telecommunication FDT’s, RAN/ MSAN Cabinets and
GSM Towers etc. shall be surveyed.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 49
4) Cross-sections must be right-angle to center line and shall be surveyed

generally at 25m interval and 5 m along curves, tunnels roads etc.
5) Road names and building/block numbers shall be noted in the field and
shown on the map.
6) Edges of ponds, lakes, streams, or other water bodies shall be surveyed.
10. Verifying Surveys by Others
a. All Consultants working for the Royal Commission shall perform check surveys
on the following types of surveys:
1) All previous surveys for the Royal Commission
2) All adjoining surveys
3) Other Survey Consulting Contractors working on the same projects
4) Roadway construction, drainage, utilities, airports, power lines, airports,
railroads, pipelines, right-of-way and property boundaries, and other
surveys common to construction and mapping.
b. Survey Verification as follows:
1) Minimum of 3 horizontal control points.
2) Minimum of 2 vertical control points.
3) On adjoining lots, at a minimum check property corners on coincident
property lines
4) On topography, construction, mapping, etc., at a minimum check tie in
points, outfalls, flowlines, angle points etc., to ensure your survey or the
previous surveys all match together and are using the same datum.
11. Monitoring Large Area Subsidence
a. Introduction – A network of subsidence benchmarks has been established
throughout Jubail. These benchmarks will be monitored for the purpose of
detecting any land movement.
b. Monitoring will include vertical measurements only.
c. Measurement of Subsidence Using GPS/GNSS
1) For initial detection of significant movements, static GPS/GNSS
observations will be used, including all existing subsidence benchmarks.
2) Repeat measurements will be made at agreed intervals.
3) A minimum of three (3) remote benchmarks will be identified or
established, situated on bed rock not liable to subsidence. These
‘controlling’ benchmarks will be incorporated into the measurements, to
enable detection of ground movement within the area of interest.
4) Results will be tabulated (and graphed, if required), including apparent
differential movement between monitoring epochs.
5) GPS/GNSS measurements are not as accurate as conventional leveling;
therefore, any significant movement trends identified through the
GPS/GNSS data will be verified by leveling.
d. Conventional Leveling Measurements

Rev. 1 4.4 - 50
1) Depending upon results from GPS/GNSS measurements, a

determination will be made as to whether a full- or partial- leveling
regime will be required for the subsidence benchmarks.
2) Monitoring shall be carried out using primary leveling procedures which
will comply with the requirements set out in Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
3) A proposed program of leveling observations will be developed based on
the existing network and focused on any apparent movements identified
in Subsection 4.4.1.J.11.c.3).
4) Subsequent monitoring visits will follow the same measurement protocol,
to enable direct comparisons between monitoring epochs.
5) The benchmark network data will be processed using an approved ‘least
squares’ adjustment process.
e. Results of each monitoring visit will be tabulated as noted in Subsection
4.4.1.J.11.c.3).
12. Monitoring Horizontal and Vertical Movement of Structures
a. Introduction - Monitoring of horizontal and vertical movement of structures may
include but is not limited to:
1) Mosques and minarets
2) Seawater cooling canal slabs (above and below water)
3) Control gates, pipes, and pump houses
4) Bridges and towers
5) Tanks (elevated and ground)
6) Industrial facilities and equipment
7) Public buildings.
b. All monitoring carried out under this item will use first-order procedures and
equipment.
c. Precise leveling procedures will comply with requirements set out in Subsection
4.4.1.J.6.
d. Primary horizontal control procedures will comply with requirements set out in
e. Frequency of monitoring will be determined by the client on a case-by-case
basis.
f. Survey Reference Monuments
1) Survey monuments used for monitoring measurement must be of stable
and durable construction. Some examples are as follows:
(a) Cast-in-place concrete pile with #16 diameter steel bolt (standard
survey fitting).
(b) Steel pile driven to refusal with #16 diameter steel bolt.
(c) Steel bolt set into bed rock or existing stable concrete structure.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 51
2) Whenever possible, the survey monument shall allow for forced-

centering of survey equipment. If not possible, and tripod-mounted
equipment is needed, then fixed-leg tripods shall be utilized.
3) Survey reference monuments must be located to provide a strong
geometric figure, consistent with optimization of measurements.
4) Unless site constraints dictate otherwise, each survey monitoring point
shall be visible from at least two reference monuments.
5) Local reference monuments, established to monitor a specific location,
must be related back to remote control points that are unlikely to be
affected by local movement.
g. Survey Monitoring Points
1) Points used for monitoring measurement need to be fixed, stable and
capable of being used for repeat measurements over a lengthy period.
Different types of points may need to be used and care needs to be
taken to minimize impact to the structure. Some examples are as follows:
(a) Survey prisms, directly attached to the structure.
(b) Flat survey targets, epoxied onto the surface of the structure (only
use in non-sensitive areas).
(c) Bolts drilled into the structure (capable of being occupied by a level
rod).
(d) Fixed and well-defined points on the structure that can be reliably
re-measured.
h. Horizontal Monitoring
1) Control Network Measurement
(a) Measurements required to establish the reference control network
will be carried out in accordance with primary control procedures,
refer to Subsection 4.4.1.J.5.
(b) All possible cross measurements between reference points will be
obtained, to strengthen the network.
(c) Wherever possible, external reference objects will be included in the
control observations, to provide a gross check on the stability of the
control network.
(d) The control network data will be processed using an approved ‘least
squares’ adjustment protocol.
2) Monitoring Measurement
(a) All normal precautions will be observed to ensure that
measurements comply with first-order survey procedures, refer to
(b) During each monitoring visit, care shall be taken to use the same
base station – reference station combination for each set of
measurements.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 52
(c) Measurements shall be commenced at approximately the same

time of day and carried out in the same sequence, to minimize
external influences.
(d) Wherever possible, redundant measurements shall be made to
monitoring points from different points in the control network.
(e) Measurements to individual points can be angle and distance,
intersecting angles or intersecting distances, depending on
circumstances. Reflectorless instruments may be used over short
distances, providing the accuracy requirements stated herein are
complied with. However, the same combination of measurements
shall be maintained throughout the whole life cycle of the
monitoring.
(f) Results of each monitoring visit will be tabulated and compared to
the base value from the initial visit. Differential movement will be
tabulated and graphed, if significant.
i. Vertical Monitoring
1) Control Network Measurement
(a) Measurements required to establish the reference control network
will be carried out in accordance with precise leveling procedures,
refer to Subsection 4.4.1.J.6.
(b) A remote benchmark must be established in an area unlikely to be
affected by local movement.
(c) All possible cross measurements between reference points will be
obtained, to strengthen the network.
(d) The control network data will be processed using an approved ‘least
squares’ adjustment protocol.
2) Monitoring Measurement
(a) All normal precautions will be observed to ensure that
measurements comply with first order leveling procedures, refer to
(b) Measurements shall be commenced at approximately the same
time of day and carried out in the same sequence, to minimize
external influences.
(c) Results will be tabulated as described in Subsection 4.4.1.J.12.h. 2)
(f).
13. Monitoring and Evaluating Ground Water Elevations and Data
a. Introduction – Where there is a need to sample ground water and monitor water
elevations at groundwater abstraction wells, pumping wells and piezometer
locations, suitable monitoring controls shall be provided to ensure that:
1) Groundwater quantities and levels can be effectively managed and
monitored.
2) Groundwater quality is maintained
3) Ground subsidence can be minimized.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 53
b. Monitoring Control
1) Benchmarks will be established at each well site, to use as a basis for
ground water elevation monitoring.
2) Benchmarks will consist of survey markers drilled into the concrete pad
around the well (if existing) or a punch mark on an accessible part of the
well assembly.
3) Benchmarks and piezometers will be connected to existing primary
control; using secondary leveling techniques, refer to Subsection
4.4.1.J.6.
4) Ground elevation adjacent to the well head or piezometer will be
measured.
5) Horizontal location will be established using methods outlined in
6) A report will be compiled to include coordinates and elevations of
benchmarks and piezometers, with descriptions including photographs.
c. Ground Water Monitoring
1) Ground water elevation monitoring at well sites will be affected by direct
measurement between the well casing and pump column using a metal
tape or lead line (shallow wells) or electrical well-sounding equipment.
Elevations will be related to the well head benchmark.
2) Piezometer measurements will be recorded by a data logger or portable
readout unit.
3) Results will be provided in the form of a spreadsheet, including
comparisons between successive monitoring visits and incorporating the
following information:
(a) Name and location of well or piezometer
(b) Date of measurement
(c) Reference point to which measurements are related
(d) Ground surface elevation, depth to groundwater and elevation of
groundwater surface
14. New Witness Posts
a. Witness posts shall be set at all primary control points as follows:
1) All primary construction control points
(a) Horizontal
(b) Vertical
2) Airports
(a) All PACs (primary airport control)
(b) All SACs (secondary airport control)
(1) All witness post locations set on airports must be pre-approved
by the airport manager prior to setting.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 54
3) Cadastral Corners
(a) All baseline points and corners
b. Type of Posts
1) Metal post with Metal Sign
2) Fiberglass post
15. Fundamental Benchmark
a. Benchmarks shall be constructed in accordance with the RCJ’s standard
drawings and all subsequent revisions thereto. Installation, cleaning, priming,
and painting of the proper witness posts and monument shall be included.
b. A diagram shall be prepared for each permanent benchmark showing clearly its
general location, with dimensions to at least three easily recognizable and
durable reference points, together with its description and designation.
c. 3 Digital photographs of the benchmark shall be taken as follows:
1) 1 of the elevation mark, from a position that clearly shows the station
markings.
2) 2 of the benchmark structure, from 3 to 10 meters away and from two
different locations, showing the general location and surrounding
features.
3) The elevation of the benchmark shall be measured in accordance with
the precise vertical control survey Standards described in Subsection
4.4.1.J.6.
4) Photographs shall be annotated and submitted with the elevation report.
16. Geodetic Control Pillar
a. Geodetic Control Pillars shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ
specifications and all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be constructed of the highest quality materials and workmanship to
assure longevity and durability.
c. They shall be placed to be stable and protected from nearby activities whenever
and wherever possible.
d. Number and location of monuments shall be as directed by RCJ.
17. Second and Third Order Control Monuments
a. Second and third order control monuments shall be constructed in accordance
with RCJ specifications and all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be constructed of the highest quality materials and workmanship to
assure longevity and durability.
c. They shall be placed to be as stable as possible and protected from nearby
activities.
d. They shall be placed in locations with good visibility in all directions and
intervisible with a minimum of two other control monuments, and/or as directed
by the RCJ.
e. They shall be completed with aluminum bronze plaques and witness posts.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 55
18. First, Second, and Third Order Control Plaques

a. Plaques shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ specifications and all
subsequent revisions.
b. The plaques shall be stamped or otherwise marked with all pertinent
information.
19. Boundary Marker
a. Boundary Markers shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ specifications
and all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be placed so as to mark the boundary lines and corners as directed.
c. They shall be placed so as to be as stable as possible and protected from nearby
activities.
20. Bronze Cadastral Survey Plaque
a. The bronze cadastral survey plaques shall be constructed in accordance with
RCJ specifications and all subsequent revisions.
b. They shall be stamped or otherwise marked with all pertinent information.
21. Lot Monuments
a. The lot monuments shall be constructed in accordance with RCJ specifications
and all subsequent revisions.
b. Shall be placed at all lot corners and/or along the lot lines as directed by the
RCJ
22. Underwater Surveys
a. Introduction – Underwater Surveys may be required for inspection of existing
facilities or conditions, including but not limited to, the following:
1) Natural sea-bed materials, dredged channels, prepared gravel beds,
rock or concrete slope protection and the like.
2) Cooling system structures, moorings, foundations, piles, sheet pile walls,
intake and outlet structures, pipelines, retaining structures and other
structural elements.
3) Navigational equipment, buoys, hulls of barges and other vessels.
b. The purpose of such underwater surveys will be to provide information
pertaining to damage, corrosion, effectiveness of repairs, functionality of
equipment and evaluation of future maintenance requirements, and to facilitate
an assessment of whether work performed by others has been carried out in
accordance with designs and specifications.
c. The surveys will generally be limited to depths of up to thirty (30) meters.
d. Surveys in water depths of up to one (1) meter will be carried out by conventional
survey techniques, as detailed in Subsection 4.4.1.J.3.
e. Underwater surveys below 1-meter depth will be carried out by teams of
qualified divers, who shall include a qualified engineer. Appropriate certifications
of competence will be required.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 56
f. Supporting survey measurements which may be required to supplement the

underwater survey below 1-meter depth will be performed as described in
Subsections 4.4.1.F and 4.4.1.J.3.
g. Underwater inspections will be carried out to one of three levels of detail, as
determined by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
1) Level 1: General Visual Inspection
(a) Confirm as-built structural plans
(b) Detect obvious major damage or deterioration due to overstress
(e.g. collisions), severe corrosion or extensive biological attack.
(c) This level of inspection is generally regarded as an overview, used
to develop a subsequent inspection strategy, and shall reveal the
following:
(1) Steel – extensive corrosion or severe mechanical damage.
(2) Concrete – Major failures, spalling and cracking, severe
reinforcement corrosion.
2) Level 2: Close-Up Visual Inspection
(a) A complete detailed inspection of selected components or critical
areas of structures.
(b) Identification of damaged or deteriorating areas hidden by surface
biofouling.
(c) Limited measurements of deteriorating areas (may be preceded by
cleaning), using measuring scales or calipers.
(d) Limited probing or testing for structural integrity.
(e) This level of inspection shall reveal typical defects such as:
(1) Steel – moderate mechanical damage, major corrosion pitting.
(2) Concrete – surface cracking and crumbling, rust staining,
exposed rebar or other reinforcing material
(3) Wood – External damage due to marine borers or pre-damage
infestation, splintered wood, loss of bolts or fasteners.
3) Level 3: Highly Detailed Inspection
(a) Level 3 inspections will only be carried out by qualified engineering
and testing personnel.
(b) This level is designed to provide data pursuant to a structural
assessment. Procedures, including non-destructive testing, will be
used to detect hidden or imminent damage, loss in cross-sectional
area and material homogeneity.
(c) Prior cleaning will normally be required.
(d) Partially destructive testing (e.g. sample coring) may be required.
(e) This level of inspection shall reveal the following information or
defects:
(1) Steel – remaining thickness of material

Rev. 1 4.4 - 57
(2) Concrete – location of rebar, extent of rebar corrosion, internal

voids, changes in material strength
(3) Wood – Internal voids and damage due to marine borers,
changes in material strength
h. Frequency of Inspection
1) The frequency of inspection will vary, depending on the expected rate of
damage and deterioration. Active areas (e.g. ships’ berthing areas) are
likely to deteriorate more quickly.
(a) Recommended frequencies, per US Navy, ‘Volume 4 NAVFAC MO-
322, Inspection of Shore Facilities’ are as follows:
(1) Superstructure, piling and sheet piling above the water line –
annually
(2) Concrete/steel members at splash/tidal zones and downwards
– at least every 6 years
(3) In areas where marine infestation is known to be a problem,
these frequencies will be reduced accordingly.
i. Documentation
1) Documentation must be comprehensive and provide a full understanding
of location and condition of the various elements inspected.
2) Pre-planning shall include a scheme for designating structural elements
or other key items, for subsequent reference throughout the survey.
3) Documentation shall include daily logs of inspection findings, including
measurement data, locations of observations and water depth.
4) Wherever practicable, inspections shall be documented with
photography and/or video, referenced and labeled with the description
and location of the object. A slate, with reference information shall be
included in each photograph or video.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 58
SUBSECTION 4.4.2 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
4.4.2 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
A. General
1. Introduction
This Section of the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) provides general guidelines
on development of geotechnical investigations for the Royal Commission of Saudi
Arabia in Jubail (RCJ). The Manual presents the general state of the practice for the
scope and specific elements of typical geotechnical investigation programs and
should be read in conjunction with Section 5.X where analysis and design
requirements for the construction of RCJ facilities, including buildings, transportation,
pipelines, etc. are presented. The manual presents the latest methodologies in the
planning, execution of geotechnical investigations investigation methods, and the
development of appropriate soil and rock parameters for engineering applications.
Any geotechnical engineering work is site specific in nature. It is understood that the
procedures discussed in this Subsection of the manual are subject to local variations.
Therefore, it is important for the geotechnical engineer to become thoroughly familiar
with the local practices. The proper execution of a geotechnical engineering scope of
work requires a thorough understanding of the principles and practice of geotechnical
engineering, subsurface investigation techniques and principles of design
construction methods and planned purpose of the facility supplemented with a
working knowledge of geology and hydrogeology.
2. Applicability
This section of the GEM is applicable to the geotechnical aspects of projects of the
RCJ in the Eastern Province of Saudi Arabia. RCJ is responsible for developing major
industrial cities. Typical projects include industrial, residential, utilities and civil works
such as parks, infrastructure, and roadways.
3. Definitions
a. “Borehole” A hole drilled as part of geotechnical investigation to collect soil
and/or rock samples or in general to study the subsurface soils.
b. “Collapsible soil” Soils susceptible to large and sudden reduction in volume
upon wetting.
c. “Compaction” The process of improving the density (densification) and hence
the improvement of soil shearing strength and permeability characteristics using
mechanical means such as rolling or vibration.
d. “Expansive soil” Soil that has a potential for swelling or shrinkage under
changing moisture conditions.
e. “Foundation” Part of a structure that supports the weight of the structure and
transmits the loads to underlying soil or rock.
f. “Karst formation (sometimes known as Carstic Limestone)” A geologic setting
where cavities are developed in massive beds of limestone, dolomite, gypsum,
etc. by solution in flowing water.
g. “Sabkha Soils (Sabkhas)” Sabkha is an Arabic term for coastal and inland saline
flats built up by deposition of silt, clay, and muddy sand in shallow, albeit

Rev. 1 4.4 - 59
sometimes extensive, depressions. Sabkha deposits are usually saturated with

brine and often are barren and salt encrusted.
h. “Slope” An inclined surface of the earth (manmade or natural).
i. “Water table” The subsurface elevation at which water will be present.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Subsection 2.2.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Chapter:
1) AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
2) ACI: American Concrete Institute
3) API: American Petroleum Institute
4) ARAMCO: Arabian-American Oil Company, officially Saudi Arabian
Oil Company
5) ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
6) ASD: Allowable Stress Design
7) ASTM: American Standard for Testing and Materials
8) Caltrans: California Department of Transportation
9) CPT: Cone Penetration Test
10) DM: NAVFAC Design Manual
11) EM: USACE Engineer Manual
12) FHWA: Federal Highway Authority
14) JIC: Jubail Industrial City
15) LRFD: Load and Resistance Factor Design
16) MARAFIQ: Power and Water Utility Company for Jubail and Yanbu
17) NAVFAC: Naval Facilities Engineering Command
18) NCMA: National Concrete Masonry Association
19) NHCRP: National Highway Cooperative Research Program
20) NHI: National Highway Institute
21) RCJ: Royal Commission in Jubail
23) RMR: Rock Mass Rating
24) RQD: Rock Quality Designation
25) SAR: Saudi Rail Company
27) SEAPA: Seaports Authority of Saudi Arabia

Rev. 1 4.4 - 60
28) SEC: Saudi Electricity Company

29) STC: Saudi Telecom Company
30) SPT: Standard Penetration Test
31) SWEC: Shuaibah Water and Electricity Company
32) SWCC: Saline Water Conversion Corporation
33) USACE: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
a. Geotechnical Requirements
Geotechnical work in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia shall include a proper
assessment of the subsurface conditions at the project site (including surficial
geology, active zone as defined in Sections 1 and 2 of the Saudi Building Code
(SBC 303). The assessment shall include an evaluation of the above key
geotechnical issues and their potential impact on the proposed development.
For the minimum scope of a geotechnical site investigation, including the
compliance requirements for geotechnical engineering reports in Saudi Arabia,
refer to Chapter 2 and Table 2.1 of the SBC 303. Further detail on geotechnical
boring requirements is included in Subsection 4.4.2.B.2 – Boring Requirements.
For non-building facilities such as bridges, pipeline crossing, tower foundations,

etc., the requirements of AASHTO, FHWA, and API shall be consulted in the
development of investigation proposals which shall be subject for review and
acceptance by the RCJ.
For problematic soils encountered in a given project, reference shall be made to

the minimum geotechnical requirements discussed in the following sections of
SBC 303:
1) Chapter 9 – Design for Expansive Soils

2) Chapter 10 – Design for Collapsible Soils
3) Chapter 11 – Design for Sabkha Soils
4) For projects including tunneling (micro tunneling and other trenchless
methods), port and marine works, overhead electrical distribution
networks, potable water and wastewater distribution networks, etc., the
requirements of ARAMCO, MARAFIQ, SAR, SEAPA, SEC, STC and
SWCC shall be met together with an assessment of the potential impact
on third party assets and existing structures and services.
b. Seismic Considerations
1) General
Saudi Arabia is a country of relatively low seismic activity. According to
the World Health Organization, Saudi Arabia Seismic Hazard Distribution
Map (WHO 2010) most of the country is classified as having a very low
(PGA ≤ 0.02 g) to low (0.02 < PGA ≤ 0.08 g) seismic hazard. Here, the
peak ground acceleration (PGA) corresponds to a 10% probability of
exceedance in 50 years. Local regions have PGA values as high as 0.2
g; West of Tabuk City, north of the City of Al-Madinah, surrounding the
City of Jeddah, and the coastal region near the City of Jubail.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 61
2) Geotechnical Investigation for Seismic Design

SBC 301 Sections and 303 provides guidance with respect to the
geotechnical investigation and assessment for seismic design
3) Earthquake Hazard Assessment

For buildings with Seismic Design Categories C and D, the geotechnical
investigation shall address the following potential earthquake hazards:
(a) Slope Instability

(b) Liquefaction
(c) Lateral Spreading
(d) Surface Rupture
4) Seismic Lateral Earth Pressure
For retaining walls assigned to Seismic Design Categories C and D, the
combined static and seismic active earth pressure shall be calculated
using the method outlined in Section 7.2.6 of SBC 303. This design
approach is commonly known as the Mononobe-Okabe method.
6. Codes
a. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Standards for a list of applicable Codes.
7. Standards
a. All geotechnical investigations shall conform to the applicable industry Codes,
Standards and Associations.
b. The latest revision of the referred Codes and Standards shall be used whenever
applicable. In case of conflict, the A/E shall propose equipment or methods
conforming to one group of Standards.
1) ASTM D 1143: Standard Test Method for Piles under Static Axial
Compressive Load. American Association for Testing and Materials,
West Conshohocken, PA.
2) ASTM D 1194: Standard Test Method for Bearing Capacity of Soil for
Static Load and Spread Footings (ASTM D 1194). American Association
for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
3) ASTM D 4750: Standard Test Method for Determining Subsurface Liquid
Levels in a Borehole or Monitoring Well (Observation Well). American
Association for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
4) ASTM D 5092: Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Ground
Water Monitoring Wells in Aquifers. American Association for Testing
and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
5) ASTM Environmental Sampling, 2nd Ed., ASTM Standards, Committee
D-18 on Soil and Rock, American Society for Testing & Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
6) ASTM Environmental Site Characterization, ASTM Standards,
Committees D-18 on Soil & Rock, D-19 on Water, D-34 on Waste
Management, E-47 on Biological Effects and Environmental Fate, and E-

Rev. 1 4.4 - 62
50 on Environmental Assessment, American Society on Testing &

Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
7) ASTM D 420: Standard Guide to Site Characterization for Engineering
Design and Construction Purposes. American Association for Testing
8) ASTM D 3441: Standard Test Method for Mechanical Cone Penetration
Tests of Soil. American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
9) ASTM D 4700: Standard Guide for Soil Sampling from the Vadose Zone.
American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
10) ASTM D 4719: Standard Test Methods for Prebored Pressuremeter
Testing in Soils. American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
11) ASTM D 6635: Standard Test Method for Performing the Flat Plate
Dilatometer. American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
12) ASTM D 2573: Standard Test Method for Field Vane Shear Test in
Cohesive Soil. American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
13) ASTM D 6151: Standard Practice for Using Hollow-Stem Augers for
Geotechnical Exploration and Soil Sampling, American Society for
Testing and Materials. West Conshohocken, PA.
14) ASTM D 1452: Standard Practice for Soil Exploration and Sampling by
Auger Borings. American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA.
15) ASTM D 2488: Standard Practice for Description and Identification of
Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure). American Society for Testing and
16) ASTM D 6907: Standard Practice for Sampling Soils and Contaminated
Media with Hand-Operated Bucket Augers. American Society for Testing
17) ASTM D 1586: Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test
(SPT) and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils. American Society for Testing
18) ASTM D 2487: Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). American
Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
19) ASTM D 1587: Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of
Soils for Geotechnical Purposes. American Society for Testing and
20) ASTM D 5778: Standard Test Method for Electronic Friction Cone and
Piezocone Penetration Testing of Soils. American Society for Testing
21) ASTM D 5783: Standard Guide for Use of Direct Rotary Drilling with
Water-Based Drilling Fluid for Geoenvironmental Exploration and the

Rev. 1 4.4 - 63
Installation of Subsurface Water-Quality Monitoring Devices. American

Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
22) ASTM D 6282M: Standard Guide for Direct Push Soil Sampling for
Environmental Site Characterizations. American Society for Testing and
23) ASTM D 7383: Standard Test Methods for Axial Compressive Force
Pulse (Rapid) Testing of Deep Foundations. American Society for
Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
8. References
a. Aas, G., Lacasse, S., Lunne, I., and Hoeg, K. (1986). Use of In Situ Tests for
Foundation Design in Clay. Proceedings, In Situ ’86, American Society of Civil
Engineers, pp 1-30.
b. Al-Refeai, T. and Al-Ghamdy, D. (1994). Geological and geotechnical aspects
of Saudi Arabia. Geotechnical and Geological Engineering, vol. 12: 253-276.
c. Amin, A. and Bankher, K. (2004). Geotechnical Aspects of Loess in in Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia. JKAU: Earth Sciences, vol. 15, pp. 163-179.
d. Baguelin, F., Jezequel, J.F., and Shields, D.H. (1978). The Pressuremeter and
Foundation Engineering. Trans Tech Publication, Switzerland.
e. Bjerrum, L. (1972). Embankments on Soft Ground, Proceedings of the ASCE
Specialty Conference on Earth and Earth-Supported Structures, Purdue
University, Volume 2, pp 1-54.
f. Bjerrum, L. (1973). Problem of Soil Mechanics and Construction on Soft Clays.
Proceedings 8th International Conference on Soil mechanics and Foundation
Engineering (ICSMFE), Moscow, State of the Art Report, Volume 3, pp. 111 159.
g. Briaud, J.L. (1989). The pressuremeter test for highway applications. Report
FHWA-IP-89-008, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, D.C., 148p.
h. CAPP. 2004. Planning Horizontal Directional Drilling for Pipeline Construction.
Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers.
i. Clarke, B.G. (1995). Pressuremeters in Geotechnical Design. International
Thomson Publishing/UK, and BiTech Publishers, Vancouver.
j. Dafalla, M.A. and Shamrani, M.A. (2012). Expansive Soil Properties in a Semi-
Arid Region. Research Journal of Environmental and Earth Sciences 4 (11):
930-938.
k. Decourt, L. (1989). The Standard Penetration Test State-of-the-Art Report.
Proceedings 12th International Conference on Soil mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.
l. Douglas, B.J. and Olsen, R.S. (1981). Soil Classification using Electric Cone
Penetrometer. ASCE Geotechnical Engineering Division, Symposium on Cone
Penetration Testing and Experience, St. Louis, pp. 209-227.
m. Driscoll, F.G. (1986). Groundwater and Wells, 2nd ed., Johnson Filtration
Systems, St. Paul, MN.
n. Durgunoglu, H.T. and Mitchell, J.K. (1975). Static Penetration resistance of
Soils, Evaluation of Theory and Implication for Practice. Proceedings of the In-
situ Measurement of Soil properties, Raleigh, NC, ASCE, New York.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 64
o. Dunnicliff, J. (1993). Geotechnical Instrumentation for Monitoring Field

Performance. Wiley.
p. Erol, A.O. (1989). Engineering Geological Considerations in a Salt Dome
Region Surrounded by Sabkha Sediments, Saudi Arabia. Engineering Geology,
vol. 26. Elsevier Science.
q. ESOPT II (1982). Proceedings of the Second European Symposium on
Penetration Testing. A.A. Balkema, Amsterdam.
r. FHWA. (1997). Subsurface Investigations - Training Course in Geotechnical and
Foundation Engineering. Publication No. FHWA HI-97-021, Authors: A. Arman,
N. Samtani, R. Castelli, and G. Munfakh. Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
s. FHWA. (2001). Manual on Subsurface Investigations. Publication No. FHWA-
NHI-01-031. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, D.C.
t. FHWA. (2002a). Geotechnical Circular No. 5 - Evaluation of Soil and Rock
Properties. Report No. FHWA IF 02 034. Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
u. FHWA. (2002b). Subsurface Investigations - Geotechnical Site
Characterization. Publication No. FHWA NHI-01-031, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
v. FHWA. (2006a). Soils and Foundations Reference Manual - Volume I and II.
Report No. FHWA NHI 06 089. Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
w. Hanna, T. (1985). Field Instrumentation in Geotechnical Engineering. Clausthal-
Zellerfeld, Germany: Trans Tech Publications.
x. Harr, Milton E. (1962). Groundwater and Seepage, McGraw-Hill, New York.
y. International Society for Soil Mechanics and Geotechnical Engineering. (2005).
Geotechnical and Geophysical Investigations for Offshore and Nearshore
Developments. Technical Committee 1.
z. International Society for Trenchless Technology (http://www.istt.com/).
aa. James, A.N. and Little, A.L. (1994). Geotechnical aspects of sabkha at Jubail,
Saudi Arabia. Quarterly Journal of Engineering Geology and Hydrogeology, 27,
83-121.
bb. Jamiolkowski, M., Ladd, C.C., Germaine, J.T. and Lancellotta, R. (1985). New
Developments in Field and Laboratory Testing of Soils. Theme Lecture No. 2,
Proceedings of 11th International Council on Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, San Francisco, Volume 1, pp. 57-154.
cc. Janbu, N. and Senesset, K. (1973). Field Compressometer; Principles and
Applications. Proceedings 8th International Conference on Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering (ICSFME), Moscow, Volume 1.1, pp. 191-198.
dd. Kovacs, W.D., Salamone, L.A. and Yokel, F.Y. (1981). Energy Measurements
in the Standard Penetration Test. United States National Bureau of Standards,
Building Science Series 135.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 65
ee. Leroueil, S. (2001). 39th Rankine Lecture – Natural Slopes and Cuts, Movement
and Failure Mechanisms. Geotechnique, Volume 51, No. 3, pp 197-243.
ff. Leroueil, S. La Rochelle, P., Tavenas, F. and Roy, M. (1990). Remarks on the
Stability of Temporary Cuts. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Volume 27, No. 5,
pp 687-692.
gg. Lunne, T., Robertson, P., and Powell, J. (1997). Cone Penetration Testing in
Geotechnical Practice. London: Spon Press.
hh. Lunne, T., Lacasse, S. and Rad, N.S. (1989). SPT, CPT, pressuremeter testing
and recent developments in in-situ testing – Part 1: All tests except SPT.
Proceedings, 12th International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering (ICSMFE), Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, Volume 4, A.A. Balkema,
Rotterdam, pp 2239-2403.
ii. Mayne, P.W. and Mitchell, J.K. (1988). Profiling of Overconsolidation Ratio in
Clays by Field Vane. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Volume 25, No. 1, pp 150-
158.
jj. Meyerhof, G.G. (1956). Penetration Tests and Bearing Capacity of
Cohesionless Soils. ASCE Journal for Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, Vol. 82, SM1, pp 1-19.
kk. Ministry of Interior (2015). Minimum Technical Requirements (MTR). Royal
Commission of Jubail.
ll. Mitchell, J.K. (1988). New Developments in Penetration Tests and Equipment.
International Symposium on Penetration Testing (ISOPT-1). Orlando, Florida,
USA, Proceedings Volume 1, pp 245-262, A.A. Balkema.
mm. Mitchell, J.K., Guzikowski, F. and Villet, W.C.B. (1978). The Measurement of
Soil Properties In-Situ. Report prepared for US Department of Energy, Contract
W-7405-ENG-48, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, University of California,
Berkeley, CA, 67 p.
nn. Nicholson, G.A. (1983b). In Situ and Laboratory Shear Devices for Rock: a
Comparison. Technical Report GL-83-14, US Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
oo. Robertson, P.K. (1986). In-Situ Testing and its Application to Foundation
Engineering. Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Volume 23, No. 4, pp 573-594.
pp. Schmertmann, J.H. (1970). Static Cone to Compute Static Settlement over
Sand. ASCE Journal for Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Volume
96, SM3, pp 1011-1043.
qq. Schmertmann, J. (1978). Guidelines for Cone Penetration Test: Performance
and Design, FHWA-TS-78-209. U.S. Department of Transportation.
rr. Schmertmann, J.H. (1979). Statics of SPT. ASCE Journal of Geotechnical
Engineering, Volume 105, GT5, pp 655-670.
ss. Schmertmann, J.H. (1986). Suggested method for performing the flat
dilatometer test. ASTM Geotechnical Testing Journal, Vol. 9 (2), 93-101.
tt. Seed, H.B. (1979). Soil Liquefaction and Cyclic Mobility Evaluation for Level
Ground during Earthquakes. ASCE Journal, Geotechnical Engineering Division,
Volume 105, No. GT2.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 66
uu. Shehata, W. and Amin, A. (1997). Geotechnical Hazards associated with desert
environment. Natural Hazards, vol. 16, Issue 1, July 1997.
vv. Skempton, A.W. (1986). Standard Penetration Test, Procedures and Effects in
Sands of Overburden, Relative Density, Particle Size, Aging and Over-
consolidation. Geotechnique, Volume 36, No. 3, pp 425-447.
ww. Stipho, A.S. (1992). Aoelian sand hazards and engineering design for desert
regions. Quarterly Journal of Engineering Geology, 25, 83-92.
xx. SUT. (2014). Guidance Notes for the Planning and Execution of Geophysical
and Geotechnical Ground Investigation for Offshore Renewable Energy
Developments. Society for Underwater Technology Offshore Site Investigation
and Geotechnics Committee, London.
yy. Tavenas, F.A. (1971). The Standard Penetration Test. Discussion, Proceedings
4th PanAmerican Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering,
Puerto Rico, Volume 3, pp 64-70.
zz. UFC. (2004). Dewatering and Groundwater Control, UFC 3-220-05. Unified
Facilities Criteria, Department of Defense, USA.
aaa. US Department of the Army. (1983). Technical Manual TM 5-818-7:
Foundations in Expansive Soils. Head Quarters, Department of the Army.
bbb. USACE. (2001). Geotechnical Investigations. EM 1110-1-1804. U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers, Washington, D.C.
ccc. Ziegler, T.W. (1972). In Situ tests for the Determination of Rock Mass Shear
Strength. Technical Report S-72-12, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
B. Geotechnical Investigation
1. Background
a. Introduction
1) Geological Setting of Saudi Arabia
The geological features of the Arabian Peninsula have been detailed by
Powers et al. (1966), among others. Saudi Arabia is divided into two main
geological zones (Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy 1994 and Powers et al.
1966):
(a) The Precambrian complex of igneous and metamorphic rocks

(known as the Arabian Shield) occupying roughly one-third of the
Arabian Peninsula in the west; and
(b) A broad expanse of relatively low-relief terrain (known as the
Arabian shelf), in which Tertiary and younger deposits overlie older
units, in the eastern two-thirds.
2) The Geology of Saudi Arabia may be divided into the following
geographic areas as summarized by Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy (1994):
(a) The western region is mostly mountainous, with low-lying coastal
areas along the Red Sea.
(b) The southern area is covered with extensive sand deposits in the
Rub’ al Khali Desert.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 67
(c) The central areas consist of the relatively flat terrain of the Central
Plateau, with silt, sand, and gravel deposits, and limestone
bedrocks of Quaternary and Tertiary origin along erosion channels
and wadis between escarpments.
(d) The northern areas form the Nafud sedimentary basin, with largely
Quaternary deposits of red to pink and grey marly to calcareous
sandstone, sandy marl with pinkish sandy shale, and clayey silty
sand.
(e) The eastern areas are covered by deposits of salt-bearing soils,
sand dunes, and outcrops of limestone and calcareous sandstones.
3) Geological Issues in Saudi Arabia
The primary geotechnical issues in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia include
the following (Al-Refeai and Al-Ghamdy 1994; Dafalla and Shamrani 2012;
Stipho 1984, et al, and as referenced inSBC 303 2007):
(a) Collapsible soils

These soils will compress when inundated with water, resulting in
settlements without additional applied stress. Water weakens or
destroys weak bonds between the soil particles, severely reducing
the bearing capacity of the original soil. Collapsible soils have low
densities (generally 1040 to 1600 kg/m or porosity of 0.6 to 0.4).
Loose granular sand deposits, sand dunes, and sand tracts in large
areas of central, eastern, and southern Saudi Arabia, including the
Rub’al-Khali desert, are generally susceptible to collapse when
wetted. The collapse potential of these soils must be considered in a
foundation design.
(b) Expansive soils

Expansive soils are clayey materials that shrink and swell (expand)
with changes in moisture content. These soils exist mainly in the
central and northern regions of Saudi Arabia, but are found in other
areas across the Kingdom, including Al Ghatt, Tabuk, Tayma, Al
Jouf, Al Medinah, Al Munuwarah, Al Hafuf, and Sharorah.
(c) Karst Formations

A karst formation is characterized by solution features created by
percolating water that dissolves carbonate bedrock (usually
limestone, dolomite, marble, gypsum, anhydrite, halite, or other
soluble rocks). Sinkholes and solution cavities at or near the ground
surface are characteristic features of karst and pose a hazard in the
eastern and central regions of Saudi Arabia, including the Jubail
area.
(d) Loess
Loess is an unstratified, geologically recent deposit of predominantly
silt-size material that is deposited by wind. Loess has a very loose
structure of low density and is highly compressible. Loess deposits
are found extensively in the central and southern regions of Saudi
Arabia.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 68
(e) Sabkhas
Sabkhas are salt bearing, arid climate sediments that cover vast
areas of the coastal and inland plains of Saudi Arabia. Sabkhas
contain heterogeneous materials, primarily clays, silts, fine sands,
and organic matter that are randomly interlayered. Sabkha sediments
are generally characterized by high void ratios and low dry densities
and are collapsible. They are generally considered among the
poorest of foundation materials. Sabkha terrains are known to exist
in many parts of Saudi Arabia: along the Arabian Gulf coast including
Jubail, Rastanura, Abqaiq, Dammam, and Shaibah; along the
western coast including Jeddah, Jizan, Qunfudah, Al Lith, Rabigh,
and Yanbu; and around Riyadh and Qasim in the central region.
(f) Corrosive environment and potential for sulphate attack

Soils in Saudi Arabia, especially Sabkhas, are often high in water
soluble sulphate and chloride. Hence, there is a potential for sulphate
attack on concrete foundation elements and corrosion of metallic
materials in contact with these soils.
4) Geotechnical and Geological Conditions of the Eastern Region

(a) Jubail is located within the Arabian Gulf Coastal Region of the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The base geology of the area is like that
of the eastern plain which is composed of upper Tertiary
sedimentary rocks and marine sediments (Al-Refeai and Al-
Ghamdy 1994). The Gulf region geological setting is a result of
continuous sediment accumulation since Paleozoic times. The
predominant Tertiary unit in the area is the Hadruk Formation which
typically consists of grayish-green, white, and pink calcareous marly
sandstone, sandy marl, sandy clay, and sandy limestone. The
Tertiary sedimentary rocks and marine deposits in the area are
overlain by Quaternary deposits consisting of Sabkha and aeolian
deposits. The Sabkha flats occupy approximately two-thirds of the
area. The Sabkha deposits are characteristically gray and brown in
color. Sabkha is typically loose (or soft), has high salinity and water
content and often contains fine sands and clays. From foundation
engineering considerations, Sabkha is a problematic soil since it is
highly compressible and weak. The non-Sabkha terrain of the area
is mostly aeolian silty sand deposits and dune sands.
(b) Significant areas of Jubail have been subjected to preparation
works and some alternations have already taken place, including
reclaimed areas. Geotechnical design in these areas shall also
consider the construction history of the site in addition to the
geologic conditions.
(c) Ras Al-Khair
The Ras Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) is currently the site of rapid
construction activity. It is understood that significant areas have
been reclaimed with/without removal of the underlying Sabkha,
likely to a greater extent than that at Jubail. In addition, the
hinterland in the RIC includes higher ground/dune environments.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 69
The geotechnical investigation and design shall adequately

characterize these conditions.
The following references provide additional information and relevant
discussions on the Sabkhas and dunes prevalent in the Jubail and
Ras Al-Khair regions, along with other regions of Saudi Arabia and
the Middle East with identical geologic conditions: Al-Refeai and
Al-Ghamdy (1994), Amin and Bankher (2004), Dafalla and
Shamrani (2012), Erol (1989), Fookes (1978), James and Little
(1994), Shehata and Amin, and Stipho (1992).
b. Applicability
The guidelines in this Subsection are applicable to geotechnical engineering
projects under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission of Jubail (RCJ) in Saudi
Arabia. The geotechnical engineering work shall comply with the requirements
of this Subsection of the manual and the appropriate sections of the codes and
standards indicated.
c. Site Investigations
Requirements of site investigations are provided in Subsections 4.4.2.B.2,
4.4.2.C, 4.4.2.F, 4.4.2.G and 4.4.2.H.
d. Laboratory Testing
Laboratory testing requirements are provided in Subsection 4.4.2.E and 4.4.2.H.
e. Analysis and Design

Analysis and design requirements are provided in Section 5.10.2
2. Boring Requirements
a. General
As per Section 2.2 of the SBC 303, boring investigations are not required if all
of the following criteria are met:
1) The net load pressure on the foundation is less than 50 kPa.

2) There are no dynamic or vibratory loads on the building or structure.
3) Questionable or problematic soil is not suspected within the proximity of
the building or structure.
4) Cavities are not suspected underneath the footing of the building or
structure.
If any of the above criteria are not met, a boring investigation must be
carried out. Depending on the availability of historical boring information
in the area of the proposed development, and its quality, a new boring
investigation may not be required. This determination shall be made by
the Geotechnical Engineer.
b. Types of Boring Investigations

The type of boring investigation will depend on the anticipated site soils, as well
as the objectives of the investigation. Soil boring and sampling requirements

Rev. 1 4.4 - 70
are outlined in Chapter 2 of SBC 303, with more detailed descriptions of various
boring types can be found in AASHTO, FHWA, and USACE’s EM 1110-1-1804.
Some types of boring investigations include:
1) Auger borings
Auger borings, which can be either continuous or discontinuous flight,
allow for the collection of disturbed soil samples for laboratory testing, but
give limited information on the soil strata. They are typically used above
the water table (but may be used below the water table in the case of stiff
clays).
2) Drive borings
Drive borings are advanced into the soil and allow for the collection of
disturbed soil samples for later testing; they also give some information on
the soil stratification, an advantage over auger borings. Types of drive
borings can include vibratory, Becker Hammer drill, and Standard
Penetration Tests.
3) Test Pits
Excavation of test pits allows for determination of soil stratification at
shallow depths, and for relatively low cost. Samples can be obtained for
laboratory testing, including larger samples, such as cobbles and
boulders, which may not be obtained through auger methods.
4) Cone penetration testing

Cone penetration testing, or CPT, is an in-situ test which is advanced
continuously into the soil and allows for determination of soil strata and
engineering properties without sampling.
5) Undisturbed borings
Undisturbed samples, which are typically obtained using push samplers
(such as Shelby tubes) or rotary samplers, allow for a detailed study of
stratification, and the determination of properties such as shear strength,
consolidation, permeability and density.
6) Rock core boring

Boring in rock is typically carried out through rotary drilling with hollow core
barrels fitted with diamond- or carbide-tipped bits (when rock samples are
required), or through percussive methods (to advance through hard rock
to install instrumentation). Rock core borings can be vertical, inclined, or
horizontal, depending on the stratigraphy and properties of the rock.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 71
c. Frequency and Depth of Boreholes

SBC 303 Table 2.1 specifies the following minimum requirements for borehole
investigations for buildings:
TABLE 4.4.2 A: MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS (SBC 303)
No. of Built Area No. of Minimum Minimum

Stories (m2) Boreholes Depth of Two Depth of One
Thirds of the Third of the
Boreholes (m) Boreholes (m)
2 or less < 600 3 4 6
600 – 5000 3 – 10 5 8
> 5000 Special Investigation
3–4 < 600 3 6-8 9 - 12
600 – 5000 3 - 10
> 5000 Special Investigation
5 or higher Special Investigation
Borehole depth shall be measured from the planned base of the foundation, as
opposed to ground surface. The selection of boreholes for buildings will depend
on the anticipated site soils, as well as the type of proposed development.
Boreholes shall fully penetrate all questionable or soft soil layers.
Borehole frequency shall be sufficient to define the geologic setting at the project
site, and will be dependent on both the anticipated soil conditions as well as the
phase of the investigation being performed; for more general planning
investigations, a wider spacing may be appropriate, while for detailed design
purposes, a closer borehole spacing shall be used.
Suggestions for borehole layout and frequency for road schemes are provided in
FHWA (2001). The following table outlines typical minimum boring depths for
road infrastructure works.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 72
TABLE 4.4.2 B: MINIMUM BORING DEPTHS (FHWA)
Area of Investigation Recommended Minimum Boring Depth (Bf)

Bridge Foundations – Spread • Lf ≤ 2Bf – Two footing widths below bearing
Footings level where Lf is footing breadth
• Lf ≥ 5Bf – Four footing widths below bearing
level
• 2Bf ≤ Lf ≤ 5Bf – Determined by linear
interpolation
Bridge Foundations – Deep • Soils – 6m beyond anticipated pile or shaft
Foundations tip, or two times the maximum pile group
dimension, whichever is deeper
• Bearing on Rock – 3m of rock core to ensure
boring has not terminated on a boulder
• Extending into Rock – 3m of rock core, or
three times shaft diameter (for isolated
shafts) or two times maximum shaft group
dimension, whichever is deeper
Retaining Walls Between 0.75 and 1.5 times height of the wall
(below final ground line). If stratification indicates
possible deep stability or settlement problem,
extend to hard stratum.
Roadways 2 m below proposed subgrade level.
Cuts 5 m below anticipated cut at ditch line. Should be
increased in locations of base instability, or
where base of cut is below groundwater level.
Embankments Twice the embankment height, unless hard
stratum encountered above this depth. If soft
strata are encountered, extend to hard stratum.
Culverts Use criteria for embankments.
The number and depth of boreholes shall be determined by the registered

professional and subject to review and acceptance by RCJ.
d. Where rock is encountered during the depth of investigation, a typical rock

coring length is a minimum of 1.5m into competent rock, to ensure auger refusal
has not occurred on a boulder. If structures are to be founded directly on rock,
a minimum rock core length of 3m into competent rock is appropriate (FHWA
2001). Borehole Locations and Elevations
Boring locations and elevations shall be established. If a surveyor is
unavailable, the field engineer shall determine the location of all boreholes
relative to known site features, to an accuracy applicable to the project scope.
Boring elevations shall be to either a geodetic benchmark (BM) or a temporary

benchmark (TBM) which shall be included on the field report. Elevations are
typically reported to ±0.1meter (at a minimum). Borehole elevations shall be
referenced to the RC datum.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 73
e. Questionable Soils
Additional boring frequency and procedures are required when questionable
soils are suspected beneath the proposed development.
1) Expansive Soils
Sampling requirements for expansive soils are outlined in SBC 303
Section 2.5.1.
2) Collapsible Soils
Sampling requirements for collapsible soils are outlined in SBC 303
Section 2.5.2.
3) Sabkha Soils
Sampling requirements for collapsible soils are outlined in SBC 303
Section 2.5.3.
f. Sampling
Soil sampling during a boring investigation will depend on the type of boring
investigation being performed, and the information required from the samples.
Common sampler types include the following:
1) Split-Barrel (Split Spoon)

2) Thin-Walled Shelby Tube
3) Continuous Push
4) Piston
5) Pitcher
6) Denison
7) Modified California
8) Continuous Auger
9) Bulk
10) Block
The sampling interval will depend on the type of soil and will vary by project and
by region. Common intervals for Standard Penetration Testing using Split
Spoon samplers (which is the most common type of geotechnical sampling)
include the following: continuous SPT sampling over the initial 5 m, then 1 m
intervals to 20 m, followed by 1.5 m intervals to the bottom of the boring.
In cohesive soils, if encountered, at least one undisturbed sample (such as a

Thin-Walled Shelby Tube) shall be recovered from each layer or change in
strata, Shelby Tube samples shall alternate with SPT split spoon samples, or as
directed in the proposed scope of works . As required, in very soft to soft soils
undisturbed samples shall be recovered using thin wall piston samplers with
continuous sampling.
Where samples are taken during a boring investigation, they shall each be
assigned a unique number to aid in identification. Care shall be taken to

Rev. 1 4.4 - 74
minimize disturbance of the sample, particularly undisturbed samples.

Standard practices for handling field samples are provided in FHWA (2001).
g. Reporting
The following information shall be included on all field logs used during the
boring investigation, as per SBC 303 Section 2.6.0:
1) Boring or Test Pit number or designation and elevation of top of boring or

test pit.
2) Driller's name and field representative's name.
3) Make, size, and manufacturer's model designation of drilling, sampling,
and test pit excavating equipment.
4) Type of drilling and sampling operation by depth.
5) Boring diameter.
6) Dates and time by depths when test pit excavation, drilling, and sampling
operations were performed.
7) Time required for drilling each run.
8) Drill action, rotation speed, hydraulic pressure, water pressure, tool
drops, and any other unusual and non-ordinary experience which could
indicate the subsurface conditions encountered.
9) Depths at which samples or cores were recovered or attempts made to
sample or core including top and bottom depth of each run.
10) Classification or description by depths of the materials sampled, cored,
or penetrated using the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487)
and including a description of moisture conditions, consistency and other
appropriate descriptive information described in ASTM D2488. This
classification or description shall be made immediately after the samples
or cores are retrieved.
11) Classification and description by depths of rock materials sampled or
cored, including rock type, composition, texture, presence and
orientation of bedding, foliation, or fractures, presence of vugs or other
interstices, and the RQD for each cored interval.
12) Indication of penetration resistance such as drive-hammer blows given in
blows per increment for driving sample spoons and casing. Note that the
hammer type (i.e., donut, safety, or automatic) and the hammer
efficiency shall be reported to enable correction to N60 (blow count
corrected with respect to 60% hammer efficiency) used for design.
13) Weight of drive hammer.
14) Percentage of sample or core recovered per run.
15) Depth at which groundwater is encountered initially and when stabilized.
16) Depths at which drill water is lost and regained and amounts.
17) Depths at which the color of the drill water return changes.
18) Type and weight of drill fluid.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 75
19) Depth of bottom of hole.

20) Pressures employed in pressure testing.
C. Groundwater Conditions
1. General
Groundwater refers to the water located beneath the earth's surface in soil pore
spaces and in the fractures of rock formations. Groundwater has a significant
influence on all geotechnical projects. Conversely, development projects often have
an impact on groundwater. Groundwater can cause or contribute to failure because
of excess saturation and reduction of soil strength, seepage pressures), or uplift
forces. In some localities, groundwater may have elevated concentrations of
pollutants or may contain constituents in concentration sufficient to make it
aggressive and cause damage to construction materials such as concrete and steel.
Groundwater affects the design, performance, and constructability of project
elements. Assessment of groundwater conditions involves determination of
groundwater levels and pressures, hydraulic conductivity, and water quality in terms
of chemical composition.
Experienced geoenvironmental/geotechnical engineers or hydrogeologists shall be

consulted when planning a groundwater characterization study. Guidelines and
reference standards (i.e. ASTM 1997a and b) shall be consulted during the planning
stages for groundwater characterization studies. Comprehensive reviews and
discussions on groundwater and wells are also provided in several reference works
including Driscoll (1986), UFC (2004), FHWA (2002), and Harr (1962).
Characterization of groundwater conditions is an important component of

geotechnical investigation of a project. The geotechnical investigation shall identify
groundwater levels and determine the range in seasonal fluctuations. If the geology
or the groundwater regime is complex, significant input from an engineering geologist
and/or a hydrogeologist is required.
2. Assessment of Groundwater Conditions

Detailed information regarding groundwater observations can be obtained from
ASTM D 4750 and ASTM D 5092. The geotechnical scope of works shall provide
requirements of groundwater measurement and monitoring for different applications,
including minimum requirements and frequency of monitoring.
The geotechnical scope of works shall assess the types of groundwater investigation
required: those used to determine groundwater levels and pressures, and those used
to determine the hydraulic conductivity (permeability) of the subsurface materials.
Determination of the hydraulic conductivity of soil or rock strata is required in
connection with seepage studies (refer to Section 5.X) for leakage through
embankments, yield of wells, piping assessment, groundwater control, temporary
shoring design, and assessment of soil susceptibility to liquefaction.
Groundwater levels and pressures may be measured in existing wells, in open

borings, and specially installed monitoring (observation) wells and piezometers.
Hydraulic conductivity shall be determined by means of various types of seepage,
pressure and pumping tests. Commonly used means of groundwater measurement
are given below.
3. Groundwater Measurement – Water Levels (Pressures)

Rev. 1 4.4 - 76
a. Existing Wells. If records (including logs) of wells are available within proximity
of the project, these shall be incorporated into the groundwater study plan for
the project. If such information is available, its acquisition shall be coordinated
with the owner of the well.
b. Open Boreholes. The water level shall be measured during drilling and after
completion of the borehole (if the borehole does not collapse). Groundwater
observations made in open boreholes shall be treated with care since the length
of time required for water levels in boreholes to stabilize at the groundwater level
is a function of the hydraulic conductivity of the site soil.
c. Monitoring Wells. These are wells installed for the purpose of longer-term
studies of groundwater levels. Details of the installation procedures are available
in the references listed in Subsection 4.4.2.C.1.
d. Piezometers. Piezometers are like monitoring wells except that the former in
general measure water pressures as opposed to water levels. Note: standpipe
piezometers are identical in performance to monitoring wells albeit smaller in
diameter. Available types of piezometers include pneumatic, vibrating wire, and
electrical resistance wire gauge piezometers. Consideration of time lag effect
is particularly important in the selection of the appropriate type of piezometers
for a given project. For further details on the selection, installation, and
instrumentation of piezometers, refer to Dunnicliff (1993).
4. Groundwater Measurement – Hydraulic Conductivity
In-situ hydraulic conductivity may be estimated using the following methods:
1) Falling Water Level Method – for low permeability soils

2) Rising Water Level Method – for low permeability soils
3) Constant Water Level Method – mainly for high permeability soils
4) Packer Tests – mostly for determining in-situ hydraulic conductivity in
bedrock
For the selection and specific application procedures for these methods, refer to one
or more of the references listed in Subsection 4.4.2.C.1.
D. Geotechnical Equipment
1. General Field Equipment
General field equipment will be required to successfully complete the field
investigation, and shall include logging forms and tools, site information, and
appropriate site manuals and permits. A list of general field supplies is provided in
Table 2.4 of FHWA (2002).
2. Personal Protective Equipment

Investigations shall include all required Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
necessary to complete the work safely. This could include written documents, such
as a properly completed Health and Safety plan specific to the job, as well as field
gear, such as safety footwear, reflective clothing, and safety glasses. All safety gear
shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate Health and Safety authority.
3. Drilling Equipment

Rev. 1 4.4 - 77
Geotechnical drilling equipment is used to perform borings and obtain soil or bedrock
samples, and varies widely depending on the goals of the investigations. A summary
of common geotechnical drilling equipment (FHWA 2002), as well as any applicable
standards, is provided below.
a. Solid Stem Continuous Flight Augers (ASTM D 1452)

Solid stem augers act similarly to a screw, bringing soils to the top of the boring
as they are advanced. Although various sizes are available, the 100 mm
diameter is most common. Solid stem augers are commonly connected to the
drill rig by means of cotter pins.
b. Hollow Stem Continuous Flight Augers (ASTM D 6151)

Hollow stem augers are similar to solid stem augers, and often come in similar
sizes. They differ primarily in that hollow stem augers have a hollow core, which
is typically plugged with a center plug during advancement of the auger. The
center plug is removed when sampling.
c. Rotary Wash Borings (ASTM D 5783)

Rotary wash borings employ either casing or drilling fluid to support the sides of
the excavation. Casing sizes commonly range from 60 mm to 130 mm, and are
often chosen based on the diameter of sampling equipment which must be
advanced within. Drilling bits commonly consist of either drag bits or roller bits.
d. Bucket Augers (ASTM D 6907)

Bucket augers are used to obtain larger volumes of soil, and consist of a bucket
(diameter typically 600 mm – 1200 mm, length typically 600 mm – 900 mm)
advanced through the soil or rock with cutting teeth mounted to the bottom.
Slots in the base of the bucket allow it to collect samples.
e. Hand Augers/Excavators (ASTM D 1452)

Hand augers are typically used for shallow investigation, with several types
available, with the post hole type barrel auger recognized as the most common.
Hand held power augers are also available.
f. Mechanical Excavators
Mechanical excavators, such as backhoes, bulldozers and excavators are
commonly used to excavate test pits. Their size will depend on the type of soil,
depth of interest, and any site constraints.
g. Non-Core (Destructive) Drilling

Non-core drilling, also known as destructive drilling, is typically used in situations
where rock core samples are not required. The equipment used in such an
investigation can include:
1) Air-track drills
2) Downhole percussive drills
3) Rotary tricone (roller bit) drills
4) Rotary drag bit drills

Rev. 1 4.4 - 78
5) Carbide-tipped bits
h. Core Drilling
When intact rock samples are required, core drilling equipment is often used. A
summary of rock drilling equipment and procedures is provided in FHWA (2002).
Core drilling barrels are typically single-, double-, or triple-tube, with double tube
the most common.
Rock cores are typically brought to the surface using either conventional or
wireline equipment; conventional equipment requires the entire string of rods
and core barrel to be brought to the surface after each run to retrieve core
samples, while wireline equipment allows the inner core (on double- and triple-
core barrels) to be brought to the surface separately.
Core barrels and other rock sampling equipment come in a variety of sizes,
which are denoted by letters. Size NX core is typically the most common core
barrel sizes, although other sizes are also in use, and may be appropriate
depending on the type of rock encountered.
Coring bits are attached to the tip of the core barrel and are discussed in
Subsection 4.4.2.D.5.
4. Sampling Equipment
Sampling equipment used in geotechnical field investigations is dependent on the
type of investigation being conducted; further information on boring investigations is
provided in Subsection 4.4.2.B.2 – Boring Requirements. Common soil sampling
methods for geotechnical investigations include:
a. Split-Barrel (Split Spoon) (ASTM D 1586)

b. Thin-Walled Shelby Tube (ASTM D 1587)
c. Continuous Push (ASTM D 6282)
d. Piston (ASTM D 6519)
e. Pitcher (ASTM D 4700)
f. Denison (FHWA 2002)
g. Modified California (FHWA 2002)
h. Continuous Auger (FHWA 2002)
i. Bulk (FHWA 2002)
j. Block (FHWA 2002)
5. Rock Core Sampling
Rock core sampling is typically achieved using coring bits attached to core barrels
(see Subsection 4.4.2.D.3.h). The most common types of coring bits (per FHWA
(2002)) include:
a. Diamond
b. Carbide

Rev. 1 4.4 - 79
c. Sawtooth
6. In-Situ Field Testing Equipment
Refer to Subsection 4.4.2.G In-Situ Testing for equipment required to perform in-situ
testing.
7. Laboratory Testing Equipment

Geotechnical laboratory testing is discussed in detail in Subsection 4.4.2.E, including
references to the equipment required to carry out specific tests.
E. Laboratory Testing
1. General
Laboratory testing shall be specified to determine physical and hydrogeological
properties of soil and rock to classify and define engineering properties for
geotechnical design. Based on the anticipated ground conditions and required
parameters, the geotechnical engineer shall identify all the required tests to
determine design parameters. It is then the responsibility of the geotechnical
engineer to use their experience along with the data to perform their design.
Procedures for specific laboratory tests are not outlined in this manual; references to
applicable standards and procedures for laboratory tests are provided.
2. Sample Selection
The number of samples required is largely determined by the size and type of the
project, as well as the prevalent subsurface conditions in the area. Areas in which
additional indexing of soil and rock is required can be identified as samples are
collected and analyzed and testing requirements can be adjusted as needed. The
following minimal criteria to be considered when developing a laboratory testing
program have been developed by the FHWA (Manual on Subsurface Investigations,
2001):
a. Project type (bridge, embankment, rehabilitation, buildings, etc.)

b. Size of the project
c. Loads to be imposed on the foundation soils
d. Types of loads (i.e., static, dynamic, etc.)
e. Critical tolerances for the project (i.e., settlement limitations)
f. Vertical and horizontal variations in the soil profile as determined from boring
logs and visual assessments
g. Identification of soil types in the laboratory
h. Known or suspected peculiarities of soils at the project location (i.e. swelling
soils, collapsible soils, sabkha soils, organics, etc.)
i. Presence of visually observed inclusions such as buried sabkha deposits,
disturbed ground concretions and cemented layers, etc.
All soil samples shall be classified according to the Unified Soils Classification
System (ASTM D2487). Moisture contents shall be determined for both cohesive
soils and unsaturated granular soils with 12 percent or more fines. Rock core shall
be fully described and logged before laboratory testing.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 80
Most index testing is performed on disturbed samples that have not had any special
handling to preserve structural integrity (grain size distribution, liquid limit, etc.). It is
important that samples are properly sealed to prevent drying when collected for
moisture content to be determined in the laboratory. Soils can be sealed in metal
tubes, plastic bags, or glass jars; rock samples are normally coated in a thin layer of
wax.
Laboratory tests to determine engineering properties (consolidation, triaxial

compression, etc.) shall be performed on undisturbed samples. The geologist or
engineer responsible shall be responsible for specifying laboratory testing
requirements. The Contractor undertaking the geotechnical investigation for the
project shall have control over the sampling and shipping of samples.
Refer to SBC 303 Section 2.5 for proper sampling procedures for expansive, sabkha
and collapsible soils.
To satisfy project requirements, a suitable number of index and engineering property

tests need to be planned to adequately cover the proposed site. If it is found during
the sampling program that the field coverage is uneven, or lacking in certain
stratigraphic units, field procedures shall be revisited.
3. Index and Classification Tests

a. Rock
The following index and classification tests are commonly performed on rock
samples obtained from geotechnical field investigations (including both intact
and crushed rock samples):
TABLE 4.4.2 C: ROCK INDEX CLASSIFICATION TESTS

Applicable
Test Purpose Significance
Procedure
Specific gravity and absorption
To determine the bulk or
provide valuable insight into a
Specific gravity apparent specific gravity
ASTM D 6473 rocks ability to withstand
and absorption and absorption of a rock
weathering and evaluating
specimen.
potential deterioration.
Provides an indirect indication
To determine the water
of porosity of a specimen, or
Water content ASTM D 2216 (moisture) content of a
clay content of a sedimentary
rock specimen by mass.
rock.
To determine the pulse
velocities of compression Useful for characterizing the
Pulse velocities
and shear waves through effects of uniaxial stress and
and elastic ASTM D 2845
a rock specimen, as well water saturation on pulse
constants
as the ultrasonic elastic velocity.
constant.
To determine the rebound A simple and quick index test
Rebound
ASTM D 5873 hardness number of a of hardness, especially useful
hammer
rock specimen. in the field.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 81
Applicable
Procedure
To determine the
permeability (hydraulic
conductivity) of a small Hydraulic conductivity is
Permeability ASTM D 4525 rock specimen (and a important to characterizing
liquid permeability fluid flow through a rock mass.
equivalent through
extrapolation).
Porosity is intrinsic to
To determine the
permeability, affecting things
Effective porosity ASTM D 7063 effective porosity of a
such as fluid flow and drill
rock specimen.
penetration rate.
Provides an indication of rock
To determine the physical
type, minerals present,
Petrographic and chemical
ASTM C 295 chemical reactivity (alkali-
examination characteristics of the rock
carbonate etc.) among other
specimen.
properties.
These tests characterize
To determine the freeze/thaw durability of rocks
ASTM D 4644
durability of a rock (D 5312 & D 5240), the slake
ASTM D 5240
Durability specimen exposed to a durability of shales and weak
ASTM D 5312
variety of physical and rocks (D 4644) and
ASTM D 5313
chemical conditioning. wetting/drying durability of
rocks (D 5313).
Provides an indication of
To determine a coarse relative quality of various
LA Abrasion ASTM C 535 aggregate’s resistance to sources of aggregate that
degradation. share similar mineral
compositions.
A simple and quick index test
To determine the point- of strength, especially useful in
Point load testing ASTM D 5731 load strength index of the the field. Can be correlated to
rock specimen. unconfined compressive
strength.
b. Soils
The following index and classification tests are commonly performed on
overburden samples obtained from geotechnical field investigations:
TABLE 4.4.2.D: SOIL INDEX CLASSIFICATION TESTS

Applicable
Procedure
Provides significant information
To determine the water
about the soil when combined
Water content ASTM D 4959 (moisture) content of a
with data obtained from other
sample of soil.
tests.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 82
Applicable
Procedure
To determine the liquid
limit, plastic limit and Provides an indication of soil
Atterberg Limits ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of the fine- behavior and consistency
grained portion of the relative to moisture content.
sample.
Provides a means for
To determine grain size classifying soil and aggregate
Sieve ASTM D 422
distribution. based on the distribution of
grain sizes on each sieve.
To determine the
Provides a means for
Hydrometer distribution of particle
ASTM D 422 determining the percentage of
analysis sizes smaller than the No.
clay particles present.
200 sieve (75 μm).
Obtaining clay mineralogy is
USACE EM To determine mineralogy important for predicting
X-ray diffraction
1110-2-1906 of clay particles. behavior of clay under various
conditions.
Hydraulic conductivity is one of
To determine the the main parameters used
ASTM D 2434
Permeability hydraulic conductivity of when selecting soil materials
ASTM D 5084
the soil sample. for construction (backfill type
etc.)
Mitigating the effects of
To estimate the potential
expansive soils and clay is an
Swell potential ASTM D 4546 for wetting-induced swell
important consideration in
of the soil.
design.
At high moisture contents,
ASTM D 5333 To estimate the potential collapsible soils such as Loess
Collapse
(Withdrawn) for wetting-induced undergo a sudden change in
potential
ASTM D 4546 collapse of the soil. volume, posing a risk to the
integrity of the structure.
4. Engineering Property Tests
a. Rock
The following tests are commonly performed to determine the engineering
properties of rock samples obtained from geotechnical field investigations:
TABLE 4.4.2 E: ROCK TESTS

Applicable
Procedure
The uniaxial compressive
strength is the most direct
Uniaxial & To determine the strength method of determining rock
triaxial of a rock specimen in strength.
ASTM D 7012
compressive uniaxial and/or triaxial The triaxial compressive
strength compression. strength test can be used to
calculate angle of internal
friction, angle of shearing

Rev. 1 4.4 - 83
Applicable
Procedure
resistance and cohesion
intercept.
The procedure listed provides
a method for calculating
Young’s Modulus and
Poisson’s Ratio from these
two tests.
Shear strength is an important
design parameter in the
To determine the shear construction of foundations
Direct shear
ASTM D 5607 strength of a rock and slopes. Discontinuities
strength
specimen. present in a rock mass make
this a difficult parameter to
ascertain.
Provides quantitative
To determine the strain of parameters for stability
Creep in
ASTM D 7070 a rock specimen as a analysis of underground
compression
function of time. structures subjected to an
approximately constant load.
b. Soils
The following tests are commonly performed to determine the engineering
properties of overburden samples obtained from geotechnical field
investigations:
TABLE 4.4.2 F: SOIL TESTS

Applicable
Procedure
To determine the
Unconfined Provides a good
ASTM unconfined compressive
compressive measure of shear
D 2166 strength of a cohesive
strength strength of the soil.
soil.
To determine the Certain triaxial tests can
ASTM
strength and stress- provide effective stress
Triaxial D 2850
strain relationship of an parameters of the soil
strength ASTM
undisturbed or remolded (cohesion and angle of
D 4767
cohesive soil. internal friction).
Provides a simple and
To determine the easy test for shear
ASTM consolidated, drained strength, though with a
Direct shear
D 3080 shear strength of a few shortcomings
cohesive soil. outlined in the referenced
procedure.
To estimate the
undrained shear
Provides a quick field test
Miniature ASTM strength of a fine-
for estimating shear-
vane D 4648 grained, undisturbed,
strength of a soil.
remolded or
reconstituted soil.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 84
F. Geophysical Testing
1. General
Geophysical testing shall be specified where necessary to determine the type,
nature, and characteristics of subsurface materials; determine the in-situ engineering
properties; and/or detect hidden cultural features. Geophysical testing shall
supplement or aids in the planning, execution and interpretation of the geotechnical
drilling investigations.
Geophysical testing generally consists of measurement of mechanical waves (to

determine elastic properties of materials) or electromagnetic waves (to locate
anomalous objects such as cavities or buried objects).
As Per FHWA (2001, 2002), the advantages and disadvantages of geophysical

testing include:
a. Advantages
1) Non-destructive and/or non-invasive
2) Fast and economical testing
3) Theoretical basis for interpretation
4) Applicable to soils and rocks
5) Works well for large areas
6) Characterizes materials at very small strains – provides more accurate
elastic properties
b. Disadvantages
1) No samples or direct physical penetration
2) Models assumed for interpretation
3) Affected by cemented layers or inclusions
4) Results influenced by water, clay, and depth
5) Works best when there are large differences in stiffness between
adjacent units
6) Does not work as well for hard strata layered over softer strata
7) Specialized equipment often required
2. Geophysical Testing Methods
Common methods for geophysical testing are summarized below, along with the
appropriate standards.
a. Mechanical Waves
There are four main types of mechanical waves: compression (P-waves), shear
(S-waves) surface or Rayleigh (R-waves) and Love (L-waves). The first two are
the most measured in geophysical investigations, particularly shear waves,
which can be directly linked to a soil’s shear modulus (Campanella 1994).
1) Seismic Refraction Method (ASTM D 5777)

Rev. 1 4.4 - 85
This method is used to determine the depth, thickness and seismic velocity
of subsurface soil, rock or engineered materials. The method requires a
seismic energy source, trigger cable, geophones, geophone cable, and a
seismograph. Seismic Refraction commonly measures P-waves, although
recent technology has allowed S-waves to be measured as well (FHWA
2001).
2) Crosshole Testing Method (ASTM D 4428)

This method is used to determine the depth, thickness and seismic velocity
of subsurface soil, rock, or engineered materials. The method requires a
cased pipe (usually PVC and grouted in place), a seismic energy source
(downhole hammer), trigger cable, a geophone, geophone cable, and a
seismograph. Multiple boreholes are required. Crosshole testing
measures both P-waves and S-waves (FHWA 2001).
3) Downhole Testing Method (ASTM D 7400)

The downhole testing method is very similar to the crosshole testing
method with the primary difference being that only one hole is required.
The seismic Cone Penetration Test (sCPTu) is a form of downhole testing,
with an accelerometer located within the piezometer.
4) Surface Wave Method

This method is used to determine the seismic profile (shear wave velocity)
of subsurface soil, rock or engineered materials. The method requires a
pair of geophones in a linear array, a transient force or vibrating mass to
generate surface waves, and a spectrum analyzer or other data logging
equipment. Surface wave methods analyze Rayleigh waves, which are
converted to obtain shear waves (S-waves).
b. Electromagnetic Waves
Electromagnetic methods measure electrical and magnetic properties of the soil
to determine subsurface conditions; types of electromagnetic properties include
resistivity, conductivity, magnetic fields, dielectric characteristics, and
permittivity (FHWA 2001).
1) Surface Ground Penetrating Radar (ASTM D 6432)

The method is used to interpret geologic or subsurface conditions using
measurements of changes in electromagnetic wave properties (i.e.
permittivity) that are a function of the subsurface material’s type, density,
and moisture content. The method uses transmitting antenna to radiate
electromagnetic waves. GPR is most effective in dry granular soils; in wet
clay soils, the accuracy is limited to shallow depths.
2) Direct Current Resistivity Method (ASTM D 6431)

The method is used to measure the resistivity of subsurface materials as
an indicator of the type of subsurface material present. The method
requires a source of current (battery or generator), high-impedance
voltmeter or resistivity unit, metal stakes for the current and potential
electrodes, and connecting wire.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 86
3) Frequency Domain Electromagnetic Method (ASTM D 6639)

The method is used to characterize the subsurface materials and geology
based on their properties to conduct, enhance, or obstruct the flow of
electrical currents induced in the ground. The method requires an energy
source, transmitter coil, receiver electronics, a receiver coil and connecting
wire.
4) Gravity Method (ASTM D 6430)

The method is used to characterize the subsurface conditions by
measuring variations in the earth’s gravitational field caused by differences
in density of the subsurface soil or rock or the presence of voids or man-
made structures.
3. Conducting Geophysical Testing

Geophysical testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM or other approved
RCJ standards. The equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for calibration and
standardization shall be followed; if no recommendations are provided, periodic
checks of the equipment operation shall be conducted, including after each
equipment problem or repair and before starting field work each day.
An initial site inspection to evaluate the survey plan shall be conducted, and the
instrumentation locations shall be laid out and surveyed. Calibration, standardization,
and data interpretations shall be conducted by a geotechnical professional.
An experienced geologist or engineering geophysicist shall be involved in preparing

the scope and technical specification of a geophysical investigation. Additional
guidelines on geophysical testing are found in FHWA (2002) and EM 1110-1-1804
(USACE 2003).
4. Reporting
When conducting geophysical testing, accurate logs and records of all work
accomplished shall be kept. The following information shall be included in the final
report for the work:
a. Purpose and scope of the survey;

b. A description of the geologic setting;
c. Limitations of the survey;
d. A list of assumptions made;
e. A description of the field approach, including the equipment used and the data
acquisition parameters used;
f. A to-scale site map showing the instrumentation locations;
g. A description of the approach used to perform the test, as well as a description
of corrections applied to field data and justification for their use;
h. Results of field measurements, raw record copies, and time-distance plots;
i. A description of the interpreted results;
j. A description of the data recording format;

Rev. 1 4.4 - 87
k. A description of any variance from the Work Plan, Quality Control Plan or the
ASTM guide;
l. A list of references used; and
m. A list of the personnel conducting the field testing and data interpretation and
their qualifications.
G. In-Situ Testing
1. In-Situ Tests
a. Standard Penetration Test (ASTM D 1586)
The Standard Penetration Test, or SPT, is the most commonly used in-situ test.
The test allows soil samples to be obtained for further testing, and a wide variety
of correlations between the test and various engineering properties have been
published.
SPT is typically specified in granular soil (although correlations for clay exist)
and can be advanced in very weathered rock. The test is useful for preliminary
analysis of a site (Bowles 1996) and can guide placement of further undisturbed
samples (such as Shelby tubes or direct shear tests).
TheSPT is well-correlated to a number of index tests, including bearing capacity

(see Meyerhof 1956)unconfined compressive strength (see Mitchell, Guzikowski
and Villet, 1978), settlement (see Terzaghi, Peck and Mesri, 1996), and
liquefaction susceptibility (see Seed 1979).
The repeatability of the SPT can be questionable, and results shall be analyzed
on a qualitative basis (Schmertmann 1979, Skempton 1986) and where ground
conditions are suitable CPT profiling shall specified Numerous sampling
procedures can affect the results of the SPT, and are summarized in Skempton
(1986) and Decourt (1989). Corrected N-values shall be reported and used in
subsequent design and analysis to account for factors such as overburden
stress, length of drill rod, presence of a liner, diameter of the borehole, and
energy use.
b. Field Shear Vane (ASTM D 2573)

Shear vanes are used to measure the in-situ strength of clay soils and where
required shall be specified in the geotechnical investigation scope of works.
Although a variety of vane sizes are available, the most common, or standard,
consists of a blade diameter of 65 mm, a height of 130 mm, and a blade
thickness of 2 mm. Should another vane be used, the measured shear strength
can be adjusted using a vane factor, calculated either from ASTM D 2573,
Bowles (1984)
The shear vane test shall be corrected to account for the Plasticity Index (see
Bjerrum, 1972, 1973) and for overconsolidation ratio (OCR) (see Aas et al.
1986). Guidelines on the use of field shear vanes in soft or sensitive clays are
provided by Leoueil et al (1990) and Leroueil (2001). Shear vane tests can also
be used to estimate the overconsolidation ratio of a clay deposit (see Mayne
and Mitchell 1988).
c. Cone Penetration Test (CPT) (ASTM D 3441)

Rev. 1 4.4 - 88
Cone Penetration Testing allows for a continuous log of soil properties and
stratigraphy. Cone penetrometers typically consist of a rod with a 35.7 mm body
(10 cm2 projected area), 60° apex angle, and 150 mm2 friction sleeve. A rod
with a 43.7 mm body (15 cm2 projected area and 200 cm2 sleeve) is also
available. The rod is typically pushed at a rate of 20 mm/s.
d. CPT profiling can be used to determine the soil type (see Douglas and Olsen
1981), the undrained shear strength for clays (see Jamiolkowski et al. 1985,
Schmertmann 1970), and the relative density of sands (Durgonoglu and Mitchell
1975, Mitchell, Guzikowski and Villet 1978, and Schmertmann 1978). Cone
Penetration Testing shall only be adopted in suitable site and ground conditions
and cannot typically be performed in dense to very dense granular deposits or
hard cohesive deposits Cone penetrometers with piezocone element shall be
utilized to measure porewater pressure, and geophones to measure seismic
wave data. Direct Shear
Direct shear tests can be performed in situ where available shear strength data
is in doubt, or where thin, soft continuous layers exist within relatively stronger
material (USACE 2001). These tests are typically performed on rocks (as
opposed to soil).
Further information regarding the in-situ Direct Shear test can be obtained from
Zieglar (1972), Nicholson (1983a,b) and the USACE Rock Testing Handbook
(USAEWES 1993).
e. Pressuremeter
The pressuremeter consists of a cylindrical probe expanded radially into the
surrounding soil to obtain a soil’s stress-strain curve. Pressuremeters can be
used to test soils which are not suitable for push-type tests (i.e. SPT, CPT, etc.),
such as hard clay, dense sands and gravels, and weathered rock. Four types of
pressuremeters are common:
1) Pre-bored (Menard) Pressuremeter (MPMT)

2) Self-boring Pressuremeter (SBP)
3) Push-in Pressuremeter (PIP)
4) Full-displacement Pressuremeter (FDP)
The most common pressuremeter test is the Menard, which is described in
ASTM D 4719 and in Baguelin et al (1978). Further details on types of
pressuremeters and calibration can be obtained from Briaud (1989) and Clarke
(1995).
f. Flat Plate Dilatometer (ASTM D 6635)

The flat plate dilatometer consists of a tapered blade with 18° wedge tip, which
is pushed vertically into the soil at either 200 mm or 300 mm depth intervals.
The typical rate is 20 mm/s, like the Cone Penetration Test. Pressures are taken
from a 60 mm diameter flexible steel membrane located on one side of the blade
(typical dimensions L = 240 mm, W = 95 mm, t = 15 mm).
Further information on the flat plate dilatometer can be obtained from

Jamiolkowski et al. (1985), Robertson (1986), Schmertmann (1986), Mitchell
(1988) and Lunne et al (1989).

Rev. 1 4.4 - 89
g. Plate Load Test (ASTM D 1194)

The plate load test is used to determine the bearing capacity of foundations, or
for obtaining the soil modulus. The test consists of measuring the applied load
and penetration of a plate pushed into soil or rock mass; typically, a series of
maintained loads of increasing magnitude are applied. The test can be
performed either drained or undrained, in the case of cohesive soils.
The plate load test is typically valid only for the depth and location of a specified
test; to obtain representative results for a larger area or a full soil stratum, the
test shall be performed in multiple locations or at multiple depths. A variation
on the plate load test is the screw-plate test, which consists of a flat pitch auger
which is screwed into the soil at the desired depth. Further information
concerning the screw-load test is provided in Janbu and Senesset (1973).
h. Aquifer Characterization (ASTM D 4043)

An aquifer test method is a controlled field experiment utilized to determine the
approximate hydraulic properties of water-bearing material. The hydraulic
properties that can be determined are specific to the test method selected,
dependent upon the instrumentation of the field test, knowledge of the aquifer
system at the site, and conformance of the hydrogeologic conditions at the site
to the assumptions of the test method. Hydraulic conductivity and storage
coefficient of the aquifer are the basic properties determined by most test
methods. The appropriate test method shall be selected based on site
geological conditions encountered. Refer to Subsection 4.4.2.C Groundwater
Conditions for information on design and installation of wells.
i. Slope Inclinometers (ASTM D 6230)

Slope inclinometers generally consist of grooved PVC casing that is grouted to
a target depth near or on a slope to measure movements that may occur in the
slope. A baseline reading is obtained shortly after instrument installation and is
compared to subsequent readings to determine deflection in the slope (both
vertical and horizontal directions). Both two- and three-dimensional readings
can be obtained depending on the depth of the instrument.
j. Geophysical testing
Geophysical tests can be used to characterize soils and rock in situ; these
methods are summarized in Subsection 4.4.2.F.
k. Other Tests
Less common in situ tests include the following:
1) Becker Penetration Test (BPT)

2) Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (DCPT)
3) Plate Bearing/Jacking
4) Uniaxial Compressive Testing
5) Borehole Direct Shear
6) Borehole Jacking

Rev. 1 4.4 - 90
Further information on these tests may be obtained from USACE (2001) and
FHWA (2002).
H. Off-Shore Geotechnical Investigations

1. Introduction
Offshore investigations (i.e., for deep-water structures and oil production platforms)
including those for near shore structures (i.e., breakwaters and sheet pile walls for
harbors) are highly specialized, and although the basic procedures for geotechnical
site investigation (i.e., refer to SBC 303 and ASTM D 420) shall be adhered to,
several other requirements related to Saudi and international waters shall be
considered. There are many additional statutes and regulations which apply to
offshore geotechnical investigation work (especially those involving international
waters). Applicable standards and regulations are included in, but not limited to, the
following:
a. American Petroleum Institute

b. International Association of Oil and Gas Producers
c. International Association of Oil and Gas Producers and International Marine
Contractors Association
d. International Cable Protection Committee / Society for Underwater Technology
e. International Marine Contractors Association
f. International Organization for Standardization (ISO 19900 series)
In addition, other applicable offshore codes of practice shall be considered as
found appropriate to a specific project. Due consideration needs to be given to
shipping, harbor and other regulations with respect to developing investigation
proposals and carrying out the investigation at the site and for permission to use
the overwater facilities proposed.
For simple cases, such as shallow-water offshore and near-shore investigations,

a land-type investigation can be used with additional facilities needed for access
and the depth of water. As the difficulties associated with access and depth of
water increase, techniques for offshore investigations shall be specified
including provisions for use of static and floating platforms.
2. Useful Resources
Several reference materials and guidance documents are available containing
information on the planning and execution of offshore explorations. A partial list is
provided below (in chronological order):
a. Geotechnical & Geophysical Investigations for Offshore and Nearshore

Developments, by TC 1 of ISSMGE (2005)
b. Offshore Geotechnical Engineering: Principles and Practice, by E.T.R. Dean
(2010)
c. Offshore Geotechnical Engineering, by M. Randolph and S. Gourvenec (2011)
d. Guidance Notes for the Planning and Execution of Geophysical and
Geotechnical Ground Investigations for Offshore Renewable Energy
Developments, by the Society for Underwater Technology (2014)

Rev. 1 4.4 - 91
A complete reference to these documents is provided in Subsection 4.4.2.A.8.
3. Key considerations
Offshore investigations involve greater uncertainties and cost and therefore require
more extensive planning of the scope of works and preparation for mobilization and
completion of the works. To control the variables and associated risks/hazards and
to ensure that these do not adversely impact a project and subsequent design, it is
recommended that a project specific geological and geotechnical risk register be
created and maintained as soon as the project commences. Typical risks/hazards
that may be present at an offshore geotechnical investigation site include the
following (SUT 2014):
a. Areas of soft soils (i.e., channel fill), the presence of which may affect foundation
placement and installation depths and may also restrict the selection of
installation vessels.
b. Areas of mobile seabed, the presence of which affect foundation behavior, loads
and installation depths and may also affect cable routing, installation, and long-
term burial/protection.
c. Very hard soils or bedrock, the presence of which may affect foundation
installation methods, installation depths as well as cable routing and
burial/protection options and methods.
d. Rapid change in foundation conditions that may determine the selection of more
than one foundation type for a development area.
e. Surface (i.e., at seabed) or buried obstructions, boulders, unexploded
ordinance, etc.
f. Shallow gas, presence of which may impact foundation stability and the safe
execution of geotechnical soil borings.
g. Seismic risk and the potential for soil liquefaction.
h. Environmental issues that can impact or be impacted by the project.
4. Types of Investigation
To manage offshore ground investigations effectively, all investigations must be
planned with very clear aims and objectives. The sequence of an offshore
investigation program, which shall be identified and planned at the planning stage,
shall involve the following:
a. Preliminary Study (desktop study). This is mainly to determine and compile

existing information in published documents, company archives (if any), online
sources, and from technical data providers. The preliminary study shall address
the following items, among others (SUT 2014):
1) Definition of area to be investigated
2) Geodetic datum and projection to be used
3) Vertical (tidal) datum to be used
4) Project requirements
5) License and consenting requirements pertinent to the area to be
investigated

Rev. 1 4.4 - 92
6) Conceptual foundation selection studies

7) Existing geophysical and/or geotechnical data
8) Existing site investigation data and reports for nearby sites
9) Environmental issues (marine mammals, seabed ecology, etc.)
10) Public domain data, i.e., winds, waves, tides, weather, climate, etc.
11) Any other local experience or knowledge
12) A hazard register including all hazards to public safety, the project and
the environment
A site reconnaissance is usually required as part of the desktop study.
b. Topographical and shallow geophysical survey. This involves the use of non-
intrusive devices to get a general understanding of the nature or characteristics
of the seabed. An experienced marine engineering geophysicist shall be
involved in preparing the geophysical survey scope and technical specifications.
c. Shallow-penetration geotechnical investigation. This involves in-situ testing and
soil sampling to relatively shallow depths (a few meters) below the seafloor, with
subsequent laboratory testing. This step is generally required for pipelines and
small structures.
d. Deep-penetration geotechnical investigation and laboratory testing. This
involves a significant amount of field work with in-situ testing and soil sampling
to a depth of up to 120 m or greater below the seafloor, with extensive laboratory
testing. This is usually done for sites of fixed and mobile offshore platforms.
e. Additional geophysical and/or geotechnical surveys and/or laboratory testing as
required.
5. Geophysical Investigation Techniques
Geophysical techniques commonly used for offshore investigation are given below.
For a detailed treatment, refer to the resources listed in Subsection 4.4.2.H.2. For a
general background on, and advantages and limitations of geophysical testing, refer
to Subsection 4.4.2.F.
In general, offshore geophysical techniques shall allow the investigation of geological

features such as shallow gas, infilled channels, rock head, very dense sands,
geological faults, etc.
a. High-resolution reflection systems. These systems use sound or short-range

laser light to take measurements of the seabed and the sub-seabed:
1) Seabed measuring systems, i.e. echo sounders, multi-beam sounders
2) Imaging sensors, i.e., sidescan sonar, laser scan, acoustic scanning
systems
3) Sub-bottom profilers, i.e., pingers, boomers, sparkers, and CHIRP
system
b. Seismic refraction systems. A high-resolution seismic refraction is an efficient
technique for acquiring detailed information in the top few meters of the sub-
seabed (layering and quantitative characterization, i.e., compressive and shear
wave velocities of materials).

Rev. 1 4.4 - 93
c. Electrical resistivity systems. These are semi-continuous techniques of

measuring the bulk resistivity of a volume of soil near the seabed.
d. Remotely operated geophysical platforms
1) Remotely Operated Vehicles (ROV) with umbilical connection and
constant source of power
2) Autonomous Underwater Vehicles (AUV) with onboard power requiring
no umbilical connection
6. Geotechnical Investigation Techniques
The aim of geotechnical site investigation is to determine the soil layering at the
proposed structure locations and to measure engineering properties of the soils.
Detailed description of the various geotechnical drilling techniques are provided in
ISSMGE (2005) and Dean (2010). Common offshore drilling and coring systems
include the following:
a. Drill mode borings from vessels

b. Rock corer (seabed unit)
c. PROD™ seabed drilling/coring
d. Basic gravity corer
e. Piston corer
f. Vibrocorer
g. Box corer
h. Seabed push-in sampler
i. Grab sampler (mechanical and hydraulic systems)
7. Vessels, Platforms and Deployment Systems for Investigation
The choice of deployment systems depends partly on the type of information needed,
partly on the environment, and on the availability of suitable equipment. Common
deployment systems include the following:
a. Ships and barges for geophysical and geotechnical surveys/investigations

b. Geotechnical drill ships
c. Geotechnical jack-up platforms
d. High-wheeled vehicles and other trucks
e. Remotely controlled systems
For a detailed description, refer to ISSMGE (2005), and Dean (2010).
8. Positioning
Offshore and nearshore geophysical or geotechnical investigations require accurate
positioning systems. Positioning of locations is controlled using data from Differential
Global Positioning System (DGPS), a system of satellites and onshore stations
around the globe. Where underwater positioning is required, acoustic positioning
systems such as Ultra Short Baseline (USBL), Long Baseline (LBL) or special

Rev. 1 4.4 - 94
variations of these may be employed. For more detail on offshore positioning, refer
to ISSMGE (2005).
9. Offshore Laboratory Testing

Laboratory techniques for offshore site investigations essentially do not differ from
those applied to investigations for onshore developments and generally follow the
same standards (refer to Subsection 4.4.2.E). Some tests are carried out offshore
during the field work. However, test results can be affected by vibrations and by the
rocking motions of a ship in bad weather. For this reason, most of the laboratory tests
are carried out onshore.
10. Offshore In-situ Tests

Routine offshore in-situ testing includes the following:
a. Seabed Cone penetration test (includes piezocone, i.e., PCPT and seismic
PCPT). This is the most common offshore in-situ test with extensive experience
available.
b. ROV penetration test units
c. Minicone test
d. Vane shear test
e. T-bar and ball penetration tests
f. Other in-situ tests
1) Standard Penetration Test – can provide a measure of static and cyclic
(liquefaction) soil strength assessment.
2) Pressuremeter Test – used for measuring soil stiffness and strength at a
selected depth.
For additional information on offshore in-situ tests, refer to ISSMGE (2005) and
Dean (2010).

Rev. 1 4.4 - 95
SUBSECTION 4.4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS AND STUDIES
4.4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS AND STUDIES
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidance for Project Submission Standards and
Requirements related to environmental investigations and studies. The
Guidelines, Codes and Standards apply to:
1) Environmental Regulations and Project Permitting;
2) Construction Phase Environmental Controls;
3) Pollution Prevention;
4) Petroleum and Chemical Storage; and
5) Site Cleanup and Remediation.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to all projects within the cities under jurisdiction of the RCJ.
3. Definitions
a. “Adjoining Property” Any real property or properties, the border of which is
contiguous or partially contiguous with that of the Applicant’s property, or that
would be contiguous or partially contiguous with that of the Applicant’s property
but for a street, road, or other public thoroughfare separating them.
b. “Area of Concern” Geographic areas that fail to meet the general or specific
objectives of environmental regulations where such failure has caused or is
likely to cause impairment of beneficial use of the area’s ability to support life.
c. “Controlled Recognized Environmental Conditions” A Recognized
Environmental Condition resulting from a past release of hazardous substances
or petroleum products that has been addressed to the satisfaction of the
applicable regulatory authority with hazardous substances or petroleum
products allowed to remain in place subject to the implementation of required
controls.
d. “Drum” A container (typically, but not necessarily, holding 208 L of liquid) that
may be used to store hazardous substances, petroleum products, or other
materials.
e. “Environmental Concern” An environmental matter for consideration, suggesting
that a recognized environmental condition may be applicable to a site.
f. “Environmental Site Assessment” The process by which a person or entity seeks
to determine if a parcel of property (including improvements) is subject to
recognized environmental conditions.
g. “Geotechnical” Of or pertaining to practical applications of geological science in
civil engineering, mining, etc.
h. “Geo-environmental” Of or pertaining to practical applications of geological
science in environmental engineering, mitigation, remediation, etc.
i. “Investigation Derived Waste” Waste that may include drilling muds, cuttings,
and purge water from test pit and well installation; purge water, soil, and other

Rev. 1 4.4 - 96
materials from collection of samples; residues (e.g., ash, spent carbon, well
development purge water) from testing of treatment technologies and pump and
treat systems; contaminated personal protective equipment (PPE); and
solutions (aqueous or otherwise) used to decontaminate non-disposable
protective clothing and equipment.
j. “Material Threat” A physically observable or obvious threat which is reasonably
likely to lead to a release that, in the opinion of an environmental professional,
is threatening and might result in impact to public health or the environment.
k. “Occupant” Those tenants, subtenants, or other persons or entities using the
property or a portion of the property in question.
l. “Pits, Lagoons, or Ponds” Man-made or natural depressions in a ground surface
that is likely to hold liquids or sludge containing hazardous substances or
petroleum products. The likelihood of such liquids or sludge being present is
determined by evidence of factors associated with the pit, lagoon, or pond,
including, but not limited to, discolored water, distressed vegetation, or the
presence of an obvious wastewater discharge.
m. “Recognized Environmental Condition” The presence or likely presence of any
hazardous substance or petroleum products in, on, or at a property: (1) due to
a release to the environment; (2) under conditions indicative of a release to the
environment; or (3) under conditions that pose a material threat of a future
release to the environment.
n. “Release” Any spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying,
discharging, injecting, escaping, leaching, dumping, or disposing into the
environment (including the abandonment or discarding of barrels, containers
and other closed receptacles containing any hazardous substance, pollutant, or
contaminant).
o. “Site Reconnaissance” Includes, but is not limited to, a site visit, with the
objective of obtaining information indicating the likelihood of identifying
recognized environmental conditions in connection with the property.
p. “Site Visit” The visit to the property during which observations are made
constituting the site reconnaissance section of this Section.
q. “Sump” A pit, cistern, cesspool, or similar receptacle where liquids drain, collect,
or are stored.
r. “Wastewater” Water that (1) is or has been used in an industrial or
manufacturing process, (2) conveys or has conveyed sewage, or (3) is directly
related to manufacturing, processing, or raw materials storage areas at an
industrial plant.
4. Abbreviations
a. AOC: Area of Concern
b. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials
c. EIA: Environmental Impact Assessment
d. ESA: Environmental Site Assessment
e. GDMS: General Directorate of Military Survey
f. PID: Photoionization Detector

Rev. 1 4.4 - 97
g. RCJ: Royal Commission for Jubail

h. RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations (current version)
i. REC: Recognized Environmental Condition
j. RMP: Risk Management Plan
k. SCTA: Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities
l. STDB: Saudi Topographic Database
m. USACE: United States Army Corps of Engineers
n. USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
a. Projects shall comply with all applicable requirements and regulations of the
RCJ.
6. Codes
7. Standards
b. USACE Engineering and Design Manual, Dredging and Dredged Material
Disposal, EM 1110-2-5025
8. Related Sections
a. RCER Volume I – Regulation, Standards, and Guidelines
d. Section 4.2 Submission Requirements
e. Subsection 4.3.8 Life Cycle Costing and Design Service Life
f. Subsection 4.3.9 Risk Management and Emergency Planning
g. Subsection 4.5.6 Environmental Compliance During Construction
h. Subsection 5.1.6 Local Climate Conditions
i. Subsection 5.2.1.G.3 Culverts and Drainage Structures
j. Subsection 5.3.2.J Waste Collection Requirements
k. Subsection 5.3.2.K Screening of Waste, Utilities, and Service Areas
l. Subsection 5.6.1.E Erosion and Sediment Controls
m. Subsection 5.6.2.A.3.b Environmental Impact, Air
n. Subsection 5.6.2.B.3.f Noise Barriers
o. Subsection 5.7.2 Wastewater
p. Subsection 5.9.2 Air
q. Subsection 5.9.4 Solid Waste Management and Recycling

Rev. 1 4.4 - 98
9. Approvals
B. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
1. Purpose and Summary
a. The EIA is a mandated step in the environmental regulatory process for the
development of Type I and Type II facilities as detailed in the RCER Volume II
but could potentially be mandated by the RCJ for other types of projects. The
objective of the study is to assess the environmental impacts of a project to the
site whether they are positive or negative.
b. As per the RCER, a third-party consultant or team of consultants with no known
conflicts of interests must be hired to complete the assessment. This will mitigate
bias in the assessment and report and help uphold the highest national
environmental Standards.
c. The EIA forms a basis of information for environmental design for projects with
identified future environmental impacts. It is necessary to accurately report
these potential impacts to properly mitigate their effects during design,
construction, and operation to conform to the RCJ Standards. The EIA is
ultimately reviewed by the RCJ and is a large part of the decision to grant a
permit to the facility. Ensuring potential environmental impacts have been
thoroughly reviewed, and that alternatives or mitigation techniques are proposed
at the end of the EIA, will help the RCJ review and permitting process.
d. At a minimum, the EIA will contain the following as detailed in the RCER:
1) Executive summary
2) Introduction
3) Policy, Legal, and Administrative Framework
4) Description and Layout of Proposed Development
5) Air Quality and Meteorology
6) Terrestrial Environment
7) Biological Resources
8) Noise and Vibration
9) Waste Management
10) Water Quality Management
11) Marine Environment
12) Socio-Economic Aspects
13) Traffic and Transportation Infrastructure
14) Utilities Usage and Infrastructure
15) Archaeology and Cultural Heritage
16) Health and Safety Aspects
17) Sustainable Development Assessment

Rev. 1 4.4 - 99
18) Analysis of Alternatives

19) Cumulative Impacts Assessment
20) Determine Significance of Effects
21) Mitigation Measures
22) Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan
23) Risk Management Plan
(a) A Risk Management Plan (RMP) shall be developed and submitted
to the RCJ for any stationary facility that is using more than a
threshold quantity of a controlled substance in a process. An RMP
shall be developed to assist local fire, police, and emergency
response personnel in responding to a possible spill or release of
the controlled substance(s) at the facility.
(b) Refer to USEPA’s General Risk Management Program Guidance
(http://www2.epa.gov/rmp/guidance-facilities-risk-management-
programs-rmp) document for further information into what qualifies
as a regulated substance and a threshold quantity.
(c) RMP’s shall contain, at minimum, the following three sections:
(1) A hazard assessment detailing potential worst-case and
alternative accidental substance releases, potential effects of
an accidental release, and a history of accidental releases
over the last five years;
(i) At a minimum, the RMP shall cover both a toxic release,
and flammable (explosive) release.
(2) A prevention program including safety actions such as
precautions, maintenance, monitoring, and staff training
measures; and
(3) An emergency response program spelling out employee
procedures for contacting and communicating with response
agencies, emergency health care representatives, and the
public should a substance release occur.
e. The full explanation, description, and guidance for completion of the EIA to the
RCJ Standards are detailed in the RCER Volume II-A-Introduction, Appendix C.
C. Environmental Site Assessment for Recognized Concerns and Conditions
1. Environmental Site Assessment Report Standard
a. Purpose
1) An ESA is conducted to assess potential or existing environmental
contamination liabilities prior to site development or sale. It generally
involves identifying potential impacts to underlying land as well as
improvements on the property. Sampling is not typically performed
during an ESA.
2) The ESA is an observational study intended to form the basis for future
and more comprehensive investigations such as geo-environmental
investigations, marine investigations, or tank removals.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 100
b. Reference
1) Refer to ASTM E1527-13 Standard Practice for Environmental Site
Assessments: Phase I Environmental Site Assessment Process (2013)
for specifics and details for conducting an assessment.
c. Table of Contents
1) A table of contents shall be provided in the report containing at a
minimum the following categories.
d. Summary
1) This section shall summarize the ESA that was conducted for the subject
property and shall contain at least the following:
(a) A section discussing why the assessment was conducted, who was
involved, and under what regulatory requirements and/or guidance
it was conducted.
(b) A property description.
(c) A summary of Recognized Environmental Conditions (RECs) and
recommended further studies or a statement that none were
identified; and
(d) Recommendations for additional studies, if warranted.
e. Introduction
1) Objective of the ESA, regulatory description, and definitions of important
ideas and terms.
2) Property Description
(a) Describe the subject property and surrounding properties. This shall
include a description of the facility and general descriptions of the
surrounding facilities as well as buildings and physical attributes of
the site.
(b) The description shall also refer to site maps created and pictures
taken during the site reconnaissance.
3) Special Terms, Conditions, and Significant Assumptions
(a) Describe terms, conditions, or assumptions that may limit the ESA’s
findings.
4) Exceptions and Limiting Conditions
(a) Include stipulations, legal agreements, or legal clarifications.
5) Personnel Qualifications
(a) Affirm that the ESA was performed by or under supervision of
qualified personnel that meet the ASTM definition of an
Environmental Professional. Personnel who were involved in the
ESA must list their credentials in an appendix.
f. User-Provided Information
1) This information is provided by the property owner or manager when
asked by those performing the ESA. This information consists of at least

Rev. 1 4.4 - 101
a User Questionnaire, Environmental Liens or Activity Use Information,

Previous Environmental Permits or Reports, and the Purpose of the
ESA. This section lists the user-provided information and key findings;
the full information is provided in an appendix.
g. Records Review
1) Physical Setting
(a) A summary of the setting of the site.
2) Property Topography and Surface Water Flow
(a) Describe the topography of the Property here using a Saudi
Topographic Database (STDB) topographic map. At a minimum
describe approximate elevation (mean sea level), topography,
surface drainage pattern, distance, and direction to nearest surface
water body.
3) Regional and Site Geology
(a) Describe known geologic deposits from surface downward: soil and
unconsolidated materials, bedrock type and depth to bedrock. Detail
on underlying bedrock is not required unless it is less than 7.5 m
below grade (identification of uppermost bedrock formation is
sufficient unless additional information is available, i.e. test boring
data).
4) Regional and Site Hydrogeology
(a) Describe the water table topography and flow direction. Estimate
depth to the water table and contrast the regional groundwater flow
trend with the site flow. Describe manmade structures, utilities, or
natural surface features in the area that may influence groundwater
flow.
5) Environmental Records
(a) Listing for Property
(1) State and summarize if property has previously been identified
to have RECs by the RCJ.
(b) Listings for Adjoining Sites with Potential to Impact Property
(1) State and summarize if adjoining properties are identified to
have RECs by the RCJ.
(2) This is intended to evaluate the potential impact that adjoining
sites may have had/will have on the property as well as RECs.
(c) Health Department or Fire Department Records
(1) This section includes a summary of responses to medical
emergencies, fires, or spills that may have occurred
previously. It is intended to track potential exposure or spill
events that may have occurred on the property.
(d) Building and/or Planning Department Records
(1) This section summarizes records of potential environmental
concern that involve the property such as, but not limited to,

Rev. 1 4.4 - 102
aboveground or underground storage tanks or historical site

usage.
6) Historic Records Review
(a) Land Title Records/Deeds
(1) A summary of previous owners and time periods of their
ownership.
(b) Aerial Photographs
(1) Dates and summaries of observations from review of aerial
photographs of the site throughout the site’s history.
(c) Historical and Archeological Records
(1) Describe and summarize investigations or records pertaining
to historical or archeological resources obtained from the
Saudi Commission for Tourism and Antiquities (SCTA) or the
RCJ.
h. Site Reconnaissance
1) Site Reconnaissance Methodology
(a) Describe the method used to evaluate the property such as mode of
transportation, travel paths and locations, types of areas observed,
etc. Summarize weather conditions and physical site restrictions or
lack of access that may have resulted in inability to view all portions
of the site.
2) General Description
(a) The general description shall include a short summary of key
features, and descriptions of the following:
(1) Site Operation
(2) Structures, Roads, Other Improvements
(3) Site Size (Hectares)
(4) Estimated % of Site Covered by Buildings and/or Pavement
(5) Observed Current Site Use/Operations
(6) Observed Evidence of Past Site Use(s)
(7) Sewage Disposal Method
(8) Potable Water Source and
(9) Electric Utilities.
3) Hazardous Substances and Petroleum Products
(a) This section shall list and describe, at a minimum, the following
observations:
(1) Hazardous Substances and Petroleum Products as defined by
the RCJ
(2) Drums larger than 20 l

Rev. 1 4.4 - 103
(3) Strong, Pungent, or Noxious Odors

(4) Pools of Liquid with Potential Source (Water or chemical)
(5) Unidentified Substance Containers
(6) PCB-Containing Equipment and
(7) Other Observed Evidence of Hazardous Substances or
Petroleum Products.
4) Interior Observations
(a) Interior observations shall list and describe, at a minimum, the
following:
(1) Heating / Cooling Method
(2) Surface Stains or Corrosion
(3) Floor Drains and Sumps and
(4) Other Interior Observations.
5) Exterior Observations
(a) Exterior Observations shall list and describe, at a minimum, the
following:
(1) On-Site Pits, Lagoons, Ponds
(2) Stained Soil or Pavement
(3) Stressed Vegetation
(4) Waste Streams and Waste Collection Areas
(5) Solid Waste Disposal Areas
(6) Potential Areas of Fill Placement
(7) Cooling/Wastewater Discharges
(8) Stormwater Discharges
(9) Wells
(10) Septic Systems and
(11) Other Exterior Observations.
6) Underground Storage Tanks/Structures
(a) Describe, at a minimum, the following:
(1) Existing Underground Storage Tanks
(2) Previous Underground Storage Tanks and
(3) Other Underground Structures.
7) Aboveground Storage Tanks
(a) Describe, at a minimum, the following:
(1) Existing Above Ground Storage Tanks and
(2) Former Above Ground Storage Tanks.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 104
8) Adjoining Properties
(a) Current Uses of Adjoining Sites
(b) Observed Evidence of Past Use of Adjoining Sites and
(c) Pits, Ponds, or Lagoons on Adjoining Sites.
9) Observed Physical Setting of Adjoining Sites
(a) Brief description of the visible topographic features, general slope,
and gradients.
i. Interviews
1) Findings from Interviews with Occupants or Other Involved Parties
(a) Interviews shall be conducted with occupants of the property about
the type of work performed and materials used to ascertain the
potential for environmental concerns. A representative sample of
the occupants must be interviewed to cover different types of work
performed on the property. If there is more than one tenant at the
property, occupants at each tenant shall be interviewed to achieve a
representative sample.
(b) Interviewees shall be at the level of owner, key tenant, operator, or
regulator and have knowledge of the facility.
(c) List names and titles of people interviewed and describe the major
findings of the interviews.
2) Findings from Interviews with Property Neighbors
(a) If deemed necessary, adjoining property occupants must be
interviewed to ascertain the potential for environmental concerns
either on the site or the adjoining property.
(b) Interviewees shall be at the level of owner, key tenant, operator, or
regulator and have knowledge of the facility.
(c) List names and titles of people interviewed and describe the major
findings of the interviews.
j. Evaluation
1) Findings and Opinions
(a) This shall list and summarize major findings from the assessments
conducted at the property as well as the professional’s opinion of
those findings.
2) Data Gaps
(a) Identify data gaps present within the assessment. This includes
information that might be important for a complete assessment but
was unobtainable at the time despite of good faith efforts made to
obtain the information.
(b) Identify and summarize the data gaps for each section listed above.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 105
3) Conclusions
(a) Include conclusions regarding RECs, historic RECs, controlled
RECs, currently regulated RECs, or the lack of identified RECs.
k. Non-Scope Considerations
1) Identify environmental work and findings not related to the above
sections that were performed at the property that were agreed upon
between the client and performing consultant.
l. References
1) List any material references used for the assessment.
m. List of Figures
1) Property Location Map
2) Property Vicinity Map
n. List of Appendices
1) Photographs of the Property and Vicinity
2) Historical Records
3) Archeological/Cultural Resource Records
4) Environmental Agency Database Search Report
5) Agency Records
6) User-Provided Records
7) Interview Forms
8) Investigating Personnel Qualifications
D. Geo-environmental Investigations (Surface and Subsurface Sampling Protocols)
1. Work Plan
a. Purpose
1) The purpose of developing a work plan prior to performing work is to
ensure that the investigation proposed will meet the RCJ requirements
and directives. Work plans for investigations shall be developed and
submitted to the RCJ for comment and approval. Work may not start until
the work plan has been approved in writing.
b. Reference
1) Refer to ASTM E1903-11 Standard Practice for Environmental Site
Assessments: Phase II Environmental Site Assessment Process (2011)
for specifics and details for developing a work plan.
c. A work plan for geo-environmental investigations shall include, but is not limited
to, the following sections:
d. Introduction
1) Describe the purpose of the investigation, including regulatory
requirements and site-specific conditions (i.e. as described in ESA).

Rev. 1 4.4 - 106
2) Summarize the site background. Include location, physical setting,

current site and surrounding land use, water supply in surrounding area,
past uses for the site and adjoining properties, and previous
investigations (i.e. ESA) and activities that influence how the
investigation will be performed.
e. Planned Investigation Activities
1) Overview and Discussion of Areas of Concern
(a) Develop an overview of the site and use existing investigations and
studies to determine areas of concern. Discuss the potential
impacts to these areas, the speculated origin of the impacts, and
the extent of the impacts. Provide site drawings and maps.
2) Mobilization
(a) Identify parties that will participate in completing the investigation.
These would be the parties performing the work as well as
assistance of utility companies, facility personnel, etc.
3) General Sampling Considerations
(a) Identify the potential contaminants regulated in the RCER that will
be tested for, the method of those tests, the qualified laboratory that
will perform the analysis, and quality assurance/quality control
(QA/QC) measures to be taken.
4) Testing and Sampling
(a) Describe the types of testing and sampling proposed for the
investigation. This could span multiple sections as each must
contain a detailed explanation supporting why the method(s) were
chosen, the goals, how the work will proceed, and other information
that describes the method of investigation.
(b) This section may include investigations such as:
(1) Geophysical Survey, i.e. electromagnetic or ground-
penetrating radar,
(2) Soil Gas Survey
(3) Surface and Subsurface Soil Sampling
(4) Soil Borings and Sampling
(5) Test Pits
(6) Well Installation and Monitoring
(7) Hydraulic Conductivity Testing
(8) Groundwater Sampling
(9) Marine Sediment Data Collection
(10) Marine Sampling Equipment and Protocols
(11) Marine Sediment Characterization
(12) Evaluation of Dredged Material Pollution Potential
5) Decontamination

Rev. 1 4.4 - 107
(a) Describe the decontamination procedures that will be implemented

to prevent cross-contamination of samples and protect personnel
from exposure. If testing and sampling materials are chosen that do
not require decontamination (i.e. use of disposable equipment),
summarize these materials and methods.
6) Investigation-Derived Waste
(a) Describe the plan to contain and disposed of waste derived from the
investigation.
(b) Refer to USEPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response’s
Guide to Management of Investigation-Derived Wastes (1992,
publication 9345.3-03FS) for methods and requirements.
7) Sampling Location Survey
(a) Describe the plan to survey the investigation and sample locations.
8) Field Quality Assurance / Quality Control Samples
(a) Describe how many and what type of quality control samples (field
duplicates, trip blanks, etc.) will be taken during the investigation.
f. Laboratory Analytical Program
1) Describe the laboratory’s qualification(s) and applicable certification(s).
2) Describe the analytical program that will be adhered to during the
investigation and what deliverables will be generated from the analysis.
g. Documentation and Reporting
1) Describe the methods of documentation that will be used during the
investigation. These methods include documentation such as:
(a) Field Notebooks
(b) Project Photographs
(c) Calibration Records
(d) Geologic Logs
(e) Safety Forms
(f) Chain-of-Custody Forms
(g) Laboratory Reports
(h) Other Field Documentation deemed necessary
2) Describe the contents of the report that will be generated to summarize
the investigation.
h. Project Organization
1) Identify individuals that will be involved in the project and what roles they
will have.
2) Identify subcontractors that will be involved in the investigation and their
role(s) and qualification(s).
i. Project Schedule

Rev. 1 4.4 - 108
1) Include a project schedule to be followed once the work plan has been
approved.
2. Examples of Investigations
a. Soil borings
1) Use of rotary or “direct-push” drilling methods, such as core samplers,
augers, or other sampling tools, is appropriate for sampling soil. In these
methods, soil cores are brought to the surface to be characterized and
potentially submitted for lab analysis.
2) Observations of soil conditions as well as methods and tools used must
be documented for submission, including:
(a) Visual, odors, PID readings, soil types and stratigraphy, non-native
material, etc.
(b) Rig type, tools, decontamination procedures, sampling methods,
locations, personnel performing the shallow subsurface excavation,
etc.
3) Follow soil boring procedures and protocols outlined in Subsection
4.4.3.D.
b. Surface and Subsurface Soil Sampling
1) Protocols
(a) Refer to the USEPA Office of Research and Development’s
Preparation of Soil Sampling Protocols: Sampling Techniques and
Strategies (1992, EPA/600/R-92/128) for sampling theory, statistical
evaluation, designs, and collection of samples.
(b) Refer to USEPA Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory’s
Soil Sampling Quality Assurance User’s Guide Second Edition
(1989, EPA 600/8-89/046) for detailed explanation of record
keeping protocols and procedures.
(c) Refer to USACE’s Dredging and Dredged Material Disposal (1983,
EM 1110-2-5025) for marine sampling protocols, equipment,
characterization, and evaluation.
2) Surface Soil Sampling
(a) Surface sampling is performed to characterize contaminants in soil
that has the greatest potential for human contact. This type of
sample shall contain soil no deeper than 150 mm below the surface.
(b) Observations of soil conditions as well as methods and tools used
shall be documented, including:
(1) Visual, odors, PID readings, soil types, non-native material,
etc.
(2) Tools, decontamination procedures, sampling methods,
locations, personnel performing the shallow subsurface
excavation, etc.
(c) Surface soil sampling results and observations must be
summarized on a standard log form.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 109
(d) Surface soil sampling results shall be submitted to the RCJ with a
standard reporting form.
3) Subsurface Soils
(a) Use of an auger or core sampler shall be used for soil samples at
depths greater than 300 mm. Hand augers disturb the soil and
create a “mixed” sample that may not be suitable for correctly
evaluating site conditions.
(b) Observations of soil conditions as well as methods and tools used
shall be documented, including:
(1) Visual, odors, PID readings, soil types, non-native material,
etc.
(2) Indications of groundwater presence; and
(3) Tools, decontamination procedures, sampling methods,
locations, personnel performing the shallow subsurface
excavation, etc.
(c) Subsurface soil sampling results and observations shall be
summarized on a standard log form.
(d) Soil sampling results must be submitted to the RCJ with a standard
reporting form.
4) Test Pits
(a) Test pits or trenches can be performed for detailed characterization
of site stratigraphy, for direct observation of soil conditions, and for
understanding of behavior of soil materials upon excavation. Test
pits or trenches are usually performed with the use of an excavator,
are roughly one meter wide, and dug to below the desired sampling
depth.
(b) Record visual observations, odors, instrument readings, soil types
(stratigraphy and thickness), non-native material, decontamination
procedures, sampling methods, and location data for test pits.
Record depths to stratigraphic contacts.
(c) Record personnel performing the test pit excavation and sampling.
c. Soil Gas Survey
1) Objective
(a) ‘Soil gas’ refers to the atmosphere present in soil pore spaces.
Volatile organic compounds introduced into the subsurface can be
present in the gas phase and have the potential for intrusion into
occupied structures. A soil gas survey may be used to screen a site
for potential contamination.
(b) The survey uses several sample points in the subsurface to collect
soil gas for analysis. These points can be positioned at a specific
depth depending on the target.
2) Procedures and Methods

Rev. 1 4.4 - 110
(a) Refer to USEPA’s Soil Gas Measurement (March 2003) for

procedures and methods to reference.
3) Requirements
(a) When performing a soil gas survey, a map with the GPS or
surveyed location of each soil gas sample must be generated.
(b) Observations and depths of the soil shall be recorded in the field for
submission.
d. Groundwater Monitoring
1) Objectives
(a) Groundwater monitoring is important for understanding groundwater
quality and movement and for protection of groundwater resources.
Contamination can exist in the groundwater most frequently near
commercial and industrial sites. Contaminated groundwater poses a
threat to plants, animals, and people who use the groundwater.
Standardizing sampling and analytical protocols will facilitate
development of a thorough and effective system for evaluating
contaminated sites. Groundwater monitoring is used to identify
groundwater impacts from surface or subsurface contaminant
releases. The data can be used to develop mitigation of current or
potential negative impacts to groundwater.
(b) Refer to RCER Volume II Appendix E, Groundwater Monitoring
Guidelines for more information.
2) Requirements
(a) The RCJ has established a Well Construction and Sampling record
sheet in the RCER (Annexure 3 of RCER Volume II Appendix E,
Groundwater Monitoring Guidelines). The record sheet is required
for sampling programs and will be submitted to the RCJ.
(b) Refer to RCER Vol. II Introduction, Appendix E for specific
groundwater monitoring methods and procedures.
(c) Using the sampling record established in RCER Volume II–A-
Introduction Appendix E, field parameters including temperature,
pH, and conductivity must be recorded while purging a well for
sampling. These parameters shall be recorded prior to starting
purging and again after one, two, and three well volumes have been
purged, sampling the well after the third well volume is purged. If
the RCJ requests more frequent field parameter records, a table
that prompts the sampler for the same information as the imbedded
table in the established record sheet will be attached for submission
and contain basic site and well identifying information.
(d) The sampling record sheet also serves as a chain-of-custody for
sample transportation to laboratories. Standard chain of custody
procedures shall be followed during sample handling and
transportation.
3) Well Monitoring Network

Rev. 1 4.4 - 111
(a) A site plan showing the network of monitoring wells shall be

generated for RCJ submission and field use. This plan must show
existing structures and well locations with well IDs at a minimum.
The plan shall also include location data such as GPS coordinates
or tie-off measurements to facilitate quicker location in the field.
e. Groundwater Sampling and Analytical Testing
1) Objectives
(a) Each lab typically has its own format for reporting analytical results.
To expedite data evaluation, analytical reports submitted to the RCJ
must be in a standard format.
2) Requirements
(a) Laboratory data must be transferred to the RCJ Groundwater
Standard Reporting Form for submission with the consultant’s
analytical report. A copy of the laboratory analysis report shall be
attached to the standard form for RCJ verification.
(b) The standard form is Annexure 4, located in RCER Vol. II Appendix
E.
3) Groundwater Quality – Baseline Conditions
(a) Understanding existing groundwater conditions is important for
developing a remediation strategy. The same sampling protocols
and procedures are to be used for determining baseline conditions
and for continued periodic monitoring events. Baseline conditions
are necessary for comparison to future sampling events. Refer to
RCER Volume II Appendix E, Groundwater Sampling Guidelines for
more information.
f. Marine Surveys
1) Hydrographic
(a) Surveys shall meet the requirements of the Saudi Arabia General
Directorate of Military Survey, Ministry of Defense & Aviation and
Inspectorate General. All surveys (including hydrographic surveys)
shall be completed in the Saudi Topographic Database (STDB).
The surveys shall also meet current General Directorate of Military
Survey (GDMS) Standards and Specifications. Current horizontal
and vertical datum, scale, metadata designations, resolution, table
of entities, and other parameters shall be confirmed with the RCJ
and the GDMS. The existing survey and a map with proposed
improvements shall be provided to the RCJ. Hydrographic surveys
shall also be provided to the RCJ.
(b) Refer to Subsection 4.4.1, Surveying and Subsection 4.4.1.D for
more information on survey datums and product format prior to
submittal of surveys to the RCJ.
2) Marine Boreholes
(a) The locations and depths of Surface Water Sampling shall be
surveyed and added to the survey mapping created for the project.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 112
The work shall be completed in a manner that does not damage the
environment.
3. Investigation Report
a. After the geo-environmental investigation has been completed, a report shall be
generated to summarize the findings of the investigation.
b. The report will at a minimum, contain the information outlined in the
Documentation and Reporting section of the work plan.
c. The report shall include, but is not limited to, the following sections:
d. Introduction
1) Like the work plan, it will include the purpose of the investigation and
background information for the site.
e. Investigation Program
1) Summarize the scope of the investigation and methodologies used.
Describe the work performed including variations from the work as
proposed in the work plan.
f. Investigation Results
1) Describe and summarize the data collected, including, but not limited to,
the subsurface conditions, work logs, and specific features or areas of
concern.
2) This data shall be separated into two sections: one for the physical
characteristics of the site and the other for analytical data.
g. Quality Control Evaluation
1) Describe data usability problems, if any, which may impact the
conclusions of the investigation.
h. Exposure Assessment
1) Based on the data collected, perform an exposure assessment for
humans and ecological resources in and around the site. This shall
include an identification of potential exposure pathways and mitigation
techniques for these potential exposures.
2) The summary shall include current potential exposures as well as
exposures that could result during the remediation and development of
the site.
i. Summary and Conclusions
1) Briefly summarize the investigation that took place and the data
generated for each area of concern. Develop conclusions based on
these data and observations for each area of concern.
j. References
1) Include references used for the report.
k. Figures, Tables, Appendices
1) Include figures, tables, and appendices referenced in the body of the
report.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 113
2) Figures shall include sheets such as site maps, facility maps, sample
location maps, or necessary details.
3) Tables are generally used to show analytical data and comparisons to
national environmental Standards.
4) Appendices include log sheets, previous reports, chains of custody, and
other items that must be submitted with the report for reference.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 114
SUBSECTION 4.4.4 DECONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
4.4.4 DECONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides guidance for Project Submission Standards and
Requirements related to Demolition and Removal. The Guidelines, Codes, and
Standards apply to:
1) Environmental Regulations and Project Permitting
2) Demolition Phase Environmental Controls
3) Site Environmental Cleanup and Remediation
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to all projects within the cities under jurisdiction of the RCJ.
3. Definitions
a. “Asbestos Containing Material” Any material that contains or partly contains any
amount of asbestos fibers.
b. “Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (1986)” US legislation requiring the
cataloging of asbestos containing building materials in schools.
c. “Underground Storage Tank” Any tank, including underground piping connected
to the tank, that is or has been used to contain hazardous substances or
petroleum products and the volume of which is 10% or more beneath the surface
of the ground.
d. “Universal Wastes” Hazardous waste streams, such as batteries, pesticides,
mercury-containing equipment, and lamp bulbs, which a generator can choose
to manage in an alternative manner in place of the more complex hazardous
waste requirements.
4. Abbreviations
a. PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyls
b. USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
c. UST: Underground Storage Tank
a. Projects shall comply with all applicable requirements and regulations of the
RCJ.
6. Codes
7. Standards
8. Related Sections
a. RCER Volume I - Regulation, Standards, and Guidelines

Rev. 1 4.4 - 115

d. Subsection 3.5.8 Site Cleanup and Remediation
e. Section 4.2 Submission Requirements
f. Subsection 5.1.6 Local Climate Conditions
g. Subsection 5.3.2.J Waste Collection Requirements
h. Subsection 5.3.2.K Screening of Waste, Utilities, and Service Areas
i. Subsection 5.6.1.E Erosion and Sediment Controls
j. Subsection 5.9.2 Air
k. Subsection 5.9.4 Solid Waste Management and Recycling
9. Approvals
B. Pre-Demolition Surveys
1. Asbestos Containing Material
a. A survey shall be completed using the inspection Guidelines established by the
USEPA’s Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances in USEPA 560/5-85-024:
Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings, and US 40
CFR 763 - Asbestos.
2. Lead Based Paint
a. Paint shall be tested for lead using the inspection Guidelines established in US
29 CFR 1926.62 – Lead and/or US 29 CFR 1910.1025 – OSHA’s Lead
Standards. These guidelines shall also be used for the removal of any paint
found to be lead based.
3. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Survey and Sampling
a. Survey and sampling for PCB’s shall be completed utilizing appropriate USEPA
Standard Methods and ASTM methods. Samples shall be prepared according
to USEPA Method 3550B (1996). Samples shall be analyzed according to
USEPA SW 846-8082A (2007).
4. Universal Wastes and Other Materials
a. Universal Wastes (such as mercury-containing equipment) shall be sampled
and removed according to USEPA Guidelines and US 40 CFR 273 – Standards
for Universal Waste Management.
C. Waste Handling and Disposal
1. Basics
a. Waste Handling and Disposal shall be completed according to RCER Volume I
Section 4, Hazardous Material Management and Section 5, Waste
Management.
D. Underground Storage Tank Removal
1. Underground Storage Tank (UST) Closure
a. Removal of Materials

Rev. 1 4.4 - 116
1) Accumulated materials, including the UST, secondary containment, and

fencing, shall be removed from the tank location at the completion of the
project or at the time of the UST decommissioning. Upon removal from
the site the materials shall be disposed of in a properly licensed landfill or
properly reused on another site.
b. Removal of Impacted Soil
1) Soil that is impacted by a release (i.e. spills, leaks, etc.) from the UST
shall be removed and disposed of according to RCER regulations.
c. Applicable Codes and Standards
1) Refer to US 40 CFR Part 280 Subpart G - Out-of-Service UST Systems
and Closure; Subsection 3.5.7, Petroleum and Chemical Bulk Storage;
and RCER Volume I Section 4.5, Underground Storage Tank
Regulations for detailed information on UST removal and closure
protocol.
2. Tank Location Restoration
a. Upon the removal of the UST, the subsurface and surface soils tested and
determined to be unimpacted (clean) shall be used to restore the UST site to its
original condition unless written permission by the RCJ is given to do otherwise.
If the subsurface and/or surface soils are found to be impacted, clean soil shall
be brought to the UST site and used for restoration of the site.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 117
SUBSECTION 4.4.5 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT
4.4.5 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT
A. Purpose
1. Collect and Summarize Data
The purpose of an existing environmental conditions report is to collect and
summarize data and findings from previous site investigations. This data will serve
as the basis for design of environmental aspects of the project.
2. Summary
The report includes a summary of tangible data to be used for project design. The
report shall contain summaries of previous reports such as ESAs, geo-
environmental investigations, marine investigations, or other site activities in which
data was recorded and/or a report was generated.
B. Report Content
1. Executive Summary
a. Briefly summarize the key information of the report.
2. Introduction/Site Background
a. Describe the purpose of the investigation; provide a general site description; and
list the parties involved in the investigation and reporting.
3. Methodology
a. Describe the methodology and sources used for obtaining existing reports and
information for the site.
b. Describe the methodology used in performing any site-specific field
investigations that were conducted.
4. Previous Investigations
a. List and describe previous environmental investigations at the site, including a
summary of the activities and their findings and conclusions.
b. Include historic and archeological studies that have been conducted at the site.
5. Investigation(s) Conducted for Project
a. Describe the environmental investigations conducted specifically for the
proposed project, making sure to summarize the activities conducted for these
investigations.
6. Summary of Conditions and Conclusions
a. This section shall include the findings and conclusions from all site
investigations completed by the Applicant.
b. An example list of conditions may include, but are not limited to the following:
1) Surface Conditions
2) Subsurface Conditions
3) Existing Infrastructure and Utilities
4) Air Quality

Rev. 1 4.4 - 118
SUBSECTION 4.4.5 EXISTING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS REPORT
5) Water Quality
(a) Groundwater
(b) Surface Water
(c) Marine
6) Historic and Archeological Resources
7) Need for additional/supplemental investigations
7. Recommendations
a. Summarize how findings impact the proposed development.
b. Recommend alternatives, mitigation, avoidance, remediation, or other
measures for each environmental concern identified in the existing conditions
report. These are potential paths the owner/developer/client may take to
conform to RCJ environmental regulations.
8. Tables, Figures, Appendices
a. Include Tables, Figures, and Appendices referenced in the report. Copies of
previous reports shall be included in the appendices.

Rev. 1 4.4 - 119
SECTION 4.5 CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.5.0 CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Using this Subsection .................................................................................................... 1
4.5.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 2
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
4.5.2 DESIGN CHANGE NOTICES ....................................................................................... 3
A. Definition ........................................................................................................................ 3
4.5.3 LABOR ACCOMMODATIONS ...................................................................................... 4
A. A/E Responsibility .......................................................................................................... 4
4.5.4 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................... 5
A. Submittals ...................................................................................................................... 5
B. Reviews and Approvals ................................................................................................. 5
C. Responses ..................................................................................................................... 5
4.5.5 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION................................................................................... 6
4.5.6 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................. 7
B. Stormwater Control ........................................................................................................ 7
C. Noise Control ................................................................................................................. 7
4.5.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................................. 15
A. A/E Responsibility ......................................................................................................... 15
4.5.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .......................................................... 16
4.5.9 STARTUP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING ......................................................... 17

Rev. 1 4.5 - i
A. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 17
B. Facility Operation .......................................................................................................... 17
C. Facility Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 17
4.5.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (INITIAL ACCEPTANCE) ........................................... 18
4.5.11 DOCUMENTATION AND ARCHIVING ........................................................................ 19

Rev. 1 4.5 - ii
4.5.0 CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Introduction
and defining construction phase requirements to be used for the Royal Commission
in Jubail (RCJ) Projects prepared by Architecture/Engineering (A/E) and/or Engineer,
Procure, Construct (EPC) Contractors.
b. In addition, Chapter 4 covers Drawing requirements in Subsection 4.2, Design Phase
requirements in Subsection 4.3, and Field Investigations and Existing Conditions in
Subsection 4.4.
2. Applicability
a. The Standards and Guidelines outlined in Chapter 4 are to be used by A/E and/or
EPC Contractors on all project submissions under the jurisdiction of the RCJ.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
b. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Chapter 4 abbreviations
Not Applicable
6. Codes
Not Applicable
7. Standards
a. Standards Specific to Discipline – see references in individual parts of GEM as
appropriate.)
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 4.1 for all Sections related to Chapter 4
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission in Jubail will review and act on all project submissions,
reference Section 1.1 and Subsection 4.2.8.
B. Commissioning
Not Applicable.
C. Using this Subsection
The RCJ requires that the A/E that designs a Project be involved in a review and interpretation
capacity during construction.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 1
4.5.1 GENERAL
A. Introduction
1. The A/E’s responsibilities during construction will be negotiated as part of
the A/E’s Technical Contract on a project by project basis. The extent of
required services will vary depending upon the complexity of the
construction.
2. The A/E will not have direct interaction with the Contractor but will interface
with the RCJ and provide interpretation, response to queries, and design
modifications as directed by the RCJ as defined in this Section.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 2
SUBSECTION 4.5.2 DESIGN CHANGE NOTICES
4.5.2 DESIGN CHANGE NOTICES
A. Definition
1. A Design Change Notice (DCN) is a means to control revisions of Technical Contract
documents, including drawings and specifications.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 3
SUBSECTION 4.5.3 LABOR ACCOMMODATIONS
4.5.3 LABOR ACCOMMODATIONS
A. A/E Responsibility
1. The A/E shall have no responsibility for labor accommodations. The A/E shall refer to his
Technical Contract for any project specific requirements.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 4
SUBSECTION 4.5.4 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
4.5.4 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
A. Submittals
1. To be defined in project specifications
2. When a Technical Submittal (TS) is made by the Contractor to the RCJ, the RCJ Field
Engineer (FE) will decide if the review may be accomplished by the RCJ team or if the TS
needs to be reviewed by the A/E.
B. Reviews and Approvals
1. The RCJ will provide the A/E with a form to respond to any TS deemed necessary for the
A/E to review.
2. If a response time for the A/E to review a TS is not included in the A/E’s Technical Contract,
the review time will be limited to ten (10) business days. If the A/E requires more time to
review, the A/E shall submit a request in writing to the RCJ for an extension and indicate a
future date when the review is expected to be completed.
3. The A/E may additionally be asked to respond to Contractor Technical Queries (TQ) and
Field Change Design (FCD) requests. Reviews will be limited to ten (10) business days
unless otherwise identified in the A/E’s Technical Contract and shall be submitted in writing
via the RCJ’s provided form.
C. Responses
1. Technical Contract documents (i.e., drawings, specifications) shall not be altered by
response to TQ or FCD. Formal Issuance of a DCN is the only means to alter technical
Contract documents.
2. Responses to TQ and FCD shall be only address the subject raised by the Contractor and
shall not comment on cost or schedule.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 5
SUBSECTION 4.5.5 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
4.5.5 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
1. Inspections shall be identified in project specifications
2. In general, the A/E is not responsible for conducting construction inspections. However,
shall the design or detail complexity warrant a site review by the A/E, the RCJ will notify
the A/E in writing.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 6
SUBSECTION 4.5.6 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
4.5.6 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
1. Contractor requirements for environmental compliance shall be defined in project
specifications
2. The A/E is not directly responsible for the Contractor’s environmental compliance during
construction, however, the A/E or EPC Contractor prepares the environmental guidelines
and requirements for the Project as directed in Task Release, this Manual and the A/E’s
Technical Contract.
3. The Contractor awarded the Project is responsible for submitting his compliance plan to
the RCJ. The RCJ may have the A/E review the Contractor’s plan to confirm the compliance
path with the previously established guidelines
B. Stormwater Control
1. Stormwater Runoff
a. Stormwater has the potential to pick up contaminants and sediment from an open
construction site and transport them offsite, causing environmental impacts. Best
efforts shall be made to retain stormwater runoff onsite and minimize offsite
discharges. Stormwater that flows offsite constitutes a water discharge. Such
discharge must adhere to RCER Volume I Subsections 3.2, Water Quality Discharge
Standards, 3.3, General Water Quality Regulations, and 3.7, Storm Water Runoff
Regulations.
b. Guidance for the design for stormwater and sediment control and stormwater
drainage can be found in Subsection 5.6.1.L, Erosion and Sedimentation Controls,
and Subsection 5.6.3, Site Stormwater Drainage.
C. Noise Control
1. Construction Noise Control
a. Noise control measures and methods shall be included in construction planning.
Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.D, Noise Barriers for the objectives, acoustical
considerations, and barrier types that are to be utilized as noise control measures
and methods, and Subsection 5.9.5.F, Equipment Enclosures for further detail on
noise control measures for equipment use on site.
b. Construction shall be conducted during normal working hours where possible.
1) Any equipment that is intended to be run on-site shall have engine mufflers
installed to lower noise to values referenced below. If mufflers cannot
sufficiently lower noise generation levels, noise barriers shall be erected in
addition to the engine muffler to lower noise to mandated levels.
2) Special attention must be paid to equipment placement on the site to keep
noise levels at a minimum along the site perimeter.
c. Vibration from equipment shall also be mitigated.
2. Compliance
a. Noise generated on site must remain below values specified in the Presidency of
Meteorology and Environment (PME)’s Environmental Standard 3 Article VI, Noise
from Construction Activities and/or the World Health Organization’s Guidelines for
Community Noise Document, Table 4.1: Guideline values for community noise in

Rev. 1 4.5 - 7
specific environments, whichever is lower at a given time of day. When the values
specified in the above documentation are likely to be, or are continually, breached, a
construction noise permit shall be required.
b. Noise created on site must adhere to regulations and monitoring requirements in the
US 23 CFR 772.19 - Construction Noise. Refer to the US Federal Highway
Administration’s Construction Noise Handbook (last updated 05/07/2011), Chapter 5
for specifics in measurement of construction noise, and Chapter 7 for methods of
mitigating construction noise.
c. If necessary, noise barriers shall be erected to maintain compliance with regulations.
Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.D, Noise Barriers for design guidelines for noise barriers.
d. Designs of noise barriers for roadways in Subsection 5.6.2.B.3.F may be adapted to
serve this purpose.
D. Asbestos
1. Control Guidelines
a. When working with suspected and/or confirmed Asbestos Containing Materials
(ACMs), the work area shall be properly cordoned off and controlled by encasing the
work area with plastic sheeting and maintaining negative air pressure in the
workspace. Workers shall wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and
wet ACMs appropriately before contact or handling.
b. Work practices pertaining to ACMs shall adhere to US 29 CFR 1910.1001 Asbestos.
c. Use of ACMs shall adhere to RCER Volume I Subsection 2.3.5, Air Environment,
and applicable tables.
E. Pollution Control
1. Solid Waste
a. Onsite waste shall be disposed of in a proper receptacle.
b. Waste receptacles for municipal solid waste shall be present onsite for laborer waste
generated from personal activities i.e. food, drink, litter, non-construction, and
demolition. These shall be covered with a tarp daily and emptied when they are at
capacity.
c. Construction and Demolition Waste containers staged onsite shall not exceed the
height dimension of the waste container. These containers shall be emptied or
replaced when they are at capacity.
d. Waste management shall adhere to all applicable regulations in RCER Volume I
Section 5, Waste Management.
2. Wastewater Discharges
a. General Wastewater Composition
1) When referring to wastewater on the site of Construction work, liquid produced
from sanitary and domestic functions and that produced from construction
functions such as washing down equipment is subject to compliance
requirements.
b. Compliance

Rev. 1 4.5 - 8
1) Wastewater shall be collected in proper receptacles, taking care to keep

wastewaters of different processes segregated to the maximum extent
possible.
2) Wastewater generated shall be subject to wastewater treatment regulations as
detailed in RCER Volume I Sections 3.2, Water Quality Discharge Regulations
and 3.3, General Water Quality Regulations.
3) The contents of Construction and Demolition Wastewater staged onsite shall
not exceed the height and/or volume dimension of the wastewater vessel to
prevent spillage and allow for proper pouring or pumping out of the wastewater
per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4) Wastewater shall not be mixed with stormwater runoff for any reason.
5) Wastewater discharges to the land or any body of water are prohibited.
6) Wastewater management shall adhere to all applicable regulations in RCER
Volume I Section 4, Hazardous Materials Management and Section 5, Waste
Management.
3. Spill Prevention
a. Machinery
1) Machinery shall be maintained so that no fluid (fuel, lubrication oil, hydraulic oil,
grease, coolants, and other fluids) leakage occurs during construction.
2) In the case of unrepairable leakage, a non-flammable, metal drip pan or tear
resistant, impermeable plastic sheeting (minimum 6 mil thick) shall be placed
beneath the machinery to contain leaks during operation. Sheeting placed in
this manner shall be bermed continuously on all sides to prevent escape of
contained fluid from the plastic.
3) Routine inspections of the containment system shall be performed and
documented for RCJ review, shall the RCJ request proof of inspection.
4) After transfer of contained fluids to a proper container, used plastic sheeting is
considered Non-hazardous Industrial Waste and shall be handled and
disposed of as such in accordance with RCER Volume I Section 5, Waste
Management.
b. On Site Storage
1) Refer to Subsection 3.5.7, Petroleum and Chemical Bulk Storage.
4. Spill Control
a. Upon discovery of a release, the owner of or party responsible for the released
material shall:
1) If possible and safe, shut off the source of the leak i.e. valves, switches, etc.
2) Create a perimeter around the released material to prevent further migration.
The perimeter could be made of such materials as:
(a) Bermed, plastic-covered soil or sand,
(b) Plastic sheeting,
(c) Absorbent pads or booms, or bulk absorbent material, and/or

Rev. 1 4.5 - 9
(d) Other materials or equipment that is effective at preventing flow or

infiltration of leaked material.
3) Notify the RCJ immediately upon discovery of a release.
5. Cleanup
a. Spills and Impacted Soil
1) Use absorbents to capture as much of the released material as feasible.
Cleanup material containing absorbed fluids shall be considered Non-
hazardous Industrial Waste and shall be handled, and disposed of as such in
accordance with RCER Volume I Section 5, Waste Management.
2) Remove impacted soil and stockpile on and under tear-resistant, impermeable
plastic sheeting (minimum 6 mil thick) that is bermed and weighted down at the
perimeter and protected from wind damage.
3) Soil and impacted plastic shall be characterized and shall be handled, and
disposed of as such in accordance with RCER Volume I Section 4, Hazardous
Materials Management and Section 5, Waste Management.
b. Waste
1) Trash, litter, and construction and demolition waste shall be cleaned up and
disposed of in proper solid waste containers at the end of every work day.
c. Migration of Soil Offsite
1) Earth material that has been transferred beyond site boundaries (such as onto
public roads adjacent to site entrance) shall be cleaned up and returned to the
site as needed. Measures shall be taken to prevent reoccurrence of material
being conveyed outside the site boundaries. This shall include dust
suppression with potable water, or vehicle wheel-washing equipment.
F. Environmental Emergency Response Plan (EERP)
1. EERP
a. An EERP shall be developed and included with the PAP.
b. The EERP shall include provisions covering construction and startup phases of the
project.
c. In case of an environmental emergency during construction, trained onsite
personnel shall adhere to the RCJ-approved EERP for the project and facilities.
G. Dust Control
1. Excavated Material Resource Plan (EMRP)
a. An EMRP must be included with the PAP and shall include the following:
1) Maps showing existing onsite material types, and the proposed limits of areas
to be stripped or left in-situ.
2) Methods for stripping, stockpiling, spreading, and improving/amending soils.
3) Locations and content of material stockpiles.
4) Schedules of volumes for each material.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 10
5) Expected post-excavation use or disposition of each material type, e.g.

transported offsite, used as structural fill onsite, used for landscaping onsite, or
other uses.
6) Identification of personnel responsible for supervising material management.
b. An EMRP shall not be so complicated that it is unworkable in practice.
c. If impacted or contaminated soil is encountered during excavation that was not
generated from current construction activities, refer to Subsection 3.5.8, Site
Cleanup and Remediation for guidance.
d. Stockpiles shall be staged and covered/controlled such that erosion from stormwater
and wind does not occur, and sediment runoff and dust generation is prevented.
2. Dust Control Measures
a. Haul roads
1) Haul roads shall be constructed and maintained in a manner that minimizes
potential dust generation.
b. Speed Reduction
1) Reducing vehicle speeds on roads shall reduce the generation of dust.
Maximum onsite speed limits shall be posted and enforced.
c. Temporary Geotextile
1) Temporary geotextile may be placed on the ground or used to cover soil piles
to reduce ground disturbance and dust generation.
d. Wind Breaks
1) Wind breaks may be used on construction sites to prevent wind from blowing
away loose material. Wind breaks shall be placed upwind of the target dust
prevention area (such as to the South West (SW) side of a haul road if the
prevailing wind direction is from the SW). Wind breaks may be created from
onsite soil, or they may be temporarily erected structures strong enough to
withstand maximum expected wind speeds.
2) If wind breaks are created from onsite soil, they must also be covered and/or
stabilized to prevent erosion from wind and water.
H. Waste Management
1. Reuse and Recycling
a. When possible, materials from the construction project shall be reused and recycled.
Reused/recycled materials must adhere to applicable Regulations, Guidance,
Specifications, and Details.
2. Disposal
a. Waste receptacles and containers shall not be filled beyond capacity. Capacity is the
level at which the contents of the container can be reasonably anticipated not to
have the potential to fall out during transport of the container. Waste receptacles and
containers or vehicle “boxes” shall be covered while being stored and during
transportation.
b. The facility developer shall coordinate with authorized waste management entities to
transport and dispose of waste regularly in accordance with the applicable RCER

Rev. 1 4.5 - 11
Regulations and Standards Volume 1, Sections 5.5 Municipal Waste Collection, 5.6
Non-Hazardous Industrial Waste & Municipal Waste Disposal Regulations, 5.7 Inert
Waste Disposal Regulations, 5.8 Waste Transporter Registration Regulations and
5.9 Waste Disposal Facility Closure / Post Closure Care Regulations.
I. Maintenance and Monitoring
1. Stormwater Discharges
a. Stormwater Discharges offsite shall be monitored in accordance with RCER Volume
I Section 3.7, Storm Water Runoff Regulations, 3.13, Water Quality Monitoring
Requirements and any other applicable regulations.
2. Wastewater Discharge Monitoring
a. Discharge of wastewater generated during Construction and Demolition shall be
periodically monitored via the Standards set by RCER Volume I Section 3.13, Water
Quality Monitoring Requirements.
b. Wastewater discharge monitoring results are to be reported to the RCJ in the format
and at the frequency specified by the RCJ.
3. Groundwater Protection and Monitoring
a. For project sites housing more than 5000 liters of hazardous, chemical, and/or
petroleum-based liquids, regardless of the longevity of the project, there must be a
Spill Prevention, Countermeasure and Control (SPCC) plan established.
1) The SPCC shall follow the guidelines above in Subsections 3.5.4.D.3, Spill
Prevention and 3.5.4.D.4, Spill Control.
2) Additionally, sites that meet the volume criteria above, and where the planned
site is anticipated to exceed more than one (1) year shall also follow the
Specifications detailed in RCER Volume I Subsection 3.11.2 and Subsection
3.11.3 for performing groundwater quality monitoring by installing groundwater
monitoring wells.
J. Construction Camps and Laydown Areas
1. Structures
a. Housing
1) Housing structures shall meet applicable building and fire protection Codes.
b. Wastewater Disposal
1) Wastewater shall be contained in appropriately sized and constructed storage
tanks and be transported to and disposed of at an operating wastewater
treatment plant that is licensed to accept waste.
c. General Storage
1) Storage areas shall be protected and shall prevent spillage or other harm to the
environment.
d. Equipment Loading Facilities
1) Loading facilities shall be placed to minimize impact to surrounding land uses
and pedestrians.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 12
2. Construction Machinery
a. Storage
1) Storage areas shall be secure and fenced.
b. Maintenance
1) Maintenance areas shall be underlain by waterproof barriers (pavement,
cement, poly-lined stone, etc.) to prevent discharges or leakage of any fluids
from impacting existing soil or groundwater.
c. Leakage
1) Leakage of chemicals or petroleum-based fluids from any equipment shall be
mitigated immediately. The equipment shall be repaired and used only over
impermeable barriers.
d. Emission Standards
1) All machinery on a construction site operating with a stationary Reciprocating
Internal Combustion Engine (RICE) shall meet limitations for hazardous air
pollutants emitted from the machinery. All such machinery shall also meet
applicable requirements and it shall be demonstrated to the RCJ that initial and
continuous compliance of the RICE with the established pollutant emission
limitations has been met. Refer to US 40 CFR Part 63 Subpart ZZZZ,
established by NESHAP for RICE, for the operating pollutant emission
limitations and the initial and continuous demonstration requirements.
2) All machinery on a construction site operating with a Spark Ignition Stationary
Internal Combustion Engine (SI SICE) shall meet limitations for hazardous air
pollutants emitted from the machinery. All such machinery shall also meet
applicable requirements and it shall be demonstrated to the RCJ that initial and
continuous compliance of the SI SICE with the established operating pollutant
emission limitations has been met. Refer to US New Source Performance
Standards (NSPS) for SI SICE in US 40 CFR Part 60 Subpart JJJJ for the
operating pollutant emission limitations of SI SICE and the initial and
continuous demonstration requirements.
3) All machinery on a construction site operating with a Compression Ignition
Stationary Internal Combustion Engine (CI SICE) shall meet limitations for
hazardous air pollutants emitted from the machinery. All such machinery shall
also meet applicable requirements and it shall be demonstrated to the RCJ
both initial and continuous compliance of the CI SICE with the established
operating pollutant emission limitations has been met. Refer to US Standards
of Performance for CI SICE in US 40 CFR Part 60 Subpart IIII for the operating
pollutant emission limitations of SI ICE and the initial and continuous
demonstration requirements.
4) Sulfur Emissions Standards are excluded from machinery using diesel fuel.
e. Age
1) All equipment being operated on a site shall have been constructed on or after
the year 2000.
3. Fuel Storage
a. Fuel Storage Tanks

Rev. 1 4.5 - 13
1) All fuel storage tanks, including Aboveground Storage Tanks and Underground
Storage Tanks, shall include secondary containment with 110% of tank
capacity plus water accumulation from a 100 year storm event and shall be
fenced in and locked to prevent vandalism.
b. Releases
1) All releases shall be reported to the RCJ and cleaned up immediately in
accordance with RCER Regulations.
4. Construction Debris
a. Excess Material
1) Excess material shall be removed from the project site and shall be either
recycled, reused on another site or disposed of in a properly-licensed landfill.
5. Decommissioning
a. Removal of Materials
1) Accumulated materials shall be removed from the project site at the completion
of the project. The materials shall be removed from the project site and reused
on another site or disposed of at an authorized waste management facility.
b. Removal of Impacted Soil
1) Soil that is impacted by the construction process (i.e. spills and uncontained
releases) shall be removed and disposed of according to RCER Regulations.
6. Restoration
a. Site Restoration Timing
1) Upon completion of the construction, the Construction Camps, contractor
staging areas, and other areas shall be disassembled, demolished, and
restored in conformance with the RCJ-approved restoration plan. In the cases
where no restoration plan has been required, the area shall be restored to the
original condition.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 14
SUBSECTION 4.5.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
4.5.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
1. Contractor requirements for closeout submittals shall be defined in project specifications
2. The A/E is not responsible for completing As-Built drawings as this responsibility rests with
the Contractor alone.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 15
SUBSECTION 4.5.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
4.5.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1. All specifications prepared by the A/E for the Project shall include provisions for the supply
of manuals outlining assembly, operation, and maintenance procedures for all equipment,
furnishings, appliances, and finishes. Translations into the Arabic language shall be
provided for all such publications by the A/E.
2. The A/E is not responsible for generating or submitting the operation and maintenance
manuals. The RCJ Field Engineer (FE) will receive and coordinate this information from
the Contractor.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 16
SUBSECTION 4.5.9 STARTUP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING
4.5.9 STARTUP, COMMISSIONING, AND TRAINING
A. Commissioning
1. Contractor requirements for commissioning shall be defined in project specifications
2. The A/E prepares this information as part of the Project specifications on startup and
commissioning. The A/E is not responsible for receiving or coordination this information
with the Contractor.
B. Facility Operation
1. Contractor requirements for demonstration and training shall be defined in project
specifications
2. Where necessary, the A/E shall solicit training to be provided to the owner's designated
personnel in the initial operation of the facilities' equipment as part of the Project
specifications.
C. Facility Maintenance
1. Contractor requirements for facility maintenance procedures shall be defined in project
specifications
2. Where necessary, the A/E shall solicit training to be provided to the owner's designated
personnel in the initial maintenance of the facilities' equipment.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 17
SUBSECTION 4.5.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (INITIAL ACCEPTANCE)
4.5.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (INITIAL ACCEPTANCE)
1. Contractor requirements for the acceptance of work results shall be defined in project
specifications
2. The A/E shall have no role in initial acceptance. The RCJ FE will be supported by various
RCJ departments to complete this task.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 18
SUBSECTION 4.5.11 DOCUMENTATION AND ARCHIVING
4.5.11 DOCUMENTATION AND ARCHIVING
1. Project specifications shall define the Contractor’s requirements for documenting and
archiving the as-built condition or drawings
2. The A/E is not responsible for documenting and archiving the as-built condition or
drawings. The RCJ FE and Contractor are required to keep full documentation of their
work as described in the A/E’s Technical Contract.

Rev. 1 4.5 - 19
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.1
DESIGN GUIDELINES


CHAPTER 5 DESIGN GUIDELINES
SECTION 5.1 DESIGN GUIDELINES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.1.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 2
10. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 2
5.1.2 SAUDI ARABIAN GOODS AND SERVICES ................................................................ 3
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
5.1.3 STANDARDS OF QUALITY .......................................................................................... 4
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4
5.1.4 THIRD PARTY REQUIREMENTS................................................................................. 6
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 6
5.1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 7
A. Risk Assessment and Mitigation.................................................................................... 7
5.1.6 LOCAL CLIMATE CONDITIONS................................................................................... 9
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 9

Rev. 1 5.1 - i
5.1.1 GENERAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides A/E and/or EPC Contractors with an overview of the Design
Guidelines for all Projects.
2. Applicability
a. The guidelines apply to all disciplines including but not limited to :
1) Structural Engineering
2) Architecture
3) Interior Design
4) Mechanical Engineering
5) Electrical Engineering
6) Civil Engineering
7) Landscape Architecture
8) Environmental
9) Geotechnical
10) Coastal Marine
b. This Section applies to utilities, sites, road systems, industrial developments and to
proposed types of facilities including but not limited to those defined in Subsection
5.3.5.
3. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Section 2.2.
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), refer to Section 3.1.
7. Standards
a. Refer to the most recent version of ISO 31000 - Risk Management for requirements
related to risk assessment and management.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Standards:
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 5.2 for Structural
b. Refer to Section 5.3 for Architecture
c. Refer to Section 5.4 for Mechanical

Rev. 1 5.1 - 1
d. Refer to Section 5.5 for Electrical

e. Refer to Section 5.6 for Civil, Sitework and Roads
f. Refer to Section 5.7 for Utilities
g. Refer to Section 5.8 for Costal Marine
h. Refer to Section 5.9 for Environmental
i. Refer to Section 5.10 for Geotechnical
j. Refer to Section 5.11 for Landscape
9. Approvals
a. The Royal Commission for Jubail will review and act on all design reports, plans and
specifications. Refer to Section 1.1.
10. Commissioning
a. Refer to the RCJ’s Commissioning requirement in Subsections 4.5.9.

Rev. 1 5.1 - 2
SUBSECTION 5.1.2 SAUDI ARABIAN GOODS AND SERVICES
5.1.2 SAUDI ARABIAN GOODS AND SERVICES
A. General
1. On all projects, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall specify and require the use of
materials, supplies, goods, equipment, fabrications, crafts, and services of Saudi Arabian
origin for incorporation into the Design and Specifications. Specified products must also
be approved by the RCJ.
2. A list of Saudi Arabian manufacturing firms may be obtained from the Ministry of Industry
and Electricity or the RCJ. The Specifications for goods produced by these
manufacturers shall be incorporated in the design work for the Project provided they meet
basic Standards of quality as established by the RCJ Each Specification prepared by the
Consultant shall include the following standard clause in Part 2, - "Products":
a. “All goods and products covered by these Specifications shall be procured, when
available, from an in-Kingdom manufacturer. Procurement of all goods and products
manufactured out-of-Kingdom must be approved by the Royal Commission for Jubail.”
3. If the A/E and/or EPC Contractor determines that the use of these Specifications would
be detrimental to the work, he shall report this to the RCJ, supported by a complete
justification of this determination, and await further instructions. Decisions by the RCJ
shall be final and binding. Notwithstanding the above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall remain entirely responsible and liable for the Specifications.

Rev. 1 5.1 - 3
SUBSECTION 5.1.3 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
5.1.3 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
A. General
1. It is the intent of the RCJ that a high Standard of Quality be achieved at a reasonable
cost. All design work shall be provided with professional Standards of skill, care and
diligence. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall consider, in performing the work, the
current best practices known and successfully employed in the industry.
2. The Design shall accomplish the following general objectives:
a. Saudi Standards
1) Utilize all Standards issued by Saudi Arabian Government Agencies.
b. Saudi Products
1) Utilize Saudi Arabian products and services to the greatest extent possible by
using the specifications of Saudi Arabian manufacturers and requiring the use
of all Saudi Arabian manufactured products.
c. Suitability
1) Provide materials and equipment suitable for the desired use and life of the
facility and its exposure to the environmental conditions of this location.
d. Practicality
1) Be practical for implementation at the jobsite in areas of both procurement and
construction.
e. Reliability
1) Incorporate attention to reliability and accessibility of all components, simplicity
of operation and maintenance and safety of operators and the public.
f. Aesthetic
1) Be aesthetically pleasing and harmonious with other facilities in the Project.
g. Expansion
1) Where appropriate, provision shall be made for future expansion and loadings.
h. Life Safety
1) Ensure life safety of the occupants and users throughout the life of the building
and meet all accessibility Standards.
i. Economy of Design
1) Meet all budget restrictions with regard to life cycle cost and ensure a lifespan
that meets the needs of the building type and/or the project requirements.
3. Systems shall be designed to be as simple and as durable as possible. Even in areas
where highly trained operators are available, experience has proven that they are apt to
make mistakes during emergencies. Simple systems are easy to understand and operate
during both normal and emergency conditions and consequently are considered more
desirable.
4. Different types of systems shall be compared based on cost, function and operation. In
making cost comparisons, it is important to include all parts of the system from the power

Rev. 1 5.1 - 4
SUBSECTION 5.1.3 STANDARDS OF QUALITY
source to and including the utilization of equipment. Cost comparison shall include
equipment, its installation, operation, maintenance, and replacement costs.
5. All permanent facilities, buildings, components, and systems shall be designed to keep
their structural, operational, and aesthetic integrity for a minimum of 30 years.

Rev. 1 5.1 - 5
SUBSECTION 5.1.4 THIRD PARTY REQUIREMENTS
5.1.4 THIRD PARTY REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. A Third Party is a stakeholder other than the Royal Commission for Jubail’s Engineering
Department and the Consultant, such as a Saudi governmental/regulatory agency,
including, but not limited to:
a. Saudi Aramco (SA)
b. Saudi Electricity Company (SEC)
c. Marafiq
d. Saudi Private Telecom Companies (STC, Mobily)
e. Ministry of Transportation (MOT)
f. Ministry of Defense and Aviation (MODA)
g. Coast Guard, National Guard, Civil Defense, High Commission for Industrial Security
(HCIS)
h. Saudi Railway Company (SAR)
i. Saudi Sea Ports Authority (SEAPA)
j. The Ministry of Interior (MOI)
2. The design work for third party approval shall be in conformance with Standards and
requirements of the relevant third party and the RCJ. However, drawing sizes, lettering,
drawing numbering systems and title blocks shall conform to the RCJ Standards.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors are responsible for all submissions to any and all third
parties and for obtaining approved and stamped drawings. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractors shall undertake all necessary steps – including visits to the third party’s
offices, follow-up submissions, etc. to obtain approvals. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors
shall ensure that design approvals are obtained before submission of the RFP Package
for bid and approved drawings are included in the RFP Package. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractors shall obtain letters from third parties that their designs have appropriate
capacities to support the proposed development. These final letters shall be submitted to
the RCJ no later than the 90% submittal stage.
4. The monthly Engineering Progress Report (EPR) shall have a Third Party Approvals
Summary Table indicating the 30% submission, final 30% comments return, and IFB
dates. In addition, the monthly report shall have the following two logs:
a. A Third Party Follow-Up Log containing a record of every communication event
(phone call, email, visit, letter submission etc.) with names of the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor and all of the third party people involved, date, and brief outcome / result;
and
b. A Third Party Approvals Current Status Log as a record of the status at the current
design stage.

Rev. 1 5.1 - 6
SUBSECTION 5.1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
5.1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Risk Assessment and Mitigation

1. The A/E and/or EPC Consultant shall perform Project risk assessments prior to
performing the detailed design of the works. The risk assessment shall consider the
following impacts for the full Project life cycle from design through long term operation
and maintenance of the works:
a. Safety
b. Constructability
c. Environmental
2. The A/E and/or EPC Consultant shall develop and submit for the RCJ’s agreement the
processes and procedures to be implemented for the risk assessment to be implemented
for each design performed under this Contract. The processes and procedures for all risk
assessments shall be in general conformance with ISO 31000: 2009 (or current edition),
or an equivalent internationally accepted standard.
3. In addition, the A/E and/or EPC Consultant shall include the following as part of the risk
assessment process:
a. Incorporation of lessons learned from similar work conducted by the RCJ and A/E
and/or EPC Consultant which as a minimum shall include:
1) Assessment of Design Change Notices (DCN’s), and
2) Change notifications from previous similar Projects executed by the RCJ.
3) Technical Queries (TQ) provided from the RCJ to the A/E or EPC Contractor.
4) Field Change Design (FCD) provided from the RCJ to the A/E or EPC
Contractor.
4. Safety and Constructability Workshops involving all affected parties:
a. A/E and/or EPC Consultant
b. RCJ Engineering (All Disciplines)
c. RCJ Construction
d. Affected Royal Commission for Jubail Departments
e. End User
f. Affected Third Parties
g. Operating and Maintenance Organizations
5. Depending on the nature of the design and interfaces with existing conditions affecting
the design the A/E and/or EPC Contractor may be required to employ specialist sub-
consultants to perform all or part of the risk assessment. Where this is necessary the A/E
and/or EPC Consultant shall advise the RCJ of the need to employ a specialist sub-
consultant and shall employ such specialist sub-consultant following agreement with the
RCJ. The outcome of the risk assessments shall be formally documented by the A/E
and/or EPC Consultant and submitted for the RCJ’s agreement. A comprehensive report
documenting the outcome of the risk assessment shall be provided and include:
a. A detailed written report of the following:

Rev. 1 5.1 - 7
SUBSECTION 5.1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
1) Process
2) Finding and strategies
3) A risk matrix
4) A risk register
b. The risk matrix shall be divided into three parts:
1) Risks mitigated within the design
2) Risks transferred to Construction Management
3) Risks transferred to the End User’s Operations and Maintenance Management
c. The risk register shall clearly identify for each risk:
1) Hazard associated with the risk
2) The probability of the hazardous event occurring
3) The consequences of the hazardous event
4) The ranking of the risk
5) Proposed mitigation measure
6) Responsibility for the implementation of the mitigation measure
7) Evidence of implementation where risks have been mitigated within the design

Rev. 1 5.1 - 8
SUBSECTION 5.1.6 LOCAL CLIMATE CONDITIONS
5.1.6 LOCAL CLIMATE CONDITIONS
A. General
1. Jubail has a desert climate, with little rainfall. The Köppen-Geiger climate classification is
BWh. The average annual temperature in Jubail is 25.2 °C. The average annual rainfall is
88 mm, typically with heavy rains occurring between November and January. The entire
year's rainfall may consist of one or two local rain events
2. Except for the province of Asir on the western coast, Saudi Arabia has a desert climate
characterized by extreme heat during the day, an abrupt drop in temperature at night,
and very low annual rainfall. Because of the influence of a subtropical high-pressure
system, there is considerable variation in temperature and humidity. The two main
differences in the climate of Saudi-Arabia may be felt between the coastal areas and the
interior.
3. The average summer temperature is about 45° C, but readings of up to 54° C are not
unusual. The heat becomes intense shortly after sunrise and lasts until sunset, followed
by surprisingly cool nights. In the winter, the temperature seldom drops below 0° C, but
with low humidity and high winds-chill factor make a quite cold atmosphere. In the spring
and autumn, the heat is temperate. Temperatures average around 29° C.
4. JUBAIL:
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Avg. Temperature (°c) 15.8 15.9 19.9 28.5 32.4 35 37.7 36.7 32.7 27.9 21.3 17.8
Max Temperature (°c) 28.3 31.7 38.6 37.7 45.4 46.8 48.7 47.5 45.3 41.9 35.6 23.8
Min Temperature (°c) 10 8 9.8 14.5 28.4 24.9 27.9 25.8 20.7 18.8 9.3 4.5
Avg. Rain Fall (mm) 41.4 0.7 0.3 3.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Avg. Snow Days 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
5. Refer to Subsection 5.3.1.C for design guidance for local conditions.

Rev. 1 5.1 - 9
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.2
STRUCTURAL
1 2020 General update MA/KJP TM RA MRC OMQ


CHAPTER 5 – DESIGN GUIDELINES
SECTION 5.2 STRUCTURAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.0 STRUCTURAL............................................................................................................... 1
A. Section Content ............................................................................................................. 1
5.2.1 BUILDING STRUCTURES ............................................................................................ 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Scope ............................................................................................................................. 1
3. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
4. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 2
5. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 4
7. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 6
8. Related RC GEM Sections: .......................................................................................... 10
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 10
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 10
C. Related Specifications and Details ............................................................................... 10
1. Royal Commission Standard Specifications (RCSS) ................................................... 10
2. Royal Commission Standard Details (RCSD) .............................................................. 10
D. General Design Requirements ..................................................................................... 10
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 10
2. Strength ........................................................................................................................ 11
3. Serviceability................................................................................................................. 12
4. Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 14
5. Risk Category ............................................................................................................... 14
6. Counteracting Structural Actions .................................................................................. 14
7. Self-Straining Forces .................................................................................................... 14
E. Design Loads ................................................................................................................ 15
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 15
2. Special Considerations ................................................................................................. 15
3. Applicable Loads .......................................................................................................... 16
4. Dead Loads (D) ............................................................................................................ 16
5. Live Loads (L) ............................................................................................................... 17
6. Roof Live Loads (Lr) ..................................................................................................... 17
7. Rain Loads (R).............................................................................................................. 18
Guiding Engineering Manual

Rev. 1 5.2 - i
8. Flood Loads (Fa) .......................................................................................................... 18

9. Wind Loads (W) ............................................................................................................ 18
10. Seismic Loads (E) ........................................................................................................ 19
11. Self-Straining Loads (T) ................................................................................................ 20
12. Loads Due to Lateral Earth Pressure, Ground Water (H) ............................................ 21
13. Hoisting Devices Loads ................................................................................................ 21
14. Crane Loads ................................................................................................................. 21
15. Vibration Loads ............................................................................................................. 25
16. Railway Loads .............................................................................................................. 26
17. Areas Accessible to Vehicular Loads ........................................................................... 26
F. Load Combinations ....................................................................................................... 26
G. Geotechnical Information .............................................................................................. 26
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 26
2. Geotechnical Investigation ........................................................................................... 26
3. Geotechnical Design Report......................................................................................... 26
H. Concrete Design ........................................................................................................... 27
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 27
2. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 27
3. Concrete Durability ....................................................................................................... 28
4. Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................................................................ 28
5. Precast / Pre-Stressed Concrete .................................................................................. 31
6. Precast Architectural Concrete ..................................................................................... 31
7. Pre-Engineered/Pre-Fabricated Precast Buildings....................................................... 31
8. Post-Tensioned Concrete ............................................................................................. 31
9. Composite Construction ............................................................................................... 31
10. Slab on Grade............................................................................................................... 32
11. Joints ............................................................................................................................ 32
I. Masonry Design ............................................................................................................ 34
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 34
2. Composite Construction ............................................................................................... 35
3. Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) Masonry Units.................................................... 35
4. Approval of Special Systems of Design or Construction .............................................. 36
5. Design Basis ................................................................................................................. 36
J. Steel Design ................................................................................................................. 38
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 38

Rev. 1 5.2 - ii
2. Structural Steel ............................................................................................................. 39

3. Steel Joists ................................................................................................................... 39
4. Cold Formed Steel ........................................................................................................ 39
5. Pre-Engineered / Pre-Fabricated Metal Buildings (PEMB) .......................................... 40
K. Wood Design ................................................................................................................ 41
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 41
5.2.2 HIGH RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES (HEIGHT > 18 METERS) .............................. 42
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 42
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 42
2. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 42
3. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 42
4. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 42
5. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 42
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 42
8. Related Sections: ......................................................................................................... 43
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 43
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 43
D. Structural Design and Design Considerations .............................................................. 43
1. Structural Design .......................................................................................................... 43
2. Design Considerations ................................................................................................. 44
3. High Rise Building Limits .............................................................................................. 44
E. Damping System .......................................................................................................... 45
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 45
5.2.3 NON-BUILDING STRUCTURES .................................................................................. 46
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 46
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 46
2. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 47
3. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 47
4. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 47
5. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 47

Rev. 1 5.2 - iii
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 47
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 50
D. Principles and Guidelines ............................................................................................. 50
1. Concrete ....................................................................................................................... 50
2. Structural Design .......................................................................................................... 51
E. Design Standards and Requirements .......................................................................... 53
1. Culverts and Drainage Structures ................................................................................ 53
2. Catch Basins and Manholes ......................................................................................... 55
3. Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures Including Shades ................................................. 56
4. Shade Structures .......................................................................................................... 57
5. Water and Wastewater Structures................................................................................ 57
6. Liquid Retaining Structures .......................................................................................... 58
7. Flow Chambers ............................................................................................................ 60
8. Valve Chambers ........................................................................................................... 61
9. Thrust Blocks (for non-restrained piping system) ......................................................... 61
10. Mechanical Equipment Support Structures .................................................................. 64
11. Pipeline Corridor Structures ......................................................................................... 65
12. Electrical and Communication Structures .................................................................... 70
13. Generator Support Structures ...................................................................................... 72
14. Concrete Duct Banks .................................................................................................... 74
15. Security Crash Barriers ................................................................................................ 75
16. Supports for Signs, Luminaries, Traffic Signals ........................................................... 76
5.2.4 TRANSPORTATION STRUCTURES ........................................................................... 80
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 80
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 80
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 80
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 80
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 82
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 82
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 84

Rev. 1 5.2 - iv

9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 85
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 85
C. Structures Groups ........................................................................................................ 85
D. Related Specifications and Details ............................................................................... 86
E. Preliminary Design and Planning ................................................................................. 86
1. Scoping ......................................................................................................................... 86
2. Structure Geometry ...................................................................................................... 86
F. Structure Selection ....................................................................................................... 92
1. Material ......................................................................................................................... 92
2. Concrete Superstructure .............................................................................................. 92
3. Steel Superstructure ..................................................................................................... 94
4. Abutments..................................................................................................................... 95
5. Wing walls..................................................................................................................... 96
6. Piers .............................................................................................................................. 97
7. Cap Beams ................................................................................................................... 98
8. Foundations .................................................................................................................. 98
9. Bearings ....................................................................................................................... 101
10. Expansion Joints ......................................................................................................... 101
G. Principles and Guidelines ............................................................................................ 103
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 103
2. Depth/Span Ratios ...................................................................................................... 103
3. Design Life ................................................................................................................... 103
4. Skew Angle .................................................................................................................. 103
5. Abutments.................................................................................................................... 103
6. Bearings ....................................................................................................................... 103
7. Arrangement ................................................................................................................ 104
8. Expansion joints .......................................................................................................... 104
9. Diaphragms ................................................................................................................. 104
10. Piers ............................................................................................................................. 104
11. Railing .......................................................................................................................... 104
12. Approach Slab ............................................................................................................. 104
13. Environmental and Safety ........................................................................................... 105

Rev. 1 5.2 - v
H. Design Standards and Requirements ......................................................................... 106

1. General ........................................................................................................................ 106
2. Design Standards ........................................................................................................ 106
3. Analysis Methods ........................................................................................................ 107
4. Design Methods ........................................................................................................... 107
5. Strength Requirements ................................................................................................ 107
6. Concrete Cover Requirements .................................................................................... 108
7. Design Loads ............................................................................................................... 108
8. Deformation limits ........................................................................................................ 118
9. Fatigue ......................................................................................................................... 119
10. Bearings ....................................................................................................................... 119
11. Concrete Box Culverts ................................................................................................. 119
12. Concrete Superstructure ............................................................................................. 120
13. Concrete Deck ............................................................................................................. 120
14. Deck Drainage ............................................................................................................. 120
15. Piers ............................................................................................................................. 120
16. Approach slab .............................................................................................................. 121
17. Fill material .................................................................................................................. 121
18. Highway surcharge ...................................................................................................... 121
19. Abutments.................................................................................................................... 122
20. Retaining walls ............................................................................................................ 122
21. Wingwalls ..................................................................................................................... 122
22. Cut and Cover Tunnel Structures ................................................................................ 123
23. Retaining Wall Drainage .............................................................................................. 123
24. Waterproofing of Structures ......................................................................................... 124
25. Foundation ................................................................................................................... 124
26. Load combinations ...................................................................................................... 124
27. Temporary Structures .................................................................................................. 125
I. Load Rating and Life-Cycle Performance ................................................................... 125
1. Bridge Load Rating ...................................................................................................... 125
2. Load Rating Methodology ............................................................................................ 125
J. Aesthetics .................................................................................................................... 126
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 126
2. Incorporation ................................................................................................................ 126
3. Aesthetic Design .......................................................................................................... 126

Rev. 1 5.2 - vi
4. References: ................................................................................................................. 126

5. Design Guidelines: ..................................................................................................... 126
5.2.5 FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES ...................................... 129
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 129
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 129
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 129
3. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 129
4. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 129
5. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 129
7. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 129
8. Related Sections: ........................................................................................................ 130
9. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 130
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 130
C. Related Specifications and Details .............................................................................. 130
1. Royal Commission Standard Specifications (RCSS) .................................................. 130
2. Royal Commission Standard Details (RCSD) ............................................................. 130
D. Design Requirements .................................................................................................. 130
1. Bearing Pressure ......................................................................................................... 130
2. Water Table ................................................................................................................. 130
3. Buoyancy ..................................................................................................................... 130
4. Hydrostatic Pressure ................................................................................................... 131
5. Hydrodynamic Pressure .............................................................................................. 131
6. Adjacent Loads ............................................................................................................ 131
7. Existing Construction ................................................................................................... 131
8. Founding Depth ........................................................................................................... 131
9. Stability ........................................................................................................................ 132
E. Foundation Structures Types and Selection ............................................................... 133
1. Shallow Foundation ..................................................................................................... 133
2. Deep Foundation ......................................................................................................... 133
F. Earth Retaining Structures Types and Selection......................................................... 135
G. Construction Requirements ......................................................................................... 135
1. Foundations ................................................................................................................. 135
2. Retaining Walls ............................................................................................................ 135
5.2.6 CORROSION PROTECTION ...................................................................................... 136

Rev. 1 5.2 - vii
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 136

1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 136
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 136
3. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 136
4. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 136
5. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 136
7. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 138
8. Related Sections: ........................................................................................................ 139
9. Approvals ..................................................................................................................... 139
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 139
C. Related Specifications and Details .............................................................................. 140
1. Royal Commission Standard Specifications (RCSS) .................................................. 140
2. Royal Commission Standard Details (RCSD) ............................................................. 140
D. Protection of Concrete Structures ............................................................................... 140
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 140
2. Forms of Concrete Deterioration ................................................................................. 140
3. Exposure Conditions ................................................................................................... 140
4. Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures ........................................................ 141
5. Summary of Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures ................................... 144
E. Protection of Steel Structures ...................................................................................... 146
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 146
2. Forms of Corrosion of Steel ......................................................................................... 146
3. General Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel ...................................................... 147
4. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel Structures .................................................. 148
F. Protection of Pipelines ................................................................................................. 150
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 150
2. Non-metallic Piping System......................................................................................... 151
3. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Pipes ................................................................... 151
G. Protective Coatings ..................................................................................................... 152
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 152
2. Coating Selection Criteria ............................................................................................ 152
3. Coating Systems for Various Structures ..................................................................... 152
H. Cathodic Protection ..................................................................................................... 154
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 154

Rev. 1 5.2 - viii
2. Cathodic Protection Systems Design Criteria ............................................................. 154

3. Cathodic Protection Systems for Different Structures ................................................. 155
4. Monitoring of Cathodic Protection Systems ................................................................ 156
APPENDIX I CALCULATIONS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS ......................................... 157
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 157
B. General Items & Design Criteria .................................................................................. 157
C. Gravity Design ............................................................................................................. 159
D. Lateral Design.............................................................................................................. 160
E. Footing & Foundation Design ...................................................................................... 160
F. Computer Aided Design .............................................................................................. 161
APPENDIX II SPECIFIC DRAWINGS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS ............................... 163
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 163
B. General Items .............................................................................................................. 163
C. Foundation Plans ......................................................................................................... 163
D. Framing Plans of Floors, Roofs Walls and Ancillary Structures .................................. 164
E. Column Information Showing ...................................................................................... 165
F. Sections and Details .................................................................................................... 165
G. Other Information ......................................................................................................... 166

Rev. 1 5.2 - ix
SUBSECTION 5.2.1 BUILDING STRUCTURES
5.2.0 STRUCTURAL
A. Section Content
The principles, guidelines, and requirements for design and construction of RC structures and
structural systems are provided in this section. The provisions of the Saudi Building Code 2018
(SBC 2018), unless otherwise specified herein, except as modified by the project specific design
criteria and the RC Standard Specifications (RCSS), shall constitute the RC Structural building
code in Jubail, and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities (JIC and RIC). The section has six subsections
organized based on the following classification:
5.2.1 Building Structures.
5.2.2 High Rise Building Structures.
5.2.3 Non-Building Structures.
5.2.4 Transportation Structures.
5.2.5 Foundation and Earth Retaining Structures.
5.2.6 Corrosion Protection.
Each of the six subsections (5.2.1 to 5.2.6) has an “Applicability” section defining the type
of structures and structural systems for which the provisions of the subsection apply.
Requirements for structural calculations and drawings are included in the Appendices to
this section.
5.2.1 BUILDING STRUCTURES
A. General
1. Introduction
This subsection mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for design and
construction of the RC building structures. Building structures are defined as those
structures enclosed by walls and roofs and constructed to provide support or shelter for an
intended occupancy. The subsection provides the minimum technical requirements to be
adopted by the A/E and/or EPC Contractors to enable safety, quality, and cost
effectiveness in the design and construction of building structures and building systems
that meet the needs and expectations of the RC.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of building
structures and building systems constructed of concrete, masonry, steel and wood. The
design requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on a Model Building
Code (MBC), industry standards, and best practices adopted by the RC.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall govern all
RC building structures and building systems, as defined in the introduction herein.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 1
4. Definitions
a. Allowable Stress Design
A method of proportioning structural members, such that elastically computed
stresses produced in the members by nominal loads do not exceed specified
allowable stresses (also called "working stress design").
b. Dead Loads
The weight of materials of construction incorporated into the building and other
structures, including but not limited to walls, floors, roofs, ceilings, stairways, built- in
partitions, finishes, cladding and other similarly incorporated architectural and
structural items, and the weight of fixed service equipment, such as cranes, plumbing
stacks and risers, electrical feeders, heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems
and automatic sprinkler systems.
c. Diaphragm
A horizontal or sloped system acting to transmit lateral forces to the vertical-resisting
elements. When the term "diaphragm" is used, for steel structures, it shall include
horizontal bracing systems.
d. Diaphragm Chord
A diaphragm boundary element perpendicular to the applied load that is assumed to
take axial stresses due to the diaphragm moment.
e. Flexible Diaphragm
A diaphragm is flexible for the purpose of distribution of story shear and torsional
moment.
f. Rigid Diaphragm
A diaphragm is rigid for the purpose of distribution of story shear and torsional moment
when the lateral deformation of the diaphragm is less than or equal to two times the
average story drift.
g. Duration of Load
The period of continuous application of a given load, or the aggregate of periods of
intermittent applications of the same load.
h. Essential Facilities
Buildings and other structures that are intended to remain operational in the event of
extreme environmental loading from flood, wind, snow, or earthquakes.
i. Factored Load
The product of a nominal load and a load factor.
j. Impact Load
The load resulting from moving machinery, elevators, crane ways, vehicles and other
similar forces and kinetic loads, pressure, and possible surcharge from fixed or
moving loads.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 2
k. Limit State
A condition beyond which a structure or member becomes unfit for service and is
judged to be no longer useful for its intended function (serviceability limit state) or to
be unsafe (strength limit state).
l. Live Loads
Those loads produced by the use and occupancy of the building or other structure
and do not include construction or environmental loads such as wind load, snow load,
rain load, earthquake load, flood load or dead load.
m. Live Loads (Roof)
Those loads produced (1) during maintenance by workers, equipment, and materials;
and (2) during the life of the structure by movable objects such as planters and by
people.
n. Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
A method of proportioning structural members and their connections using load and
resistance factors such that no applicable limit state is reached when the structure is
subjected to appropriate load combinations. The term "LRFD" is used in the design of
steel, concrete and wood structures.
o. Load Effects
Forces and deformations produced in structural members by the applied loads.
p. Load Factor
A factor that accounts for deviations of the actual load from the nominal load, for
uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect and for the
probability that more than one extreme load will occur simultaneously.
q. Loads
Forces or other actions that result from the weight of building materials, occupants
and their possessions, environmental effects, differential movement and restrained
dimensional changes. Permanent loads are those loads in which variations over time
are rare or of small magnitude, such as dead loads. All other loads are variable loads.
r. Nominal Loads
The magnitudes of the loads specified in this section (dead, live, soil, wind, snow, rain,
flood, and earthquake).
s. Occupancy Category
A category used to determine structural requirements based on occupancy.
t. Other Structures
Structures, other than buildings, for which loads are specified in this section.
u. Resistance Factor
A factor that accounts for deviations of the actual strength from the nominal strength
and the manner and consequences of failure (also called "strength reduction factor").
v. Strength, Nominal
The capacity of a structure or member to resist the effects of the loads, as determined
by computations using specified material strengths and dimensions and equations

Rev. 1 5.2 - 3
derived from accepted principles of structural mechanics or by field tests or laboratory

tests of scaled models, allowing for modeling effects and differences between
laboratory and field conditions.
w. Strength Required
Strength of a member, cross section or connection required to resist factored loads or
related internal moments and forces in such combinations as stipulated by these
provisions.
x. Strength Design
A method of proportioning structural members such that the computed forces
produced in the members by factored loads do not exceed the member design
strength [also called "load and resistance factor design" (LRFD)]. The term "strength
design" is used in the design of concrete and masonry structural elements.
5. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for additional definitions and abbreviations.
b. AAC Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Masonry Units
c. MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
d. MEPS Mechanical Electrical Plumbing Structural
e. PEMB Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings
f. PECS Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures
a. Industrial buildings may be classified as non-building structures in certain situations
for the purposes of determining seismic design coefficients and factors, system
limitations, height limits, and associated detailing requirements. Therefore, when the
occupancy is limited primarily to maintenance and monitoring operations, these
structures may be designed in accordance with the provisions of the SBC 301-18,
Chapter 15 for non-building structures (non-buildings similar to buildings).
b. Buildings designers must understand how the building responds to vertical and
lateral loads and follow all loads through the structure to ensure that all structural
elements and connections along the load path have sufficient strength and stiffness
to maintain structural integrity. Direct and continuous load paths from the roof to
foundation must be provided. Building configuration, continuous and redundant load
paths, connection detailing, system ductility, quality of materials, and construction
are very important to overall building performance, and should properly addressed in
the design.
c. In accordance with the MBC, building structures are designed to sustain local
damage under extreme loading conditions with the structural system as a whole
remaining stable. This objective of structural integrity can be achieved by an
arrangement of structural elements wherein loads can be transferred from any
locally damaged region to adjacent regions capable of resisting the acting loads.
This can be accomplished by providing sufficient continuity, redundancy, and energy
dissipating capability (ductility) in the design.
d. Lateral loads must be transferred from their point of application to the foundation. All
structural elements and connections along the load path must have sufficient
strength, sufficient ductility to transfer the lateral loads in a manner that does not

Rev. 1 5.2 - 4
impair structural performance. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide detailed
design and drawings which reflect lateral load paths, such as:
1) Transfer shear from floor and roof diaphragms to the lateral load resisting
system.
2) Transfer shear from the lateral load resisting system to the foundations.
3) Transfer shear between individual wall panels (for precast wall panel systems).
4) Transfer tension caused by overturning forces.
5) Transfer shear, bending, and axial loads between beams and columns and
between beams and walls.
e. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also provide detailed design and drawings for
connections between structural elements, including:
1) Column to foundation.
2) Column to column.
3) Beam to column.
4) Slab to beam.
5) Beam to girder.
6) Beam to beam.
7) Slab to slab.
8) Wall to foundation.
9) Slab to wall.
10) Beam to wall.
11) Wall to wall.
f. Stability
1) Stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of its
elements. Any method that considers the influence of second-order effects
(including P-δ and P-∆ effects), flexural, shear and axial deformations,
geometric imperfections, and stiffness reduction due to residual stresses on the
stability of the structures and its elements is permitted.
2) The building foundation must be capable of safely transferring all vertical and
horizontal forces, due to specified design load combinations, to the supporting
soil or rock. The mechanism used for the transmission of horizontal forces may
be friction between the bottom of the footing and ground, friction between the
floor slab and ground, and/or lateral resistance of soil against vertical surfaces
of grade beams, basement walls, footings, piles, or pile caps. Net upward
forces on footings and piles, which must be resisted to prevent overturning
and/or flotation, are discussed in the foundation design subsection (5.2.5).
Structures shall be designed to resist overturning effects caused by seismic
forces. Building structures shall have a minimum safety factor of 1.5 against
sliding, overturning, and flotation.
3) Building structures shall have the following minimum safety factors:
(a) Against sliding = 1.5

Rev. 1 5.2 - 5
(b) Against overturning = 1.5

(c) Against flotation = 1.2
g. The following requirements shall be reflected in the design and construction of the
RC building structures covered under this subsection:
1) Structures shall have adequate structural configurations acceptable to the RC
and shall meet architectural and functional requirements of the project.
2) Structures shall demonstrate the high standards for safety, durability, and cost
effectiveness required by the RC.
7. Codes
a. Design and construction of all RC building structures shall be based upon the
requirements of this subsection and existing buildings standards; these shall be from
the Model Building Code (MBC), the Saudi Building Code 2018 (SBC 2018), as
published by the Saudi Building Code National Committee (SBCNC). The MBC for
all structures not addressed by the SBC 2018 shall be the International Building
Code 2015 (IBC 2015) as published by the International Code Council (ICC), except
as modified by the SBC 2018 for regional and local information and amended in this
manual.
b. The material building codes and standards for all structures shall be those versions
referenced by the MBC. Where a code or standard is not referenced by the MBC,
but is referenced by a material building code, the adopted version of the code shall
be that is referenced by the material building code. If a later version of a code or
standard has provisions which improve safety or quality of construction, such
improvements may be implemented with RC approval.
c. Adopted codes for RC building-type structures include:
1) SBC 2018: Saudi Building Code 2018 (MBC)
(a) SBC 301-18 Loads and Force Requirements
(b) SBC 302-18 Testing and Inspection Requirements
(c) SBC 303-18 Soil and Foundations
(d) SBC 304-18 Concrete Structures Requirements
(e) SBC 305-18 Masonry Structures Requirements
(f) SBC 306-18 Steel Structures Requirements
2) ACI: American Concrete Institute
(a) ACI 117M Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials and Commentary (Metric)
(b) ACI 207.1R Guide to Mass Concrete
(c) ACI 207.2R Report on Thermal and Volume Change Effects on Cracking
of Mass Concrete
(d) ACI 207.4 Cooling and Insulating Systems for Mass Concrete
(e) ACI 313 Standard Practice for Design and Construction of Concrete
Silos and Stacking Tubes for Storing Granular Materials
(f) ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

Rev. 1 5.2 - 6
(g) ACI 318M-14 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

and Commentary
(h) ACI 350M Metric Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering
Concrete Structures and Commentary
(i) ACI 350.2R Concrete Structures for Containment of Hazardous Materials
(j) ACI 351.1R Grouting between Foundations and Bases for Support of
Equipment and Machinery
(k) ACI 351.2R Foundations for Static Equipment
(l) ACI 351.3R Foundations for Dynamic Equipment
(m) ACI 360R Guide to Design of Slabs-on-Ground
(n) ACI 371R Guide for the Analysis, Design, and Construction of Elevated
Concrete and Composite Steel-Concrete Water Storage Tanks
(o) ACI 530/530.1 Building Code Requirements and Specification for
Masonry Structures and Companion Commentaries
(p) ACI 544.1R Report on Fiber Reinforced Concrete
(q) ACI 544.2R Measurement of Properties of Fiber Reinforced Concrete
(r) ACI 544.3R Guide for Specifying, Proportioning, Mixing, Placing and
Finishing Steel Fiber Reinforced Concrete
(s) ACI 544.4R Design Considerations for Steel Fiber Reinforced Concrete
(t) ACI SP 226 Autoclaved Aerated Concrete-Properties and Structural
Design
3) AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction
(a) LRFD/ASD Manual of Steel Construction
(b) AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
(c) AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
(d) Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
(e) AISC Design Guide Series Numbers 1- 29.
4) AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute
(a) AISI S100 North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members and Commentary
(b) AISI D100 Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
(c) AISI S200 North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing
5) ANSI: American National Standards Institute
(a) ANSI/ASCE3 Standard for the Structural Design of Composite Slabs
6) ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
(a) ASCE 10 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures
(b) ASCE 20 Standard Guide for the Design and Inst. of Pile Foundations

Rev. 1 5.2 - 7
7) ASCE/SEI: American Society of Civil Engineers - Structural Engineering

Institute
(a) ASCE 5/ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(b) ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
(c) ASCE/SEI 8 Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless-
Steel Structural Members
(d) ASCE/SEI 11 Guideline for Structural Condition Assessment of
Existing Buildings
(e) ASCE/AF&PA 16 Standard for Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) for Engineered Wood Construction
(f) ASCE/SEI 19 Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings
(g) ASCE/SEI 23 Specifications for Structural Steel Beams with Web
Openings
(h) ASCE/SEI 24 Flood Resistant Design and Construction
(i) ASCE/SEI 37 Design Loads on Structures During Construction
(j) ASCE/SEI 48 Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures
(k) ASCE/SEI 49 Wind Tunnel Testing for Buildings and Other Structures
(l) ASCE/SEI 52 Design of Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Stacks
(m) ASCE/SEI 55 Tensile Membrane Structures
(n) ASCE/SEI 59 Blast Protection of Buildings
(o) ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire
8) AWS: American Welding Society
(a) AWS D1.1M Structural Welding Code
(b) AWS D1.4M Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
9) CRSI: Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
(a) Manual of Standard Practice
(b) CRSI Design Handbook
(c) Reinforcing Bars: Anchorages and Splices
10) ICC: International Code Council
(a) ICC IBC International Building Code
(b) ICC IEBC International Existing Building Code
(c) ICC IECC International Energy Conservation Code
(d) ICC ICCPC Performance Code for Buildings and Facilities
(e) ICC IRC International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family
Dwellings
(f) ICC ISPSC International Swimming Pool and Spa Code
11) MBMA: Metal Building Manufacturers Association

Rev. 1 5.2 - 8
(a) MBMA Manual Metal Building Systems Manual

12) MSMA: Metal Stud Manufacturers Association
13) AWC: American Wood Council
(a) National Design Specification for Wood Construction - ASD/LRFD
14) PCA: Portland Cement Association
15) OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(a) OSHA 1910 Regulations for General Industry
(b) OSHA 1926 Regulations for Construction
16) PCI: Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute
(a) PCI TR-7 PCI Standard Design Practice
(b) PCI MNL-116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Structural Precast Concrete Products
17) PCI: Precast Concrete Products
(a) PCI MNL-117 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Architectural Precast Concrete Products
(b) PCI MNL-119 PCI Drafting Handbook - Precast and Pre-Stressed
Concrete
(c) PCI MNL-120 PCI Design Handbook
(d) PCI MNL-123 Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast
and Pre-Stressed Concrete
18) PCI: Pre-Stressed Concrete
(a) PCI MNL-124 Design for Fire Resistance of Precast/Pre-Stressed
Concrete
(b) PCI MNL-129 Precast Pre-Stressed Concrete Parking Structures:
Recommended Practices for Design and Construction
(c) PCI MNL-138 PCI Connections Manual for Precast & Pre-Stressed
Concrete Construction

Rev. 1 5.2 - 9
8. Related RC GEM Sections:

a. Chapter 2.2 Definitions and References
b. Chapter 2.3 SI Units and Conversions
c. Chapter 3.1 Codes and Performance Standards
d. Chapter 4.2 Submissions Requirements
e. Chapter 4.3 Design Phase Requirements
f. Chapter 4.4 Field Investigations and Existing Conditions
g. Chapter 5.1 to 5.10 Design Guidelines
9. Approvals
The RC Reviews approves all reports, drawings and specifications related to design of
building structures within the RC jurisdiction. This is shared with the building owner, if other
than the RC.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated building structure achieves project
requirements as intended by the RC/building owner and as designed by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor.
C. Related Specifications and Details
1. Royal Commission Standard Specifications (RCSS)
2. Royal Commission Standard Details (RCSD)
D. General Design Requirements
1. General
a. The adopted Model Building Code (the Saudi Building Code 2018) provides absolute
minimum design requirements for RC buildings structures. However, the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor may resort to the codes and standards listed in Section 5.2.1.A for
design requirements not adequately addressed by the MBC.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop cost-effective designs that provide the
RC with the most efficient buildings structures. Therefore, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall incorporate repetitive/modular structural members and components
in designs.
c. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall design all structures in the scope of work, and
shall not relegate this task, directly or indirectly, to a Fabricator or Contractor. Use
of the word “Similar” in description of details is discouraged. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide sufficient details on the drawings so that structural work can
be accurately priced and constructed.
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate structural work with all other
disciplines, be “proactive” in this by reviewing all other disciplines’ related drawings,
and be aware of revisions in the other disciplines designs at the various design

Rev. 1 5.2 - 10
stages (10%, 30%, 60%, 90% and 100%). This would ensure incorporation of all
coordination-related revisions in the final structural design.
e. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of all loads and requirements of
other disciplines, including those for housekeeping, inertia bases, operating weights
and equipment, window washing equipment etc.
f. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall verify that there are no conflicts of “space” in
the design and that structural framing is not clashing with any other components of
the building introduced by other disciplines’ designs.
g. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall show all structural penetrations, due to above
conflicts, on the drawings and show sections through the building in critical areas
indicating the location on the structure and its relation in space to the conflicting
components.
h. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall review and design all “secondary” structures
detailed on other disciplines’ drawings, such as stairs shown on architectural
drawings, retaining walls shown on landscape drawings, mechanical platforms
shown on mechanical drawings.
i. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate, design, and detail all connections
of non-structural elements to supporting structural elements.
j. Building structures shall be configured to comply with the Fire and Smoke Protection
Features chapter of the MBC, and as directed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
k. Other structures shall be configured for fire and smoke protection in accordance with
industry standards, or as directed by the RC.
l. Design Details:
Proper drainage shall be provided for the following conditions or locations:
1) All surfaces of the structure exposed to weather shall be sloped to drain.
2) Intersecting surfaces forming valleys or pockets that may retain water shall be
arranged to provide proper drainage of the surfaces.
3) Structural steel and wood members shall be designed so that they would not
retain moisture or, when arranged in pairs or multiples, water or moisture is not
trapped between the members.
4) Structural items such as expansion plates, rocker joints, and surfaces intended
to permit movement shall be designed so that they are protected against direct
contact with water or condensation and shall be detailed to readily drain water.
5) Surfaces and members shall be designed so that water may be drained from
points where steel contacts or enters into masonry or concrete.
2. Strength
a. Buildings and other structures, and all parts thereof, shall be designed and
constructed to support safely the factored loads in the load combinations defined in
this subsection without exceeding the specified strength limit states for the materials
of construction. Alternatively, buildings and other structures, and all parts thereof,
shall be designed and constructed to support safely the nominal loads in the load

Rev. 1 5.2 - 11
combinations defined in this subsection, without exceeding specified allowable

stresses for the materials of construction.
3. Serviceability
a. Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance,
maintainability, durability, and comfort of its occupants are preserved under normal
usage. Limiting values of structural behavior for serviceability (such as maximum
deflections and accelerations) shall be chosen with due regard to the intended
function of the structure. Serviceability shall be evaluated using appropriate load
combinations for the specified serviceability limit states.
b. Serviceability limit states, service loads, and appropriate load combinations for
serviceability requirements can be found in ASCE/SEI 7-10, Appendix C and
Commentary to Appendix C. Service loads, as stipulated herein, are those that act
on the structure at an arbitrary point in time and are not usually taken as the nominal
loads.
c. Camber
1) Where camber is used to achieve proper position and location of the structure,
the magnitude, direction, and location of camber shall be specified in the
structural drawings.
2) For Reinforced Concrete Members:
(a) Beam and Slab Form Cambers:
(1) Where beams and/or slabs have centerline-to-centerline support
spans greater than or equal to 9 m, the forms shall be cambered up
3 mm for each 3 m of span.
(2) Where cantilevered beams and/or slabs have centerline of support to
end of member spans greater than or equal to 3 m, the forms shall
be cambered up 25 mm for each 3 m of cantilever span.
3) For Pre-Cast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Members:
(a) Camber for all pre-cast/pre-stressed members shall be designed in
accordance with the PCI design handbook, 6th edition, Chapter 4, Section
4.8.
4) For Structural Steel Members:
(a) Camber for all structural steel members shall be designed in accordance
with the following:
(1) SBC 306-18, Chapter 13, Section 13.2
(2) SBC 306-18, Chapter 14, Section 14.2.1
(3) AISC DG-3, Chapter 5
d. Deflections
1) Deflections in structural members and structural systems under appropriate
service load combinations shall not impair serviceability of the structure.
Generally, deflection of structural members shall not exceed the more
restrictive of the limitations for the following:
(a) Basic requirements for structural members: SBC 301-18 Table 1-1

Rev. 1 5.2 - 12
(b) Concrete structural member: SBC 304-18 Chapter 24, Section 24.2, and
Table 24.2.2
(c) Masonry structural members: SBC 305-18
(d) Steel structural members: SBC 306-18
2) Conditions to be considered include levelness of floors, alignment of structural
members, integrity of building finishes, and other factors that affect normal
usage and function of the structure. For composite members, additional
deflections due to shrinkage and creep of concrete shall be considered in the
design.
e. Drift
1) Drift of a structure shall be evaluated under service loads to provide required
serviceability performance of the structure, including integrity of interior
partitions and exterior cladding. Drift under strength load combinations shall not
cause collision with adjacent structures or exceed the limiting drift values
specified by the MBC.
2) Drift of a structure shall not exceed the limitations outlined in the SBC 301-18
Chapter 12, Section 12.8.6 for seismic loading concerning stability under
ultimate loading condition.
3) Drift due to wind shall be checked under service level loads and shall not
exceed h/500, where “h” is story height of the structure with the following
exceptions:
(a) For brittle cladding, story drift shall not exceed h/600.
(b) For glazed cladding, maximum story drift shall be limited to 10 mm.
f. Vibration
1) Floor systems susceptible to vibration shall be designed so that vibrations
would have no significant adverse effects on the intended occupancy of the
building.
2) Where the fundamental vibration frequency of a structural system supporting
an assembly occupancy used for rhythmic activities such as jumping exercises,
gymnastics, pedestrian loading, vibrating machinery, etc. is less than 6Hz, the
effects of resonance shall be investigated by means of dynamic analysis.
(a) For Concrete Structural Members:
(1) Pre-Cast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Structural Members shall be
designed for vibration in accordance with PCI Design Handbook, 6th
edition, Chapter 9, Section 9.7.
(b) For Steel Structural Members:
(1) Steel Structural Members shall be designed for vibration in
accordance with AISC DG-3, Chapter 6 and DG-11.
g. Expansion and Contraction
The effects of thermal expansion and contraction of a building shall be considered in
the design. Damage to building cladding can cause water penetration and may lead
to corrosion-related problems.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 13
h. Connection Slip
The effects of connection slip shall be included in the design where slip at bolted
connections may cause deformations that impair serviceability of the structure. Where
appropriate, the connection shall be designed to preclude slip in accordance with the
SBC 306-18, Chapter 10, Section 10.3.
4. Analysis
a. Load effects on individual structural members shall be determined by methods of
structural analysis that consider equilibrium, general stability, geometric
compatibility, and both short- and long-term material properties.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop an accurate 3D model of the structure
that captures actual rigidities of the lateral force resisting systems and accurate load
application. The total lateral force is generally distributed to the various elements of
the lateral-force-resisting system in proportion to their rigidities, including rigidities of
horizontal bracing systems and diaphragms.
5. Risk Category
a. Each building and structure shall be classified in accordance with the SBC 301-18,
Chapter 1, Section 1.6 (Table 1-2) for the purposes categorizing buildings in flood,
wind and earthquake. Where a referenced standard specifies an occupancy
category or the risk category, it shall not be taken as lower than the occupancy
category specified therein.
6. Counteracting Structural Actions
a. All structural members and systems, and all components and cladding in a building-
type or other structure, shall be designed to resist forces due to earthquake, wind,
soil and hydrostatic pressure and flood loads, with consideration of overturning,
sliding, and uplift, and continuous load paths shall be provided for transmitting these
forces to the foundation. Where sliding is used to isolate the elements, the effects of
friction between sliding elements shall be included as a force. Where all or a portion
of the resistance to these forces is provided by dead load, the dead load shall be
taken as the minimum dead load likely to be in place during the event causing the
considered forces. The effects of vertical and horizontal deflections resulting from
such forces shall be considered in the design.
7. Self-Straining Forces
a. In addition to the self-straining effects from restrained dimensional changes due to
temperature, moisture, shrinkage, creep, and similar effects described in the
previous sections, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also consider the self-
straining effects on structural members due to:
b. Angular Distortion Due to Differential settlement:
1) Building or other structures shall be designed such that angular distortion of the
structure is within the limits specified in the SBC 303-18, Chapter 5, Table 5.2.
In case these limits cannot be met, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
consider the effect of angular distortion to structural elements in the design.
c. Sensitivity Analysis:
1) The value for Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (k s) shall be verified from in situ
tests for sensitive and important structures. Where ks cannot be verified, the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall perform sensitivity analysis with a minimum of
two different values of the Modulus of Subgrade Reaction values. Selected ks
Rev. 1 5.2 - 14
values for sensitivity analysis shall be minimum ½ ks and maximum 2ks, where
ks is the best estimated subgrade modulus recommended in the GDR.
E. Design Loads
1. General
a. Design loads, load combinations, and design methods shall be as provided in the
MBC and in the respective standards and material building codes referenced by the
MBC. Any conflicts in definition, notation, terminology, or methodology between the
MBC and the other codes and standards referenced in the MBC shall be evaluated
and reconciled.
b. Design loads not provided in the MBC shall be determined and established in
accordance with the references and standards listed in this subsection. Loadings not
covered by the references and standards in this manual shall be obtained from
available technical literature, manufacturer’s data, or be carefully formulated. Such
formulation shall be described in the design basis report and detailed in the
calculations. Where there is conflict between standard and other available data, the
most current acceptable data or practice shall be used, subject to RC approval.
c. Design loads and their sources shall be clearly indicated on construction documents
in accordance with the provisions of the MBC. Dead weights of prefabricated
components, unit and concentrated live loads, dead and operating weights of fixed
equipment, and any loadings that are in excess of the code prescribed weights and
loads shall be indicated in the General Notes section of the drawings and referenced
in the floor plans drawings.
2. Special Considerations
a. Factors that may result in differences between actual and calculated loads, which
shall be considered in the design include:
1) Actual weights of members and construction materials may exceed the values
used in design due to such conditions as increased member thickness resulting
from deflections of formwork and supports.
2) Allowance shall be made for the weight of future wearing, protective, or finish
surfaces where there is high probability that such surfacing may be applied.
3) Special consideration shall be given to the likely types and positions of
partitions. Insufficient provision for partitioning may reduce future utilization of
the building.
b. Future Change of Occupancy
1) Where use and/or occupancy of all or part of a building structure could be
changed in the future, design loads shall be increased as required to those of
the anticipated future use and occupancy.
2) The above increase in design loads shall only be made when such changes
are reflected in the architectural design. Increased design loads and
architectural changes implemented for this purpose shall be described in the
design basis report and detailed in the calculations.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 15
3. Applicable Loads
a. Dead load (D).
b. Live load, except roof live load, including any permitted live load reduction (L).
c. Roof Live load including any permitted live load reduction (Lr).
d. Combined effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake induced forces (E).
e. Load due to fluids with well-defined pressures and maximum heights (F).
f. Flood load (Fa).
g. Load due to lateral earth pressures, ground water pressure or pressure of bulk
materials (H).
h. Rain load (R).
i. Self-straining force (arising from contraction or expansion resulting from
temperature change, shrinkage, moisture change, creep in component material,
displacements due to differential settlement, or combinations thereof) (T).
j. Load due to wind pressure (W).
Members of the structure shall be designed for the combination of loads and forces that
can occur simultaneously to produce the most critical design conditions as specified in
the MBC code.
4. Dead Loads (D)
a. For purposes of design, the actual weights of materials of construction and fixed
service equipment shall be used. In the absence of definite information, values used
shall be subject to the approval of the RC.
b. Where tanks, vessels, bins, or other containers of significant weight are located in a
structure, the dead weight of the item shall be applied to the structure at the points
of support. The dead weight reactions of connected pipelines and supported
conveyance systems shall also be included the design.
c. Minimum allowance of 0.2 kN/m² shall be added to self-weight of floor or roof system
to account for weight of mechanical ducts, electrical cabling and plumbing runs, etc.
d. Minimum allowance of 0.5 kN/m² shall be added to self-weight of floor or roof system
to account for additional weight due to unpredicted increase in slab thickness.
Actual weight shall be used if predictable,
e. The structural design shall consider “sloped screed” weight for roof as dead load.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall clearly indicate minimum and maximum
“screed” thicknesses on construction drawings.
f. Where a roof garden is located in a structure, self-weight of soil (wet) shall be
applied to the structure.
g. In areas of a building where partitions other than permanent partitions are shown on
the drawings, or where partitions might be added in the future, the following
allowances shall be made for the weight of partitions:
1) For Light Gauge Steel Framed partitions: 1.0 kN/m²
2) For Masonry partitions: 2.0 kN/m²

Rev. 1 5.2 - 16
Partition allowance used in design shall be shown on the drawings, including

type of partition anticipated. In cases where dead load of partitions is
counteractive, the load allowances shall not be included as counteracting dead
load in design calculations.
5. Live Loads (L)
a. Live loads used in the design of buildings and other structures for uses and
occupancies which are not specified in the MBC shall be based on the maximum
loads expected for the intended use or occupancy, but shall in no case be less than
a uniformly distributed unit load of 1 kN/m² or a line load of 1 kN/m.
b. Handrails, guards, grab bars, accessible seats, accessible benches, and vehicle
barrier systems shall be designed and constructed to the more stringent of the
structural requirements of the SBC 2018, IBC 2015.
c. Where tanks, vessels, bins, or other containers of significant weight are located in a
structure, those items and their content shall be treated as live loads, calculated
based on operating weight of the item and the fluid/infill material in the filled item.
The minimum live load calculated as such shall not be less than 1 kN/m².
d. Where moveable (on wheels) tanks, vessels, bins, or other containers of significant
weight are located in a structure, those items and their contents shall also be treated
as live loads, calculated based on operating weight of the item and the fluid/infill
material in the filled item. The live load calculated as such for an item shall be
divided by the number of wheels and applied as concentrated loads placed on the
structure in a manner that maximizes load effects. The minimum live load on each
wheel in kN shall not be less than the area of the item divided by the number of
wheels. Floor systems shall be evaluated for punching, as warranted by the
magnitude of the applied load.
e. For listing of minimum uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads, refer to the
SBC 301-18 Chapter 4, Table 4-1 / 4-2 / 4-3.
f. For occupancies or uses not designated herein, the specified live loads due to use
and occupancy of the area shall be determined from analysis of the loads resulting
from the weight of:
1) The probable assembly of persons.
2) The probable accumulation of equipment and furnishing.
3) The probable storage of materials.
Analysis methods and results shall be subjected to RC approval.
6. Roof Live Loads (Lr)
a. Minimum uniformly distributed Roof Live Load to be used for RC Structures:
1) Flat Roof = 1.0 kN/m²
2) Sloped Roof = 1.0 kN/m² for slope ≤ 20°; = 0.6 kN/m² for slope > 20°
3) Minimum Roof Live Load for accessible roofs, Lr = 2.0 kN/m²
4) For Roofs used for promenade purposes, Lr = 3.0 kN/m²
5) For Roofs used for Roof Garden and Assembly purposes, Lr = 5.0 kN/m²

Rev. 1 5.2 - 17
6) Ordinary flat, pitched, and curved roof supported by a skeleton structure such
as steel sunshades, space frames, canopies, awnings, except those of fabric
construction shall be designed based on a minimum roof live load = 0.6 kN/m2.
b. Minimum specified concentrated live loads on an area of roof shall be:
1) 1.3 kN over an area of 750 mm x 750 mm.
c. Refer to SBC 301-18 Table 4-1 for other roof live loads not specified herein.
7. Rain Loads (R)
a. Reference SBC 301-18, Chapter 8.
b. Coordinate with RC for expected rainfall in specific project area and the minimum
rain load to be used in design.
8. Flood Loads (Fa)
a. Reference SBC 301-18 Chapter 5, Section 5.3 and 5.4.
b. Use of ASCE 7-10, Chapter 5 is permitted with local data provided by the MBC.
c. Army Corps of Engineers Publication, EM-1110-2-2502, Engineering and Design of
Retaining and Flood Walls
9. Wind Loads (W)
a. Buildings and other structures, including the main wind force-resisting system and all
components and cladding thereof, shall be designed and constructed to resist wind
loads as specified herein with reference to the SBC 301-18, Chapter 26 to 31.
b. The Ultimate Wind Speed for the various Risk Categories shall be as follows:
3-Second Gust Wind Speed in

km/hour
Jubail Ras Al-Khair

Risk Category
Industrial City Industrial City
(See Section 5.2.1.D.5) (JIC) (RIC)
Risk Category I – V300 183 189
Risk Category II – V700 196 202
Risk Category III and IV – V1700 210 217
c. The wind exposure condition for all building sites shall be Exposure D. For
modifications to existing structures, the wind exposure may be that of the original
design, unless directed otherwise by the RC.
d. Story Drift due to Wind Loads.
1) Story drift limitations shall be in accordance with Section 5.2.1.D.3.c.2.
2) For structures supporting steel pipelines, story drift limitations shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the Process Industry Practices Guidelines.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 18
e. The design wind pressure for components and cladding shall be calculated in
accordance with the SBC-301-18, Chapter 30, but shall not be less than 0.5 kN/m²
acting in either direction normal to the surface.
f. In the design of interior walls and partitions, consideration shall be given to
differences in air pressure on opposite sides of the wall or partition which may result
from:
1) Pressure differences between the windward and leeward sides of a structure.
2) Stack effects due to a difference in air temperature between exterior and interior
of the structure.
3) Air pressurization by the mechanical services of the structure.
10. Seismic Loads (E)
a. Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCER) Ground Motion
Parameters:
The seismic spectral response acceleration parameters, SS and S1, for Jubail
Industrial City (JIC) and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) are as follows:
1) Seismic Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters, 5% damped (in %g)
Ss: 0.2 Second Mapped MCER Spectral Response Acceleration
S1:1.0 Second Mapped MCER Spectral Response Acceleration
Location Ss S1
Jubail Industrial City (JIC) 15% 7%
Ras Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) 15% 7%
Note: Use Ss and S1 values for the Industrial City location as indicated above
unless Site-Specific Seismic Hazard Analysis and Response spectrum are
determined in the project GDR.
b. Every building structure, and portion thereof, shall be designed and constructed to
resist the effects of earthquake motions. Certain non-building structures, as
described in the MBC, are similar to buildings in seismic behavior and as such shall
be designed using similar seismic requirements.
c. Seismic design shall be taken to completion in the calculations regardless of
whether the wind base shear exceeds the seismic base shear. (The specified
earthquake loads are based on post-elastic energy dissipation in the structure, and
because of this fact, the provisions for design, detailing, and construction shall be
satisfied even for structures and members for which load combinations that do not
contain the earthquake effect indicate larger demands than combinations including
earthquake).
d. Additions to existing structures shall be designed and constructed to resist the
effects of earthquake motions in accordance with the provisions of the MBC.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 19
Existing structures and alterations to existing structures need only comply with these
provisions when required by the MBC.
e. Story drift due to seismic loads limitations shall be in accordance with the provisions
of the SBC 301-18, Chapter 12, Section 12.8.6.
f. For structures supporting steel pipelines, story drift limitations shall be in accordance
with the provisions of the Section 5.2.3.H.
11. Self-Straining Loads (T)
a. Self-Straining Thermal Forces:
1) Provision shall be made for stresses or movements resulting from variations in
temperature. The rise and fall in temperature shall be fixed for the locality in
which the structure is to be constructed and shall be computed from an
assumed temperature at the time of erection. Due consideration shall be given
to the lag between air temperature and the interior temperature of massive
concrete members or structures.
(a) Thermal expansion change in temperature shall be 25 oC.
(b) Thermal contraction change in temperature shall be 15 oC.
b. Thermal Reactions from Piping, Ductwork, or Other Systems.
1) Thermal loads from any source other than ambient atmospheric temperature
changes shall be treated as dead loads.
2) The thermal load effects of a mechanical system on a structure shall be based
on the actual design temperatures of the system and the type of support
utilized. The following cases shall be considered in the load combinations:
(a) Maximum expansion of the system with the maximum expansion of the
structure.
(b) Maximum expansion of the system with the maximum contraction of the
structure.
(c) Maximum contraction of the system with the maximum expansion of the
structure.
(d) Maximum contraction of the system with the maximum contraction of the
structure.
Where it is not possible for the conditions to occur simultaneously, the case
may be omitted. Justification for omission of any load case shall be provided
to RC for approval.
3) The load induced by each condition shall be considered in the load
combinations, as well as the condition of no thermal reactions.
4) Where sliding connections are used, the friction force shall be considered in the
design of the supporting structural elements.
5) Where slotted connections are used, the slots shall be of sufficient length to
accommodate maximum displacements of the system. Bolts used in slotted
connections shall be finger tight (very slightly loose) and restricted from
loosening - either by the use of double nuts (interlocked) or nylon insert lock-
nuts, by thread deformation, or by tack welding.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 20
12. Loads Due to Lateral Earth Pressure, Ground Water (H)

Load effect on basement walls and/or underground structures due to lateral earth pressure
and ground water shall be calculated in accordance with the SBC 301-18, Chapter 3,
Section 3.2.
13. Hoisting Devices Loads
Structures that support hoisting devices (cranes, monorails, jibs, etc.) shall be designed for
the forces induced by the operation or movement of the components of the hoisting device.
a. Hoisting device loads shall be considered live loads.
b. Impact, braking, and other relevant dynamic forces shall be considered in the
design.
c. For exterior devices, the effect of wind shall be considered in the design.
d. For devices that can move freely when exposed to wind, safety restraint
mechanisms shall be provided.
e. For hoisting devices that are exposed to the local environment such that dust, sand,
and windborne corrosive chemicals can accumulate on the device, the most robust
protective coating system available from the manufacturer shall be used, subject to
RC approval. Sealed protective covers shall be used to prevent dust and sand
intrusion into the electrical motors and mechanical gears of the device. The effect of
continuous exposure to elevated temperatures and of the contained heat from
enclosure of the motors shall be considered in the selection of the device.
f. Hoisting device loads shall be combined with other design loads in accordance with
ASCE 7. Any load combinations that could produce the maximum stress or govern
for stability shall be considered in the calculations.
g. Anchorage of jib cranes to a structure shall be based on the forces generated by the
dead weight of the jib mechanism plus the rated load plus 25% impact. The
anchorage shall be capable of supporting the jib crane with the jib located at all of
the possible angular positions and with the hoist (if movable) located at the position
that causes the most unfavorable effect.
h. Cranes: Engineering and configuration of the supporting crane rail runway girders
and the loads imparted to the building structure shall be established in accordance
with the more conservative of the provisions of the AISE (Technical Report 13), and
the provisions in the Crane Loads section of the report.
i. Vibration Loads: Where vibration is induced by equipment such as pumps, blowers,
fans and compressors, supporting members shall be designed to prevent fatigue
failure and to avoid misalignment or malfunction of machinery and equipment. Refer
to AISE Technical Report No. 13 for guidelines on vibratory loadings.
14. Crane Loads
All vertical, lateral, and longitudinal crane forces (reactions) shall be transferred through a
clearly defined and continuous load path to the ground. All lateral forces shall be
transferred through frame action to the transverse bracing system of the building. All
longitudinal forces shall be transferred as axial loads through girders and brace members.
Brace systems shall preferably be tension-only X-braces. Brace connections shall be
designed as slip-critical and configured with minimal eccentricity, and shall transfer forces
into rigid elements of the main structural members.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 21
The crane live load shall be the rated capacity of the crane. Design loads for the runway
beams, including connections and support brackets, of moving bridge cranes and monorail
cranes shall include the maximum wheel loads of the crane and the vertical impact, lateral,
and longitudinal forces induced by the moving crane.
a. Maximum Wheel Load. The maximum wheel loads shall be the wheel loads
produced by the weight of the bridge, as applicable, plus the sum of the rated
capacity and the weight of the trolley with the trolley positioned on its runway at the
location where the resulting load effect is maximum.
b. Vertical Impact Force. The maximum wheel loads of the crane shall be increased by
the following percentages to determine the induced vertical impact or vibration force:
1) Monorail cranes (powered)
25%
2) Cab-operated or remotely operated Bridge cranes (powered)
25%
3) Pendant-operated bridge cranes (powered)
10%
4) Bridge cranes or monorail cranes with hand-geared bridge, trolley, and hoist
0%
c. Lateral Force. The lateral force on crane runway beams with electrically powered
trolleys shall be calculated as 20 percent of the sum of the rated capacity of the
crane and the weight of the hoist and trolley. The lateral force shall be assumed to
act horizontally at the traction surface of a runway beam, and shall be distributed
with due regard to the lateral stiffness of the runway beam and supporting structure.
d. Longitudinal Force. The longitudinal force on crane runway beams, except for bridge
cranes with hand-geared bridges, shall be calculated as 10 percent of the maximum
wheel loads of the crane, and assumed to act horizontally at the top of the runway
beam.
e. Crane Loading Condition:
For a bridge crane, the location and lateral movement of the trolley produces 4 crane
conditions that shall be considered in the design of crane buildings:
1) The maximum wheel loads at the left end truck and the minimum wheel load at
the right end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the left.
2) The maximum wheel loads at the left end truck and the minimum wheel load at
the right end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the
right.
3) The maximum wheel loads at the right end truck and the minimum wheel load
at the left end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the
left.
4) The maximum wheel loads at the right end truck and the minimum wheel load
at the left end truck, acting simultaneously with the lateral force acting to the
right.
f. Design Loads for Runway Beams and Suspension Systems:
1) Cranes shall be located longitudinally in the aisle in the positions that produce
the most unfavorable effect on the runway beam, runway beam connections,

Rev. 1 5.2 - 22
and support brackets or suspension systems. Consideration shall be given to

eccentric loads that may be induced by a single crane.
2) The following recommendations are applicable to the design of runway beams
and their connections and support brackets or suspension systems for single
or multiple cranes:
(a) Single Crane
The runway beam, including its connections and support bracket or
suspension system, shall be designed for the maximum wheel loads plus
100% of the vertical impact, acting simultaneously with 100% of the lateral
force assumed to act horizontally in either direction.
(b) Multiple Cranes
(1) If the runway beams are simple span and the cranes are separated
by spacer struts or electronic spacer controls so the minimum
distance between the nearest end truck wheels of any two adjacent
cranes equals or exceeds the span of runway beam, only the crane
loads for the crane producing the most severe effect need be
considered for the design of the runway beam.
(2) If the runway beam is continuous or the cranes are not separated as
described above, the runway beam, including its connections and
support brackets or suspension system, shall be designed for the
worst case crane loads of: a single crane producing the most
unfavorable effect, or for any two adjacent cranes producing the most
unfavorable effect. For the two crane condition, the maximum wheel
loads without vertical impact for the two cranes shall be used
simultaneously with 50% of the lateral force for each of the two cranes
or 100% of the lateral force of either of the cranes, whichever
produces the most unfavorable effect. For continuous runway beams,
the lateral force of adjacent cranes shall be considered to act in the
same direction or opposing directions.
g. Design Loads for Building Frames and Support Columns:
1) The crane or cranes shall be located longitudinally in the aisles in the positions
that produce the most unfavorable effect on the building frame or support
columns. Consideration shall be given to eccentric loads that may be induced
by a single crane operating in a crane aisle, or by a crane or cranes operating
in one crane aisle of a building with multiple crane aisles.
2) The following requirements are applicable to the design of building frames and
support columns for crane buildings with single or multiple cranes acting in one
or more aisles:
(a) Single Crane Aisle with One Crane
The frame and support columns shall be designed for the 4 crane loading
conditions. The wheel loads without vertical impact shall be used with
100% of the lateral force.
(b) Single Crane Aisle with Multiple Cranes
(1) If the runway beams are simple span and the cranes are separated
by spacer struts or electronic spacer controls so the minimum
distance between the nearest end truck wheels of any two adjacent

Rev. 1 5.2 - 23
cranes equals or exceeds the largest bay of the building, only the
crane loads for the crane producing the most severe effect need be
considered for the design of the building frame and support columns.
(2) If the runway beams are continuous or the cranes are not separated
as described above, then the frame and support columns shall be
designed for the worst case crane loads of: a single crane producing
the most unfavorable effect, or of any two adjacent cranes producing
the most unfavorable effect. For the two crane condition, the wheel
loads without impact shall be used simultaneously with 50% of the
lateral force from both of the two cranes, or with 100% of the lateral
force from either of the two cranes, whichever produces the most
unfavorable effect.
(3) The crane loading conditions shall be used for each crane. When the
lateral forces for two cranes are used, only those conditions in which
lateral forces act in the same direction need be considered.
(c) Multiple Crane Aisles with Single Cranes
(1) Frame and support columns shall be designed for the single crane
producing the most unfavorable effect or for any one crane acting in
each of any two aisles. For the two cranes, the wheel loads without
impact shall be used with 50% of the lateral force from both of the two
cranes or 100% of the lateral force from either of the two cranes.
(2) The crane loading conditions shall be used for each crane. When the
lateral forces for two cranes are used, only those conditions in which
the lateral forces act in the same direction need be considered.
(d) Multiple Crane Aisles with Multiple Cranes
(1) If the runway beams are simple span and the cranes in all aisles are
separated by spacer struts or electronic spacer controls so the
minimum distance between the nearest end truck wheels of any two
adjacent cranes equals or exceeds the largest bay of the building,
only the crane loads for the crane producing the most unfavorable
effect in each aisle need be considered for the design of the building
frame and support columns.
(2) If the runway beams are continuous or the cranes are not separated
as described above, then the frame and support columns shall be
designed for the most unfavorable effects of crane loads of:
(i) A single crane,
(ii) Any two adjacent cranes in any one aisle,
(iii) Any two adjacent cranes in one aisle acting simultaneously with
one crane in any other non-adjacent aisle, or
(iv) Any one crane acting in each of any two adjacent aisles.
(3) The crane arrangement producing the most unfavorable effect on the
frame and support columns shall be used. For these conditions, the
wheel loads without impact for each crane shall be used with 50% of

Rev. 1 5.2 - 24
the lateral force from each of the cranes acting simultaneously, or

with 100% of the lateral force from any one of the cranes.
(a) The crane loading conditions shall be used for each crane. When the lateral
forces for two or more cranes are used, only those conditions in which lateral
forces act in the same direction may be considered.
h. Crane Supports:
1) Vertical deflection of support runway girders shall not exceed the following
limits due to maximum wheel load(s), without impact (where L = the span
length):
(a) Top running CMAA Class A, B, and C cranes L/600
(b) Top running CMAA Class D cranes L/600
(c) Top running CMAA Class E and F cranes L/1000
(d) Under running CMAA Class A, B, and C cranes L/1000
(e) Monorails L/1000
2) Vertical deflection of jib cranes shall not exceed L/225 (where L = the maximum
distance from the support column to load location along the length of the jib
beam) due to the maximum lifted load plus hoist load(s), without impact.
3) Lateral deflection of support runway girders for cranes with lateral moving
trolleys shall not exceed L/400 (where L = the span length) based on a total
crane lateral force not less than 20% of the sum of the weights of the lifted load
(without impact) and the crane trolley. The lateral force shall be distributed to
each runway girder with due regard for the lateral stiffness of the runway girders
and structure supporting the runway girders.
4) Bumper Force. Crane stops shall be designed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements, or, if not specified, the following load:
𝑊 𝑉²
F=
(2 𝑔 𝑇 𝑛)
Where:
F = Design force on crane stop, kN
W = 50% of bridge weight+90% of trolley weight, excluding the lifted load, kN
V = Rated crane speed, m/s
g = Acceleration of gravity, 9.81 m/s2
T = Length of travel (m), of spring or plunger required to stop crane, from crane
manufacturer (usually 50 mm)
n = Bumper efficiency factor
(0.5 for helical spring see mfg. for hydraulic plunger)
15. Vibration Loads
Refer to vibration requirements above (5.2.1.E.13.i).

Rev. 1 5.2 - 25
16. Railway Loads

a. Design buildings and other structures interfacing with railway traffic shall be based
on AREMA.
b. Building structures supporting railway traffic on curved tracks shall be designed to
resist centrifugal forces due to railway traffic by shear walls or braces, with a clearly
defined and continuous load path to the foundation.
c. Building structures supporting railway traffic shall be founded on deep foundations,
unless recommended otherwise in the GDR.
d. Surcharge load due to railway traffic on supporting and adjacent building structures
shall be considered in the design of these structures.
17. Areas Accessible to Vehicular Loads
a. Areas in building structures accessible to vehicular traffic shall be designed with
consideration for permitted vehicular loads.
b. Floors in garages or portions of building used for storage of motor vehicles shall be
designed for the uniformly distributed live loads shown in SBC 301-18, Chapter 4,
Table 4-1 or the following concentrated load:
1) For garages restricted to passenger vehicles accommodating not more than
nine passengers, 13.0 kN acting on an area of 100 mm by 100 mm, footprint of
a jack.
2) For mechanical parking systems without slab or deck which are used for storing
passenger cars only, 10 kN per wheel.
c. Areas accessible to pedestrian traffic, but not to vehicular traffic, shall be designed
for their intended use, but not for less than the greater of:
1) The live load of 12.0 kN/m².
2) Rain load prescribed in Section 5.2.1.E.
d. Transportation structures shall be designed in accordance with Subsection 5.2.4.
F. Load Combinations
Buildings and other structures shall be designed using the allowable or ultimate strength
provisions of SBC 301-18 Chapter 2.
G. Geotechnical Information
1. General
The information in this section is intended to provide the A/E and/or EPC Contractor with
the basic understanding of the geotechnical investigation process and the Geotechnical
Design Report (GDR).
2. Geotechnical Investigation
Geotechnical investigation is required for all projects, unless otherwise waived by the RC.
Specific requirements for geotechnical investigation are included in this manual.
3. Geotechnical Design Report
For all projects, a GDR is prepared based on geotechnical investigation at the project
site and submitted to the RC for review and approval. The report generally include:

Rev. 1 5.2 - 26
a. A plot showing the location of all test borings and/or excavations.

b. Elevation of the water table, if encountered.
c. Recommendations for foundation type and design criteria, including net allowable
bearing pressure and the allowable peak bearing pressure of the stratum of soil
where shallow footings would normally be founded, and provisions to mitigate the
effects of expansive and highly plastic soils.
d. Recommend type of cement for foundation and protection degree for concrete
surfaces in contact with soil, such as:
1) Retaining, basement, pit, and other walls.
2) Soil densities for dry, moist, and saturated conditions.
3) Active and passive pressure coefficients for the soil.
4) Recommended procedure for combining hydrostatic pressure with lateral soil
pressure.
e. For walls resisting lateral forces transmitted through soil resulting from the presence
of distributed or concentrated surcharge loads, the report provides recommended
procedures for determining resulting vertical and horizontal pressures on vertical
and horizontal surfaces.
f. Where soil stratigraphy or presence of fills is indicated, and the potential for non-
uniform settlement is high, the GDR provides instructions on how to achieve uniform
foundation settlement.
g. Where existing structures are adjacent to new construction, the GDR provides
instruction on how to mitigate the effects of new construction on the existing
structures.
h. When expansive and highly plastic soils are present, special provisions are usually
made in the foundation design and construction to safeguard against damage due to
these soils. In such cases, the GDR provides design and construction criteria to
mitigate the prevailing conditions.
H. Concrete Design
1. General
Engineering and configuration of concrete structures shall be as provided in the SBC 304-
18 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC.
The design, construction, maintenance and selection of materials covered herein shall
comply with the SBC 304-18, Chapter 3, Section 3.2 and Chapter 4, Section 4.2.
For RC specifications and typical construction detail drawings refer to Section 5.2.1.CC.
2. Materials
a. For reinforced concrete structures, Portland Pozzolan Cement concrete (Type I
Cement) shall be used in accordance with RC guideline specifications for structural
concrete for the following types of structures:
1) All concrete structures in contact with the ground or the ground water – up to 1
m above finished grade.
2) All waterfront structures in contact with seawater or in a location subject to
seawater spray.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 27
3) All mass-concrete construction (mass concrete is defined here as monolithically

poured structural elements with least dimension over 1m in thickness).
Construction of mass concrete elements shall comply with ACI provisions for
casting and curing of mass concrete. Where mass concrete is required in a
project, the drawings shall include locations, notes, and construction
instructions. Due to the increased cost, effort, and time associated with the
casting and curing of mass concrete, A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall make an
effort to avoid proportioning structural members as mass concrete.
b. For reinforced concrete not in contact with the ground, Type I Cement shall be used
in accordance with the RC guideline specification for structural concrete.
c. For plain concrete blinding, Type V Cement shall be used in accordance with the RC
guideline specification for structural concrete.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.2.6.D and TABLE 5.2.6.A, for additional requirements on
corrosion protection.
3. Concrete Durability
a. Concrete Durability shall meet the requirements of the SBC 304-18, Chapter 4,
Section 4.8.
b. Engineering of concrete structures shall be performed with due consideration of the
corrosive nature of the local environment. Unless conditions warrant a more
aggressive treatment, details for the protection of concrete shall meet the
requirements of the RC, guideline specifications, and typical construction details
drawings.
4. Cast-In-Place Concrete
a. Reinforced Concrete
1) Reinforcing steel details shall be in accordance with the provisions of the SBC
304-18. Use of ACI 315 is allowed where the specific design requirements are
not addressed by the MBC.
2) Tolerances for fabrication and placement of reinforcing steel bars shall be in
accordance with ACI 117M, “Specification for Tolerances for Concrete
Construction Materials and Commentary [Metric]”. The effect of these
tolerances shall be considered in the design.
3) The minimum yield strength of reinforcing steel shall be as follows:
(a) Reinforcing Steel Bars ASTM A615M : 420 MPa (60 ksi) Yield Strength
(b) Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A1064M :240 MPa (35 ksi) Weld Shear
Strength
4) ASTM A775M Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars shall be used for those
portions of structures situated below grade and up to 1m above grade, provided
that the reinforcement is not cathodically protected.
5) The maximum size of reinforcing steel bars to be used shall be Ø32 mm and
the minimum shall be Ø10 mm. Larger reinforcing steel sizes shall be used only
when technically feasible, design cannot be achieved, and only upon approval
of the RC.
6) Configuration of structural members such that they have the maximum code
permitted ratio of reinforcing steel area to concrete area shall be avoided. For
members that intersect with other members, the preferred maximum ratio shall
Rev. 1 5.2 - 28
be 75% of the maximum code permitted ratio. Exceptions are permissible for
isolated cases.
7) Particular care shall be exercised in the configuration of joints that have
members framing from multiple directions.
(a) Bar spacing limitations shall apply to all splices and laps in the joint.
(b) Curvature of bends of bars larger than 12mm shall be considered.
(c) Positions of offset bends of column bar splices shall be considered.
(d) When multiple beams frame horizontally into a joint, beams other than the
primary beam shall be configured with the top longitudinal reinforcing steel
positioned successively below the longitudinal steel of the primary beam.
(e) Longitudinal beam reinforcing steel cannot be in the same position in
space as the longitudinal column steel. Size and spacing of members shall
be selected such that reinforcing steel does not have to be reoriented or
repositioned at the joint. Bunching of bars at the joint shall not be
permitted.
(f) Bottom reinforcing steel that terminates at a joint shall be hooked only if
required by structural analysis or by structural integrity provisions.
8) For wall and slab openings, provide total equivalent rebar area of cut reinforcing
bars of the opening as additional reinforcing rebars equally distributed around
the perimeter of openings.
9) Concrete Compressive Strength to be Used in Building Structures
The following shall govern the uses of concrete for the design of reinforced
concrete Building Structures:
(a) Structural Concrete
The minimum design compressive strength (ASTM C39M) of structural
concrete, including those with minimum reinforcement for shrinkage and
temperature control, shall be as follows:
(1) For substructure (in contact with soil): 35 MPa
(2) For superstructure: 30 MPa
(b) Pre-cast/Pre-stressed Concrete
The minimum design compressive strength (ASTM C39M) of Pre-
cast/Pre-stressed Concrete shall be 35 MPa except for transportation
structures that are defined in Section 5.2.4.
(c) Non-Structural Concrete
The minimum design compressive strength (ASTM C39M) of unreinforced
concrete of no significant structural value such as concrete blinding or lean
concrete shall be 20 MPa.
b. Plain Concrete
1) Engineering of plain concrete structures shall be in accordance with the
Structural Plain Concrete chapter of the MBC and/or codes and standards
referenced in the MBC.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 29
(a) Structural plain concrete basement walls shall be exempt from the
requirements for special exposure conditions.
(b) Design and construction of soil-supported slabs, such as sidewalks and
slabs–on-ground, shall not be governed by ACI 318M-14 unless they
transmit vertical loads or lateral forces from other parts of the structure to
the soil.
2) For special structures, such as arches, underground utility structures, gravity
walls, and shielding walls, provisions of this subsection shall govern where
applicable.
3) Minimum Concrete compressive strength for plain concrete shall be no less
than 20 MPa.
c. Architectural Concrete
1) A cast-in-place architectural concrete structure shall be any structure indicated
on the Architectural drawings that does not participate in the resistance of loads
as an element or a component of the building structure, and that is not an off-
the-shelf architectural element. They exist independently and resist no loads
other than those applied directly to them. Examples are concrete steps,
benches, signs, fences, screens, artwork, etc. that are of such nature that only
minimal and repetitive grid reinforcement is required. They shall not be shown
on the structural drawings unless it is deemed that there is complexity or
potential risk to human life to warrant more careful detailing.
2) Engineering of architectural concrete structures shall be directed by the A/E
and or EPC Contractor’s Architectural Engineer.
3) The finished surfaces of a cast-in-place architectural concrete structure shall
be as specified on the architectural design drawings.
d. Concrete Finishing
1) Concrete finishes exposed to view in the finished structure shall be as specified
in the Architectural construction documents. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D for
fair-face concrete color finish requirements.
(a) For all concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished structure, a
rough- formed finish, defined as having an as-cast concrete texture
imparted by the form facing material, tie holes filled, defects repaired, and
fins and other projections removed, shall be acceptable. Unformed
surfaces shall be struck off smooth, unless additional concrete is to be cast
against the surface, whereupon the surface shall be struck off and
intentionally roughened. Surface roughness shall be as provided in ACI
318M-14.
(b) The finished surface for cast-in-place concrete that will have an
architectural finish adhered shall be coordinated with the supplier of the
finish product.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 30
5. Precast / Pre-Stressed Concrete

a. Precast/pre-stressed concrete structures shall be fabricated at an off-site, certified
manufacturing facility.
b. Engineering of Precast/pre-stressed concrete structures shall be performed by the
manufacturer, unless noted otherwise.
c. Engineering of Precast/pre-stressed concrete structures shall be as provided in the
SBC 304-18, Chapter 4, Section 4.12.1 and 4.12.2 and in the respective material
building codes referenced by the MBC, and in accordance with the provisions and
recommendations of the PCI Design Handbook, MNL 120.
d. Fabrication, rebar placement, embedment placement, and erection tolerances shall
be in accordance with PCI MNL 116.
6. Precast Architectural Concrete
Engineering of precast Architectural concrete shall be in accordance with the provisions
and recommendations of the PCI Architectural Precast Concrete Manual, MNL-122.
7. Pre-Engineered/Pre-Fabricated Precast Buildings
Modular building design for utilization of precast concrete elements, the following directive
for designing of reinforced concrete buildings shall be adopted as a favored construction
method.
a. Whenever feasible and economically viable, precast elements shall be utilized in the
design. Whenever feasible, precast elements already manufactured in the Kingdom
shall be utilized, taking into consideration Saudi material availability and
manufacturing capability. Design of structural details such as connections shall be
complete.
b. A complete single set of structural design calculations and contract drawings shall
be developed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor such that the construction
contractor can submit an alternative proposal for structural systems and
components, which are shown on the Contract bid package with minimum
alterations and additional calculations. The alternative proposal may consist of either
a modified cast-in-place or precast concrete structural system. To comply with this
requirement, the general layout, structural details and dimensions of structural
components shall reflect the modular concept (i.e., variation of dimensions and
details shall be minimized, and conversely, repetition of dimensions and utilization of
identical building components shall be maximized).
8. Post-Tensioned Concrete
Engineering of post-tensioned concrete structures shall be as provided in the SBC 304-18,
Chapter 4, Section 4.12.2 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the
MBC, and in accordance with the provisions and recommendations of the PTI Post-
Tensioning Manual, TAB.1.
9. Composite Construction
a. Engineering and configuration of composite steel and concrete structures shall be in
accordance with the SBC 306-18, Chapter 9.
b. Specific products used in the implementation of a composite system that are not in
direct compliance with the building codes shall be certified by the ICC Evaluation
Service. Engineering shall be based on the values and limitations provided in the
ICC Evaluation Service Report (ESR). Applications outside of the range of testing

Rev. 1 5.2 - 31
shall not be permitted. Test reports and design values produced by other
independent product testing and certification organizations may be used, subject to
RC approval.
10. Slab on Grade
a. Design Requirements:
1) In general, slabs on grade structures are designed for bending stresses due to
uniform loads and concentrated loads and for in-plane stresses due to drying
shrinkage and subgrade drag resistance. When appropriate for the type of
facility being designed, slabs are designed for the effects of warehouse
loadings involving aisles, posts and racks, etc. In such instances, particular
attention shall be given to the design for negative moment in aisles.
2) Proper construction methods, workmanship, and concrete mix proportioning
generally follow the guidelines of ACI Committee 302 Report, "Guide to
Concrete Floor and Slab Construction". Slabs are required to have a minimum
thickness of 100 mm. TABLE 5.2.1.A provides the criteria for selection of slab
thickness based on design live load, for slabs on grade having a reaction
modulus (ks) of at least 25,000 kN/m3.
TABLE 5.2.1.A. SLAB ON GRADE LIVE LOAD.
Maximum Uniform Design Live

Thickness of Slab
Load
100 mm 7 kN/m²
150 mm 12 kN/m²
200 mm 20 kN/m²
Unless otherwise specified above, the correct slab thickness shall be

determined in accordance with the Portland Cement Association (PCA)
Publication, "Slab Thickness Design for Industrial Concrete Floors on Grade."
In the PCA design process, compressive strength is converted to modulus of
rupture, which is then reduced by a factor of safety to obtain the maximum
allowable flexural tensile stress. The maximum allowable flexural tensile stress
is then used to determine the required slab thickness.
3) When partition walls are situated over slab on grade, the slab on grade shall be
thickened under partition wall.
4) Mechanical equipment pads shall be isolated from slab on grade.
11. Joints
a. Slab on Grade Joints:
1) Expansion Joints (EJ)
(a) Expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate the effects of
displacements caused by shrinkage, temperature, creep, and settlement.
(b) Expansion joints shall be located such that they divide the slab on grade
into a number of approximately equal individual sections.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 32
(c) Expansion joints shall be provided at approximately 50 m centers both

longitudinally and transversely. For exposed slabs, expansion joints shall
be provided at approximately 25 m spacing.
(d) Expansion joints shall be at least 25 mm wide.
2) Contraction/Control Joints (CCJ)
(a) Contraction joints shall be provided to accommodate the effects of
shrinkage, temperature, and settlement. Contraction joints attempt to
control the location of cracks that occur due to contraction of the slab.
(b) Contraction joints shall be located such that they divide the slab on grade
into a number of approximately equal individual sections between edges
and expansion joints.
(c) Contraction joints shall preferably be straight, located on or near building
grid lines, and at approximately equal intervals between grid lines.
(d) The location of contraction joints shall be clearly indicated on the plans.
3) Construction Joints (CJ)
(a) Construction joints shall be provided to facilitate separate casting of
different sections of a slab. A construction joint may be used as a
contraction joint provided that the contraction joint features are
implemented.
(b) Construction joints shall preferably be straight.
(c) The location of construction joints shall be clearly indicated on the plans.
4) All Joints
(a) Where the use of the slab involves the movement of traffic or heavy
equipment across the joint, provisions shall be made to transfer shear
across the joint. The shear transfer mechanism shall permit free
movement (opening and closing) of the joint, and, where required, lateral
translation.
(b) Joints shall preferably be straight and located on or near building grid lines.
b. Structure Movement Joints:
1) Movement joints shall be provided in structures to accommodate the effects of
displacements caused by wind, seismic, other lateral loads, shrinkage,
temperature, creep, and settlement. Joint width shall be determined based on
the calculated service displacements of the structures on both sides of the joint.
The minimum clearance between deflected structures shall be 12 mm.
Expected maximum and minimum deflected joint widths shall be indicated on
the structural drawings.
2) For reinforced concrete structures, movement joints allowing for at least 25 mm
shall be provided at approximately 50 m centers both longitudinally and
transversely.
3) Movement joints shall be located such that they divide the structure into a
number of individual sections.
4) The joints shall pass through the height of the structure above ground level in
one plane – preferably straight. Joints must be designed to accommodate all
expected movements at the joint.
Rev. 1 5.2 - 33
5) The structure shall be framed on both sides of a movement joint.

6) Details for accommodating finished floor, internal and external wall, and other
sliding joints per architectural requirements shall be provided.
7) Movement joints shall be provided where there is significant change in the type
of foundation.
8) Movement joints shall be considered where there is significant change in the
height of the structure.
9) Joint spacing in exposed parapets shall be approximately 12 m.
10) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with all disciplines to ensure
that all systems crossing the joints are configured correctly to accommodate
the expected range of movement. This includes mechanical services pipes,
ducts, and wires; electrical services; architectural finish, glazing, and cladding
systems; and any other elements or systems that cross or are near a movement
joint.
I. Masonry Design
1. General
a. Engineering and configuration of masonry structures shall be as provided in the SBC
305-18 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC. Any
conflicts in definition, notation, terminology, or methodology between the MBC and
the codes and standards referenced by the MBC shall be evaluated and reconciled.
For RC specifications and typical construction detail drawings refer to Section 5.2.1.C.
b. This section provides engineering, planning and design guidelines for masonry
structures including:
1) Reinforced Concrete masonry
2) Non-Reinforced masonry
3) Load Bearing Masonry
4) Non-Load bearing masonry
5) Composite Construction
c. Engineering of masonry structures shall be performed with due consideration of the

Rev. 1 5.2 - 34
aggressive treatment, details for the protection of exposed masonry shall be in

accordance with RC specifications and details.
2. Composite Construction
a. Composite masonry wall systems are comprised of multiple masonry wall units set
side by side and tied together utilizing metal ties.
b. Metal ties transfer shear stress between wythes allowing interaction between
masonry wall units.
c. Composite masonry is usually constructed without vertical steel bar reinforcement,
but cores may or may not be fully grouted depending on the required wall geometry
and loading.
d. Refer to the National Concrete Masonry (NCMA) TEK Notes and SBC 305-18 for
general design guidance.
3. Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC) Masonry Units
a. AAC masonry units are ultra-light concrete blocks with a unique cellular structure
that provides increased energy efficiency, fire resistance and acoustical properties.
b. Structural Properties
AAC masonry units may be used in low-rise load-bearing buildings as shear walls,
partition walls, and infill walls. See TABLE 5.2.1.B for AAC Physical Properties.
TABLE 5.2.1.B. AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
ASTM C1693 – PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
Average
Compressive
Nominal Dry Drying
Strength Density Limits
Strength Bulk Density, Shrinkage
(MPa)
Class %
minimum kg/m3 kg/m3 ≤0.02
AAC-2 2.0 400 350-450 ≤0.02
500 450-550 ≤0.02
AAC-4 4.0 500 450-550 ≤0.02
600 550-650 ≤0.02
700 650-750 ≤0.02
800 750-850 ≤0.02
AAC-6 6.0 600 550-650 ≤0.02

Rev. 1 5.2 - 35
700 650-750 ≤0.02
800 750-850 ≤0.02

c. Mortar
1) The first course of AAC units may be placed on a thin mortar set consistent with
ASTM C270.
2) The remaining courses are set on thin bed mortar fabricated from Portland
cement based adhesives consistent with ASTM C1660.
3) Moisture
(a) AAC Unit moisture content is in the range of 25% to 30% at fabrication and
reduces to 4% to 6% within four years. The linear shrinkage is 0.02%.
(b) It is recommended that a breathable coating be applied to the AAC Units
to facilitate moisture dissipation.
4. Approval of Special Systems of Design or Construction
Comply with the SBC 305-18, Chapter 1, Section 1.3.
a. Design Load
1) Design loads shall be determined and established in accordance with Section
5.2.1.E.
b. Basic Design References
1) SBC 305-18 and/or The Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402), Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI
530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602) shall be the basic references for design of masonry
structures.
5. Design Basis
a. General
1) Masonry walls used as a part of the structural system shall be reinforced.
2) Un-reinforced masonry walls shall be used for non-structural applications, but
such walls shall be designed to sustain lateral loads.
3) Structures of masonry construction shall be designed such that the masonry is
not in contact with the soil.
b. Control Joints
1) Cracking of walls constructed of concrete masonry units is caused by the
development of tensile stresses within the wall assembly that exceed the tensile
strength of the materials comprising the assembly. Generally, it is due to tensile
stresses that develop when wall movements accompanying temperature and
moisture change as restrained by other elements, or when concrete masonry
places restraint on the movements of adjoining elements. Moisture loss
depends on the shrinkage potential of the masonry units and the drying
conditions at the building site, expressed in terms of relative humidity. Major
methods employed to control cracking in masonry structures are:
(a) Materials specifications to limit the drying-shrinkage potential,

Rev. 1 5.2 - 36
(b) Reinforcement to increase crack resistance, and

(c) Control joints to accommodate movement.
2) Any crack control measure taken shall be compatible with the structural design
for lateral forces. Control joints provide a complete separation of the masonry.
Hence, location of control joints fixes the length of wall panels and, in turn, the
rigidity of the walls, the distribution of lateral forces and the resulting stresses.
Therefore, adding, eliminating or relocating control joints shall not be permitted
once the structural design is completed.
3) Control joints shall never be assumed to transfer bending moments or diagonal
tension across the joint. Joint reinforcement and bars in nonstructural bond
beams shall be terminated at control joints; deformed bars in structural bond
beams shall be made continuous for length of the diaphragm. Using quality
controlled concrete-masonry-units and the prescribed minimum reinforcement
for lateral forces, cracking is not normally a problem when maximum horizontal
spacing of control joints is limited to 4 times the diaphragm-to-diaphragm height
or 30 m on center, whichever is less.
c. Connection to other Elements
1) Connections between vertical resisting elements (shear wall-panels) and
horizontal resisting elements (floor and roof diaphragms) shall be designed to
make the walls integral parts of the structural system. Positive means shall be
provided for transferring shear from the plane of the diaphragm into the shear
wall-panels.
2) In designing connections or ties, it is necessary to carry out the forces and their
stress paths, and to make connections along each path consistent with the
basic assumptions of behavior and distribution of forces according to relative
rigidities. Connections contribute to integrity of the structure, and therefore they
shall be properly designed and fabricated. Design and detailing of connections
shall be based on the actual nature of forces transmitted through the connection
(static/dynamic, tensile/compressive, etc.).
3) Connections Design
(a) Forces to be considered in the design of joints and connections are gravity
loads; temporary erection loads; horizontal loads normal to wall; horizontal
forces parallel to wall; and creep, shrinkage, and thermal forces –
separately or combined, as applicable.
(b) Bond beams acting as flange (chord) for horizontal diaphragms shall be
reinforced at dummy control joints to resist chord stresses induced by
diaphragm-beam action.
(c) Maximum spacing of anchor dowels or bolts used in connections shall not
exceed 1.2 m, and connections shall designed based on rational analysis
in accordance with well-established principles of mechanics. Anchor
dowels or bolts shall not be used in structural applications where they are
subjected to tensile forces.
(d) Strength of connections, as a general rule, shall be sufficient to develop
useful strength of connected structural elements. Joints and connections
for elements resisting lateral forces shall be designed for at least 2 times
the calculated shear when using the prescribed lateral loads, except that

Rev. 1 5.2 - 37
the connection need not be required to develop forces greater than the
ultimate capacity of the connected elements.
4) Cautionary Notes for Designers and Detailers
(a) Avoid connection and joint details that could result in stress concentrations
that might cause spalling or splitting at contact surfaces. Liberal chamfers,
adequate reinforcement, and cushioning materials are a few means by
which adverse effects of stress concentrations may be reduced. Avoid
direct bearing of heavy concentrated loads on concrete masonry units.
Avoid welding to any embedded metal items that may cause damage to
the adjacent masonry by spalling, in particular where the expansion of the
heated metal is restrained by masonry. All bolts and dowels that are
embedded in masonry shall be grouted solidly in place with not less than
25 mm of grout between bolt or dowel and the masonry. At tops of piers
and columns, vertical bolts shall be set inside the horizontal ties.
(b) Supports for cantilever/overhanging canopies, decorative panels and
similar items shall not be anchored on hollow, unreinforced CMU walls.
d. Reinforcements around Openings
1) Since the area around wall openings is vulnerable to failure, at least two (2)
Ø12 mm diameter reinforcing bars shall be provided around the perimeter of
openings.
2) The lintel bars above the opening may serve as the top horizontal reinforcing
bars.
J. Steel Design
1. General
a. Engineering of steel structures shall be as provided in the SBC 306-18 and in the
respective material building codes referenced by the model building code. Any
conflicts in definition, notation, terminology, or methodology between the MBC and
the codes and standards referenced in the MBC shall be evaluated and reconciled
with the model building code.
b. For RC specifications and typical construction detail drawings refer to Subsection
5.2.1.C.
c. Either the Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or the Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) method may be used for design of steel structures. The entire structural
system shall be designed based on the selected method.
d. Engineering of steel structures shall be performed with due consideration of the
aggressive treatment, details for the protection of steel shall be in accordance with
the RC specifications, or as noted in Subsection 5.2.6, Corrosion Protection. Any

Rev. 1 5.2 - 38
deviations from the specified corrosion protection methods shall require RC

approval.
e. Guidance related to engineering, planning, and design of structural steel frames and
elements, including structural steel, steel joists, steel decks, composite construction,
cold formed steel, and pre-engineered buildings are provided in the next sections.
2. Structural Steel
a. Engineering and configuration of steel structures shall be as provided in the SBC
306-18 and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC. Shape
designations shall be based on the metric system.
b. All structural steel exposed to the weather shall be galvanized or coated per the
corrosion protection subsection of this manual (5.2.6). Exposed anchor rods/bolts
shall be provided with an allowance for corrosion of 2 mm (i.e., required d + 4 mm,
where “d” is diameter of the anchor rod/bolt). Refer to Section 5.2.6.E for additional
requirements on corrosion.
c. Steel structures shall be designed such that the steel is not in contact with soil.
d. Hot-rolled structural steel shape elements (such as webs, flanges, legs) shall have a
minimum thickness of 4 mm for use in bolted connections.
3. Steel Joists
a. Engineering and configuration of steel joists shall be as provided in the SBC 306-18
and in the respective material building codes referenced by the MBC.
b. Joists used in floor systems shall be sized to minimize perceptible vibration.
1) K-Series joists are lower capacity joists ideally suited for roof systems.
2) LH and DLH are joists with higher capacity suitable for longer spans or for
shorter spans and heavier loads.
3) Joist Girders are designed to carry reaction loads from joists or other members.
Economy is provided through the open web system of construction.
4) Refer to Standard Specifications from the Steel Joist Institute for design
guidance such as:
(a) Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series.
(b) Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, LH-Series.
(c) Standard Specifications for Joist Girders.
4. Cold Formed Steel
a. Cold formed steel shall be engineered in accordance with AISI S-100 and D-100. It
shall not be engineered in accordance with AISC.
b. Cold formed steel framing is an inexpensive structural system for constructing lightly
loaded structures. The system is non-combustible and requires minimal training and
equipment to install. Capacity of studs, beams, and walls increases substantially
when adequate bracing is provided. Cold formed steel systems include the following:
1) Loadbearing Wall Framing: System is capable of carrying horizontal and
vertical load systems when properly braced.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 39
2) Exterior Non-Loadbearing Wall Framing: Able to carry wind and seismic

horizontal forces when utilized as exterior cladding system with brick, masonry
or other cementations material.
c. Cold formed steel members may be used to construct steel roof trusses for various
spans.
d. Cold formed steel stud members shall meet the requirements of the “Steel Stud
Manufacturers Association.”
5. Pre-Engineered / Pre-Fabricated Metal Buildings (PEMB)
a. Engineering and configuration of pre-engineered metal buildings shall be as
provided in the Structural Steel sections of the SBC 306-18 for hot-rolled steel
members and AISI S-100 for Cold Formed Steel members, and in the respective
material building codes and standards referenced by the MBC.
b. Additional design information and recommendations available from the Metal
Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA) may be used.
c. Engineering of the PEMB system - steel frame structure, girts, purlins, metal deck
(roof and side); all appurtenances, appendages, and accessories attached to
the steel frame; the connections of all system components; and the provision for
connections to attach all A/E and/or EPC Contractor coordinated building system
components (MEPS) - is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the PEMB
system. The loading effect of the functioning of all building components and systems
attached to the PEMB shall be considered for all operating conditions (doors opened
or closed, monorail at critical locations, motor start-up torque, etc.).
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with all relevant internal disciplines
and the PEMB Manufacturer to ensure that the PEMB is engineered and configured
to function with all interfacing building systems. The PEMB Manufacturer shall
indicate on the drawings the locations and magnitudes of all concentrated loads
agreed upon in coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and as provided in
construction documents.
e. The PEMB Manufacturer shall provide to the RC and A/E and/or EPC Contractor all
PEMB reactions as service loads such that all load combinations required by the
building codes may be calculated. Factored loads may additionally be provided, if
available.
f. The PEMB Manufacturer shall provide to the RC and A/E and/or EPC Contractor the
required layout of the anchor rods for the PEMB, including the required sizes,
projections, and other anchorage details for the PEMB member base attachments.
g. The PEMB Manufacturer shall provide erection and shop drawings to RC and A/E
and/or EPC Contractor for approval before commencing any physical work.
h. Engineering of substructure elements of a PEMB system is the responsibility of the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s structural engineer. Provision shall be made to resist
all reactions from the PEMB structural system and to transfer these reactions to the
ground. Where tension ties are used in the slab- on-ground or structural slab, A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the presence of trenches or building MEPS
services in the design. Engineering and configuration of the anchor rods below the
base plate of the PEMB members shall be the responsibility of the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor. Engineering and configuration of the attachment of the base member of

Rev. 1 5.2 - 40
the side deck to the supporting base shall be the responsibility of the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor and shall be consistent with the PEMB system details.
i. Features of a PEMB System:
1) The PEMB superstructure steel is approximately 30% lighter than conventional
construction due to the tapered fabrication of structural steel and the use of light
gage members in roof and wall construction.
2) Delivery and installation time is reduced significantly for PEMB construction
versus conventional construction.
3) PEMB structures are approximately 20% less expensive to construct than
conventional construction for the following reasons:
(a) Installers are preapproved to construct PEMB facilities, and they are
usually well experienced in this type of construction.
(b) Installation details are the same over thousands of buildings. Repetition
makes for expertise in installation.
(c) Products used in the construction of PEMB such as doors, windows,
roofing and siding are the least expensive products available for the
proposed facility use.
4) PEMB Manufacturer is generally concerned with the design of the
superstructure, as design of the substructure is the responsibility of the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor. However, success of any PEMB project requires close
coordination between the two parties during both design and construction
stages.
5) PEMB facilities may be a good fit for simple structures such as warehouses,
industrial centers, and trucking stations.
6) PEMB structures may not be applicable to more complex facilities where
architectural features drive the facility superstructure layout such as schools,
courthouses, office buildings, or hospitals.
7) The use of other more architecturally pleasing facade systems and other
building amenities may be utilized in PEMB facilities, however cost savings
usually associated with PEMB facilities may not always be realized.
K. Wood Design
1. General
a. Engineering of wood structures shall be in accordance with the Wood Chapter of the
IBC 2015.
b. All connection hardware shall be galvanized or stainless steel.
c. All lumber exposed to the weather and not within the closed airspace of a building
structure, shall be treated with preservatives consistent with AASHTO-M133 for
preservatives and pressure treatment processes.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 41
SUBSECTION 5.2.2 HIGH RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES (HEIGHT > 18 METERS)
5.2.2 HIGH RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES (HEIGHT > 18 METERS)
A. General
1. Introduction
construction of the RC high rise building structures, and provides the minimum technical
requirements to be adopted by the A/E and/or AE EPC Contractors to enable safety,
quality, and cost effectiveness in the design and construction of high rise building structures
and high rise building systems that meet the needs and expectations of the RC. High rise
buildings are defined as structures with an occupied floor located more than 18 m above
the lowest level of fire department vehicle access.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of high-rise
building structures constructed of concrete and steel materials. The design requirements
provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on a Model Building Code (MBC) and
industry standards.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall govern all
RC high rise building structures, as defined in the introduction herein.
4. Definitions
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for definitions.
b. Refer to Section 5.2.1.A for definition.
5. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for abbreviations.
b. Refer to Section 5.2.1.A for abbreviations.
a. Engineering of high rise buildings shall be as provided in the structural design
chapter of the MBC and in the respective material building codes and standards
referenced by the MBC.
b. Complete description of the lateral force resisting systems and of any special
mechanisms used for the dampening or control of lateral response in high rise
building structure shall be provided in the design basis report. The systems shall be
analyzed and detailed in the calculations, and their important structural design
parameters and limitations included in the general notes section of the drawings.
7. Codes
High-rise buildings shall be designed based on the ASCE 7-10. Design and construction
of all RC high rise building structures shall be based upon the requirements of this
subsection and existing buildings standards. These shall follow the provisions of the ASCE
7-10 and the special requirements specified the MBC.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 42
8. Related Sections:
a. Chapter 2.2 Definitions and References
b. Chapter 2.3 SI Units and Conversions
c. Chapter 3.1 Codes and Performance Standards
d. Chapter 4.2 Submissions Requirements
e. Chapter 4.3 Design Phase Requirements
f. Chapter 4.4 Field Investigations and Existing Conditions
g. Chapter 5.1 to 5.10 Design Guidelines
9. Approvals
The RC reviews and approves all studies, drawings and specifications related to design
of high rise building structures and systems within the RC jurisdiction. This responsibility
is shared with the high rise building structure owner, if other than RC.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated high rise building structure achieves
project requirements as intended by the RC/building owner and as designed by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor.
D. Structural Design and Design Considerations
1. Structural Design
a. Engineering of high-rise buildings shall be as provided in the Structural Design
chapter of the MBC and in the respective material building codes and standards
referenced by the MBC.
b. Complete description of the lateral force resisting systems and of any special
mechanisms used for the dampening or control of lateral response shall be provided

Rev. 1 5.2 - 43
in the design basis report, in the calculations, and in the structural general notes on
the construction drawings.
2. Design Considerations
a. High-rise buildings shall be designed as performance based structures as outlined in
various chapters of ASCE 7-10.
b. Linear seismic response spectra analysis shall be conducted using three
dimensional structural modeling.
c. Nonlinear dynamic behavior of structure is required when the response spectra
analysis exceeds demand to capacity ratio outlined in the ASCE 7-10, AISC 341,
and AISC 360.
d. Site-specific response spectrum to be used in structural design shall be as
recommended in the GDR.
e. Spectrum used in seismic design shall conform to the requirements of the ASCE 7-
10.
f. Non-Linear dynamic shaking motion is required, using the Maximum Considered
Earthquake shaking motion with a 5% damped acceleration.
g. Determine required wind speeds and associated pressures per the base wind
speeds specified in this section.
h. Consider wind tunnel studies that accurately model dynamic behavior.
i. Slab-Wall Connections
1) Concrete core walls provide substantial building support making connections
an important consideration.
2) Tower sway induces lateral deformation creating shear and rotation forces in
these connections.
j. Story Drift shall not exceed 0.5% of story height of any story for service level
shaking.
3. High Rise Building Limits
a. Concrete Structures
1) Construction
(a) Concrete rigid frame buildings are the preferred system for up to 20
stories.
(b) Concrete shear wall structures are the preferred system from 21 to 35
stories.
(c) Combination frame-shear wall structures are the preferred system from 36
to 50 stories.
(d) Perimeter Concrete formed tube or bundled tube construction is the
preferred system from 50 stories to 75 stories.
b. Steel Structures
1) Construction
(a) Steel Staggered truss is the preferred system for up to 20 stories.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 44
(b) Steel Rigid frame is the preferred system from 21 to 30 stories.

(c) Steel Rigid frame combined with concrete shear wall is the preferred
system from 31 to 40 stories.
(d) Steel belt truss is the preferred system from 41 to 60 stories.
(e) Steel framed tube and bundled tube arrangements are the preferred
system from 61 stories to 140 stories.
E. Damping System
1. General
Dampers assist in the dissipation of energy generated by seismic shaking and wind gust
frequency.
a. Types of dampers are as follows:
1) Passive Dampers are uncontrolled and require no power to work.
(a) Examples of passive dampers are as follows:
(1) Viscous dampers
(2) Friction dampers
2) Active Dampers generate forces on a structure to counter wind or seismic
imposed disturbance.
(a) Examples of active dampers are as follows:
(1) Tuned mass damper
(2) Tuned liquid damper

Rev. 1 5.2 - 45
SUBSECTION 5.2.3 NON-BUILDING STRUCTURES
5.2.3 NON-BUILDING STRUCTURES
This subsection provides structural design criteria for structures other than buildings, furnishes
design guidance for various types of non-building structures, and identifies special considerations
with regard to certain materials in specific applications.
The non-building structures and systems covered under this subsection include:
1. Drainage Structures
2. Catch Basins and Manholes
3. Pre-engineered Canopy Structures
4. Shade Structures
5. Water and Wastewater Structures
6. Liquid Retaining Structures
7. Flow Chambers
8. Valve Chambers
9. Lift Stations
10. Steel Tanks
11. FRP Tanks
12. Thrust Blocks
13. Mechanical and Process Structures
14. Pipeline Corridor Structures
15. Electrical and Communication Structures
16. Generator Support Structures
17. Concrete Duct Banks
18. Security Crash Barriers
19. Supports for Signs, Luminaires, Traffic Signals
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This subsection mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for design
and construction of the RC non-building structures, and provides the minimum
technical requirements to be adopted by the A/E and/or EPC Contractors to enable
safety, quality, and cost effectiveness in the design and construction of non-building

Rev. 1 5.2 - 46
structures that meet the needs and expectations of the RC. This subsection provides
structural design criteria for structures other than buildings, and furnishes design
guidance on materials and applications for these structures.
b. Non-building structures include all self-supporting structures that are not included
under the purview of the MBC, that resist gravity loads and environmental and/or
other lateral loads.
c. Engineering and configuration of non-building structures shall be in accordance with
the applicable provisions of the MBC and the standards of the various organizations
referenced in this subsection, and as amended herein.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of non-
building structures, constructed of various materials. This scope is limited to non-building
type structures and systems defined in the introduction to this subsection. The design
requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on applicable provisions
of the MBC, industry standards, and best practices embraced by the RC.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements included in this subsection shall govern
design and construction of all RC non-building type structures and systems listed in the
introduction to this section and discussed herein.
4. Definitions
5. Abbreviations
a. For non-building structures not listed in this subsection, design requirements,
specifications, and construction details for such structures shall be developed by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor, for review and approval by the RC.
b. Although this section covers certain materials and special considerations for those
materials when used in particular applications, the category of structures classified
as "non- buildings" shall not be limited in materials to those discussed in this
subsection.
7. Codes
Design and construction of all RC non-building structures and systems shall be based upon
the requirements of this section and existing standards; these shall be from the applicable
requirements of the MBC and the codes and references included herein.
a. Subsection 5.2.1.A: General Reference.
b. ACI: American Concrete Institute
1) ACI 554 Specification for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete
Materials and Commentary (Metric).
2) ACI 350M Metric Code Requirements for Environmental
Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 47
3) ACI 350.2R Concrete Structures for Containment of Hazardous

Materials.
4) ACI 351.1R Grouting between Foundations and Bases for Support
of Equipment and Machinery.
5) ACI 351.2R Foundations for Static Equipment
6) ACI 351.3R Foundations for Dynamic Equipment
7) ACI 371R Guide for the Analysis, Design, and Construction of Elevated
Concrete and Composite Steel-Concrete Water Storage Tanks
8) ACI 544.1R Report on Fiber Reinforced Concrete
9) ACI 544.2R Measurement of Properties of Fiber Reinforced Concrete
c. American Concrete Pipe Association
1) Concrete Pipe Design Manual
d. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
1) ASCE 10 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures
2) ASCE/SEI: American Society of Civil Engineers – Structural
Engineering Institute
3) ASCE/SEI 48 Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures
4) ASCE/SEI 74 Guidelines for Electrical Transmission Line Structural
Loading
5) ASCE Publication Structural Reliability Based Design of Utility Pole Structures
6) ASCE Design of Circular Concrete Tanks
7) ASCE Considerations for Rectangular Concrete Tanks
8) ASCE Engineering Practice Report 113
9) ASCE/SEI 49 Wind Tunnel Testing for Buildings and Other Structures
10) ASCE/SEI 52 Design of Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Stacks
e. American Water and Waste Water Association
1) AWWA M42 Steel Water Storage Tanks
f. NACE RP0193 External Cathodic Protection of on Grade Carbon Steel tank bottom
g. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1) ASTM A775M Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel
Reinforcing Bars
2) ASTM A934M Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated
Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
3) ASTM C478M Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced
Concrete Manhole Sections
h. API: American Petroleum Institute
1) API 650 Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage
2) API 651 Cathodic Protection Systems

Rev. 1 5.2 - 48
3) API RP 615 Installation of Underground Petroleum Storage Tanks and

Piping Systems
4) API RP 1632 Cathodic Protection of Underground Petroleum
Storage Tanks and Piping Systems
5) API STD Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage
Tanks
i. AWWA: American Water Works Association
1) M09 Concrete Pressure Pipe
2) M11 Steel Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation
3) M41 Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
4) M42 Steel Water Storage Tanks
5) M45 Fiberglass Pipe Design
6) M55 PE Pipe Design and Installation
j. PCA: Portland Cement Association
1) PCA Design of Rectangular Concrete Tanks
2) PCA Design of Circular Concrete Tanks
k. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1) AASHTO LRFD Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaires, and Traffic Signals, AASHTO, 1st Edition, 2015
2) AASHTO Highway Drainage Guidelines
l. PCI: Precast/Pre-Stressed Concrete Institute
1) PCI MNL-120 PCI Design Handbook
m. PIP: Process Industry Practices
n. PTI: Post-Tensioning Institute
1) PTI TAB 1.0 Post-Tensioning Manual
o. STI: Steel Tank Institute
p. US Government Agencies
1) US Department of Defense, UFC 1-200-01 DoD Building Code
2) US Department of Defense, UFC 4-141-04 Emergency Operations Center
Planning and Design
3) US Department of Defense, UFC 4-010-01 Minimum Antiterrorism Standards
for Buildings
q. TIA: Telecommunications Industry Association
1) TIA-222H Structural Standards for Antenna Supporting Structures

Rev. 1 5.2 - 49
a. Section 2.2 Definitions and References
b. Section 2.3 SI Units and Conversions
c. Section 3.1 Codes and Performance Standards
d. Section 4.2 Submissions Requirements
e. Section 4.3 Design Phase Requirements
f. Section 4.4 Field Investigations and Existing
Conditions
g. Sections 5.1 to 5.10 Design Guidelines
9. Approvals
The RC reviews all studies, drawings and specifications related to design of non-building
structures within the RC jurisdiction. This responsibility is shared with the structure’s owner, if
other than RC.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated non-building structure and systems
achieve project requirements as intended by the RC/building owner and as designed by the A/E
and/or EPC Contractor. Specific commissioning requirements for systems are described in
respective specifications.
D. Principles and Guidelines
1. Concrete
a. General
1) Concrete properties shall be selected to suit the expected conditions. For
discussion of considerations in selecting appropriate composition and
properties of concrete, refer to the RC specifications.
2) Portland-Pozzolan cement shall also be used for non-building structures. For
unreinforced concrete in contact with the earth, Type V cement shall be used.
3) TABLE 5.2.3.A and Subsection 5.2.6.D shall be used for selection of minimum
concrete classes.
4) Refer to Subsection 5.2.6.D for additional guidance and requirements on
corrosion protection.
TABLE 5.2.3.A. MINIMUM RECOMMENDED CONCRETE CLASSES
Mass concrete not exposed to deteriorating agents where mass

C20
rather than strength is the principal consideration
Drainage and Utility Structures C25

Rev. 1 5.2 - 50
Structures to contain non-corrosive fluids (tanks and reservoirs) C30
Waterfront structures on fresh water C30
Reinforced concrete structures over seawater which are

sufficiently elevated so that they are ordinarily wetted by salt C30
water
Reinforced concrete decks of waterfront structures where the

C35
underside is frequently wetted by salt water
5) Concrete reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the RC specifications.
ASTM A775M Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars shall be used for the
following structures, provided that reinforcement is not cathodically protected
(Refer to Subsection 5.2.6.D):
(a) Portions of structures situated below grade and up to 1 m above finished
grade. Where splices with uncoated reinforcement occur, splicing shall
begin above this location.
(b) Drainage structures.
(c) Bulk structures to contain liquid and corrosive materials.
(d) Water related structures.
(e) Waterfront structures.
6) Concrete cover for protection of reinforcement shall be in accordance with the
RC specifications.
b. Fiber Reinforced Concrete:
Concrete and cementitious mortar may be reinforced with alkali-resistant, chopped-
glass fibers, or various organic plastic fibers to obtain enhanced strength, ductility,
and toughness when compared to plain concrete and mortar. Fiber reinforced
concrete shall be used only if it is approved by the RC. Design guidance and typical
material properties are found in the SBC 304-18.
Requirements and limitations for use of Fiber Reinforced Concrete are included in the
ACI 554.
2. Structural Design
a. Design Loads
1) Design loads shall be in accordance with the guidelines listed in Subsection
5.2.1E, and as modified in this subsection.
2) Loadings not covered by the criteria in this section shall be obtained from
available technical or manufacturer’s literature, or carefully formulated with RC
approval.
3) Particular attention shall be given to wind, seismic, dynamic, and fatigue loads
on cable-supported structures and other similar force-oscillating structures.
b. Design Stresses
1) Conform to MBC and referenced codes and standards.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 51
c. Design Requirements:
1) Design shall conform to the general concepts and practices of the proper
design specification cited in this subsection. Where the design of a particular
structure or of a special case is not covered, the design approach and technical
formulae shall be based on available technical literature or shall be carefully
formulated, with to RC approval. If formulated, such formulation shall be
included in the design basis report and related calculations.
2) Wherever possible, standard, readily available materials, units, and systems of
construction shall be specified. New materials, units, and systems of a
progressive nature or creative design concepts that are economically and
structurally sound may be used, subject to RC approval.
3) Structural systems and materials shall be selected based on safety, quality, and
cost effectiveness.
4) Industrial buildings may be classified as non-building structures in certain
situations for the purposes of determining seismic design coefficients and
factors, system limitations, height limits, and associated detailing requirements.
Therefore, when the occupancy is limited primarily to maintenance and
monitoring operations, these structures may be designed in accordance with
the provisions of the SBC 301-18, Chapter 13 for non-building structures similar
to buildings.
d. Stability:
1) Factor of Safety Against Overturning, Sliding, and Uplift
(a) Unless noted otherwise, stability relates to sliding, overturning, and other
sources of gross displacement and not to stability as related to buckling.
Non-Building Structures or any of its elements shall be designed to provide
the following minimum safety factors:
(1) Against sliding = 2.0
(2) Against overturning = 2.0
(3) Against uplift = 2.0
This required degree of stability shall be provided solely by dead load plus
any permanent anchorage.
(b) Stability calculations shall be based on service loads.
(c) Soil shall not be considered unless it is directly supported by the
foundation and it is certain that the soil cannot be removed. Soil wedges
shall not be considered.
(d) For tanks, vessels, bins, etc. structures both cases (empty and with
content) shall be considered for stability analysis. Structural design shall
be based on the most significant load effects under the two cases.
(e) Overturning, sliding, and uplift stabilities shall be evaluated with and
without the effects of buoyancy.
2) Factor of Safety Against Buoyancy
(a) The safety factor against buoyancy shall be at least 1.2 against the highest
anticipated hydrostatic uplift pressure. Where the weights calculated are
well established (i.e. equipment or similar), this factor may be reduced to

Rev. 1 5.2 - 52
1.1. In determining the safety factors, allowance shall be made for future
removal of weights, removal of soil, for example.
E. Design Standards and Requirements
1. Culverts and Drainage Structures
a. Culverts convey surface water through a roadway or other structure into a channel.
The culvert fulfills both structural and hydraulic guidelines. When designing a culvert,
the following must be considered:
1) The most common shapes used are:
(a) Circular (most common shape)
(b) Pipe Arch and Elliptical (used where there is limited cover)
(c) Box (singular or multiple boxes)
(d) Three Sided Arch (used for spanning water with natural bed as the bottom)
2) Shape selection shall be based on:
(a) Materials may be corrugated steel, precast concrete, or cast-in-place
concrete.
(b) Corrugated Steel structures may not be utilized without authorization by
the RC
(c) Material selection is governed by opening size and cost requirements
(d) Upstream elevation
(e) Embankment height
(f) Hydraulic performance
3) The selection of material for the culvert is based on the following:
(a) Structural strength (fill height, loading condition, foundation condition)
(b) Durability (considering water and soil environment)
(c) Availability of materials
(d) Roadway or feature profile
(e) Channel characteristics
(f) Construction and Maintenance costs
(g) Service Life
Structural design of culverts is generally preceded with hydraulic design, where
the culvert material shape, and other related design parameters are
determined. Depending on the site and nature of the flow, the culvert hydraulic
design may call for additional measures such as protection against scour due
to high discharge velocity. Such protection may be in the form of riprap,
concrete mats, or stone fill.
b. Loading
Drainage and culvert structures shall be designed for the loadings defined in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification Standard Specification and in

Rev. 1 5.2 - 53
accordance with the design requirements presented herein. (Refer to Subsection

5.2.4).
c. Methodology
1) Design of circular and elliptical culverts are based the Standard Installations
Design Procedure (based on Soil-Pipe Interaction Design and Analysis), as
detailed by the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification and the American
Concrete Pipe Association, Concrete Pipe Design Manual.
(a) This procedure is based on the following criteria:
(1) culvert backfill,
(2) trench size,
(3) culvert geometry,
(4) culvert materials
2) Design of Concrete Box Culverts
(a) The principal criteria of design for culverts and drainage structures are as
follows:
(1) Depth of backfill over structure: 0 to 2.5 m.
(i) The greater the depth, the higher the lateral soil pressure on the
walls and the more soil weight on the culvert top
(ii) Truck loading is superimposed on the culvert sidewalls via
surcharge and is distributed through the backfill to the top of the
culvert.
(2) Depth of backfill over structure: Greater than 2.5 m
(i) Truck live load dissipates and does not need to be considered
(ii) Soil weight on culvert top and passive pressure on side walls
governs the design
(3) Soil pressures shall be considered fully saturated unless a drainage
system is installed with the culvert system.
(4) Interior culvert water pressure is required to be considered, but rarely
governs the design of culverts and drainage structures.
d. Design Considerations
Applicable loads and load combinations shall be analyzed per AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specification. (Refer to Subsection 5.2.4). Additional design considerations
include:
1) Drainage Structures are also referred to as manholes inlets vaults and valve
boxes. Drainage structures shall be designed to resist earth, water,
temperature, and other loads to which they will be subjected. Structural design
of concrete structures shall be in accordance with the SBC 2018, ACI 350 or
other applicable Codes and Standards.
2) Special consideration shall be given to the effect of proper allowance for
differential movement due to settlement, thermal expansion, etc., between
manholes and interconnecting elements and vaults. To the extent practical,

Rev. 1 5.2 - 54
precast, and prefabricated components for manhole construction shall be used.

Precast components shall be furnished in accordance with ASTM C478M.
3) Design of underground precast structures shall include ground floatation:
(a) Downward gravity forces including the weight of walls, slabs, inverts, and
soil
(b) Weight of earth fill and overburden on extended base
(c) Frictional resistance of the soil on an extended edge
(d) Buoyant forces
4) The factor of calculated safety will determine if the structure complies with the
factor of safety required in ACI 350M.
5) The factor of safety against buoyancy may be addressed by increasing member
thickness, deeper placement or by anchors.
2. Catch Basins and Manholes
a. General:
1) Catch basins are vertical flow chambers for routing water to drainage
structures. Manholes are vertical access chambers for maintenance personnel.
2) Structures may be reinforced precast concrete or reinforced cast-in-place
concrete and can be designed as round or rectangular in shape.
b. Design Requirements:
1) Catch Basins and Manholes are required to be watertight.
2) Resist buoyant forces.
3) Resist vertical Truck and/or Construction Loading and horizontal surcharge
loads when placed in vehicle right-of-way.
4) Design for lifting lugs and associated forces if structure is precast construction.
5) Minimum interior spacing between pipe openings shall be 150 mm.
6) Required structural design data
(a) Soil investigations are required to determine the following information:
(1) Soil and groundwater profile
(2) Strength parameters for natural soils and engineered fills
(3) Soil density (dry, moist, and saturated)
(4) Coefficients of lateral earth pressure
7) Design Loads:
(a) Rectangular Structures
P = Soil Weight x Active pressure Coefficient x Height + Water Weight x Wall
Height
(b) Round Structures
Hoop Stress = Pressure x Diameter / (2 x Wall Thickness)
(c) Add Truck Loading surcharges if present per Subsection 5.2.4.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 55
3. Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures Including Shades

a. General: Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures are those that are pre-manufactured for
assembly on any site. While some purchase contracts provide for supply only,
others provide for supply and installation, in the appropriate situation, off-the-shelf
structures may provide a readily available, cost-effective method of shade provision.
b. References and Standards:
1) Saudi Building Code SBC-301-18 – Loads and Force Requirements
2) Saudi Building Code SBC-304-18 – Concrete Structures Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code SBC-305-18 – Masonry Structures Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code SBC-306-18 – Steel Structures Requirements
5) American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE-7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures
6) Guidelines for Shade Planning and Design Grounded
c. Purpose:
1) The purpose of Canopy Structures is to provide maximum protection of the
public from UV rays and weather. Pre-Engineered Canopy Structures (PECS)
provide a cost and effective means to installing schedule, shade, and weather
protection.
d. The following preliminary steps are recommended in developing a Pre-Engineered
Canopy structure design.
1) Shade Audit
2) Opinion of Cost
3) Geotechnical Report
4) Approval of the RC
5) Architectural/Landscape Architecture Layout of Canopy
e. Materials: Canopy materials are to be determined and shown on architectural layout
drawings.
f. Components of Canopy Structures: All superstructure components of the canopy
shall be designed, shipped, and installed by the Pre-Engineered Canopy supplier
including:
1) All member sizes and materials
2) Connections
3) Decking and Waterproofing
4) Engineering
5) Certificates and Warranties
g. Design and Construction:
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible for supplying the following
information:

Rev. 1 5.2 - 56
(a) Design Loads per the SBC-301 including with initial tensile forces for
tensile structures and possible ponding over canopies.
(b) Size, location and materials of proposed canopy structure
(c) Foundation and anchor bolts design of proposed canopy structure
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is responsible to review and approve shop
drawings prior to construction, verify materials and certifications meet required
parameters.
4. Shade Structures
Shade structures shall be designed based on the requirements of the proprietary shade
structure manufacturer, the soil parameters recommended in the GDR, and the wind
speed included in this manual.
5. Water and Wastewater Structures
a. General:
Water and Wastewater structures are required to have the following characteristics:
1) Serviceability.
2) Durability.
3) Limited deflection and cracking in concrete structures
b. References:
1) ACI 350M, Metric Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures & Commentary.
2) Rectangular Concrete Tanks, Portland Cement Association (1994).
3) Circular tanks without Pre-stressing, Portland Cement Association (1993).
4) Moments and Reactions for Rectangular Plates, US Bureau of Reclamation.
c. Steel Reinforcement:
1) ASTM A775 Epoxy Coated reinforcing bars
2) Minimum Concrete Cover:
(a) Concrete Base = 75 mm.
(b) Concrete Wall = 50 mm.
(c) Stilling Basin = 150 mm.
d. Flotation Criteria (Flotation Stability Criteria for Concrete Hydraulic Structures, US
Army COE).
1) Loading Conditions FS
2) Construction 1.3
3) Normal Operation 1.5
4) Extreme (max. pool) 1.1
e. Crack Reduction:
1) Reinforcement Distribution - use smaller diameter reinforcement and reduce
bar spacing not to exceed 300 mm.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 57
2) For additional requirements related to crack reduction, refer to following

standards:
(a) ACI 207 / ACI 224 / ACI 350.4 / ACI 350
f. Temperature and Shrinkage Reinforcement:
1) Refer to ACI 350M for minimum of reinforcement requirement.
g. Minimum Thickness:
1) As required by ACI 350M, wall with height greater than 3 m shall be a minimum
of 300 mm in thickness and shall have reinforcement on both faces.
2) A minimum of 200 mm is required where 50 mm concrete cover is desired.
6. Liquid Retaining Structures
a. General: Liquid retaining structures may comprise the following:
1) Concrete tanks;
(a) Buried or below ground
(b) Above ground
2) Structural steel:
(a) Buried or below ground
(b) Above ground
b. Concrete tanks shall conform to the following:
1) ASCE – Design of Circular Concrete Tanks
2) PCA – Circular Concrete Tanks
3) ASCE – Considerations for Rectangular Tank Design
4) PCA – Rectangular Concrete Tanks
5) ACI 350M
In addition, the following parameters / considerations shall be incorporated into the
design:
6) Minimum steel for crack control
7) Concrete mix design
8) Minimize shrinkage effect by pouring the sections of the work between
construction joints in a sequence such that there will be suitable time delays
between adjacent pours
9) Curing methodology
c. Joint Sealing:
1) Provide PVC water-stops for all cast-in-place joint interfaces. Hydrophilic,
mastic type, water-stops shall not be used.
2) Interfaces between Precast and cast-in-place to be detailed on the design
drawings.
3) Where joint sealing is to include a primary and secondary seal, water tightness
test is to be completed and passed prior installation of secondary seal.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 58
d. Concrete Repairs:
1) Repair all air voids, bolt holes, and honeycombs using a suitable epoxy mortar
applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2) Repairs by bagging using cement mortar, etc. is not permitted. A work method
statement should be submitted to the RC for approval 48 hours prior to
undertaking repairs.
3) Other repair methodologies may be acceptable, subject to RC approval, such
as injection methods.
e. Water tightness Test:
1) Refer to ACI 350.1
2) Determine evaporation during testing period by direct measurement of
evaporation losses in a manner approved by the RC.
f. Steel tanks shall conform to the following:
1) API 650 - Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage
2) AWWA M42 - Steel Water Storage Tanks
3) Special corrosion resistant materials shall be used to protect steel tanks
including:
(a) Cathodic Protection Systems. Per API-651 or NACE RP0193 External
Cathodic Protection of on-grade carbon steel tank bottoms.
(1) A steel tank that is coated and cathodically protected
(2) A steel tank jacketed or clad with a non-corrodible material
(3) A steel tank that is cathodically protected and internally lined.
g. Tank Type Descriptions:
1) Protected Steel: Steel tank coated at the factory and built with sacrificial
(galvanic) anodes, and usually equipped with dielectric nylon bushings in the
bungholes.
2) Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic: While the term Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic
(FRP) is technically correct, these tanks are more commonly referred to as
fiberglass tanks.
3) Polyethylene-Jacketed Steel Tank: This is a double-wall tank with a steel inner
wall and a plastic outer wall.
4) Fiberglass-Jacketed Steel Tank: This is a double-wall tank with a steel inner
wall and an outer wall made of fiberglass reinforced plastic material.
5) Clad Steel Tank: this is a steel tank that has a thick layer of non-corrodible
material such as fiberglass or urethane that is mechanically bonded to the outer
wall of the steel tank that protects the outer part of the steel wall from corroding.
6) Steel with Impressed Current: These tanks are either:
(a) Bare steel tanks that have been retrofitted with an impressed current
system

Rev. 1 5.2 - 59
(b) Protected steel tanks that had an anode failure that could not be remedied
by addition of one or more galvanic anodes, and consequently were
retrofitted with impressed current.
h. In addition, the following parameters shall be incorporated into the wall and floor
plate design:
1) A minimum corrosion allowance of 2 mm for all plates.
2) Design limiting stress for base bending up to 0.5 x Yield Stress is considered
acceptable.
3) The maximum additional horizontal deflection due to filling shall be the lesser
of height/250 and 20 mm.
4) Careful handling methodologies or procedures are to be developed and
employed on-site to minimize plate buckling / deformation.
i. Bolted Steel Tanks:
1) Bolted steel tanks are not acceptable except for shorter design life applications
such as 15 years.
7. Flow Chambers
a. General:
Flow chambers route water or wastewater.
1) Chambers are constructed from reinforced concrete – precast concrete or cast-
in-place concrete.
2) For size and dimensions of chambers, structural designer shall coordinate with
mechanical discipline and obtain required sizes.
3) Chambers shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of ACI-350.
4) Chambers are required to be watertight, to prevent leakage of water or
wastewater.
5) Access in and out of valve chambers shall be in accordance with the
requirements of OSHA 1910.27 using FRP ladder and minimum 900 mm
diameter structural opening.
6) Most Flow chambers have interior walls routing water to different sections of
the chamber. Therefore, Interior Walls are required to be designed for
unbalanced water levels.
7) Exterior walls are to be designed for interior water /wastewater levels.
8) Similar forces to catch basins and manholes apply to valve chambers.
(a) Soil Surcharge (assume saturated)
(b) Hydrostatic pressure (assume based on finished grade level)
(c) Buoyancy
(d) Truck Loading as per Subsection 5.2.4.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 60
8. Valve Chambers
a. General:
Valve Chambers house buried high-pressure utility control gates and valves such as
water mains or sanitary sewer control housing.
1) Chambers are constructed from reinforced cast-in–place concrete or precast
concrete.
2) For size and dimensions of chambers, structural designer shall coordinate with
mechanical discipline and obtain required sizes.
3) Chambers shall be designed in accordance with requirements of ACI-350.
4) Chambers are required to be watertight.
5) Access in and out of the valve chambers to be in accordance with the
requirements of OSHA 1910.27 using FRP ladder and minimum structural
opening of 900 mm.
6) Gate valves and bends in pressure pipe result in large reaction loads
superimposed on the chamber walls, floor, or both. Pipe supports and
associated attachments must be designed to resist these forces.
7) Concrete chamber walls, floors, and roof must be designed for pipe thrust
reaction forces.
8) Recommend incoming pressure pipe to be supported on interior of chamber
instead of on perimeter walls to prevent chamber water penetration and wall
damage.
9) Where environment around chamber is unknown and surcharge loads cannot
be established, a minimum surcharge of 15 kN/m² shall be considered in the
design of chamber walls.
10) Similar forces to catch basins and manholes apply to valve chambers.
(a) Soil Surcharge (assume saturated)
(b) Hydrostatic pressure (assume based on finished grade)
(c) Buoyancy
(d) Truck Loading as per Subsection 5.2.4.
(e) Interior water forces do not apply – Valve Chambers are required to remain
watertight.
9. Thrust Blocks (for non-restrained piping system)
a. General:
1) When thrust blocks are required (Refer to Section 5.7.1.H.4) at tees, elbows,
wyes, caps, valves, hydrants, reducers, and caps, etc., they should be
designed and constructed per the requirements of this subsection.
2) Inertial thrust forces act during the following situations:
(a) Change in fluid velocity
(b) Change in pipe size

Rev. 1 5.2 - 61
(c) Change in pipeline direction

(d) Connection at different pipe types and connection diameters.
FIGURE 5.2.3.A depicts the net thrust force at various configurations. In each
case, the expression for T can be derived by the vector addition of the axial
forces.
3) Restrained piping system
Thrust blocks are normally not required for pipe size more than 300 mm in
diameter when restrained piping system is considered. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall design the restrained piping system based on the results of a
pipe stress analysis with the appropriate vendor details.
FIGURE 5.2.3. A THRUST BLOCK TYPES.
1) For pipe diameter up to 300 mm, thrust block size shall be in accordance with
table shown on the RC standard details. For pipe diameter larger than 300mm
shall be designed in accordance with requirements listed herein.
2) Internal design pressures and test pressure shall be specified by the designer
of the pipeline.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 62
3) Locate the thrust block such that its passive pressure zone of influence does
not affect other utilities or structures. Thrust blocks should not be placed in
close proximity to each other to prevent overlap of passive pressure soil zones.
4) Provide a minimum soil cover of 600 mm over all thrust blocks. For pipelines
under roadway right–of-way, provide a minimum 900 mm soil over thrust block.
5) Elevation of groundwater table must be below the bottom of the block for upper
vertical bends or the invert of the pipe for all other blocks. If the actual
groundwater table is higher than the above, then evaluate the standard block
size for submerged conditions and note that a special design block may be
required.
6) There are two possibilities for design of the thrust block. The first design allows
for small movement of the thrust block and the second does not allow for such
movement. The designer of the pipeline system shall decide between the two
possibilities based on the assumptions made at the thrust block location in the
pipeline analysis. Thrust blocks that rely on lateral resistance of the soil will
generally undergo small movement before passive soil resistance is developed.
On the other hand, thrust blocks that rely on soil frictional force will generally
develop frictional soil resistance practically without any slippage or movement.
Thrust blocks shall be designed considering either lateral or frictional soil
resistance, and never both together.
7) For thrust blocks designed to rely on lateral soil resistance, soil investigation is
required to determine the following information:
(a) Soil and groundwater profile
(b) Strength parameters for natural and engineered fills
(c) Soil Classification
(d) Soil density (dry, moist and saturated)
(e) Coefficients of lateral pressure
Depending on the lateral soil pressure assumed in the design (full passive or
fraction of it), the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall include the displacement
associated with the assumed soil pressure in the analysis of the pipeline.
This design follows the NFPA 24 Code, and is commonly used for thrust blocks
associated with small diameter pipes commonly used in residential and
commercial areas.
Groundwater elevation must be determined and if applicable, buoyancy effects
must be considered in the design.
8) General considerations and earth pressure theories to be used when designing
thrust blocks.
(a) Horizontal bends, reducers, tees, TS&V, TA&V, plugs and caps.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 63
(1) Design horizontal bends, reducers, tees, TS&V, TA&V, plugs and
caps using the appropriate earth pressure theories and state the
specific references if used in the design calculations.
(2) For blocks in cohesive soils, evaluate the soil resistance in terms of
short and long-term shear strengths and use the lowest resistance
between the two for the design.
(3) Calculated net soil resistance for the block is to be at least 1.5 times
the design pressure thrust force and 1.2 for the test pressure force.
(b) Upper vertical bends: Design the thrust blocks for upper vertical bends
such that the sum of the effective weight of the concrete, bend and fluid is
equal to or greater than the vertical component of the design thrust force.
(c) Lower vertical bends: Design the thrust blocks for lower vertical bends
such that the contact pressure at the bottom of the block is within the
allowable soil bearing capacity.
9) Earth bearing surface of thrust block shall be cast against either undisturbed
soil or structural fill.
10) Concrete strength of thrust block encasement shall be no less than 25 MPa.
11) Thrust blocks shall generally be configured similar to those shown in the RC
standard details. A rectangular shaped front face shall be used for the blocks
for horizontal bends, reducers, tees, plugs and caps if possible. The reasonable
range of depth to width ratio for the rectangular face shall be between 1 and 3.
10. Mechanical Equipment Support Structures
a. General: This section includes design requirements for the following:
1) Static Equipment Support Structure including Foundation
2) Dynamic Equipment Support Structure including Foundation
3) Pipe Supports
b. References:
1) ACI 351.1R – Grouting Between Foundations and Bases for Support of
Equipment
2) ACI 351.2R – Foundations for Static Equipment
3) ACI 351.3R – Foundations for Dynamic Equipment
c. Static Equipment Foundation:
1) Static Equipment Foundations shall be designed in accordance with the
provisions of the SBC 2018 and the following publications:
(a) ACI 351.2R – Foundations for Static Equipment.
(b) ASCE-7-10
d. Dynamic Equipment Foundation
1) Dynamic Equipment Foundations shall be designed in accordance with the
provisions of the SBC and the following publications:
(a) ACI 351.3R – Foundations for Dynamic Equipment

Rev. 1 5.2 - 64
(b) ASCE-7-10
2) Foundations for vibrating machinery shall be isolated from adjacent foundations
via isolation joints or other systems that allow independent system movement.
e. Pipe Support Systems:
1) Pipe support systems shall be designed in accordance with the following:
(a) SBC 301-18
(b) ASCE-7-10
2) Structural Engineer shall collect information for pipe stress analysis performed
by others for all pipe support systems including thermal forces, gravity forces,
and pressure piping forces.
3) Pipe supports shall be provided based on the pipe stress analysis reactions.
4) Pipe Support Analysis shall include the following
(a) Guide Pipe Supports
(b) Hanging Pipe Supports
(c) Feed Pipe Supports
11. Pipeline Corridor Structures
a. General
1) Introduction
(a) This section establishes minimum safety requirements for existing and
new pipeline support structures for the pipeline corridors under the
jurisdiction of the RC.
(b) Review of submittals for design and installation of pipeline structures in
the pipeline corridors requires coordination with other disciplines’ designs
(mainly, Civil Mechanical, and Electrical design).
b. Applicability
1) This section is applicable to the following in the RC area of jurisdiction:
(a) Pipeline assets operated by Industries in the pipeline corridors.
(b) Pipeline systems that transport hazardous liquids, petrochemicals and
gases.
2) This section does not apply to the following pipeline facilities:
(a) In-plant piping systems as defined in the Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and
Utility Corridors (UC) Regulations
(b) Pipelines outside the limits of the RC Pipelines and Utility Corridors
(c) Pipelines that have been exempted by the RC
c. Pipeline Support Structures
1) Structural Supports
(a) Industries shall always remain responsible for ensuring that their designs
and construction conform to their contract obligations and all applicable
regulations, Codes, and Standards. The design of pipe supports, pipe

Rev. 1 5.2 - 65
racks, pipe sleepers, cross access structures, expansion loops,

intersection support structures, foundations, and other related supports
carrying, anchoring, and guiding pipes shall be made to acceptable
industry Standards.
(b) Horizontal expansion loops may be used in the areas where such loops
currently exist and where there is sufficient space in accordance with the
applicable standards to allow their use without harming future expansion;
otherwise, vertical expansion loop systems shall be adopted by all projects
throughout Pipeline Corridors and Utility Corridors.
(c) The industry is responsible for providing its own anchors that are required
based on their own analysis of load conditions on the pipeline. Anchors
are not allowed TBA to any existing RC structure.
(d) All Pipe Supports shall be designed and constructed to resist stresses
produced by load combinations in accordance with the ASCE 7-10, PIP
STC01015-17, SBC 2018 and the requirements of this section.
(e) Any new structure or extension of an existing structure (except for a
cantilevered member that can accommodate only one pipe) must be
designed for full pipe load of 5 kN/m².
2) Design Loads and Load Combinations
Refer to PIP STC01015-17 Structural Design Criteria for other applicable design
loads and load combinations not listed herein.
(a) Symbols and Notations
(1) Ds = Structure dead load
(2) De = Empty dead load
(3) Do = Operating dead load
(4) T = self-straining load
(i) Ts = Self-straining load (sustained)
(ii) Tt = Self-straining load (temporary)
(5) L = Live load
(6) W = Wind load
(7) E = Seismic Load Effect which shall include both Eh and Ev with ρ =
1.0 for SDC = B
(i) Ee = Earthquake load (empty)
(ii) Eo = Earthquake load (operating)
(b) Strength Design Load Combinations for Pipe Racks, Pipe Bridges and
Pipe Supports (refer to PIP STC01015-17 Table 11)

Rev. 1 5.2 - 66
(1) 1.4(Ds + Do) + 1.2Ts

(2) 1.2(Ds + Do) + 1.2Ts + 1.0Tt + 1.6L
(3) 1.2(Ds + Do) + 1.2Ts + 0.5W
(4) 1.2(Ds + Do) + 1.2Ts + 1.0W + 0.5L
(5) 1.2(Ds + Do) + 1.2Ts + 1.0Eo + 0.5L
(6) 0.9(Ds + De) + 1.2Ts + 1.0W
(7) 0.9(Ds + Do) + 1.2Ts + 1.0W
(8) 0.9(Ds + De) + 1.2Ts + 1.0Ee
(9) 0.9(Ds + Do) + 1.2Ts + 1.0Eo
(c) Allowable Stress Design Load Combinations for Pipe Racks, Pipe Bridges
and Pipe Supports (refer to PIP STC01015-17 Table 10)
(1) Ds + Do + Ts
(2) Ds + Do + Ts + Tt
(3) Ds + Do + Ts + L
(4) Ds + Do + Ts + 0.6W
(5) Ds + Do + Ts + 0.7Eo
(6) Ds + Do + Ts + 0.75L + 0.75(0.6W)
(7) Ds + Do + Ts + 0.75L + 0.75(0.7Eo)
(8) 0.6(Ds + De) + Ts + 0.6W
(9) 0.6(Ds + Do) + Ts + 0.6W
(10) 0.6(Ds + De) + Ts + 0.7Ee
(11) 0.6(Ds + Do) + Ts + 0.7Eo
3) Exceptions to Factored and Nominal Load Combinations
(a) Effects of one or more loads not acting in whole or in part shall be investigated.
This includes patterning transient loads in continuous and cantilever framing.
(b) Increases in allowable stress shall not be used with the load combinations
given for Allowable Stress Design.
(c) E and W are permitted to be applied independently in each of two orthogonal
directions and orthogonal interaction effects are permitted to be neglected.
(d) Minus E and minus W directions shall be investigated.
4) Stability against Overturning, Uplift, Sliding, and Buoyancy
(a) Stability analyses shall demonstrate the ability of the structures to resist
overturning, uplift, sliding, and buoyancy, and that the allowable soil
bearing values are not exceeded. Stability shall be provided solely by
dead load plus permanent mechanical anchorages. In determining the
safety factors, allowance shall be made for the potential removal of
resisting dead loads (i.e., excavation, erosion, etc.).

Rev. 1 5.2 - 67
(b) Retaining wall sliding resistance shall be developed by friction (and

passive soil pressure where necessary) utilizing particularly detailed shear
keys to engage the friction-resistance plane below the plane of the
waterproofing and protection.
5) Deflections and Drift
(a) The maximum allowable vertical deflection of Pipe Supports determined
from ASD Load Combinations shall be L/400 (where L is the beam length),
except L/600 shall be used for pipe supports for fixed service equipment
and high temperature or pressure piping.
(b) Acceptable deflection shall also consider the parameters used in the
design of the piping and the pipe supports. Coordination between the
structure design and piping design is critical.
(c) Allowable wind drift limits for pipe racks and pipe support structures shall
not exceed Hy/100 where Hy is the height of the structure at any designated
level.
(d) Allowable wind drift limits for process structures and personnel access
platforms shall not exceed Hy/200 where Hy is the height of the structure
at any designated level.
(e) Allowable seismic drift limits shall be in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7-10.
6) Materials
(a) All materials shall conform to the Specifications and Serial Designations
herein. All steel materials shall be new.
(b) Structural design and material selection shall conform to the requirements
of the latest Industry Standards, RC specifications, standards published
by the Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO), and the documents
listed in Section 5.2.3.A herein.
(c) Design calculations shall conform to the RC requirements stipulated in this
manual, without exceptions.
(d) Civil Reference datum for all elevations shall be based on the Royal
Commission Datum.
7) Concrete Design
(a) All concrete Pipe Support elements shall be designed in accordance with
ACI 318M-14 with load factors and combinations given in this Guideline.
(b) Concrete formwork, constituents, proportions, and maximum water-
cement ratios shall be in accordance with the RC specifications.
(c) Reinforcing steel shall be fusion bonded epoxy-coated (FBEC) in
accordance with ASTM A775M and RC specifications.
(d) The classes of concrete for Pipe Support foundations shall be as in
TABLE 5.2.3.B:
TABLE 5.2.3.B. PIPE SUPPORT FOUNDATIONS
Minimum Cylinder
Structure Class of Concrete Compressive
Strength at 28 Days

Rev. 1 5.2 - 68
Structural concrete in contact with

C35 minimum with Type I
soil or exposed to weather, salt,
Portland cement and silica fume
salt water, brackish water, 35 MPa
pozzolanic replacement as per
seawater, or spray from these
RCSS 03 30 00, Section 2.15.J
sources
C30a or C30b minimum with

Type I Portland cement and
All other structural concrete 30 MPa
RCSS 03 30 00, Section 2.15.J
C20 with Type V Portland cement

Blinding Slabs, Mud Mats, and
as per RCSS 03 30 00, Section 20 MPa
Lean Concrete
2.15.J
(e) The concrete cover for reinforcing bars shall be 75 mm.

(f) The height of pipe support foundations above adjacent, finished grade
shall be 300 mm minimum.
(g) Pipe support drawings shall explicitly show and specify the foundation
waterproofing and protection, blinding slab, sand-cement screed,
chamfers, fillets, reglets, counter flashing, coal tar epoxy coating, concrete
class, concrete mix design, cementitious material, and FBEC reinforcing
requirements.
(h) Material designations for steel material in the pipeline corridor shall be as
shown in Table 5.2.3.C.
TABLE 5.2.3.C. MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates,

ASTM A36 or A992
Bars, and Fittings
Hollow structural shapes (HSS)

ASTM A500 Grade B
square, rectangular, and round
Pipes ASTM A53 Type E, Grade B
High-strength Bolts, Nuts, and ASTM A325, Type 1; Nuts – ASTM A563, Grade DH;
Washers for Joints Washers – ASTM F436, Type 1; all hot-dip galvanized
Anchor Rods (headed-type or ASTM A36 or F1554 Grade 36; Double nuts – ASTM
threaded/nutted with double nuts and A563, Grade DH; Plate washers – ASTM A36; all hot-
plate washers) dip galvanized
AWS D1.1, D1.4, and D1.6. Low hydrogen electrodes

Welding Processes and Electrodes with a minimum tensile strength of 480 MPa, (e.g.,
“E7018” for SMAW)
ASTM C150 Type I and V Cements; ASTM C618,

Cementitious Materials
C989, and C1240 Pozzolanic replacements

Rev. 1 5.2 - 69
ASTM C1107 with minimum 7 day compressive

Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout
strength at least twice the base concrete strength
ASTM A615, Grade 60 (420 MPa); ASTM A775M

Reinforcing Steel
Fusion bonded epoxy-coated reinforcing (FBECR)
Epoxy adhesives with hot-dip galvanized or stainless

Chemical Anchors steel high-strength bolt assemblies as manufacturer
by Hilti Corp. or approved equivalent
12. Electrical and Communication Structures

a. Substation electrical and communication structures are used to support above-grade
components and electrical equipment such as cable bus, rigid bus, and strain bus
conductors; switches; surge arresters; insulators; and other equipment. Substation
and switchyard structures may be fabricated from latticed angles that form chords
and trusses, wide flanges, tubes (round, square, and rectangular), pipes and
polygonal tubes (straight or tapered). Common materials used are concrete, steel,
aluminum, and wood.
b. References and Standards:
1) Saudi Building Code SBC 301-18 – Loads and Force Requirements
2) Saudi Building Code SBC 304-18 – Concrete Structures Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code SBC 305-18 – Masonry Structures Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code SBC 306-18 – Steel Structures Requirements
5) American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE-7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures
6) ASCE Engineering Practice Report 113
7) ASCE 48 - Design of Steel Transmission Pole Structures
8) ASCE Report No. 74 - Guidelines for Electrical Transmission Line Structural
Loading
9) ASCE Publication - Guide to Improved Earthquake Performance of Electric
Power Systems
10) ASCE Publication - Structural Reliability Based Design of Utility Pole Structures
11) ASCE-10
12) ASCE/SEI 48
c. Materials of Electrical and Communication Structures:
1) Steel Structures
(a) ASCE 10 is recommended for design of lattice structures using angles.
(b) AISC is recommended for design of structures using standard structural
shapes.
(c) ASCE/SEI 48 is recommended for design of structures using hollow
tubular member shapes.
2) Concrete Structures:
Rev. 1 5.2 - 70
(a) Concrete Structures are designed to accommodate cracking behavior. In

a corrosive environment, water may be absorbed into the open cracks and
corrode the reinforcing steel. Typical substation concrete structures shall
provide enough concrete cover to protect the reinforcing steel. For
structural members subjected to sustain flexural loading, such as dead-
end structures, it may be desirable to allow no tensile stress along the
member cross section under everyday loading conditions. This zero-
tension criterion will prevent cracks from staying open under normal
situations and will preclude the reinforcing steel from corroding.
(1) Reinforced Concrete Structures – Reinforced concrete structures
shall be engineered and configured in accordance with ACI 318M-14.
(2) Pre-stressed Concrete Structures – Pre-stressed concrete structures
shall be engineered and configured in accordance with PCI MNL-120.
This handbook uses the ultimate strength method with factored deign
loads, linear material properties, and second-order elastic analysis.
Member capacity reduction factors shall be used as specified in PCI
MNL-120.
(3) Pre-stressed Concrete Poles – The pre-stressed concrete pole type
structures, either static cast or spun cast, should be engineered and
configured in accordance with PCI. This guideline uses the ultimate
strength design method and, in general, follows all ACI and PCI
recommendations.
3) Aluminum Structures:
The United States Aluminum Association’s design criteria for aluminum
structures are recommended in this manual.
(a) Aluminum with Dissimilar Materials – Aluminum corrodes when in contact
with dissimilar materials such as steel, wood, or concrete. These dissimilar
materials have a different pH than that of aluminum. Aluminum Functions
best when in contact with material having a pH range of 5 to 9.
(1) Steel – Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with steel should
be given one coat of a zinc chromate primer or the equivalent, or one
coat of a suitable non-hardening joint compound that may exclude
moisture from the joint during prolonged service. Additional protection
may be obtained by applying the joint compound in addition to the
zinc chromate primer. The zinc chromate paint should be allowed to
dry before the parts are assembled. Aluminum surfaces to be placed
in contact with stainless, aluminized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-
galvanized steel need not be painted.
(2) Wood – Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with wood should
be given a heavy coat of an alkali-resistant bituminous paint before
installation. The paint should be applied in the condition in which it is
received from the manufacturer without the addition of any thinner.
(3) Concrete – Aluminum should not come into contact with wet concrete.
Aluminum reacts with the alkaline constituents of the cement and
generates hydrogen gas. They hydrogen gas will cause expansion of
the mortar and reduce the concrete’s compressive strength.
4) Wood Structures:

Rev. 1 5.2 - 71
(a) Ultimate Strength Design – Wood structures and poles shall be

engineered and configured in accordance with IEEE 751 and NESC. IEEE
751 describes a probabilistic and a deterministic method for designing
wood structures. ANSI-05.1 and O5.1c may be used for wood pole
stresses with the NESC 0.65 strength factor. Additional design information
may be found in NDS.
d. Design Loading:
1) All structures shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of 5.2.1.E.
2) The following loads described in ASCE 113 shall be included:
(a) Wire Tension Loads
(b) Terminal Connection Loads
(c) Concentrated Loads on Strain Bus Systems
(d) Substation Dead-End Structure Forces
13. Generator Support Structures
a. The generator shall be provided with a foundation and housekeeping pad sufficient
to support the weight of the equipment. This shall include the engine-generator, fuel
storage, batteries, and engine exhaust silencer and piping.
b. Vibration isolation shall be provided to avoid the transmission of vibration to the
surrounding occupancies. The selection of the vibration isolation shall address any
applicable seismic requirements and the sensitivities of the adjacent facilities.
c. Rotating and vibrating loads shall be individually considered and, where feasible,
shall be independently supported.
d. Natural Frequency
1) Structural supports of rotating and vibrating equipment shall be designed to
avoid resonant vibration with the equipment and limit amplitude to acceptable
values.
2) Acceptable values shall be verified with suppliers of individual equipment such
as motors, drives, etc.
3) Appropriate models considering mass, stiffness, and damping shall be used.
The equipment operation shall be examined to understand the acting forces.
4) If the design considers only the supporting beams, they shall be designed with
a ratio between the natural frequency (fn) and the equipment frequency (fe)
equal to or larger than the values given below.
Beam Span Type of Support Ratio fe /fn

 5.0 m 1.5
Directly connected to columns
 5.0 m 2.0
 5.0 m 2.0
Not directly connected to columns
 5.0 m 2.5
Otherwise, a complete 3D model is required for the supporting structure and
corresponding vibrations need to satisfy the vendor allowable criteria for
vibrations. If the criteria is not available, the Richard Chart presented below
needs to be satisfied.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 72
5) When detailed evaluation is warranted, the Designer shall ensure the

separation of the fundamental mode structural frequency from the machine
frequency. The recommended criteria is as follows:
(a) Structure frequency < 1/2 of machine operating frequency
(b) Structure frequency > 1.5 times machine operating frequency
6) Structures that shall be verified are those that support equipment that may
induce excessive vibration to the supporting structure, as for example: fans,
pumps, blowers, compressors and other similar equipment.
7) The global sway modes of the entire structure shall be calculated by means of
a structural model with concentrated masses on node points. Masses and
stiffness used for modeling shall be those needed for obtaining representative
frequencies of the dynamic response. Unbalanced forces, generated as a result
of operations, such as material build up on pulleys, belt misalignment, uneven
wear, shall be considered in analysis and design.
8) The soil/structure interaction shall be evaluated in the determination of
structural natural frequency.
e. Allowable Equipment Vibration
1) The below Richart Chart (FIGURE 5.2.3.B) sets general guidelines for vibration
amplitude. However, equipment and its functional activity must be carefully
considered in setting design amplitude to assure proper functioning and
personnel comfort in its operation. Vibration limits set by equipment suppliers
shall be verified and complied with.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 73
FIGURE 5.2.3.B RICHART CHART.
14. Concrete Duct Banks

a. General:
Concrete encased duct banks are a group of conduit or pipes that are fully encased
in concrete. The purpose of the encasement is to protect the utility lines from
superimposed ground loading and from being pierced by future excavation
equipment.
1) Minimum concrete compressive strength of duct banks shall be as follows:
(a) Not subjected to traffic loads = 20 MPa

Rev. 1 5.2 - 74
(b) Subjected to traffic loads = 35 MPa

2) All concrete duct banks shall be reinforced with minimum temperature
reinforcement in accordance with ACI 350.
3) All reinforcement shall be epoxy coated.
4) Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross concrete area shall be
based on the length between movement joints, and shall conform to ACI 350
Section 7.12. Maximum spacing of reinforcement bars shall be 450 mm;
minimum of one bar in each corner of duct bank.
5) Provide steel tie bars in the transverse direction enclosing the longitudinal bars
minimum size of 10 mm bars. Contractor is to determine the minimum spacing
of bars based on proper support of ducts during placement of concrete
minimum clear concrete cover over reinforcement steel shall be 75 mm where
concrete is cast directly against earth.
6) Special consideration requires where duct bank enters rigid underground
structures. Structural engineer shall provide details indicating method
employed to prevent differential settlement from damaging duct bank.
7) Top surface of duct bank shall be dyed red.
8) Ducts shall be installed with duct separators with no less than 5 separators in
3 m.
(a) Secure separators to earth to prevent uplift during concrete installation.
(b) Tie assembly together using fabric straps – metal ties are not to be used
to prevent conductive loops.
(c) Minimum duct spacing in banks 30 mm.
(d) Ducts should be placed no less than 500 mm below grade.
15. Security Crash Barriers
a. General:
Security crash barriers are designed to protect employees, visitors, and building
functions from unauthorized vehicle approach.
1) Security crash barriers are designed to meet crash test standards based on the
following publications:
(a) ASTM F 2656
(b) United States Department of State, SD-STD-02.01
(c) USA Department of Defense, UFC – 4-022
(d) FEMA 430, Perimeter Security Design
2) Security crash barriers are designed for the following load classification:
(a) K12: 6803 kg Truck traveling 80 Kph
(b) K8: 6803 kg Truck traveling 65 Kph
(c) K4: 6803 Kg Truck traveling 48 Kph
3) Project specifications dictate the required load level of design.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 75
4) Barrier Materials
(a) Steel or cast iron is the most effective barrier material and the most easily
installed, but requires regular maintenance.
(b) Reinforced Concrete barrier systems are more costly and require more
time to install but are maintenance free.
5) Types of Barriers
(a) Passive Barriers
(1) Fixed in Place Barriers preventing vehicle access.
(2) Walls, Berms, Fixed bollards, Engineered Planters, Fences.
(b) Active Barriers
(1) Used at vehicle access and control points
(i) Retractable bollards
(ii) Crash Gates
(iii) Rotating Wedge Systems
16. Supports for Signs, Luminaries, Traffic Signals
a. General: This provision applicable to structural support for Highway Signs,
Luminaries and traffic signals.
b. Type of supports:
1) Sign Supports:
(a) Overhead Signs:
Refer to FIGURE 5.2.3.C for types of overhead sign support structures used
in RC.
(b) Roadside Signs:
Refer to FIGURE 5.2.3.D for types of roadside sign support structures used
in RC.
2) Luminaire:
Luminaires are complete lighting units to illuminate highways, bridges, streets,
parks, playgrounds, etc. Types of street lightings used in RC are shown on
FIGURE 5.2.3.E.
3) Traffic Signals:
Refer to FIGURE 5.2.3.F for types of traffic signals support structures used in RC.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 76
OVERHEAD
FIGURE 5.2.3.C HIGHWAY
OVERHEAD SIGNS SIGNS
STRUCTURES.
A A
A A
Section A-A
OVERHEAD CANTILEVER
OVERHEAD BRIDGE SIGN SUPPORTS SIGN SUPPORTS
FIGURE 5.2.3.D ROADSIDE SIGNS.
SINGLE POST MULTI POST

ROADSIDE SIGN Side View ROADSIDE SIGN
FIGURE 5.2.3.E LUMINARIES.
STREET LIGHT STREET LIGHT TOP MOUNTED TOP MOUNTED

SINGLE ARM DOUBLE ARM LOW LEVEL HIGH LEVEL

Rev. 1 5.2 - 77
FIGURE 5.2.3.F TRAFFIC SIGNALS.
c. Design Requirements:
1) The Support Structures for signs, luminaires and traffic lights to be designed in
accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals (refer to Subsection 5.2.4).
2) Wind speed based on 3-second gust for JIC, RIC and YIC are listed in
Subsection 5.2.1.E.9.
3) The Design Life/Recurrence Interval shall be 50-years.
4) For overhead sign structures, cat walk TBA for future maintenance and lighting
fixture installation. Structural engineer shall design catwalk for min of 2 kN live
load over 750 mm x 750 mm area.
5) Hot-dipped galvanized or protected steel and hardware shall be used for
support structures. For corrosion protection for steel support structures, refer
to Subsection 5.2.6.
6) Luminaire structures may be Standard Aluminum Light Poles, Standard High
Mast Lighting, or custom design. In any case, structural engineer shall provide
full analysis and design calculation for RC approval.
7) Fluted poles luminaires support are only allowed on vertical posts that have a
single luminaire load at the top. No fluted vertical poles are allowed on the
Highways with luminaire arms that produce torsion in the vertical shaft.
8) A fluted shell cover that fits around the standard round pole can be used. The
fluted shell has a different drag coefficient and calculations are required for the
pole and foundation.
9) Structural engineer shall consider future addition, galloping, wind drag, truck
induced gust and fatigue in the design.
10) Full geotechnical investigation and geotechnical report required for foundation
design of support structures.
11) Foundation design of support structures shall be designed in accordance with
Sections 5.2 and 5.10 of this manual and AASHTO LRFD LTS Specifications.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 78
12) Any foundation to be designed for support structures height higher than 10 m
shall be designed without contribution of passive soil pressure.
13) AASHTO LRFD LTS Specifications require damping or energy absorbing
devices on aluminum overhead sign support structures to prevent vibrations
from causing fatigue failures.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 79
SUBSECTION 5.2.4 TRANSPORTATION STRUCTURES
5.2.4 TRANSPORTATION STRUCTURES
A. General
1. Introduction
construction of the Royal Commission (RC) structures carrying highway traffic loads, and
provides:
a. Guidance on preliminary planning, selection, design, and construction of these
structures.
b. Minimum technical requirements to be adopted by Consultants and/or A/E
Contractors to enable safety, quality, and cost effectiveness in the design and
construction of structures that meet the needs and expectations of the RC.
2. Applicability
structures on regular truck route sections of the RC highway network. This excludes
structures on the RC Module Path sections of the network, which are designed based on
the Module Path System Design Report.
3. Definitions
a. Abutment
Substructure unit supporting the ends of a bridge and, usually, retaining the approach
embankment.
b. Backwall
The portion of the abutment above the level of the bridge seat that primarily acts as a
retaining wall. It may also act as a support for the bridge deck and/or the approach
slab.
c. Bearing
A support element used to transfer loads from superstructure to substructure while
permitting some rotation and horizontal movement of the superstructure.
d. Bridge seat
Horizontal surface of the abutment stem upon which rest the pedestals and/or the
bearings.
e. Brush curb
A curb used with steel railing to channel water off of a bridge and preventing it from
falling onto the feature crossed.
f. Cofferdam
A watertight enclosure that permits dewatering of an excavation and for construction
in a waterway.
g. Concrete Barrier
A railing system of reinforced concrete having a traffic face that adopts some form of
a safety shape.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 80
h. Cross Section
A view taken transverse to the longitudinal axis of an element.
i. Culvert
A structure that provides passage of water or utilities through an embankment.
Usually constructed of precast concrete boxes, round concrete pipe, or elliptical
concrete pipe (Usually with a clear opening of less than 6.2 m).
j. Deck
That portion of a bridge that provides a riding surface for vehicular and/or pedestrian
traffic.
k. Fascia
The outside vertical edge of a concrete deck.
l. Fascia Girder
The outermost girder on each side of a bridge.
m. Feature Crossed
The roadway, railway, ravine, stream, or other physical feature that is crossed over by
the bridge.
n. Feature Carried
The roadway, railway, or pathway that is carried by the bridge.
o. Fixed Support
In terms of bridge bearings, a support that allows rotation only. In analysis, this type
of connection is commonly defined as ‘pinned’.
p. Skew Angle
The angle between the perpendicular to the centerline of the bridge and the centerline
of the pier.
q. Substructure
Any supporting member below the superstructure (such as abutments, piers, and wing
walls).
r. Superelevation
The cross slopes of a roadway at a horizontal curve.
s. Superstructure
That part of the structure above and supported by, the bearings.
t. Surcharge
Load that acts on a retaining wall in addition to normal soil forces, such as a vehicular
load or a building load.
u. U-wing wall
A wing wall that is parallel to the feature carried.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 81
v. Underdrain Filter
A method of conveying groundwater away from behind a wall or abutment using
porous medium and weep hole.
w. Vertical Clearance
The minimum vertical distance between the bottom of the structure and the surface of
the feature crossed.
x. Wing wall
A retaining wall placed adjacent to an abutment stem to retain the fill behind an
abutment (See in-line wing wall, flared wing wall, and U-wing wall).
4. Abbreviations
a. Technical requirements for the RC transportation structures shall not preclude
highway traffic interoperability within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
b. The following requirements shall be reflected in the design and construction of the
RC transportation structures covered under this subsection:
1) Structures shall have adequate configurations acceptable to the RC and shall
meet aesthetic and functional requirements of the project. Minimum aesthetic
design requirements are included in this section and detailed in the “RC
Guidelines for Aesthetic Design of Transportation Structures”.
2) Structures configurations shall include features such as simplicity, regularity,
integrity, redundancy, and ease of inspection, maintenance, and repair.
3) Structures shall demonstrate the high standards for safety, durability,
sustainability and cost effectiveness required by the RC.
6. Codes
Design and construction of all RC transportation structures shall be based upon the
requirements of this subsection and existing highway standards; these shall be from Saudi
Ministry of Transportation (MOT) to ensure interoperability, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), or those of the authority having
jurisdiction over the structure such as ARAMCO, SAR and SEC as most appropriate to the
individual application. Where the requirements stipulated by these standards are in conflict,
the most stringent shall govern unless otherwise noted herein and shall require the RC
approval. A listing of the adopted codes follows.
a. Volume 3 - Structural Design Specifications, Highway Design Manual, Ministry of
Transport (MOT), the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, 1992 as modified by the MOT
Circular 57026/01, 2015
b. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 9th Edition, 2020, and subsequent
interim revisions.
c. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 4th Edition (SI Units), 2007. Shall

Rev. 1 5.2 - 82
only be used to extract nominal SI units quantities for use with AASHTO LRFD 9th
Edition provisions.
d. AASHTO LRFD Guide Specifications for the Design of Pedestrian Bridges,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 2nd
Edition, 2014, and subsequent interim revisions
e. AASHTO LRFD Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaires, and Traffic Signals, American Association of State Highway and

Rev. 1 5.2 - 83
Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 1st Edition, 2017, and subsequent interim

revisions
f. AASHTO LRFD Road Tunnel Design and Construction Guide Specifications,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 1st
Edition, 2017, and subsequent interim revisions
g. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Guide Specifications for GFRP-Reinforced Concrete,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 2nd
Edition, 2018, and subsequent interim revisions.
h. AASHTO LRFD Guide Specifications for Design of Concrete-Filled FRP Tubes, 1st
i. AASHTO/AWS D1.5M/D1.5 Bridge Welding Code, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) and American Welding Society
(AWS), 7th Edition, 2015, and subsequent interim revisions.
j. AASHTO Manual for Bridge Evaluation, American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 3rd Edition, 2018, and subsequent interim
revisions.
k. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 4th Edition, 2017, and subsequent
interim revisions.
l. AASHTO LRFD Guide Specifications for Bridges Carrying Light Rail Transit Loads,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 1st
m. Manual for Railway Engineering, the American Railway Engineering and
Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA), 2016 Edition.
7. Standards
a. FHWA publication - FHWA - FHWA-HIF-18-046 Manual for Refined Analysis in
Bridge Design and Evaluation, 2019.
b. PCI Bridge Design Manual (MNL-133-11), 3rd Edition, PCI, 2011.
c. FHWA publication - FHWA - FHWA-HIF-15-016 Post-Tensioned Box Girder Design
Manual, 2016.
d. FHWA publication - FHWA - FHWA-NHI-13-026 Post-Tensioning Tendon Installation
and Grouting Manual, 2013.
e. AASHTO Guide Specifications for Design and Construction of Segmental Concrete
Bridges, American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO), 2nd Edition, 2003, and subsequent interim revisions.
f. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), 29th
Edition, 2018.
g. FHWA publication - FHWA - FHWA-HIF-16-002 (Vol. 1&2) Steel Bridge Design
Handbook, 2015.
h. FHWA publication - FHWA - FHWA-IF-12-027 Manual for Design, Construction, and
Maintenance of Orthotropic Steel Deck Bridges, 2012.
i. FHWA publication - FHWA - FHWA-HIF-19-088 Steel Bridge Welding Reference
Manual, 2019.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 84
j. AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design, American

Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 2nd Edition,
2012, and subsequent interim revisions.
k. AASHTO A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 7th Edition,
2018
l. AASHTO Bridge Aesthetics Sourcebook, American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 1st Edition, 2010, and subsequent interim
revisions.
m. Royal Commission for Jubail, Guidelines for Aesthetics Design of Transportation
Structures, 1st edition, 2016.
f. Section 4.4 Field Investigations and Existing
Conditions
9. Approvals
The RC will review and act on all design reports, drawings and specifications.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning shall verify that the new/rehabilitated structure achieves project requirements
as intended by the RC and as designed by the Consultant and/or A/E Contractor.
C. Structures Groups
The principles, guidelines, and requirements specified under this subsection shall apply to the
RC transportation structures groups defined in TABLE 5.2.4.A. The table provides concept
designs for the types of structures that would be required to carry RC highways over existing
roadways and terrain. Additional structures also covered under this subsection include
pedestrian bridges, earth-retaining structures, cut, and cover tunnel structures.
TABLE 5.2.4.A. APPLICABLE STRUCTURES
Group Structure
Configuration Structure type
Designation
1 Drainage/utility Culvert Roadway over Precast box/three-sided/arch/ steel or FRP
culvert reinforced concrete,
2 Bridge over pipelines Roadway over Three-sided/arch reinforced concrete
pipelines culvert structures

Rev. 1 5.2 - 85
3 Bridge over drainage Roadway over Prestressed/reinforced/three-sided/arch

channel/terrain drainage reinforced concrete structure
channel/terrain
4 Bridge over roadway Roadway over
Prestressed/reinforced concrete structure
roadway
5 Bridge over rail Roadway over Prestressed/three-sided/arch reinforced
railway track concrete structure/reinforced concrete
structure
D. Related Specifications and Details
E. Preliminary Design and Planning
1. Scoping
During scoping/early planning phase of the project the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
establish genuine consensus about the nature of the proposed project and what is to be
accomplished regarding:
a. Project objectives.
b. Design criteria.
c. Feasible alternates and reasonable cost estimate(s) for each.
2. Structure Geometry
a. Alignment and Layout
1) Alignment and layout of structures shall be established based on the geometry
of the feature the structure carries and crosses, and the structure’s aesthetics
design criteria of the project.
2) Structure’s horizontal alignment for centerline and foundation setout points,
shall be established in accordance with the structure’s alignment and layout.
3) Vertical alignment for RC Groups 3, 4, and 5 structures shall be established in
accordance with the profile of the roadways they carry, and shall meet
controlling vertical clearance requirements for the features the structures cross.
4) Vertical alignment and profile for Groups 1 and 2 structures, profile and vertical
clearance requirements shall be governed by the type of application and/or
those of the authorities having jurisdiction over the structures.
5) Horizontal and vertical alignments for all structures shall meet the horizontal
and vertical clearance requirements of the geometric design criteria of the
project.
6) Structure’s length shall be determined based on the roadway alignment, width
of the feature crossed, geotechnical site conditions, economy, and aesthetic
requirements of the project.
7) Structure's width shall be determined based on the width of the roadway the
structure carries and the specific requirements in the project objectives.
8) Structures area shall be calculated based on abutment centerline-to-centerline
length and structure’s width.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 86
b. Vertical Clearance
1) Highway structure minimum Vertical Clearance over the carriageway is 5.5 m.
The minimum Vertical Clearance shall be provided across all lanes, shoulders,
and edge strips. Vertical clearance to sign supports and pedestrian overpasses
shall be 500 mm greater than highway structure clearance and vertical
clearance from the roadway to overhead cross bracing of through truss
structures shall not be less than 6.0 m.
2) Structures over navigable waters shall have a minimum vertical clearance of
6.5 m above maximum navigable pool elevation or as determined based on the
design vessel. Specified minimum clearance is estimated based on clearance
requirements for common barges with tugboats, sailing boats, and yachts
navigating similar waterways to those crossed by the RC structures. Water
depth shall be no less than 4.5 m from normal pool elevation or as determined
based on investigation of the specific site. Actual vertical clearance for a bridge
over navigable waterway may be investigated based on, but not limited to,
existing, upstream and downstream clearances, and type and size of vessels
utilizing the waterway. The RC shall make a determination on increasing the
specified minimum vertical clearances based on the outcome of the
investigation. Ordinary high water elevation for non-tidal or mean high water
for tidal areas shall be used when determining minimum vertical clearance.
Water depth shall be determined from normal pool elevation in non-tidal waters
or mean sea level in tidal areas.
3) Navigational clearances, both horizontal and vertical, shall be established in
cooperation with the Kingdom Coast Guard and coordinated with other
agencies having jurisdiction over the structure.
4) Reduction in vertical clearance due to support settlement shall be accounted
for in the vertical clearance calculations, if such settlement exceeds 25 mm.
c. Hydraulic Clearance
1) Hydraulic structures falling under Group 1 shall be designed such that adequate
opening is provided for a 100-years design flood and for the passage of debris.
A minimum freeboard of 600 mm for the 100-years flood shall be considered
as satisfying normal hydraulic clearance requirements for Jubail and Ras Al-
Khair. The freeboard may be increased to 750 mm for sites where the risk of
debris clogging the structure is high. This requirement follows common practice
in the US that calls for a minimum of 600 mm of freeboard, and allowing for an
additional 150 mm for sand/debris depositing in the bottom of the culvert.
2) The minimum freeboard may be increased, based on additional investigation
at the site's history of debris, changes in water surface elevations, consequence
of debris clogging, potential damage, and the degree of difficulty of performing
necessary repairs.
d. Structure Roadbed
1) Width
The full road cross section is to be carried over bridge structures. Concrete bridge
railing shall be installed under the following scenarios:
(a) At outer edges.
(b) On all roads in the Industrial area and on freeways in the community area,
where the median is at least 8 m wide, bridge railing shall be placed 1 m

Rev. 1 5.2 - 87
behind the sidewalk. This 1 m shall be constructed as a raised sidewalk,

locally across the structure only, in which utility ducts/troughs may be
provided for street lighting and emergency telephone cables.
(1) Barriers are generally placed in compliance with the AASHTO
standards referenced in this section.
(2) If the design intends to provide a raised verge or sidewalk, care shall
be taken with regards to the proposal of a roadside barrier in
combination with a curb.
(3) The A/E shall carefully consider the safety requirements of vulnerable
road users such as pedestrians and cyclists.
(c) On community roads other than freeways, the bridge railing may be
located behind the normal 1 m sidewalk.
2) Median Edge
(a) On freeway bridges, railing shall be located immediately behind the 2 m
paved shoulder.
(b) On expressways, where the normal cross section has a raised median with
no hard shoulder, the median curb shall be carried over the structure with
the bridge railing located 1 m behind the face of the curb.
(c) In case of collector roads or other situations with narrow medians, the
median shall be decked unless directed otherwise by the RC.
3) Alignment at Structures
(a) Superelevation transitions almost always result in an unsightly
appearance of the bridge and the bridge railing. Therefore, if possible,
horizontal curves should begin and end a sufficient distance from the
bridge so that no part of the superelevation transition extends onto the
bridge.
(b) If the superelevation transition is unavoidable because of alignment and/or
safety considerations, the A/E and or EPC Contractor shall prepare special
rendering of the structure with proposed treatment to reduce the
superelevation impact on the structures’ aesthetics.
4) Depressed grade line under structures
It frequently simplifies bridge design if the low point in the grade line is set a
sufficient distance from the intersection of the centerlines of the structure and
the highway so that drainage structures clear the structure footings.
5) Grade line on bridge decks
Vertical curves on bridge decks shall provide a minimum fall of 70 mm per 100
m. The flattest allowable tangent grade shall be 0.12%, but on long bridges
where drainage is confined to the bridge deck, this shall be increased to 0.25%.
e. Structures over Existing Roads
Every effort shall be made to phase work in such a way that traffic may be re-routed
away from bridges that have to be constructed over existing roads. Alternatively, and
subject to available right of way (ROW), the AE and/or EPC Contractor may include
temporary details in the Contract. As a last resort, where falsework has to be erected
over traffic during construction, the following criteria shall be followed:

Rev. 1 5.2 - 88
1) The minimum width of traffic opening through falsework for various lane and
shoulder requirements is shown in TABLE 5.2.4.B
TABLE 5.2.4.B. FALSEWORK SPAN AND DEPTH REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Minimum
Facility Resulting
Width of Opening Width Depth
to be Falsework
Traffic Provides For Required for
Spanned Normal Span2
Opening (m) Falsework1
1 Lane + 2.4 m &
1.5 m Shoulders
7.6 2 Lane + 2.4 m & 9.8 m 0.5 m
11.3 1.5 m Shoulders 13.4 m 0.7 m
Freeway
14.9 3 Lane + 2.4 m & 17.1 m 0.8 m
18.6 1.5 m Shoulders 20.7 m 1.0 m
4 Lane + 2.4 m &
1.5 m Shoulders
1 Lane + 0.6 &
1.2 m Shoulders
2 Lane + 0.6 &
6.1 8.2 m 0.5 m
1.2 m Shoulders
9.8 11.9 m 0.6 m
Non- 2 Lane + 0.6 &
12.2 14.3 m 0.7 m
Freeway 2.4 m Shoulders
15.8 18.0 m 0.8 m
3 Lane + 0.6 &
19.5 21.6 m 1.0 m
2.4 m Shoulders
4 Lane + 0.6 &
2.4 m Shoulders
1. Includes 2.1 m for 2 temporary metal beam guardrails.

2. No temporary railing provided.
2) When metal beam guardrail is used to protect the false work, space must be
provided for its bending/deformation as per the Kingdom – Highway Design
Manual.
3) In special cases, where existing restraints make it impractical to comply with
the minimum widths of traffic openings set forth in TABLE 5.2.4.B, a lesser
width may be used if approved by the RC.
4) The minimum temporary vertical clearance shall be 4.5 m.
5) The use of temporary vertical clearances less than 4.5 m shall require approval
by the RC.
6) To establish the grade of a structure to be constructed with a falsework
opening, allowance must be made for the depth of the falsework. The minimum
depths required for various widths of traffic opening are shown in Appendix I.
7) Where vertical clearances, either temporary or permanent, are critical, close
coordination shall be required during the early design stage when the

Rev. 1 5.2 - 89
preliminary grades, structure depths and falsework depths may be adjusted

without incurring major design changes.
8) Because the width of traffic openings through falsework may significantly affect
costs, special care shall be given to determining opening widths. The following
shall be considered:
(a) Staging and traffic handling requirements.
(b) The width of approach roadbed at the time the bridge is constructed.
(c) Traffic volumes.
(d) Controls in the form of existing facilities.
(e) Desires of the Roads Department.
9) Practical problems of falsework construction:
(a) After establishing the opening requirements, a field review of the bridge
site shall be made to ensure that existing facilities (drainage, other bridges
or roadways) are not in conflict with the falsework.
(b) Advance warning devices shall be specified or shown on the plans. Such
devices may consist of flashing lights, overhead signs, over-height
detectors, or a combination of these or other devices.
(c) Placement and removal of falsework requires special consideration.
During these operations, traffic shall either be stropped for short intervals
or diverted away from the span where placement or removal operations
are being performed.
f. Railing
1) General
(a) Concrete Barrier/Parapet safety crashworthy bridge railing shall be used
on all bridges for protection of traffic and pedestrians as per MOT and
AASHTO LRFD standards. Bridge railings and attachment to the deck
overhang shall meet the structural and geometric requirements of Test
Level 5 (TL-5) safety performance criteria provided in AASHTO LRDF
Section 13, unless unfavorable site conditions justify the use of Test Level
6 (TL-6).
(b) The following Design Forces for Traffic Railing Test Level 5 and Test Level
6 shall replace the values listed in AASHTO LRFD Table A13.2-1. Note
that no changes are required for the length and height dimensions.
Design Forces and Railing Test Levels

Designations
TL-5 TL-6
Ft Transverse (N) 850,000 850,000
FL Longitudinal (N) 284,000 284,000
FV Vertical (N) Down 600,000 600,000
2) Approach Railings
(a) Approach railings shall be provided at the ends of bridge railings, exposed
to approach traffic. On divided highways, railings shall be placed to the

Rev. 1 5.2 - 90
left and right of approach traffic. On two-way roadbeds, railings shall be

placed on both sides of each end of the structure.
(b) Metal beam guardrail, with cable anchor breakaway, shall be used for
bridge approach railing. However, concrete “safety shape” rail may be
used for better appearance where long structures/viaducts are involved
and the structure has concrete bridge railing.
(c) When long runs of guardrail (such as embankment guardrail) precede the
bridge, the guardrail shall connect to the bridge railing and thus serve the
approach railing function. Approach railings shall be flared at their
exposed end.
(d) Physical connection shall be provided between approach rails and bridge
rails to prevent vehicles from deflecting the guardrail and continue driving
onto the end of the more rigid bridge railing.
g. Drainage
1) Transverse drainage of the bridge roadway shall be accomplished by providing
a suitable crown in the roadway surface and longitudinal drainage shall be
accomplished by camber or gradient. Water flowing downgrade in a gutter
section shall be intercepted and not permitted to run onto the bridge.
2) Short continuous span bridges, particularly overpasses, may be built without
inlets and the water from the bridge roadway carried downslope by open and
closed chutes near the end of the bridge structure. Longitudinal drainage on
long bridges is accomplished by means of scuppers or inlets, of the required
sizes and numbers to drain the gutters.
3) Downspouts, where required, shall be of rigid corrosion-resistant materials shall
be provided with cleanouts. The details of deck drains shall be such as to
prevent the discharge of drainage water against any portion of the structure and
to prevent erosion at the outlet of the downspout. Overhanging portions of
concrete deck shall be provided with a drip notch located 100 mm from the
edge of the deck.
4) The number and size of deck drains shall be kept to a minimum and be
consistent with hydraulic design requirements.
5) The minimum internal dimension of the downspout shall be not less than 300
mm.
6) Proper drainage details shall be provided behind abutment wing walls such that
runoff water is not collected at the back of the walls (behind the walls).
7) Proper drainage details shall be provided behind culvert end walls and wing
walls such that runoff water is not collected at the back of the walls. Grouted
riprap 500 mm wide or concrete swale of similar width shall be provided at these
locations.
8) Additional drainage considerations:
(a) Provide a minimum 100 mm projection below the lowest superstructure
component.
(b) Location of pipe outlets shall be such that a 45-degree splash zone will not
dampen structural components.
(c) Use slots in parapets where practical and permissible.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 91
(d) Provide drain clean-outs.

(e) Provide pipe drain bends no greater than 45 degrees.
(f) Route bridge drainage runoff in a manner meeting safety and
environmental requirements.
F. Structure Selection
1. Material
a. Although concrete is the preferred material for the RC transportation structures,
steel may be considered as an alternative material for certain structures. This
section provides guidance on use of steel for these structures. Other factors related
to consideration of steel for RC transportation structures include structure’s
relationship to the total project, aesthetics, geographical location, site accessibility,
and constructability.
b. Steel structures may be considered for the following situations:
1) For curved spans with mid-ordinate corrections exceeding 300 mm, if their
advantages over prestressed/reinforced concrete construction could be
established.
2) For spans with restricted clearances, if their smaller depth advantages over
prestressed concrete is demonstrated.
3) For locations where either long piles or poor bearing capacity is anticipated, if
their lighter weight advantages over prestressed concrete could be
substantiated.
4) For pedestrian skyways between buildings, pedestrian bridges, and for carrying
utility lines over terrain.
5) For spans on vertical curves, since the camber can be fabricated and controlled
with greater accuracy, if advantages over prestressed concrete could be
demonstrated. Accommodating curve correction by placing a variable depth
deck slab, generally, is not desired as it results in considerable additional dead
load and hence deeper structures.
2. Concrete Superstructure
a. Precast or cast-in-place concrete units
1) Four-sided boxes have a maximum practical single cell span of approximately
7.5 m. Their concrete inverts may raise objections in sensitive fishing areas,
where a natural stream bed is preferred. Various methods may be used to
design these boxes that could be used for spans ranging from 3 m (single cell)
to 30 m (multiple cells).
2) Three-sided units, with a frame or arch corner shape, have a maximum span
of approximately 12 m. These units are usually supported on strip footings
founded on rock or piles. A precast or cast-in-place full invert slab/footing unit
may also be used.
3) Both of the above units shall be used with a minimum fill of 600 mm.
b. Precast Arches
1) Precast arch units are generally available as proprietary systems of standard
geometry designed for use with specified fill properties. Proprietary precast
arch systems manufacturer shall demonstrate arch systems static
Rev. 1 5.2 - 92
indeterminacy, alternative load paths, reliability and robustness to ensure

redundancy. Industry standards should be consulted for available arch sizes
and limitations on customization of those systems.
2) Three-sided and precast arches units may be used for many of the same
situations identified for large pipes. In order to obtain the necessary headroom
for some cases, the units may be raised by supporting them on pedestals or
conventional retaining walls.
3) Use of multi-cell units to convey waterways may not be appropriate when the
risk of debris catching and accumulating at the intermediate piers is high.
c. Spans Between 3 m and 30 m
1) Prestressed concrete voided slabs of standard AASHTO sections may be used
to a maximum span of about 17.5 m. Prestressed concrete box units, concrete
I-beams, bulb-tee sections are used for longer spans.
2) Prestressed box and voided slab systems, are generally designed with
diaphragms provided within unit sections at each support to resist transverse
rotations, displacements and cross sectional distortion, and designed to resist
torsional moments and transmit vertical and shear forces from the
superstructure to the bearings.
3) Prestressed box and voided slab structures must be analyzed for construction
loads and forces that arise during jacking of the structure during bearing
maintenance and replacement.
4) Intermediate diaphragms are required for box and voided slab structures.
Diaphragm requirements and layout are described in this manual.
d. Spans Between 31 m and 60 m
1) Modified prestressed concrete box beams (modified shapes of standard
AASHTO sections) up to 1.4 m deep may be used for spans up to 30 m.
Modified prestressed concrete box beams up to 2 m deep may be used for
continuous arrangements for spans up to 45 m. Prestressed concrete I-beams
and bulb-tee beams ranging from 1.4 m to 2.0 m in depth may be used for
spans up to approximately 46 m. Composite steel plate girder systems can
easily and economically span this range. Once the single span exceeds 50 m,
alternate multiple span arrangements shall be considered. The cost of
additional substructures must be compared to the greater superstructure cost.
2) Precast concrete beams are not recommended for spans over 50 m.
e. Multiple Span Arrangements.
1) For multiple span bridges, a continuous design shall be adopted whenever
possible to eliminate deck joints. In the case of multiple simple span
prestressed bridges, the deck slab shall be made continuous for live load over
the intermediate supports.
2) If aesthetically acceptable, arrangements ranging from equal span viaduct type
structures to proportionally increasing span ratios shall be evaluated during
preliminary design.
3) Required beam depth for multiple span, prestressed box and voided slab
structures is the same as for a single span with the identical span length.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 93
f. Spans over 90 m
1) Multiple span arrangements in this range generally involve balancing
superstructure and substructure costs to achieve an optimum design. Site
restrictions often hamper efficient substructure placement.
2) Long multiple span structures can utilize a variety of construction types and
materials.
(a) Segmental box designs consisting of precast match cast or cast-In-place.
(b) Cable-stayed trapezoidal boxes.
(c) Deck arches.
(d) Segmental viaduct and variable depth units.
3. Steel Superstructure
a. Spans less than 12 m
1) Prestressed concrete voided slab units and concrete decks with steel girders
cover this entire span range. Conventional reinforced concrete slabs, however,
are inefficient for spans greater than 7.5 m due to their excessive depth and
heavy reinforcement.
b. Spans Between 12 m and 60 m
1) Conventional composite design systems utilizing concrete decks and steel
stringers may be used for the entire span range. At the lower end of the span
range, rolled beam sections are typically used. Fabricated, welded plate
girders are more likely be used at the upper end.
2) Special prefabricated bridge panels with composite concrete decks and steel
beams may reach spans approaching 30 m. They have the advantage of
reduced field construction time.
c. Span Between 61 m and 90 m
Single span bridges in this range have few options. For the majority of the cases only a
thru or deck truss shall be considered. Plate girders may be used at the lower end of
this span range. Special designs utilizing arches, slant leg rigid frames, and concrete or
steel box girders are also viable options. These types of special structures are used to
address limited member depths, aesthetics and compatibility with site conditions. The
RC will have a greater input into these larger structures. Live load model as well as
constructability concerns and possible alternatives shall be discussed, in detail, with the
RC for structures in this span range.
d. Multiple Span Arrangements
Continuous design using steel rolled beams or built-up plate girders takes into account
the continuity over the interior support points. Based on the span arrangements and the
span ratios, the largest span of a continuous layout may be equated to a smaller
equivalent simple span. This reduces the required beam depth for the span. Poor
continuous span ratios may result in uplift. Tie-down system and anchored end spans
are two means of addressing uplift. Refer to TABLE 5.2.4.C.
TABLE 5.2.4.C. MULTIPLE SPAN ARRANGEMENTS
Ratio of Spans Span to Depth Ratios

Rev. 1 5.2 - 94
Number Equivalent Simple

Desired Maximum
of Spans Span
2 1.0:1.0 10.90 X 1.0 span 27.5 302
3 0.75 : 1.0 : 0.75 10.85 x 1.0 span 27.5 302
4 0.8 : 1.0 :1.0 : 0.80 10.75 x 1.0 span 27.5 302
5 0.6 : 0.80 : 1.0 : 0.80 : 0.60 10.60 x 1.0 span 27.5 302
1 For span arrangements with less efficient ratios, the equivalent factor may be
adjusted proportionally upward (i.e., 0.85 up to 0.90, 0.75 up to 0.85 and 0.60 up to
0.75).
2 Ratios greater than 30 may be used as long as the live load deflection criteria are
not exceeded.
e. Spans over 90 m
1) Multiple span arrangements in this span range generally involves balancing
superstructure and substructure costs to achieve an optimum design. Site
restrictions will often hamper efficient substructure placement. The RC will have
a greater input into these larger structures. Live load model as well as
constructability concerns and possible alternatives shall be discussed, in detail,
with the RC for structures in this span range.
2) Long multiple span structures may utilize a variety of construction types and
materials.
(a) Thru or deck trusses with girder approach spans.
(b) Trapezoidal box beams.
(c) Variable depth girders (“I” shaped beams and box girders).
(d) Cable-stayed girders or box beams.
(e) Deck or thru arches.
(f) Suspension bridges.
4. Abutments
a. General
Abutments serve two principal functions. They support the bridge superstructure
and retain earth of the roadway approach immediately adjacent to the bridge.
Therefore, a bridge abutment combines the functions of a pier and a retaining wall.
1) Cantilevered Abutment
(a) Cantilevered abutments consist of a central stem supporting the bridge
seat backwall and pedestals. A backwall on top of the stem and wing walls
on either side of the stem retains the fill behind the abutment. The stem
and wing walls rest upon a continuous footing that may be either soil or
pile supported.
The structural reinforcing steel in a cantilevered abutment is designed to
withstand the overturning forces that cause tension in the back of the stem

Rev. 1 5.2 - 95
and backwall. In addition, design of footing reinforcement is required and

depends on the type of foundation selected.
(b) Cantilevered abutments have no limit on the skew angle; however, bridges
with less skew perform significantly better than highly skewed bridges.
(c) There is no limit on span for superstructure used with cantilevered
abutments. The abutment shall be designed to support all applied
superstructure loads. Thermal expansion of the superstructure shall be
accounted for by the use of an expansion joint or appropriate jointless
details.
(d) There are three different forms of the cantilevered abutment:
(1) When the abutment is placed so that the abutment has as little reveal
above the ground surface as allowed, it is called a stub-cantilevered
abutment.
(2) When the abutment has the largest possible reveal with respect to
the clearances required for the feature crossed, it is called a
cantilevered high abutment.
(3) An abutment that falls between these two extremes is called a
cantilevered semi-high abutment.
2) Isolated Pedestal Stub Abutment
(a) Isolated pedestal stub abutments have tall pedestals that rest directly on the
footing and have no bridge seat. They have a backwall between the pedestals
and wing walls on each side to retain the fill. The footing may be either soil or
pile supported.
1) Spill Through Abutment
(a) Spill through, or open, abutment consists of two or more vertical columns
carrying a beam that supports the bridge seat and pedestals. The fill extends
on its natural slope from the bottom of the beam through the openings in the
columns. In an extreme form the spill through abutment is no more than a row
of vertical piles driven through the fill and supporting a bridge seat and
pedestals. The stem is usually provided with small wing walls to keep the
bridge seat free of soil. Spill through abutments are economical, however,
they require proper drainage details be provided for the structure and
approaches, to prevent water penetration and washout of the fill soil.
5. Wing walls
a. General
1) Wing walls are retaining walls placed adjacent to the abutment stem to retain
the fill behind the abutment. The orientation of the wall in relation to the
centerline of bearings or centerline of the roadway determines the wing wall
type.
2) When the wing walls are parallel to the roadway, they are called U-wing walls.
U-wing walls are used primarily in fill situations where there are obstructions or
limited right of way on either side of the roadway to build a wide embankment.
The length of the U-wing wall is determined by equating the point where the
embankment slope meets the shoulder break (where the roadway shoulder
changes slope at the embankment) elevation from the roadway. The
intersection shall occur at the inside corner of the top of the wing wall. The
Rev. 1 5.2 - 96
elevation of the end of the U-wing wall shall be set at this intersection and stated
on the plans.
3) When the wing walls are parallel to the centerline of bearings they are called
in-line wing walls. These wing walls are used when the abutment is relatively
short and there are no obstructions or right of way limitations on either side of
the highway. The end of an in-line wing wall is located where the slope from
the shoulder break meets the under-bridge embankment slope. The
intersection shall occur at the rear corner of the wing wall. Elevation of the top
of the wing wall shall be 200 mm higher than this intersection and stated on the
plans.
4) When the wing walls are turned back towards the retained fill but not parallel to
the roadway, they are called flared wing walls. These wing walls are used when
the abutment fill would spill out too far for in-line wing walls, but there are not
enough restrictions to justify U-wing walls. The end of a flared wing wall is
located where the shoulder break from the roadway meets the under-bridge
embankment slope. The intersection shall occur at the rear corner of the wing
wall.
5) Curved wing walls shall be avoided whenever possible. If it is necessary to
provide a curved wing wall, it is best to place a widened footing on a chord and
only curve the top portion of the wall. Curved wing walls should never be
battered since the forming is extremely difficult.
6. Piers
‘Pier’ is used here to refer to an intermediate support for a bridge superstructure, between
the abutments, extending from below the ground surface to the bottom of the
superstructure.
Piers may be required because of long spans, beam depth restrictions, or both. The pier
may be a support point along a continuous superstructure, or it may be at the end of one
simple span and the beginning of another. In either case, the pier must be designed to
safely resist the dead, live, seismic and other loads introduced from the superstructure
while resisting any loads acting on the pier from floodwater, ice flow, wind, and vehicular
or ship impact.
a. Pier Types
1) Solid Piers
A solid pier (pier wall) consists of a solid mass of reinforced concrete, without
overhangs, that is usually rectangular in plan. Solid piers are used primarily for
river or stream crossings, low clearance bridges, bridges over divided highways
with narrow medians, and where short columns on wide bridges would have high
stress due to shrinkage. Solid Piers may also be used to meet crash protection
requirements adjacent to railroads.
2) Hammerhead Pier
With increasing pier height and narrow superstructures, the hammerhead pier
becomes more economical by reducing the required amounts of material and
formwork. Hammerhead piers consist of a single large column with a cap beam
overhanging on either side. Both the column and cantilevered ends of the cap
beam support the superstructure beams. When located in a waterway, pier
protection may be required.
3) Multiple Columns

Rev. 1 5.2 - 97
When piers need to be tall and wide, a multiple column pier is usually the best
choice. This pier type consists of two or more columns that may be either
rectangular or circular. The columns are usually connected by a cap beam that
supports the superstructure at points between the columns. For some highly
skewed bridges with large beam spacing, it may be necessary to place individual
columns under each bearing and to connect the top of the columns with a simple
tie strut. When there are only two columns with overhangs, this pier is called a pi
pier. Circular piers are aesthetically less attractive than rectangular piers and are
not recommended for use in residential areas.
4) Free Standing Columns
This type of pier consists of freestanding individual columns usually supporting a
voided slab or box type continuous superstructure. Unlike multiple columns, the
freestanding columns are not connected with a cap beam that transmits
superstructure loads to the columns. Instead, superstructure loads are transmitted
to the columns through an interior diaphragm embedded in the superstructure.
7. Cap Beams
A feature of most multi-column piers is the presence of the cap beam. This cap beam is
subject to many design considerations that are not applicable to any other type of pier. The
width of the cap beam is governed by the necessary width to support the bridge bearings
with sufficient cover for the anchor bolts and the required support length for the beams.
When the simply supported end of a beam rests on a pier, seismic criteria dictates the
support length required. Support length (N) in the longitudinal direction shall be measured
perpendicular to the centerline of bearings. Support length (N) in the transverse direction
shall be measured perpendicular to the centerline of the beam. Round columns require
that the cap beam be a least 50 mm wider than the columns on all sides.
For cap beam cantilever ends where the fascia beam loads fall within a distance “d” form
the column face, the actual behavior of the cantilever end may not be compatible with beam
theory and must be checked against the requirements of AASHTO LRFD, Special
Provisions for Brackets and Corbels. An alternative method to analyze such cantilever
ends is the strut and tie method described in the AASHTO LRFD. Both the Bracket and
Corbel and the Strut and Tie methods recognize that direct shear is the primary behavioral
mode instead of flexure, and is resisted by tension reinforcement across the shear plane.
As a result of these methods, more reinforcement may be required in the top of the
overhang than would be required if a normal cantilevered beam is assumed.
8. Foundations
a. Substructure Location
When deciding where to locate the substructures, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
identify all appropriate horizontal offsets, standards and requirements. Utilizing these
constraints and the shoulder break length, the determination of whether a single or
multiple span arrangements is the most appropriate shall be made. The available
beam depth is factored in along with any special concerns such as:
1) Sheeting requirements for staging and substructure construction. Cantilever
sheeting design vs. tied-back sheeting vs. pile and lagging wall costs.
2) Deep-water cofferdam construction vs. shallower depths or causeway
construction.
3) Treatments such as high abutments with large reveal heights for masonry or
brick treatments.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 98
4) Wetland or corridor encroachments – Longer spans would require additional

beam depth. This might raise a profile and move the toe of slope out or require
a retaining wall. Shorter spans may require more disturbance of the area and
also require retaining walls at the toe.
5) Staging problems – includes interference between the existing and new
features, such as substructures, beams and pier caps, as well as utilities that
must remain in service.
6) Utility Conflicts – The avoidance of utilities that would require costly relocations
may further restrict the location of substructures. Pile driving and sheeting
placement may be limited by overhead or underground interference.
b. Foundation Assessment
The substructure design shall be based on available borehole logs for the bridge and
earthworks. These logs shall be evaluated with regard to:
1) Their location with respect to the proposed bridge and shall be assessed by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor to confirm there is sufficient information to develop
the substructure design.
2) Where necessary the A/E and/or the EPC Contractor shall specify additional
exploratory holes to develop and/or validate the substructure design.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall review the borehole and supporting
laboratory test data to confirm soil and rock profiles to develop the design
ground model.
4) The ground shall be assessed to determine the appropriate foundation type,
constructability and temporary works.
c. Foundation Selection
Water Crossings – The following criteria shall be applied to all structures crossing
water:
1) Unless founded on rock, all structures crossing water shall be supported on
piles or have other positive protection to maintain the elevation at which the
bottom of the substructure unit is founded. In concrete lined channels where
there is no scour risk, this requirement may be waived with approval of the RC.
2) The minimum pile length to pile diameter shall be > 12.
3) Piles shall be socketed into rock if a stilt effect is possible due to scour.
4) Cofferdams shall be evaluated with regard to need, type, size, constructability
and cost. Alternative types of construction such as causeways, caissons or
drilled shafts shall be considered and compared to conventional cofferdam
costs.
5) The estimated maximum depth of scour shall be used to determine the overall
structure stability.
d. Grade Separations
1) Use of continuous structures will normally require unyielding foundations.
Differential settlement is not acceptable since it may result in secondary
stresses that may be detrimental to the structure.
2) In cases where the abutment or wing wall heights exceed 9 m, alternate system
other than cantilevered, cast-in-place concrete wall systems shall be
Rev. 1 5.2 - 99
considered. This is especially true in fill areas. Several modular wall systems
are available which may provide a more economical system.
e. Orientation, Configuration, and Details
1) Skew
(a) The orientation of the substructure units is greatly dependent upon the
type of feature crossed. Whenever possible, the skew of the structure
shall be kept at 30° or less.
(b) Skews in excess of 30° may cause uplift problems, cracking of the
concrete deck in the acute corners, and require larger bridge seats and
pedestal bearing areas.
(c) Sharp acute corners shall be avoided, and radial supports are preferred
for curved structures. If possible, skews of 10° or less should be
eliminated, unless it creates problems of misalignment with the feature
crossed.
2) Water Crossings
Whenever possible piers should be aligned with the stream flow to avoid the
creation of eddies and turbulence which could result in scour. The placement
of abutments or piers should not result in pockets where water turbulence could
increase the potential for scour. The following guidelines for substructures
need to be considered:
(a) Two piers close to each shoreline may be more hydraulically efficient and
economical to build than one deep-water pier.
(b) The pier shall be made solid to a height of 1 m above the maximum
navigable elevation or 600 mm above the 100-year flood or the flood of
record, whichever is higher. If the remaining height of pier above the solid
stem is 5 m or less, the pier shall be made completely solid.
(c) The upstream face of piers shall be rounded or V shaped to improve
hydraulics and debris problems.
(d) In cases where the wing walls of an abutment are at or near the water’s
edge, the wing walls shall be flared to improve the hydraulic entrance
condition. If possible, the elevation at the end of the wing wall should be
higher than design high water or as a minimum, the ordinary high water.
(e) The wing walls on the upstream side should be aligned to direct the flow
through the bridge opening. For the ease of construction, the downstream
wing walls may be made mirror images. Scour protection should be
provided in the form of riprap wherever risk of scour is identified.
3) General Details
(a) U-wing walls may be used when there is interference between the existing
and the proposed structure or some other site restriction. They may also
be used when a certain aesthetic effect is requested. Flared or in-line wing
walls are generally more cost effective. Corrosion environment for
sheeting. Durability for precast.
(b) When the length of a wing wall exceeds 8 m, use of an alternate type of
wing wall system shall be investigated. MSE walls or other modular wall
systems may prove to be more economical than a cast-in-place cantilever

Rev. 1 5.2 - 100
design. However, MSE walls shall never be used in proximity to a

hydraulic environment where there is risk of scour or underpinning.
Commercially available proprietary MSE wall systems specifically
developed for use in marine environments may be used with RC approval.
(c) Special details such as below ground cast-in-place or masonry block sills
may be used to support architectural stone or brick facings. If form inserts
are used to obtain an aesthetic appearance, wall thickness must be
increased by an amount equal to the relief of the insert.
(d) Narrow roadway medians will generally require the alignment of a median
pier to approximate the skew of the roadway. In wider medians, 18 m or
more, pier skews may be modified. In narrow highway medians where a
pier will be subject to road spray, a solid pier shall be considered.
9. Bearings
Bearings allow controlled bridge movement, and thus reducing the stresses induced on the
bridge superstructure and substructure.
a. Design references for the design of bridge bearings are:
1) AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification, Steel Bridge Design Handbook
b. Types of Bearings
1) Elastomeric Bearings
Plain elastomeric pads rely on friction at contact surface to prevent bulging.
Pads are thin to prevent slip of pads under strain and therefore may
accommodate small horizontal translation.
Steel Reinforced elastomeric bearings rely on steel reinforcing pads and
contact surface friction to prevent budging. Steel reinforced elastomer may
carry larger strains and rotations than unreinforced bearing pads.
2) Multi-Rotational Bearings
(a) Pot bearings provide a contained elastomer disc to high loading pressures,
causing the disc to behave as a fluid. Vertical force is transmitted through
elastomeric disc via a piston. Horizontal loads are transmitted by contact
of the piston face against the pot wall.
(b) Disc bearings are stiff to compression and rotation forces but are free to
bulge. Horizontal forces are distributed from a load plate to a center shear
pin or restricting ring.
3) Mechanical Bearings
Mechanical bearings distribute vertical and horizontal forces through
metal-to-metal contact. Most mechanical bearings provide a pin or
knuckle to allow for rotation while restricting translation. Rockers, rollers
or sliding type bearings are common types of bearings allowing required
translation
10. Expansion Joints
Bridge expansion joints are designed to allow for continuous traffic between structures
accommodating movement, shrinkage, temperature variations on reinforced and prestressed
concrete, composite and steel structures. They stop the bridge from bending out of place in

Rev. 1 5.2 - 101
extreme conditions and allow enough vertical movement to permit bearing replacement
without the need to dismantle the bridge expansion joint.
a. Types of joints
1) Small movement Joints:
(a) Compression Seals
Compression seals are continuous manufactured elastomeric elements
installed within an expansion joint gap to seal the joint against water and
debris infiltration. Compression joints are held in place by utilizing wall
friction of vertical surfaces
(b) Silicone Sealants
Silicone sealants are durable watertight sealants that are efficient for
rehabilitation and repair projects. System has less service life than
compression seals but is easier to install and maintain.
2) Medium Movement Joints:
(a) Sliding Plate Joints
Two overlapping plates attached to the superstructure on each side of the
plate. Joints do not provide an effective barrier against water infiltration;
however, they provide a smooth driving surface across joints. Corrosion
protection/mitigation shall be considered when using sliding plate joints,
and shall be used only with the approval of the RC.
(b) Strip Seal Joints
Elastomeric strip seal system consists of preformed gland mechanically
locked into steel angles or members embedded in slab or abutment
concrete. 180 mm block-out in concrete is required for installation.
(c) Large Movement Joints
(1) Steel Finger Joints
These are the most common type of joints and are installed in
cantilever situations on bridges. Steel finger joints are designed to
carry superimposed traffic loads. However, they do not provide an
effective seal against water and debris infiltration. This type of joint
shall only be used with RC approval.
(2) Modular expansion Joints
Comprise a series of steel or concrete center beams oriented parallel
to the expansion joint axis. Elastomeric strip seals or box-type seals
attach to adjacent center beams, preventing infiltration of water and
debris. The center beams are supported on support bars, which span
in the primary direction of anticipated movement. The support bars
are supported on sliding bearing mounted within support boxes.
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) – stainless steel interfaces between
elastomeric support bearings and support bars facilitate the
unimpeded translation of the support bars as the expansion gap
opens and closes. The support boxes generally rest on either cast-
in-place concrete or grout pads installed into a preformed block out.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 102
G. Principles and Guidelines

1. General
The principles and guidelines included in this section shall apply to all the RC structures in
TABLE 5.2.4.A.
Concrete is the material of choice for RC transportation structures. As appropriate,
superstructures and substructures shall be designed as reinforced or prestressed
concrete members. Structures and components covered under this subsection include
reinforced concrete bridges, pre-tensioned and post-tensioned concrete beams,
unreinforced and reinforced concrete culverts, and reinforced concrete piers, foundations,
retaining walls, spread footings, drilled shafts, driven pile foundations, and cut and cover
tunnel structures. Although concrete is the preferred material for RC transportation
structures, steel material might be more appropriate in some cases.
2. Depth/Span Ratios
The depth to span ratio for each structure is dependent on many factors. Some of these
are span, type of construction, aesthetics, cost, and false work and vertical clearance
limitations. For purposes of preliminary planning and design, the depth to span ratio listed
below may be used in setting grade lines at grade separations:
a. Highway Bridges:
1) Multiple spans 35 m or less, use 0.06.
2) Multiple spans over 35 m, use 0.045.
3) Single spans up to 55 m, use 0.045.
b. Railroad Underpasses (not including the 0.6 m dimension between the top of bridge
deck and top of track for ballasted rails):
1) Single spans up to 25 m, use 0.08.
2) Multiple spans 25 m or less, use 0.075.
3. Design Life
All RC transportation structures covered under this section shall have a target minimum
life of 75 years.
4. Skew Angle
Maximum skew for Groups 3, 4, and 5 structures shall not exceed 30 degrees, unless
restricted by extreme conditions at the structure’s site. Any skew greater than 30 degrees
shall require the RC approval. Severely skewed alignments may cause uplift, seismic
design issues, and maintenance problems.
5. Abutments
Wing wall foundations shall match the abutment foundation type, and a pile-supported
abutment shall always have pile supported wing walls, except when MSE wall is used in
combination with a piled abutment.
6. Bearings
a. Elastomeric bearings shall be considered first, and other types may be used if their
advantages over elastomeric bearings are demonstrated during preliminary design.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 103
Pot bearings shall be considered as second best choice. Spherical bearings shall
not be used on Royal Commission structures.
b. Multiple span substructures shall have fixed type bearings at only one pier support
and expansion types at all others. The fixed pier shall be centrally located, or close
thereof, between the two expansion joints.
c. Wide seats shall be provided at expansion span ends at abutments and piers to
allow for large displacements without unseating the spans. The minimum seat width
shall be the greater of 220 mm or that determined based seismic analysis.
7. Arrangement
a. For single span bridges, simply supported or integral abutment structures shall be
used.
b. Multiple span bridges shall be made continuous for live load over interior supports,
with the maximum span length meeting the requirements stipulated in this section
and configurations meeting aesthetics requirements of the project.
8. Expansion joints
The distance between any two expansion joints on the deck shall not exceed 90 m. Modular
type joints are the expansion joints of choice for RC structures, unless dictated by design
or advantages of other systems are demonstrated to RC satisfaction.
9. Diaphragms
All Groups 3, 4, and 5 superstructures shall be designed with two end diaphragms and at
least one intermediate diaphragm, depending on the structure’s span length. For spans
shorter than 17 m, at least one intermediate diaphragm shall be specified at the center of
the span. For spans 17 m or longer, at least 3 intermediate spans shall be provided at
span mid- and quarter points.
10. Piers
a. Piers over navigable water shall be placed with their longitudinal axes parallel to the
principal direction of water flow.
b. The need to protect bridge piers from ship impact shall be determined based on
investigation of the specific site for the probability of occurrence of such event.
11. Railing
a. Brush curbs/sidewalks with curbs shall be used directly in front of concrete barriers,
guard fences, or traffic rails on all structures. Curb height shall meet or exceed
height of approach roadway.
1) The application of curbs in combination with barriers must be in compliance
with the AASHTO standards referenced in this section.
b. Both bridge rails and transition rails on structures shall meet crash-testing
requirements of AASHTO LRFD Section 13 for the specified Test Level. Refer to
Subsection 5.2.4.E.2.f.1.b.
12. Approach Slab
Approach slabs behind abutments shall be provided to guard against susceptibility of
backfill soil material to settlement behind abutments and smooth the transition from
structure to pavement and vice versa.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 104
13. Environmental and Safety

a. Corrosion control
1) RC transportation structures shall be designed to endure corrosive or marine
environments or any other severe exposure conditions. Concrete protection
shall be suitably addressed by controlling concrete and steel materials, cover
thickness, and/or providing other protection methods. Concrete corrosion
protection is included in this manual.
2) Exposed reinforcing bars, inserts, and plates intended for bonding with future
extensions shall be protected from corrosion by concrete or other adequate
covering acceptable to the RC.
3) Anchorages, end fittings, couplers, and exposed tendons shall also be
protected from corrosion by adequate means acceptable to the RC.
4) Burning or welding operations in vicinity of prestressing tendons shall be
carefully performed, so that tendons are not subjected to excessive
temperatures, welding sparks, or ground currents.
5) Tendon wrapping, sheathing, or coating shall be continuous over entire
debonded length, and shall prevent intrusion of cement paste during concrete
placement.
b. Elements Control
1) Closed box beam sections shall be provided with bottom vent openings of 25
mm diameter located at the lowest ends of the beams, to relief air pressure and
prevent accumulation of water accidentally entrapped inside a box.
2) Structures in arid regions are expected to be influenced by the following three
processes associated with wind action on the topography of such regions:
deflation, abrasion, and dunes. Deflation is the lifting or rolling and subsequent
removal of loose, dry sediments (fine silt to coarse sand) by wind action. As the
wind-driven silt and sand impact an exposed surface of the structure, it creates
a form of natural sandblasting effect called abrasion. Dunes are formed when
a wind carrying a load of sediment encounters an obstructing barrier, the wind
velocity decreases and the sediment is subsequently deposited in the form of
a hill of sand on the lee side of the barrier. Design and construction of RC
structures in arid regions shall incorporate, as reasonably practicable,
provisions to mitigate the adverse effects of deflation, abrasion, and dunes on
the structures and their maintenance. An example of such provisions is
increasing culvert depth to account for sand accumulation on inlet.
c. Noise control
The effect of highway noise within urban areas shall be mitigated by providing sound
barrier systems, designed to meet RC requirements for noise abatement at the bridge
site.
d. Safety
1) Structures over rail shall be designed with provisions to protect their
substructure elements from being impacted by a derailed train. Such provisions
are included in AREMA.
2) Structures shall be designed to withstand the forces induced in structural
members because of accidental truck impact. The members covered under
these requirements include deck cantilevers due to accidental impact on
Rev. 1 5.2 - 105
concrete barrier, and pier bents consisting of two columns or less, including
hammer heads, laying within less than 9 m from the edge of a roadway and not
protected by other means from accidental truck impact. The impact force and
point of application on a pier shall be as specified for traffic barriers.
3) Piers in navigable waters shall be protected from ship impact whenever
probability of occurrence of such an event is established. The reference
document on this is the AASHTO LRFD.
H. Design Standards and Requirements
1. General
a. Purpose
This section mandates the standards and design requirements for the RC
transportation structures to meet the requirements specified herein for durability,
strength, stiffness, stability, and serviceability to ensure long and safe operation of
highway vehicles on those structures.
b. Applicability
This section shall apply to all RC transportation structures, except those excluded in
Section 5.2.6.B.
2. Design Standards
a. Main standards
Design and construction of all applicable RC transportation structures shall be based
upon the requirements of this section and existing structures standards as stated in
this section. Where the requirements stipulated in any reference document are in
conflict with the requirements of this section, the stricter shall govern unless otherwise
noted herein and shall require the RC approval. The AASHTO LRFD Specifications
and MOT are the main standards for design and construction of RC transportation
structures.
b. Authorities standards
Design and construction of Groups 1 and 2 structures, as applicable, shall be based
upon the design standards of the authority having jurisdiction over the structures.
c. Alternative Standards
In the absence of appropriate standards, because of unconventional design or
introduction of uncommon features, alternative standards may be proposed. However,
documents and evidence in support of the proposed standards must be submitted to
the RC for review and approval.
d. No appropriate Standards
Where no appropriate standards exist (e.g. due to the introduction of new technology,
components or a novel application of such) then risk assessments shall be carried
out, supported by analytical and simulation modeling methods, experimental and
development data, before the component or technique is adopted for RC use

Rev. 1 5.2 - 106
3. Analysis Methods
a. Member forces, stresses, and deformations under the design loads specified in this
section shall be obtained through recognized elastic analysis methods accepted by
the RC.
b. Inelastic analysis methods shall only be used where noted in this section, or
required/recommended in the design standards referred to in the section.
c. Soil structure interaction shall be considered in the design of major structures
subjected to dynamic loads, long-span bridges, integral abutment/pier bridges, and
flexible buried structures, such as suspension and cable-stayed bridges and
proprietary precast arch systems.
4. Design Methods
a. Design of RC transportation structures shall be based on the following methods:
1) Reinforced concrete structures - Load and Resistance Factor Design Method
2) Prestressed concrete structures – Load and Resistance Factor Design Method
with check for Serviceability.
3) Abutments, cap beams, pile caps, and piers – Load and Resistance Factor
Design Method with check for Serviceability.
4) Foundations – Load and Resistance Factor Design Method
5) Drilled shafts - Load and Resistance Factor Design Method
6) Driven piles– Load and Resistance Factor Design Method
7) Steel structures - Load and Resistance Factor Design Method
b. Groups 1 and 3 structures over drainage channels shall be designed with attention
to neighboring drainage structures, to prevent potential for channel overflow and
flooding.
c. Groups 1 and 3 structures over drainage channels shall be sized based on hydraulic
design demand and specified freeboard. Selection of RC unreinforced culvert
structures sizes shall also be based on hydraulic design, and not on height of the fill
above the culvert.
d. Cut and cover tunnel structures shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Road Tunnel Design and Construction Guide Specifications.
5. Strength Requirements
a. Steel
1) Reinforcing Steel
(a) Reinforcing steel used for constructing RC transportation structures
substructures shall as per the requirements of Subsection 5.2.6.
(b) Minimum steel yield strength = 420 MPa
2) Prestressing Steel
(a) Prestressing steel used for constructing RC transportation structures shall
be 12.5 mm diameter “Uncoated Seven-wire high Tensile Cold Drawn Low
Relaxation strand for Prestressed Concrete” as specified in ASTM
A416M, Grade 270 with fu’ = 1860 MPa.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 107
(b) Use of 15.24 mm strands shall be allowed for cast in place post-tensioned
members only.
b. Concrete
1) Reinforced Concrete Applications:
Concrete strength used for constructing RC reinforced concrete transportation
structures shall have the following minimum cylinder strength:
(a) Decks fc’ = 40 MPa
(b) Abutments fc’ = 35 MPa
(c) Piers except footings fc’ = 35 MPa
(d) Drilled shafts fc’ = 35 MPa
(e) All others fc’ = 30 MPa
2) Post-Tensioned Concrete Applications:
Concrete strength used for constructing RC post-tensioned concrete
transportation structures shall have the following cylinder strength:
(a) Min. initial fc’ = 28.5 MPa
(b) Min. final fc’ = 35 MPa
(c) Max. final fc’ = 41 MPa
3) Pre-Tensioned Concrete Applications:
Concrete strength used for constructing RC prestressed concrete
transportation structures shall have the following minimum cylinder strength:
(a) Min. initial fc’ = 28.5 MPa
(b) Max. initial fc’ = 31.4 MPa
(c) Min. final fc’ = 35.3 MPa
(d) Max. final fc’ = 41 MPa
Use of higher concrete strength than those specified in this section shall require
approval of the RC.
6. Concrete Cover Requirements
a. The following minimum concrete clear cover shall be provided:
1) Concrete exposed to salt water & splash zone 75 mm
2) Concrete of all substructure elements in contact with earth soil 75 mm.
3) Concrete of all substructure elements exposed to weather 75 mm.
4) Superstructure cast-in-place concrete exposed to weather 50 mm.
5) Inside faces of post-tensioned concrete boxes 50 mm.
6) Prefabricated superstructure elements, outside 50 mm
7) Prefabricated superstructure elements, inside faces 40 mm.
7. Design Loads
RC transportation structures shall be designed for all the loads listed under this section.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 108
a. Standard loads
RC transportation structures shall be designed for the applicable of the following
loads:
1) Dead load and superimposed dead load (DC, DW)
2) Vehicular, surcharge, pedestrian and live loads (LL, LS, PL)
3) Vehicular Dynamic Load (IM)
4) Wind load on structure and on live load (WS, WL)
5) Vehicular horizontal force from live load (BR, CE, CT)
6) Vessel collision force (CV)
7) Earth pressure load (EH, ES, EV)
8) Force effect due to temperature (TG, TU)
9) Post-tensioning secondary forces (PS)
10) Creep and shrinkage force (CR, SH)
11) Earthquake dynamic and blast force (EQ, BL)
12) Water load and stream pressure (WA)
13) Miscellaneous locked-in force (EL)
14) Other forces (Downdrag force, Friction load, Support Settlement) (DD, FR, SE)
Members of the structure shall be designed for the combination of loads and
forces that can occur simultaneously to produce the most critical design
conditions as specified in the standard codes. In addition, RC transportation
structures shall also be designed for the non-standard loads specified in this
section.
15) Dead load (D)
(a) Dead load shall consist of the structure’s estimated self-weight and the
superimposed dead load it supports, such as weigh of concrete deck,
diaphragms, utilities, and rail system. The unit weights below shall be
used to calculate dead load on structures.
(1) Steel 78 kN/m3
(2) Reinforced Concrete 24 kN/m3
(3) Pre-stressed Concrete 24 kN/m3
(4) Earth-Fill 19 kN/m3
(5) Asphalt Concrete 22 kN/m3
(6) Water 9.81 kN/m3
(b) Structures designed with concrete wearing surface for riding surface shall
be designed for an additional future wearing surface weight calculated
based on 2 kN/m2.
(c) Superimposed load due to lighting poles, utility lines, fences, noise
barriers, etc. carried on a structure shall be calculated based on specific
materials volumes and unit weights.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 109
(d) The minimum superimposed dead load due to waterproofing and

protective covering shall be 1 kN/m2.
16) Live load (L)
(a) Groups 1, 2, and 3 Structures
RC Groups 1, 2, and 3 culvert-type transportation structures shall be
designed using the MOT live load models in FIGURE 5.2.4.A and the
AASHTO LRFD culvert design requirements for consideration and
distribution of live load.
(b) Groups 3, 4, and 4 Structures
RC Groups 3, 4, and 5 transportation structures shall be designed using
the MOT live load models in FIGURE 5.2.4.A and the AASHTO LRFD
bridge design requirements for distribution of live load.
(c) Configuration for the MOT truck is apparently similar to that of the HS-20,
however, total gross weight for the MOT truck is much higher than that of
the HS-20.
(d) All RC structures laying on a Module Path shall be designed based on the
MOT truck in addition to the live load criteria specified in the RC’s Module
Path System Design Report.
(e) Railing and Sidewalks Live Load
(1) The minimum live load on bridge sidewalks shall be as specified in
the AASHTO LRFD Specifications.
(2) In addition to standard live loads on traffic lanes, one-lane structures
with sidewalks shall be analyzed for incidental truck traffic on the
sidewalk.
(3) Design Live Loads on railing shall be as specified in the AASHTO
LRFD Specifications.
(f) Governing Live Load (L)
(1) Design live load for Groups 1 to 5 shall include various loading
scenarios to maximize the positive and negative load effects on the
member to be designed as required by AASHTO LRFD. This shall
include, eccentric loading, alternate lane loading, alternate span
loading, and eccentric wind loading.
(2) For bridges on curves, additional provision shall be made for the
increased proportion of the load carried (distribution factors) by main
structural members due to eccentricity of the load.
(g) Distribution of Live Load
(1) For Groups 1 to 5, live load distribution shall be based on AASHTO
LRFD Specifications.
(2) In line girder analysis, live load for Groups 3, 4, and 5 shall be
distributed in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Specifications
requirements.
17) Dynamic Load Allowance (IM)

Rev. 1 5.2 - 110
(a) Dynamic Load Allowance for Groups 1 to 5 structures shall be calculated

based on the AASHTO LRFD Specifications Table 3.6.2.1-1 requirements.
(b) The static effects of the design truck or tandem, other than centrifugal and
braking forces, shall be increased by the percentage specified in AASHTO
LRFD for dynamic load allowance.
(c) The dynamic load allowance shall not be applied to pedestrian loads or to
the design lane load.
(d) Dynamic Load Allowance shall not be included in the design of
foundations, abutments, and other earth retaining structures.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 111
FIGURE 5.2.4.A MOT DESIGN LIVE LOAD
18) Wind Load

Rev. 1 5.2 - 112
The design 3-second gust wind speed, V, used in the determination of design wind
loads on bridges Combination Strength III shall be 190 km/h, unless directed
otherwise by the RC.
(a) Wind load background
(1) According to RC site-specific requirements and based on AASHTO
LRFD, the wind velocity of 190 km/h is used to determine the base
wind load for Combination Strength III. Wind speeds used for other
load combinations shall be taken from AASHTO LRFD Table
3.8.1.1.2-1.
(2) When a design wind velocity other than 190 km/h is advisable for
Combination Strength III; the design wind load shall be based on wind
tunnel model studies for developing wind loading information to
supplement and, in some situations, replace the RC site-specific wind
load.
(3) If the alternative proposed design wind speed study is accepted by
the RC, the new wind speed shall be recorded on the design
documents and shown on the plans.
(b) Wind load on structure (W)
(1) Wind load on superstructure
Wind pressures on structures shall be included as part of the W loads
as follows:
(i) In the general case of wind analysis, the wind load shall be
determined as specified in Article 3.8.1.1 and the wind direction
shall be varied. The wind loads shall be taken as the algebraic
transverse and longitudinal components of the wind load. The
wind direction for design shall be that which produces the
maximum force effect in the component under investigation. The
transverse and longitudinal components of the wind load shall be
applied simultaneously.
(2) Wind load on substructure
Wind upon the substructure shall be included in load as follows:
(i) The transverse and longitudinal forces to be applied directly to
the substructure shall be calculated using the wind pressure
determined using AASHTO LRFD Article 3.8.1.2.3.
(ii) For wind directions taken skewed to the substructure, the wind
pressure shall be resolved into components perpendicular to the
end and front elevations of the substructure. The component
perpendicular to the end elevation shall act on the exposed
substructure area as seen in end elevation, and the component
perpendicular to the front elevation shall act on the exposed
substructure area as seen in front elevation. The two
substructure wind force components shall be applied
simultaneously with the wind loads from the superstructure.
(3) Wind load on live load (WL)
(i) When vehicles are present, the design wind pressure shall be
applied to both structure and vehicles. Wind pressure on vehicles
Rev. 1 5.2 - 113
shall be represented by an interruptible, moving force of 1.46

N/mm acting normal to, and 1800 mm above, the roadway and
shall be transmitted to the structure.
(ii) When wind on vehicles is not taken as normal to the structure,
the components of the transverse and longitudinal components
of the wind load force applied to the live load may be taken as
specified in AASHTO LRFD Table 3.8.1.3-1, with the skew angle
measured from the perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
bridge in plan.
(iii) The wind direction for design shall be that which produces the
extreme force effect on the component under investigation. The
transverse and longitudinal wind load components on the live
load shall be applied simultaneously.
19) Centrifugal Force (CF)
(a) On curves, structures shall be designed for a horizontal radial force
(centrifugal force/CF) determined as the percentage of the live load,
without impact, in all traffic lanes obtained as described below (AASHTO
LRFD).
C = f v2 /gR
Where:
C = Centrifugal force in percentage of the live load
f = 4/3 for load combinations other than fatigue and 1.0 for fatigue
g = gravitational acceleration: 9.807 m/sec2
v = highway design speed (m/sec)
R = Radius of curvature (m)
(b) The centrifugal force obtained using the above percentages shall be
applied horizontally through a point 1.8 m above the top surface of the
roadway measured along a line perpendicular to the centerline of the
roadway.
20) Longitudinal force (LF)
Design of structures shall consider a longitudinal force due to acceleration and
deceleration of traffic equal to 5 percent of those determined for live load in all
lanes carrying traffic and headed in the same direction, regardless of the
direction of travel on the lanes. Live load shall be based on lane load plus the
concentrated load for moment specified in FIGURE 5.2.4.A, without impact and
with reduction for multiple loaded lanes as specified in AASHTO LRFD. The
force shall be applied as a longitudinal force assumed to act within a horizontal
plane located (1.8 m) above the floor slab and to be transmitted to the
substructure through the substructure. The force shall be considered to act in
any direction along the structure.
The effective longitudinal force shall be distributed to the various components
of the supporting structure, taking into account their relative stiffness. The
resistance of the backfill behind the abutments shall be utilized where
applicable. The mechanisms (bearings, load transfer devices, etc.) available to

Rev. 1 5.2 - 114
transfer the force to the various components shall also be considered in the
analysis to distribute the longitudinal force.
In torsion sensitive structures such as single column piers, the design shall
consider the scenario of the longitudinal force applied simultaneously in
opposite directions.
21) Earth lateral load (EH)
(a) RC structures, as applicable, shall be designed to resist lateral load due
to soil pressure. When the retained soil could become saturated, those
forces shall be estimated based on Rankine equation, neglecting wall
friction:
Pa =   H2 Ka
Where:
Pa = Active thrust (kg/m)
 = Unit weight of retained soil fill (kg/m3)
H = Height upon which earth thrust acts (m)
Ka = Active pressure coefficient
Ka = Ka ( )
 = Angle of inclination of slope to horizontal
 = Angle of internal friction
(a) For dry retained soil, wall friction shall be included, and the earth pressure
shall be estimated based on Coulomb equation given by:
Pa =   H2 Ka
Where:
Pa = Active pressure (kg/m)
 = Unit weight of retained soil fill (kg/m3)
H = Height upon which earth pressure acts (m)
Ka = Active pressure coefficient
Ka = Ka ()

Rev. 1 5.2 - 115
 = Angle of inclination of the back face of the wall with respect to

horizontal
 = Wall friction angle
(b) According to AASHTO Section 3.11.5, the earth pressure coefficients
adopted in design are dependent on the wall type and degree of
movement. The earth pressure coefficients further depend on soil types
(granular or cohesive), consolidation state, etc. Rankine equation may not
be appropriate depending on the above, sloping ground, etc.. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall be able to identify such limitations on Rankine
equation, and recommend alternative methods to RC for approval should
they arise.
22) Shear resistance at expansion bearings (F)
Structures shall be designed with provisions to accommodate forces due to
friction or shear resistance at expansion bearings.
23) Other forces (OF)
RC transportation structures shall be designed to resist all applicable forces
due to concrete shrinkage (S)), settlement of supports, rib shortening (R),
erection, or any other loads expected to act on the structure and not included
in this manual.
24) Thermal forces (TG, TU)
(a) Forces and deformations resulting from temperature variations shall be
accounted for.
(b) The maximum expected temperature differential and coefficients of
thermal expansion shall be considered as follows:
(1) Concrete:
(i) Temperature differential 70o C between max. and min.
(ii) Expansion coefficient 1.08x10-5 cm/(cm-oC) for concrete
(iii) Expansion coefficient 1.17x10-5 cm/(cm-oC) for steel

Rev. 1 5.2 - 116
(iv) Temperature rise 40o C

(v) Temperature fall 30o C
(c) The 40oC rise and 30oC fall in temperature assumes that the stress free
temperature (temperature at which the structure is cast) is around 30oC.
(d) Thermal forces in concrete box girder bridges due to temperature
differential between the top of the deck and bottom slab shall be based on
a temperature gradient of 20o C.
(e) Air humidity to be considered in the design shall be 70 percent.
25) Earthquake forces (EQ)
(a) RC transportation structures carrying highway loads shall be designed for
seismic loads based upon the AASHTO LRFD requirements. Structures
designed as such shall satisfy the specified performance criteria to ensure
safety of the traveling public and minimize the costs of damage, and loss
of use caused by potential earthquakes.
(b) Seismic Response Spectral Acceleration Parameters
The seismic acceleration parameters, PGA, SS and S1, for Jubail Industrial
City (JIC) and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) are as follows:
PGA: Peak Ground Acceleration Coefficient
SS: 0.2 Second Response Spectral Acceleration Coefficient
S1: 1.0 Second Response Spectral Acceleration Coefficient
Location PGA Ss S1
Jubail Industrial City (JIC) 4% 10% 4.67%
Ras Al-Khair Industrial City 4% 10% 4.67%
(RIC)
(c) The soil supporting the RC transportation structures shall be analyzed for
liquefaction hazard and, as appropriate, mitigation measures shall be
taken.
26) Stream flow pressure (SF)
(a) All piers and other portions of RC structures which are subject to the force
of flowing water or drift shall be designed to resist the maximum stresses
induced thereby.
(b) The effect of flowing water on piers and drift build up, assuming a second-
degree parabolic velocity distribution and thus a triangular pressure
distribution shall be computed using the following equation:
P = KV2
Where:
P = Average stream pressure in Pa
K = A constant, being 725 for all piers subjected to drift build up and
square-ended piers, 360 for circular piers, and 260 for angle-ended
piers where the angle is 30 degrees or less.
V = average water flow velocity in m/sec.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 117
(c) The maximum stream flow pressure P max, shall be computed using the
above equation as twice the average stream flow pressure, Pavg. Stream
flow pressure shall be a triangular distribution with P max located at the
top of water elevation and a zero pressure located at the flow line.
(d) The stream flow forces shall be calculated as the product of the stream
flow triangular pressure distribution by the exposed pier area. If the
corresponding top of water elevation is above the low beam elevation,
stream flow loading on the superstructure shall be investigated. Then the
stream flow pressure acting on the superstructure shall be taken as P max
with a uniform distribution. When stream flow is not normal to the pier,
directional component of the pressure shall be investigated.
(e) When it is anticipated that the flow area under a structure will be
significantly blocked by drift build up, increases in high water elevations,
stream velocities, stream flow pressures, and the potential increases in
scour depths shall be investigated.
27) Buoyancy (B)
Design of foundations is negatively impacted by buoyancy. RC foundation
structures shall be designed assuming the negative effects of buoyancy, unless
water below the foundation level is effectively removed.
28) Prestressing Forces (PS)
Design of RC transportation structures shall consider the forces created in
those structures due to prestressing. Those shall include 1) primary forces
occurring in any prestressed structure and secondary forces occurring in
prestressed concrete continuous structures and 2) forces arising during
construction due to temporary restraint of post-tensioned members. The latter
shall be considered under erection loads during construction. Movement due
to shortening during prestressing shall never be obstructed.
b. Nonstandard loads
1) In addition to the loads defined herein, RC may request that Groups 3, 4, and
5 highway structures be designed for loads other than those previously defined
to assess ultimate strength or stability of the structures.
2) Construction Loads
All RC transportation structures shall be designed to safely and adequately resist
construction loads specified under adopted design codes.
8. Deformation limits
a. Flexural members of bridge structures shall be designed to have adequate stiffness
to limit deflections or any deformations which may adversely affect the strength or
serviceability of the structure at service load levels. Deflection of main structural
flexural members carrying live load shall not exceed L/800 where L is the member’s
span length.
b. RC transportation structures shall be designed for a minimum of 25 mm vertical
differential settlement at any single pier/abutment foundation. Based on geological

Rev. 1 5.2 - 118
and geotechnical assessment of the structure’s site, RC may change this differential
settlement requirement.
9. Fatigue
RC Groups 3, 4, and 5 shall be verified to have adequate fatigue life under highway traffic.
The aim of performing fatigue–safety verification is to demonstrate that the fatigue effects
due to traffic loads will not impair the safety of the highway bridge during its intended
service life. Fatigue requirements specified under AASHTO LRFD Standard Specifications
may be used for adequate fatigue life verification.
10. Bearings
a. All bridge bearings shall be designed and constructed according to AASHTO LRFD
and as specified in this manual. Bearings articulation shall be shown on plans and
be consistent with the structure’s kinematics under applicable design loads.
b. Uplift
Design of the RC transportation structures shall include provisions for adequate
attachment of superstructure members to the substructure to resist uplift. Anchorage
or tie down elements shall be designed to provide 150 percent of the uplift forces
calculated under Group I loading and 125 percent of that calculated under all other
service load combinations of the AASHTO LRFD. Anchorage devices shall be
designed for a minimum force of 100 kN per beam support location for Group I where
uplift is identified.
c. Uplift requirements mandated under the seismic design criteria shall govern over
those specified in this section.
11. Concrete Box Culverts
a. Concrete box culverts shall be fully designed and constructed in accordance with
AASHTO LRFD and as amended by this manual.
b. A culvert shall be defined as any structure, whether of single or multiple-span
construction, with an interior width of 6.0 m or less, measured horizontally along the
center line of the roadway from face-to-face of abutments or sidewalls. Structures
spanning more than 6.0 m along the centerline of the highway shall be considered
bridges. More complex hydraulic and design analysis is generally required for
bridge-size culverts. The information in this section shall apply to both culvert and
bridge size culverts.
c. Hydraulic analysis of culverts is generally based on the span length, and any
sophisticated backwater analysis program shall be used to determine the size and
shape of RC culvert structures.
d. Hydraulic analysis shall be performed on all culverts over drainage or seawater
cooling channels, including the RC standard un-reinforced culvert structures.
e. Four-sided (box), three-sided, and arch types of concrete culverts are often provided
as proprietary products with adjustable basic geometries, and designed using
specialized software. A/E and/or EPC Contractor proposing such products shall
include in the submittal to RC design basis report, sample calculations, and
foundation reactions for the proposed system.
f. The maximum clear span (the perpendicular distance between the inside face of the
sidewalls for nonskewed culverts, or for the perpendicular distance between the

Rev. 1 5.2 - 119
centerlines of the sidewalls for skewed culverts) for a cast in place concrete box
culvert shall not exceed 7.3 m.
g. Before a final determination is made to use a large concrete culvert, the use of a
short-span bridge with laid-back slopes and integral abutments shall be investigated.
12. Concrete Superstructure
Design and construction of concrete superstructures shall be based upon the standards
and specifications included in this section. Concrete superstructures shall be designed to
resist all applicable standard and nonstandard loads at the required performance levels
mandated by AASHTO LRFD and amended by this manual.
13. Concrete Deck
a. For multispan structures, the concrete deck shall be designed to be continuous for
live load, and the top of the deck shall be appropriately reinforced to locally resist all
applicable standard and nonstandard loads specified in this section.
b. Precast reinforced concrete stay-in-place forms are not permitted to construct a
composite concrete deck. Full depth cast-in-place deck slab construction is required.
Precast prestressed concrete stay-in-place forms shall not be used to form any
permanent bridge decks.
c. On skewed decks, main deck reinforcement shall be placed normal to the
girders/bridge centerline when the skew angle does not exceed 30 degrees.
d. For skew angles greater than 30, main deck reinforcement shall be placed parallel to
the skew at the obtuse triangles formed at the ends of the deck, and parallel to the
girders/bridge centerline past the areas of the triangles.
e. Design of expansion joints
Joint design shall be based on:
1) Bridge creep and shrinkage effects.
2) Thermal effects.
3) Bridge geometry.
14. Deck Drainage
Deck drainage shall be based on proper calculations of storm water runoff, and can be
accomplished by sloping the top of the pavement transversely by not less than 1.0 percent
to direct the runoff to brush curbs and collecting the water at low points located close to
the lower end of the span within the fascia beams of the structure. A properly designed
collection system, consisting of scuppers and downspouts shall be used to disposal of the
runoff water, with the pipes descending down the nearest pier and the water discharged
away from the structure. Scuppers or inlets shall be of corrosion resistant materials, of size
and number that adequately drain the structure, shall be provided. Downspouts also made
of corrosion resistant material, not less than 100 mm in the least dimension, and having
cleanouts, shall be provided to prevent discharge of water against any portion of the
structure and detailed to prevent soil erosion at ground level.
15. Piers
a. Bridge piers shall be designed for expected loads from the structure, wind load,
stream flow pressure, longitudinal forces due to traffic, earthquake, thermal forces,
torsional forces, and any additional forces that might act on them. Additionally, piers

Rev. 1 5.2 - 120
shall be designed to meet the requirements on deformations and stiffness specified

in this manual.
b. Design of piers shall be based on load and resistance factor design method and in
accordance with the reinforced concrete design section of the AASHTO LRFD and
checked for serviceability.
c. Pier protection
In order to limit damage by the redirection and deflection of highway traffic and
equipment, piers supporting bridges over highways shall be protected by a reinforced
concrete crash barrier or wall. Protection of piers shall be provided as outlined in the
RC Standard Details, which bases protection strategy on median width, roadway
classification, and area (residential or industrial).
In general, crash walls for piers are provided unless the pier has a heavy built - have
a cross-sectional area equal to or greater than that required for the protective crash
wall and the larger of its dimensions is parallel to the roadway.
1) Crash walls for piers generally specified of a minimum height above the top
surface of the roadway and width.
2) For a pier made of two or more columns, the crash wall usually connects the
columns and extends parallel to the roadway at least 300 mm beyond the
outermost columns, and 150 mm beyond the face of the column facing traffic.
3) The crash wall could be anchored to the footings and columns, if applicable,
with adequate reinforcing steel.
16. Approach slab
Transition approach slabs behind abutments shall be provided to guard against
susceptibility of backfill soil material to settlement and smooth the transition for the ride as
it changes from a rigid to a flexible and vice versa, such as between a concrete
superstructure and an embankment. In the case of bridge abutments, a subsurface
approach slab shall be adequately designed and reinforced with a varying thickness over
a distance away from the abutment.
17. Fill material
The following values shall be used to estimate lateral soil pressure, unless instructed
otherwise by the Geotechnical Design Report:
Weight of fill material: 19 kN/m3
Angle of internal friction: 30o
18. Highway surcharge
Surcharge load on earth retaining structures due to truck traffic shall be determined based
on AASHTO LRFD procedures and MOT loading, and total surcharge load on the
structures shall also include that contributed by adjacent foundations and structures.
Highway surcharge load due to traffic shall be calculated as an equivalent surcharge load
due 600 mm soil overfill.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 121
19. Abutments
a. Abutments shall be designed to support loads applied by the bridge superstructure
and sustain those exerted by the retained earth of the highway/roadway approach
immediately adjacent to the bridge.
b. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall pay special attention to abutment behavior and
design of elements when the abutment is analyzed as part of 3-D model including
the wing walls. In such cases, traditional analysis and design methods of the
abutment are no longer valid.
c. Design of bridge abutments shall be such that the resultant of all loads acting on the
abutment is located within the middle one third of the footing, when the abutment is
not resting on rock or piles. A factor of safety against overturning of 1.7 shall be
used. For abutments bearing on rock, the resultant may be located within the
middle one half of the footing, and a factor of safety against sliding of 2.0 at the base
of the footing shall then be used.
d. Piled integral abutments shall be supported on a single row of piles.
e. Abutments supporting multiple span structures shall have the stem and wing walls
designed to rest upon a continuous footing that can be either soil or pile supported.
f. Appropriate provisions for drainage shall be provided at the back of abutments, for
back fill materials to be analyzed using its dry fill properties in the design of the
abutment.
g. Abutments shall be designed based on load factor design method and checked for
serviceability.
20. Retaining walls
a. Design of reinforced concrete retaining walls shall be based on the lateral earth
pressure and surcharge load calculated based on standard methods, and shall meet
acceptable design and stability requirements. A retaining wall structure shall be
properly designed to ensure that it will not fail by overturning, sliding, excessive
settlement, excessive bearing pressures, or overloading of piles, and shall possess
adequate strength to resist applied earth pressure, live load, and surcharge load.
b. The passive earth pressure of the soil in contact with the face of the retaining wall
shall consider the effects of unplanned and planned excavation works, such as
installation of new services and maintenance of existing services when calculating
wall stability. Unless otherwise approved by RC, the passive earth pressure shall be
neglected when computing the wall resistance against sliding. Cantilever retaining
walls shall be used for a maximum height of 9 m, and counterfort walls shall be used
for structures in excess of 9 m in height.
c. Use of cantilevered sheet pile retaining walls shall be limited to temporary
construction work. These walls are generally efficient for wall height in the range 2-5
m. For temporary construction when wall heights is in excess of 5 m, tied back sheet
pile and tied back soldier pile or lagging can be used.
d. Mechanically Stabilized Retaining shall be used, as appropriate, as alternate
systems to traditional retaining walls.
21. Wingwalls
a. Wing walls, retaining wall structures adjacent or abutting a bridge abutment, shall be
designed based on the stipulation in the previous section for retaining walls, and for
the types and requirements included in this section. Wing walls used in RC
Rev. 1 5.2 - 122
transportation structures shall be limited to the three types: U-wing walls, in-line wing
walls, and flared wing walls. Selection of a wing wall type is dictated by the
conditions at the site, including clearance and right of way constraints.
b. Wing wall foundation shall match the abutment foundation requirements (pile-
supported abutments shall have pile-supported wing walls, for example, except
when MSE wall is used in combination with a piled abutment).
c. The elevation of the top of the wing wall shall be 250 mm higher than the fill level
and be shown on the plans.
d. For integral abutments, in-line wing walls cantilevered from the abutment are the
preferred arrangement. Flared wing walls cantilevered from the abutment may also
be used on a case by case basis, especially at stream crossings where the
alignment and velocity of the stream increase risk of in-line walls to scour.
22. Cut and Cover Tunnel Structures
a. RC transportation tunnel structures constructed by cut and cover methods shall be
designed as reinforced concrete box-type earth-retaining structures which are not
free to yield significantly. In addition to the weight of the basic structure, dead load
for these structures shall include weight of secondary elements supported by the
structure and the earth cover gravity load acting on the roof structure.
b. Cut and cover tunnel structures are generally less than 12 meters deep below
grade, and constructed using open excavation, with temporary support of the
excavation during construction operations. Round or horseshoe shaped structures
are often used for efficiency, and rectangular configuration may also be utilized.
c. The following loading scenarios for structures shall be investigated at working stress
levels, and additional loading scenarios shall be investigated as deemed necessary
based on the specific site and loading conditions (construction and permanent
loads): Vertical and long-term horizontal loads; vertical long term on one side and
short term horizontal load on the other side applied simultaneously.
d. For structures subjected to unequal lateral pressure, analysis for axial, shear, and
moment effects shall consider the top slab as being both restrained and
unrestrained against horizontal translation; and vertical load and short-term
horizontal load, neglecting ground water pressure on both sides. Cut and cover
tunnels shall also be designed for hydrostatic pressures, including uplift/flotation and
provision of piles to resist uplift and/or drainage measures.
e. The analysis shall consider variations in the stiffness and elastic properties of the
supporting subgrade soil. Compression forces shall not be considered in the shear
design of the top slab and invert.
f. Ventilation shaft structures shall be designed similar to cut and cover structures, and
installed utilizing similar construction methods requiring support of excavation with
soldier piles or sheet piles.
23. Retaining Wall Drainage
a. The fill material behind abutments, wing walls, and retaining walls shall be effectively
drained using weep holes placed at a maximum spacing of 8 m. The water behind
the wall may be collected using a filtering system of coarsely-graded soil with water
receptors behind the wall at the weep hole locations. Counterfort retaining walls
shall have at least one weep hole for each pocket formed by the counterforts.
Location of weep holes shall be established such that their invert is at 150 mm
above finished grade or low water in the case of stream bridges. Back-fill material

Rev. 1 5.2 - 123
may also be drained by means of pipe drains or gravel drains, or by perforated

drains.
24. Waterproofing of Structures
a. Waterproofing of the RC structures shall be based on the recommendations of the
corrosion protection subsection (5.2.6).
b. Waterproofing methods, details, and application on structural members shall follow
standard RC specifications and details.
25. Foundation
a. Geological and geotechnical investigation at the bridge site shall be performed to
provide the soil parameters and soil stratification information for foundation design.
Soil parameters shall be determined based on recognized standard laboratory
testing methods and field testing. The soil parameters and stratification information
shall be investigated for the expected load effects transmitted to the foundation from
the structure, foundation deformation limits, and site restrictions to determine the
most suitable foundation type for the bridge site.
b. Shallow foundations shall be spread or combined footing type, on treated or
untreated soil to improve soil properties. Deep foundation shall be of driven piles,
cast in place drill shafts, or any other type of foundation involving piles.
c. Footings and piles shall be designed to keep maximum soil stresses within allowable
limits. To prevent uneven settlement, the footings shall be designed such as to
maintain uniform stresses in the soil and on piles.
d. Long-term differential settlement between adjacent piers on any RC transportation
structures shall not exceed 1/2750 of the sum of the adjacent spans lengths or any
other limit set by the RC based on the results of the site geotechnical investigation.
e. Design of foundations, including spread footings, drilled shafts, and driven piles shall
be based on service load method.
f. Pile shall be used for foundation at any structures site where scour risk is identified.
g. Pile foundations supporting fixed columns shall be battered, if necessary, to provide
adequate resistance for longitudinal forces on the structure.
26. Load combinations
a. Service Load Design:
The various groups representing all the various combinations of loads and forces to
which a structure may be subjected are included in the AASHTO LRFD Specifications.
Components of the structure and foundation shall be proportioned for the applicable
loads and group of loads that produce the most critical design condition.
Service load design shall be based on the groups in the AASHTO LRFD, and the
allowable overstress limits shown in the table (allowable percentage of basic unit
stress is referred to as “Allowable over stress”).
b. Load and Resistance Factor Design:
The loading group combinations for Load Factor Design are included in the
AASHTOLRFD Specifications. The factors are only intended for designing structural
members based on the load and resistance factor method.
When designing for foundations (soil pressure, pile loads, etc.), the actual loads shall
not be increased by the factors in the table. The factors are not intended to be used
Rev. 1 5.2 - 124
when checking for foundation stability (safety factors against overturning, sliding, etc.)
of a structure. The factors in the code represent usual conditions and should be
increased, if it is judged that predictability of loads is different than that anticipated by
the specifications.
27. Temporary Structures
Temporary structures, including false work, and shoring systems consisting of cantilevered
sheet piling, anchored sheet piles, cantilevered and anchored soldier beams with lagging,
braced excavation, and cofferdams, shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
AASHTO requirements for temporary structures.
I. Load Rating and Life-Cycle Performance
1. Bridge Load Rating
Load rating is the determination of the live-load carrying capacity of an existing bridge. As
such it reflects the current capacity of a bridge including various factors such as the current
condition of the structure as well as changes in loading over time. It involves the
determination of the capacity to carry live loads that are frequently very different in overall
size and weight / force effects as compared to the live load conditions of the original design.
Load ratings are based on information about the bridge type and configuration. This data
is taken from the bridge design plans and is supplemented by information gathered from
field inspections or field testing. The load rating provides a basis to determine the safe
operating conditions of the bridge and is also used to support maintenance, rehabilitation
or replacement decisions, and life-cycle performance of bridges.
It is critical to know the capacity of each bridge to:
a. To assist in the overload permit review process
b. To assess potential changes in legal loads, i.e. vehicle weight limits, new classes of
exempt vehicles, etc.
c. To determine which structures have substandard load capacities that may require
load posting or other remedial action
d. To assist in the most effective use of available resources for rehabilitation or
replacement
2. Load Rating Methodology
a. Load rating is the calculation of a safe live load capacity for various vehicles such as
design loads, specific or national legal loads, and overweight permit loads. It
involves the calculation of member resistance as well as permanent and transient
force effects.
b. For common bridges like slab-on-girder, the rating is usually computed for shear and
for bending moment, which are the dominant force effects. For other bridge types,
the rating involves other force effects such as axial force demand and sometimes
includes a combination of forces such as axial load and bending forces.
c. When load rating a bridge, the final overall bridge load rating is the load rating at the
weakest point of the weakest member within the whole bridge. This member is
called the controlling member (controlling load rated member) of the bridge.
d. The three methodologies for load rating are Load and Resistance Factor Rating
(LRFR), Load Factor Rating (LFR), and Allowable Stress Rating (ASR). Most new or

Rev. 1 5.2 - 125
updated load ratings will be computed using LRFR, as LFR and ASR are mostly
historical but are still used in overload permit review process.
J. Aesthetics
1. General
Bridges have more than just transportation functions. They also function socially, visually
and symbolically as significant elements in their communities and environments. Every
project will be different and will possess its own unique characteristics. Nevertheless there
will be some commonality in the steps that engineers may apply in considering aesthetic
bridge design. Following these steps will help ensure a successful bridge that its owner
and community will be proud of. Basic aesthetic features of bridge elements are included
in this section, and for additional guidance on proportioning and selection of these elements
for aesthetic values are included in the “Royal Commission for Jubail, Guidelines for
Aesthetics Design of Transportation Structures, 1st edition, 2016” and the AASHTO
references listed below.
2. Incorporation
Incorporated aesthetics in the design process from the early preliminary design stages and
shall be submitted to the RC for review and approval.
3. Aesthetic Design
As detailed on AASHTO BAS-1, the following steps shall be executed in the Aesthetic
Design of Bridges:
a. Site Goals.
b. Develop a Design Vision.
c. Engineering Study.
4. References:
a. AASHTO BAS-1 Bridge Aesthetics Source Book, 1st Edition.
b. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
c. Royal Commission for Jubail, Guidelines for Aesthetics Design of Transportation
Structures, 1st edition, 2016.
5. Design Guidelines:
a. Horizontal and Vertical Geometry
Before there is a concept for a bridge, the roadway geometry creates a ribbon in space
that can be either attractive or unattractive. The geometry establishes the basic lines
of the structure, to which all else must react. A graceful geometry will go a long way
toward fostering a successful bridge, while an awkward or kinked geometry will be
difficult to overcome.
b. Superstructure Type
The superstructure type defines the structural system used to support the bridge self-
weight and applied loads. It may be an arch, girder, rigid frame, truss or cable-
supported type structure. The most memorable aspect of the structure is determined
when the overall shape of the structural members is established.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 126
1) Multiple girder systems such as steel plate or box girders, prestressed concrete
girders and concrete box girders are common structural systems for everyday
bridges.
2) Arches or rigid frames are occasionally used in situations where visual features,
atypical site conditions or project requirements make their use appropriate.
3) Cable-supported bridges are often used in special situations where visual
impact is important or where site conditions require long span solution.
c. Abutment Placement and Height:
Abutment placement and height determine how a bridge begins and ends and, for
shorter bridges, how the structure is framed. The abutment placement also
establishes the shape of the end-span opening, which may have a significant
influence on what can be seen beyond the structure and how well the structure relates
to adjoining uses.
1) An abutment is where a bridge touches the ground and the transparency of the
structure transition to the mass of the surrounding walls or topography.
Abutments may have an important symbolic function, as these are the points
where travelers begin and end their passage over a bridge. This is particularly
true when pedestrian traffic crosses a bridge. Abutments frame the landscape
or cityscape behind the bridge much like a picture frame defines the view of the
picture it encloses. Depending on the under clearance and superstructure
width, spaces under bridges may be very dark even during daytime. Security
or maintenance considerations may influence abutment type selection.
2) Stub-type or flow-through end bent abutments are located at the top of an
approach embankment or at the top of a cut slope. From a visual perspective,
the spaces adjacent to stub abutments are often slivers that are dark and
distant to the observer. This may not be desirable on bridges where security
or maintenance considerations may discourage the creation of spaces that are
not easily viewed from a distance.
3) Mid-height abutments are typically located within the limits of the side slopes
and have a vertical surface whose height is a significant percentage of the
overall bridge opening. This abutment type may better frame the view beyond
the bridge and be more suitable for use on bridges in close proximity to the
public, such as over recreational trails.
4) Full-height abutments extend from the ground line to the bottom of the
superstructure. They are typically more massive than other abutment types
and often create a very strong definition of the bridge ends. This may be
desirable for gateway bridges or for locations where framing the view of the
background is important. They may also provide for improved security beneath
urban bridges.
d. Superstructure Shape (including parapets, overhangs and railings):
The superstructure shape establishes the form of the structural members, including
deck overhangs, parapets and rails. The superstructure may be shaped to respond
to the forces on it, and the shapes of these elements and the shadows they cast
determine the intrinsic interest of the structure.
e. Pier Shape:
The pier shape defines the form and details of the piers. From many viewpoints,
particularly at oblique angles to the structure, the shapes of the piers will be a major

Rev. 1 5.2 - 127
influence on the impression created. The majority of workhorse bridge piers are
structural frames consisting of circular or rectangular columns with a cap beam, which
supports the superstructure girders. Typically, the exterior columns are inset from the
fascia girder for reasons of structural efficiency, and the cantilevered portions of a cap
beam are often tapered to reduce the depth and mass at the ends.
f. Abutment Shape:
Abutments may become visually massive structures or secondary structures,
depending on the nature of the grading at the bridge ends and the bridge layout
geometry. Abutment shapes are typically more visually important on shorter bridges
than on longer bridges, since an observer is more likely to view a short bridge in its
entirety. From viewpoints near the ends of longer structures, the shape and detail of
the abutment will also be important. For structures involving pedestrians, the
provisions made for them at the ends of the bridge can be among the most memorable
aspects of the structure.
g. Color
Colors have a long history of application on bridges due to their large visual impact
with a correspondingly low cost relative to that associated with other bridge features
and treatments. The colors of uncoated structural materials as well as coated
elements and details need to be considered. Color, or lack thereof, will influence the
effect of all the decisions that have gone before. It provides an economical vehicle to
add an additional level of interest.
h. Texture, Ornamentation and Details
Texture, ornamentation and details are elements that can add visual interest and
emphasis. Structural elements, such as stiffeners and bearings, may serve this
function. Indeed, traditional systems of architectural ornamentation started from a
desire to visually emphasize points where force is transferred, such as from beam to
column through an ornamental capital. Patterns of grooves or insets and similar
details are other examples.
i. Lighting, Signing and Landscaping
Though not actually part of the structural system, these elements may have great
influence on the aesthetic impression a bridge makes.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 128
SUBSECTION 5.2.5 FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES
5.2.5 FOUNDATIONS AND EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURES
A. General
1. Introduction
This section mandates the principles, guidelines, and requirements for design and
construction of the RC foundation and earth retaining structures, and provides the minimum
technical requirements to be adopted by the A/E and/or EPC Contractors to enable safety,
quality, and cost effectiveness in the design and construction of foundation structures that
meet the needs and expectations of the RC.
2. Scope
The scope of this subsection is to provide guidance on design and construction of
foundation and earth retaining structures, constructed of concrete and steel materials. This
scope is limited to building and non-building type structures and systems. The design
requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on the MBC, industry
standards, and best RC practices.
3. Applicability
design of and construction of foundations and earth retaining structures for all RC building
and non-building structures and systems.
4. Definitions
5. Abbreviations
a. Foundations and retaining walls shall be designed based on the allowable soil
pressure recommended in the GDR.
b. Foundations shall be designed with due consideration of the fact that soil cannot be
engaged in tension. However, a region of zero pressure in a foundation design is
acceptable provided that stability of the footing is confirmed.
c. The highest elevation of the water table shall be as provided in the GDR. Soil
condition, dry or saturated and the need to consider buoyancy in the analysis shall
be based on this elevation.
7. Codes
Design and construction of all RC foundation and earth retaining structures shall be based
on the requirements of this section and existing standards; these shall be from the MBC.
Analysis of these structures shall be based on standard methods acceptable to RC and
the soil parameters recommended in the GDR for the specific structure’s site.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 129
f. Section 4.4 Field Investigations and Existing Conditions
g. Section 5.1 to 5.10 Design Guidelines
9. Approvals
The RC is responsible for review and approval of all studies, drawings and specifications
related to design of foundation and earth retaining structures within the RC jurisdiction.
This responsibility is shared with the structure’s owner, if other than RC.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning of foundation shall be performed after their construction is completed to verify
that the new/rehabilitated foundation structure achieves project requirements as intended by
the RC/building owner and as designed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
D. Design Requirements
1. Bearing Pressure
a. Foundations and retaining walls shall be designed using an allowable soil pressure
and soil parameters recommended GDR.
b. Foundations shall be designed with due consideration of the fact that soil cannot be
engaged in tension. Regions of zero pressure are acceptable provided that stability
is maintained.
2. Water Table
a. The highest elevation of the water table shall be as provided in the GDR.
b. For structural design, water table elevation shall be at the elevation provided in the
GDR or at the finished grade elevation, whichever is higher.
c. Structures shall be designed for the most severe ground water conditions, including
the condition of no ground water.
d. For retaining walls, the ground water on the toe side and the soil on top of the toe
shall be ignored in structural design and in the overturning, sliding, and buoyancy
stability calculations.
3. Buoyancy
a. In the design of foundations, retaining walls, pits, pipes, and buried structures, the
upward buoyant force of ground water shall be taken as the volume of water
displaced by the structure and air space multiplied by the density of water.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 130
Interactions of structural systems shall be considered, such as empty pipeline

buoyant reactions on walls.
b. The dead weight of the structure shall be considered in the resistance to buoyant
force calculations. Soil shall not be considered unless it is directly supported by the
foundation and it is certain that the soil would not be removed. Soil wedges shall not
be considered in the design. For soil that is directly supported by the foundation and
that could possibly be removed, the weight of water may be substituted for the
weight of the soil.
c. For structures wherein water is expected on the inside of the structure, such water
shall be ignored in the calculation of the resistance to buoyant force.
4. Hydrostatic Pressure
a. For retaining, basement, tank, and pit walls, hydrostatic pressure shall be
considered in the design of the wall elements.
b. Base slabs of basements, tanks, and pits shall be investigated for upward shear and
bending due to hydrostatic pressure. The hydrostatic pressure shall be based on the
water table being at the finished grade elevation.
c. Water-stops shall be provided as specified in the RC specifications and at the
locations shown on the drawings.
5. Hydrodynamic Pressure
If hydrodynamic pressure due to flowing water is possible, then this pressure shall be
considered in the structural design of impacted elements.
6. Adjacent Loads
Where footings are placed at varying elevations, the effects of adjacent loads shall be
considered in the foundation design.
7. Existing Construction
a. New footings shall not be placed in locations which would increase soil pressure on
existing structural elements. Where the situation is unavoidable, the existing
foundation shall be evaluated for the impact of the new foundation, and the new
foundation system shall be configured to have the least negative effect on the
existing foundation.
b. The effect on existing structures of surcharges relating to service and construction
loads shall be considered in the design. Limits shall be indicated on the construction
drawings that define the zones in which cranes and heavy equipment may not
operate. Where the condition is unavoidable, the A/E and or EPC Contractor shall
provide an engineered solution and submit to RC for approval.
8. Founding Depth
Unless a deeper depth is established as a result of the geotechnical investigation, the
minimum depth for shallow foundations shall be based on the recommendations of the
SBC 303-18, Chapter 5; min footing depth not less than 1.2 m below natural ground for
cohesion less soils, 1.5 m for silty and clay soils, and 0.6 to 1.2 m for rocks depending on
quality and strength of rock.
For strip footings supporting walls of light-frame construction, foundation width and
thickness shall be as provided in the MBC.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 131
9. Stability
a. General
1) Stability calculations shall be based on service loads.
2) Except for retaining walls, soil shall not be considered unless it is directly
supported by the foundation and it is certain that the soil would not be removed.
Soil wedges shall not be considered.
3) For tanks, vessels, bins, etc.., both cases (empty and with content) shall be
considered for all stability analysis. Structure shall be designed for the most
significant effect from the two cases.
4) Overturning and sliding stabilities shall be evaluated with and without the
effects of buoyancy.
b. Factor of Safety for Overturning
1) For building structures, refer to Section 5.2.1.A.6.f
2) For non-building structures, refer to Section 5.2.1.D.2.d
3) For retaining walls, the factor of safety for overturning shall not be less than 1.5
(or 1.1 under earthquake loads)
4) For irregular or special-use structures where loads other than wind and seismic
contribute significantly to the overturning effect, a higher factor of safety shall
be considered.
5) Weights of equipment that can be removed shall not be considered in the
overturning resistance.
c. Factor of Safety for Sliding
1) For building structures, refer to Section 5.2.1.A.6.f.
2) For non-building structures, refer to Section 5.2.1.D.2.d
3) For retaining walls, the factor of safety for sliding shall be as follows:
(a) For cohesionless backfill: 1.5
(b) For cohesive backfill: 2.0
(c) Minimum factor of safety under earthquake loads: 1.1
4) A value of 0.40 shall be used for the coefficient of friction, unless specified
otherwise in the GDR.
d. Factor of Safety for Buoyancy
1) The factor of safety for buoyancy shall be at least 1.2 for the highest anticipated
buoyant force effects. Where the dead weights calculated are well established,
such as for concrete components, this factor may be reduced to 1.1.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 132
E. Foundation Structures Types and Selection

1. Shallow Foundation
a. Ground supported concrete mat, combined, isolated, and strip foundations are
recommended where the soil at shallow depths has sufficient bearing capacity for
the applied structural loads.
b. Shallow foundations shall be configured such that the gravity load bearing pressures
for all foundations will produce uniform settlement of the structural system.
Combined foundations shall be configured such that the dead load bearing pressure
is approximately uniform.
c. For foundations that support a lateral force resisting system of a structure, all tensile
and shear forces shall be resisted by the foundation and transferred to the ground
through a well-defined load path. Any uplift shall be resisted by concrete mass and
soil, if it could not be removed.
d. Shallow foundations shall be reinforced to resist the maximum loads required by
design. Steel reinforcement in shallow foundations shall be hooked only if required
by analysis.
2. Deep Foundation
a. Deep Foundations are recommended when there are large design loads, poor soil at
shallow depth, or site constraints. Piles are generally driven into the in-situ ground;
other deep foundations are typically installed using excavation and drilling. Deep
foundations may be composed of either treated timber, reinforced concrete, or pre-
stressed concrete. A pile cap shall be used when the required loads exceed single
pile capacity recommended in the GDR. Pile caps and isolated piles are typically
connected with grade beams to tie the foundation elements together. Lighter
structural elements are usually supported on the grade beams, while heavier
elements bear directly on the pile cap.
b. There are different terms used to describe different types of deep foundations as
follows:
1) Driven Piles
2) Drilled shafts or caissons
3) Helical or Screw piles
c. Pile Types are as follows:
1) Concrete Driven Piles
(a) Precast / Pre-stressed concrete round reinforced shafts ranging in size
from 150 mm to 600 mm.
(b) Depths of soil embedment are optimal when greater than 5 m and may
range in depth to over 30 m.
(c) Concrete piles are typically designed with steel reinforcing bars and/or pre-
stressing tendons to develop the strength required for handling and
driving, and to provide required bending resistance.
(d) Long piles may be difficult to handle and transport. Pile joints may be used
to join two or more short piles to form one long pile. Pile joints may be used
with both precast and pre-stressed concrete piles.
2) Treated Timber Driven Piles
Rev. 1 5.2 - 133
(a) Timber piles shall not be used unless specific authorization by the RC is
provided.
(b) Timber piles have significantly less strength than steel or concrete piles.
(c) Timber piles are more durable than steel piles in a corrosive environment.
3) Steel Driven Piles
(a) Structural Steel piles are subject to severe corrosion and shall be used
only with RC authorization.
(b) Steel piles are most economical for depths greater than 5 m and may
range in depth to over 30 m.
(c) Wide flange and Pipe profiles provide the most economical sections for
use as piles.
(d) See corrosion protection subsection (5.2.6) for Corrosion Protection
requirements.
4) Drilled Piers/Caissons
(a) Drilled piers range in size from 450 mm to 2000 mm. Drilled shafts have
the ability to generate large passive pressure forces based on their
diameter and depth of embedment and should be considered for sign, flag
pole and high mast lighting foundations due to their significant lateral load
capability.
5) Soldier Piles
(a) Soldier pile systems are utilized extensively in temporary works such as
support of excavation during project construction phases.
(b) Other applications of Soldier Pile systems are not allowed and require
authorization by the RC.
(c) Soldier pile systems are constructed of wide flange steel H sections
spaced about 2 to 3 m apart and are driven prior to excavation. As the
excavation proceeds, horizontal timber sheeting (lagging) is inserted
behind the H pile flanges.
(d) Horizontal earth pressure is generally attracted to the soldier pile locations
because of their relative rigidity in comparison to the lagging. Soil
movement is minimized by maintaining the lagging in firm contact with the
soil.
6) Helical Piles
(a) Helical piles are subject to severe corrosion and shall be used only with
RC authorization.
(b) Helical piles are a steel screw-in piling and ground anchoring system used
for building deep foundations.
(c) Helical Piles are manufactured using varying sizes of tubular hollow
sections for the pile or anchor shaft.
(d) The pile shaft transfers the structural load into the pile. Helical steel plates
are welded to the pile shaft in accordance with the intended ground
conditions, and transfer the shaft load into the soil. Helices may be press

Rev. 1 5.2 - 134
formed to a specified pitch or simply consist of flat plates welded at a

specified pitch to the pile's shaft.
(e) Helical piles may be installed at reduced cost and time of installation as
compared to competing pile systems.
(f) Helical piles can be installed in low overhead situations where there is
insufficient access for pile driving equipment.
7) Auger-cast Piles
(a) Auger-cast piles require specific soil and geotechnical parameters to be
utilized effectively and shall be used only with RC authorization.
(b) Auger-cast piles are formed by drilling into the ground with a hollow
stemmed continuous flight auger to the required depth or degree of
resistance. No casing is required. A cement grout mix is then pumped
down the stem of the auger. While the cement grout is pumped, the auger
is slowly withdrawn, conveying the soil upward along the flights. A shaft of
fluid cement grout is formed to ground level. Reinforcement may be
installed after removal of the auger.
(c) Auger-cast piles cause minimal disturbance, and are often used for noise
and environmentally sensitive sites.
(d) Pile Testing
(1) All pile projects shall have load testing and inspection per the
requirements of the MBC.
(2) Dynamic pile testing shall be required for all driven piles.
(3) Load testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1143 and
ASTM D3689 for piles which have been augured or drilled.
F. Earth Retaining Structures Types and Selection
Earth retaining structures shall be designed based on the GDR recommendations for the
specific type of structure and acceptable analysis and design methods included in the
geotechnical design section of this manual.
G. Construction Requirements
1. Foundations
The top elevation of pedestals supporting steel bases such as structural columns, pipe
supports, and equipment shall be at least 150 mm above finished grade level.
2. Retaining Walls
a. Accumulation of water behind retaining walls shall be prevented by providing a
drainage system consisting of adequately spaced weep holes and coarse gravel
filter to collect the water behind the wall.
b. The depth of backfill material in front of a retaining wall shall be at least 600 mm
from the bottom of the footing and at least 300 mm from the top of the footing.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 135
SUBSECTION 5.2.6 CORROSION PROTECTION
5.2.6 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. RC Concrete and steel structures are subjected to one of the most severe exposure
conditions in the world, and therefore, require special considerations in design,
detailing, and construction to achieve the acceptable standards for protection and
long term durability required by the RC.
b. This subsection covers the corrosion protection guidelines for the Royal Commission
facilities during design, construction, and operation and maintenance stages, to
achieve long service life, durability, and low maintenance cost.
2. Scope
a. The scope of this subsection is to provide the principles, guidelines, and
requirements for corrosion protection of RC facilities and systems constructed of
concrete and steel materials. The facilities and systems covered under this
subsection include reinforced concrete and steel structures including buildings,
bridges, culverts, marine structures, water storage tanks, wastewater handling
structures, pipelines, pipe supports, pipe racks, drainage channels, and others.
b. The requirements provided herein, or cited by reference, are based on the Saudi
Building Code (MBC), industry standards, and best practices adopted by the RC for
over four decades.
3. Applicability
The principles, guidelines, and requirements in this subsection shall apply to all RC
facilities and systems included in the above scope. For structures and systems not
specifically mentioned in the scope, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall direct questions
on applicability to the RC.
4. Definitions
5. Abbreviations
a. For non-building structures not listed, specifications and construction details shall be
generated by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor, subject to RC approval.
b. Although this subsection covers certain materials and special considerations for
those materials when used in particular applications, the category of structures
"other than buildings" includes possible applications for virtually any material type.
c. Exposure Conditions
1) Jubail Industrial City (Jubail 1 and Jubail 2)
The exposure conditions for reinforced concrete and steel structures in Jubail 1
and 2 are severely corrosive. The parameters which are relevant to performance
of concrete and steel structures are listed herein.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 136
(a) According to the Soil Corrosivity Survey Report conducted under Contract
No. 001-T20 in 1981 for Jubail 1, the characteristics of the soil conditions
of Jubail 1 are as follows:
(1) About 63% of the area is covered with sabkha (flat and very saline
areas of sand or silt lying just above the water-table).
(2) Chloride content in soil exceeds the critical value for corrosion at 21%
of the area.
(3) Sulfate content in soil exceeded the critical value for sulfate attack for
concrete at 52% of the area.
(4) Soil resistivity at 3 m depth was lower than 500 ohm-cm at 18% of
the area.
(b) According to the Report on Characterization of Soil and Groundwater
Conditions in Jubail 2 conducted under Contract No 202-T03, Task 10, the
characteristics of the soil conditions of Jubail 2 are as follows:
(1) The soil conditions above the groundwater table are very severely to
moderately corrosive.
(2) The soil conditions below the groundwater table are very severely to
severely corrosive.
(3) Only 6% of the area is covered with sabkha.
(4) Chloride content in soil exceeded the critical value of 0.1% for
corrosion of reinforcing steel at 15% of the area. The chloride
concentration in soil varied from 0.01 to 0.6%.
(5) Sulfate content in soil exceeded the critical value of 0.1% for sulfate
attack of concrete at 15% of the area. The sulfate concentration in
soil varied from 0.01 to 0.6%.
(6) Soil resistivity at 5 m depth was lower than 1000 ohm-cm at 25% of
the area.
(7) The depth of groundwater table varies from 0.3 to 5.8 m from the
finished ground level (after the proposed filling).
(8) Chloride and sulfate contents in groundwater are more than the
critical values for concrete deterioration. The chloride and sulfate
concentrations in groundwater varied from 0.05 to 1% and 0.02 to
0.38% respectively.
The atmospheric conditions in Jubail 1 and Jubail 2 are characterized
by high day-time temperatures during summer, high humidity in winter
season, high temperature difference between summer and winter
seasons, high temperature and humidity fluctuations during day and
night in summer season, high winds and sandstorms, and atmosphere
heavily laden with slat and dust. The average minimum and maximum
temperatures are 8 and 46°C respectively.
2) Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
Ras Al-Khair Industrial City is located about 65 km North-west of Jubail 1. The
exposure conditions are similar to those in Jubail and can be considered as
severely corrosive for reinforced concrete and steel structures.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 137
(a) According to the Report on Geotechnical Investigation for Site

Development of Area B in Ras Al-Khair Industrial City conducted under
Contract No. 001-T01, Task Release 54, January 2013, the characteristics
of the soil conditions in Ras Al-Khair Industrial City can be summarized as
follows:
(1) The soil comprises predominantly granular soil deposit with clay
deposits at some locations.
(2) Groundwater table is located at 2 to 9 m from the surface.
(3) pH of soil varies from 7.02 to 7.36 and that in the groundwater varies
from 7.03 to 8.37.
(4) Chloride content in soil (as NaCl) varies from 0.04 to 0.13% whereas
in groundwater it varies from 0.2 to 1.0%.
(5) Sulfate (SO3) content in soil and groundwater ranges from 0.01 to
0.38% and 0.08 to 0.25%.
7. Codes
a. Industry Standards
1) Saudi Building Code, Chapter 4.
2) American Concrete Institute, ACI 214R Evaluation of Strength Test Results of
Concrete.
3) American Concrete Institute, ACI 224R Control of Cracking in Concrete
Structures.
4) American Concrete Institute, ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
5) American Concrete Institute, ACI 318M-14 Building Code Requirements for
6) Structural Concrete and Commentary.
7) American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM C76 Standard Specification
for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
8) American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM C150 Standard
Specification for Portland Cement.
Specification for Coal Fly ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use in
Concrete.
10) American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM Standard Test Method for
Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete.
Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures.
12) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, AASHTO
T277 Standard Method of Test for Rapid Determination of the Chloride
Permeability of Concrete
13) American Water Works Association, AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement
for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
14) American Water Works Association, AWWA C151 Ductile Iron Pipe,
Centrifugally cast.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 138
15) American Water Works Association, AWWA C301 Prestressed Concrete

Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type.
16) American Water Works Association, AWWA C303 Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar
Wrapped, Steel-Cylinder Type.
17) Society for Protective Coatings, SSPC SP-5 White Metal Blast Cleaning.
18) Society for Protective Coatings, SSPC SP-10 Near-White Blast Cleaning.
b. Royal Commission Issued Reports
1) Report on “Characterization of Soil and Groundwater Conditions in Jubail 2”,
Contract No. 202-T03, Task Release No. 10, 2006.
2) Report on “Corrosion Control Guidelines for Concrete Structures in Jubail 2”,
Contract No. 202-T03, Task Release No. 10, 2006.
3) Report on “Corrosion Control Guidelines for Concrete Structures in Ras Al-
Khair Industrial City (RIC)”, Contract No. 027-T01, Task Release No. 2, 2013.
4) Report on “Soil Corrosivity Study, Contract No. 001-T20, by Research Institute,
King Fahd University of Petroleum and Minerals for Royal Commission, Jubail
Project, 1981.
5) Report on Geotechnical Investigation for Site Development of Area B in Ras Al-
Khair Industrial City conducted under Contract No. 001-T01, Task Release 54,
January 2013.
f. Section 4.4 Field Investigations and Existing Conditions
9. Approvals
The RC is responsible for review and approval of all corrosion protection related designs,
details, specifications, and studies for facilities and structures constructed within the
jurisdiction of the RC. This responsibility is shared with the structure’s owner, if other than the
RC.
B. Commissioning
Commissioning for corrosion protection shall be performed during or after construction,
depending on the structural systems or elements, to verify that the new/rehabilitated systems
or elements meet the corrosion protection requirements of this subsection.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 139

D. Protection of Concrete Structures
1. General
Concrete structures in Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are subjected to one of the
most severe exposure conditions in the world and therefore, require special considerations to
achieve the intended durability. The guidelines provided herein include all reinforced concrete
structures.
2. Forms of Concrete Deterioration
a. Reinforcement Corrosion
This is the most predominant type of deterioration of concrete structures in Jubail and
Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities. Chloride salts from soil, groundwater, seawater, and
other sources ingress into concrete and cause breakdown of the protective oxide film
on reinforcing steel and cause onset of active corrosion. Accumulation of corrosion
products, which occupy more volume than the steel, cause tensile stresses in the
cover concrete. When these tensile stresses exceed the tensile strength of concrete,
the cover concrete suffers cracking, delamination, and spalling. This causes loss of
serviceability and may lead to a reduction in the structural capacity of the reinforced
concrete member.
b. Sulfate Attack
Sulfate attack is caused in concrete exposed to soil, groundwater and seawater by
chemical reaction between hydrated cement and sulfate ions. Sulfate attack results in
formation of expansive products which cause expansion of concrete leading to
cracking. Sulfate attack can also cause progressive loss of strength and mass due to
deterioration in the cohesiveness of the cement hydration products.
c. Salt Crystallization
This is caused in concrete exposed to wetting and drying by groundwater and
seawater. It is caused by ingress of salts into concrete which crystallizes on drying
leading to progressive crumbling or scaling of concrete. Salt crystallization leads to
erosion of concrete surface and exposes the aggregate.
d. Thermal Cracking
Cracking of concrete may be caused due to plastic shrinkage in freshly poured
concrete or drying shrinkage in hardened concrete. Plastic and drying shrinkage are
physical phenomena and cause tensile strain in concrete. When the associated tensile
stress in concrete exceeds its tensile strength, cracking occurs.
3. Exposure Conditions
Concrete structures exposed to the following conditions shall be considered as severe
exposure:

Rev. 1 5.2 - 140
a. Below ground and up to half meter above ground level

b. Seawater and spray from seawater (splash zone, tidal zone and structures located
within 500 m from the seashore)
c. Interior of chambers (valve chambers, manholes etc.)
d. Wastewater and chemicals
Concrete exposed to atmosphere and interior of air-conditioned areas shall not be
considered as exposed to severe conditions.
4. Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures
a. General
Design and construction of durable concrete structures involve selection of adequate
materials, adoption of proper design and construction techniques and provision of
additional protection measures, as required, to prolong the service life to the design
service life.
b. Material Selection
1) Cement Type
The SBC recommends ASTM C150 Type I cement with mineral admixture for
concrete exposed to very severe chloride exposure and ASTM C150 Type V
cement with mineral admixture for concrete exposed to very severe sulfate
exposure. Similarly ACI 318M-14 recommends ASTM C150 Type V cement
with pozzolan or slag for concrete exposed to very severe sulfate exposure.
Cement with a high tricalcium aluminate (C3A) content is more resistant to
chloride exposure than that with a low C3A content. This is due to the influence
of C3A in binding more chlorides and reducing chloride diffusion coefficient of
concrete. Mineral admixtures increase resistance to reinforcement corrosion
as well as sulfate attack due to improvement in impermeability of concrete.
Type of cement for different exposure conditions shall be as follows:
(a) For reinforced concrete exposed to severe conditions, use ASTM C150
Type I with mineral admixture.
(b) For reinforced concrete not exposed to severe conditions, use ASTM
C150 Type I cement without mineral admixture.
(c) For unreinforced concrete exposed to severe conditions, use ASTM C150
Type V cement with mineral admixture.
(d) The mineral admixture shall be silica fume conforming to ASTM C 1240.
Class F fly ash conforming to ASTM C 618 may be used as an alternative.
2) Water Cementitious Materials Ratio
(a) The maximum water-cementitious materials ratio for all concrete shall be
limited to 0.40.
(b) Water-cementitious material ratio is the ratio of water to the sum of cement
and mineral admixture. The SBC recommends maximum water-
cementitious material ratio of 0.4 for concrete exposed to very severe
chloride exposure and 0.45 for concrete exposed to very severe sulfate
exposure. ACI 318M-14 recommends maximum water-cementitious

Rev. 1 5.2 - 141
material ratio of 0.45 for concrete exposed to very severe sulfate

exposure.
3) Compressive Strength
(a) The minimum specified compressive strength for reinforced concrete
exposed to severe conditions shall be 35 MPa.
(b) A lower strength may be specified for un-reinforced concrete.
(c) The SBC requires minimum compressive strength of concrete of 35 MPa
for concrete exposed to very severe chloride exposure and 30 MPa for
concrete exposed to very severe sulfate exposure. ACI 318M-14
recommends minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi or 35
MPa for corrosion protection of reinforcement in concrete exposed to
moisture and chlorides from de-icing chemicals, salt water, brackish water,
seawater, or spray from these sources.
4) Cement Content
(a) A minimum cement content of 370 kg/m³ shall be used for all reinforced
concrete.
(b) A lower cement content value may be used for unreinforced concrete.
(c) Minimum cement content requirement is governed by maximum water
cementitious material ratio, minimum compressive strength and
workability. For a required water cementitious material ratio and
compressive strength, a certain amount of cement is required to obtain a
workable concrete mix.
(d) The SBC recommends minimum cementitious material (cement plus
mineral admixture) content of 370 kg/m³ for concrete exposed to very
severe chloride exposure and 350 kg/m³ for concrete exposed to very
severe sulfate exposure.
c. Design
1) Cover
(a) For concrete exposed to severe conditions, the minimum cover shall be
75 mm.
(b) The cover over the reinforcing steel plays a very important the role in
protection of reinforcement against corrosion. ACI 318M-14 specifies a
minimum cover of 75 mm for concrete cast against and exposed to earth.
2) Crack Control
(a) The minimum crack width shall be 0.15 mm for structures exposed severe
conditions and 0.30 mm for superstructures exposed to atmosphere.
(b) One of the major causes of concrete deterioration in otherwise durable
concrete is cracks. The cracks allow ingress of chlorides at an accelerated
rate through concrete cover. Cracks are caused by stresses in concrete
due to drying shrinkage, loads, and settlement.
(c) ACI 214R “Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures” provides a general
guide for tolerable crack widths in reinforced concrete for different
exposure conditions. A tolerable crack width of 0.30 mm is recommended

Rev. 1 5.2 - 142
for concrete structures exposed to humidity, moist air, and soil, and 0.15
mm for structures exposed to seawater and seawater spray.
(d) The above crack width limits shall be used for the design. However, ACI
224R cautions that these values of crack width are not always a reliable
indication of the corrosion and deterioration to be expected. In particular,
a larger cover, even if it leads to a larger surface crack, may sometimes
be preferable for corrosion control in certain environments. Thus,
engineering judgment must be exercised on the extent of crack control to
be used. ACI 224R also provides recommendations for controlling cracks
in different structural members.
3) Reinforcement Detailing
Good detailing helps in minimizing reinforcement corrosion risk. Using a large
number of smaller diameter bars is preferable to small number of larger
diameter bars. The maximum spacing between the bars shall be limited to 300
mm. Large diameter bars shall be avoided in thin sections.
d. Construction Practice
1) Curing
(a) Curing is essential to develop the potential properties of concrete.
Concrete containing mineral admixtures is more sensitive to curing.
Strength development of fly ash blended cement concrete is slower than
plain concrete and hence, a prolonged curing period is required. Silica
fume blended cement concrete has higher potential of cracking due to
plastic shrinkage and its strength development is sensitive to early curing.
Therefore, efficient curing during early days is required. The rate of
strength development of concrete containing silica fume is either equal to
or better than concrete without silica fume.
(b) The minimum curing period shall be 14 days for all reinforced concrete
with and without silica fume. However, the minimum curing period shall
be extended to 21 days for concrete containing fly ash as mineral
admixture.
2) Hot Weather Concreting
Precautions shall be taken for concreting during hot weather.
Recommendations provided by ACI 305R “Hot Weather Concreting” shall be
followed. The temperature of concrete at delivery shall be limited to 30C.
3) Chloride and Sulfate Limits
(a) The SBC and ACI 318M-14 recommend maximum water soluble chloride
ion content, as measured in accordance with ASTM C1218, of 0.15% by
weight of cement for reinforced concrete exposed to very severe chloride
exposure. This limit is reduced to 0.06% for pre-stressed concrete. As
the exposure conditions in Jubail 1, Jubail 2 and Ras Al-Khair Industrial
Cities are characterized by presence of sulfates in soil and high ambient
temperatures, which adversely affect chloride diffusion in service and
reinforcement corrosion process, a more stringent value is applicable.
Therefore, a value of 0.10% water soluble chloride content is adopted for
Jubail and Ras Al-Khair. For pre-stressed concrete, the limit shall be
reduced to 0.06%.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 143
(b) Sulfate (SO3) content of cement allowed by ASTM C150 is 3% for Type I
cement with C3A content of 8% and less, and 3.5% for C3A content of
more than 8%. This is equivalent to about 4% of SO4 content. Therefore,
SO4 content of hardened concrete shall be limited to a maximum of 4%
for all concrete (reinforced and unreinforced).
4) Chloride Permeability
Chloride permeability, as measured by procedures described in AASHTO
T277, is a convenient quality control test for concrete durability. Typical values
of chloride permeability for 0.40 water cement ratio concrete made with ASTM
C150 Type I cement varies from 3500-5000 Coulombs. These values for 10%
silica fume concrete range from 500-1000 Coulombs. Therefore, the maximum
chloride permeability for plain, fly ash, and silica fume concrete shall be 4,000,
2,000, and 1,000 Coulomb respectively.
5) Mass Concrete
(a) Excessive cracking that occurs as a result of improper casting and curing
of mass concrete significantly increases the ingress of corrosive
contaminants. The presence of cracks can rapidly accelerate the
deterioration process.
(b) The configuration of structural elements with proportions that qualify as
mass concrete shall be avoided. Engineering shall employ “strut and tie”
or “truss analogy” techniques, where applicable, to keep member sizes
below the mass concrete threshold.
(c) Any concrete structural element for which the least dimension exceeds 1
m shall be considered mass concrete and shall be subject to the
requirements of this subsection. The presence of mass concrete shall be
declared in the general concrete notes and specifically identified on the
plans of the construction drawings. Instructions for casting and curing the
mass concrete shall be provided in the notes.
(d) Mass concrete is defined by ACI Committee 207 as “any volume of
concrete with dimensions large enough to require that measures be taken
to cope with the generation of heat from hydration of cement and attendant
volume change to minimize cracking.”
(e) Casting and curing of mass concrete elements shall comply with the
recommendations and provisions of ACI 207.1R, 207.2R, and 207.4.
e. Additional Protection Measures
Depending on the design service life requirement, it may be necessary to provide
additional protection systems. Some of the commonly used measures are using
fusion bonded epoxy (FBE) coated reinforcement, concrete surface coating, tanking,
and cathodic protection. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall assess the exposure
conditions and the design life and decide upon the required additional protection
measures.
5. Summary of Guidelines for Protection of Concrete Structures
a. The guidelines on water-cementitious material ratio, compressive strength, cement
content, cover, crack control, reinforcement detailing, curing, hot weather concreting,

Rev. 1 5.2 - 144
chloride and sulfate limits, and chloride permeability shall be followed for all concrete
as discussed in the above sections.
b. A summary of the guidelines for protection of concrete structures is given in TABLE
5.2.6.A.
TABLE 5.2.6.A. SUMMARY OF GUIDELINES FOR PROTECTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Type of
Exposure Additional
S. No Structure Cement Type Reinforcemen
Condition Protection
t
Superstructures
1 (located over 500 m Atmosphere TYPE I Uncoated NONE
away from seashore)
Superstructures TYPE I Plus
Concrete Surface
2 (located within 500 m Atmosphere Mineral Uncoated
Coating
from seashore) Admixtures*
Interior of air-
3 Superstructures TYPE I Uncoated NONE
conditioned areas
Foundation of
buildings, bridges,
culverts and other TYPE I Plus
Buried (soil / Waterproofing
4 structures (buried and Mineral FBE Coated
groundwater) Membrane
up to 0.5 m above Admixtures*
ground/finished floor
level)
Immersed in
seawater and
Spray from TYPE I Plus Impressed current
All Reinforced
5 seawater (splash, Mineral Uncoated cathodic
Concrete
tidal & Admixtures* protection
atmospheric
zones)
Waterproofing
membrane for
buried concrete up
Partially buried & TYPE I Plus
to 150 mm above
6 Pipe Supports exposed to Mineral FBE Coated
ground level and
atmosphere Admixtures*
concrete surface
coating for
exposed concrete
TYPE I Plus
Buried (soil /
7 Piles Mineral FBE Coated NONE
groundwater)
Admixtures*
TYPE I Plus
Chambers and Interior of non-air- Concrete Surface
8 Mineral FBE Coated
manholes conditioned areas Coating
Admixtures*

Rev. 1 5.2 - 145
Interior of chambers TYPE I Plus

Wastewater/chemi Concrete Surface
9 handling wastewater Mineral FBE Coated
cals Coating
and chemicals Admixtures*
TYPE I Plus
Potable/reclaimed Concrete Surface
10 Tanks (internal) Mineral FBE Coated
water Coating
Admixtures*
Waterproofing
membrane for
buried concrete up
TYPE I Plus
Tanks (bottom & Potable/reclaimed to 150 mm above
11 Mineral FBE Coated
external) water ground level and
Admixtures*
concrete surface
coating for
exposed concrete
Unreinforced concrete TYPE V Plus
12 (mud-mat, anchor All conditions Mineral NONE NONE
blocks etc.) Admixtures*
* Mineral admixture shall be 7% silica fume conforming to ASTM C1240 as cement replacement
E. Protection of Steel Structures
1. General
Steel structures in Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are subjected one of the most
severe exposure conditions in the world and therefore, require special corrosion control
measures to achieve the intended durability. The guidelines provided herein include steel
framed structures (such as buildings, pipe racks, bridges etc.), tanks, vessels, and piles.
2. Forms of Corrosion of Steel
a. Galvanic Corrosion
Galvanic corrosion occurs when two dissimilar metals come in contact in a conducting
corrosive environment. The corrosion is stimulated by the potential difference that
exists between the two metals. The more active metal acts as anode and the other
acts as cathode.
Galvanic corrosion can be minimized by selecting suitable metal couples in system
design. If sufficient experience is not available to select compatible couples, the
selection may be confirmed through laboratory testing. Wherever dissimilar metals
are used, they shall be separated electrically with an electrical insulator. When
insulation is not practical, the area ratio method may be used in the design. Coating
the cathode only, or coating both the anode and the cathode, is generally preferable
to avoid the unfavorable area ratio effect in a galvanic corrosion situation.
b. Pitting
Pitting corrosion is localized accelerated dissolution of metal that occurs as a result of
a breakdown of the otherwise protective passive film on the metal surface. Pitting can
be avoided/minimized by coating the metal surfaces, periodic cleaning and designing
shapes that prevent liquids or solids to collect.
c. Crevice Corrosion
Crevice corrosion refers to corrosion occurring in confined spaces to which the access
of the working fluid from the environment is limited. These spaces are generally called

Rev. 1 5.2 - 146
crevices. Examples of crevices are gaps in contact areas between parts, under
gaskets or seals, inside cracks and seams, in spaces filled with deposits, and under
sludge piles. Crevice corrosion can be avoided by minimizing and sealing crevices
and cavities where the metal is susceptible to corrosion. The use of double butt or
double lap weld joints, continuous welds, or nonporous filler materials is
recommended to seal the crevice openings.
d. Intergranular Corrosion
Intergranular corrosion, also known as intergranular attack, is a form of corrosion
where the boundaries of crystallites of the material are more susceptible to corrosion
than their insides. This situation can happen in otherwise corrosion-resistant alloys,
when the grain boundaries of the corrosion-inhibiting elements are depleted, such as
chromium by some mechanism. To minimize the effects of intergranular corrosion,
the base metal and weld filler material shall be selected to be compatible with the
specific environment. Laboratory tests, if necessary, may be specified as part of the
materials selection process. Additionally, a qualified corrosion or metallurgical
engineer shall be consulted on the need of other control measures such as stress
relieving and heat treatment of susceptible metals.
e. Stray Current Corrosion
Stray current corrosion, also called interference corrosion, is corrosion caused by
direct current from an external source that travels through paths other than the
intended circuit. Accelerated corrosion may result if the current is collected by a
structure and discharges to the soil. Preventive measures include electrical insulation
of the structure, equipotential bonding, shielding, or cathodic protection.
3. General Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel
a. General
Steel structures shall be designed to resist the exposure conditions to achieve the
intended design service life of the structure. The most commonly used method of
design and construction of durable steel structures involve material selection,
protective coatings, cathodic protection, and environment treatment.
b. Material Selection
Material selection shall consider the service conditions to which the structure will be
exposed to and shall involve a qualified metallurgical engineer. Suitable corrosion
protection techniques shall be selected by a qualified corrosion control and coatings
specialist.
Following guidelines shall be followed in selection of materials:
1) Materials Selection Process
Most corrosion patterns are not uniform but highly localized. Therefore, it is
important that all materials be evaluated on maximum penetration rates
especially when considering structures containing products. Care shall be
taken when substituting more noble alloys; while general corrosion rates are
substantially lower, the mode of failure can be catastrophic (i.e. stress corrosion
cracking, hydrogen embrittlement, etc.).
2) Galvanic Corrosion
When selecting materials for various components of a unit (ex. body and trim
materials for valves or connecting pipework), care shall be taken to ensure use
of galvanically compatible materials. Electrical insulators and insulating
Rev. 1 5.2 - 147
sleeves shall be used to separate dissimilar metals from each other. In cases
where providing insulation is not feasible, more noble metals shall be used for
joining or fastening.
3) Ferrous Alloys
Ferrous alloys that are buried in soil or exposed to marine environment are
expected to corrode at higher rates. Therefore, such ferrous alloys shall be
protected against corrosion by coating or cathodic protection.
4) Galvanized Steel
Galvanizing alone cannot be expected to provide adequate protection for
metals in outdoor, buried, or submerged applications. Particular attention shall
be given to conditions where galvanized components are electrically
continuous with a large structure, since the galvanizing will provide very little
advantage. Wherever galvanized steel is buried in soil or exposed to the splash
zone or below, it shall be protected against corrosion by coating or cathodic
protection.
5) Aluminum
Aluminum shall not be buried, embedded in concrete, or submerged in brine or
chlorinated water.
c. Protective Coatings
Application of protective coatings is the most commonly used method for corrosion
protection of steel structures. Coatings may be used in conjunction with other
methods, such as cathodic protection. Discussion on protective coatings is provided
in detail the following sections.
d. Cathodic Protection
Cathodic protection is one of the most commonly used methods for corrosion
protection of steel structures exposed to aggressive conditions. Discussion on
cathodic protection is provided in detail the following sections.
e. Environmental Treatment
The treatment of environment shall be viewed as part of an overall strategy to enhance
the performance of a system. Several control methods may be adopted, depending
on the type and function of the systems. Typical treatment methods are oxygen
removal, pH adjustment, dehydration, water removal, velocity control, sludge removal,
temperature control, pressure control, addition of inhibitors, use of biocides and
bactericides, entrained solid removal, etc.
4. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Steel Structures
a. General
1) Steel structures exposed to atmosphere shall be protected by hot dip
galvanizing or protective coating. The most suitable coating is epoxy with a top
coat of polyurethane.
2) Buried steel structures shall be protected by protective coating and cathodic
protection.
3) Steel structures immersed in potable and reclaimed water shall be protected by
protective coating, the most suitable coating being epoxy.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 148
4) Steel structures exposed to seawater or other corrosive environment shall be

protected by protective coating plus cathodic protection.
5) Stainless steel structures exposed to seawater shall also be protected with
cathodic protection.
b. Steel Framed Structures
1) Structures shall be designed to eliminate or minimize crevices and features that
trap and hold dust and water. All crevices shall be suitably sealed.
2) Steel framed structures shall not be buried and shall be protected against
atmospheric corrosion by protective coatings. The most suitable coating is
epoxy with a top coat of polyurethane.
3) Steel members shall be embedded in concrete foundation. A base plate with
anchors into the concrete foundation shall be used. The exposed anchor bolts
shall also be coated with the protective coating.
4) Provision shall be made for inspection and re-coating of the structures after the
design life of the coating is exhausted.
c. Tanks and Vessels
1) Tanks and vessels shall be protected internally as well as externally.
2) Design of vessels shall include eliminating or minimizing crevices. All crevices
shall be suitably sealed.
3) Internal of potable and reclaimed water storage steel tanks shall be protected
by protective coatings. The most suitable coating is epoxy.
4) Internal of vessels handling corrosive media (other than potable and reclaimed
water) shall be protected by coating plus cathodic protection.
5) External of potable and reclaimed water storage steel tanks shall be protected
by protective coatings. The most suitable coating is epoxy with a top coat of
polyurethane.
6) Tank bottoms (underside of the tank floors) shall be protected by impressed
current cathodic protection to avoid corrosion due exposure of the steel to soil.
d. Steel Piles, if approved by the RC
1) Steel piles and the steel casing pipe driven in soil of cased concrete piles shall
be protected by protective coating and cathodic protection (coating is prone to
damage during driving). Piles exposed to atmosphere shall be protected by
protective coating.
2) Steel piles driven in seabed shall be protected by protective coating and
cathodic protection. The cathodic protection shall be provided to the buried as
well as immersed portions of the piles.
3) Piles in the splash zone shall be corrosion protection tape or protective coating
or cathodic protection (jacket-type system). Piles exposed to atmosphere shall
be protected by protective coating.
e. Other Steel Structures
1) Suitable corrosion protection shall be provided for steel structures exposed to
corrosive environments.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 149
2) Light poles shall be protected by hot dip galvanizing. The base plates shall be
protected by protective coating, epoxy being the most suitable coating.
3) Metallic structures in seawater intake and discharge structures shall be
protected by protective coating plus cathodic protection.
F. Protection of Pipelines
1. General
Buried pipelines in Jubail and Ras Al-Khair Industrial Cities are subjected to one of the
most severe exposure conditions in the world and therefore, require adequate corrosion
protection and provisions for inspection during service. The guidelines provided herein
include ductile iron, prestressed concrete, concrete cylinder, reinforced concrete, carbon
steel and cement lined carbon steel pipes.
Recommendations on protection of pipelines are given in TABLE 5.2.6.B.
TABLE 5.2.6.B. RECOMMENDATIONS ON PROTECTION OF PIPELINES
Recommended
S. No Pipe Type External Protection Internal Protection
Use
Pure metallic zinc High alumina cement
(200 g/m2) plus mortar applied
Ductile iron
Potable water bituminous paint (120 centrifugally and
1 (conforming to
Reclaimed water micron) plus sealed with 400
AWWA C151)
polyethylene sleeve micron thick epoxy
(200 micron) coating
Pre-stressed
Potable water Coal tar epoxy coating
Concrete Pipe Epoxy coating (400
2 Reclaimed water (400 micron) Plus
(conforming to micron)
Seawater Cathodic protection
AWWA C301)
Concrete Cylinder Potable water Coal tar epoxy coating
Epoxy coating (400
3 Pipe (conforming to Reclaimed water (400 micron) Plus
micron)
AWWA C303) Seawater Cathodic protection
Reinforced Concrete
Storm drains Coal tar epoxy coating Coal tar epoxy
4 Pipe (conforming to
Culvert pipe (400 micron) coating (400 micron)
ASTM C76)
Epoxy or polyethylene
Potable water Cement mortar lining
Cement Lined coating
5 Reclaimed water plus epoxy coating
Carbon Steel Pipe Plus Cathodic
Seawater (400 micron)
protection
Glass-fiber
Reinforced Polyester Potable water
Pipe (GRP) Reclaimed water
6 NONE NONE
(conforming to Seawater
AWWA C950 and Wastewater
ASTM C3517)
Plastic Pipe (PVC)
Potable water
7 (conforming to SASO NONE NONE
Reclaimed water
14)

Rev. 1 5.2 - 150
Seawater
Wastewater
2. Non-metallic Piping System

Non-metallic piping systems shall be considered for use wherever applicable. All factors,
such as service, exposure conditions, life, cost (initial and life-cycle cost), maintenance
requirements, and other factors shall be considered for selection of the piping system.
3. Guidelines for Corrosion Control of Pipes
a. Ductile Iron Pipes (conforming to ISO 2531 and AWWA C151)
1) Ductile iron pipes are recommended for potable, reclaimed and sea water. They
shall not be used for wastewater.
2) Ductile iron pipes have been successfully used and have good track record in
Jubail Industrial City.
3) Ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be lined internally with high alumina cement
mortar applied centrifugally and sealed with 400 micron thick epoxy coating.
4) Buried ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be protected externally by pure
metallic zinc at the rate of 200g/m2 and covered by a bituminous paint of 120
microns. Additionally, the pipes and fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene
sleeving conforming to ISO 8180 and AWWA C 105. The sleeve is made of a
tubular film of 200 micron thick low density polyethylene slipped over and
snugly fitted to a pipe at the time of laying. The sleeve is fitted to the pipe by
means of adhesive plastic tape at each end and intermediate tie fasteners.
5) Cathodic protection is not required for internal nor external protection of ductile
iron pipes.
b. Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipes (PCCP) (conforming to AWWA C301)
1) PCCP are recommended for potable, reclaimed and sea water service and are
suitable for large diameter pipes. They shall not be used for wastewater.
2) PCCP shall be protected internally by 400 micron thick epoxy coating.
3) Buried PCCP shall be protected externally by 400 micron thick coal tar epoxy
plus cathodic protection.
c. Concrete Cylinder Pipes (CCP) (conforming to AWWA C303)
1) CCP are recommended for potable, reclaimed and seawater service and are
suitable for large diameter pipes. They shall not be used for wastewater.
2) CCP shall be protected internally by 400 micron thick epoxy coating.
3) Buried CCP shall be protected externally by 400 micron thick coal tar epoxy
plus cathodic protection.
d. Reinforced Concrete Pipes (RCP) (conforming to ASTM C76)
1) RCP are recommended for storm drains and culvert pipes.
2) RCP shall be protected internally and externally by 400 micron thick coal tar
epoxy coating.
e. Carbon Steel Pipes
1) Carbon steel may be used for potable, reclaimed and sea water service.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 151
2) Carbon steel pipes shall be protected internally by cement mortar lining and
400 micron thick epoxy coating.
3) Buried carbon steel pipes shall be protected externally by epoxy or
polyethylene coating plus cathodic protection.
G. Protective Coatings
1. General
Protective coating is one of the most commonly used corrosion control methods. Protective
coatings are used for steel as well as concrete structures. Supplemental protection, such
as cathodic protection, may be required for coated steel structures. A typical coating
system includes primer, intermediate coat and top coat. All components of the coating
system shall be compatible and shall be obtained from the same manufacturer.
2. Coating Selection Criteria
Protective coating systems design shall take into consideration the following factors:
a. Location: Whether seacoast, inland, industrial, or rural.
b. Climate: Temperate, humid, dry, wetting, and drying.
c. Type of Service: Exterior/interior or immersed.
d. Service Life: Level of performance desired, life of protection or time to first
maintenance, and color/gloss retention.
e. Surface Preparation: Types and condition of substrate, degree of cleanliness, and
anchor profile.
f. Chemical Exposure: Severe/moderate/mild and immersed.
g. Physical Requirements: Impact resistance, flexibility, abrasion resistance, adhesion,
and hardness.
h. Compatibility: Lifting/hiding power.
i. Curing Schedule: Minimum temperature required, pot life restriction, and re-coat
limitation.
j. Application Methods: Spray, brush, roller, field or shop application, and thinner
required.
k. Economics: Initial cost and cost of maintenance.
3. Coating Systems for Various Structures
Recommended coating systems for various reinforced concrete and steel structures are
given in Table Given in TABLE 5.2.6.C.
a. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned prior to coating to remove loose material, oil,
grease, and dust. Imperfections in the surface shall be filled with epoxy filler. The
coating system shall comprise penetrating epoxy sealer, intermediate and top coat.
b. Steel surfaces shall be prepared by grit blasting to the required finish (SSPC SP 5
for internal surfaces and SSPC SP10 for external surfaces). Pits and surface

Rev. 1 5.2 - 152
imperfections shall be filled with epoxy filler. The coating system shall comprise zinc
phosphate epoxy primer, intermediate, and top coat.
c. The coating shall be tested for dry film thickness, pin holes, and adhesion.
TABLE 5.2.6.C. RECOMMENDATIONS ON COATING SYSTEMS FOR VARIOUS STRUCTURES
Recommended
Type of Exposure Recommended
S. No Surface
Structures Condition Coating System
Preparation
Epoxy sealing primer
Reinforced
Amine cured epoxy
Concrete Clean surface and
(2 coats, 400 micron
1 Structures within Marine fill imperfections
DFT) Re-coatable
500 m from with epoxy filler
polyurethane (1 coat,
seashore
60 micron DFT)
Reinforced Clean surface and
Exterior (above Coal tar epoxy (2
2 Concrete Pipe fill imperfections
ground) coats, 400 micron
Supports with epoxy filler
DFT)
Reinforced Epoxy sealing primer
Clean surface and
Concrete Coal tar epoxy (2
3 Interior fill imperfections
Chambers and coats, 400 micron
with epoxy filler
Manholes DFT)
Reinforced
Concrete Epoxy sealing primer
Clean surface and
Chambers Coal tar epoxy (2
4 Interior fill imperfections
Handling coats, 400 micron
with epoxy filler
Wastewater and DFT)
Chemicals
Clean surface and
MIO epoxy (2/3 coats,
Interior fill imperfections
400 micron DFT)
with epoxy filler
Reinforced Epoxy sealing primer

5
Concrete Tanks MIO epoxy (1/2 coats,
Clean surface and
200 micron DFT) Re-
Exterior fill imperfections
coatable polyurethane
with epoxy filler
(1 coat, 60 micron
DFT)
Epoxy zinc phosphate
Primer (75 micron
DFT) MIO epoxy (1/2
6 Structural Steel Atmosphere SSPC SP-10 coats, 200 micron
DFT) Re-coatable
60 micron DFT)

Rev. 1 5.2 - 153

Buried
primer (75 micron
Seawater
7 Piles SSPC SP-10 DFT) MIO epoxy (2/3
(submerged &
coats, 400 micron
exposed)
DFT)

primer (75 micron
Interior (potable &
SSPC SP-5 DFT)
reclaimed water)
MIO epoxy (2/3 coats,
400 micron DFT)
8 Steel Tanks Epoxy zinc phosphate

Primer (75 micron
DFT) MIO epoxy (1/2
Exterior SSPC SP-10 coat, 200 micron DFT)
Re-coatable
60 micron DFT)
MIO: Micaceous iron oxide; DFT: Dry film thickness
H. Cathodic Protection
1. General
Cathodic protection design, installation, and commissioning shall be carried out by qualified
engineers and contractors. Various factors to be considered prior to design of a cathodic
protection system are type of structure to be protected, electrolyte resistivity, presence of
other facilities and cathodic protection systems and stray current, right of way for locating
cathodic protection hardware, availability of ac power, and other factors. Design
information provided shall include design calculations, material and installation
specifications, commissioning requirements and provisions for monitoring. All cathodic
protection systems shall be monitored by the installation contractor for one year prior to
handing over the system to the Royal Commission.
2. Cathodic Protection Systems Design Criteria
1) Design current density for new reinforced concrete shall at least be 5 mA/m2
of steel reinforcement area.
2) Design current density for existing reinforced concrete shall at least be 20
mA/m2 of steel reinforcement area.
3) Protection criteria shall be an instant off potential of -720 mV or more negative
with respect to silver-silver chloride electrode or potential decay of at least 100
mV over a period of 24 hours or 150 mV over extended period of time.
b. Steel Structures
1) Design current density for tank bottoms, buried piles, and buried bare pipelines
shall at least be 20 mA/m2 of steel area. For coated steel piles and pipes, the
value shall depend on the type of coating; a value of 0.1 to 1 mA/m2 can be
adopted.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 154
2) Design current density for bare steel piles exposed to seawater shall at least
be 150 mA/m2 (initial) and 70 mA/m2 (mean) of steel area. For coated steel,
the design current density can be based on a coating breakdown factor of 10%.
3) Protection criteria for steel exposed to soil and seawater shall be an instant off
potential of -800 mV or more negative with respect to silver-silver chloride
electrode.
3. Cathodic Protection Systems for Different Structures
1) For new reinforced concrete, mixed metal oxide coated titanium expanded
mesh ribbon anodes from a qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record
shall be used. The anodes shall be placed in the cover concrete or between
two layers of the reinforcement. Titanium conductor bar shall be used for
current distribution.
2) For existing reinforced concrete, mixed metal oxide coated titanium mesh
anodes from a qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record shall be used.
The anodes shall be placed on the existing concrete surface and covered in a
cementitious overlay. Titanium conductor bar shall be used for current
distribution.
3) The structure shall be divided in zones of suitable sizes and each zone shall be
fed from a dedicated power supply channel.
b. Steel Tanks and Vessels
1) For new tanks, mixed metal oxide coated titanium ribbon anodes from a
qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record shall be used. The anodes
shall be placed in soil under the tank in the form of parallel strips running in one
direction. Titanium conductor bar shall be used for current distribution and shall
be placed perpendicular to the anodes.
2) For existing tanks, mixed metal oxide coated titanium tubular or high silicon
cast iron anodes from a qualified manufacturer with sufficient track record shall
be used. The anodes shall be placed in drilled holes around the tank. The
depth of the anodes shall be determined in the design calculations.
3) Each tank shall be fed from a dedicated transformer rectifier or a dedicated
channel of a multi-channel transformer rectifier.
c. Steel Pipelines
1) For new and existing pipelines, different types of anodes can be used. The
type of anode shall be manufactured by a qualified manufacturer with sufficient
track record.
2) Use of deep well anodes may be used for cross country pipelines, however,
distributed anodes shall be used for pipelines inside plants and if other
structures exist in the vicinity of the pipeline.
d. Steel Piles
1) For new and existing steel piles buried in soil or submerged in seawater,
sacrificial or impressed current anodes may be used. Sacrificial aluminum
anodes shall preferred for piles in seawater. The impressed anodes may
include mixed metal oxide coated titanium tubular anodes for seawater, and

Rev. 1 5.2 - 155
mixed metal oxide coated titanium tubular and high silicon cast iron anodes for
soil.
4. Monitoring of Cathodic Protection Systems
a. All cathodic protection systems shall be regularly monitored to ensure proper
functioning of the systems and to establish upgrade needs.
b. The frequency of monitoring for sacrificial anode systems shall be six months. The
monitoring shall include measuring anode current and structure-to-soil potentials.
c. The frequency of monitoring for impressed current systems shall be as follows:
1) Monthly: Inspect condition of the hardware and measure transformer rectifier
output.
2) Semi-Annually: Inspect condition of the hardware, measure transformer
rectifier output and structure-to-soil potentials (on, instant-off and decay).
3) Three-years: Conduct complete system check including analysis of the
monitoring data for the previous period.
END OF CHAPTER 5.2 STRUCTURAL

Rev. 1 5.2 - 156
APPENDIX I CALCULATIONS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS

A. General
In addition to requirements listed in Section 5.2 of this manual, structural calculations submitted
to RC for review shall also include the guidelines and requirements provided in this appendix.
B. General Items & Design Criteria
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must prepare calculations to support the design of the
structural system and connections. The calculations should contain a table of contents or
index and must clearly show and delineate service loads, factored loads, and factored
load combinations. The structural calculations should be dated, legible and retained in a
project file.
2. Analysis and design calculation package shall be provided with direct contact information
of Design Engineer and Lead Structural Engineer in order to enable RC Structural
Engineer to discuss issues directly with them.
3. Prepared package shall be free from vague statements, self-explanatory and conclusive.
4. Provide linkage between Drawings and calculations for all structural members and
connections. This can be with clear location descriptions in the calculations.
5. A discussion and description of the design basis including assumptions and clarification
for why these assumptions used in design.
6. List of Building Codes, Standards and Specification (including their editions) for the
materials used in design. Providing irrelevant codes, standards and specification will
cause rejection of submittal.
7. Geotechnical report information, design criteria and correct reference to Geotechnical

Report.
8. Limitations of deflection for structural elements and lateral drift limitations for entire
structure.
9. Documentation of Design Loads:
a. Dead Loads: Dead loads shall include self-weight of all items of permanent nature
that will act continuously throughout the service life of the building. Dead Load shall
be well itemized for each type of assembly including with proper sketch, for
example:

Rev. 1 5.2 - 157
50mm Thick Gravel Roof Dead Load

Geotextile Seperation Layer
150mm Thick Thermal Insulation 50 mm Thick Gravel xxx
Waterproofing Membrane
kPa
Geotextile xxx
kPa
150 mm Thick Thermal Insulation xxx
kPa
Waterproofing Membrane xxx
kPa
Suspended Ceiling Screed (Ave. Thick: [50+150]/2=100 mm xxx
200mm Thick RC Slab kPa
Screed (Min Th: 50mm, Max Th:150mm)
200 mm Thick RC Slab xxx
ROOF DECK SECTION kPa
MEP Allowance xxx
kPa
Suspended Ceiling xxx
kPa
TOTAL Roof Dead Load xxx
kPa
b. Live Loads: Structural Engineer shall list live loads for each location where purpose
of use differs.
c. Wind Loads: Structural Engineer shall document all parameters required for wind
load calculation for Main Wind Force Resisting System and Components &
Cladding.
Parameters shall include:
1) Design wind speed
2) Exposure category
3) Risk Category
4) Importance Factor
All parameters shall be clearly identified and referenced to relevant sections of codes
and standards.
d. Seismic Load: Structural Engineer shall document all parameters required for
seismic load calculation for the structure including:
1) Risk Category
2) Importance Factor
3) Lateral Load Resisting System
4) Response Reduction Factor (R)
5) System Over strength Factor (Ω0)
6) Deflection Amplification Factor (Cd)
7) Site Class (Should be referenced to Geotechnical Report)

Rev. 1 5.2 - 158
8) Site Coefficients
9) Mapped Spectral Response Accelerations
10) Spectral Response Coefficients
All parameters shall be clearly identified and referenced to relevant sections of codes
and standards.
e. Temperature Load: Consideration for loads and effects of contraction or expansion
from temperature changes shall be clearly documented.
f. Equipment Loads: All MEP equipment planned to be used in structure shall be listed
with their location and operating weight.
g. Structural Engineer shall clearly list all other loads including with locations to be
applied, magnitude and explanation for resource of loads.
10. Load combinations used in design shall be clearly documented.
11. Structural Engineer shall list all fire rating requirements throughout the structure.
12. Consideration and information for Buoyancy and Flood shall be documented.
C. Gravity Design
1. Analysis and Design of the Primary Structural Components. This design should
document the location, tributary area, span, loading and controlling condition, load
combination for each member designed. Also effects of temperature loads shall be
identified.
2. Structural Engineer shall provide list for used material and their grades used in design for
each structural components.
3. Calculations should note the final member size as shown on the plans, including the
support condition. Structural Engineer shall also note any eccentric loading conditions
which creates torsion effect on member and design member accordingly.
4. All design calculation shall be conclusive, highlighted that Resistance of member

satisfactory against analysis results. Also each step of design shall be referenced to
related design standards or codes.
5. Deflection of member shall be checked against allowed deflection criteria.
6. Calculations for design of the connections between the Primary Structural Components.
7. Calculation for design of the connection between Secondary and or non-structural

elements to primary structural components.
8. If vendor supplied elements used in design, Structural Engineer should still provide full
analysis and design calculations as explained here in.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 159
D. Lateral Design
1. Factors used in determining overall wind load should be indicated as required in section
B.9B.c of this appendix.
2. Factors used in determining base shear should be indicated in addition to the required
seismic design criteria required in section B.9B.d of this appendix.
3. Clearly defined type of Lateral-Force-Resisting System used and which Primary

Structural Components are part of the system.
4. Analysis and design results should be submitted with a sketch showing geometry,
loading, boundary conditions, etc.
5. Design of Primary Structural Components relating to the Lateral Force Resisting System.
These components would include, but are not limited to, diaphragms, collectors, drag
struts, out-of-plane anchorage and connection design.
6. Design of Secondary Structural and Non-Structural Components and their connections to

Primary Structural Components shall be provided.
E. Footing & Foundation Design

1. Clearly documented horizontal and vertical service loading on pile, pile group or
foundation.
2. Design of the primary footing and foundation components.
3. Calculation or reference for sub grade modulus (ks) used in design.
4. Information and reference about Allowable Bearing Pressure for soil shall be provided.
5. Provide footing schedule including with information for, size, service loads, reinforcement,
bearing pressure, estimated settlement, etc.
6. Design of Secondary Structural Components required at the interface between

foundation and structure above. These components would include base plates, anchor
bolts and embed plates.
7. Effects of lateral loading including uplift, overturning and shear transfer to soil must be
included.
8. Effects of buoyancy and flood should be included in foundation design.
9. The requirements for engineered fill or other specific placement criteria should be noted
in the calculations and on the plans.
10. Unless otherwise approved by RC, "assumed" soil properties (bearing pressure) shall not
be used in the design. Where assumed parameters have been approved then field
verification shall be undertaken, as determined by the size and complexity of the project.
The RC shall approve all proposals for site validation, field records and analysis shall be

Rev. 1 5.2 - 160
submitted to the RC prior to the commencement of work to demonstrate site conditions

can support the specified foundation design, similar to a deferred submittal.
F. Computer Aided Design

In addition to the requirement listed in section 4.2.5.C.2 of this manual, the followings are
additional requirement for use of computer software in analysis and design.
1. For computer software that has built-in algorithms to implement the provisions of
particular versions of model or material building codes, an analysis of the methodologies
of the selected building code and the building code used in the software shall be
performed to ensure consistency of methodology. The methodology of the software shall
be reconciled with the selected building code(s) either through the use of modified input
data or through the use of modified load factors within the load combinations, or both.
2. The method of reconciliation of the building code selected for design and the building
code implemented in the software, as well as the determination of the modified input data
and/or load combination factors that are utilized shall be included in the design basis
reports and in the calculations. Notes shall be included as comments in the software
input that describe why the input information and/or load combination factors are different
than the normal values.
3. 3D structural skeleton of total structure shall be provided (All four isometric view).
4. Structural Engineer shall itemize all input variables and provide clear explanations for
each variables (Loads, load combinations, defined section name, properties and
modifications, etc.). Acronyms and abbreviations used in software shall be listed.
5. Plan view (including with grid lines and dimensions) for each level of structure showing
each applied area loads and area section names.
6. Elevation view at each gridline showing each applied line loads and frame section
names.
7. Plan view showing location and section name of lateral load resisting system(s) at each
level of structure.
8. If software used has auto lateral load calculation function, list all input variables for wind
and seismic parameters with clear explanations.
9. If hand calculation method used for lateral loads, provide comprehensive calculation of
loads and show how and where loads applied to structure. Structural engineer shall also
provide calculation for fundamental period of structure.
10. Information about assigned diaphragm shall be provided including with location of
connection for diaphragm to lateral load resisting system.
11. Output summary for lateral loads including but not limited to following information:

Rev. 1 5.2 - 161
a. Story shear shown on elevation view of structure

b. Base shear
c. Drift for each level of structure
12. Structural Engineer shall provide analysis and design outputs for each primary structural
members (beams, columns, slab, foundation, shear walls, etc.). Design outputs should be
conclusive and results should be highlighted in form of grouped members as reflected on
the drawings. Grouped members (columns, beams, etc.) shall be provided in detailed
steps for verification of dimensions and reinforcement consistent with the submitted
drawings.
13. Most of structural analysis and design software in market performs only macro level
analysis and design, meaning, detailed analysis of connections, checks for code
requirements, etc. are left Structural Engineer to design either with hand calculations or
other special software. Therefore, Structural Engineer shall provide comprehensive report
including but not limited to the following:
a. Beam-Column, Slab-Column Joint Design

b. Punching shear checks for flat slabs and footings
c. Code requirement checks for size of elements, grades, etc.
d. Steel column – concrete foundation connection including with base plate, anchor
bolt designs.
e. Cladding connections to primary structural members
f. Corbel, Ledge designs
g. Diaphragm design
14. RC designated Software for analysis and design of structures are restricted to the
following:
a. CSI (Computers and Structures International)

1) ETABS
2) SAP2000
3) SAFE
b. Bentley
1) STAAD.Pro Connect
2) STAAD Foundation
c. PROKON
A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall secure RC approval prior to using any non-RC
designated software.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 162
APPENDIX II SPECIFIC DRAWINGS GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX II SPECIFIC DRAWINGS GUIDELINES AND

REQUIREMENTS
A. General
In addition to the general requirements listed in Subsection 4.2 of this manual, structural
drawings shall also include the specific information provided in this appendix.
B. General Items
1. Date & Purpose of each issue;
2. Applicable design and construction codes, standards and bylaws governing the work;
3. Materials to be used, including standards and grades;
4. Description of the lateral load resisting system under General Notes / Seismic section;
5. Provisions for future extensions, if applicable;
6. Sequence of work, if this is critical to the function of the finished structure;
7. Expansion, construction and control joint locations and details;
8. Existing structural drawings, condition surveys and special reports prepared by others,
when necessary;
9. Structurally derived dimensions (generally, grid line and overall building dimensions
should preferably be shown, or the architectural drawings, to avoid the duplication of
dimensions and possible errors);
10. Design criteria giving the appropriate information for all vertical and horizontal loads,
designating them as live or dead and specified or factored;
11. Design criteria shall include Seismic and Wind load information. Wind load shall be
clearly identified for MWFRS and Components & Claddings. Include pressure diagrams if
appropriate, and
12. Location and specification of temporary shoring / bracing if required.
C. Foundation Plans
1. Grid lines and grid line dimensions as well as overall dimensions and structurally derived
dimensions;
2. Type, sizes, details and locations of foundations for columns, walls, piers, special
equipment and other structural load bearing components;
3. Drainage and dewatering requirements, if critical to the structural design;
4. The anticipated bottom elevation of foundations;

Rev. 1 5.2 - 163
5. Sub-grade preparation for slabs-on-grade, as well as the thickness, reinforcing and

elevation of the slabs-on-grade;
6. Waterproofing details for foundations, if required;
7. Design soil or rock bearing values, with reference to pertinent geotechnical reports;
8. The location of existing adjacent services, foundations and site information made known
to structural Engineers by others, which may conflict with structural footings or
foundations;
9. In addition, where underpinning and/or shoring is specified to be designed by others,

structural engineers should indicate on the drawings the areas to be underpinned or
shored, the maximum allowable deflections and settlements, and other restrictions or
criteria. When structural engineers are designing underpinning, they should indicate on
the drawings adequate details and construction sequences, and
10. Foundation for vendor supplied structures: Structural engineer shall provide full design
drawings for foundation and capacity table for the foundation. Also structural engineer
should clearly note that the construction contractor shall review and confirm foundation
size and capacity with superstructure which vendor shall provide.
D. Framing Plans of Floors, Roofs Walls and Ancillary Structures

1. Grid lines and structurally derived dimensions, dimensions to outside of structural floor
plate from grid or overall dimensions of floor plate;
2. Size and location of all structural framing components for the Building Structure must be
shown for each direction and at all levels of structure;
3. Indicate location of each lateral force resisting component such as, but not limited to,
lateral bracing, shear walls, moment frames.
4. Location and magnitude of additional loads, such as mechanical unit, considerably heavy
architectural futures, special equipment, etc. The drawing must indicate whether loads
noted are service or factored loads;
5. Slopes and depressions or references to drawings by others that show that information;
6. Locations, sizes and framing details or reinforcing around openings on structural

members;
7. Reference elevations of floors or roof(s);
8. Reinforcing bar sizes and spacing for concrete members;
9. Conditions at change of elevation of the structure, conditions at intersections of different

structural materials, and at interaction of structural and non-structural components;

Rev. 1 5.2 - 164
10. Direct forces, moments, shears or torsion required for the preparation of shop and detail
drawings;
11. Standards to which detailing should conform;
12. Sufficient detail cuts, references to schedules and specific information identifying the
Structural Components.
13. Connections between similar materials and materials manufactured offsite are generally
designed by the supplier’s engineer. Therefore, structural engineer shall differentiate
between live and dead and specified and factored loads, to avoid possible confusion.
14. Framing plans for vendor supplied structures: Structural engineer shall provide schematic
frame plan with adequate sizing of all structural members, however, Structural engineer
shall also provide note to clarify that shown design on framing plan is indicative and it is
vendor’s responsibility to provide full design.
E. Column Information Showing

1. Elevations of top and bottom of columns;
2. Member sizes;
3. Reinforcing steel details for concrete columns;
4. Proposed splice locations for structural steel and concrete columns, and
5. Column axial loads and bending moments to be resisted.
F. Sections and Details

1. Elevations, sections, and details are to be at an appropriate scale to portray the
relationship of structural elements to each other and their interconnection(s). Sections
and details are to be in sufficient number to show all non-typical conditions, their
locations and extent.
2. Primary Structural Component connections required to transfer gravity load from roof to
floor to foundation must be detailed. These connections would include, but are not limited
to, joist to beam or wall, beam-to-beam, beam to column and column to foundation.
3. Structural detailing of Secondary Structural Components such as parapets, fascia and

canopies must be included in the structural drawings.
4. Details must be shown for all lateral force resisting connections. These types of
connections are; diaphragm shear transfer, out of plane anchorage, bracing connections,
moment frame connections and force transfer to foundations.
5. Typical details should be used where appropriate, however, care should be taken to
determine that details noted as "typical" are applicable to the condition being portrayed
and that their locations and extent are explicit.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 165
G. Other Information
1. Structural details of masonry bearing and shear walls, including details of reinforcing,
support of loads, lintels and grouting procedures.
2. Structural details of reinforced concrete elements, openings in members, change in floor

elevations, sufficiently detailed to enable others to prepare shop drawings.
3. Elevations and details of custom designed trusses, including direct forces, moments,
shears and torsion to be resisted by each member.
4. Subgrade preparation for slabs on grade, based on the geotechnical engineer’s

recommendations, and slabs on earth thickness and elevation of main slab. Drawings
should also make reference to other contract drawings for such additional details as
recesses, depressions, pits.
5. Design loadings, details of reinforcing steel, if any, and the location and details of control
and expansion joints.

Rev. 1 5.2 - 166
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.3
ARCHITECTURAL
1 2020 General update MAM CJR AMS MRC OMQ


SECTION 5.3 ARCHITECTURAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.3.0 ARCHITECTURAL ........................................................................................................ 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
5.3.1 GENERAL ARCHITECTURE ........................................................................................ 9
A. Architectural Design Principles ...................................................................................... 9
B. Cultural Context ............................................................................................................ 10
C. Local Conditions ........................................................................................................... 12
D. Standardization ............................................................................................................. 15
E. Facility Life Cycle .......................................................................................................... 15
F. Pre-design, Programming, and Space Allocation......................................................... 16
G. Pest Control .................................................................................................................. 18
5.3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR BUILDINGS .................................................................... 21
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 21
B. Building Orientation ...................................................................................................... 25
C. Setback Criteria and Placement of Structures ............................................................. 26
D. Building Approaches and Entrances ............................................................................ 26
E. Walkways, Paving, and Pedestrian Safety ................................................................... 28
F. Site Lighting .................................................................................................................. 29
G. Service and Emergency Vehicle Access ...................................................................... 30
H. Vehicle Access ............................................................................................................. 31
I. Waste Collection Requirements ................................................................................... 32
J. Utility and Service Areas .............................................................................................. 32
5.3.3 BUILDING DEVELOPMENT ........................................................................................ 33
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 33
B. Height, Mass, and Scale ............................................................................................... 33
C. Architectural Context .................................................................................................... 34
D. Architectural Concept and Consistency ....................................................................... 36
E. Human Scale ................................................................................................................ 45
F. Life Safety Requirements ............................................................................................. 46
G. Building Entrances ........................................................................................................ 49
H. Acoustic Design Requirements .................................................................................... 53
I. Rooftop Equipment ....................................................................................................... 55
J. Electrical Rooms and Telecommunication Rooms ....................................................... 57
K. Mechanical Rooms and Mezzanines ............................................................................ 58
L. Restrooms .................................................................................................................... 59
5.3.4 BUILDING COMPONENTS .......................................................................................... 60

Rev. 1 5.3 - i
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 60
B. Precast Concrete .......................................................................................................... 60
C. Unit Masonry................................................................................................................. 61
D. Stone ............................................................................................................................ 63
E. Metals ........................................................................................................................... 63
F. Wood, Plastics, and Composites .................................................................................. 64
G. Thermal and Moisture Protection ................................................................................. 65
H. Openings ...................................................................................................................... 69
I. Finishes ........................................................................................................................ 74
J. Specialties .................................................................................................................... 78
K. Equipment..................................................................................................................... 80
L. Furnishings ................................................................................................................... 81
M. Conveying Systems ...................................................................................................... 81
5.3.5 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE ............................................................................. 83
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 83
B. Public/Institutional ......................................................................................................... 83
C. Education ...................................................................................................................... 93
D. Commercial................................................................................................................... 95
E. Residential ................................................................................................................... 103
F. Industrial and Utility ..................................................................................................... 107
G. Specialty Applications .................................................................................................. 110

Rev. 1 5.3 - ii
SUBSECTION 5.3.0 ARCHITECTURAL
5.3.0 ARCHITECTURAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section covers requirements for the architectural design and planning of
residential, commercial, institutional, and industrial facilities, including aesthetic,
functional, life safety, and accessibility aspects of buildings and their relationship to
their respective environments.
b. This Section provides the basis for design of Building Projects including their Site
Development, Building Components, Materials and Systems, and provides general
Guidelines by Building Type.
c. This section does not apply to aesthetic of bridge designs; reference Chapter 5.2.
2. Applicability
a. The criteria in this Section apply to all buildings unless noted as only applicable to a
specific building type.
b. This Section applies to buildings and industrial developments. Parks and open
spaces, as well as streetscapes, are addressed elsewhere as listed under “Related
Sections.”
c. This Section shall apply to all proposed building projects and shall apply equally to
all renovation and /or building addition projects.
d. This Guiding Engineering Manual applies to the following areas within the sites and
premises of residential, commercial, institutional, and light industrial facilities:
1) General architectural design principles Subsection 5.3.1
2) Site development for buildings design principles Subsection 5.3.2
3) Building development Subsection 5.3.3
4) Building components Subsection 5.3.4
5) Guidelines by building type Subsection 5.3.5
3. Definitions
a. The following are intended as a general guide only. Refer to applicable Codes for
specific definitions and requirements. Refer to Section 2.2 – Definitions and
Abbreviations.
1) Accessory Structure: a structure that is adjacent to, is subordinate to, and
has a service function in support of a primary use or structure; also typically but
not necessarily, subordinate in size.
2) Accessory Use: the function of an Accessory Structure, typically one that
differs from that of the primary structure and/or is very specialized. Refer also
to the adopted building code for further information.
3) Addition: construction that creates additional floor area for an existing building.
4) Adjacent Uses or Adjacent Lots: lots that share a common lot line or are
separated only by a public way.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 1
5) A/E: architectural and/or engineering consultant responsible for the design of a

project.
6) Alteration: any physical change to a building, structure, or site. See also,
Addition and Renovation.
7) Anti-Slip: refers to floor friction characteristics intended to minimize slip and
fall accidents
8) Assembly: Refers to a Use Group that consists of the congregation of people.
(The adopted Building Code provides specific definitions.)
9) Block: A site or group of contiguous properties bounded on all sides by a street,
public way, or other geographically separating feature, forming a planning unit,
typically a repeated organizing element creating an urban or land use pattern.
10) Buffer: A strip or area of land that separates one use, occupancy, road, or
other type of land use from another, typically provided with landscaping or other
forms of screening.
11) Building: A structure housing or supporting human activity, though not
necessarily occupied, that is governed by applicable adopted Building Codes.
12) Building Line: The line beyond which a building or structure is not permitted
to encroach, usually defined in the Zoning Code
13) Building Types: Classifications of buildings according to their principal activity
or Use Group, as defined by the adopted Building Code. These include but are
not limited to Public/Government, Commercial, Residential, Industrial, etc.
14) Carport: A covered area or shelter, often open on one or more sides, used for
the parking of one or more motor vehicles.
15) Cartway: A strip of pavement designed primarily for public vehicular traffic
circulation, defined as the area from curb to curb or edge to parallel edge of
pavement.
16) Communication Tower: Public or private vertical structure intended for
telecommunications transmission, reception, and/or relay.
17) Contextual Setback: A theoretical line offset and parallel to a property line,
established with the intended purpose to align the faces of buildings or
structures with the adjacent building(s) or structure(s).
18) Contextual Height: A building structure’s height dimension from a base plane
or grade, established with the intended purpose to establish a visual
consistency in height among adjacent developments.
19) Contour Lines: Graphic lines on a grading plan that connect points of identical
elevation, expressed in values relative to a standard such as sea level.
20) Density: Within a development with a defined geographic area, such as the
ratio dwelling units per given area of land, or of the total floor areas of all
buildings on a site to the land area.
21) Development:
(a) The total of all improvements to a site, or any substantial change in the
use or appearance of any structures or land.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 2
(b) In connection with the use of land, substantial disturbance of existing

vegetation, tree cover, site contours, watercourses, parking areas, and/or
structures.
22) Driveway: A privately developed and maintained strip of pavement intended
for vehicular circulation or access.
23) Dwelling Unit: A building or portion thereof designed and used for residential
occupancy by a single family and that includes exclusive sleeping, cooking,
eating, and sanitation facilities or as otherwise defined by the adopted Code.
24) Elevation:
(a) A view of a building seen from one side as a flat representation of one
façade, commonly used to depict the external appearance of a building
or series of adjacent buildings.
(b) Height above sea level elevation.
25) End User: The person or entity that will take possession of the building or be
its primary occupant.
26) EPC Contractor: Engineer-Procure-Construct contracting entity responsible
for all three parts of project delivery.
27) Façade: The exterior elevation of a structure or building as viewed from any
single vantage point.
28) Facility: Building and/or enclosed or unenclosed industrial processes as well
as all its site features.
29) Flamespread Rating: Classifications of interior building materials that
evaluates their surface burning characteristics by means of a specific certified
test assembly.
30) Floor Area, Gross: The sum total horizontal area of all floors of a building,
measured from the exterior face of exterior walls or from the centerline of walls
separating two (2) abutting buildings, including or excluding such areas as
defined by the applicable adopted code.
31) Floor Area, Net: The horizontal area of all floors of a building, measured from
face-of-wall to face-of-wall in each space, totaled together, including or
excluding such areas as defined by applicable adopted code.
32) Floor Area Ratio (FAR): The amount of gross floor area of all principal
buildings on a lot divided by the total area of the lot on which such buildings are
located.
33) Garage: A structure or any portion thereof designed for the parking of one (1)
or more motor vehicles, not including vehicle repair, exhibition, or showrooms.
34) General Requirements: Requirements necessary to carry out the
construction, such as start-up mobilization; construction trailers; temporary
offices, toilets, utilities; site stake-out; dumpsters, recycling and trash removal,
security; and various other overhead items. These are typically referred to as
the “General Requirements of the Contract for Construction.”
On all building projects, the A/E and EPC Contractors shall illustrate that the
proposed construction work plan takes adequate financial and logistic account
of the General Requirements.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 3
35) Grading Plan: A site plan or drawing that illustrates an intended physical
change in a land surface, typically by means of contour lines and spot
elevations.
36) Height, Building: The vertical distance between the finished grade and a
defined point at the top of a building or structure. Refer to the adopted building
and zoning codes for what constitutes ‘finished grade’ and what is the defined
point at the top of a building or structure.
37) Helipad, Heliport, Helistop, or Helicopter Landing Area: An area specifically
designed for the landing of public, private, or medical assistance helicopters.
38) Impervious Surface: Area covered by pavement, roofs, or other surface
materials that inhibits ground absorption of water.
39) Site Improvements: All changes and additions to the natural ground surface
or to the site surface prior to the proposed development.
40) Life-Cycle Analysis (LCA): Consideration of many aspects of a material,
product, or system, including environmental impact, over its entire life.
41) Life-Cycle Costing (LCC): Method for assessing the total cost of a material,
product, system, or facility ownership, taking in to account first costs as well as
operations and maintenance expenses, and final disposition expenses.
42) Lots:
(a) Lot Area – the total area of a piece of property lying within the lot lines,
not including any portion of a street or way.
(b) Corner Lot – means a lot abutting two (2) or more streets at their
intersection.
(c) Lot Depth – the horizontal distance between front and rear lot lines
measured as noted in the applicable ordinance.
(d) Lot Size – the area of a parcel of land within its defined boundaries.
(e) Lot Width – the horizontal distance between the side lot lines measured
as noted in the applicable ordinance.
43) Master Plan:
(a) A conceptual or detailed site plan document produced by the Developer,
A/E, and/or EPC Contractor that defines the entire intent of the proposed
development to the level of detail appropriate to the site plan review
process.
(b) An established document controlling proposals for development
endorsed by the RCJ to demonstrate that a superior development is
intended. The master development plan shall contain all that information
required by the zoning administrator to support the application. Refer to
Section 1.1 A for the National and Regional Framework and 1.1 B and D
for Master Plans and Community Design.
44) Mixed Use Development: The development of a tract of land, a building, or a
structure with a variety of complementary and integrated uses, including, but
not limited to, residential, office, manufacturing, retail, public, and/or assembly.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 4
45) Open Space: That portion of a lot or property not occupied by buildings. By
definition, it may or may not include parking areas, driveways, streets, or
loading areas.
46) Ordinance: A general term for any applicable rule of law or governing code.
47) Overlay District: Zoning regulation that imposes additional requirements or
provisions above that required by the underlying district based on specific or
special conditions.
48) Owner: The controlling person or entity in a development.
49) Parking Area: An uncovered open space other than a street or way, used for
the parking of motor vehicles.
50) Plat: A map or plan of a subdivision of land parcels.
51) Plot Plan: A drawing used for the purposes of identifying the intended use or
occupancy of a particular plot of land, and facilitate administrative review
showing the location of the property boundary, structures, streets, and other
important features.
52) Positive Drainage: Drainage that occurs in a downhill/downslope direction
away from a structure or site improvement to help prevent water infiltration and
damage.
53) Public Way: Any area of land whose designated purpose is vehicular or
pedestrian circulation or a publicly available space that is capable of vehicular
or pedestrian circulation.
54) Ramp: A walking surface that has a running slope of one vertical unit in 20
horizontal units (5-percent slope) or steeper, or as elsewhere defined.
55) Renovation: Work on an existing building that must be further defined as either
repair, alteration, or addition.
(a) Addition: An extension or increase in floor area, number of stories, or
height of an existing building or structure.
(b) Alteration: Any construction or work on an existing building that is not a
repair or addition.
(c) Repair: The reconstruction or renewal of any part of an existing building
for the purpose of its maintenance or to correct damage. Changes of
structure or occupancy, or increases in height or area are not repairs.
56) Right-of-way: A strip of land acquired by reservation, dedication, forced
dedication, prescription, condemnation, or decree, intended to be occupied by
a road, crosswalk, railroad, electric transmission lines, oil or gas pipeline, water
line, sanitary storm sewer, and other similar uses, typically defined with specific
boundaries that define its width, use, and access rights.
57) Setback: A specific line fixed by regulatory action, parallel to the property line
at the street right-of-way that defines a zone wherein a defined level of
improvement might not occur.
58) Shaft: An enclosed space extending vertically through one or more stories of a
building.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 5
59) Solar Orientation: The compass direction a building or site element faces (for
example north, south, east, or west), considered in reference to the sun and
solar heat gain considerations.
60) Spot Elevation: Numeric notation on a grading plan that indicates the height
above sea level elevation at a specific point.
61) Story: That portion of a building included between the surface of any floor and
the surface of the next floor or roof above it.
62) Street: This term may be used to describe one of the following depending on
the regulatory context:
(a) Cartway
(b) Right-of way
63) Structure: Anything constructed or erected by means of a secure connection
to or fixture on the ground, and intended for a non-temporary function or
location.
64) Subdivision: A legally obtained division of a property into separate uses or
parcels.
65) Topology: The functional relationship of one or more architectural spaces due
to related use, necessary interconnectedness, grouping in a spatial
arrangement, or other organizational criteria.
66) Tower: For the purpose of this Section, any structure that is designed and
constructed primarily to support one (1) or more antennas, or
telecommunications apparatus.
67) Tree Protection Zone: An area surrounding an individual tree or group of trees
to be preserved during construction; defined by the drip line of an individual tree
or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees.
68) Use: The primary functional purpose for which land or a building is intended.
The building may have one or more building code defined occupancy groups.
69) UV Degradation: Cracking, bleaching or disintegration that results in materials
after exposure to sunlight.
70) Yard: The unobstructed open space that exists or is proposed between a
setback line and a lot line.
71) Zoning District: An area of land consisting of multiple properties for which a
common general use is defined and specific constraints to development are
given based on this use.
72) Zoning Ordinance: A legal document consisting of verbiage, maps, and in
some cases, details that govern all developments in a given area. Refer to
Section 3.2.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation, refer to Section 2.2.
1) BAS: Building automation system
2) BIM: Building Information Modeling

Rev. 1 5.3 - 6
3) BOD: Basis of Design

5) FAR: Floor Area Ratio (see ‘Definitions’)
6) GC or GR’s: General Conditions or General Requirements of the Contract for
Construction
7) LEED Leadership in Environmental and Energy Design
8) OPR: Owner’s (end-user’s) Project Requirements
9) PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
10) R.O.W: Right of Way
11) S.O.F or S.O.P: Scope of Facility, or Program
12) STC: Sound transmission class
13) UV: Ultra-violet radiation
a. Not applicable.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the adopted building code and authority having
jurisdiction, refer to:
1) Section 3.1 for building codes and referenced standards, and other applicable
regulations.
2) Section 3.2 for zoning regulations
7. Standards
a. The following is a partial list of standards that apply to this Section, refer to Chapter
3 for more information and a complete list of additional Standards.
1) GEM Urban Planning Requirements
2) Area Master Planning Requirements
3) High Commission for Industrial Security – Safety and Fire Protection Directives
4) Section 3.3 – Accessibility
5) Section 3.4 – Sustainability
6) Section 3.5 – Environmental Protection and Preservation
7) Section 3.6 – Safety Standards
b. Refer to Chapter 4 for Project Submission Standards and Requirements
8. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and take action on all design reports, plans, and specifications;
refer to Section 1.1.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be obligated to observe and adhere to the
adopted building code and its referenced standards, the Guiding Engineering
Manual of the RCJ, RCJ procedures, and the RCJ’s design review and construction
management process for demolition, new construction, renovations, and any work,

Rev. 1 5.3 - 7
study, or services related to such work that the A/E and/or EPC is performing for the
RCJ.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 8
SUBSECTION 5.3.1 GENERAL ARCHITECTURE
5.3.1 GENERAL ARCHITECTURE
A. Architectural Design Principles
1. Introduction
a. All development shall be designed and generated with specific response to:
1) The adopted building code and its referenced standards.
2) The applicable overall Master Plan for the area where the development is
located.
3) The local conditions in terms of building character, access, circulation, and the
visual effect of the development.
4) The cultural context.
5) Requirements specific to the building type.
6) Requirements of the End Users.
7) The RC and Kingdom’s sustainability goals.
b. A/E and/or EPC Contractor are to meet the design criteria requirements herein
provided in order to ensure a high level of architectural design quality.
c. Professional competence in the uniformity of practical approaches, compatibility of
design, and coordination of interfaces among the other design disciplines and third
party services, is required.
d. Designs must protect the unique character of the area, and create compatibility in
the environment through architectural treatment and site design.
e. Designs must develop an architectural character and site design that creates a
sense of place.
f. Designs must screen and protect privacy, frame and enhance views, and
appropriately accommodate uses and activities.
g. Design Criteria:
1) The overall goal of these criteria is to provide the user with buildings and spaces
that provide the best possible environment that will support their mission,
functions, and needs. Overall site organization criteria include well-planned
circulation that is adequately sized for both current and future needs, minimizes
vehicular-pedestrian conflict; creative landscape elements, provides
accessibility, and building siting and orientation for energy efficiency and
sustainability.
2) Design projects to comply with all aspects of the building code and its
referenced standards, including material standards, energy conservation,
envelop continuity, accessibility, and egress.
3) Make every effort to achieve the RC’s sustainability goals on each project.
Meet and document all LEED design perquisites on all projects that meet the
LEED Minimum Project Requirements for certification.
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall identify, designate, and protect historically
significant resources by complying with the provisions set forth. This document
establishes the standards and guidelines for site work and alterations within the

Rev. 1 5.3 - 9
historic district, including both the interior and exterior renovation/rehabilitation

of the properties identified in the memorandum and any major projects affecting
these structures. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also adhere to the
RCJ’s Construction Standards, adopted Building Code, and the Kingdom’s
historic preservation regulations.
2. General Design Components
a. Form, Scale and Proportion
1) The form and proportion of buildings shall be consistent or compatible with the
scale, form, and proportion of existing development in the immediate area, or
as otherwise directed by the RCJ.
b. Mass and Voids
1) The rhythm of structural mass to voids, such as windows and glass doors, of
front facades shall relate to those established in adjacent buildings.
c. Architectural Design
1) Architectural design shall create harmony using textures, complementary
colors, shadow lines, and shapes.
d. Monotony
1) Avoid monotony of design in single or multiple building projects. Use variation
of form, detail, and siting to provide visual variety and interest. Large
unarticulated or monotonous forms are discouraged.
e. Design Uniformity
1) Architectural elements such as building materials, finishes, colors, façade and
rooflines, and screening shall be consistent and compatible.
2) Design and architectural elements that are consistent on all sides may be used
to meet the requirements of these principles and criteria.
3) Adjacent land uses, visibility from public streets, and use of screening devices
such as walls, fences, berms, and landscaping are to be considered when
varying this treatment. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor will justify the reasons
for differing treatment on different sides, such as the need for automobile
access on one side and pedestrian access on another.
B. Cultural Context
1. Design all facilities keeping in mind the Saudi Arabian heritage and culture. Architectural
aesthetics and layout shall reflect Saudi needs and values using both traditional and
modern designs, motifs, and influences. Consider local materials and products first, to
the greatest extent possible when designing.
2. The overall facility shall be sensitive to, and reflect, the local culture.
3. Architectural design shall be respectful and relate to the building location and
surroundings using design elements including appropriate color, materials, and detailing.
Overall architecture design shall enhance the environment by honoring local
architectural, historical, cultural, and community themes.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 10
4. Privacy
a. Buildings such as mosques, government facilities, commercial facilities, and
permanent private residences may or may not be provided with privacy walls or
fences, as determined by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
When privacy walls or fences are not provided, the area between the building and
the lot boundary must be landscaped. In all cases, landscaping solutions are
preferred over walls and window coverings.
b. Fenced security enclosures, including lockable gates and security lighting, shall be
provided around all facilities requiring the exclusion of unauthorized persons. All
walls around Saudi Kindergarten schools and Saudi Girls’ Schools shall be of solid
construction and shall be 3.75 meters high so that the interior is screened from
public view. All school sites shall have not less than two pedestrian exits through
the wall for fire ingress/egress, in addition to not less than two vehicular gates for
access by emergency and maintenance vehicles.
c. The site or location of all building or other improvements must be approved by the
RCJ. The RCJ will take into consideration the height, profile, and proposed
placement of buildings on the units in relation to the height, profile, and location or
potential location of other buildings or improvements on adjacent portions of the
units in an effort to minimize obstruction of the view from other parts as much as
possible.
d. Notwithstanding the above, the RCJ, as defined in Standards, may construct, or
require construction of, a perimeter wall on or near the property line of a lot or a
screening wall within the setback area of a lot as a special condition.
5. Screening
a. All screening elements, walls, and fences shall be within the lot lines.
b. The area between the lot line and a wall or fence set back from the lot line shall be
landscaped.
c. All wall and fence material shall be compatible with the exterior building finishes.
d. Boundary wall height overlooking the road shall not be more than 2.5 m high, except
where otherwise specified herein. Internal walls may be up to 3 m high as
measured from adjacent walkway.
e. A boundary wall overlooking the road, or the main boundary wall which encloses car
parks, shall have 50% open area above half of the front wall, or planting adjacent to
that portion of the boundary from outside the lot to cover 50% of the wall area by any
type of steel or wooden bars, or decorative material.
f. Notwithstanding the above, the RCJ may construct, or require as a special condition
of construction, a perimeter wall on or near the property line of a lot or construction
of a screening wall within the setback area of a lot.
g. At street and road intersections, boundary walls cannot interfere with drivers’
visibility of traffic. Walls are to be set back as required to maintain full driver
visibility.
h. Garbage and Trash Containers shall be kept within an enclosure.
i. Preserving trees is highly desirable where there is existing tree cover. Large
artificial landscape areas and foreign flora are not considered desirable.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 11
j. Limit retaining walls to an exposed height of 1 meter unless it is shown that a higher
wall is necessary. In this event, stepped terracing will be required to reduce visual
mass. All retaining walls shall complement the exterior building finishes and blend
with the landscape. Locally available Riyadh stone, masonry, brick, or concrete
walls may be used. Concrete shall be textured, articulated, sandblasted, or bush-
hammered. “Split-face” CMU is permissible. Plantings of vines, bushes, or trees
shall be placed to minimize the visual effect of large unbroken surfaces.
k. Privacy window screening may be necessary based on the arrangement with
respect to other buildings. Privacy window screens cannot impede the emergency
escape and access requirements of the building code.
l. Screening, fence walls, and privacy issues must comply with the requirements of the
Jubail Development Code, and are to be reviewed with the RCJ as part of the 30%
Submission.
m. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall comply with any additional requirements from
the Department of Education that are not in conflict with these Design Guidelines.
6. Gender Separation
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall consider gender separation on all projects
with public access according to current law and the context and use of the facility.
Separate entrances for males and family, restricted visual access (screening)
separate waiting areas, and separate work areas are some of the elements that may
be incorporated. The project types for consideration of gender separation includes,
but is not limited to:
1) Residences
2) Medical clinics
3) Schools
b. Submit the justification, goals, and objectives related to gender separation at the
10% stage to the RCJ for review and approval. Clearly demonstrate the strategy
intended and include the elements to accomplish it.
c. Submit the methodologies related to gender separation at the 30% stage with a
more fully developed design.
C. Local Conditions
1. Elements of an environment or site have numerous physical and environmental effects.

These elements include man-made and natural features with inter-relationships that may
be difficult to anticipate.
2. Design shall consist of low maintenance/vandal-resistant interior finishes and building
systems comprised of materials that are commonly available for repair and replacement.
The design of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems shall be based on simple,
reliable components.
3. Operation and Maintenance
a. All material and systems shall be reliable and easy to use or operate and maintain.
Materials shall be environmentally sound.
b. Life-cycle cost analysis is a required aspect of good design. A higher first cost may
be beneficial to achieve savings for the life of the project. When required, the
Consultant shall provide life cycle cost analysis in support of design decisions.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 12
4. Location
a. The building and site design shall reflect the location and surroundings in terms of
color, materials, and detailing, and shall preserve and build upon those architectural
themes.
5. Blending
a. The architectural design shall result from the successful blending of local culture,
function, environment, economy, durability, operations, and maintenance.
6. Emphasis
a. The architectural design shall place appropriate weight and emphasis on each
element, and shall not let one of these elements become overly dominant.
7. Characteristics
a. The Architectural design shall reflect and support the characteristics and function
with the exterior of the structure not disguising the function of the structure.
8. Transient Styles
a. The Architectural design must avoid following transient architectural styles that are
short-lived.
9. Quality
a. The Architectural design shall provide quality to enhance safety, productivity, and
quality of life. In this light, the architectural design shall:
1) Be functional
2) Be intended for an extended life. Building systems and materials shall have a
demonstrated longevity, durability, reliability, supported by life cycle cost
analysis.
3) Be conceived, designed, and constructed to provide ease of operations and
maintenance
4) Be conceived, designed, and constructed for ease of alterations and
expansions
5) Be conceived, designed, and constructed to provide a quality, cost effective
facility
6) Be respectful of the cultures of those it is intended to serve
7) Be expressive of its function and of the services it provides
10. Designing for thermal expansion/contraction and building movement
a. Large thermal expansions and contractions tend to occur due to temperature
differentials. These may happen in a short period of time. Careful study of the use
of materials, their exposure to sun and counteracting-measures, such as expansion
joints and control joints, shall be made at all levels of architectural and structural
detailing. The resulting expansion and control joints must accommodate all
movements without compromising the strength, stability, weather tightness, or
integrity of the building envelope, as well as aesthetics.
b. Expansion joints shall be continuous through the building elements, including
finishes. Except for fire-safing, thermal insulation, water and moisture barriers, and
similar required devices, expansion joints are to clear of materials that do not allow

Rev. 1 5.3 - 13
movement of the joint. Remove formwork from expansion joints, or the material
used for forming that remains in the expansion joint must be designed to
accommodate the structurally calculated movement. Such form material is to be
submitted to the RC for approval.
c. Take special care when designing with metal cladding to avoid buckling,
deformation, and “oil canning,” or movement-generated noise resulting from
uncontrolled rapid thermal expansion. It is also essential that heat gain and
radiation due to the intense sun be minimized. Color and solar exposure must be
considered when designing these systems.
d. Low heat absorbing materials, light colors, natural/passive air flow between building
components, orientation of buildings and surfaces, and angling of surfaces are
examples of measures designs shall consider in addressing the local climate thereof
are prime considerations. Specify materials and colors that do not fade or degrade
due to ultraviolet light.
e. Refer to section 5.2.1.H.11 for additional design requirements.
11. Corrosion
a. The humid salty atmosphere can corrode metals and cause staining of other
materials. Select appropriate materials and provide proper architectural and
structural detailing to guard against such effects.
b. Mitigation of corrosive effects on cladding materials, hardware, finishes, sealants,
joints, connectors, and detailing is essential. This is most important on the exterior
of buildings but shall be recognized as a potential problem in the interior of buildings
as well. When dealing with metals, the use of heavily anodized aluminum,
galvanized and properly coated steel, or stainless steel, is recommended. Exterior
stainless steel must be Grade 316 or better corrosion–resistant grade, and a lacquer
or polyurethane clear coat is recommended.
c. Refer to section 5.2.6 for additional design requirements.
12. Sand Control
a. The prevention of sand and dust infiltration is essential throughout the design of a
facility. Blowing dust particles tend to infiltrate through minute cracks, joints, and
openings. The accumulation of sand and its harmful abrasive effects must be
countered. Design joints and connections to prevent dust and sand infiltration.
b. High quality weather stripping, gaskets, and tight connections and tolerances shall
be provided for. Materials resistant to sand abrasion, sand blasting effect during
heavy sand storms, and high saline content in sand shall be specified.
c. All main entrances and all other entrances to public buildings which may be
frequently used (except certain emergency exits), shall have vestibules with
adequately separated doors to serve as an air lock to check sand accumulation.
Vestibules are to incorporate walk-off grates to further limit entry of dirt and sand into
the facility. Tight weather-stripping completely around all doors, windows, roll-up
doors, sliding doors, industrial doors, and other openings shall be incorporated.
d. Mechanical intake and exhaust louvers and grills shall be protected or placed in
such a way as to minimize infiltration of wind, water, and sand.
13. Summary
a. In summary, acceptable architectural design shall reflect the function of the
structure, the environment, and culture of the people being served, respect and

Rev. 1 5.3 - 14
enhance its immediate environment, and achieve its mission in a quality and life
cycle cost-effective manner.
D. Standardization
1. Criteria
a. Selection of systems and materials shall provide uniformity and standardization of
materials, equipment, hardware, and finishes to minimize and simplify service and
maintenance. Design structures and elements to be compatible with their
environment and adjoining buildings.
b. The architectural design shall include the selection of materials based upon location,
quality, energy efficiency, life cycle costs, safety, and environmental impact.
c. Throughout the design review and construction management process, the RCJ will
implement its Construction Standards. The design review process shall also inform
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor of any adjustments to the Guiding Engineering
Manual or Construction Standards.
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall implement provisions of the RJC Construction
Standards, Exterior Signage, and Interior Signage to address the needs of exterior
and interior signage. The signage design shall meet the graphics requirements in
the Construction Standards. Signage design and installation must meet accessibility
standards.
e. All signage requires approval from the RCJ as to size, material, graphics, color,
reflectivity, accessibility, and illumination. Most signs are not permitted with the
exception of identification signs showing the name and the address of the owner or
occupant of the building or unit.
E. Facility Life Cycle
1. Design
a. All permanent facilities, buildings, components, and systems shall be designed to
maintain their structural, functional, operational, and aesthetic integrity for a
minimum of 40 years, unless otherwise specified in the project charter. All material
and systems shall be cost effective and efficient, based on life cycle costing (LCC)
and analysis (LCA).
b. LCC is a valuable tool for evaluating appropriate/durable materials based upon their
longevity and expected maintenance and operating costs. While LCC has
traditionally addressed mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment/systems, it
must also be used to evaluate major civil, structural, and architectural envelope
systems.
c. LCA is also a valuable tool, and shall be used in conjunction with LCC to evaluate
materials, products, and systems. LCA may show that a product with a favorable
LCC is not the better choice for the project. The A/E Consultant and/or EPC
Contractor must always be prepared to substantiate the reasons for design
decisions, including LCC and LCA factors.
2. Operation and Maintenance
a. Designs shall deliver low maintenance/vandal-resistant interior finishes and building
systems that are commonly available for necessary replacement. Designs of

Rev. 1 5.3 - 15
mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems shall be based on reliable components

and LCC.
b. All material and systems shall be reliable and easy to operate, access, and maintain.
Materials shall be environmentally sound and selected based on LCA.
3. Demolition and Salvage
a. Designs shall consider demolition and construction activities and strive to minimize
the amount of construction debris. Construction waste of any type is prohibited from
entering the municipal waste stream. Salvage, reuse, repurposing, and recycling of
materials is required to the fullest extent possible.
b. Future demolition and salvage must be considered in all LCA and LCC calculations.
c. Refer also to Section 3.4 Sustainability and Subsection 4.3.5 Value Engineering.
F. Pre-design, Programming, and Space Allocation
1. Nomenclature
a. The terms “Space Allocation Program,” “Architectural Program,” and “Architectural
Brief,” and “Scope of Facility” (or SOF) may be interchangeable and shall be
considered herein to have identical meaning.
b. Refer to LEED IP Credit “Integrative Process” for further process guidance.
c. See Subsection 5.3.0.A.3, Definitions, for additional terminology.
2. Process
a. The goals of the building owner, end user, or developer are expressed in written
form. These are often stated in the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR).
b. Statement of Intent
1) The building owner, end-user, or developer initially provides a written statement
noting the type of building or its purpose, an approximate size, and a budgeted
construction cost.
c. Basis of Design (BOD)
1) The Budget and OPR informs the BOD. The BOD includes the program, design
constraints (budget is a constraint), the intended design character, preferred
materials, sustainability goals, etc.
2) The program provides general requirements of the all the spaces (including
exterior spaces), the activities in each space, the anticipated number of
occupants each space is to accommodate, and the relationship (connectivity)
of the space to other spaces.
3) Provide an overview of how the building will be used, such as demographic
target group, hours, and how occupants move within the building.
4) Submit the applicable parking, loading, and site requirements.
5) Provide specialized information such as industrial process equipment, support
and utility infrastructure, material handling and storage, and vehicular and/or
user traffic that may be generated.
6) The DBR provides the BOD and related information to the review team.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 16
d. Information Gathering
1) Before beginning design, conduct meetings and workshops with the end-
user/developer/owner and other stakeholders to identify the goals for the
project. This usually will include visiting existing facilities and the site. Other
means of investigation and research shall be used as needed to formulate a
complete understanding of the project.
2) Define the types, functions, occupant loads, and approximate sizes of spaces.
The typology and functional relationships of the spaces and circulation are to
be indicated, and circulation, production, and/or industrial process flow is to be
delineated.
3) Define any specific functional needs of specific spaces.
4) Orientation requirements such as the following, are to be defined:
(a) Spatial orientation
(b) Solar orientation
(c) Ceremonial / Religious orientation
5) Define the utility needs of the spaces.
6) Define the technology, security, and/or telecommunications needs of the
spaces.
7) Define any special disability/accessibility requirements or challenges. (All
spaces must meet at least the minimum accessibility standards.)
8) Define any special hazardous material requirements.
9) Define site access, delivery, and service requirements.
10) Research Lessons Learned and identify those that may be applicable to the
project.
e. Compilation
1) Typically, a “bubble diagram” showing the connectivity of spaces shall be
created to define room and space arrangements, and their topology.
2) Describe the resultant or intended hierarchy of spaces in terms of function or
size.
3) Coupled with the topology, create “stacking diagrams,” or three-dimensional or
cross-sectional diagrammatic drawings to show the vertical topology and the
beginning of a volumetric arrangement organizing the spaces in multi-story
buildings.
4) Diagrams of special areas shall be included.
5) Submit a detailed database of spaces with their areas, with provisions for
support, circulation, and net/gross area factors indicated. In most cases, create
“technical data sheets” describing all the relevant information for each space.
6) Submit the technical data sheets with the 30% phase documents, and form the
basis for continued design development.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 17
f. Design Basis Report (DBR)

1) Using the goals established for the project and the resulting Basis of Design,
the Design Basis Report provides an overall problem statement for the project.
2) Include references to the appropriate building and zoning codes, and a general
outline of the design constraints therein. (Do not include a life safety analysis;
that is in the Contract Documents.)
3) Provide specialized information such as industrial process equipment, support
and utility infrastructure, material handling and storage, and vehicular and/or
user traffic that may be generated.
4) Provide a programming statement and summary, including spatial relationships
(“bubble diagrams”) and occupancy and functional requirements
5) Outline the project goals, including a LEED scorecard indicating how the project
team intends to achieve the required level of certification.
6) Include documentation of all meetings and workshops (including, but not limited
to sign-in sheets, meeting minutes, meeting documents, and photographs)
related to goal setting and pre-design activities shall be included as an
appendix.
G. Pest Control
1. Project Requirements
a. Pest control is required for any project involving new construction at grade.
b. A/E is to edit the relevant Guideline Specifications to meet the individual
requirements of the project as necessary, in keeping with the following.
2. Chemical Treatment
a. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider in the design of all buildings, facilities, and
the sites surrounding them as well as in the use of materials, steps, and procedures
to combat and exclude all rodents, termites, and insects. Particular problems with
subterranean termites, cockroaches, and rats exist in the area.
b. Any anti-pest substance or material must be a substance approved by local health
authorities, and the RCJ and the Standards referenced therein. Substances must
be employed strictly according to health regulations and manufacturer’s
recommendations. Refer to the relevant Guideline Specifications for additional
requirements.
c. Typical termite and insect treatment techniques include soil trenching and injection
into the effected materials via drilling or other invasive methods.
d. Soil Treatment
1) A zone of treated soil shall be created around the building perimeter. Soil shall
be treated with an approved termiticide, prior to the concrete slab construction,
for control of subterranean termites, as best method for the control of
subterranean termite is prevention.
e. Chemicals for treatment must conform to all applicable product and application
restrictions. The A/E and/or EPC must only use approved substances, chemicals,

Rev. 1 5.3 - 18
and/or materials, and is responsible for all permitting. Some chemicals may include
the following list, subject to the above,
1) Organophosphates and synthetic pyrethroids (modified).
2) Reticulated Chemicals are proprietary systems that use a piping distribution
network installed at strategic points under concrete slabs and around the
perimeters of buildings. At completion of Construction, chemicals are injected
to reach each distribution point. Retreatment may be applied at any time.
f. Chemically impregnated membranes for under-slab and perimeter protection may be
provided with a proprietary system where a vapor barrier membrane is laminated to
a synthetic fibrous web impregnated with synthetic chemicals,
g. Stainless steel mesh (‘termimesh’) is a proprietary system that consists of a fine
woven marine grade stainless steel mesh used as a physical barrier. The stainless
steel mesh is too narrow for intrusion and incapable of being chewed through. The
mesh may be under the entire concrete slab or as a partial system in conjunction
with a concrete slab barrier that allows for construction of a perimeter barrier only.
Installations must comply with the manufacturer’s requirements.
3. Preventative Measures
a. Recommended preventative measures during construction:
1) Construction site garbage, food, and food or drink container refuse, shall not
be mixed with construction material waste, and shall have separate receptacles
subject to frequent pick-up.
2) Temporary Construction toilets shall be maintained and regularly refreshed.
3) The observed presence of rodents, termites, insects, and other pests shall be
immediately reported to the appropriate on-site personnel who shall address
the situation by employing professional exterminators as necessary.
4) Removal of all form boards and grade stakes used in construction activities.
5) Sites shall be cleared of vegetation and/or ripped and grubbed to remove roots
etc. prior to commencing earthworks. Vegetation, tree stumps, and roots shall
be removed from site as soon as practical, and shall not be incorporated in any
fill.
6) Any wood that contacts the soil, such as fence posts and foundation elements
shall be made of pressure treated wood.
b. General Construction techniques
1) Construction techniques and details shall employ deterrents to rodent entry,
including avoidance of wood or wood products near the ground or water
sources within the building such as showers, toilets, sinks, and drain lines.
2) There shall be no contact between the building woodwork and the soil or fill
materials.
c. Types of Potential Termites
1) There are two main types of termites capable of attacking buildings:
(a) Dry wood termites, which do not have ground contact, and

Rev. 1 5.3 - 19
(b) Subterranean termites, which require contact with the ground or some
other moisture source. Subterranean termites are found to be most
responsible for termite damage of economic significance.
d. Protection Options
1) Termite or Ant Shields
(a) These are continuous metal barriers or shields acting as physical
barriers.
(b) Materials may be of aluminum, stainless steel, sheet copper, or an alloy.
(c) These elements shall be installed with a continuous protruding
metal edge turned down at an angle of no less than 45° from the
horizontal. The protruding edge must not be less than 38 mm from the
vertical pier or wall.
(d) The shields' main value is that of detection rather than protection. They
force the termites to construct their tubes in a visible area where they
may be treated or removed.
e. Inherent Deterrents
1) Monolithic Concrete Slabs form an inherent barrier; however, construction
joints and service penetrations must be detailed properly to prevent intrusion.
2) Ventilation of crawl spaces and cavities, and the proper installation of under-
slab vapor barriers deter moisture and build-up of humidity that attract termites.
A minimum of 400 mm vertical clearance is recommended for proper
maintenance inspections.
3) The use of termite resistant and wolmanized lumber.
4) Strip footings and slabs shall be continuous to minimize construction breaks
that may allow intrusion.
5) Utility penetrations shall be provided with both physical and chemical
deterrents.
6) Walls with masonry veneers shall not allow the air cavity to extend below grade.
7) Ventilation opening in foundations shall be designed to prevent dead air
pockets. These helps to keep the ground dry and unfavorable for termites.
f. Create proper grading to direct water away from the structures to eliminate creating
favorable conditions for pests. Typically, the grade is to slope away from the
building at 5%.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 20
SUBSECTION 5.3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR BUILDINGS
5.3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR BUILDINGS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides the basis for Site Planning for Building Projects, and applies to
the following features:
1) General Building Site Planning
2) Building Orientation
3) Setback Criteria and Placement of Structures
4) Building Approaches and Entrances
5) Walkways Paving and Pedestrian Safety
6) Site Drainage
7) Site Lighting
8) Service and Emergency Vehicle Access
9) Vehicle Access and Parking
10) Loading, Off-Loading, and Delivery Areas
11) Waste Collection Requirements
12) Screening of Waste Utilities and Service Areas
13) Walls and Fencing
b. Sustainability Goals
1) Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Director of Engineering, comply
with the requirements of LEED Credit SS “Site Assessment.” Requests to
deviate from the requirement must include a summary of why the requirements
cannot or should not be met.
with the requirements of LEED Credit SS “Rainwater Management.” Requests
to deviate from the requirement must include a summary of why the
requirements cannot or should not be met.
with the requirements of LEED Credit SS “Heat Island Reduction.” Requests
requirements cannot or should not be met.
with the requirements of LEED Credit SS “Light Pollution Reduction.” Requests
requirements cannot or should not be met. More lighting is not necessarily
better; smarter design creates better lighting for safety and for the environment.
5) All documentation, calculations, drawings, product data, and other supporting
evidence for the design related to meeting these LEED requirements shall be
kept on file and submitted to RCJ on request.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 21
4. Planning Guidelines
a. General: Site Planning shall strive to provide social, environmental, and economic
benefits for each project in keeping with physical site conditions, public expectations,
market realities, and environmental constraints. Refer to the Jubail Development
Code, applicable Master Plans, the Urban Planning Department, and Section 3.2 for
Zoning Regulations.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide an accurate Site Survey of the Existing
Conditions.
1) A site survey including topographic information, utilities, existing site features,
and similar detail is a necessary prerequisite to the planning process.
2) An accurate survey is to be carried out to define the boundary of the site and
identify existing features within and adjacent to the site. The survey shall be
comprehensive and detailed.
c. Property lines, setbacks, and other physical constraints of the site shall be
diagrammed. These include, but are not limited to, adjacent buildings, traffic flow
around the site, pedestrian paths, natural features, views, solar orientation,
prevailing winds, noise sources, and other aspects of the site that could impact the
design and the use of the facility. Refer to Master Plans, the Urban Planning
Department, and Section 3.2 for Zoning Regulations.
d. Issues to be considered include, but are not limited to:
1) Setbacks and Placement of Structures, refer to Subsection 5.3.2.C.
2) Building Approaches and Entrances, refer to Subsection 5.3.2.D.
3) Walkways, Paving, and Pedestrian Safety, refer to Subsection 5.3.2.E.
4) Architectural Context, refer to Subsection 5.3.3.C.
5) Visual Elements refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.3
e. The positioning of entrances, the ability of building exits to exit onto a public way or
appropriate open space, pedestrian and vehicular traffic flow within the site and
connecting beyond, the availability of useable open space, the proximity of parking
to building entrances all must be coordinated.
f. Site composition is a paramount issue. The character of the development, its
“sense of place,” the organization of buildings, the creation of outdoor spaces by
framing and forming it with structures, the reinforcement and treatment of existing
axes, edges and boundaries (refer to Section 5.3.3.D.2.h), and the creation of new
ones, shall all be thoughtfully considered and skillfully addressed to lead to a
successful and harmonious development plan.
g. Design all site improvements including pavements, garden walls, constructed
elements, and even automatic irrigation systems, to maintain their structural,
functional, operational and aesthetic integrity for a minimum of 40 years.
5. Site Drainage
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4 Site Stormwater Drainage for guidance on the design of
stormwater facilities.
b. Special attention shall be given to site drainage. A positive site drainage system
must be coordinated with the adjacent off-site drainage system at points of
discharge and interface. Verify the external/off-site system capacity.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 22
c. Ground absorption or percolation areas are not a suitable or acceptable method for
managing rainwater. A positive rainwater drainage system is required. Slope the
grade away from the building at 1:20.
d. Provide erosion protection for all drainage slopes and landscape embankments.
e. Proposed site grades and landscaping, including future development, shall
emphasize the intent to minimize changes to the natural drainage patterns and
contours. Any proposed changes to existing grades, swales, or existing drainage
patterns must be accompanied by a proposed method of handling changes in the
direction, quantity, or subsurface loading of water. All such proposals for change
must be approved by the RCJ and by an independent engineering consultant
retained by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Such engineering consultant shall be
approved in advance by the RCJ.
f. All buildings shall conform to the typical grading plans provided by the Royal
Commission in Jubail. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall confirm all finished floor
elevations with the Royal Commission in Jubail.
g. Existing trees and vegetation shall be retained whenever possible. Design cuts and
fills to complement the natural topography of the site. Existing drainage structures
shall not be altered or affected in any way.
h. Flow of water shall be directed to existing or proposed drainage structures in such a
manner as not to allow run-off onto adjacent property nor allow puddles or ponding
in paved areas, channels, or swales. Surface runoff is not allowed to drain to the
adjacent street or road.
i. Grades shall be nominally sloped away from building entrances providing drainage
away from buildings at 2% for 2m minimum. The overall parking lot shall be
generally sloped by a minimum of 0.5% towards the rainwater drainage or collection
system elements.
j. Rain Water Drainage at roofs
1) To comply with IBC 1503.4, IPC 1106, and IPC 1108, where roof drainage is
achieved through internally concealed pipes, an additional overflow shall be
provided at each roof sump or drain in case concealed pipes are blocked. The
overflow shall be located 100 mm above the top surface of the associated roof
sump or drain.
2) Subsurface drainage shall be provided for those areas where it becomes
necessary to control perched water or ground water (“water table”) elevations
at foundation walls, cut areas, and landscape areas.
6. Landscape Scheme
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.5 Landscaping and Plant Irrigation for guidance on the
details of landscaping and plant irrigation systems.
b. A detailed landscape plan is required. This scheme shall show the hard landscape
layout detailing surface treatments, boundary types, earthwork design, changes of
level, proposed levels, artifacts such as walls, steps, etc., plant beds, grass areas,
services, and site furniture. Details shall also be provided as necessary.
c. A complete automatic irrigation system, if required, shall be fully specified and
detailed. It shall serve all plantings. The planting schedule shall be coordinated with
irrigation water availability volumes and schedule.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 23
7. Open Spaces
a. Pedestrian open spaces shall be provided consisting of pedestrian courts, yards,
plazas, greens, and linear open spaces. Greens shall serve as social congregation
areas. Linear open spaces shall consist of pedestrian ways, and provide linkages
between facilities or amenities and potentially serve as recreational assets.
b. The potential of open spaces for the use and enjoyment of its inhabitants shall be
fulfilled by the judicious planning, design, and installation of appropriate landscape
materials.
8. Special Site Features
a. Swimming Pools and Enclosures
1) All swimming pools and bathing facilities shall conform to the adopted codes in
Section 3.1
2) Total separation of sexes, both for the swimming and bathing facilities
associated with such establishments, is necessary. The design must
incorporate facilities to enable users to shower or bathe before and after the
use of the swimming pools and/or hot tubs.
3) All swimming pools must be in-ground. Raised decks, spa areas, etc. shall not
project more than 600 mm above the established grade. Pools shall not be
permitted on the street side of the residence and no screening of a pool area
may stand beyond a line extended and aligned with the side walls of the
dwelling. No portion of any pool, decking, or enclosure shall be permitted to
extend outside the building setback lines.
b. Tennis Courts
1) Tennis courts to be constructed on any lot shall be subject to approval by the
Royal Commission in Jubail. Any lighting shall be designed to comply with the
requirements herein, and must be approved by the Royal Commission in Jubail.
c. Play Equipment, Accessory Structures, and Decorative Objects
1) No basketball-backboard, swing set, other fixed game or play structure,
platform, doghouse, tool shed, or structure of a similar kind or nature shall be
constructed on any part of a home site except when approved by the Royal
2) No decorative objects such as sculptures birdbaths fountains, flagpoles, and
the like shall be placed or installed on the street side of any lot without approval
of the Royal Commission in Jubail.
d. Games and Play Structures
1) All basketball backboards and any other fixed game structures shall be located
at the rear of the dwelling, or on the inside portion of corner lots within the
setback lines. No platforms, playhouses, or structures of a similar kind or
nature shall be constructed on any part of a lot located in front of the rear line
of the residence constructed thereon, and any such structure must have prior
approval of the Royal Commission in Jubail.
e. Play Surfacing Treatments
1) A key consideration in the design of accessible playground areas is the type of
surfacing to use. It is important that play surface materials be suitable for

Rev. 1 5.3 - 24
cushioning falls, yet firm and stable enough to provide access for persons with
disabilities.
2) Children's play facilities shall be located with shaded areas. The surfaces
beneath the equipment shall be sand or other approved material. Natural turf
is not sufficiently durable for use beneath play equipment.
9. Site Plan Content
a. Ultimately, the Site Plan shall be a comprehensive layout drawing or drawings
showing the detailed site design and development of all project components. It shall
describe the design thoroughly with specific details, including, but not limited to
entrance feature design, lighting, materials for walkways, landscaping, storm water
management design, and subsurface utility plans. Renderings and final
presentation materials may also be required to present the design concept to the
Royal Commission in Jubail in the approval process.
b. Proposed plant species, density and microclimate factors, irrigation efficiency, and
use of captured rainwater shall also be included.
B. Building Orientation
1. Site Plan Considerations

a. Solar orientation
1) South-facing orientations receive sunlight vertically, so horizontal elements
may provide shading.
2) East and west-facing orientations receive horizontal solar rays. West
exposures typically have stronger solar gain than east-facing exposures.
3) North-facing orientations typically have the least direct solar gain.
b. Sun Angles
1) Study the sun angles for proposed designs. Use these in determining basic
building orientation, as well as selecting both active and passive shading
devices.
2) Sun angles vary by latitude, by season, and by time of day.
c. Solar Path
1) Solar Path refers to the relative position of the sun during the course of a day
at a particular selected date or during a particular season. Charts and diagrams
are available from various sources to inform this study. The relative position of
the sun at various times of day shall be a consideration for both interior and
exterior spaces of a building.
2) Consideration shall be given to the Solar Path at various seasons in order to
understand the effects of light and shading on the development as it relates to
the building and site functions and to the selection of landscaping species.
d. The building orientation, fenestration, and envelope shall be designed to minimize
energy consumption and maximize interior daylighting opportunities.
1) Include a solar angle/path analysis of the site in the DBR.
2) In the schematic design (30%) submittal, include an analysis of how the design
takes the solar angles and path into consideration.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 25
e. Wind
1) To the extent possible, it is desirable to provide for natural ventilation of
buildings by taking advantage of prevailing winds.
2) Wind also carries dust and sand. Building orientation should minimize intrusion
of windborne dust and sand into the building.
3) The key is to successfully balance these two factors.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.4.d for Design of Shading Systems.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F for Orientation of Entrances.
C. Setback Criteria and Placement of Structures
1. Definition: A Setback is a specific line fixed by regulatory action, parallel to the property
line at the street right-of-way, abutting property that defines a zone wherein a defined
level of improvement may not occur.
2. Location: Typically, a site has specific setbacks along each property line that are defined
by the applicable zoning ordinance. These are set by zoning district. These will consist
of front yard setbacks, side yard setbacks, and rear yard setbacks, which may differ
dimensionally from one another.
3. Purpose: The purpose of setbacks is to keep developments from infringing on the use,
function, or views of adjacent developments and in some cases to implicitly set density,
daylighting, or open space requirements.
4. Context
a. Contextual setbacks must also be considered. A contextual setback is an imaginary
line determined by the designer or the reviewing agency intended to align the face of
a building or structure with the adjacent building(s) or structure(s) to establish a
visual commonality.
b. Effort shall be made to design structures and the elements to be compatible with
their environment and adjoining buildings. Design excellence reinforces and
enhances the urban fabric, scale, and coherence of architectural treatments.
5. References
a. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.B for Height, Mass, and Scale considerations.
b. Refer to Section 3.1 for Codes and Standards affecting setback requirements.
c. Refer to Master Plans, the Urban Planning Department, and Section 3.2 for Zoning
Regulations.
D. Building Approaches and Entrances
1. Street Access
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3 Roads for design criteria to locate entrances to sites from
roadways.
b. Consideration must be given to the location of driveways. The speed of traffic and
number of lanes may affect the radius of the curb cut of the driveway based on the
expected speed of an entering vehicle.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 26
c. The presence of medians or barriers may restrict turning in and out to one direction.
d. The queuing distance of vehicles at an adjacent intersection may necessitate setting
the access point further from the intersection.
e. The horizontal and vertical location of an entrance drive may typically be affected by
sight lines from a vehicle awaiting exiting, based on adjacent topography,
obstructions, and anticipated street vehicle speed. Sight line studies are mandatory.
f. Consideration must be given to the anticipated turning radii of trucks, delivery, and
service vehicles.
g. Sidewalks, street crosswalks, and on-site pedestrian paths may also affect entrance
drive design.
2. Entrance Approaches
a. The requirements of the drive approaches to building entrances vary greatly
between building types.
b. Consideration shall be given to the following:
1) Delivery vehicle needs
2) Emergency vehicle requirements
3) Vehicle drop-off of pedestrians
4) Accessibility for people with disabilities and for moving heavy and/or rolling
loads.
5) Adjacent parking
c. Emergency vehicle requirements
1) Emergency access-ways shall be located and designed in an appropriate
manner to ensure safe ingress to and egress from facilities.
2) Accessibility of emergency fire-fighting equipment will affect the fire ratings and
construction types required by the adopted building code.
d. Landscaping at Entrances
1) Entry drives in vehicular use areas shall be landscaped with approved trees
and shrubs in a manner that visually emphasize the areas and offer the driver
and pedestrian an attractive appearance from the street.
2) The landscape plan shall identify a visibility triangle at all intersections including
parking access aisles and roads.
3) No trees, shrubs, or other materials shall be placed where this will impede
visibility of drivers or pedestrians at entries, driveways, pedestrian crossings,
and similar locations.
3. Parking Areas
a. Trees shall be planted in parking areas to provide shade, windbreaks, spatial
enclosure, and a visual buffer of parking areas.
b. All visible parking lots shall be designed to be screened from the public street or
adjacent property owners that are located in a different zone district.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 27
a. Refer to Subsections 5.3.2.I and 5.3.2.J. for Service and Loading Requirements.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F for Orientation of Entrances.
c. Refer to Section 5.11 for landscaping and irrigation information.
E. Walkways, Paving, and Pedestrian Safety
1. Walkways
a. Walkways are the paths for pedestrian circulation within the site.
b. Walkways are required from building points of egress to the public right-of-way or
other place of safety as designated by the RC.
c. Except at buildings warranting “monumental” or “ceremonial” entrances, steps
should be avoided by sloping walkways to the entrances at not more than 5% (1:20).
This provides positive drainage away from the building, avoids steps and ramps, and
provides for safer pedestrian ingress and egress.
d. Refer to Section 3.1 for Building Code Requirements, Section 3.2 for Zoning
Requirements, and Section 3.3 for Accessibility Requirements.
e. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.3.d.1 (i) for Circulation Systems.
2. Paving
a. Durability and longevity shall be considered in selecting walkway paving materials.
Proper sub-base, control joint spacing, and pavement thicknesses are required.
b. Refer to Pavement Guideline 2015 document no. RCJ-3DG-3DJ-GEX-AA01 for
general paving recommendations.
3. Pedestrian Safety
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.1 for pedestrian accessibility requirements and 5.6.3 for
vehicular accessibility requirements.
b. Vehicular Dangers
1) Separation of motorized vehicle and pedestrian circulation shall be
incorporated into the landscape development plan.
2) The layout of pedestrian walkways must consider vehicular danger potential.
Driveways and intersections must be carefully planned and kept clear of visual
obstructions for both driver and pedestrian. Analyzing pedestrian sight
distances to on-coming vehicles is critical to pedestrian safety.
3) Guardrails, railings, walls, or other physical barriers, or reasonable distances
shall be provided at walkways along streets or major thoroughfares. Because
some physical barriers and bollards are considered to be obstacles affecting
traffic safety, give consideration to clearance distances of the barriers to the
traffic lanes.
4) Physically defined (i.e., constructed from material different from the road or
raised compared to the road elevation) or painted pedestrian crosswalks are
required. Where roads have frequent bus service, raised pedestrian
crosswalks are to be specially designed to minimize additional bus
maintenance; coordinate design with the bus operators.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 28
5) Consideration shall be given to establishing on-site speed limits, caution signs,

and crosswalk signs or pavement markings. In low visibility crosswalk
locations, consider illuminated signs or signs with very high retro reflectivity to
improve pedestrian safety.
6) Provide code compliant detectable warning pavement in accordance with
adopted accessibility Codes.
c. Fall Potential
1) Sidewalks and patios shall be constructed of textured or sandblasted concrete,
brick, interlocking pavers, or stone. The coefficient of friction of a proposed
walking surface shall be a factor in its selection, particularly with brick, stone,
ceramic, and certain other paver types. Concrete masonry units typically are
more slip-resistant than fired clay units.
2) All walking surfaces shall have a non-slip finish. Tiled and slab paving shall be
solid bedded with fully grouted joints. Colored paving shall only be provided in
light-reflective colors, resistant to fading from strong sunlight. Adequate
provisions shall be made for expansion and cracking due to temperature and
moisture changes in paving materials.
3) Maintenance of walking surfaces is critical to pedestrian safety, and is a
consideration in material selection.
4) Storm water drainage and collection shall be designed to minimize the fall
potential due to wet pavement. The possibility of standing water shall be
eliminated. Walking surfaces must have adequate slope to assure positive
drainage.
5) Shielding from blowing sand shall be provided periodically along longer
pedestrian paths. Sun-shading is also a strong consideration.
6) Slopes beside walkways shall not exceed 1:20 for the first 5 meters. Railings
or other guards shall be provided where this cannot be achieved.
7) Guards and rails shall be provided in accordance with the adopted building
codes where walking surfaces are elevated above the grade plane.
F. Site Lighting
1. Design all outdoor lighting to provide sufficient security for all facilities. Reference
5.5.1 M. This system shall, by its design, style, material, color, and function, serve as a
unifying element of the visual character of the areas developed by the Royal Commission
in Jubail.
2. Illumination levels shall be within the limits prescribed by applicable code, but must be
appropriate for the function to be illuminated, and adequate for security and safety.
Reference Table 5.5.1.J.
3. Design lighting to minimize or eliminate glare and up lighting. Spillover of light onto
adjoining properties is not permitted. Design exterior lighting to satisfy LEED SS Credit
“Light Pollution Reduction” using either compliance option.
4. Location
a. Provide street lighting at all intersections of street and access drives. Reference
5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting

Rev. 1 5.3 - 29
b. Provide lights in parking areas, along sidewalks, between buildings, and at loading
areas as needed for safety and convenience.
5. Design
a. The placement, height, and shielding of light standards shall provide adequate
lighting without hazard to drivers or nuisance to nearby residents.
b. Lighting shall not glare so as to hinder pedestrians or drivers either on or off the site.
“Full cut-off” fixtures are required in most applications.
c. Brighter light is not necessarily better light. Eliminating glare and creating even light
levels results in better lighting design and efficiency.
d. Light standard size shall reflect site context; use taller street lights in vehicular areas
and shorter pedestrian scaled lights along sidewalks, plazas, and building
entrances.
e. Up-lighting is strongly discouraged, and requires the written approval of the Chief
Architect.
f. Lasers and beacons are prohibited.
G. Service and Emergency Vehicle Access
1. Access and Location

a. Off-street loading and unloading space shall be provided and sized to accommodate
the anticipated loading requirement.
b. Vehicular access for service vehicles is desirable from a secondary entrance rather
than the primary entrance. Segregate service vehicle route from user vehicle
circulation to the degree practical.
c. The service route and loading area shall be designed to accommodate the
maneuvering requirements of the largest anticipated vehicles.
d. For safety, service vehicle access is to require minimal vehicle maneuvering.
Backing, except into a loading dock, is to be avoided. Crossing pedestrian paths is
to be minimized.
e. Emergency vehicle access to fire department connections must be maintained.
Parking/stopping on emergency vehicle paths is not permissible.
f. The loading area shall be located and/or screened to be hidden from view of the
public street and main building entry.
g. The loading area shall have direct access to a public street without the use of
parking spaces.
h. All loading spaces shall be independently accessible such that a vehicle may enter
or exit without the necessity of moving another vehicle.
i. Provide bollards as needed to protect the building, stairs, and loading docks from
being hit by maneuvering service vehicles. Bollards are considered obstacles that
affect traffic safety; consider clearance distances of these barriers from the traffic
lanes.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 30
H. Vehicle Access
1. Vehicle Access
a. Location
1) Access drives shall enter public streets at safe locations with adequate sight
distances, capacity for anticipated traffic flow, and sufficient spacing from other
intersections.
b. Design
1) Access drives shall consist of a well-defined roadway separate from the parking
area.
2) Access drives shall not have excessive grades and shall provide a level area
at intersections.
3) The angle of intersection between the access drive and the public street shall
be as close to 90 degrees as possible.
4) The number of access points to a development shall be based on the number
of users needing egress at specific times as approved by the RC.
2. Parking
a. Location
1) Parking spaces shall be “off-street,” that is, located on the same lot as the
principal use.
2) Parking spaces shall not be directly accessed from the public street.
b. Design
1) Off-street parking lots shall be graded, surfaced, drained, and illuminated.
2) Double loaded parking bays with parking spaces arranged at 90 degrees to the
drive aisle is an efficient and preferred arrangement.
3) In general, it is preferable to have the parking lanes perpendicular to the front
of the building in order to minimize pedestrian crossing of vehicular traffic lanes.
c. Quantity
1) The quantity of parking to be provided shall be calculated based on the number
of anticipated users arriving by private vehicle at peak time and any overlap
between user or shifts, but not less than required by RC Zoning.
2) Where parking use times are complementary between adjacent uses, the
potential for joint use parking shall be considered to reduce the overall number
of spaces.
3) Handicap parking spaces shall be provided and be the closest spaces to the
building accessible entrance and shall have an accessible path of travel to the
building entrance; the number, sizes, and arrangement to comply with ADA
standards
4) Visitor parking spaces shall be provided according to applicable zoning
regulations.
5) When directed, provide preferred parking spaces for car pool (multiple
occupants) vehicles and for electric vehicle recharging stations.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 31
I. Waste Collection Requirements
1. Location and Design

a. Provide dumpster enclosures and/or enclosed storage spaces for all waste and
recyclables as determined by the amount of waste generated. Enclosures shall be
three-sided, with a site-proof operable gate on the fourth side to provide access for
collection vehicles. Provide separate spaces for recycling containers and non-
recyclable refuse containers.
b. Verify the anticipated required waste container sizes with the end-user and the
Sanitation Department.
c. Coordinate the location, arrangement, and spatial requirements of dumpsters with
the type and loading characteristics of the anticipated collection vehicle. Backing of
collection vehicles must be minimized.
J. Utility and Service Areas
1. Location and Design

a. To the greatest extent practical, locate waste, utilities, and service areas out of view
of from public streets, building entrances, and pedestrian amenities.
b. Waste, utilities, and service areas shall be screened by vegetation, fencing, and/or
grade changes.
c. Maintained existing vegetation may be used to fulfill screening requirements.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 32
SUBSECTION 5.3.3 BUILDING DEVELOPMENT
5.3.3 BUILDING DEVELOPMENT
A. General
1. General Themes and Concepts

a. This Section provides general themes and concepts that shall be considered in the
design of all projects commissioned by the RCJ.
B. Height, Mass, and Scale
1. Building Height
a. Building height shall be determined with due consideration to the function of the
building, activities in the building, aesthetics, and economy. Building height is also
restricted by the adopted building code and zoning.
b. Zoning height restrictions are intended to be contextual, creating harmonious visual
environments, to enable light and air to reach the streetscape below, and mitigate
the ‘canyon effect’ of streets between tall buildings
c. Developments on the edge of zoning districts with different height restrictions shall
be designed with sensitivity to the inherent height transition.
2. Mass
a. The size and shape of a mass is known as the form. The individual forms that
comprise a building or occur within a multi-building development shall be designed
to complement one another and the overall environment.
b. The massing of a building shall be developed as a harmonious composition of
elements. The massing shall take into consideration the massing of the adjacent
buildings to create a skyline.
c. The building mass must work in harmony with the natural environment in terms of
site location, density, color, form, function, and materials.
d. The form and proportion of buildings shall be consistent or compatible with the
scale, form, and proportion of existing development in the immediate area.
e. The rhythm of structural mass and voids, such as windows and glass doors of a
front façade, shall be related to the rhythms established by adjacent buildings.
3. Scale
a. Scale is the proportional relationship of a person to his spatial environment. The
scale of a design shall result in a comfortable relationship for the user in his
environment, and will vary as space, size, and activities vary.
b. The most common scales used in the built environment are monumental and human
scales. Monumental scale is used to make a dramatic statement or to be viewed
from a distance creating a landmark or point of orientation. Human scale is used to
create comfortable spaces for people to live and work in and respond to the physical
and emotional needs of the typical human.
c. Monumental and human scales may be used independently or together in the
design of a facility. The application of these different scales is often used to define
public versus private areas. For example, monumental scales may be more likely to
be used for large buildings, lobbies, and gathering places for larger groups of people

Rev. 1 5.3 - 33
or to create more formal settings within public areas or structures; while human
scale is more likely to be created in spaces designed for smaller groups of people or
places that are more private. Sometimes buildings of more monumental overall
stature may be made up of spaces and volumes of moderate or human scale that
serve the needs of the users while creating a more monumental overall structure.
d. A third type of scale is the automotive scale. This scale relates to the perception of
form and space due to potential speed of movement. At higher speeds, human
perception of form, space, and detail diminishes. Buildings designed to be viewed at
automotive scale may have simpler features or may be more iconic to give
recognition at a glance.
e. Streetscapes need to take into account automotive scale at closer proximity. The
character of the lowest levels of structures may require more detail to enhance the
quality of the transportation experience. Building entrances and parking locations
must be identifiable physically as well as by signage.
C. Architectural Context
1. Cultural Considerations
a. Design all facilities keeping in mind the Saudi Arabian heritage and culture.
Architectural aesthetics and layout shall reflect Saudi needs and values with both
traditional and modern designs, motifs, and influences. Local materials and
products shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible.
b. The overall facility shall be sensitive to and reflect the local culture.
c. Architectural design shall be respectful and relate to the building location and
surroundings with appropriate color, materials, and detailing. Overall design shall
enhance the environment by honoring and preserving significant architectural,
historical, cultural, and community themes which bring consistency.
d. Be wary; do not allow consistency to become monotony. Architectural design shall
result from the successful and interesting blending of local culture, function,
environment, economy, durability, operation and maintenance, and location. Do not
interpret consistency to mean variety is not welcome.
e. Refer to the relevant master plans and district design guidelines for additional
guidance and requirements for the specific project location.
2. City and Community Context
a. Architectural design is the creation of the physical language that becomes part of a
city or community identity. New construction will inevitably be set in an environment
of other structures, circulation, and spaces. It both responds to and affects the
environment where it is constructed. Consideration must be given by the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor to both the response and effect of any proposed design on its built
environment. These existing structures will have varying characteristics to which the
new design must be sensitive. One of the characteristics of this environment is the
architectural context.
b. The role of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is to work thoughtfully to incorporate new
designs into the unique local character using the best qualities of the regional and
cultural forms found in this region.
c. The overall context is comprised of many things, including its character or “sense of
place,” the cultural context of the locale, architectural features of adjacent structures,

Rev. 1 5.3 - 34
the contextual history of the site area, circulation routes, building massing and
alignments, and the specific aesthetics of adjacent structures such as forms and
spaces, materials and colors, and scale.
1) Character and “sense of place:” Is the character industrial, high-tech,
picturesque, or urban? “Sense of place” is its identity as an area or
neighborhood with identifiable differentiating characteristics.
2) “The cultural context” of the locale relates to historic precedents and the related
architectural forms and features with which people culturally or religiously
identify.
3) “Contextual history:” The built environment is constantly changing and growing
through various transformations whether rapid or prolonged. Existing cities and
communities have unique cultures and pasts called “contextual history.” Future
designs of buildings and spaces weave their way into this context and become
a part of the whole.
4) “Circulation routes” must not be overlooked as key components of context,
since the enhancement or alteration of pedestrian or vehicular circulation may
drastically affect the way spaces are used and how access is facilitated.
5) “Adjacent building massing and alignments” may also create context which a
proposed development shall respond to by aligning the new forms with existing,
picking up horizontal lines, or otherwise placing the new forms and surfaces in
a composition with the adjacent existing structures.
6) “The aesthetics of adjacent structures:” Forms, spaces, materials, colors, and
scale are discussed elsewhere, but they contribute significantly to the context
of a new structure and a new structure’s relationship to the aesthetic
characteristics of its neighbors. It must enhance, and not detract visually from
the common good.
7) “Regional motifs” are recognizable combinations of forms, surface textures,
colors, and patterns that are indigenous to the locale. These are to be analyzed
and studied in order to create a responsive new design which will contribute to
the regional motif.
d. Every building design must consider its context to create an environment that
enriches the lives of the people and responds to the vision, history, beliefs, and
identity of a particular place and time.
e. In the unique situation of the creation of a new city, community, or development, the
architect must identify the context from which to draw the style and culture to base
design upon. The architect must work with the Royal Commission in Jubail to
identify the contextual model that the new development is to become.
f. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall continue to identify, respond to, and protect
the region’s historically significant resources by complying with the provisions set
forth. This agreement establishes the Standards and guidelines for site work and
alterations within the historic district, including both the interior and exterior
renovation/rehabilitation of the properties identified in the memorandum and any
major projects affecting these structures.
g. Refer to Subsection 5.6.1.H for Land Use Compatibility.
h. Refer to Subsection 1.1.1.B for the National and Regional Framework and
Subsections 1.1.1 C and E for master plans and community plan design.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 35
D. Architectural Concept and Consistency
1. General
a. After the architectural context is defined, the architectural design shall be used to
create harmony within the context using textures, forms, colors, shadow lines, and
both complimentary and contrasting shapes to meld the new design into the existing
locale.
b. All permanent facilities, buildings, components, and systems shall be designed to
keep their structural, operational, aesthetic, and contextual integrity for a minimum of
40 years.
c. Effort shall be made to design structures and elements thereof to be compatible with
their environment and adjoining buildings. Design excellence reinforces and
enhances the urban fabric, scale, and coherence of architectural treatments.
d. Monotony of design in single or multiple building projects shall be avoided.
e. Variation of detail, form, color, texture, and siting shall be used to provide visual
interest.
f. Architectural materials shall be of high caliber. Material and color selection shall
create a harmonious composition. While visual variety and interest is encouraged,
the architect shall be judicious in the number of types of materials, textures, finishes,
and colors used.
g. Design interior spaces in harmony with each other and the exterior.
a. Activity
1) The design shall provide a physical development that encourages and
enhances the importance of movement and fosters an interest using urban
spaces.
2) Internal activity is encouraged by creating interest using attractive detailing and
the provision of a spatially comfortable environment.
3) External activity shall be fostered with adequate consideration of the solar
environment. Spaces with specific purposes and features designed to
encourage social interaction and use of outdoor space are encouraged.
Daytime shading and nighttime lighting are encouraged to promote usability.
b. Community
1) The design shall provide development that produces a sense of pride and
commitment to the awareness of quality of life issues.
2) The design shall create opportunities that invite public use, except where
inappropriate, and sharing of spaces within a complex of structure in order to
encourage personal interaction.
3) The design shall visually “be a good neighbor” to surrounding developments by
favorable juxtaposition of its design components to its neighbors.
4) Refer to for the relevant master plans and district or community guidelines.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 36
c. Harmony
1) The design shall assure that the proposed design is compatible with existing
development and the natural environment in terms of site location, mass,
density, color, form, function, and materials.
d. Livability
1) The design shall provide an environment that is sensitive to natural elements
such as topography, vegetation, light, water, and views.
2) The design shall have features that enhance the quality of life for the users.
e. Maintenance
1) The design shall promote ease of maintenance, operation, and management.
2) This entails choosing materials and surfaces that have low replacement or
refinishing requirements, that weather well, and utilization of forms that allow
ease of access to maintainable areas of components.
3) Design to deliver low maintenance/vandal-resistant interior finishes and
building systems that are commonly available for necessary replacement.
Base the design of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems on simple,
reliable components.
4) Provisions for window cleaning are highly recommended and may be required
for taller buildings at conditions that make accessing windows for cleaning
unsafe, or at the discretion of the RC.
f. View
1) The design shall provide physical development that frames and enhances
desirable vistas and screens undesirable vistas.
g. Design Principles
1) The visual inventory and analysis requires an understanding of basic design
principles. The primary principles are:
(a) Scale
(1) The proportional relationship of a person to their spatial environment.
The scale shall result in a comfortable relationship for the user and
will vary as space, size and activities vary.
(2) Refer to Subsections 5.3.3.B.3 and 5.3.3.E for further discussion of
Scale.
(b) Form
(1) The size and shape of mass. Individual forms shall be designed to
complement one another and the environment.
(2) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.B for Height, Mass, and Scale.
(c) Function
(1) Function is the use of a space or area. Function is gaged by the
degree to which the space works in its intended purpose.
(2) Aspects of design that facilitate function are the size and shape of
the volume of space for each activity; amenities and features within

Rev. 1 5.3 - 37
the space; appropriate connection to other spaces of related function;

access to and from the space; and appropriate degree of light and
air.
(d) Color
(1) All elements of the visual environment have color. The use and
arrangement of colors greatly determine the visual impact of all
elements.
(2) Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.D.5 for additional detail on color.
(e) Texture
(1) All elements of the visual environment have texture. The use and
blending of textures greatly influence the visual environment.
(f) Unity
(1) All elements of the visual environment shall blend to complement one
another. Repetition of scale, form, color, and texture results in a
unified visual impression and a sense of composition to the design.
(g) Framing
(1) Positioning architectural elements in such a way as to direct attention
to views of other elements, spaces, or vistas is referred to as
“framing.” All views typically include a ground plane, side planes, and
overhead plane. These are the primary tools to employ. The
relationship of planes changes as the individual moves through the
environment, which may create opportunities to enhance the user’s
experience of the architecture.
(h) Axis
(1) An axis is a linear progression of space connecting two or more
dominant features. It has a definite planning function in creating
connectivity and organizing architectural elements, but shall also
have an experiential characteristic to persons moving along it or
having their views drawn by it.
(i) Terminus
(1) A terminus is the end of an axis and is typically defined by a dominant
feature such as a building.
(j) Balance
(1) Visual elements are composed to be symmetrical or asymmetrical.
In either case, visual elements shall be sized and located to provide
visual balance.
(k) Economic Issues
(1) The facility shall be sensitive to the cost of materials, building layout,
and operations and maintenance of building systems, yet not
jeopardize aesthetics, function, and environmental impact.
(l) Durability
(1) The facility shall be constructed for a 40-year life. All materials and
systems shall be cost effective and resource efficient.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 38
(m) R- and U-Values

(1) Refer to Section 3.4 for building envelope design requirements.
(n) Safety
(1) Safety for the occupants, users, and maintenance workers must be
considered in all elements of the design. Be aware of the potential
for falls, head clearances, trip hazards, and other dangers.
(2) Consider how lamps will be replaced, drains cleaned, and how other
maintenance needs will be accomplished without undue risk.
3. Aesthetic Requirements of Visual Elements
a. Basic design principles are utilized to define visual elements and assess their
character. The assessment and classification of visual elements follows basic
design principles describing “good” and “not so good” design. Their assessment
becomes the design criteria used to determine the visual character of the
installation. Visual inventory and analysis rely on an understanding of the
installation’s visual elements, and an understanding of the principles of design. The
visual elements for principles of design are described in the following paragraphs.
b. Proposed designs are encouraged to find ways to create Visual Elements to
enhance the urban character and create visual interest and dynamic character.
c. Design is more than the sum of the parts. It is acknowledged that it is possible to
create “not so good” designs with “good” materials and individual features
juxtaposed in awkward or unsightly ways, and it is sometimes possible to create
“good” design compositions with an array of lesser elements. However, the
following visual elements are to be considered.
d. Visual Elements
1) Visual elements of a city or development include a myriad of physical and
environmental impacts. These elements include man-made and natural
features and their inter-relationship. The visual inventory shall include review
and assessment of the following elements of the installation.
(a) Natural Characteristics
(1) Includes the regional and site characteristics that have been
preserved and enhanced. These include topography, natural or man-
made watercourses, and adjacent natural or man-made landscape
features.
(b) Edges and Boundaries
(1) Linear elements such as walls, fences, or a tree line create
separation of use and activities. Streets, rail lines, transit corridors,
edges of adjacent developments, and natural characteristics are
other typical elements that form edges and boundaries.
(c) Buildings and Structures
(1) Typically the most dominant features of a city or development
installation. Their location and design characteristics determine the
primary visual image.
(d) Materials

Rev. 1 5.3 - 39
(1) The Designer shall implement existing provisions of the Royal

Commission in Jubail Construction Standards that address the
selection of materials based upon location, quality, energy efficiency,
life cycle costs, and safety statements.
(2) Material selection is primarily done for visual reasons. Therefore, the
appropriateness of materials is paramount. Color, texture, pattern,
and reflectivity must be considered. The site context may suggest,
dictate, or negate certain choices.
(3) Effort shall be made to design structures and elements thereof to be
compatible with their environment and adjoining buildings. Design
excellence reinforces and enhances the urban fabric, scale, and
coherence of architectural treatments.
(4) A sense of uniformity and standardization of materials, equipment,
hardware, and finishes is desirable.
(5) Material selection shall enhance the overall composition of the
building or complex. Consistency through the application of certain
materials in certain ways is desirable.
(6) Material selection shall minimize life cycle cost of the project, service,
and maintenance.
(7) Materials shall be environmentally sound, in other words have
sustainable attributes such as recycled material content, low volatile
organic compound (VOC) content, and non-hazardous
characteristics when returned to the environment.
(e) Exterior Lighting
(1) Exterior site lighting is an important element of design. Refer to
subsection 5.3.2.F.
(f) Nodes
(1) Centers of activity that attract people on a daily basis.
(2) Nodes may be physical elements, functional foci, or both.
(3) Nodes are concise elements or points in the urban fabric such as a
traffic circle, plaza, or tower.
(4) They may be the focus of elements or activities directed toward them,
or the origin of elements or activities radiating out from them.
(5) A node as a physical element may be a tower or landmark structure
that stands out amidst its context.
(6) A node may also be a “void” such as a traffic circle, green area, or
depression in the urban fabric.
(7) Nodes are typically reinforced by axes or radiating elements such as
boulevards or linear structures of some kind.
(g) Landmarks
(1) Visually or historically prominent features such as towers, statues, or
buildings that provide identity and orientation of place.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 40
(2) Landmarks are universally recognizable buildings or features whose

status is based on monumentality, prominent function, physical
character, or other significant attributes.
(3) Special care must be taken in the design of landmarks to create the
appropriate character and scale.
(4) Acknowledgment of existing landmarks shall be displayed by site and
building designs that enhance and do not diminish or conflict with
their stature.
(h) Entrances and Gates
(1) Provide the first and last impression of the facility. These may also
be elements that consciously or subtly form gateways.
(2) By definition, an “Entrance” is the sense of visual passage through
an element such as a group of buildings or into an area. It implies
that upon “entering,” a place of recognizable character is entered.
(3) Gates or gateways tend to imply the penetration of a boundary or
edge which may lead to access for a larger zone or sense of existing
one. Again, it implies that upon “entering,” a place of recognizable
character is entered.
(i) Circulation System
(1) Vehicular includes streets, service roads, mass transit lines, parking
lots, and driveways. Delivery areas utilize a large amount of space
and create significant visual impact that needs to be screened.
(2) Pedestrian includes sidewalks, walking pathways and bicycle paths.
(3) Circulation elements shall be designed with architectural character to
enhance the experience of movement, and shall not just be a means
to an end to get from place to place.
(4) Lining vehicular circulation with attractive and reinforcing features is
encouraged.
(5) Coupling vehicular and pedestrian circulation must be done with care
from a safety standpoint but the visual strength gained from this
mutual reinforcement is to be encouraged.
(6) Pedestrian circulation as a visual element shall be enhanced with
detail that enriches the experience. Variety in spaces along
circulation, paths, framed views and vistas, places to stop and rest or
gain shade or shelter, features such as water, bridges.
(7) Refer also to Subsection 3.3 Pedestrian Accessibility.
(j) Trees and Other Vegetation
(1) Trees and other vegetation frame views provide visual screens;
provide shade, color, and interest in the environment.
(2) These may also be used to create rest stops and add interest to the
circulation experience.
(3) Street trees soften, complement, and define the road hierarchy, and
improve the overall visual quality of the installation.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 41
(4) The biological needs to facilitate growth of the street trees are light,
access to water, adequate growth material, all of which must be
designed to enable longevity.
(5) Refer to Section 5.11 Landscaping and Irrigation, for additional
requirements.
(k) Views and Vistas
(1) Scenic and attractive views and vistas shall be enhanced.
Unattractive views shall be screened.
(2) Views may be toward natural or man-made features, or both.
(3) Both natural vegetation and man-made walls, edges or other
architectural elements may be used to frame the views and vistas.
(l) Open Spaces
(1) Open space areas create visual impact and serve to separate or join
adjacent uses according to how they are designed.
(2) The character of open spaces is critical to be consciously created.
(i) Plazas are more open and are generally devoid of internal
barriers. This enables larger gatherings to take place there or
large numbers of people to traverse through them. Plazas
typically have a character of monumentality to them.
(ii) Courtyards are smaller spaces designed for fewer people.
These may be “way stations” for respite, zones designed for
contemplation, or simply pleasant smaller spaces.
(iii) Open spaces may be bounded on two or more sides with the
other direction(s) opening to greater vistas and views
(m) Signage
(1) A coordinated installation signage plan, addressing both exterior and
interior signage, shall be developed to facilitate circulation and
provide useful information.
(2) Appropriate directional, safety, and identity signs shall be provided in
all public and industrial facilities.
(3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall implement provisions of RCJ’s
Construction Standards, Exterior Signage, and Interior Signage to
address the needs of both exterior and interior signage respectively.
The RCJ’s existing design review process policy shall continue to be
utilized to facilitate the coordination of exterior and interior graphics
in accordance with Construction Standards.
(4) All signs require approval from the RCJ as to size, material, graphics,
and color. Normally, signs will not be permitted with the exception of
identification signs showing the name and the address of the owner
or occupant of the unit. Exterior signage must comply with the Jubail
Development Code.
(5) Signs shall be clearly visible, contrasting with their immediate
environment and generally follow established international principles.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 42
(6) Signage must meet applicable accessibility standards. See Sections

3.1 and 3.3.
(7) Signs may be both graphic and written, provided graphic signs are
clearly identifiable, simple and stylized.
(8) Arabic is the official language for all public signs and instructions such
as traffic signs, warning signs, and street signs.
(iv) Written signage shall firstly be in the Arabic language, followed
by the English language. The use of any other language shall
be approved by the RCJ prior to implementation.
(v) Arabic shall always be to the right or above English. Arabic
lettering shall be 1.5 times as high as English and the style of
Arabic lettering for all signs shall be in "NASKH" characters.
When appropriate the use of graphics shall be maximized. See
the "Planning Manual" of the RCJ for other details.
(9) Internally lit building identification signs such as corporate logos or
names must be mounted in the top 10% of the height of the building.
The size of such signs is subject also to applicable Codes and
ordinances.
(10) Refer also to Subsection 5.6.2 for information regarding Street and
Roadway Signage.
(11) Refer also to Section 3.2 for Zoning Requirements for Signage.
(12) For highway sign structures, please refer to section 5.2.3.
(n) Utility Corridors
(1) Utilities shall be in corridors.
(vi) Utility corridors are comprised of land designated for the
installation of utility infrastructure that serves one or more
buildings. These “corridors” are typically strips of land that may
be so designated for common use.
(2) Utility corridors shall NOT become visual elements in the landscape
or streetscape.
(vii) Unsightly above ground utilities shall be minimized.
(3) Where it does not inhibit use, tapping, or access, utility corridors may
sometimes be overlaid with pedestrian or vehicular circulation
elements, landscaping, or elements forming axes in their own right,
which happen to have a utility corridor alongside or within them.
4. Building Style and Elevations
a. Each architectural design shall be considered on an individual basis with specific
emphasis on impact and harmony with surrounding buildings and styles. Elevations
that are similar in appearance are prohibited on adjacent lots. Notwithstanding the
above, similar elevations in the same parcel section will be limited to a maximum of
three.
b. Elevation approval shall consist of a review of front, side, and rear elevations. All
elevation treatments shall follow the common architectural design theme of the local
buildings as closely as possible.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 43
c. Design Uniformity
1) Architectural treatments (e.g., building materials, colors, facade design,
rooflines, and screening) shall be consistent and compatible on all sides, i.e.
there shall be no side or portion of the building treated as the “back.” Treatment
that is uniform on all sides will be deemed to meet the requirements of these
principles and criteria.
2) Adjacent land uses, visibility from public streets, and use of screening devices
(walls, fences, berms, landscaping) are criteria to be considered when varying
the treatment on different facades. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors will have
the burden of demonstrating the reasons for differing treatment on different
sides (for example, the need for automobile access on one side and pedestrian
access on another).
d. Designing Shading Systems
1) Sun shading is a critical element in building design. However, explicit
consideration need be given based on the building function, design, and solar
orientation.
(a) South-facing orientations receive sunlight vertically, so horizontal
elements such as fixed overhangs on south-facing glass shall be used to
control direct solar radiation.
(b) East and west-facing orientations receive horizontal solar rays.
Therefore, it is advisable to limit the amount of east and west-facing
glass since it is harder to shade than south-facing glass. Vertical
building elements or site features such as the use of landscaping may be
used to shade east and west exposures. West exposures typically have
stronger solar gain than east-facing exposures.
(c) North-facing glass may be used for natural daylighting since this
orientation receives much less direct solar gain.
(d) Consider ways to shade the roof even if there are no skylights since the
roof is a major source of transmitted solar gain into the building.
(e) Study the sun angles for proposed designs. Use these in determining
basic building orientation, as well as selecting shading devices,
photovoltaic panels, or solar collectors.
2) For shading systems for most buildings in this solar environment, the following
design recommendations generally hold true:
(a) Light shelves bounce natural light deeply into a room through high
windows while shading lower windows.
(b) Indirect radiation shall be controlled by other measures, such as the
choice of glass.
(c) Do not expect interior window shading devices such as blinds or vertical
louvers to reduce cooling loads since the solar gain has already been
admitted into the space.
(d) Interior window shading devices do offer glare control and may
contribute to visual acuity and visual comfort.
(e) Consider operable of electronically controlled shading devices where
feasible.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 44
(f) In most regularly occupied spaces, shading control devices and/or

window treatment is required.
5. Color
a. General Requirements
1) Colors used on the project shall be in accordance with the overall project
scheme and the local context and shall be subject to project approval prior to
use on the project.
2) Color schemes developed as part of systems for the protection of health, safety
and welfare shall be coordinated with the overall color scheme in order to
maintain project continuity and maximum aesthetic impact.
3) Identify all colors by RAL number no later than the 90% submission. Submit
samples of all proposed colors.
b. The guidelines for the color and texture of new and renovated or expanded facilities
have been established to provide continuity between the new and existing facilities.
In addition to providing aesthetic harmony in the appearance, this approach allows
more cost-efficient maintenance of all facilities.
1) Exception to this requirement shall be piping corridors shared by the Industries
in the Industrial Area, on the Causeway and in the Port Area.
c. Fair-Face Concrete Color Finish
1) Natural gray color finish for the fair-face concrete shall not be used for exterior
facades of buildings. Some examples of systems, which may be considered,
are as follows:
(a) Use of low-volatile organic compound (VOC) Spray Paint.
(b) Use of white cement per ASTM C150, Type V.
(c) Use of color pigments like titanium dioxide, zirconium orthosilicate, cobalt
oxide, etc.
(d) Combination of white cement and color pigments like natural yellow iron
oxides, nickel titanate yellow, natural brown iron oxides, etc.
(e) Plaster in colors other than gray.
2) A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall submit their proposed system for the RCJ
approval.
E. Human Scale
1. Scale
a. The proportional relationship of a person to their spatial environment. The scale
shall result in a comfortable relationship of the user and will vary as space, size and
activities vary.
b. Multiple scales may coexist together creating drama and harmony at the same time.
The scales that all have a place in the built environment include monumental scale,
human scale, and micro scale.
c. Typically, monumental scale is for public spaces, human scale is for private people
spaces, and micro scale is for fine details of parts and pieces.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 45
2. Human Scale
a. Human scale is designed to enable personal physical interaction with the built
environment based on physical dimensions of one’s surroundings. It may be the
creation of “personal space” which implies a sense of ownership, an intimately sized
environment that implies a sense of shelter, or simply a space whose elements are
proportionate to the human body.
b. What differentiates human scale from monumental or micro scales is the detail in
building components. Human scale components fit the human hand, foot, stride,
reach, visual acuity, and mental comprehension. Human scale creates places for
people.
c. Building components scaled to the human physical capabilities include stairs, ramps,
railings, doors, seating, work surfaces, finish patterns, ceiling heights, building
component modules, distances, heights, mass and many other features that fit the
human eye and perception of comfort and ease.
d. Human scale may exist in the entirety of a building such as a single-family
residence, or as a component of a larger monumental structure such as an office
building, apartment building or a shopping mall.
e. Human scale is also a sensory quality that reflects comfort in the built environment
such as acoustic comfort, pleasing sightlines, lighting levels that deliver visual, and
temperature comfort, finishes that are pleasing to the touch and to the eye and
spatial qualities that put the mind in a safe and comfortable state.
F. Life Safety Requirements
1. All facilities shall comply with the building codes listed in Section 3.1, “Codes and
Performance Standards.”
2. There are no exceptions to following all aspects of the adopted building codes and their
referenced standards. Life Safety is the paramount consideration in all aspects of design
on all projects. All components of the code apply equally. The building codes establish
the minimum level required; good design may often exceed the code requirements.
3. The building code requires certain aspects of compliance be indicated on the Contract
Documents. In addition to those requirements, RCJ requires additional life safety
analysis to be on the Contract Documents. Provide the specific code reference for each
area of compliance. For example, under Classification of Occupancy and Hazard,
Business Group B, the source is SBC 2018 Section 201 2.4. The following items must be
included on the Contract Documents (and not in the Basis of Design).
a. Applicable Master Plan, Zoning and / Or District Guidelines
1) Identify the applicable Master Plan
2) List any applicable zoning / district guidelines
3) List any applicable special guidelines such as mosque, fuel stations, etc.
4) List any special site provisions such as variances, easements, LAR’s.
b. Applicable site development regulations
1) For each regulation, identify what the code allows or requires, and what is
proposed.
(a) Lot coverage

Rev. 1 5.3 - 46
(b) Density / FAR (Floor Area Ratio)

(c) Setbacks at front, side, and rear.
(d) Landscaping (ground cover, trees, etc.)
(e) Open space
(f) Parking
(g) Accessible parking
(h) All other items affecting the design.
c. Identify the applicable Building Code(s).
d. Classification of Occupancy Group and Hazard
1) Identify the primary occupancy of the building and secondary occupancies for
spaces within the building per floor.
2) Identify whether an occupancy is considered an accessory occupancy.
3) Identify occupancy separation requirements and the design resolution.
e. Type of Construction
1) Construction Classification
(a) Type of construction
(b) Material combustibility
2) Fire resistance rating requirements for building elements as indicated in the
code.
f. Building Heights and Areas. Provide applicable calculations.
1) Construction type
2) Allowable height and number of stories
3) Allowable height and story increases
4) Total height and stories allowed
5) Proposed height and number of stories
6) Allowable area per floor
7) Allowable area increases
8) Proposed area
g. Fire and smoke protection requirements and measures
1) In general, it is preferred that buildings be equipped throughout with automatic
fire suppression systems. There needs to be clear and concise reasoning to
not have an automatic fire suppression system.
2) Clearly indicate whether the building is equipped with an automatic fire sprinkler
system throughout, as defined by the code. Indicate the fire suppression
system requirements and how the requirements are fulfilled. Include the
following supporting information:
(a) Occupancies

Rev. 1 5.3 - 47
(b) Fire area(s) (sq. meters)

(c) Fire suppression system(s) (e.g. sprinkler, fire extinguisher)
(d) Applicable code references
h. Interior Finish Requirements
1) Floor or space in building
2) Occupancy classification(s)
i. Provide a table showing what each class requires for flame spread and smoke
developed.
j. Exit Access Design:
1) For each space and floor, indicate the floor areas, occupancy load factors,
calculated occupant loads, actual occupant load (if higher than the calculated
load), the number of exits required, the number of exits provided, the clear exit
width required, the clear exit width provided, the exit separation distance
required, and the exit separate provided.
2) For each stairway, indicate the calculated egress load, the required calculated
width, required minimum width, the actual width, the actual egress capacity.
3) For each door on the egress path, indicate the calculated accumulated egress
load, the required calculated width, required minimum width, the actual width,
the actual egress capacity.
4) Maximum travel distances for each occupancy group.
5) Maximum dead ends for each occupancy group.
6) Maximum common path of egress per occupancy group.
7) Note that the building code prohibits locating ducts, pipes, conduits, raceways,
and other devices in an egress stairway unless it serves that stair exclusively.
k. Specific occupancy egress requirements
1) Assembly occupancies have additional requirements related to travel distance,
common paths of egress travel, and aisle widths.
l. Areas of refuge calculations
1) List the code requirement
m. Sound Isolation Requirements
1) Identify minimum requirements.
2) See also GEM 5.3.3 G and Table 5.3.3.A: SOUND TRANSMISSION
LIMITATIONS
n. Energy Efficiency – Building Envelope Summary
1) Glazing area % of floor
2) Building element (e.g. roof, wall, mass wall, well below grade, floor, etc.)
3) Assembly/system maximum U-value
4) Insulation minimum R-Value
5) Assembly R-value or U-value

Rev. 1 5.3 - 48
6) Note: U and R-values are to be based on the Saudi Building Code and IECC
Requirements.
o. Plumbing Fixture Requirements: Show calculations for each floor:
1) Occupancy group
2) Number of occupants
3) Water closets required/provided
4) Lavatories required/provided.
5) Showers required/provided.
6) Drinking fountain required/provided
7) Service sinks required/provided.
8) Other fixtures(e.g. bidets, laundry sinks)
9) Indicate how many of each item is required to be accessible and how many are
provided.
p. Always provide drinking fountains in “hi/lo” pairs, and located in alcoves to avoid
projecting into corridors.
G. Building Entrances
1. Natural Access Control

a. The normal users of the space shall be made to feel welcome and secure, while
discouraging the entry of undesirable users. Access to the site, parking areas, and
accompanying structures shall be well defined and incorporate a celebration of a
sense of arrival.
b. The main entrance to a site, parking area, or structure shall be sufficiently sized to
accommodate the normally expected ingress and egress demands. Supplemental
entry and exit ways shall be securable or have the ability to be closed off.
c. All buildings shall have a minimum of two entrance/exit points.
2. Entry Signage
a. Signage size, type, and lighting must conform to applicable codes and ordinances.
b. Identity signs for public buildings shall be located at eye level on the entrance door
or on the wall adjacent to it, or as required by accessibility requirements.
c. Accessible signage shall meet applicable code requirements for braille, pictorial
icons, and graphics. See Section 3.3 Accessibility.
d. Signage and natural barriers shall inform normal users of the space of appropriate
directions and the rules pertaining to the areas, while eliminating excuses for the
abnormal user’s unacceptable behavior.
e. Flashing, animated, and electronic signs with moving graphics, and motionless
digital flat-screen signs, require special approval.
3. Orientation
a. Whenever possible, use passive strategies, such as utilizing shade to minimize heat
gain, radiation, and glare or positioning a building entrance to take advantage of

Rev. 1 5.3 - 49
existing topography or opportunities for natural ventilation afforded by prevailing

winds.
b. Structures shall be oriented to take advantage of such conditions, and excessively
glazed surfaces, particularly when un-shaded or directly facing toward the sun, shall
be avoided.
c. Seasonal wind rises, showing a predominance of west-north-west to north-north-
west winds both in frequency and velocities as referred to in the Environmental
Chapter shall also be consulted when orienting facility entrances.
d. Properly designed exterior sun control devices for entry vestibules and other
openings are strongly encouraged. A study of their optimum shape in relation to the
sun, as well as their initial economic impact, and maintenance costs as related to
HVAC equipment and operation costs, shall be made. Such devices shall have low
heat absorptive qualities and minimal contact with the building surfaces to which
they are attached.
4. Design
a. A building entrance provides the first impression and the last impression of the
building, the operations taking place in the building and the people working or living
there. This first and last impression is essential to the success of a building design.
b. The building entrance shall be very obvious, well lighted, and inviting to all visitors,
users, and residents.
c. The Scale of the entrance needs to respond to the human scale of the users versus
monumental scale for larger buildings.
d. Materials shall be appropriate to the local land and building scape of the region,
neighborhood, or individual streets.
5. Emergency and Fire Department Access.
a. Entrances and entrance canopies, porte-cocheres, and marquees must be designed
to allow unfettered emergency vehicle access. Height and width of these elements
must allow passage of emergency vehicles. The space between the closest access
point of an emergency vehicle and the doorway must be clear and capable of
enabling emergency personnel to transport gurneys smoothly.
b. Fire department access must be provided in accordance with the building code.
This includes providing sufficient vehicle access through perimeter wall openings,
and between perimeter walls and buildings.
c. Both the local emergency response team and fire departments must be contacted to
verify requirements and approve building configurations at access points.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.3.3.F.9 for architectural Security System information. Refer to
Section 5.5 for electrical information regarding Safety and Security Systems.
e. Refer to Section 5.4 for information regarding Fire Department Connections.
f. Fire department connections shall be clearly indicated on architectural plans and
elevations, and be located to provide ready access and connection by fire
department personnel.
g. A fire alarm annunciation panel shall be located in the main entry vestibule to
provide information to firefighters before they enter the building.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 50
6. Sand Control
a. The prevention of sand and dust infiltration is essential throughout the design of a
facility entrance. Blowing dust particles tend to infiltrate through minute cracks,
joints, and openings. The accumulation of sand and its harmful abrasive effects
must be countered. Joints and connections shall be designed to prevent dust and
sand infiltration.
b. High quality weather-stripping, gaskets and tight connections and tolerances shall
be provided for. Materials resistant to sand abrasion, sand blasting effect during
heavy sandstorms and high saline content in sand shall be specified.
c. All main entrances and all other entrances to public buildings, which are frequently
used except emergency exits, shall have vestibules with adequately separated
doors to check sand accumulation. Tight weather-stripping all around all doors,
windows, roll-up doors, sliding doors and other industrial doors shall be installed.
d. Inner and outer doors located in sequence that are on automatic operators or motion
sensors shall be timed to minimize the time both sets of doors are open
simultaneously. At heavy-use entrances in areas of high winds, automatic sliding
doors shall be used.
e. Mechanical intake and exhaust louvers and grilles shall be protected or placed in
such a way as to minimize the negative effects of wind and sand.
7. Door Hardware
a. Door hardware for main entrances and monumental entrances shall be
commensurate with the character of the building.
b. Exterior door hardware shall be chosen for its ability to operate in a dusty
environment, therefore dustproof keyways shall be provided. All doors shall be
provided with appropriate hardware including hinges or pivots, locksets or latch sets,
closers, door stops, weather-stripping, kick plates, push-pull plates, flush or surface
bolts, coordinators and roller latches.
c. Hardware for each door shall be set-up in "Hardware Sets" and the sets shall be
included in the appropriate specification. Each Hardware Set shall identify every
item of hardware required for the particular door.
1) In all buildings, latch sets and locksets shall feature lever operators instead of
knobs for accessibility. Knobs are prohibited.
2) All knuckle-type hinges shall be of the 5-knuckle design and all out swinging
exterior doors shall have hinges with non-removable pins. All doors up to a
height of 2150 mm shall be provided with 1½ pair (3) hinges, and 2 pair (4)
hinges shall be provided for doors whose height is in excess of 2150 mm up to
a height of 2700 mm.
3) Offset pivot hinges and bi-parting automatic doors are allowable. Bi-parting
doors must provide emergency egress in full compliance with the building code.
4) Roton geared continuous hinges shall be utilized in all kindergarten and
elementary school buildings and other locations where large numbers of
children are expected to use the facility. Use of these hinges is encouraged at
other high-volume swing door locations.
5) Auto-operators are encouraged for main entrances, subject to Subsection 5.3.3
F.6 – Sand Control.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 51
6) Mortise type locksets are preferred for exterior doors with cylinders having a
minimum of 6 pins.
d. Mechanical or electrified automatic closers are required for all exterior doors. Closer
tension is subject to accessibility requirements.
e. Hardware using any plastic components is unacceptable. All hardware shall be low
maintenance, rugged, and of durable materials. Hardware that may be exposed to
excessive humidity and all exterior hardware shall be corrosion resistive.
f. Hardware groups shall be listed for each door. Each group shall include all items for
that opening. Hardware is anything associated with a door and frame related to its
operation, including hold-opens, wall bumpers, mop plates, closers, etc.
8. Security Systems
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are expected to consider security as part of the
project design process. The designer’s approach shall be holistic and consider
security risks that may affect the project and mitigation strategies to accommodate
those risks.
b. An access control system is required at telecom equipment room entrances.
c. A security service company approved by the RCJ shall install an electronic security
access control system at required building entrances. The RCJ shall specify which
entrances are required to have access control, set the minimum system capabilities,
and approve the design and installation of each system. Each system shall be
placed in service upon completion of the building.
d. Where required by the RCJ, 24-hour CCTV surveillance is to be provided at building
entrances, parking garages, and parking lots that are included in the arrival and
departure sequence to and from the building, and elsewhere as deemed desirable.
e. Lighting shall be uniform, consistent, and contain overlapping zones of coverage to
avoid any dark or shadowed areas that could conceal a possible threat. Lighting
levels shall coordinate with security camera capabilities. Lighting shall comply with
LEED light pollution requirements.
f. The designer shall consider on a project-by-project basis the physical security
measures to plan for, protect from, and prevent security threats by the physical
design in place. Physical security measures to be considered shall include but are
not limited to:
1) Maintaining appropriate distances from a security risk or blast potential
2) Lines of sight
3) Barrier design (bollards, berms, vehicular access prevention, etc.)
4) Sally ports
5) Blast resistance
6) Envelope hardening strategies
7) Opening protection
g. Security, Safety, and Fire Protection Strategy and Approvals:
1) The High Commission for Industrial Security (HCIS), part of the Ministry of the
Interior, is the Authority Having Jurisdiction responsible for the development
and implementation of security, safety, and fire protection strategies kingdom-

Rev. 1 5.3 - 52
wide. Industrial projects and other select building development projects are to
be submitted to the HCIS by the Owner for review and approval. Refer to
Section 3.1 Codes and Performance Standards.
2) For ballistic protection, the following test protocols and information may be
used:
(a) GSA Test Protocol: GSA-TS01-2003
(b) Ratings of bullet resistant materials per UL 752, ASTM F-1233, or BS
5051
H. Acoustic Design Requirements
1. General
a. All normally occupied spaces in buildings and facilities shall be designed to provide
acoustically isolated environments in relation to exterior noise, from adjacent interior
spaces, and exterior influences.
b. All normally occupied spaces shall also be designed to enhance acoustics within the
space in order to promote better communication and privacy of speech. Background
noise, such as HVAC and plumbing noise is to be minimized. Control reverberation
in spaces by use of appropriate sound-reflecting and sound-absorbing materials.
Spaces must have sound absorbing material; rooms where all surfaces are reflective
(floors, ceilings, and walls) are not acceptable
c. Placement of significant spaces shall be strategically planned during the
development of the project’s site plan and floor plans to avoid having to take
extraordinary measures to sound isolate a space.
2. Acoustically Sensitive Spaces
a. All acoustically sensitive spaces such as mosques, school music rooms, sound
studios, laboratories, concert halls, and auditoriums shall be designed with the aid of
qualified acoustical consulting firms.
b. Spaces with high levels of sound control requirements such as classrooms,
conference rooms, offices, sleeping rooms, audiology testing rooms, laboratories,
and special healthcare spaces shall be designed by the architect or engineer to
achieve the required sound isolation.
c. Indoor locations containing generators or other noise-generating equipment shall be
designed to reduce and/or prevent transmission of the equipment noise to the
adjacent spaces. The level of sound attenuation is dependent on the criticality of the
adjacent spaces. The designer shall define mitigation strategies for high frequency
and low frequency transmission.
3. Sound Control Devices
a. Exterior spaces shall strive to control sound created within them by using strategies
that include planting materials, non-paved areas and the use of sound absorbent
materials.
b. Interior spaces shall strive to prevent sound generation within the space and absorb
the sound generated that may not be avoided by using sound absorbing materials
such as planting materials, carpeting, draperies, acoustic ceiling systems, and fabric
covered furnishings.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 53
c. Particular care shall be taken to minimize noise from air distribution devices; air
velocities must be low enough to not create unnecessary background noise.
4. Demolition and Construction Activities
a. Demolition and new construction activities shall seek to minimize the amount of
construction noise generated. Work restrictions on items such as time frame for
certain work activities, tool usage, and equipment operation, as imposed by
applicable ordinances and laws, shall be strictly adhered to. Designs must reflect
such restrictions.
5. Sound Transmission Limitations
a. Mechanical equipment shall be located and installed to minimize transmission of
objectionable sound to the surrounding area. Sound Transmission Class (STC)
shall be determined with ASTM E90 and E413 Standards.
b. Mechanical equipment shall be placed on sound and vibration isolators to mitigate
structure borne vibration and noise being transferred from one space to another.
c. Ductwork shall be wrapped with sound attenuation/thermal insulation to control
airborne ductwork noise and expansion and contraction noise.
d. Keep airflow rates low to minimize noise, especially in classrooms, offices,
conference rooms, and sleeping rooms.
e. Acoustic baffles and equipment screens may be required per Subsection 5.3.3.J.
f. Mechanical equipment shall be commissioned by a certified commissioning agent
before Owner acceptance to assure that equipment is operating properly, efficiently
and quietly. Regular maintenance is required to assure that the commissioned
operating levels are maintained.
Refer to Table 5.3.3.A below for additional sound transmission limitations
between important spaces defined as “Sound Transmission Class” (STC).
(Continue to next page)

Rev. 1 5.3 - 54
TABLE 5.3.3.A: SOUND TRANSMISSION LIMITATIONS
Minimum Sound
Separation between: Isolation
Requirement
Room Adjacent Area (STC)
Bedroom, bathroom of separate
Bedroom occupancy, living room, kitchen, 47
Dwelling Units corridors, public spaces.
Except Private
Residence Mechanical equipment room,
Bedroom high noise public and service 52
spaces
Executive Areas, Private offices, corridors, lobby,

Office 47
Doctor’s Suites, toilets, kitchens, dining areas.
Confidential Privacy General offices, exterior of
Requirements Office 42
building
Private offices, general offices,

Normal Office Office corridors, lobby, exterior of 37
Areas, Normal building
Privacy Conference rooms, offices,
Requirements Conference General office areas, corridors, 42
lobbies
Classrooms, corridors, public

Classroom 42
Normal School areas, exterior of building
Buildings Shops, recreational areas, music
Classroom 47
rooms, drama areas
Similar areas, recreational areas,

Theaters, mechanical, equipment rooms,
52
Performing Arts Concert Halls shops, toilet rooms, exterior of
Buildings and buildings
Theaters Public spaces, classrooms,
Theaters,
laboratories, arts and Concert 47
Lecture Halls
Halls, areas
I. Rooftop Equipment
1. Rooftop Equipment Screening: Rooftop equipment shall be screened from view from the
ground near the building. A variety of strategies may be employed to meet this screening
requirement.
a. Vertical extensions of the building walls may be used as a device for screening
rooftop equipment if it fits within the context of the design and does not result in a
large cost increase to the structure. Wall extensions shall be reviewed with a
structural engineer who will prepare a lateral force analysis to determine the lateral
bracing required to adequately handle local wind loads. Protection from sand is also
a major consideration.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 55
b. Parapet walls may be extended to provide screening of rooftop equipment. A

structural engineer shall review and prepare a lateral force analysis and determine
the required lateral bracing to adequately handle local wind loads on all parapets.
Parapet walls are also subject to building code requirements related to fire-rating of
structural elements and fire-separation requirements at adjacent buildings.
c. Architectural design features using the same family of materials as on the exterior
walls of the building shall be used to screen rooftop equipment if they fit within the
context of the design.
d. Locate rooftop equipment in a roofed penthouse when possible to avoid the need for
screening and noise control.
e. Screening materials with acoustical properties shall be considered for use when
detailing screen walls to also absorb equipment noise at the source. The Royal
Commission in Jubail reserves the right to require acoustic enclosures at its sole
discretion.
2. Design, selection, and location of rooftop equipment
a. Every effort shall be made to locate rooftop equipment as close as possible to the
center of the roof to reduce the viewing angles from adjacent properties. The
location of equipment shall be balanced to not create undue structural loading,
particularly at mid-spans.
b. Careful design and selection of rooftop equipment shall be made to select the lowest
profile equipment available that may be used to allow screening height to be
minimized.
c. Where required by code or as otherwise directed, a stair tower shall provide direct
access to the roof level. Where a stair tower does not provide roof access, a ladder
and roof hatch shall be provided. Where a roof hatch is not feasible, and exterior
ladder shall be provided. Access to all roof levels is required. Ladders shall provide
a safe means of moving over the top of parapets. Parapets shall not be “notched” to
provide access.
d. Exterior elevations and building sections shall show visible rooftop equipment and
screens.
3. Extent of screening
a. Where topography permits, it is desirable to screen rooftop equipment from adjacent
properties, but it is not the intent of this requirement to increase the height of the
screening significantly above that of the equipment in order to screen it from view
from high-rise buildings or from higher ground.
b. Screening of rooftop equipment shall extend minimally 150 mm above the highest
element on the equipment. The highest element is defined to include piping,
ductwork, and all other elements serving the piece of equipment.
c. Screening shall occur on all sides of all rooftop items.
d. Items that need not be screened include:
1) Plumbing vent pipes,
2) Exhaust fans less than 650mm tall,
3) Satellite dishes less than 650mm in diameter, whose tops are less than
1000mm off the roof.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 56
4. Satellite Dishes
a. Size and height requirements
1) The maximum permissible size for rooftop satellite dishes is 1,100mm in
diameter.
2) The top of the dish may be no more than 1,250mm above the roof surface at
the satellite dish location.
b. Large satellite dishes shall be set in toward the center of the roof, screened behind
larger building forms, or located within roof screens where possible. All building-
mounted satellite dishes shall be located and designed as follows:
1) Roof-mounted satellite dishes less than 650mm in diameter shall be located no
closer than 2m to the nearest edge of the roof, unless screened by a parapet
or other building element meeting the requirements of Subsection 5.3.3.I.3.b.
2) Roof-mounted satellite dishes greater than 650mm in diameter shall be located
no closer than 5m to the nearest edge of the roof.
3) Wall-mounted satellite dishes of any size are prohibited unless a special
exception is applied for and granted by the RCJ.
4) All obsolete or unused satellite dishes shall be removed within sixty (60) days
of cessation of use.
5. Antennae
a. Antennae include radio, television, cellular phone, and telecommunications
antennas, and their complete support structures.
b. All building-mounted telecommunications antennas shall be located and designed as
follows:
1) Roof-mounted antennas shall be located no closer than 2m to the nearest edge
of the roof;
2) Wall-mounted antennas are prohibited unless a special exception is applied for
and granted by the RCJ.
c. No antenna located in a Residential District shall exceed 5m in height.
d. No antenna located in any other District shall exceed 10m in height.
e. All obsolete or unused antennas shall be removed within 60 days of cessation of
use.
J. Electrical Rooms and Telecommunication Rooms
1. Room Sizing
a. Electrical Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all electrical equipment
and provide all code required clearances and egress routes. See SBC 401.
b. Telecom Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all equipment and
provide all code required clearances including entrance facilities. The room shall
have adequate space for cable vaults, isolated racks, and cabinets not dedicated to
telecommunications.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 57
2. Stacking
a. Electrical and Telecommunication Rooms shall be stacked (aligned vertically from
floor to floor) to facilitate vertical distribution of feeders where possible.
3. Access
a. Electrical Rooms shall be designed to restrict access to only authorized personnel
experienced with operation and maintenance of electrical equipment.
b. Electrical Rooms shall be located and arranged to facilitate installation and
replacement of equipment. The doors and removal path shall accommodate the
largest electrical equipment items.
c. Telecom Rooms shall be designed to restrict access to only authorized personnel
experienced with operation and maintenance of telecom equipment. Card access is
preferred when available.
d. Telecom Rooms shall be located and arranged to facilitate installation and
replacement of equipment. The doors and removal path shall accommodate the
largest Telecom equipment items. The doors are to swing outward 175 degrees.
4. Life Safety
a. For Electrical Rooms containing equipment rated 1200 amperes or more, the means
of egress shall swing in the direction of the egress from the room and shall not
require the operation of keys, operable latches, or other mechanisms to exit the
space, but shall employ “Panic Hardware” or similar devices.
5. Fire Protection
a. For Electrical and Telecommunication Rooms in sprinklered buildings, use a clean
(dry) agent system or “pre-action” sprinkler in compliance with NFPA 13 or as
otherwise directed by the RCJ.
b. Electrical and Telecommunication Rooms shall be enclosed within not less than two-
hour fire-rated assemblies (vertical and horizontal). Note that this RC requirement is
usually more than what is required by the code.
c. Penetrations of fire-rated assemblies (horizontal and vertical) shall not jeopardize
the fire-rating. All penetrations must be sealed with an approved, tested fire sealant
assembly in accordance with applicable code requirements. This applies to all
conduit, cable trays, and any other pathway through the assembly.
K. Mechanical Rooms and Mezzanines
1. Mechanical Room shall be adequately sized to accommodate all equipment and provide
all code required clearances. See SBC 501.
2. Access
a. Mechanical Rooms shall be designed to restrict access to only authorized personnel
experienced with operation and maintenance of electrical equipment.
b. Mechanical Rooms shall be located and arranged to facilitate replacement of
equipment. The doors and removal path shall accommodate the largest installed
equipment items. Space must be provided for the removal of coils from air handling
units and tube bundles from chillers.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 58
c. Unless otherwise directed, all equipment mezzanines shall have access by means
of a stair or ladder.
3. Provide noise and vibration abatement as required to mitigate noise transmission to
building occupants. Vibration control, sound absorption, acoustic baffles, and other
devices may be necessary.
L. Restrooms
1. Restroom Room Sizing

a. Restrooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all fixtures and partition doors
to fixtures and provide all code required clearances. Care is to be taken to provide
adequate visual screening at restroom entries. Be prepared to provide line-of-site
analysis to RC reviewers.
2. Restrooms shall be stacked (aligned vertically from floor to floor) to facilitate vertical
distribution of sanitary sewer where possible.
3. Restrooms shall be located to provide convenient access for all users and meet code
requirements.
4. There shall be at least two toilet facilities on each floor.
5. Janitor Closets shall not be inside a restroom. Janitor closets shall be adequately sized
to provide storage for carts, mop buckets, brooms, mops, and janitorial supplies.
(Continue to next page.)

Rev. 1 5.3 - 59
SUBSECTION 5.3.4 BUILDING COMPONENTS
5.3.4 BUILDING COMPONENTS
A. General
1. The Design Guidelines below are intended to be general in nature. The purpose of these
guidelines is to provide the A/E and/or EPC Contractor with the requirements of the RCJ
for specific building components. These guidelines are not intended to provide design
usage or specifications but rather to indicate additional information, provisions, and
considerations for each building component. The building components are separated
into the following categories:
a. Unit Masonry
b. Stone
c. Metals
d. Wood, Plastics and Composites
e. Thermal and Moisture Protection
f. Openings
g. Finishes
h. Specialties
i. Equipment
j. Furnishings
k. Conveying Systems
l. Special Construction
2. Each of these categories is broken down further into sub-categories for specific building
components. If the A/E and/or EPC Contractor retained is asked to use a building
component the type of which is not contained in this Section, he must then request
specific guidelines from RCJ prior to commencing the work.
3. Quality of Material
a. The Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO), the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and the American
Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) are recognized as the industry standards for
establishing the performance requirements for various building materials.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the quality of design and relationship
and compatibility to other building materials in the immediate neighborhood for each
building component. Durability of materials takes precedence over matching
existing material.
4. References: The information in this Section coordinates and applies to use of the
Guiding Procurement and Construction Specifications (GPCS) and Typical Construction
Detail Drawings (TCDD):
B. Precast Concrete
1. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize and document all of the following provisions
in the drawings and specifications that apply to each project in the 90% submission, or as
otherwise indicated. The specifications must clearly identify the concrete type(s) to be
used, the finishes and colors required, requirements for attachments, and other
accessories.
a. Repetition:
1) The economy of using precast concrete comes from using the same mold or form
as many times as possible. Therefore, the number of different panels must be

Rev. 1 5.3 - 60
minimized; economies are realized by repetition. Designs that do not meet this
basic criterion will be rejected.
2) Repetition and the limited ability to vary the color can lead to monotonous
designs. Exercise care and creativity to create interesting and well-scaled
designs.
b. Panel Size:
1) Do not design panels that are too large to be easily transported to the project
site.
2) Precast panels can become too large and the building design can lose human
scale. Details must overcome such scale issues.
c. Color and Texture:
1) Plain, ordinary, smooth-finish concrete panels are highly discouraged, and
require written approval of the Architecture Chief to be used. Such use is limited
to use in extraordinary designs and as components of such designs.
2) Color must be integral to the concrete; applied coatings have limited lifespans
and fade more quickly. Care is to be exercised in selecting colors, and working
with precasters to be sure color variance between panels can be minimized.
Always specify adequate samples and mock-ups commensurate with the scale
and prominence of the project.
3) Textures are important in creating aesthetically pleasing precast concrete. The
use of textures to create interest and variety is recommended. Work with
precasters to determine whether selected textures can be consistently produced
for the project.
C. Unit Masonry
1. Concrete Unit Masonry (CMU)
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize and document all of the following
provisions in the drawings and specifications that apply to each project in the 90%
submission. The specifications must clearly identify the masonry to be used, the
finishes required, requirements for attachments, and other accessories.
1) All visible masonry shall be void of any defects, blemishes, or discolorations.
2) Coordinate the design of all masonry with a structural engineer.
3) Select materials and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the environment,
including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content in the air, and
sandstorms.
4) When utilizing masonry, horizontal and vertical dimensions of all building
elements, such as windows, doors, and walls shall be designed with
consideration to the modular masonry size wherever possible. This helps
maintain aesthetics and decrease labor and material costs.
5) Mortar joints, control joints, and relief angles shall be considered during the
design process and integrated in the aesthetic of the building. All joints are to be
shown in the contract drawings. Relief angle locations must be clear, and details
developed for each condition.
6) Consideration for ease of maintenance shall be given for all exposed masonry.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 61
7) Utilize air space, weeps, and vents to achieve proper airflow in masonry cavity
wall systems. An air space of 25mm is required between the exterior masonry
and the insulation.
8) Design consideration shall be given to the top, bottom and side terminations,
flashing, penetrations, vertical and horizontal transitions, and cladding/roofing
interface.
9) In general, CMU partitions shall be of 200mm thick units. 150mm units are to be
avoided. Use of 100mm units is to be limited to walls less than 2m long, such as
shower and toilet stalls.
10) Solid units are prohibited without written approval of the RC Chief Architect.
11) CMU is to be two-cell construction to allow for adequate reinforcing and grouting.
12) Indicate masonry expansion (control) joints as recommended by the Masonry
Institute.
13) In general, partitions extend to the structure above.
(a) Provide details for CMU interfaces with structure above that allow not
less than 25mm of vertical movement.
(b) These joints must not be grouted solid, but rather be loosely filled with
mineral fiber insulation. At fire-rated partitions, the joint shall incorporate
a UL-listed test fire-rated protective.
(c) The detail shall include a means of laterally bracing the partition. This is
typically pieces of steel angles on both sides of the partition, attached to
the structure above, allowing free vertical movement.
(d) Unless detailed otherwise in the structural drawings, the top full course of
masonry is to be a reinforced, grouted bond beam.
(e) Exposed corners are to be 25mm radius bullnose.
14) Regardless of structural design, the minimum CMU reinforcing in all partitions is
#12 vertical bars at 1230mm on center in grouted cells, and galvanized ladder-
type joint reinforcing every 420mm vertically.
15) In general, maximum CMU wall height for exterior non-load bearing is 18 times
the width of the masonry (18 x 200mm = 3,600mm) without additional
reinforcement.
2. Clay Unit Masonry
a. In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
comply with the following in the design of Clay Unit Masonry:
1) Selection of clay masonry over concrete masonry shall be considered based on
their cost, availability, thermal performance, moisture absorption, strength, and
durability required for the application.
2) Utilize clay masonry in areas that will be exposed to excessive temperatures,
such as a fireplace.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 62
D. Stone
1. Exterior Stone Cladding
submission. The specifications must clearly identify the stone to be used, the
finishes required, requirements for attachments, and other accessories.
1) All visible stone shall be void of any defects, blemishes, or discolorations beyond
the normal natural range.
2) Select materials and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the environment
including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content in the air and
sandstorms.
3) When utilizing stone, horizontal and vertical dimensions of all building elements,
such as windows, doors, and walls shall be designed with consideration to the
modular stone size wherever possible. This will help maintain aesthetics and
decrease labor and material costs.
4) Mortar joints, control joints, and relief angles shall be considered during the
design process and integrated in the aesthetic of the building.
5) For exterior installations, thermal expansion and contraction of the material will
generally preclude the use of grouted joints; the stone cladding is to be designed
as a rain screen. Utilize air space, weeps, and vents to achieve proper airflow in
rain screen and cavity wall systems.
6) Consideration for ease of maintenance shall be given for all exposed stone.
7) Give design consideration to the top, bottom, and side terminations, flashing,
penetrations, vertical and horizontal transitions, and cladding/roofing interface.
Stone cladded soffits at entry/exit ways are not permitted.
b. Attachment Methods
1) In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall
comply with the following in the design of attachment methods:
(a) Coordinate the support of all exterior stone cladding with a structural
engineer.
(b) Coordinate anchor type with stone and mortar types to accommodate
movement and prevent corrosion.
E. Metals
1. Shop Applied Coatings
submission. The specifications must clearly identify the coating systems to be used,
the finishes required, requirements for preparation and touch-up, and related
information.
b. Select materials and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the environment
including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content in the air, sand
storms, and normal wear.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 63
2. Pipe and Tube Railings

a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall also comply with the following in the design of
pipe and tube railings:
1) Consideration shall be given to the location of exterior metal stairs, and pipe and
tube railings to minimize their exposure to direct sunlight.
2) Pipe and tube railings exposed to long periods of sunlight shall receive a suitable
heat reducing coating.
3) All railings must conform to the adopted code and the referenced standards,
including accessibility requirements, excepting certain allowable industrial
locations. This includes heights, diameters, clearances, returns, terminations,
and extensions. Handrails are to be 38mm diameter. The clearance between
the handrail and adjacent items is 38mm.
3. Metal gratings and cover plates shall be flush, shall have a non-slip finish, and shall be
removable to allow access for adequate maintenance.
a. Perforated cover plates and gratings in public circulation areas shall be designed to
avoid items such as women’s heels, canes, crutches, or fingers from becoming
stuck in them.
b. When placed in areas of potential bike traffic, grilles, cover plates, and gratings shall
be designed to prevent bicycle wheels from lodging in them.
4. In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall comply
with the following in the design of all metals:
a. Coordinate the use of all load-bearing metals, including guard and handrails, with a
structural engineer and applicable code requirement.
b. Aluminum shall never be in direct contact with concrete. Gaskets, coatings, or other
separation devices shall be utilized in all occurrences.
c. All metal building components shall be checked on both the galvanic corrosion chart
and anodic index to prevent corrosion from contact with any other connecting metal
building components.
d. Exterior metals shall be evaluated by a corrosion specialist for their exposure to
salts and chlorides, especially at coastal locations. Appropriate alloys and coatings
shall be used for long-term resistance to corrosion.
F. Wood, Plastics, and Composites

1. Finish Carpentry
submission. The specifications must clearly identify the finish systems to be used,
the finishes required, requirements for preparation and touch-up, and related
information.
1) In general, wood and plastic laminates are to be limited to interior locations.
2) All visible wood shall be void of any defects, blemishes, or discolorations beyond
the usual natural range.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 64
3) Select materials and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the environment
including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content in the air, and
sandstorms.
4) Woodwork exposed to the highly saline and humid atmosphere shall be treated
to resist degradation in accordance with the Standards of the American Wood
Preservers Association.
5) Plastic laminate finishes shall be considered in heavily utilized areas for ease of
maintenance, durability, and cost.
6) Water resistant materials such as solid surface counters, granite, quartz
surfacing, marble, or tile shall be used exclusively around sinks or other surfaces
that are subjected to significant moisture. Laminate finishes in these areas are
not acceptable.
7) The core or substrate material of millwork or cabinet panels shall be plywood or
high-density particleboard. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) is not acceptable.
G. Thermal and Moisture Protection

1. Damp proofing and Waterproofing
submission. The specifications must clearly identify the materials and systems to be
used, including membrane or application thicknesses, attachments, flashings, and
related information to give the Contract complete information.
1) Continuity of both the damp and waterproofing shall be maintained in both plan
and section across the entirety of the building envelope.
2) Provisions shall be made for protection of slabs on grade from the effects of a
high water table and mineral content. Slabs for wet areas, such as bathrooms,
shall be waterproofed.
3) Dew point calculations shall be made for all exterior wall types to ensure
condensation occurs outside of the damp proofing and waterproofing. Submit
dew-point calculations as part of the 30% Design Review Package.
4) Flashing, weeps, and vents shall be utilized and integrated with the damp
proofing and waterproofing.
2. Thermal Insulation
a. In addition to the design guidelines above, the A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall
comply with the following in the design of thermal insulation:
1) The required thermal resistance value of the building envelope assemblies shall
be determined by using the prescriptive requirements of SBC section 601 –
Energy Conservation. The climate zone and degree-days are determined from
the tables in SBC 601 using data for Jubail.
2) Continuity of the building envelope thermal insulation is essential, and shall be
maintained in both plan and section. The thermal insulation is not to be
interrupted by columns, floor slabs, or other building components. All of these
elements must be inside the thermal envelope.
3) Lintels, jambs, and sills shall provide thermal breaks. Each wythe shall have its
own independent lintel and sill.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 65
4) Floor finish transitions from interior to exterior will incorporate a thermal break,
and typically be covered by a door threshold or other appropriate transition.
5) The thermal plane of doors and windows shall align with the thermal plane of the
wall.
6) Select insulation appropriate for their resistance to fire, rot, and vermin. In most
instances, mineral wool is not appropriate in cavity walls, rain screens, and above
roof decks. The preferred material in these instances is extruded polystyrene or
polyisocyanurate boards.
7) Design insulated precast panels to minimize or eliminate thermal bridging.
Thermal bridging negatively impacts the overall effectiveness of the thermal
envelope.
8) To the extent possible, utilize passive solar design strategies for the exterior
envelope to enhance the energy efficiency characteristics of the building’s overall
performance. For example:
(a) Use of sunshades on walls or using overhangs to reduce solar heat gain on
walls.
(b) Use of landscaping to create shade.
(c) Minimizing wall areas in the direction of the most solar heat gain.
b. Cavity walls
1) Cavity walls are the preferred method of providing thermal barriers in external
masonry walls that form part of the building envelope. Cavity walls have an
interior portion (wythe, if masonry), and exterior portion (wythe, if masonry), and
the thermal barrier in between them.
2) If both the interior and exterior layers are masonry, typically, the interior section
is designed to withstand lateral loading, and the exterior section is braced by the
interior section.
3) The interior section is typically attached to columns on the side, and braced by
the structure above.
4) Lateral loading on the exterior section is translated to the interior section, typically
by use of adequate horizontal reinforcing with adjustable wall ties.
5) Thermal insulation fits between the wall ties, against the interior section.
6) Depending on dew point calculations, the damp proofing/waterproofing is applied
to the exterior face of the interior wythe. The A/E is responsible for determining
the correct location of vapor, wind, moisture, and water barriers for each
condition, and adequately detailing the requirements on the contract documents.
7) A 25mm minimum air space is required between the insulation and the exterior
section (wythe).
8) The cavity shall be designed to be drained and naturally ventilated. This requires
that weep/vents are required at the top and bottom of every cavity, and that
through-wall flashing is required to direct water out of the cavity. In general, head
joint weep vents shall be spaced every 800mm. Mortar dropping control devices
shall be used at the bottom of every air cavity.
9) Grade beams shall provide a shelf allowing the cavity and exterior wythe to start
one course below the bottom course of the interior wythe.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 66
10) Through-wall flashing shall be stainless steel, copper-laminated, or asphalt-

coated copper.
3. Insulated Metal Panels
a. Insulated metal and roof panels are to have tongue and groove joints, designed to
be sealed and anchored with concealed fasteners. Details are to be included that
clearly indicate the use of concealed fasteners and note that exposed fasteners are
not permitted. Standing seam systems are also acceptable.
b. Provide details and allowances for thermal expansion and contraction of insulated
metal panels
c. Roof panels shall have low albedo colors to reduce solar heat gain.
4. Low-Slope Membrane Roofing
a. In order to reduce overall structural loading, reduce cost, and speed construction,
the use of roof screeds is highly discouraged, and the use of sloped structural decks
and/or tapered roof insulation is highly encouraged.
b. Design flashing around all roof penetrations and edge conditions to ensure
continuity of waterproofing.
c. In accordance with the building code, all roofs shall be designed with proper
drainage and to eliminate standing water. Roof slopes are required to be not less
than 2%, and must have an independent secondary drainage system that provides
visible discharge. As required by the adopted code, crickets are required for
diversion of drainage around roof penetrations and roof curbs.
d. Roof insulation shall be installed in a minimum of two layers. Layers shall be
designed and specified to have staggered joints.
e. Roof Color: To reduce solar heat gain, ballast is to be light gray to white; exposed
membranes shall have a very low albedo color.
f. For concrete roof deck structures, use an inverted roof system with sloped
lightweight concrete screed:
1) The screed shall be not less than 50mm thick at any point. Design the slope to
be uniform. Use spot elevations to indicate ridges and high points at parapets.
Alternatively, slope the roof deck accordingly and delete the screed.
2) The membrane shall be placed on the screed. Indicate if the membrane is to be
fully adhered or mechanically attached. In general, fully-adhered will be
preferred.
3) A polyethylene sheet or geotextile fabric shall be used directly above the
membrane, covered by loose-laid rigid insulation of the thickness required to
meet RSI-values of 2018 SBC 601 Table 5.1, Zone 1.
(a) For concrete roof decks, the minimum average total RSI-value of the insulation
shall be 6.1.
4) Provide a layer of geotextile fabric and concrete pavers or rounded river stone
ballast.
5) Ballasting shall be of sufficient size and total weight as required to resist the
highest negative wind uplift loads required by code. Provide calculations and
diagrams to substantiate the design.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 67
g. Indicate minimum membrane thicknesses as follows:

1) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 1.50mm (60mil)
2) Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM): not less than 1.50mm (60mil);
specify 2.30mm (90mil) on high traffic roofs or where extra durability is
required. 1.15mm (45 mil) is not acceptable.
3) Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO): not less than 1.50mm (60mil); specify 2.30mm
(90mil) on high traffic roofs or where extra durability is required. 1.15mm (45
mil) is not acceptable.
h. Built-up roofing systems:
1) Two- and three-ply modified bitumen roofing systems. Ballasted roofs shall not
be used. Install as recommended by manufacturer.
5. Sheet metal flashing:
a. Flashing is to be stainless steel or prefinished aluminum.
b. Parapet copings are to be concealed fastener systems complying with FM-120 high
wind requirements.
c. Indicate all fasteners are to be stainless steel.
6. Fire and Smoke Protection
a. Refer to the Saudi Building Code (SBC) and the International Building Code (IBC)
for all requirements regarding fire and smoke protection. There are no exceptions;
all buildings required to have automatic fire suppression are to comply.
b. The safety of children is paramount. Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the
RC Chief Architect and RC Chief Mechanical Engineer, all schools, regardless of
code requirements, shall have automatic fire protection systems.
c. All penetrations of fire-rated assemblies (horizontal and vertical) must be protected
with a UL-tested assembly. These may be as simple as a fire sealant for small
holes, or fire damper assemblies for ducts. Indicate on the drawings appropriate
assemblies as design intentions, bearing in mind the Contractor can submit
substitutions for approval.
7. Control and Expansion Joints
a. Consideration to all thermal and waterproofing joints shall be given to ensure
continuity through the building envelope.
b. Utilize expansion joints to prevent damage from the expansion and contraction of
building components.
c. Expansion Joints
1) Expansion joints shall be continuous through a building. The width shall be
determined by the structural engineer and be clearly identified in the dimensions.
2) Expansion joints shall be located to minimize impact on the functionality of
affected spaces. The architect and structural engineer must work together in
optimizing the locations.
3) Joints shall be kept clear of formwork and other solid materials. Joints are
permitted to have only weather and thermal barriers, fire-safing, and mineral fiber

Rev. 1 5.3 - 68
acoustic insulation in the space. The calculated required width of the joint shall
take into account any elements required in the joints.
4) All normally visible joints shall have an appropriate expansion joint cover.
5) Expansion joint covers shall be identified using an expansion joint cover schedule
to identify the size of the joint, the type of cover, the finish, the fire-rating, and
other pertinent information.
6) Details of expansion joint cover installations shall be provided.
d. Control Joints:
1) Control joint shall be integrated into plaster, gypsum board, masonry, and other
locations as recommended by the relevant standards or as otherwise required.
2) Control joints are to be shown on the drawings, particularly on elevations,
sections, interior elevations, and reflected ceiling plans.
3) Provide details of all relevant control joints and fire-rated control joints.
4) Control joints shall be continuous through layered materials; e.g., where plaster
is applied to CMU, a control joint in the CMU shall have a corresponding control
joint in the plaster.
H. Openings
1. General
a. Coordinate the support of all openings with a structural engineer. Each wythe of the
exterior walls shall have its own lintel, creating a thermal break.
b. Design all exterior doors, openings, louvers, vents, and penetrations with protection
from sand storms.
c. Select materials, hardware and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the
environment including UV exposure, intense solar heat gain, high salt content in the
air, and sand storms.
d. Utilize overhangs, horizontal and vertical sun shading elements, and building
orientation to protect openings from solar heat gain.
e. Exterior wood frames are not permitted, except on residential villas.
f. Fiberglass, PVC, and non-metallic materials are not permitted for exterior openings.
g. Doors shall be identified in plan by unique numbers with letter suffixes; the numbers
corresponding to the room number of the space they serve, and the letter to identify
each individual door.
1) Single doors and double doors have one number. Doors in the same frame, but
separated by fixed (non-removable) mullions are separate doors, each receiving
a number.
2) Where pairs of doors have an active and inactive leaf, the tag on the floor plan is
to be adjacent to the active leaf.
h. Windows and louvers shall be identified in plan by a window-type or louver-type
designator.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 69
i. Utilize low emissivity coatings (low-e) on tinted exterior glazing to reduce solar heat
gain. Low-e coatings should be on Surface #2. Refer to SBC 601, IBC 1301/IECC,
and ASHRAE 90.1 and 90.2.
j. When utilizing spandrel glazing, the coating shall be placed on Surface #3 of the
glazing unit.
2. Entrances
a. The main entrances to most buildings are to be aluminum-framed storefront and
entrance systems.
b. These systems are designed to transfer lateral loads directly to the adjoining walls
and floors, and the gravity loads to the floor or wall directly beneath it. They are
therefore generally limited to approximately 3.75m in height without reinforcing and
depending on the design of the framing members.
1) Do not confuse these doors with aluminum flush doors.
2) Entrances should be recessed into an alcove in order to provide solar and
weather protection.
3) Entrances shall be designed as airlocks (vestibules).
(a) The exterior portion shall utilize thermally-broken framing and insulating
glass glazing.
(b) The interior portion shall utilize single-pane glazing in non-thermal-break
framing.
c. Design
1) Whenever possible, entrances shall incorporate sidelights.
2) Entrance doors are to have heavy-duty concealed continuous geared hinges.
3) The preferred aluminum finish is 70% PVDF painted finish that passes AAMA
2605. Where an anodized finish is used, exterior locations are to be Class I;
interior locations may be Class II.
3. Doors
a. Doors shall be designed for the location, function, and atmosphere they serve.
1) On the pull-side, the clear distance on the latch edge of a door shall be not less
than 400mm, even where not required by code. On the push-side, this clearance
may be reduced to 300mm.
2) Each door is to have a unique identifier (tag) that incorporates the room number
of the space it serves.
3) Do not place exterior doors flush to the outside face of the wall. Recess the door
and frame into the opening to help keep rainwater from entering.
b. Wood Doors:
1) Frames for wood doors are to be hollow metal. Wood frames are permitted only
with written approval of the RC Chief Architect.
2) All wood doors are to be solid core. Typically, wood doors are to be flush; panel
doors may be appropriate in certain high-end locations.
3) Wood doors shall be used at all interior locations in public view.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 70
4) Wood doors are to be stained and finished with polyurethane. The goal is to bring
out the grain of the wood. Painted wood doors are generally not desired.
5) Solid core wood doors can be fire-rated. The fact that a door and frame need to
be fire-rated does not mean the door must be hollow metal.
c. Hollow Metal Doors:
1) Hollow metal flush doors are to be used at exterior doors, industrial areas, and
doors out of public view or may be subject to excessive wear.
d. Other Door Materials:
1) Aluminum flush doors and frame are to be used in highly corrosive atmospheres,
including, but not limited to aquatics centers and chlorine treatment rooms. Do
not confuse aluminum doors with aluminum entrance doors.
2) Solid phenolic doors used at toilet and shower stalls are not doors, and are to be
specified as toilet compartment components. These are not to be included in the
door schedule.
3) Plastic laminate doors are generally not used.
e. Overhead Doors:
1) Overhead coiling doors shall be steel.
2) Sectional overhead doors are to have vision panels unless otherwise directed.
3) Exterior overhead coiling doors shall be insulated.
4) Sectional overhead doors may be used at non-conditioned spaces or where the
circumstances make them the better choice.
f. Glazing
1) Doors at conference rooms, workrooms, laboratories, and classrooms are to
have narrow vision panels and sidelights.
2) For safety, corridor doors are to have narrow vision panels.
3) Wire glass is not permitted anywhere.
g. Hardware
1) Hardware shall be listed in “hardware groups”. Groups will include every item
associated with the opening. Separate notes indicating hardware items are not
appropriate. Each door shall be assigned a hardware group.
2) Hardware groups are those sets that are identical in every way. Any variation is
a new group.
3) Door closers must not be mounted on the exterior of the building.
4) Panic hardware is to be specified only where required or otherwise directed. A
fire-rated door does not necessarily mean the door is to have panic hardware.
5) Hardware is defined as any item attached to the door or frame, or otherwise
associated with the door operation.
6) Hardware finish is typically brushed or satin chrome stainless steel.
7) Electronic access control hardware must be coordinated with the appropriate
security department and the telecommunication engineers.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 71
h. Door Frames:
1) Frames shall be fully welded; “knock-down” frames are not permitted, except for
renovations in existing openings.
2) Frames shall be double-rabbet.
3) Frames set in masonry openings are not to be “wrap-around.”
4) Frames set in framed openings are to be “wrap-around” for framing up to 150mm
deep.
5) The standard frame face width is to be 50mm.
i. Door Schedule:
1) Each door is to have a unique identifier that includes the room number of the
space it serves. .
2) The standard width of door leafs is 915mm. This is also the minimum door width.
3) Door schedule is to list each and every door. (Toilet stall doors are not doors;
they are toilet partition components). For each door, indicate the following:
(a) Door number
(b) Door material
(c) Door type
(d) Door leaf size
(e) Frame material
(f) Frame type
(g) Jamb detail reference(s)
(h) Head detail reference
(i) Sill/threshold detail reference
(j) Fire rating
(k) STC rating
(l) Hardware group
(m) Glazing type
(n) Remarks
4. Windows
a. General
1) Design horizontal window mullions to not block views from either interior standing
or seated positions.
2) Unless otherwise directed, tempered glazing is to be used only where required.
3) Wire glass is not permitted anywhere.
b. Exterior
1) Include sill pan flashing with integral end dams for all window openings.
2) All exterior windows are to incorporate thermal breaks. They shall be glazed with
insulated glass units with tinted exterior panes and have low-e coating on Surface
#2.
3) Exterior framing is to be aluminum, and the type of finish is to match the type of
finish on any aluminum entrances.
4) Operable windows are to include insect screens.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 72
c. Interior (Borrowed Lights)

1) Borrowed light frames shall be aluminum or hollow metal as needed to provide
the most consistent overall design.
2) Fire-rated glazing systems are expensive, and are to be used in moderation.
(a) Where required, indicate t-ratings.
(b) Specify and indicate only complete systems. For example, specifying fire-rated
glass in regular hollow metal frames does not create a fire-rated system.
The partition, framing, and glazing together must all be a Fire Door
Assembly.
5. Louvers and Vents
a. Utilize bug screens on all exterior louvers and vents.
b. Coordinate all related exterior openings with the HVAC design.
c. Provide sand control louvers on buildings in undeveloped desert areas, or as
required by project.
d. Louvers must be located to avoid being a nuisance to the building occupants,
passers-by, or neighbors.
6. Skylights
a. Skylights are encouraged as a means of reducing the need for artificial lighting
during daylight hours.
b. Skylights are to be framed, mounted on raised roof curbs. Translucent panels
integral to the roof panels are not permitted.
c. To provide diffused light with improved insulating value, and low solar heat gain,
translucent insulating sandwich panels from approved manufacturers are
encouraged.
1) Face sheets are to be manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins.
Thermoplastic faces are not acceptable.
7. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
a. These systems are designed to gravity and lateral loads to the building structure,
and are therefore usually span more than one floor vertically. The connection points
must not only transfer the loads to the structure, but allow for system movement.
b. Because the framing members carry larger loads, they are usually wider and much
deeper than storefront systems. This also allows some curtain wall systems to be
sloped, creating dramatic architectural effects.
c. System drainage is a critical aspect of successful design and installation.
Penetrating water and condensation must be directed out of the system.
d. The preferred aluminum finish is 70% PVDF painted finish that passes AAMA 2605.
Where an anodized finish is used, exterior locations are to be Class I; interior
locations may be Class II.
e. Framing members are to be thermally-broken.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 73
I. Finishes
1. Exterior Finish Materials and Colors
a. General considerations:
1) The environmental conditions in Jubail are a challenge to the architect. Dust,
grit, and sand accumulate on exterior surfaces. Strong sunlight and coastal
atmospheric conditions tend to fade colors. The strong sun also causes
excessive surface temperatures, which are exacerbated by darker colors. These
challenges cannot be an excuse for banal design.
2) Thermal expansion and contraction requires control joints in all materials. Use
control joints to help create interest and textures in facades.
3) Use plane changes to create shadow lines, which can accentuate rhythms and
patterns in facades.
4) Use of multiple materials and colors requires moderation; too much and the
design becomes muddled or contrived. Too little, and the design is dull. Find the
balance, and create interest.
b. Metals
1) Composite Metal Panels
(c) To provide panel stability and minimize “oil-canning,” panels are to be not
less than 4mm thick.
(d) Provide details including the manufacturer’s recommended substructure
that accommodates expansion and contraction of the panels.
(e) In most cases, the system is to be designed as a rain screen (also
known as “rear-ventilated” or “pressure equalized”); provide proper vapor
barrier, air barrier, and waterproofing behind the panel system on the
substrate (usually CMU or exterior sheathing).
(f) All fasteners are to be stainless steel, or as otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer.
2) Sheet metal flashings and copings
(g) To the fullest extent possible, fasteners are to be concealed.
(h) All sheet metal fabrications are to be factory finished, and factory
fabricated whenever possible.
c. Stucco/Cement Plaster
1) Provide control joints as recommended by the manufacturer. Control joints in the
substrate shall continue through the plaster.
2) Wherever possible, colors should be integral to the plaster. Painting plaster is not
the first choice.
2. Interior Finish Materials and Colors
a. General:
1) Materials and colors are to be selected to balance the aesthetic, maintenance,
functional, and sustainability needs of the project. Consideration must be given
to light reflectance, acoustic properties, flammability, and appropriateness of the
material and/or color for the specific location and occupancy of the space.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 74
2) Verify that all finish materials meet the required flame spread and smoke
developed classifications for the occupancy group and specific spaces in which
they are used as required by code.
b. Floors:
1) Screeds are unnecessary, and to be avoided, except in wet areas (restrooms,
kitchens, etc.). This speeds construction and reduces the cumulative dead
loads on the structural system, resulting in further cost savings.
2) Non-slip (non-polished) surfaces must be used in potentially wet areas, including
lobbies and those portions of corridors near entrances.
3) Utilize recessed entrance walk-off grates in entry vestibules to reduce the amount
of sand and grit brought into the building. Vestibules should have at least 3 m of
space between the exterior and interior walls.
4) Consider strongly how the space is to be used, and the human anatomical
interface between the flooring and human movement. For example, exercise
spaces need to have resilient floor systems in order to reduce wear and tear on
people’s joints. Resilient flooring is as easily cleaned as tile flooring.
5) Unless there is a special pattern or design associated with a tile floor, there is no
need to indicate a start point. Tile layouts should minimize cutting and wasted
material. (The tiles on the edges of the spaces should usually be more than one-
half of a tile.)
6) Consider strongly the acoustics of a space. Reflective floor surfaces make
spaces more noisy and difficult to discern speech.
7) Tile floors (Stone, ceramic, and porcelain):
(a) Select tile appropriate to the character of the building and location, with
consideration to the traffic load.
(b) The size of the tile is to be of a scale in keeping with the space. The size of the
joint is part of that determination.
(c) Specify the tile material, type, color, size, and the grout color.
8) Resilient floors (rubber, vinyl composite, and similar materials) are appropriate
for classrooms, workrooms, cafeterias, control rooms, and laboratories.
Research the options carefully for making the best choice for each application
9) Terrazzo and terrazzo tile offer excellent durability, performance, low
maintenance, and broad color possibilities. It is strongly recommended for high
traffic areas, such as lobbies, school corridors, and public transportation facilities.
10) Sealed, hardened concrete offers faster construction, high durability, and low
maintenance. It is the standard choice for warehouses, mechanical and electrical
rooms, and other industrial settings. Integrally colored concrete makes this an
intriguing choice for high traffic public spaces.
11) Carpet can be either tile or broadloom. It offers sound absorption, color, and
under-foot comfort to spaces. It is the standard choice for prayer rooms, is
usually required in auditoria, and should be strongly considered for office areas
and conference rooms.
12) Wood (non-athletic) flooring offers a pleasing aesthetic with many options for
species and floor patterns, making it a great design option. The cost will vary
depending on the specie and patterns desired. Be careful to not select species

Rev. 1 5.3 - 75
that tend to be soft, as they can be easily damaged by furniture, equipment, and
high heel shoes.
(a) Where possible or determined to be desirable as a project sustainability goal,
select and specify wood products to be certified by the “Forest Stewardship
Council” (or USGBC-approved equivalent) as part of the LEED MR Building
Product Disclosure and Optimization – Sourcing of Raw Materials credit.
13) Athletic floor systems:
(a) Wood: Engineered wood floor systems (often referred to as “floating”
wood systems) are to be used for racquetball and squash courts, bowling
alleys, stages, and movement studios (dance and aerobics). Gymnasia
intended for high schools and most community centers or recreation
centers should be engineered wood. These systems use maple as the
finish surface. Typically, the maple is “3rd and better” which enhances the
wood appearance. Better grades tend to become too monochromatic.
(b) Athletic polyurethane systems come in many different types. Investigate
the differences, and select the appropriate system for the primary use of
the floor. These flooring systems could be used for running tracks,
tennis courts, outdoor covered basketball courts, and elementary school
gymnasia. Despite the advertising, it is not the equal to wood athletic
floor systems and will not be approved as such by the RC.
(c) Rubber tile flooring is appropriate for weight rooms and similar spaces.
c. Walls
1) General:
(a) Consider the integration of way finding elements when choosing wall and
floor finishes.
(b) Utilize water resistant materials on any surfaces subject to wetting.
(c) Utilize impact resistant elements such as corner guards, chair rails,
impact resistance gypsum board, or crash rails in areas more susceptible
to damage, especially corridors.
(d) Partitions are the primary means of controlling sound transmission
between spaces. Therefore, consider the STC rating of partition types in
design.
(1) Sound transmission is greatly reduced when the partition extends to
the structure above.
(2) For gypsum board partitions, double layers on both sides may be
required.
(3) Security Compartmented Information Facility (SCIF) areas will
typically require higher STC ratings. Verify requirements with the
end-user.
(e) Consider sound absorption panels and/or fabric wall covering to improve
acoustics in conference rooms, offices, dining rooms, and meeting rooms
to help improve speech discernment.
2) Plaster:
(a) Plaster is not needed or desired on CMU in utility spaces.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 76
(b) Indicate control joints in plaster as recommended in “Plaster Technical

Guide – Prevent Cracks in Veneer and Conventional Plaster Systems”
(PM17), published by United States Gypsum Company, and provide
related details.
(c) Control joints in the substrates must continue through the plaster.
3) Gypsum Board and Veneer Plaster:
(a) Wood framing is not permitted.
(b) Indicate control joints in gypsum board as recommended in “The
Gypsum Construction Handbook,” published by United States Gypsum
Company, and provide related details.
(c) Except for 25mm shaft wall panels and 6.4mm “flexible” gypsum board
used for creating curves, all gypsum board panels are to be 16mm
(minimum) Type X. Moisture resistant panels shall be used in high
moisture locations. Abuse resistant panels shall be used in corridors and
other areas subject to abuse.
(d) Use mineral wool acoustic insulation in frame partitions to improve STC
ratings.
(e) Avoid very long, uninterrupted runs of gypsum board partitions.
Introduce pilasters or other means and materials to break up long runs.
4) Concrete Masonry Unit:
(a) Refer to masonry standards above.
(b) While it is customary to cover CMU with plaster, it is not necessarily the
best option. In large spaces, such as gymnasia, omitting plaster may
improve the acoustics of the space by making the walls relatively less
reflective. In locker and shower areas, it may create additional
maintenance issues. Specify a paint system with a masonry filler/primer.
d. Ceilings
1) General:
(a) Coordinate ceiling design and layout with any above-ceiling mechanical,
electrical, or plumbing equipment requiring access. Minimize access
panels by using suspended acoustic tile ceilings and avoiding hard
ceilings.
(b) Access panels shall be factory made; field fabricated access panels are
not permitted.
(c) Avoid gypsum board soffits; these are costly and tend to be over-used.
Suspended acoustic tile ceilings can extend from wall-to-wall.
(d) In most spaces, strive to have more than one-half of a tile along the outer
edges of suspended acoustic tile ceilings.
(e) Typically, acoustic ceiling tiles are to be mineral fiber; gypsum board is
generally not appropriate.
(f) Corridor intersections should have a change of material, elevation, or
other architectural device to avoid uninterrupted but awkward ceiling grid
intersections.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 77
(g) Reflected ceiling plans are to show all visible devices, such as lights,
diffusers, access panels, sprinkler heads, smoke detectors, cameras,
motion detectors, speakers, etc.
2) Gypsum Board:
(a) Gypsum board ceilings should be limited to small spaces, or where wind
could be an issue, such as in vestibules.
(b) In high moisture spaces, gypsum board is to be moisture resistant or
even avoided. In very high moisture areas, such as shower areas,
cement plaster is more appropriate.
3) Suspended Acoustic Tile Ceilings
(a) In many spaces, the ceiling is the primary surface for controlling noise.
Because the walls and floor tend to be acoustically reflective, the ceiling is
left to reduce noise. Therefore, ceilings in most spaces need to have a
high NRC. To achieve this, most ceilings are to be mineral fiber acoustic
tiles on suspended metal grids.
(b) Mylar or PVC faced tiles are to be used in areas such as kitchens,
laundry rooms where cleanability is required.
(c) Tegular tiles are preferred over simple square edge tiles.
(d) In corridors, the tiles are to be centered. Where corridors intersect,
consider using a gypsum board ceiling in the intersection to separate the
ceiling grids.
(e) Try to position the grid in other spaces so that the edge tiles are greater
than one-half of a tile.
(f) Toilet room ceilings for public building types shall be PVC ceiling tiles.
J. Specialties
1. Signage
a. Utilize appropriate directional safety and identity sign in all public and industrial
facilities as required by building type.
b. The design of all signs shall maximize visibility and contrast with the immediate
environment.
c. The design and location of all signage shall comply with accessibility requirements.
d. Utilize both graphic and written elements on signs where possible.
e. Written signage shall firstly be in the Arabic language, followed by the English
language.
f. Exit signs shall be illuminated, and appear on the electrical lighting plans and the
reflected ceiling plans. Do not block visibility of exit signs with other signage.
2. Toilet and Bath Accessories
a. Partitions provided around all public water closets and shower stall shall extend from
floor to ceiling.
b. To reduce water damage and provide air circulation, toilet and shower stall doors
shall be undercut 50-100 mm.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 78
c. The inside dimensions of toilet stalls shall be not less than 900mm wide by 1600mm
long.
d. Privacy screens shall be installed between all urinals, extending from approximately
600 mm above the finish floor to a height of 1500 mm. Urinals shall be not less than
900mm center to center.
e. Each shower or bath stall shall have adequate space for dressing and undressing in
private, as well as for clothes storage. The total inside dimensions for standard
shower stalls shall be not less than 900mm wide by 2000mm long, divided evenly
into a shower area and a dressing area. Clothes hooks and a bench are to be
provided in the dressing area.
f. Toilet partitions shall be solid phenolic.
g. All exposed metal parts of toilet accessories and hardware shall be stainless steel or
chrome plated. Painted metal accessories shall not be acceptable.
h. Lavatories shall be not less than 900mm center-to-center. A soap dispenser shall
be located between each pair of lavatories. (Do not create situations where a person
using a lavatory must reach around someone at the adjacent lavatory to get soap).
i. Clothes hooks shall be provided in each toilet stall. It is preferable to have these on
sidewalls rather than on the back of the door.
j. The path of travel shall be considered when locating paper towel dispensers, hand
dryers, and trashcans.
k. Toilet facilities shall be equal for each sex as required by the International Plumbing
Code.
l. All drinking fountains are to be in high-lo pairs in an accessible alcove. Consider
providing bottle fill spouts.
m. A light cove is to be located against the wall above lavatories. This provides better
light distribution without casting shadows as overhead lighting would.
n. All showers shall have a shower tray to hold personal items, such as shampoo
bottles.
3. Sun Control Devices
a. Utilize sun control devices to protect doors and windows from solar heat gain.
b. A study of their optimum shape in relation to the sun, as well as their initial economic
impact and maintenance costs as related to HVAC equipment and operation costs
shall be made.
c. Select materials and finishes to have low heat absorptive qualities.
d. Minimize contact with the building surfaces to which they are attached.
e. All windows are to have window treatments, such as blinds and curtains, in order to
control daylight, glare, and privacy. Select materials, opacity, hardware, and
finishes appropriate for their resistance to the environment including UV exposure
and intense solar heat gain. In open office areas, consider using automatic controls
on the window treatments to regulate solar heat gain.
f. In auditoria and classrooms, room-darkening treatments should be specified. Larger
spaces should utilize centralized lighting and shade controls at the podium.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 79
g. Spaces requiring room-darkening treatments should usually have two sets of

window treatments, opaque and non-opaque. Non-opaque still allows for some
connection to the outdoors and for some daylight in the space.
h. Sun control devices and privacy screens cannot block fire department access to
bedrooms in residential buildings as required or allowed by code.
4. Vehicle Shelters
a. Select materials, hardware, and finishes appropriate for their resistance to the
b. Design tensile fabric canopies to quickly shed rain and avoid any possibility of
ponded water.
c. Framing members projecting from the columns shall not be lower than 2m about the
paving.
d. Give strong consideration to using photovoltaic solar panels for vehicle shading.
K. Equipment
1. Equipment is defined as items or building elements that allow the building to function as
required. Typically, they are attached to the building by fasteners, wiring, piping, and/or
ductwork.
that apply to each project in the 30% submission. Refer to Section 4.2 for additional
submission requirements:
a. All equipment shall be specified only from manufacturers with a proven record of
reliability, service, and replacement parts supply.
b. All equipment shall conform to applicable safety regulations and shall be installed in
strict compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. Equipment shall be designed for a service life appropriate to the building type.
d. Where possible, exterior equipment shall be designed to be kept away from public
spaces. Landscaping and/or screen walls shall be utilized to minimize the visual
impact of exterior or roof top equipment.
e. Exterior equipment shall be protected appropriately for resistance to the
f. Utilize sound separation from large equipment to minimize disturbance to public
spaces or neighboring occupied spaces.
3. Fire extinguishers:
a. Fire extinguishers are to be in recessed cabinets. Cabinets must be fire-rated when
placed in fire-rated partitions. Surface mounted cabinets are not acceptable.
b. Fire extinguishers in utility spaces, such as mechanical rooms need not be in
cabinets.
c. When possible, fire extinguishers are to be located just outside electric and
telecommunication rooms. Where not possible, they are to be placed just inside the

Rev. 1 5.3 - 80
door; under no circumstances should anyone have to enter, and then cross the room
to access the fire extinguisher.
4. Fire sprinklers:
a. In most public spaces, concealed sprinkler heads are preferred.
b. Sprinkler heads are to be centered in ceiling tiles.
L. Furnishings
1. Furnishings are defined as items or elements that help the building to function as
required. Typically, they are mobile, and not permanently attached to the building by
fasteners, wiring, piping, and/or ductwork. For example, bookcases or display cases may
be attached to a wall to avoid tipping, but are considered mobile. However, bookcases or
display cases that are designed and built-into the building and are therefore not mobile
are not considered furnishings.
that apply to each project in the 30% submission. Refer to Section 4.2 for additional
submission requirements:
a. Consideration shall be given to numerous factors of the users that include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1) Functions and types of spaces.
2) Number of assigned staff and visitors.
3) Types and quantities of items to be stored.
4) Quantity, condition, and type of furniture to be reused.
b. Select furniture and furnishings with function, durability, aesthetics, and budget as a
primary consideration. Budget in this context means life cycle cost; furniture that
needs to be replaced after only a few years is not economically wise.
c. Flexible and modular furniture and furnishings shall be considered based on the
current or potential future project needs.
d. Select furniture and furnishings for their resistance to fire.
e. Select furniture and furnishings that require less maintenance to clean and/or repair
them.
f. Select furniture and furnishings that complement the project design, provide
aesthetic consistency, and have proper scale, size, and proportion for the space.
g. Classroom furniture shall be designed with durability and size adjustment as a
primary concern.
M. Conveying Systems
1. Elevators
a. Consider the building type and elevator function when choosing elevator type and
speed. Low-rise elevators should typically be designed as “machine-room less”
when possible.
b. At least one elevator shall be capable of accommodating a stretcher to be used by
first responders during medical emergencies. Refer to the building code for

Rev. 1 5.3 - 81
complete requirements. Larger elevators facilitate moving furniture and equipment

during the life of the building.
c. Elevators intended primarily for public or passenger use shall be placed to maximize
accessibility and occupant flow. Its location shall coordinate with the lobby, stairways
and/or corridors.
d. Elevators intended primarily for private or freight use shall be located away from the
public circulation if possible, and its location shall correspond with any spaces
intended to utilize it, such as mechanical rooms, shipping, and maintenance.
e. Coordinate any access control requirements with security and telecommunications
design.
f. Alphanumeric lettering for elevator call buttons shall be as follows:
1) Basement (when applicable): B
2) Underground Parking: P (or P1, P2, etc.)
3) Ground Floor: 1
4) Subsequent Floors: 2, 3, etc.
5) The letter “G” shall not be used for Ground Floor.
6) The Arabic alphanumeric shall be used, be 50% larger in size and stroke, and
written to the right of the English alphanumeric.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 82
SUBSECTION 5.3.5 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE
A. General
1. The Design Guidelines in this section are intended to be general in nature, and provide
the A/E and/or EPC Contractors with the requirements of the RCJ for specific building
types. These guidelines are not intended to provide design knowledge but rather to
indicate additional information, provisions, and submissions for each building type. The
Building Types are separated into the following categories:
a. Public/Institutional
b. Education
c. Commercial
d. Residential
e. Industrial
f. Specialty Applications
2. Each of these categories is broken down further into sub-categories for specific building
types. If the A/E and/or EPC Contractor retained to design a building whose type is not
contained in this Section, then they must request specific design guidelines from RCJ
prior to commencing the work as part of their pre-design activities.
3. The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall submit, in each of the design phase submissions,
how they have addressed each of the provisions for their respective building type.
a. Goals of the facility: Understand the target user groups and how the facility is
intended to benefit them.
b. Understand how the interior spaces and uses relate to exterior spaces and how this
will influence the site design, as well as the interface with the community.
c. All aspects of all buildings must comply with the adopted building code and the
referenced standards, including all accessibility requirements. There are no
exceptions. Understand that these are minimum requirements, and the RC at its
discretion does in some circumstances require design to exceed the minimum. Good
design practice will very often exceed the minimum requirements in order to further
the health, safety, and welfare of the public as well as to provide the quality and
service life the RC expects from its facilities.
B. Public/Institutional
1. Aviation
a. Design Considerations
1) Goals and purpose of the facility
(a) Size, type, and number of aircraft
(b) Passenger load
(c) Freight capacity
(d) Owner/operator

Rev. 1 5.3 - 83
2) Constraints: In addition to adopted building code, the facility must comply with
the requirements of the General Authority of Civil Aviation of the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
3) Building and Siting
(a) Understand the relationship between solar orientation and safe landing,
take-off, and taxiing visibility.
(b) Understand the site wind conditions and the relation to optimal
positioning of runways or landing decks. Understand how wind will affect
blowing sand and dust.
(c) Provide proper flight path clearances, both vertically and horizontally.
(d) Identify the relationships between land services and the aircraft.
(e) Landside traffic flow at passenger facilities must flow smoothly.
Passenger volume may dictate separating departure and arrival traffic.
e. Features
1) The features required will depend greatly on the size and type of facility desired.
Identify these features during pre-design. Most facilities will require at least the
following:
(a) Fuel storage and dispensing.
(b) Some level of maintenance.
(c) Security
(d) Parking
(e) Operations office
(f) Emergency services
2) Depending on size and mission, the following features may be needed:
(a) Control Tower
(b) Hangar(s)
3) Passenger terminal may require the following:
(a) Baggage handling (drop and pick-up)
(b) Prayer rooms
(c) Dining (vending or prepared)
(d) Retail space
(e) Gates and waiting areas
(f) Staff and Public restrooms
(g) Ticketing
(h) Catering services (to re-stock aircraft)
(i) Business area
(j) Passenger, Employee, and/or flight crew lounges
(k) Immigrations and Customs

Rev. 1 5.3 - 84
(l) Security and screening areas.

4) Cargo services may require the following:
(a) Warehouse/distribution center
(b) Customs
f. Consider environmental elements such as birds, sand, and rain and provide means
to mitigate their impact on operation of the aviation facility.
2. Community Centers
a. Features: Community Centers can provide for a wide variety of activities. There will
be great variance in the offerings between facilities.
b. A great deal of investigation into the needs and goals of the client/end-user is
needed during pre-design in order to proceed to design. However, seeing plans may
initiate new thinking or render previous ideas moot. Therefore, several conceptual
plans will need to be explored with the client/end-user so the designer and the end-
user are comfortable that the path forward will best suit their needs and goals.
c. Sports/Fitness Functions
1) Spaces designed for indoor sports shall be designed to accommodate the
designated sport(s) according to established guidelines and rules published by
the governing sports associations. These include floor area, flooring type, sports
line markings, equipment specific to the sport, vertical height clearances,
peripheral area of the sport surface or court, spectator seating, team seating,
scoreboard locations, acoustics, lighting, and ventilation.
(a) The preferred flooring for most indoor sports courts and studio spaces
(dance and aerobic activities) is engineered wood athletic flooring. It is the
required flooring system for racquetball and squash.
(b) Synthetic flooring systems may be considered for basketball/volleyball
courts. Care must be taken to specify durable systems with the
appropriate resilience.
(c) Design and coordinate physical requirements such as floor and wall
materials, equipment supports, power, and proper lighting types and
layouts. Provide adequate storage space for equipment that is not in use.
(d) Personal fitness spaces must be designed for adequate clearance
around the workout equipment.
(e) Provide adequate locker rooms and showers.
2) Swimming Pools
(a) Design swimming pools to have perimeter overflow with non-metallic
grating. Skimmers are not appropriate for public swimming pools.
(b) Avoid locating lights and ducts over water surfaces. Indirect lighting works
best. Light levels at the water surface should be as even as possible for
safety.
(c) Daylighting is good, but minimize clear glass; use insulated translucent
sandwich panels.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 85
(d) Indoor swimming pools are to have separate HVAC to control moisture
and humidity; the space is to be negatively pressured relative to adjoining
spaces.
(e) Doors and frames shall be aluminum.
(f) Allow generous deck space on all sides of the water surface.
(g) To provide better acoustics, the roof should not be parallel to the water
surface. Consider also using acoustic banners and wall panels.
(h) Provide sufficient space in the pool equipment rooms to allow for easy
operations and maintenance. Do not undersize the room. The room is to
have access to the exterior for easier delivery of chemicals.
(i) Competition “short-course” pools are to be 25.025m clear between end
walls. This allows 25mm for touchpads. (A true Olympic-size, international
competition (“long-course”) pool is 50.025m).
(j) Entrance to swimming pools shall be through the locker rooms. Locker
rooms shall be arranged such that people must pass the showers into and
out of the swimming pool to encourage them to shower before entering
and after exiting.
d. Meeting Rooms
1) Design multi-purpose spaces to be flexible to accommodate the expected
functions and potential future ones.
2) Provide appropriate audio-visual and sound systems for the expected uses.
3) Consider manually- or electrically-operated folding partitions to subdivide spaces
for smaller gatherings or activities. Folding partitions must provide acoustic
separation and have durable finishes appropriate to the spaces.
4) Provide adequate storage for chairs and tables on racks, plus any specific use
equipment.
e. Auditoria
1) Submit sight line analysis no later than the 60% phase submittal.
2) Design the shape and materials of the space to enhance the acoustic
performance of the space.
3) Provide audio-visual capable of serving a variety of possible uses, including
audience participation.
4) Lighting is to be flexible.
f. Environmental Considerations
1) Design mechanical systems to minimize noise and vibration that could disturb
the users.
2) Provide wireless internet service throughout the facility, and wire connections
where appropriate.
g. Traffic Flow and Way-finding
1) Outdoor signage is to direct people to the desired portion of the building.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 86
2) Generally, it is desirable for patrons to use a single entrance and exit in order to
better control building access. Typically, provide a central reception and
information desk for check-in and passive entry control. However, under certain
circumstances, multiple entrances may be desirable.
3) At times, meeting rooms may need a separate entrance. In this case, access to
the remainder of the facility should be restricted.
4) A library in the facility may warrant a separate entry.
5) The interior floor plan shall include clear and discernible way-finding by means
of visual cues and signage.
6) Provide displays and kiosks to advertise services, programs, and events.
7) The floor plan is to facilitate closing sections of the building (without negatively
affecting emergency egress).
h. Include the following in the DBR:
1) Goals of the facility/target user group(s)
2) Primary functions to be provided at the facility
3) Requirements for support functions such as locker rooms, computers, etc.
4) Descriptions of environmental needs, such as security, lighting, and mechanical
needs.
3. Libraries
a. Additional Design Considerations
1) Type of library
(a) Understand the type of library, such local, regional, or other, and the impact
it may have on program and design.
(b) Define any joint use intent with other facilities or any affiliation with other
institutions.
b. Planning
1) Provide for any stated growth or expansion plans.
2) Design for future flexibility as needs and/or technologies evolve.
(a) Structural design must take into account the possibility of relocating library
stacks.
(b) High-density storage must be well planned and accommodated by the
structural design. In most cases, there will be little opportunity to relocate
high-density storage due to structural limitations.
3) Environmental
(a) Provide for ambient temperature of 20-32c and 30-50% relative humidity
for collection areas, or as prescribed by the facility’s library consultant. To
protect the collections, these areas may need to maintain these conditions
around the clock.
(b) Find the balance between energy conservation, the use of daylighting,
controlling the daylighting, and the possibility that daylighting may be
detrimental to some library collections.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 87
(c) Give special consideration to the electrical and data requirements of

technology and computers, including individually owned electronic devices
(power for laptop and electronic pad chargers). Provide adequate
infrastructure for data, wireless usage, and automation. Plan for the
continuing evolution of how technology will change in libraries.
(d) Consider energy conservation features such as motion sensors in stacks
and meeting rooms, and the ability to comprehensively power down
computers during off hours.
(e) Acoustics in libraries are very important. Consider how to minimize noise
within spaces, and sound transmission between spaces.
(f) Furnishings shall be ergonomically designed and appropriate to the space
and function.
(g) Consider space for literacy training and computer technology training, and
distance learning.
4) Technology
(a) Consider providing flat screens for web-meetings, teaching, and distance
learning.
(b) Consider powered compressible stacks when appropriate.
5) Accessibility for Libraries
(a) Provide accessible work areas, computer stations, and service/circulation
desks.
(b) Consider seating for the elderly or infirm and space for wheelchairs
anywhere lines of patrons may form.
(c) Space between book stacks shall maintain the required wheelchair
clearances.
(d) Consider the age of users. Provide child-size and child-reach
environments in areas designed for children.
(e) Provide storage for courtesy wheelchair storage if applicable.
(f) Make provisions for service animals such as seeing eye dogs.
6) The Design Basis Report must include:
(a) Special technical requirements or features
(b) Definition statement of the target market
(c) Definition of affiliations with other institutions
(d) Description of required features
(e) Description of security measure requirements
4. Mosques
a. Refer also to the RC Mosque Design Guidelines.
b. Design Goals and Considerations
1) Provide a safe and spiritual place to practice Islam.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 88
2) Site and building design shall respond to placing the Mirhab in the direction of
Mecca.
3) Features
(a) Minarets
(b) Provide only enough furniture in the prayer hall(s) as required to assist
elderly or disabled worshippers.
(c) Mihrab
(1) The Mihrab shall face Makkah. Consideration shall be given to the
layout of other features knowing worshippers will be facing the
Mihrab.
(2) The interior face/wall edge of the Mihrab shall be flush with the wall
closest to Makkah. The depth of this wall shall be approximately 2 m.
(d) Minbar
(1) The Minbar shall be located to the right of the Mihrab.
(2) Consideration of the mosque’s acoustical properties shall be given to
a speaker atop of the Minbar.
(e) Dome
(f) Courtyard
(1) Gates shall be provided into the courtyard. Gates are not required to
be solid or opaque. A well designed screen or mesh shall also be
acceptable.
(2) Provide a covered walkway around the courtyard.
(b) Ablution Fountain
(1) Hot water set at tepid temperature shall be supplied to all ablution
taps and perianal sprays. Sinks shall be equipped with both hot and
cold water.
(2) Ablution areas shall be separated from water closet areas.
Separated indirect, accessible access shall be provided for both
sexes.
4) Environmental Considerations
(a) Provide protection from wind and sand.
(b) Storm water control for open areas.
5) Traffic Flow and Way-finding
(a) Provide distinct, accessible, separate entrances to ablution facilities and
prayer rooms for males and females.
(b) Public access begins with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is used
to reach the facility. Entry is typically restricted to a specific area in order
to control access.
(c) Public circulation through the facility may be uni-directional (basically one
way to travel) or multi-directional with multiple choices along the way.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 89
6) Security
(a) Consideration shall be given to the blast requirements when designing the
exterior structure and vehicular access to the mosque.
7) Specialized Amenities
(a) There shall be no point or “spear” rising above the Hilal. The Hilal shall act
as a lightning terminal removing the need for additional lightning rods. The
Hilal shall be aligned towards Mekkah.
(b) Lighting levels shall be sufficient for reading at near floor level. The use of
chandeliers or special lighting is not needed.
(c) The sound system shall be simple in design, installation, operation, and
maintenance.
(d) Consideration shall be given to the cleanliness of the floor. Provide large
prayer carpets and/or smaller prayer rugs for individual use. Allocate a
space where small prayer rugs may be stacked.
(e) Provide shoe racks for approximately 60% of the total number of
worshipers. They shall be located in the interior courtyard by the main
entrance.
(f) Bookshelves shall be located on sidewalls around interior columns.
(g) Clocks shall be provided to show worshippers the proper times for prayers.
(h) No urinals shall be provided.
(i) Water Closets
(1) All mosques, except Grand Friday Mosque and Friday Mosque, shall
be provided with the required number of eastern toilets plus one
western toilet.
(2) For Grand Friday Mosque and Friday Mosque, two western toilets
and one western toilet modified for the use of handicapped persons
shall be provided out of the total number of required toilets.
5. Museums
1) Consideration to defining the goals of the museum such as theme, target
audience, civic purpose, historic preservation, education, research, and religious
orientation. A definition of the target audience shall also be established.
2) Architectural space shall be designed to be appropriate to display the intended
exhibits, transport them to and from their locations, and to provide some flexibility
for change over time. This includes the gallery layout and sequence, the plan
geometry of spaces, and the volumes of spaces.
3) Exhibits
(a) Arrangement considerations: Exhibits shall be arranged in a recognizable
orderly pattern or sequence.
(b) Exhibits shall be appropriately lit. The goals of lighting design are to
enhance the viewing experience. Lighting considerations include: the

Rev. 1 5.3 - 90
amount of illumination; the fixture and lamp selection; the positioning of

fixtures and direction of lighting.
(c) Use of graphics, movement, and technology, shall be considered where
appropriate. Graphics include the backdrops and settings as well as the
signage. Exhibits that employ physical motion may have clearance or
viewing issues. Technology considerations include but are not limited to
visual computer animations, flat screen presentations, video feeds, and
computer-controlled technical effects, and motion-sensor activated
exhibits.
(d) Sound and acoustic considerations include such things as audio feeds for
the above and acoustical separation from neighboring exhibits that may be
adversely impacted.
(e) If consistent with the museum’s goals, meeting and/or gathering spaces
shall be considered for groups of varying sizes. Certain exhibits may
require positioning to allow presentation to a group.
(f) Consider interactive activity / classroom spaces, if appropriate. Interactive
activity spaces may be situated among or as part of the exhibits, or as
separate educational components, staffed or self-guided. If classroom
spaces are to be provided, appropriate support spaces shall be
considered.
(g) Special Accessibility Considerations
(1) Visually and hearing impaired considerations include enhancing the
experience of visually impaired persons by auditory or tactical means.
For the hearing impaired, portable audio devices may enable access
to exhibit audio feeds or live presentations. Various technologies exist
for text renditions of auditory tracts.
(2) Exhibit accessibility for the physically elderly includes seating areas
to view exhibits to avoid the need to stand, as well as seating along
museum circulation routes.
(3) Children in strollers and patrons in wheelchairs need to be considered
in the positioning of exhibits and viewing areas.
4) Environmental criteria used to govern the design of the overall building, specific
galleries, and storage spaces, include ambient temperatures and humidity levels
required for the storage and display of exhibits. The appropriate allowable levels
of VOC’s in adhesives and paints used in storage rooms and display areas shall
be evaluated by professional experts and records of requirements kept to inform
subsequent renovations to these areas. Ultraviolet (UV) and ambient light may
seriously affect paintings and artifacts and likewise warrants professional
consideration.
5) Traffic Flow and Way-Finding
(a) Public access begins with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is used
to reach the facility. Entry is typically restricted to a specific area in order to
control access and collect fees for entry.
(b) Public circulation through the facility may be unidirectional (basically one
way to travel) or multi-directional with multiple choices along the way.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 91
(c) Depending on the floor plan layout and the number of levels, typically a
three-dimensional circulation concept is required. It is important to allow
museum patrons to understand where they are at any given time
according to some recognizable frame of reference, independent of maps
and diagrams to whatever extent is practical. This frame of reference may
be the front entry, vertical circulation elements such as stairs or elevator
towers, or some other feature(s) of the building.
(d) Physical cues such as flooring, wall panel orientation, lighting, ramps, and
colors may assist way-finding and directionality of the intended circulation.
(e) Exhibit progression may also be considered as a way to encourage
intended traffic flow. Both exhibits and architectural elements may serve
as visual cues for both traffic flow and way-finding.
(f) Lighting and illumination may create accents that draw attention to areas
or exhibits and thereby prompt movement.
(g) Signage and facility maps are the most obvious ways to illustrate layout
and circulation, and to define potential destinations within the facility. To
the user, the clear correlation of signage and facility maps to visual
elements such as exhibits and physical cues as noted above shall be
considered in the implementation of these elements.
6) Security
(a) Exhibit security is typically a high priority in museums due to the value of
objects and the irreplaceability of historic treasures. Security typically
revolves around theft prevention and the prevention of vandalism.
Electronic detection devices, camera systems, motion sensors, physical
barriers and observation by security personnel are among the ways this
may be done. Restricted access, alarmed exits with delayed egress
hardware are among the possibilities. All security measures must also
comply with the building code.
(b) Many of the same elements are required for storage security as exhibit
security, but the physical barriers and locking arrangements are
necessarily more elaborate.
(c) Fire safety for collections and storage may entail providing fire-rated
enclosures over-and-above code requirements and vapor fire suppressant
systems.
7) Museum Functions
(a) Entrances - consider security, accessibility, and emergency egress.
(b) Public Amenities
(1) Consider placement and distribution of toilet facilities especially in
proximity to public amenities and entrances.
(2) Eating areas are a typical need for a facility that typically attracts
visitors for longer durations.
(3) Stores / Merchandising may be provided if appropriate.
(4) Consideration shall be given to provisions for religious activities and
for the religious character of certain exhibits.
(5) Auditoriums shall be considered for museum-related programs.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 92
b. The Design Basis Report must include:

1) A narrative of the goals and themes.
2) Describe flexibility needs.
3) Listing of proposed exhibits, identified as “permanent exhibits,” “rotating exhibits”
(within the museum’s permanent collection), “travelling exhibits” (prospective
outside touring exhibitions), and any others.
4) The museum’s availability for classes and groups, as well as special accessibility
considerations.
5) Environmental criteria used to govern the design of the overall building, specific
galleries, and storage spaces, such as ambient temperatures; humidity levels;
allowable VOC’s of adhesives and paints; UV and light.
6) Describe the general requirements for fire safety for collections and storage,
over-and-above code requirements.
7) Describe entrance security, accessibility, and emergency egress.
8) List and describe the other desired public amenities.
C. Education
a. The type of schools may include but are not limited to the following:
1) Pre-primary (kindergarten)
2) Primary (grade school)
3) Intermediate (middle school)
4) Secondary (high school)
5) Technical institutes
6) College/university
b. Building and Siting
1) For schools serving grades K-12, do not allow vehicular traffic paths to cross
pedestrian traffic paths. Students walking to school are to have a path to the
entry that does not require crossing a line of vehicular traffic. Students being
dropped off from busses or family vehicles shall likewise not cross-vehicular
traffic paths.
2) Drop-off and pick-up traffic is to flow in a single direction with separate entries
and exits.
3) To the extent possible, bus traffic shall be separated from family vehicles.
Busses are also to flow in a single direction; busses should never have to use
reverse gear.
4) For higher education institutions, priority is to be given to pedestrian safety, and
minimizing intersections of vehicles and pedestrians.
5) School grounds are to be enclosed by walls or fences. Pedestrian gates shall be
proved as needed. Provide vehicular access gates to facilitate access to all sides
of the building(s) for emergency and maintenance purposes.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 93
6) Guard facilities shall be at the front of the site, but away from the main entry.
2. Environmental Considerations
a. Minimize sound transmission between rooms and from the corridors.
b. Consider the appropriate noise reduction measures needed to enhance the
education experience.
c. Indoor air quality shall be a primary concern for school design. Air delivery velocities
should be low to prevent papers from moving and reduce air-handling noise.
d. The lighting level in each room is to be individually controlled to facilitate a variety of
learning experiences. In most classrooms, indirect lighting is preferred in order to
reduce shadows and glare, and provide more uniform light levels. Utilize daylighting
when possible.
e. Rooms shall be provided with individual temperature controls.
f. Visual connection to the outdoors is highly valued for classrooms and office areas.
(a) Consideration of space adjacencies; classrooms to one another and
common spaces, etc.
(b) When designing a School for younger children, consider using simple and
easily identifiable way-finding elements such as bright colors or patterns.
2) Security
(a) Safety and security of the students shall be the highest priority in the
design of schools.
(b) Provide highly visible entrances and exits.
(c) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized individuals
and vehicles.
(d) Provide areas for emergency shelter in the event of a natural disaster.
(e) Utilize both interior and exterior cameras.
3) Specialized Amenities
(a) Technology
(1) Flexible system that may update as technology improves
(2) Public address system
(b) Furnishings
(1) Sized appropriately for age of students
(2) Durability from heavy use and vandalism
(3) Cleanable and easily maintained
4) The design shall be flexible and offer the ability to adapt and change to the use
such as using operable walls in the gymnasium, cafeteria, and large classrooms.
5) Ventilation and airflow in areas of increased activity such as the gymnasium shall
be increased.
6) Provide sight line and distance analysis for auditoria and tiered classrooms.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 94
3. Additional Submittal Requirements

a. Coordination with the Ministry of Education
4. References
a. Consult all appropriate educational bodies for any additional applicable regulations
and guidelines. These include but are not limited to the following:
1) Ministry of Education
2) Ministry of Higher Education
3) General Organization for Technical Education and Vocational Training
D. Commercial
1. Hospitality
a. Goals of the Facility
1) Identify the project type.
(a) Hotel
(b) Resort
(c) Conference Center
(d) Other
2) Define the target client market.
3) Identify the franchise involved in the development.
4) Identify the type of facility within the franchise.
b. Building and Siting Considerations
1) Provide access for limousine and taxicab service including a taxi stand, if
applicable.
2) Consider volume of use in determining number and position of lobby entry doors.
3) Consider surface garage and underground parking options for vehicles.
4) Consider staff commuting (mode of transportation).
5) Consider siting for waste and recycling containers.
6) Consider access to laundry and housekeeping facilities.
c. Development Types
1) Hotels
(a) Consider franchise requirements for interior and exterior design and
signage.
(a) Consider number and types of rooms, including accessible guest rooms.
(b) Consider suite rooms, business travel, and long-term stay potential when
determining room count by type.
2) Resort units may be similar to timeshare units, again influenced by the franchise
requirements.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 95
3) Conference centers are typically business related. Consider type of units and
necessary amenities for conference gatherings. These would often be part of a
hotel complex.
d. Features
1) Consider the following as appropriate:
(a) Lobby and general gathering space
(1) Circulation
(2) Seating types and arrangements
(3) Front desk configuration
(4) Bell stand and concierge locations
(b) Indoor and/or outdoor swimming pools
(1) Size and depth of pool
(2) Accessibility
(3) Circulation and sitting areas
(4) Adjacent changing rooms
(5) Adjacent toilet and shower facilities
(6) Chemical and equipment rooms
(7) Ventilation requirements
(c) Exercise/fitness center
(1) Intended users
(2) Types of equipment provided
(3) Spatial relationships needed for the uses
(4) Electric loads and power feeds for equipment
(5) Ventilation
(6) Adjacent changing rooms
(7) Adjacent toilet rooms
(d) Spa and related services
(1) Plumbing, electrical and ventilation
(2) Storage
(3) Consider gender separation
(e) Personal grooming services
(1) Appropriate service requirements
(2) Consider gender separation
(f) Personal dry cleaning/laundry services
(1) Access to public
(2) Garment Care

Rev. 1 5.3 - 96
(3) Garment Storage

(4) General Storage
(g) Retail venues
(h) Concierge/travel services
(i) Religious amenities
(j) Restaurant(s)
(k) Game room/activity areas
(l) Meeting rooms and break-out spaces
(viii) Size according to group expectation.
(ix) Subdivide as appropriate.
(x) Provide acoustic separation as required.
(xi) Consider adjacency to food service, lobby, and toilet facilities.
(m) Other amenities as appropriate
e. Design Basis Report to include:
1) Define target market.
2) Identify franchise.
3) Identify project type.
4) Describe amenities.
2. Office Buildings
1) Goals of the facility
(a) Define whether the building is a single-tenant or multi-tenant building.
(b) Identify target floor area and/or building population,
(c) Define the building as a low-rise, (1-2 stories), mid-rise (3 to 10 stories), or
high-rise (buildings having occupied floors located more than 23 m above
the lowest level of fire department vehicle access). Provide building and
zoning code categorization as well.
(d) Define whether a stand-alone or part of a mixed-use development.
2) Building and siting
(a) Consider zoning restrictions on floor area ratio (F.A.R.), lot coverage, and
open space requirements.
(b) Consider zoning daylighting restrictions, in terms of any increased
setbacks that relate to building height.
(c) Consider navigation easements (air travel flight path height restrictions) if
near airfields.
b. Project Types
1) Low-Rise Considerations.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 97
(a) Lobby/elevator needs

(b) Screening of rooftop mechanical and communication equipment
2) Mid-Rise Considerations
(a) Consider elevator type: traction, hydraulic, or other.
(b) Screening of rooftop mechanical and communication equipment.
(c) Views
3) High-Rise Considerations
(a) Consider engaging an elevator consultant for number, type, speed, and
floor distribution of elevators.
(b) Consider inclined mechanical stairs (escalators) for multi-story lobbies.
(c) Consider views from the building.
(d) Consider adjacencies to other structures when determining building
configuration.
(e) Consideration of stair wall and elevator shaft pressurization.
c. Features
1) Design configuration.
(a) Consider parking needs. Determine amount of surface versus garage or
underground parking.
(b) Consider building population when sizing the lobby or lobbies.
(c) Consider access for emergency vehicles.
(d) Consider loading dock and delivery needs, including tenant moving van
access, regular deliveries, and overnight express pick-up and delivery.
(e) Consider utility issues: Capacity of utilities, ground mounted equipment
such as transformers and emergency generators, or other considerations.
2) Exterior Envelope
(a) Consider the appropriate glazing for environmental considerations and life
cycle costing.
(b) Consider appropriate roofing system.
(c) Consider tie-offs for window cleaning apparatus.
(d) Consider solar shading devices.
(e) Consider solar effects on exterior material when selecting.
3) Mechanical and Electrical Systems
(a) Consider building operation management systems.
(b) Provide utility analysis and life cycle cost considerations.
(c) Provide smoke evacuation systems per code requirements.
d. Design Basis Report to include
1) Special technical requirements or features

Rev. 1 5.3 - 98
e. Submit elevator study at 30%.

3. Cafeteria/Restaurants
1) Define the market group for the development.
2) Define the development as a:
(a) Single establishment
(b) Multiple service retail development
(c) Mixed-use development
b. Building and Siting Considerations
1) For single establishments, define the retail, commercial, or residential context
of the proposed development.
2) For multiple service retail establishments, define the retailing concept such as:
(a) Mall/indoor access facility
(b) Shopping center/exterior access facility
(c) Mixed use (define the scope and function of the entire development)
c. Development Types
1) Stand-alone Food Service/Cafeteria (supporting residential, educational,
governmental, etc.)
(a) State the name of the overall development.
(b) Identify the franchise name if applicable.
(c) State the square footage proposed.
(d) State and illustrate any interior or exterior design Standards of the retail
franchise.
(e) State the exterior design Standards of the retail development location.
(f) Consider parking, and both pedestrian and vehicular access.
(g) Provide adequate delivery/loading dock space.
(h) Provide adequate storage space for inventory or food storage.
(i) Provide employee and patron restrooms.
2) Restaurants
(a) Determine the target user group menu options.
(b) Determine the appropriate decor and furnishings.
(c) Provide adequate waiting area for patrons.
(d) Consider the menu when determining the food service equipment
necessary to support the menu offerings.
(e) Provide adequate refrigerator and freezer food storage. Consider
emergency power for walk-in and bulk refrigerators and freezers.
(f) Adequately ventilate food preparation areas.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 99
(g) Adequately condition the public and prep areas.

(h) Be sure sewage system and grease interceptors are adequately provided.
(i) Ensure appropriate lighting fixtures and illumination levels are provided for
both preparation and eating areas.
(j) Consider all special dietary restrictions in food storage and preparation.
(k) Consider the fire hazard risks with appropriate detection and suppression
systems.
d. Design Basis Report to include:
1) Special technical requirements or features
2) Define the user group.
3) Define the development type.
4) Define the service concept.
4. Auditoria
1) Goals of the Facility
(a) Define the goals of the facility in terms of auditorium type and prospective
audience.
(1) Establish the number of separate spaces, and the occupant load of
each.
(2) Target audience categorization may include, but not be limited to the
following:
(xii) Age group(s)
(xiii) Religious groups
(xiv) Special interest groups
(xv) Educational groups
(xvi) Combinations of the above
2) Building Configurations, Auditorium Types, and related requirements
(a) Acoustic isolation
(1) Mitigate external sound with respect to street noise, rail lines, bus
routes, and airplane flight paths when designing the exterior
envelope.
(2) Internal sound isolation: consider proximity to adjacent theaters
corridors, and lobbies when designing acoustic separation walls.
(3) Mitigate service and equipment noise such as HVAC systems,
plumbing, rain leaders, and elevators.
(b) Sound Systems
(1) Digital sound, “surround sound,” and the character of the audio
portion of motion pictures have advanced rapidly. This requires

Rev. 1 5.3 - 100
appropriate acoustic design within the theater and appropriate

acoustic separation.
(2) Speaker arrays shall consider the inherent digital distribution of film
audio tracks, such as left, center, right, and multiple station audio
tracks.
(3) Theater sound systems shall consider the appropriate sound
processor to go with the projection system.
(c) Video
(1) Provide digital inputs, including portable hard drives and encrypted
files.
(2) Provision for older formats (DVD, Blu-Ray, and other media may be
required.
(3) Consider the digital formats needed when selecting projection
equipment.
(d) Consider the potential video formats the projection equipment must
accommodate.
(e) Consider the size of theater and the intended viewing angles when
selecting screen type and size.
(f) Projection booth design shall consider the required equipment, the
operations, and space for access and egress.
3) Theaters for Live Performance and or Lectures
(a) Proscenium Theaters - General Layout:
(1) Consider the type of performance when selecting a proscenium
theater. Drama, musical theater, ballet, opera, and symphonic /
choral performances are among the more typical activities for this
venue.
(2) Proscenium theaters are those that involve an elevated stage at one
end of an assembly area. The stage is characterized by a
proscenium opening, some form of apron across the front at the
ceiling, and some closure to the sides that results in a stage opening
facing the audience.
(3) Proscenium theaters often have an additional stage extension that
projects toward the audience.
(4) A “fly gallery” or tall volume over the stage and behind the proscenium
opening is used to raise and lower various types of backdrops and
provide theatrical lighting.
(b) Thrust Stage and Arena Theaters (“Theater in the Round”) – General
Layout
(1) Consider whether potential uses may be better served with a thrust
stage, whether temporary or permanent.
(2) Thrust stages are platform stages that extend out into the audience
area and typically allow seating around three sides. Thrust stages
often are located at or only slightly above the bottom row of seating.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 101
(c) Consider the range of types of performances when creating the Program
of Spaces. These may include but not be limited to the following:
(1) Height of the stage performance area
(2) Potential use of riser platforms for seated performers, their quantity,
type and storage needs
(3) Chair storage for seated performers
(4) Equipment storage, such as music stands
(5) Proper storage for drama and theater elements
(6) Carpentry shop for set construction
(7) Paint booth for sets and props
(8) Costume creation areas
(9) Costume storage areas
(10) Dressing rooms
(11) “Green Room” for performers’ preparation areas
(12) Rehearsal/Practice rooms
(13) Toilet rooms for performers
(14) Off-stage areas for moving and relocating props during a
performance
4) Technical Requirements
(a) Stage Flooring – consider the uses when selecting the stage flooring. Live
performance stages are best served by engineered wood systems.
(b) Consider options for an orchestra pit such as fixed, on hydraulic lifts, or
backstage.
(c) Consider the acoustics of both the performance area and the seating area.
(d) Consider the use when selecting sound and lighting systems. These
systems must be flexible and adaptable.
5) Seating
(a) Study sight lines, both horizontally and vertically.
(b) Consider seat types and spacing, allowing for access and egress as well
as comfort.
6) Amenities
(a) Consider size, capacity, and placement of restroom facilities.
(b) Consider ushers’ rooms and janitorial needs.
(c) Consider areas for food, beverage, and merchandise sales, either
temporary or permanent in nature.
b. Design Basis Report to include
1) Describe special technical or features requirements.
2) Identify target users

Rev. 1 5.3 - 102
3) Identify desired amenities

4) Describe desired seating features
E. Residential
1. Multi-Family Housing
1) Goals
(a) Identify and define the target user population. This may include:
(1) Location/Neighborhood factors.
(2) Family unit demographics such as individuals, families, or seniors.
(3) Social demographics such as workers, executives, or religious.
(b) Define the intended facility responses to the above.
(1) Replicate adjacent housing markets.
(2) Identify living unit sizes, features, and number of bedrooms based on
family demographics.
(3) Identify and define building and site amenities.
2) Building Configuration
(a) Determine from the applicable zoning ordinance what the maximum lot
coverage, floor area ratio, or other density restrictions are.
(b) Develop an appropriate unit count and building “stacking,” meaning
numbers of stories and units per floor.
(c) Provide appropriate vehicle parking whether via garage or surface
parking. Parking counts must, at a minimum, address zoning
requirements and market study recommendations.
3) Consider amenities and features appropriate to the target population. These
may include but not be limited to the following:
(a) Multipurpose room(s) for meetings, parties, and other social gatherings
(b) Religious spaces
(c) Exercise/work out rooms
(d) Lounges and lobby space for informal interaction
(e) Exterior public patios (at grade or rooftop)
(f) Balconies
(g) Walking paths
(h) Swimming pool
(i) Outdoor recreation areas
(j) Gardens and grounds
(k) Playgrounds
(l) Trash and recycling rooms with chutes

Rev. 1 5.3 - 103
(m) Tenant storage lockers

(n) Recycling Storage Areas
b. Environment
1) The selection of the mechanical/HVAC system(s) shall be suited to the building
configuration. Energy efficient systems are vital. Selection of the HVAC
system(s) shall consider multiple viable options for which a detailed life-cycle
cost analysis is performed. Consider central vs. individual HVAC systems
2) Consider central vs. individual hot water heaters
3) Consider motion sensors for the lighting and HVAC for infrequently used
spaces.
4) The amount of window area and glass selection shall consider energy
conservation.
5) The acoustic environment is a paramount consideration. Wall types,
particularly unit-separation walls and corridor walls, and floor/ceiling
assemblies shall be constructed of assemblies with tested acoustic values. An
STC rating of 50 shall be considered a minimum, or as otherwise prescribed by
building code.
6) Detailing of construction must be configured to maintain the acoustic value
when joining different wall and/or floor/ceiling assemblies.
7) Penetrations through walls with acoustic criteria must not void acoustic criteria.
Electric outlets, blocking, and attachment of architectural elements such as
toilet accessories are included in this consideration.
8) Position of rooftop equipment or HVAC condensers shall not create acoustic or
vibration issues for residential units.
9) Toilet rooms and laundry exhaust grilles on the exterior shall be positioned
away from operable windows.
10) Mechanical rooms should be provided as necessary with separate entrances.
c. Traffic and Circulation
1) An elevator study shall be considered to establish the number, type, and speed
of elevators.
2) At least one elevator shall be capable of accommodating a stretcher to be used
by first responders during medical emergencies. Refer to the building code for
complete requirements. Larger elevators facilitate moving furniture and
equipment during the life of the building.
3) Consideration of requirements for moving vans, loading and unloading furniture
and elevator size and type, are necessary for occupants moving in and out.
d. Security & Privacy
1) Define the salient security issues of the building and select systems to
adequately address building and occupant security. These may include, but are
not limited to the following:
(a) Gated entry or secure lobby.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 104
(b) Camera system in vestibule tied to occupant television or computers, to

allow observation of entrants.
(c) Intercom system to lobby with electronic access triggered by the building
occupant.
(d) Exterior and interior public space video monitoring.
(e) Emergency call stations, if appropriate.
(f) On-site security personnel.
(g) Keyed and keyless access controls.
(h) Identify perimeter privacy concerns with respect to adjacent properties
(i) Privacy screens are discouraged. If unavoidable, they are required to be
code compliant; life safety takes priority over privacy.
e. The Design Basis Report shall include:
1) Special technical or amenity requirements
2) Identification and definition of the target market
3) The market study
4) Description of security requirements
2. Single-Family Housing
1) Goals
(a) Identify and define the target user population. This may include:
(1) Location/Neighborhood factors.
(2) Family unit demographics such as individuals, families, or seniors.
(3) Social demographics such as workers, executives, or religious.
(b) Define the intended facility responses to the above.
(1) Replicate adjacent housing markets.
(2) Identify living unit sizes, features, and number of bedrooms based on
family demographics.
(3) Identify and define building and site amenities.
2) Configuration
(a) Determine from the applicable zoning ordinance what the maximum lot
coverage, floor area ratio, or other density restrictions are.
(b) Develop an appropriate unit count and density.
(c) Provide appropriate vehicle parking whether via garage or surface parking.
Parking counts must, at a minimum, address zoning requirements and
market study recommendations.
3) Features
(a) Villa/House Units:
(1) Kitchen – cabinet and counter types, appliances, and special features

Rev. 1 5.3 - 105
(2) Bathroom – number, and spas and other amenities

(3) Living spaces (dining rooms, living rooms, family/game rooms, etc.)
(4) Special indoor and outdoor features (patios, balconies, and rooftops)
(5) Storage space
(6) Varying degrees of separation
(b) Development Amenities
(1) Gated Communities
(2) Swimming Pool
(3) Community Building
(4) Walking, fitness, and recreation facilities
(5) Gardens and Grounds
4) Environment
(a) The selection of the mechanical/HVAC system shall be suited to the
housing type. Selection of the HVAC system shall consider multiple viable
options for which a detailed life-cycle cost analysis is performed.
(b) Consider motion sensors for the lighting.
(c) The amount of window area and glass selection shall consider energy
conservation.
(d) The acoustic environment is a consideration. Wall types, particularly unit-
separation walls and corridor walls; and floor/ceiling assemblies shall be
constructed of assemblies with tested acoustic values.
(e) Position of mechanical equipment or HVAC condensers shall not create
acoustic or vibration issues for sleeping areas, or adjacent houses.
(f) Toilet rooms and laundry exhaust grilles on the exterior shall be positioned
away from operable windows and from adjacent housing unit.
5) Traffic and Circulation
(a) Determine number of parking spots or garage stalls.
(b) Consider emergency vehicle access and trash removal.
(c) Consideration of requirements for moving vans, loading and unloading
furniture and elevator size and type, are necessary for occupants moving
in and out.
6) Define the salient security and privacy issues of the development and select
systems to adequately address building and occupant security. These may
include, but not be limited to the following:
(a) Gated entry
(b) Identify perimeter privacy concerns with respect to adjacent properties.
(c) Privacy screens are discouraged. If unavoidable, they are required to be
code compliant; life safety takes priority over privacy.
(d) Camera systems

Rev. 1 5.3 - 106
(e) Emergency call stations, if appropriate

(f) On-site security personnel
b. Design Basis Report to include:
1) Technical and amenity requirements.
2) Description of desired development amenities
3) Description of desired security measures
F. Industrial and Utility

2. Industrial facilities may include but are not limited to the following:
a. Distribution
b. Warehouse
c. Waste Processing
d. Telecomm
e. Power Substations
f. Pump Stations
3. Refer to Section 3.1 for applicable codes, standards, and regulations. Many industrial
buildings need to comply with the additional requirements of the Higher Commission for
Industrial Safety with respect to safety, security, and fire regulations.
4. Control Room Design
a. Control rooms may be required for various reasons and shall be designed to meet
the specific project requirements as well as applicable industry standard
requirements.
b. Design considerations include:
1) Safety and security measures to protect the room and its occupants from
anticipated risks, hazards, and other events. Measures shall be diverse and
redundant to ensure that control may be maintained in an emergency.
2) Structure of the control room is to withstand major hazard events. Construction
materials shall be fire resistant for the duration of possible fire events. This is
likely in excess of any code requirements.
3) Ability to seal control room from ingress of toxic gases, as required.
4) Room layout derived from an appropriate task analysis method, such as link
analysis or hierarchical task analysis. The layout shall be effective under high
and low staffing levels, enable verbal and non-verbal communication, and
facilitate team working.
5) Appropriate lines of sight and view of monitoring systems and displays.
6) Lighting shall be adequate for the tasks with no perceptible flicker and no veiling
reflections created.
7) Noise levels shall not interfere with communications, warning signals, or mental
performance.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 107
8) Ergonomic considerations to promote operator effectiveness, good posture, and

appropriate reaches.
9) Provide adequate access and protection of equipment so that inadvertent
operation during maintenance is not possible.
5. Battery Rooms
a. Battery rooms shall meet applicable code and industry standard requirements, and
be approved by the RCJ.
b. Battery room design considerations may include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Depending on the size/quantity of batteries stored, the room may be considered
a hazardous occupancy. Refer to the applicable code for detailed requirements.
2) If more than one type of battery chemistry (e.g., lead-acid, nickel-cadmium, etc.)
are being used, each type shall be located in a separate battery room.
3) Comply with applicable OSHA requirements for ventilation, installed personal
safety measures (e.g., safety showers), etc. as required.
4) Spill control/containment measures as required by applicable codes or
standards.
5) Appropriate signage.
6. Ports/Docks
1) Define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not limited to the
following:
(a) Administrative – ensuring proper laws are being followed
(b) Industrial – import and export of goods
(c) Commercial – trade and sale of goods and transport of people
(d) Development – promote and stimulate the regional economy
2) Consider locations that offer natural protection from storms and rough waters.
3) Features
(a) Space requirements may include but are not limited to the following:
(1) Terminal
(i) Ticketing
(ii) Food and beverage
(iii) Retail
(2) Port structures may include:
(i) Wharf
(ii) Berth
(iii) Quay
(iv) Pier
(v) Jetty

Rev. 1 5.3 - 108
(vi) Dock
(vii) Mole
(viii) Breakwater
(ix) Dock basin
(x) Fuel stations
4) Public access shall begin with whatever vehicular or pedestrian means is used
to reach the facility. Consider locations that provide accessible routes to the
venue and adjacencies to public transportation.
b. Environmental Considerations
1) Resistance to salt
2) Resistance to storms
3) Depth of water and types of boats to be used
4) Attempt to mitigate oily water
5) Reduction of noise from surrounding environment
6) Mitigation of air emissions
7) Consideration of sea level changes
8) Protection from coastal erosion
9) Protection from tides
10) Protection from wave impacts
c. Traffic Flow and Way-finding
1) Establish control points into main terminal to create security stations.
2) Docks shall be marked with clearly visible signage.
3) Information desks/kiosks shall be made available to assist passenger way-
finding.
d. Security
1) Pedestrian and vehicular access.
2) Consider required blast criteria for portions of the facility near public vehicular
traffic.
e. Specialized amenities may include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Public address system
2) Safety lighting
3) Light house or beacon
4) Furnishing shall be chosen with durability and water resistance as primary
concerns
5) Impact resistant elements to protect dock structures
6) Provide structural analysis for dock ties

Rev. 1 5.3 - 109
G. Specialty Applications
1. Military Installations
1) Define the overall goals of the installation. These may include but are not limited
to the following:
(a) Creating a secured environment for military operations.
(b) Creating a secured and private environment for housing military personnel.
2) Identify the types of facilities within the installation, and their goals. These may
include but are not limited to the following:
(a) Administrative purposes.
(b) Storage and maintenance facilities
(c) Base amenities, including medical and retail facilities.
(d) Housing.
(e) Training Facilities.
(f) Weapons and ammunition storage and training.
3) Building and siting design considerations:
(a) Limit the installation’s proximity to taller buildings.
(b) Consider the landscape and vegetation to prevent visual security
breaches.
(c) Locate such as to limit accessibility to the public.
(d) Comply with all Saudi Arabian military requirements.
b. Space requirements of military facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
1) Blast Protection. Provide structures that eliminate progressive failure and are
blast resistant.
2) Perimeter control: Walls, fences, and/or watchtowers.
c. Consider the mitigation of environmental concerns that may hinder the privacy or
security of the facility.
d. Traffic Flow and Way-finding
1) Control traffic flow to and from the installation.
2) Regulate traffic within the installation.
e. Security measures may include, but are not limited to:
1) Automated information systems and screening areas.
2) Limited and secure entry points.
3) Security towers shall provide sight lines to the entirety of the facility and
neighboring area as necessary.
4) Warning signs shall provide clear boundaries for the facility.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 110
5) Security fencing shall block views as necessary for the privacy of the facility’s
operations.
6) Perimeter barriers, where provided, shall offer appropriate blast and ballistic
requirements.
7) Perimeter roads and clear zones.
8) Alarm systems.
f. Additional amenities may include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Security system
2) Security lighting
3) Camera monitoring system
2. Water Treatment Plants
(a) Identify and define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not
limited to the following:
(1) Uninterrupted water supply
(2) Uninterrupted water supply
(3) Create an effective distribution system
(4) Optimize supply capacity
(5) High water quality and protection of supplies
(b) The type of water treatment may include but are not limited to:
(1) Water treatment facility
(2) Wastewater treatment plant
(3) Pump Station
2) Coordinate all incoming or outgoing utilities with the utility infrastructure.
3) Space requirements of Water Treatment may include but are not limited to the
following:
(a) Pools/ponds
(b) Chemical storage
(c) Water towers
(d) Treatment pipe and tank system
4) Chlorination Facilities Environmental Considerations
(a) Consideration shall be given to prevent contamination of water from the
environment.
(b) Consideration shall be given to prevent contamination of environment by
chemicals or unclean water.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 111
(c) Airflow, ventilation, and exhausted air filtration shall be utilized to maximize
air quality at facility and in neighboring community.
(d) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(e) Refer also to NFPA 55 for system requirements.
(a) Maximize sight lines for ease of operation and maintenance.
(b) Provide road/gravel access to pools for cleaning/grit removal.
6) Security
(a) Prevent access of unauthorized persons or vehicles.
(b) Provide screening from neighboring community.
7) Additional amenities may include, but are not limited to, the following:
(a) Integrated automated control and electrical systems.
(b) Remote monitoring and control.
8) Design Basis Report to include:
(a) Flow chart analysis
(b) Computational fluid-dynamics modeling of all on-site or off-site airborne or
water borne contaminants.

Rev. 1 5.3 - 112
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.4
MECHANICAL
1 2020 General update YQ TJC TJC MRC OMQ


SECTION 5.4 MECHANICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FIRE SUPPRESSION ................................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Scope ............................................................................................................................. 1
2. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
4. Definitions (specific to this Section) ............................................................................... 2
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 3
C. Fire Protection Specialties ............................................................................................. 3
1. Valves ............................................................................................................................ 3
2. Backflow Preventer ........................................................................................................ 4
3. Fire Department Connection ......................................................................................... 4
4. Roof Manifold................................................................................................................. 5
5. Floor Control Assembly ................................................................................................. 5
6. Flow Switch Tester ........................................................................................................ 5
D. Sprinklers ....................................................................................................................... 6
1. System Design............................................................................................................... 6
2. Types ............................................................................................................................. 6
E. Piping and fitting material .............................................................................................. 8
1. Pipe ................................................................................................................................ 8
F. Fire Suppression Standpipes ........................................................................................ 9
1. Fire Suppression Standpipe Design .............................................................................. 9
G. Fire Pumps .................................................................................................................... 9
1. Design ............................................................................................................................ 9
H. Fire Suppression Systems ............................................................................................ 10
1. Automatic Wet Systems ............................................................................................... 10
2. Dry Systems ................................................................................................................. 10
3. Pre-Action System ........................................................................................................ 10
4. Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems ..................................................................... 11
5. Fire Suppression Systems for Commercial Kitchen Hoods ......................................... 11
PLUMBING ................................................................................................................... 13
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 13
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 13

Rev. 1 5.4 - i
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 13
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 14
5. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 15
6. Standards and References ........................................................................................... 15
7. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 16
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 16
1. Requirements ............................................................................................................... 16
C. Sustainability Design for Plumbing Systems ................................................................ 16
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 16
2. Strategies for Increasing Water Efficiency ................................................................... 16
D. Piping Systems ............................................................................................................. 17
1. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 17
2. Installation..................................................................................................................... 17
3. Domestic Hot Water and Cold Water Piping ................................................................ 17
4. Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping .................................................................................. 18
5. Storm and Secondary (Emergency) Storm Drainage Piping ........................................ 19
6. Compressed Air Piping ................................................................................................. 20
7. Natural Gas Piping ....................................................................................................... 22
8. Vacuum Piping ............................................................................................................. 22
E. Equipment..................................................................................................................... 23
1. Water Softeners ............................................................................................................ 23
2. Water Heaters............................................................................................................... 24
3. Pumps........................................................................................................................... 28
4. Facility Water Storage Tanks ....................................................................................... 31
5. Interceptors ................................................................................................................... 33
6. Special Waste Systems ................................................................................................ 35
7. Backflow Preventers ..................................................................................................... 37
8. Trap Seal Primer Valve ................................................................................................ 38
9. Water Meters ................................................................................................................ 38
10. Pressure Gauges .......................................................................................................... 38
11. Thermometers .............................................................................................................. 39
F. Plumbing Fixtures ......................................................................................................... 39
1. Quantities...................................................................................................................... 39

Rev. 1 5.4 - ii
2. Quality ........................................................................................................................... 39
3. Type .............................................................................................................................. 39
G. Laboratory Piping And Appurtenances ......................................................................... 44
1. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 44
2. Installation..................................................................................................................... 44
3. Non-Potable Hot and Cold Water Piping ...................................................................... 44
4. Tepid (Emergency) Water Piping ................................................................................. 45
5. Laboratory Grade Water Piping .................................................................................... 46
6. Laboratory Waste and Laboratory Vent Piping ............................................................ 47
7. Laboratory Compressed Air Piping .............................................................................. 48
8. Laboratory Vacuum Piping ........................................................................................... 49
9. Specialty Piping ............................................................................................................ 50
H. Laboratory Equipment And Appurtenances ................................................................. 52
1. Tepid (Emergency) Water Mixing Valve ....................................................................... 52
2. Laboratory Neutralization Tanks................................................................................... 52
3. Laboratory Grade Water Systems ................................................................................ 53
4. Laboratory Compressed Air System ............................................................................ 55
5. Laboratory Vacuum System ......................................................................................... 57
6. Laboratory Nitrogen System ......................................................................................... 57
I. Medical Piping And Appurtenances ............................................................................. 58
1. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 58
2. Installation..................................................................................................................... 58
3. Nitrous Oxide Piping ..................................................................................................... 58
4. Carbon Dioxide Piping .................................................................................................. 59
5. Oxygen Piping .............................................................................................................. 60
6. Medical Air Piping ......................................................................................................... 60
7. Medical Vacuum Piping ................................................................................................ 61
8. Specialty Systems Piping ............................................................................................. 62
J. Safety Equipment ......................................................................................................... 62
1. Eyewashes ................................................................................................................... 62
2. Emergency Showers .................................................................................................... 62
K. Vibration........................................................................................................................ 63
1. Control .......................................................................................................................... 63
L. Condensate Drainage And Collection Systems ........................................................... 63
1. Refer to GEM Section 5.4.3 HVAC. ............................................................................. 63

Rev. 1 5.4 - iii
M. Specialty Plumbing Systems ........................................................................................ 63

1. Water Hammer Arrester ............................................................................................... 63
2. Strainers ....................................................................................................................... 64
N. Valves ........................................................................................................................... 64
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 64
2. Butterfly Valve............................................................................................................... 64
3. Gate Valve .................................................................................................................... 65
4. Ball Valve ...................................................................................................................... 65
5. Check Valve.................................................................................................................. 65
6. Plug Valves ................................................................................................................... 66
7. Balancing Valve ............................................................................................................ 66
HVAC ............................................................................................................................ 67
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 67
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 67
2. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 68
3. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 68
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 68
5. Definitions (specific to this section) .............................................................................. 70
6. Codes and Standards ................................................................................................... 70
7. Design Criteria .............................................................................................................. 71
8. Heating Load Calculations ............................................................................................ 73
9. Cooling Load Calculations ............................................................................................ 74
10. Energy Modeling ........................................................................................................... 76
11. Building Envelope Thermal and Moisture Properties ................................................... 79
12. Refrigerants .................................................................................................................. 80
13. Sustainability................................................................................................................. 81
14. Redundancy.................................................................................................................. 81
15. Units and Conversions ................................................................................................. 83
16. HVAC Software ............................................................................................................ 83
B. HVAC SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................... 83
1. Central Heating and Cooling ........................................................................................ 83
2. Air Handling Distribution ............................................................................................... 85
3. In-Room Terminal Systems .......................................................................................... 90
4. Applied Heat Pump and Heat Recovery Systems ........................................................ 92
5. Forced Air Heating and DX Cooling Systems .............................................................. 93

Rev. 1 5.4 - iv
6. Steam Systems ............................................................................................................ 93

7. Hydronic Heating and Cooling ...................................................................................... 95
8. Condenser Water Systems ........................................................................................... 99
9. Variable-Refrigerant Flow Systems ............................................................................. 100
10. Dust Collection Systems .............................................................................................. 102
11. Stair Pressurization Systems ....................................................................................... 104
12. District Cooling and Central Plant Systems ................................................................. 104
13. Building Automation (Management) System ............................................................... 109
C. HVAC EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES ................................................................ 112
1. Air Handling Equipment and Accessories ................................................................... 112
2. Heating Equipment and Accessories .......................................................................... 122
3. Cooling Equipment and Accessories ........................................................................... 124
4. Common System Components.................................................................................... 129
D. HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS .............................................. 133
1. General Design Considerations................................................................................... 134
2. Building Operations ..................................................................................................... 163
GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE ............................................................................ 168
A. Public/Government ...................................................................................................... 168
1. DX systems are most suitable for buildings with cooling demand 200 Tons or less. For
buildings with cooling demands greater than 200 Tons, consider a chiller water system ...... 168
2. Ventilation systems shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 – Ventilation
for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low Rise Residential Buildings. .................................................................................. 168
3. All outdoor air intakes shall have sand trap louvers. ................................................... 168
4. Temperature control zones for public/government buildings should not exceed 200 sq m in
floor area, except for large open assembly areas. Smaller control zones will generally provide better
comfort, but may not be economical. For large open assembly areas, temperature control zones can
be as large as 1000 sq m. Assembly areas with multiple levels should have a separate
temperature control zone for each level. ................................................................................. 168
5. For large assembly areas, air should be supplied so that it is directed at the front of the
occupants’ bodies. If air cannot be adequately distributed from the front of the occupants, it may be
distributed from the side at a velocity not exceeding 0.15 m/S. In no case should air be delivered
from the occupants’ backs. ..................................................................................................... 168
6. All supply air shall be ducted. ...................................................................................... 168
7. Ceiling plenums may be used for return air paths in accordance with the International
Mechanical Code. ................................................................................................................... 168
8. Means must be provided for de-energizing HVAC when their space is unoccupied.
Preference would be that the HVAC can be de-energized on a zone-by-zone basis............. 168

Rev. 1 5.4 - v
B. Commercial.................................................................................................................. 168
buildings with cooling demands greater than 200 Tons, consider a chiller water system. ..... 168
2. Ventilation systems shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 – Ventilation
for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low Rise Residential Buildings. .................................................................................. 168
3. All outdoor air intakes shall have sand trap louvers .................................................... 168
4. Temperature control zones for commercial buildings should not exceed 200 sq m in floor
area. Smaller control zones will generally provide better comfort, but may not be economical.
168
5. All supply air shall be ducted. ...................................................................................... 168
Mechanical Code. A single ceiling return air plenum must not serve multiple tenants. Return air for
each tenant must be kept separate back to the return fan or air handling unit. ...................... 168
7. Means must be provided for de-energizing each tenant’s HVAC when their space is
unoccupied. ............................................................................................................................. 168
C. Residential ................................................................................................................... 168
1. Residential HVAC shall consist of DX cooling, with independent blower coil/air handling units
for each dwelling unit. ............................................................................................................. 168
2. Where heating is required, utilize a heat pump. .......................................................... 169
3. Any equipment requiring maintenance shall be located in an area that is accessible without
entering the dwelling unit. Violating the privacy of the dwelling unit occupants is not acceptable.
Equipment requiring maintenance includes Compressors, condensers, blower coil/air handling units
and filters. ................................................................................................................................ 169
4. All supply air shall be ducted to the spaces served. Supply air system shall include an
outdoor air intake with sand trap louver, minimum MERV 8 filters, DX cooling coil, centrifugal cabinet
fan, supply air ducts and return air ducts. ............................................................................... 169
5. Return air shall be ducted and shall not be transferred room-to-room........................ 169
6. Each dwelling shall have a minimum of one temperature control zone. ..................... 169
7. Residential exhaust systems shall be designed in accordance with the Saudi Mechanical
Code 501-CR, Sections 504 & 505. Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust discharge(s) do
not affect the neighboring residences. .................................................................................... 169
8. Residential bathrooms shall have an exhaust. ............................................................ 169
D. Industrial ...................................................................................................................... 169
1. Reference to other sections of the GEM ..................................................................... 169
2. General ........................................................................................................................ 169
3. Ventilation System Design ........................................................................................... 170
4. Industrial Air Conditioning ............................................................................................ 170
E. Specialty Applications .................................................................................................. 170

Rev. 1 5.4 - vi
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 170

Rev. 1 5.4 - vii
SUBSECTION 5.4.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION
FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. General
1. Scope
a. This Guiding Engineering Manual establishes the Royal Commissions mandatory,
minimally acceptable, requirements for new and renovation projects. This Manual
provides:
1) The criteria for planning, design, construction, sustainment, restoration, and /
or modernization for building fire suppression systems.
2) The policies and technical information to be used, however project conditions
may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of Guiding Engineering Manual are not intended to prohibit the use of
alternative systems, methods, or devices not specifically described; however, the use
of alternative systems, methods, or devices can be used upon approval from the Royal
Commission.
c. If a conflict is discovered between the Guiding Engineering Manual, the Guiding
Procurement and Construction Specification, and the Typical Construction Details or
Drawings, the Guiding Engineering Manual shall take precedence.
d. The RCJ is the final Authority Having Jurisdiction in Jubail Industrial City.
e. The design of fire suppression system requires coordination and integration with other
disciplines such as, but not limited to, the fire alarm electrical design for alarms related
to tamper and flow switches, the plumbing design for drains from various elements of
the fire suppression system, the electrical design for power to the fire pump and
automatic transfer switch and all disciplines for space to install piping and equipment.
2. Introduction
a. The Guiding Engineering Manual:
1) This Subsection establishes the uniform design criteria and standards for fire
suppression systems and equipment to enable quality, and cost effective
buildings and facilities that meet the needs and expectations of the end users.
2) Provides explicit design criteria that will be used by the Royal Commission to
evaluate if all fire suppression design criteria goals and requirements have
been met.
b. The following objectives shall be reflected in the fire protection programming and
design:
1) Design Quality – The Royal Commission is committed to excellence in the
design and development of its sites and buildings. This requires an integrated
approach by all disciplines to achieve the highest quality pipe work design while
providing cost effective fire suppression systems.
2) Flexibility and Adaptability is required to accommodate renovations and future
expansion without replacement of central building equipment or components.
3) Sustainability - The essential principles of sustainable design shall address:
Energy, materials, water, environmental quality, operations, and maintenance.
3. Abbreviations

Rev. 1 5.4 - 1
a. Abbreviations in general are referenced in Section 2.2.

b. Abbreviations (specific to this Section)
2) ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
4) ASPE: American Society of Plumbing Engineers
6) FM: Factory Mutual
8) IFC: International Fire Code
9) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fitting
Industry
11) RCJ: Royal Commission of Jubail
13) UL: Underwriters Laboratories
4. Definitions (specific to this Section)
a. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar subsequent requirements.
b. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection,
placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting,
cleaning, and similar requirements.
c. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
d. Concealed Interior: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants.
e. Concealed Exterior: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
f. Exposed Interior: Exposed to view indoors (not concealed).
g. Exposed Exterior: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions.
h. Finished Space: Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, space above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, tunnels, and interstitial spaces.
i. Conditioned: Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling.
j. Unconditioned: Spaces without heating or cooling including ceiling plenums.
k. Indoors: Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
l. Outdoors: Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
m. Atmosphere: The same as outdoors.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 2

a. The following documents establish the minimum requirement for the design of fire
suppression systems:
1) Saudi Fire Code SBC 801-CR
2) NFPA 1 – Fire Code
3) NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
4) NFPA 13 – Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems
5) NFPA 13D – Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems for One and Two
Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes
6) NFPA 13R – Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and including
Four Stories in Height
7) NFPA 14 – Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
8) NFPA 20 – Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps
9) NFPA 22 – Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
10) NFPA 24 – Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
11) International Building Code
12) International Fire Code
b. In the event of conflict between Codes and this document, the various sections of the
Saudi Building Code shall govern.
B. Commissioning
Refer to Section 4.5.9 – Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning requirements.
C. Fire Protection Specialties
1. Valves
a. Control Valves
1) Provide control valves at the inlet and outlet of all items of equipment that may
require maintenance and/or testing to avoid the need to drain the upstream and
downstream piping when maintenance or testing is performed. Items of
equipment requiring upstream and downstream control valves include, but are
not limited to fire pumps, alarm check valves, backflow preventers, and
pressure regulating valves.
2) All valves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 12 Bar. In the event fire
pump operation or building height results in pressures exceeding 12 Bar, the
valve pressure rating shall be 14 Bar.
3) All control valves shall have a monitor switch to indicate if the valve is not in the
full-open position. Monitor switches shall be single pole, double throw (SPDT)
type switch with contacts for interconnection to the building fire alarm system.
4) Valves size 65 mm and smaller shall be UL listed/FM approved butterfly valves
with wheel operator and integral, tamper resistant SPDT monitor switch for
interconnection with building fire alarm system.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 3
5) Valves size larger than 65 mm shall be UL listed/ FM approved listed butterfly

valves with integral tamper resistant SPDT monitor switch.
6) Outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) gate valves, UL listed/FM approved are
permitted for use upstream and downstream from backflow preventers and fire
pumps. OS&Y gate valves shall have resilient seats.
b. Pressure Regulating Valves
1) For small portions of the system or where system pressure exceeds the
pressure rating of the sprinklers, provide a pressure regulating valve in the
branch or cross main feeding those components. Provide regulating valve
complete with a pressure gauge up and down stream of the valve, and a
pressure relief valve with its discharge piped to a floor drain or mop sink.
2) For large sections of the fire protection system that exceed the pressure rating
of the components, provide a pilot operated pressure regulating valve. Valve
body shall be epoxy coated. Provide regulating valve complete with a pressure
gauge up and down stream of the valve, and a pressure relief valve with its
discharge piped to a floor drain or mop sink.
c. Post Indicator Valves
1) Post indicator valves shall be provided on the fire water service entrance to the
building. The valve shall be a post mounted non-rising stem gate valve that
extends to bury depth of the pipe and provided with a supervisory switch. Post
valve shall be provided a minimum of 12 m from building. Switch shall be wired
to building fire alarm system.
d. Check Valves
1) General purpose check valves shall be provided in the fire protection system
where flow direction is regulated. Valves shall be UL Listed/FM Approved
swing check valves.
(a) Typical locations requiring check valves include but are not limited to,
piping between fire department connection and sprinkler supply piping,
downstream from a fire pump.
2) Riser check valves shall be provided at the base of all fire protection system
risers. Valves shall be UL Listed/FM Approved swing check valves.
3) Fire Alarm Riser Check Valve should provide supervisory Switch and pressure
switch (or flow switch) to monitor the status and should be wired to building Fire
alarm system
2. Backflow Preventer
a. Backflow preventer shall be provided in the water service to the fire protection system.
The backflow preventer shall be detector double check style with stainless steel body
and low pressure loss characteristics. The backflow preventers shall be insulated with
fiberglass or rubber cellular insulation to prevent condensation.
3. Fire Department Connection
a. A fire department connection shall be provided for each building to facilitate the fire
department connecting to the building fire suppression system. The fire department
connection shall be selected in accordance with the RC Guideline Specification for
Fire Protection.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 4
b. The fire department connection shall be located street side where the fire department
will respond to the building in the event of a fire. The fire department connection shall
be easily visible and accessible. The location shall be a minimum of 12 m from the
building, preferably in the same general location as the post indicator valve.
c. The inlet of the fire department connection shall be 500 mm above grade.
d. The fire department connection shall have an escutcheon plate labeled “STANDPIPE
AND AUTO SPKR”.
e. The fire department connection shall be protected by 100 mm carbon steel pipe
bollards to prevent it from being damaged by vehicles.
f. Fire department connections shall be post mounted, siamese type, and shall be 65
mm x 65 mm x 100 mm. Inlet shall be furnished with a self-closing clapper valve, and
shall have threads suitable for coupling to fire department hoses.
g. A UL listed check valve and a 20 mm ball drip shall be provided where the piping to
the fire department connection joins the sprinkler supply piping system. Ball drip shall
be piped to floor drain or to exterior.
4. Roof Manifold
a. A roof manifold shall be provided where required by NFPA 14 and/or the Saudi
Building Code 801 Fire Protection, as well as by the AHJ, for addressing a fire from
the roof level.
b. Roof manifold shall be a two-way Hydrant, 100 mm x 65 mm x 65 mm with caps and
chains. Manifold shall be supplied with a plate lettered "WALL HYDRANT." Threads
shall be compatible for coupling to fire department hoses.
c. Roof manifold shall be UL Listed / FM Approved automatic ball drip for roof manifold.
Drain line shall be extended to, and terminate in, a floor drain or at roof with splash
block.
5. Floor Control Assembly
a. A floor control assembly shall be provided at each sprinkler branch connection to a
standpipe or sprinkler riser.
b. Floor control assembly shall comprise of a control valve, a riser manifold, and a test
and drain assembly to provide for testing and drainage of the sprinkler system. The
floor control assembly shall have threaded connections and be FM approved. The
outlet of the test and drain assembly shall be piped to a drain riser
c. All Flow Zone Control Valves should provide supervisory Switch and flow switch to
monitor the status and should be wired to building Fire alarm system
6. Flow Switch Tester
a. The flow switch tester shall be provided to test the flow switch without the need to spill
the test water to drain. The unit shall consist of a water flow switch, pump, isolation
ball valves, check valve and fittings. The unit shall be rated for a working pressure of
12 Bar at 50° C.
b. Manifold piping shall be schedule 10. Pump shall be fitted with 230 volt motor (this
shall match SEC requirements) and be controlled with a local key switch also rated
for 230 volts. Key switch shall be furnished with a back box capable of surface or
recessed mounting. Unit shall be UL listed and FM approved. Provide one flow switch
tester manifold for each floor level of the facility.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 5
D. Sprinklers
1. System Design
a. Provide sprinkler systems for buildings where required by the Saudi Fire Code 801-
CR, the International Building Code or NFPA. The Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Section
903 Automatic Sprinkler Systems, shall be the primary reference for sprinkler system
design. The International Building Code and NFPA shall be referenced for subjects
and issues not addressed in the Saudi Fire Code.
b. Types of fire suppression systems are discussed further in Subsection 5.4.1.H.
c. The entire sprinkler system shall be hydraulically designed based on the results of the
new water supply flow test conducted by the contractor or the local water authority.
The consultant shall make arrangements with Marafiq, the local water authority, for
the flow test and shall witness the test. A minimum of 0.7 Bar cushion shall be
provided between the water supply curve and the system design point.
1) Hydraulic sprinkler design software shall meet the requirements established by
NFPA.
d. Hydraulic calculations shall be approved by the RCJ and meet the requirement
established by NFPA 13.
e. Fire water flow design criteria shall be based on the requirements established in the
Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Appendix B.
f. Water velocity in pipes shall not exceed 6 m/s.
g. Special Occupancies
1) The Saudi Fire Code 801-CR addresses the design of fire protection for special
occupancies in dedicated Chapters relating specifically to each occupancy
type. Design fire protection for special occupancies in strict accordance with
the Saudi Fire Code 801-CR.
(a) Design fire protection for paint shops and other finishing operations in
strict accordance with the Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Chapter 24,
Flammable Finishes.
(b) Design fire protection for storage of flammable liquids and chemicals in
strict accordance with the Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Chapter 57,
Flammable and Combustible Liquids
2. Types
a. Standard response
1) Exposed (upright or pendant) sprinklers
(a) Exposed sprinklers shall only be used in applications where there are no
ceilings.
(b) Exposed sprinklers shall be large glass bulb operated automatic
sprinklers with chrome finish. Temperature rating shall be 68°C at 12
bar, unless the application dictates the need for a higher temperature
and or pressure rating.
(c) Provide wire sprinkler guards on sprinklers where subject to mechanical
damage.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 6
(d) Provide escutcheon to match adjacent finishes for semi-recessed

applications.
2) Concealed sprinklers
(a) Concealed sprinklers shall be used only in special architectural finish
areas.
(b) Concealed sprinklers shall be chosen in accordance with NFPA 13,
Chapter 6.
(c) Cover plate color shall match ceiling color.
3) Horizontal sidewall
(a) Horizontal sidewall sprinklers shall only be used only in light hazard
applications where they will eliminate the need for ceiling mounted or
exposed overhead sprinklers entirely, and either reduce the total number
of sprinklers required, or eliminate aesthetic issues of ceiling mounted or
exposed overhead sprinklers.
(b) Horizontal sidewall sprinklers shall be glass bulb operated automatic
sprinklers rated for 68°C at 12 bar, unless the application dictates a
higher temperature and/or pressure rating.
4) Dry-type sprinklers
5) Where sprinklers must be installed in areas subject to freezing and requiring
minimum area coverage, dry pendent, dry concealed or dry sidewall sprinklers
may be used.
(a) Dry pendant sprinklers
(b) Dry pendent sprinkler shall be chrome plated large glass bulb operated,
rated for 68°C at 12 bar.
(c) Sprinkler going from a warm space into a cold space shall be installed
with a manufactured sprinkler boot or appropriate calking and insulation.
(d) Dry concealed sprinklers
(e) Dry concealed sprinkler shall be large glass bulb operated, rated for
68°C at 12 bar.
(f) Cover plate color shall match ceiling color and be rated for 57°C.
(g) Sprinkler going from a warm space into a cold space shall be installed
with a manufactured sprinkler boot or appropriate calking and insulation.
(h) Dry horizontal sidewall sprinklers
(i) Dry horizontal sidewall sprinkler shall be chrome plated large glass bulb
operated, rated for 68°C at 12 bar.
(j) Provide with factory made adjustable chrome plated escutcheon.
(k) All dry type sprinklers going from a warm space into a cold space shall
be installed with a manufactured sprinkler boot or appropriate calking
and insulation.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 7
b. Quick response
1) Quick response sprinklers maybe used in place of standard response sprinklers
where permitted by the referenced Codes and Standards, and where approved
by the AHJ.
2) Exposed (upright or pendant)quick response sprinklers
(a) Exposed quick response sprinklers shall be chrome plated, glass bulb
automatic sprinklers rated for 68°C at 12 Bar.
3) Concealed quick response sprinklers
(a) Concealed quick response sprinklers shall be solder link operated
automatic sprinkler rated at 71°C at 12 Bar. Cover plate color shall be
selected by the architect and be rated at 57°C.
4) Horizontal sidewall quick response sprinklers
(a) Horizontal sidewall quick response sprinklers shall be chrome plated,
solder link sprinkler rated at 68°C at 12 Bar.
5) Semi-recessed quick response sprinklers
(a) Semi recessed quick response sprinklers shall be chrome plated, glass
bulb operated rated at 68˚C at 12 Bar.
6) “Sealed” concealed quick response sprinklers
(a) Sealed concealed quick response sprinklers for areas where room
pressurization with respect to surrounding spaces must be maintained by
the mechanical systems shall be fusible solder link recessed sprinkler
with gasketed cover plate rated for 71˚C at 12 Bar.
c. Early Suppression Fast Response Sprinklers
1) Early suppression fast response systems are quick responding, high volume
systems that provide protection for high piled storage occupancies. They
suppress a fire by discharging a high volume of water directly to the fire to
reduce the heat release rate. They deliver large droplets of water at high
velocity to knock down the fire plume.
2) Early suppression fast response sprinklers deliver water at an output rate of 6.3
L/S, which is as much as four times the delivery rate of a standard sprinkler.
3) Early suppression fast response heads are available in pendant or upright
configurations
4) Properly design early suppression fast response systems can be installed at
the ceiling, and can eliminate the need for in-rack sprinklers in warehouse
spaces
5) Early suppression fast response sprinklers are available at temperature ratings
of 74˚C and 101˚C.
6) ESFR type sprinklers are recommended to be used in large storage areas with
high storage racks
E. Piping and fitting material
1. Pipe

Rev. 1 5.4 - 8
a. Design of all fire suppression systems shall be based on the material requirements
set forth in the NFPA Standards.
b. Material requirements for sprinkler systems shall be as set forth in NFPA 13 –
Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
c. Material requirements for standpipe systems shall be as set forth in NFPA 14 –
Standard for the installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
d. Material requirements for dry chemical extinguishing systems shall be as set forth in
NFPA 17 – Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
e. Supports and anchors for fire suppression system piping and equipment shall be
coordinated with the design requirements in Section 5.2, Structural.
F. Fire Suppression Standpipes
1. Fire Suppression Standpipe Design
a. Fire suppression standpipes shall be designed in strict accordance with the Saudi Fire
Code 801-CR, Section 905, Standpipe Systems, with the International Building Code
and with NFPA 14 – Standpipe and Hose Systems. The Saudi Fire Code 801-CR
shall be the primary reference for sprinkler system design. The International Building
Code and NFPA 14 shall be referenced for subjects and issues not addressed in the
Saudi Fire Code.
b. Standpipe classifications shall be in accordance with NFPA 14 – Standpipe and Hose
Systems and the International Building Code Section 905.
c. Provide a standpipe of the proper classification for the given construction in
accordance with the Saudi Fire Code 801-CR.
d. Provide fire hose valves and cabinets in accordance with the Saudi Fire Code 801-
CR and NFPA 14 – Standpipe and Hose Systems.
G. Fire Pumps
1. Design
a. Design fire pumps in strict accordance with the Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Section 913,
Fire Pumps and with NFPA 20 – Installation of Stationary Pumps. The Saudi Fire
Code 801-CR shall be the primary reference for fire pump design. NFPA 20 shall be
referenced for subjects and issues not addressed in the Saudi Fire Code.
b. Where the building has an emergency generator and the generator can be selected
with adequate capacity to support an electric fire pump, the fire pump should be
electrically driven. Otherwise the fire pumps shall be diesel engine driven.
1) Fuel storage, piping and delivery for diesel driven fire pumps shall be designed
in strict accordance with NFPA 20, and shall be approved by the RCJ and the
AHJ. Single wall fuel storage tanks shall be provided with spill containment in
accordance with NFPA 20.
c. The pump room shall be ventilated in accordance with NFPA 20. For an electric driven
fire pump, provisions shall be made to prevent the room temperature from exceeding
the maximum temperature rating of the motors or any controls in the room.
1) Ventilation from outdoors shall be drawn through sand trap louvers (refer to
Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.k
d. A jockey pump shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 20. The
minimum flow requirement for the jockey pump shall be based on allowable leakage
Rev. 1 5.4 - 9
per NFPA 20, but shall not be less than the sprinkler flow equivalent of one sprinkler
head.
H. Fire Suppression Systems
1. Automatic Wet Systems
a. Provide sprinkler systems for buildings where required by the Saudi Fire Code 801-
CR, the International Building Code or NFPA. The Saudi Fire Code 801-CR shall be
the primary reference for sprinkler system design. The International Building Code
and NFPA shall be referenced for subjects and issues not addressed in the Saudi Fire
Code.
b. Sprinkler systems for all spaces shall be wet systems unless the release of wet
sprinklers would cause irreparable harm to high value equipment housed in the space
(such as a data processing center). In this instance, a dry-type system shall be
considered. The RCJ shall be consulted and its approval obtained where designs
include dry-type sprinkler systems.
2. Dry Systems
a. Dry-pipe systems shall be used in areas subject to freezing. In a dry-pipe system, the
piping is charged with compressed air or nitrogen, and the pressure holds a remote
valve, known as a dry-pipe valve closed and prevents the piping from being charged
with water.
1) Dry-pipe systems shall utilize regular closed sprinkler heads
2) The dry-pipe valve must be located in a secure, heated space.
3) Provide means of pressure maintenance in the piping system.
4) Provide monitoring to indicate a reduction of air or nitrogen pressure in the
piping system.
5) The time limits for charging all dry-type sprinkler systems and maximum water
velocities in piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 – Standard for
Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
6) Water filling the piping rapidly causes significant vibration that can cause poorly
anchored pipe to fail. Assure that piping is properly supported and anchored.
7) Design guidelines are provided in Subsection 5.4.1.D.1.
3. Pre-Action System
a. Pre-action systems shall be used where release of water over energized equipment
may cause irreparable or costly damage.
1) Pre-action systems shall have dual, cross-zoned detection and shall be
charged through an electrically released pre-action valve.
2) Pre-action systems shall utilize regular closed sprinkler heads
3) Provide alarm after the first zone of detection is activated. Provide abort switch
and 60 second count-down timer for aborting filling the system with water for
up to one minute after second zone of detection.
4) The pre-action valve must be located in a secure space where it can be
maintained. Provide an adequate drain in the space. A floor sink with 75 mm
drain pipe is preferred.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 10
5) Provide means of pressure maintenance in the piping system.

6) Provide monitoring to indicate a reduction of air or nitrogen pressure in the
piping system.
7) The time limits for charging all dry-type sprinkler systems and maximum water
velocities in piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 – Standard for
Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
8) Water filling the piping rapidly causes significant vibration that can cause poorly
anchored pipe to fail. Assure that piping is properly supported and anchored.
9) Design guidelines are provided in Subsection 5.4.1.D.1.
4. Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
a. Clean agent fire extinguishing systems shall be used in lieu of pre-action sprinkler
systems where release of water over energized equipment may cause irreparable or
costly damage. Obtain the approval from the RCJ and the AHJ prior to designing or
specifying clean agent systems.
b. Clean agent systems shall be designed in strict accordance with Saudi Fire Code 801-
CR, Sections 904 and 914 and NFPA 2001 – Standard for Clean Agent Fire
Extinguishing Systems.
c. Agent release shall be initiated through a system of dual cross-zoned smoke
detectors.
d. Design shall be designed on the “total flooding” principal.
e. Provide alarm after the first zone of detection is activated. Provide abort switch and
60 second count-down timer for aborting release of agent for up to one minute after
second zone of detection.
f. Coordinate the location of the clean agent canisters with the architect and the
structural engineer, addressing the size and weight of the canisters.
g. Assure that all canisters and piping are properly supported and anchored. Significant
forces result in the piping system when the agent is released.
h. Provide the proper volume of agent plus an acceptable safety factor to provide the
concentration required to extinguish the fire.
i. Confirm with the architect that the volume where the agent will be utilized will be
properly sealed to allow the agent to maintain adequate concentration for sufficient
time to extinguish the fire.
j. Identify on the construction documents the path and means to exhaust the volume
when the fire is extinguished.
k. Fire / smoke dampers for isolation of the clean agent protected areas. the clean agent
system control should to shutdown these Fire/Smoke Dampers directly, all exhaust
fans should be automatic stopped during the agent release
l. The clean agent control panel should be integrated with building Fire Alarm Control
panels via hardwired cable connections.
5. Fire Suppression Systems for Commercial Kitchen Hoods
a. Fire suppression systems for kitchen hoods shall be designed in strict accordance
with Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Paragraph 904.12 and NFPA 96 – Standard for
Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Appliances.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 11
b. Coordinate the system requirements with the kitchen equipment designer.

c. Assure that grease filters comply with UL 1046 – Standard for Grease Filters for
Exhaust Ducts
d. Assure proper provisions have been made in the design to shut off fuel to the cooking
appliance upon activation of the fire extinguishing system. Shut-off devices shall be
manually reset.
e. Coordinate the requirements for the operation of the ventilation system upon
activation of the extinguishing system with the HVAC designer. Some extinguishing
systems require the ventilation system to continue to operate, while others require the
ventilation system to be de-energized upon activation of the extinguishing system.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 12
SUBSECTION 5.4.2 PLUMBING
PLUMBING
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection of the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) establishes the Royal
Commission (RCJ) mandatory, minimum accepted plumbing requirements for new
and renovation projects. This section provides:
or modernization for building plumbing systems.
2) The policies and technical information are to be used; however project
conditions may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of GEM are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative systems,
methods, or devices not specifically described herein however the use of alternative
systems, methods, or devices must have prior approval from the RCJ.
c. If a conflict is found between the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), the Standard
Specifications, and the Standard Details, the conflict shall be brought to the attention
of the Royal Commission. The Royal Commission shall provide resolution or direction
on how to proceed.
d. In the event there is a conflict between the GEM and the requirements of the RCJ, the
conflict shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ. The Royal Commission shall
provide resolution or direction on how to proceed.
e. The design of RCJ plumbing system requires coordination and integration with other
disciplines such as, but not limited to, the architectural design, structural design,
HVAC design, electrical design, and other disciplines.
2. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2.
b. Atmosphere: The same as outdoors.
c. Concealed Exterior: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
d. Concealed Interior: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants.
e. Conditioned: Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling.
f. Exposed Exterior: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
g. Exposed Interior: Exposed to view indoors (not concealed).
h. Finished Space: Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, space above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, tunnels, and interstitial spaces.
i. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar subsequent requirements.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 13
j. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection,

placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting,
cleaning, and similar requirements.
k. Indoors: Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
l. Outdoors: Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
m. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
n. Unconditioned: Spaces without heating or cooling including ceiling plenums.
3. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Section 2.2.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this section:
1) AGA: American Gas Association
3) ASPE: American Society of Plumbing Engineers
4) ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers
6) AWWA: American Water Works Association
7) ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
9) CISPI: Cast Iron Soils And Pipe Institute
10) DFU: Drainage Fixture Unit
12) IAPMO: International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
13) IP: Ingress Protection
15) NSF: National Standards Foundation
16) OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administrations
17) PPFA: Plastic Pipe and Fitting Association
18) PDI: Plumbing and Drainage Institute
20) SASA: Saudi Arabian Standards Association
22) TDS: Total Dissolved Solids
23) UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
24) WSFU: Water Supply Fixture Unit

Rev. 1 5.4 - 14
a. Material, equipment, products and appurtenances, when available, shall be provided

from an In-Kingdom Manufacturer. Procurement of material, equipment, products
and appurtenances manufactured Out-of-Kingdom shall be approved by the RCJ.
b. Plumbing work shall be completed in full accordance with the respective health and
safety requirements established by:
1) Kingdom of Saudi Arabia – Legislation, Regulation, Standards, and Codes
2) Royal Commission Regulations – Standards, Contractual Conditions, Health
and Safety
c. Drawing Guidelines
1) Plumbing drawings shall follow the organization, scale, and other requirements
for architectural drawings except as otherwise specified in this Section 5.4.2
5. Codes
a. Plumbing Codes establish the minimum acceptable standard for design and
installation of plumbing systems.
b. The information provided in this Section shall be used to augment sizing methods,
sizing procedures, and design methods and should not be used as the primary basis
of the plumbing design.
c. The latest version of the following Codes establish the minimum requirement for the
design of plumbing systems:
1) Saudi Sanitary Code – Plumbing, SBC 701-CR
2) Saudi Sanitary Code – Private Sewage Disposal, SBC 702-CR
4) International Plumbing Code
5) International Fuel Gas Code
d. In the event of conflict between Codes and this document, the Saudi Sanitary Code
shall govern.
e. For information regarding the Authority Having Jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
6. Standards and References
a. The following is a list of standards which apply to this Section,
1) American Gas Association
2) American Society Of Plumbing Engineers
3) American National Standards Institute
4) American Society Of Sanitary Engineers
5) American Society For Testing And Materials
6) American Society If Testing And Materials
7) American Water Works Association
8) American Welding Society
9) Cast Iron Soils Pipe Institute

Rev. 1 5.4 - 15
10) International Association Of Plumbing And Mechanical Officials

11) National Standards Foundation
12) International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC)
13) National Fire Protection Association
14) National Standards Foundation
15) Occupational Safety And Health Administrations
16) Plastic Pipe And Fitting Association
17) Plumbing And Drainage Institute
18) Saudi Arabian Standards Association
19) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional standards.
c. In the event of conflict between these standards and this document, the more stringent
requirement shall govern.
7. Approvals
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsections 4.2.5, 4.5.9, 5.4.3.B.13
B. Commissioning
1. Requirements
a. Refer to Section 4.5.9
C. Sustainability Design for Plumbing Systems
1. General
a. Refer to Section 3.4 for sustainability requirements.
b. The Royal Commission is committed to energy-efficient design within the limits of
budget constraints and within the bounds of good practice and conforming to Energy
Codes.
c. Buildings shall use water efficient plumbing fixtures, solar water heaters, components,
and appurtenances to reduce:
1) Operating costs
2) Water consumption
3) Sewage discharge
4) Energy
2. Strategies for Increasing Water Efficiency
a. Building Sewage Conveyance
1) Use of water-conserving fixtures
2) Use of captured rain water

Rev. 1 5.4 - 16
3) Use of recycled gray water

b. Do not design or specify
1) Equipment or components that utilize potable water for cooling
2) Water-cooled ice machines
D. Piping Systems
1. Materials
a. Shall be selected using mechanical properties and other specifications in the latest
issue of ASTM Standards Specifications.
b. Shall be selected in consideration of the environmental conditions, ease of shipment,
installation and maintenance.
c. Shall meet applicable system temperature, pressure, and content requirements.
d. Shall meet the requirements of the contract.
e. Due to high ground water aggressiveness, all pipes placed below grade shall have
external protection by using epoxy coating or tape wrap.
f. Supports and anchors for plumbing and other system piping and equipment called
out in this section, shall be coordinated with the design requirements in Section 5.2,
Structural.
2. Installation
a. Pipe shall be installed within shafts, chases, ceiling cavities, or other accessible
locations.
b. No piping shall be embedded in wall or floors.
3. Domestic Hot Water and Cold Water Piping
a. Building hot water piping, cold water piping, and fittings shall conform to NSF 61 and
one of the standards listed in the Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 605,
Materials, Joints and Connections.
b. Potable water supply shall be determined as potable hot water and cold water by the
RCJ.
c. Structures equipped with plumbing fixtures utilized for human occupancy or habitation
shall be provided with a potable supply of hot and / or cold water in the volume and
pressure required for operation.
d. Where the water pressure is not sufficient to supply the minimum pressure and
quantities require for proper operation of plumbing fixtures and components, the
potable water supply shall be supplemented with a building water storage tank
connected to a hydro-pneumatic pressure booster system, a water pressure booster
system, or an elevated water tank.
e. Piping design shall include provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping
systems, to prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points, and
connections to equipment.
f. Because of the variable conditions encountered in hydraulic design, it is impractical
to provide detailed requirements and rules for sizing water system piping. The water
distribution systems shall be designed and pipe sizes selected based on peak
demand.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 17
g. Design criteria for hot water and cold water piping

1) Determine the minimum static pressure available from the supply source.
(a) It is essential that enough pressure is available to overcome all system
pressure drop caused by friction and building height.
(b) The water systems shall be designed based on the lowest pressure
available to ensure proper operation of plumbing fixtures; Refer to the
Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 604, Table 604.3.
2) Determine the plumbing fixture demand
(a) When determining peak demand, Water Supply Fixture Units (WSFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used; Refer to the International
Plumbing Code, Appendix E - Load Values Assigned to Fixtures Table.
(b) The WSFU is a numerical factor that measures the load producing effect
of a single plumbing fixture.
(c) The WSFU shall then be converted into liters per minute flow rate for
determining pipe sizes; Refer to the International Plumbing Code,
Appendix E – Tables for Estimating Demand.
3) Determine pipe sizes
(a) Based on system pressure requirements and loses
(b) The sum of the liters per minute required for each pipe branch and main
(c) Water flow velocities between 1.5 to 2.4 m/sec
4. Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
a. Building sanitary piping and fittings shall conform to one of the standards listed in the
Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Chapter 7 – Sanitary Drainage.
b. Building vent piping and fittings shall conform to one of the standards listed in the
Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Chapter 9 – Vents.
c. Structures equipped with plumbing fixtures utilized for human occupancy or habitation
shall be connected to the public sewer or an RCJ approved disposal system.
d. Horizontal drainage piping shall be designed with uniform alignment at uniform slopes.
The minimum velocity of flow to achieve scouring action is 0.60 m per second.
e. Waste water discharging into the sanitary drainage system shall have a temperature
of 60° C or less. When higher temperatures exist, an approved cooling method shall
be provided.
f. Building sanitary that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly covered
and vented sewage ejector from which the effluent shall be lifted and discharged into
the gravity sanitary system by automatic pumping equipment and components.
g. Connections and changes in direction shall be designed with drainage fittings. The
fittings shall not have interior ledges, shoulders, or reductions capable of retarding or
obstructing flow.
h. Cleanouts
1) Shall be indicated at every change of horizontal direction greater than 45
degrees. Where more than one change of direction occurs in a run of piping,

Rev. 1 5.4 - 18
only one cleanout is required for each 12 m of developed length of sanitary

pipe.
2) Shall be provided at the base of each drainage stack or riser.
3) At the junction of the building drain and building sewer. The cleanout shall be
located on either the inside or outside of the building wall.
i. Sanitary drainage systems within a building shall be completely independent of the
storm drainage system.
j. Design criteria for sanitary piping
(a) When determining peak drainage demand, Drainage Fixture Units (DFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used. The DFU is a numerical
factor that measures the load producing effect of a single plumbing
fixture; Refer to the Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 710 -
Drainage System Sizing.
(b) Values for continuous and semi-continuous flow into the drainage system
shall be computed on the basis that 0.06 liters per second is equivalent
to two DFU.
(a) Each pipe branch and main shall be determined based the number of
DFU’s connected; Refer to Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Tables
710.1(1) and 710.1(2).
(b) Horizontal stack offsets shall be sized as required for building drains.
(c) Vertical stack offsets shall be sized for straight stacks.
k. Design criteria for vent piping
1) The diameter of individual vents, branch vents, circuit vents, and relief vents
shall be at least one half the required diameter of the drain served.
2) Vent pipes shall not be less than 30 mm in diameter.
3) Vent exceeding 12 m in developed length shall be increased by one nominal
pipe size for the entire developed length of the vent pipe.
5. Storm and Secondary (Emergency) Storm Drainage Piping
a. Building storm and secondary (emergency) storm piping and fittings shall conform to
one of the standards listed in the Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Chapter 11 – Storm
Drainage.
b. Roofs, paved areas, yards, courts, and courtyards shall be drain into the public storm
system or an approved place of disposal.
c. Horizontal drainage piping shall be designed with uniform alignment at uniform slopes.
The minimum velocity of flow to achieve scouring action is 0.60 m per second.
d. Building storm drains that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly
covered and vented sump from which effluent shall be lifted and discharged into the
gravity drainage system by automatic pumping equipment.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 19
e. Building secondary (emergency) storm discharge shall have a point of discharge

above grade in a location that would typically be observed by building occupants or
maintenance personnel.
f. Connections and changes in direction shall be designed with drainage fittings. The
obstructing flow.
g. Cleanouts
1) Shall be indicated at every horizontal change of direction greater than 45
pipe.
2) Shall be provided at the base of each drainage stack or riser.
3) At the junction of the building drain and building sewer. The cleanout shall be
located on either the inside or outside of the building wall.
h. Storm drainage and secondary (emergency) storm systems within a building shall be
completely independent from each other and the sanitary drainage system.
i. Design criteria for storm piping
1) The size of vertical storm stacks, horizontal storm mains, and branches shall
be based the local weather data shown in Subsection 5.6.4, Site Stormwater
Drainage. The most stringent criteria shall be used as the basis of design;
Refer to Saudi Building Code 701, Tables 6.6.2 and 6.6.3.
2) Determine the maximum projected square meter drain area for each drain
3) One half of the area of any vertical wall that diverts storm water into the storm
drainage system shall be included into the calculation.
j. Design criteria for secondary (emergency) storm piping
1) The size of the secondary (emergency) storm shall be sized in accordance with
the requirements of the storm drainage system.
2) The secondary drain shall discharge above ground in an observable location in
accordance with IPC 1108.2 and SBC 701-1108.2.
6. Compressed Air Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for compressed
air systems however the Compressed Gas Association, The National Fire Protection
Association Standards and ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume
3 – Special Plumbing Systems, Chapter 9 – Compressed Air Systems shall be used
for the basis of design.
b. The compressed air system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that
an adequate volume of air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user requirements, is
delivered during peak demand.
c. The entire compressed air system, including but not limited to air dryer, pre-filters,
after filters, controls shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty structural steel support
frame.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 20
d. Design criteria for compressed air piping

1) Identify each process, work station, or piece of equipment requiring
compressed air.
2) Determine the volume of air and pressure required for each location.
3) Determine the condition requirements for each location, such as the allowable
moisture content, particulate size, and oil content.
4) Determine how much time the individual tool or process will be in actual use for
a one minute period of time (duty cycle).
(a) To determine the duty cycle, the user should be consulted, they are the
only authority capable of providing the length of time an individual tool is
in use
5) Determine maximum number of locations that may be used simultaneously on
each branch and main (use factor).
(a) It may be difficult to accurately determine the simultaneous use factor so
sufficient receiver capacity or larger compressor capacity must be
provided to allow for variances in use.
6) Determine the extent of allowable leakage.
(a) Leakage is a function of the number of connections to the system and
the quality of the pipe assembly.
(b) Many smaller tools and operations will generally have a greater leakage
than a few larger ones.
(c) Leakage rates
(d) A well maintained system may have a leakage rate of approximately 2 to
5 percent.
(e) A typical system may have a leakage rate of approximately 10 percent.
(f) A poorly maintained system may have a leakage rate of approximately
25 percent.
7) Determine an allowance for future expansion.
8) Determine the developed length of pipe (The length of pipe measured along
the centerline of the pipe and fittings).
9) Determine the equivalent length of pipe (The length of pipe of a specific
diameter that would produce the same frictional resistance of a particular pipe
or line comprised of pipe and fittings).
10) Select the air compressor type, conditioning equipment, equipment location,
and air inlet, making sure that cubic meters / minute, liters / minute, or liters /
second is consistently used for both the system and compressor capacity
rating.
e. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
1) Maximum of 7 kPa pressure drop per 30 m.
2) Maximum friction loss to the furthest outlet of 35 kPa.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 21
f. A properly sized, constantly working air compressor usually requires less

maintenance than a compressor that runs intermittently.
7. Natural Gas Piping
a. Building natural gas piping and fittings shall conform to one of the standards listed in
the International Fuel Gas Code, Chapter 4 – Gas Piping Installation.
b. The system shall be designed to provide a supply of gas sufficient to meet the
maximum demand at no less than the minimum supply pressure associated with each
piece of equipment or component.
c. The two most commonly used gases are natural gas and liquefied petroleum gas.
d. Design criteria for gas piping
1) Determine the minimum gas pressure available.
2) Identify each process, work station or piece of equipment requiring a gas
source.
3) Determine the volume of gas required for each location.
(a) Total connected load based on cubic meter per hour of every device
requiring gas in the building.
4) Determine the pressure range for each location.
(a) The available pressure after the meter could be quite low and requires
that the friction loss through the piping system be kept low.
(a) It may be difficult to accurately determine a simultaneous use factor.
(b) Include Plumbing and HVAC equipment demand.
9) Select the meter, regulator, equipment, equipment location, and components,
based on the equivalent length and total cubic meters / hour demand.
e. Design criteria for liquefied petroleum gas piping
1) The design criteria for liquefied petroleum gas is similar to natural gas and
natural gas sizing charts however a conversion factor of 0.63 must be applied
to reduce the indicated flow rate.
8. Vacuum Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for vacuum
systems however ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 2 –
Plumbing Systems, Chapter 10 – Vacuum Systems shall be used for the basis of
design.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 22
b. The vacuum system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate vacuum is provided during peak demand.
c. The entire vacuum system shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty structural steel
support frame.
d. Design criteria for vacuum piping
1) Identify each process, work station or piece of equipment requiring vacuum.
2) Determine the vacuum required for each location.
(a) Total connected load based on cubic meter per minute of every device
requiring vacuum in the building.
(a) It is difficult to accurately determine a simultaneous use factor so
sufficient receiver capacity must be provided to allow for variances in
use.
based on the equivalent length and total cubic meters per hour demand.
e. Cleanouts shall be strategically located throughout the piping system to allow for the
removal of debris.
f. A properly sized, constantly working vacuum pump usually requires less maintenance
than a compressor that runs intermittently.
g. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
1) 10 mm for a single connection or short piece of pipe.
2) 20 mm for multiple connections on branch piping.
3) 25 mm for main piping.
E. Equipment
1. Water Softeners
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for water softeners
however the ASPE Plumbing Engineered Design Handbook, Volume 4 – Plumbing
Components And Equipment, Chapter 10 – Water Treatment shall be used for the
basis of design.
b. Water softening, when required, shall reduce and remove dissolved impurities that
cause hardness in water. Water softening shall occur by passing the raw water
through an ion exchange process.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 23
c. Design criteria for water softeners

1) Perform a water analysis.
(a) Check with local authorities for water analysis.
2) Determine water consumption.
(a) Based on ASPE or Manufacturer sizing charts.
3) Determine continuous and peak flow rates.
(a) Use the fixture count flow rate from domestic hot water and cold water
sizing information.
(b) Obtain flow rates for equipment requiring softened water.
4) Determine water pressure.
(a) Water pressure at the service entrance.
(b) Water pressure at the most remote plumbing fixture or piece of
equipment.
(c) Determine the capacity of the softener.
(d) Liters per day x grains per liter = Grains per day.
(e) Select the smallest unit that can handle the maximum capacity between
regeneration with a low salt dosage.
(f) Avoid sizing unit with a high dosage requirement unless there is a reason
to do so, such as high pressure boilers.
2. Water Heaters
a. Water heaters shall conform to the requirements listed in the Saudi Sanitary Code
701-CR, Chapter 5 – Water Heaters and ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications,
Chapter 50 – Service Water Heating.
1) Shall be sized based on the total volume of hot water required for the estimated
duration of maximum demand and what is approved from SASO. This total
volume shall be determined based on a combination of hot water storage and
the water heater recovery rate.
2) The objective for a domestic hot water distribution system includes:
(a) Providing adequate quantity of hot water at prescribed temperatures to
all fixtures and equipment at any time.
(b) Provide a system that will perform its function safely.
(c) Utilizes an economical heat source.
(d) Provide a cost-effective, efficient, and durable installation.
(e) Provide an economical operating system with reasonable maintenance.
3) Water heater sizing shall be determined by one of the following:
(a) Number of hot water plumbing fixtures - This sizing method calculates
anticipated volume in liters of hot water for the peak duration of use and
storage tank capacity.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 24
(b) Population - This sizing method calculates anticipated volume when the
quantity of plumbing fixtures does not correlate to the quantity of people.
(c) Pluming fixture flow rates - This sizing method is typically utilized for
specialized buildings, such as convention centers, sports areas,
gymnasiums, etc…. where peak usage periods occur.
b. Storage Tank Water Heaters
1) Design criteria based on quantity of fixtures
(a) Determine total number of each type of plumbing fixture and assign the
liter per hour value for each fixture based on building type and system
demand value.
(b) Multiply the quantity of each fixture by the building type system demand
value.
(c) Add the sum of all individual fixtures system demand together to obtain a
total connected load in liters of water per hour.
(d) Find the actual hourly demand by multiplying the total connected load by
a demand factor. This calculation will provide the actual volume of hot
water that will be required during a one hour period of time.
(e) In addition to the hourly hot water demand determine the quantity of hot
water that will be stored.
(f) Storage capacity shall be determined by multiplying the total connected
hot water demand by a storage capacity factor.
(g) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold water
correction factor.
2) Design criteria based on population
(a) Determine the population of the building.
(b) Using a recovery, storage capacity curve chart, determine the desired
storage and recovery per person.
(c) Determine the total required recovery, storage capacity by multiplying the
population.
(d) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold water
correction factor.
(e) Add a system heat loss of 15 kJ / meter run of pipe to the gallon per hour
recovery to make up for the heat loss of the entire system. Note: This is
only required in the population method because no consideration for heat
loss was made in the hot water usage criteria.
3) Design criteria based on flow rate
(a) Determine the hours or minutes of peak use.
(b) Determine the typical flow rate for all fixtures contributing to flow during
peak duration.
(c) Determine the amount of time the fixtures will actually be utilized during
the peak duration.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 25
(d) Select a combination recovery rate and storage tank capacity that will
supply the calculated amount of hot water during the peak duration.
c. Instantaneous and Semi-Instantaneous Water Heaters
1) Instantaneous and semi-instantaneous water heater sizing shall be determined
by the quantity of plumbing fixtures. This sizing method calculates anticipated
volume in liters of hot water for the peak duration of use and storage tank
capacity.
2) Design criteria based on number of fixtures
(a) Count the total number of each type of fixture and assign the liter per
hour value for each fixture based on building type and demand value.
(b) Multiply the quantity of each fixture by the building type demand value.
(c) Add the sum of all individual fixtures together to obtain a total connected
load in liters of water per hour.
d. Solar Water Heaters
1) Solar water heaters shall conform to the requirements listed in the Saudi
Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 612 – Solar Systems.
2) Efficiency cost of solar collectors, system installation costs, and availability of
other fuels shall determine whether solar energy collections units should be
used as a primary heat source.
3) Solar energy equipment and components can also be utilized to supplement
other energy source water heaters.
4) The basic elements of a solar water heater include solar collectors, storage
tank, piping, controls, and transfer medium.
5) Collector design shall provide uniform flow distribution in the collector bank and
stratification in the storage tank.
6) Application of solar water shall depend on
(a) Auxiliary energy requirements
(b) Collector orientation
(c) Temperature of the cold water
(d) Site conditions
(e) Installation requirements
(f) Available area for collectors
(g) Amount of storage required
7) Three types of active solar water heating systems include
(a) Direct circulation system: Use pumps to circulate pressurized potable
water directly through the collectors.
(b) Indirect circulation system: Pump heat transfer fluids through the
collectors.
(c) Passive solar systems: Rely on gravity and the tendency for water to
naturally circulate as it is heated.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 26
8) Design criteria based on number of fixtures

(a) Determine total number of each type of plumbing fixture and assign the
liter per hour value for each fixture based on building type and system
demand value.
(b) Multiply the quantity of each fixture by the building type system demand
value.
(c) Add the sum of all individual fixtures system demand together to obtain a
total connected load in liters of water per hour.
(d) Find the actual hourly demand by multiplying the total connected load by
a demand factor. This calculation will provide the actual volume of hot
water that will be required during a one hour period of time.
(e) In addition to the hourly hot water demand determine the quantity of hot
water that will be stored.
(f) Storage capacity shall be determined by multiplying the total connected
hot water demand by a storage capacity factor.
(g) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold water
correction factor.
(h) Determine quantity of solar collectors, storage tank size, and component
requirements.
9) Design criteria based on population
(a) Determine the population of the building.
(b) Using a recovery, storage capacity curve chart, determine the desired
storage and recovery per person.
(c) Determine the total required recovery, storage capacity by multiplying the
population.
(d) Add an additional 30% to the calculated usable storage for the cold water
correction factor.
(e) Add a system heat loss of 15.8 kilojoule / meter run of pipe to the gallon
per hour recovery to make up for the heat loss of the entire system.
Note: This is only required in the population method because no
consideration for heat loss was made in the hot water usage criteria.
(f) Determine quantity of solar collectors, storage tank size, and component
requirements.
10) Design criteria based on flow rate
(a) Determine the hours or minutes of peak use.
(b) Determine the typical flow rate for all fixtures contributing to flow during
peak duration.
(c) Determine the amount of time the fixtures will actually be utilized during
the peak duration.
(d) Select a combination recovery rate and storage tank capacity that will
supply the calculated amount of hot water during the peak duration.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 27
(e) Determine quantity of solar collectors, storage tank size, and component
requirements.
3. Pumps
a. Domestic Water Booster Pumps
1) Building domestic water booster pumps shall conform to the requirements of
the International Plumbing Code, Chapter 6 – Water Supply And Distribution
and the ASPE Plumbing Engineered Design Handbook, Volume 2 – Plumbing
Systems, Chapter 5 – Cold Water Systems.
2) Two types of pressure booster pump drives can be utilized for adjusting the
pressure and flow in the building water distribution system:
(a) Constant speed drive – This type of drive is recommended where water
demands are relatively constant and low-to-medium boost pressure is
required.
(b) Variable speed drive – This type of drive is recommended where there
are large fluctuations in the water main supply pressure to the pump,
there is a requirement for a high pressure boost, or there is a great
variation expected in the system water demand.
3) Water pressure booster pump shall be a multiplex packaged system provided
with pump suction to facility water storage holding tank, motors, control
equipment, ASME hydro-pneumatic tank, valves, fittings, manifolds and
associated appurtenances.
4) It should be assumed that a water pressure booster pump is required. The
water pressure booster pump selection shall be determined based on the
following design criteria
(a) Determine the minimum static pressure available from the supply source.
(b) Determine the building height.
(c) Determine the developed length of pipe (The length of pipe measured
along the centerline of the pipe and fittings).
(d) Determine the equivalent length of pipe (The length of pipe of a specific
diameter that would produce the same frictional resistance of a particular
pipe or line comprised of pipe and fittings).
(e) Determine the minimum operating pressure of the farthest plumbing
fixture from the booster pump.
(f) Calculate total dynamic head for the booster pump based on available
pressure, pressure loss through system, and minimum pressure required
at the most remote plumbing fixture.
(g) A hydro-pneumatic tank should be incorporated into the booster pump
system design to meet low flow demand without operating a pump.
b. Sump Pumps
1) Building sump pumps shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi Sanitary
Code 701-CR, Section 712, Sumps and Ejectors, the International Plumbing
Code, Chapter 11 – Storm Drainage and the ASPE Plumbing Engineered
Design Handbook, Volume 2 – Plumbing Systems, Chapter 1 – Sanitary
Drainage Systems.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 28
2) Building drains that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly
covered and vented receiver from which effluent shall be lifted and discharged
into the gravity drainage system by automatic pumping equipment.
3) There are three types of pumps that can be utilized
(a) Submersible pump with receiver – The submersible pump system is
totally submerged in the effluent within a receiver.
(b) Wet-pit receiver with vertical lift pump – The vertical lift system utilizes a
vertical shaft centrifugal pump and separate driver, both mounted on the
receiver cover.
(c) Wet-pit receiver with cantilever, self-priming pump – The cantilever type
utilizes horizontal centrifugal pump and close-coupled driver mounted on
the receiver cover. A suction pipe is cantilevered from the pump down
into the receiver.
4) The pump type shall be determined by
(a) Range of head and capacity for the motor and impeller combinations.
(b) Floor space requirements.
(c) Pump and bearing construction.
(d) Type of liquids to be pumped.
(e) Headroom available to remove pump and impeller.
5) Duplex pumping systems shall be provided and control shall be based on level
of effluent in the basin.
6) Design criteria for sump pumps
(a) Pump head shall be calculated by adding the static height from the
bottom of the basin to a level one meter above the anticipated highest
point of discharge and friction loss of effluent through the pump
discharge system. The calculation shall be calculated based on both
pumps running.
(b) The pump shall be sized based on the pump running time of 1 to five
minutes, with an optimum of six starts per hour. If these conditions
cannot be achieved, the least amount of starts per hour shall be the
basis of design.
(c) The receiver shall be sized based on
(d) From the invert of the inlet pipe, allow approximately 150 mm to the high
water alarm.
(e) From the high water alarm, allow approximately 150 mm to pump two
starts.
(f) From pump two start, allow approximately 150 mm to pump one start.
(g) Below pump one start, the dimension of liquid capacity shall be
determined based on a 1 to 5 minute operating period for a pump. The
lower level of the storage portion is pump stop.
(h) Allow approximately 150 mm from pump stop to inlet of pump.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 29
(i) Allow approximately 300 mm to the receiver bottom from the inlet of the
pump.
(j) Sump pump discharge pipe shall be a minimum of 50 mm. Pipe sizes
can be larger to lessen the friction loss in the discharge piping system, if
this results in a reduction of the motor size.
c. Sewage Ejector Pumps
1) Building sewage ejector pumps shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi
Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 712, Sumps and Ejectors, the International
Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 – Sanitary Drainage and the ASPE Plumbing
Engineered Design Handbook, Volume 2 – Plumbing Systems, Chapter 1 –
Sanitary Drainage Systems.
2) Building sanitary that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly
covered and vented receiver from which effluent shall be lifted and discharged
into the gravity sanitary system by automatic pumping equipment.
3) There are three types of pumps that can be utilized, all of which shall be non-
clogging and be able to pass a 75mm solid.
(a) Submersible pump with receiver: The submersible pump system is
totally submerged in the effluent within a receiver.
(b) Wet-pit receiver with vertical lift pump: The vertical lift system utilizes a
vertical shaft centrifugal pump and separate driver, both mounted on the
receiver cover.
(c) Wet-pit receiver with cantilever, self-priming pump: The cantilever type
utilizes horizontal centrifugal pump and close-coupled driver mounted on
the receiver cover. A suction pipe is cantilevered from the pump down
into the receiver.
4) The pump type shall be determined by
(a) Range of head and capacity for the motor and impeller combinations.
(b) Floor space requirements.
(c) Pump and bearing construction.
(d) Type of liquids to be pumped
(e) Headroom available to remove pump and impeller.
5) Duplex pumping systems shall be provided and control shall be based on level
of effluent in the basin.
6) Design criteria for sewage ejector pumps
bottom of the basin to a level one meter above the anticipated highest
point of discharge and friction loss of effluent through the pump
discharge system. The calculation shall be calculated based on both
pumps running.
(b) The pump shall be sized based on the pump running time of 1 to five
minutes, with an optimum of six starts per hour. If these conditions
cannot be achieved, the least amount of starts per hour shall be the
basis of design.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 30
(c) The receiver shall be sized based on:

(d) From the invert of the inlet pipe, allow approximately 150 mm to the high
water alarm.
(e) From the high water alarm, allow approximately 150 mm to pump two
starts.
(f) From pump two start, allow approximately 150 mm to pump one start.
(g) Below pump one start, the dimension of liquid capacity shall be
determined based on a 1 to 5 minute operating period for a pump. The
lower level of the storage portion is pump stop.
(h) Allow approximately 150 mm from pump stop to inlet of pump.
(i) Allow approximately 300 mm to the receiver bottom from the inlet of the
pump.
(j) Sewage ejector pump discharge pipe shall be a minimum of 100 mm.
Pipe sizes can be larger to lessen the friction loss in the discharge piping
system, if this results in a reduction of the motor size.
d. Elevator Pit Pumps
1) Building elevator pit pumps shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi
Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 712, Sumps and Ejectors, the International
Building Code, Chapter 30 – Elevators And Conveying Systems And ASME
Safety Code For Elevators And Escalators.
2) Permanent provisions shall be provided to prevent the accumulation of ground
water in the elevator pit.
3) Design criteria for elevator pit pumps
bottom of the elevator pit to a level one meter above the anticipated
highest point of discharge and friction loss of effluent through the pump
discharge system.
(b) The elevator pit pump shall have the capability to discharge 11,356 LPH
4) Sump pump discharge pipe shall be a minimum of 50 mm.
4. Facility Water Storage Tanks
a. The capacity of the facility water storage tank shall be determined based on the type
of building and number of units shown for that type of building shown in the table
below and storage requirements.
Water Flow (L / d / unit)

Source Unit Range Typical
Airport Passenger 8 - 15 10
Automobile service station Vehicle 30 - 50 40
Employee 35 - 60 50
Hotel Guest 150 - 220 190
Employee 30 - 50 40

Rev. 1 5.4 - 31
Water Flow (L / d / unit)

Source Unit Range Typical
Industrial Building Employee 3 -65 55
Laundry Machine 1800 - 2595 2195
Wash 180 - 200 190
Motel Person 90 -150 120
Motel with Kitchen Person 190 -220 200
Office Employee 30 - 65 55
Restaurant Meal 8 - 15 10
Rooming House Resident 90 - 190 150
Toilet
Store Department Room 1600 - 2400 2000
Employee 30 - 50 40
Parking
Store Center space 2-8 4
Employee 30 -50 40
Hospital, medical Bed 500 - 950 650
Employee 20 - 60 40
Hospital, mental Bed 300 - 650 400
Employee 20 - 60 40
Rest Home Resident 200 - 450 350
Employee 20 -60 40
School, day
With cafeteria, gym, shower Student 60 - 115 80
With cafeteria only Student 40 - 80 60
Without cafeteria, gym, shower Student 20 -65 40
School, boarding Student 200 - 400 40
Apartment Person 200 - 280 220
Cafeteria Customer 4 - 10 6
Employee 30 - 50 40
Meal
Dining Hall served 15 - 50 30
Dormitory Person 75 - 175 150
Theater Seat 10 - 15 10
a. Design criteria for facility water storage tanks
1) Determine the total units required for the building type.
2) Multiply the total number of units by the typical water flow value.
3) This will be the daily water use. Determine the number of days of storage
required and multiply by the daily water use.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 32
4) Add the constant uses of water, such as HVAC make-up, fire protection water
storage, and any process requirements to the plumbing water storage.
5) Select a tank size equal to or exceeding the total of the sum of the quantities
stated above.
5. Interceptors
a. Types include but are not limited to
1) Grease Interceptor
(a) Building grease interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the
Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 1003, Interceptors and
Separators.
(b) A grease interceptor shall receive the drainage form fixtures and
equipment with grease-laden waste located in food preparation areas.
Grease interceptors shall receive waste only from fixtures and equipment
that allow fats, oils or grease to be discharged.
(c) Where food grinders connect to grease interceptors, a solids interceptor
shall separate the discharge before connecting to grease interceptor.
(d) Solids separators and grease interceptors shall be sized and rated for
the discharge of the food waste grinder.
(e) Emulsifiers, chemicals, enzymes and bacteria shall not discharge into
the food waste grinder.
(f) Grease interceptors shall have the grease retention capacity comparable
with the established flow-through rates.
(g) Grease interceptors shall be designed so as not to become air bound
where tight covers are utilized. Each interceptor shall be vented where
subject to a loss of trap seal.
(h) Grease interceptors shall be equipped with devices to control the rate of
water flow so it does not exceed the rated flow. The flow-control device
shall be vented and terminate not less than 150 mm above the flood rim
level or be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(i) Design Criteria
(j) Determine cubic volume of each plumbing fixture that will connected to
the grease interceptor.
(k) Convert cubic volume of each plumbing fixture that will connect to the
grease interceptor into liters.
(l) Determine the actual drainage load. Typically the drainage load is
equivalent to 75% of the fixture capacity.
(m) Determine flow rate and drainage period. Typically a one minute drain
period is utilized however a two minute drainage period is permitted
based on project limitations.
(n) Select grease interceptor based on calculated flow rate.
2) Solids Interceptors

Rev. 1 5.4 - 33
(a) Building solids interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the

Separators.
(b) Solids interceptors for heavy solids shall be designed and located so as
to be provided with ready access for cleaning, and shall have a water
seal of not less than 150 mm.
(c) Design Criteria
(d) Determine the liters-per-minute rate of flow through the drainage piping
into the interceptor.
(e) Determine the probable amount of substances to be separated.
(f) Select interceptor size based on flow rate and separation requirements.
Solids interceptors shall be sized to ensure solids will not be carried
through the interceptor.
3) Lint Interceptors
(a) Building lint interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi
Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 1003, Interceptors and Separators.
(b) Laundry facilities not installed within individual dwelling units or intended
for individual family use shall be provided with an interceptor with a wire
basket or similar device, removable for cleaning, that prevents passage
of solids 10 mm or larger in size, string, rags, buttons or other materials
detrimental to the public sewage system.
(c) Design Criteria
(d) Determine quantity of washing machines that will be connected to the
interceptor.
(e) Select interceptor size based on quantity of washing machines
connected, flow rate and pipe connection size.
4) Sediment Interceptors
(a) Building sediment interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the
Separators.
(b) Sands and sediment interceptors shall be designed and located so as to
be provided with ready access for cleaning, and shall have a water seal
of not less than 150 mm.
(c) Design Criteria
(d) Determine the liters-per-minute rate of flow through the drainage piping
into the interceptor.
(e) Determine the probable amount of substances to be separated.
(f) Select interceptor size based on flow rate and separation requirements.
Sediment interceptors shall be sized to ensure sediments will not be
carried through the interceptor.
5) Types include but are not limited to
(a) Oil Separators

Rev. 1 5.4 - 34
(b) Building oil interceptors shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi
Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 1003, Interceptors and Separators.
(c) Oil separators shall be required at repair garages, car-washing facilities,
at factories where oily and flammable liquid wastes are produced and in
hydraulic elevator pits, before emptying the discharge into the building
drainage system or other point of disposal.
6) Design Criteria
(a) The American Petroleum Institute (API) has established criteria for the
large scale removal of globules larger than 150 micrometers and shall be
used when sizing oil separators:
(b) The horizontal velocity through the separator may be up to 15 times the
velocity of the slowest-rising globule, up to a maximum of 0.91 m per
second).
(c) The depth of flow in the separator shall be within 0.9 to 2.4 m.
(d) The width of the separator shall be between 1.8 to 6.1 m.
(e) The depth-to-width ratio shall be between 0.3 and 0.5
(f) An oil retention baffle shall be located no less than 305 mm downstream
from the skimming device.
(g) Separators shall be designed so as not to become air bound where tight
covers are utilized. Each separator shall be vented where subject to a
loss of trap seal.
6. Special Waste Systems
a. Infectious and biological waste systems have the same basic characteristics as other
types of laboratory and production facility waste, but with the addition of bio-hazardous
materials. Bio-Hazardous material is material suspended in the waste stream with
live organisms that, if not contained, have the potential to cause infection, sickness,
and other various diseases. Special waste systems shall conform to the requirements
of Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Chapter 8, Indirect/Special Waste.
b. Bio-hazardous waste may be discharged from many sources including
1) Fermentation tanks and equipment
2) Process centrifuges
3) Sink, both hand washing and process
4) Containment area floor drains
5) Janitor closet drains
6) Necropsy table drains
7) Autoclave drains
8) Contaminated condensate drains
c. Containment design shall conform to acceptable and appropriate containment
practices based on the hazard potential.
d. The classifications for biological containment consist of four different bio-safety levels

Rev. 1 5.4 - 35
1) Biosafety Level 1 (BSL1) Containment: This is typical biological research

facility classification for work with low hazard agents.
(a) Viable microorganisms not known to cause disease in healthy adults.
(b) Standard features consist of easily cleaned, impervious bench surfaces
and hand wash sinks.
(c) Contaminated liquid and solid waste shall be treated to remove biological
hazards before disposal.
2) Biosafety Level 2 (BSL2) Containment: This level is similar to biosafety level
1 except the microorganisms may pose some risk.
(a) Equipment and work surfaces shall be wiped down with a suitable
disinfectant.
(b) All liquid wastes shall be immediately decontaminated by mixing with a
suitable disinfectant.
3) Biosafety Level 3 (BSL3) Containment: Involves organisms posing a
significant risk or represents a potentially serious threat to health and safety.
(a) Liquid waste is kept within the space or facility and steam sterilization
prior to discharge or disposal.
(b) A hand washing sink routed to sterilization shall be locate adjacent to the
facility.
(c) Vents from plumbing fixtures shall be filtered.
4) Biosafety Level 4 (BSL4) Containment: Activities in this type of facility require
a very high level of containment.
(a) The organisms present have life threatening potential and may initiate a
serious epidemic disease.
(b) All BSL3 requirements apply plus showers shall be provided for
personnel at the air lock where clothes are changed upon entry and exit.
(c) A bio-waste treatment system shall be provided within a facility to
sterilize liquid waste.
e. Liquid waste decontamination system shall be provided to collect and sterilize
decontaminants in liquid waste. System components include
1) Sump Pit: Shall consist of a gasketed water proof cover with controls similar
to those provided for a plumbing sump pump with the provisions for chemical
treatment and sterilization.
2) Kill Tank Assembly: Shall consist of a duplex tank arrangement, allowing one
batch to be decontaminated while the other is filling.
(a) Tank size shall be based on facility type however common practice is for
each tank to have the capacity to contain one day’s effluent plus the
chemicals used for decontamination.
(b) A fully automatic control system shall be provided to ensure that
chemicals are injected in the correct amounts and for the required
duration for deactivation of the bio-matter.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 36
3) Drainage System: The drainage system shall be closed with sealed floor drains
and valved connections to equipment when not in use.
(a) Floor drains shall have a minimum seal of 65 mm deeper than the
negative difference in air pressure.
(b) Floor drains shall be filled with a disinfectant solution when not used to
eliminate the possibility of spreading organisms between different areas
served by the same connected sections of the piping system.
(c) Drainage pipe material shall be based on the expected chemical
composition of the effluent and the sterilization method.
(d) Treated discharge from a containment system shall be piped completely
separate from the sanitary piping until it reaches the exterior of the
facility. Prior to connecting to the sanitary drainage system, the treated
discharge shall be provided with a monitoring system and sampling port.
7. Backflow Preventers
a. Building backflow preventers shall conform and be provided in accordance with the
requirements of the Saudi Building Code 701, Section 3.8.
b. The potable water system shall be designed to prevent contamination from non-
potable liquids, solids, or gases being introduced into the potable water system supply
through cross contamination.
c. Backflow preventers shall be “Lead Free” and selected based on degree of hazard
1) Reduced pressure backflow preventer for high and low hazard applications
(a) Shall conform to ASSE 1013; AWWA C511-92, NSF 61, and be certified
for continuous application.
(b) Shall be provided with non-rising stem shut off valves on inlet and outlet;
test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with air-gap fitting
located between two positive-seating check valves.
2) Dual Check backflow preventer for low hazard applications
(a) Shall conform to ASSE 1012, ASSE 1024, NSF 61 and be certified for
continuous pressure application.
(b) Shall be provided with inlet screen, two independent check valves, and
intermediate atmospheric vent.
d. Clearances
1) Location of backflow preventers shall be designed not to require platforms,
ladders, or lifts to access. Adequate clearances from floors, ceilings and walls
is as follows:
(a) Backflow assemblies shall be designed with a centerline height from 760
mm to 1525 mm above the floor.
(b) RPZ backflow assemblies shall be designed with a 460 mm minimum
clearance between the bottom of the relief valve and the floor.
(c) A minimum of 300 mm of clear space shall be maintained above
backflow assemblies to allow for servicing check valves and for operation
of shut-off valves.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 37
(d) A minimum of 200 mm of clearance shall be maintained from the back

side of the backflow assembly to the nearest wall or obstruction.
8. Trap Seal Primer Valve
a. Each fixture trap shall have a liquid seal of not less than 50 mm and not more than
100 mm, or deeper for special design related to accessible fixtures.
b. Where trap seal is subject to loss by evaporation, a trap seal primer valve shall be
provided.
c. Trap seal primer valves shall connect to the trap at a point above the level of the trap
seal.
d. Shall conform to ASSE 1018 or ASSE 1044.
9. Water Meters
a. Domestic water meters are available in four different types:
1) Disc Meter: This type of meter shall be provided for residential and small
commercial installations and is adaptable for remote readout systems
2) Compound Meter: This type of meter shall be provided when most of the water
flow is low, but flows are anticipated.
3) Turbine Meter: The type of meter has the characteristics of a compound meter,
but is more suitable for systems associated with a variety of flows.
4) Propeller Meter: This type of meter shall be provided where low flow never
occurs
b. Requirements
1) Shall have capability of continuous operation up to the rated maximum flow as
listed by the manufacturer without effecting accuracy or any component wear.
2) Measuring chamber shall consist of measuring element, removable housing,
and electric register
3) Shall operate properly without leakage, damage, or malfunction up to a
maximum working pressure at 1379 KPA
4) Shall be located outside of building in a meter vault. Exact location shall be
coordinated with Civil Engineer. See Civil Section 5.7.1.H.7 Flow Meters and
Services.
c. Design Criteria
1) The following shall be used in selecting a water meter
(a) Building type
(b) Minimum and maximum demand in liters per minute
(c) Water pressure available where the meter will be installed
(d) Size of building water service
(e) Pressure loss related to system piping, valves, and elevation pressure
loss.
(f) Refer to AWWA M22 for additional guidelines
10. Pressure Gauges

Rev. 1 5.4 - 38
a. Pressure gauges shall be installed so as to be readable from the floor.

b. Shall be provided where differential pressure information is needed such as on suction
and discharge connections to pumps, at domestic water heaters, strainers, etc.
c. Shall be capable of reading to approximately twice the working pressure with an
accuracy +1/2 of 1 percent.
d. Shall be provided with:
1) 115 mm diameter aluminum case with chrome slip ring, white face, with black
figure gradations.
2) High-grade shutoff cocks shall be provided between gauge and piping to permit
gauge removal while system is under pressure.
11. Thermometers
a. Thermometers shall be installed so as to be readable from the floor.
b. Shall be provided where temperature information is needed such as at domestic water
heaters, hot water systems, hot water return systems, discharge temperature of
mixing valve, water service entrance, etc.
c. Shall be provided with
1) Shall be 225 mm scale, organic liquid filled thermometers with cast aluminum
case and clear glass window, and shall read degrees Celsius.
2) 150 mm stem and 65 mm brass extension neck.
3) Scale range shall be -1C - 85C
4) 2C scale divisions.
F. Plumbing Fixtures
1. Quantities
a. Building plumbing fixtures and quantities shall conform to the requirements of the
Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Chapter 4, Fixtures, Faucets and Fixture Fittings.
b. Coordinate plumbing fixture location, style, quantities, and clearance requirements
with architect.
2. Quality
a. Plumbing fixtures shall be constructed of approved materials, with smooth, impervious
surface, free from defects and concealed fouling surfaces.
3. Type
a. Accessible plumbing facilities and fixtures shall be provided in accordance with the
Saudi Building Code SBC 201-CR, Chapter 11- Accessibility.
b. Water Closets
1) Flush Valve Type, wall or floor mounted:
(a) Water closet shall be 3 LPF vitreous china with elongated bowl, siphon
jet flush action, and 40 mm inlet spud.
(b) Standard mounting height (wall mounted) shall be 380 mm from rim to
floor.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 39
(c) ADA mounting height (wall mounted) shall be 430 mm rim to floor.
(d) Toilet seat shall be extra heavy weight, solid plastic injection molded,
elongated open front, with external stainless steel check hinges and
posts.
(e) Flush valve shall be manual or sensor operated based on building type.
2) Flush Tank Type, floor mounted:
(a) Water closet shall be 3 LPF vitreous china with tank and elongated bowl,
with flushing device, trip lever, and flow control.
(b) Toilet seat shall be extra heavy weight, solid plastic injection molded,
elongated closed front with cover, external stainless steel check hinges
and posts.
c. Bidet, floor mounted
1) Bidet shall be vitreous china with flushing rim, vertical cleansing spray, integral
overflow, with deck mounted controls.
d. Sink
1) Toilet Room
(a) Wall Hung
(b) Vitreous china, with front over flow, self-draining deck area with
contoured back and side splash shields and faucet ledge. Mounting
height shall be 865 mm rim to floor.
(c) Faucet shall be manual or sensor operated. Type of faucet shall be
determined based on project type and Owner requirements.
(d) Countertop Drop-In
(e) Vitreous china with front over flow, self-draining deck area, and faucet
ledge.
(f) Faucet shall be manual or sensor operated. Type of faucet shall be
(g) Under Countertop Mount
(h) Vitreous china, front over flow, and unglazed rim for under countertop
mount.
(i) Faucet shall be manual or sensor operated. Type of faucet shall be
2) Kitchen
(a) Countertop Drop In
(b) Type 302 nickel bearing stainless steel self-rim sink. Sink shall be
seamlessly drawn, with undercoated bottom. Compartment and deck
shall be recessed 5 mm below outside edge of sink.
(c) Faucet shall be manual or sensor operated. Type of faucet shall be
(d) Under Countertop Mount

Rev. 1 5.4 - 40
(e) Type 302 nickel bearing stainless steel. Sink shall be seamlessly drawn,
with under countertop mount and under coated bottom.
(f) Faucet shall be manual or sensor operated. Type of faucet shall be
3) Bathtub
(a) Shall be one piece recess bath with acid resisting heavy gauge porcelain
enameled steel, sloped back, and patterned slip resistant bottom.
(b) Shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z112.19.4M and ASTM F-462 slip
resistance.
(c) Shall have outside dimensions of 1524 mm long x 762 mm wide x 356
mm high.
(d) Shall be provided with tempering water valve, integral volume control,
built-in temperature limit stop, shower head, arm, and flange.
4) Showers
(a) Rectangular Enclosure
(b) Shower shall be a molded seamless acrylic enclosure with integral soap
tray.
(c) Shower shall have a backside flame spread rating of less than 30 and
shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z124.2.
(d) Shower shall have outside dimensions of 1040 mm wide x 940 mm wide
x 2135 mm high.
(e) Shower shall be pre-drilled and provided with:
(1) One 610 mm vertical grab bar with mounting plates
(2) One 787 mm x 381 mm wrap around grab bar with mounting plates.
(3) Molded soap tray
(4) One stainless steel curtain rod with mounting plates
(5) Brass drain with stainless steel strainer
(f) Shower shall be provided with a tempering water valve, integral volume
control, built-in temperature limit stop, shower head, arm, and flange.
(g) Square Enclosure
(h) Shower shall be a molded seamless acrylic shower enclosure with
integral soap tray and fold up seat.
(i) Shower shall have a backside flame spread rating of less than 30 and
shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z124.2
(j) Shower shall have inside dimensions of 915 mm x 915 mm x 2135 mm
high.
(k) Enclosure shall be pre-drilled and provided with:
(2) One 790 mm x 380 mm wrap around grab bar with mounting plates

Rev. 1 5.4 - 41

(l) Shower shall be provided with a tempering water valve, integral volume
control, built-in temperature limit stop, shower head, arm, and flange.
(m) Roll In Enclosure (Handicapped)
(n) Shower shall be a molded seamless acrylic shower enclosure with
integral soap tray.
(o) Shower shall have a backside flame spread rating of less than 30 and
shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z124.2
(p) Shower shall have inside dimensions of 915 mm x 915 mm x 2135 mm
high.
(q) Enclosure shall be pre-drilled and provided with:
(2) One 790 mm x 380 mm wrap around grab bar with mounting plates
(4) One fold up seat
(7) Provide with tempering water valve, integral volume control, built-in
temperature limit stop, shower head, arm, flange, and hand held
shower.
e. Electric Water Coolers
1) Single (Wall Mounted, where & when allowed)
(a) Self-contained, wall hung electric refrigerated water cooler with self-
closing push bars on front and both sides.
(b) Provide with stainless steel finish and stainless steel bubbler.
(c) Standard mounting height shall be 1015 mm from bubbler top to floor
(d) ADA mounting height shall be 915 mm from bubbler top to floor.
2) Bi-Level (Wall Mounted)
(a) Self-contained, bi-level wall hung electric refrigerated water cooler with
self-closing push bars on front and apron for upper unit.
3) Single (Recessed, where & when allowed)
(a) Self-contained, recess mounted electric refrigerated water cooler with
self-closing push bars on front.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 42
4) Bi-Level (Recessed)
(a) Self-contained, bi-level recess mounted electric refrigerated water cooler
with self-closing push bars on front and apron for upper unit.
f. Service Sinks
1) Floor Mounted (Square)
(a) Terrazzo mop basin, 610 mm x 610 mm x 305 mm with, integral drain.
(b) Provide with Service Faucet, Hose / Bracket, and Mop Hanger, stainless
steel caps on all curbs, and stainless steel wall guards.
2) Floor Mounted (Rectangular)
(a) Terrazzo mop basin, 915 mm x 610 mm x 305 mm with, integral drain.
(b) Provide with Service Faucet, Hose / Bracket, and Mop Hanger, stainless
steel caps on all curbs, and stainless steel wall guards.
3) Wall Mounted
(a) Enameled cast iron service sink with, 610 mm x 510 mm bowl with 230
mm back splash, wall hanger, rim guard, and trap.
(b) Provide with Service Faucet, Hose / Bracket, and Mop Hanger.
g. Floor Drain
1) Toilet Room
(a) Cast iron body with bottom outlet, trap primer connection, combination
membrane clamp and adjustable collar with strainer.
2) Mechanical Room
(a) Cast iron body with bottom outlet, seepage pan, combination membrane
clamp and cast iron slotted grate.
h. Roof Drains
1) Primary
(a) 380 mm diameter with cast iron body, roof sump receiver, under deck
clamp, adjustable extension, and combination membrane flashing
clamp/gravel guard.
2) Secondary (Emergency)
(a) 380 mm diameter with cast iron body, roof sump receiver, under deck
clamp, adjustable extension, 50 mm water dam and combination
membrane flashing clamp/gravel guard.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 43
G. Laboratory Piping And Appurtenances

1. Materials
2. Installation
locations.
b. No piping shall be in-bedded in wall or floors.
3. Non-Potable Hot and Cold Water Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed for non-potable hot and cold
water piping and fittings however they shall conform one of the standards listed in the
Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 605, Materials, Joints and Connections.
b. Non-Potable Hot and Cold Water Piping
1) Each laboratory, animal vivarium, or other critical facilities shall be provided
with a dedicated non-potable hot water and non-potable cold water piping
system that is isolated from the domestic water system.
2) A non-potable laboratory water backflow preventer shall be arranged parallel
with the domestic water service backflow preventers, to eliminate the
cumulative pressure drop of backflow preventers in series.
3) A non-potable hot and cold water system shall be designed for research
laboratories teaching laboratories, vivariums, and other similar type buildings
and spaces.
4) The non-potable water distribution systems shall be designed and pipe sizes
selected based on under peak demand and shall conform to accepted
engineering trade practices and sizing.
5) Where street water main pressure fluctuates, the building non-potable water
distribution system shall be designed for the minimum pressure.
6) Where the water pressure is not sufficient to supply the minimum pressure and
quantities require for proper operation of laboratory plumbing fixtures and
components, the non-potable water supply shall be supplemented with a hydro-
pneumatic pressure booster system, a water pressure booster system, or an
elevated water tank.
7) Design shall include provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping
systems, to prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points,
and connections to equipment.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 44
8) Water velocities in excess of 1.5 to 2.5 m per second are not permitted inside
the building.
c. Design criteria for hot water and cold water piping
(b) The water systems shall be designed based on the lowest pressure
available to ensure proper operation of plumbing fixtures; Refer to the
Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 604, Table 604.3 - Water
Distribution System Design Criteria Required Capacity At Fixture Supply
Pipe Outlets.
(a) When determining peak demand, Water Supply Fixture Units (WSFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used; Refer to the International
Plumbing Code, Appendix E - Load Values Assigned to Fixtures Table.
(b) The WSFU is a numerical factor that measures the load producing effect
of a single plumbing fixture.
(c) The WSFU shall then be converted into liters per minute flow rate for
determining pipe sizes; Refer to the International Plumbing Code,
Appendix E – Tables for Estimating Demand.
(a) Based on system pressure requirements and losses
4. Tepid (Emergency) Water Piping
a. Building hot water piping, cold water piping, and fittings shall conform to NSF 61 and
one of the standards listed in the Saudi Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 605,
Materials, Joints and Connections.
b. Tepid water supply shall be determined as potable by the RCJ.
c. Structures equipped with emergency plumbing fixtures such as emergency showers,
emergency eyewashes, and / or emergency face washes shall be provided with a
tepid water supply in the volume and pressure required by ANSI Z-358.1.
d. The tepid water distribution systems shall be designed and pipe sizes selected based
on peak demand and shall conform to accepted engineering trade practices and
sizing.
e. Design shall include provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping systems,
to prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points, and connections
to equipment.
f. Design criteria for tepid water piping

Rev. 1 5.4 - 45
2) Determine the emergency plumbing fixture demand:

(a) Emergency Showers: 75.7 lpm for 15 minutes.
(b) Emergency Eye/Face Wash: 11.4 lpm for 15 minutes
(c) Emergency Eye Wash: 1.5 lpm for 15 minutes
5. Laboratory Grade Water Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for laboratory
grade water systems however water treatment shall comply with one or more of the
following, depending on the purity of the water desired:
1) ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 4 – Plumbing
Components And Equipment, Chapter 10 – Water Treatment shall be used for
the basis of design.
2) College of American Pathologists (CAP) and American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) reagent grade water.
3) U.S. Pharmacopeia (USP) standards for water purity
4) Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation (AAMI) standards
5) Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI) standards
6) Semiconductor Equipment and Materials International (SEMI) and ASTM
electronics grade water.
b. Pipe material
1) High purity water is very aggressive and therefore corrosive.
2) The following are some recommended pipe materials that can be used with
laboratory grade water:
(a) Stainless Steel Tubing
(b) Stainless Steel Pipe Type 304 and Type 316L
(c) Polyvinyl fluoride
(d) Polypropylene
(e) Polyethylene
(f) Polyvinyl chloride
(g) Aluminum Type 3003
3) Design shall include
(a) Piping in a loop and / or continuously recirculating configuration to the
faucet to eliminate stagnant water conditions.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 46
(b) Provisions for expansion and contraction in the piping systems, to

prevent undue stress or strain on piping, building anchor points, and
connections to equipment.
(b) Flow rates shall be based on 1.9 lpm per faucet and a minimum flow
velocity of 1.5 m/sec.
(c) The sum of the liters per minute required for each pipe branch and main
6. Laboratory Waste and Laboratory Vent Piping
a. Laboratory waste and vent piping shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi
Sanitary Code 701-CR, Section 713, Health Care Plumbing. Additional requirements
can be found in the ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 3 –
Special Plumbing Systems, Chapter 2 – Plumbing Design for Healthcare Facilities and
the standards listed in the International Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 – Sanitary
Drainage and Chapter 9 – Vents shall be used for the basis of design.
b. Structures equipped with laboratory plumbing fixtures shall be connected to the
laboratory waste drainage system or an RCJ approved disposal system.
c. Horizontal laboratory waste drainage piping shall be designed with uniform alignment
at uniform slopes. The minimum velocity of flow to achieve scouring action is 0.60 m
per second.
d. Laboratory waste discharging into the sanitary drainage system shall have a
temperature of 60° C or less. When higher temperatures exist, an approved cooling
method shall be provided.
e. Building laboratory waste that cannot discharge by gravity shall discharge into a tightly
covered and vented sewage ejector from which the effluent shall be lifted and
discharged into the gravity laboratory waste system by automatic pumping equipment
and components.
f. Connections and changes in direction shall be designed with drainage fittings. The
obstructing flow.
g. Cleanouts
1) Shall be indicated at every change of horizontal direction greater than 45
pipe.
2) Shall be provided at the base of each laboratory waste drainage stack or riser.
h. Laboratory waste drainage systems within a building shall be completely independent
of the sanitary and storm drainage system.
i. Design criteria for sanitary piping
(a) When determining peak drainage demand, Drainage Fixture Units (DFU)
associated with each fixture type shall be used. The DFU is a numerical
factor that measures the load producing effect of a single plumbing

Rev. 1 5.4 - 47
fixture; Refer to the International Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 - Drainage

Fixture Units For Fixtures And Groups Table.
(b) Values for continuous and semi-continuous flow into the drainage system
shall be computed on the basis that 0.06 liters per second is equivalent
to two DFU.
(a) Each pipe branch and main shall be determined based the number of
DFU’s connected; Refer to International Plumbing Code, Chapter 7 -
Building Drains And Sewers Table and Horizontal Fixture Branches And
Stacks Table.
(b) Horizontal stack offsets shall be sized as required for building drains.
(c) Vertical stack offsets shall be sized for straight stacks.
j. Design criteria for vent piping
1) The diameter of individual vents, branch vents, circuit vents, and relief vents
shall be at least one half the required diameter of the drain served.
2) Vent pipes shall not be less than 30 mm in diameter.
k. Vent exceeding 12 m in developed length shall be increased by one nominal pipe size
for the entire developed length of the vent pipe.
7. Laboratory Compressed Air Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for compressed
air systems however the Compressed Gas Association, The National Fire Protection
Association Standards and ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume
3 – Special Plumbing Systems, Chapter 9 – Compressed Air Systems shall be used
for the basis of design.
b. The laboratory compressed air system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to
ensure that an adequate volume of air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
requirements, is delivered during peak demand.
c. The entire laboratory compressed air system, including but not limited to air dryer,
pre-filters, after filters, controls etc. shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty structural
steel support frame.
d. Design criteria for laboratory compressed air piping
1) Identify each process, work station, or piece of equipment requiring
compressed air.
2) Determine the volume of air and pressure required for each location.
3) Determine the condition requirements for each location, such as the allowable
moisture content, particulate size, and oil content.
4) Determine how much time the individual tool or process will be in actual use for
a one minute period of time (duty cycle).
(a) To determine the duty cycle, the user should be consulted, they are the
only authority capable of providing the length of time an individual tool is
in use.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 48

(a) It may be difficult to accurately determine the simultaneous use factor so
sufficient receiver capacity or larger compressor capacity must be
provided to allow for variances in use.
6) Determine the extent of allowable leakage.
(a) Leakage is a function of the number of connections to the system and
the quality of the pipe assembly.
(b) Many smaller tools and operations will generally have a greater leakage
than a few larger ones.
(c) Leakage rates
(d) A well maintained system may have a leakage rate of approximately 2 to
5 percent.
(e) A typical system may have a leakage rate of approximately 10 percent.
(f) A poorly maintained system may have a leakage rate of approximately
25 percent.
10) Select the laboratory air compressor type, conditioning equipment, equipment
location, and air inlet, making sure that cubic meters / minute, liters / minute, or
liters / second is consistently used for both the system and laboratory
compressor capacity rating.
(a) Systems are typically sized based on no more than three starts per hour.
(b) Quantity of compressors shall be determined based on a project basis
however the minimum shall be a duplex system.
e. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
f. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
1) 15 mm for single connections on branch piping
8. Laboratory Vacuum Piping
vacuum systems however ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume

Rev. 1 5.4 - 49
2 – Plumbing Systems, Chapter 10 – Vacuum Systems shall be used for the basis of
design.
b. The laboratory vacuum system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure
that an adequate vacuum is provided during peak demand.
c. The entire laboratory vacuum system shall be mounted on a single heavy-duty
structural steel support frame.
d. Design criteria for vacuum piping
1) Identify each process, work station or piece of equipment requiring vacuum.
2) Determine the laboratory vacuum required for each location.
(a) Total connected load based on cubic meter per minute of every device
requiring vacuum in the building.
(a) It is difficult to accurately determine a simultaneous use factor so
sufficient receiver capacity must be provided to allow for variances in
use.
based on the equivalent length and total cubic meters per hour demand.
(a) Systems are typically sized based on no more than three starts per hour.
(b) Quantity of vacuum pumps shall be determined based on a project basis
however the minimum shall be a duplex system.
e. Cleanouts shall be strategically located throughout the piping system to allow for the
removal of debris.
f. A properly sized, constantly working laboratory vacuum pump usually requires less
maintenance than a compressor that runs intermittently.
g. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
9. Specialty Piping
specialty gas systems however the Compressed Gas Association and the National
Fire Protection Association Standards shall be used for the basis of design.
b. Typically used for organic and inorganic chemistry, physics, and biological
laboratories, and those used for research and development. The gases used in these

Rev. 1 5.4 - 50
types of facilities are characterized by low delivery pressure, low and intermittent
volume, and high purity requirements of the specialty gas and delivery system
c. It is extremely rare that the quantity of specialty gases for laboratory and research
laboratories would justify large central systems. Specialty gas systems typically refer
to point-of-use cylinder bottles, manifolds, piping, and appurtenances.
d. Specialty gases are classified in the following categories:
1) Oxidizers: These are non-flammable gases but they support combustion. No
oil or grease is permitted to be used with any device associated with the use of
this gas, and combustibles cannot be stored near these types of gases.
2) Inert Gases: These are gases that do not react with other materials. If
released into a confined space, the will reduce the oxygen level to a point that
asphyxiation could occur. The room or area where inert gases are used shall
be provided with oxygen monitor and be well ventilated.
3) Flammable Gases: These are gases that when combined with air or oxidizers,
will form a mixture that will burn or possibly explode if ignited. The room or
area where flammable gases are used shall be well ventilated; use approved
electrical devices for explosive atmospheres, and be restricted from ignition
sources.
4) Corrosive Gases: These are gases that will attack the surface of rubber,
metals, and will damage human tissue on contact. Protective clothing and
equipment shall be used around these types of gases.
5) Toxic and Poisonous Gases: These gases will harm human tissue by contact
or ingestion. Protective clothing and equipment shall be used around these
types of gases.
6) Pyrophoric Gases: These gases spontaneously ignite upon contact with air
under normal conditions.
7) Cryogenic Gases: These gases are stored as extremely cold liquids under
moderate pressure and are vaporized when used. Protective clothing and
equipment shall be used around these types of gases.
e. There are numerous grades of pure and mixed gases. The end user shall be
consulted for the maximum acceptable level of impurities permissible base on the type
of instrument used and the analytical work being performed.
f. Design criteria for laboratory compressed air piping
1) Identify each process, work station, or piece of equipment requiring type of
specialty gas.
2) Determine the quantity and grade of specialty gas required for each location.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 51
7) Select the specialty gas, manifold, controls, and appurtenances.

g. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
h. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
H. Laboratory Equipment And Appurtenances
1. Tepid (Emergency) Water Mixing Valve
a. Tepid (emergency) water mixing valve shall meet ANSI Standard Z358.1 and shall be
capable of providing a minimum of:
1) 75.5 lpm for of water for 15 minutes at 18° - 35° C to serve an emergency
showers.
2) 11.4 lpm of water for 15 minutes at 18° - 35° C to serve an emergency eye /
face washes.
3) 1.5 lpm of water for 15 minutes at 18° - 35° C to serve an emergency
eyewashes.
b. Tepid (emergency) water mixing valve shall employ two fully independent control
mechanisms which split the water flow in half, blend each half to the design
temperature and then integrates each stream at the outlet. The valve shall control
outlet temperature over a wide range of flow and shall be suitable for deluge
emergency showers and/or emergency eyewashes applications.
c. Tepid (emergency) water mixing valve shall include three thermometers to measure
the temperature of each stream and the merged flow. Temperature adjustment shall
be vandal resistant.
d. Each independent control mechanism shall employ a liquid-filled thermostatic motor
to drive the valve. Each control mechanism shall employ a stainless steel sliding
piston control device with reverse seat closure and both fixed and variable cold water
bypass.
e. In the event that one liquid motor fails, the control mechanism shall close off the hot
water port with the reverse seat and shall fully open the internal variable bypass to
allow cold water flow. The other control mechanism shall be unaffected by the failure
and shall maintain design temperature.
2. Laboratory Neutralization Tanks
a. Corrosive liquids, spent acids or other harmful chemicals that will destroy or
compromise the sanitary drainage system, create noxious or toxic fumes, or interfere
with the sewage treatment process shall not discharge into the sanitary drainage
system without being thoroughly diluted, neutralized, or treated by passing through a
neutralization tank.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 52
b. Neutralization requirements shall be determined based on the chemical properties

being discharged.
c. Laboratory waste neutralization can be accomplished utilizing:
1) Dilution – The mixing of chemical waste with water in order to stabilize the
laboratory waste prior to discharge into the sanitary drainage system.
2) Limestone – Laboratory waste is drained through a neutralization tank filled
with high purity limestone.
3) Chemical dosing – Laboratory waste is drained through a neutralization tank
that is injected with sodium hydroxide solution to automatically raise the pH
when required and sulfuric acid solution to automatically lower the pH when
required.
4) Design Criteria:
(a) Maintain an effluent pH downstream of the neutralization system
between 5.5 and 8.5.
(b) Neutralization tank size shall be determined by the quantity and type of
laboratory fixtures connected to the neutralization system.
(c) Neutralization tank shall have a minimum dwell time of 2-1/2 to 3 hours.
3. Laboratory Grade Water Systems
a. The degree of water purity required for a building depends on the intended use of the
water. There are primarily four grades of laboratory water typically used in most
hospitals, clinical laboratories, research laboratories, teaching laboratories, and
industrial type buildings.
1) Type I Reagent Water (Ultrapure): Used when maximum accuracy and
precision are required. The grade water is produced by distillation of supply
water with a maximum resistivity of 0.05 megohm-cm at 25°C Followed by
polishing with a mixed-bed ion exchange system to 16.7 megohm-cm and 0.2-
um filter.
2) Type II Reagent Water: Use for all procedures requiring organic-free, sterilized,
pyrogen-free water. The grade of water is produced by distillation through the
use of still designed with special baffling and degassing features or by double
distillation to produce water with a resistivity greater than 1.0 megohm-cm at
25°C.
3) Type III Reagent Water: Used for general laboratory purposes, including the
preparation of solutions, routine quality control tests, washing and rinsing of
laboratory glassware. This grade is produced by ion exchange, distillation, or
reverse osmosis followed by polishing with 0.45-um membrane filter.
4) Type IV Reagent Water: Used when large amounts of moderate-purity water
are required, particularly in the preparation of test solutions for wash test or ion
exchange resin evaluation. This grade is produced by ion exchange,
distillation, reverse osmosis or electro dialysis.
b. Water treatment process consists of three primary type of systems
1) Ion Exchange (Deionization / Demineralization): Removes impurities by
passing water through synthetic resins which have an affinity for dissolved
ionized slats and gases.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 53
(a) This type of system will not remove bacteria, pyrogens, particulates, or
dissolved organic compounds.
(b) Can generate a 15 – 18 megohm-cm purity
(c) Requires regeneration with sulfuric acid and caustic
2) Distillation: Removes impurities from water by converting a liquid to a gas and
then recondensing it as distilled water.
(a) This type of system removes pyrogens, bacteria and viruses except
dissolved ionized gases.
(b) Can generate 1 – 800,000 megohm-cm purity if the system supply water
has been pretreated.
3) Reverse Osmosis: Utilizes hydraulic pressure to force pure water through a
membrane and is usually used in water with high TDS.
(a) This type of system removes some bacteria, pryrogens and viruses but
will not remove dissolved ionized gases.
c. Design Criteria
1) Ion Exchange (Deionization / Demineralization) System
(a) Confirm the capacity of the floor drain that will be receiving the backwash
from the demineralization. Backwash rates are typically several times
higher than the demineralizer flow rate.
(b) The equipment shall be completely automatic
(c) If specific demand requirements are not available for the project,
demineralizer equipment, components, and appurtenances shall be
sized based on
(d) Assume 2 – 3.8 lpd per student station for classroom laboratories.
Assume two classes per day if exact number of uses is not known.
(e) Assume 3.8 – 5.6 lpd per person for non-classroom laboratories.
(f) Assume 19 lpd for classroom preparation room pipette washers
(g) Assume 95 lpd for pipette washers
(h) Add feeding still and glass-washer demand to total based on
manufacturer requirements.
2) Distillation System
(a) If specific demand requirements are not available for the project,
distillation tanks, equipment, components, and appurtenances shall be
sized based on
(b) Assume two people per 3 m x 6 m module
(c) Assume 2- 3.8 lpd per person plus 50% for future
(d) Assume 3.8 - 5.6 lpd per person for non-classroom laboratories.
(e) Assume 170 lph for each glass-washer or 606 lpd
3) Reverse Osmosis System

Rev. 1 5.4 - 54
(a) Confirm the capacity of the floor drain that will be receiving the backwash
from the reverse osmosis filters. Backwash rates are typically several
times higher than the demineralizer flow rate.
(b) The equipment shall be completely automatic
(c) If specific demand requirements are not available for the project, reverse
osmosis equipment, components, and appurtenances shall be sized
based on
(d) Assume 2 – 3.8 lpd per student station for classroom laboratories.
Assume two classes per day if exact number of uses is not known.
(e) Assume 3.8 – 5.6 lpd per person for non-classroom laboratories.
(f) Assume 19 lpd for classroom preparation room pipette washers
(g) Assume 95 lpd for pipette washers
(h) Add feeding still and glass-washer demand to total based on
manufacturer requirements.
4. Laboratory Compressed Air System
a. There are two general categories of air compressors
1) Positive displacement: Operates at a constant volume and are capable of
operating over a wide range of discharge pressures at a relatively constant
capacity
2) Dynamic: Operates over a wide range of capacities at a relatively constant
speed.
b. Compressor Types
1) Reciprocating: This type of compressor is recommended where the potential
for a trace of oil in the discharge air is not a problem however “oil free”
compressors are manufactured.
2) Sliding Vane: This type is recommended where low capacity is required in the
range of 2832 lpm to 517 lpm.
3) Liquid Ring: This type is recommended for hospital and laboratory use.
4) Straight Lobe: This type of compressor is available as “oil free” and are
recommended for pressures up to 1379 kPa and 4285 lpm
5) Rotary Screw: This type of compressor produce pulse free air and are
available for pressures from 1304 – 2068 kPa and 8496 lpm.
6) Centrifugal: This type of compressor produces large volumes of air at
relatively low pressures. Higher pressures can be attained by adding stages
with intercooling between stages.
c. Compressor Accessories (when provided)
1) Silencers: There are two types of silencers
(a) Reactive: This type of silencer shall attenuate low frequency sound in
order of 500 hertz and are most often used with reciprocating
compressors

Rev. 1 5.4 - 55
(b) Absorptive: This type of silencer shall attenuate higher frequency sound
above 500 hertz and are most often used with screw and centrifugal
compressors
2) After-coolers
(a) Shall lower temperature of compressed air immediately after leaving the
compressor.
(b) The discharge air temperature shall be provided between 21.1°C and
43°C.
(c) The primary reason to lower the discharge air temperature is to remove
moisture that would otherwise condense elsewhere in the piping system
(d) Select the after-cooler based on pressure drop through the unit, space,
and clearance requirements for maintenance.
3) Filters
(a) Filters shall remove or reduce impurities or contaminants in the air
stream to an acceptable or predetermined level.
(b) Filters can consist of:
(c) Inlet filters: Shall remove large amounts of contaminants and particles
from the inlet of the compressor.
(d) Pre-filters: Shall remove contaminants and particles from the inlet of a
dryer.
(e) After-filters: Shall be placed after the dryer to remove contaminants and
particles that the pre-filter was not able to remove
(f) Point-of-Use filters: Shall be placed immediately prior to the tool or
individual piece of equipment that requires removal of particulates, oil, or
moisture to a greater extent than was done by the after-filter.
4) Separators
(a) Shall remove large quantities of liquid water or oil from the air steam.
(b) Shall be located downstream of the air compressor and after cooler.
5) Compressed Air Dryers
(a) Are provided to remove water vapor from the air steam.
(b) There are five categories of dryers:
(c) High pressurization of the compressed air: Reduces the quantity of
water vapor by compressing air to pressure greater than those required
for actual use.
(d) Condensation: Lower the temperature of the air stream through a heat
exchanger to produce a lower dew point.
(e) Absorption: Uses either a solid or liquid medium and operate when the
airstream containing water vapor passes through or over a deliquescent
material.
(f) Adsorption: Uses a porous, non-consumable material that causes water
vapor to condense as a very thin film on the desiccant materials surface.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 56
(g) Heat of compression: Uses a desiccant to absorb the moisture in the

compressed airstream.
(h) The most important requirement in the selection of a dryer is to
determine the lowest required temperature dew point for the intended
application.
(i) Refrigerated dryers shall be provided for dew point temperatures down to
4°C.
(j) Desiccant dryers shall be provided for dew point temperatures 3°C and
below.
6) Receivers
(a) Air receivers shall be provided for
(b) Storage of air
(c) Equalization of the pressure variations (pulsations)
(d) Collection of residual condensate
(e) Reduction of compressor cycling / run time
(f) Determination of need for a receiver shall be based on the type of
regulation the system uses.
7) The compressed air system shall be provided with an air intake that extends to
the exterior of the building.
5. Laboratory Vacuum System
a. Vacuum Types (two most commonly used)
1) Liquid Ring: This type is recommended for hospital and laboratory use.
2) Sliding Vane: This type is recommended where low capacity is required.
b. The vacuum system shall consist of:
1) Two or more pumps designed to operate as system requires
2) A receiver to provide a vacuum reservoir to separate liquids from the air stream.
3) Interconnect piping and alarms.
c. Laboratory vacuum typically serves general chemical, biological, and physics
laboratories for the purposes of drying, filtering, fluid transfer, and evacuating air from
apparatuses.
1) Standard vacuum system working pressure is typically in the range of 40.6 kPa
to 67.7 kPa.
2) High vacuum working pressure is typically in the range of 81.3 kPa to 98.2 kPa.
d. The vacuum pump system shall be provided with an exhaust pipe that extends to
exterior of the building.
6. Laboratory Nitrogen System
a. Nitrogen is an inert, colorless, and tasteless gas used primarily to control the
atmosphere for high sensitive equipment and procedures.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 57
b. Nitrogen gas shall be provided to control oxygen levels, humidity, and temperature in
laboratory equipment and tests.
c. Nitrogen supply shall be provided through either point-of-use:
1) Nitrogen cylinders: Available in various sizes and pressure ratings.
(a) A manifold with regulators, shut off valves, gauges, pig tails, interconnect
piping, and appurtenances shall be provided when connecting multiple
cylinders together to meet the demand requirement.
(b) When intermittent demand is low, a single cylinder shall be provided.
2) Nitrogen generator: The generating units have their own filters and purifiers
that generate high purity nitrogen.
(a) Shall be provided where the installation of cylinders is inconvenient and
the change out will cause disruption of continuing work and / or
experiments.
(b) Typically these units provide pressures around 415 kPa and flow rates
up to 300 cc/min.
I. Medical Piping And Appurtenances
1. Materials
2. Installation
locations.
b. No piping shall be in-bedded in wall or floors.
3. Nitrous Oxide Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for nitrous oxide
systems however the National Fire Protection Association Standard 99 and ASPE
Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 3 – Special Plumbing Systems,
Chapter 10 – Plumbing Design for Healthcare Facilities shall be used for the basis of
design.
b. The nitrous oxide system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate volume of nitrous oxide, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
c. Design criteria for nitrous oxide piping
1) Determine the volume of nitrous oxide and pressure required for each outlet.
If a specific flow is not requested, typically 0.28 lpm is assigned to each outlet.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 58

d. Pipe sizing shall be determined based on the more stringent of the following
1) Maximum friction loss of 6.90 kPa per 30 m.
e. Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
4. Carbon Dioxide Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for carbon dioxide
design.
b. The carbon dioxide system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate volume of carbon dioxide, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
c. Design criteria for carbon oxide piping.
1) Determine the volume of carbon dioxide and pressure required for each outlet.
If a specific flow is not requested, typically 28 lpm is assigned to each outlet.
requirement:

Rev. 1 5.4 - 59

5. Oxygen Piping
a. Oxygen systems shall conform to the requirements of the Saudi Sanitary Code 701-
CR, Section 1203, Oxygen Systems, the National Fire Protection Association
Standard 99 and ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook, Volume 3 – Special
Plumbing Systems, Chapter 10 – Plumbing Design for Healthcare Facilities shall be
used for the basis of design.
b. The oxygen system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate volume of oxygen, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user requirements, is
delivered during peak demand.
c. Design criteria for oxygen piping.
1) Determine the volume of oxygen and pressure required for each outlet. If a
specific flow is not requested, typically 28 lpm is assigned to each outlet.
requirement:
6. Medical Air Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for medical air
design.
b. The medical air system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that an
adequate volume of medical air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user requirements,
is delivered during peak demand.
c. Design criteria for medical air piping.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 60
1) Determine the volume of medical air and pressure required for each outlet. If
a specific flow is not requested, typically 28 lpm is assigned to each outlet.
requirement:
7. Medical Vacuum Piping
a. No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for medical air
design.
b. The medical vacuum system shall be controlled, regulated, and sized to ensure that
an adequate volume of medical air, at a pressure and purity to satisfy user
c. Design criteria for medical vacuum piping.
1) Determine the volume of medical vacuum required for each outlet. If a specific
flow is not requested, typically 50 lpm is assigned to each outlet.
d. Cleanouts shall be strategically located throughout the piping system to allow for the
removal of debris.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 61
requirement:
(a) 20 mm for multiple connections on branch piping.
(b) 25 mm for main piping.
8. Specialty Systems Piping
a. Waste Anesthesia Gas Disposal Piping
1) No mandated code requirements have been developed specifically for waste
anesthesia gas disposal systems however the National Fire Protection
Association Standard 99 and ASPE Plumbing Engineering Design Handbook,
Volume 3 – Special Plumbing Systems, Chapter 10 – Plumbing Design for
Healthcare Facilities shall be used for the basis of design.
2) The waste anesthesia gas disposal system shall be controlled, regulated, and
sized to ensure that an adequate volume of medical air, at a pressure and purity
to satisfy user requirements, is delivered during peak demand.
3) Design criteria for waste anesthesia gas disposal piping.
(a) Determine the volume of medical vacuum required for each outlet. If a
specific flow is not requested, typically 50 lpm is assigned to each outlet.
(b) Determine maximum number of locations that may be used
simultaneously on each branch and main (use factor).
(c) Determine an allowance for future expansion.
(d) Determine the developed length of pipe (The length of pipe measured
along the centerline of the pipe and fittings).
(e) Determine the equivalent length of pipe (The length of pipe of a specific
diameter that would produce the same frictional resistance of a particular
pipe or line comprised of pipe and fittings).
4) Minimum pipe sizes; Exact pipe sizes shall be determined based on project
requirement:
(a) 20 mm for multiple connections on branch piping.
(b) 25 mm for main piping.
J. Safety Equipment
1. Eyewashes
a. Shall be provided:
1) Within 10 seconds (approximately 17 m) of hazard.
2) On the same level as the hazard and with no obstructed path.
3) With “hands-free” stay-open valve activates in one second or less.
b. Unit must provide a minimum of 1.5 liters of tepid water per minute for 15 minutes.
2. Emergency Showers
a. Shall be provided:
1) Within 10 seconds (approximately 17 m) of hazard.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 62
2) On the same level as the hazard and with no obstructed path.

3) With “hands-free” stay-open valve activates in one second or less.
b. Unit must provide a minimum of 75.5 liters of tepid water per minute for 15 minutes.
c. Shower shall be installed between 2083 mm and 2438 mm above floor.
K. Vibration
1. Control
a. Effective vibration control is required to reduce noise transmission through the piping
systems. Machines, equipment, and components shall be provided with vibration
and shock mounting through the use of:
1) Compressed Cork
(a) Is typically manufactured of pure granules of cork without any foreign
binder that is compressed and baked under pressure with accurately
controlled density.
(b) Compressed cork is typically used for floor slab isolation.
2) Elastomers and Neoprene Rubber
(a) Has very good sound isolation characteristics and is acceptable for low
frequency shock absorption and is useful as vibration isolators for
frequencies above 1,200 cpm.
(b) Molded elastomer mountings are generally only used for light and
medium weight machines.
3) Steel Spring Isolators
(a) Steel spring isolators provide the most efficient method of isolating
vibration and shock.
(b) Steel spring isolation can provide deflection up to 255 mm.
(c) Rubber spring sound isolation pads shall be provided under spring
isolators to prevent high frequency noise transmission into the floor or
other critical installations.
L. Condensate Drainage And Collection Systems
1. Refer to GEM Section 5.4.3 HVAC.
M. Specialty Plumbing Systems
1. Water Hammer Arrester
a. Shall be provided on water distribution systems to reduce water flow velocities
immediately adjacent to equipment and where quick-closing valves are installed.
1) Water hammer arrestors for piping serving equipment shall be provided within
a few meters of the equipment isolation valve
2) The location of the water hammer arrestor associated with plumbing fixtures
shall be determined based on the start of the horizontal branch pipe to the last
plumbing fixture on that branch. If the branch pipe exceeds 6.1 m in length, an
additional water hammer arrestor shall be provided and each water hammer
arrestor shall be sized based on half of the fixture unit value.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 63
b. Shall conform to ASSE 1010.

c. Shall be nested stainless steel bellows type contained within a sealed stainless steel
chamber.
d. Sizing
1) Obtain the total number of fixture units on each branch pipe. This information
is then applied to manufacturer sizing charts to determine the required size
2) When water pressure exceeds 448 kPa, select the next larger size water
hammer arrestor.
3) If the fixture unit value total includes a decimal, the number shall be rounded
up to the next largest whole number.
4) Flow velocities shall not exceed 2.5 m/sec.
2. Strainers
a. Strainers shall be provided on the incoming building water service to protect the check
valves of the backflow preventer from fouling due to foreign matter and debris in the
building water supply.
b. Shall conform to ASTM A-126 Class B.
c. Strainers shall be arranged to permit the flushing of accumulated debris and to
facilitate removal and replacement of strainer screen without disconnecting from
piping system.
1) Valved dirt flush out connections for strainers shall be installed such that the
valve is located 153 mm to 305 mm below the strainer.
2) Flush out connection shall be terminated in an approved manner at a point
where there shall be no risk of flooding or damage.
N. Valves
1. General
a. Valves for potable water systems shall comply with United States Public Law 111-380
“Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act”
b. Valves shall be of same minimum working pressure and materials as specified for
fittings of the system in which they are installed. Regardless of service, valves shall
be designed for a minimum 862 kPa psi working pressure.
c. Provide shut-off valves at each plumbing fixture and / or equipment requiring plumbing
service.
d. Valves shall be provided in accessible locations and so that the tops of the valve stems
are above the horizontal.
e. Valves shall be provided with stem extensions when installed on insulated piping.
2. Butterfly Valve
a. Butterfly valves provide bubble-tight closure with excellent throttling characteristics.
They can be used for full open/closed and throttling applications. Required when
using flanged piping.
b. Has two primary body types
1) Lug: Body has tapped lugs matching up to bolt circle of Class 125 / 150 flanges.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 64
2) Grooved: Direct connect to pipe using iron pipe size couplings

c. Has a thin rotating disk which operates with a quarter turn from fully open to fully
closed; however, the disk is always in the flow path.
d. Primary Function
1) Start and stop fluid flow
2) Used either as fully open or fully closed
3) Used for high temperatures and / or corrosive materials
3. Gate Valve
a. Gate Valves provide full flow, minimum pressure drop, minimum turbulence, and
minimum fluid trapped in piping
b. Use a wedge shaped disk or gate as the closure member that operates perpendicular
to the flow.
c. Primary Function
3) Flow can be bi-directional
4. Ball Valve
a. Ball valves are light, easily installed and provide tight closure
b. Has three primary body types
1) One-piece: Has no potential body leak path, but requires use of reduced port
ball.
2) Two-piece: Most commonly used ball valve that can be provided as a reduced
port, standard port, or full port ball.
3) Three-piece: Is a repairable valve that can be provided as a reduced port,
standard port, or full port ball.
c. Port Sizes
1) Reduced Port: Have more than one pipe size flow restriction and are not
recommended for building service piping, have a high pressure drop, but
recommended for process piping in hazardous material transfer.
2) Standard Port: Are up to one pipe size smaller than the nominal pipe size, have
a better pressure drop than reduced ports, but have significantly better flow
characteristics than globe valves.
3) Full Port: Have pressure drop equal to equivalent length of pipe and have better
flow characteristics than gate valves.
d. Primary Function
5. Check Valve

Rev. 1 5.4 - 65
a. Check valves are designed to prevent backflow by automatically seating when the
direction of fluid is reversed.
b. Automatically check or prevent the reversal of flow.
c. Have three basic types
1) Swing Check: Has a hinged disk that swings on a hinge pin. When flow
reverses, the pressure pushes the disk against the seat. This type of check
valve has little resistance to flow.
2) Lift Check: Has a guided disk that is raised from the seat by upward flow
pressure. Reversal of flow pushes the disk against the seat, stopping
backflow. This type of check valve has considerable resistance to flow and is
suited for high pressure service.
3) Wafer Check: Are manufactured in two types:
(a) A dual flapper that is hinged on a center post
(b) A single flapper that is hinged on a pin.
These types of check valves are generally used in piping 100 mm and larger
because they are lighter than traditional flanged end swing check valves.
6. Plug Valves
a. Is a quarter turn valve that uses a tapered cylindrical plug that fits a body seat of
corresponding shape.
b. Are manufactured in two types
1) Lubricated: Designed with grooves in the surface of the plug. The grooves are
connected to a lubricated channel in the stem. When the grooves are filled
with lubricant, a tight seal develops between the plug and valve body.
2) Non-Lubricated: Have two basic types
(a) Lift: Is mechanically lifted while being turned to disengage it from the
seating surface.
(b) Sleeved: Has a fluorocarbon sleeve that surrounds the plug, providing a
continuous seal.
7. Balancing Valve
a. Is a measurement and regulation devise and are required to balance hot water and
hot water return systems.
b. The main purpose of a balancing valve is to provide a consistent flow through the hot
water return system.
c. Balancing valves generally shall be bronze body, brass ball valve with differential
pressure read out ports, check valve, tapped drain / purge port, memory stop, and
calibrated nameplate.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 66
SUBSECTION 5.4.3 HVAC
HVAC
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection of the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) establishes the Royal
Commission (RCJ) mandatory, minimum accepted HVAC requirements for new and
renovation projects. This section provides:
or modernization for building HVAC systems.
2) The policies and technical information are to be used; however project
conditions may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of GEM are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative systems,
methods, or devices not specifically described herein however the use of alternative
systems, methods, or devices must have prior approval from the RCJ.
c. If a conflict is found between the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), the Standard
Specifications, and the Standard Details, the conflict shall be brought to the attention
of the Royal Commission. The Royal Commission shall provide resolution or direction
on how to proceed.
d. In the event there is a conflict between the GEM and the requirements of the RCJ, the
conflict shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ. The Royal Commission shall
e. The design of RCJ HVAC system requires coordination and integration with other
disciplines such as, but not limited to, the architectural design, structural design,
plumbing design, electrical design, and other disciplines.
f. The following objectives shall be reflected in the HVAC programming and design:
1) Design Quality – The RCJ is committed to excellence in the design and
development of its sites and buildings. This requires an integrated approach
by all disciplines to achieve the highest quality HVAC design while providing
cost effective HVAC systems.
2) Flexibility and Adaptability are required to accommodate renovations and future
expansion without replacement of central building equipment or components.
3) Sustainability- The essential principles of sustainable design shall address:
Energy conservation, materials selection, water use reduction, environmental
indoor air quality, operations, and maintenance.
(a) All building design must meet the requirements of Saudi Energy
Conservation Code 601-CR and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy
Standard for Buildings. Jubail is considered Climate Zone #1.
(1) All equipment must meet the efficiency requirements established in
ASHRAE Std. 90.1
(2) Fan horsepower must not exceed the limitations established in
ASHRAE Std. 90.1
(b) The local Ministry of Electricity and Water establishes requirements for
water use.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 67
(c) All building design must comply with all minimum requirements of Saudi
Mechanical Code 501-CR, Chapter 3 and ASHRAE 62.1, Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
(d) Mechanical systems selection shall be based on life cycle cost analysis
over the entire expected life of the buildings or systems
2. Commissioning
a. Refer to Section 4.5.9 – Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning
requirements.
3. Scope
a. This Guiding Engineering Manual establishes the Royal Commission of Jubail’s
(RCJ’s) mandatory, minimally acceptable, requirements for new and renovation
projects. This Manual provides:
or modernization for building HVAC systems.
2) The policies and technical information to be used, however project conditions
may dictate the need to exceed minimum requirements.
b. The provisions of Guiding Engineering Manual are not intended to prohibit the use of
alternative systems, methods, or devices not specifically described; however, the use
of alternative systems, methods, or devices must have prior approval from the RCJ.
c. If a conflict is discovered between the Guiding Engineering Manual, the Standard
Specifications, and the Standard Details, the Guiding Engineering Manual shall take
precedence.
d. The RCJ is the final Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) in Jubail Industrial City.
e. The design of HVAC systems requires coordination and integration with other
disciplines such as, but not limited to, the fire alarm design discipline for alarms related
to smoke control and duct smoke detectors, the plumbing design discipline for make-
up water supply to hydronic systems and various drains, the electrical design
discipline for power to the HVAC equipment and all disciplines for space to install
piping and equipment.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for general Definitions and Abbreviations
b. The following documents establish the minimum requirement for the design of HVAC
systems:
1) ABMA: American Boiler Manufacturers Association
2) ADC: Air Diffusion Council
3) AGA: American Gas Association
4) AIA: American Institute of Architects
5) AIHA: American Industrial Hygiene Association
6) AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association
8) ARI: Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

Rev. 1 5.4 - 68

10) ASA: Acoustical Society of America
11) ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning
Engineers
12) ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers
13) ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
17) CGA: Compressed Gas Association
18) EPA: Environmental Protection Agency
19) EUI: Energy Utilization (or Use) Index
20) HEI: Heat Exchange Institute
21) HI: Hydraulics Institute
22) HI: Hydronics Institute
23) I2SL: International Institute for Sustainable Labs
25) IEC: International Electro-Technical Commission
28) ISA: Instrument Society of America
29) Labs21: Laboratories for the 21st Century
30) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings
Industry
31) NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau
33) NSF: National Sanitation Foundation
34) NWWA: National Water Well Association
36) PPFA: Plastic Pipe and Fittings Association
39) SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
40) SSPC: Steel Structures Painting Council
41) STI: Steel Tank Institute

Rev. 1 5.4 - 69
42) UEC: Uniform Electric Code

43) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
44) UMC: Uniform Mechanical Code
5. Definitions (specific to this section)
a. Refer to Section 2.2 for general Definitions and Abbreviations
systems:
1) "Furnish" Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements.
2) "Install" Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements.
3) "Provide" Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
4) "Concealed Interior" Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants.
5) “Concealed Exterior” Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures.
6) "Exposed Interior" Exposed to view indoors (not concealed).
7) “Exposed, Exterior” Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
8) “Finished Space” Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, space above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, tunnels, and interstitial spaces.
9) "Conditioned" Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling.
10) "Unconditioned" Spaces without direct heating or cooling including ceiling
plenums.
11) "Indoors" Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
12) "Outdoors" Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
13) “Atmosphere” The same as outdoors.
14) “Energy Utilization Index” The measure of the total energy consumed by a
building expressed as energy consumed per gross building area (kJ/M²)
a. Refer to Section 3.1 for general Codes and Standards
systems:
1) Saudi Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR
2) Saudi Energy Conservation Code – Commercial SBC 601-CR
3) Saudi Energy Conservation Code – Low Rise SBC 602-CR

Rev. 1 5.4 - 70
4) Saudi Fire Code SBC 801-CR

5) AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities
6) ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation
7) ASHRAE Handbook – Fundamentals
8) ASHRAE Handbook – Refrigeration
9) ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Applications
10) ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Systems and Equipment
11) ANSI/ASHRAE/ASHE Standard 170 – Ventilation of Health Care Facilities
12) ASHRAE Standard 15 – Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration
13) ASHRAE Standard 34 – Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants
14) ASHRAE Standard 52.2 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning
Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
15) ASHRAE Standard 62.1 – Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
16) ASHRAE Standard 62.2 – Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low-
Rise Residential Buildings
17) ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise
Residential Buildings
18) ASHRAE Standard 90.2 – Energy Efficient Design of Low Rise Residential
Buildings
19) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
20) NFPA 30 – Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
21) NFPA 45 - Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
22) NFPA 90A – Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation
Systems
23) NFPA 92 – Standard for Smoke Control Systems
24) NFPA 96 – Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations
25) NFPA 99 – Health Care Facilities Code
26) NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
28) (IEC) – International Electro-Technical Commission
29) International Mechanical Code
c. In the event of conflict between Codes and this document, the Saudi Building Code
shall govern.
7. Design Criteria
a. Outdoor Design Criteria
1) For Buildings:

Rev. 1 5.4 - 71
(a) Cooling – Standard Design

(1) Dry Bulb: 46 C
(2) Wet Bulb: 30 C
(3) Daily Range: 13 C
(4) Wind Velocity: 16 kM/hr
(b) Cooling – Critical Facilities
Dry Bulb: 50 C
Wet Bulb: 32 C
Daily Range: 15 C
Wind Velocity: 16 kM/hr
(c) Heating
(1) Dry Bulb: 5 C
(2) Wind Velocity: 24 kM/hr
2) For air cooled condensers
(a) 50 C
3) For cooling towers and evaporative condensers
(a) 32 C Wet Bulb
4) Sun Days per year
(a) Assume 300 sun days per year
5) Wind
(a) Assume frequent sustained and gusty winds to velocities of 18 m/s
b. Indoor Design Criteria
1) For commercial, religious, educational, government, health care and laboratory
facilities:
(a) Cooling
(b) 22 C +/- 1 C
(c) 45% RH
(d) Heating
(e) 21 C +/- 1 C
(i) Note that heating is not provided for commercial facilities.
2) For retail and residential facilities:
(a) Cooling
(b) 23 C +/- 2 C
(c) 50% RH
3) For all industrial, maintenance and service type facilities or spaces that are
normally occupied:

Rev. 1 5.4 - 72
(a) Cooling
(b) 26 C +/- 2 C
4) For normally unoccupied mechanical and electrical spaces:
(a) Cooling
(b) 28 C +/- 2 C to protect electronics that may be part of the mechanical or
electrical equipment.
5) For warehouses
(a) Cooling
(b) 28 C
c. Ventilation
1) The outdoor air ventilation rates from Saudi Mechanical Code 510-CR, Chapter
4- Ventilation shall be used for all spaces unless otherwise directed by the RCJ.
2) Ventilation rates from Saudi Mechanical Code 510-CR, Section 407 and
ANSI/ASHRAE/ASHE Standard 170 – Ventilation of Health Care Facilities shall
be used for design of hospital spaces.
3) Ventilation for variable air volume systems shall ensure proper ventilation rates
at low and high system airflow.
4) Instrumentation and controls shall be provided to assure outdoor air intake
rates are maintained during occupied hours.
5) The placement and location of outdoor air intakes are critical to the safety of
the occupants inside a building and must be in compliance with the security
requirements of the building.
6) Fresh air intakes shall be designed and located to minimize dust entrainment.
7) A minimum separation distances between ventilation air intakes, exhausts and
other building features shall be kept as per the International Building Code for
non-hospital applications and the AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction
of Health Care Facilities for hospital applications.
8) Ventilation shall be used for Potable Water and Irrigation Water Pump Rooms.
These rooms shall not be air conditioned.
8. Heating Load Calculations
a. General
1) Heating is rarely designed into buildings in Jubail with the exception of hospitals
and residences, or where reheat of minimum air change rates or make-up air
is required such as laboratories.
(a) Reheat systems are prohibited except for applications meeting the
exceptions listed in ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy Standard for
Buildings except Low-Rise Buildings.
2) Since heating and cooling load calculations are normally completed with a
single computer program, the software and procedure requirements are listed
in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9 – Cooling Load Calculations in the Guiding Engineering
Manual.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 73
3) For reheating in non-hospital spaces, the capacity calculation shall be based

on increasing the supply air temperature from the design temperature leaving
the air handling unit to 21 C.
4) For reheating in hospital spaces, the capacity calculation shall be based on
increasing the supply air temperature from the design temperature leaving the
air handling unit to 25 C.
b. Heating Load Components
1) Heating load calculations shall include heat losses from outside surfaces (roofs,
walls, windows, raised floors); interior non-conditioned spaces (partitions,
ceilings, floors); make up air and infiltration; duct and plenum losses.
2) The heating load calculations shall be done without credit for occupants and
internal gains.
9. Cooling Load Calculations
a. General
1) HVAC loads calculations must be performed with a computer-based program
in accordance with the Saudi Building Code 501, Section 1.12- Heating and
Cooling Load Calculations.
2) Submit the final load calculations to the RCJ prior to the completion of the final
design phase for RCJ review and acceptance.
3) The HVAC loads calculations report shall include all input and output used in
the heating and cooling calculation program, and shall include zone peak
heating and cooling loads results, and whole building “block” loads, air-handling
unit coil selections, and psychrometric process charts.
4) Zoning for the load calculations shall match the temperature control zoning.
5) Block and zone peak loads shall be calculated.
6) Residential method shall only be used for residential application.
7) For open spaces deeper than 8-meters, a separate perimeter control zone shall
be assumed in the design and calculation. The depth of the perimeter zone
shall not exceed 4-meters.
8) Account for anticipated supply duct leakage and supply duct heat gain or loss
in the load calculations
9) For final cooling load calculations, base the lighting heat gain on the actual
lighting design.
10) Base the occupancy load on the code allowable square foot per person criteria,
assuming that the building could be occupied to that maximum at some time.
11) Base heat dissipation from all electrical equipment shall be per the electrical
design.
b. Loads Calculations Computer-Based Program
1) Load and energy software programs shall be created specifically for the HVAC
system design.
2) The program shall be capable of calculating each zone’s peak heating and
cooling load as well as the whole-building “block” loads. Each zone, room and

Rev. 1 5.4 - 74
portion of room with different load profile, orientation or sensible load shall be
calculated. A separate block load for each air handling system shall also be
calculated.
3) The program shall, at a minimum, calculate:
(a) solar gains through fenestration, internal gains from occupants including
latent heat for cooling purposes, internal gains from lighting and
equipment, outside air loads (sensible and latent) from ventilation and
infiltration, and heat gains or losses through fenestration, walls, floors
and roofs.
4) Software Program Features
(a) Store all necessary databases in addition to provision for editing.
(b) Calculates from manually entered data or directly from floor plans
(c) Automatically admits correction factors necessary for computing loads
(d) Analyzes up to 12 months per calculation
(e) Calculates 24 hours per design day
(f) Links with energy program software
(g) Transfers data to energy analysis programs
(h) Calculates in both metric and English units
(i) Allows entry of an HVAC system type from a menu and automatically
differentiates between block and peak loads depending on the type of
HVAC system chosen.
(j) Allows for roof and wall color effects
(k) Allows varying indoor conditions within a project
(l) Proper handling of return air plenum loads
(m) Accounts for people diversity in total building load
(n) Automates compliance with ASHRAE Standard 62
(o) Allows different summer and winter air rates
(p) Allows simultaneous infiltration, return air, exhaust air and ventilation air
(where applicable)
(q) Computes supply fan horsepower and heat gains
(r) Accounts for both draw-thru and blow-thru fans
(s) Computes supply and return duct gains and losses
(t) Lighting and equipment watts along with number of people can be
entered directly or on a per square foot basis.
(u) Leaving coil conditions can be specified with a desired dry bulb
temperature or a relative humidity.
(v) Allows heating and cooling safety factors
(w) Calculates reheat requirements, if necessary
(x) Provision for both VAV and constant volume systems

Rev. 1 5.4 - 75
(y) Performs complete psychrometric analysis

(z) Computes CFM air quantities with psychrometrics
(aa) Allows specification of minimum supply air quantities
(bb) Selects equipment from ARI databases
(cc) Calculates runout and main trunk duct sizes
(dd) Allows an unlimited number of zones which can be grouped into as many
as 100 air handling systems
(ee) Calculates chilled and hot water coil flow rates
(ff) Printable comprehensive reports list the general project data, detailed
zone loads, air handler summary loads, outside air loads, total building
loads, building envelope analysis, tonnage requirements, air quantities,
chilled water flow rates (if applicable), and complete psychrometric data
with entering and leaving coil conditions.
c. Cooling Load Components
1) During load calculations, all sensible and latent heat sources shall be
considered.
2) Sensible cooling load shall be calculated for building envelope, people, lights,
equipment, outside air that is introduced into the system by air make-up or by
infiltration and duct heat loss/gain.
3) Latent cooling load shall be calculated for people, outside air and any process
in which moisture is given up to the air.
10. Energy Modeling
a. General
1) Building energy modeling during the design of a building or renovation shall
serve several purposes. The primary objective is to inform design decisions in
a way that guides the design toward RCJ goals for building energy consumption
performance. It is recognized that the detail and resolution of the model will
refine as the design progresses from concept to design development. The
objective of this modeling guideline is to yield results that are consistent
between projects and more representative of eventual metered utility data. The
process is one of continuous improvement; refinements will be made to the
modeling guidelines as operating data is collected on modeled buildings.
b. Buildings Requiring Energy Modeling
1) All projects, new construction and renovations, require an energy model, with
the exception of storage facilities, maintenance facilities or facilities that do not
require cooling or heating.
c. Modeling Software
1) The RCJ prefers that modelers use Trane Trace 700, Carrier HAP or eQuest,
a US DOE based energy modeling software package, to execute energy
models. The modeler will make available the input and output files for the RCJ’s
review and use. The use of other modeling software packages may be
approved by the RCJ upon specific request.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 76
d. Climate Data
1) The RCJ recommends the use of TMY-2 (Typical Meteorological Year, 2nd
edition) climate data generated specifically for Al Jubail. Deviation from using
this data set requires approval by the RCJ.
e. Modeling Plan
1) During the concept stage, prior to Schematic Design, the consultant shall
present an energy modeling plan that describes the intended modeling
approach through the course of design. This plan must be approved by the RCJ
prior to starting the Schematic phase. The plan shall define the following for
each phase of design:
(a) Model inputs that are anticipated to be known or assumed at that point of
design
(b) Modeling software to be used
(c) The anticipated building and system options that will be evaluated at
each phase
(d) Model result level of detail, format and presentation method
f. Concept/Schematic Design Phase Model
1) During this phase, decisions will be made that include building site, orientation,
glazing, and massing. The intent of energy modeling at this phase is to evaluate
concept variations relative to inherent differences in energy consumption of
these variations.
2) Evaluate the shape and orientation of the building for impact on cooling loads.
As part of this phase, the architect may generate different massing concepts
for the building. Each of these conceptual designs will be modeled during this
phase.
3) Provide key input assumptions for review by the RCJ. Assumptions should be
in line with ASHRAE Std. 90.1 Appendix G modeling protocols so as not to yield
misleading results early in the design analysis process. Not all Appendix G
detail will be used in this early modeling.
4) It is preferred to model three HVAC system options (as appropriate). Inform
the RCJ of the three options to be modeled beforehand.
5) Model wall insulation material and glazing options to optimize the cost/benefit
of the envelope. (Coordinate glazing options with the architect.
6) Model ventilation airflow reduction strategies such as carbon dioxide sensors.
7) Model opportunities for electric lighting power density reduction and use of
daylighting as much as possible. Consider high efficacy lighting and efficient
ballasts. Focus on lighting control strategies for each space based on the
energy model, such as occupancy and daylight sensors.
8) Consider renewable energy possibilities wherever possible.
9) Values for schedules, setpoints, occupancy density, and space loads shall be
documented clearly and confirmed with the RCJ so there is consistency
between modeling phases.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 77
g. Baseline Model
1) Using the Performance Approach, appropriate for the building type, per the
Saudi Energy Conservation Code 601-CR, Chapters 5 through 12, create a
preliminary baseline building model for benchmarking. The baseline model
shall comply with the provisions of these chapters, as applicable. The model is
to be used as a tool to inform design decisions, so it will transform as the
process proceeds.
(a) All associated energy use and costs must be included. This baseline
model should establish basic load calculation parameters using the
conceptual / pre-schematic design.
(b) The model shall reflect the same values for schedules, setpoints,
occupancy density, and space loads as the Concept/Schematic Design
Phase model so there is consistency between modeling phases.
(c) Simulation output shall include the Energy Use Intensity (GJ/M²), total
annual consumption of all utilities (monthly and annual), and central plant
efficiencies. These values shall be compared to the results from the
Concept/Schematic Design Phase model. The annual energy cost for
the Concept/Schematic Design Phase model must be less than the
annual energy cost for the Baseline Model.
(d) Alternatives shall be evaluated using a life cycle cost analysis. The
energy model shall be used to determine differences in performance
between options and the project cost consultant shall provide input on
cost premiums of options.
(e) All modeling records are to be preserved and presented to the RC upon
request.
h. Owner Review
1) Provide documentation summarizing all of the results of the energy modeling
exercise for review by the RCJ.
i. Design Development/Construction Phase Models
1) During the Design Development and Construction Document phases, final
decisions will be made on equipment sizing and selection. Sizing of ductwork
and piping will result in a refined value for systems pressures and horsepower.
Continued work with the RCJ will result in better information on equipment
loads, occupancy schedules and space conditions. The models developed in
Schematic Design should be updated with this new information and included
with the DD and CD document submissions. Control system optimization
strategies will be evaluated during these phases of design. Decisions made
regarding glazing, insulation systems and lighting should be tested as part of
this updated model. During these phases cost estimates will be refined and life
cycle cost analysis of options should be updated.
2) Simulation output shall include the Energy Use Intensity (GJ/M²), total annual
consumption of all utilities (monthly and annual), and central plant efficiencies.
3) Where specific high performance components, such as heat recovery, are
evaluated a parametric analysis may be used. This analysis is not a complete
run of the building model but is a differential analysis of the performance
improvement and cost premium for this component.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 78
(a) Examples of components that may best be evaluated by a parametric

analysis are: heat recovery options, glazing options, wall and roof
insulation, and boiler options.
j. Owner Review
1) Provide documentation summarizing all of the results of the energy modeling
exercise for review by the RCJ.
k. LEED Energy Model
1) This phase of the modeling effort prepares the model to be submitted as an
important part of establishing the LEED certification for the facility.
2) Make final modifications to the DD/CD model to finalize for LEED, (or other
Environmental Standards entity recognized by the RCJ incorporating
comments made in previous phases.
3) Document the Energy Model per the requirements of LEED EA Prerequisite 2:
Minimum Energy Performance; and EA Credit 2: Optimize Energy
Performance.
l. Post Occupancy Verification
1) The RCJ will compare the final LEED model results and actual metered energy
use after 2 years of occupancy, or to coincide with the time period prescribed
in the LEED Measurement & Verification Plan. The results will subsequently be
shared with the consultant, who will provide the following post design services:
(a) If results are within 10% of total energy use, and metered use is
consistent with the model breakdown, no further follow up will be
required.
(b) If results vary from the model by 10 – 20% of total energy use, or
metered use is not consistent with the model breakdown, the consultant
shall respond in a written report to reconcile the discrepancy.
(c) If results vary by more than 20%, the consultant shall conduct a building
walkthrough, participate in a reconciliation session, and issue a written
report detailing their findings.
11. Building Envelope Thermal and Moisture Properties
a. General
1) Building envelope materials and assemblies must comply with the performance
requirements specified in Chapter 5 of Saudi Energy Conservation Code 601-
CR.
(a) The requirements the Climate Zone must comply with Saudi Energy
Conservation Code 601-CR, Chapter 11.
2) The Prescriptive Path, as outlined in Chapters 5 through 12 of Saudi Energy
Conservation Code 601-CR, is the acceptable method of compliance.
3) Coordinate with the Architect in the Concept/Schematic Design phase to assure
the performance requirements for envelope materials and assemblies are
understood.
4) As part of either the cooling/heating load calculation effort or the energy
modeling effort, provide confirmation that the building envelope complies with
Saudi Energy Conservation Code 601-CR.
Rev. 1 5.4 - 79
12. Refrigerants
a. General
1) All new refrigeration equipment shall utilize compounds that are CFC and
HCFC free and have an ozone depletion potential of zero (0).
2) Use of ammonia refrigerant is discouraged, and approval must be obtained
from the RCJ before considering any refrigeration installations utilizing
ammonia.
3) All installations of refrigeration equipment must comply with ASHRAE Std. 15
4) All designs shall comply with LEED EA Prerequisite, Fundamental Refrigeration
Management and should strive to achieve EA Credit, Enhanced Refrigeration
Management.
b. Secondary Coolants (Brines)
1) In some refrigeration applications such as food processing and freezing,
secondary coolants (brines) are used. The selection of secondary coolants
shall be carefully analyzed for each application. For example, for freezing
unpackaged fish and other foods calcium chloride cannot be tolerated. Instead,
ordinary salt (sodium chloride) brine may be used.
2) Table 5.4.3.A provides guidance for typical brine systems applications.
TABLE 5.4.3.A: TYPICAL BRINE SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS
Chlorinated or
Sodium Calcium Propylene Methanol Ethanol Fluorinated
Application Chloride Chloride Ethylene Glycol Water Water Hydrocarbons
Chemical Plant X X X X X X
Dairies X X X
Food Freezing X X X X
Meat Packing X X
Preheat Coils X X
(AC Systems)
Skating Rinks X X X
Low X X X
Temperature
Systems
Ice Cream X X X
3) In selecting brine, toxicity, flash point, specific heat, density, stability, viscosity,
freezing point, vapor pressure, water solubility, and foaming shall be
considered.
4) Sizing of brine piping systems shall be such that brine velocity is sufficiently low
as to prevent erosion of piping by entrained air. To reduce the possibility of dirt

Rev. 1 5.4 - 80
and rust plugging in large salt brine systems, branch lines and valves smaller
than 25 mm shall not be used.
5) To protect brine piping systems from corrosion, the refrigerating brine shall not
be allowed to turn from all alkaline to an acid solution. Therefore, pH brine
solution shall be kept at 7 or above. Brine pH can be raised by addition of
caustic soda which has been dissolved in warm water. When pH can be
controlled, brass valves and bronze fitted pumps may be used.
6) Steel, iron, or copper piping can be used with most of the brines, except salt
brines where all-iron or steel piping shall be employed. All-iron or steel pumps
and valves shall be employed with calcium chloride brine, in order to prevent
electrolysis in the event of acidity.
13. Sustainability
a. Sustainability relating to HVAC design involves the implementing strategies to
reduce energy, improve indoor air quality, and water consumption. Directions for
minimizing energy, improving air indoor air quality and water use are addressed in
numerous sections for this Guiding Engineering Manual.
1) Designs must meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 –
Energy Standard for Buildings, ASHRAE Standard 62.1 as well as the Saudi
Building Code 601 and the local Ministry of Electricity and Water.
2) Strategies that exceed the minimum requirements of these codes and
standards will be considered based on the results of life cycle cost analysis.
Strategies should be proposed and analyzed during the initial phases of design
to minimize the cost of implementation and optimize the effectiveness of the
strategies.
b. Refer to the Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 3 – Codes & Performance
Standards; Section 3.4 –Sustainability for more guidelines regarding sustainability
relating to HVAC design.
14. Redundancy
a. General
1) To maintain cost control, redundancy is mandated only in the case of critical
systems and/or equipment and spaces such as Telecommunication Rooms,
Monitoring Rooms, etc.
2) When a system failure would result in unusually high repair costs or costly
replacement of process equipment, when activities would be disrupted that are
vital to an application or the health/welfare of humans, a costly production
process being manufactured; redundant systems or units are recommended.
3) All redundant items of equipment shall have dedicated starters or VFD’s,
depending on the application.
4) Controls shall be provided to operate the redundant equipment and
automatically equalize the runtime of all identical items of equipment. The
intention is to prevent premature bearing failure.
b. Redundancy Requirements
1) Regardless of the system redundancy requirements of the program document,
the design shall provide for redundancy in the following items of mechanical

Rev. 1 5.4 - 81
equipment. There is nothing in this document that prevents any equipment

redundancy dictated by particular system requirements.
(a) Chilled Water Pumps
(b) In single chiller applications, a second, full sized pump/motor assembly
shall be designed.
(c) Primary Chilled Water Pumps
(d) In multiple chiller/dedicated pump applications, one spare primary chilled
water pump motor shall be designed. The piping and valving
arrangement shall accommodate the redundant pump operating with
each of the chillers.
(e) Secondary Chilled Water Pumps
(f) Where used, secondary chilled pumps shall typically be a single pump,
VFD controlled, unless additional pumps are required to satisfy the flow
volume range.
(g) A standby secondary pump is required.
(h) Condenser Water Pumps
(i) In single chiller/tower applications, a second condenser water pump, full
size shall be designed.
(j) Condensate (Steam) Return Units
(k) Duplex pumps with automatic alternators are required. The design shall
be such that design flows will be handled by a single pump with 33% run
time. This equipment shall be powered from the emergency generator, if
an emergency generator is part of the project.
(l) Primary Hot Water Pumps
(m) In single boiler applications, a second, full sized pump/motor assembly
shall be designed.
(n) In multiple boiler operations, there shall be one full size redundant
primary hot water pump.
(o) Control Air Compressors
(p) A single tank is acceptable.
(q) The design shall incorporate duplex air compressors/motors with
automatic alternator.
(r) The design shall be predicated on one-third run time and no more than
six starts per hour for one compressor, with the second compressor
designed as a full standby.
2) Standby Air Conditioning Capacity
(a) All critical HVAC systems shall be provided with standby
units/equipment.
(b) Critical applications include hospitals, laboratories, data centers, UPS
rooms and any application where the health and welfare of humans or
animals or the longevity of expensive or critical equipment would be
threatened by the failure of the HVAC system.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 82
(c) If the maximum design capacity of the system is supplied by 2 or more

normally operating units, the capacity of the standby unit(s) shall be at
least equal to the capacity of one of the normally operating units.
(d) In case the maximum system demand is satisfied by one operating unit
only, the capacity of the standby unit shall be equal to the capacity of the
operating unit.
15. Units and Conversions
a. All units of measure utilized in documentation for RCJ projects shall be based on the
International System of Units (SI), better known as the metric system.
b. Conversion factors for converting units of measure for HVAC applications shall be
from the Units and Conversions Chapter of the ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
16. HVAC Software
a. Reference to Other Sections of the GEM
1) Software is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9 – Cooling Load Calculations and
in Subsection 5.4.3.A.10 – Energy Modeling.
b. General
1) It is preferred that any software used for completing HVAC designs or drafting
be commercially available or public domain software available to the general
public. The use of software developed in-house by the consultant is
discouraged.
2) Provide a list of any software that will be used for the HVAC system design or
the drafting of the construction documents to the RCJ at the beginning of the
project for approval.
3) Where the design involves calculations for which ASHRAE has prescribed
procedures, such as cooling/heating load calculations, ductwork or piping
pressure drop calculations, or acoustic calculations, the software algorithms
and subroutines be based on the procedures prescribed by ASHRAE.
4) Provide the input and output files for all software programs utilized in each
design phase for HVAC calculations to the RCJ for review and approval in pdf
format so they are readily viewable by the RCJ without purchasing the software
licenses.
c. CADD
1) Provide all CADD drawing files and record documents in DWG format at the
completion of the project.
B. HVAC SYSTEMS
1. Central Heating and Cooling
a. General
1) Guidelines related to individual items of central heating and cooling equipment
are addressed in those items’ respective Sections in this Document.
2) Guidelines related to central heating and cooling are covered in Subsection
5.4.3.B.7. – Hydronic Heating and Cooling.
b. Mechanical Space Design

Rev. 1 5.4 - 83
1) All mechanical rooms shall be designed and located to facilitate the removal,
transport and replacement of the largest equipment component housed within
each room. The fire rating of all mechanical rooms shall be in accordance with
the IBC.
2) For early planning purposes, a minimum of 5% of the total building area for a
new building shall be reserved for air handling equipment, and a minimum of
3% of the total building area for a new building shall be reserved for the central
heating and cooling plant.
3) The minimum clear height beneath the structural steel within a mechanical
room shall be 4.0 m.
4) Follow the egress requirements established by the International Building Code.
Egress doors shall be double doors, 2.0 m in total width.
5) Mechanical room locations shall be illustrated in the plan view at a scale of no
less than 1:50
6) A minimum of two composite floor-to-ceiling sections shall be illustrated for
each mechanical room at a scale not less than 1:50.
7) All ductwork and piping larger than 15 mm in width shall be shown double line.
8) Provide adequate space for maintaining all items of equipment. The clearances
shall be measured from the edge of the equipment housekeeping pad.
(a) Observe any code required clearance requirements, such as the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
(b) The minimum clearance around pumps and similar size equipment shall
be 0.5 m, unless the manufacturer’s recommendations require greater
clearance.
(c) The minimum clearance around large equipment such as chillers, boilers
and air handling units shall be 1.0 m.
(d) Adequate space shall be maintained at one end of chiller evaporator and
condenser bundles, and at one end of fire tube boilers for pulling tubes.
(e) Adequate space shall be maintained at the side of air handling units for
pulling coils.
(f) Where multiple items of equipment having tube or coil pull clearance
requirements are provided, arrange the equipment wherever possible so
that the clearance requirements can be shared by multiple items of
equipment.
(g) Provide ladders and catwalks for any equipment requiring regular
maintenance that cannot be maintained from floor level.
(h) Provide ladders and catwalks for boilers in accordance with the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
(i) The minimum clear head height within the clearance space around
equipment shall be 2.0 m.
9) The designated space for any future equipment and its service space
requirements shall be clearly identified on the design drawings.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 84
(a) Show the intended path for moving the future equipment into the
mechanical space, from the point of entry into the building to the
equipment’s final resting place.
(b) Coordinate any requirements for removal wall panels or other special
means of entry with the Architect.
10) Wherever possible, mechanical rooms shall be located at grade. In multi-level
buildings, a freight elevator stop shall be provided at each level with a
mechanical room housing equipment with components weighing more than
45 kg.
11) When mechanical equipment must be roof mounted, structural considerations
must be coordinated early in the design. Dunnage and roof curbs requirements
shall be addressed.
(a) Address manufacturers required clearances
(b) Coordinate fall protection as required, depending on the proximity of the
equipment to the roof edge.
(c) Access to roof mounted equipment shall be by permanent stairs.
(d) Doorways leading to roof mounted equipment shall be of adequate size
for replacement of the equipment.
12) Below grade equipment should be avoided, with the exception of sump pumps.
13) Mechanical rooms shall not be used as return air, outdoor air or mixed air
plenums.
14) Mechanical rooms shall have floor drains located in close proximity to hydronic
type equipment.
(a) Condensate drain from cooling coils shall be connected to floor drain
with indirect waste funnel with an air gap as per SBC 501-CR and 701-
CR requirements.
15) Housekeeping pads shall be provided under all items of equipment. The pads
shall be 150 mm thick, and shall extend 150 mm beyond all sides of the
equipment.
16) Ventilate all mechanical rooms in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
(a) Refrigeration rooms shall be ventilated in accordance with Saudi Building
Code 501, Sections 9.5 and 9.6 and ASHRAE Standard 15 – Safety
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
17) Coordinate the design with all disciplines to assure that size and location of all
required chases, soffits, access panels, louvers, etc. are indicated on the
drawings.
2. Air Handling Distribution
a. General
1) Air handling distribution consists of ductwork, duct accessories such as
balancing and fire dampers, constant and variable air volume terminals for
controlling air flow for maintaining temperature or pressure relationships, and
air inlet and outlet devices such as diffusers, registers and grilles.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 85
(a) Ductwork design is addressed in this Section.

(b) Selection of terminal units is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.b –
Room Air Distribution Equipment
b. Pressure Drop Calculations
1) All pressure drop calculations for sizing ductwork and selecting fans shall be
based on the data and procedures outlined in the Duct Design Chapter of the
ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, or the SMACNA HVAC Systems Duct
Design Manual.
2) Submit pressure drop calculations to the RCJ prior to the completion of the final
design phase for RCJ review and acceptance.
3) Complete pressure drop calculations utilizing computer based software that has
the ability to evaluate all circuits in a distribution system and identify the circuit
with the greatest flow resistance.
4) Give careful considerations to safety factors in the calculations, recognizing that
ductwork is rarely installed as designed, and that the addition of only a few
fittings to a distribution system can have a significant effect on the overall flow
resistance.
5) Careful considerations shall be given to conditions which fall outside the fittings
and arrangements listed in that reference such as multiple fittings in series and
poor inlet and outlet conditions.
(a) Provide added pressure drop allowance for fittings in series. Failure of
the air to achieve uniform velocity across the ductwork prior to entering
the second fitting will cause the pressure loss in the second fitting to be
greater than that calculated by the ASHRAE method.
(b) Losses related to fan inlet and outlet conditions, better known as System
Effect, shall be based on the data from AMCA Fans and Systems
Publication 201.
c. Duct Design Criteria
1) Duct work is classified in accordance with its working pressure as follows:
(a) Low Pressure: Below 500 Pa.
(b) Medium Pressure: 500 to 2500 Pa.
(c) High Pressure: Above 2500 Pa.
2) The allowable air velocities for each of the duct pressure classifications are as
follows:
(a) Low Pressure: 8.6 m/S and lower
(b) Medium Pressure: 8.7 m/S to 12.7 m/S
(c) High Pressure: 12.8 m/S to 17.8 m/s
3) The allowable friction loss rates for each of the duct pressure classifications are
as follows:
(a) Low Pressure: 0.8 Pa/m and lower
(b) Medium Pressure: 0.9 Pa/m to 2.0 Pa/m

Rev. 1 5.4 - 86
(c) High Pressure: 2.1 Pa/m to 4.0 Pa/m

4) Ductwork shall be sized using equal friction or static regain methods. The equal
friction method shall be based on a pressure drop of 0.65 Pa per meter for
supply, return, and exhaust ducts.
5) Duct air velocity shall be limited as shown in Tables 5.4.3.B, 5.4.3.C and 5.4.3.D
in order to limit noise to acceptable levels.
TABLE 5.4.3.B: MAIN DUCT AIR VELOCITIES IN SHAFT OR ABOVE DRY WALL CEILING
RECTANGULAR DUCT ROUND DUCT

Space over or in which Max Acceptable Duct Max Acceptable Duct
Duct will run Velocity (m/s) Velocity (m/s)
Conference Rooms 8 10
Teleconference Rooms 6.5 8
Training Rooms 8 10
Auditoriums 8 10
Hospital/Clinic Rooms 8 10
Private Offices 8 10
Open Plan Offices 9 10
Corridors and Lobbies 10 12
Mosque 8 10
TABLE 5.4.3.C: MAIN DUCT AIR VELOCITIES ABOVE SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING
Space over or in which Max Acceptable Duct Max Acceptable Duct

Duct will run Velocity (m/s) Velocity (m/s)
Conference Rooms 7.5 7.5

Teleconference Rooms 4.7 7.5
Training Rooms 7.5 7.5
Auditoriums 7.5 7.5
Hospital/Clinic Rooms 7.5 8
Private Offices 7.5 7.5
Open Plan Offices 8.9 8
Corridors and Lobbies 8.9 10
Mosque 7.5 7.5
TABLE 5.4.3.D: MAIN DUCT AIR VELOCITIES LOCATED WITHIN OCCUPIED SPACE

Rev. 1 5.4 - 87
Space Over or in Max Acceptable Duct Max Acceptable Duct

which Duct will run Velocity (m/s) Velocity (m/s)
Conference Rooms 6.1 7.5

Teleconference Rooms 3.5 6.3
Training Rooms 6.1 7.5
Auditoriums 6.1 7.5
Hospital/Clinic Rooms 6.1 7.5
Private Offices 6.1 7.5
Open Plan Offices 7.4 8
Corridors and Lobbies 8.8 10
Mosque 6.1 7.5
6) Duct design shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) All galvanized sheet metal ducts and plenums which are not wrapped
with insulation shall be field coated with epoxy.
(b) Round ducts shall be used as much as possible.
(c) Aspect ratios shall not be more than 4:1, unless space consideration is a
governing factor.
(d) Reduction in area due to obstructions shall not be more than 20%.
Obstructions inside ducts shall be streamlined.
(e) Where duct work is connected to any fittings or equipment such as
heating coils, cooling coils or filters, the transitions shall be as smooth as
possible. Diverging transitions shall have a slope not exceeding 20º.
Converging transitions shall have a slope not exceeding 30º.
(f) Increments in duct work sizes preferably shall be in one dimension only
and shall not be less than 50 mm.
(g) Smooth radius elbows, round heal round throat, with a centerline radius
equal to 1.5 times the duct diameter or width shall be used as much as
possible. For round ducts, if a smooth elbow is not available, 3-piece
elbow for velocity below 9 m/s and 5-piece elbow for velocity above
9 m/s shall be used. In all cases, the throat radius shall not be less than
3/4 of the duct diameter or width.
(h) Long conical tee shall be used for systems having a velocity above 8 m/s
and a 45° tee for systems having a velocity below 8 m/s.
(i) Access doors or panels shall be provided in duct work for maintenance
and service of the following equipment:
(j) Filters.
(k) Cooling coil.
(l) Heaters.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 88
(m) Sound absorbers.

(n) Volume and splitter dampers.
(o) Fire dampers.
d. Special Applications
1) Kitchen Exhaust Systems
(a) Kitchen ventilation systems shall be designed in strict accordance with
the Saudi Mechanical Code 501-CR,, Section 505 regarding Domestic
Kitchen Exhaust Equipment or Section 506 regarding Commercial
Kitchen Hood Ventilation System Ducts and Exhaust Equipment.
Exhaust systems for commercial cooking operations shall also be
designed in accordance with NFPA 96 – Standard for Ventilation Control
and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
2) Paint Spray Operations
(a) Minimum ventilation rates for paint spray operations shall be 6 air
changes per hour. All air must be exhausted. Recirculation is not
permitted.
(b) Where solvent based paints are used, exhaust fans shall be Type A
Spark Resistant Construction. All electrical components exposed to the
paint vapors shall be explosion proof.
(c) Exhaust inlets for exhaust systems serving paint spray operations shall
be filtered with minimum MERV 8 filters.
(d) The maximum air velocity at the filter face shall be 2.5 M/S.
(e) See Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines;
Section 5.4.1 Fire Protection; Paragraph 5.4.1.D.1.g.1)(a) regarding fire
protection requirements for paint spray operations.
3) Flammable Storage
(a) Ventilation for flammable storage areas shall be designed in accordance
with Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Sections 5704, 5804 and 5904 and NFPA
30 – Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
(b) See Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines;
Section 5.4.1 Fire Protection; Paragraph 5.4.1.D.1.g.1)(b) regarding fire
protection requirements for flammable storage.
4) Battery Rooms
(a) Ventilation for Battery Rooms shall be designed in accordance with
International Mechanical Code, Section 502, International Fire Code,
Section 608 and NFPA 111, Chapter 7.
5) Class I Division I and Division II Explosion Hazard Environments
(a) Exhaust fans for Class I Division I (Zone 0, Zone 1) and Division II (Zone
2) applications shall be Type A Spark Resistant Construction. Electrical
components in the Class 1 Division I or Division II atmosphere shall be
explosion proof or selected in accordance with IEC 60079 for use in a
Zone 1 or Zone 2 area as applicable with appropriate Gas Group and
Temperature Class rating.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 89
6) Class II Environments Involving Explosive Dusts

(a) Exhaust fans for Class II explosive dust applications shall be Type A
Spark Resistant Construction. Electrical components in the explosive
dust atmosphere shall be explosion proof or selected in accordance with
IEC 60079 for use in a Zone 20, Zone 21 or Zone 22 area as applicable
with appropriate Dust Group and Temperature Class rating.
(b) Ductwork shall be bonded and grounded to prevent the build-up of static
electricity.
7) Spaces Utilizing Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems
(a) Provide means to purge spaces protected by clean agent fire
suppression chemicals after the chemicals have been released and the
fire is extinguished.
(b) Purging can be accomplished with the building HVAC system if the flow
to the space is adequate, and if the system can be controlled so that
100% of the chemicals can be exhausted and not returned to the HVAC
air supply system. Generally an air flow rate of 6 air changes per hour is
considered adequate to purge the clean agent fire extinguishing
chemicals.
(c) If the building HVAC system does not have adequate capacity or cannot
be arranged to prevent recirculation of the chemicals back into the
building, a dedicated purge system capable of producing 6 air changes
per hour in the space protected by the clean agent fire suppression
chemicals shall be provided.
(d) The clean agent fire suppression purge system shall be tested to prove
effectiveness before the building is occupied.
(e) See Guiding Engineering Manual Chapter 5 – Design Guidelines;
Subsection 5.4.1.H.4. Clean Agent Systems for design requirements
related to clean agent fire extinguishing systems.
3. In-Room Terminal Systems
a. Reference to other Subsections of the GEM
1) Variable refrigerant flow systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.9 –
Variable Refrigerant Flow Systems
b. General
1) In-Room Terminal Systems typically do not have the required capacity to cool
and dehumidify ventilation air, with the exception of perhaps unit ventilators.
Therefore, ventilation shall be provided by a separate dedicated outdoor air
system (DOAS) where in-room terminal units are used.
(a) Some terminals systems have ventilation air provisions, however, rarely
do they have capacity to cool and dehumidify the ventilation air in the
Jubail climate.
(b) Before using any in-room terminal units to supply and condition
ventilation air, obtain the approval of the RCJ.
2) In-room terminal units require special maintenance such as regular filter
replacement and cleaning of cooling coils and cooling coil drain pans at each
unit.
Rev. 1 5.4 - 90
(a) HVAC system selection shall be based on a complete life cycle cost
analysis. Include the maintenance and equipment replacement costs for
all equipment in the analysis.
3) Sloped tops are recommended for any floor mounted in-room terminal units to
prevent room occupants from placing materials on the top of the units that
would impede airflow.
4) All in-room terminal units shall have minimum MERV 8 filters.
5) In-room terminal units shall be controlled from wall mounted controls in lieu of
unit mounted controls.
c. Types of In-Room Terminal Systems
1) Fan Coil Units
(a) Units may be floor or ceiling mounted. Floor mounted units are preferred
for ease of maintenance.
(b) Where ceiling mounted units are used, provide clear unobstructed
access to the filter rack and the condensate drain pan.
(c) Avoid locating ceiling units over desks and other furniture or equipment
as dust and dirt almost always precipitate when the units are accessed.
(d) Ceiling mounted units may require condensate pumps to transfer the
condensate to the drain risers. Rarely is the adequate height above a
ceiling to develop the proper slope for condensate drainage.
(i) Provide a condensate drain pan overflow switch to sense the
condensate before the drain pan overflows, de-energize the
unit fan and signal an alarm to the building management
system.
2) Unit Ventilators
(a) Unit ventilators are generally only used for primary and secondary school
applications. Unit ventilators may have self-contained DX cooling or
have chilled water coils for cooling.
(b) Special attention shall be given to the noise levels generated by self-
contained DX units. Most manufacturers offer options to reduce the
noise level produced by the unit.
(i) Confirm the unit noise levels are within the limits established
for the specific application in the ASHRAE Applications
Handbook. Often times, all of the options are required to
achieve acceptable noise levels.
(c) If unit ventilators are used to supply ventilation air to occupied spaces,
each outdoor air intake must be protected by a sand trap louver.
3) Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units (PTAC’s)
(a) The noise levels generated by PTAC’s vary considerably from
manufacturer to manufacturer. Clearly specify the acceptable noise
levels for these units in accordance with the limits set forth in the
ASHRAE Applications Handbook.
4) Chilled Beam Systems

Rev. 1 5.4 - 91
(a) Chilled beam systems are very sensitive to room humidity conditions.
The fluid temperature passing through the secondary coil must be
maintained above the wet-bulb temperature of the space.
(b) Chilled beams shall only be used in buildings where infiltration may be
minimized.
(c) Passive chilled beams will not have adequate cooling capacity for most
applications in Jubail, so use of chilled beams shall be limited to active
chilled beams
(d) Provide a condensation sensor on at least one chilled beam in each
room. Condensation sensors are less expensive and more reliable than
dew point sensors.
(e) For larger rooms (50 m² and larger), provide a two-position supply air
terminal and occupancy sensors to interrupt the flow of primary air to the
chilled beams and shut off the secondary chilled water flow to the chilled
beams whenever the space is unoccupied.
4. Applied Heat Pump and Heat Recovery Systems
a. Reference to other Sections of the GEM
1) Refrigerant compounds are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.12 – Refrigerants
2) Direct expansion cooling coils are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.e.2) –
Finned Cooling Coils – Direct Expansion Type
3) Heat recovery is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.g. – Air-to-Air Energy
Recovery Devices
4) Direct expansion cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.l) – DX
Packaged and Split
5) Residential heating is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.2.b. – Residential
Heating
b. Residential Applications
1) If heating is required for applications, air-source heat pumps shall be used.
Heat pumps for residential applications should be selected to have adequate
cooling capacity to meet the cooling load. The resulting heating capacity of the
selected equipment is normally more than adequate to meet heating
requirements for the application.
c. Healthcare and Industrial Applications
1) Applications that have a simultaneous need for heating and cooling may
provide opportunities for heat recovery chillers or water-to-water heat pumps.
Examples would be:
(a) HVAC supply air reheating for hospitals and labs where air is cooled and
dehumidified and then reheated for temperature control.
(b) Industrial process where there is a simultaneous demand for cool water
and warm water, either for space conditioning or for process use.
2) Hot water delivery temperatures of 40.5 C are possible from heat recovery
chillers.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 92
3) If the heat demand involves a critical application, consider providing a

redundant heat recovery chiller.
5. Forced Air Heating and DX Cooling Systems
a. Reference to other Sections of the GEM
1) Refrigerant compounds are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.12 – Refrigerants
2) Heat pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.4. – Applied Heat Pump and
Heat Recovery Systems
3) Direct expansion cooling coils are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.e.2) –
Finned Cooling Coils – Direct Expansion Type
4) Direct expansion cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.l. – DX
Packages and Split
5) Forced air heating is typically only used in residential applications.
(a) Residential heating is typically done with heat pumps (see Subsection
5.4.3.C.2.b. – Residential Heating)
6) Reheating is done in Hospitals (see Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.n. – HVAC for
Hospitals and Clinics) and in Laboratories (see Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.o. – HVAC
for Laboratories).
6. Steam Systems
a. Reference to other sections for the GEM
1) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9 – Redundancy
2) Boilers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.2.a. – Boilers
3) Heat exchangers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.d – Heat Exchangers
4) Water Treatment is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.f – Water Treatment
b. General
1) The use of steam shall be limited to applications for which there are no
substitutes, such as large scale humidification, sterilization and laundry
applications in hospitals, and some industrial applications.
2) Confirm the availability of fuel for a steam boiler with the RCJ. Boiler fuel will
likely be fuel oil or natural gas.
3) All steam systems and equipment shall be designed in strict accordance with
the requirements of the ASME Codes and Standards.
c. Operating Pressure and Pressure Control
1) The operating pressure shall not be higher than 1 Bar above the minimum
pressure required for the application.
(a) Humidification can usually be served with 1 Bar steam pressure.
(b) For hospital laundry and sterilization applications, a steam pressure of
5 Bar is usually adequate.
(c) Industrial applications may require higher steam pressures. Confirm the
required pressure with the RCJ.
2) Steam pressure reducing valves shall be self-powered pilot-operated type.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 93
(a) Single-stage pressure reducing valves are permitted for low pressure
applications operating at 1 Bar or lower pressure.
(b) Two-stage pressure reducing valves are required for high pressure
applications.
(c) Pressure reducing stations shall be located such that they can be
serviced from the floor for safety purposes.
d. Steam Demand Profile
1) Develop a full steam demand profile for the system.
2) Utilize the steam demand profile to determine the number and capacities of
boilers required to meet the demand.
3) Critical systems shall have one redundant boiler.
4) Boilers shall be sized so that one boiler remains online at low fire when demand
is lowest. Boiler efficiency drops dramatically when boilers cycle on and off. If
demand is seasonal, it is acceptable to cycle all boilers off when there is no
steam demand.
e. Feedwater Heating and Deaeration
1) Feedwater for a steam boiler must be heated to prevent shocking a boiler with
cold water.
(a) Cold water shocking could cause tube leakage and may cause water
contraction in a boiler, causing water level fluctuations.
2) Live steam from the system to shall be used to heat feedwater.
3) Specify a spray-type deaerator with the capacity to remove all carbon dioxide
from the feedwater and reduce oxygen levels in the feedwater to 0.005 CC/Liter
(7 ppb).
4) Boiler feedwater pumps shall be modulating flow type with variable frequency
drives.
(a) Operating pump capacity shall be 1.25 times the boiler capacity.
(b) Design feedwater pump head shall be equal to the boiler safety relief
valve setting.
(c) Confirm the inlet pressure at the feedwater pump is greater than the net
positive suction head requirement for the pump.
(d) Provide one redundant feedwater pump.
f. Steam Traps
1) All steam traps shall have a capacity to load factor of 2:1.
2) Provide thermodynamic traps for all high pressure drip legs.
3) Provide float & thermostatic traps for all heat exchangers.
4) Protect all steam traps with strainers. Strainers shall have valves on the
cleaning ports

Rev. 1 5.4 - 94
g. Pressure relief valves

1) All sections of the steam piping system shall be protected by ASME pressure
relief valves with adequate capacity to relieve the upstream steam capacity of
the system.
(a) The discharge of all safety relief valves shall be piped to the outdoors.
h. Shutoff Valves
1) Shutoff valves 50 mm diameter and smaller for low pressure steam shall be ball
valves with bronze body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, and reinforced
Teflon 15% glass-filled double seal seat.
2) Shutoff valves 50 mm and smaller of high pressure steam shall be ball valves
with ASTM A216 WCB carbon steel or stainless steel body, 316 stainless steel
ball and stem, and high temperature reinforced Teflon double seal seat.
3) Shutoff valves larger than 50 MM for low pressure and high pressure steam
shall be AANSI 150 high performance butterfly valves with carbon steel tapped
lug full flange body, 316 stainless steel disc and double offset stem, and high
temperature reinforced Teflon fully bidirectional seat design for dead-end
service in either direction.
i. Piping Materials
1) Steam supply piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel.
2) Condensate return piping shall be Schedule 80 black steel.
j. Steam Piping Design
1) Steam supply piping shall be designed in strict accordance with the guidelines
established in the ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
2) Specify pipe insulation in strict accordance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 –
Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
k. Expansion Compensation
1) Expansion loops are preferred over expansion joints.
2) Fully detail the dimensions of all expansion loops on the construction drawings.
3) Clearly show anchor and guide locations on the construction drawings.
4) If adequate space cannot be provided for expansion loops, expansion joints
may be used. Provide means of shutting off steam service within the general
vicinity of expansion joints on both the upstream and downstream sides to avoid
shutting down the entire system to service a joint.
7. Hydronic Heating and Cooling
a. Reference to other sections for the GEM
2) Condenser Water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8 – Condenser
Water Systems
4) Conventional chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.a – Chillers (Vapor
Compression)

Rev. 1 5.4 - 95
5) Absorption chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.b – Chillers

(Absorption)
6) Cooling towers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.c – Cooling Towers
7) Centrifugal Pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.a – Pumps
(Centrifugal)
8) Turbine pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.b – Pumps (Turbine)
b. General
1) Hydronic systems are preferred for cooling large buildings because they are
more efficient for cooling large buildings than DX systems, and cooling may be
provided through a central chiller plant which provides an efficient method for
addressing variable cooling loads
c. Volumetric Expansion Compensation
1) Bladder-type diaphragm expansion tanks are to be utilized wherever possible.
(a) Consider locating the tank at the top of the building to minimize size.
2) Expansion Joints shall be used when piping flexibility design is impractical.
Otherwise piping loops with appropriate guides and anchors shall be provided.
d. Make-Up Water/System Pressure.
1) Backflow prevention devices shall be provided per code.
2) A pressure control valve shall provide make-up water and consequently
operate to maintain system pressure.
3) Make-up water shall be provided near the suction side of the system primary
pumps, such that, the system pressure will always be above atmospheric
pressure.
4) System Pressure will always remain positive at the high point of the system.
e. Air Removal/Drainage
1) Automatic and Manual Air Vents shall be provided at all system high points.
(a) Provide shut-off valves at the inlets of air vents,
2) Venting is intended to be utilized during system fill and operation.
3) Automatic Air Vents are NOT to be placed over critical areas.
4) Drain Valves shall be piped to floor drains when practical.
f. Pumping System Configuration
1) Variable primary pumping systems are preferred for large chilled water
systems.
2) Primary/secondary systems are preferred for hydronic heating systems
(a) Secondary pumps shall utilize variable frequency drive control via
system differential pressure (sensors shall be placed near the end of the
piping system).

Rev. 1 5.4 - 96
(b) Two-way control valves at the system loads and control system bypass
shall be utilized.
(c) Primary Pumps shall be matched one pump per boiler,
g. Chilled Water Plants
1) The systems will generally supply water between 4 C and 7 C.
2) Cooling coils should be designed for a chilled water temperature rise of 9 C to
11 C.
3) Multiple Chiller Applications should use the same capacity model/type of
chillers, however, large tonnage applications should consider different size
machines and prime movers depending upon the facility load profiles and
available fuel sources.
4) Consider providing at least one chiller in each chiller plant with a variable
frequency drive. An economic analysis shall be done to determine if this is
warranted on larger chillers.
h. Water Velocities in Piping
1) Water velocity in HVAC piping shall not exceed the values shown in
Table 5.4.3.A in order to limit noise levels, avoid excessive energy consumption
and pipe erosion:
TABLE 5.4.3.A: RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM WATER VELOCITY IN HVAC PIPING

MAXIMUM VELOCITY
SERVICE IN M/SEC
Hot Water
50 mm Pipe and Under 1.2
Above 50 mm Pipe 1.8
Cold Water
Pump Suction without Head 1.2
Drain Line 1.2
i. Piping Design
1) Piping design shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) Water flow, especially through heat transfer equipment, shall be in a
direction to permit natural air venting. Typically, the water outlet shall be
higher than the water inlet to promote air elimination.
(b) Pipe friction loss for general applications shall not be more than 350 Pa
per 1 m length of pipe.
(c) Reverse return piping arrangements may be acceptable for small
hydronic systems, but is generally not cost effective for large systems.
Provide adequate means for manual balancing and flow measurement.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 97
(d) Supports and anchors for HVAC piping and other system piping and
equipment called out in this section, shall be coordinated with the design
requirements in Section 5.2, Structural.
2) Components for piping systems shall be as follows:
(a) Long radius elbows shall be used wherever possible. For offsets, 45°
elbows instead of 90° elbows shall be used.
(b) Unions shall be provided for screwed pipes, where equipment and piping
accessories have to be disconnected for service.
(c) Flanges shall be provided for welded pipes, where equipment and piping
(d) Ball, globe or butterfly valves shall be used for throttling services. 10 mm
globe valves shall be provided as bypass valves for all globe valves
above 200 mm.
j. Valves and Accessories
1) Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet of each item of HVAC equipment,
including but not limited to pumps, coils, fin-tube convectors, cabinet heaters,
unit heaters, heat exchangers, and other similar equipment.
2) Provide valves at the top and bottom of all risers.
3) Provide valves at all branch take-offs from piping mains.
4) Provide non-slam check valves as indicated at pump discharges.
5) Locate valves so that the tops of the valve stems are above the horizontal.
6) Valves for equipment, coils, specialties, etc., shall meet the component's
pressure rating listed, and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
7) Valves shall be same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
8) In general and unless otherwise noted, shut-off valves 50 mm size and smaller
shall be ball valves. Shut-off valves 62 mm size and larger shall be butterfly
valves.
k. Pumps
1) Pumps 3.75 kW and larger shall have variable speed drives for variable flow
designs and shall be arranged so that flow is matched to the demand.
2) Pumps shall be selected so that that flow may be increased by 15% with a
corresponding increase in pump head by simply changing the impeller. Neither
a change in the pump body size or pump a motor replacement shall be required.
3) Select pumps for operation within a range of 66% to 115% of the flow at the
point of highest efficiency
4) Select pump motors to prevent overloading over the entire flow range of the
selected impeller, as well as for the entire flow range of one impeller size larger.,
5) For pumps operating in series or parallel, the series or parallel curves shall be
plotted to confirm proper flow with multiple pumps operating.
l. Mechanical System Configurations
1) Water Coils

Rev. 1 5.4 - 98
(a) All hydronic water coils shall have two-way valves. Bypass valves shall
be provided at the end of circulation circuits to provide minimum flow
when all 2 – way valves are closed.
(b) A shutoff valve shall be installed on each supply and return pipe at each
coil to allow for servicing of the coil without tampering with water
balance.
(c) Coils shall have means for independent balancing for each coil.
(d) A strainer shall be provided for each coil bank to protect the 2 – way
valve.
8. Condenser Water Systems
a. Reference to other sections of the GEM
(Centrifugal)
b. General
1) Water of acceptable quality for a water cooled condenser systems is in scarce
supply in Jubail
(a) A life cycle cost analysis shall be performed to determine the overall cost
effectiveness of a cooling tower system over air cooled condensing for
refrigeration. The life cycle cost analysis shall include all cost associated
with treating the water and disposing of blowdown.
2) Because of the environment in Jubail, cooling towers shall be constructed from
stainless steel or fiberglass.
3) All cooling towers shall have variable frequency drives controlling fan speed.
4) Condenser water systems employing open cooling towers shall have side
stream filtration to remove particulates from the condenser water. Side stream
filtration systems shall filter between 5% and 10% of the total condenser water
flow on each pass.
5) All sections of the piping system except the return line to the upper tower basin
shall be kept below the basin level.
6) An approach of 4 C to the design wet-bulb temperature is frequently considered
an economically sound design.
7) Piping from the tower sump to the pump is basically flowing due to gravity. The
sump level shall be above the top of the pump casing for positive prime, and
piping pressure drop shall be minimized such that there is always adequate net
positive suction on the pump.
8) All sections of the piping system except the return line to the upper tower basin
shall be kept below the basin level.
9) Confirm the water flow rate at the tower basin outlet does not exceed the
manufacturer’s recommended maximum in order to avoid vortexing.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 99
10) Piping to be sized for water velocities between 1.0 m/s and 2.5 m/s.
11) Multiple cooling towers are to be connected; the piping shall be designed so
that the pressure loss from the tower to the pump suction is exactly equal for
each tower.
12) Provide adequate equalizing piping between sumps for multiple tower cells.
Size equalizing piping liberally for gravity flow.
13) For tower arrangements with multiple cells, provide individual valving and level
control for each cell so that any individual cell may be isolated for maintenance
without completely interrupting the operation of all towers.
14) Closed circuit evaporative fluid coolers shall be used for hydronic heat pump
and other systems water cooled unitary refrigeration equipment.
15) Where a condenser water system serves multiple pieces of refrigeration
equipment, provide flow meters and balancing valves to assure the proper flow
rate to each piece of equipment. Provide motorized isolation valves to
modulate flow to each piece of equipment that may operate with variable flow,
and to isolate refrigeration equipment when it is de-energized.
9. Variable-Refrigerant Flow Systems
a. General
1) Variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems may be used in various applications,
such as
• Multiple-tenant residential buildings
• Retail stores
• Hospitality centers, restaurants, banquet halls, hotels, and motels
2) Indoor units constantly react to changes in the zone’s cooling loads, and
maintain conditions. The inverter compressors or combination of inverter and
constant-speed compressors generally found in the VRF systems modulate
refrigerant flow, and work in unison with the refrigerant volume required by the
indoor units.
3) Ventilation air for a facility served by a VRF system should be provided by a
direct outdoor air system.
4) VRF fan coil units should be equipped with MERV 8 filters.
5) The refrigerant expansion valve shall be a modulating valve responding to
superheat at the refrigerant piping leaving the fan coil unit. Capillary tubes are
not acceptable thermal expansion control devices.
6) For applications involving high occupant densities, select equipment with a “dry
mode”, where the indoor unit fan operates at a low fan speed to keep the coil
air flowing at sufficient capacity to remove moisture from the space without
significantly lowering room temperature. If the zone temperature drops below
a designated set point shall off.
7) VRF systems can utilize air-cooled or water-cooled condensers. Complete a
life cycle cost analysis addressing all cost associated with purchasing and
treating water, as well as with disposing of blowdown water prior to design a
water-cooled system.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 100
8) Follow the VRF equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for refrigerant

piping sizes and maximum to minimum vertical and horizontal lengths, based
on refrigerant volumes and velocities required for efficient and stable system
operation. System refrigerant charge is a calculated value, whereas additional
charge is determined by liquid-line volume.
9) Given the complexities of integrating the operation of the indoor and outdoor
units, the entire control package for the VRF system should be furnished by the
VRF system manufacturer.
10) Safety Considerations for Refrigerants
(a) As with any HVAC equipment, VRF systems must include design and
application safeguards that protect occupants. ASHRAE Standard 15
applies to the design, construction, testing, installation, operation, and
inspection of mechanical refrigeration systems. This standard specifies
safe design, construction, installation, and operation of refrigeration
systems.
(b) Also refer to ASHRAE Standard 34, which lists the most current information
related to refrigerant designations, safety classifications, and refrigerant
concentration limits (RCL). ASHRAE Standard 34 refers to common
names of refrigerants used in HVAC systems, instead of using the chemical
name, formula, or trade name. The standard establishes a uniform system
for assigning reference numbers and safety classifications to refrigerants
(including blends).
(c) The smallest space in which any of the indoor units or piping could be
located must be capable of safely dispersing the refrigerant charge of the
entire VRF system in the unlikely event of a catastrophic leak or failure.
Examples of spaces that may require additional consideration include
(1) Bathrooms
(2) Electrical rooms
(3) Closets
(4) Small offices
(5) Egress
(d) Several options are available to manage smaller spaces; however, care is
needed not to violate other standards such as IEC. Options available to
manage smaller spaces where the RCL would otherwise be exceeded
include the following:
(1) Do not install an indoor unit, but allow the code-required ventilation to
maintain conditions in the space.
(2) If cooling is required in the occupied space, one option is to increase
the actual space volume by providing a permanent opening or
connecting to an adjacent room, as described in ASHRAE Standard
15. A permanent opening can be included along the common wall
between an electrical room and janitor closet to increase the size of
the space; alternatively, install the ceiling high enough to provide the
necessary volume, or omit the ceiling entirely.
(3) A ducted indoor unit could serve several smaller offices, thus
increasing the overall occupied space served by the system.
Rev. 1 5.4 - 101
(4) Central VRF systems can be subdivided into a series of smaller

systems so that the total charge in a given system does not exceed
the RCL limitations for a given space.
(e) System Expansion or Reconfiguration
(1) The modular nature of VRF systems lends itself to easy system
expansion or reconfiguration as building needs change. During the
design phase, consider any possible future or changing needs within
the building envelope.
(2) VRF outdoor units can be upsized according to manufacturers’
recommendations to anticipate supplementary indoor units without
affecting the performance of initially installed indoor units. Indoor
units can be added to the VRF system (up to the manufacturer’s
recommended limits) to address cooling needs in an adjacent space
while the primary space is unoccupied. Indoor units can be
exchanged for different models or capacities. Nonducted indoor units
such as ceiling cassette and wall-mounted units can be relocated
within a given space as occupancy needs change.
(3) Indoor units are usually added, relocated, or exchanged with minimal
disruption by simply reconfiguring indoor unit refrigerant piping,
electrical wiring, control wiring, and drain piping. Note, however, that
in some applications, piping sizes may change as capacity sizes
change. Review manufacturer’s recommendations on piping design
and diversity parameters before performing any type of indoor unit
installation or relocation.
10. Dust Collection Systems
a. General
1) Design all dust collection systems in strict accordance with Industrial Ventilation
– A Manual of Recommended Practice, published by the American Council of
Governmental Industrial Hygienists.
2) When collecting different types of dust in a single system, assure there is no
fire or explosion danger when the materials mix.
3) If a facility has operations that require intermittent operation of the dust
collection system and other operations that require round-the-clock operation
of the dust collection system, consider providing two separate dust collection
systems. Dust collection systems, due to the resistance of airflow in the ducts
and the collectors, may be significant consumers of electricity. Having the
option of shutting one of the systems off part time could save substantial
energy.
4) Provide a full acoustical analysis for dust collection systems to assure
objectionable sound levels will not result in the area where the collector is
located, or in adjacent areas.
b. Collector Air to Cloth Ratio
1) Recommended air to cloth ratio values vary depending on the dust material and
the method of cleaning the collector.
(a) For collectors with shaker and reverse air cleaning, air to cloth rations
range from 2 to 3.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 102
(b) For collectors with pulse jet cleaning air to cloth ratios vary from 5 to 12.
c. Collector Cleaning
1) Select the cleaning option that is best suited to the application and the budget
(a) Shaker cleaning may be manual for small dust collectors, or motorized
for larger collectors. Motorized shakers may be controlled to initiate
automatically based on time intervals or pressure drop through a
collector. Airflow is typically interrupted during the shaking process.
This type of cleaning is the most economical, especially for small dust
collectors.
(b) Reverse air cleaning baghouse dust collectors are usually used in
applications where hard dust cake would develop on the dirty side of the
filter. These types of a dust collectors use fans to blow air in the opposite
direction to remove the dust cake from the filter bag. These dust
collectors are meant for continuous use and may clean without
interrupting the production process. The pulse opposes and interrupts
airflow for only a few tenths of a second.
(c) Pulse jet cleaning uses compressed air to force a burst of air down
through the bag and expand it violently. The filters maybe cleaned one
row at a time, so an entire dust collector does not have to have airflow
interrupted for cleaning.
2) Provide clear space beneath the collector for a storage container to collect the
dust filtered by the collector. Provide a clear access path to remove the storage
container from the facility. If the dust material is hazardous, provide a path for
container removal that does not present a hazard for building occupants.
d. Fire and Explosion Protection
1) If the dust material offers any risk of fire or explosion, provide fire suppression
to protect the inlet ducts at the collector and explosion venting for the collector.
(a) Chemical suppression is preferred.
(b) For collectors located outdoors, direct explosion venting in a safe
direction away from buildings or personnel. For collectors located
indoors, direct the explosion venting through the roof in a direction that
will not be a threat to other buildings or personnel. The collector shall be
located so that the explosion vent is within 1.5 m of the roof.
e. Fan Selection
1) Provide complete duct pressure drop calculations for review by the RCJ.
2) Account for system effect at the fan inlets and outlets
3) Select fans with at least a 20% safety factor for the fan total pressure.
4) Fans shall be capable of material handling.
(a) Radial Blade centrifugal fans are preferred.
5) Provide variable frequency drives for duct collector fans 3.75 kW and larger.
f. Ductwork
1) Dust collection ductwork shall be round to so that uniform velocity is maintained
over the entire cross section of the duct.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 103
2) Size duct and duct hangers based on an assumption of 10% fill in the bottom
of the duct from dust that dropped out of entrainment in the airstream.
3) If the dust material offers any risk of fire or explosion, the ductwork material
must be of spark proof construction.
4) Fans for systems handling dusts that present an explosion hazard shall be Type
A spark resistant construction.
11. Stair Pressurization Systems
a. General
1) Stair pressurizations systems shall be designed in strict accordance with Saudi
Fire Code 801-CR, Section 909- Smoke Control Systems and NFPA 92 –
Standard for Smoke Control Systems.
2) Design of stair pressurization systems is complex. The design must be
completed by an experienced professional engineer.
b. Design Considerations
1) Confirm with the RCJ the number of doors to be considered open in calculating
the airflow requirements. It should be assumed that at minimum, the fire floor,
plus the floors above and below the fire floor will be evacuated in the event of
a fire. In addition, occupants will be exiting the egress door at the base of the
stair. It probably is not prudent to assume a steady stream of occupants
passing through all of these doors simultaneously, but at least three doors
should be assumed to be open at any given time.
2) Confirm the allowable door opening force that will be permitted in the completed
facility.
c. Control
1) Control fans via pressure differential sensors and variable frequency drives.
For very tall buildings, multiple pressure zones may be required.
2) A relief damper is recommended, in addition to the variable speed control of
the fans, to stabilize the pressure as doors are opened and closed. The relief
dampers should have a fast acting actuator that can operate full stroke in 4
seconds or less.
3) The relief airflow should discharge in multiple directions to eliminate the effect
of wind on the discharge.
d. Commissioning
1) Stair pressurization systems should be commissioned rigorously. Specify
commissioning of each system independently. Numerous combinations of stair
doors should be open simultaneously to test for proper pressurization. Also
test the system with fewer than design number of doors open to assure over-
pressurization does not occur, and test the system with more than the design
number of doors open to determine under what conditions the system becomes
ineffective.
2) The results from all of the testing shall be reported to the RCJ for review and
acceptance.
12. District Cooling and Central Plant Systems

Rev. 1 5.4 - 104
a. Reference to other sections of the GEM:

2) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7 – Hydronic
Heating and Cooling
3) Condenser Water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8 – Condenser
Water Systems
5) Conventional chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.a – Chillers (Vapor
Compression)
6) Absorption chillers are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.3.b – Chillers
(Absorption)
(Centrifugal)
b. General
1) District cooling systems are most applicable when used in areas where the
thermal load density is high and the annual load factor is high. Both of these
conditions will exist in areas of Jubail. A high load density is needed to cover
the capital investment for the transmission and distribution system, which
usually constitutes most of the capital cost for the overall system, often ranging
from 50 to 75% of the total cost for district cooling systems.
2) District Cooling system shall be used when:
a. District cooling demand is 15,000 TR or more
b. District Building Coefficient (Total Built-up Floor Area / Total Site Area) of
1.5 or more
c. TSE is available as the source for district cooling system make up water
3) The central plant may be any type of chiller system (or thermal energy).
Combined heat and power (CHP) plants have a high energy utilization
efficiency. If natural gas is available, electricity could be produced by a gas
fired turbine generator. The exhaust from the turbine could pass through a
waste heat boiler which could produce high pressure steam.
4) Chilled water may be produced by:
d. Absorption refrigeration machines
e. Electric-driven compression equipment (reciprocating, rotary screw or
centrifugal chillers).
f. Gas and/or steam turbine or engine-driven compression equipment.
g. Combination of mechanically driven systems and thermal-energy-driven
absorption systems.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 105
5) The distribution or piping network that conveys the energy usually consists of a
combination of pre-insulated and field-insulated pipe in both concrete tunnel
and direct burial applications.
c. Economic Analysis
1) Provide a complete life cycle cost for the RCJ to demonstrate the feasibility of
a district energy system.
2) A larger central plant may achieve higher efficiencies than the sum of several
smaller plants. Partial load performance of central plants may be more efficient
than that of many isolated, small systems because the larger plant may operate
one or more capacity modules as the combined load requires and may
modulate output. Central plant systems will often operate at 0.90 kw/ton or less
whereas smaller systems at 1.2 kW/Ton.
3) Construction cost for the local construction environment and site conditions
such as these cited below need to be considered:
(a) Labor rates
(b) Distance to ship equipment
(c) Permits and fees
(d) Local authorities and regulations
(e) Soil conditions
(f) Quality of equipment and controls
(g) Availability of materials
(h) Size of distribution piping system
(i) Type of insulation or cathodic protection for buried and above-ground
piping system
(j) Leak detection
(k) Type of distribution system installation (e.g., direct buried, tunnel)
(l) Distribution system depth of burial and restoration of existing conditions
(e.g., city streets, green areas)
(m) Distribution systems below-grade conflict resolutions
(n) Economies of scale
(o) Capital costs
(p) Energy and utility costs
(q) Operations and maintenance costs
(r) Energy and resource usage
d. Central Utility Plant
1) The chilled-water supply temperature shall range from 4.5 to 7 C. Chilled water
return temperatures shall be set as high as practical to minimize the quantity of
chilled water circulated in the system. The minimum temperature difference
between chilled water supply and return shall be 8.3 C resulting in a flow rate
of 0.13 LPS/Ton of refrigeration.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 106
2) Consider thermal storage for district chilled water systems. Thermal storage
may reduce chiller equipment requirements and lower operating costs by
shifting part of the chilling load.
3) Both ice and chilled-water storage have been applied to district-sized chiller
plants, however stratified chilled water is much more common as a thermal
storage medium and is preferred.
4) The expansion tank for the entire system shall be located in the central plant
building. Recognize that operating pressure will be lower than fill pressure, so
the system requires a pressure reducing valve for initial fill which will be valved
off after fill is complete and all air is purged, and then a second pressure
reducing valve set at a lower operating pressure to account for the contraction
of the chilled water as it cools.
5) On large chilled-water systems, consider a makeup water pump to overcome
water loss. Control the pump from level switches on the expansion tank or from
a desired pump suction pressure.
e. Distribution Design Considerations
1) The water distribution system shall be variable primary design.
2) For very large systems serving large buildings, distributed pumping may be
used. For this approach, the distribution pumps in the central plant are
eliminated and relocated to the buildings, so all the electrical energy is borne
by the pumps in the user buildings. When this approach is utilized, consider
future system loads carefully when sizing the building pumps, so the pumps
may properly share the pumping duty as the overall system flow rate increases
in the future.
3) For systems with high rise buildings, account for the static head the tall
buildings will create on the system. Consider using plate and frame heat
exchangers in tall buildings to prevent the static head of the tall buildings from
being imposed on the entire system.
f. Hydraulic Considerations
1) For systems with large distribution networks, model the flow hydraulics with a
computer modeling program.
2) Distribution pipe sizing shall be based on a maximum friction loss of 350 Pa./ m
of pipe.
g. Thermal Considerations
(a) All piping shall be insulated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
(b) No insulation system is totally water and vapor tight.
(1) Corrosion may be minimized by making the insulation system highly
water resistant through the use of a closed-cell insulation material
coupled with a high-performance vapor retarder, and paint the pipe
exterior with a strong rust-preventative costing (two-cost epoxy)
before insulating. In addition, a good vapor retarder is required on
the exterior of the insulation.
(2) Underground piping shall be a pre-engineered double-wall material
with closed cell foam insulation between the carrier pipe and the outer
pipe, and water proof joints.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 107
(c) Provide adequate means of expansion and contraction compensation.

h. Distribution System Construction
1) Provide access ports for underground systems at critical points, such as where
there are:
(a) High or low points on the system profile that vent trapped air or where
the system may be drained.
(b) Elevation changes in the distribution system that are needed to maintain
the required constant slope.
(c) Major branches with isolation valves.
2) Gravity venting of tunnels is good practice, and access ports and tunnels shall
have lighting and convenience outlets to aid in inspection and maintenance of
piping elements.
i. Leak Detection
1) Techniques for leak detection vary from periodic pressure tests on the piping
system to installing a sensor cable or wire along the entire length of the piping
to continuously detect and locate leaks.
j. Valve Vaults and Entry Pits
1) The optimum number of valve vaults is that which affords the lowest life-cycle
cost and still meets all design requirements, typically around 100 m. apart but
usually no more than 150 m apart in the absence of other requirements, such
as isolation valves for a building service.
k. User Interface
1) The connection of a district energy system to a building is commonly called an
energy transfer station (ETS).
2) Provide a cathodic isolation flange at the ETS to preserve system pipe integrity.
3) Consider a plate and frame heat exchanger at the ETS for high rise buildings
to prevent imparting the tall building static pressure head on the entire district
system. This may prevent the requirement and associated cost of rating the
entire distribution system for a higher pressure.
(a) If water quality and the potential fouling of a heat exchanger is a concern
provide two heat exchangers so that one may be removed from service
for cleaning while the other heat exchanger remains in operation.
4) Provide flow and temperature measurement devices at each ETS for assigning
costs to each customer.
l. Control Valves
1) All control valve actuators shall take longer than 60 seconds to close from full
open to mitigate pressure transients or water hammer, which occurs when
valves slam closed. Actuators shall also be sized to close against the
anticipated system pressure so the valve seats are not forced open, thus
forcing water to bypass and degrading temperature differential.
2) Electronic control valves shall remain in a fixed position when a power failure
occurs and shall be manually operable. Pneumatic control valves shall close
upon loss of air pressure.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 108
3) Avoid oversizing control valves as this limits flow control.

13. Building Automation (Management) System
a. Building Automation System Architecture
1) The building automation and control networking protocol shall be truly open,
standard, interoperable, integrated architecture, in full conformance to current
ANSI/ASHRAE 135.
2) The system must be fully BACnet compliant which means that the system must
use BACnet as the native communication protocol between servers or
workstations on the network. The system should be duly listed as FM/UL listed
for building control system package.
3) A web server with a network interface card shall gather data from this system
and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on
each PC connected to the network.
4) Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the
web browser interface.
5) The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC
controllers and a web-based operator interface.
6) Schedules, setpoints, trends and alarms specified as per sequences of
operation shall be BACnet objects.
7) Where packaged mechanical equipment is supplied with its own local control
panel, the building automation system shall only interface with this local control
panel for remote start/stop and status acquisition. Refer to paragraph
5.5,3.L.1.n.2) in Electrical for additional information.
8) For Exhaust Fans individually used for toilets, tea rooms, changing rooms, etc.
and are not involved with the BMS sequence of operation or interlocks, these
fans will be manually controlled through wall mounted on/off switches and shall
not be connected to BAS,Refer to paragraph 5.5.3.L.1.n.2) in Electrical for
additional information.
9) Air handler unit shut down from smoke detectors, as required by NFPA 90A,
shall be the function of the fire alarm control panel, not the building automation
system. e.g. The FACP will provide shutdown signal to respective PACU / AHU
DDC control panel, but the shutdown logic shall through DDC control panel
relay logic to stop the HVAC package directly, not through the DDC software
logic. FACP common shutdown signal will be monitored by BMS, and shall
have alarm lamp on HVAC DDC Controller panel.
b. BACnet Device Object Naming Conventions
1) Device Object Naming Convention Plan (DONCP)
(a) The BAS manufacturer shall submit a BACnet Device Object Naming
Convention Plan to the Royal Commission.
(b) The DONCP shall be designed to eliminate any confusion between
individual points in a facility wide EMCS system.
(c) It shall be designed for future expansion and consistency.
(d) Each device on a BACnet internetwork (including other manufacturer’s
devices) must have a unique device instance.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 109
c. BACnet Addressing
1) Three types of addresses are important in and BACnet system, though all three
can be thought of as addresses, they are very different, both in how they
function and how they are assigned, they are as follows:
(a) Network Numbers – identify the network to which a BACnet device
belongs. Every network on a BACnet LAN has a unique numerical
identifier, a network number. This network number shall be used by
BACnet devices only; it shall not rely on, nor does it affect any other
network protocols. LANs connected by a router must have different
network numbers. No interconnected BACnet network can have the
same network number.
(b) Media Access Control (MAC) Addresses
(c) Device Instances
d. System Performance
1) Performance Standards
(a) System shall conform to the minimum standards over network
connections.
(b) Systems shall be tested using manufacturers recommended hardware
and software for server and browser for web-based systems (or
operating workstation).
e. Communication
1) Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and
routers shall comprise a BACnet network.
2) Ethernet backbone for network segments should be provided for the existing
or proposed network.
f. Operator Interface
1) BACnet system shall be accessed anywhere on the network, through standard
browser interface. View a graphical menu system and dynamic color graphic
screens that paint a picture of conditions throughout the facility.
2) Acknowledge alarms; track personnel; open and close controlled doors; adjust
setpoints and comfort levels; turn lighting and equipment on and off; run
reports; modify schedules; make and edit personnel records; and access pop-
up windows of live trend data and event logs through one efficient interface.
3) Web browsing functionality shall be added to even the smallest existing system
with ease, using the same graphic displays, user profiles and system database
as a standard.
g. System Software
1) Operating System
(a) Web server shall have an industry-standard professional-grade operating
system
(b) Acceptable systems shall be Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 110
h. Controllers
1) Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC),
Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart
Sensors (SS) as required.
i. BACnet Communication
1) Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using ISO 8802-
3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing.
2) BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device routers as
necessary to connect BCs to networks of AACs and ASCs.
j. Controller Software
1) Reside and operate in system controllers
2) Applications shall be editable through operator workstation, web browser
interface, or engineering workstation.
k. Input and Output Interface
1) Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs or SAs.
l. Web Server
1) Web servers shall provide the interface between the LAN or Wan and the field
control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the
control devices connected to the web servers.
2) Web servers shall provide interface between BACnet based automation
systems and popular color-graphic web pages that can dynamically display
BACnet information.
3) Web servers shall support both a VNI (Virtual Network Interface) and RNI
(Remote Network Interface) to ensure that an open solution is being provided
and to ensure that the Royal Commission has flexibility and choice for future
network upgrades and additions.
m. Web Browser
1) Browser technology shall have the ability to interface with facility system from
any on-line PC.
2) System shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 20 simultaneous client
connections (or otherwise requested by the Royal Commission) using standard
Web browser such as Internet Explorer
3) Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system
configuration that is supported by the Web browser.
n. Power Supplies and Line Filtering
1) Wiring and Raceways
(a) Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in
applicable sections of NEC.
(b) Insulated wire shall use copper conductors and shall be UL listed for
90°C (200°F) minimum service (local ambient temperatures shall also be
considered).

Rev. 1 5.4 - 111
2) Fiber Optic Cable System

(a) Optical cables shall be duplex, tight-buffer construction designed for
intra-building environments.
(b) Sheath shall be UL listed OFNP (Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum) in
accordance with NEC Article 770.
(c) Optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data
Interface), ANSI X3T12 within the LAN network and shall meet Gigabyte
Ethernet for WAN network. Fiber cable shall be ITU-T 652.D single mode
9/125µm.
3) UPS
(a) Uninterruptible Power Supply shall be required for Building Controller(s),
and Application Controllers that monitor emergency equipment, if
Normal/Emergency Power is not available in the building.
(b) UPS back up time shall be 1 hour.
C. HVAC EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
1. Air Handling Equipment and Accessories
a. Duct Construction
1) All duct construction should be in strict accordance with the requirements of
SMACNA. The applicable SMACNA standard shall depend on the service,
operating pressure and application. Clearly specify the pressure class and seal
class for each duct system so there is no misunderstanding on the part of the
sheet metal fabricator regarding the duct pressure requirements.
2) Calculate the percent leakage based on the specified pressure and seal
classes and include the calculated leakage percentage in the specifications.
3) Clearly specify the insulation requirements for duct systems.
(a) Duct systems for cooling and heating applications must have external
insulation. Internal lining is not accepted to avoid problems with the
harboring of bacteria, dust and mold in the airstream.
4) Show all duct accessories such as balancing dampers, fire dampers, access
doors, etc. required for code compliance and proper operation of the systems.
Relying on drawing notes and specification clauses to cover these items is not
acceptable.
5) For exhaust of corrosive fumes, provide the proper duct construction (the
proper grade of stainless steel or non-ferrous material) to avoid deterioration
due to corrosion of the duct.
6) Provide fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers in
strict accordance with the Saudi Mechanical Code 501-CR, Section 607, the
Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Section 704 and NFPA Standard 90A.
(a) Coordinate smoke damper and combination fire smoke damper control
with the building fire alarm system and the building automation system.
b. Room Air Distribution Equipment
1) Select constant volume, variable volume and fan powered terminals within the
controllable flow range published by the manufacturer

Rev. 1 5.4 - 112
(a) Schedule each terminal unit for a project individually, listing all
performance criteria including maximum and minimum airflow, static
pressure drop through the terminal at maximum airflow, inlet duct size,
sound criteria, heating capacity of the terminal has a reheat coil, and fluid
flow and temperature for the reheat coil.
(b) Select terminals within the flow ranges listed by the manufacturer for
each terminal size. The maximum design flow for a given terminal shall
not exceed 80% of the manufacturer’s published maximum flow.
Minimum flow shall not be less than the manufacturer’s listed minimum
controllable airflow.
(1) Many manufacturers list 0.0 L/S as the minimum airflow for their
terminals, but this indicates that the terminal can be modulated to
shut-off. Manufacturers also list a minimum controllable airflow
range, and the minimum design airflow for a given terminal shall not
be less than the minimum value in that listed range.
2) Select room air inlets and outlets with careful consideration to uniform air
distribution, low resistance to airflow, and acceptable sound generation.
(a) The direction of air flow into a room shall be toward the faces of the
occupants whenever possible. Air flow from the side may be acceptable
under extenuating circumstances. Under no circumstances shall there be
air flow toward the backs of occupants.
(b) Air distribution shall be as uniform as possible. In no case shall
temperature variation in the air conditioned space exceed 2 C.
(c) Minimum room air movement shall be 0.1 m/s. Air outlets shall be
provided proper throw, drop and spread at or above the 0.1 m/s.
(d) The air conditioning system sound generation shall be within the limits
established in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.d – Noise Control.
(e) Location of air distribution devices shall be coordinated with the
architectural features of the space, such as columns, doors and
windows.
(f) For uniformly distributed loads, supply outlets shall be distributed
uniformly within range of their throw as published by the manufacturer.
(g) Where heating loads are of the concentrated type, supply outlets shall be
located near the source. Air around high heat load equipment shall be
returned through grilles located near the equipment, to avoid mixing with
room air.
(h) Supply and return outlets shall be located to obtain complete coverage of
the entire space. There shall be no short circuiting between supply and
return outlets.
c. Fans
1) In general, fans for HVAC applications should be centrifugal fans with airfoil
blades for maximum efficiency.
(a) Centrifugal fans with radial blades can be used for material handling
applications where airfoil blades may clog from the materials in the
airstream.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 113
(b) Axial fans may be used for industrial applications with limited static
pressure requirements
(c) Propeller fans may be used for through-the-wall exhaust ventilation of
unconditioned spaces.
2) For a given air volume flow rate and static pressure, fans of several sizes may
provide the desired performance. Larger fans operate at slower speeds and
higher static efficiencies, and therefore require less power than smaller fans.
Select fans for maximum static efficiency, which will generally result in selecting
the larger fan for a given application.
3) The following criteria should be considered in fan selection, and should be
included in the fan schedule in the construction documents:
(a) Air volume flow rate (L/s)
(b) Static pressure (Pa)
(c) Fan type
(d) Drive type
(e) Fan class
(f) Number of fans in series
(g) Air density (temperature and altitude)
(h) Type of service (supply, return lab exhaust, toilet exhaust)
(i) Noise criteria
(j) Discharge direction
(k) Fan rotation
(l) Motor position/arrangement
4) Wherever possible, direct drive fans should be used. Arrangement 8 is
preferred for large centrifugal fans.
5) Fans larger than 3.75 kW should be controlled through a variable frequency
controller for variable flow systems.
6) Fans should be carefully selected to operate close to their maximum efficiency
condition.
7) Consider system effect in accordance with AMCA Fans and Systems
Publication 201 when selecting fans.
8) Provide a graphical analysis of the system curve vs. the fan curve for all fans
to illustrate the overall performance.
9) For fans operating in parallel, graph the parallel fan operation fan curve(s) for
the maximum number of fans that will be operating simultaneously with the
system curve to determine the actual performance of the combined group of
fans.
10) Account for duct leakage in fan selection.
11) Total fan power requirements for any given project should be in accordance
with the limits set forth in ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 114
12) Provide vibration control in accordance with Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.d. – Noise

and Vibration Control.
d. Humidifiers
1) For hospitals, laboratories and similar facilities requiring wide area humidity
control, provide humidifiers mounted in the central air handling units.
2) For areas where isolated humidity control is required, such as in libraries and
museums, booster cooling coils, humidifiers, and reheat coils shall be installed
in the duct work supplying air to these specific areas.
3) Humidifiers shall be steam dispersion type. Humidifiers that rely on evaporation
of water directly in the airstream (ultrasonic) should not be used due to the
water quality in Jubail.
4) Select the humidifier for the specific application, including airflow and air
temperature.
5) Account for the impingement distance when determining the placement of a
humidifier in an air handling unit or supply air duct. Allow the manufacturer’s
recommended impingement distance plus 300 mm wherever possible between
the humidifier and downstream obstructions in the duct or air handling unit.
6) Specify the modulating humidifier control valve to be supplied with the
humidifier by the humidifier manufacturer.
7) Provide a separate motorized two-position on-off control valve upstream from
the manufacturer’s modulating control valve to provide positive shut-off when
additional humidity is not required. The manufacturer’s valves do not provide
tight shut-off.
8) Pay careful attention to the manufacturer’s requirements for steam condensate
drainage from the humidifier, and condensate trapping. Condensate must drain
by gravity from the humidifier. Do not try to lift the condensate with steam
pressure to a drain location.
9) Coordinate carefully the path for condensate drainage from duct mounted
humidifiers. Condensate drainage is frequently a problem with duct mounted
humidifiers, and the coordination of the drain piping route must not be left to the
construction team. It must be part of the design.
10) The section of duct or the air handling unit section in which the humidifier is
mounted shall be constructed from Type 304 stainless steel and must have a
drain leading to a floor drain or a sanitary safe waste.
11) Finned Cooling Coils-Chilled Water Type
(a) Cooling coils shall be selected for the specific application of air velocity,
entering and leaving air conditions, entering and leaving fluid conditions
and maximum air and fluid pressure drops. Selections shall be made
utilizing a manufacturer’s computerized coil selection program.
(b) In general, it is desirable to maximize the cooling fluid temperature rise in
a cooling coil. This minimizes pumping energy and typically maximizes
the chiller efficiency. Temperature rises of 9 C at maximum airflow and
peak outdoor conditions are achievable in hot, humid climates. That
should be the goal.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 115
(c) The face velocity of air through cooling coils shall not be less than 1.75
m/s and not more than 2.25 m/s. Face velocities higher than 2.25 m/s
increase moisture carryover, while velocities lower than 1.75 m/s
increase the dehumidification effect and cost of the coil.
(d) Air pressure drop through cooling coils shall be limited to 250 Pa when
the coil is wet.
(e) Coil rows shall be even and shall be selected from the manufacturer’s
data to give the required cooling capacity and sensible heat ratio.
Maximum cooling coil depth shall be 10 rows to facilitate cooling.
(f) No more than 10 fins per 25 mm shall be used.
(g) Where more than two sections are required, coils with the maximum
tubes across the face shall be selected to reduce the number of sections
and piping cost.
(1) For multiple vertically stacked sections, provide valves for balancing
the coil sections with parallel fluid flow.
(h) Coils using any other cooling medium (brine or well water) except clean
water shall have cleanout plugs at both ends of every tube on the
headers, to permit cleaning at regular intervals.
12) Finned Cooling Coils-Direct Expansion Type
(a) When selecting cooling coils of the direct expansion type, the following
factors of performance, size, and design which must be considered in
relation to intended use:
(1) The face velocity of air through a cooling coil shall not be less than
1.75 m/s and no more than 2.25 m/s. Face velocities, in the higher
range increase moisture carryover, while in the lower range they
increase the dehumidification effect and cost of the coil.
(2) Air pressure drop through cooling coils shall be limited to 250 Pa
when the coil is wet.
(3) The number of rows selected shall be based on consideration of
evaporating temperature to give required cooling capacity and
sensible heat ratio. For a given coil performance, reducing the
number of rows will necessitate lower evaporating temperature.
(4) An even number of rows shall be provided so that inlet and outlet
connections shall be on the same end of the coil. No more than 10
fins per 25 mm shall be used. If additional rows are required to
achieve the desired laving air conditions, multiple coils in series shall
be used. Provide adequate space upstream and downstream of each
coil for cleaning.
(5) Cooling coils shall be selected so that a coil and compressor
combination will have the required cooling capacity at their respective
suction pressures. The system will then balance at the designed
suction pressure.
(6) The suction pressure or the corresponding evaporator temperature
shall depend on the sensible heat ratio of space to be conditioned,
and shall be determined from the manufacturer's data.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 116
(7) In order to find balancing suction pressure curves, the capacity

versus suction pressure shall be plotted for a compressor and coil. If
the curves are not available from the manufacturer, they shall be
developed from manufacturer's equipment data.
(8) When compressors are provided with step capacity regulation,
cooling coils shall be divided into a number of sections so that each
section will be equal to a compressor capacity step. Where an
installation has more than one compressor, the minimum number of
cooling coil sections and the cooling capacity of each shall be the
same as that of the compressors. This arrangement will provide a
positive method of dividing the load among the compressors and will
also permit step capacity regulation. Each coil section shall be
provided with its own expansion valve and distribution header.
(9) Both fins and tubes shall be made from copper to prevent corrosion
on condenser coils, and evaporator coils shall be seamless copper
tubing with copper fins. Phenolic shall be applied at a dry film
thickness of 75 microns.
(10) When using packaged air conditioning units, the selected units shall
meet both sensible and total heat loads. The unit manufacturer
standard rated air quantity shall be used for sizing the fan motor,
ductwork and related appurtenance.
e. Dehumidifiers and Related Components
1) Dehumidification shall be provided where control of room humidity or removal
of moisture is the main consideration; for example, in dehumidified warehouses
used for preservation and long term storage of materials.
2) The dehumidifiers shall be a dual bed, dry desiccant type. The total installed
capacity shall be 1.5 to 2 times the calculated normal operating load, in order
to provide capacity for initial pull-down and some standby capacity after pull-
down. The lower factor of 1.5 shall be used where the space has two or more
machines, and the higher factor of 2 shall be used when the operating load
requires only one machine.
3) The capacity factors listed above must also be applied to regeneration capacity.
4) Proper air filtering must be provided upstream from all dehumidification.
Upstream filtering should be minimum MERV 10.
5) Account for the air pressure drop through the dehumidification, as well as for
dirty filter pressure drop in the fan system design.
6) It is recommended that bypasses be provided around dehumidification where
the system is also used for other HVAC purposes, so that the dehumidification
can be bypassed when not required to reduce fan energy requirements
7) Provide highest quality temperature and humidity sensors upstream and
downstream of dehumidifiers and regeneration systems. Accurate sensing are
critical to proper functioning of the equipment
8) Provide complete graphical psychrometric analysis for all dehumidification and
regeneration.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 117
f. Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Devices

1) Provide exhaust air energy recovery in accordance with the requirements of
ASHRAE Standard 90.1. Provide exhaust air energy recovery when the system
air volume flow rate exceeds the limit established by the Standard. Exhaust air
energy recovery systems shall meet the minimum efficiency requirements of
the standard.
2) Air-to-air energy recovery devices for applications in Jubail should be
refrigerant phase-change heat pipes. Heat wheels are not an acceptable heat
recovery strategy for Jubail.
3) Filtering equivalent to MERV 10 must be provided upstream from all air-to-air
energy recovery devices, both in the make-up airstream and the exhaust
airstream.
4) Consideration should be given to evaporating the cooling coil condensate in the
exhaust airstream upstream of the heat recovery coil. This will lower the
exhaust air temperature prior to entering the exhaust heat recovery coil and
can significantly increase the overall efficiency of the heat recovery system.
5) Provide temperature sensors upstream and downstream of heat recovery coils
in both the exhaust airstream and the supply airstream to control the operation
of the heat recovery and to calculate the real-time energy being recovered.
Calculation should include instantaneous and cumulative energy recovered.
6) In the life cycle cost analysis for the air-to-air energy recovery devices, account
for the air pressure drop of the energy recovery device and the air filter in the
fan selection.
g. Air Heating Coils
1) Heating is used in very limited number of applications in Jubail. Heating coils
will primarily be:
(a) Residential heating coils that will be part of a heat pump system. In this
application, the indoor coil will serve as the evaporator coil during cooling
and the condenser coil during heating. Therefore the coil design should
be in accordance with Subsection 5.4.3.C.1. – Air Cooling Coils,
Paragraphs 2)(a)(1) through 2)(a)(10).
(b) Outdoor air preheat coils for hospital, laboratory and other similar
applications where large quantities of outdoor air are introduced. Given
the climate and the hours of operation per year, these coils can be
electric preheat coils. Given the nature of the application, the coils
should be tubular sheath electric resistance coils. The potential for sand
entering the intake would preclude the use of open elements that could
build-up on the element and finned sheath coils where the fins could clog
with sand.
(1) Assure that an electric disconnect switch is within close proximity to
the coil.
(2) Control should be silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) or solid state relay
(SSR) for infinite control staging. Step control will not react fast
enough for the sheathed element to provide the necessary
temperature control stability.
(3) The coils should be protected by minimum MERV 10 filters upstream.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 118
(c) Reheat coils for hospital, laboratory and similar applications where
reheating of minimum air change or make-up air is required. These coils
can be electric or hydronic hot water coils.
(1) Electric coils may be open element or finned sheath. Assure that an
electrical disconnect is within close proximity to the coil. Control
should be silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) or solid state relay (SSR)
for infinite control staging and proper response and temperature
stability.
(2) Hydronic coils shall be copper tubes and copper fins. Hydronic hot
water temperature should not exceed 60 C.
h. Make-up Air Units
1) Reference to other sections of the GEM
(a) Fans are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.c. – Fans
(b) Air cooling coils are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.e. – Air Cooling
Coils
(c) Energy recovery is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.g. – Air-to-Air
Energy Recovery Devices
(d) Air Filtration is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.1.j. – Air Filtration
2) Provide dedicated make-up air units for applications where there is no central
HVAC air handling systems capable of providing the required make-up air,
where the requirement for make-up air is intermittent, or where the required
quality or temperature/humidity conditions for the make-up air are different from
the air provide by the central HVAC system.
(a) Examples of applications for make-up air are industrial processes and
kitchens.
3) Consider the required differential pressure condition in the spaces served
relative to adjacent spaces when sizing make-up air systems, as well as the
associated exhaust volume. It is generally prudent to provide some excess
capacity in the make-up air system if the desire differential pressure condition
is positive, as the space may not pressurize as well as expected as building
and space envelopes generally leak more than expected.
4) Fans 3.75 kW and larger shall have variable frequency drives.
5) If direct expansion cooling is used, use cooling equipment especially designed
for the sensible to latent heat ratio encountered with 100% outdoor air systems.
Normal building direct expansion cooling equipment will not have the capacity
to provide the required latent heat removal.
6) Consider energy recovery for make-up air systems. Submit a life cycle cost
analysis to the RCJ to demonstrate the cost effectiveness of providing vs. not
providing heat recovery.
i. Air Filtration
(a) Sandstorm provisions are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.a. –
Sandstorm Provisions, Design Criteria and Objectives.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 119
(b) Air intake and exhaust considerations are addressed in

Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. – Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design.
2) All re-circulating and outside air systems shall be provided with air filters.
3) All air filtration shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
4) All filters shall be tested by the manufacturer to demonstrate performance in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52 – Method of Testing General Ventilation
Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
5) Built-up central HVAC systems shall be provided with pre-filters and final filters.
6) Filter racks shall be designed to minimize the bypass of air around the filter
media with a maximum bypass leakage of 0.5%.
7) Differential pressure gages shall be provided across the filter assemblies.
8) Where occupancy requirements are likely to generate high levels of airborne
particles, special air filtration shall be provided on the return air system, or
dedicated and localized exhaust systems shall be utilized to contain airborne
particulates.
9) Due to the decrease in system airflow as the pressure drop across the filter
increases, size fans for the “dirty” filter condition. This will ensure that each fan
has adequate capacity to deliver the design airflow as the filter becomes
loaded. The “dirty” pressure drop is usually considered to be two times the
clean pressure drop.
10) The recommended average air velocity over the filter face area is 1.25 m/S,
and shall not exceed 2.5 m/S.
11) All filters shall conform to UL 900 Class 2 for combustibility and smoke
generation. Systems serving areas carrying flammable gases shall have the
additional fire resistance of Class 1 filters, where specified.
j. Sand Filtration Equipment
1) General
(a) Sand filtration equipment is generally utilized for removing particulate
from circulating water systems for chillers, condensers, heat exchangers
and cooling towers.
(b) Sand filtration is most effective on fine light particles down to 0.45
microns. Avoid sand filtration for applications with a high concentration
of coarse particles larger than 40 microns. Centrifugal separators are
more effective for these applications.
(c) Sand filtration system should be packaged with dedicated pump, pipe
manifolds, pressure gauges and strainer.
(1) Pump shall be end suction for flooded suction applications
(2) Pump shall be self-priming for negative suction applications
(d) Sand filtration system shall have backwash cycle automatically initiated
based on pressure difference across the filter media. Pressure
difference setpoint for initiating backwash shall be adjustable.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 120
(e) Minimize the piping between the sand filtration equipment and the
recirculating water system.
(f) Coordinate the placement of a sanitary drain with the plumbing
consultant for discharge of backwash water.
k. DX Packaged and Split
(a) Refrigerant compounds are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.12 –
Refrigerants
(b) Heat pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.4. – Applied Heat
Pump and Heat Recovery Systems
(c) Direct expansion cooling coils are addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.C.1.e.2) – Finned Cooling Coils – Direct Expansion Type
2) Equipment Selection
(a) All equipment efficiencies shall meet the requirements of the latest
edition of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
(b) Design of refrigeration piping for split systems shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Pay particular
attention to length of piping and changes in elevation.
(c) The capacities for DX packaged and split equipment are typically listed
at Standard ARI conditions in the manufacturers’ catalogs and literature.
These conditions are radically different from the outdoor design
conditions in Jubail. Selections for all units must be specific to RCJ
requirements/applications. Correct the catalog capacities to reflect
Jubail outdoor design conditions. The correction factors are available
from the equipment manufacturers.
(d) DX packaged and split equipment usually has limited ability to address
high latent cooling loads. The equipment has fixed cooling coil and
compressor capacity, and the sensible heat capacity ratio can be
changed somewhat by varying the supply air volume across the cooling
coil; however, the variability is minimal. Frequently the sensible heat
ratio for the application will be lower than the actual sensible heat
capacity ratio of the equipment. Match the actual sensible heat capacity
ratio of the equipment as closely as possible to the sensible heat ratio of
the application. This again requires correcting the catalog capacities of
the equipment to reflect the outdoor design conditions for Jubail.
(1) Care should be taken to avoid oversizing of DX package and split
equipment. Oversizing will result in short cycling of the equipment,
and will further reduce the latent cooling capacity of the equipment.
(e) DX and package equipment has limited ability to address part load
conditions. This is further reason to avoid oversizing of the equipment.
Consider multiple pieces of equipment where the equipment does not
have the capacity range to address part load conditions.
(f) If the DX packaged or split equipment does not have the ability to
properly address part load conditions or the desired latent cooling
capacity, options are available from some manufacturers to compensate
for these problems. The options include:
Rev. 1 5.4 - 121
(1) Staged multiple compressors

(2) Humidistat control with hot gas reheating
(3) Variable speed evaporator fans
(4) Wrap-around heat pipes or air-to-air heat exchangers at the
evaporator coil to provide free reheating of the air after
dehumidification.
3) Variable Air Volume Applications
(a) Where packaged DX or split equipment provides the cooling for a
variable air volume air handling system, special provision must be made
for the cooling capacity control. Variable air volume applications usually
operate with constant supply air temperature; however, cycling stages of
refrigeration on and off for DX refrigeration can result in supply air
temperature changes as great as 3 C. Most manufactures of DX
refrigeration offer an optional controller that is specifically designed for
variable air volume applications. Specify this controller with the
equipment.
(1) Where the manufacturer does not offer an optional variable air
volume controller, a method of false loading the evaporator known as
“outdoor air trim” can be utilized. In this control method, as a stage
of refrigeration is staged on, the outdoor air volume passing through
the evaporator is increased to false load the refrigeration and prevent
the refrigeration from cycling off. The same tactic can be used as the
refrigeration load decreases to prevent the stages of refrigeration
from cycling off prematurely.
4) Ducted Applications
(a) Most DX packaged and split equipment evaporator fans have limited
capacity to overcome static resistance in the supply air duct system.
Design supply air duct carefully to minimize resistance to airflow,
calculate the air pressure drop in accordance with Subsection
5.4.3.B.2.b. – Pressure Drop Calculations.
2. Heating Equipment and Accessories
a. Boilers
(a) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9. - Redundancy
2) General
(a) Heating is rarely used in Jubail. Heating applications that may require
the use of boilers would be reheating and humidification for hospital and
laboratory HVAC systems, sterilization and laundries for hospital
applications and industrial heating applications.
(1) Humidification, sterilization, laundries, and some industrial
applications require steam boiler.
(2) Hot water boiler systems are preferred for all other applications
because of reduced maintenance requirements and generally higher
efficiencies.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 122
(b) Before designing boiler systems, confirm the availability of adequate fuel.
3) Pressure and Temperature
(a) Boilers must be constructed in strict accordance with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV (SCIV), Rules for Construction of
Heating Boilers (low-pressure boilers), or Section I (SCI), Rules for
Construction of Power Boilers (high-pressure boilers).
(1) Low-pressure boilers are constructed for maximum working
pressures of 1 Bar for steam and up to 10 Bar for hot water.
Hot-water boilers are limited to 120 C operating temperature.
(i) Low pressure boilers require less supervision and are more
efficient to operate than high pressure boilers, and are
therefore preferred over high pressure boilers.
(2) High-pressure boilers are designed to operate above 1 Bar for steam,
or above 10 Bar and/or 120 C for water boilers.
(ii) High pressure steam boilers are typically required for
sterilization and laundry applications.
4) Fuel Used
(a) Oil fired boilers or Electric are typically used in Jubail.
5) Boiler Types
(a) Hot water boilers shall be modular high efficiency condensing type
boilers or steel fire tube boilers.
(1) Condensing boilers are subject to corrosion. Specify condensing
boilers that are available with a minimum 10 year warranty.
(b) Steam boilers shall be steel fire tube boilers or industrial water tube
boilers.
6) Boiler Burners
(a) Modular high efficiency condensing boilers, steel fire tube boilers and
industrial water tube boilers will all utilized forced draft burners.
(b) Burners shall have a minimum 10:1 turndown ratio, and shall operate
efficiently through all firing rates within that turndown ratio.
(c) Boiler burners shall also be Low NOx emissions type burners.
7) Boiler Controls
(a) Given the complexity of maintaining fire rates for installations with
multiple boilers to meet the load, it is recommended the boiler controls
be supplied by the boiler manufacturer.
(1) The controls must have the ability to stage all of the boilers in the
installation through the full range of firing rates.
(2) The controls shall equalize the runtime for all boilers, and shall signal
the failure of any boiler through an audible and visible alarm.
(3) The controls shall have graphic capability to display all boiler
functions

Rev. 1 5.4 - 123
(4) The controls shall communicate with the building automations system
through a serial interface, and all data including graphics that are
available through the boiler controls shall also be available through
the building automation system.
8) Selection Parameters
(a) Boiler selection depends on many variables of the individual application,
including operating characteristics of actual loads, load distribution; total
heating demand on the boiler plant, number of boilers in the plant,
operational characteristics of individual boiler, reliability factors and the
whole boiler burner and control package.
(b) Develop a detailed load profile for a boiler installation
(c) The boiler plant must be sized for the maximum system load. This is not
merely the sum of connected loads, but shall also take in to account
piping loss, warm-up loads, possible diversity standby requirements, etc.
(d) Select the boiler equipment so that one boiler can be kept on line without
cycling at the lowest load conditions. Efficiency drops dramatically when
boilers cycle due to purging prior to and after a firing cycle.
9) Boiler Breechings and Flues
(a) Specify breeching and flue material that is compatible with the
combustion gases leaving the boilers
(1) There are a limited number of breeching and flue materials that are
compatible with combustion gases from condensing boilers.
(2) Design breechings and flues in strict accordance with the guidelines
in the ASHRAE HVAC Systems and Equipment Handbook.
b. Residential Heating
1) Reference to Other Sections of the GEM
(a) Residential heating is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.3 – Heating Load
Calculations and Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.h. – Air Heating Coils
2) Design
(a) Residential heating equipment should be air source heat pumps. Since
heating is rarely required, sizing of the heat pump shall be based on the
required cooling capacity to meet cooling load.
(b) Controls shall be wall-mounted 7-day programmable electronic
thermostats with night setback provisions and manual change-over from
cooling to heating.
3. Cooling Equipment and Accessories
a. Chillers (Vapor Compression)
1) Reference to other sections of the GEM:
(a) Refrigerants are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.7. – Refrigerants
(b) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9. - Redundancy
(c) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7. –
Hydronic Heating and Cooling

Rev. 1 5.4 - 124
(d) Condenser water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8. –

Condenser Water Systems
(e) District cooling and central plants are addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.B.12. – District Cooling and Central Plant Systems
2) General
(a) Vapor compression chillers can be either air-cooled or water-cooled, and
can have reciprocating, scroll, rotary screw or centrifugal compressors.
3) Air cooled vs. Water Cooled
(a) This topic is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8. – Condenser Water
Systems
(1) Water cooled equipment is more efficient than air cooled equipment,
but water for condenser water systems is in short supply in Jubail.
(2) A life cycle cost analysis shall be performed to determine the overall
cost effectiveness of a cooling tower system over air cooled
condensing for refrigeration. The life cycle cost analysis shall include
all cost associated with treating the water and disposing of blowdown.
4) Compressor Types
(a) Reciprocating compressors tend to be noisy, and cannot match the
efficiency of other compressor types due to the general nature of the
reciprocating cycle and the required clearance volume in the cylinders.
Reciprocating compressors shall therefore be avoided if at all possible.
(b) Scroll compressors are efficient, quiet and reliable, but are only available
in single compressor capacities up to 75 tons. They are used in modular
chiller arrangements, which can provide an inexpensive level of
redundancy by simply adding one compressor to a unit. Capacity control
is also provided by hot gas bypass and variable speed controls. Banks
of scroll compressors are acceptable for loads up to 300 Tons.
(c) Rotary screw compressors are efficient, and provide very good part load
efficiency; however, they can be noisy. Rotary screw compressors are
acceptable for loads up to 750 Tons.
(d) Centrifugal compressors provide the greatest overall flexibility with
regard to capacity and efficiency, and shall be used for machines larger
than 750 Tons.
(1) In the Jubail environment, hermetic machines have an advantage due
to the fact the motor is refrigerant cooled, and not subject to the
potentially high temperatures in the equipment room.
(2) Consider dual compressor machines to provide a higher level of
redundancy.
5) Heat Recovery Chillers
(a) Consider providing a heat recovery chiller for hospital or laboratory
applications where hydronic reheating is required.
6) Chiller Controls
(a) Purchase all chiller controls from the chiller manufacturer.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 125
(b) The chiller control system must interface to the building automation
system through a serial interface. All points and graphics available
through the chiller control system shall be able to be viewed through the
building automation system.
b. Chillers (Absorption)
(a) Refrigerants are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.7. – Refrigerants
2) General
(a) Absorption chillers shall only be considered where “free” waste steam or
high temperature hot water is available, such as waste heat from a
turbine generator or an industrial process.
(b) The inherent inefficiencies of absorption chillers eliminate any potential
economic justification unless the heat to operate them is totally free.
(c) Prepare a full life cycle cost analysis and obtain RCJ approval prior to
designing a system with absorption chillers.
(d) Gas fired absorption chillers are complex to operate and have relatively
short life spans, and shall not be provided.
3) Absorption Chiller Types
(a) Absorption chillers shall be double-effect type for maximum efficiency.
(b) The heating chamber shall be designed and constructed in strict
accordance with the requirements of ASME for Pressure Vessels.
c. Cooling Towers
(a) Outdoor design conditions are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.2. –
Design Criteria
(f) Vibration control is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.c. – Noise and
Vibration Control

Rev. 1 5.4 - 126
(g) Water Treatment is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.d. – Water

Treatment
2) General
(a) Given the limited availability of water for cooling tower makeup in Jubail,
cooling towers are typically only used in applications where TSE
(Treated Sewage Effluent) water is available for cooling tower make-up
water.
(b) Towers shall be constructed of non-corrosive material, stainless steel or
fiberglass for the Eastern Region environment.
(c) Cooling tower fans shall have variable speed drives.
(d) Provide generously sized equalization piping between tower cells.
(e) Provide level controls and isolation valves for each cell of a cooling tower
installation so cells can be taken out of service without shutting down the
entire installation.
(f) Provide walking platforms with railings around the complete periphery of
cooling towers at the basin level. Provide ladders to the top of cooling
tower and railings around the entire top periphery of all towers
3) Open Cooling Towers
(a) Forced-draft cross flow towers have the greatest overall efficiency of all
tower types, and given the climate and water availability in the Eastern
Region shall be used in lieu of other options.
4) Closed Circuit Fluid Coolers
(a) Closed circuit fluid coolers shall be used for hydronic heat pump and
other water cooled HVAC refrigeration equipment with tube-in-a-tube
coaxial refrigeration condensers, where particulate in the condenser
water from a cooling tower would clog the condensers.
(b) Industrial fluid coolers shall have centrifugal fans for maximum efficiency.
d. Thermal Storage
1) General
(a) Thermal storage can be utilized to reduce cooling equipment
requirements and/or electrical demand where peak cooling demands are
uncharacteristically high and of relatively short duration.
(1) Consultants proposing the use of thermal storage must demonstrate
past experience with design of similar systems of the type and
capacity being proposed.
(b) Where the use of thermal storage appears justifiable, first propose the
concept to the RCJ. If the RCJ concurs, they will authorize a preliminary
design and life cycle cost analysis to determine the economic justification
prior to authorizing the detailed design for the thermal storage system.
(c) Although ice storage systems have been used in Jubail, stratified water
thermal storage systems are much preferred.
(1) The life cycle cost analysis for ice storage systems must account for
the inefficiency of operating refrigeration equipment at low

Rev. 1 5.4 - 127
temperatures to produce ice, as well as any parasitic losses inherent

in thermal storage systems.
2) System Design
(a) The following criteria must be specified in the design of a thermal storage
system:
(1) Thermal Storage System Load for each hour of the design day, kW.
(2) Operating mode of the Thermal Storage Refrigeration Equipment
(charge, partial cooling or off) for each hour of the design day.
(3) Design Heat Sink Rejection Temperature, C, for each hour of the
design day.
(4) Supply temperature to the Load during the hour of maximum load,
T1, C, for each hour of the day.
(5) Return temperature from the Load during the hour of maximum load,
T2, C, for each hour of the day.
(6) Flow rate (LPS) to the Load during the hour of maximum load and for
each hour pumping is used.
(7) Maximum time (Hours) available to charge from fully discharged
condition.
(8) Minimum temperature available to charge from fully discharged
condition, C.
(9) The Charge and Discharge fluids (e.g., water, 25% ethylene
glycol/75% water, etc.).
(10) Parasitic and accessory heat load allowance (e.g., air compressor,
dedicated recirculation pump, etc.) into the storage device, tons.
(11) Ambient Heat Load allowance into the storage device due to ambient
air temperature and solar radiation.
(12) Net Storage Inventory, kWH.
(13) Saturated suction temperature and refrigeration load or other design
parameters for the refrigeration plant, when this equipment is to be
supplied by other than the thermal storage supplier.
(14) Temperatures of Fluid entering and leaving the Thermal Storage
Device, and any other heat exchanger(s) included in the system, C.
(15) Flow rate of Fluid through the Thermal Storage Device and any heat
exchanger(s) included in the system, L/S.
(16) Pressure drop across the Thermal Storage Device and any heat
exchanger(s) included in the supplier's scope of supply, KPa.
(17) Energy input to thermal storage refrigeration equipment included in
the supplier's scope of supply, kWh (for electric chiller) or kBJ (for
gas-fired chiller).
(18) Total heat rejection, kJ, and condensing temperature for the
refrigeration system, C.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 128
(19) Energy input to essential storage device parasitics and accessories,

i.e. air compressors or air pumps, in kWh.
4. Common System Components
a. Pumps (Centrifugal)
(a) Redundancy is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.A.9. - Redundancy
(b) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7. –
(c) Condenser water systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.8. –
(d) District cooling and central plants are addressed in Subsection
(e) Vibration control is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.c. – Noise and
Vibration Control
2) General
(a) Pumps coupled to motors with a replaceable coupler are preferred for
large pump and critical applications, as the motor or the pump may be
repaired or replace separately. Pumps with the impeller mounted on the
motor shaft are more difficult and costly to repair or replace, and
frequently require a special motor with a longer than normal shaft that
may be a long lead delivery item.
(b) Variable frequency drives shall be utilized for variable flow systems.
(c) Select pumps near the points of maximum efficiency on the pump
curves. Best selections are usually between the ¼ and ¾ points on the
pump curves. Avoid selections with flat performance curves.
(d) For parallel or series pump arrangements, plot the parallel or series
curves to demonstrate how the pumps will perform in combined
operation.
(e) Select pump motors to be non-overloading over the entire range of
operation for one impeller size larger than the selected size impeller.
(f) Select pumps seals for the intended duty. Stuffing box seals should not
be used due to wasting water.
(g) For cooling tower and other open pumping arrangements, demonstrate
there is adequate net positive suction head.
3) In-Line Pumps
(a) Pipe mounted horizontal shaft in-line pumps should be limited to sizes
1 kW and smaller.
(b) Vertical shaft inline pumps may be used where space is at a premium for
flow rates to 150 LPS and pump heads of 10 Bar. Motor sizes may be
as large as 45 kW. Recognize the impellers are typically attached
directly to the motor shaft in these applications.
4) Base Mounted End Suction Pumps

Rev. 1 5.4 - 129
(a) Base mounted pumps are preferred due to their reliability and
serviceability.
(b) Base mounted end suction pumps may be used for flow rates up to
250 LPS and pump heads up to 15 Bar. Motor sizes may be as large as
110 kW.
5) Horizontal Split Case Pumps
(a) Horizontal split case pumps are used for industrial and large central and
district applications. The may be used for flow rates up to 400 LPS and
pump heads up to 12 Bar. Motor sizes may be as large as 225 kW.
They provide the advantage of being able to service the bearings, seals
or impeller without affecting the piping.
6) Vertical Split Case Pumps.
(a) Vertical split case pumps are also used for industrial and large central
and district applications. The may be used for flow rates up to 250 LPS
and pump heads up to 18 Bar. Motor sizes may be as large as 225 kW.
Like the horizontal split case pumps, they provide the advantage of being
able to service the bearings, seals or impeller without affecting the
piping. However, they have the additional advantage of requiring less
space due to the pipe connections being vertical. There just has to be
adequate height to accommodate the flex connections, valve train,
strainers and other pump accessories.
b. Pumps (Turbine)
(a) Centrifugal pumps are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.a. – Pumps
(Centrifugal)
2) General
(a) Turbine pumps are centrifugal pumps with multiple impellers stacked in
series to increase the pump’s head capacity, and should be used for
applications where the pump head is greater than the head capacity of a
single impeller pump with identical flow rate.
(b) Vertical turbine pumps are the most common type of turbine pump,
where the impellers stack in a vertical arrangement.
(c) In HVAC applications, vertical turbine pumps are most often used for
large cooling tower applications and other “open system” applications
where the pumping circuit is not a closed loop and open static head
exists.
(d) Vertical turbine pumps should also be used for any applications utilizing
underground tanks for water storage
(e) Because of the multiple impeller arrangement, turbine pumps tend to
have steep performance curves. Large changes in head have minimal
effect on flow. This generally makes balancing more simple; however, it
can also make the pump less forgiving is the flow requirement is
underestimated. Estimate flow requirements carefully for turbine pumps.
c. Pumps (Positive Displacement for Fuel Oil)
1) General
Rev. 1 5.4 - 130
(a) Fuel oil pumps are generally gear pumps.

(b) By design, positive displacement pumps are overloading. The pump
horsepower increases exponentially as the pump head increases. For
that reason it is prudent to oversize the pumps somewhat, and to use
balancing valves to obtain the desired flow. Fuel systems should
typically include a return line to adjust for modulating flow requirements.
d. Heat Exchangers
(a) Hydronic heating and cooling is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.7. –
(b) District cooling and central plants are addressed in Subsection
2) General
(a) Heat exchangers may be used in HVAC applications for steam-to-hot
water production for hydronic reheat water in hospitals. These heat
exchangers shall be shell and tube type.
(b) Heat exchangers may also be used to decouple tall buildings from
campus and district chilled water systems. To achieve the minimum
approach temperature, these heat exchangers should be plate and frame
heat exchangers.
(c) Design fouling factors for steam, hydronic hot water and chilled water
should be 9x10-5m2/kW.
(d) Plate and frame heat exchangers are subject to fouling. Consider
providing two heat exchangers so one can be taken out of service for
cleaning while the other heat exchanger remains in service.
(e) Where tandem heat exchangers are used, provide motorized isolation
valves to stop flow through heat exchangers not required at low flow
conditions.
e. Motors and Motor Controllers
1) Motors
(a) Coordination
(1) Provide a complete list of all anticipated motors, complete with the
HVAC system the motors will serve, the motor location, voltage,
phase, kW rating and starter type, for the Electrical Engineer prior to
the completion of the Schematic Phase of design. Update the list with
each design phase as the design progresses.
(b) Ratings of Motors
(1) Motors 0.37 KW and smaller should be single phase or as per vendor
recommendation.
(2) All other motors shall be 3-phase. Table 5.4.3.B is a guide to the
range of sizes of 3-phase induction motors at the various system
voltages. This is intended as a guide only and may be relaxed or
made more restrictive depending on actual supply conditions.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 131
TABLE 5.4.3.B: THREE PHASE MOTOR VOLTAGE RATINGS
Nominal 3-Phase Motor Voltage

Motor Rating System Voltage Rating
0.5 – 150 kW 400Y/230 400
160 – 3000 kW 4160 4000
Above 3000 kW 13800 13200

2) Motor Controllers
(a) General
(1) Appropriate type of motor starters shall be selected for starting and
smooth running of motor. The type of the starter depends on the type
of motor it is starting and the means of control desired.
(2) Small fractional horsepower motors such as exhaust fan motors can
be operated from simple wall switch without conventional starter.
(3) For motors 3.75 kW and larger, a “soft start” type starter shall be used
where calculated starting volt-drop exceeds specified limits.
(i) Consider using variable frequency drives (VFD’s) for motors
3.75 kW and larger, even in applications which do not require
variable operation such as pumps and fans. They offer the
opportunity to start the device at low RPM and ramp to the
desired speed, and they simplify balancing.
(4) Variable Frequency Drives
(i) VFD’s shall be based on pulse width modulation technology,
minimum 12 pulse type, and shall have the following features:
• Automatic restart after a power line transient
• Adjustable number of restarts after a drive fault
• Auto/Off/Manual switch, local speed control, adjustable
current limit, and adjustable acceleration and deceleration
rates
• “On the fly” restart into a coasting load
• Phase loss and voltage over/under voltage protection
• Ground fault protection
• Output over current trip
• Stall protection
• Capability to accept external normally closed permissive
contacts such as static pressure safeties
• Input power disconnect
(ii) Where there is a central building automation system (BAS),
VFD’s for HVAC application shall interface with the BAS. Any
interface devices (hardware or software) required for the VFD

Rev. 1 5.4 - 132
interface with the BAS should be provided by the BAS

manufacturer.
(iii) All VFD’s provided on a single project should be furnished by the
same manufacturer.
(5) Reversing Starters
(i) Reversing starters for motors are used for various applications
such as opening or closing of valves.
(b) Starter type selection is dependent on the motor size and the application.
Table 5.4.3.C provides guidance on the selection of the starter types for
the various motor sizes, voltages and applications. The final selection
shall be determined by the engineer designing the specific application.
TABLE 5.4.3.C: STARTER SELECTION
Reduced Voltage
Frequency Drive
Across the Line
Motor Rating Voltage Application
Star Delta
Variable
0.5 kW to 4
400 All
kW
Constant
≥ 4 kW 400
Speed
Variable
≥ 4 kW 400
Speed
< 37 kW 400 Fire Pump
≥ 37 kW 400 Fire Pump
(c) Motor Control Center (MCC)

(1) When it is required to control multiple motors, it is preferred to control
them from a centralized location such as a motor control center.
(2) Motor control center is comprised of individual controllers for various
motors mounted on a fixed or draw-out type of chassis with each
controller located in separate compartment.
(d) Medium Voltage Controllers
(1) 4160 V motors shall use combination controllers with current limiting
fuses and contactor. Standard motor controllers available for squirrel
cage, wound rotor and synchronous motors shall be specified.
Medium voltage circuit breakers may be used as motor starters, but
are not preferred since they are not suitable for repetitive starting
duty.
D. HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

Rev. 1 5.4 - 133
1. General Design Considerations

a. Roof Top Equipment
1) Roof top equipment screening is addressed in Architectural Subsection
5.3.3.I.1.
b. Sandstorm Provision, Design Criteria and Objectives
1) Frequent high wind gusts, often of long duration and well in excess of 18 m/s,
produce humid, salty, dusty and sandy atmosphere. Provisions must be made
to eliminate sand from outdoor air intakes prior to the air entering the HVAC
filters, or the filters will clog quickly.
2) Where space is available, orienting the intake so that the air must rise vertically
up into the intake, and orienting the intake louver in a horizontal plane helps to
drastically reduce the volume of sand that is entrained in the airstream.
3) All intakes, regardless of whether the louver is in the vertical or horizontal
orientation, should have prefabricated sand trap lovers at the face of the intake.
Sand trap louvers shall have self-emptying sand drain holes at the base. Sand
trap louvers shall be backed with 50 mm thick washable aluminum filters. The
filters shall be washable for cleaning. Behind that and trap louvers and filter
shall be a plenum with the same basic height and width dimensions as the
louver, minimum 0.6 m deep with access doors for removing sand.
4) Maximum air velocity at the sand trap louver face shall be 1.0 m/s for general
HVAC applications and 2 m/s for non-HVAC applications, such as a generator
intake.
c. Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design
(a) Building air intake design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.a. –
Sandstorm Provisions, Design Criteria and Objectives
(b) The design of laboratory exhaust is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.o.
– HVAC for Laboratories
2) Intake height and orientation
(a) Locating intakes 8 M above grade greatly reduces the exposure to wind
driven sand. Many buildings are less than 8 M in height; however,
intakes should be located as high as practical to minimize the intake of
wind driven sand.
(b) Locating intakes on the prevailing leeward side of the building further
reduces the exposure to wind driven sand.
3) Intake Isolation Distances
(a) Isolation for outdoor air intakes for non-healthcare applications shall be
in accordance with the International Mechanical Code
(b) Isolation distances for healthcare applications shall be in accordance
with the AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care
Facilities and with ANSI/ASHRAE/ASHE Standard 170 – Ventilation of
Healthcare Facilities
4) Intake Velocity

Rev. 1 5.4 - 134
(a) The velocity over the entire face of the intake shall not exceed 2 m/S,
with the exception of packaged HVAC equipment where the intake
velocity shall not exceed 1.25 m/S.
5) Exhaust Discharge
(a) All exhaust must be discharged outdoors. Discharge to attics or crawl
spaces is prohibited.
(b) The location of exhaust outlets shall comply with the International
Mechanical Code
(c) The height and velocity of laboratory exhaust discharges shall comply
with ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation.
(d) Exhaust from cooking and food preparation applications shall be directed
up and away from any building components or neighboring buildings
6) Nuisance or hazardous exhaust
(a) Exhaust from diesel engines such as trucks in a loading dock or diesel
generators are detectable and objectionable at concentrations well below
the concentration that would constitute a health hazard.
(b) Exhaust from cooking operations with high concentrations of spices are
detectable and objectionable to many building occupants
(c) Exhaust from laboratory or industrial applications involving hazardous
chemicals can pose a health risk if drawn into an intake and distributed in
a building, especially in the event of a chemical spill.
(d) For applications in the vicinity of nuisance or hazardous exhausts,
sometimes allowing the isolation distances between exhaust discharges
and outdoor air intakes is not sufficient to prevent nuisance or even
hazardous concentrations of fumes in a building. For these applications,
careful consideration should be given to providing a higher level of
design analysis such as computational Fluid dynamic (CFD) analysis or
a wind tunnel study.
(1) CFD analysis and wind tunnel studies involve complex science and
must be completed by persons understanding the science and the
application. Submit the names and resumes of the persons who will
be completing the analysis to the RCJ for approval.
d. Design and Application of Controls
1) DDC Systems Controls
(a) All non-residential systems shall be direct digital type, distributed controls
systems.
(b) All actuators shall be electronic type.
(c) For chillers, boilers and similar large items of equipment requiring control
of integral components in the equipment such as compressors, inlet
vanes, burners, motors, etc., it is preferable to have the controller for that
equipment supplied by the equipment manufacturer. In such case, the
controllers supplied by the equipment manufacturer must be compatible
with the central control system provided for the building. The controller
for the individual equipment must be supplied with any required interface

Rev. 1 5.4 - 135
gateways so the manufacturer’s controller can communicate seamlessly

with the building automation system.
(d) Provide complete drawings for the control system. The drawings shall
consist of:
(1) A drawing illustrating the control system architecture representing
each floor of the facility and complete with the control network, all
major expandable controllers, representative unitary controllers
(multiple similar application unitary controllers on each floor can be
represented by a symbol for the unitary controller application and
then a note indicating that symbol is typical for a specific number of
controllers, any necessary routers, all interfaces with other systems
such as fire alarm or security, and all desired human machine
interfaces.
(2) Complete control diagrams for all systems and equipment illustrating
all required control devices to accomplish the desired sequences of
operation.
(3) Complete written sequences of control for all systems and equipment.
Sequences should be arranged so that short segregated paragraphs
are provided for each component in a system. Long paragraphs
specifying sequences for multiple components are confusing, and
difficult for the programmers to follow. Programming is accomplished
in short step function format, and the sequences should be arranged
accordingly.
(4) Complete input/output (I/O) summary listing all control system
components, the desired control functions and all desired alarms.
e. Noise Control
1) General
(a) The ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook – Sound and Vibration chapter
and the ASHRAE Application Handbook – Sound and Vibration Control
chapter; and this document shall constitute the noise and vibration
control design criteria for RCJ Projects.
(1) See the Table entitled Design Guidelines for HVAC-Related
Background Sound in Rooms in the ASHRAE Applications Handbook
– Noise and Vibration Control chapter for specific HVAC sound
guidelines for various occupancy types. Table 5.4.3.D lists HVAC
sound guidelines for some representative spaces:
TABLE 5.4.3.D: DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR HVAC RELATED BACKGROUND SOUND IN ROOMS
Octave Band Approximate Overall Sound Pressure
Space Type Analysis Level
NC/RC dBA dBC
Private Offices 30 35 60
Open Offices 40 45 65
Conference Rooms 30 35 60
Libraries 25 35 60

Rev. 1 5.4 - 136
Octave Band Approximate Overall Sound Pressure

Space Type Analysis Level
NC/RC dBA dBC
Laboratories 50 55 75
Places of Worship 25 30 55
Classrooms 25 35 60
(b) Sound and vibration are created by a source, transmitted along one or
more paths, and reach a receiver.
(c) Any sound analysis shall include source-path-receiver chain.
(d) Treatments and modifications can be applied to any or all of these
elements to achieve an acceptable acoustical environment.
(e) It is most effective and least expensive to reduce noise at the source.
(f) Adequate noise and vibration control in the mechanical systems is best
achieved during the design phase.
(g) The way the HVAC components are assembled into a system affects the
sound level generated by the system and accordingly shall be
considered in the design.
(h) The basic elements of acoustics should be understood and used in order
to work intelligently with SPL (Sound Power Level), PWL (Sound
Pressure Level) and SIL (Sound Intensity Level) data for many types of
electrical and mechanical noise sources, know the effects of distance
(both indoors and outdoors), appreciate the significance of noise criteria,
and be able to manipulate acoustic data in a meaningful and rational
way.
2) The primary objective for the acoustical design of mechanical systems and
equipment is:
(a) Ensure that the acoustical environment in a given space meet the design
criteria.
(b) Consider practicality and simplicity.
(c) Consider total economy.
3) Several background sound rating methods are used to rate indoor sound.
4) They include the A-weighted sound pressure level (dBA) and noise criteria
(NC), the more recent room criteria (RC), balanced noise criteria (NCB) and the
new RC Mark II.
5) Not all methods are equally suitable for the rating of sound in the variety of
applications encountered.
6) The desired noise criterion curves for various indoor areas are published in the
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals and shall be used as the design criteria
for RCJ Projects.
7) It should be understood that lower values are quieter.
8) Select quieter equipment. Select manufacturers that involve ANSI, ISO, ARI,
ASHRAE and ASTM standards to set up the equipment noise specifications

Rev. 1 5.4 - 137
and to evaluate acoustical equipment and products performance in the

laboratory and in the field.
9) Equipment shall be oriented so that maximum sound radiation, such as from
air intake and exhaust, is directed away from points of possible complaints.
10) Regular maintenance procedures such as tightening of loose parts and
replacement of damaged components shall be enforced.
11) If areas have ambient noise levels exceeding 90 dBA; it shall be classified as
Noise Hazard Areas.
12) Enclosures and Barriers
(a) Enclosing a sound source is a common means of controlling airborne
sound transmission.
(b) Adequate wall and floor-ceiling constructions shall be designed to
contain the noise and limit its transmission into adjoining areas.
(c) Acoustic absorption material shall be used, if needed in either or both the
sound transmitting room and the sound receiving room to absorb some
of the sound energy that “bounces” around the room.
(d) The sound transmission class (STC) rating of a partition or assembly is a
single number rating used in architecture to classify sound isolation for
speech (ASTM E90, ASTM E413).
(e) Transmission loss data shall be used to select various types of
construction materials for the design of noise enclosures.
(f) Select partitions and floors on the basis of their one-third octave or
octave band sound transmission loss values rather than single number
ratings, especially when frequencies below 125 Hz are important.
(g) Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Transmission Loss Values of
typical mechanical equipment room wall, floor, and ceiling types in dB
are found in ASHRAE Applications Handbook.
13) Noise Control in Duct Systems
(a) System sound levels at maximum flow shall be carefully evaluated to
ensure required acoustic levels.
(b) The ductwork design shall appropriately consider and address airborne
equipment noise, equipment vibration, duct-borne fan noise, duct
breakout noise, airflow generated noise and duct-borne crosstalk noise.
(c) Duct noise control shall be achieved by controlling air velocity.
(d) Reduce fan-generated noise immediately outside of any mechanical
room wall by acoustically coating or wrapping the duct.
(e) Use sound attenuators for critical areas.
(f) Terminal units shall be selected so that design air volume is
approximately three-quarters of the terminal box’s maximum capacity.
(g) Volume dampers shall be located at least 1.8 m from the closest diffuser.
14) Isolation from Exterior Noise Sources

Rev. 1 5.4 - 138
(a) Buildings located near airports, highways, rail corridors or other sources
of significant environmental noise levels shall have exterior wall and
window assemblies controlling noise intrusions.
f. Vibration Control
1) Design Objective
(a) All vibrating, reciprocating, or rotating equipment shall be mounted such
that it does not transmit significant levels of vibration into the surrounding
or supporting structure.
(b) Provide vibration isolation for all attachments to a vibrating machine,
including structural mounts, cooling or drainage pipe connections,
exhaust air ductwork, and electrical connections.
(c) It is very important that equipment operating frequencies be isolated from
natural frequencies of the building.
(d) Ensure that the supporting structure has sufficient stiffness and mass.
(e) Ensure that where machinery operations or vibrations are transmitted
through the foundations and support structure they are designed in
accordance with Saudi Soils and Foundation Code 303-CR, Chapter 12.
(f) Where it might be impractical or too expensive to meet the design
criteria, then sound engineering judgment shall be applied to limit noise
and vibration effect on building occupants and to protect the equipment.
2) Vibration Criteria
(a) Design Criteria shall be as per ASHRAE Fundamentals and Applications
Handbooks, recommended acceptable vibration criteria for vibration in a
building structure.
3) Vibration Isolators Selection
(a) Vibration isolators must be selected not only to provide required isolation
efficiency but also to compensate for floor stiffness.
4) Vibration Control
(a) General
(1) Provisions shall be made to control equipment induced vibration.
(2) Refer to and incorporate the basic design techniques as described in
ASHRAE Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control.
(3) The use of vibration isolators between equipment and foundations
and/or building structures shall be required to minimize transmitted
vibration.
5) Vibration Isolators
(a) Vibration isolation mounts shall be used for the support of mechanical or
vibrating equipment.
(b) Isolators shall be specified by type and by deflection, not by isolation
efficiency.
(c) Refer to ASHRAE Fundamentals for Selection of Vibration Isolators and
ASHRAE Application Handbook for types and minimum deflections.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 139
(d) All vibration isolators shall be selected according to ASHRAE and

manufacturer’s recommendations.
(e) Isolation performance shall be within the responsibility of the equipment
supplier.
6) Rotating Equipment
(a) All rotating equipment within the housing of units shall be mounted on
vibration isolators.
(b) Reciprocating compressors shall be vibration isolated from the unit, and
frame shall have vibration isolation (such as a vibration pad) between
equipment and equipment base.
(c) All air handling units and fans casing shall be isolated from their ducts by
flexible connections.
7) Ductwork
(a) The ductwork design shall appropriately consider and address
equipment vibration.
(b) All ductwork connections to equipment having motors or rotating
components shall be made with 150 mm length of flexible connectors.
(c) All ductwork within the mechanical room or serving critical rooms shall be
supported with isolation hangers.
8) Piping Hangers and Isolation
(a) Isolation hangers shall be used for all piping in mechanical rooms and
adjacent spaces, up to a 15 m distance from vibrating equipment.
(b) The pipe hangers closest to the equipment shall have the same
deflection characteristics as the equipment isolators.
(c) Other hangers shall be spring hangers with 19 mm deflection.
Positioning hangers shall be specified for all piping 200 mm and larger
throughout the building.
(d) Spring and rubber isolators are recommended for piping 50 mm and
larger hung below noise sensitive spaces.
(e) Floor supports for piping may be designed with spring mounts or rubber
pad mounts.
(f) For pipes subject to large amounts of thermal movement, plates of
Teflon or graphite shall be installed above the isolator to permit
horizontal sliding.
(g) Anchors and guides for vertical pipe risers usually must be attached
rigidly to the structure to control pipe movement.
(h) Flexible pipe connectors shall be designed into the piping before it
reaches the riser.
9) Piping Supports
(a) Provide channel supports for multiple pipes and heavy duty steel
trapezes to support multiple pipes.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 140
(b) Hanger and support schedule shall have manufacturer’s number, type
and location.
(c) Comply with MSS SP69 for pipe hanger selections.
(d) Spring hangers and supports shall be provided in all the mechanical
rooms.
10) Mechanical Equipment Isolation
(a) Floating isolation bases shall be considered for major mechanical
equipment located in critical areas.
11) Concrete Inertia Bases
(a) Inertia bases shall be provided for reciprocating and centrifugal chillers,
air compressors, all pumps, axial fans above 300 RPM, and centrifugal
fans above 37.3 kW.
12) Mechanical Shafts and Chases
(a) Mechanical shafts and chases shall be continuous and closed at the top
and bottom.
(b) Any piping and ductwork shall be isolated as it enters the shaft to prevent
propagation of vibration to the building structure.
(c) All openings for ducts and piping must be sealed.
(d) Shafts dedicated to gas piping must be ventilated.
g. Water Treatment
1) Water quality for the HVAC system shall minimize corrosion, scale build-up and
biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a
hazard to operating personnel or the environment.
2) Specify water treatment systems for the following HVAC systems:
(a) Closed loop chilled water
(b) Closed loop heating water
(c) Open loop cooling tower water
(d) Steam boilers
3) Base all HVAC water treatment on the quality of water available at the project
site, HVAC system and equipment material characteristics and functional
performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities and requirements
and guidelines of AHJ.
4) Obtain water samples at the site for testing to determine the required water
treatment. Contract for an analysis of the water sample and a complete report
of the water characteristics to be included with the specifications for the water
treatment.
5) Specify water treatment requirements related to initially flushing all HVAC
piping, for initially filling the piping systems and for maintaining the systems free
of scale, corrosion and bacteria, and at the proper chemical concentrations and
pH for efficient operation.
6) Water treatment shall maintain the following water quality parameters:

Rev. 1 5.4 - 141
(a) Closed Systems

(1) Conductivity: 1200 to 2500 µmhos
(2) pH: Not less than 7.5 or greater than 8.5 (except for piping flush and
clean setup where the pH level shall be in the alkaline range of 9.5 to
10.5)
(3) Hardness: < 5 ppm
(4) Fouling factor: < 0.0005
(b) Condenser Water
(1) Conductivity: 1500 to 1600 µmhos
(2) pH: Not less than 8.0 or greater than 9.5
(c) Steam Boiler
(1) Boiler Conductivity: 3000 to 4000 µmhos
(2) pH: Not less than 9.0 or greater than 12.5
(3) Hardness: < 5 ppm
7) Refer Standard Specifications for Water Treatment.
h. Evaporative Cooling
1) Evaporative cooling loses effectiveness at wet bulb temperatures above 26ºC.
Therefore it is not an appropriate strategy in Jubail for applications requiring
year-round comfort conditioning to temperatures close to 24ºC.
2) Evaporative cooling can be effective for providing spot cooling in kitchens,
laundries and industrial applications where higher than normal comfort
temperatures are acceptable and delivering air at higher temperatures than
would be delivered from refrigerated cooling equipment can have benefit.
3) Complete a life cycle cost analysis addressing the operating and maintenance
cost of evaporative cooling to the RCJ prior to starting detailed design.
4) Evaporative cooling should be done with 100% outdoor air.
(a) Provide a relief air path with proper controls to avoid over pressurization
of the space served.
5) The air to be conditioned in an evaporative cooling process must first pass
through filters with a minimum performance of MERV 8.
6) The water passing through the evaporative cooling device shall be passed
through a Class 1 water filter with a minimum efficiency of 97% for particles
1 micron and larger in size.
7) Direct evaporative cooling or two-stage indirect/direct evaporative cooling are
most effective for the applications listed previously.
(a) Rigid media or spray type direct evaporative coolers are preferred over
wetted pad type because of the relative short life of the wetted pads (1 to
2 years).
8) The air velocity through the wet chamber shall be less than 2.5 m/s. Higher
velocities can result in moisture carryover, as well as excessive fan horsepower
requirements.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 142
9) The wet chamber of the evaporative cooler shall be constructed of noncorrosive

material. Stainless steel is preferred, but plastic or fiberglass may be accepted,
based on review by the RCJ. Approve acceptance for use of materials other
than stainless steel for the wet chamber prior to bidding.
10) For evaporative coolers with rigid media, it is recommended the circulating
pump remain operational even when the unit is not in use to avoid mineral
deposits in the media.
11) A method must be provided for minimizing solids build-up in the sump. Time
sequenced bleed-off or controls that activate bleed-off based on solids
concentration are preferred because the limit water use.
i. Fire and Smoke Management
(a) Stair pressurization systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.11 –
Stair Pressurization Systems.
2) General
(a) Fire and smoke management systems shall be designed in strict
accordance with Saudi Fire Code 801-CR, Section 909 – Smoke Control
Systems and NFPA 92 – Standard for Smoke Control Systems.
(1) The SBC and NFPA are very specific regarding the a number of
factors relating to fire and smoke management system design,
including but not limited to: building stack effect, temperature effect
of the fire, wind effect on the building, pressure differences across
smoke barriers, velocity through intake openings, allowable height of
smoke layer, fire heat release, exhaust fan capacity and construction,
duct construction, damper ratings and control, electrical power
sources, fire and smoke detection and control sequences and ratings.
Design the systems in strict accordance with each and every one of
these requirements.
(b) Design of fire and smoke management systems is complex. the design
must be completed by an experienced fire protection engineer.
(c) The preferred method of analysis for designing fire and smoke
management systems is computational fluid dynamics (CDF) modeling.
CFD modeling will normally result in the lowest overall airflow
requirements which usually results in the simplest and lowest cost
systems. CFD modeling must be completed by persons having
experience with the science and the software.
(1) Submit the names and resumes of the persons who will be performing
the CFD modeling.
(2) If a method of analysis other than CFD modeling is being proposed
for designing fire and smoke management systems, submit the
proposed method of analysis, as well as the names and resumes of
the persons who will performing the analysis to the RCJ for approval.
3) Coordination
(a) Early coordination of the fire and smoke management system
requirements with other design disciplines is critical to achieving effective
functioning of the systems
Rev. 1 5.4 - 143
(1) Coordinate location of air intakes, fan locations and support, and
discharge locations with the Architect. Quite often doors and
windows must be motorized to open when smoke exhaust is activated
in order to provide adequate intake area. Strategically locating doors
and windows that will be used for air intake is crucial to effective
smoke exhaust, so coordinating early in the design process helps
assure the optimum locations can be accommodated in the design.
(2) Fire and smoke management systems must have at least two
sources of power, and one source must be from a standby system.
Coordinate the power requirements and the locations of the
equipment needing power with the Electrical Engineer early in the
design process to assure optimum design of the power sources.
4) Design Considerations
(a) Confirm with the RCJ all design parameters that are influencing the
design of the fire and smoke management systems.
(b) Where egress time is a design parameter, assure that the egress time
calculations are acceptable to the RCJ prior to using them as a design
parameter.
(c) Where door opening force will be affected by the operation of the fire and
smoke management system, confirm the allowable door opening force
that will be permitted in the completed facility.
5) Control
(a) It is preferred that fire and smoke management systems be controlled
from the building automation system, although all controls must have the
proper listing and monitoring in accordance with NFPA 92.
6) Commissioning
(a) Fire and smoke management systems should be commissioned
rigorously. Specify commissioning of each system independently.
Prepare a comprehensive testing procedure to be used by the
commissioning agent.
(b) Assure that the system is operating properly through all sequences of
operation prior to the final testing which will be reported to the AHJ.
(c) The system must pass one complete final test through all sequences of
operation without any functional problems.
(d) The results from all of the testing shall be reported to the RCJ.
7) Refer to Standard Specification for HVAC Power Ventilators
j. Electrical Considerations
(a) Motors and motor starters are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.f. –
Motors and motor controllers
2) General
(a) Consult the electrical consultant regarding the proper voltages for motors
and equipment

Rev. 1 5.4 - 144
(b) Provide a complete list of HVAC equipment requiring electrical service

with proposed voltage, phase and kW or maximum amperage to the
electrical consultant during the Schematic Design phase of the project.
Update the list through each phase of the design process.
(c) Provide a complete list of equipment requiring power from an emergency
source with proposed voltage, phase, kW of maximum amperage and
starting priority to the electrical consultant during the Schematic Design
phase of the project. Update the list through each phase of the design
process.
3) Generators
(a) Installation Requirements
(1) Ventilation
(i) The ventilation air shall satisfy the manufacturer’s requirements
for combustion and cooling.
(ii) Intake and exhaust louvers shall be located with sufficient
separation to avoid short circuiting of the air which would result
in equipment overheating.
(iii) Ventilation intakes shall incorporate motor operated dampers to
close off the intake when not in use. These dampers shall be
electrically held shut so that they will automatically open when
the power fails.
(iv) The intake shall also be provided with filters to maintain clean air
to the equipment room and to avoid degradation of equipment
performance.
(v) Indoor locations shall be selected to ensure that there is
adequate intake and exhaust air to address the combustion and
cooling air requirements.
(vi) Outdoor locations shall be coordinated with the surrounding
facilities to ensure that adequate ventilation can be provided to
address the combustion and cooling air requirements.
(2) Fuel Supply
(i) Diesel engine driven generators shall be used. Storage of diesel
fuel shall be sufficient to support the back-up power loads for a
minimum duration of 1 ½ hours but shall also accommodate
routine exercising of the generator without requiring the fuel to
be replenished after every routine test. Fuel storage tanks shall
include capacity for 24 hours operation at full load or more as
established by the criticality of the facility. The final storage
capacity shall be confirmed for each facility with the Royal
Commission.
(ii) Fuel storage tanks shall be located above ground and they shall
be double wall construction with integral leak detection to
indicate if the fuel oil has entered the cavity between the inner
and outer tank walls.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 145
(iii) Fuel storage tanks may be base mounted below the generator
or separate from the generator depending on the capacity and
space requirements.
• Indoor tanks are preferred. Outdoor tanks near traffic areas
must be protected by bollards from being impacted by
vehicles.
• Fuel tanks must be contained by a dyke to limit amount of
fuel spill in case of fuel leakage. Dyke must be sized to
contain min of 110% of the full fuel tank volume.
(3) Engine Exhaust
(i) The engine exhaust system consists of the silencer and piping.
These components will reach high temperatures and must be
carefully designed to ensure that they will not impact the safety
of the occupants or the building structure.
(ii) The location of the discharge shall be carefully coordinated to
ensure that the discharge will not affect the intake air to the
building or the adjacent facilities.
(iii) The exhaust silencer is typically provided with the generator unit
and shall be specified with the sound attenuation characteristic
suitable for the installed environment as follows:
• Residential grade silencer shall be utilized in light industrial
areas where the background noise is relatively high and
constant and the requirement for a higher level of silencing
is minimal.
• Critical grade silencer shall be utilized for quiet residential
areas where background noise is relatively low and critical
grade silencing is required.
• Hospital grade silencer shall be utilized for noise reduction
in heavy industrial areas where machinery operates in a
quiet locality including, hospitals, schools, and quiet
residential districts.
(iv) The exhaust system piping shall be designed by the mechanical
engineer.
(4) Structural and Vibration
(i) The generator shall be provided with a foundation and
housekeeping pad sufficient to support the weight of the
equipment. This shall include the engine-generator, fuel
storage, batteries, and engine exhaust silencer and piping.
(ii) Vibration isolation shall be provided to avoid the transmission of
vibration to the surrounding occupancies. The selection of the
vibration isolation shall address any applicable seismic
requirements and the sensitivities of the adjacent facilities.
(5) Noise:

Rev. 1 5.4 - 146
(i) The engine exhaust noise is addressed by the silencer as

described above. The radiated engine noise shall be addressed
as follows:
• Indoor locations shall have the room designed to prevent
transmission of the equipment noise to the adjacent
spaces. The level of sound attenuation is dependent on the
criticality of the adjacent spaces.
• Outdoor locations shall incorporate sound attenuation into
the enclosure. The level of attenuation is dependent on the
criticality of the adjacent facilities and control shall limit the
sound level at the property line to meet all local codes and
ordinances. In the absence of any ordinance, the sound
attenuated enclosure shall be selected to limit the
maximum noise at the property line to the following levels:
• Residential – 45 dBA
• Hospitals - 45 dBA
• Light Industrial – 55 dBA
• Heavy Industrial – 60 dBA
k. Integrated Building Design
1) Integrated building design is a process in which multiple disciplines and
seemingly unrelated aspects of design are integrated in a manner that permits
synergistic benefits to be realized.
2) It is a highly collaborative process that emphasizes the development of a
holistic design
3) The key to successful integrated building design is the participation of people
from different specialties of design such as : general architecture, HVAC,
lighting and electrical, interior design, and landscape design in a highly
collaborative arrangement beginning at the very initiation of the concept design
phase.
4) The key objectives in the design of any building include:
(a) Accessibility for people with special needs
(b) Aesthetics including physical appearance and image
(c) Economy relating to life cycle cost in addition to first cost
(d) Functionality in meeting the needs and requirements of the occupants as
well durability and efficient maintenance
(e) Productivity of the occupants which is dependent on physical and
psychological comfort
(f) Secure and safe from natural and human threats
(g) Sustainable as it relates to the occupants and the environment
5) Each design objective is significantly important in any project, yet a truly
successful one is where project goals are identified early on and held in proper
balance during the design process; and where their interrelationships and
interdependencies with all building systems are understood, evaluated,

Rev. 1 5.4 - 147
appropriately applied, and coordinated concurrently from the planning and

programming phase. A truly high-performance building cannot be achieved
unless the integrated design approach is employed.
6) By working together at key points in the design process, the design team can
often identify highly attractive solutions to design needs that would otherwise
not be found.
7) To accomplish truly integrated design, the engineering team must engage with
the architectural team at the beginning of the concept design, and each team
needs to understand the project program as well as each other’s needs and
constraints with regard to the project design. The engineering team cannot
allow the architect to design to some early level of completion before they
become engaged in the project.
8) In an integrated design approach, the engineering team will calculate energy
use and cost very early in the design, informing designers of the energy-use
implications of building orientation, configuration, fenestration, mechanical
systems, and lighting options. The energy model will be used to inform the
design, not simply confirm it.
9) Integration/collaboration must continue through all design phases of the
project, although the effort has its greatest impact in the early stages of design
where changes have lesser impact on the design production.
l. Fume Hood Exhaust Systems
(a) Exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. –
Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design.
(b) Laboratory exhaust is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.o. – HVAC for
Laboratories.
2) General
(a) Fume hood exhaust systems shall be designed in accordance with the
following codes and standards:
(1) Saudi Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR
(2) International Mechanical Code
(3) NFPA 45 – Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using
Chemicals
(4) NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
(5) ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation
(b) Complete the calculations to confirm if the exhaust airstream is or is not
hazardous in accordance with the criteria listed in the Saudi Mechanical
Code 501-CR, Section 510.
(c) Wherever possible, fume hood exhaust systems shall be manifolded
systems to provide greater dilution of chemical fumes in the exhaust
airstream, especially in the event of a spill, and for simplicity of providing
exhaust fan redundancy.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 148
(1) One redundant exhaust fan should be provided with each installation
of laboratory exhaust fans.
(d) Fume hood exhaust can be combined with laboratory exhaust in the
manifolded system, but should not be combined with other building
exhaust systems such as cooking, toilet or locker room exhaust systems.
(e) Hoods which are high hazard or unique use, such as perchloric or other
acid digestive systems, radio-iodination hoods, etc., shall not be installed
in a manifolded system and must be separately exhausted.
(f) Where the use of hoods reduces significantly at night, consider providing
a lower capacity exhaust fan for night time operation, so the primary
exhaust fans can be de-energized to reduce energy consumption.
(g) For installations involving five or more fume hoods, the fume hood
exhaust system should be variable air volume type.
(1) Coordinate with the consultant specifying the fume hoods to assure
that restricted bypass hoods suitable for variable air volume operation
are specified.
(2) Where any single laboratory contains two or more hoods, consider
motion and proximity sensors to reduce the airflow through the hood
when no one is standing or moving near the hood.
(h) The design exhaust air volume for each fume hood is generally based on
operating at a maximum 45 CM height. Confirm this is appropriate for
the applications involved in the project.
3) Materials
(a) Duct materials between the fume hood and the exhaust mains shall be
constructed of welded Type 316 stainless steel, unless it can be
demonstrated that the vapors from the fume hoods are not corrosive.
(b) If the exhaust main exhaust ducts convey fume hood exhaust only, they
shall also be constructed of welded Type 316 stainless steel. If the main
exhaust ducts convey general exhaust as well as fume hood exhaust,
they may be constructed of galvanized steel in accordance with the
SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
(1) For systems conveying fume hood and general exhaust consider
constructing the risers Type 316 stainless steel, since they will be
completely enclosed in the building construction, surrounded by other
systems and nearly impossible to replace in the future should they
corrode.
4) Fans
(a) Fume hood exhaust fans should be constant volume to achieve constant
dispersion of the effluent.
(1) Provide a modulating dilution damper for each fan to dilute outdoor
air with the exhaust air dilution damper and maintain constant airflow
through each exhaust fan as the fume hood and lab general exhaust
airflow rates vary. The design pressure drop for the dilution damper
at full flow shall be equal to the pressure drop in the exhaust duct
system from the lab to the exhaust fan.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 149
(b) All fans for fume hood exhaust shall be AMCA Type B spark-resistant
construction.
(c) Many manufacturers produce high induction fans specifically designed
for laboratory applications. Experience has shown that the performance
of these fans with regard to dispersion varies with ambient wind velocity
and direction, as well as the density of the exhaust and ambient air.
When using these fans, the exhaust stack location, height and velocity
requirements from the codes and standards sited at the beginning of this
Section must still be followed. A wind tunnel or computational fluid
dynamic dispersion study is still recommended.
(d) Many manufacturers produce fan assemblies where multiple fans are
factory assembled on a single intake plenum. Experience has shown
that the manufacturers rarely account properly for system effect resulting
from less than ideal inlet conditions to the fans. This can result in the
actual exhaust capacity falling far short of the desire capacity. Address
the results of system effect in every fume hood exhaust system design.
Do not rely on the manufacturer of multiple fan assemblies to account for
system effect.
(e) Provide a low leakage isolation damper at the inlet of each fume hood
exhaust fan. Where multiple exhaust fans are manifolded together or
mounted on a single intake plenum, account for leakage through the
isolation damper of any normally inoperable of redundant fans in the
overall exhaust volume determination.
5) Controls
(a) All fume hoods, constant or variable volume) shall have an airflow
monitor confirming the exhaust airflow rate through the hood is
maintained at a velocity that provides a safe condition for anyone using
the hood. The monitor shall have an audible and visible alarm indication
of unsafe conditions, and shall transmit the alarm to the building
automation system.
(b) Variable air volume controls shall be designed specifically for laboratory
fume hood applications and shall provide the response time and
performance required by ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation.
(c) Variable volume fume hood controls shall include the following
components:
(1) Face velocity display
(2) Visible and audible alarms for high and low face velocity
(3) Local alarm reset
(4) Standby velocity setting (for unoccupied mode)
(5) Sash position sensor
(6) Hood exhaust air volume feedback
(7) Dry contact for alarming transmission to the building automation
system.
6) Refer to Standard Specifications for Centrifugal HVAC Fans and Fume Hoods.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 150
m. Lift Station Ventilation and Odor Control Systems

1) Methane gas is the primary byproduct of the biological degradation of waste
that occurs in lift stations.
2) Methane gas is highly flammable and poses a potential for severe explosion in
the presence of a spark.
3) Lift station ventilation systems shall be designed in strict accordance with NFPA
820 – Standard for Fire Protection in Waste Treatment and Collection Facilities.
4) Enclosed lift stations must be provided with Odor Removal Units capable of
providing continuous lift station ventilation at minimum rate of 12 air changes
per hour.
5) Fans for lift station ventilation shall be AMCA Type A Spark Resistant
Construction.
6) Low and high exhaust shall be drawn from within 300 mm of the lowest
maintenance access of the lift station space, and from within 300 mm of the
ceiling of the lift station enclosure
7) See Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. – Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design
n. HVAC for Data Centers
1) General
(a) The most defining HVAC characteristic of data and communications
equipment centers is the potential for exceptionally high sensible heat
loads. In addition, the equipment installed in these facilities typically:
(1) Serves mission-critical applications (i.e. 24/7/365 operation)
(2) Has special environmental requirements (temperature, humidity, and
cleanliness)
(3) Has the potential for disruptive overheating and equipment failure if
cooling service is interrupted
(b) Expect that most computer equipment will be replaced multiple times
with more current technology during the life of the facility. Typical
equipment product cycles are 1 to 5 years, whereas facilities and
infrastructure have life cycles of 10 to 25 years. Replacement equipment
has historically required more demanding power and cooling
requirements; therefore, expect the data center cooling load to increase
over time. Plan how additional cooling capacity will be provided.
(c) Data Center Classification and Design Criteria.
(1) Work with the RCJ to identify the environmental requirements for all
data centers. A consortium of server manufacturers has agreed on a
set of four standardized conditions (Classes 1 to 4), listed in Thermal
Guidelines for Data Processing Environments prepared by ASHRAE
Technical Committee 9.9 in 2011.
(i) Class 1 – A data center facility with tightly controlled
environmental parameters (dew point, temperature, and
relative humidity) and mission-critical operations; types of
products typically designed for these environments are
enterprise servers and storage products.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 151
(ii) Class 2 – A data center space or office or lab environment with

some control of environmental parameters (dew point,
temperature, and relative humidity); types of products typically
designed for this environment are small servers, storage
products, personal computers, and workstations.
(iii) Class 3 an office – A home, or transportable environment with
little control of environmental parameters (temperature only);
types of products typically designed for this environment are
personal computers, workstations, laptops, and printers.
(iv) Class 4 – A point of sale or light industrial or factory
environment with weather protection, sufficient winter heating
and ventilation; types of products typically designed for this
environment are point-of-sale equipment, industrial controllers,
or computers and handheld electronics such as PDAs.
(v) NEBS – A telecommunications central office with some control
of environmental parameters (dew point, temperature and
relative humidity); types of products typically designed for this
environment are switches, transport equipment, and routers.
Since Class 3 and 4 environments are not designed primarily
for data center equipment, they are not covered further in this
chapter.
2) Environmental Conditions
(a) Table 5.4.3.E lists recommended and allowable conditions for Class 1,
Class 2, and NEBS environments, as defined by the footnoted sources.
Note that dew-point temperature and relative humidity are also specified.
TABLE 5.4.3.E: CLASS 1, CLASS 2, AND SELECTED NEBS DESIGN CONDITIONS

Classes 1 and 2 NEBS
Recommended
Condition Allowable Level Level Allowable Level Recommended Level
Temperature control range 15 to 32 C (Class 1) 18 to 27 C 5 to 40 C 18 to 26.7 C

10 to 35°C (Class 2)
Maximum temperature rate of change 5 C/Hr (cooling) 5 C/Hr
Relative humidity control range 20 to 80%, Dew point 5.5 to 5 to 85% Max 55%
17 C max. dew point 15 C, 27.7 C max. dew
(Class1) RH less than point
21 C max. dew point 60%
(Class 2)
Filtration quality 65%, min. 30% Min. 85%

(MERV 11, min. MERV 8) (Min. MERV 13)
NOTE: The stated environmental conditions are measured at the inlet to the data and communications
equipment, and not average space or return air conditions.
(b) Outdoor Air Ventilation

Rev. 1 5.4 - 152
(1) Provide adequate ventilation to pressurize the data center to aid in

temperature and humidity control, dilute VOC’s from the data center
equipment, and provide acceptable indoor air quality conditions for
human inhabitants in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. Ventilation air is
typically cooled, dehumidified, filtered and delivered separately from
the data center HVAC system
(2) Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) using vented flooded lead-acid
batteries shall be exhausted at a minimum rate of 6 air changes per
hour or 0.15 m³/s, whichever is greater. UPS utilizing valve regulated
lead acid batteries (VRLA) or modular cartridge batteries do not
require special ventilation, other than the normal ventilation required
to meet the ventilation requirements for human occupants.
(3) Refer to Paragraph 5.4.3.B.2.d.6) for requirements relating to purging
clean agent fire suppression chemicals.
(c) Flexibility
(1) As mentioned earlier, technology is continually changing and data
center equipment in a given space is frequently changed and/or
rearranged during the life of a data center facility. In critical
applications, it shall be possible to modify the system without
shutdown. Modular in-rack cooling options provide the greatest
overall flexibility. They can utilize chilled water or variable flow
refrigerant for cooling.
(d) Redundancy
3) Provide N+1 redundancy for each item of equipment in a data center HVAC
system. HVAC Load Considerations
(a) Calculate cooling loads in data center facilities in the same manner as for
any other facility. Typical features of these facilities are a high internal
sensible heat load from the data center equipment itself and a
correspondingly high sensible heat ratio. However, other loads exist and
it is important that a composite load comprised of all sources is
calculated early in the design phase, rather than relying on a generic
overall “watts per square meter” estimate that neglects other potentially
important loads.
(b) In addition, if the initial deployment or first-day data center equipment
load is low because of low equipment occupancy, the effect of the other
loads (envelope, lighting, etc.) becomes proportionately more important
in terms of part-load operation.
(c) In some cases, power distribution units (PDUs) are located in the data
center equipment room as the final means of transforming voltage to a
usable rating and distributing power to the data center equipment. The
heat dissipation from the transformers in the PDUs shall be accounted
for by referencing the manufacturer’s equipment specifications.
(d) Heat gains through the building envelope shall be included.
(e) Lighting is normally a small part of the overall heat gain for a data center,
but needs to be included in the HVAC load calculation.
4) Reheat

Rev. 1 5.4 - 153
(a) Reheat is needed in data centers for humidity control when the supply air
must be overcooled to remove humidity. Electric resistance reheat
provides the best control and is the most economic method of reheating.
5) Humidification
(a) The data center envelope shall be carefully constructed of extremely low
permeability materials to avoid humidity from permeating into or out of
the data center. Work with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to ensure
envelope materials and construction details result in a “humidity tight”
facility.
(b) Humidification shall be provided by electric steam generators. Electric
steam generators shall be provided with disposable water canisters that
may be replaced when they become caked with precipitate from the
water being evaporated.
6) Energy Conservation
(a) Power usage effectiveness (PUE) is a metric for characterizing and
reporting overall data center infrastructure efficiency, and is defined by
the following formula:
Total data center energy consumption or power
PUE =
IT energy consumption or power
(b) When calculating PUE, IT energy consumption shall be measured
directly at the IT load. If necessary, at minimum, it could be measured at
the output of the UPS.
(c) The design goal for data center PUE shall be within a range of 1.3-2.0.
7) HVAC Systems, Components and Arrangements
(a) Consider the data center cooling load, the equipment density, the
mission critical nature of the equipment, and the size of the data center.
(1) Computer room air conditioning (CRAC) and computer room air
handling (CRAH) units are the most common data center cooling
units. However, they are not necessarily the most efficient, especially
at serving dense equipment loads
(2) Some larger data centers use central-station air handling units.
These may not work well for getting the conditioned air to densely
packed equipment, and it may be expensive to provide a high level of
redundancy. If multiple air handling units can be manifolded together,
only one additional AHU may be required to provide redundancy.
Another option for manifolded air handling units is to oversize the
units then operate them at reduced capacity when all units are
operational. Then if one units fails or is taken out of operation for
maintenance purposes, the capacities of the remaining units can be
ramped up to meet the load.
(b) Chilled-water distribution loops are frequently provided with taps and
valves for future local fan coil units that are designed especially for data
center applications. Careful design of the loop may provide for flow from
either direction in the loop if a section must be isolated to provide a new
tap.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 154
(c) Chilled-water pipe insulation with a vapor barrier is required to prevent

condensation, but not to prevent thermal loss in a cold plenum; therefore,
minimum insulation thickness shall be considered as insulated piping
may restrict underfloor air distribution.
(d) Controls and Monitoring
(1) Control systems shall be capable of reliable control of temperature,
relative humidity, and, where required, pressurization within tolerance
from set point. Specify the required control accuracy to maintain the
desired temperature and humidity tolerances.
(2) Monitoring shall include control system sensors as well as
independent “monitoring-only” sensors and shall include data center
equipment areas, critical infrastructure equipment rooms,
command/network operations centers, etc., to ensure critical
parameters are maintained.
(3) As a minimum, alarms shall be provided to signal when temperature
or humidity limits are exceeded. Properly maintained and accurate
differential pressure gages for air-handling equipment filters may help
prevent loss of system airflow capacity and maintain design
environmental conditions. All monitoring and alarm devices shall
provide local indications as well as interface to the central monitoring
system.
(e) Data center equipment is typically mounted in racks or cabinets arranged
in rows. In a typical configuration, the “front” of cabinets, racks, or
frames faces one aisle, and the rear, which includes cable connections,
faces another aisle. The cabinets or racks in a data center environment
are usually 2 M high. Each cabinet or rack may contain a single piece of
equipment, or it may contain any number of individual items of
equipment.
(f) Typically, supply air is drawn into the inlet of the equipment cabinet or
rack, picks up heat internal to the equipment, and is then discharged,
typically from a different side of the equipment. The air then travels back
to the HVAC cooling coil, where the heat is absorbed.
(g) Hot Aisle/Cold Aisle Configuration. Using alternating hot and cold aisles
promotes separation of the cool supply and warm return streams which
generally leads to lower equipment inlet temperatures and greater
energy efficiency.
(1) Data center facilities often use an underfloor plenum to supply cooling
air to the equipment. CRAC units push cold air into the plenum, from
which it is introduced into data and communications equipment rooms
via perforated floor tiles, tile cutouts, and other openings. The raised-
floor design offers flexibility in placing computer equipment above the
raised floor. Cool air can, in theory, be delivered to any location
simply by replacing a solid floor tile with a perforated tile.
(2) With a hot-aisle/cold aisle configuration, perforated tiles are placed in
the cold aisle. Cool air delivered by the perforated tiles is drawn into
the front of the racks. Warm air is exhausted from the back of the
racks into the hot aisle and is ultimately returned to the CRAC units.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 155
(3) The underfloor plenum is often used for cables, electrical conduits,
and pipes. These obstructions in the plenum may interfere with
airflow. When determining plenum depth, below-floor obstructions
shall be considered. It is recommended that the height of underfloor
plenums be at least 300 mm.
(4) When adequate airflow is not supplied through the perforated tiles,
internal fans in the equipment racks tend to draw air through the front
of the cabinet from the path of least resistance, which typically
includes the space to the sides of and above the racks. Because
most of this air originates in the hot aisle, its temperature is high.
Thus, cooling of the sides and upper portion of the equipment racks
could be seriously compromised.
(h) HVAC for Telecommunication Rooms
(1) The relative humidity in telecommunication rooms must be
maintained between 30%-55%. There must be at least one air
change per hour to maintain positive pressurization inside of the
room.
(i) HVAC for Hospitals and Clinics
(1) Reference to other sections of the GEM
(i) Exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.D.1.b. – Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design.
(ii) Stair pressurization system design is addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.B.11 – Stair Pressurization Systems
(iii) Fire and smoke control system design is addressed in
Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.h.-Fire and Smoke Management Systems
(2) General
(3) HVAC systems for hospitals and clinics shall be designed in
accordance with the following codes and standards:
(i) Saudi Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR
(ii) International Mechanical Code
(iii) AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care
Facilities
(iv) NFPA 92 – Standard for Smoke Control Systems
(v) NFPA 99 – Healthcare Facilities Code
(j) Refer to the ASHRAE Applications Handbook Health Care Facilities
Chapter for further information and guidance regarding laboratory HVAC
design.
(k) The cooling demand for hospitals will usually dictate a central chilled
water system.
(l) Where chillers with water cooled condenser are utilized, consider
collecting cooling coil condensate to be used for cooling tower make-up
water. The peak production of cooling coil condensate will normally
coincide with peak demand for cooling tower make-up water.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 156
8) HVAC Air Handling System

(a) Central air handling systems are preferred for hospitals. The central
systems consolidate most of the equipment requiring maintenance into
large mechanical rooms, and minimize the number of satellite equipment
requiring maintenance, as well as the complexity of that maintenance.
(b) Central air handling systems should be variable air volume systems that
meet the airflow requirements of the International Mechanical Code and
the AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities.
(c) Zone reheating for space temperature control shall be accomplished by
electric resistance heaters.
(d) The central air handling system should be comprised of several identical
air handling units. Units can be staged off as the supply air demand
diminishes during periods of low occupancy. Multiple air handling units
can be designed to operate at low velocities through coils and filters
during normal operation for energy savings, and then ramped up to
adjust for a unit that fails or is taken out of service for maintenance.
(e) In air handling units, locating the supply fan downstream from the cooling
coil but upstream from the final filters provides reheating of the cooled air
before it enters the final filters and typically eliminates the risk of
condensation in the final filters.
(f) Energy recovery will generally be cost effective for large heath care
facilities. Complete a life cycle cost analysis to determine the cost vs.
benefit of an energy recovery system. Where practical, consider
collecting condensate from the air handling unit cooling coils, and then
passing the condensate through an evaporative cooling unit in the
exhaust airstream upstream from the exhaust heat recovery coil. This
will lower the exhaust air temperature and improve the overall
performance of the heat recovery system.
(g) Packaged terminal equipment and fan coil units are acceptable for clinics
and small heath care facilities.
(h) Consider a dedicated outdoor air system for supplying the required
ventilation air. Packaged terminal equipment and fan coil units rarely
have adequate capacity to condition the ventilation air.
9) Air distribution System Design
(a) Hospitals have rather high supply, return and exhaust air volume
requirements. Careful design of the distribution ductwork can
significantly reduce the fan horsepower, and the resulting electrical
energy use.
(b) The velocity in the duct system should systematically step down from the
risers to the air outlets in the rooms. Maximum velocity in risers should
be 10 m/S. Maximum velocity in main ducts should be 7.5 m/S.
Maximum velocity in branch ducts to variable volume and constant
volume terminals should be 6 m/S. Maximum velocity in duct
downstream of the variable volume and constant volume terminals
should be 5 m/S. Maximum velocity in diffuser necks should be 2.5 m/S.
This systematic decreasing of velocity results in a phenomenon known

Rev. 1 5.4 - 157
as “static regain” which reduces the overall resistance to flow, and the
corresponding fan horsepower.
(c) Locate supply air diffusers and registers in patient rooms to avoid drafts
at the patient bed.
10) Room Environmental Control
(a) An individual room controller should be provided as part of the building
automation system for each room in a hospital.
(b) Individual temperature (and humidity control where required) should be
provided for occupied space.
(c) Some spaces in hospitals require pressure control with respect to
surrounding spaces. Examples are infectious isolation rooms, protective
isolation rooms, operating rooms, other invasive procedure rooms,
sterilization rooms and morgues. This is best accomplished by
maintaining a constant offset between the supply and return/exhaust
airflows for these spaces. The airflow can be measured by the airflow
sensors in the supply and exhaust air volume control terminals and the
offset can be controlled by the room controller.
(d) Differential pressure monitoring between a space and a corridor is useful
for indicating and alarming a condition where the airflow tracking has
failed. However, for pressure control, airflow tracking is much more
reliable than active pressure control.
o. HVAC for Laboratories
(a) Exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. –
(b) Exhaust systems for fume hoods are addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.D.1.k. – Fume Hood Exhaust Systems
2) General
(a) HVAC systems for laboratories shall be designed in accordance with the
following codes and standards:
(b) Saudi Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR
(c) International Mechanical Code
(d) NFPA 45 – Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using
Chemicals
(e) NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
(f) ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 – Laboratory Ventilation
(g) Refer to the ASHRAE Applications Handbook Laboratory Chapter for
further information and guidance regarding laboratory HVAC design.
(h) There are four fundamental concerns in the design of laboratory HVAC
systems:
(i) Safety is paramount.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 158
(j) Functionality – many processes and procedures in a lab are critical, and
the systems must function and provide the support needed.
(k) Flexibility – Over time the experiments in the labs will change. Some
changes will be significant. The lab HVAC system must be able to adapt
to those changes.
(l) Energy Efficiency – Laboratory buildings consume more energy than
most other building types. Careful attention must be paid in the design
phase to minimize energy consumption.
(m) An initiative cosponsored by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
and the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) known as Labs for the 21st
Century (Labs21) promotes the sharing of information related to reducing
energy and water consumption in laboratories. This initiative has been
continued by the International Institute for Sustainable Labs(I²SL).
Labs21 and I²SL distribute Best Practice Guides with information on the
design, construction, and operation of specific technologies that
contribute to energy efficiency and sustainability in laboratories. The
following Best Practice Guides should be considered in laboratory
design:
(n) Energy Recovery in Laboratory Facilities
(o) Chilled Beams
(p) Optimizing Laboratory Ventilation Rates
(q) Commissioning Ventilated Containment Systems in the Laboratory
(r) Laboratory Guidelines Using ASHRAE 90.1—2007 Appendix G
(s) Metrics and Benchmarks for Energy Efficiency in Laboratories
(t) Manifolding Laboratory Exhaust Systems
(u) Efficient Electric Lighting in Laboratories
(v) Minimizing Reheat Energy Use in Laboratories
(w) Right-Sizing Laboratory Equipment Loads
(x) Modeling Exhaust Dispersion for Specifying Acceptable Exhaust/Intake
Designs
(y) Water Efficiency Guide for Laboratories
(z) Low-Pressure-Drop HVAC Design for Laboratories
(aa) Daylighting in Laboratories
(bb) Onsite Power Systems for Laboratories
3) HVAC System Capacity and Right Sizing
(a) It is typical that the airflow requirements for some labs is determined by
the exhaust demand, usually based on the number of fume hoods. The
airflow requirements for other labs will be determined by the internal heat
gain from equipment. Analyze the lab program to determine the
determining factor for the airflow design and size the HVAC accordingly.
Apply typical diversity factors for lab equipment as found in ASHRAE
Applications Handbook Laboratories Chapter.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 159
(b) For labs with high concentrated sensible heating loads from equipment,
consider chilled water fan coil units to provide supplemental cooling and
meet peak cooling demands.
(c) Provide a secondary chilled water distribution system in lab buildings for
supplemental sensible cooling and for equipment cooling.
(d) The air handling system for a laboratory building should be one single
central system wherever possible. Issues of redundancy and flexibility
can be addressed more simply if the building is served by one system.
(e) Air from uncontaminated spaces such as offices, classrooms, conference
rooms usually comprises a relatively small percentage of the total air
requirement for a lab building, and 100% of this air can be returned to
the central air handling system.
(f) The central air handling system should be comprised of several identical
air handling units. Units can be staged off as the supply air demand
diminishes during periods of low occupancy. Multiple air handling units
can be designed to operate at low velocities through coils and filters
during normal operation for energy savings, and then ramped up to
adjust for a unit that fails or is taken out of service for maintenance.
(g) In air handling units, locating the supply fan upstream from the cooling
coil imposes the fan heat directly to the cooling heat transfer fluid. This
usually results in a higher acceptable leaving air temperature from the
cooling coil, which in turn results in increased efficiency in the
refrigeration equipment.
(h) Energy recovery will generally be cost effective for large laboratory
buildings. Complete a life cycle cost analysis to determine the cost vs.
benefit of an energy recovery system. Where practical, consider
collecting condensate from the air handling unit cooling coils, and then
passing the condensate through an evaporative cooling unit in the
exhaust airstream upstream from the exhaust heat recovery coil. This
will lower the exhaust air temperature and improve the overall
performance of the heat recovery system.
4) Air Distribution System Design
(a) Laboratory buildings tend to be “supply air intensive”. Careful design of
the distribution ductwork can significantly reduce the fan horsepower
requirement, and the resulting electrical energy use.
(b) The velocity in the duct system should systematically step down from the
risers to the air outlets in the rooms. Maximum velocity in risers should
be 10 m/S. Maximum velocity in main ducts should be 7.5 m/S.
Maximum velocity in branch ducts to variable volume and constant
volume terminals should be 6 m/S. Maximum velocity in duct
downstream of the variable volume and constant volume terminals
should be 5 m/S. Maximum velocity in diffuser necks should be 2.5 m/S.
This systematic decreasing of velocity results in a phenomenon known
as “static regain” which reduces the overall airflow resistance in the
ductwork, and reduces the required fan horsepower and resulting
electrical energy use.
(c) Consider using “extended plenum” sections in the supply and exhaust air
duct where the duct remains the same size for extended lengths. This

Rev. 1 5.4 - 160
will reduce the resistance, and will also contribute to the flexibility of the
system. Sometimes heavy demands are imposed in the middle or at the
ends of the distribution system. The extended plenum concept will
accommodate high demands in almost any portion of the distribution
system.
(d) Opinions vary regarding safe minimum airflow rates for laboratories
where chemicals are used. Unless active air monitoring is employed in
labs where chemicals are present, the airflow rates shall not be less than
6 air changes per hour when the lab is occupied, and not less than 4 air
changes per hour when the lab is unoccupied.
(e) Supply air registers and grilles must be located carefully so as not to
create air currents that will spread chemical fumes or cause fume
spillage from fume hoods.
5) Room Environmental Control
(a) An individual room controller should be provided as part of the building
automation system for each lab.
(b) Individual temperature (and humidity control where required) should be
provided for each lab room.
(c) In general, it is desirable to maintain most labs at a negative pressure
with respect to the adjacent corridor. This is best accomplished by
maintaining a constant offset between the supply and exhaust airflows to
each lab. The airflow can be measured by the airflow sensors in the
supply and exhaust air volume control terminals and the offset can be
controlled by the lab room controller.
(d) Differential pressure monitoring between a lab and a corridor is useful for
indicating and alarming a condition where the airflow tracking has failed.
However, for pressure control, airflow tracking is much more reliable than
active pressure control.
(e) Because of the high air change rates in laboratories, as well as the
characteristics of lab equipment to transfer heat to the space, location of
temperature and humidity sensors must be considered carefully.
6) Lab Hoods
(a) Lab hood types include fume hoods and canopy hoods.
(b) Fume hood types include full bypass constant volume hoods and
restricted bypass variable volume hoods. Coordinate with the consultant
selecting the fume hoods to assure the proper hood is selected for the
type of exhaust system being designed. Auxiliary air fume hoods should
not be used for laboratory applications.
(c) Ductless fume hoods are gaining popularity for applications with minimal
chemical use. Recognize the chemical absorbing filters in these hoods
will have to be changed while the hoods are in place. Provide proper
access to the hoods, and confirm the maintenance staff who will be
servicing the hoods has the staffing and the expertise needed to change
the filters. Ductless fume hoods must comply with all applicable codes.
Perform an assessment of the chemicals that will be used in a laboratory
vs. the effectiveness and life of the ductless fume hood filters prior to
specifying the ductless fume hood for any application.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 161
(d) Canopy hoods typically do not provide adequate capture for most
applications in laboratories; however, they are used for some
applications to remove sensible heat from ovens and similar equipment.
(e) For applications where perchloric acid is used in experimentation and
laboratory procedures, hoods specially design for perchloric acid should
be used. Perchloric acid is a strong oxidizing agent, and the hood and
connected ductwork must be constructed of materials that will resist
attack from the chemical. The ductwork must be constructed of welded
Type 316 stainless steel, and must have complete washdown capability.
(f) Air flow through the open hood face area shall be 500 L/S-M² for fume
hoods and canopy hoods adjacent to a wall. Air flow through the open
face area of island canopy hoods shall be 625 L/S-M².
(g) Biological safety cabinets are enclosures that employ an internal fan and
filtration system to protect the environment inside the cabinet, as well as
the environment in the lab. They are not fume hoods, and should not be
used as such. There are several types of biological safety cabinets.
(i) Class II Type A cabinets are unducted.
(ii) Class II Type B1 cabinets have an exhaust duct connection, but
the connection usually includes a bypass where some exhaust
air is drawn from the room. They therefore do not impart any
airflow resistance to the lab exhaust air system.
(iii) Class II Type B2 cabinets are hard connected to the exhaust
system and impart as must as 500 Pa of resistance to the
exhaust system. It is therefore advisable that a dedicated
exhaust system be provided for Class II Type B2 cabinets to
avoid operating the entire lab exhaust system at a much higher
static pressure.
p. Contamination Control
(a) Air filtration is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.j. – Air Filtration
(b) Building automation systems are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.b.13 –
Building Automation System
(c) Building air intake and discharge design considerations are addressed in
Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. – Building Air Intake and Exhaust Design
(d) Design of building automation systems is addressed in Subsection
5.4.3.D.1.b.1. – Design and Application of Controls
2) General
(a) HVAC systems can assist in contamination control in research and
healthcare facilities.
(b) The air must be free from contaminants, must be distributed in a space in
a uni-directional flow pattern to prevent contamination of occupants or
processed in the room, and must provide the desired pressure
relationship in the room with respect to surroundings.
3) Filtration

Rev. 1 5.4 - 162
(a) MERV 15 (95% efficient) filters are acceptable for most hospital
applications in providing contamination control. MERV 15 filters are
effective in removing bacteria from airstreams
(b) MERV 20 (HEPA) shall be utilized for protective isolation rooms for
patients with suppressed immune systems or burn patients.
(c) MERV 20 filters shall be used for contamination control in manufacturing
processes or research related to electronic or computer equipment.
4) Uni-Directional Airflow
(a) In the healthcare environment, contamination control shall be provided to
protect the patient or the healthcare worker.
(b) In either case, the desire is to deliver filtered and conditioned air from
high in the space, and to have the filtered air pass to the protected
occupant, to the contaminated occupant, and then to the room return or
exhaust air terminal.
(c) For most healthcare applications, the desired airflow rate to maintain
contamination control is 12 air changes per hour.
(d) In the product manufacturing and research environment, the intent of the
contamination control is to protect the product from dust and other
contaminants. The desire is to create a “shower” of clean air passing
from the ceiling, over the product, and then to low, floor-level return air
outlets.
(e) MERV 20 filters are typically located at the ceiling level.
(f) The airflow rate and ceiling filter coverage varies depending on the level
of cleanliness desired.
(g) Refer to the ASHRAE Application Handbook Chapter regarding Clean
Spaces
5) Room Pressurization
(a) Pressurizing a room to a pressure higher than the adjacent spaces will
help prevent contaminants from entering the space; whereas,
maintaining a contaminated room at pressure less than the adjacent
spaces will prevent contaminants from migrating from the space.
(b) It is generally accepted that a differential pressure equal to 12.5 Pa is
adequate for contamination control.
(c) Work with the Architect to ensure construction materials and methods to
contain and maintain the desired pressure relationship.
2. Building Operations
a. Energy Use and Management
(a) HVAC equipment room design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.1. –
Central Heating and Cooling
(b) Building Automation is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.13. – Building
Automation

Rev. 1 5.4 - 163
(c) Control system design and applications are addressed in Subsection

5.4.3.d.1.b.1 – Design and Applications of Controls
2) The following are guidelines for minimizing energy use.
(a) The energy consumption for most buildings in Jubail is dominated by
refrigeration systems and supply air fans.
(b) Optimize the selection of all components. Provide life cycle cost analysis
for options to optimize the energy consumption.
(c) Review the results of all energy modeling with the building operators so
they become familiar with assumptions made regarding how the building
is to be operated, in order to understand how to operate the building
efficiently.
(d) Specify adequate training for the building operators on the programming
and functions of the building automation system so they can monitor the
HVAC systems and energy use closely and make necessary
adjustments to the programming and functions to reduce energy use.
(e) The Sequences of Operation in the Standard Specifications include
special strategies to optimize the operation of systems and equipment.
These strategies go beyond the normal functions required to achieve
comfort in buildings. Review the building automation system shop
drawing submittals in detail to ensure the vendor providing the system
understands the sequences and is incorporating them properly in the
HVAC systems. Many building automation system vendors have
standard, pre-programmed basic sequences for controlling different
types of HVAC systems, and they will often substitute those standard
sequences for the custom sequences specified in the construction
documents.
(f) Clearly illustrate all of the required control devices on the control
drawings, the plans and the Standard Details. Do not rely on the control
sequences or standard notes to cover the requirement to provide control
devices.
(g) Illustrate and specify all metering required to monitor energy use.
Accurate monitoring will aid the building operators in determining how to
fine tune the building operation to minimize energy use.
(h) Consider providing a central “energy dashboard” to display the energy
use of the systems and equipment, as well as the performance of any
energy savings strategies such as photovoltaic or active solar systems,
heat recovery and variable frequency drives for pumps and fans.
b. Owning and Operating Costs
1) Owning and operating costs include maintenance costs and replacement costs
for equipment, in addition to the energy cost for operating the facility.
(a) The Standard Specifications provide a standard of quality for systems
and equipment that helps ensure cost effective reliability and longevity
for HVAC Systems and equipment. Do not compromise on the standard
of quality established in the Standard Specifications during the shop
drawing submittal review and approval process.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 164
(b) The Standard Details illustrate the features and accessories required for
systems and equipment so they may be properly maintained. Failure to
provide these features and accessories could limit the building operators’
ability to properly maintain systems, which could seriously increase
owning and operating cost over time. Failure to provide valves in proper
locations, or valves that provide tight shut-off could limit the ability to
provide maintenance, and could create the need for widespread system
shutdown to replace one item of equipment, which will significantly
increase maintenance costs. Failure to provide flow and pressure
readout ports in proper locations could limit the ability to balance
systems properly, which could lead to a long term increase in owning
and operating costs.
c. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
1) General
(a) Systems that control the environment in a building change with time and
use and must be rebalanced accordingly. The designer must consider
initial and supplementary testing and balancing requirements for
commissioning carefully when developing the design documents.
(b) Clearly illustrate all devices required for proper balancing on the
construction documents. These devices include, in addition to valves
and dampers, ports and flow meters required in the hydronic systems to
properly measure flow rates. It is almost impossible to install ports and
flow meters in a hydronic system after it is filled and operational. Surface
flow measurement devices (Doppler type) have limited accuracy.
(c) Create documents that clearly list the design air and water flow rates for
each item of equipment. These documents may be riser diagrams
illustrating each item of equipment and/or terminal, or spreadsheets that
list each item of equipment or terminal with an identifying number that
corresponds to the information on the HVAC plans.
(d) Where items of equipment and terminals operate over a range of flow,
list the maximum and minimum flow rates for each item.
(e) Where flow rates vary for occupied vs. unoccupied periods, list both the
occupied and unoccupied flow rates.
(f) Specify balancing tolerances. Minimum flow tolerances are + 10% for
individual terminals and branches in on-critical applications and + 5% for
main air ducts. For critical water systems where differential pressures
must be maintained, tolerances of + 5% are suggested. For critical air
systems, recommendations are the following:
(g) Positive zones:
(i) Supply air 0 to 10%
(ii) Exhaust and return air 0 to -10%
(h) Negative zones:
(i) Supply air 0 to -10%
(ii) Exhaust and return air 0 to +10%

Rev. 1 5.4 - 165
d. Operation and Maintenance Management

1) Documentation
(a) Information on the facilities, collateral equipment, and intended operation
procedures is essential for planning facilities maintenance actions,
efficiently performing facilities maintenance, documenting maintenance
histories, following up on maintenance performance, energy reporting,
and management reporting.
(b) Specify detailed Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for all
HVAC systems and equipment. Deliverables shall support the expected
maintenance strategy, skills of the maintenance and operation staff, and
anticipated resources to be committed to performing operations and
maintenance.
(c) The information shall be provided in hard copy and digital format.
(d) Information shall be compiled into the manual as soon as it becomes
available. This information may be used to support design and
construction activities, systems commissioning, training of operation and
maintenance staff, start-up and troubleshooting. It is critical that all
information required to operate the systems and maintain the equipment
be compiled prior to project turnover to the owner’s staff and be available
to the entire facilities department.
(e) A complete operation and maintenance documentation package is to
include following documents:
(f) The operation and maintenance document directory provides easy
access to the various sections within the document.
(g) Emergency information, which shall include emergency and staff and/or
agency notification procedures. In addition to being directly distributed to
emergency response personnel, including emergency information in the
operation and maintenance documents enables this critical information to
be kept in a single place and be immediately available during
emergencies.
(h) The operating information, which shall contain the following information:
(i) General Information:
• Building function
• Basis of design
• Building description
• Operating standards and logs
(ii) Technical information:
• System description
• Operating routines and procedures
• Seasonal start-up and shutdown
• Special procedures
• Basic troubleshooting

Rev. 1 5.4 - 166
(iii) The maintenance information:

• Equipment data sheets (specific to installed equipment)
• Operating and nameplate data
• Warranty information
• Manufacturer’s installation, operation, and maintenance
instructions
• Spare parts information
• Corrective, preventive, and predictive maintenance actions,
as applicable
• Schedule of actions, including frequency
• Action descriptions
(iv) Test reports with a record of observed performance during start-
up and commissioning.
(v) Copies of construction documents (“As-Built”).
2) Staffing and Training
(a) Training is a critical component in the overall operating and maintenance
plan. Assess the skills and experience and knowledge of the operating
and maintenance staff, and specify adequate training for them to become
completely familiar with the requirements for the building. Specify for the
training to be videotaped for review and refresh by the staff, as well as
for training future recruits. Training may be done in-house or by a
contracted third party who provides training as a business.
e. Supervisory Control Strategies and Optimization
1) General
(a) Confirm in the shop drawing review and commissioning that the building
automation system vendor has followed the sequences to the letter.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 167
GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE
A. Public/Government
buildings with cooling demands greater than 200 Tons, consider a chiller water system
2. Ventilation systems shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy
Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings.
3. All outdoor air intakes shall have sand trap louvers.
4. Temperature control zones for public/government buildings should not exceed 200 sq m
in floor area, except for large open assembly areas. Smaller control zones will generally
provide better comfort, but may not be economical. For large open assembly areas,
temperature control zones can be as large as 1000 sq m. Assembly areas with multiple
levels should have a separate temperature control zone for each level.
5. For large assembly areas, air should be supplied so that it is directed at the front of the
occupants’ bodies. If air cannot be adequately distributed from the front of the
occupants, it may be distributed from the side at a velocity not exceeding 0.15 m/S. In no
case should air be delivered from the occupants’ backs.
6. All supply air shall be ducted.
Mechanical Code.
8. Means must be provided for de-energizing HVAC when their space is unoccupied.
Preference would be that the HVAC can be de-energized on a zone-by-zone basis.
B. Commercial
buildings with cooling demands greater than 200 Tons, consider a chiller water system.
2. Ventilation systems shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 –
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and ASHRAE Standard 90.1 – Energy
Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings.
3. All outdoor air intakes shall have sand trap louvers
4. Temperature control zones for commercial buildings should not exceed 200 sq m in floor
area. Smaller control zones will generally provide better comfort, but may not be
economical.
5. All supply air shall be ducted.
Mechanical Code. A single ceiling return air plenum must not serve multiple tenants.
Return air for each tenant must be kept separate back to the return fan or air handling
unit.
7. Means must be provided for de-energizing each tenant’s HVAC when their space is
unoccupied.
C. Residential
1. Residential HVAC shall consist of DX cooling, with independent blower coil/air handling
units for each dwelling unit.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 168
2. Where heating is required, utilize a heat pump.

3. Any equipment requiring maintenance shall be located in an area that is accessible
without entering the dwelling unit. Violating the privacy of the dwelling unit occupants is
not acceptable. Equipment requiring maintenance includes Compressors, condensers,
blower coil/air handling units and filters.
4. All supply air shall be ducted to the spaces served. Supply air system shall include an
outdoor air intake with sand trap louver, minimum MERV 8 filters, DX cooling coil,
centrifugal cabinet fan, supply air ducts and return air ducts.
5. Return air shall be ducted and shall not be transferred room-to-room.
6. Each dwelling shall have a minimum of one temperature control zone.
7. Residential exhaust systems shall be designed in accordance with the Saudi Mechanical
Code 501-CR, Sections 504 & 505. Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust
discharge(s) do not affect the neighboring residences.
8. Residential bathrooms shall have an exhaust.
a. Control individual exhaust fans with a dedicated switch adjacent to the light switch.
D. Industrial
1. Reference to other sections of the GEM
a. Dust collection is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.B.10 – Dust Collection Systems
b. Air intake and exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. –
c. Fans are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.c. – Fans
d. Make-up air units are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.C.1.i. – Make-up Air Units
e. Sandstorm design criteria are addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.a. – Sandstorm
Provision design Criteria and Objectives
f. Air intake and exhaust discharge design is addressed in Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.b. –
2. General
a. Industrial HVAC typically involves ventilation for the removal of excess heat or
airborne contaminants that are generated in the workplace.
1) Contaminants are generally airborne particulate, chemical contaminants or
odors.
2) All ventilation for industrial operations shall be designed in strict accordance
with the following references:
(a) Industrial Ventilation – A Manual of Recommended Practice, published
by the American Council of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
(b) ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook Chapter regarding Ventilation of
the Industrial Environment
(c) ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook Chapter regarding Industrial
Local Exhaust
b. Occasionally industrial HVAC will involve temperature and/or humidity control to
support a production process.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 169
3. Ventilation System Design

a. Dilution ventilation is marginally effective for most applications, and is highly
inefficient.
b. Design ventilation systems that capture contaminants and/or heat as close to the
source of generation as possible, and exhaust the contaminants and/or heat directly
from the building.
1) Reference Industrial Ventilation – A Manual of Recommended Practice,
published by the American Council of Governmental Industrial Hygienists for
guideline information regarding capturing contaminants such as ducts and
vapors.
c. Design make-up air systems to adequately replace the exhausted air and maintain
the desired pressure relationship relative to adjacent spaces.
d. Where ventilation is provided for worker comfort, local area and spot
ventilation/cooling are preferred as methods of minimizing energy consumed for
ventilation
1) Reference the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook Chapter regarding
Ventilation of the Industrial Environment for guideline information on local area
and spot cooling.
e. Where hot industrial processes or equipment expose workers to intense radiant
heat, consider providing shielding to reduce the effect of the heat felt by workers in
the area. Ventilation has little effect on workers comfort when intense radiant heat
sources are present. The only effective method for reducing radiant heat gain is to
shield workers from the radiant source.
f. Ventilation system design for gas storage rooms shall be in accordance with Saudi
Fire Code 801-CR, Section 5004.3, Ventilation and NFPA 55, Section 6.16.
4. Industrial Air Conditioning
a. Occasionally an industrial process will require specific temperature and/or humidity
conditions to support the process and achieve the desired results.
b. Where special industrial air conditioning is required to support a production process,
work with the process engineers to determine the specific conditions required, as
well as the tolerances or limits associated with those conditions.
c. Frequently, special control sequences will be provided to maintain the conditions
within the limits or tolerances needed to support the industrial process.
d. Prior to developing the detailed HVAC design, develop Process and Instrumentation
Diagrams (P&ID), and get sign-off from the process engineers that the process is
understood and the design concept meets the requirements of the process.
E. Specialty Applications
1. General
a. Specialty applications include places of worship or assembly, educational facilities,
museums, libraries and clean spaces.
1) All of these spaces have specific requirements for temperature and humidity
control, as well as ventilation rates.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 170
2) Refer to the ASHRAE Application Handbook for guidelines regarding the design
of HVAC for each of these specialty applications. There is a dedicated chapter
in the Applications handbook for each of these facility types.
3) Refer to the other sections of this GEM regarding the design conditions and
guidelines relating to the equipment and systems design for the HVAC required
to serve these facilities.

Rev. 1 5.4 - 171
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.5
ELECTRICAL
1 2020 General update OJ MY SSF MRC OMQ


SECTION 5.5 ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5.1 ELECTRICAL................................................................................................................. 1
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 2
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 2
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 6
6. Environmental Conditions .............................................................................................. 9
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 10
8. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 11
10. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 14
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 14
1. References ................................................................................................................... 14
C. Power Systems ............................................................................................................. 14
1. Electrical Characteristics .............................................................................................. 14
2. Site Power Distribution ................................................................................................. 16
3. Equipment..................................................................................................................... 17
4. Equipment De-rating ..................................................................................................... 17
5. Power Calculations and Analyses ................................................................................ 19
D. Electrical Rooms ........................................................................................................... 22
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 22
2. Main Electrical Rooms .................................................................................................. 23
3. Distribution Electrical Rooms ........................................................................................ 24
E. Backup Power Systems ................................................................................................ 25
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 25
2. Sources ......................................................................................................................... 27
3. Emergency Systems ..................................................................................................... 30
4. Standby Systems .......................................................................................................... 30
F. Transfer Switches ......................................................................................................... 32
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 32
2. Types ............................................................................................................................ 32
3. Operation ...................................................................................................................... 32

Rev. 1 5.5 -i
4. Configuration ................................................................................................................ 33
5. Applications .................................................................................................................. 33
G. Electrical Distribution Equipment .................................................................................. 34
1. Medium Voltage Switchgear ......................................................................................... 34
2. Low Voltage Switchgear and Switchboards ................................................................. 34
3. Panel boards................................................................................................................. 37
4. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers ....................................................................................... 38
5. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 39
6. Motors ........................................................................................................................... 40
7. Motor Controllers .......................................................................................................... 40
8. Wiring Devices .............................................................................................................. 42
9. Power Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 42
H. Transformers ................................................................................................................ 43
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 43
2. Community Area Transformer ...................................................................................... 43
3. Industrial Area Transformer .......................................................................................... 44
4. Transformers for Existing Facilities with Discontinued Voltages .................................. 44
5. References ................................................................................................................... 45
I. Conduits, Ducts and Busways ...................................................................................... 45
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 45
2. Selection of Raceway Type .......................................................................................... 45
3. Raceway Types ............................................................................................................ 45
4. Surface Installations ..................................................................................................... 46
5. Underfloor Installations ................................................................................................. 47
6. Underground Installations ............................................................................................. 47
7. Cable Trays and Cable Trenches ................................................................................. 48
8. Wires and Cables ......................................................................................................... 48
9. Busways ....................................................................................................................... 49
10. Conduit Fill .................................................................................................................... 50
J. Grounding ..................................................................................................................... 50
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 50
2. System Grounding ........................................................................................................ 50
3. Equipment Grounding ................................................................................................... 50
4. Grounding System Calculations ................................................................................... 50
5. Grounding of Various System Installations .................................................................. 51

Rev. 1 5.5 -ii
6. Installation Requirements ............................................................................................. 51

7. Grounding to Eliminate Hazards from Static Electricity ................................................ 52
8. Corrosion Protection for Grounding Systems ............................................................... 52
9. Additional Grounding Protection by Residual Current Devices (RCD)......................... 54
10. Instrument and control system clean earth and grounding. ......................................... 54
11. References ................................................................................................................... 54
K. Lightning Protection Systems ....................................................................................... 55
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 55
2. Applications .................................................................................................................. 55
3. Principal Components for Lightning Protection System ............................................... 55
4. Minimum Lightning Protection Features ....................................................................... 56
L. Surge Protection Devices ............................................................................................. 56
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 56
2. Types of surge protection: ............................................................................................ 57
M. Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 58
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 58
2. Light Source.................................................................................................................. 59
3. Interior Lighting ............................................................................................................. 65
4. Exterior Lighting ............................................................................................................ 72
5. Lighting Calculations .................................................................................................... 78
N. Lighting Control Systems .............................................................................................. 79
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 79
2. Interior........................................................................................................................... 79
3. Exterior ......................................................................................................................... 83
4. Lighting Control Strategies ........................................................................................... 83
O. Electrical Equipment Remote Monitoring ..................................................................... 86
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 86
2. For Medium Voltage Switchgear .................................................................................. 86
3. For Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS). .......................................................................... 86
4. For Transformer ........................................................................................................... 87
5. For Diesel Generator and Generator Fuel Oil System. ................................................ 87
6. For MCC/MCP Starter Control Panel and for MCC/MCP VFD panels ........................ 87
7. For UPS ....................................................................................................................... 87
8. Communications ........................................................................................................... 87
5.5.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................... 88

Rev. 1 5.5 -iii
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 88
1. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 88
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 88
3. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 101
4. Codes .......................................................................................................................... 113
5. Standards and References .......................................................................................... 114
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................ 119
1. References .................................................................................................................. 119
C. System Design............................................................................................................. 119
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 119
D. Service Conditions ....................................................................................................... 119
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 119
E. Basic Conditions .......................................................................................................... 120
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 120
F. Communications Systems ........................................................................................... 120
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 120
2. Local Area Network ..................................................................................................... 121
3. Metropolitan Area Network .......................................................................................... 123
4. FTTH............................................................................................................................ 126
5. Data Centers................................................................................................................ 135
6. Wireless Local Area Network ...................................................................................... 141
7. Telephone and Intercom .............................................................................................. 149
8. Structured Cabling ....................................................................................................... 165
9. Distributed Television System ..................................................................................... 171
10. Master Clock System ................................................................................................... 179
11. Public Address and General Alarm ............................................................................. 180
12. Audio/Visual Systems .................................................................................................. 183
G. Safety and Security Systems....................................................................................... 189
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 189
2. Access Control System ............................................................................................... 190
3. Automatic Number Plate Recognition (ANPR) ............................................................ 192
4. Intrusion Detection Systems ........................................................................................ 195
5. Vehicle Barriers ........................................................................................................... 202
6. Video Surveillance Systems ........................................................................................ 203
7. Security Screening ...................................................................................................... 205

Rev. 1 5.5 -iv
H. Utilities ......................................................................................................................... 205

1. Outside Plant Infrastructure ......................................................................................... 205
2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ............................................ 211
3. Earthing and Bonding .................................................................................................. 211
5.5.3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS .................................................................... 214
A. General: ....................................................................................................................... 214
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 214
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 214
3. Exclusions.................................................................................................................... 215
4. References - Units of Measurement ............................................................................ 215
5. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 216
6. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 220
7. Codes And Standards ................................................................................................. 223
8. Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................ 225
B. Control System Architectures ...................................................................................... 228
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 228
2. Scope ........................................................................................................................... 228
3. Building Automation System (BAS) Architecture......................................................... 229
4. Process Control System (PCS) Architecture ............................................................... 230
5. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA ..................................................... 231
6. Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System ..................................................... 233
C. Control Strategies ........................................................................................................ 234
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 234
2. Principals of Automation .............................................................................................. 234
3. Advanced Control Systems ......................................................................................... 236
4. Equipment Operating Modes ....................................................................................... 236
5. Consoles, Workstations and Control Networks ........................................................... 237
6. Redundancy - Fault Tolerance .................................................................................... 239
7. Centralized Enterprise, MIS/ERP System ................................................................... 239
8. Segregation - Risk Levels - Safety Integrity levels ...................................................... 242
9. Spare and Expansion Capabilities .............................................................................. 244
D. Instrumentation - Basic Design Criteria ....................................................................... 245
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 245
2. Online Continuous Measurement or Analog Type Instrumentation ............................ 248
3. Online Discrete Type Instrumentation ......................................................................... 249

Rev. 1 5.5 -v
4. On-line Final Control Elements.................................................................................... 249

5. Custody Metering ........................................................................................................ 252
E. Instrumentation and Control System Cabinets ............................................................ 253
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 253
F. Electrical Systems for Instrumentation ........................................................................ 255
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 255
2. Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................... 255
3. Power Supply............................................................................................................... 256
4. Power Distribution within PCS Cabinets ..................................................................... 256
5. Power Supply and Distribution to PCS Consoles and Workstations ........................... 257
6. Utility Power ................................................................................................................. 257
7. Grounding .................................................................................................................... 257
G. Process Automation Network (PAN) ........................................................................... 258
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 258
2. Process Automation Network Design .......................................................................... 258
3. Physical and Logical Separation ................................................................................. 258
4. Engineering and Maintenance Network (E&MN) ......................................................... 258
5. Wireless Communications ........................................................................................... 258
6. HART ........................................................................................................................... 259
7. Profibus ........................................................................................................................ 260
8. BACNET ...................................................................................................................... 261
9. Control Network Cabling .............................................................................................. 261
H. Control System Access and Security .......................................................................... 261
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 261
2. Foundational Requirements: ....................................................................................... 262
3. Defense in Depth: ........................................................................................................ 262
4. Countermeasures: ....................................................................................................... 263
5. Security Zones: ............................................................................................................ 263
6. Conduits:...................................................................................................................... 264
7. Local and Remote Access ........................................................................................... 264
8. Data Protection and Retention .................................................................................... 264
I. System Integration ....................................................................................................... 265
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 265
2. DCS, PLC and SCADA (MTU, RTU) ........................................................................... 266
3. Historian....................................................................................................................... 266

Rev. 1 5.5 -vi
4. Instrumentation Asset Management Systems (IAMS)................................................. 266

5. Condition Monitoring Systems (CMS) ......................................................................... 267
6. Emergency Shutdown and Isolation Systems (ESD) .................................................. 267
J. Control System Software ............................................................................................. 271
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 271
2. Standards .................................................................................................................... 271
3. Licensing...................................................................................................................... 271
K. Control Buildings and/or Control Rooms ..................................................................... 272
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 272
2. Control Room requirements ........................................................................................ 272
3. Server (Rack) Room requirements .............................................................................. 273
4. Engineering Room requirements ................................................................................. 274
5. Electrical - Power, Wiring, Lighting, Grounding requirements ..................................... 274
6. UPS and Battery Room requirements ......................................................................... 275
7. Environmental requirements........................................................................................ 275
L. Fire Alarm and Gas Detection Systems and Fire Suppression Control System ......... 275
1. Fire Alarm System ....................................................................................................... 275
M. Documentation ............................................................................................................ 291
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 291
2. Required Instrumentation Documents ......................................................................... 291
5.5.4 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE ............................................................................ 298
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 298
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 298
2. Definitions and Abbreviations: ..................................................................................... 298
B. Public/Government ...................................................................................................... 298
1. Athletic Venues ............................................................................................................ 298
2. Aviation ........................................................................................................................ 300
3. Community Center ....................................................................................................... 303
4. Hospital ........................................................................................................................ 304
5. Libraries ....................................................................................................................... 307
6. Mosque ........................................................................................................................ 309
7. Museum ....................................................................................................................... 310
8. Ports/Docks ................................................................................................................. 313
9. Schools ........................................................................................................................ 314
C. Commercial.................................................................................................................. 317

Rev. 1 5.5 -vii
1. Hospitality .................................................................................................................... 317

2. Office ........................................................................................................................... 319
3. Retail/Restaurants ....................................................................................................... 320
4. Theaters ....................................................................................................................... 322
D. Residential ................................................................................................................... 324
1. Multi-Family Housing ................................................................................................... 324
2. Single-Family Housing ................................................................................................. 325
E. Industrial ...................................................................................................................... 326
1. General Industrial ........................................................................................................ 326
2. Chemical Processing ................................................................................................... 328
F. Specialty Applications .................................................................................................. 330
1. Military ......................................................................................................................... 330
2. Water Treatment and/or Power Plants (Desalination) ................................................. 332

Rev. 1 5.5 -viii
SUBSECTION 5.5.1 ELECTRICAL
5.5.1 ELECTRICAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. General
1) This Section provides the basis for design and installation of electrical systems
and services. The guidelines apply to the following systems within the sites and
premises of Residential, Commercial, Institutional and Light Industrial facilities:
(a) Primary and Secondary Power Distribution Systems:
(1) 34.5 kV and 13.8 kV for Jubail Industrial City
(2) 33 kV and 34.5 kV for Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
(b) Low Voltage Power Distribution
(c) Lighting Systems
(d) 115 kV, 230 KV and 380 kV refer to SEC Standards and Specifications
b. Health Safety and Welfare Considerations
1) All work undertaken in relation to these guidelines shall be completed in full
compliance with the respective health and safety requirements established by
the following:
(a) Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) Legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes
(2) Royal Commission’s Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM)
(3) Royal Commission’s Standard Specifications
(4) Royal Commission’s Standard Detail Drawings
(b) A/E and/or EPC Contractor
(1) Health and Safety Standards, and System as accepted by the Royal
Commission
2) In the absence of any or all of the above, best international industry practices,
with reference to health, safety and welfare, shall be employed and utilized
throughout.
c. Electrical systems designed using these Guidelines shall consider the following
features:
1) Safety of personnel, building and plant.
2) Design with consideration for energy efficiency and sustainability.
3) Compliance with standard voltage levels established for the development, as
detailed in this Guideline and the latest SEC Standards DPS-02 and SDMS-01.
4) A design arrangement that allows minimum interruption to the system during
maintenance that is carried out on a part of the system.
5) Allowances for future load growth and system expansion.

Rev. 1 5.5 -1
6) Economy, considering overall building and plant cost as well as electrical

system costs.
7) Adequate interrupting capacity for circuit interrupting devices.
8) Proper coordination of all elements of the system with regards to insulation
levels, protective relaying, fusing and mechanical strength.
9) Power factor correction to address concerns associated with the electrical
distribution network.
10) Consideration for minimizing the impacts harmonics associated with non-linear
loads.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to facility types defined in Subsection 5.5.4 Guidelines by
Building Type.
3. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
b. This Section contains definitions for acronyms, abbreviations, words, and terms as
they are used in this Chapter. For definitions not listed, the latest issue of the
following Documents shall apply:
1) Saudi Building Code
2) International Electro Technical Commission Glossary
3) IEC Electropedia, http://www.electropedia.org
4) Comprehensive Dictionary of Measurement and Control, International Society
for Measurement and Control
c. Definitions Specific to the Subsection:
1) “Ambient Temperature” Average temperature of air or another medium in the
vicinity of the luminaire. Ambient temperature is expressed in degrees Celsius.
2) “Ampacity” The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry continuously
under the conditions of use without exceeding its temperature rating.
3) “Backup Power System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for
automatic, delayed, or manual connection to the alternate power source and
that serves all of the loads identified as essential for the facility.
4) “Bonded (Bonding)” Connected to establish electrical continuity and
conductivity.
5) “Bonding Jumper” A reliable conductor to ensure the required electrical
conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.
6) “Bonding Jumper, Equipment” The connection between two or more portions
of the equipment grounding conductor at the service.
7) “Cabinet” An enclosure that is designed for either surface mounting of flush
mounting and is provided with a frame, mat or trim in which a swinging door or
doors are or can be hung.

Rev. 1 5.5 -2
8) “Circuit Breaker” A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-

automatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined
overcurrent without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating.
9) “CIE color group” a grouping system for the color rendering and color
appearance of light sources.
10) “Classified Areas” An area where the hazardous classification is defined by
three main criteria as follows: 1) The type of hazard (groups), 2) The auto-
ignition temperature of the hazardous material (temperature or “T” rating), and
3) The likelihood of the hazard being present in flammable concentrations
(zones).
11) “Color Rendering Index” Quantitative measure of the ability of a light source to
reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or
natural light source.
12) “Concealed” Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building.
Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may
become accessible by withdrawing them.
13) “Conduit” Part of a closed wiring system of general circular cross-section for
insulated conductors and/or cables in electrical or communication installations,
allowing them to be drawn in and/or replaced.
14) “Continuous Load” A load where the maximum current is expected to continue
for 3 hours or more.
15) “Coordination (Selective)” Localization of an overcurrent condition to restrict
outages to the circuit or equipment affected, accomplished by the choice of
overcurrent protection devices and their ratings or settings.
16) “Critical Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of feeders
and branch circuits supplying energy to task illumination, special power circuits,
and selected receptacles serving areas and functions related to patient care
and that are connected to alternate power sources by one or more transfer
switches during interruption of normal power source.
17) “DALI” a lighting control protocol that allows the use of digital addressing of
lighting components to function and to communicate using 2 way digital
communications specified by IEC62386.
18) “Demand or Diversity Factor” - The ratio of the maximum demand of a system,
or part of a system, to the total connected load of a system for the part of the
system under consideration.
19) “Device” A unit of an electrical system that carries or controls electric energy as
its principal function.
20) “Disconnecting Means” or “Isolator” A device, or group of devices, or other
means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their
source of supply.
21) “Distribution Board (DB)” A single panel or group of panel units designed for
assembly in the form of a single panel, including buses and automatic
overcurrent devices, and equipped with or without switches for the control of
light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box
placed in or against a wall, partition, or other support; and accessible only from
the front.

Rev. 1 5.5 -3
22) “Duct” A pipe provided to facilitate the installation of cables and provides
protection for the cables.
23) “Duct Bank” A multiple array of ducts.
24) “Emergency Systems” Electrical systems legally required to be installed and
that supply loads essential to safety and life.
25) “Enclosed” Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that prevents
persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
26) “Enclosure” The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding
an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized
parts or to protect the equipment from physical damage.
27) “Equipment” A general term, including material, fittings, devices, appliances,
luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like used as a part of, or in
connection with, an electrical installation.
28) “Equipment System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for delayed,
automatic, or manual connection to the alternate power source and that serves
primarily 3-phase power equipment.
29) “Feeder (Electrical)” All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the
source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and the
final branch-circuit overcurrent device.
30) “Hand hole” A small jointing chamber of the joint box category but restricted to
footway use only.
31) “Interface Point (I.P.)” A location established for demarcation of contractual
responsibilities.
32) “Interrupting rating” The highest current at rated voltage that a device is
intended to interrupt under standard test conditions.
33) “Isolator” Refer to “Disconnecting Means”.
34) “Joint (splice)” The connection of two or more lengths of wire or cable at a single
point.
35) “Joint Box” A jointing chamber the top of which consists of fully removable
covers.
36) “Labeled” Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol,
or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Royal
Commission and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic
inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, and by whose
labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or
performance in a specified manner.
37) “Life Safety Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of
feeders and branch circuits intended to provide adequate power needs to
ensure safety to building occupants and that are automatically connected to
alternate power sources during interruption of the normal power source.
38) “Luminaire” Apparatus which distributes, filters or transforms the light emitted
from one or more lamps and which includes all the parts necessary for fixing
and protecting the lamps and, where necessary, circuit auxiliaries together with
the means for connecting them to the electric supply. The words "luminaire"
and "lamp system" are often assumed to be synonymous. For the purposes of

Rev. 1 5.5 -4
this standard, the word "luminaire" is restricted to apparatus used for

distributing light in general lighting, while "lam p system" implies use of lamps
in other than general lighting applications.
39) Luminaire Efficacy: Quotient of the luminous flux emitted by the power
consumed by the Iuminaire. The efficacy is expressed in lm /W.
40) “Luminaire Lifetime” Length of time during which 70% of the measured initial
luminous flux value are provided, as a function of maximum operating
temperature range. The luminaire lifetime of the module is expressed in hours.
41) “Lumen Maintenance” Value of the luminous flux at a given time in the life of a
Iuminaire divided by the initial value of the luminous flux of the luminaire and
expressed as a percentage “x” of the initial luminous flux value. The lumen
maintenance of an Iuminaire is the effect of decrease of lumen output which is
sometimes referred to as depreciation or lumen loss factor.
42) “Manhole” A jointing chamber, accessed via a restricted opening in the top.
43) “Main Distribution Board” Board in the building which fulfills all the functions of
a main electrical distribution for the supply building area assigned to it and
where the voltage drop is measured for operating the safety services.
44) “Main Incomer” Refer to “Service”.
45) “Neutral Conductor” The conductor connected to the neutral point of a system
that is intended to carry current under normal conditions.
46) “Nonlinear Load” A load where the wave shape of the steady-state current does
not follow the wave shape of the applied voltage.
47) “Operating Temperature Range” Ambient temperature range within which the
luminaire with regard to the specification can be operated. The operating
temperature range is expressed in degrees Celsius.
48) “Overcurrent” Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the
ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload, short circuit, or ground
fault.
49) “Panel board” Refer to “Main Distribution Board”, “Sub Main Distribution Board”
and “Distribution Board”.
50) “Residual Current Device” A mechanical switching device or association of
devices intended to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual current
attains a given value under specified conditions.
51) “Ring Main Unit” A Ring Main Unit includes two load break switches for the
connection of the substation to the ring and a transformer protection unit.
52) “Separately Derived System” A premises wiring system whose power is derived
from a source of electric energy or equipment other than a service. Such
systems have no direct electrical connection, including a solidly connected
ground conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system.
53) “Service” The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the
serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. Also referred to as
“Supply Intake” or “Main Incomer”.
54) “Short Circuit Current Rating” The prospective symmetrical fault current at a
nominal voltage to which an apparatus or system is able to be connected
without sustaining damage exceeding defined acceptance criteria.

Rev. 1 5.5 -5
55) “Splice” See Joint.

56) “Standby Systems” Include alternate power systems for such applications
where interruption of normal power would cause discomfort to personnel or
damage to product.
57) “Sub Main Distribution Board” Any distribution board which is neither a Main
Distribution Board nor a Distribution Board
58) “Surround Ratio” The average illuminance just outside the edge of the
carriageway in proportion to the average illuminance just inside the edge of
carriageway. Acceptable surround ratio values allows drivers to see
pedestrians and other road users who may be about to cross the road.
59) “Switchboard” A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on which are
mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent and other protective
devices, buses, and usually instruments. Switchboards are generally
accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not intended to be
installed in cabinets.
60) “Task lighting” is lighting directed to a specific surface or area to provide
illumination for visual and/or manual tasks.
61) “TN-C System” A system in which neutral and protective functions are
combined in a single conductor throughout the system.
62) “TN-S System” A system having separate neutral and protective conductors
throughout the system.
63) “Vacuum Interrupter Switch” A current interrupting switch for power distribution
systems comprising an outer case and a plurality of vacuum interrupter bottle
switches positioned in the case.
64) “Voltage (of a circuit)” The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned.
65) “Voltage, Nominal” A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the
purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (such as 400/230 volts).
The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within
a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2 Definitions and
Abbreviations.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection :
1) A: Amperes
2) AC: Alternating Current
3) ACB: Air Circuit Breakers
5) AFF: Above Finished Floor
6) AFFL: Above Finished Floor Level
7) AGL: Above Ground Level

Rev. 1 5.5 -6
9) ATF: Active Tracking Filters

10) ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch
11) AVG: Average
12) BAS: Building Automation System
13) BIL: Basic Insulation Level
14) BITS: Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
15) BMS: Building Management System
16) CB: Circuit Breaker
17) CCT: Correlated Color Temperature
18) CAD: Computer Aided Design
19) CEN European Committee for Standardization (Lighting control
protocol)
20) CIE: Commission Internationale De L’eclairage (International
Commission on Illumination)
21) CR: Critical
22) CRI: Color Rendering Index
23) CT: Current Transformer
24) DALI Digital Application Lighting Interface
25) DB: Distribution Board
26) DP: Distribution Panel
27) DPS Distribution Planning Standard
28) ECG Electronic Control Gear (Lighting)
29) EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing
30) EPC: Engineering Procurement and Construction
31) EPR: Ethylene Propylene Rubber
32) FLA: Full Load Amps
33) FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit
34) FNC: Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit
36) HID: High Intensity Discharge
37) HVAC: Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
38) HZ: Hertz
39) IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
41) IFC: Issued for Construction

Rev. 1 5.5 -7
43) KA: Kilo-amperes

44) KW: Kilo-watts
45) KV: Kilo-volts
46) KVA: Kilo-volt-amperes
47) LED: Light Emitting Diode
48) LFMC: Liquid tight Flexible Metallic Conduit
49) LMS: Lighting Management System
50) LS: Life Safety
51) LV: Low Voltage
52) MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker
53) MCCB: Molded Case Circuit Breaker
54) MDB: Main Distribution Board
55) MIN: Minimum
56) MIS: Metering Installation Standard
57) MIS1: Metering and Interface Standards
58) MTS: Manual Transfer Switch
59) MV: Medium Voltage
60) NA: Not Applicable
61) NEC: National Electrical Code
63) OS: Optional Standby
65) RCD: Residual Current Device
66) RCJ: Royal Commission for Jubail
67) RMU: Ring Main Unit
68) RMS: Root Mean Squared
69) RNC: Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
70) RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit
71) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or Saudi Standards,
Metrology and Quality Organization
73) SDS: Saudi Distribution Standards
74) SDCS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Construction Standard
75) SDMS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
76) SDPS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Planning Standard

Rev. 1 5.5 -8

78) SEC-EOA: Saudi Electricity Company - Eastern Operating Area
79) SMDB: Sub Main Distribution Board
80) SMSS: Saudi Electricity Company Material Standard Specification
81) SPD: Surge Protection Device
82) TCDD: Typical Construction Detail Drawing
83) UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply
84) V: Volts
85) VIS: Vacuum Interrupter Switch
86) XLPE: Cross-linked Polyethylene
a. Equipment and Material Selection
1) Equipment and materials manufactured in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia which
meet the GPCS and Standards shall be used.
2) All equipment and materials shall be selected in consideration of the following:
(a) Performance
(b) Ability to withstand the environmental conditions
(c) Availability and ease of shipment
(d) Ease of installation
(e) Maintenance characteristics
3) All equipment and materials shall be the standard products of approved
manufacturers, regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and
materials and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design.
4) Specifications shall clearly state all requirements to meet environmental
conditions and special provisions for equipment installed outdoors. Refer to
Subsection 5.2.1.H Corrosion Protection for additional information.
6. Environmental Conditions
a. All parts of an Electrical Installation must be suitably designed, constructed and
maintained so as to operate safely and carry out their designated function in the
expected operating environment in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
b. Equipment Enclosures
1) All equipment enclosures shall meet the following Ingress Protection rating as
defined by IEC 60529. The object of these standards is to give:
(a) Definitions for degrees of protection provided by enclosures of electrical
equipment as regards:
(1) Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts inside the
enclosure;
(2) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of
solid foreign objects;

Rev. 1 5.5 -9
(3) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against harmful

effects due to the ingress of water.
(b) Measures to protect both the enclosure and the equipment inside the
enclosure against external influences or conditions such as:
(1) Mechanical impacts
(2) Corrosion
(3) Corrosive solvents (for example, cutting liquids)
(4) Fungus
(5) Vermin
(6) Solar radiation
(7) Icing
(8) Moisture (for example, produced by condensation)
(9) Explosive atmospheres
(10) And the protection against contact with hazardous moving parts
external to the enclosure
2) The following IP Ratings shall apply as a minimum requirement for the following
equipment.
(a) Low Voltage Switchgear (Indoor) - IP52
(b) Sub Main Distribution Board (Indoor) - IP52
(c) Sub Main Distribution Board (Outdoor) - IP65
(d) Distribution Board (Indoor) - IP52
(e) Distribution Board (Outdoor) - IP65
(1) For SEC related equipment, follow SEC Standards and Specifications
for IP ratings.
3) All enclosures located outside which are not sheltered or made from stainless
steel shall have a white finish to lower the internal temperature.
4) All enclosures with a lens or transparent display cover subject to direct sunlight
shall be glass or as a minimum UV resistant.
7. Codes
a. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Performance Standards for a list of applicable Codes.
b. In addition to the aforementioned - All electrical equipment and material and its
installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code 401 Electrical
2) Occupations Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
3) Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code 201 Architectural Requirements
5) Saudi Building Code 701 Sanitary Requirements
6) Saudi Arabian Distribution Code

Rev. 1 5.5 -10
7) Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection Requirements

8) Civil Defense Department (CDD)
8. Standards
a. All work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations.
b. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used wherever
applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate the priority
for application with regards to design of the electrical systems. In case of conflict,
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose equipment conforming to one group of
Codes and Standards.
1) CIE International Commission on Illumination
2) EN Euro-norms published by CEN
3) EN 13201 Road lighting
4) EN 12464 Workplace Lighting Outdoor Spaces
5) EN 12193 Light and Lighting Sports Lighting
6) IEC International Electro-Technical Commission
7) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
10) SDCS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Construction Standards
11) SDMS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
12) SDPS Saudi Electrical Company Distribution Planning Standard
13) SDS Saudi Electric Company Distribution Standard
c. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Section include the following:
1) BS 7430 Code of practice for protective earthing of electrical installations
2) CIE 115 Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic.
3) IEC 60076 Power transformers
4) IEC 60079 Explosive atmospheres
5) IEC 60227 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 V
6) IEC60228 Conductors of insulated cables
7) IEC 60332 Tests on electric and optical fiber cables under fire conditions
8) IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installation - Electrical installations of
buildings (including all sub-parts)
9) IEC 60427 High-voltage alternating current circuit-breakers
10) IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
11) IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)

Rev. 1 5.5 -11
12) IEC 60644 Specification for high-voltage fuse-links for motor circuit
applications
13) IEC 60715 Dimensions of low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
Standardized mounting on rails for mechanical support of
electrical devices in switchgear and control gear installations.
14) IEC 60724 Short-circuit temperature limits of electric cables with rated
voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3.6 kV)
15) IEC 60754 Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from cables
16) IEC 60787 Application guide for the selection of fuse-links of high-voltage
fuses for transformer circuit application
17) IEC 60898 Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for household and
similar installations.
18) IEC 60981 Extra heavy duty rigid steel conduits
19) IEC 61000-3-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - part 3-3
20) IEC 61034 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined
conditions
21) IEC 61340 Electrostatics
22) IEC 61386 Conduit systems for electrical installations
23) IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
24) IEC 61537 Cable management - Cable tray systems and cable ladder
systems
25) IEC 61643 Low-voltage surge protective devices
26) IEC 62031 LED Modules
27) IEC 62305 Lightning Protection
28) IEC 62384 Performance Requirements for Electrical Control Gear for LED
Modules
29) IEC 62471 Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamps Systems
30) IEC62504 General Lighting - LEDs and LED Modules - Terms and
Definitions
31) IEC 62560 Self-ballast LED Lamps (>50V)
32) IEC 62717 LED Modules Performance
33) IEC 62722-2-1 LED Luminaires Performance
34) IEEE STD 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
35) IEEE STD 142 Recommended practice for grounding of industrial and
commercial power systems
36) IEEE STD 1453 Recommended Practice for Measurements and Limit of
Voltage Fluctuations and Associated Light Fluctuations and
Associated Light Flicker on AC Power Systems
37) IESNA Lighting Handbook

Rev. 1 5.5 -12
38) IESNA LEM-3 Design Considerations for Effective Building Lighting Energy
Utilization
39) IESNA LM-5 Guide for Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports
Lighting Installation
40) IESNA RP-1 Practice for Office Lighting
41) IESNA RP-7 Practice for Industrial Lighting
42) IESNA RP-16 Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering
43) IESNA RP-24 Practice for Lighting Offices Containing Computer Visual
Display Terminals
44) IESNA RR-96 Lighting Ready Reference / Energy Management
45) IES/IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Measurement of Solid-State Lighting Products
46) IES/IESNA LM-80-08 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance
of LED Light Sources
47) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) (Applicable only if guidance is not
available in IEC)
48) NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
49) NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
50) NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
51) NFPA 111 Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and
Standby Power Systems
52) AASHTO LTS-2 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals
53) AASHTO GTB-77 Guide for Selecting, Locating, and Designing Traffic
Barriers
54) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
55) SASO 55 PVC-insulated cables with circular copper conductors
56) SEC SDCS-02 Distribution Construction Standard - Construction Standard
for Underground Distribution Network
57) SEC DPS-01 Distribution Planning Standards - Estimation of Customer
Load Guideline
58) SEC DPS-02 Distribution Planning Standards - Design Guideline of
Underground Low Voltage Network to Supply Customers
59) SEC DPS-09 Distribution Planning Standards - General Guidelines for
Design of Electrical Distribution Networks of Private Plot
Plans
60) SEC SDMS Distribution Material Specification
61) SEC SDS-5 Metering Installation Standard
9. Related Sections
a. Refer to Section 3.4 Sustainability.

Rev. 1 5.5 -13
b. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.E.4 Lighting.

c. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.F Site Lighting
d. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting.
e. Refer to Subsection 5.7.6 Electrical for information regarding service utilities.
f. Refer to Section 5.4 Mechanical.
g. Refer to Subsection 5.2.6 Corrosion Protection.
10. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications. Refer
to Section 1.1 Introduction/Background.
B. Commissioning
1. References
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning
requirements.
C. Power Systems
1. Electrical Characteristics
a. General
1) The frequency of all alternating current power systems shall be 60 Hz.
2) Phase rotation shall be in accordance with latest SEC Standard DPS.
3) All systems shall be grounded. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.J Grounding.
b. System Voltage Level and application
1) Nominal voltages, standard for all new projects shall be in accordance with the
latest SEC Standard DPS-02 and as indicated in Table 5.5.1.A Standard
Voltages and Applications.
TABLE 5.5.1.A: STANDARD VOLTAGES AND APPLICATIONS
Nominal System
Application
Voltage (V)
All facility types, - this voltage is being discontinued and is only

120 Note 1, 2
to be used for specific applications as approved by the RCJ.

240 Note 1, 2

220/127 Note 1, 2

380/220 Note 1, 2

Rev. 1 5.5 -14
Nominal System
Application
Voltage (V)
Residential, - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors, receptacles and

miscellaneous.
Commercial - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors, receptacles

and miscellaneous.
400/230 Institutional - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors, receptacles and

miscellaneous.
Healthcare Facilities - Lighting, Air Conditioning, motors,

receptacles and miscellaneous.
Industrial - Lighting, Air conditioning, and motors.
All facility types, this voltage is being discontinued and is only to

480/277 Note 1, 2
be used for specific applications as approved by the RCJ.
Industrial and Large Commercial applications. Large motors

4160
over 150 kW and other loads.
Main Distribution in Community, Institutional, and Light

13800
Industrial Areas.
Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Ras Al-Khair Industrial

33000
City.
34500 Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Jubail Industrial City.
115000 Sub Transmission Network in Community and Industrial Areas
230000 Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary Industries.
380000 Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary Industries.
Notes:
1. Discontinued voltage may be allowed only if all following conditions are met:
A. Electrical service with the discontinued voltage is already existing.
B. Requested service is for a new facility which is located in an area that is
served by a discontinued voltage.
C. Newly added equipment to be compatible with existing and current in county
voltage (400/230V).
2. Discontinued voltage will be dealt with in the following two phases:
A. Preliminary Stage Voltage change: The change of system voltage, to
customers in existing area, shall take place by 9/20/1441H. The change

Rev. 1 5.5 -15
Nominal System
Application
Voltage (V)
requires that all added (new) equipment to be compatible with both existing
and current in county voltage (400/230V).
B. Final Stage Voltage change: Thefinal stage of system voltage change, to
customers in existing area, shall take place between 9/20/1441H and
9/20/1456H.The change requires upgrading all electrical system to the
current in county voltage (400/230V).
c. Voltage Identification
1) All voltage levels shall be identified in accordance with the values provided in
the latest SEC Standard DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01.
d. Voltage Range
1) Minimum and maximum permitted service voltage ranges are identified in the
latest SEC Standards DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01. The designer shall ensure
that the distribution system design shall provide proper utilization voltage at the
consumer appliances and equipment.
e. Voltage Drop
1) The electrical system shall be designed to account for voltage drop for the
entire electrical distribution system. The electrical components including
feeders and branch circuits shall be sized and selected to limit the total voltage
drop from source to loads as follows:
(a) For network voltage drop design shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the latest SEC Distribution Planning Standard DPS-02.
(b) For Consumers (customers) installations voltage drop design shall be in
accordance with SBC 401, section 52-5.
f. Power Factor
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the utilization power factor for
the facility and determine whether power factor correction is required to
maintain operation within the required power factor in accordance with latest
SEC DPS standard.
g. Fault Levels
1) Fault levels for facilities with all voltage ratings including400/230 V, 4.16 kV,
13.8 kV, 33 kV and 34.5 kV systems shall utilize the maximum allowable
symmetrical short circuit values from the latest SEC as the available fault level
to the facility.
2) Fault levels for facilities with discontinued voltage ratings including 240 V, 120
V, 220Y/127 V, and 380Y/220 V (where used with specific approval from the
RCJ) may not be identified in the latest SEC Standards. For these systems the
designer shall select the equipment to limit the fault current to a reasonable
value and ensure that interrupting devices have the required ratings for the
available short circuit.
2. Site Power Distribution

Rev. 1 5.5 -16
a. Site development power distribution at 380 kV, 230 kV, 115 kV, 34.5 kV, 33 kV and
13.8 kV are developed by the Royal Commission in accordance with the latest SEC
Standards including but not limited to the following SDCS-02, 01-SDMS-01, DPS-01,
DPS-02, and DPS-09. The system improvements are completed and turned over to
the SEC for operation and maintenance.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.7.6. Electrical for a description of the electric service utility for
the various types of facilities.
3. Equipment
a. Uniformity and Standardization
1) Uniformity in the design of electrical system components is important to
minimize the number of spare parts required to be stocked for maintenance and
repairs.
2) The design for the electrical system shall be standardized to reduce the number
of different types of transformers, switchgear, panel boards and cable sizes
used.
b. Insulation Levels
1) The BIL ratings for equipment shall be specified to be in accordance with the
latest SEC Standard 01-SDMS-01
4. Equipment De-rating
a. General
1) The high temperatures prevalent in Saudi Arabia must be considered when
selecting the appropriate capacities of electrical cables and equipment. When
ambient temperatures exceed a certain threshold, the current carrying capacity
shall be de-rated to compensate for the environmental conditions. The standard
service conditions for electrical system design are identified in latest SEC
Standards DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01.
2) De-rating of electrical system components shall be determined in accordance
with latest SEC Standard DPS-02.
3) The manufacturers of all specified electrical system components and
equipment shall be consulted to ensure that the proper de-rating factors are
applied to the electrical equipment.
b. De-rating of Cables
1) Temperature Correction Factor
(a) The rate of heat dissipation from cable to surrounding depends upon the
temperature difference between them. If the temperature of surrounding
is high, then the temperature difference between cable and surrounding
will be less resulting in less heat dissipation from cable to surroundings.
(b) The cable ampacities are specified at certain ambient temperature. It is
required to correct the cable ampacities by applying temperature
correction factor depending upon surrounding ambient temperature.
(c) Ampacity of the cable passing through different temperature zones shall
be corrected by applying appropriate temperature correction factor for
highest zone temperature through which the cable is passing.
(d) SBC 401 Tables A.52-14 to A.52-16 shall be used as reference.

Rev. 1 5.5 -17
(e) The capacity of the MV cables can be improved by use of special sand
with better thermal resistivity.
2) Group De-rating Factor
(a) Where a number of circuits are installed in close proximity to one
another, consideration must be given to the mutual heating effect.
(1) Cables installed on the outside of the group will be able to dissipate
heat outwards, but will be restricted in dissipation towards other warm
cables.
(2) Cables installed between others near the center of the group may be
challenged to dissipate heat at all and will rise further in temperature.
(b) The cables in the group shall be de-rated by applying appropriate group
de-rating factor.
(c) Selection of cable de-rating factors shall consider the following:
(1) Method of installation of the cables: i.e. whether the cable is laid in
trench, duct bank or surface mounted.
(2) Group and loading of cables: may contain cables carrying load
current and standby cables not carrying current. Under such
circumstances consider the number and configuration of load
carrying cables only.
(d) SBC 401 Tables A.52-2 to A.52-17 shall be used as reference.
3) Cable De-rating for SEC feeders:
(a) LV cables shall be de-rated in accordance with SEC Standard DPS-02
Rev. 02.
(b) MV cables up to38kV shall be de-rated in accordance with SEC
Standard DPS Rev. 01.
4) Calculations
(a) Cable capacity calculations for services and feeders shall be in
accordance with latest SEC Standard DPS-02.
c. De-rating of Transformers
1) Transformers shall be de-rated for the environmental conditions where they are
installed.
2) Where a transformer serves non-linear, high-harmonic loads, the transformer
shall be de-rated to account for excessive heat associated with the increase in
harmonic currents.
(a) Loads with these non-linear, harmonic-rich currents include electronic
lighting ballasts, computers, adjustable frequency drives, and other
switch mode power supplies.
(b) These types of loads are common for commercial and small industrial
facilities and the design of the electrical systems for these facilities shall
consider the adverse effects on the electrical transformers.
3) Operating limits of transformers shall be de-rated in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 60076.

Rev. 1 5.5 -18
d. De-rating of Distribution Equipment - Switchgear and Switchboards

1) Switchgear and switchboards shall be de-rated for the environmental
conditions where they are installed.
2) Where distribution equipment serves non-linear, high-harmonic loads, the
equipment shall be de-rated to account for excessive heat associated with the
increase in harmonic currents.
(a) Loads with these non-linear, harmonic-rich currents include electronic
lighting ballasts, computers, adjustable frequency drives, and other
switch mode power supplies.
(b) These types of loads are common for commercial and small industrial
facilities and the design of the electrical systems for these facilities shall
consider the adverse effects on the electrical transformers.
e. Equipment Labeling Requirements
1) Equipment nameplates shall be provided to indicate the capacity rating of the
equipment for the ambient temperature to which the equipment is designed.
5. Power Calculations and Analyses
a. The responsible A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare calculations as required to
support the selection and sizing of the electrical equipment and components for
each facility. Power calculations shall justify the size of cables, raceways,
equipment bus, transformers, overcurrent protective devices, generator(s), etc.
1) Calculations shall be prepared in accordance with the latest SEC and IEC
Standards.
2) Calculations shall be prepared for all new construction and renovation projects.
3) Submit all calculations to the Royal Commission for approval.
4) Submit calculations required by the utility company, SEC, to obtain the
necessary approvals for service and equipment sizing.
b. AE shall coordinate with Urban Planning Department (UPD), RC Engineering
Department, Private Project Department and SEC for load estimation activity of
large piece of lands. Application of correct factors such as Built up Area, Demand
Factor, Load Density etc. shall be applied while determining required estimated
power.
c. Voltage Drop Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which confirm compliance with the voltage drop limitations
identified in the latest SBC 401 52-5, SEC Standards DPS-02 and DPS-09.
d. Power Factor Assessment and Calculations
1) Prepare a power factor assessment summary which identifies the loads served
and anticipated power factor for the facility. The results of this assessment
shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to provide a recommendation
on whether power factor correction shall be provided for the facility. The
assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to obtain confirmation
of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) For facilities where power factor correction is anticipated to be below 0.9
lagging, The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit calculations

Rev. 1 5.5 -19
which identify the magnitude and approach for this equipment. Refer to SBC
401, Chapter 801.
e. Fault Level Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which identify the available fault levels throughout the
electrical system for a facility. The results of the calculations shall be used to
identify the required equipment ratings on the drawings and equipment
specifications.
2) The requirement for provision of an independent study is recommended to be
provided for each facility to ensure compliance with the original design, identify
the required ratings for the provided equipment, and provide a level of quality
assurance for the electrical installation. Include the requirement for this
independent study in the project specifications.
f. Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
1) An overcurrent protective device coordination study shall be prepared to
demonstrate the proposed system performance for the specified overcurrent
protective devices. This study shall be utilized for comparison of the provided
electrical equipment to ensure that the intent of the original design is closely
replicated by the manufacturer of the provided equipment.
2) The requirement for provision of an independent study is recommended to be
provided for each facility to ensure compliance with the original design,
demonstrate appropriate coordination of the provided equipment, and provide
a level of quality assurance for the electrical installation. Include the
requirement for this independent study in the project specifications.
g. Harmonic Distortion Calculations
1) Prepare a harmonics assessment summary which identifies the potential
source and extent of non-linear, high harmonics loads for each facility. The
results of this assessment shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to
provide a recommendation on whether further harmonic calculations are
required. The assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to
obtain confirmation of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) For facilities that are determined to have non-linear, high harmonic loads which
exceed 15%, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit
calculations for reduction in cable capacities in accordance with the latest SBC
401, Annex D.52.
3) For facilities that are determined to have non-linear, high harmonic loads which
exceed 33%, prepare and submit calculations which identify the anticipated
voltage and current total harmonic distortion (THD) at the various electrical
equipment throughout the facility. The results of these calculations shall be
utilized by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to develop a strategy for application
of active and/or passive components to mitigate harmonic distortion.
h. Load Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which identify the connected and demand electrical loads
for each facility. The calculations shall identify the electrical loads by type and
size and shall identify all diversity factors applied in accordance with the latest
SEC Standard DPS-01.

Rev. 1 5.5 -20
2) Calculations shall be prepared for each piece of electrical distribution

equipment and also summarized for the service entry.
i. Backup Power Assessment Analysis
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare an assessment of the
requirement for provision of backup power for each facility. The assessment
shall identify the occupancy for the facility and establish the critical functions
which may warrant the provision of backup power. The assessment shall
summarize the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation for application of
backup power which will be reviewed by the Royal Commission.
j. Generator Calculations
1) Generator Sizing
(a) Prepare calculations which justify the selection of generator, or paralleled
generators to supply the backup electrical loads for each facility.
(b) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required
and to demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the
load types that are supplied.
(c) The calculations shall account for the specific load types and adverse
effects that may result for motors, non-linear loads, uninterruptable
power supplies, etc.
(d) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized,
etc. to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence
to be applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
(e) Calculations shall be performed with the generator manufacturer’s
software and shall include the following:
(1) Generator sizing with running kW, starting kW, running kVA, starting
kVA, voltage dip, and frequency dip for each load starting step.
2) Sound Performance
(a) Prepare calculations to identify the anticipated sound levels for the
backup generator installation. The calculations shall be used to
demonstrate compliance with IEC Standard 60034, all local ordinances,
and the sound performance requirements identified herein this
document. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.b.6.b Noise.
k. Transfer Switch Application
1) Prepare transfer switch application recommendations for Royal Commission
approval. Refer to Table 5.5.1.D Transfer Switch Application
Recommendation.
l. Battery System Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which justify the sizing of the battery system to supply the
backup electrical loads for each facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
also submit recommendations for modifications to the backup duration which is
different than the minimum identified in this document. Refer to Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.c.3).

Rev. 1 5.5 -21
2) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required and to

demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the load types that
are supplied for the desired duration.
3) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized, etc.
to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence to be
applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
m. Uninterruptible Power Supply Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which justify the selection of the UPS to supply the backup
electrical loads for each facility.
2) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required and to
demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the load types that
are supplied for the desired duration.
3) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized, etc.
to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence to be
applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
4) Prepare calculations which justify the sizing of the battery system to support
UPS loads for each facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also submit
recommendations for modifications to the backup duration which is different
than the minimum identified in this document. Refer to Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.d.4)(a).
n. Lightning Protection Calculations
1) Prepare a lightning risk assessment in accordance with the latest SBC 401
Chapter 802 to demonstrate the potential exposure for each facility. The results
of these calculations shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to provide
a recommendation on whether a lightning protection system is required. The
o. Electrostatic Discharge Assessment
1) For facilities where electrical installations are classified as hazardous in
accordance with the latest SBC 401, Chapter 720, prepare an assessment
regarding the potential risks associated for electrostatic discharge for each
facility in accordance with IEC Standard 61340. The results of this assessment
shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to provide a recommendation
on whether an electrostatic discharge control system is required. The
2) Hazardous Area Classification;
3) For classified area refer to IEC 60079
D. Electrical Rooms
1. General
a. Electrical Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all electrical equipment
and also provide all appropriate clearances for access and maintenance in
accordance with IEC 60364 for low voltage electrical installations and in accordance
with the following Table 5.5.1.B for Working Clearances around exposed live part of
electrical equipment.

Rev. 1 5.5 -22
TABLE 5.5.1.B: WORKING CLEARANCES
600 V and 601 V to 9.0 9.0 kV to

Working Condition
below kV 25.0 kV
Exposed live parts on one side of the

working space and no live or grounded
parts on the other side of the working
900 mm 1200 mm 1500 mm
space, or exposed live parts on both
sides effectively guarded by wood or
other insulating materials.
Exposed live parts on one side of the
working space and grounded parts on
the other side of the working space. 1100 mm 1500 mm 1800 mm
Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be
considered grounded.
Exposed live parts on both sides of the

working space (not guarded as provided
1200 mm 1800 mm 2800 mm
in the first working condition) with
operator between.
b. Electrical Rooms shall be provided with adequate illumination to facilitate

maintenance procedures. The lighting for these rooms shall include at least one
fixture supplied from the backup power source to facilitate trouble shooting during
power interruptions. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.M Lighting for additional information
regarding illumination for Electrical Rooms.
c. Normal and backup power equipment shall be located in separate Electrical Rooms
for the main service equipment. This will prevent the catastrophic failure of one
system from damaging the alternate power source.
1) Exception: Where the transfer function between power sources utilizes devices
which are mounted integral in the normal equipment.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.3. Architectural for additional guidance on the design of
Electrical Rooms.
e. Refer to Section 5.4 Mechanical for additional guidance on heating, ventilation and
air conditioning provisions for Electrical Rooms.
f. Refer to Section 5.4.1 Fire Suppression for additional guidance on fire protection for
Electrical Rooms.
2. Main Electrical Rooms
a. The Main Electrical Room shall be located at the service entrance and shall house
the normal electric service equipment including but not limited to the following:
1) Main switchgear
2) Main distribution boards
3) Sub main distribution boards
4) Distribution boards

Rev. 1 5.5 -23
5) Switchboards
6) Motor control centers
7) Lighting control relay panels
8) Individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers
9) Individually mounted disconnect switches
10) Individually mounted motor controllers
11) Power factor correction equipment
12) Harmonics mitigation equipment
13) Surge protective devices
14) Electrical metering equipment
15) Spare fuse cabinet
16) Grounding bus bar
b. Service transformers are typically located outside of the building however, a
situation may arise that warrants installation inside of the building to address
aesthetic or security concerns. In this situation, the service transformer shall be
located in a separate dedicated room constructed with adequate fire rating,
ventilation, and access and working clearances for the installed equipment. For
indoor installations, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consult with the SEC to
determine the specific requirements for the service installation.
1) Refer to Table 5.5.1.B Working Clearances.
c. Where the building is supported by a backup power source, the electrical equipment
associated with the backup power source shall be housed in an Electrical Room
separated from the normal electrical equipment.
1) Exception: Where the transfer function between power sources utilizes devices
which are mounted integral in the normal equipment.
3. Distribution Electrical Rooms
a. Distribution Electrical Rooms shall be provided throughout the facility as necessary
to accommodate the distribution electrical equipment including but not limited to the
following:
1) Sub main distribution boards
2) Distribution boards
3) Lighting control relay panels
4) Individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers
5) Individually mounted disconnect switches or isolators
6) Individually mounted motor controllers
7) Harmonics mitigation equipment
8) Surge protective devices
9) Electrical metering equipment
10) Grounding bus bar

Rev. 1 5.5 -24
E. Backup Power Systems

1. General
a. Emergency and standby power systems shall comply strictly with the following
directives issued in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
1) Council of Ministers Decision No. 27 of 20 December 1980.
2) Ministry of Interior Decision No. 2847/401 of 14 June 1981.
3) Minister of Industry and Electricity Ministerial Decision No. 924 of 6 July 1981.
b. The power distribution system provides for parallel feeders from two different source
substations to most of the institutional, commercial and industrial facilities. In case of
failure of power on one feeder, the facility can be switched to the other feeder. This
dual feeder arrangement provides an inherent service redundancy; however the
provision of a backup power system shall be carefully evaluated and provided where
necessary.
c. The requirement for a backup power supply will depend on the facility type and
particular application. The provision of backup power for each facility requires
careful determination during the early stages of the design. A list of loads proposed
to be supplied from the backup power source shall be provided to the Royal
Commission to obtain confirmation prior to proceeding with the design. Table
5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix has been developed to assist the consultant with the
determination of the backup power loads for each facility.
d. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the backup power source
configuration to determine the best approach for the facility.
1) Where the facility is a single building, the source configuration would be a single
location with one or more backup power source devices as required to satisfy
the loads.
2) Where the development is multiple buildings, the following backup power
source configurations shall be considered:
(a) Distributed Backup Power Source: A separate backup power source
dedicated for each building and distributed throughout the development.
(b) Regional Backup Power Plants: Multiple regional plants with one or more
backup power sources to supply a district of the development. An
underground feeder network would be used to distribute the backup
power to the various buildings in each region of the development. This
approach shall consider the various distribution voltage opportunities to
optimize the feeder network. Medium voltage backup power sources
may be suitable but will require careful consideration and may
necessitate the provision of transformers at each building.
(c) Central Backup Power Plant: One central plant with one or more backup
power sources to supply the buildings throughout the entire
development. An underground feeder network would be used to
distribute the backup power to the various buildings in the development.
This approach shall consider the various distribution voltage
opportunities to optimize the feeder network. Medium voltage backup
power sources may be suitable but will require careful consideration and
may necessitate the provision of transformers at each building.

Rev. 1 5.5 -25
TABLE 5.5.1.C: BACKUP POWER MATRIX MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Facility Types
Load Description Commercial Schools University Civic Public Safety Health Safety Infrastructure Religious
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
Fire Alarm l l l l l l l l
Egress Lighting & Exit Signs l l l l l l l l
Elevators (< 5 Stories) l l l l l l l l
Elevator (5 Stories or more) l l l l l l l l
Security Systems l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Hazardous Gas Monitoring l l l NA l l l NA
HVAC
Controls l l l l l l l l
Smoke Control l l l l l l l l
Stair Pressurization l l l l l l l l
Chiller l l l l l l l l
Chilled Water Pumps l l l l l l l l
Laboratory Exhaust NA l l NA l NA NA
Fumehood Exhaust NA l l NA l NA NA
Hazardous Exhaust NA l l NA l NA NA
Supply Air l l l l l l l
Cooling Towers l l l l l l l
Electrical
Switchgear Controls l l l l l l l l
Generator Accessories
Controls l l l l l l l l
Battery Charger l l l l l l l l
Motorized Louvers l l l l l l l l
Fuel Supply l l l l l l l l
Plumbing
Sump Pumps l l l l l l l l
Water Purification l l l l l l l
RO Water System NA l l NA NA NA NA NA
RO System Pumps NA l l NA NA NA NA NA
Domestic Water Pumps l l l l l l l l
Tepid Water Pumps NA l l NA NA NA NA NA
Fire Supression
Fire Pump l l l l l l l l
Jockey Pump l l l l l l l l
Dry/Pre-Action Compressors l l l l l l l l
Fire Suppression Controls l l l l l l l l
IT Systems and Equipment

Data Center Servers & Drives l l l l l l l l
Data Center Air Conditioning l l l l l l l l
Data Center Fire Supression l l l l l l l l
Essential Computers l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Non-essential Computers l l l l l l l l
Network Switch l l l l l l l l
Infrastructure
Traffic Signals NA NA NA NA NA NA l NA
Pumping Stations NA NA NA NA NA NA l NA
ABBREVIATIONS: FACILITY TYPE DESCRIPTIONS:

LS Life Safety Commercial Office Buildings, Retail Shops, Hotels, Restuarants, Athletic Clubs
CR Critical Schools Facilities for Pre-primary, Primary, Intermediate and Secondary Education
OS Optional Standby University College and University Buildings for Instruction, Research, Residency, and Support Activities
U Uninterruptible Power Supply Civic Theaters, Exhibition Halls, Museums, Libraries, Municipality Offices
N Normal Public Safety Police Stations, Fire Stations
NA Not Applicable Health Safety Hospitals, Health Centers, Outpatient Facilities
Infrastructure Traffic Signaling, Pumping Stations, Sewage Treatment
Religious Mosques

Rev. 1 5.5 -26
e. Additional Provisions
1) In all cases, each important sub-system in all facilities such as fire alarm,
telephone, public address, intercom, emergency and exit lights, and security
system shall be provided with an individual, integral, rechargeable battery pack
and charger.
2) All critical equipment such as computers and life support systems shall be fed
from a UPS system, which is generally integral with such equipment.
f. Backup power systems shall be configured with separate branches for the various
load types. Categories for load segregation shall include emergency and standby.
Refer to the descriptions for each of these categories in Subsections 5.5.1.E.3
Emergency Systems and 5.5.1.E.4. Standby Systems.
2. Sources
a. The following are the various types of backup power sources which are available.
They can be used individually or in combination as required by the facility.
1) Local Generators
2) Batteries
3) Uninterruptible Power Supply
b. Generators
1) Local generation is advisable where emergency power is required for power
and lighting loads.
(a) Generators shall be engine driven.
(b) Fuel source for engine driven units shall be diesel. The fuel source
needs to consider fuel availability, capacity and storage requirements.
Fuel source shall comply with the Royal Commission Environmental
Regulations.
(c) Generator circuit breaker shall be included in the generator set and shall
be suitable, specifically designed and tested for the application.
2) Generators are available in various ratings as follows:
(a) Standby Rated: Application is to supply emergency power for a limited
duration during a power outage. Standby generators shall be used for
applications where operation is roughly 200 hours per year and they are
not recommended for parallel operation with the utility source.
(b) Prime Rated: Application is to supply loads for an unlimited number of
hours per year in a variable load setting. It is not advisable to that the
variable load exceed 70% average of the prime power rating during any
operation period of 250 hours. If operating at 100% of prime power
rating, yearly hours should not exceed 500.
(c) Continuous Rated: Application to supply a constant 100% load for an
unlimited number of hours each year. Continuous power rated units are
most widely used in applications where the power grid is unreachable.
Such applications include mining, agriculture or military operations.
3) Generators for backup power to most facilities shall be standby rated unless
there is a specific critical need as determined by the A/E and/or EPC

Rev. 1 5.5 -27
Contractor. The justification for use of prime or continuous rated generator(s)

shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
4) Generator voltage, frequency and phase relationship shall be the same as the
normal system. Size shall be adequate to carry the required emergency loads
of the facility. Where the backup power loads exceed the capacity of a single
generator, multiple units shall be operated in a parallel configuration. Paralleled
units may also be justified for extremely critical loads such as hospitals or data
centers. Automatic transfer shall be provided for all emergency loads.
5) Backup generators with standby rating shall be sized to be loaded between
50% minimum and 80% maximum of their nameplate rating. Calculations shall
be performed to justify the equipment selection and performance. Refer to
Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.i Generator Sizing.
(a) Generator sizing shall include 10% spare capacity for load growth.
6) Installation Requirements
(a) Enclosure
(1) For outdoor installations, the enclosure shall be design to withstand
the environmental conditions and provide a minimum protection
rating of IP65. All openings for ventilation and access shall be
designed to maintain the weather-proof requirement.
(2) Weather-proof enclosures shall be walk-in type where space permits.
If adequate space is not available for the walk-in enclosure, a skin
tight enclosure with access doors is permitted with the approval of the
Royal Commission.
(b) Noise:
(1) The radiated engine noise shall be addressed as follows:
(i) Outdoor locations shall incorporate sound attenuation into the
enclosure. The level of attenuation shall limit the sound level at
the property line to meet the requirements of the Royal
Commission Environmental Regulations.
7) Refer to Chapter 5.2 Structural for additional information regarding installation
requirements for generators including:
(a) Structural
(b) Vibration
8) Refer to Chapter 5.3 Architectural for additional information regarding
installation requirements for generators including:
(a) Indoor space
(b) Acoustical considerations
9) Refer to Chapter 5.4 Mechanical for additional information regarding installation
requirements for generators including:
(a) Ventilation
(b) Fuel supply
(c) Engine exhaust

Rev. 1 5.5 -28
c. Batteries
1) Where the load requirements are not large enough to require local generators,
centrally located batteries may be provided as the backup power source.
Sealed lead acid, nickel-lead-alkaline or nickel cadmium types may be used.
Ampere-hour capacity shall be adequate for power requirements. Battery
charging equipment shall be included.
2) The initial battery system shall be sized to provide 20% spare capacity to
accommodate additional loads in the future.
3) Battery storage shall be sufficient to supply the loads (connected and initial
spare capacity) for a minimum duration 1.5 hours. Longer backup durations
may be desirable or recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for
unique conditions. These special considerations shall be presented to the
Royal Commission for review and approval.
4) Batteries shall be located in well ventilated rooms, and mounted on racks to
facilitate regular maintenance.
d. Uninterruptible Power Supply
1) UPS systems shall be battery - static inverter type, packaged pre-engineered
units. kVA and time rating shall be adequate for the application.
2) UPS systems are costly and shall only be applied for critical loads which cannot
tolerate even extremely short power interruptions including but not limited to
the following:
(a) Hospital life support systems
(b) Critical data centers
(c) Critical computer systems
(d) Critical security systems
(e) Critical building control systems
(f) Critical communications systems
3) The initial UPS system shall be sized to provide 20% spare capacity to
accommodate additional loads in the future.
4) Battery Storage
(a) The battery storage for the UPS shall be sized to provide the appropriate
backup duration for the application. Battery storage shall be sufficient to
supply the loads (connected and initial spare capacity). The minimum
duration for a stand-alone UPS system shall be 1.5 hours for the full
capacity of the UPS. Longer backup durations may be desirable or
recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for unique conditions.
These special considerations shall be presented to the Royal
Commission for review and approval.
(b) The UPS may also be supported by a backup generator as another level
of redundancy. When this configuration is implemented, the battery
storage associated with the UPS system shall be sized to provide the
appropriate duration of backup. Typically this would include a reduced
duration to allow these critical loads to remain operational while the
generator is activated and is ramping up to accept the loads. For this

Rev. 1 5.5 -29
situation, a minimum battery backup of 15 minutes for the full capacity of

the UPS shall be provided to bridge the outages between the normal and
emergency power sources. Longer backup durations may be desirable
or recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for unique
conditions. These special considerations shall be presented to the Royal
5) UPS units are available with modular construction and hot swappable modules.
This configuration is beneficial to facilitate system expansion and also allows
maintenance to be performed without interruption to the critical loads. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall evaluate the use of these equipment features and
provide recommendations to the Royal Commission for approval prior to
developing the specifications for this equipment.
6) UPS systems shall be installed in clean dry locations away from occupied
areas.
7) UPS systems shall be located in well ventilated rooms, and mounted in cabinets
to protect the equipment.
8) There are additional special occupancies associated with telecommunication
systems that warrant the application of a dedicated UPS. These special
conditions and the associated requirements are described further in Paragraph
5.5.2.E.2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
3. Emergency Systems
a. Electrical systems legally required to be installed and that supply loads essential to
safety and life. This load category is typically referred to as the Life Safety Branch
and supplies the following loads:
1) Egress lighting and exit signs
2) Fire alarm
3) Security systems
4) Generator accessories: controls, fuel supply, and motorized dampers
5) Fire pumps
6) Dry/Pre-action fire protection system compressors
7) Fire suppression controls
8) Smoke control systems
9) Stair pressurization systems
10) Elevators (High rise Buildings)
11) Generator battery charger
12) Hospital communication systems
13) Sewage disposal
14) Dangerous industrial processes
b. Refer to Table 5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix for guidance on emergency power
requirements for each building type.
4. Standby Systems

Rev. 1 5.5 -30
a. Alternate power systems for such applications where interruption of normal power
would cause discomfort to personnel or damage to product. This load category is
typically broken into Critical Equipment and Optional Standby. The loads associated
with each of these branches are described as follows:
1) Critical Equipment
(a) Task Illumination and selected receptacles for the following areas and
functions related to patient care in healthcare facilities:
(1) Critical Care
(2) Patient Care
(3) Infant Nurseries
(4) Medication Prep
(5) Pharmacy Dispensing
(6) Selected Acute Nursing Areas
(7) Psychiatric Bed Areas
(8) Ward Treatment Rooms
(9) Nurses Stations
(b) Hospital communications systems including nurse call and telephones.
(c) Security systems.
2) Optional Standby
(a) Building management and control systems
(b) Security systems
(c) Data Center air conditioning systems
(d) Laboratory exhaust air systems
(e) Laboratory supply air systems
(f) Chilled water generation - chillers, cooling towers, and pumps
(g) Water purification systems
(h) Domestic water pumping system
(i) Essential computers
(j) Elevators (other than High rise Buildings)
(k) Supply, return and exhaust systems for healthcare facilities including:
(1) Operating Rooms
(2) Delivery Rooms
(3) Airborne Infectious/Isolation Rooms
(4) Protective Environment Rooms
(5) Clinical Laboratories
(6) Nuclear Medicine Areas

Rev. 1 5.5 -31
b. Refer to Table 5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix for guidance on emergency power
requirements for each building type.
F. Transfer Switches
1. General
a. A transfer switch is an electrical switch that is able to transfer electrical loads
between two sources. There are several types and numerous features for this
equipment that shall be considered when selecting the appropriate equipment for
each application.
2. Types
a. Manual transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied from multiple sources
and facilitates manual transfer from one source to another when there is a failure of
one source or there is some other special situation to initiate this transfer. Examples
for special situations include load balancing between service feeders or in response
to a request from the utility company to avoid an overload condition. Manual transfer
switches are not used for life safety or critical backup power loads but may be
applied to optional standby loads.
b. Automatic transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied from multiple
sources and facilitates automatic transfer from the primary to the secondary source
when the primary source fails. The automatic transfer also occurs from the
secondary to the primary source when the primary source returns to normal.
Automatic transfer switches are commonly used for all backup power loads including
life safety, critical and optional standby.
c. Bypass isolation automatic transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied
from multiple sources and, in addition to the automatic transfer capability, provides a
means to manually bypass and isolate the transfer switch to allow for maintenance
procedures. The bypass isolation switch is connected both in series and in parallel
with the automatic transfer switch to facilitate this operation. Bypass isolation
transfer switches are used for all backup power loads where the criticality of the load
warrants this additional feature to allow for routine maintenance without interruption
to the equipment operation. This equipment is most commonly utilized for health
safety type facilities such as hospitals but can also be applied to other facilities
where the occupancy or function is determined to be critical.
3. Operation
a. Single operator transfer switches utilize a single electrical component to initiate the
transfer from one source to the other. This method of operation does not provide
the capability to incorporate any delays in the transfer process and is appropriate for
the most critical loads which need to transfer as quickly as possible.
b. Dual operator transfer switches utilize two electrical components to initiate the
transfer between power sources. The first initiates the break from the connected
source and the second initiates the connection to the alternate source. The dual
operator provides flexibility for programming delays that may be desirable for certain
types of loads to avoid detrimental impacts to the power distribution system.
c. Open transition transfer includes a break-before-make operation where there is a
delay between separation from one source and connection to the next. This is the
typical operation and shall be the normal selection for all facilities.
d. Closed transition transfer includes a make-before-break operation where the two
sources are momentarily paralleled to avoid outages to the critical loads. Use of this

Rev. 1 5.5 -32
operation method requires careful consideration and shall only be selected when it
has been justified for the critical application. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
provide documentation to support the selection of this operating means to the Royal
Commission for review and approval. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also
coordinate with the SEC to establish the acceptability of closed transition transfer
and the protective safety features required for implementation of this operation.
4. Configuration
a. Four (4) pole transfer switches include separate poles for all three phases and the
neutral. This transfer switch provides isolation of source neutrals and is the preferred
configuration. Four (4) pole transfer switches shall be the normal selection for all
facilities. This approach requires special attention to the grounding of the backup
power source. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2 Backup Power Source.
b. Three (3) pole transfer switches include separate poles for all three phases but the
neutral is solid and does not have the capability to be isolated between the normal
and emergency power sources. Applications for this configuration shall be limited to
existing facilities where the existing transfer switches are 3 pole type and their use
will maintain the electrical system consistency and avoid confusion for maintenance
procedures. The selection of this configuration shall be reviewed with the Royal
Commission to obtain approval. Refer to the transfer switch application
recommendation process described in Subsection 5.5.1.F.5 Applications and Table
5.5.1.D Transfer Switch Application Recommendation.
5. Applications
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider all of the backup power applications
for a facility and shall provide the Royal Commission with recommendations for the
transfer switch application utilizing the following Table 5.5.1.D. Typical
recommendations for transfer switch applications are provided as follows:

Rev. 1 5.5 -33
TABLE 5.5.1.D: TRANSFER SWITCH APPLICATION RECOMMENDATION
Config- Optional
Type Operation
uration Features
Transfer
Closed Transition
Open Transition
Single Operator
Switch Branch
Dual Operator
No.
3 Pole
4 Pole
BITS
MTS
ATS
B
C
D
1 Life Safety l l l l l l
Critical
2 l l l l l
Equipment
Optional
3 l l l l l l
Standby
ABBREVIATIONS: OPTIONAL FEATURES:

MTS Manual Transfer Switch A Engine-Generator Exerciser
ATS Automatic Transfer Switch B Digital Metering
BITS Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch C Programmed Neutral Switch Position
D In-Phase Monitor
G. Electrical Distribution Equipment

1. Medium Voltage Switchgear
a. General
1) All medium voltage switchgear and cables shall be designed in accordance with
the latest SEC Specifications SDMS.
2) This includes the following medium voltage electrical equipment:
(a) Ring Main Units (RMU)
(b) Interrupter Switches
(c) Oil-filled switches
(d) Manual Transfer Switches
(e) Automatic Transfer Switches
(f) Metal Clad Distribution Switchgear
(g) Relays, Instruments and Meters
2. Low Voltage Switchgear and Switchboards
a. General

Rev. 1 5.5 -34
1) All low voltage switchgear and control gear shall be designed in accordance
with the IEC 60439 and IEC 60947.
2) Low voltage switchgear and switchboards are utilized for distribution of power
to the panel boards and electrical loads throughout a facility. This equipment
is critical to the operation of the facility and shall be carefully designed to best
meet the operational requirements and budget limitations for the facility.
3) Switchgear construction offers the following characteristics:
(a) Lower maintenance costs
(b) Higher interrupting ratings
(c) Enhanced coordination capabilities and operational safety
(d) Higher quality and reliability
4) Switchboard construction offers the following characteristics:
(a) Lower equipment costs
(b) More compact dimensions
b. Construction
1) Switchgear
(a) Self-supporting, free-standing equipment with metal enclosure to
accommodate the overcurrent protective devices, metering equipment,
surge suppression devices and other auxiliary components.
(b) Modular construction with individual compartments for each overcurrent
protective device.
(c) Forms of internal separation between components within the Low
Voltage Switchgear shall conform to IEC 60439-1 7.7. This provides
higher degree of protection based on the requirement.
(d) Integral steel channel base for increased rigidity.
(e) Overcurrent protective devices are draw-out type to facilitate
maintenance of the devices.
2) Switchboards
(a) Self-supporting, free-standing equipment with metal enclosure to
accommodate the overcurrent protective devices, metering equipment,
surge suppression devices and other auxiliary components.
(b) Separate cubicles for main circuit breaker and distribution feeder circuit
breakers.
3) Fault current ratings for equipment shall be in accordance with the results of
the fault calculations. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.d Fault Level Calculations.
Equipment ratings shall be selected for the next standard level above the
calculated levels.
c. Application
1) The type of distribution equipment shall be selected to satisfy the requirements
of the facility and the application. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall make

Rev. 1 5.5 -35
recommendations regarding the appropriate equipment type based on

consideration for the following criteria:
(a) Magnitude of the loads served
(b) Type of facility
(c) Budget limitations
(d) Maintenance capabilities and procedures
(e) Economic impact of interruptions
(f) Space availability
2) Table 5.5.1.E Switchgear vs. Switchboard Application Guide has been
developed to assist the A/E and/or EPC Contractor with the determination of
the selection for distribution equipment for each facility type.
TABLE 5.5.1.E: SWITCHGEAR VS. SWITCHBOARD APPLICATION GUIDE
Main Circuit Feeder Circuit

Construction Access
Breakers Breakers
Individual Fixed
Individual Fixed
Group Mounted
Equipment
Front and Rear

Facility Type Rating
Switchboard
Switchgear
Front Only
(Amps)
Draw out
Draw out
≤ 2000 l l l l
Commercial > 2000 l l l l
≥ 4000 l l l l
≤ 2000 l l l l
Schools > 2000 l l l l
≥ 4000 l l l l
≤ 2000 l l l l
University > 2000 l l l l
≥ 4000 l l l l
≤ 2000 l l l l
Civic > 2000 l l l l
≥ 4000 l l l l
≤ 2000 l l l
Public Safety > 2000 l l l l
≥ 4000 l l l l
≤ 2000 l l l l
Health Safety > 2000 l l l l
≥ 4000 l l l l
≤ 2000 l l l l
Infrastructure
> 2000 l l l l

Rev. 1 5.5 -36
Main Circuit Feeder Circuit

Construction Access
Breakers Breakers
Individual Fixed
Individual Fixed
Group Mounted
Equipment
Front and Rear

Facility Type Rating
Switchboard
Switchgear
Front Only
(Amps)
Draw out
Draw out
≥ 4000 l l l l
≤ 2000 l l l l
Religious > 2000 l l l l
≥ 4000 l l l l
FACILITY TYPE DESCRIPTIONS:

Commercial Office Buildings, Retail Shops, Hotels, Restaurants, Athletic Clubs
Schools Facilities for Pre-primary, Primary, Intermediate and Secondary Education
University College and University Buildings for Instruction, Research, Residency, and Support Activities
Civic Theaters, Exhibition Halls, Museums, Libraries, Municipality Offices
Public Safety Police Stations, Fire Stations
Health Safety Hospitals, Health Centers, Outpatient Facilities
Infrastructure Traffic Signaling, Pumping Stations, Sewage Treatment
Religious Mosques
3. Panel boards
a. General
1) Electric systems in commercial and industrial buildings shall include panel
boards, which utilize circuit breaker devices. Fused devices are not
recommended unless specifically required for specific protection requirements
or coordination purposes. An example is fuses may be used for control circuits
of instrument or monitoring devices.
2) Panel boards are generally classified into the following categories:
(a) Main distribution boards
(b) Sub main distribution boards
(c) Distribution boards
b. Features
1) Panel boards and associated circuit breakers shall be fully rated for available
fault current. Series rating of the equipment is not acceptable.
2) Panel boards shall be rated to accept the calculated loads and shall include
20% spare capacity for future growth.
3) Panel boards shall be provided with 20% bussed space suitable to accept
future circuit breakers.
4) Panel boards shall be provided with 10% spare circuit breakers. Provide at
least (1) spare breaker with rating to match the other active breakers in the
panel board.
5) Panel boards shall include door-in-door construction with hinged door to
facilitate access to the breakers and wire ways.

Rev. 1 5.5 -37
6) Fault current ratings for panel boards shall be in accordance with the results of
the fault calculations. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.e Fault Level Calculations.
Panel board ratings shall be selected for the next standard level above the
calculated levels. Minimum ratings shall be as follows:
(a) Bracing - 20 kA
(b) Overcurrent Protective Devices - 15 kA
c. Selection of Installation
1) Surface mounted panel boards shall be used in electrical rooms and other
spaces where the surface mounted enclosure is not aesthetically objectionable.
2) Recessed mounted panel boards shall be utilized where installed in finished
spaces and where surface mounting is undesirable.
4. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
a. General
1) Low voltage circuit breakers used in the Royal Commission installations are
used at the voltage levels below 600 V. These circuit breakers generally fall
under 3 classifications.
(a) Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
(b) Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
(c) Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
2) Circuit breakers shall be a quick-make and quick-break switching device, which
will operate both manually for normal switching functions and automatically
under overload and short-circuit conditions.
3) Circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically trip free. The RMS
symmetrical interrupting capacity for each breaker shall be adequate for the
available fault but shall have a minimum rating of 15 kA for 400 V systems.
Circuit breakers shall be either de-rated or calibrated if installed in an ambient
temperature higher than 40°C.
(a) When ambient temperature is within allowable limits, the circuit breakers
shall have electronic trip with long and short time uniform tripping
characteristics throughout the temperature range from 25 to 50°C.
(b) Circuit breakers located in environments where the temperature varies,
while the load is in constant, such as submersible pumps, shall be
ambient temperature compensated to 50°C.
(c) Refer to Paragraph 5.5.1.C.4 Equipment De-rating.
4) Circuit breaker selection and application shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a) Residential facilities - IEC Standard 60898.
(b) Commercial, education, public safety, health safety, religious and
industrial facilities - IEC Standard 60947.
(c) Circuit breaker trip ratings shall be industry standard in accordance with
the IEC Standards. The standard ampere rating for circuit breakers shall
be considered are1.6, 2, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32,

Rev. 1 5.5 -38
40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 225, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 800,
1000, 1250, 1600
b. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
1) Miniature circuit breakers are preferred for residential, commercial, institutional,
and industrial branch circuit loads feeding lighting loads, small receptacle loads
etc.
c. Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
1) Molded case circuit breakers are preferred to fuses and shall be used in
distribution panel boards for distribution of power to various loads such as
lighting panel boards, power panel boards, motor loads, etc.
d. Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)
1) For low voltage switchgear with higher ratings (greater than 1000 amps), draw
out type air circuit breakers are preferred over molded case circuit breakers.
2) Air circuit breakers shall be provided with microprocessor based trip units to
facilitate the adjustment of the tripping characteristics to best suit the
application. These trip units vary in sophistication, communications and
metering capabilities including the following:
(a) Adjustable protection and coordination
(b) System diagnostics
(c) System monitoring
(d) System communications
(e) Optional features for enhanced maintenance
3) The type of microprocessor trip unit used for each application shall be
determined by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and recommendations shall be
submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
5. Fuses
a. General
1) Low voltage fuses used in the Royal Commission installations are used at the
voltage levels below 600 V. Fuses are generally available with the following
operating characteristics:
(a) Fast-acting which open quickly when their current rating is exceeded.
These fuses are generally used for resistive or other type loads with low
inrush currents.
(b) Time-delay which are designed to open only on an excessive current
draw for a defined of time. These fuses are typically used for protection
of inductive and capacitive loads that experience heavy inrush currents.
2) The use of fuses for overcurrent protection shall be on a limited basis
determined by the specific application. The Royal Commission prefers the use
of circuit breakers for overcurrent protection but understands that there may be
applications which warrant the use of fuses. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall submit recommendations for fuse applications to the RCJ for review and
approval.

Rev. 1 5.5 -39
3) Fuse selection and application shall be in accordance with the following:

(a) All facility types - IEC Standard 60269.
(b) Fuse ratings shall be industry standard in accordance with the IEC
Standards.
6. Motors
a. General
1) Motors requirements are addressed in Section 5.4 Mechanical. Refer to
Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.e Motors and Motor Controllers.
7. Motor Controllers
a. General
1) Motors controller requirements are addressed in Section 5.4 Mechanical. Refer
to Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.e Motors and Motor Controllers.
b. Motor Control Centers (MCC) or Motor Control Panel (MCP)
1) Where multiple motors are located in the same space or area, it is preferred to
control them from a centralized location such as a motor control center. Where
motors or equipment are scattered from the physical locations, then individual
Motor Control Panel (MCP) can be provided as close to the driven as practical.
2) A motor control center is an assembly of individual starters or VFD for various
motors mounted on a fixed or draw-out type of chassis and located in a common
enclosure. Motor control centers shall be modular construction with a separate
compartment for each starter or VFD. Common wireways shall be provided in
each cubicle of the motor control center and shall be utilized for low voltage
control wiring.
3) For Low Voltage Motors with VFD controls, combine the VFD and associated
protection and control circuits inside the MCC or MCP panel.
4) MCC/MCP/VFD panel should include all protections, including relay interlocks
for process protections, such as Level LL running dry protection, all electrical
protections such as under voltage, phase balance monitoring, overload
protections, reverse rotation monitoring etc. and all necessary mechanical
protections such as motor winding temperature monitoring, motor vibration
protection, bearing temperature protections etc. as per motors requirements
addressed in Section 5.4 Mechanical.
5) All MCC/MCP Starters or MCC/MCP VFD panels should be located indoors
and as close to the driven as practical and should maintain proper clearance in
front of panels for maintenance, typically 1.5m deep. Or minimum 3 meters
gaps panel to panel.
6) All MCC/MCP Starters or MCC/MCP VFD panels should include H-O-A
operation mode, emergency stops, start / stop push buttons, alarm lamps and
lamp testing components to provide fully Motor control functions.
7) All MCC/MCP Starters or MCC/MCP VFD panels should clearly defined the
Interface signals to be remote monitored by PLC/SCADA or DDC/BAS system.
Command signals should be hardwired interface only, but for monitoring and
diagnostic data can be transferred to control system via communication serial
links, communication protocol should be specified in specific project.

Rev. 1 5.5 -40
8) All MCC/MCP Starters or MCC/MCP VFD panels should include air filter and
ventilation fans for heater dispassion. Air cycling inside the panel should be
from the bottom to the top.
9) All MCC/MCP Starters or MCC/MCP VFD panels should include door lockers
and panel lightings, 230V AC utility power socket and document holder for
maintenance.
10) When a piece of equipment or a system includes multiple motors (such as
HVAC TOAHU, ERU etc. with a supply and a return fans, parallel pumps in
pump station), provide a VFD for each motor. Control of multiple motors with
the same VFD is discouraged and should be consult with RC for approval.
11) The MCC/MCP Starters or MCC/MCP VFD panels should include following
minimum information in the IFC drawings or documents - Equipment Served,
Power/Voltage/Current Rating, all Interface Signals with Controls and Motor
local control Stations ( LCS), Communication protocol, Emergency Stop, H-O-
A operations, alarm lamps requirements, VFD bypass devices requirements,
Emergency / backup Power Feeder requirements etc.
12) Control battery limit and scope of supply for MCC/MCP/VFD control panels
between Electrical and mechanical should be clearly defined on the IFC
drawings and RFP documents.
13) VFD bypass devices
(a) VFDs serving for non-redundant equipment shall be scheduled with a
bypass device to be servers as DOL or soft starters to continue control
the equipment with full speed in case of VFD failure or out of service.
(b) Non redundancy equipment here typically refer to HVAC equipment such
as PACU, AHU, TOAHU, ERU etc. the HVAC equipment should be able
to continuous operation in full speed with bypass mode when VFD is
failure or out of service.
(c) Pump sets are normally provided with duty / standby operation mode,
therefore a fully redundant pump operation has been included inside the
pump sequence of operations, therefore VFD bypass devices are not
required for pump sets.
(d) The electrical and mechanical systems associated with the VFD shall be
sized and braced to allow the driven system to safely start and operate
when the VFD is placed in bypass mode. All process interlocks, electrical
protections and mechanical protection or similar devices should still be
activated that prevent damage to the driven mechanical equipment and
the associated components such as duct and pipe, when the motor is
operated (full speed) across-the-line via the bypass device.
(e) Evaluation the need to provide the automatic bypass feature that can
automatically switchover to bypass operation if the VFD faults or fails.
Normally this controls are not required, however, when an automatic
bypass is deem necessary, the motor overload protection, run
permissive, and safety circuits shall remain active with the VFD in
automatic bypass.
c. Disconnect Switches (DS) and pump local control station (LCS) Requirements
1) For MCC/MCP Starter or MCC/MCP VFD panels served for Building’s HVAC
equipment and Plumbing equipment.

Rev. 1 5.5 -41
(a) For MCC/MCP Starter or MCC/MCP VFD panels in sight from motor, no
separate disconnected is required between the panel and motor.
(b) For MCC/MCP Starter or MCC/MCP VFD panels are not insight from the
motor, separate disconnected switch should be provided for the
associated motor, the disconnected switch should be pad-lockable in the
open position.
(c) When a separate motor disconnect switch is provided the disconnect
shall include automatic “early break” auxiliary contacts that deactivate
the MCC/MCP Starter MCC/MCP VFD whenever the motor disconnect
switch is opened.
2) When the mechanical equipment / package has provided the unit control panel
(UCP) that including the main isolation switch to isolate the power feeder to the
motors inside the UCP, then the disconnected switch is not required.
3) For MCC/MCP Starter or MCC/MCP VFD panels served for water pump
stations. The pump local control station (LCS) should be provided for each
pump, separate disconnected switch is not required.
(a) For MCC/MCP Starter or MCC/MCP VFD panels in sight from motor, the
LCS should minimum include the E-Stop push button and connect to
MCC/MCP panel directly to trip the pump.
(b) For MCC/MCP Starter or MCC/MCP VFD panels are not insight from the
motor, the LCS should minimum include the E-stop, L-O-R switch, Start /
Stop push buttons, Pump Running / Stopped / Fault alarm lamps and
connected to MCC/MCP control circuits for the proper pump operations
as per defined in the project specific control and operational
philosophies.
8. Wiring Devices
a. The wiring devices for facilities throughout Jubail Industrial City shall be provided
with the ratings and configurations associated with the standard 400/230 volt, 60 Hz
electrical system.
b. All wiring devices shall be selected to meet the requirements of the latest applicable
SASO 444 standard. These standards shall guide the A/E and/or EPC Contractor in
the selection of wiring devices for the following:
1) Plugs and socket-outlets for domestic and similar general use
2) Plugs and socket-outlets for commercial and similar purposes
3) Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes
4) Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations
c. The selection of wiring devices and installation methods shall be coordinated with
the raceway system to facilitate a physically and aesthetically acceptable result.
9. Power Monitoring
a. Power Monitoring System shall be provided as required by the RCJ.
b. Power Monitoring Equipment shall be provided to the following as minimum;
1) MV and LV Switchboard main and the distribution circuit breakers.
2) Secondary low voltage circuit breaker of unit/packaged substation.

Rev. 1 5.5 -42
3) Automatic Transfer Switches.

4) Generator Paralleling Switchboards.
5) Major distribution panel boards as maybe required by RCJ.
c. Power Monitoring functions shall include but not limited to the following;
1) Voltage
2) Current
3) KWh
4) kW, kVA and kVAR.
5) Power Factor
6) Total Harmonic Distortion (Voltage and Current)
H. Transformers
1. General
a. All service transformers and associated medium voltage switchgear for all
residential, commercial, institutional, and industrial facilities shall be in accordance
with the latest SEC Specification SDMS.
b. All features for the service transformers and associated equipment shall be in
accordance with the latest SEC Specifications SDMS.
c. Sizing of all transformers shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Standards
DPS-01 and DPS-02.
d. Configuration and arrangements for transformers and associated equipment shall be
in accordance with the latest SEC Standard SDCS-02.
e. Transformer application restrictions:
1) Liquid filled transformers shall not use polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) fluid.
2) Oil filled transformers shall not be utilized for indoor applications to the extent
possible.
3) Installation of oil filled transformers for indoor application shall meet NFPA fire
protection installation and vault requirement.
4) Dry type transformers shall only be used when approval has been obtained
from the Royal Commission and they shall not be installed outdoors.
f. Transformer Noise Levels
1) Service transformer noise levels shall be in accordance with the latest SEC
Specifications SDMS.
2. Community Area Transformer
a. Community area includes residential, commercial, and institutional facilities.
b. The standard service transformer for facilities in the Community Area shall be
outdoor type, liquid filled, self-cooled, dead front, and pad mounted.
c. Exceptional cases may allow the use of indoor transformers. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations regarding the indoor transformer (liquid
filled or dry type) and justification for this application to the RCJ for approval. Indoor

Rev. 1 5.5 -43
installations will require special provisions for fire separation, noise control, and
ventilation. Refer to Section 5.3 Architectural and 5.4 Mechanical for additional
information regarding special provisions for indoor installations.
d. Installation Requirements
1) All terminations shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Specifications
SDMS.
2) All transformers and associated equipment shall be installed on a concrete pad
3. Industrial Area Transformer
a. The standard service transformer for facilities in the Industrial Area shall be outdoor
type, liquid filled, self-cooled, dead front, and pad mounted.
b. Exceptional cases may allow the use of indoor transformers. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations regarding the indoor transformer (liquid
filled, dry type, or cast coil) and justification for this application to the RCJ for
approval. Indoor installations will require special provisions for fire separation, noise
control, and ventilation. Refer to Section 5.3 Architectural and 5.4 Mechanical for
additional information regarding special provisions for indoor installations.
c. Installation Requirements
1) All terminations shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Specifications
SDMS.
2) All transformers and associated equipment shall be installed on a concrete pad
3) The secondary winding of all industrial transformers shall be grounded wye
connection.
4. Transformers for Existing Facilities with Discontinued Voltages
a. The Royal Decree for transition to the new standard voltages for all RC facilities has
eliminated various voltage ratings. There are existing facilities which will not be
required to transition to the new standard voltage ratings until economically justified.
b. For work in existing facilities, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop
modification concepts and make recommendations regarding the economic
justification for converting from the discontinued voltages to the new standard
voltage. This justification shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review
and approval.
c. When determined that the discontinued voltages are to remain, transformers shall
be used to establish the required voltages for existing equipment and loads. These
transformers shall have the following characteristics:
1) Indoor
2) Dry type
3) Enclosed ventilated
4) Encapsulated type is acceptable in controlled environments for ratings 112.5
kVA or less
5) Cast coil type for industrial polluted areas

Rev. 1 5.5 -44
5. References
1) Refer to Chapter 5.2 Structural for additional information regarding foundation
requirements for transformers.
I. Conduits, Ducts and Busways
1. General
a. This Section addresses the application requirements for electrical raceways, ducts
and busways for Royal Commission facilities.
b. An electrical raceway is any channel of metallic or non-metallic materials designed
expressly for holding wires, cables or bus-bars.
c. Electrical raceways and shall be applied in accordance with the latest edition of SBC
401, IEC 61386, and IEC 60529.
2. Selection of Raceway Type
a. The type of raceway shall be selected to suit the location and method of installation
which are grouped in the following basic classifications:
1) Surface mounted installations include:
(a) Raceways concealed in plenums and hollow spaces for residential,
commercial and institutional type facilities.
(b) Raceways exposed in utility type spaces for residential, commercial and
institutional type facilities.
(c) Raceways exposed in industrial type facilities.
2) Embedded installations include raceways in floor slabs or walls.
3) Underground installations include raceways located below the floor slabs inside
a building and raceways located below grade outside of the building.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the following when selecting the
appropriate electrical raceway for each RCJ facility:
1) Protection of personnel against electrical injury.
2) Protection of property from damage resulting from a fire.
3) Protection of circuitry against mechanical damage or injury.
4) Atmospheric conditions such as corrosive or hazardous environment.
3. Raceway Types
a. The electrical raceway types that are typically used for installation and protection of
electrical wiring include the following:
1) Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC)
(a) Rigid steel conduit shall conform to IEC 61386 and IEC 60981 for extra
heavy duty electrical rigid steel conduits.
(b) Rigid steel conduit larger than Trade Size 6 shall not be used for routing
the cables.
2) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
(a) Electrical metallic tubing larger than Trade Size 2 shall not be used.

Rev. 1 5.5 -45
(b) Electrical metallic tubing shall generally be used for routing the cables for
branch circuits, control circuits and signal circuits.
3) Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC)
(a) Rigid non-metallic heavy wall conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.
(b) The conduits and fittings shall be made from suitable non-metallic
material such as PVC that is resistant to moisture and chemical
atmospheres.
4) Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)
(a) Flexible metal conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.
(b) Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection between equipment
that is subject to vibration such as motors or which requires movement
for adjustment and permanent raceways or for connecting two parts of
the building across an expansion joint.
(c) The flexible metal conduit shall be circular in cross section and made of
helically wound, formed, interlocked metal strip.
5) Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)
(a) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.
(b) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection between
equipment that is subject to vibration such as motors or which requires
movement for adjustment and permanent raceways or for connecting two
parts of the building across an expansion joint.
(c) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for outdoor installations
and other applications subject to ingress of solid objects and/or water in
accordance with IEC 60529.
6) Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit (FNC)
(a) Flexible non-metallic conduit (spiral wound) shall be manufactured in
accordance with IEC 61386.
(b) Flexible non-metallic conduit shall be used for connection between
equipment which requires movement for adjustment and permanent
raceways.
(c) These conduits shall be used in the places where there is no danger of
mechanical damages such as connection between outlet boxes and
luminaires in false ceilings.
4. Surface Installations
a. Industrial Facilities
1) Surface raceway installations shall utilize extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit
which satisfies the requirements of IEC Standards 60981 and 61386.
b. Residential, Commercial and Institutional Facilities
1) Electrical raceways shall be concealed above ceilings, in walls or in shafts
wherever possible. These raceways shall be medium duty steel conduit which
satisfies the requirements of IEC Standard 61386.

Rev. 1 5.5 -46
2) Surface raceway installations in areas subject to physical damage shall utilize

extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit which satisfies the requirements of IEC
Standards 60981 and 61386.
3) Cable trunking or gutters may be used for installations where accessibility of
the cables is of prime importance. Cable trunking shall not be used where
subjected to corrosive vapors or severe physical damage. Cable trunking shall
be steel with painted finish and removable or hinged cover.
4) Cable trunking shall conform to IEC 61084.
5. Underfloor Installations
a. Applications
1) In commercial and institutional facilities where large open areas are required
and/or moveable systems furniture is utilized, underfloor raceways and ducts
shall be used for distribution of electrical cables.
2) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall be used to support electrical cables for
power, lighting, signal, and telecommunications to workstations, work benches
and tables which are not located adjacent to a wall.
3) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall not be used for hazardous locations or
where subject to corrosive vapors or severe physical damage.
b. Underfloor Raceway Characteristics
1) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall utilize welded rectangular steel
construction with multiple compartments as necessary to accommodate the
various electrical wiring.
2) Underfloor raceways shall be sized to accommodate the installed cables. Size
of raceways with a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable installation.
3) Underfloor raceways shall be provided with continuous separators between all
different cable types.
4) Underfloor raceway system shall include junction boxes to facilitate access to
cables and activation fittings to accommodate devices for the various electrical
services.
6. Underground Installations
a. Applications
1) Underground raceways in areas which are not subjected to traffic and/or severe
physical damage may be direct buried conduit.
2) Underground raceways in traffic areas or others areas subject to disruption or
severe physical damage shall be concrete encased.
3) The underground cables crossing the main roads where open cut is difficult,
the Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) or Thrust boring method shall be
adopted for cable crossing on such roads.
b. Raceway Characteristics
1) Direct buried raceways in residential, commercial and institutional areas shall
be PVC conduit.

Rev. 1 5.5 -47
2) Direct buried raceways in industrial areas shall be PVC coated extra heavy duty
rigid steel conduit.
3) Concrete encased raceways shall be PVC conduit.
4) Raceways installed in structural or reinforced concrete envelope shall be PVC
conduit.
5) Underground raceways (direct buried and/or concrete encased) in hazardous
areas shall be PVC coated extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit.
6) Raceways installed below roadways shall be concrete encased.
7. Cable Trays and Cable Trenches
a. Applications
1) Industrial Facilities
(a) In substations and mechanical and electrical rooms, cable trays and
cable trenches may be used.
(b) Cable trays shall not be used for outdoor applications unless specifically
approved by the Royal Commission.
2) Residential, Commercial and Institutional Facilities
(a) In substations and mechanical and electrical rooms, cable trays and
cable trenches may be used.
(b) Cable trays shall not be used for interior distribution of electrical cables
where they are exposed to view unless specifically approved by the
Royal Commission.
b. Cable Tray Characteristics
1) Cable trays shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 61537.
2) Cable trays shall be ladder type, aluminum with natural finish or steel with hot-
dipped galvanized finish.
3) Cable trays shall be of the width and depth required to accommodate the
installed cables plus a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable
installation. Minimum depth shall be 100 mm. Rung spacing shall be adequate
for support of installed cables but shall not exceed 230 mm.
c. Cable Trench Characteristics
1) Cable trenches shall be of the width and depth required to accommodate the
installed cables plus a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable
installation.
2) Cable trenches shall include removable covers to facilitate access to the
cables. Covers shall be rated to withstand the environmental conditions.
8. Wires and Cables
a. Copper Conductors
1) All wires and cables shall have copper conductors.
2) Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with SASO and IEC Standards.

Rev. 1 5.5 -48
3) Cable installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest

SEC Standards and Distribution Materials Specifications.
4) Standard millimeter size cables shall be used and shall be in accordance with
IEC 60228.
5) Minimum size power wire used shall be 2.5 mm².
b. Low Voltage Wires and Cables for Major Feeders
1) Low voltage wires and cable (600 V and below) for major feeders installed in
underground ducts and for indoor installation in raceways, conduits and wire
ways shall be 90°C rated, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated and PVC
sheathed in accordance with IEC 60502 and flame retardant per IEC 60332-3,
B
c. Low Voltage Building Wiring
1) General purpose low voltage building wiring for use in conduit (for receptacle
and lighting circuits) shall be PVC Insulated, 85Deg C, 450/750V (IEC 60227&
SASO 55) wires flame retardant in accordance with IEC 60332-1
d. Low Voltage Cables for Direct Burial
1) Low voltage cables for direct burial shall be armored, minimum 90°C rated,
PVC or XLPE insulated and PVC jacketed in accordance with IEC 60502
e. High Voltage Cables
1) High voltage cables (above 1000V) shall be 90°C rated, be EPR or XLPE
insulated and have metallic shield. Cables used for direct burial purposes shall
have an outer jacket.
f. Cable Ampacity and Electrical Characteristics
1) Cable ampacity, electrical characteristics, and insulating thickness shall
conform to the latest IEC 60364, IEC 60228 and SBC 401.
2) The types of insulation used within a building and their maximum operating
temperatures are identified in SBC 401 Table 52-4.
g. Cable glands shall be in accordance with IEC 62444.
h. LSZH, LSOH, LSFH, or OHLS (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) material classification in
accordance with IEC 60754 and IEC 61034 typically used for cable jacketing for
wires which emit limited smoke and no halogen when exposed to a high heat
source. This type of cable is required to be used in confined spaces, poorly
ventilated areas, such as plenums, with a large amount of cables in close proximity
to humans or sensitive electronic equipment. Mass transit and central office facilities
are common applications for LSOH cable.
9. Busways
a. Electrical busways for electrical distribution shall be in accordance with IEC 61439.
b. Busways shall utilize copper bus rated and shall be protected with a metal
enclosure. Steel or aluminum enclosures are acceptable.
c. The busway assembly shall include a separate bus for each phase, neutral and
ground. The busway enclosure shall not be utilized as the ground conductor.

Rev. 1 5.5 -49
d. Neutral bus shall be increased in capacity over the phase conductors when the
busway supplies loads with high harmonic currents. The A/E and/or EPC contractor
shall complete an assessment of the loads served and provide recommendations to
the Royal Commission for approval.
10. Conduit Fill
a. For a total of 1 conductor inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 53%.
b. For a total of 2 conductors inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 31%.
c. For more than 2 conductors inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 40%
J. Grounding
1. General
a. All facilities shall be provided with grounding systems designed in accordance with
the requirements of the latest SEC Standards and the SBC 401 Chapter 54.
b. Grounding systems shall be designed to achieve the following:
1) Eliminate potential of electrical shock to personnel
2) Enable protection devices to operate correctly to minimize duration of fault
currents
3) Equalize the voltage potential of normally non-current carrying metal work
4) Prevent electrostatic charge of facility elements to avoid potential problems
c. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the design for all related grounding and
protection components including the system grounding, equipment grounding,
lightning protection, surge protection, and electrostatic discharge.
2. System Grounding
a. All low voltage power distribution systems shall have supply transformer secondary
neutrals solidly grounded.
b. The low voltage earthing system shall be of TN-S type unless installations for
special locations are required.
c. Medium voltage distribution systems (e.g. 4160 V, 13800 V, 33000 V and 34500 V)
shall be resistance grounded to minimize ground fault levels.
3. Equipment Grounding
a. The metal frames of all electrical equipment, machinery, lighting fixtures, enclosures,
raceways, cable trays, outlet boxes, appliances and non-electric equipment in close
proximity to electrical equipment shall be grounded for safety. Two grounding
connections shall be provided to the frames of large electrical equipment such as
unit substations, power transformers, motor control centers and switchgear.
4. Grounding System Calculations
a. SBC 401 Chapters 41 and 54 shall be used as a basis of design for the grounding
system. Grounding calculations shall be conducted based on selected calculations
method listed in IEEE 142, IEEE 80, or BS 7430. Soil resistivity values from the
Geotechnical Investigation Report, as detailed in Section 4.4.2.F shall be used for

Rev. 1 5.5 -50
the determination of the grounding calculations. Grounding calculations shall

demonstrate that the calculated resistance does not exceed the maximum
resistance allowed for the system.
5. Grounding of Various System Installations
a. Substation and Industrial Plant
1) System and equipment grounding in substations and industrial plants is
particularly important because of the multiplicity of electrical equipment and
locations in isolated areas. These shall be provided with a ground loop or grid
consisting of multiple spaced ground rods interconnected by adequately sized
bare or insulated copper cable(s).
b. Commercial, Institutional and Light Industrial Facilities
1) For equipment grounding in commercial, institutional and light industrial
facilities, a ground loop shall be provided outside the building foundation. If this
is not possible, a ground grid shall be provided under the basement or ground
floor. System grounding at the facility transformer(s) shall be interconnected to
this loop. Interconnection cables may be bare or insulated.
c. Residential
1) In residential areas, residences shall be supplied with a single ground rod at
the service entrance. Grounding to incoming water supply pipe alone is not
acceptable. All exposed metallic pipes shall be bonded to the grounding
system.
d. Communication Equipment
1) All communications equipment over voltage protection system devices shall be
directly grounded to the facility ground rod, grid or loop. Ground leads from
power distribution systems or facility metalwork shall not be shared by the
communications equipment over voltage protection device ground lead.
e. Floodlighting
1) All floodlighting, area lighting, sports lighting, roadway and street lighting
fixtures shall be grounded.
f. Backup Power Source
1) It is the preference that backup power sources such as generators are
grounded as a separately derived electrical system.
2) Existing facilities may not utilize a separately derived ground configuration. A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall evaluate the backup power source grounding
configuration for an existing facility and provide the Royal Commission with
recommendations whether the existing configuration shall remain or be
modified. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall obtain approval of this
recommendation from the Royal Commission prior to proceeding with the
design.
3) Refer to subsection 5.5.1.F Transfer Switches for additional information
regarding equipment requirements for separately derived and combine
grounding for a backup power source.
6. Installation Requirements
a. All grounding systems shall be interconnected below grade for each facility.

Rev. 1 5.5 -51
b. System grounding and equipment grounding shall use a common ground loop or
grid, wherever possible. Separate grounding conductors shall be run from the
systems (transformers neutrals) and equipment to terminate on the ground loop or
grid via wall mounted ground bus.
7. Grounding to Eliminate Hazards from Static Electricity
a. Various facilities and occupancies have sensitivity toward electrostatic discharge
which may cause damage to equipment or facilities. To address these potential
hazards, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall assess the need for provision of an
electrostatic discharge control program in accordance with IEC Standard 61340.
b. Typical facilities, occupancies or activities that warrant consideration include but are
not limited to the following:
1) Manufacturing of electronic parts, assemblies or equipment
2) Assemble, install, packaging, servicing, testing of electronic equipment
3) Industrial facilities which involve operations with gas, coal, paper, and grain
processing and handling
4) Commercial facilities such as dry cleaning plants and others
c. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an assessment and submit
recommendations to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
8. Corrosion Protection for Grounding Systems
a. General
1) The environmental conditions may result in undesirable deterioration to the
grounding systems for facilities. To protect against this potential, the following
measures shall be implemented to address exposure to underground and
atmospheric conditions:
2) Underground Conditions
(a) The nature of the soil and high water table with salt water content for the
Jubail area results in soil resistivity which is generally low. These
physical conditions make it easy to obtain good ground resistance values
however these same conditions can also cause severe corrosion of
metals leading to deterioration of ground resistance values with time. Not
only does the grounding copper corrode but buried steel in the vicinity
can also be corroded by galvanic interaction with the copper. To avoid
the adverse effects of the physical conditions, the following features shall
be considered and applied as appropriate:
(1) Interruption of Couple: Where possible, the buried steel shall be
separated from the grounding system. Buried lengths of pipework
shall be fitted with insulated flanges at points of connection to the
general mass of grounded equipment. Electrical equipment mounted
in such runs of buried or part-buried pipework shall be grounded but
insulated from the pipework.
(2) Elimination of Buried Steel: Where possible, when choosing between
burying and not burying a steel structure, pipe or conduit; the non-
buried choice is the Royal Commission’s preference. The alternative
approach shall consider the use of non-ferrous materials.

Rev. 1 5.5 -52
(3) Reduction of Effect of Buried Copper: At any location where ground

faults can cause large currents to flow between the body of earth and
the grounding system, extensive buried un-insulated grounding
conductor is necessary to control voltage gradients and ensure that
the whole complex remains as one resistance area. It is therefore not
possible to eliminate buried copper but its corrosion effects can be
reduced as follows:
(i) Grounding conductors shall be lead jacketed or tinned where
the corrosion risk is high, otherwise un-tinned conductors shall
be used.
(ii) Where possible, locate grounding conductors at least 7 m away
from buried steel work. This applies particularly to the grid
conductors extending through plant areas.
(iii) Grounding conductors linking equipment and ground grid
conductors shall be PVC insulated where within approximately
7 m of buried steel work. Connections shall be thermite welded
or compression types and coated with bitumen compound
protected by PVC green tape.
3) Atmospheric Conditions
(a) The following relates to corrosion resulting from atmospheric conditions
on non-buried parts of the grounding system, and is unrelated to any
level of soil resistivity. Wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, a risk of
corrosion from electrolytic action exists. The following safeguards shall
be observed:
(1) Where possible, bare grounding conductors shall be spaced from
surfaces of a dissimilar metal. Where contact between surfaces is
unavoidable and especially outdoors, a coating such as bitumastic
No. 50 or equal, shall be introduced between them (except at
electrical joint faces).
(2) Termination hardware such as Servit connectors, etc., may often be
selected for its compatibility with the metals being connected.
Manufacturer's catalogs give details in this respect. Care shall be
taken in selecting such hardware that it is suitable for its application
from a corrosion aspect.
(3) Conductors passing through short lengths of metal conduit, such as
used for kick-pipes shall be coated with bitumastic No. 50 or equal.
The pipes shall be self-draining and the upper ends mastic sealed.
b. Special Materials
1) Ground Rods
(a) Materials and dimensions of the earth electrodes shall be selected to
withstand corrosion and to have adequate mechanical strength.
(b) For commonly used materials, the common minimum sizes from the
point of view of corrosion and mechanical strength for earth electrodes
where embedded in the soil are given in SBC 401 Table 54.1.
(c) All connections between ground rods and conductors shall be coated
with bitumastic and mastic tape as part of the final installation.

Rev. 1 5.5 -53
9. Additional Grounding Protection by Residual Current Devices (RCD)

a. The use of residual current devices (RCD) is intended only to augment extra
measures of protection against direct contact.
b. The use of such devices is not recognized as a sole means of protection.
c. Application of residual current devices in the system shall conform to the latest SBC.
10. Instrument and control system clean earth and grounding.
a. The general principle of instrument clean earth is all individual shields (screen) and
overall shield (screen) of single or multi pair cable shall be isolated from electrical
safety earthling ( dirty earth) and terminated at different bus bar. This instrument
earth usually also called reference earth since it serve the reference point of the
instrument loop (ground of internal electric circuit inside the instrument).The use of
such devices is not recognized as a sole means of protection.
b. Instrument clean earth grounding should separate from the site structure, other
mental works, and electrical safety earth.
c. Provide a dedicated main grounding dispatcher (main Instrument earth bus bar) as a
signal point of IE earthing system.
d. Instrument clean earth should be normally required for all PLC/ RTU / SCADA
control system as well as telecom data system, telephony or other communication
system.
e. DDC/BAS system Instrument earth requirement should be advised by the selected
DDC/BAS supplier. Normally, instrument earth system is not required for DDC/BAS.
However, the Contractor should be responsible to develop instrument earth system
when the selected DDC/BMS materials are required dedicated IE earth system.
f. Each PLC/RTU/Marshaling cabinet will provide dedicated instrument earth bar
inside the panel by the vendor, these IE earth bars should be connected to main
grounding dispatcher (main IE earth bar ) in the building via 6mmsq ~ 25mmsq
dedicated green-yellow stripped earthing cable, from the IE grounding dispatcher (
IE main earth bar), it should be connected to the building electric earth rod or earth
grid bed directly via dedicated earth wire.
g. In any circumstance, the Instrument earth / grounding should be totally isolated from
all other grounding system or mental works, except the Instrument earth / grounding
system will eventually terminated and bonded directly to the building eclectic earth
rod or earth grid bed
h. When the control system served in hazardous area where intrinsic technique are
deployed. A dedicated intrinsic grounding system should be provided. the Intrinsic
grounding will follow the similar philosophy as the Instrument clean earth, but the
intrinsic should have dedicated earth rod or earth grid bed that separate from all
other grounding system, and the minimum earth impedance for Intrinsic earth should
be less than 1 ohm.
11. References
a. Refer to the following TCDDs:
1) 260526-001 Typical Ground Rod Connection
2) 260526-002 Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch Grounding
Configuration Detail 4 Pole

Rev. 1 5.5 -54
3) 260526-003 Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch Grounding

Configuration Detail 3 Pole
K. Lightning Protection Systems
1. General
a. Lightning protection shall be considered for all facilities to protect them from damage
and/or disruption caused by a lightning strike. Provision of a lightning protection
system shall include consideration for the following:
1) Impacts to health and safety of the facility occupants
2) Economic impacts associated with damage to facility or equipment
3) Economic impacts associated with facility downtime
4) Impacts or interruption to public services
5) Impacts to commercial or industrial activities
6) Impacts to individuals in residential facilities
7) Impacts to groups in places of assembly
b. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete a lightning risk assessment in
accordance with the latest SBC 401, Chapter 802Code, and IEC Standard 62305 to
summarize the associated risks and provide a recommendation regarding the need
for this protective means for the facility.
c. Where a lightning protection system is required, the components, features and
installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest SBC 401,
Chapter 802.
d. The design for the lightning protection system shall be closely coordinated with the
grounding and surge protection provisions for each facility.
2. Applications
a. Lightning protection for underground electrical distribution is not anticipated to be
extensive due to the routing of the power network below grade. A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall determine the characteristics of lightning arrestors at all substations
to coordinate with the other surge protective devices for each facility.
b. Lightning protection for ordinary buildings and structures is typically provided for the
following facilities. The final determination shall be the result of the lightning risk
assessment and approval by the Royal Commission.
1) Buildings and structures over 30 m in height.
2) Health safety buildings including hospitals, clinics, etc.
3) Public safety buildings including police stations and fire stations
4) School buildings
5) University buildings
6) Places of assembly
7) Data centers
3. Principal Components for Lightning Protection System

Rev. 1 5.5 -55
a. Principal components for the lightning protection system include air terminals,
ground rods and down conductors with adequate number of test points.
b. Selection of the appropriate materials will be dependent on the location and
construction materials. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select materials which are
compatible with the building finishes to ensure adequate protection and avoidance of
any corrosion.
c. Materials selections and installation shall be in accordance with the latest SBC 401,
Chapter 802.
4. Minimum Lightning Protection Features
a. The lightning protection system shall be designed in accordance with the latest SBC
401, Chapter 802.
b. Separate ground rods shall be provided for each down conductor. The down
conductor shall be directly connected to the ground rod. Adequate number of test
points shall be installed. The minimum distance to other earth pits has to be
maintained.
c. The lightning protection ground rods shall be interconnected below grade to the
ground loop which provides the system and equipment ground for the facility.
L. Surge Protection Devices
1. General
a. Protection of buildings, equipment, and operations is critical for facilities throughout
the Jubail Industrial City. Provision of the appropriate surge protection devices shall
include consideration for the following:
1) Impacts to health and safety of the facility occupants
2) Economic impacts associated with damage to facility or equipment
3) Economic impacts associated with facility downtime
4) Impacts or interruption to public services
5) Impacts to commercial or industrial activities
6) Impacts to individuals in residential facilities
7) Impacts to groups in places of assembly
8) Extent and location of protection system devices
b. Critical Facilities that warrant special consideration include:
1) Health Safety - Hospitals and Health Clinics
2) Public Safety - Police and Fire Stations
3) Educational - schools and training centers
4) Transportation - Signaling
5) Data Centers
6) Telecommunications
7) Industrial

Rev. 1 5.5 -56
c. Determination for surge protection shall include an assessment of the facility to

analyze the potential exposure and to develop a recommendation for the level of
protection. Consult IEC standards to complete this assessment and provide a
recommendation to the Royal Commission early in the design phase.
d. Coordinate the surge protection installation with the electrical grounding and
lightning protection system provisions.
e. Sample application levels of surge protection for the various facility types are
summarized in the following Table 5.5.1.F:
TABLE 5.5.1.F: TYPICAL SURGE PROTECTION APPLICATION LEVELS
Facility Type
Telecommunications
Protection Application
Health Safety
Public Safety
Commercial
Data Center
Residential
Industrial
Civic
Service Entrance l l l l l l l l
Distribution Panels l l l l l l
Branch Circuit panels l l l l
Critical Equipment l l l l l l l
Tertiary Devices
l l
(Receptacles)
2. Types of surge protection:

a. Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
1) Parallel-connected, non-linear protective devices for limiting surge voltages on
equipment by discharging, bypassing, or diverting surge current.
b. Filtering/Line Conditioning
1) Units designed to provide clean AC power by helping to eliminate or
dramatically reduce high-voltage transients and low-voltage electrical noise
that degrade microprocessor-based equipment.
(a) Active Tracking Filters (ATF)
(b) Harmonic Filters
(c) Line Conditioners
(d) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
c. Data/signal Line Devices

Rev. 1 5.5 -57
1) Devices designed to protect signal lines from harmful surges.

M. Lighting
1. General
a. This RCJ GEM covers the minimum mandatory requirements for lighting
installations.
b. All lighting systems for interior applications shall be designed in accordance with the
latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
Lighting Handbook.
c. In order to optimize the effective utilization of Iighting energy, interior lighting design
requirements for new buildings shall be in accordance with the IESNA Lighting
Ready Reference / Energy Management IESNA RR-96. Design components for
lighting energy management shall be per considerations in IESNA LEM-3.
d. Lighting design for Industrial Lighting shall be in accordance with IESNA RP-7, as
supplemented by this GEM.
e. Lighting design shall be designed for energy efficient operation.
f. Photometric measurements of sports lighting, when required shall be performed as
per the IESNA LM-5, supplemented by this GEM.
g. Lighting system power supplies consisting of 400/230 Volt, three- phase, three-wire
or four-wire; and 400 Volt, two-wire shall be acceptable. The choice of voltage and
distribution system for lighting installations shall depend on the area to be supplied
and the required lighting load.
h. Direct-control switches and switching contacts used on lighting circuits other than
fluorescent luminaires shall have a continuous current rating of at least 1.5 times the
steady-state current of the lighting load.
i. Direct-control switches and switching contacts used on fluorescent lighting circuits
shall have a continuous current rating of at least twice the steady-state current of the
lighting load.
j. Mounting method of luminaires shall be based on the best arrangement for
illuminance and mounting accessories shall not affect the luminaire components e.g.
(Driver, light source, reflectors, etc.) or lighting output, as well as easy and safe
access during installation and maintenance.
k. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the appropriate lighting selections
based on each application part of the project complying with IESNA category using
latest technology of light source and also the best application of light source, lamp
types, required illumination levels, distribution configuration, and luminaire type for
each application associated with the facility.
l. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the energy efficiency associated with
the recommended lighting solutions and explore opportunities to reduce the energy
consumption by selecting sources and luminaires with high efficiencies and also
capitalize on the use of available daylight.
m. Energy conservation strategies shall conform to latest SBC 601.
n. Luminaires shall be suitable for the environment where they are installed.
Luminaires installed outdoor shall be approved as weather proof and dust tight as
per IEC.

Rev. 1 5.5 -58
o. Luminaires shall be marked, listed or labeled by an independent third party

laboratory (notified body) the associated certificate shall state either that the
luminaires meet appropriate designated standards or have been tested and found
suitable for use in a specified manner.
p. All public lighting systems for exterior use shall be designed in accordance with the
CEN standards see applicable specification section for full list of applicable
standards.
q. All lighting systems for exterior and roadway applications shall be designed in
accordance with CIE 115 and the associated CEN standards. Exterior lighting to
have full cut-off shielding to eliminate glare and light spillage.
r. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the appropriate lighting solutions
based on the best application of light source, lamp types, required lighting design
criteria, distribution configuration, and luminaire type for each application associated
with the facility.
2. Light Source
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the light source which is appropriate for
each residential, commercial, institutional, and industrial facility, and shall ensure
that the selected lighting fixtures, or approved equal, with full data sheet complying
to requirements, is available in local market at the 90% stage of the design, showing
the fixture performance characteristics and aesthetics to be included in the RFP.
Any source of light blocked by SASO shall not be include in the design like Mercury
Vapor or incandescent bulb.
b. Only luminaires with a minimum efficacy of the following shall be used:
c. Indoor luminaries efficacy (85lm/w) or better if available with lights source efficacy
(100lm/w).
d. Outdoor luminaries (non-decorative) 75lm/w and light source efficacy (90lm/w)
e. Outdoor/indoor (decorative light) - 45lm/w and light source 65lm/w.
f. The various light sources have advantages and disadvantages and the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall consider the available sources and provide recommendations
regarding the appropriate light sources to be used throughout a facility.
1) Selection of the light source shall consider the following:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Installation requirements
(c) Color rendition characteristics
(d) Dimming capabilities
(e) Maintenance requirements (and associated health and safety risks)
(f) Availability
(g) Life cycle cost
(h) Internal ambient air temperature (25° C)
(i) Outside ambient air conditions (50° C)
(j) Desired aesthetic result

Rev. 1 5.5 -59
(k) Correlated Color Temperature

g. The three commonly used light sources along with their characteristics include
fluorescent, high intensity discharge (HID), and light-emitting diode. A relative
comparison of the operational characteristics for these light sources is summarized
in Table 5.5.1.G. Each characteristic is rated from 1 to 4 where 1 = the highest and
4 = the lowest in that category.
TABLE 5.5.1.G: LIGHT SOURCE OPERATION COMPARISON
Starting Characteristics
Color Rendition
Light Source
Initial Cost
Dimmable
Lamp Life
Efficacy
Fluorescent 2 2 2 3 2 2
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Note

2 1/4 2 4 2
Metal Halide 1
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Note

1/2 4 1-2 4 2
HPS 1
Light-emitting Diode (LED) 1/2 1-3 2 1 2 4
Notes:
1. Source is only dimmable with specialized control gear.
h. Lamps
1) The lamps selected for each facility shall be standardized as much as possible
to minimize the variety of lamps sources used to achieve the desired aesthetic
results. This standardization will facilitate the maintenance of the lighting
throughout a facility.
2) Fluorescent Lamps
(a) Fluorescent lamps are acceptable for use in all residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities. These lamps have typically been the
most common selection due to the color rendition characteristics, source
life, availability of lighting fixtures, energy efficiency, and associated cost
effectiveness
(b) Compact fluorescent lamps are available in various shapes, wattages
and color temperatures and have become a replacement alternative for
applications that previously utilized incandescent lamps. Compact
fluorescent lamps are acceptable for use in RCJ’s facilities and shall be

Rev. 1 5.5 -60
compared with other source alternatives to determine the most

appropriate applications.
(c) Energy-Efficient type T5 and compatible energy efficient electronic
ballasts having less than 10% THD (voltage total harmonic distortion)
shall be used. Efficacy of Compact fluorescent lights (CFL) shall not be
less than 65-70 Lumen/Watt.
(d) Fluorescent lamps can be used for the following specific applications and
RC approval:
(1) Electrical substations
(2) Electrical switchyard buildings
(3) Control rooms
(4) Offices
(5) Plant rooms
(6) Store rooms
(7) Large ceiling voids and Maintenance access
(e) Fluorescent lamps are available in different shapes, diameters, wattages,
lumen outputs, and color temperatures. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall utilize standard fluorescent lamps that are commercially available
and minimize the types of lamps used throughout the facility. The
following Table 5.5.1.H. provides a list of the commonly used lamps
types, however other wattage and type shall be discussed and approved
by RCJ
TABLE 5.5.1.H: FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Type Control Initial Life

Watts CRI
Description Gear Lumens Hours
8 T5, 288mm E, DE 380 85 20,000
13 T5, 517mm E, DE 680 85 20,000
14 T5/HO,549mm E, DE 1,350 85 20,000
24 T5/HO, 549mm E, DE 2,000 85 20,000
28 T5, 1149mm E, DE 2900 85 20,000
35 T5, 1449mm E, DE 3650 85 20,000
49 T5/HO, 1449mm E, DE 4900 85 20,000
54 T5/HO, 1149mm E, DE 5000 85 20,000
(f) Fluorescent lamps are available with output in a variety of color

temperatures ranging from 3000 to 6500° kelvin.

Rev. 1 5.5 -61
(1) The lamp color temperature output shall be selected as appropriate

for the application.
(2) The lamp color temperature shall preferably be consistent for all
fluorescent lamps throughout a facility to facilitate maintenance.
3) High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps
(a) HID lamps are used for the following applications:
(1) Indoor Commercial and Institutional facilities
(2) Indoor and outdoor Industrial facilities
(3) Outdoor facilities for public circulation spaces, parks, sporting
venues, street lighting and parking
(4) Security lighting
(b) HID lamps have good efficiencies and lamp life however, their color
rendering index (CRI) is lower than other sources and controllability is
less desirable due to warm up and restrike requirements. Specialized
Hot restrike control gear is available for special situations such as public
venues for instant light.
(c) HID lamps are available in the following options:
(1) Metal halide lamps are available in a wide range of wattages and
have the best CRI but the lowest efficacy of the HID options. These
characteristics lend themselves towards applications where color
rendition is critical to the occupancy. Typical applications include
indoor sports facilities, public circulation spaces, and large assembly
spaces such as auditoriums and convention halls and decorative
external lighting where white light and high color rendering are
important.
(2) High pressure sodium lamps are also available in a wide range of
wattages and shapes. The efficacy is higher than metal halide but
their CRI is lower. These characteristics lend themselves towards
applications where color rendition is less critical to the occupancy.
Typical applications include indoor storage, loading docks, vehicular
circulation and outdoor parking, street lighting and security.
(3) Low pressure sodium lamps are outdated technology and shall not
be used without prior agreement with the RCJ. LED /HPS is the
preferred choice for traditional uses. Low pressure sodium lamps are
the most efficient of the HID options but have the lowest CRI. The
light output is monochromatic and typically used in limited
applications which do not require distinction of color. Typical
application is for outdoor security.
(d) Where HID lamps are used the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize
standard HID lamps that are commercially available and minimize the
types of lamps used throughout the facility. The following Table
5.5.1.I.provides a list of the commonly used lamps types.

Rev. 1 5.5 -62
TABLE 5.5.1.I: HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
Watts Type Description Initial Lumens Life Hours Base
Med,E27,Double
70 High Pressure Sodium 6,000 24,000 ended
Med,E27, Double
Med,E27,Double
Mogul,E40,Double
Mogul,E40,Double
1000 High Pressure Sodium 140,000 24,000 Mogul,E40
7,500 Vert. MedE27,Double

70 Metal Halide 5,200 ended
6,000 Hor.
7,500 Vert. Med,E27,Double

6,000 Hor.
10,000Vert. Med,E27,Double
7,500 Hor
10,000 Ver. Mogul,E40,

250 Metal Halide 20,800 Double ended
6,000 Hor.
20,000 Ver. Mogul,E40,Double

15,000 Hor.
15,000 Ver. Mogul,E40

1000 Metal Halide 108,000
11,000 Hor.
1500 Metal Halide 170,000 6,000 Mogul
2000 Metal Halide 220,000 9,000 Double ended
4) Light-emitting Diodes (LED) Lamps

(a) LED lamps are acceptable for indoor use in all residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities. Where a point source distribution is
required. Where an area source is required, LED is an option to be
compared with high efficiency linear fluorescent lamp (T5, either HE or
HO). These lamps have not typically been utilized due to the availability
and cost. Recent developments have increased the availability and
reduced the associated costs. These developments have resulted in the
use of this source for more applications.

Rev. 1 5.5 -63
(b) LED source can have good efficacy and long life but need to be obtained
from a reputable manufacturer. Quality of the driver is also an issue.
Luminaire lumens (LLm) and not bare LED lumens should be used in
calculations. The ambient thermal conditions are critical to the
performance of LEDs and Luminaire Manufacturers are required to
design their thermal management systems to allow the LEDs to operate
to the published values in an ambient air temperature of 25 deg C. which
can easily be present in an unventilated ceiling void and 50 deg C
externally LEDs and they are available in a wide range of color
temperatures. This source is becoming more typical for all types of
applications and thus shall be considered for residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities.
(c) LED for external lighting shall be of high quality manufacturer from
recognized major suppliers from the following list:
(1) Cree
(2) Philips Lumileds
(3) Tridonic
(4) Osram
(5) Nicha
(6) LG
(7) Citizen
(8) SAMSUNG
(d) Other LED suppliers may only be used with the express consent of the
RCJ. ALL LEDs shall be capable of providing a minimum efficacy of
100lm/w at forward design current of less than 700mA with external
ambient air temperature of 50 deg C. all LEDs shall be color consistent
within 5 macadam ellipses. The CRI of LEDs shall be not less than
70Ra. The life expectancy shall be quoted at 80% of initial Lumens and
for a minimum life of 50000hrs. The early life failure of LEDs shall not be
greater than 10% at the quoted life expectancy. All LEDs are to be
warranted by the LED manufacturer operating within the luminaire for a
minimum of half the rated life of the LEDs.
(e) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an economic analysis to
compare LED lamps to others options to determine the best solution.
This analysis shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and
approval.
(f) Designer is responsible for selecting the LED luminaire system
components. This includes as applicable; LED driver and luminaire
controls, heat-sink, self-ballasted or non-self-ballasted, etc.
(g) The luminaire manufacturer shall provide certificate issued by third
party agency (notified body) verifying the luminaire’s performance
including declared luminaire lifetime and lumen maintenance based on
the operating temperature range specified in this standard.
(h) Reflectors or filters shall be provided to control the glare and harmful
light spectrum to safe level. Guidelines and limits of IEC 62471 and /or
the lES handbook shall be applied.

Rev. 1 5.5 -64
(i) Additional Requirements for LED

(1) The LED circuitry shall prevent flicker perceptible to the unaided eye
over the voltage range specified as per IEC 61000-3-3 or IEEE 1453.
(2) All LED components to be designed to tolerate between -20°C and
65°C at 100% Relative Humidity (RH) during non-operating/daytime.
(3) Voltage THD induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not
exceed 10%.
(4) Thermal management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or
other mechanical devices shall not be allowed.
(5) Cable between LED Module and driver shall be low smoke and
halogen free type.
5) Control Gear and Drivers
(a) All ballasts and drivers for fluorescent, HID and LED lamps shall be
manufactured to meet the requirements of IEC Standards and Pre-
standard Specifications for lamp control gear.
(1) Fluorescent ballasts shall be DALI HF electronic type. Dimming
electronic ballasts shall be standard for all areas where daylight is
present..
(2) HID ballasts shall be electronic type up to 150 watts.
(3) LED drivers shall be DALI electronic type constant current.
(4) For external luminaires all ballasts and drivers shall be rated to a
minimum of IP 23 and have Ta 50 deg C and Tc 80 deg C.
(5) All ballasts and drivers shall have a minimum design life of 50,0000
hrs. in their prescribed operating conditions.
(6) ALL LED drivers shall operate to protect the LEDs should the
temperature exceed their maximum operating temperature. Firstly by
dimming the output of the LEDs up to 80% of full output and then by
switching off the LEDs should the temperature still be high. An alarm
shall be generated by the ballast in line with the DALI protocol and
communicated to the LMS as high level alarm.
(7) LED drivers should be capable of being mounted in the base of poles
and operating the LEDs remotely for up to 25m distance.
3. Interior Lighting
a. Illumination levels for spaces in all residential, commercial, institutional and industrial
applications shall be selected in accordance with the procedures and
recommendations provided in the latest edition of the IESNA Lighting Handbook.
1) Illumination levels shall consider the following criteria:
(a) The task being performed
(b) The ages of the occupants
(c) The importance of speed and accuracy
(d) Luminaire mounting height

Rev. 1 5.5 -65
(e) Work plane height

2) The selection of the appropriate light source, lamp and luminaires shall
consider the following criteria:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Lamp lumen output
(c) Lamp operation characteristics including lamp lumen depreciation
(d) Environment characteristics and associated dirt depreciation
(e) Utilization Factor
(f) Room shape and size
(g) Room finish characteristics including reflectance
(h) Availability of natural daylight
(i) Correlated Color Temperature
3) The quality of the lighting solution designed for each space shall include
consideration for the following:
(a) Glare shall be reduced by utilizing the appropriate luminaire features.
The application of direct, direct/indirect, or indirect distribution shall be
evaluated to apply the appropriate system for each space. The light
control mechanism including lens, louver, etc. shall be selected to
minimize the adverse effects of glare.
(b) The lighting shall be distributed evenly over the task to maintain
illuminance uniformity. The following are the average to minimum ratios
which should be considered when designed the lighting system for
interior applications:
(1) Uniformity ratio of 2:1 is considered excellent and should be used for
critical tasks.
(2) Uniformity ratio of 3:1 is considered good and is the typical uniformity
to be used for the majority of applications.
(3) Uniformity ratio of 4:1 is considered fair and is appropriate for used in
applications which are less critical.
(c) Color rendering characteristics of the source is identified as the color
rendering index (CRI) and shall be carefully considered when selecting
the source for each application.
(1) CRI between 75 and 100 is considered excellent.
(2) CRI between 65 and 75 is considered good.
(3) CRI between 55 and 65 is considered fair.
(4) CRI below 55 is considered poor.
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate illumination levels
for all spaces within a facility. The standard illumination levels for various
locations and occupancies are listed in Table 5.5.1.J.

Rev. 1 5.5 -66
TABLE 5.5.1.J: ILLUMINATION LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS BY OCCUPANCY

Elevation
Horizontal Vertical of Working
Illumination Illumination Plane
Location/Occupancy Level in Lux Level in Lux (mm)
CONTROL AND DISPATCH
General 550 800
Vertical Panels 550 1700
Desks 550 800
DINING FACILITIES
Dining Areas (Leisure Service) 330 800
Dining Areas (Quick Service) 550 800
Food Preparation 550 900
Entrance Hall 300 Floor
ELECTRICAL ROOM
Substation (General) 220 Floor
Vertical Face of Switchgear 330 1700
Battery Room 220 Floor
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Telecom Equipment Room 200 Floor
OFFICES
Regular 600 800
Conference Room 500 800
Drafting (Mixed CAD and Paper
Tasks) 600 700 800
Corridors 150 Floor
Stairways 200 Floor
Elevator 200 Floor
Washrooms 200 900
WAREHOUSE
Indoor Bulk Storage 100 Floor
Indoor Barrel Storage 110 Floor
Countertops 300 1200
Parts Storage 200 900

Rev. 1 5.5 -67
Elevation
RELIGIOUS PLACES
Mosque 300 Floor
SPORTS AND RECREATION
Volleyball 300 Floor
Basketball 300 Floor
WORK SHOPS
General 300 Floor
Rough Bench or Machine Work 500 900
Medium Bench or Machine Work 500 900
Fine Bench or Machine Work 3000 900
Corridors 200 Floor
Washrooms 100 900
SCHOOLS
Chalkboards 500 Task
Classrooms 500 800
Science Laboratories 500 300 900
Shops 500 900
Art Rooms 500 800
Music Rooms 500 800
Library 300 800
Corridors 200 Floor
HOSPITAL
Examination Rooms 500 800
Patient Rooms 50 900
Procedure Rooms 500 900
Laboratories 500 900
Therapy 300 Floor
Nurse Stations 500 800
Corridors Nursing Areas 100 Floor

Rev. 1 5.5 -68
Elevation
Corridors Procedure Areas 500 900
Waiting Room 300 Floor
Notes:
1. Illumination levels for locations and occupancies not listed in this table shall
be in accordance with IESNA Lighting Handbook.
b. Residential Lighting
1) Residential facilities typically utilize a mixture of LED and fluorescent
lamps/luminaires due to the excellent color rendering capabilities, availability of
lighting fixtures, dimming capability, and cost.
2) Development and availability of compact fluorescent lamps has resulted in the
replacement of incandescent lamps..
3) Recent developments with LED lamps has improved availability and associated
cost and their use is anticipated to increase as the availability of luminaires
improves. The LED sources offer good color rendering, high efficacy and
excellent control capabilities.
4) For decorative purposes, a combination of recessed, pendant, track mounted,
and wall mounted luminaires are utilized to provide adequate illumination and
satisfy aesthetic objectives.
5) The voltages used for residential lighting shall be in accordance with Table
5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
c. Commercial and Institutional Lighting
1) Commercial and Institutional type facilities typically utilize a mixture of
fluorescent, high intensity discharge and LED lamps/luminaires.
(a) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are the primary source.
(1) Compact fluorescent lamps/luminaires are utilized in applications
where incandescent lamps/fixtures were typically used.
(2) High output fluorescent lamps/luminaires are acceptable for spaces
with high ceilings where instant start characteristic of this source is
advantageous. These occupancies include gymnasiums, high bay
storage spaces and other similar occupancies.
(b) High intensity discharge lamps/luminaires may be used for interior high
ceiling applications, loading docks, storage areas, parking facilities, and
other similar occupancies.
(1) Metal halide lamps/luminaires are the preferred source for interior
applications where color rendition is critical. Examples include public
circulation, indoor sports arenas, gymnasiums, and places of
assembly.

Rev. 1 5.5 -69
(2) High pressure sodium lamps/luminaires are applicable to interior

occupancies where color rendition is not as critical and include
loading docks, storage areas, and parking garages,
(c) Recent developments with LED lamps has improved availability and
associated cost and their use is anticipated to increase as the availability
of luminaires improves. The LED sources offer good color rendering,
high efficacy and excellent control capabilities. This source shall be
considered for all interior applications in Commercial and Institutional
facilities to determine the cost effectiveness.
2) The voltages used for commercial and institutional lighting shall be in
accordance with Table 5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
d. Industrial Lighting
1) Industrial type facilities typically utilize a mixture of fluorescent, high intensity
discharge and LED lamps/luminaires.
2) Lighting for industrial facilities shall be selected in accordance with the
procedures and recommendations provided in the latest edition of the American
National Standard Practice for Industrial Lighting: ANSI IESNA RP-7.
(a) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are acceptable for use for industrial
facilities.
(1) Availability of high output fluorescent lamps has resulted in the
increased application of fluorescent lamps/luminaires for high bay
spaces. This source is advantageous due to its instant start and
instant restrike characteristics.
(2) Compact fluorescent lamps/luminaires shall be considered for
industrial applications where instant start is required for the
application.
(b) High intensity discharge shall be given preference for use in industrial
facilities.
(1) Metal halide lamps/luminaires have the higher CRI and shall be
applied to occupancies that require this higher color rendering for
performance of the tasks.
(2) High pressure sodium fixtures have a lower CRI and are acceptable
for occupancies where color rendering is not as critical for
performance of tasks.
3) The voltages used for industrial lighting shall be in accordance with Table
e. Emergency Lighting
1) Emergency lighting shall be provided throughout each facility to illuminate the
designated means of egress, including the exit discharge, to allow the
occupants to safely exit in the event of a power outage. Minimum duration of
emergency lighting in the event of normal power failure shall be one-and-one
half hours.
(a) Illumination levels for the means of egress shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the latest SBC 801.

Rev. 1 5.5 -70
(b) The egress path lighting shall be supplied from the life safety branch of
the backup power system or may be supplied from a self-contained
integral battery power source.
(c) Duration of operation for means of egress lighting shall be in accordance
with the latest SBC 801.
(d) The power source for emergency lighting shall be supplied ahead of the
switch or control device.
2) Supplemental emergency lighting shall also be considered for special
occupancies in critical facilities such as hospitals, important offices,
communications centers, etc. to facilitate normal operation of these critical
facilities during a normal power interruption.
(a) Lighting levels for these special occupancies during normal power
interruptions shall be selected to allow safe operation. The A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall provide recommendations for the special
applications and associated lighting levels to the Royal Commission for
approval.
(b) These supplemental emergency lighting applications shall be supplied
from the standby branch of the backup power system or may be supplied
from a self-contained battery power source.
(c) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the duration of
operation for supplemental emergency lighting with the Royal
Commission to ensure that it is sufficient for the criticality of the
occupancy.
3) Emergency lighting shall be provided in electrical rooms. A minimum
emergency illumination level of 100 lux shall be provided at finished floor level.
4) Luminaires installed in the control room shall provide shadow less illumination.
In addition, lighting for control rooms shall be designed for maximum flexibility
to permit flicker-free variation of illumination levels above each group of
operator workstations. Luminaires shall be installed to minimize reflections and
glare at operating screens.
5) Normal and emergency task lighting of at least 200 lux shall be provided for
the following;
(a) In plant areas to illuminate equipment required for use in emergencies,
such as: emergency telephones, shutdown and emergency isolation
stations, fire water pump areas, central foam concentrate mixing
areas, fire control panels, breathing apparatus & fire extinguisher
station, and stand-by generators.
(b) In evacuation assembly areas and in off-shore platform escape capsule
areas and boat landing.
6) The preferred power supply for emergency lighting is the backup power source.
However, in the event a central backup power source is not provided as part of
the building infrastructure, the emergency lighting may be supplied from a self-
contained battery power source.
f. Exit Signs
1) Exit signs shall be located throughout each facility in accordance with the
requirements of the latest SBC 801.

Rev. 1 5.5 -71
2) Exits signs shall be internally illuminated in accordance with the latest SBC 801.
3) The preferred power supply for exit signs is the backup power source.
However, in the event a central backup power source is not provided as part of
the building infrastructure, the emergency lighting may be supplied from a self-
contained battery power source. Nickel cadmium batteries are not permitted.
4) Duration of operation for exit signs shall be in accordance with the latest SBC
801.
5) Illuminated exit signs shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with
NFPA 101 requirements.
4. Exterior Lighting
a. General
1) This section covers Building floodlighting, Area lighting, Sports lighting, and
Security lighting.
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.F Site Lighting for additional information
requirements pertaining to exterior lighting associated with Site
Development for Buildings.
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting for additional
information and requirements pertaining to exterior lighting associated
with roadways, parking areas and sidewalk lighting.
2) Illumination levels for exterior spaces in all residential, commercial, institutional
and industrial applications shall be selected in accordance with the procedures
and recommendations provided in the latest edition of the Illuminating
Engineering Society of North America, Lighting Handbook and reference
should be made to CIE 115 and the associated CEN standards and guidance
for road and exterior lighting. All public spaces are to be lit to the CEN
methodology.
3) Illumination levels for exterior applications shall consider the following criteria:
(a) The task being performed
(b) Security and safety of the occupants
4) The selection of the appropriate light source, lamp and luminaires shall
consider the following criteria:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Lamp lumen output
(c) Lamp operation characteristics including lamp lumen depreciation
(d) Luminaire efficiency
(e) Color Rendering Index
(f) Correlated Color Temperature
5) The quality of the lighting solution designed for each exterior application shall
(a) Horizontal illumination
(b) Vertical illumination

Rev. 1 5.5 -72
(c) Uniformity ratios

(d) Color rendering characteristics of the source is identified as the color
rendering index (CRI) and shall be carefully considered when selecting
the source for each application.
(1) CRI between 75 and 100 is considered excellent.
(2) CRI between 60 and 75 is considered white light.
(3) CRI between 20 and 60 is considered semi-monochromatic.
(4) CRI below 20 is considered monochromatic.
The CIE color groups also give good indication of color rendering and color
appearance.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate illumination levels
for all exterior applications. The standard illumination levels for exterior
locations and occupancies except Roadway Lighting are listed in Table 5.5.1.K.
TABLE 5.5.1.K: ILLUMINATION LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EXTERIOR
Horizontal Vertical Elevation

Illumination Illumination of
Level in Level in Working Uniformity
Location/Occupancy Lux Lux Plane Ratio
BUILDING FLOODLIGHTING
Not Vertical 5:1

Façade (Dark Surroundings) 35
Applicable Plane Note 2
Not Vertical 5:1

Facade (Bright Surroundings) 90
Applicable Plane Note 2
AREA LIGHTING
20 10 20:1
Parking - Basic Ground
Minimum Minimum Max:Min
50 25 15:1
Parking - Enhanced Security Ground
Minimum Minimum Max:Min
15 20 4:1
Public Park Ground
Minimum Avg @ 1.5m Avg:Min
Common and/or Sitting Areas 60 60 4:1

Ground
(CEN EN 13201) Minimum Min @ 1.5m Avg:Min
60 60 4:1
Walkways Ground
Minimum Min @ 1.5m Avg:Min
SPORTS LIGHTING

Rev. 1 5.5 -73
Horizontal Vertical Elevation

Illumination Illumination of
Level in Level in Working Uniformity
Location/Occupancy Lux Lux Plane Ratio
Not 4:1 or less

Soccer (Class IV) 500 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less

Volleyball (Class IV) 200 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less

Basketball (Class IV) 200 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less

Tennis (Class IV) 500 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
SECURITY LIGHTING
Not 4:1 or less

Entrance 100 Ground
Applicable Avg:Min
Not 4:1 or less

Perimeter 50 Ground
Applicable Avg:Min
Notes:
1. All public areas are to be lit in accordance with road lighting section 5.6.3.
2. Uniformity ratio is lighted surface to immediate surroundings.
3. All external lighting is required to meet the obstructive lighting standard’s
identified within sections 5.6.3, and 5.3.
7) Luminaires
(a) Luminaires shall be heavy-duty, weather-proof type suitable for use in
the Jubail outdoor environment to a minimum of IP 65 IK08.
(b) All components and features shall be suitable to withstand the
environmental conditions and shall be selected to minimize maintenance
requirements.
(c) Luminaires use for decorative applications shall use bollards sparingly.
Bollards shall be used mainly for aesthetic function and not as the prime
illumination source. Bollards can be used as a prime illumination for
walkways, gardens, and like places. Typical bollard applications include
landscaped areas, shopping arcades, walkways at building entrances,
etc.
(d) LED luminaires shall be fully designed by the luminaire manufacturer to
take account of the high ambient air temperature and relative humidity the
light output of the luminaire should be quoted on the basis of a luminaire
operation in an environment of 50 deg C and 95% RH min. The luminaire
manufacturer shall take overall responsibility for the functioning of the

Rev. 1 5.5 -74
LEDs, drivers and the luminaire body to enable the stated operating
parameter of the system to be maintained through life.
(e) The luminaire body shall be made of high quality die cast aluminum and
shall be coated with a finish which is dust shedding and the body designed
to comply with IEC 60068-2 Part 2 Test L.
(f) The luminaire optics shall be made of borosilicate glass and shall be
treated with a coating to prevent the accumulation of dust. The optic seals
shall be tested to ensure that the thermal effects of heating and cooling
does not damage the seals.
(g) The luminaire shall be designed to accept the RCJ’s chosen LMS system.
(h) The luminaire body shall have 2 separate compartments for Lamp/LEDs
and control gear.
8) Poles
(a) Exterior lighting poles shall be fiberglass, stainless steel, hot-dipped
galvanized steel, anodized aluminum or precast concrete. Painted poles
can be used if decorative poles are required but with special treatment
before paint and also special paint type to resist corrosion. Painted poles
shall not be used without the express agreement with the RCJ. Typical
pole selections are summarized in Table 5.5.1.L: Exterior Lighting Pole
Applications.
TABLE 5.5.1.L: EXTERIOR LIGHTING POLE APPLICATIONS

Pole Material
Application Galvanized Anodized
Fiberglass Precast Concrete
Steel Aluminum
Walkways
Sports Facilities
Security
Freeways
Expressways
Collectors
Corniche
Interchanges
Local 2 & 4 Lane
Residential Road
Cul-de-sac
Cycle ways
(b) Metallic lighting poles shall be provided with slip-base plate and break
away fuses which is designed to slide off a lower plate upon impact,
except where the speed limit for the road is less than 60 km/hr or where

Rev. 1 5.5 -75
poles are located behind elevated curbs. In these latter cases, the poles
shall be provided with fixed bases.
(c) Poles and associated foundations shall be designed using EN 40 for a
sustained wind speed of 30m/s and intermittent 3 sec gusts in a 30min
period of 45m/s.
(d) Poles shall be positioned at the rear of footpaths ideally.
(e) The use of outreach arms shall be minimized and outreach arms over
2.5m should not be used without the express approval of the RCJ.
(f) Where trees are present outreach arms should bring the luminaire to the
front of the agreed tree canopy. Trees are to be coordinated with
landscape design so the agreed separation distance of 6m can be
maintained.
9) Grounding
(a) Metallic poles, posts, luminaire housings and all non-current carrying
metallic parts shall be grounded.
(b) Individual ground rods shall be provided for each pole of a minimum of
3m in depth to achieve 25 ohms resistance.
(c) Where the concentration of poles or bollards is heavy, consideration
shall be given to sharing the ground rods between locations and/or
grounding conductor(s) may be run from the nearest panel, i.e. less than
6m.
(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide recommendations
regarding grounding provisions for exterior lighting to the Royal
Commission for approval.
10) The voltages used for all exterior lighting shall be in accordance with Table
b. Building Floodlighting
1) Floodlighting for the exterior of a facility may be considered for security and/or
aesthetic purposes.
(a) Application of building floodlighting for security purposes shall be
discussed and approved by the Royal Commission.
(b) Application of building floodlighting for aesthetic purposes shall only be
allowed if specifically requested and approved by the Royal Commission.
Facade lighting illuminance shall meet the obtrusive light requirement
outlined in sections 5.6.3, and 5.3.
c. Area Lighting
1) Area lighting includes illumination for parking areas, public parks and walkways
which are not adjacent to roadways.
2) Exterior Area lighting may utilize a mixture of fluorescent, HID and LED
lamps/luminaires.
(a) HID sources are the most common with metal halide being used where
color rendition is critical and high pressure sodium used for less critical
applications.

Rev. 1 5.5 -76
(b) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are utilized for decorative applications and

where instant start is required.
(c) LED lamps/luminaires for exterior applications shall conform to the RCJ
Exterior Lighting specification. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
confirm the acceptability of LED source for exterior application with the
Royal Commission.
3) Installation requirements
(a) Direct buried armored cable shall be used for lighting circuits.
(b) Cables routed under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased
duct banks.
d. Sports Lighting
1) Sports lighting shall utilize either High Intensity Discharge or LED light sources.
(a) LED lamps/luminaires shall be used for most applications as a primary
light fixture selection, or Metal halide (RC approval is required) to provide
good color rendering capabilities of more than 60Ra.
(b) High pressure sodium lamps/luminaires may be used for applications
where color rendition is not critical. Several example applications
include, golf driving range, archery range, and other similar sports
venues.
(a) Underground lighting circuits shall be routed around and not under sports
fields and tracks. This will prevent future disruption to playing surfaces.
(b) Direct buried armored cable or direct buried PVC conduits with
conductors shall be used for lighting circuits.
(c) Cables routed in locations subject to possible mechanical damage or
under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased duct banks.
3) Sports lighting shall utilize LED light sources.
e. Security Lighting
1) Security lighting shall be provided for selected facilities as determined by the
Royal Commission. Security lighting shall be designed in accordance with the
Directives of the High Commission for Industrial Security (HCIS) Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
2) Security lighting shall utilize high or low pressure sodium light sources.
(a) Security lighting shall be located to be inaccessible to intruders and
protected from vandalism.
(b) Security lighting fixtures shall include vandal resistant features.
(c) Direct buried armored cable shall be used for lighting circuits.
(d) Cables routed under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased
duct banks.
f. Illumination of Areas Adjacent to Roadway

Rev. 1 5.5 -77
1) People and objects adjacent to the roadway need to be seen by the driver.
Such locations include unmade verges, footways and cycle paths and the
emergency lanes of motorways.
2) The lighting for these areas should conform to the lighting criteria including
surround ratio as stated in Lighting of Roads for Motor And Pedestrian Traffic -
International Commission on Illumination Technical Report (CIE 115).
g. Lighting Recommendations for Conflict Areas
1) A conflict area is one in which traffic flows merge or cross, e.g. at intersections
or roundabouts, or where vehicles and other road users, are in close proximity,
e.g. on a shopping street or at a pedestrian crossing.
2) The lighting for these areas should conform to the lighting criteria as stated in
Lighting of Roads for Motor And Pedestrian Traffic - International Commission
on Illumination Technical Report (CIE 115) Minimum illumination requirement
for pedestrian crossings shall be as per CIE S 015/E:2005.
5. Lighting Calculations
a. Approved lighting criteria shall be developed for all interior and exterior applications.
1) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare a summary of the recommended
maintained illumination levels for all interior occupancies. Refer to Table
5.5.1.JmaintainedIllumination Level Recommendations by Occupancy. This
summary shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
This summary shall be part of the 30% design submissions.
2) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare a summary of the recommended
maintained illumination levels for all exterior applications. Refer to Table
5.5.1.Kmaintained Illumination Level Recommendations Exterior. This
summary shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
This summary shall be part of the 30% design submissions.
b. Lighting calculations shall be performed using either the lumen or point-by-point
methods utilizing approved RCJ software package(s). The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall prepare lighting calculations plan and at the 30% design stage for
approval by RCJ. Lighting calculations to be conducted for all differing spaces
associated with the facility.
1) Interior calculations should be carried out using approved computer software.
Approved software packages are DiaLux, ReLux, and AGI32.
2) Point-by-point method is used for more complicated geometric spaces, where
lighting performance is critical, and for exterior applications. These calculations
are typically prepared utilizing commercially available software such as Dialux
or AGi32 which was developed by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
3) Prepared calculations shall identify the performance of the selected
source/fixture with respect to the recommended lighting criteria.
4) The results of these calculations may be presented in tabular or graphic format
to illustrate the lighting performance in a formal calculation submission at the
60% design stage for the Royal Commission for review and approval.. The
results of the calculations shall be summarized in tabular form on the design
drawings.
5) The calculations shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and
approval.

Rev. 1 5.5 -78
c. Interior Lighting
1) All interior lighting calculations shall be prepared using point-by-point method
and shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for approval.
d. Exterior Lighting
1) All exterior lighting calculations shall be prepared using point-by-point method
and shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for approval.
N. Lighting Control Systems
1. General
a. Controls for lighting systems are intended to provide the occupants with the
capability to manually operate the artificial lighting for convenience and comfort. In
addition, automatic controls are intended to be used to enhance the security for
facilities and reduce the energy use associated with artificial lighting throughout a
facility.
b. Lighting control energy conservation strategies shall conform to the latest SBC 601.
2. Interior
a. Localized Room Controls
1) Manual Switches
(a) Local switches shall be applied in all spaces to provide the occupants
with capability to manually control the lighting fixtures.
(b) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the provision of multiple
switches to facilitate zone control and/or multiple lighting levels to suit the
functional requirements of the space.
2) Occupancy Sensors
(a) Occupancy sensors shall be applied in spaces to allow the artificial
lighting to be automatically turned off when the space is unoccupied.
(b) Occupancy sensors shall be interconnected with the local switching to
facilitate manual operation by the occupants.
(c) Occupancy sensors types and locations shall be carefully selected for
the space controlled.
(d) Occupancy sensor types and common applications include the following:
(1) Ultrasonic sensors are typically applied to corridor applications due
to the increased spacing coverage.
(2) Dual technology (ultrasonic and passive infrared) are typically applied
to most applications
(e) Occupancy sensor mounting shall utilize the following options:
(1) Combination wall switch/occupancy sensor may be used for small
rooms where the location of the sensor in the wall switch adequately
covers the entire room.
(2) Wall or ceiling mounted occupancy sensors separate from the
manual wall switches are typical utilized to optimize the coverage.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate mounting

Rev. 1 5.5 -79
location to provide the best coverage and the least opportunity for
false activation.
3) Daylighting Sensors
(a) Daylighting sensors shall be applied in spaces with ample natural light to
automatically turn off artificial lighting when the daylight contributions are
sufficient to satisfy the lighting level requirements.
(b) Daylighting control may be applied using a space-by-space or central
system approach.
(1) Space-by-space approach includes provision of photocells to
measure the daylight contribution within the spaces and control the
lighting fixtures within that space. The daylighting control shall be
integrated with the other control means including any manual
switches and/or occupancy sensors.
(2) Central system approach includes provision of photocell(s) in a space
to measure the daylight contribution within the space and control of
the lighting in that space through the central lighting control system.
(c) Daylighting control may be applied using the following approaches:
(1) On/off control of individual lamps within lighting fixtures.
(2) On/off control of banks of lighting fixtures in zones.
(3) Dimming control of lamps within lighting fixtures.
4) Emergency Transfer Devices
(a) Occupancies which require emergency lighting for safe egress but
require these lights to be turned off for various activities shall utilize an
emergency transfer device for the lighting controls. Emergency transfer
devices sense the status of the normal power source and automatically
energize the emergency lighting in the event of a power interruption
regardless of the on/off status prior to the interruption.
5) Dimmer Switches
(a) Manual dimmer switches shall be applied in spaces where dimming of
the lighting fixtures is required.
(b) Diming switches shall be selected to coordinate with the lighting source
and associated ballast/driver.
6) Digital Timer Switch
(a) Digital timer switches shall be utilized in spaces where occupancy
sensors are not appropriate for automatic control of the lighting. Typical
applications for digital timer switches include Mechanical Equipment
Rooms, Telecom Rooms, and other spaces that are typically only
occupied for short durations.
b. Central Lighting Controls
1) General
(a) A central lighting control system shall be applied where the economics of
a central system are justified.

Rev. 1 5.5 -80
(b) The extent of a central lighting control system may include all spaces in
the facility or only a portion of the spaces. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations for the extent of a central
system approach to the Royal Commission for approval.
2) Smart Relay Based System
(a) Typical central lighting control systems utilize a network of intelligent
relay panels to control the lighting circuits.
(1) The control panels house multiple relays and the lighting circuits are
routed through the panels to facilitate control of these circuits.
(2) The lighting control panels are interconnected via communication
cable to form a dedicated lighting control network and the system
uses a microprocessor to control the lighting from a time clock
function and/or other external devices such as switches, occupancy
sensors, photocell, etc.
(3) Communication within the lighting control panels and lighting control
components should be advised by the selected supplier, but normally
the Lonworks and KNX technique are predominant in the market. The
AE should include dedicated lighting control system network
architecture drawing for properly define the lighting control system
and networks.
3) Wireless System
(a) Wireless control is available from many manufacturers protocols
including Enocean and ZigBee. The use of wireless control devices shall
be considered by A/E and/or EPC Contractor when selecting the
appropriate central lighting control system.
(b) Use of a wireless lighting control system shall coordinate with other
functions in the facility to ensure that there are no impacts to other
wireless system in the facility. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide
recommendations for application of wireless lighting controls to the Royal
Commission for approval.
4) Integration
(a) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the benefits of integrating the
lighting control system with the building DDC/BAS system.
(b) Integration with building DDC/BAS system should be via Bacnet IP
communication gateway or Lonwalks IP / KNXnet IP protocol when the
selected DDC/BMS can support various standard industrial protocols.
(c) Integration by using interposed change over relay contacts is not
recommended and should be obtain approval from RC during the
concept design ( 30%) phase
(d) The automatic lighting control schedule, lighting zone controls should be
programmed within the lighting controller. However, all lighting control
status should be able to be visualized, displayed, remote monitored and
controlled from BAS workstation, from the BAS workstation, customized
lighting layout graphics should be available, and the operator should be
able to override the lighting control schedule and manually switch on/off
individual lighting control circuits as required.

Rev. 1 5.5 -81
(e) In case the offered BAS material cannot support the full monitoring and
control functions for the lighting control system as per description above,
a dedicated lighting control workstation should be provided.
(f) This integration may be desirable to initiate other control function in the
facility. Examples of possible control functions include:
(1) Use of occupancy sensors to initiate HVAC setback sequence when
a space is unoccupied.
(2) Use of photocell for activation of ceiling fans for air circulation.
c. Dimming Controls
1) Architectural Dimming System
(a) Occupancies that warrant a multi-zone, preset lighting control system
with dimming capability shall be provided with an architectural dimming
system.
(1) Architectural dimming system shall be provided with dimming and
control components necessary for the quantity of zones served.
(2) A master control station shall be provided and located to facilitate the
setup of preset scenes appropriate for the occupancy.
(3) Remote control stations shall be located at all entrances and other
appropriate control points such as lectern, demonstration station,
control station, etc.
(4) Common applications for architectural dimming systems include
conference rooms, meeting rooms, seminar rooms, classrooms,
public lobbies, etc.
(5) Interface with audio visual controls may also be desirable to facilitate
a single control point for various applications. A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate between the lighting control and audio
visual requirements and provide a recommendation for integration of
these systems to the Royal Commission for approval.
(6) A standard protocol is to be utilized. DALI is preferred choice
alternatives may be submitted for approval at the 10% design stage.
2) Theatrical Dimming System
(a) Various occupancies such as auditoriums, mosques and other
performance venues may warrant a more substantial dimming control
system to facilitate the required control for the associated lighting
equipment. For these unique applications, a theatrical dimming system
shall be utilized.
(1) Theatrical dimming system shall be provided with separate cabinet(s)
to house the dimming modules for all required control channels.
(2) Control stations shall be conveniently located to facilitate setup and
control of lighting fixtures from all required control points.
(3) Interface with audio visual controls may also be desirable to facilitate
a single control point for various applications. A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate between the lighting control and audio

Rev. 1 5.5 -82
visual requirements and provide a recommendation for integration of

these systems to the Royal Commission for approval.
(4) DMX512 is the preferred protocol for theatrical systems.
3. Exterior
a. Building floodlighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled
lighting contactor(s).
1) Include manual override (On-Off-Auto Selector Switch) and locate at the source
panel.
2) Photocell shall be located at a tamperproof height.
b. Area lighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled lighting
contactor(s).
panel.
c. Sports lighting circuits shall be switched on and off by the energizing of master
override control. Secondary controls downstream of the master override shall
include photocell and time clock controlled lighting contactor(s).
panel.
d. Security lighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled
lighting contactor(s).
panel.
4. Lighting Control Strategies
a. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate control strategies for each
application. The recommended control strategies for typical applications are
summarized in Table 5.5.1.M for interior and Table 5.5.1.N. for exterior. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall develop recommendations for locations and
occupancies not identified in these tables and submit to the Royal Commission for
approval.

Rev. 1 5.5 -83
TABLE 5.5.1.M: INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS
Localized Room Control Central Control System
Occupancy Sensors (linked to DALI system
Photocells for Daylighting Control (linked to

Low Voltage Switches or Preset Stations
Architectural Dimming System DALI
Toggle Switches - Multiple Levels
Toggle Switches - Zoned Control
Photocell for Daylighting Control
Theatrical Dimming DMX 512

Toggle Switch - Single Level
Emergency Transfer Device

Occupancy Sensor(s)
Central Relay Panels

Digital Timer Switch
Dimmer Switch
DALI system)
Location/Occupancy
Offices l l l l l
Conference Rooms l l l l l l
Classrooms l l l l l
Gymnasium l l l
Assembly Space l l l1 l
Auditorium l l l l1 l
Public Lobby l l l1 l
Atrium l l l1 l
Warehouse l l
Repair Shop l l
Central Plant l l
Corridors l l l1 l
Restrooms l l l1
Electrical Room l
Mechanical Room l l l

Rev. 1 5.5 -84
Rev. 1
Telecom Room
Location/Occupancy
Building
Toggle Switch - Single Level
Public Park
Floodlighting
Notes:
Toggle Switches - Multiple Levels
Walkways (public)
Location/Occupancy
Toggle Switches - Zoned Control

Toggle Switch
Dimmer Switch
Contactor with Astronomical Time Clock
l
Occupancy Sensor(s)
Occupancy Sensor(s)
Localized Control
Photocell for Daylighting Control
Localized Room Control
Photocell at Fixture
l
Digital Timer Switch
Architectural lighting control (DALI)
l
Multi-pole Contactor
l
Central Relay Panels

Street lighting LMS (DALI wireless)
l
l
Architectural Dimming System DALI
Central Control
Programmed time clock
Theatrical Dimming DMX 512
Occupancy Sensors
1. Manual On/Auto/Off, Absence detection a time delay of 15 minutes.
Low Voltage Switches or Preset Stations

TABLE 5.5.1.N: EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS
Common Photocell
l
Occupancy Sensors (linked to DALI system
Central Control System
Photocells for Daylighting Control (linked to
5.5 -85
DALI system)
Localized Control Central Control
Contactor with Astronomical Time Clock
Street lighting LMS (DALI wireless)

Architectural lighting control (DALI)
Programmed time clock

Occupancy Sensor(s)
Occupancy Sensors
Photocell at Fixture
Common Photocell
Toggle Switch
Location/Occupancy
Parking (public) l l
Walkways (private) l l
Parking (private) l
Sports Lighting l l
Security l l l l
O. Electrical Equipment Remote Monitoring

1. General
a. Electrical system and equipment should be remotely monitored by central DDC/BAS
or PLC/SCADA system. Refer to RC standard specifications for each individual
electrical equipment interface and integration requirements. the basic concepts of
interface and integrations requirements are summarized as below:
2. For Medium Voltage Switchgear
a. Medium voltages 34.5KV, 13.8KV, and 4.16KV, and low voltage (400V) switchgears,
Main Distribution Panel (MDP) , Emergency Main Distribution Panel (EMDP) that
located within the RC project battery limit.
1) All Income circuit breakers on/off and trip status, all income power meter for
voltage, current, KW, and power factors, all outgoing circuit breaker on/off and
trip status should be remotely monitored.
2) Serial links are preferred for interface and integration with central monitoring
system. Hardwired I/O will be considered only when the central monitoring
system don’t support the respective serial link communication protocols.
3. For Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS).
a. Typically, the ATS normal power source circuit breaker on/off and trip status,
emergency power source on/off and trip status, ATS common alarms should be
remotely monitored.

Rev. 1 5.5 -86
b. Interface and integration with central monitoring system can be hardwired or serial
links based on the ATS selected materials.
4. For Transformer
a. Transformer winding temperature high alarm, oil temperature high alarm and seal oil
level low alarm are normally to be remotely monitored, the AE will define other
additional critical signals if necessary in each specific project.
5. For Diesel Generator and Generator Fuel Oil System.
a. Generator control panel should provide serial links with central monitoring system,
all generator data and status should be properly visualized, displayed, monitored by
the central monitoring system.
b. The generator diesel bulk storage tank and fuel oil transfer controls, daily tank levels
should be remote monitored by the central monitoring system,
c. Interface and integration with central monitoring system can be hardwired and serial
links, refer to RC specification - Section 26.32.13.13 for detail monitoring
requirements.
6. For MCC/MCP Starter Control Panel and for MCC/MCP VFD panels
a. MCC/MCP control panel income circuit breaker on/off and strip status, income
multifunction digital meter for voltage, current, KW should be central monitored via
serial links
b. More information for Motor Starters and VFDs should be obtained via serial links for
the detail parameters, settings, configurations and diagnostics status.
c. Motor automatic control function signals should be hardwired as per given details in
RC specifications - Section 26.24.19.
7. For UPS
a. Typical hardwired signals for UPS normal / running status, UPS common fault status
and UPs battery in operations.
b. More detail of UPS status can be obtained via serial links or SNMP protocol.
8. Communications
a. Serial link here refer to the standard industrial communication protocol, such as
Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, Profibus, Profinet, DNP3 etc. the AE should clearly
define the communication protocol in the drawings.
b. When multiple electrical equipment and devices are provided, the electrical designs
should include data concentrator / communication gateway for multiple electrical
devices and collect all data together as single communication point to be used for
data communication with remote central monitoring system.

Rev. 1 5.5 -87
SUBSECTION 5.5.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
5.5.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A. General
1. Scope
a. General
1) The Telecommunication Design Guidelines provide:
(a) The basis to be followed by all parties making calculations and/or
preparing drawings and specifications of Telecommunications within RCJ
Industrial Cities including the engineering design phase of Contracts
where Engineering, Procurement and Construction are combined (EPC
Contracts).
(b) The framework within which work will be performed by all A/E and/or
EPC Contractors to ensure uniformity throughout the
Telecommunications infrastructure of the Project and compatibility within
the Royal Commission Boundary.
b. This Sub-section does not provide design information normally found in available
textbooks, handbooks, codes and standards, nor does it attempt to duplicate design
criteria within the expertise of the A/E and/or Contractor. Decisions are to be
developed for specific applications as design progresses.
c. The purpose of this chapter is to indicate the minimum level of quality required by
the RCJ in order to:
1) Define the role of the Authorized Representatives and the responsibilities of the
A/E and/or Contractors, and
2) Provide a reference basis for Saudi Arabian and International Codes and
standards, and for the Guideline Specifications and Guideline Details issued by
the RCJ.
d. Where works interface with Saudi Telecommunication Company (STC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with STC standards latest revision,
and shall be reviewed and approved by the STC.
2. Definitions
a. The following definitions apply to this Subsection :
1) “Address” An identifying name, label, or number for a data terminal, source, or
storage location calculation.
2) “Alarm Notification Appliance” A fire alarm system component such as a bell,
horn, speaker, light, or text display that provides audible, tactile, or visible
outputs, or any combination thereof.
3) “Ampacity” The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry continuously
under the conditions of use without exceeding its temperature rating.
4) “Analog data” Data represented by scalar values.
5) “Annunciator” A unit containing one or more indicator lamps, alphanumeric
displays, or other equivalent means in which each indication provides status
information about a circuit, condition, or location.

Rev. 1 5.5 -88
6) “Application Account” Refers to the account name used to run applications as

either a service or a background process.
7) “Application Software” The software written specifically to perform functional
requirements for an individual plant when standard software packages cannot
be configured to meet the requirements. Application software works with the
standard operating software and access the SCADA real-time and historical
database data.
8) “Assigned Line” Cable pair which is connected to the Main Distribution Frame
(MDF), and currently being used as a subscriber's line.
9) “Attenuation” A measure of the decrease in energy transmission “or loss of
light” expressed in decibel (dB). In optical fibers, attenuation is primarily due to
absorption and scattering losses.
10) “Audible Alarm Notification Appliance” A notification appliance that alerts by the
sense of hearing.
11) “Audio Amplifier or Pre-amplifier” Electronic equipment that increases the
current or voltage, or both, potential of an audio signal intended for use by
another piece of audio equipment.
12) “Availability” The percent of time a system or component remains on line and
performs as specified.
13) “Backup Power System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for
automatic, delayed, or manual connection to the alternate power source and
that serves all of the loads identified as essential for the facility.
14) “BACnet” A communications protocol for building automation and control
networks. It is an ASHRAE, ANSI, and ISO standard protocol. BACnet allows
communication of building automation and control systems for applications
such as heating, ventilating and air-conditioning control, lighting control, access
control, and fire detection systems and their associated equipment. BACnet is
addressed inASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135 - 2012, and became ISO 16484-5 in
2003 - is a communications protocol for building automation and control
networks and provides mechanisms for computerized building automation
devices to exchange information, regardless of the particular building service
they perform.
15) “Bandwidth” In electrical transmission systems, the range between the highest
and lowest frequencies of a transmission channel.
16) “Bidirectional” Providing for information transfer in both directions between
master and remote terminals (of a communication channel).
17) “Binary digit” A character used to represent one of the two digits in the binary
number system and the basic unit of information in a two-state device. The two
states of a binary digit are usually represented by “0” and “1”. Synonym: bit.
18) “Bonded (Bonding)” Connected to establish electrical continuity and
conductivity.
19) “Bonding Jumper” A reliable conductor to ensure the required electrical
conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.
20) “Bonding Jumper, Equipment” The connection between two or more portions
of the equipment grounding conductor at the service.

Rev. 1 5.5 -89
21) “Buffer” A device in which data are stored temporarily in the course of
transmission from one point to another; used to compensate for a difference in
the flow of data, or time of occurrence of events, when transmitting data from
one device to another.
22) “Cabinet” A large, above ground connection point.
23) “Cable, Coaxial” A cable constructed with a wire conductor surrounded by a
concentric outer conductor spaced by a dielectric.
24) “Cable, Distribution” A cable usually connecting the cross connection point to
the subscriber point.
25) “Cable, Feeder” A cable connecting the exchange to a cross-connection point
or directly to a subscriber.
26) “Cable, Lateral Distribution” A cable branching from a main distribution cable to
access subscribers on side streets.
27) “Cable, Main Distribution” An arterial cable, originating at a cross-connect
cabinet, and extending the cabinet pairs to the lateral distribution cables.
28) “Cable, VF Telephone” A number of insulated conductors arranged in pairs,
each pair capable of voice frequency transmission.
29) “Cable Count (reading)” A method of designating and identifying the individual
pairs in a multi-pair cable.
30) “Call Up Time” The time between when the operator initially enters a display
request and when all objects, lines, values (good or invalid), trends and other
parts of the display have been fully presented to the operator.
31) “Carrying Plant” That portion of telephone Outside Plant (ducts, jointing
chambers, etc.) that is used to carry and route telephone cable and terminals.
32) “Central Office (C.O.)” See Exchange.
33) “Central Office Homerun” Type of Centralized FTTH architecture where splitters
are located inside the central office & no splitting beyond.
34) “Centralized Topology FTTH” Type of FTTH architecture where fiber optic cable
from OLT is split only once before reaching customers. There are two types of
Centralized FTTH topology namely: Central Office Homerun and Local
Convergence Point.
35) “Centrex Services” Subscriber group services utilizing the central office PBX
facility, rather than a customer owned EPABX.
36) “Circuit Breaker” A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-
automatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined
overcurrent without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating.
37) “Coating” A layer of composite plastic material covering the fiber to provide
mechanical protection.
38) “Color Rendering Index” Quantitative measure of the ability of a light source to
reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or
natural light source.
39) “Community Antenna Television System (CATV)” A cable system distributing
television and radio programs from a central reception/control point to individual
subscribers, normally on a coaxial cable.

Rev. 1 5.5 -90
40) “Command” Commands are sent by operators or by applications. Commands

can be binary or analog (set-point). Commands require reliable, secure, and
timely delivery. Command data shall be delivered to its target as quickly as
possible, typically in the order of seconds or sub-seconds. If a command cannot
be delivered or acted upon, the SCADA system shall report this to the operator.
41) “Communication channel” A facility that permits signaling between two
terminals i.e. a path between master station and an RTU, PLC or a subsystem.
42) “Communication Equipment Room (CER)” Buildings drop point to house indoor
FDT cabinets, FAT and ONT's.
43) “Communications Subsystem” The hardware and software that performs the
transmitting and receiving of digital information.
44) “Concealed” Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building.
Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may
become accessible by withdrawing them.
45) “Conduit” A single duct inside a building.
46) “Configurable” - The capability to select and connect standard hardware
modules to create a system, or the capability to change functionality or sizing
of software functions by changing parameters without having to modify or
regenerate software.
47) “Console” A collection of one or more workstations and associated equipment
such as printers and communications devices used by an individual to interact
with the SCADA and perform other functions.
48) “Continuous Load” A load where the maximum current is expected to continue
for 3 hours or more.
49) “Cross-Connection Point (CCP) or flexibility point” In the local cable network,
equipment which enables an incoming pair in a cabinet to be connected to any
of the outgoing pairs in a separate cable, by use of jumper wires or their
equivalent.
50) “Cross-Connection or Distribution Area” The geographical area served from a
cross-connection cabinet.
51) “Crosstalk” The unwanted transfer of energy from one circuit to another.
52) “Cycle” The scanning of inputs, execution of algorithms and transmission of
output values to devices.
53) “Cyclic Polling (data request)” The process by which a data acquisition system
selectively requests data from one or more of its RTUs. An RTU may be
requested to respond with all, or a selected portion of, the data available.
54) “Dead Band” The range through which an input signal may be varied without
initiating an action or observable change in output signal.
55) “Dead Pair” - Within a cable, an extension of a pair that has been used, or a
pair that is not terminated at either end.
56) “Demand or Diversity Factor” - The ratio of the maximum demand of a system,
or part of a system, to the total connected load of a system for the part of the
system under consideration.

Rev. 1 5.5 -91
57) “Device” A unit of an electrical system that carries or controls electric energy as
its principal function.
58) “Direct Exchange Line (DEL)” A telephone pair connected between a local
switch and subscriber, by whatever means.
59) “Direct Service Area” The area in which subscriber pairs are connected directly
to the exchange without passing through a cross-connection point.
60) “Directional Coupler” A splitter in which the attenuation between any two output
ports exceeds the sum of the attenuations between the input port and each of
those output ports.
61) “Disconnecting Means” or “Isolator” A device, or group of devices, or other
means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their
source of supply.
62) “Distributed / Cascaded” Type of FTTH architecture where fiber from OLT is
split twice (outside the Exchange/ or one in the Exchange & one outside the
Exchange) before reaching customers location. Splitting may be located in
Exchange, FDT, manholes, hand holes or in FAT.
63) “Distribution” In conventional method of FTTH deployment this is equivalent to
the secondary cables in copper network. These are the fiber cables that
connect FDT or Cross Connect Cabinet to the last distribution point (an FAT or
a splice in a hand hole) before Drops. In short, it is the cable in between the
Feeder and the Drops.
64) “Distribution Amplifier” - An amplifier designed to feed one or more branch or
spur feeders. Note: This is a general term embracing branch amplifier and line
extender amplifier.
65) “Distribution Points (DP)” The last point in the exchange area cable network
from which pairs are extended to individual subscribers.
66) “Drops” The fiber from the last distribution point up to customer's location.
67) “Duct” A pipe provided to facilitate the installation of cables and provides
protection for the cables.
68) “Duct Bank” A multiple array of ducts.
69) “Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)” The interference in signal transmission or
reception resulting from the radiation of undesirable frequency interfering
electrical or magnetic and electrical fields.
70) “Emergency Systems” Electrical systems legally required to be installed and
that supply loads essential to safety and life.
71) “Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications” Dedicated manual or automatic
facilities for originating and distributing voice instructions, as well as alert and
evacuation signals pertaining to a fire emergency, to the occupants of a
building.
72) “Enclosed” Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that prevents
persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
73) “Enclosure” The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding
an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized
parts or to protect the equipment from physical damage.

Rev. 1 5.5 -92
74) “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)” Is software that allows the integration of
operations and resources and manages them through one program. This
approach to management is called Integration. Most large companies in the
world use ERP to manage various aspects of their businesses. These are
product planning, parts planning, parts procurement and inventory
management, interacting with suppliers, providing customer service, and
tracking orders. It can also include applications to manage finance and human
resources.
75) “Equipment” A general term, including material, fittings, devices, appliances,
luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like used as a part of, or in
connection with, an electrical installation.
76) “Equipment Side” That side of the MDF that is connected to equipment, often
called Horizontal side.
77) “Equipment System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for delayed,
automatic, or manual connection to the alternate power source and that serves
primarily 3-phase power equipment.
78) “Erlang” A dimensionless unit that is used in telephony as a measure of offered
load or carried load on service-providing elements such as telephone circuits
or telephone switching equipment.
79) “Exchange (central office)” A system of switches enabling individual
telecommunication circuits to be automatically connected.
80) “Exchange Area” An area served by the local exchange.
81) “Faceplate” - A graphic element that mimics the front panel of an analog
controller instrument, hardwired push-button or switch.
82) “Fail-Over” Occurs automatically without user intervention, transparent to the
user.
83) “Feeder (Telecommunications)” Equivalent to the primary cables in the copper
network. The fiber cables that connect the exchange to the FDT or a splice
point in manhole that serve as a cross connect to Distribution network.
84) “Fiber Access Terminal (FAT)” A distribution point in the distribution end that
distributes the drop fibers to each customer. It can also house splitters to
distribute drops to homes and offices
85) “Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF)” Exchange termination equipment where fibers
from OLT are split and jointed to Feeder cable when there is mass FTTH
deployment.
86) “Fiber Distribution Terminal (FDT)” A hub where all the fiber from the telecom
provider's central office is split and distributed to the end users.
87) “Fiber Termination Box (FTB)” Customer Lead-In Unit, installed at the customer
outer wall for termination of incoming & indoor fibers.
88) “Fiber to the Home (FTTH)” Access technology architecture that brings fiber
optic cable from the exchange direct to customer's location at high bandwidth
delivering triple play (voice, video and data) from a single fiber.
89) “Fire Alarm” The giving, signaling or transmission to any public fire station, or
company or to any officer or employee thereof, whether by telephone, spoken

Rev. 1 5.5 -93
word or otherwise, of information to the effect that there is a fire at or near the
place indicated by the person giving, signaling, or transmitting such information.
90) “Fire Alarm Control Unit” A system component that receives inputs from
automatic and manual fire alarm devices and is capable of supplying power to
detection devices and transponder(s) of off-premises transmitter(s). The
control unit is capable of providing a transfer of power to the notification
appliances and transfer of condition to relays of devices.
91) “Fire Alarm Signal” A signal initiated by a fire alarm-initiating device such as a
manual fire alarm box, automatic fire detector, water-flow switch, or other
device whose activation is indicative of the presence of a fire or fire signature.
92) “Fire Alarm System” A system or portion of a combination system consisting of
components and circuits arranged to monitor and annunciate the status of fire
alarm or supervisory signal-initiating devices and to initiate the appropriate
response to those signals.
93) “Fire Command Center” The principal attended or unattended location where
the status of the detection, alarm communications and control systems is
displayed, and from which system(s) can be manually controlled.
94) “Fire Detector, Automatic” A device designed to detect the presence of a fire
signature and to initiate action.
95) “Fire Protection System” Approved devices, equipment and systems or
combinations of systems used to detect a fire, activate and alarm, extinguish or
control a fire, control or manage smoke and products of a fire or any
combination thereof.
96) “Fire Safety Functions” Building and fire control functions that are intended to
increase the level of life safety for occupants or to control the spread of the
harmful effects of fire.
97) “Flag” A character that signals the occurrence of some event. Usually, a field
of 1 bit.
98) “Footway” An area not normally accessible to vehicular traffic.
99) “Foreign Exchange Line” A telephone connection from one local exchange
which serves a telephone station in the serving area of another local exchange
(out of area working).
100) “Gigabit Passive Optical Network (GPON)” ITU G.984 Recommendation that
describes a flexible optical fiber access network cable of supporting bandwidth
requirements of subscriber and covers system with nominal line rates of 1.2
Gbps and 2.4 Gbps in downstream direction; and 155 Mbps up to 2.4 Gbps in
the upstream direction.
footway use only.
102) “Heat Detector” A fire detector that senses heat produced by burning
substances.
103) “Initiating Device” A system component that originates transmission of a
change-of-state condition, such as in a smoke detector, manual fire alarm box,
or supervisory switch.

Rev. 1 5.5 -94
104) “Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)” A circuit to which automatic or manual initiating
devices are connected where the signal received does not identify the individual
device operated.
105) “Insertion Loss” The attenuation at a fixed frequency of a test tone inserted at
one end of a circuit measured at the far end of the same circuit in a resistive
termination, and recorded in dB at 20 °C.
106) “Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)” An intelligent electronic device that
perform specific control and/or data gathering function.
107) “Intercom System” A communication system linking different rooms within a
building or other facilities.
108) “Interrupting rating” The highest current at rated voltage that a device is
intended to interrupt under standard test conditions.
109) “Installed Pair” Cable pair that has been placed and jointed.
110) “Isolator” Refer to “Disconnecting Means”.
111) “Jack” A receptacle used with a plug to make an electrical connection between
communication circuits. Jacks are considered the female component of a
jack/plug connector.
112) “Joint (splice)” The connection of two or more lengths of wire or cable at a single
point.
113) “Joint Box” A jointing chamber the top of which consists of fully removable
covers.
114) “Jointing Chamber” A general term for underground structures in which cables
are placed and jointed.
115) “Labeled” Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol,
or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Royal
Commission and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic
inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, and by whose
labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or
performance in a specified manner.
116) “Line Extender Amplifier” An amplifier to compensate for the attenuation in a
spur feeder.
117) “Line Side” That side of the MDF that connects to outside plant cable and that
includes protectors. Often called Vertical side.
118) “Life Safety Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of
feeders and branch circuits intended to provide adequate power needs to
ensure safety to building occupants and that are automatically connected to
alternate power sources during interruption of the normal power source.
119) “Listed” Equipment or materials included on a list published by an approved
testing laboratory, inspection agency or other organization concerned with
current product evaluation that maintains periodic inspection of production of
listed equipment or materials, and whose listing states that equipment or
materials comply with approved nationally recognized standards and have
been tested or evaluated and found suitable for use in a specified manner.
120) “Local Convergence Point (LCP)” Type of Centralized FTTH architecture where
splitters are concentrated in an FDT or a manhole outside the exchange.

Rev. 1 5.5 -95
121) “Local Area Network (LAN)” A LAN is a network used for bit serial
communication of information between interconnected, independent devices
and is completely under user jurisdiction and limited to being within a user’s
premises.
122) “Logs” Files or printouts of information in chronological order.
123) “Local Exchange” An exchange which serves subscribers in a defined and
limited geographical area.
124) “Local Exchange Code” A letter designation used to indicate the exchange. This
alpha designation will be used as part of the designation of each jointing
chamber, Interface Cabinet or Cross Connect Cabinet, and each cable.
125) “Loudspeaker” Equipment that converts an AC electric signal into an acoustic
signal.
126) “Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” Location where copper OSP cables are
terminated inside the exchange for access to Network switch.
127) “Management Information System (MIS)” Provides information which is needed
to manage organizations efficiently and effectively. Management Information
Systems involve three primary resources: people, technology, and information
or decision making. Management information systems are distinct from other
information systems in that they are used to analyze operational activities in the
organization.
129) “Manual Fire Alarm Box” A manually operated device used to initiate an alarm
signal.
130) “Main Incomer” Refer to “Service”.
131) “Maintenance Pair” A cable pair terminated on both ends, one end of which
assigns the pair a count and the other end terminated at a subscriber’s
premises, but not connected to subscriber apparatus.
132) “Master Station” Server or servers and software responsible for communicating
with the field equipment (RTUs, PLCs, etc.), and then to the HMI software
running on workstations in the control room, or elsewhere. Master station may
include multiple servers, distributed software applications, and disaster
recovery sites. The Master Station includes all networks switch and connectivity
devices required to communicate with RTUs and remote sites.
133) “Multimode Fiber (MMF)” A fiber that allows more than one optical mode to
propagate. Used for shorter distances; usually a larger diameter fiber of plastic
or other low-cost material.
134) “Multiple-Station Alarm Device” Two or more single-station alarm devices that
can be interconnected such that activation of one causes all integral or separate
audible alarms to operate. It also can consist of one single-station alarm device
having connections to other detectors or a manual fire alarm box.
135) “Multiple-Station Smoke Alarm” Two or more single-station alarm devices that
are capable of interconnection such that activation of one causes all integral or
separate audible alarms to operate.
136) “Neutral Conductor” The conductor connected to the neutral point of a system
that is intended to carry current under normal conditions.

Rev. 1 5.5 -96
137) “Nonlinear Load” A load where the wave shape of the steady-state current does
not follow the wave shape of the applied voltage.
138) “Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC)” A circuit or path directly connected to a
notification appliance.
139) “Nuisance Alarm” An alarm caused by mechanical failure, malfunction,
improper installation, or lack of proper maintenance, or an alarm activated by a
cause that cannot be determined.
140) “Operating System” Software that runs on computers and manages the
computer hardware and provides common services for execution of application
software.
141) “Operating Wavelength” The light wavelength at which a system is specified,
normally expressed in nanometers (nm). Most single-mode fibers can operate
at 1300 or 1550 nm.
142) “Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)” Location where fibers from OLT ports are
terminated then interfaced to Feeder cable of FTTH.
143) “Optical Line terminal (OLT)” Located inside the exchange and serve as the
termination point of OSP Feeder fiber cables. This is an FTTH access platform
designed for ITU-T GPON standard to easily deliver RF video and TDM voice
services while providing a smooth migration path to IP Triple Play services.
144) “Optical Link Loss Budget” Total losses allowed for satisfactory operation of an
optical fiber system.
145) “Optical Network Terminal (ONT)” A media converter that is usually installed
outside/inside the home or buildings designed for delivering multi line POTS,
Data and Video.
146) “Optical Network Unit (ONU)” A unit located outside customer's area to serve
more customers.
147) “Outside Plant” That portion of telephone plant (including carrying plant)
between the telephone exchange building and the subscriber's premises.
148) “Overcurrent” Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the
ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload, short circuit, or ground
fault.
149) “Paging” Calling out the names of persons (especially by a loudspeaker
system).
150) “Panel board” Refer to “Main Distribution Board”, “Sub Main Distribution Board”
and “Distribution Board”.
151) “Passive Optical Network (PON)” An architecture using optical transmission
system designed to carry signals via fiber optic cable from the central office
directly to end users such as businesses and multi dwelling units. Passive
means that there is no active or powered element in between the exchange
and the customer's location.
152) “Passive Optical Splitter (POS)” Split the signal bi-directionally from a single
fiber to multi fiber without any power application.
153) “Pay Telephone” A coin/card operated telephone for use by the general public.

Rev. 1 5.5 -97
154) “Plug” The male component of a connection providing a method to connect

communication equipment to the communication outlets.
155) “Protocol” A strict procedure required to initiate and maintain communication
with the RTU or a PLC. Open Industry Standard communication protocol is
defined as a protocol that has a published specification and available for all
suppliers to read and implement and will not lock the customer into a particular
vendor or group. The Protocol may be extended, or offered in subset form and
supported by publication of reference information.
156) “Public Address System” An electronic amplification system used as a
communication system in public areas.
157) “Redundant Configuration” A system and/or subsystem that provides for a
standby module with automatic switchover from the primary unit to the standby
module, in the event of a failure, without loss of a system function. Both active
and standby modules utilize diagnostics to assist in identifying and locating
failures and to permit modules to be removed for repair and/or replacement.
158) “Registered Jack (RJ)” Registered jack wiring configurations developed by Bell
System for the connection of customer premises equipment to the public
network. Registered jacks serve telephone and data applications. The most
common types are RJ45 and RJ11.
159) “Report-by-Exception” The reporting of data (e.g., from RTU to master station)
only when the data either changes state (e.g., for a status or digital input point)
or exceeds a predefined dead-band (e.g., for an analog input point).
160) “Right-of-Way (ROW)” A bounded strip of land reserved exclusively for one
utility.
161) “Round Trip Delay (latency)” The time required for a packet of data to travel
from a specific source to a specific destination and back again. Latency is
measured by sending a packet that is returned to the sender and the round-trip
time is considered the latency.
162) “Scan” The process by which a data acquisition system interrogates remote
terminals or points for data.
163) “Security Code” A group of data bits calculated by a transmitting terminal from
the information within its message by use of a prearranged algorithm,
appended to the transmitted message, and tested by the receiving terminal to
determine the validity of the received message.
164) “Self-Diagnostic” The capability of an electronic device to monitor its own status
and indicate faults that occur within the device.
165) “Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)” A circuit path between any combination of
addressable appliances or devices, circuit interfaces, control units, or
transmitters over which multiple system input signals or output signals or both
are carried.
166) “Single-mode Fiber (SMF)” A fiber that supports the propagation of only one
mode. Used for maximum distances; usually a small, precise diameter (8 to 9
microns) fiber of monolithic quartz.
167) “Single-Station Smoke Alarm” An Assembly incorporating the detector, the
control equipment, and the alarm-sounding device in one unit, operated from a
power supply either in the unit or obtained at the point of installation.

Rev. 1 5.5 -98
168) “Smoke Alarm” A single or multiple-station alarm responsive to smoke and not
connected to a system.
169) “Smoke Detector” A listed device that senses visible or invisible particles of
combustion.
170) “Spare Pair” A cable pair which has been terminated at one end, but is not in
service.
171) “Splice” See Joint.
172) “Splice Loss” The amount of loss of light energy caused by angular
misalignment, fiber end separation or lateral displacement of fiber axis.
173) “Splitter” A device in which the signal power at the input port is divided equally
or unequally between two or more output ports.
174) “Spur Feeder” A feeder to which splitters, subscriber taps or looped system
outlet are connected.
damage to product.
176) “Station Equipment” The portion of telephone equipment installed at the
subscriber's premises.
177) “Subscribers' Apparatus” A terminal equipment which may be connected to the
public telephone network, such as telephone instruments and sets, data
terminals, telex machines, and PBX.
178) “Subscriber's Lead-in” That part of the outside plant that includes the
subscriber's line between the distribution point and subscriber's premises.
179) “Subscriber's Lines” - The circuits connecting the subscriber's apparatus to the
local exchange.
180) “Subscriber's Service Line” - That part of the subscriber's lead-in between the
distribution point and the telephone set.
181) “Subscriber Termination” That portion of telephone plant that includes the
interface between outside plant and station equipment, normally including the
station protector.
182) “Supervisory Control” A telemetry based process control command initiated
from a Master Central Station either manually by operator or automatically by
an application to initiate an action and/or change analog set point in a remotely
located Control Stations over a bidirectional communications link using specific
communication protocol. Such command is dependent of having quality
process related alarm/event data and follows timely bidirectional confirmation
and acknowledgment executing sequences between the master and the station
known as select/check before Operate (CBO).
183) “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)” Refers to an industrial
computer telemetry based control system that monitors and controls remotely
connected processes.
184) “Supervising Station” A facility that receives signals and at which personnel are
in attendance at all times to respond to these signals.

Rev. 1 5.5 -99
185) “Supervisory Service” The service required to monitor performance of guard

tours and the operative condition of fixed suppression systems or other systems
for the protection of life and property.
186) “Supervisory Signal” A signal indicating the need of action in connection with
the supervision of guard tours, the fire suppression systems or equipment, or
the maintenance features of related systems.
187) “Supervisory Signal-Initiating Device” An initiating device such as a valve
supervisory switch, water level indicator, or low-air pressure switch on a dry-
pipe sprinkler system whose change of state signals an off-normal condition
and its restoration to normal of a fire protection or life safety system; or a need
for action in connection with guard tours, fire suppression systems or
equipment, or maintenance feature of related systems.
188) “Switchboard” A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on which are
mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent and other protective
devices, buses, and usually instruments. Switchboards are generally
accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not intended to be
installed in cabinets.
189) “System Account” Refers to account names used by the operating system.
190) “Telephone Density (line density or penetration)” Is the number of telephones
(or lines) relative to a characteristic element such as number of inhabitants
(telephones per 100 population), number of house-holds, business premises,
area units, income groups, etc., used generally for planning purposes.
191) “Telephone Subscriber” An individual or corporation (including government
agencies, municipal authorities) with a current subscription of one line or more.
192) “Telephone Instrument” Any apparatus equipped with a microphone and
earphone (sender and receiver) which is or may be connected to a telephone
system and which may be used for voice telephone conversation.
193) “Telephone Station” A telephone instrument installed and connected to a public
telephone system.
194) “Terminal Block” A passive electrical device used to terminate and cross-
connect outside plant and central office equipment.
195) “Termination” The point at which pairs in a cable are terminated.
196) “Toll Cable” The cable that carries toll circuits.
197) “Toll Circuits” Circuits between one toll center and another. (such as Al-Jubail
Industrial City and Dammam).
198) “Transaction” A sequence of messages between cooperating terminals to
perform a specific function. Usually, a minimum of one message in each
direction that is comprised of a command followed by a response.
199) “Trouble Signal” A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device indicative
of a fault in a monitored circuit or component.
200) “Trunk Amplifier” An amplifier to compensate for the attenuation in a trunk
feeder.
201) “Trunk Cable (junction cable)” A cable connecting two local telephone
exchanges.

Rev. 1 5.5 -100
202) “Trunk Circuit (junction circuit)” A circuit between two local telephone
exchanges.
203) “Trunk Feeder” A feeder used for the transmission of signals between a head-
end station and a distribution point or between distribution points.
204) “Twisted Pair Cable (TP)” A type of communication transmission cable in which
two individually insulated wires are twisted around each other to reduce
induction (thus interference) from one wire to other. The pair may be
surrounded by a shield, insulating jacket, to form Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)
cable, otherwise it is Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP).
205) “Unit Cable” A unit shall consist of 25 cable pairs, specifically color coded.
Cables larger than 25 pairs shall be assembled as groups of units where each
unit is separated from all other units by a colored unit binder as defined in the
Guideline Specifications.
206) “Visible Alarm Notification Appliance” - notification appliance that alerts by
sense of sight.
207) “Voltage (of a circuit)” The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned.
208) “Voltage, Nominal” A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the
purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (such as 400/230 volts).
The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within
a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
209) “Wave Division Multiplexing (WDM)” - Multiplexing of signals by transmitting
them at different wavelengths through the same fiber.
210) “Wireless Protection System” - A system or a part of a system that can transmit
and receive signals without the aid of wire.
211) “Zone” A defined area within the protected premises. A zone can define an
area from which a signal can be received, an area to which a signal can be
sent, or an area in which a form of control can be executed.
3. Abbreviations
a. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection :
1) A: Amperes
2) AAC: Advanced Application Controllers
3) AC: Alternating Current
4) ACD: Automatic Call Distribution
5) ACI: Adjacent Channel Interference
6) ACS: Access Control System
7) ADSL: Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
9) AES: Advanced Encryption Standard
10) AFF: Above Finished Floor
11) AFFL: Above Finished Floor Level

Rev. 1 5.5 -101
12) AGL: Above Ground Level

13) AIM: Automated Infrastructure Management
14) ALMS: Alarm Management System
15) AND: Access Network Development
16) ANN: Artificial Neural Networks
17) ANPR: Automatic Plate Number Recognition
19) AON: Active Optical Network
20) AOS: Application Object Servers
21) AP: Access Points
22) AP1: Access Service Provider
23) AP2: Application Program Interface
24) APC: Angled Physical Contact Optical Fiber Connection
25) APON: ATM Passive Optical Network
26) ARP: Address Resolution Protocol
27) ASC: Advanced Specific Controllers
28) ASI: Asynchronous Serial Interface
29) ATF: Active Tracking Filters
30) ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode
31) ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch
32) AV: Audiovisual
33) AVC: Advanced Video Coding
34) BACnet: Building Automation & Control Networks
36) BC: Building Controllers
37) BGL: Below Ground Level
38) BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level
39) BIM: Building Information Modeling
40) BITS: Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
42) BPON: Broadband Passive Optical Network
43) BYOD: Bring Your Own Device
44) CAD: Computer-Aided Design
45) CAN: Customer Access Network
46) CAT: Category

Rev. 1 5.5 -102
47) CATV: Community Antenna Television System

48) CB: Customer Building
49) CBD: Central Business District
50) CBO: Check Before Operate
51) CCI: Co-Channel Interference
52) CCITT: Consultative Committee International Telegraphy and Telephony
53) CCMP: Counter Mode Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication
Code Protocol
54) CCP: Cross-Connection Point
55) CCR: Central Control Room
56) CCSO: Co-located Cabinet for Shared Operators
57) CCTV: Closed Circuit Television
58) CER: Communication Equipment Room
59) CI: Circuit Integrity
60) CMS: Condition Monitoring System
61) CO: Central Office
62) CoPP: Control Plane Protection
63) COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf
64) CPE: Customer Premises Equipment
65) CR: Critical
66) CRI: Color Rendering Index
67) CSMA/CD: Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection
68) DAHS: Data Acquisition and Historization System
69) DAI: Dynamic ARP Inspection
70) dB: Decibel
71) dBm: Decibel-milliwatts
72) dBmV: Decibel-millivolts
73) dBµV: Decibel-microvolts
74) DC: Direct Current
75) DCS: Distributed Control System
76) DDC: Direct Digital Control
77) DEL: Direct Exchange Line
78) DFS: Dynamic Frequency Selection
79) DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
80) DID: Direct Inward Dial

Rev. 1 5.5 -103
81) DMS: Dynamic Message Signs

82) DMW: Digital Microwave Radio
83) DNP: Distributed Network Protocol
84) DNS: Domain Name System
85) DOD: Direct Outward Dial
86) DONCP: Device Object Naming Convention Plan
87) DP: Distribution Point
88) DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point
89) DTMF: Dual-tone Multi-Frequency Signaling
90) DVB-S: Digital Video Broadcasting - Satellite
91) DWDM: Dense Wave Division Multiplexing
92) E2E: End To End
93) EBU: Enterprise Business Unit
94) EDA: Equipment Distribution Area
95) EF: Entrance Facility
96) EIA: Electronic Industries Association
97) EIRP: Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power
98) EKTS: Electronic Key Telephone Service
99) EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility
100) EMC1: Electrical Metallic Tubing
101) EMCS: Energy Management and Control System
102) EMI: Electromagnetic Interference
103) EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing
104) EPABX: Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange
106) EPON: Ethernet Passive Optical Network
107) ER: Entrance Room
108) ER1: Equipment Room
109) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning
110) ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute
111) FAT: Fiber Access Terminal
112) FAT1: Factory Acceptance Test
113) FC: FC Optical Fiber Connector Designation
114) FCC: Federal Communication Commission
115) FDDI: Fiber Distributed Data Interface

Rev. 1 5.5 -104
116) FDF: Fiber Distribution Frame

117) FDH: Fiber Distribution Hub
118) FDT: Fiber Distribution Terminal
119) FF: Foundation Fieldbus System
120) FGS: Fire & Gas System
121) FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit
122) FNC: Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit
123) FNF: Flexible Net Flow
124) FO: Fiber Optic
125) FOES: Fiber Optic Ethernet Switch
126) FOIDS: Fiber Optic IDS
127) FSAN: Full Service Access Network
128) FSD: Functional Specification Document
129) FTB: Fiber Termination Box
130) FTP: File Transfer Protocol
131) FTTB: Fiber To the Building
132) FTTC: Fiber To the Curb (Electronic cabinets)
133) FTTH: Fiber To The Home
134) FTTP: Fiber to the Premises (Home & Business)
135) FTTX: Fiber to the ____ (Refer to FTTB, FTTC, FTTH and FTTP)
136) GB: Gigabyte
137) Gbps: Gigabits Per Second
138) GEM Guiding Engineering Manual
139) GHz: Gigahertz
140) GI: Galvanized Iron
141) GIS: Geographical Information System
142) GPCS Guiding Procurement Construction Specifications
143) GPON: Gigabit Passive Optical Network
144) GPRS: General Practice Radio Service
145) GPS: Global Positioning System
146) GSM: Global System for Mobile
147) GUI: Graphic User Interface
148) HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
149) HBU: Home Business Unit
150) HC: Horizontal Cross connect

Rev. 1 5.5 -105

152) HD: High Definition
153) HDA: Horizontal Distribution Area
154) HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface
155) HDPE: High Density Polyethylene
156) HDTV: High Definition Television
157) HFC: Hybrid Fiber Coaxial
158) HH: Hand hole
159) HID: High Intensity Discharge
160) HMI: Human Machine Interface
161) HTTP: Hypertext Transfer Protocol
162) HTTPS: HTTP Secure
164) Hz: Hertz
165) I/O: Input/output
166) I&R: Department of Installation & Repair
167) IAMS: Instrument Asset Monitoring System
168) IC: Intermediate Cross connect
169) ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
170) ICSS: Integrated Control and Safeguarding System
171) ID: Inner Diameter
172) IDC: Initiating Device Circuit
173) IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame
174) IDS: Intrusion Detection System
175) IEC: International Electro technical Commission
176) IECEx: IEC Ex Certification
177) IED: Intelligent Electronic Devices
178) IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
180) IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force
182) IGMP: Internet Group Management Protocol
183) IM&T: Information Management and Technology
184) IMS: Information Management System
185) IP: Internet Protocol

Rev. 1 5.5 -106
186) IP1: Ingress Protection

187) IPxx: International Protection Marking, IP Code
188) IPTV: Internet Protocol Television
189) IPv4: Internet Protocol Version 4
190) IPv6: Internet Protocol Version 6
191) IR: Infrared
192) IRD: Integrated Receiver Decoder
193) ISO: The International Organization for Standardization
194) IT: Information Technology
195) ITS: Intelligent Transportation System
196) ITU: International Telecommunication Union
197) ITU-T: ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector
198) Kbps: Kilobit Per Second
199) KHz: Kilo-hertz
201) KVM: Keyboard/Video/Mouse
202) KW: Kilo-watts
204) LC: Lucent Connector (Optical Fiber Connector Designation
205) LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
206) LCP: Local Convergence Point
207) LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
209) LNB: Low-Noise Block Downconverter
210) LS: Life Safety
211) LV: Low Voltage
212) MAC: Media Access Control (Common use is MAC Address)
213) MAN: Metropolitan Area Network
214) Mbps: Megabits Per Second
215) MC: Main Cross-Connect
216) MC1: Media Converter
217) MCIT: Ministry of Communication and Information Technology
218) MDA: Main Distribution Area
219) MDB: Main Distribution Board
220) MDF: Main Distribution Frame

Rev. 1 5.5 -107
221) MDNS: Multicast Domain Name System

222) MDU: Multi Dwelling Unit
223) MH: Manhole
224) MHz: Megahertz
225) MIMO: Multiple Input/Multiple Output
226) MIS:: Metering Installation Standard
227) MLD: Multicast Listener Discovery
228) MMF: Multimode Fiber
229) MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group
230) MPLS: Multiprotocol Label Switching
231) MPLS-TP: Multiprotocol Label Switching Transport Profile
232) MPTS: Multiple Program Transport Stream
233) MRO: Multicast Rate Optimization
234) MTU: Master Terminal Unit
235) MU-MIMO Multiple User - Multiple Input/Multiple Output
236) MVA: Mega-volt-amperes
237) MW: Mega-watts
238) NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit
239) NAG: Needed Acoustical Gain
240) NAP: Network Access Point
241) NAT: Network Address Translation
242) NC: Noise Criteria
243) Ne: Network Engineer Tool System
246) Nm: Nanometer
247) NTP: Network Time Protocol
248) NVR: Network Video Recorder
249) O&M: Operations & Maintenance
250) OCR: Optical Character Recognition
251) ODB: Optical Distribution Box
252) ODF: Optical Distribution Frame
253) ODN: Optical Distribution Network
254) OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer
255) OFNP: Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum

Rev. 1 5.5 -108
256) OLT: Optical Line Termination

257) OM3: Optical Multimode Fiber Designation
258) ONT: Optical Network Terminal
259) ONU: Optical Network Unit
260) OS: Optional Standby
261) OS1: Operating System
262) OSP: Outside Plant (Cabling)
263) OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
264) P2MP: Point To Multi Point
265) PA: Public Address
266) PAG: Potential Acoustic Gain
267) PAGA: Public Address and General Alarm
268) PAN: Plant Automatic Network
269) PAS: Process Automation System
270) PBX: Private Branch Exchange
271) PC: Personal Computer
272) PCS: Process Control System
273) PD: Powered Device (PoE)
274) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant
275) PDR: Preliminary Design Review
276) PDU: Power Distribution Unit
277) PEC: Polyethylene Corrugated
278) PF: Power Factor
279) PHY: Physical Layer
280) PIP: Picture in Picture
281) PIR: Passive Infrared
282) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
283) PMD: Physical Medium Dependent Layer
284) PMS: Power Management System
285) PoE: Power Over Ethernet
286) PoE+: PoE Plus
287) PON: Passive Optical Network
288) POP: Point Of Presence.
289) POS: Passive Optical Splitter
290) POTS: Plain Old Telephone System

Rev. 1 5.5 -109
291) PPE: Personal Protective Equipment

292) PSE: Power Sourcing Equipment (PoE)
293) PSK: Pre-Shared Key
294) PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network
295) PTP(P2P): Point To Point
297) QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
298) QoS: Quality of Service
299) R2-MFC: R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling System
300) RA Guard: Router Advertisement Guard
301) RAM: Random Access Memory
302) RBE: Report by Exception
305) RF: Radio Frequency
306) RFC: Request For Comments
307) RFI: Radio Frequency Interference
308) RMU: Ring Main Unit
309) RJ: Registered Jack used in Structured Cabling System
310) RJ-45: Standard 8-pin data/voice outlet jack
311) RMS: Root Mean Squared
312) RNC: Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
313) ROADM: Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
314) ROW: Right of Way
315) RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit
316) RSSI: Received Signal Strength
317) RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
318) RTP: Real-time Transport Protocol
319) RTCP: RTP Control Protocol
320) RTSP: Real Time Streaming Protocol
321) RTU: Remote Terminal Unit
322) RU: Rack Unit
323) SA: Smart Actuators
324) SAES: Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
325) SAN: Storage Area Network

Rev. 1 5.5 -110
326) SAR: Specific Absorption Rate

328) SAT: Site Acceptance Test
329) SATV: Satellite Television
331) SC: SC Optical Fiber Connector Designation
332) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
333) SCS: Structured Cabling System
334) SD: Standard Definition
336) SDMS: SEC Distribution Materials Specification
337) SFP: Small Form-Factor Pluggable
338) SFP+: Enhanced Small Form-Factor Pluggable
339) SLC: Signal Line Circuit
340) SDU: Single Dwelling Unit
341) SDV:: Switched Digital Video
342) SEI: Software Engineering Institute
343) SFU: Single Family Unit
345) SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
346) SIS: Safety Instrumented System
347) SMF: Single-mode Fiber
348) SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
349) SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol
350) SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol
351) SPL: Sound Pressure Level
352) SOA: Service Oriented Architecture
353) SO/HO: Small Office/Home Office
354) SOIC: Single Operator Independent Cabinet
355) SLC: Signaling Line Circuits
356) SPD: Surge Protection Device
357) SPTS: Single Program Transport Stream
358) SQL: Database Product of Microsoft Corporation
359) SS: Smart Sensors

Rev. 1 5.5 -111
360) SSDP: Simple Service Discovery Protocol

361) ST: ST Optical Fiber Connector Designation
362) STB: Set Top Box
363) STP: Shielded Twisted Pair
365) TCDD: Typical Construction Drawing Details
366) TCP: Transmission Control Protocol
367) TDM: Time Division Multiplexing in Downstream
368) TDMA: Time Division Multiple Access in Upstream
369) TE: Telecommunications Enclosures
370) TER: Telecommunication Equipment Room
371) TETRA: Terrestrial Trunked Radio
372) TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Bus bar
373) TKIP: Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
374) TMC: Traffic Management Center
375) TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus bar
376) TO: Telecommunication Outlet
377) TOS: Type of Service
378) TP: Twisted Pair
379) TPC: Transmit Power Control
380) TR: Telecommunications Rooms
381) TSP: Telecommunications Service Provider
382) TV: Television
383) TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
384) U: Rack unit, one rack unit is 44.45 mm
385) UDDI: Universal Description Discovery and Integration
386) UDP: User Datagram Protocol
387) UHF: Ultra High Frequency
389) UPC: Ultra Polish Contact
390) UPOE: Universal Power over Ethernet
392) uPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
393) UPnP: Universal Plug and Play
394) USB: Universal Serial Bus

Rev. 1 5.5 -112
395) UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair

396) UV: Ultraviolet
397) V: Volts
398) VESDA: Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus
399) VCP: Vendor Control Panel
400) VF: Voice Frequency
401) VID: Video Image Detection
402) VGA: Video Graphics Array
403) VHF: Very High Frequency
404) VHT: Very High Throughput
405) VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network
406) VMS: Vibration Monitoring System
407) VN: Virtual Network Interface
408) VOD: Video on Demand
409) VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol
410) VPN: Virtual Private Network
411) VTP: Virtual Trunked Protocol
412) VSAT: Very Small Aperture Terminal
413) VSS: Virtual Switching System
414) W: Watts
415) WAN: Wide Area Network
416) WAP: Wireless Access Point
417) WDM: Wavelength Division Multiplexing
418) WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy
419) Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi Alliance Trademark for IEEE 802.11 WLAN Products
420) WIPS: Wireless Intrusion Prevention System
421) WLAN: Wireless Local Area Network
422) WMM: Wi-Fi Multimedia
423) WPA2: Wi-Fi Protected Access II
424) WUXGA: Widescreen Ultra Extended Graphics Array
425) XFP: 10 Gigabit Small Form-Factor Pluggable
426) XML: Extensible Markup Language
427) ZDA: Zone Distribution Area
4. Codes

Rev. 1 5.5 -113
b. In addition to the aforementioned - All equipment, material and its installation shall
conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code 401 Electrical Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code 201 Architectural Requirements
6) Saudi Building Code Chapter 801 Fire Safety Requirements
5. Standards and References
a. All work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations.
b. Additional international and national standards shall be applied as and where
appropriate either in the absence of a particular Saudi Standards or in order to
augment an existing standard.
c. Recognized national or international certifying authorities accepted by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction shall approve equipment and materials. Any deviation from the
codes, regulations and above certifications shall only be permitted after obtaining
written approval from RCJ.
d. Where specific standards referred to throughout the Project documents, A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall review the standard and identify the options available within
the standard. If options are applicable and are not obvious from the Project
documents then these shall be raised for resolution with RCJ before implementation.
e. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used wherever
applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate the priority
for application with regards to design of the telecommunications systems. In case of
conflict, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose equipment conforming to one
group of Codes and Standards.
1) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute/Steel Product Manual
3) ANSI/ISA American National Standards Institute/The Instrumentation
Society of Automation
4) API American Petroleum Institute
5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
6) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
7) BSI British Standards Institution
8) BICSI Building Industries Consulting Service International
9) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
10) EPRI Electric Power Research Institute

Rev. 1 5.5 -114
11) ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

12) FCI Fluid Control Institute
13) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
14) IEC International Electro-Technical Commission
16) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
17) INFOCOMM Infocomm International
18) ISA The International Society of Automation
19) ISO International Organization for Standardization
20) ITU International Telecommunication Union
21) MIL-STD Military Standard
22) NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
23) NECA National Exchange Carrier Association
24) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
26) ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
27) RCER Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
28) SAEP Saudi Aramco Engineering Procedures
29) SAES Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
30) SAMSS Saudi Aramco Material System Specifications
35) STES Saudi Electricity Company Transmission Engineering Standard
36) SEI Software Engineering Institute
37) TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
38) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
39) Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Alliance Trademark for IEEE 802.11 WLAN Products
f. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Subsection of the GEM include the
following:
1) ANSI/BICSI 001-2009, Information Transport Systems Design Standard for K-
12 Educational Institutions
2) ANSI/BICSI 002-2011, Data Center Design and Implementation Best Practices
3) ANSI/BICSI 003-2014, Building Information Modeling (BIM) Practices for
Information Technology Systems

Rev. 1 5.5 -115
4) ANSI/BICSI 004-2012, Information Technology Systems Design and

Implementation Best Practices for Healthcare Institutions and Facilities
5) ANSI/BICSI 005-2013, Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) System Design
and Implementation Best Practices
6) ANSI/IES RP-7, American National Standard Practice for Industrial Lighting
7) ANSI/INFOCOMM 1M-2009, Audio Coverage Uniformity in Enclosed Listener
Areas
8) ANSI/INFOCOMM 2M-2010, Standard Guide for Audiovisual Systems Design
and Coordination Processes
9) ANSI/INFOCOMM 3M-2011, Projected Image System Contrast Ratio
10) ANSI/INFOCOMM 4:2012, Audiovisual Systems Energy Management
11) ANSI/INFOCOMM 10:2013, Audiovisual Systems Performance Verification
12) ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling
13) ANSI/TIA-440-C: Fiber Optic Terminology
14) ANSI/TIA-568.0-E, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
15) ANSI/TIA-568.1-D, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
16) ANSI/TIA-568.2-D, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and
Components
17) ANSI/TIA-568.3-D, Optical Fiber Cabling Components
18) ANSI/TIA-568.4-D, Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components
19) ANSI/TIA-569-D, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
20) ANSI/TIA-570-D, Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
21) ANSI/TIA-606-C, Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure
22) ANSI/TIA-607-C, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
23) ANSI/TIA-758-B, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard
24) ANSI/TIA-862-B, Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent Building
Systems
25) ANSI/TIA-942-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data
Centers
26) ANSI/TIA-1005-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial
Premises
27) ANSI/TIA-1152-A, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements
for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling
28) ANSI/TIA-1179-A, Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure
29) ANSI/TIA-1183, Measurement Methods and Test Fixtures for Balun-Less
Measurements of Balanced Components and Systems

Rev. 1 5.5 -116
30) ANSI/TIA-4966,Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Educational

Facilities
31) ANSI/TIA-4994: Standard for Sustainable Information Communications
Technology
32) ANSI/TIA-5017: Telecommunications Physical Network Security Standard
33) ANSI/TIA-5048: Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) Systems
34) ANSI/BICSI-001-2017: Information and Communication Technology Systems
Design and Implementation Best Practices for Educational Institutions and
Facilities
35) ANSI/BICSI-002-2019: Data Center Design and Implementation Best Practices
36) ANSI/BICSI-004-2018: Information Transport Systems Design and
Implementation Best Practices for Healthcare Institutions and Facilities
37) ANSI/BICSI-007-2017: Information Communication Technology Design and
Implementation Practices for Intelligent Buildings and Premises
38) ANSI/BICSI 008-2018, Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Systems Design
and Implementation Best Practices
39) BICSI Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual, 4th Edition
40) BICSI Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM),
7th Edition
41) BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition
42) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 14th Edition
43) ETSI ETS 300 119-X Equipment Engineering
44) IEC 60332 Tests On Electric and Optical Fiber Cables Under Fire Conditions
45) IEC 60581-7 High Fidelity Audio Equipment and Systems: Minimum
Performance Requirements. Part 7: Loudspeakers
46) IEC 60754 Test On Gases Evolved During Combustion of Electric Cables
47) IEC 60849 Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes
48) IEEE 802.1, Bridging & Management
49) IEEE 802.2, Logical Link Control
50) IEEE 802.3, Ethernet
51) IEEE 802.11, Wireless LANs
52) IEEE 802.15, Wireless PANs
53) IEEE 802.16, Broadband Wireless MANs
54) IEEE 802.17, Resilient Packet Rings
55) IEEE 802.20, Mobile Broadband Wireless Access
56) IEEE 802.21, Media Independent Handover Services
57) IEEE 802.22, Wireless Regional Area Networks
58) IES/INFOCOMM RP-38-1X, Videoconferencing Lighting

Rev. 1 5.5 -117
59) INFOCOMM 5M-201X, Display Image Size for 2D Content

60) INFOCOMM 8M-201X, Audio System Spectral Balance
61) ISA/INFOCOMM 111.01, Unified Automation for Buildings - Part 1: Terminology
and Concepts
62) ISO/IEC 11801-1, Generic Cabling: General Requirement
63) ISO/IEC 11801-2, Generic Cabling: Office Premises
64) ISO/IEC 11801-3, Generic Cabling: Industrial Premises
65) ISO/IEC 11801-4, Generic Cabling: Homes
66) ISO/IEC 11801-5, Generic Cabling: Data Centers
67) ISO/IEC 11801-6, Generic Cabling: Distributed Building Services
68) ISO 11064 Ergonomic Design of Control Centers
69) ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2: Customer Premises
70) ISO/IEC 15018 Edition 1.0, Generic Cabling for Homes
71) ISO/IEC 14763-2 Edition 1.0, Planning and Installation
72) ISO/IEC 14763-3 Edition 1.1, Testing of Optical Fiber Cabling
73) ISO/IEC 18598 Edition 1.0, Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM)
Systems
74) ISO/IEC 24702 Edition 1.0, Industrial Premises
75) ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0, Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centers
76) IEC 62676, Video Surveillance Systems for use in Security Applications
77) ITU-T G.652D, Characteristics of Single-mode Optical fibers
78) ITU-T G.657A, Characteristics of bending loss insensitive single-mode optical
fiber and cable for the access network
79) NECA/FOA 301-2016, Standard for Installing and Testing Fiber Optics
80) Mobily Design Guidelines, Access Network Development (AND+) Phase III
Revision - 05 (09.09.2013)
81) Mobily Micro Bundled Duct Specification
82) MobilyStandard UPL-2012
83) NECA/BICSI 607-2011, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and
Grounding Planning and Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
84) ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
85) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) Engineering Standards and Specifications,
latest edition
86) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) TS 2111, Cables, Fiber Optic, Single-mode
(SM)
87) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) TS 2116, Cables, Fiber Optic, Single-mode
(SM), Mini Type, (Outdoor)

Rev. 1 5.5 -118
88) Saudi Telecom Company (STC), Fiber to the Home (MoP& Guidelines) STC-
2005
89) Saudi Telecom Company (STC), FTTH Design Guidelines
90) TIA TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity
of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems
91) TIA TSB-155-A, Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of Installed
Category 6 Cabling to Support 10GBASE-T
92) TIA TSB-162-A, Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access
Points
93) TIA TSB-184, Guidelines for Supporting Power Delivery Over Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
94) TIA TSB-190, Guidelines on Shared Pathways and Shared Sheaths
95) TIA/EIA-598A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
B. Commissioning
1. References
a. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning
requirements.
C. System Design
1. General
a. Each system shall be designed in accordance with the requirements stated in this
Guideline, respective system referenced specifications and standards. Where
certain specific system aspects are not stated in the documents, A/Es and
Subcontractor will be free to make suitable proposals provided they are compatible
with the stipulated system performance, are in keeping with the relevant standards
and normal industry practice and trends, and the proposed features and the
underlying assumptions are fully explained.
D. Service Conditions
1. General
a. All equipment and installations shall be new and shall in all respects be suitable for
reliable, continuous operation in accordance with the service and environmental
conditions.
b. Active IT and automation-related equipment and material furnished within the
Telecommunications scope of work shall have a design life of at least five (5) years.
This shall include, but not be limited to, the following general types of items:
1) Servers
2) PCs
3) Storage Devices
4) Monitors
5) Routers
6) Network Appliances

Rev. 1 5.5 -119
7) Firewalls
8) Access Points
9) Switches
10) Printers
11) Telephones
12) Encoders, Modems, Converters, etc.
13) Changes or exceptions to this list must be approved by RCJ in writing, and shall
be based only upon a formal deviation request by A/Es or Subcontractor.
c. All systems equipment shall be capable of tolerating voltage variation of ±10% and
system frequency variation of ±5% without impact or damage to normal operations.
d. Equipment installed outdoors will be in a harsh marine environment subject to a
rainy, salt-laden atmosphere at sea level, with excessive wind-borne dust, sand, and
direct sun exposure. The location is an arid environment with a potential for high
winds and storm surge. Telecommunications structures shall meet the structural
requirements described in the Civil and Structural Design Specifications.
E. Basic Conditions
1. General
a. The telecommunications systems shall be selected and designed on the basis of
safety, reliability, maintainability, compatibility with specified future expansion,
suitability for environment, economic considerations, and past service history.
b. Prototype or unproven equipment not having a well-established record (less than
one year) shall not be considered.
F. Communications Systems
1. General
a. Telecommunications equipment shall be installed within floor-mounted, modular, 19-
inch, and 42U cabinets. Cabinets must include fully front and rear doors and side
panels, and shall have adjustable front and back equipment mounting rails. Cabinets
shall not use top-exhaust fans. If rack-based exhaust fans are to be used, they must
be rear exhaust; i.e., mounted on the rear perforated doors. All unused cabinet
space shall be filled with blanking panels to prevent bypass air flow. Where the use
of floor-mounted cabinets for remote equipment is impractical, A/E and/or
Subcontractor may propose suitably rated wall-mounted enclosures which comply
with all other project requirements.
b. Telecommunications equipment cabinets shall all be of identical manufacture and
physical dimensions. Central equipment cabinets shall be located adjacent to each
other, and shall be bayed and bonded together to form a single mechanically and
electrically continuous structure. All cabinets shall be equipped with front and rear
removable locking doors and shall be keyed alike, regardless of location. Fans and
lights power supplies shall be separate from that of equipment.
c. All telecommunication equipment cabinets shall accommodate both top and bottom
cable entry, have vented front and rear doors, and be furnished with a temperature-
activated exhaust fan with dry alarm contacts in the event of fan failure.
d. The main telecommunications equipment cabinets shall be furnished with sufficient
monitors, keyboards, mice, etc., to permit local access to system servers/devices. In

Rev. 1 5.5 -120
situations where more than one device requiring local user interface exists in a
group of cabinets, keyboard, video, and mouse (KVM) controllers shall be furnished
to reduce the quantity of separate I/O devices. Monitors associated with main
cabinets are exempt from the 19-inch size requirement.
e. Telecommunications equipment cabinets shall be furnished with a sufficient amount
of cable management accessories to ensure the neat and orderly
arrangement/routing of backbone and horizontal cables within and between the
cabinet(s). Cable management facilities shall include, but not be limited to,
horizontal and vertical cable troughs with controlled-radius corners designed to
support fiber optic jumper cables, and shelves/bins in which to spool excess jumper
cable lengths. It shall be possible to close the cabinets when all patch cords are
deployed.
f. Clearances and spacing for cabinets shall be a minimum of:

1) 1 m of clear working space in front of and behind all cabinets with active
equipment.
2) 150 mm depth off wall for wall-mounted equipment.
2. Local Area Network
a. System Description
1) Where the works interface with Telecom Service Provider (TSP), such as Saudi
Telecom (STC), the equipment/materials and installation shall comply with
most recent STC regulation and standards.
2) The system provided shall be compatible with existing installed RCJ network
equipment and Network Management System (NMS).
3) Local Area Network (LAN) within each RCJ facility shall be connected to the
RCJ Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) via an uplink from the LAN core /
distribution switch.
4) Internet connectivity for RCJ facilities is generally provided through the RCJ
MAN. Dedicated firewall appliances are generally not provided within local
facilities.
5) All network solutions must be designed to be fault tolerant, with fallback, diverse
routed solution that will allow continued connectivity if single point failures
occur.
6) All components of the Structured Cabling System shall be supplied from a
single manufacturer and be installed by qualified technicians. A manufacturer’s
warranty for the system shall be issued lasting for a minimum of 10 years
commencing from hand over of the building.
7) The projects shall provide and install all necessary cable and related hardware
to connect all existing servers within the Royal Commission backbone switch
that shall ensure dedicated individual communication speeds up to 10 Gbps
within the core/distribution down to the access layer. Exceptions exist for
facilities that do not require 10 Gbps such as utility equipment buildings and
spaces with low bandwidth requirements.
8) The project shall include remote management tools that, at a minimum, provide
full network management, real time reports of performance, and alert
notifications in graphic format, to support groups or helpdesk.

Rev. 1 5.5 -121
9) All site tests in accordance with approved test procedures shall be provided to
ensure that the equipment and related accessories comply with specifications
and operational requirements. All tests are subject to witnessing by the Royal
Commission’s representative. Site tests are listed in the GPCS.
b. Network Equipment
1) The network equipment shall be compatible with existing installed network
appliances and Network Management System (NMS).
2) The cabled LAN components shall be provided in facility Telecom Equipment
Rooms (TER).
3) The LAN shall be provisioned with 20% spare port capacity on all access layer
switches for future.
4) LAN switches shall have the option of integrated wireless controller capability
with up to 40G of wireless capacity per switch, support for up to 50 access
points and 2000 wireless clients on each switching entity (switch or stack).
5) LAN switches shall be configured with 24 / 48 port 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet copper interfaces or 12 / 24 / 48 SFP ports for optical connections.
6) LAN access switches shall be built to offer stacking throughput architecture,
allowing additions, deletions and redeployment without interruption.
Additionally, power stacking among stack members shall permit power
redundancy.
7) LAN access switches shall be configured with dual redundant, modular power
supplies and modular fans providing redundancy.
8) LAN access switches shall contain full IEEE 802.3 at (PoE+) with 30W power
on all copper ports in 1 rack unit (RU) form factor.
9) Provide software support for IPv4 and IPv6 routing, multicast routing, modular
quality of service (QoS), Flexible NetFlow (FNF), and enhanced security
features.
10) Configure LAN access switches for PoE/PoE+ on all ports.
11) Configure LAN access switches with uplinks as required supporting single-
mode fiber. The LAN shall support uplink modules consisting of Gigabit
Ethernet or 10 Gigabit Ethernet with Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) and
SFP+ receptacles.
12) Enable security features for wired plus wireless users such as IEEE 802.1x,
port security, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Snooping and
Guard, Dynamic ARP Inspection, RA Guard, IP Source Guard, control plane
protection (CoPP), and wireless intrusion prevention systems (WIPSs).
13) The LAN shall be optimized for multicast for wired plus wireless. Implement
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping.
14) Access switches shall support both layer 2 switching and layer 3 routing
protocols.
15) Enable Inter-VLAN IP routing for full Layer 3 routing between 2 or more VLANs.
16) Provision QoS and VLAN’s per RCJ requirements.
17) Provide network management software for centralized management.

Rev. 1 5.5 -122
18) A maintenance support contract with next-business day replacement and free
phone technical assistance shall be available from the product manufacturer
directly.
19) In installations where existing switches are in place, PoE injectors may be
required:
(a) PoE injector shall deliver connectivity to 802.3 at-compliant devices.
(b) PoE injector shall provide two 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet ports: 1
data uplink, 1 power+data
(c) PoE injector shall be equipped with LED to indicate power.
20) Proactive Maintenance Program
(a) Program shall provide global 24-hour access to system experts
(b) Self-help support through online communities, resources, and tools
(c) Advanced hardware replacement options, including 2-hour, 4-hour and
next business day
(d) Operating System software updates applicable to licensed feature set
(e) On-site support for remedial hardware maintenance service
(f) Proactive diagnostics and immediate alerts on core network devices
3. Metropolitan Area Network
1) Wide Area Network connectivity shall be provided to sites/nodes as identified
by the RJC using a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN).
(a) The network connectivity shall support site/node connections including
but not limited to:
(1) IP based security cameras
(2) Intelligent Transportation System components such as information
displays
2) The Metropolitan Area Network connects sites/nodes within geographic
proximity in a logical access ring topology using RCJ standard single-mode
optical fiber strands.
3) Access rings are numbered sequentially for administration purposes and
typically may contain up to 10 sites/nodes. Each site/node is identified by site
number and name, as approved by the RCJ.
4) New facilities shall be assigned to a new node on a new or existing access ring,
with optical fiber strands provided as needed for physical ring connections to
adjacent sites/nodes in the ring.
5) Each end of an access ring shall be connected to two different backbone nodes
to provide redundancy.
6) New access rings shall be assigned and connected to a specific node on the
backbone ring, as identified by the RCJ.
7) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be single-mode conforming to the ITU-
T G.652 standard.

Rev. 1 5.5 -123
b. System Topologies
1) The MAN shall support Carrier Packet Transport as a carrier class converged
and aggregation platform for unified packet transport architectures.
2) The MAN shall consist of a Packet-Optical Transport System (P-OTS) built on
standards-based MPLS-Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) for Ethernet aggregation
and transport.
3) The MAN shall provide dense hierarchical QoS and support for Layer 2 services
and features, using MPLS-TP, MPLS or Layer 2 Ethernet based technologies.
4) The MAN shall support transport-class network timing, support of network-
synchronized services and applications such as mobile backhaul and migration
of TDM services.
5) Dense wave division multiplexing (DWDM) supporting Gigabit Ethernet and 10
Gigabit Ethernet packet-optical transport shall be provided within the core
backbone ring.
c. Network Components
1) Backbone Ring Nodes
(a) The backbone node consists of a rack mounted chassis to be provided in
Telecom Room equipment cabinet locations identified by the RCJ
through coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
(b) The backbone node shall support 480 GB total switch capacity.
(c) The backbone node shall support 30 channels of 10 Gigabit Ethernet in
the backbone ring.
(d) The backbone node shall be a modular platform consisting of transport
fabric cards and modules.
(e) The backbone node shall be configured to support access ring nodes
comprising an access ring. Final configuration of the backbone node
cards and modules shall be coordinated with the RCJ to meet the
requirements of the network expansion.
(f) The backbone node shall be connected to the backbone ring through a
provider edge router and a DWDM multiservice transport platform
supporting reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexers (ROADMs) for
management of fiber wavelengths.
2) Access Ring Nodes
(a) The access ring node consists of a rack mounted chassis to be provided
in Telecom Room equipment cabinet locations identified by the RCJ
through coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor. Typically in
new facilities, this shall be located in the main Telecom Room or Server
Room.
(b) The access node is a satellite shelf that provides remote port expansion
for the backbone node. The access node shall be managed virtually as
part of the backbone node.
(c) The access node is a fixed configuration platform supporting 44 SFP-
based Gigabit Ethernet ports and four SFP+ 10 Gigabit Ethernet uplink
ports.

Rev. 1 5.5 -124
(d) In order to distribute Ethernet network service within a site, the access
node is connected to a 24 port Fiber Optic Ethernet Switch (FOES)
utilizing an SFP Gigabit Ethernet port. The FOES then distributes
Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber SFP connections to Power over
Ethernet edge switches. Ethernet edge switches provide Gigabit
Ethernet utilizing Category 6 UTP copper cables.
d. Intelligent Transportation Systems
1) The Metropolitan Area Network shall be utilized to support network connectivity
to systems and devices used in Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) where
new development occurs. Within existing urban areas, use of other existing
communications networks shall be investigated, including service provider
leased lines and wireless systems.
2) Coordination shall occur with project civil designs that establish the
requirements for ITS systems. These design requirements include final
locations, quantities, and mounting conditions of devices and equipment as well
as device communications interface requirements.
3) ITS systems require reliable and some redundant connections. Where
practical, redundant and diverse connections shall be available to critical
components of the ITS system to minimize outage downtimes. Component
bandwidth requirements for ITS systems are typically low with the exception of
CCTV video surveillance cameras, which may require up to 5 Mbps of
bandwidth each.
4) ITS systems are designed to facilitate future growth, expansion, and
capabilities. The MAN shall be provisioned to support future needs of the ITS
system as planned by the Civil design of the project.
5) ITS components requiring MAN connections may include the following:
(a) Traffic and transport data gathering
(1) Closed circuit video surveillance
(i) General monitoring of roads and highways
(ii) Where recommended by traffic police, provide red light
intersection ANPR cameras.
(iii) ANPR cameras shall be located on selected DMS gantries for
freeway data collection and enforcement.
(iv) In urban areas, significant junctions shall be provided with
camera coverage down each arm of the junction providing
adequate coverage.
(v) On freeways where full surveillance is required, a camera shall
ultimately be provided every 1 to 1.5 km. ANPR cameras shall
be provided in order to measure link speed and journey times.
(vi) On Road Intersections, Hybrid Radar and Video Vehicle
Detection Cameras shall be installed, these Cameras shall
comply at a minimum with the following: Video and radar
sensors sealed in waterproof and dust tight housing which
meet IP65 standards, Operating Temperature of -40°C to 60°C
, MPEG-4 streaming via Ethernet.

Rev. 1 5.5 -125
(vii) Bus locations

(viii) Car park occupancy
(2) Traffic counting sensors
(i) Where appropriate, additional sensors used for counting traffic
shall be implemented, in addition to ANPR cameras.
(3) Visibility Sensors
(i) Several visibility sensors shall be provided around the network
to detect fog and sandstorms to provide warnings and reduce
speed limits.
(b) Traffic control
(1) Access control to secure areas
(2) Traffic and pedestrian signaling
(c) Traffic and transport information
(1) Dynamic message signs (DMS)
(i) Typically located at interchanges, entrances, and exits to
provide traffic condition information.
(ii) DMS provide four lines of text, variable speed limits, and
pictographic warnings. In addition, the sign may provide
journey time, date, time, and temperature.
(2) Provision of data to satellite navigation systems
(3) Provision of information to broadcast media for traffic reporting
(4) Provision of bus arrival at bus stops
(d) Payment Systems
(1) Integrating ticketing systems for public transport
(2) Car park payment
(3) Toll collection
6) Traffic Management Center (TMC)
(a) The TMC is a facility that shall contain the central computer systems
running a suite of integrated ITS programs and sub-systems that allow
communication with field equipment, collection of data, and control.
(b) The TMC shall contain a server room conforming to TIA/EIA 942 which
shall be connected to a MAN access ring.
4. FTTH
a. Jubail Community FTTH System Deployment Description
1) Within Jubail Industrial City are two types of FTTH/GPON systems in use.
(a) The RCJ FTTH/GPON network is owned and operated by the RCJ. This
RCJ system shall consists of a fiber distribution network utilizing GPON
wave division multiplexing to extend services to residential homes,
apartments, and villas within various districts. This network is

Rev. 1 5.5 -126
implemented primarily for distribution of IPTV services. The design of

the system shall meet the guidelines described in the GEM.
(b) The TSP (Telecommunication Service Provider) FTTH/GPON is provided
by either STC or Mobily per STC/Mobily standards, not by the RCJ.
Coordinate with the TSP to plan infrastructure components that may be
shared between the RC and TSP FTTH/GPON as required by each
project. This may include manholes, duct banks, and FDT cabinets.
2) The RCJ FTTH system design shall be similar to the TSP FTTH design, but
incorporate specific RC requirements outlined in the GEM. The GEM shall not
provide design requirements for TSP FTTH/GPON System. The following TSP
standards may be used for reference only:
(a) Mobily Design Guidelines for Access Network Development (AND+)
Phase III - Latest Revision
(b) STC FTTH Design Guidelines, Latest Revision
(c) STC Fiber to the Home Latest
(d) Coordinate with the TSP’s (STC and/or Mobily) to request the most
recent standard revisions governing the TSP FTTH/GPON networks.
b. RCJ FTTH GPON System Description
1) The RCJ FTTH GPON system shall accept IPTV system signals which are
combined, multiplexed, converted to light signals & interfaced to a single fiber
by the Optical Line Terminal (OLT) placed within the exchange. The signals are
transported & distributed to the end users, directly or through splitters, where
the signals are converted through the Optical Network Terminal (ONT) to
electrical signals.
2) The system shall support optical access GPON with a minimum 2.5 Gbps
downstream line rate, 1.2 Gbps upstream line rate, and a 20 kilometer reach
on an IP platform.
3) The RCJ FTTH GPON system is distributed from central IPTV headend
buildings located within each district served. The central IPTV headend
building contains the IPTV headend equipment racks, Optical Line Terminator
(OLT) system equipment racks, and Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)
equipment racks. For detailed requirements for the RCJ IPTV headend, refer
to GEM Section 5.5.2.C.8 Distributed Television System.
4) The ODF contains a Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF) consisting of exchange
termination equipment where fibers from the OLT are jointed to feeder optical
fiber cables for mass FTTH deployment.
5) The OLT and ODF serve as the final termination point of feeder optical fiber
cables. The feeder optical fiber cables are distributed directly into the
underground duct systems from inside the IPTV headend building.
6) The GPON system underground distribution is provided in parallel to a similarly
built out, but separate, GPON system provided by the TSP. Within the
underground distribution system, generally the same manholes are shared
between the RCJ GPON network and the TSP GPON network. Underground
conduits within duct banks shall be designated for use by the RCJ or the TSP.
7) Optical fiber feeder cables are routed from the OLT through the underground
distribution system to Fiber Distribution Terminals (FDTs). FDTs are located

Rev. 1 5.5 -127
throughout the district area, serving multiple blocks of residential community

area. FDTs consist of pedestal style outdoor enclosures that house Optical
Distribution Frames (ODFs). ODFs are racked in shelves on a frame within the
FDT and provide passive optical splitting. The FDTs are typically located in
pairs in the same vicinity, with one designated for the RCJ GPON, and the other
provided by the TSP for the TSP GPON.
8) From each FDT, distribution optical fiber cables are routed through district
blocks to Fiber Access Terminals (FATs). FATs are located in pairs, one
designated for the RCJ GPON, and the other the TSP GPON.
9) FATs provide a splicing location for distribution optical fiber cables to interface
with drop fiber optic cables. Drop optical fiber optic cables extend to customer
premises for termination in Optical Network Terminals (ONTs). The ONT is a
media converter that is installed inside the home or buildings designed for
delivering IPTV signals.
10) Splitter attenuation loss should be within the system standards. Each splitter
configuration is assigned a particular maximum split ratio loss, including
connectors, defined by the ITU G.671 standard.
11) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be single-mode conforming to the ITU-
T G.652 standard.
c. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Line Terminator (OLT) Requirements
1) OLTs shall standardize on line cards with a minimum of 16 PON ports per card.
2) The OLTs shall be central office chassis based and mounted in ETSI standard
equipment racks within the central IPTV headend building. The equipment rack
shall meet the recommendations of the OLT system manufacturer.
3) Each equipment rack shall support two (2) OLT chassis’ and a system -48V
redundant DC power supply located at the top of the rack.
4) The equipment racks shall be arranged in one or more rack lines with overhead
cable tray installed above for optical fiber cable management.
5) The OLT performs aggregation to the IPTV network switch distribution. The
OLT has interface slots for GPON line termination cards and network
termination cards. Services are delivered via GPON interfaces using a single
fiber with two wave lengths (receive and transmit) multiplexed together. A third
wavelength can also be multiplexed for downstream RF video over the same
fiber; however this feature is not currently used by the RCJ. The line termination
cards support a minimum of 4 ports each, permitting a minimum of 56 PON
interfaces in total. The GPON interfaces comply with Full Service Access
Network (FSAN) recommendations and International Telecommunications
Union Telecom (ITU-T) sector standards for optics, line rates, data transfer
protocol and management interface.
6) IPTV network traffic aggregation and uplink shall be provided by using network
termination cards within the OLT. The network termination card shall support a
48 Gbps Ethernet switch fabric with integrated Gigabit Ethernet (1 Gigabit
Ethernet) uplink interfaces using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optics, as
well as a single 10 Gigabit Ethernet uplink interface using XFP pluggable optics.
Two network termination cards shall be provided for redundancy and load
sharing, enabling 96 Gbps switching capacity. Coordinate with the RCJ IT

Rev. 1 5.5 -128
Department to determine the IPTV system uplink interfaces required for

network termination cards.
d. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) Requirements (ISP)
1) Inside plant ODFs reside within the IPTV headend building and contain FDFs
accepting optical fibers extending from the OLTs.
2) The inside plant ODF equipment is mounted in an ETSI standard equipment
rack and can accommodate multiples of rack height 1U (44.4 mm) or 2U (88.8
mm). The ODF equipment rack shall have integral large capacity vertical
managers, full height on each side, for organization of optical fiber cabling.
3) The ODF equipment rack is located at the end of the rack line of OLT equipment
racks.
4) The ODF serves as the interface/cross connect facility between optical fibers
extending from the OLT and the feeder optical fiber cables from the outside
plant distribution.
5) The ODF optical fiber interconnects and cross connects shall utilize LC/APC
connectors.
6) A network of 200mm deep, 450mm wide ladder tray with 300mm rung spacing
shall be provided over system rack lines for routing OLT power feeds and
feeder optical fiber cable sub ducts.
7) Optical fiber cabling from the OLTs to the indoor ODF shall be routed in
dedicated fiber wire ways, minimum 50mm square, located within the overhead
ladder cable tray above the equipment rack lines.
8) Each feeder optical fiber cable shall be routed in a dedicated sub duct from the
ODF to the IPTV headend building point of entrance for distribution outside
plant ducts through the underground distribution system. Refer to GEM Section
5.5.2.E.1 Outside Plant Infrastructure for detailed outside plant requirements.
e. RCJ FTTH GPON System Feeder Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) Optical fiber cabling for feeder cables shall consist of single-mode, loose tube
available from 12F-288F.
2) The feeder optical fiber cable network commences from the exchange (OLT,
ODF/ FDF) and ends at the splitter point, at the outdoor FDT Cabinet. The
feeder portion of the network is provided over long distances, with the objective
of minimizing splice points and splitters in the network.
3) The location and routing of feeder fiber routes should take into consideration
the overall "link budget" (attenuation) and the position of easy access facilities
like FDTs and FATs that house splitters and drop fibers.
4) The minimum feeder optical fiber cables size to each FDT shall be 24F.
5) Feeder optical cable size (round off to nearest cable size) = Ultimate number
of splitters / FDT sizes + Ultimate demand forecast within FDT serving area to
meet multi-tenant buildings + 20 % for maintenance & unforeseen demand.
The number of main feeder cables is then determined by dividing the number
of fibers calculated above by the size of cable (24F, 36F, 48F, 72F, 96F, 144F
or 288F) and the remainder is rounded off to the nearest cable size to obtain
total number of feeder cables.
f. RCJ FTTH GPON System Outdoor Fiber Distribution Terminal (FDT) Requirements

Rev. 1 5.5 -129
1) The outdoor FDT is placed strategically in the FTTH network to facilitate service
connections for fiber serving areas defined by the scope of the project.
2) The FDT provides environmental and mechanical protection for cables, splices,
connectors and passive optical splitters.
3) The FDT provides the transition point and management for feeder and
distribution optical fiber cables using ODF splitters and point to point (P2P)
connections.
4) ODF Splitters
(a) The FDT typically accommodates ODF splitters with (1:32) splitting ratio.
However, each project may require various splitter ratios to meet project
demands such as 1:X where X=2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128. Higher split
ratios however reduce the effective cabling distances and reduce serving
area sizes due to additional optical split ratio loss.
(b) ODF splitter modules are provided with connectorized pigtail outputs and
one pigtail input. The splitter input is spliced to the feeder cable in the
splice shelf using fusion splicing. The splitter outputs are spliced into the
distribution cables in the splice shelves using fusion splicing. LC/APC
optical fiber interconnects shall be provided for inputs and outputs to
splitter units.
5) The FDT outdoor cabinet is sized for the total connections required to connect
FATs & ONTs in the fiber serving area plus the total number of splitters required
per cabinet based on future tenants forecast.
6) Fusion splicing cassettes for feeder and distribution cabling are organized in a
cabinet located in the bottom of the FDT. Color coded shelves for splitters are
racked and include:
(a) Red - Feeder Panel Splitters and Feeder Panel P2P connections
(b) Blue - Optical Splitters
(c) Gray - ODF/Splitters for distribution cabling
7) Fiber managers located on the sides of the FDT organize optical fiber cabling.
Each fiber bundle is labeled per system requirements.
8) Where required by the project, utilize colocation style FDTs
(a) The colocation FDT contains three compartments; the center
compartment shall be for cable entrance from the manhole. The two
compartments on either side shall be designated for use by the RCJ
IPTV FTTH GPON and the TSP FTTH GPON.
(b) The colocation cabinet shall meet the requirements of the TSP. The
designer shall submit the FDT configuration only for the TSP
compartment for approval by the TSP; explaining the requirement of
ODF and splitters for 100% customer activation.
9) Criteria for locating outdoor FDTs include:
(a) The cable distance from FDT to the last customer building shall be within
a radius of 500 m; the linear distance from FDT to customer could be
more; but should not exceed 600-700 m.

Rev. 1 5.5 -130
(b) Accessibility to the cabinet and installations in all times of the day,
especially after work hours for cabinets at subscriber’s premises.
(c) It should be away from pedestrians, traffic, traffic signals, and road
crossings.
(d) Locate away from customers’ walls.
(e) Shall not cause any inconveniences to the public.
(f) Shall be placed on solid grounds, not water and flood runways or in
wadis.
g. RCJ FTTH GPON System Distribution Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) The distribution optical fiber cables connect FDT Splitters to FAT closures.
2) The distribution optical cables are laid in P2P/Star topology from FDT/Splitter
location.
3) The cabling shall consist of single-mode, loose tube available from 12F-96F
depending upon the grouping of villas and numbers of FATs.
4) The distribution cable shall be labeled as per RCJ requirements.
h. RCJ FTTH GPON System Fiber Access Terminal (FAT) Requirements
1) Fiber Access Terminals (FATs) are located in manholes/hand holes and
provide the interface between distribution and drop cables. Based upon final
FTTH distribution layouts, two FATs shall be provided in designated manholes;
one for the RCJ FTTH GPON, and one for the TSP FTTH GPON.
2) The FAT shall contain fusion splice trays or pre-connectorized assemblies
where individual fiber strands from distribution cables are spliced or
interconnected into drop cables. Distribution cables may daisy chain through
FATs with unused loose tube fiber strands left coiled and uncut, and routed
continuous in a distribution cable to the next FAT.
3) The drop cables are 2F & 4F capacity. The FAT closures are capable to
accommodate 24 drop cables.
4) The drop closures (FATs) are recommended to be installed inside joint boxes
close to group of villas. These have 24 outlets for drop cables.
i. RCJ FTTH GPON System Drop Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) The drop optical fiber cable extends the “last mile” from FAT to the Fiber
Termination Box (FTB).
2) The minimum bending radius of the drop cable, as stipulated on the
manufacturer data sheet, shall not be exceeded.
3) The drop optical fiber cable shall be single-mode, center or loose tube
containing 4 cores.
4) Drop cables shall be provided containing 4 cores to each unit, villa, or building
within the project scope. All fibers to be terminated and labeled to indicate dark
fibers.
5) The distribution cable shall be labeled as per the following format: 0X:YYF(ZZ)
S1: 1,2…n + S2: 1,2,…n…+ Sm: 1,2…n Where:
(1) 0X: It is the Fiber Optic Cable (FOC) Number.

Rev. 1 5.5 -131
(2) YY: It is the total FOC Cores Quantity.

(3) F: Fiber Optic.
(4) ZZ: Dead Fibers Number.
(5) S1, S2…Sm: Splitters Numbers.
(6) 1,2,…n: Ports Assignment per Splitter
(7) Please refer to the below example for the above mentioned labeling:
(8) 04:96F(80) S1+S2:1-10+S17-S18 and drop cables as 4F(3).

6) In multi-dwelling units, provide a minimum of 4 core fiber drop cables from the
main telecom room to the ONT location of each Flat/shop/office etc. No splices
are allowed between the Telecom Room and ONTs.
j. RCJ FTTH GPON System Fiber Termination Box Requirements
1) The Fiber Termination Box (FTB) is provided at the point of entrance for each
customer building to serve as the termination point between the drop cable and
customer premises cabling extending to the Home Networking Cabinet.
2) The FTB provides the test point for customer connection without entering the
premises.
3) LC/APC connector interface shall be provided.
k. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Network Terminal Requirements
1) Customer premises equipment which converts the optical signal to electronic
signal.
2) The ONT consists of the following:
(a) Terminal Box - to terminate the drop fiber cable.
(b) Power conversion AC/DC. For IPTV GPON ONTs, a local UPS is not
required.
(c) Converts the optical signals to electrical
3) The location of the Indoor ONT Distribution Box shall be within the Home
Network Cabinet, where all the internal conduits meet and provide the
structured cabling system in a star topology.
4) The farthest telecom outlet shall not exceed 90 m from the ONT.
l. RCJ FTTH GPON System Design Requirements
1) Fiber Optic cables, splitter cabinet & civil (ducts, joint boxes, etc.) shall be
proposed in the most economical way while meeting project scope
requirements.
2) Optical Link Budget Calculation

Rev. 1 5.5 -132
(a) Total allowed link budget from OLT to ONT is 28db. All FTTH design
losses from OLT to ONT should not exceed (not more than) 28db.
(b) The following Parameters should be taken into account while calculation
the dB budget loss of the network.
(1) Exchange
(i) ODF Connector - 0.2 dB
(2) OSP
(i) Splice Loss/splice - 0.1 dB
(ii) Cable Loss/ km - 0.35 dB
(3) FDT
(i) Splitter 1:32 - 17.5 dB
(ii) ODF Connector Loss - 0.2 dB
(4) Sub Premises
(i) Drop cable loss per km - 0.35 dB
(ii) Fiber Termination Box - 0.2 dB
(c) The design shall comply with ITU-T recommendation G.984 Gigabit-
capable Passive Optical Network (G-PON). The maximum logical
distance from OLT to ONT shall not exceed 60km. The physical distance
shall be limited by the optics used and the calculated link loss budget.
(d) The budget loss is calculated as follows: Losses = (Fiber cable +
Connectors + Joint + Splitter) Losses.
(e) FTTH System Documentation Requirements
(1) Route Map: The Route Map shows a geographic overview of cables
and conduit routes.
(2) Graphic Access for Feeder & Distribution Network: Graphic Access
shows a graphical overview of the cable/conduit route including
MH/MH distances. These distances depend on type of cable
deployed and the pulling tension of the cable as well as splice and
splitter locations. Distance between HH/HH depends on the drop fiber
distribution, pipe formation, pipe assignment, cable joints for new
cables/conduit systems. The minimum information required and to be
reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:
(i) Cable size & type
(ii) HDPE duct/sub duct assignment.
(iii) Manhole layout
(3) Detailed Conduit Access for Feeder & Distribution Network: The
Detailed Conduit drawing shall show in detail the geographic location
of the conduit system, manholes, hand holes, FDT cabinet’s, FAT
locations, distances from reference points to center of MH cover and
to various parts of the conduit system. The minimum information
required and to be reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:

Rev. 1 5.5 -133
(i) Location of new Manholes/Hand holes, e.g. distance from

intersection
(ii) Any “Construction Notes” that may affect implementation
(iii) MH and duct designation
(iv) The distance and number of Ducts between MHs and/or HHs
(v) FDT Cabinet numbers
(vi) Crossings Method, for road , pipe line (thrust boring or
excavation)
(vii) Labels and legends
(4) Cable Vault Plan: A Cable Vault Plan shall reflect telecommunication
facilities in cable vault room, tunnel vault as well as location and
position of the cables on cable brackets/ladders and the cable
entrance from manhole/tunnel to cable vault room.
(5) Fiber Cable Schematic for Feeder & Distribution Networks: A
Schematic is to be provided showing the new optical fiber cable,
cable type, size, distances between jointing points and termination
points. The minimum information required and to be reflected in this
type of drawing is as follows:
(i) Tabled calculation of cable pulling tension available and
acceptable
(ii) Location of FDTs, FATs & Terminations
(iii) Labels and legends
(6) Fiber Jointing Schematic for Feeder & Distribution Networks:
(i) A Schematic is to be provided, reflecting an overview of all new
optical fiber cables, fiber termination points, joints, splitter
locations and stumped fibers (dark fibers). Distances between
joints and termination points/MH shall be noted. The minimum
information required and to be reflected in this type of drawing
is as follows:
(ii) Use of fibers (fiber assignment)
(iii) Fiber termination points at ODF / OLT
(iv) Numbering of FO Cabinets and Splitters
(v) Numbering of FO cables
(vi) Distances between joints (Feeder cable)
(vii) Distance between splitters (Distribution cable)
(viii) Labels and legends
(7) Local IPTV Building: An exchange floor plan is to be provided
reflecting proposed locations of OLT and ODF locations along with
cable routing within the exchange building. Distances of cable from
Cable Vault to ODF / OLT locations should be provided.
(8) Test Plan

Rev. 1 5.5 -134
(i) The test plan will describe the acceptance Testing that will be
carried out to ensure the deployment of FTTH in Royal
Commission Jubail has been implemented in accordance with
Guidelines.
(ii) Attenuation per unit length and splice, splitter loss is measured
with an OTDR to verify the integrity of fiber and splices in the
optical transmission path. A Laser source and an optical power
meter is used to test the attenuation of the fibers from the OLT
to the ONT (customer premises), insuring that the transmission
system loss design requirements are within the maximum
permissible dB loss. These tests will be recorded on power
meter test sheets along with OTDR graphic printouts as
required.
(iii) Before performing any optical test, Instrument Calibration
Certificates of the test equipment to be used has to be
presented to the RCJ for approval. The equipment serial
numbers and calibration dates will be recorded accordingly.
m. RCJ FTTH GPON System Outside Plant Design Parameters
1) Refer to GEM Section 5.5.2.E.1-Outside Plant Infrastructure, for detailed
requirements for providing FTTH outside plant infrastructure.
5. Data Centers
a. Data Center Design Overview
1) Data Centers shall be designed in accordance with the following
(a) TIA-942-A -Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data
Centers and ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0 “Information Technology -
Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centers”.
(b) BICSI 002-2011, Data Center Design and Implementation Best
Practices, and BICSI International Standards Supplemental Information
001: Methodology for Selecting Data Center Design Class Utilizing
Performance Criteria
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall implement Best Practices recommended
by the Uptime Institute.
3) Tiering Structure - The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with the
RCJ to determine the appropriate Tiering Structure required on a project by
project basis.
4) When designing a data center, it is essential that all systems be coordinated as
follows:
(a) Provide estimate of anticipated power, space, and cooling and required
telecommunications equipment based upon full capacity and with future
needs considered.
(b) Provide required space power, cooling, security, floor loading, grounding,
electrical protection and other requirements to design team. These
requirements shall also include requirements for operations center,
loading dock, storage room, staging areas, and other support areas.

Rev. 1 5.5 -135
(c) Work with architect and engineers for the space planning. Revise design
as necessary to accommodate facility needs.
(d) Develop floor plan requirements with placement of major rooms. This
shall indicate entrance rooms, main distribution areas, horizontal
distribution areas, zone distribution areas, and equipment distribution
areas. Power, cooling and floor loading requirement for equipment shall
be provided to the engineering team as well as the requirements for
telecommunications raceways.
(e) Review the updated plan with the requirements for the
telecommunications pathways, electrical equipment and mechanical
equipment (at full capacity).
(f) Design the telecommunications cabling distribution system based upon
the equipment to be housed in the data center.
b. Telecommunications Spaces and Topologies
1) Major Spaces and Organization
(a) Provide authorized access and monitoring
(b) Coordinate floor loading requirements
(c) Coordinate service clearance requirements
(d) Verify airflow requirements
(e) Verify DC power requirements and circuit length restrictions
(f) Telecommunications rooms and other equipment rooms serving spaces
outside the data center shall not be housed within the data center.
(g) Data Center may be comprised of:
(1) Data Center Support staff offices
(2) Data Center entrance room
(3) Data Center Electrical and Mechanical Rooms
(4) Data Center Operations Center
(5) Telecommunications Room(s) serving data center spaces
(6) Data Center Storage rooms and loading docks
(7) Data Center Computer Room
(h) Where not a dedicated building, other tenant spaces shall be non-
industrial, with use that is non-intrusive to the data center.
(i) Where on an upper floor, adequate shaft space shall be provided for
generator, security, telecommunications and electrical conduits in
addition to HVAC, grounding, antennas and other services as required.
2) Relationships and Adjacencies
(a) Locate away from EMI sources. Sources of EMI/RFI shall be located at
a distance that reduces the interference to 3.0 volts/meter throughout the
frequency spectrum.
(b) No exterior windows

Rev. 1 5.5 -136
(c) Unrelated equipment shall not be installed in, pass through, or enter the
area. The Room shall not be located below plumbed areas such as rest
rooms, janitor closets, kitchens, laboratories, or mechanical spaces.
(d) Telecommunications Design
(1) Building shall be equipped with multiple fiber optic entrance rooms
with services from different local access providers.
(2) Cabling may be distributed overhead or under floor.
3) Entrance Room Requirements
(a) Access Provider Coordination
(1) Coordinate to provide maximum circuit lengths in conformance with
access provider requirements.
(2) Entrance Rooms may be located inside or outside the computer
room.
(3) Where Entrance Rooms are located inside the computer room,
typically separate rooms are not required unless the access provider
leases the space.
(4) Entrance rooms shall have pathways specific for access provider
pathways.
(b) Telecommunications Design
(1) Equipment cabinets or racks shall be provided with minimum of 1m
clearance in front of the rack. Where deeper equipment is
anticipated, a minimum clearance of 1.2m shall be provided. Rear
clearance shall be 0.6m. Coordinate final clearance requirements
with equipment provided.
(2) Spaces shall be configured with equipment racks having a “cold” air
aisle in the front of the cabinet and “hot” air aisle in the back.
(i) Perforated floor tiles shall be utilized along the cold aisles to
improve circulation. No cable trays shall be placed below the
cold aisles.
(3) Placement of racks, cabinets and other equipment shall be
coordinated with the floor grid. Racks supported by the access floor
shall be attached to the slab through threaded rods or otherwise
secured.
(4) Cabinets shall be placed at the same location on each floor tile to
allow standardization of floor tile cuts. Spaces shall be utilized to
ensure each cabinet begins at the edge of a floor tile.
(5) Rack/cabinets shall be 2.1m tall for access to equipment and
interconnection of devices.
(6) Racks shall be powder coated or other scratch-resistant finish.
(7) Power strips shall be provided for all cabinets with active equipment.
Power strip plugs shall have locking mechanisms to prevent
accidental disconnection.
(i) Label power strips with panel number and circuit.

Rev. 1 5.5 -137
(ii) Provide clearance on racks to accommodate power strips.

4) Distribution Areas
(a) Main Distribution
(1) MDA’s shall be centrally located to minimize cabling lengths.
(b) Horizontal Distribution
(1) HDA’s shall be centrally located to minimize backbone cabling
lengths.
(c) Zone Distribution
(1) Overhead, or under floor Zone Distribution Areas shall serve a
maximum of 288 twisted-pair or coaxial connections.
(2) Active equipment shall not be housed in the zone distribution area.
(d) Equipment Distribution
(1) Equipment distribution does not include telecom rooms, entrance
rooms, main distribution areas, or horizontal distribution areas.
EDA’s house telecommunications and headend equipment, typically
in floor mounted equipment racks or cabinets.
(2) Power shall be provided to accommodate equipment housed in racks
and cabinets.
(3) Cabling extending between devices within the EDA shall not exceed
15m.
5) Cabling Topologies
(a) Entrance room (ER)
(1) Entrance Room houses the interface between the inter-building
cabling (access provider and customer owned) as well as the
structured cabling associated with the data center.
(2) Houses demarcation hardware and access provider equipment
(3) May be located outside the computer room if the data center is in a
building that includes spaces outside of the data center, or if
additional security is required.
(4) Multiple entrance rooms may be required for additional redundancy
or due to cabling lengths.
(5) Entrance Room may be adjacent to or combined with the main
distribution area.
(b) Main Distribution Area (MDA)
(1) MDA houses the main cross-connect (MC). This is the central point
of distribution for the data center structured cabling system. This may
also include the horizontal cross-connect (HC) if the equipment areas
are served directly from MDA. This is typically housed in the
computer room, unless it is a multi-tenant data center, in which case
it may be a separate dedicated room.

Rev. 1 5.5 -138
(2) Every data center requires at least one MDA. This is the central point
for the data center cabling, housing computer room core routers, LAN
switches, SAN switches, and PBX.
(3) Access provider equipment may be located in this space due to
length restrictions.
(4) MDA’s may serve one or more horizontal distribution areas or
equipment distribution areas.
(c) Horizontal Distribution Area (HDA)
(1) HDAs serve equipment areas when the HC is not located in the MDA.
HDA may include the HC.
(2) HDA is within the computer room; however it may be within a
dedicated room for security.
(3) HDA includes LAN switches, SAN switches, and
keyboard/video/mouse (KVM) switches for end equipment located in
the equipment distribution areas.
(4) Where data centers extend over multiple floors, each floor may have
its own HC.
(5) Typical data centers have multiple HDA; however, small data centers
may not require HDA as the entire computer room may be able to be
supported from the MDA.
(d) Zone Distribution Area (ZDA)
(1) ZDA is between the HDA and the EDA allowing interconnection of the
horizontal cabling for frequent reconfiguration and flexibility.
(e) Equipment Distribution Area (EDA)
(1) EDA is space dedicated for end equipment, including computer
systems and telecommunications equipment. This equipment does
not serve ER, MDA, or HDAs.
6) Pathways
(a) Access Floors
(1) Cabling under the access floor shall be provided in ventilated cable
trays permitting airflow. Multiple layers of cable tray may be required.
(2) Cable tray shall be grounded as required.
(3) Access floors shall use bolted stringer styles (1.2m long) with
pedestals to improve stability.
(b) Overhead trays
(1) Cable trays may be installed overhead. Tray type may be:
(i) Basket
(ii) Center spine
(iii) Ladder
(2) A separate duct/tray system may be utilized for fiber.

Rev. 1 5.5 -139
(3) Maximum tray depth shall be 150mm.

(4) Overhead tray placement shall be coordinated with other services to
prevent obstruction of lighting, sprinklers, and other devices.
7) Infrastructure Identification
(a) Floor space shall be utilized to organize the identification of data center
components. Data centers shall be designed in a grid format with every
600mmx600mm floor tile designating a block of the grid.
(b) Cabinets and racks shall be labeled in front and back with the grid letter
and number.
(c) Where data centers extend to multiple floors, the floors shall be added as
a prefix to the cabinet number:
(1) nx1y1:
(i) Where n = floor that houses data center
(ii) x1y1= one or two alphanumeric characters followed by to
alphanumeric characters designating the location on the floor
space grid where the right front corner of the rack or cabinet is
located
(2) Similarly for patch panel ports, label as x1y1-an, where:
(i) n=one to three characters designating the port on a patch
panel. Where patch panels are for fiber, alpha characters shall
be utilized starting with “A” excluding “I” and “O” with numeric
characters designating a fiber strand.
(3) Patch Panels, label as p1 to p2:
(i) p1 = near end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence and port
number range
(ii) p2=far end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence and port
number range
(4) Path cord identifiers p1n/p2n:
(i) p1n = near end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence, and
port designator assigned to that cable
(ii) p2n = far end rack, cabinet, patch panel sequence and port
designator assigned to that cable
8) Redundancy and Infrastructure Tiering
(a) Redundancy Overview - Reliability of system depends upon the
redundancy of the infrastructure components. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate with the RCJ to determine the appropriate
level of redundancy required on a project by project basis.
(1) N+1 Redundancy
(i) This system provides one additional unit or pathway in addition
to the minimum provided as part of the original system. This
allows the failure of one leg or component of the system to not
disrupt operations.

Rev. 1 5.5 -140
(2) 2N Redundancy
(i) This system provides two complete (N) units or pathways or
systems. This allows the failure of an entire unit, path or
system to not disrupt operations.
(b) Tiering Structure - The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with
the RCJ to determine the appropriate Tiering Structure required on a
project by project basis. RCJ facilities may use elements of Tier II and/or
Tier III structures in Data Center designs
(1) Tier II Data Center: Redundant Components
(i) Less likely to require disruptions from planned and unplanned
activities.
(ii) Equipped with raised floor, UPS, and generator. These
systems are built with capacity of need plus one (N+1) to allow
maintenance.
(iii) Critical power path and other infrastructure components may
require a shut down for maintenance.
(iv) This system has redundant components but only a single path.
(2) Tier III Data Center: Concurrently Maintainable
(i) Allows for planned site activity without interruption.
(ii) Planned activities include: additions, removal, repair,
replacement, and preventative maintenance.
(iii) System must be able to simultaneously carry load of one path
while maintenance or other planned activities are performed on
the other.
(iv) This system has multiple power and cooling distribution paths.
(v) This system requires personnel 24/7.
9) Temperature and Humidity Requirements
(a) Temperature: 18-27°c (64-81°f) dry bulb
(b) Maximum Relative Humidity: 60%
(c) Maximum dew point: 15°c (59°f)
(d) Maximum Rate of Temperature Change: 5°c (9°f) per hour
6. Wireless Local Area Network
a. All WLAN hardware including Access Points shall, at minimum, support the IEEE
802.11ac wireless standard and be backward compatible with IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
standards. Where possible, the design of the wireless local area network shall
support draft recommendations of future upcoming standards under development by
the IEEE. Coordinate with the RCJ for final approval to implement
recommendations. Technologies implemented shall be backward compatible with
existing RCJ installations.
b. WLAN Design Criteria
1) Access Point Ethernet Connections

Rev. 1 5.5 -141
(a) Provide two or more category 6A or higher rated cables as specified in

ANSI/TIA-568.2-D, deployed as part of an overall structured cabling
system, to every 802.11ac access point. These connections shall
properly service link aggregation of two (2) 802.11ac radios supporting
1.3 Gbps data rates as well as future 2.6 Gbps and higher data rate
implementations.
(b) Follow the recommendations of TIA TSB-162-A, “Telecommunications
Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access Points.
(c) Temperature rise resulting from Type 2 PoE used to power 802.11ac
access points shall be considered. The use of solid equipment cords,
which exhibit better thermal stability and lower insertion loss than
stranded conductor cords, is recommended for access point connections
for this same reason.
(d) Verify the system authentication server can support the inrush and
outrush of users at fixed times (such as a class start and stop bell).
Ensure that the server can accommodate the expected peak number of
authentications per second.
(e) Ensure sufficient addresses are available to support not only laptops but
also smartphones and other future Wi-Fi compatible devices that may
expect connectivity. Surplus space will be necessary to support inrush
and outrush of users in a transparent fashion and in concert with the
DHCP service lease times in order to prevent address exhaustion.
(f) The DHCP server for the WLAN must also be able to accommodate an
appropriate inrush peak load of leases per second. Lease times must be
optimized to the length of sessions in the room so that the address space
can be turned over smoothly between classes or meetings.
2) Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Services
(a) Validate the availability of Power over Ethernet (PoE) Power Sourcing
Equipment (PSE) to support access point and WLAN equipment.
(b) Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) consisting of powered network
switches (endspan) or power injectors (midspan) shall be properly
planned to support the quantities and power levels of Powered Devices
(PDs) required in the wireless network.
(c) In new building projects, endspan powered network switch ports shall be
provided. In renovation and upgrade projects where existing non-
powered network switches are used, provide midspan power injectors.
(d) Power over Ethernet (PoE) equipment shall conform to IEEE 802.3at
Type 2 PoE Plus at minimum and be backward compatible with IEEE
802.3af (IEEE 802.3at Type 1) Powered Devices. Proprietary Power
over Ethernet equipment may be utilized with approval from the RCJ.
(e) Future PoE equipment shall conform to the forthcoming IEEE 802.3bt
standard with Type 3 (≤ 60W at the PSE) and Type 4 (≤ 100W at the
PSE) utilizing all four pairs of approved Category 6/Class E and
Category 6A/Class EA cabling. The cabling shall be warranted to
support IEEE 802.3bt per the structured cabling system 25 year
extended warranty requirements.
3) Wireless Infrastructure Design Criteria

Rev. 1 5.5 -142
(a) In order to provide seamless interoperability across facilities, all access

points must adhere to the IEEE 802.11ac wireless specifications at
minimum. The WLAN shall operate at 5 GHz as well as continue to
support 2.4 GHz devices.
(b) The WLAN shall support Very High Throughput (VHT) data specification.
(c) The WLAN shall support 80 MHz wide channels with future upgrades to
support 160 MHz wide channels.
(d) The WLAN shall support 256 QAM.
(e) The WLAN shall provide standard beam forming to focus energy on a
specific client, improving reliability and thus throughput and capacity.
(f) The WLAN system shall support a minimum of three (3) MIMO streams
with future growth of up to eight (8) MIMO streams and Multiple User
MIMO (MU-MIMO).
(g) Dynamic channel and power selection features shall be provided.
(h) Provide spectrum load balancing to ensure even allocation of clients
across available channels including dynamic client distribution features
to steer 5-GHz-capable clients to that band.
(i) Include airtime fairness for a heterogeneous client environment with an
unpredictable mix of legacy and new wireless adapters. Older IEEE
802.11a/b/g clients that require more airtime to transmit frames must not
be allowed to limit newer high throughput clients.
(j) There must be adequate address space to accommodate all of the
expected devices, including a reserve capacity for leases that straddle
different meetings in the same room.
(k) To minimize unnecessary rate adaptation due to higher collision activity,
it is a requirement to reduce the number of supported client device low
rates.
(l) Wherever chatty protocols that produce small frames at frequent
intervals are not needed, they should be blocked or firewalled. These
protocols include IPv6 if it is not in production use, netbios-ns, netbios-
dgm, Bonjour, mDNS, UPnP, and SSDP.
(m) Multicast optimization shall be configured to make reliable, high-quality
multicast transmissions over WLAN possible. To ensure that video data
is transmitted reliably, multicast video data is transmitted as unicast,
which can be transmitted at much higher speeds and has an
acknowledgement mechanism to ensure reliability. Transmission
automatically switches back to multicast when the client count increases
high enough that the efficiency of unicast is lost.
(n) Enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping to ensure
that the wired infrastructure sends video traffic to only those access
points that have subscribers.
(o) Multicast over WLAN, by provision of the IEEE 802.11 standard, needs
to be transmitted at the lowest supported rate so that all clients can
decode it. Provide Multicast Rate Optimization (MRO) to track the
transmit rates sustainable for each associated client to use the highest
possible common rate for multicast transmissions.

Rev. 1 5.5 -143
(p) Where voice or video clients are expected, enable Quality of Service
(QoS) both in the air as well as on the wire, end-to-end between the
access points and the media distribution infrastructure.
(q) Receive sensitivity tuning shall be used to fine tune the access points to
“ignore” clients that attempt to associate at a signal level below what is
determined to be the minimum acceptable for a client in the intended
coverage zone. This tuning helps to reduce network degradation to
outside interference and/or client associations that may be attempted
below the minimum acceptable signal level based on the desired
performance criteria.
(r) Use very low equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) on the
access point in a high-density deployment. Enable Transmit Power
Control (TPC) to lower client device power to match the APs.
4) WLAN Design Planning Methodology
(a) Unless specifically approved by the RCJ, the WLAN coverage
throughout facilities shall be ubiquitous.
(b) Provide a coverage based wireless design in facilities where the goal is
to provide good quality of service (in terms of RF signal strength) in as
much of the area as possible with a single or multiple access points.
Examples of coverage based deployments include but are not limited to
sites where there is a relatively large area with few Wi-Fi devices/users
such as:
(1) Warehouses
(2) Industrial Sites
(3) Mechanical and Electrical equipment rooms and buildings
(4) Clinics
(5) Hotels with single occupancy rooms
(6) Office Buildings
(7) Retail
(c) Identify and provide a capacity based high density deployment where the
goal is to provide good quality wireless service to a concentrated set of
concurrent users in a confined area. Generally, this occurs when more
than 25 concurrent users are expected within the coverage area.
Examples of capacity based deployments include but are not limited to
sites such as:
(1) Classrooms
(2) Lecture halls and auditoria
(3) Libraries
(4) Stadiums
(5) Offices
(6) Conference Centers

Rev. 1 5.5 -144
(d) Follow a design process described below that establishes a WLAN

capacity goal, determines the number of usable Wi-Fi channels, chooses
a concurrent device target number, and validates the capacity goal is
achieved.
(e) In coordination with the RCJ, establish a capacity planning goal defining
the application-layer throughput target.
(1) Estimate the quantity of devices (MAC addresses) by considering the
quantity of users and number of devices per person in areas to be
covered.
(2) Establish the minimum bandwidth required per device in consultation
with the RCJ. This is primarily driven by the mix of data, voice, and
video applications that will be used. Request LAN traffic studies to
precisely quantify this value. Consider the actual duty cycle of each
device type. Incorporate diversity in that it is unlikely that maximum
throughput will be required simultaneously to each device, unless
required by certain applications such as interactive learning systems.
Include forecasted future capacity requirements.
(3) Differentiate between theoretical and practical access point
throughput by accounting for protocol and packet overhead, distant
clients, uneven distribution of clients on different bands (2.4 GHz vs
5 GHz), control traffic, and co-channel/adjacent channel interference.
(f) Determine the usable number of Wi-Fi channels. Establish an approved
channel plan in coordination with the RCJ.
(1) The WLAN design shall ensure that non-overlapping channels within
the 2.4 GHz band are used should it be necessary to provide service
within this frequency. Within the 5 GHz band the design should not
reuse any of the secondary frequencies should channel bonding be
used to increase channel bandwidth from 20 MHz up to a maximum
of 160 MHz. Only channels approved within the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
band by the CITC (Communications and Information Technology
Commission) shall be used. The design shall take into consideration
channels that are subject to Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and
Transmit Power Control (TPC) for avoidance of interference with
RADAR. If a C band (IEEE defined as 4 to 8 GHz) RADAR source is
operating in the area the design shall take account of this as certain
channels may automatically be disabled.
(2) The WLAN should utilize the 5 GHz band for primary client service
where possible because there is greater channel capacity in this
band.
(3) Identify and discount any reserved channels that are required for
indoor or outdoor mesh backhaul.
(4) Channels may be reused within clusters serving large areas, where
the radios are separated from one another by free space, walls, or
other structures. Typically a minimum of two cell isolation distance
shall be required within large open spaces.
(5) In high density applications such as very large auditoria, channel
reuse is driven by the number of devices to be served. Each radio
can serve a finite number of devices without either oversubscribing

Rev. 1 5.5 -145
the access points or reusing the allowed radio channels. Channel

reuse in combination with low gain antennas, Transmit Power Control
(TPC) and correct positioning shall be considered in order to provide
suitable coverage and performance.
(6) In high density applications, use of 20 MHz channel widths (HT20)
shall be evaluated to accommodate a higher total quantity of devices
than is possible through use of fewer 40 MHz, 80 MHz or 160 MHz
channel widths.
(7) Provide 40 MHz, 80 MHz or 160 MHz channel widths in 5 GHz bands
where the ability for individual stations to burst at the maximum PHY
rate is required.
(g) Determine a concurrent user device limit for each access point radio.
(1) Determine the practical limit for the number of client devices that can
transmit simultaneously on each radio while still achieving the
capacity goal.
(2) Follow system manufacturer recommendations. For high density
applications, typical rule of thumb approximations shall not be used.
Where large numbers of heterogeneous users are to be covered with
relatively few radios, adjust for the expected mix of legacy and high-
throughput devices. Per-client limits are primarily determined by the
mix of legacy IEEE 802.11a/b/g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac devices
expected in the high density application. The more legacy devices
that are present, the lower the limit will be.
(h) Determine the number of devices supported in the WLAN application
using the number of non-overlapping channels available along with the
number of concurrent devices planned. Validate that the WLAN meets
the capacity requirements for the application. In challenging high density
applications, follow an iterative process, balancing between channel
count, radio loading, and minimum per-client throughput to best meet the
requirements of the RCJ.
5) Access Point Coverage Strategy
(a) Wherever possible, access points shall be located overhead on ceilings
with cabling concealed in finished construction. Where ceiling heights,
ceiling construction, or aesthetic requirements do not permit ceiling
mounting, use of side wall mounting shall be provided. Do not mix
mounting strategies in the same room. When planning adjacent WLANs,
use the same strategy in all rooms.
(b) Access points with integrated antennae shall typically be provided.
Select mounting locations that have no obstructions between the front of
the integrated antenna access points and the intended wireless clients.
Mount antennas with built-in down tilt parallel to the ceiling or floor so
that the beam is exactly vertical.
(c) Use of external antennae shall be minimized and used to provide
coverage for special case applications and conditions. If external
antennas are being used, plan to mount access points as close to the
antennas as possible. If absolutely necessary, low-loss coaxial cable
shall connect the access point to the antenna when mounting remotely.

Rev. 1 5.5 -146
(d) Access points in overhead applications shall be distributed evenly to

optimize system performance. Observe minimum physical separation
distances. Access points using non-overlapping channels shall be
separated so the interference target is -85 dBm to ensure that no
channel bandwidth degradation occurs and all data rates are available.
(e) Keep a minimum of 6” of clearance from the integrated antenna access
points and any location where people will be present to observe Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR) requirements.
(f) Design the AP placement in high density areas such that each client
sees two to three access points. If one or two access points are
overloaded at any given time, the client can be load balanced to another
access point without any negative impact to the end user.
(g) Provide and position access points to permit power level settings to one
half at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz to mitigate co-channel and adjacent-channel
interference.
(h) Site Survey Requirements
(1) Predictive Surveys
(i) Use computer-based software applications to model the facility
and RF environment shall be performed.
(ii) Outline the required coverage areas using facility CAD or BIM
files. Define facility structures to aid in estimating RF signal
attenuation.
(iii) Establish thresholds for minimum signal strength and
application throughput that clients must achieve.
(iv) Predict the quantity, location, and type of access points that
should be installed.
(v) Provide channel and power settings that maximize spectral
capacity while minimizing co-channel and adjacent-channel
interference (CCI/ACI).
(2) Pre-deployment Site Survey
(i) A pre-deployment survey shall be performed prior to WLAN
network installation to determine the actual RF signal
propagation characteristics of the environment.
(ii) The preliminary Wi-Fi network design shall be verified by using
a predictive site survey and shall reduce the need for network
adjustments once WLAN equipment is procured and installed.
(iii) Spectrum analysis shall be performed through a Calibrated
Spectrum Analysis equipment to detect possible interferences
that could cause WLAN performance issues. A copy of the
Calibration Certificate of the equipment shall to be issued to
RC Staff. Remediate sources of interference prior to
deployment.
(iv) Test transmitters’ proposed AP locations with data points taken
to establish the predicted wireless coverage for each location.

Rev. 1 5.5 -147
The transmitter shall simulate the AP positioning and determine

the actual coverage.
(i) For mobile devices to be tracked properly, a minimum of three access
points (with four or more preferred for better accuracy and precision)
shall be detecting and reporting the received signal strength (RSSI) of
any client station, asset tag, or rogue device being tracked. It is preferred
that this detected signal strength level be -75dBm or better.
(j) WLAN Controllers shall manage the WLAN.
(1) The controller shall support all modes of access point operation and
will provide scaling up to the quantity of access points and clients
required by the RCJ.
(2) The controller shall offer redundancy offering sub−second failover of
thousands of access points to a standby controller.
(3) The controller shall offer service provider features such as Wi−Fi
Certified Pass point (HS2.0) for secure public connectivity and Proxy
Mobile IPv6 (PMIPv6) to ensure seamless mobility between Cellular
and Wi−Fi.
(4) The controller shall regulate the power output of each AP to adjust
the coverage zone. Additionally they optimize the number and
placement of access points.
(5) The controller shall detect the status of access points to determine if
any have failed.
(6) The controller shall provide security by denying network access to
improperly configured devices
(7) The controller shall detect and locate the unauthorized access points.
(8) The controller shall balance the load of network traffic among the
access points in the area.
6) Security
(a) The use of WPA2-CCMP/AES is required. Avoid selecting TKIP or WEP,
which would result in limiting client operation to legacy (802.11a/b/g)
data rates per Wi-Fi Alliance certification requirements.
(b) Use one of the following network security options: WPA2 802.1X
(Enterprise) or WPA2 PSK (Personal).
(c) When enabling Layer 2 security, ensure WPA2-Enterprise or WPA2-
Personal key management and CCMP/AES encryption is selected. Avoid
selecting Auto (WPA or WPA2) or WPA for the key management and
TKIP for the encryption cipher, which could result in clients using WPA
(TKIP) instead of WPA2 (CCMP/AES) and being limited to legacy
(802.11a/b/g) data rates.
(d) Use Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms through Wi-Fi Multimedia
(WMM) to prioritize latency and jitter-sensitive traffic such as voice and
video.

Rev. 1 5.5 -148
(e) Require users to provide authentication credentials before they are

allowed to use a wireless network. Provide authentication via RADIUS
(RFC 2865) which can be back-ended an LDAP enabled directory.
7) Implementation Policies
(a) All departments that wish to deploy wireless networks must work with
and obtain certification for any wireless design from RCJ IT Department.
(b) To facilitate IP address assignment via DHCP, the wireless network
card's address can be registered in the RCJ central DHCP database.
(c) Access to the wired campus network from wireless APs must be
controlled via secure authentication where the authentication credentials
(preferably Royal Commission MyID) can be associated with a unique
individual. Departments will be accountable for activity associated with
any credentials that are not Royal Commission MyID user ids and
passwords.
(d) MAC (network card) address authentication can be employed by pointing
access points to a RADIUS server containing the allowed MAC
addresses, but shall be used in conjunction with WPA2-CCMP/AES.
7. Telephone and Intercom
a. Telephone and intercom systems provided in new and renovation projects shall be
IP based systems only. Refer to additional sections below for descriptions of
existing legacy RCJ telephone systems.
b. IP Telephone System
1) IP Telephone system service shall be provided for RCJ operated facilities only.
2) To support IP telephony, a multi-service network shall be provided on which
voice, video, and data can coexist over a single IP-based infrastructure.
3) The network shall support traffic prioritization mechanisms using Layer 2 (IEEE
802.1p/Q) and Layer 3-IP type of service (TOS), IP precedence, DiffServ Code
Point (DSCP), UDP/TCP Port and/or IP address.
4) The system shall provide voice, signaling, central processing and
communications resources including voice mail, ACD (automatic call
distribution), and systems management.
5) The network shall support open standards that promote interoperability with
VoIP products.
6) Plan for the provisioning of RCJ Metropolitan Network MAN connectivity to
support the IP Telephone system with sufficient bandwidth. Determine the
additional bandwidth and performance that will be required for new voice
services. The link must be provisioned with sufficient bandwidth to
simultaneously support the maximum number of desired voice calls and
business-critical data applications. Each active telephone call shall typically
require 100 Kbps of bandwidth for each uncompressed (G.711) and 40 Kbps
for each compressed (G.729) telephone conversation.
7) In addition the system shall have to ability to support digital trunks to PSTN and
connectivity for analog trunks and telephones (POTS). Provide failover transfer
for direct connection between an analog telephone and loop start trunk in the
event of a system or power failure.

Rev. 1 5.5 -149
8) Provide a complete management application to control the operation and

management of the IP Telephone system using web based system
management tools.
9) Provide interface permitting building paging and public address capabilities.
10) DHCP service shall be configured for IP phones.
11) Coordinate with the RCJ to configure the dial plan and emergency call services.
12) The IP telephone network shall have port security, DHCP snooping, DAI, and
other mechanisms to protect Layer 2 enabled.
13) Quality of Service
(a) Provide end to end Quality of Service (QoS) to ensure that voice quality
is protected in the presence of bursty data traffic.
(b) For toll-quality voice, provide packet loss of less than 1%.
(c) For toll-quality voice, ensure jitter of less than 50ms variation in delay of
sequentially transmitted packets.
(d) For toll-quality voice, provide latency less than 150ms end-to-end delay.
For the MAN links, provide a one-way delay of 80ms or less.
(e) To deliver toll-quality voice on an end-to-end basis, voice traffic must be
prioritized higher than bursty data traffic on every link along the data path
between IP telephones.
14) VLAN Implementation
(a) VLAN topologies shall be implemented to fully isolate voice and data
networks with no routing between them. Create end-to-end QoS policies
in a heterogeneous suited to a multi-vendor deployment of switches,
routers and end-hosts.
(b) VLANs shall also ensure that excessive broadcast and multicast packets
present on many data networks will not disrupt IP telephony equipment
or affect voice quality.
(c) Because the VLAN tag is not retained when the frame is forwarding over
WAN links, enable a Layer 3 prioritization method as well.
(d) Assign different subnet addresses to voice and data VLANs for
increased security between voice and data traffic and ensuring that all
call control and voice traffic gets the appropriate level of priority.
15) System Resiliency
(a) Provide redundant IP call manager appliances, voice gateways, core
network devices, and access network devices in a distributed, physically
separated fashion. Configure the IP telephone system such that no
single point of failure will result in a total system outage.
(b) To ensure resiliency in the event of a MAN failure, provide a migration
path with a legacy PBX systems, and allow staged VoIP deployments,
the IP Telephone system shall facilitate a variety of trunks for publicly
switched transmission network (PSTN) or analog connections. The local
PSTN also ensures that local phone service does not need to traverse
the MAN link and provides service to analog devices such as fax,
modem, and emergency services.

Rev. 1 5.5 -150
(c) UPS power shall eliminate the impact of power glitches and allows for a
graceful system shutdown in the event of an extended outage.
(d) IP Telephone equipment shall be configured with redundant power
supplies.
16) Telephone Units
(a) Develop an equipment list for each project indicating quantities,
locations, and types of handsets to be deployed.
(b) IP Phone must support pass-through to connected PC equipment with
switched 10/100/1000 Base-T with VLAN priority tagging (802.1p/Q).
(c) Support Quality of Service (QoS)
(d) Support programmable station keys and support basic call features such
as hold and speed dial.
(e) Support the IEEE 802.af or 802.at PoE standards.
(f) Built-in compression with G.711, G.729 codecs, and SIP v2 Protocol
(g) 128-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
(h) IP Telephone Handsets
(1) Identify as part of project equipment lists the types, quantities, and
locations for IP telephone handsets.
(2) IP telephones shall have the following properties:
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet.
(ii) Speakerphone
(iii) Message waiting indicator
(iv) Hands-free support
(v) Power over Ethernet, minimum IEEE 802.3af compliant
(vi) IEEE 802.1p/q compliant
(vii) DHCP compliant
(viii) Codecs: G.711a, G.711μ, G.729, G.729a, and G.729b
(3) Basic IP telephones
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100 Ethernet
(ii) Monochrome LED pixel-based display
(iii) Wall Mounted
(iv) Wall mounted telephone mounting heights shall be proportional
to the height of the person of use.
(v) Provide wall phones in utility spaces
(4) Office
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet.
(ii) 127 mm graphical, 320 x 240, backlit, 16-bit, color display

Rev. 1 5.5 -151
(iii) Dual-port, multi-line display, IP speakerphone with

programmable keys
(iv) 4 soft keys, 6 line keys for use as lines, speed dials or
programmable keys.
(v) Third party XML support
(vi) These phones also support new modes of collaboration, such
as: integrated high-definition voice, video, and conferencing;
instant messaging and presence; instant access to cloud
services; USB peripherals for extensibility; and Bluetooth.
(5) Conference Room Phones
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet
(ii) Conference phones shall be full duplex audio
(iii) Wired or wireless microphone kit
17) Voicemail Requirements:
(a) System shall provide voicemail for all extensions.
(b) Directory lookup by called party’s last name shall be available.
(c) System shall have the ability to clear out and initialize all mailboxes using
a bulk administration tool for summer time maintenance.
(d) Message Indication - the receipt of a message in a mailbox shall initiate
a message waiting light or a stutter dial tone to indicate a new message
condition.
(e) System must have both Global and per Mailbox settings.
(f) System must allow programmable mailbox features such as, but not
limited to:
(1) Size of mailbox
(2) Length of greeting
(3) Maximum recorded message length
(4) Message full warning indicator
(5) Internal and external greeting
(6) Reporting by mailbox
18) Call Accounting
(a) System shall include built in reporting capabilities.
(b) Call Record fields need to include, but are not limited to the following:
(1) Date
(2) Time
(3) Called Number
(4) Calling Number by Extension
19) Voice Gateways

Rev. 1 5.5 -152
(a) Voice gateways may be required on per project basis where it is a

requirement for buildings to access local TSP telephony services for
connection to the IP telephone system.
(b) Voice gateway shall convert TDM telephony traffic from the Publicly
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) into digital IP packets for transport
over IP network. It shall also convert digital IP packets into TDM
telephone traffic for transport across the PSTN.
(c) The Gateway shall bring application intelligence into the network and
enable efficient deployment of secure, reliable, and accelerated
Extensible Markup Language (XML) applications and Web services. This
shall enable the intelligent network to support service-oriented
architecture (SOA) implemented using web services technologies and to
accelerate, secure, and scale XML applications.
(d) Gateway shall permit auto-provisioning of web services from Universal
Description Discovery and Integration (UDDI) registry and application
servers, and provide transport and message-level security for XML -
based network traffic.
(e) Gateway shall enable a shared-service environment, reducing end-to-
end latency, and enabling business services to scale to meet capacity
imperatives while improving server utilization.
(f) Gateway shall permit XML messages of all sizes to be processed without
compromising security, interoperability, or system reliability.
c. Existing Telephone Systems: The following is a description of existing systems and
applies only for minor moves, additions, and changes required in renovation
projects, where telephone system upgrades to current technologies are not in the
scope of work.
1) Existing EPABX With Public Switched Network Description
(a) General
(1) In order to conserve manpower resources, to minimize call holding
time and usage, to provide for maximum signaling control on the
public switched network and to be consistent with the Kingdom
Standards, all EPABX applications shall be equipped for the
following:
(i) Outgoing to Public Switched Network
(ii) One-way, 2-wire, direct outward dial (DOD), loop start PABX to
exchange trunks.
(iii) The method of pulsing shall be DTMF as per ITU-T
Recommendations.
(iv) Upon seizure from the PABX (polarity reversal), the public
exchange switch shall transmit 425 Hz continuous dial tone at
a nominal -13 dBm toward the PABX. The public exchange dial
tone shall be transmitted through the PABX switch matrix to the
PABX extension originating the call. The PABX extension shall
then dial (DTMF transmitted to the public exchange switch) the
desired number.
(v) Incoming from Public Exchange Switch

Rev. 1 5.5 -153
(vi) All PABX applications shall be equipped for direct inward dial
(DID) directly to PABX extensions from the public switched
network using one-way trunk circuits consisting of loop start
line signaling and R2-MFC inter-register pulse signaling.
(2) Numbering Scheme
(i) The numbering scheme used in the PABX must be coordinated
with the Royal Commission so that the numbering plan will
match the local public network switch.
(ii) The National Numbering Plan requires 10 digit numbers of
which the first 3 are the public exchange Switch NXX code.
The last 7 digits identify the particular number of the lines
associated with that code. A maximum of 4 digits shall be used
for PABX extensions.
(iii) The number of DlD trunks depends on the volume of inward
traffic to the PABX. Sufficient numbers of trunks must always
be available to provide non-blocking access into the PABX
from the public switched network. A call completion rate from
the public network service exchange to a PABX shall be 95%
or better. If subscriber equipment performance or capacity
limitations degrade the public network standard and adversely
affect other subscriber usage, the Royal Commission will take
any measures deemed necessary to protect the public network.
(iv) DID trunk circuits are comprised of two factors; line signaling
and line pulsing (inter-register).
(v) Line signaling shall be 2-wire loop start (a and b wire battery
reversal).
(vi) Line pulsing shall be accomplished by means of ITU-T based,
Saudi Telephone modified, R2-MFC inter-register signaling.
(vii) Upon special request and following review and approval by the
engineering department, a separate PABX attendant 2-way, 2-
wire trunk group may be established using the PABX main
number, if the PABX application is large enough to require full-
time attendant(s) operation.
(viii) In cases when small PABXs up to 120 extensions, are
considered and trunk R2-MFC interface is not yet available
from manufacturers, the system application should be
reconsidered for a large hybrid EKTS or for Special Business
Service. If all desired features cannot be provided in the EKTS
or Centrex mode, then a deviation request may be submitted to
the Royal Commission, as per Section 8.13 D.3 below for
consideration.
(3) Deviation
(i) If any deviation is required from the standard DOD, DID R2-
MFC for any PABX applications, a deviation request must be
submitted to the Royal Commission for review and/or approval
(Royal Commission Telecom Engineering approval required).

Rev. 1 5.5 -154
(ii) The PABX shall have means to internally test any DOD or DID
trunk appearance.
(iii) The PABX customer shall perform tests to the customer/Royal
Commission interface point before any PABX trunk faults are
reported to the Royal Commission.
(b) PABX
(1) PABX trunk blocking, automatically or manually, shall be
accomplished by disconnecting either the trunk battery negative
polarity, positive polarity, or both, from the battery supply.
(c) Transmission Parameters
(1) The trunk interface for all EPABXs shall be analog/digital.
(2) The following technical criteria shall be required of any PABX
equipment operating within the Royal Commission switched network:
(i) Signaling Frequencies
(ii) The frequency tolerance shall be ± 4 Hz.
(iii) Power level of each un-modulated signaling frequency shall
have a value of - 14.5 dBm ± 1 dB.
(iv) Signaling frequency power level of any leak current transmitted
to the Royal Commission facilities must be at least 50 dB below
the nominal level of anyone frequency when no multi-frequency
combinations are being sent, and at least 30 dB below the level
of either one of the signaling frequencies when a multi-
frequency combination is being sent.
(v) The inter-register receivers may be sensitive to the
transmission characteristics of the unloaded cable plant with
respect to frequency attenuation and balance return loss.
Provision shall be made for field adjustable compensation
options to accommodate mixed or single gage, (0.4, 0.5, 0.65)
non-loaded, 600 ohm outside plant facilities with a range from 0
to 8 dB.
(vi) The sensitivity range of the multi-frequency signaling
equipment shall be -5 dBm to - 35 dBm.
(vii) The total power level of all frequencies due to harmonic
distortion and inter-modulation between 300 and 3400 Hz shall
be at least 37 dB below the power level of any one frequency.
(viii) The time interval between the start of sending of each of the 2
frequencies constituting a multi-frequency combination shall
not exceed 1 ms. The time interval between the cessation of
sending of each of the two frequencies shall not exceed 1 ms.
(ix) The operate and release times of the receive section of the
multi-frequency signaling shall be (To + Tr) = 70 ms.
(x) When multi-frequency combination has caused the receive
section of the multi-frequency signaling equipment to operate,
the latter shall not release if the signaling frequencies are
interrupted for less than 7 ms.

Rev. 1 5.5 -155
(xi) The longest signal to be ignored by the receive section of the

multi-frequency signaling equipment shall be 8 ms.
(xii) The acceptable difference in power level of the 2 frequencies of
a multi-frequency pair shall be less than 5 dB for adjacent
frequencies and less than 7 dB for non-adjacent frequencies.
(d) The receiver bandwidth shall accept a variation in frequency of ± 10 Hz
relative to the nominal value for any signaling frequency.
(e) Traffic Parameters
(1) The PABX matrix and processor shall be designed, and the number
of trunk circuits from the public switched network calculated to
provide free access into the PABX, thereby protecting the public
switched network against congestion caused by unnecessary call
attempts.
(2) To ensure an acceptable grade of service for PABX users, the PABX
switch matrix, processor and trunks should be engineered for the
following busy hour parameters:
(i) 0.12 Erlangs per extension (combined originating and
terminating).
(ii) 0.24 Erlangs per PABX - exchange trunk.
(iii) Blocking factors should be 1:200 (0.005) for originating,
terminating and intra-PABX calls.
(iv) Local Call Average Holding Time: 100 s.
(v) Long Distance Call Average Holding Time: 120 s.
(vi) Dial Tone Delay to PABX Extension: No call attempts delayed
over 3 s.
(3) The processor capacity shall be engineered to accommodate non-
blocking during busy hours for switching, special feature processing,
maintenance diagnostics, traffic measuring and message recording.
(4) The switch matrix may be either time- or space-based; however, the
switch cross points must be solid-state.
(f) Signaling Tones and Announcements
(1) The following signaling tones are Ministry of Communication and
Information Technology (MCIT) standard and in order to present the
minimum contrast to the user should be closely approximated:
(i) Dial Tone: 425Hz, continuous.
(ii) Ringing Tone: 425Hz, 1.2s on, 4.65 s off.
(iii) Busy and Congestion Tone: 425Hz 0.5s on, 0.5 s off.
(iv) Intrusion Tone: 425 Hz, 0.17s on, 0.17s off, repeated.
(v) Number Unavailable Tone: 425Hz, 0.2s on, 0.2 s off, repeated.
(vi) Signaling from a PABX that affect the performance
measurements of the public network or cause confusion to the
public network administration shall not be accepted.

Rev. 1 5.5 -156
(g) Announcements
(1) No information signals or announcements are allowed from the PABX
before the answer signal except ringing tone.
(2) Announcements provided by the PABX shall convey only PABX
related messages (limited to PABX or business identification).
(h) Additional Requirements
(1) A negative 48V DC power plant shall be supplied with capacity to
provide DC power for the PABX and all peripheral equipment. If
critical peripheral equipment is AC powered such as the maintenance
teletype, and user determined critical message detail recording
equipment, a DC to AC inverter shall be provided. The DC power
plant shall be able to provide power at the required operating voltage
for a minimum of 48 hours.
(2) A rectifier capable of charging the batteries from a fully discharged
state to fully charge in an 8 hour period while maintaining normal
PABX load shall be provided. The rectifier shall be of an automatic
constant voltage and current limited type.
(3) Batteries shall be lead calcium or nickel cadmium type. During normal
operation, the batteries shall be floated across the load.
(4) Remote power alarms shall be provided for:
(i) AC power failure
(ii) Rectifier failure
(iii) Low voltage
(iv) High voltage
(i) PABX System Requirements
(1) The PABX system shall physically consist of free standing cabinet(s)
of modular construction or wall mount.
(2) The stored program control (SPC) operating features and
configurations shall be executed from the attendant console or the
maintenance console.
(3) The generic program must be non-volatile or be protected in the event
of AC power failure.
(4) The system alarm shall be provided with a remote major alarm to
indicate call processing failure or AC power failure.
(5) Generic programs and feature releases shall be easily updated as
released.
(6) The equipment cabinet should be arranged to permit all circuit board
replacement and provide maintenance access points, while operating
from the front. If rear access is required, the installation shall provide
for such access.
(7) The system shall be provided with complete sets of installation and
operations documentation.

Rev. 1 5.5 -157
(8) All specialized tools, circuit board extenders, backup program tapes
shall be provided for the PABX and DC power systems.
(9) Consumable and component spares shall be provided for a minimum
of 2 years’ service.
(j) Main Distribution Frame
(1) A main distribution frame, using the "quick-connect" termination
technique, shall be provided. All PABX system extension lines, PABX
to exchange trunks, consoles and peripheral equipment shall be
terminated on the MDF.
(2) All outside plant cable pairs shall be terminated on MDF blocks
equipped with protectors. The protection devices shall be 3-element,
fail safe ionizing discharge tubes.
(3) The terminal blocks shall normally be mounted on industry standard
steel framework.
(4) If there is inadequate equipment space, industry standard 1-sided,
wall mounted terminal block arrangements may be provided.
2) Modifications to Existing Tertiary Telephone Cabling for Residential Housing
(a) Refer to TSP standards for most up to date requirements.
(b) The tertiary network is defined as the portion of the telephone networks
from the telecommunications hand hole, provided by others and located
at the Subscriber Property Line, to the telephone outlets in the
subscriber's residence. This includes but is not limited to ductwork,
cables, protectors, splitters, amplifiers and jacks. All defined equipment
and fittings must be provided and installed by the Contractor building the
individual house or apartment.
(c) The telecommunications hand hole shall be equipped with two 32 mm
(ID) HDPE duct stubs for each individual residence or small apartment
building.
(d) The ducts shall be joined to the duct stubs and extended to the building,
maintaining a minimum of 600 mm of cover from final grade to top of
duct and having the lowest point of the duct run at the hand hole
entrance.
(e) At the building, the ducts shall be joined to factory preformed 90 degree
bends.
(f) The telephone cable shall be installed in a 50 mm duct and shall
terminate in separate flush mounted wall boxes.
(g) Wherever practical, hand holes shall be placed at the property line
between adjacent residences and subscriber cables installed for each
building. Hand holes shall serve a maximum of ten adjacent subscribers.
The only allowable exceptions to serving more than ten residences from
one hand hole are as follows:
(1) A subscriber cable duct may be extended from a hand hole to serve
the last residence on the street if no future duct extensions will be
required such as at the end of a cul-de-sac or where common

Rev. 1 5.5 -158
property lines abut a street at one point, again as at the end of a cul-
de-sac or along the inside radius of a sharp curve.
(2) Separate conduit runs shall be provided for telephone and TV cables
within the buildings.
3) Modifications to Existing Telephone Tertiary Network
(a) The Telephone Tertiary Network consists of provision and installation of
an outdoor telephone cable conforming to the requirements stipulated by
the Royal Commission from the telecommunications hand hole to the
residence telephone protector access box.
(b) An indoor telephone cable conforming to the requirements stipulated by
the Royal Commission shall be extended from the protector to all
telephone outlets.
(c) Connection to the telephone distribution cable in the hand hole will be
done by the Telephone Administration or Site Development Contractor,
as applicable.
(d) Wall outlets shall be installed at 300 mm AFFL, in a standard flush
mounted wall box for desk type telephones and at 1350 mm AFFL for
wall mounted telephones.
(e) The indoor cable may loop from outlet to outlet.
(f) The outdoor telephone cable shall be a paired, 0.9 or 0.65 mm conductor
non-armored polyethylene sheath filled cable containing a minimum of
two 4 pair for each single residence.
(g) The indoor telephone cable to standard telephone sets shall be a
minimum of one 3 pair 0.9 or 0.5 mm copper conductors individually
color coded with polyethylene conductor insulation and enclosed in a
polyvinyl chloride jacket.
(h) Both indoor and outdoor telephone cables shall be free from opens,
shorts, grounds and transpositions on all pairs.
4) Existing Telephone Line Protection
(a) All subscribers’ equipment shall be connected to the outside plant
entrance facilities via a 3 element, 350 V DC ionizing discharge tube,
inserted in every pair entering and/or leaving the building.
(b) These protection devices shall be installed at the common point of entry
to the building and shall be connected to the building grounding system
via an isolated and independent ground lead.
(c) In the event that a building ground is not readily accessible at the
common point of entry, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
establish a ground point that conforms to Guideline Specifications.
(d) The line shall be capable of withstanding the following conditions without
damage to subscriber equipment:

Rev. 1 5.5 -159
TABLE 5.5.2.A: CONDITIONS TO WITHSTAND
Applied Voltage Period of Application

1000 V 20 microseconds
100 V 1 second
± 20% Normal working conditions
5) Existing Protector Outlet Box
(a) General
(1) The Residence Protector Outlet Box shall be flush mounted,
accessible from the outside and of sufficient size, for the telephone
service to:
(i) Contain two 3 element 350 V Fail-Safe Gas Discharge Tubes.
(ii) Terminate 50 mm duct from telecommunications hand hole.
(iii) Terminate conduit runs for telephone outlets.
(iv) Terminate 25 mm conduit nipple from the CATV service box.
(v) Terminate a 25 mm conduit for the ground lead and for the
CATV service to:
(vi) Contain an over voltage protection unit.
(vii) Terminate a 50 mm duct from the telecomm hand hole.
(viii) Terminate conduit from internal CATV outlets.
(ix) Terminate a 25 mm conduit nipple from the telephone service
box.
(b) Protector Outlet Box for Apartments
(1) The apartment protector outlet boxes shall be of sufficient size to
house the above items as required for each residence in the building.
d. Intercom Systems
1) Intercom systems provide building audio or audio and video communication
between designated locations using a two-way connection between a
substation and master station.
2) The intercom systems shall utilize building IP network based communications
and be connected through the building telecommunications structured cabling
systems.
3) Intercom systems shall be provided within various RCJ facilities for the
following applications as directed by the RCJ on a per project basis.
(a) Schools
(1) Door/Gate Entry Access Control
(2) Emergency Communications

Rev. 1 5.5 -160
(b) Residential Facilities

(1) Door Entry/Gate Control
(2) Multi-tenant Entrance Communications
(c) Industrial Facilities
(d) Healthcare
(e) Commercial/Retail
(2) Security Transaction Window
(f) Transportation/Car Parks
(2) Security Transaction Window
4) Door/Gate Entry Access Control Requirements
(a) Door intercom stations shall be located at normally locked building visitor
entrances, after hour entrances, service door locations, gates and other
locations determined through the project planning process.
(b) Door intercom stations shall permit hands free communications with a
master station with activation of the call button with LED status indicator.
(c) Door intercom stations shall be of stainless steel construction and rated
for interior or exterior environments. In new construction, doors stations
shall be recess mounted flush with finished construction.
(d) Concealed conduit pathway, minimum of 75 mm diameter shall be
provided to serve the door station back box.
(e) Indicate mounting height of door stations to permit call button activation
at standard switch height and permit video camera view area to capture
face and torso of visitor.
(f) Locate door intercom stations adjacent to door entrance with clear
approach to unit. Stations serving vehicle entrances shall be bollard
mounted and permit operation through driver side vehicle windows.
Avoid locations where direct sunlight will interfere with system camera.
Provide shrouds around the devices where necessary at exterior
locations to mitigate environmental interference with system operation.
(g) The door station shall be IP addressable and powered by Power over
Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station shall be connected to the
building LAN through structured cabling using one (1) minimum ANSI-
TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet connection. Network

Rev. 1 5.5 -161
connections shall be provisioned with quality of service, VLAN

separation, and multicast support.
(h) The door substation shall support video surveillance through a fixed
ONVIF compatible integrated IP camera. Constant video streaming from
the door station shall be provided. Digital pan, tilt, and zoom camera
with wide angle lens shall be provided.
(i) The door substation shall permit mounting of an integrated card reader
connected to the building access control system (if available) to unlock
the door for valid credential holders. Access control system cabling shall
be provided into the substation for connection to the card reader.
(j) Form C relay outputs shall be available with a connection to the local
door hardware power supply to permit remote release unlock of the door
for authorized visitors.
(k) Door intercom stations shall be capable of communicating with all
building master station locations.
(l) Master stations shall be located within buildings at reception points,
service desks, security offices, maintenance management offices, or
other monitoring locations deemed required by the project planning
process.
(m) Master stations shall provide hands free communication with handset for
privacy to any substation.
(n) The master station shall be IP addressable and powered by Power over
Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station shall be connected to the
building LAN through structured cabling using one (1) minimum ANSI-
TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet connection. Network
connections shall be provisioned with quality of service, VLAN
separation, and multicast support. Network protocols accepted shall
include: IPv4, IPv6, TCP, UDP, SIP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTSP, RTP, RTCP,
IGMP, MLD, SMTP, DHCP, NTP, and DNS.
(o) The master station shall have an integrated color LCD display to view
substation video surveillance.
(p) The master station shall have programmable Form C dry contact
multipurpose relays to enable remote release of access controlled doors
triggered by the operator.
(q) The master station shall be desk, wall, or rack mounted depending on
project requirements.
5) Security Transaction Window
(a) A window security intercom system shall be provided where determined
on a per project basis to permit secure and environmentally protected
public communications.
(b) The attendant shall utilize a gooseneck microphone and mono type
headset.
(c) Communication shall be voice activated requiring no additional
operations during conversation.

Rev. 1 5.5 -162
(d) The system may be placed in standby by the operator, muting the
attendant and playing public side audio at a reduced level.
(e) A detection sensor shall be used to signal the system when a customer
is present.
(f) An external speaker and acoustic tube or microphone shall be provided
to communicate with the public side. Lobby or waiting area paging
speakers shall be connected to the attendant’s station to permit queued
pages.
(g) Noise cancellation shall be used in the system to reduce background
noise.
6) Emergency Communications
(a) Emergency communications station locations shall be determined by the
project planning process after review of building and site plans. Propose
locations based upon project security risk assessments. Request
confirmation of locations from project stakeholder’s local protection
personnel.
(b) Typical emergency communications station locations include but are not
limited to:
(1) Elevators
(2) Car parks
(3) Pedestrian walkways
(4) Public building corridors
(5) Parks
(6) Universities
(c) Emergency communications stations shall permit hands free
communications with police or designated security personnel capable of
providing emergency assistance, with activation of the call button with
LED status indicator.
(d) Emergency communications stations shall be labeled with
“EMERGENCY” lettering in English and Arabic.
(e) Each station shall automatically place a call to preprogrammed number
when activated. In the event that the call is not completed, the station
shall rollover to a second and third preprogrammed number until
completion of the call.
(f) Emergency communications stations shall be of stainless steel
construction and rated for interior or exterior environments. In new
construction, stations shall be recess mounted flush with finished
construction. Stations may stanchion mounted where designated as
freestanding in the site.
(g) Concealed conduit pathway, minimum of 75 mm diameter shall be
provided to serve the emergency communications station back box.
(h) Indicate mounting height of door stations to permit call button activation
at standard switch height and permit video camera view area to capture
face and torso of visitor.

Rev. 1 5.5 -163
(i) Locate door emergency call stations with clear approach to unit. Provide
shrouds around the devices where necessary at exterior locations to
mitigate environmental interference with system operation.
(j) The emergency communications station shall be IP addressable and
powered by Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station
shall be connected to the building LAN through structured cabling using
one (1) minimum ANSI-TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet
connection. Network connections shall be provisioned with quality of
service, VLAN separation, and multicast support. Where call stations are
located on sites not in direct vicinity of buildings, connection shall occur
through one of the following means:
(1) Underground single-mode fiber from RCJ Metropolitan Network.
Final device connection will be supplied through a fiber to copper
media converter.
(2) Cellular Gateway
(3) The station may be powered through utility service drop, solar array
module/battery, or night charge/battery
(k) The emergency station shall support video surveillance through a fixed
ONVIF compatible integrated IP camera. Constant video streaming from
the station shall be provided. Digital pan, tilt, and zoom camera with
wide angle lens shall be provided.
(l) Form C relay outputs shall be available and used to a trigger beacon
strobe light integral to the unit housing. This feature shall be provided in
outdoor areas and car parks.
7) Harsh Environmental Conditions
(a) In industrial or otherwise harsh environments subject to dirt, dust, and
water infiltration, provide IP66 or IP67 rated components to suit location
requirements
(b) Components shall incorporate noise cancellation technologies.
(c) Housings shall be constructed of rugged antistatic plastic or aluminum
and stainless steel housings.
(d) Stations shall permit integration of push to talk microphones.
8) Multi-tenant Entrance Communications
(a) In multi-tenant residential developments, provide a visitor entrance
communications intercom system.
(b) The system shall permit visitors to announce their presence to individual
residences through a video entrance station.
(c) Entrance stations shall be located in the main vestibule or lobby of the
facility and provide the following functionality:
(1) Wide angle camera allows user to view up to 170° of the entry area
(2) Direct digit dialing, alphabetical scrolling, or jump scrolling by letter to
select tenant name
(3) Digital panel stores tenant names/number locations and unique
access codes to activate door release

Rev. 1 5.5 -164
(4) Built‑in motion sensor to detect presence of a visitor (optional)

(5) PC software for loading resident information, access codes, and
welcome message
(6) Hands‑free communication
9) Tenant intercom stations shall be provided within residences wall mounted near
entrance. Intercom stations shall provide the following functionality:
(a) Color LCD screen with picture memory for recording visitor images
(b) Hands‑free or push‑to‑talk communication
(c) Door release and security guard / concierge call buttons
(d) Security inputs for alerting tenant and guard
8. Structured Cabling
a. General
1) Structured cabling system is the heart of the facility’s critical
telecommunications transport infrastructure, and all parts of it shall be designed
with robustness, redundancy, and fault tolerance as the primary design goal.
2) Structured cabling for LAN’s within buildings shall be based on a star topology
unless otherwise stated.
3) The structured cable plant shall be installed by a manufacturer certified
contractor using approved components such that the manufacturer provides an
extended applications assurance warranty for a period of 10 years as a
minimum. The structured cabling system performance shall be warrantied to
exceed all relevant global cabling system standards, including Category 6 and
Category 6A as well as ISO/IEC 11801 Class E and Class Ea.
4) Single-mode optical fiber shall be provided in the intra-building backbone and
conform to the ITU-T G.652 standard.
5) Fiber optic backbone cables shall be terminated into patch panels with the
same segregation requirement which applies to the backbone cables; different
services shall not be mixed within the same patch panel.
6) Unless otherwise specified, for each primary backbone fiber optic cable a
redundant fiber optic cable (identical in construction, composition, and fiber
count) shall be furnished and installed in separate routing.
7) All fiber optic strands shall be terminated in a patch panel.
8) Unless otherwise directed by the RCJ, provide 20% spare fibers and conductor
pairs in cables; positions in patch panels, cross-connects and terminal strips
and space in conduit, pathways, cable trays and wire way to accommodate
20% future expansion in active workstations. Cable pathway fill percentages
shall observe requirements of ANSI/TIA-568.0-E, ANSI/TIA-569-D, and
ISO/IEC 14763-2 ed1.0.
9) In order to minimize costs over the long term, it is highly recommended to
develop a comprehensive building network design that takes into account the
needs of all of the building occupants. Once that design has been developed,
it can be implemented in phases as funding permits.

Rev. 1 5.5 -165
10) Building networks that adhere to structured wiring specifications typically have
one central wiring closet called a main distribution frame (MDF) and one or
more distributed wiring closets called intermediate distribution frames (IDFs).
11) Each IDF shall be star wired back to the MDF via fiber optic cabling. Fiber
cabling supports longer distances than twisted pair copper wiring and it is
immune to electrical interference and grounding problems. It also has the
potential for supporting high data transmission capacities (gigabits per second).
Twelve strands of fiber cabling shall be run from MDF to each IDF to provide
for future growth and redundancy.
12) The LAN components of an IDF minimally consist of one or more rack mounted
switches (either modular chassis or stackable, shared and/or switched) with
each hub port connecting to a port on a rack mounted patch panel via a
stranded wire Category 6A UTP patch cable. Each port on the patch panel is
connected to an RJ-45 wall plate in an office through a solid conductor
horizontal Category 6A UTP cable running through the building infrastructure.
The networked device is connected to the wall plate via a stranded wire
Category 6A UTP station cable.
13) The total cable length for CAT 6A UTP wiring is 100 m (90 m for horizontal
cabling and 10 m for both station and patch cables combined). As indicated
above, fixed horizontal cables must use solid copper Category 6Awire,
whereas, patch cables must be stranded copper Category 6A wire. When
designing and installing Category 6A wiring, it is important to stay away from
sources of electrical interference, e.g., 300 mm from light ballasts and 1.2 m
from electrical devices such as high-voltage transformers, electric motors,
microwave ovens and Xerox machines.
14) Cable trays shall be installed above ceilings to provide clearly defined paths for
horizontal Category 6A wiring, and can keep cables from sources of electrical
interference. They also protect cables from damage by other personnel working
above ceilings.
15) Rack mounted patch panels shall provide the direct termination points for
Category 6A wiring in the IDF. Although Category 6A cabling can be terminated
in 110-type punch down blocks, it is not recommended unless that type of
termination block will be installed for both telephone and data services. Under
no circumstances shall 66-type punch down blocks be utilized since they can
adversely affect data signals. One shall also not plan to allow two signals (either
LAN-LAN or LAN-VOICE) within the same four pair of a Category 6A cable.
16) Cable installations must comply with appropriate building codes. All
penetrations through rated fire walls, ceilings and floors must be fire sealed.
Cabling with required fire rated shall always be utilized, but it is required when
installed in air plenums or traversing floors of the building. SASO and IEC
60754 and 60332 requirements shall be followed.
17) Before attaching networking equipment to the cable infrastructure, each
terminated cable shall be tested with Category 6Acertification equipment. Each
cabling link shall pass all Category 6A standards and be submitted to the
system manufacturer to obtain the required minimum 10 year structured cabling
system warranty.
b. Structured Cabling Components
1) Work Area

Rev. 1 5.5 -166
(a) Work area is considered telecommunications outlet/connector (including

multi-user outlet assembly, consolidation point, and transition point),
work area cable (patch cord), and work area equipment.
(b) Work area outlet shall house a minimum of two cables per outlet box
location.
(c) A minimum of two outlet box locations shall be designed per space.
(d) Telecommunications outlets shall be located directly adjacent to an
electrical receptacle and shall typically be mounted at the same height.
2) Horizontal Distribution Systems
(a) Horizontal pathways include the raceways utilized for routing
telecommunications cabling such as j-hooks, conduit, and cable trays.
(b) Horizontal Pathway Systems
(1) Raceways shall be designed to accommodate the maximum amount
of work areas. Where pathways include additional cabling
requirements, capacity shall be increased accordingly.
(2) Access to pathways shall be maintained.
(3) Pathways shall be designed for a 40% fill capacity maximum
including space allocated for future, with each work area outlet
allowing for at least three cables.
(4) Cellular floors may be utilized in spaces where:
(i) Increased flexibility is required (large office layouts)
(ii) Large capacity is required
(iii) Increased security is necessary
(iv) Electrical interference is an issue
(5) Conduit pathways shall have bend radii six times the internal
diameter of the conduit for conduit smaller than 50 mm. For conduit
with an internal diameter larger than 50 mm, the bend radius must be
10 times the diameter.
(6) Conduit runs shall be designed to have no more than two bends.
(i) Where more than two 90 degree bends in a conduit run are
necessary, provide pull boxes between sections with two bends
or less.
(ii) Where a bend between 100 and 180 degrees is required,
provide a pull box at each bend.
(iii) Where conduit runs exceed 30 m, provide a pull box.
(7) Conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings to prevent
cable damage during installation or use.
(8) Access Floors
(i) Raised floors may be utilized in data centers and
telecommunications equipment rooms.

Rev. 1 5.5 -167
(ii) Cabling in raised floors shall be fire rated to permit usages of

space as air handling plenum.
(iii) Standard height for access floors shall be 150mm or higher,
with 50mm between the top of tray and the bottom of the
underside of the stringer allocated for accessibility.
(iv) Floors shall be designed with aluminum locking pedestals to
support and interlock with lateral bracing.
(9) Ceiling Systems
(i) Maintain 75 mm clear vertical space above conduit and cables.
(ii) Maintain 300 mm clear vertical space above cable trays.
(iii) Cable tray support span shall not be greater than the length of
a section of tray.
(iv) Cable trays shall be utilized to support cabling in areas of
cabling that converge and route to the Telecommunications
Room.
(v) Cable trays shall be supported by either trapeze supports,
cantilever brackets, individual rod suspensions brackets.
(vi) Cable trays accessories shall be provided by manufacturer.
(10) Typical telecommunications outlet back boxes shall be large capacity
to facilitate cable terminations and bends.
(c) Horizontal Cabling Systems
(1) Horizontal cables shall consist of:
(i) 4 pair 100 ohm balanced Category 6/6A or higher cabling
(terminated utilizing TIA-568B wiring standards)
(ii) Two or more strands of 50/125micron multimode fiber optic
cable (terminated utilizing Duplex LC connectors)
(2) Service loops at the TR shall be 3m; service loops at the work area
outlet location shall be 1m.
3) Backbone Distribution Systems
(a) Backbone systems shall be comprised of:
(1) Cable pathways
(2) Equipment Rooms
(3) Telecommunications Rooms (typically containing HC)
(4) Telecommunications enclosures (typically containing HC)
(5) Entrance Facility
(6) Transmission media (cables)
(7) Miscellaneous support facilities
(b) Backbone Building Pathways

Rev. 1 5.5 -168
(1) Distribution shall be in a star topology with no more than two levels of
cross-connects.
(2) Telecommunications Rooms shall be stacked in multilevel facilities.
(3) Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 25 mm above the floor.
(4) Sleeves shall be provided (103mm) to allow four sleeves or conduits,
plus one additional spare for every 4000m2.
(5) All penetrations shall be firestopped as required.
(6) Coordinate all penetrations with structural team.
(c) Backbone Building Cabling
(1) Backbone cabling shall typically consist of :
(i) Fiber optic cable
(ii) Multi-core twisted pair cabling (for analog lines)
(2) Fiber optic cable may be utilized for:
(i) Inter-building backbone cabling
(ii) Intra-building backbone cabling
(iii) Horizontal cabling
(iv) Patch cords and equipment cables
(3) Tight buffered fiber optic cables
(i) Single-mode fiber optic fiber
(ii) Utilized for:
(iii) Intra-building backbone cabling
(iv) Horizontal distribution cabling
(v) Patch cords and equipment cables
(4) Loose buffered fiber optics
(i) Outside plant cabling
(ii) Select inside plant cabling
(5) Hardware/equipment mounting may be:
(i) Wall mounted:
(ii) When rack mounting of equipment is not a possibility
(iii) Equipment requires wall mounting
(iv) Rack mounted (in 480 mm racks or cabinets) in:
(v) Telecommunications Rooms
(vi) Equipment Rooms
(vii) Computer Rooms
(viii) Provide splicing, termination and patch panels as required for
cabling being utilized.

Rev. 1 5.5 -169
4) Campus Cabling
(a) Indoor backbone campus fiber optic cabling shall have minimum bend
radius of 10 times the cables outside diameter installed, and 15 times the
outside diameter during installation.
(b) OSP backbone fiber optic cabling shall have minimum bend radius of 10
times the cables outside diameter installed, and 20 times the outside
diameter during installation.
(c) Install fiber optic cabling in inner duct to allow for sectionalization for
future cable pulls.
(d) Splicing
(1) Fusion
(e) Terminating
(1) Pigtail splicing with duplex LC connectors
(2) Pre-connectorized cables with duplex LC connectors
5) Telecommunications Rooms (TR) and Enclosures (TE)
(a) TRs may house:
(1) HC (horizontal cross connect)
(2) IC (intermediate cross connect)
(3) MC (main cross connect)
(4) EF (entrance facility)
(5) Passive components
(6) Active components served by backbone cabling
(b) TEs may house:
(1) HC
(2) IC
(3) MC
(c) Clearances:
(1) Provide 1 m (minimum) in front and rear of each equipment rack or
cabinet.
(2) Reserve minimum of 1m clear working area around cross connects
for accessibility.
6) Equipment Rooms
(a) Equipment Rooms serve a building, campus or tenant, while TRs serve
portions of a building.
(b) ER’s may house:
(1) EF (entrance facility)
(2) TR
(3) Cross-connect facilities

Rev. 1 5.5 -170
(4) Active components served by backbone cabling

(5) Building facilities
(c) TR size:
(1) Where usable floor space being served is less than 500 m2:
(2) Interior TR dimensions shall be 3.0 m x 2.4 m.
(d) Where usable floor space being served is greater than 500 m² and less
than or equal to 800 m²:
(e) Where usable floor space being served is greater than 800m² and less
than or equal to 1000m²:
(f) Clearances:
(1) Provide a minimum of 1 m in front and rear of each equipment rack
or cabinet.
(2) Reserve minimum of 1m clear working area around cross connects
for accessibility.
7) Telecommunications Entrance Facilities and Termination
(a) Separate entrance facilities may be required for:
(1) Access Provider
(2) Campus distribution
(3) CATV network
(4) FTTH system
(b) Designer shall work to coordinate right of way easements and permits as
applicable to the project.
(c) Full route diversity and redundancy is required. This requires a complete
(physical) separation of cable route including duct bank(s) to provide
redundancy. Mainly this is required for following, but not limited to:
(1) Hospitals
(2) Airports
(3) Police/Fire/Emergency Services
(4) Military
(5) Radio and TV stations
(6) Data and/or Control Centers
9. Distributed Television System
a. Distributed television systems implemented by the RCJ include various system
types such as IPTV, Hybrid Fiber Coaxial (HFC) and Satellite Master Antenna
(SMATV).

Rev. 1 5.5 -171
b. The IPTV system, utilizing FTTH GPON networks for distribution, shall be provided
for new projects for commercial or residential buildings. The RCJ has established a
central IPTV Headend Building located within the Buffer Zone. Local IPTV Buildings
are provided throughout Jubail to serve all areas of the city. Each Local IPTV
Building is connected to the IPTV Headend Building utilizing single-mode fiber in the
underground distribution system.
c. HFC type systems shall be provided for projects as directed by the RCJ. HFC type
systems are currently in use in existing RCJ facilities, and shall only be maintained
or expanded in renovation type projects. These projects shall be designed to
conform to ANSI/TIA-568-C.4: Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components
standard. New projects shall not provide HFC cable television based systems
without prior approval of the RCJ.
d. SMATV systems shall be used in residential projects for distribution of satellite IF
(Intermediate Frequency) signals to complement the IPTV service or where IPTV
systems are not available. An example of this a group of satellite dishes for an
apartment building being shared through a multi-switch to every apartment
(alongside IPTV / HFC). Additionally, a more complex system could use an optical
LNB to distribute the signals from a satellite dish farm to all the buildings within a
given area (such as in RIC where there is no IPTV or CATV system).
e. IPTV System Description
1) The RCJ provides complimentary television service to Jubail districts utilizing
IPTV signal distribution across dedicated GPON FTTH networks. New
buildings and developments requiring television service shall be provided with
IPTV system service as described here.
2) The RCJ IPTV signal originates within the central IPTV headend building
located in the Buffer Zone. The IPTV system equipment is provided in
equipment racks and is interfaced directly with GPON Optical Line Terminals
(OLTs) or other IP access networks for transmission across the FTTH network.
3) The location of Local IPTV buildings within districts shall be practically planned
in coordination with community planning to minimize optical fiber distribution
lengths throughout the district served. The GPON FTTH system supports
optical fiber distribution of up to a maximum logical distance between OLT and
ONT of 60km, physical distance is dependent on the optics currently available
and split ratios employed.
4) At customer premises, optical fiber GPON FTTH service extends to the Optical
Network Terminator (ONT) and interfaces with the building network structured
cabling system. IPTV network addressable set top boxes are provided at each
designated television location in the building and connected to the network
structured cabling system.
5) The existing IPTV headend equipment is located in ETSI standard four post
equipment rack, suitable to support system servers.
(a) Feeds into the existing IPTV Headend Building include satellite television
dishes for reception of cable/satellite TV networks as well as
programming transmitted to the headend over single-mode optical fiber.
(b) Existing satellite reception shall occur through a modular Integrated
Receiver Decoder (IRD) that accepts DVB-S/S2 sources, provides
descrambling, and outputs IP signals.

Rev. 1 5.5 -172
(c) The IP streams are then directed to a content processor which shall
perform the following tasks:
(1) Rate shaping of real-time, broadcast ‑ quality MPEG-4/AVC and
MPEG-2 SD and HD streams.
(2) Grooming, de-jittering, and seamless localized ad insertion
(3) Switched Digital Video, VOD Playlist Advertising, IPTV, and Bulk
Encryption
(d) Existing digital feeds are brought to the central IPTV Headend Building
on single-mode fiber and shall be converted to broadband signals,
demodulated, and IP encoded for distribution through the IPTV headend
content processor.
6) Redundant network switches shall provide connectivity from the FTTH OLT’s
in Local IPTV buildings in each district with the central IPTV Headend Building.
f. Existing IPTV System Components Description
1) Fiber Optic Receiver/ Demodulator/Encoder
(a) The Fiber Optic Receiver accepts digital television signals over single-
mode optical fiber with SC/APC connection from designated RCJ
sources.
(b) The fiber optic receiver module is integrated with a rack mounted
broadband distribution amplifier. System outputs include RF Output and
Test Ports.
(c) The fiber optic receiver shall be connected to a demodulator to extract
designated channels for local insertion into the IPTV system.
(d) The demodulators shall be frequency agile with broadcast quality.
(e) The demodulated signal shall be extended to IP encoders and connected
into the content processor.
(f) The IP encoder can maximally encode four (4) channels video and audio
and multiplex corresponding 4 SPTS into MPTS output. It shall comply
with MPEG-2 standard and has high encoding quality and efficiency.
2) Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD)
(a) The modular Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD) is based on a flexible
platform hosting different modules allowing for a configuration to meet
the requirements of the RCJ. The platform supports signal reception,
descrambling, and Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) outputs through
modules containing multiple inputs such as QAM, ASI, and DVB-S/S2.
The received services are descrambled using DVB (common interface)
or AES with virtual smartcards, as required.
(b) The system contains an intuitive web-based user control, Dual redundant
hot-swap power supply, and monitoring of system power and fans.
(c) A switch module in the IRD is used to enable MPEG traffic distribution
within the chassis and provides configuration and management of the
chassis.

Rev. 1 5.5 -173
(d) Input modules in the IRD analyze incoming transport streams and
extracts selected MPEG services from the DVB-S/S2 physical input
interface. The system shall permit the ability to mix input types freely
within a chassis enables multiple MPEG transport streams originating
from a variety of sources to be received and processed in parallel.
Received signals shall be demodulated, de-multiplexed and distributed to
other modules inside the chassis via the backplane.
(e) ASI output modules with independent ASI outputs shall be provided.
3) ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
(a) The ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge provides ASI to Gigabit Ethernet
bridging for video services. It shall bridge traffic from ASI-output IRDs,
Encoders, video routers, and other video sources to a common Gigabit
Ethernet IP backbone.
(b) The ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge contains twenty-four ASI inputs,
system Ethernet control ports, and an IP payload Gigabit output port.
4) Content Processor
(a) The content processor provides the RCJ IPTV system with optimal rate
shaping, re-multiplexing, and ad insertion capability at the IPTV head
end location.
(b) The content processor provides a software application for rate shaping of
real-time, broadcast-quality MPEG-4/AVC and MPEG-2 SD and HD
streams and handles up to 2Gbps of aggregate video stream throughput.
(c) The content processor possesses additional applications, such as
grooming, de-jittering, and seamless localized ad insertion, and has the
performance needed to support mission-critical initiatives like Switched
Digital Video, VOD Playlist Advertising, IPTV, and Bulk Encryption.
(d) The system has carrier-class reliability and high availability needed for
high stream counts with redundant and hot-swappable power supplies,
hot swappable fan trays, with 1:1 and N: 1 redundancy, and field-
replaceable input/output cards and processing modules.
5) IPTV and FTTH OLT Network Connections
(a) Gigabit Ethernet connections shall be provided from the central IPTV
Headend Building to each Local IPTV Building network termination card
on the FTTH OLTs through implementation of network switches.
(b) Network switches shall contain autosensing 10/100/1000 ports (IEEE
802.3 Type 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u Type 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.3ab
Type 1000BASE-T). The network switches shall also contain Layer 4
prioritization to enable prioritization based on TCP/UDP port numbers,
Traffic prioritization (IEEE 802.1p), and managed Layer 2 feature set.
Optical uplinks shall be required.
(c) Size the quantity of network switch ports based upon quantity of OLT
and IPTV system connections required, with a minimum of 20% spare.
48 port network switches shall be provided.
(d) Provide structured cabling systems to support network connections
conforming to ANSI/TIA 568-C and ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2 for TIA
Category 6A/ISO Class Ea/6a. In addition, cabling within the IPTV

Rev. 1 5.5 -174
headend building shall conform to ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0

“Information Technology - Generic Cabling Systems for Data Centers”.
(e) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be single-mode conforming to the
ITU-T G.652 D standard.
6) IPTV Set Top Boxes
(a) IPTV Set Top Boxes (STBs) are used to accept IPTV streams provided
from the RCJ Local IPTV Buildings in each district. These streams are
transported across the system FTTH GPON network to the building
where it interfaces with the building structured cabling system through an
ONT. Provide IPTV STBs located adjacent to user television displays,
with video and audio connections from the STB to the display. IPTV
STBs may also be integrated into audiovisual systems as a media
source in installations where CATV programming is required.
(b) The STB supports all necessary technologies for deployment of the IPTV
services including:
(1) High definition decoding and output
(2) MPEG2 and MPEG4 video formats
(3) AAC audio formats
(4) Hardware supported descrambling of media signals
(c) Ensure building infrastructure to support IPTV Set Top Boxes (STB’s) is
provided locally at each device including an IP network outlet and
building power.
(d) Typically in villas and apartments, IPTV STBs do not require fixed
mounting. Where required, ensure provisions for mounting the IPTV
STB are provided as needed including brackets, shelves, blocking, and
cable management. Mounting conditions shall accommodate device
passive ventilation requirements through proper device orientation and
clear space required by device manufacturer. Mounting conditions may
include:
(1) Cabinet entertainments centers
(2) Equipment rack mounting
(3) Wall or post shelf mounting adjacent to the television display
(e) Where projects require the television display to be included in the scope
of work, provide audiovisual cable patch cord connections from the IPTV
STB to the display.
g. CATV Tertiary System
1) CATV Tertiary Network
(a) The tertiary network is defined as the portion of the CATV networks from
the telecommunications hand hole, provided by others and located at the
Subscriber Property Line, to the telephone and CATV outlets in the
subscriber's residence. This includes but is not limited to raceways,
cables, protectors, splitters, amplifiers and jacks. All defined equipment
and fittings must be provided and installed by the Contractor building the
individual house or apartment.

Rev. 1 5.5 -175
(b) The CATV Tertiary Network consists of provision and installation of a 75

ohm coaxial cable, suitable for use with CATV frequencies up to 1000
MHz from the telecommunications hand hole to the individual CATV
outlets in the residence.
(c) The CATV cable shall be placed in the duct from the hand hole to a wall
mounted apparatus cabinet dimensioned to contain over-voltage
protection, splitters and where applicable amplifier or other equipment
required for system operation. From this point the cable will be extended
to all CATV outlets. No splicing of cable is permitted inside the duct.
(d) The CATV outlets shall be flush mounted jacks with covers that
automatically provide a 75 ohm termination on the cable when a plug is
not inserted into the jack. Splitters or tap-off shall be used at each
branching point in the cable. Any output of a splitter not used at a
branch point shall be terminated in a 75 ohm resistor. Locate CATV
outlets directly adjacent to electrical outlets with a matching faceplate
construction and color.
(e) The intent of all distribution design is to provide a test signal level of 0
dBmV, flat from 52 to 1000 MHz at each subscriber outlet. As a practical
approach to this objective, the signal level provided by the distribution
network at the subscribers connection point will be set between + 18 and
+ 22 dBmV. From this input level, the tertiary network design shall
provide for signals within the range - 3 to + 20 dBmV at the subscribers
outlet. The CATV distribution system is designed for 31 TV channels and
the worst-case receive signal condition (i.e., following 35 trunk amplifiers,
1 bridging amplifier and 2 line extenders) shall be:
(1) Signal to Hum: 41.49dB.
(2) Signal to Noise: 44.73dB.
(3) Signal to Cross-Modulation: 51.45dB.
(4) Signal to 2nd Order Intermode: 59.55dB.
(f) Each apartment shall be provided with a separate coaxial cable feed
from the main distribution box, located for convenient access in the entry
to the building.
(g) The CATV cable shall terminate first on a lightning protection block
before entering the building distribution system.
(h) Trunk, Distribution and Line Extender Amplifiers
(1) Broadband push-pull amplifier is used for amplification of the signal
in the trunk and spur feeds. Devices shall power powered through a
local power supply and shall be located in the equipment rack.
(2) Trunk and line extender amplifier shall have the main features as
shown in Table 5.5.2.C.

Rev. 1 5.5 -176
TABLE 5.5.2.C: MAIN FEATURES OF TRUNK AND LINE EXTENDER AMPLIFIERS
Trunk
Line Extender Amplifier
Amplifier
Nominal Impedance 75  75 
Frequency Response ± 0.25 dB ± 0.5 dB
Minimum input level 10 dBmV 10 dBmV
Minimum output level 25 dBmV 38 dBmV
Minimum full gain 27dB (forward amplifier)

25 dB
without equalizers 26 dB (reverse modules)
Noise figure 8 dB 7 dB
Test Jack at output - 30 dB - 30 dB
Return loss at input and
20 dB 20 dB
output at 40 MHz
(i) Distribution Amplifier
(1) Distribution amplifier is utilized to raise the output level of the
headend signal for insertion of the lower pilot frequency.
(2) Distribution amplifiers main features
(i) Nominal impedance input and output 75ohm.
(ii) Frequency range 47 to 870MHz.
(iii) Input level 78dBµV and output level 92dBµV.
(iv) Gain 12 to 14dB.
(v) Frequency response ± 0.4dB.
(vi) Isolation of test points, input and outputs - 20dB.
(vii) Pilot insertion level adjustable over ± 1dB.
(viii) Maximum admissible spurious emissions 4 x 10-9 W.
(j) Directional Coupler
(1) Directional coupler shall be two-way coupler with cast-aluminum
enclosure, 75 Ohm, and shall be used for connection of cables with
a maximum outer connector diameter of 12.7 mm.
(2) It shall have the features presented in Table 5.5.2.D.

Rev. 1 5.5 -177
TABLE 5.5.2.D: SPECIFICATION OF 8, 12 AND 16 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
8 dB 12 dB 16 dB
5 - 50 MHz 1.9 (2.4) 1.3 (1.6) 1.1 (2.2)

Through loss 50 - 600 MHz 2.0 (3.2) 1.4 (2.5) 1.2 (2.5)
dB
Nominal
(Maximum) 600 - 862 MHz 2.6 (3.6) 1.4 (2.8) 1.4 (2.8)
862 - 1000 MHz 3.4 (4.1) 1.8 (3.5) 1.8 (2.5)
5 - 50 MHz 8.6 12.2 16.9
Tap loss 50 - 600 MHz 8.8 12.1 16.8

dB
(± 1dB) 600 - 862 MHz 8.2 11.7 16.2
862 - 1000 MHz 8.3 11.7 15.8
5 - 50 MHz ≥ 28 ≥ 28 ≥ 25
Tap-to-output 50 - 600 MHz ≥ 21 ≥ 23 ≥ 24

dB
isolation 600 - 862 MHz ≥ 19 ≥ 19 ≥ 19
862 - 1000 MHz ≥ 18 ≥ 18 ≥ 18
Return loss dB ≥ 15
Power passing between all ports dB Max 12 A, 60 V (AC/DC)
(k) Line Splitter

(1) Line splitter shall have cast-aluminum enclosure with a maximum
outer connector diameter of 12.7mm.
(2) It shall have the features presented in Table 5.5.2.E.
TABLE 5.5.2.E: 2-WAY AND 3-WAY LINE SPLITTER
2-way 3-way
5 - 50 MHz 3.7 (4.3) 3.7/7.1 (4.4/8.0)

50 - 600
3.9 (5.2) 4.0/7.4 (5.4/8.7)
Insertion loss MHz
dB
Nominal 600 - 862
(Maximum) 3.9 (5.4) 4.0/7.6 (5.7/9.0)
MHz
862 - 1000
4.2 (5.7) 4.1/8.5 (6.0/9.2)
MHz
5 - 50 MHz ≥ 23 ≥ 23
Output Isolation 50 - 600 dB
≥ 23 ≥ 20
MHz

Rev. 1 5.5 -178
2-way 3-way
600 - 862
≥ 22 ≥ 20
MHz
862 - 1000
≥ 18 ≥ 18
MHz
Return loss dB > 16
Power passing between all ports dB Max 12 A, 60 V (AC/DC)
10. Master Clock System

a. The master clock system shall provide synchronized time throughout the facility.
Time source shall be provided through a network connection communicating via
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) and Network Time Protocol (NTP) RFC-1305
to an internet based stratum-1 network time server. This shall be the Royal
Commission NTP server if the facility is connected via the Metropolitan Area
Network (MAN) or an internet based time server otherwise. If no network or internet
source is available time can be sourced via the GPS (Global Positioning System)
time signal.
b. Master Clock System Types
1) Wired Clock Systems
(a) Clock system shall allow for combining data and electrical power signals
over the same cable.
(b) Clocks shall correct themselves upon receipt of digital signal.
2) Wireless Clock Systems
(a) Clocks shall self-synchronize upon receipt of wireless signal.
(b) Diagnostic function shall permit monitoring of last received wireless
signal.
(c) Web interface shall permit monitoring of system status.
3) Wireless Talkback Clock Systems
(a) Master clock with wireless talkback technology transceiver
(b) Clocks shall self-synchronize upon receipt of wireless signal.
(c) Diagnostic function shall permit monitoring of last received wireless
signal.
(d) System shall not require physical servers or additional hardware or
software to function.
(e) Talkback functionality permits communicating vital information such as
battery life, status updates, clock status, and signal strength to the
master clock. Any changes in this information shall be automatically
reported to the facility’s manager via email.
4) IP Clock Systems
(a) IP clocks shall utilize PoE to IEEE 802.3af/at or bt.

Rev. 1 5.5 -179
(b) System shall allow for monitoring of clocks through software, including:
(1) Uploading and downloading configuration capabilities
(2) Sending countdown functions to digital clocks
(3) Displaying clocks not receiving signal
(c) Power interruption to clocks shall not cause system failure.
c. Clocks Types
1) Analog Clocks
(a) Clocks shall have round or square 12/24 hour face with shatter-proof
case.
2) Digital Clocks
(a) Clocks display high-efficiency LED numeric values with shatter-proof
case.
d. Locations, Mounting, and Sizes
1) Provide minimum of one clock per occupied space.
2) Approximate mounting height shall be 2.4m above finished floor. Final location
and mounting height shall be coordinated with other equipment and furnishings
prior to installation.
3) Typical clocks shall be 300 mm in diameter (round clocks) or 230 mm on a side
(square clocks).
4) Large group spaces shall require larger clocks - 410 mm in diameter (round
clocks) or 300 mm on a side (square clocks).
5) Double sided clocks shall be provided in corridors.
e. Accessories
1) GPS
(a) GPS shall be capable of receiving synchronization signal from satellites.
2) Wireless Transmitter
(a) Capable of wirelessly transmitting data for synchronization of clock time.
3) Wireless Repeater
(a) Capable of wirelessly transmitting and receiving data for synchronization
of clock time.
4) Network Repeater
(a) Capable of receiving time signal through TCP/IP from master clock.
5) Environmental Protection
(a) In gymnasiums and other potentially high impact spaces, provide wire
guards on clocks.
f. Cabling for wired aspects of systems shall meet system manufacturer requirements
for types of communication protocols and cabling distances used.
11. Public Address and General Alarm

Rev. 1 5.5 -180
a. General
1) The public address system for offices shall be designed to permit one-way
general announcements, emergency notifications/warning and informational
notices to be broadcast. The system shall support intercom communications
functions.
2) Public Address systems for Mosques shall be designed for voice only.
3) Public Address and General Alarm (PAGA) for Industrial Areas shall include
Amplifiers, Speakers and Loudspeakers to broadcast general and emergency
announcements and Industrial Intercom Stations to provide important plant
communication functions in operational or emergency events (according to IEC
60849standard).
b. Public address system shall consist of the following but not limited to:
1) Network Audio Adapter
(a) The network audio codec shall be IP-addressable and convert analog
audio (mic or line level) to standard IP packets for transport over an IP-
based network including local area, wide area and the Internet. The
device shall be capable of simultaneous transport of audio, serial RS-232
data and contact closures. The device shall have variable sample rate
and audio bandwidth with a minimum latency/delay of 20 ms.
(b) The network interface shall be 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, Auto-
Negotiation and utilize the network protocols TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP and
RTP. The audio input shall be balanced, transformer-isolated, MIC/LINE
switchable with adjustable volume control.
(c) The audio output shall be balanced, transformer-isolated, (0 dBV, 600
ohms), with plug-in screw connector. Specifications shall include
frequency response of 50 to 14k Hz and distortion of under 0.3% (1k Hz,
sampling frequency 32 kHz).
(d) The unit shall be capable of Unicast transmission to up to 4 simultaneous
units/locations over LAN/WAN/Internet, and Multicast transmission to up
to 64 simultaneous units/locations over LAN/WAN.
(e) The device shall include software for configuration, operation and
management with password-protected access. The device shall include
a built-in web server for control and monitoring from any network-based
PC with password protected access.
2) Main Amplifiers
(a) The amplifiers shall have the following main features:
(1) Frequency response 60 Hz to 20 kHz ± 2 dB or better
(2) Maximum distortion 100 Hz to 16 kHz - 0.25%
(3) Signal to noise ratio 45 dB or better
(b) Balanced 70/100 V outputs shall be available at a screw terminal strip.
(c) The equipment shall have protection circuits to protect the amplifiers
from damage under all normal and abnormal operating conditions.
3) Control Pre-Amplifiers

Rev. 1 5.5 -181
(a) Control Pre-amplifiers shall be supplied by the Contractor to accept such

inputs as may be required under the terms of the Contract. All inputs
shall be preferably of 600 Ohm balanced or 50M Ohm single ended
configuration.
(b) There shall be at least one spare input in addition to the inputs required
by the Contract Drawings.
(c) Control Pre-amplifiers shall be equipped with mixable inputs, convertible
for various sources with supplementary modules and adapter kits.
Remote controllable priority switching for each input and separate
controls for treble and bass shall be provided.
(d) The output from the pre-amplifier shall be at a level compatible with the
input requirements of the main power amplifier.
(e) All inputs to the pre-amplifier shall be shielded and grounded cables.
4) Low Powered Amplifier (for Mosques Only)
(a) The amplifier provided shall consist of the pre-amplifier, power amplifier,
zone selector and a mixer in a single assembly.
(b) The input signal shall be balanced.
(c) The amplifier shall be equipped with tone control facilities to tailor the
audio response to suit the input signals and the required performance
detailed in this Specification.
5) Tone Signal Generator
(a) This unit shall generate various signals e.g. fire alarm, air raid warning,
air raid imminent and all clear etc. according to requirements of the Civil
Defense Bureau.
(b) External warnings may be initiated from Civil Defense Bureau
installations through dedicated links.
(c) Automatic release through systems such as fire alarm and burglar
detection and manual release must be possible.
6) Loudspeakers
(a) Performance of loudspeakers shall be not less than that specified in IEC
60581-7.
(b) Wall Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be provided with a resonating board and an
aluminum grille for universal application for flush or surface mounted
enclosures.
(2) The speaker shall be a high performance type and shall be provided
with an autotransformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 of output capacity.
(3) The unit shall incorporate a volume control. Frequency response shall
be ± 2 dB from 60 Hz to 16 kHz.
(c) Ceiling Speakers
(1) These speakers, including their accessories, shall be designed for
recess installation in various suspended ceiling types.

Rev. 1 5.5 -182
(2) The grille shall be aluminum. The speaker itself shall be the same
type as wall mounted loudspeakers.
(d) Column Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be for interior, or in weatherproof design, for
exterior installation. The enclosure shall be of aluminum and shall be
for wall or pole mounting, with suitable accessories.
(2) A transformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 capacity shall be built in.
Frequency response shall be at least ± 2 dB from 150 Hz to 15 kHz.
(e) Horn Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be for exterior installation in weatherproof
design. The enclosure shall be of impact resistant plastic with swivel
brackets.
(2) The built in autotransformer shall have taps for 1/8, 1/4, 1/2 and 1/1
of output capacity. The frequency response shall be within ±2 dB
from 200 Hz to 10 kHz.
7) Microphones
(a) Microphones shall be selected for the special usage. They shall have a
super re-inform characteristic, and shall be equipped with an adjustment
device for 5 step tone characteristic, and a presence switch.
(b) The frequency response shall be between 30 Hz and 20 kHz and the
feedback damping shall be approximately 20 dB at 130 ohm.
(c) Connection cables and supports shall be provided to suit the special
usage.
(d) All microphones shall be provided with desk mount or floor mount as
suitable for application.
8) Passive Combiner
(a) The passive combiner shall consist of a resistive network to combine the
outputs from the microphones and enable the connection of all three
microphones to a single pre-amplifier channel.
9) Headsets
(a) The headsets shall be of robust design and incorporate lightweight
components and level control.
(b) The frequency response shall be 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
10) Industrial Intercom Station
(a) Handset channel.
(b) Hands-free microphone channel.
(c) Output channel for handling an external amplified Loudspeaker.
(d) Capacity to activate an emergency call.
12. Audio/Visual Systems
a. System Type Descriptions

Rev. 1 5.5 -183
1) Auditorium
(a) The auditorium shape and acoustical treatments shall meet project
requirements and be designed by an acoustician or acoustical
consultant.
(1) Provide room calculations for the following:
(i) Reverberation Time
(ii) Noise Criteria (NC)
(iii) Potential Acoustic Gain (PAG)/Needed Acoustic Gain (NAG)
(b) The room shall typically have pendant mounted projectors and motorized
projection screens. The projector can be floor mounted if a projector
room is provided. The projectors shall be native WUXGA resolution,
have a minimum 6000 ANSI lumens, and be a 3-chip LCD.
(c) Each projector shall have the capability to display independent images.
(d) Power, network, and twisted pair audiovisual connections shall be
provided to the projector locations.
(e) Motorized tab tensioned front projection screens with low voltage control
interfaces and wall switches shall be provided. The screens shall be
ceiling recessed.
(f) The screens shall have a 16:10 aspect ratios and be sized to maximize
viewing distances as required.
(g) The screens shall be supplied with black drop and the viewable surface
bottom edges shall be approximately 4’ above finished floor (AFF).
(h) The screen surface is matte white to facilitate general presentations.
(i) A lectern (not mobile) shall be provided for the classroom and connected
into a floor box input/output plate beneath the lectern.
(j) The lectern shall have a goose neck microphone with shock mount.
(k) Laptop video/audio, power, network, and microphone patch cables shall
be stored in a cable cubby in the lectern surface.
(l) A power receptacle with USB charging shall be located in the lectern.
(m) The lectern shall have equipment rack rails and contain the following
major components:
(1) Blu-ray player
(2) Permanent PC with wired mouse and keyboard
(3) Media presentation matrix switcher with amplifier and control
processor
(4) Twisted pair extenders
(n) A ceiling document camera shall be provided over the instruction table.
(o) Signal distribution shall utilize HDBaseT technology or other enhanced
proprietary technology.

Rev. 1 5.5 -184
(p) A scaling twisted pair receiver shall be mounted with the projectors to
receive the video and control signals. The video signal sent from various
sources shall be scaled to match the native resolutions of the projectors.
(q) Wall mounted front speakers in the room will operate to provide program
audio.
(r) BYOD (Bring Your Own device) collaboration shall be. Up to four (4)
student tablet devices shall be capable of presenting simultaneous on
the projection screen using Campus Wi-Fi.
(s) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system using serial RS-232/485 or network connection interfaces.
(t) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported in the
systems at the discretion of the RCJ.
(u) A system input for a camera shall be provided in the rear of the room.
(v) A wall mounted touch panel/button controller will be used to operate the
system. This panel shall permit control of the following:
(1) Intro screen
(2) System on/off
(3) Source selection
(4) Video mute
(5) Video freeze
(6) Blu-Ray device control
(7) Ceiling document camera controls
(8) Program volume
(9) Audio mute
(10) Help
2) Classrooms
(a) The Classroom audiovisual shall facilitate classroom lecture,
presentation, and collaboration.
(b) The room shall have one (1) ultra or extreme short-throw projector. The
projector shall be native WXGA resolution, have a minimum 3000 ANSI
lumens, capable of displaying 95”, and be a 3-chip LCD.
(c) Power, network, and twisted pair, audiovisual connections (HDMI) shall
be provided to the projector location.
(d) A smart interactive board with integrated sound and wall/floor outlets
shall be provided. The screen shall support multiple simultaneous
touches.
(e) The screen shall have a 16:10 or 16:9 aspect ratio and be sized to
maximize viewing distances as required.
(f) The screen surface shall be matte white to facilitate general
presentations.

Rev. 1 5.5 -185
(g) One (1) HDMI/VGA with 3.5mm stereo audio twisted pair transmitter
plate shall be available as inputs for the system from a designated
presentation location at the front teaching wall. This shall provide a
connection for Instructor laptops. The twisted pair transmitter shall utilize
HDBaseT technology or other enhanced proprietary technology.
(h) A scaling twisted pair receiver shall be mounted with the projector to
receive the video and control signals. The video signal sent from various
sources shall be scaled to match the native resolution of the projector.
(i) BYOD (Bring Your Own device) collaboration shall be supported. Up to
four (4) student tablet devices shall be capable of presenting
simultaneous on the projection screen using building Wi-Fi.
(j) The classroom shall also contain a media presentation switcher with
integrated amplifier, twisted pair extender, and control processor.
(k) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system.
(l) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported in the
systems, however the system shall also support PC based Web
conferencing.
(m) A wall mounted touch panel/button controller may be used to operate the
system. This panel shall permit control of the following:
(1) Intro screen
(2) System on/off
(3) Source selection
(4) Video mute
(5) Video freeze
(6) Blu-Ray device control
(7) Program volume
(8) Audio mute
(9) Help
3) Conference Room
(a) The room shall have one (1) large 2,032 mm nominal flat panel display
wall mounted with a swing arm mount and recessed back box.
(b) The room shall have a table based room collaboration system consisting
of four (4) HDMI connections and two (2) VGA/Stereo connections.
“Show me” selector cables in a cable cubby shall provide source control.
The cables shall be located in retractors mounted under the table.
(c) A presentation switcher shall be secured under the table. An HDMI
output from the switcher shall be connected to a twisted pair transmitter
located in the floor box. A twisted pair receiver, audio de-embedder, and
mini amplifier shall be located behind the flat panel display.
(d) The collaboration system shall control the flat panel display using an RS-
232 based control processor and button panel controller.

Rev. 1 5.5 -186
(e) Two (2) mono 70V ceiling speakers shall be located in the room to
provide program audio.
(f) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system.
(g) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported at the
discretion of the RCJ.
4) Video Wall
(a) The video wall is typically used to provide a real time display
informational data, sensor data, and video surveillance.
(b) The size of the video wall shall be coordinated based on user
requirements and be proportional to number of operators required within
the control room.
(c) The video wall shall consist of an array of flat panel displays or small
form factor video cubes supported from an engineered framing system.
The displays shall have zero or narrow mullions designed for video wall
applications. The Video Wall should have an extreme narrow bezel
(ENB) gap that reduces the bezel width (bezel-to-bezel). This is in order
to guarantee the correct operation for the Integrated Security System
which requires detailed visualization of Maps, Road Routes, etc.
(d) The panel framing system and mounts shall provide rear access or
scissor supports permitting removable or maintenance of single panel in
the array. The framing systems shall accommodate cable management
for power and video distribution.
(e) The video wall shall be provisioned with a hardware based video
processor to collect video source inputs from numerous ITS servers
including video surveillance network video recorders and storage area
networks. Coordinate the quantities of inputs based on user
requirement.
(f) Any system input can operate as a Native High Resolution Channel,
Scaled PIP, Scaled Background, or Key Channel - on any display in the
system. The video processor shall provide blending, windowing, mixing
and scaling along with key frame effects. Operators shall control the
video wall from PC workstations.
b. System Components
1) Projection Screens
(a) Types shall include: front projection and rear projection
(b) Gain: Indication of screen's luminance or brightness, measured
perpendicular to screen center and relative to magnesium carbonate
block, which serves as standard for 1.0 gain. Higher numbers indicate
greater brightness.
(c) Viewing Angle: Horizontal angle from perpendicular center of screen at
which gain or brightness decreases by 50%.
(d) Format: Proportion of projection screen viewing area expressed as a
ratio of width/height.
(1) HDTV Format: 1.78:1.

Rev. 1 5.5 -187
(2) 16:10 Wide: 1.60:1.

(e) Types shall include:
(1) Manual
(i) Screen Operation: Manually operated, retractable projection
screen mounted on ball bearing rigid steel spring roller with
controlled screen return mechanism.
(ii) Form screen bottom into pocket holding tubular metal slat with
attached steel pull bail
(iii) Protect slat ends with heavy-duty end caps
(iv) Pull cord
(v) Adjustable roller mounting brackets to allow centering or
offsetting the screen within the case.
(vi) Screen Mounting Type: Ceiling Recessed
(vii) Screen Viewing Surface:
(viii) Permanently attached to roller
(ix) Front projection, flame retardant, mildew resistant, fiberglass
fabric, black backed typically with standard black borders,
easily cleaned with mild soap and water solution
(2) Motorized
(i) Screen Operation: Electrically operated, retractable, with rigid
metal roller
(ii) Motor: Housed inside metal roller and including automatic
thermal overload protection, integral gears, capacitor and
electric brake to prevent coasting
(iii) Type: 3-wire with ground with quick connect male plug-in
connector, permanently lubricated, quick reversal type
designed for mounting inside roller
(iv) Include preset, adjustable limit switches to automatically stop
viewing surface in UP or DOWN position
(v) Electric Controls: Wall-mounted switch
(vi) Switch: 3 position type with cover plate for UP, DOWN and
STOP functions
(vii) Junction Box: attached to screen case
(3) Portable
(i) Free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable, projection
screen with pneumatic spring system allowing screen to be
raised and lowered with minimal effort
(4) Table Top
(i) Compact, free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable,
projection screen suitable for tabletop presentations

Rev. 1 5.5 -188
(5) Tripod
(i) Free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable, tripod type
projection screen
(ii) Aluminum housing case for screen on shall be on spring roller.
Attach case to tripod support. Provide with built-in lock to
secure screen fabric during transport and use to prevent
shifting.
(iii) Tripod support: Extruded aluminum legs with toe release
mechanism. Legs mounted on self-locking extension support
tube with high and low case adjustment.
2) Flat Panel Displays
(a) Displays shall be professional grade displays capable of operating
24hrs/day, 7 days a week.
(b) Tamper resistant control locks shall prevent unauthorized adjustments at
standalone locations or non-monitored public locations.
(c) Display shall allow for both vertical and horizontal mounting.
(d) Display shall be of high durability in exposure to moisture, smoke, and
well as dust and temperature changes.
(e) Display shall allow a variety of input terminal cards as well as multiple
inputs.
(f) Viewing angle shall be a wide angle to allow screen to retain color when
viewed at a wide angle.
(g) Displays shall permit RS-232 control.
(h) Screen shall be equipped with rear speakers.
(i) Screen may offer touchscreen capabilities.
(j) Types:
(1) LED
(2) LCD
(3) Monitor
(4) 3D
3) Audiovisual Control Systems
(a) Audiovisual control systems shall be IP network based.
(b) Audiovisual control systems shall have the following capabilities:
(1) Control panel integration
(2) RS-232c control ports
(3) IR control ports
(4) Relay control ports
G. Safety and Security Systems
1. General

Rev. 1 5.5 -189
a. The Safety and Security Systems shall fully comply with the HCIS Directives 3870
and 3871
2. Access Control System
a. The access control system consists of a controller and associated hardware. This
provides for the physical connection to readers, locking hardware, door status
switches, and request to exit devices. Access Control Door Types and Locations
1) Typically, access control doors permit free egress at all times.
2) Monitored only - Doors are equipped with door status switches reporting to the
centralized control system.
(a) Passive infrared detectors or request to exits shunt the alarm triggered
by activation of door status switch.
3) Electrified Doors - Doors may be programmed to allow access during
scheduled building hours. Otherwise access may be granted through:
(a) Authorized Access - Authorized credentials shunt the alarm triggered by
activation of door position switch from exterior. Interior passive infrared
detectors, or request to exits shunt alarm triggered by activation of door
status switch from interior.
(1) Access control system keeps log of authorized entry.
b. User Credentials and Access Readers may include:
1) Proximity card
2) SMART card
3) Outdoor card reader.
4) Wireless card reader.
5) Key fob
6) Biometrics
7) Keypad
c. Access Control System Panels
1) Panels shall have sufficient capacity for input and outputs to provide for the
card readers, electric strikes, door monitors and other devices as required.
2) Control system shall have features to reduce false alarms.
3) Controllers shall interface between the central station and remote sensors and
controls.
4) Panels shall include main Controller Cards and have capacity to expand the
doors quantity to be monitored through Expansion Cards.
d. Cabling and Pathways
1) Cabling shall be plenum rated where exposed in environmental air plenums.
2) Cabling shall include low-voltage control cabling, control-circuit conductors,
and identification products.
3) Wiring within Enclosures:

Rev. 1 5.5 -190
(a) Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and
without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
(b) Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
(c) Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
(d) Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of
enclosure.
(e) Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks.
(f) Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams.
(g) Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
(h) Cabling shall not be spliced.
4) Pathways
(a) Cabling shall be supported in conduit to headend location. Where
conduit is not provided, cabling shall be supported using open top cable
supports or cable tray as required.
(b) Outlet boxes, connection panels, cameras, card readers and other
devices shall be weatherproof gasket type, IP52 or IP65 in the following
instances:
(1) On surface of exterior face of building, including areas where not
under canopies, cast boxes with threaded hubs must be used and
under canopies steel boxes with gasket connections to devices
(2) In any areas where specifically noted "WP" or required by the local
regulation
(3) Within air conditioning enclosures
(4) In underground splice boxes
(5) On building roof
(6) Within vivarium locations
(7) In unconditioned spaces subject to exterior ambient conditions such
as loading docks and parking garages
(c) Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and
location
(1) Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel
conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated.
(2) PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed
for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and
scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use
sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness
and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
(3) EMT: Use compression, steel fittings.

Rev. 1 5.5 -191
(4) Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit.
(5) Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with
concrete or earth.
3. Automatic Number Plate Recognition (ANPR)
1) ANPR is a technical method of using closed circuit video surveillance cameras
coupled with processors to determine vehicle license plate numbers. ANPR
shall be used to automatically read and recognize vehicle registration number
plates, which can then be cross-checked against a linked database.
2) The ANPR system will have the following capabilities:
(a) Locate and to isolate the number plate in the image
(b) Correct the brightness and the contrast of the number plate
(c) Separate each character of the number plate
(d) Recognize each character of the number plate through optical character
recognition
3) The ANPR capture unit contains the camera, housing, mounts, and infrared
focusing detectors. The ANPR process unit contains the computer, image
frame grabber, and recognition engine. The process unit can control one or
more capture units simultaneously.
4) Fixed ANPR cameras shall be situated in designated traffic and entrance areas
and be mounted in weatherized enclosures.
5) The ANPR camera shall be served by a local weatherized terminal box
providing easy access to all hardware interfaces and power supplies.
6) The terminal box shall interface through approved wired or wireless
connections to the RCJ network to communicate with database system
software.
7) The database system software shall be the central repository to all number
plate data along with tools to support data analysis, queries, and reporting for
investigative purposes. It shall provide administrative and data analysis
functions for both mobile and fixed deployments of ANPR.
8) Each ANPR system shall be capable of performing at traffic volumes of 1,000
vehicles per hour at a minimum.
b. System Selection and Fixed Locations
1) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall confirm the locations where ANPR Systems
are to be provided with the RCJ. The location and application of the ANPR
system shall determine the components and configurations required for the
system. Examples locations where ANPR systems may be required by RCJ
include:
(a) Car Parks
(1) The ANPR system shall provide automated parking facility
management and security for airports, hospitals, universities, arenas,
stadiums, and other locations as designated.

Rev. 1 5.5 -192
(2) The system shall record parking ticket number, day, and time which
are linked in a management application.
(3) The system shall permit correct amounts to be charged for lost
tickets.
(4) Ticket interchange shall be blocked where vehicle number plates do
not match with the entrance tickets.
(5) The system shall provide visitor history reports and identify unusual
parking behaviors.
(6) Tabulation of occupancy levels shall be a feature of the system.
(b) Access Control
(1) ANPR shall be used in conjunction with driver personal access
control credentials to permit vehicle access at designated gated
entrances.
(c) Public Safety
(1) Where designated by the RCJ, the ANPR system shall provide
continuous surveillance of high-traffic areas to enables rapid,
efficient, and appropriate deployment of public safety resources.
c. Cameras
1) Cameras types shall be selected based upon application requirements and
include:
(a) Compact ANPR Camera
(1) Compact cameras shall be used in temporary or fixed applications
where visual aesthetics is a project goal, or project budgets require a
cost effective option.
(2) The controller shall be integral to the camera unit with a single point
connecting cable.
(b) Fixed Single Lane ANPR Camera
(1) Single lane cameras shall be used in single lane applications or in
dense areas such as busy intersections where small sized systems
are required.
(2) The camera shall provide a minimum of 1.5m of horizontal traffic lane
coverage.
(c) Fixed Wide Lane ANPR Camera
(1) Wide lane cameras shall be used to capture multiple license plates in
the same field of view across the minimum width of a highway lane.
(2) The camera shall be used where interfacing with external devices
such as radar, weigh-in-motion, or ticketing systems is required.
(d) Fixed High Resolution ANPR Camera
(1) High Resolution cameras shall be used to capture multiple license
plates in the same field of view across a minimum width of 2.8m of
horizontal traffic lane coverage.

Rev. 1 5.5 -193
(2) The camera shall contain high-power IR pulsed illuminator LEDs to

permit high resolution imaging.
(3) Real time video triggering upon number plate presence shall provide
optimum plate detection. A vehicle presence detector input may also
be provided for capturing vehicle overview images when no license
plate is present.
(4) The camera shall be integrated with third party devices including
Weigh-in motion, radar, lane controllers for tolling, and loop detectors
for parking as required by the application.
2) The camera units shall be fully integrated and rugged incorporating the fixed
ANPR camera, illuminator and processor within a single sealed enclosure.
3) Dual lens cameras shall be provided with channels for integrating infrared and
color images. Infrared capability shall capture the plate number regardless of
sun glare, headlights, darkness, or weather conditions.
4) The system optical character recognition (OCR) engine shall be specific to the
region. The system shall operate under conditions of skewed and off-axis plate
reads, various plate sizes, syntax rules, and designs.
5) The system shall vary the flash, shutter and gain settings of the camera to
capture multiple plate images, ensuring the highest quality photo regardless of
light or weather conditions. The image determined to produce the highest
quality read shall be used for processing.
6) Camera lenses shall be selected based on required depth and field of view.
7) Camera enclosures shall be weatherproof sealed to IP67 Standards minimum
and the Operation Temperature range shall be -20 to 75 °C.
8) The system shall support TCP / IP Ethernet with socket and FTP protocols,
Wireless LAN connectivity, relay output, RS232, or true IP connectivity over
GPRS / GSM.
9) The cameras shall be web-enabled IP-addressable devices.
d. Software and Databases
1) Database
(a) Database system software includes administration utilities permitting for
customization of screens, setup of users, and specification of databases
for comparison purposes.
(b) The software shall permit data mining, allowing users to locate and map
hits based on a wide range of criteria including partial plates, street
address, GPS coordinates, and time and date.
(c) Remote camera health notifications shall be provided via email.
(d) Car Park Monitoring Software
(1) The software shall be web based and track items such as:
(i) Mean stay times
(ii) Total vehicle in/out
(iii) Current occupancy levels

Rev. 1 5.5 -194
(2) The software shall offer graphing functionality to provide visual

depiction of key trends.
(3) The software shall also identify unusual behaviors, such as repeat
visitors or long stay visitors.
(4) The software shall create hotlists to flag vehicles known for
suspicious activity and alert management when such vehicles are
present.
2) User Portals
(a) User software shall have a web enabled interface permitting remote
mobile users to perform queries and receive hit alerts from local servers
using laptops or PDA’s. The system shall permit efficient allocation of
enforcement resources for fixed camera deployments.
(b) The application software shall be intuitive and configured to permit
individual selection of device(s) and hotlist(s) of interest.
(c) The software shall display reads including license plate number, time &
date, device and location (GPS coordinate).
(d) The software shall be username and password protected requiring pre-
set VPN or firewall recognition.
4. Intrusion Detection Systems
a. General
1) This Subsection applies to the intrusion detection systems inside residential,
commercial, institutional and industrial facilities.
2) Purpose
(a) The primary purpose of the intrusion detection system is to notify public
safety personnel and/or facility occupants upon system alarm, providing
the location and type of secure perimeter breach.
(b) The secondary purpose is to initiate security functions which are building
functions intended to increase the protection of the individuals and
physical property.
3) The intrusion detection system shall be provided in accordance with the
physical security requirements of the facility.
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall collaborate with the RCJ to
determine the following project intrusion detection system requirements
prior to the 10% design submission.
(1) Project site security perimeters
(2) Building security perimeter
(3) Layered security perimeters within buildings
(i) Public Areas
(ii) Employee Areas
(iii) High Value Asset Areas
(4) Intrusion Detection Zones

Rev. 1 5.5 -195
(5) Alarm Types and Zones

(6) Building Hours of Operation
(7) System Arming/Disarming Positions
(8) System Monitoring Positions
(9) System Reporting Locations and Means
(10) Building Systems Interface Requirements
(i) Fire Alarm System
(ii) CCTV Video Surveillance System
(iii) Access Control System
(iv) Lighting Control System
(v) Building Automation Systems
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare documentation to
summarize the recommended approach for the intrusion detection
system designed for the facility. This documentation shall be submitted
to the RCJ for review and approval and shall include the following:
(1) Floor plans illustrating the locations for all required intrusion detection
system equipment
(2) Description summarizing the detection methods selected for the
various spaces throughout the facility
(3) System operational description
b. System Description and Requirements
1) The intrusion detection systems shall consist of modular architecture,
microprocessor-based controls, intrusion sensors and detection devices, and
communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions.
2) The intrusion detection system shall be a component of an integrated security
management system that performs additional related functions such as access
control, security video surveillance, and emergency communications.
3) System components shall be continuously monitored for normal, alarm, and
trouble conditions.
4) Alarm signals shall display at a master control unit and actuate audible and
visual alarm devices.
5) Trouble signals shall indicate system problems such as battery failure, open or
shorted transmission line conductors, or control-unit failure.
6) A master control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection devices and
connecting wiring in a multiplexed distributed control system or as part of a
network.
7) The system shall interface with computer software with the capability to fully
program the panel by connecting to the panel through a standard phone line
connection, Ethernet network connection, or network connection across the
Internet.

Rev. 1 5.5 -196
8) The system areas and zones shall be programmable and can be assigned to
time schedules. The system shall store, log, display, and transmit specific
custom designations for system areas, zones, and user names.
9) The system shall support user interaction by way of a keypad, web browser,
system software, key switch, or radio frequency wireless control.
10) System operators shall have the ability to acknowledge alarms, arm/disarm
zones, and conduct system tests.
11) Alarm or supervisory signals from certain intrusion detection devices shall
permit the intrusion detection system to control the following functions in related
systems:
(a) The system shall interface with computer software capable of locking
down all access controlled doors.
(b) The system shall interface with computer software capable of monitoring
and logging all events.
(c) The system shall interface with computer software capable of exporting
reports.
(d) Switch selected lights.
(e) Shift elevator control to a different mode.
(f) Open a signal path between certain intercommunication stations.
(g) Switch signal to selected monitor from CCTV camera in vicinity of sensor
signaling an alarm.
c. Detector Operation and Selection
1) The most common detector sensor devices which are generally used include
motion sensors, photoelectric beams, and glass break detectors.
2) Specialty detectors such as shock detectors may be considered for special
applications in appropriate facilities.
3) Motion Sensors
(a) Motion detectors determine if someone is moving in protected rooms or
areas. Ceiling or wall-mounted devices detect movement within the
protected area and analyze the motion to determine if an actual intrusion
occurred.
(b) If the sensor detects motion when the system is armed, an alarm
message is sent to the central monitoring station. While the system is
disarmed, it monitors the motion throughout the day, but does not send
alarm messages. It can, however, send messages if someone tampers
with the detector.
(c) Motion detectors may utilize various technologies to detect motion
including passive infrared (PIR) technology, microwave motion
technology, and dual motion technology.
(1) Passive Infrared Technology
(i) The PIR detector can be made up of one or more elements that
are precisely arranged and aimed so that the sensor can judge

Rev. 1 5.5 -197
the size and speed of travel related to a moving object within its
view pattern.
(ii) This can help to minimize false activations from rodents or
other small animals, yet trigger accurately when a person walks
within its viewing pattern.
(iii) When the detector senses motion in the protected area, its
relay output changes the state of a zone input on the system.
The control panel responds to this change according to its
program.
(iv) PIR detectors contain optical mirror or lens configured to create
a viewing pattern.
(v) There are three major types of PIR sensor visual patterns
including:
(vi) Wall-mounted long-range curtain or barrier pattern
(vii) Wall-mounted wide angle, volumetric
(viii) Ceiling-mounted 360 degrees wide angle, volumetric
(2) Microwave Motion Technology
(i) The sensor uses the Doppler Effect to sense a change in the
frequency of a low-power microwave signal. As an object
moves toward the sensor, the reflected frequency increases.
As an object moves away from the sensor, the reflected
frequency decreases.
(ii) By comparing these characteristics with the frequency being
transmitted, the detector can accurately sense an object as it
moves through the protected area.
(iii) When the detector senses motion in the protected area, its
relay output changes the state of a zone input on the system.
The control panel responds to this change according to its
program.
(iv) K-Band microwave technology shall allow a precise pattern
wave less likely to activate when objects outside of the
protected room move, such as in the case with store-front
display windows or multi-tenant office complexes.
(3) Dual Technology Motion
(i) Dual technology motion detectors use both PIR and Microwave
technologies to determine if there is motion within a protected
area prior to alarming.
(ii) The major advantage of using dual technology motion
detectors is the built-in validation of motion within the protected
area. Both sensors detect motion, but sense it in different
ways. This helps to minimize false activations caused by
environmental changes, small animals and other unexpected
conditions.
(iii) In some cases, the detectors can conserve power by allowing
the PIR to remain active while allowing the microwave sensor

Rev. 1 5.5 -198
to sleep. If the PIR senses motion, the microwave sensor

activates and verifies the motion. If there is no motion sensed,
the detector does not change the state of its alarm output.
(iv) When the detector senses motion from the PIR and microwave
sensors in the protected area, its relay output changes the
state of a zone input on the system. The control panel
responds to these changes according to its program.
(d) PIR detectors shall be used only in stable environments with no open
windows and minimal air flow.
(e) Dual technology motion detectors shall be used in harsh environments
such as drafty areas in front of windows, warehouse and storage
environments or in multi-tenant facilities.
(f) Motion detectors may be wall or ceiling mounting. Observe product
guidelines for permissible mounting heights.
(g) Motion detectors located in public areas or otherwise potentially subject
to intentional tampering shall have cover and base tamper supervision
and anti-mask supervision to avoid blockage of view.
(h) Motion detectors shall be connected to the intrusion detection system
using independent zone inputs or be installed as part of an addressable
system.
(i) The pattern diagrams of each motion detector shall be verified to ensure
coverage of area to be protected. Detectors shall have pattern shaping
capabilities to provide coverage in zones as required.
(j) Motion detectors to be installed in areas where animals or pests may be
present shall have animal immunity features.
(k) Motion detectors shall have LED status indicators to permit visual
confirmation of operation.
(l) Motion detectors shall be discrete and low profile where space aesthetics
is a project goal.
(m) The motion detectors used shall resist false alarms.
(n) Where approved by the RCJ, wireless motion detectors may be used for
specific deployments.
(1) Wireless connections shall be fully supervised.
(2) Batteries shall have a minimum 5 year life.
(o) Outdoor rated motion detectors shall be used in the case of secured
outdoor areas, infrastructure sites, building sites, and industrial yards.
4) Photoelectric Beams
(a) Photoelectric beams detectors shall be used in indoor or outdoor
applications to provide a line of sight detection barrier between a
transmitting and receiving unit.
(b) It shall detect an interruption of a pulsed, infrared, light beam that links
transmitter and receiver.

Rev. 1 5.5 -199
(c) Photoelectric beam detectors may be used for outdoor applications such
as fence lines, parking areas, outdoor stock areas, buildings, driveways,
and roadways.
(d) Photoelectric beam detectors may be used for indoor applications such
stock isle protection and shipping and receiving doors.
(e) The detector shall have adjustable optics and obscuration timing to
calibrate to environmental issues.
(f) The detector shall require two mounting locations that are within an open
line of sight.
(g) The receiving unit shall be mounted closest to the control to minimize
cabling of tamper and alarm outputs.
5) Glass break Detectors
(a) Glass break detectors shall be used to detect unique airborne acoustic
energy spectrum and high-frequency vibrations caused by breaking
glass associated with unlawful intrusion through windows.
(b) The detector shall sense the characteristics and patterns associated with
a wide variety of common glass types such as plate, tempered,
laminated, coated, wired, double pane, sealed and insulated.
(c) The detector shall be designed to suppress very loud noises associated
with a window break occurring in close proximity to the sensor.
(d) The detector shall permit remote testing using handheld simulator/test
equipment.
6) Shock Detectors
(a) Shock detectors shall detect tampering and movement and be used to
protect high value assets such as safes, vault doors, computer
equipment, electronics, tools, building materials, and pieces of art.
d. Intrusion Detection Control Panel
1) Control panels shall be designed to meet the unique requirements of each
building and occupancy. Control panels shall be located in secured
environmentally conditioned areas within proximity of facility access control and
security video surveillance equipment panels.
2) The control panel shall contain the following features:
(a) Hardwired zones
(b) Support for wireless zones
(c) Power limited bell circuit
(d) Dialer
(e) Accommodation for user codes, authority levels, and keypad macros
(f) Scheduling
(g) Event logging
(h) Pager support
(i) Printer support

Rev. 1 5.5 -200
(j) Multiplexing loop interface

(k) Programmable auxiliary relays
(l) Partitioning for independent control of areas
3) Zoning:
(a) The building area may be divided into zones as required to allow for
accurate and rapid determination of the intrusion location and the type of
detectors being activated.
4) Control panels shall have spare zone capacity.
5) The control panels shall be a multi-processor based networked system
designed specifically for intrusion detection. The control panels shall include
all required hardware, software, and site specific system programming to
provide a complete and operational system.
6) The control panel shall be diagnostic type and shall be designed such that
interactions between any applications can be configured and modified using
software provided by a single supplier.
e. Keypads
1) Keypads shall be provided for system user interfaces. They shall be located at
designated building access points in coordination with the Royal Commission.
2) The keypads shall have LCD or graphic displays with menu driven prompts for
clear operation without the use of complicated command strings.
3) The keypads shall display current system status and alarm locations.
4) Authorized building users shall be able to arm and disarm the intrusion
detection system through the keypad interface.
f. Intrusion Detection Sounders
1) The intrusion detection system shall be designed with sufficient notification
devices to provide ample notification for the building occupants as required by
the RCJ. Notification shall include both audible and visual devices.
2) Audible
(a) Audible devices consisting of horns, bells and/or speakers shall be
located throughout each facility to provide audible notification of the
intrusion condition. Audible devices shall be specified with multiple tap
settings to facilitate adjustment of the sound intensity to adapt to the final
installed conditions.
(b) The type of audible device shall be determined from the requirements of
the facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop a
recommendation for the type of audible device and submit to the RCJ for
review and approval.
(c) Audible devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
3) Visual
(a) Strobes shall be located throughout each facility to provide visual
notification. Strobes shall be specified with multiple candela ratings to

Rev. 1 5.5 -201
facilitate adjustment of the light intensity to adapt to the final installed

conditions.
(b) Visual devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
4) Audible/Visual Combination Devices
(a) The use of combination audible/visual devices is permitted and is the
preferred approach.
g. Power Source(s)
1) Power to the control panel must be fed from a reliable source of supply which
will not be disconnected for maintenance on other electrical systems. The
circuit breaker shall be labeled "Intrusion Detection - Do Not Switch Off" and
shall be capable of being locked.
2) Standby power shall be available to the system in case of failure of the main
power source. Integral backup provision with nickel cadmium batteries shall be
located in the control panel. The backup batteries shall be sufficient to operate
the system for a minimum of 24 hours.
3) Where the building is furnished with a backup power source (generator, battery,
or UPS) the system shall be supplied from the life safety emergency power
branch in addition to the integral batteries.
4) Power supplies shall initially be sized with 20% spare capacity to accommodate
future system modifications.
h. Wiring Requirements
1) General
(a) The wiring network for the intrusion detection system must be designed
in accordance with the applicable codes and must address the criticality
of the facility. The extent of redundancy and survivability must be
determined to properly specify the appropriate wiring system.
2) Installation
(a) The intrusion detection cabling shall be installed in a dedicated raceway
system.
(b) Minimum conduit sizes shall be 20 mm.
(c) All wiring shall enter panels from the bottom to prevent moisture from
entering the panel through the conduit.
(d) All wires shall be numbered and labeled.
(e) Provide separate circuits for audible and visual devices.
5. Vehicle Barriers
a. Bollards
1) Provide bollards for protection of pedestrian areas and buildings as required by
the project.
2) Bollards shall provide protection of areas from accidental or intentional acts.
b. Active Barriers

Rev. 1 5.5 -202
1) Retractable Vehicle Barriers

(a) Retractable vehicle barriers shall be provided at secured entrances and
checkpoints as required by the project.
(b) The system shall operate in either a normally open or closed state.
2) Active Cable Barriers
(a) Active cable barriers shall be provided at critical check point locations as
required by the project.
3) Drop Arm Crash Beams
(a) Drop arm crash beams shall be provided at critical check point locations
as required by the project.
6. Video Surveillance Systems
a. Description of System
1) Video surveillance systems shall permit real time and recorded video
monitoring of building and site areas as required by the project.
2) The video surveillance systems shall consist of surveillance camera, wired or
wireless connectivity; network based video transport and switching, network
video recorders, and monitoring software and stations.
3) Design of the surveillance system shall be based on Open Network Video
Interface (ONVIF) profile S in order to assure cross vendor compatibility.
b. Camera Selection and Location
1) Interior, Controlled Environment: System components installed in temperature-
controlled interior environments are rated for continuous operation in ambient
temperatures of 0 to 50°C dry bulb and 20 to 90% relative humidity,
noncondensing. Use IP10 rated enclosures.
2) Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-
temperature-controlled interior environments are rated for continuous operation
in ambient temperatures of -17 to 60°C dry bulb and 20 to 95% relative
humidity, noncondensing. Use IP52 rated enclosures.
3) Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to
weather are rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus
34 to plus 75°C dry bulb and 20 to 95% relative humidity, condensing. Rate for
continuous operation as specified in IEC 60529.
4) Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where
surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence, the housing shall
be IK10 Rating.
5) Cameras shall be selected to allow high definition video recording.
6) Dynamic range of the camera shall be selected based on the expected lighting
conditions at the site. Cameras with more than 100dB dynamic range shall be
used when facing exterior doors.
7) Panoramic view cameras are to be selected in order to minimize the number of
cameras.

Rev. 1 5.5 -203
8) Cameras with built-in SFP ports shall be used in order to minimize the need of
media converters, or industrial switches at the edge. However, for those
applications where Outdoor IP Cameras shall be installed at locations with
more than 90 meters from the nearest Telecom Room, the connections shall
be done through Ethernet Media Converters with PoE and Fiber Optic Cables.
9) System shall be designed with no exposed cabling near the cameras. All power
and communication cables shall be secured.
10) Perimeter Fence Cameras in Wide Industrial Areas: In those Wide Industrial
Areas where an important quantity of Industrial Plants and Buildings are
located, Multi-sensor Thermal Cameras with Continuous Zoom Lens shall be
installed along the Perimeter Fence. These Cameras shall comply at a
minimum with the following: Simultaneous analog video outputs (Thermal and
Visible Light), easy integration into IP Networks, Continuous Thermal Zoom
available, P/T with continuous 360° pan, Combined Technology of Infrared and
CCD imagery in real time, Multiple lens combinations for tailor-made range
performance, IP65.
c. Network and Video Transport Requirements
1) Surveillance systems shall be served with IP network connectivity
2) The IP network shall be configured as a dedicated network or subnet.
3) Network ports or power injectors shall be capable of supplying Power over
Ethernet compliant with IEEE 802.3af/at/cg.
4) IP networks shall be fault tolerant utilizing redundant uplinks, and redundant
power supplies.
d. Network Video Recording Requirements
1) IP Network based network video recorder (NVR) storage appliances or Network
attached storage solution shall be used to record video.
2) Whenever the sites are connected to the RC Metro Network, all recording shall
be done centrally in the RCJ datacenters. Edge storage is only allowed upon
approval from RC.
3) All network recording appliances shall be ONVIF Profile G compliant.
4) For edge storage, storage appliances shall be secured, both physically and
environmentally.
5) Configure devices with storage capacity to meet requirements for number of
cameras to served, recording rates, and archival time periods needed. Provide
20% spare capacity for anticipated future growth of the system.
e. Video Analytics
1) NVR systems shall permit various software based video analytic features.
f. Monitoring Workstation Requirements
1) Monitoring workstations shall be PC based and be connected to the video
surveillance IP network
2) Supplemental flat panel monitors shall provide viewing capability for additional
cameras.
g. Cabling and Pathway Requirements

Rev. 1 5.5 -204
1) IP network connected devices shall have cabling requirements that meet the
building telecommunications structured network cabling plant requirements.
h. Power Source Requirements
1) Incorporate sufficient Power over Ethernet sources to serve devices. Power
supplies shall be redundant.
7. Security Screening
a. Security screening requirements shall be based upon project risk assessments and
may include the components as required on a per project basis:
1) Divest and Composure Tables
2) Walk Through Metal Detectors
3) Baggage X-ray Machines
4) Explosives Detection and Trace Systems
5) Officer Station
6) High Speed Operational Communications
7) Video Surveillance Coverage
8) Under Vehicle Surveillance
9) Vehicle Recognition
(a) Weight Sensors
(b) Traffic/Flow Control
(c) Explosives Detection
(d) Trunk X-Ray
(e) Undercarriage Scanning
(f) Personnel Credential Access Control
(g) Barricades
H. Utilities
1. Outside Plant Infrastructure
a. The principles and criteria specified in this Section are applicable to the
telecommunications outside plant/buildings provided between the local exchange
and the subscriber's plot boundary, and also applicable to any section of outside
plant/buildings within this area that is determined as the RCJ Contractor
responsibility.
b. Existing RCJ installations have relied upon use of Polyethylene Corrugated (PEC)
110 mm corrugated duct with 5 x 33 mm sub/ducts between hand holes or manholes
for optical fiber cable distribution. Current and future projects shall make use of
HDPE duct materials and micro duct configurations that provide enhanced densities
and compatibility with air blown fiber installation techniques. PEC ducts shall only
be provided where existing PEC installations are altered or backwards compatibility
is otherwise required. In these cases, final configuration of ducts shall match
existing.

Rev. 1 5.5 -205
c. In the existing Manholes which belong to third parties (such as STC or Aramco) and
where are installed main Trunk Lines/Backbone Cables connecting Feeders, a
Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Wall is required around the Telecommunication
Manhole and this structure shall be according to Section No 02350.
d. All new construction of road infrastructure require to have underground duct banks
and conduits at each side of road to ensure ease of service in the respective areas
and minimize road crossings. Appropriate distance of 250m shall be required
between the duct banks.
e. RCJ FTTH GPON and Metropolitan Networks OSP Infrastructure
1) OSP Duct bank Requirements Spanning from the FAT to the FTB.
(a) The OSP duct bank shall be shared between RCJ networks and TSP
networks. OSP design shall conform to the requirements of the TSP.
Color coding shall be used to identify the duct use as per CITC Guideline
in Annex A, Technical Standards for Outside Plant (OSP) Installations.
(b) The maximum distance between the FAT and FTB shall typically not
exceed 160 m. In special cases where distances are permitted to be
exceeded, additional One Cover Hand holes shall be provided for ease
of pulling cabling.
(c) The minimum trench size shall typically be 150 mm wide and 500 mm
deep, but this shall be adjusted as required to facilitate final quantity of
ducts within a segment.
(d) The trench shall be backfilled by concrete up to asphalt level and asphalt
shall be reinstated with milling and paving as per RCJ requirements.
(e) The duct bank shall typically consist of twenty- five (25) x20 mm HDPE
ducts situated in a5-wide by 5-deep arrangement. Each duct shall have
20 mm outside diameter/16.2 mm inside diameter and nominal wall
thickness of 1.9 mm.
(f) Ducts extend in pairs to a customer location where one shall be used for
RCJ FTTH networks and the second duct shall be used for TSP services
or spare. A maximum of twelve (12) buildings shall be connected from
one hand hole including vacant lots, and can go up to fifteen (15)
buildings in special cases only.
(g) HDPE duct material shall conform to the following construction
classifications: PE-100, PN-16, and SDR-11.
(h) Spacers shall be installed with the duct at every 1.5 m to keep the duct
straight and in position.
(i) Pairs of 20 mm HDPE ducts exit the trench to extend to customer
locations. These shall be routed in an offset trench with minimum size of
90 mm wide and 400 mm deep situated in a 2-wide by 1-deep
arrangement.
(j) U-guard shall be installed on customer wall to protect the poke out pipe.
The length of the U-guard shall be of 1.5 m from the finished surface.
There shall be no gap between U-guard and FTB. The duct should
enter/flushed with FTB. The clamps shall be securely placed with
Aluminum screws.
2) OSP Duct bank Requirements Spanning from the FDT to the FAT.

Rev. 1 5.5 -206
(a) The OSP duct bank shall be shared between RCJ networks and TSP
networks. OSP design shall conform to the requirements of the TSP
color coding shall be used to identify the duct use.
(b) The distance between the MH to MH or MH to HH shall be within 250 m
to 350 m. The minimum distance requirement shall be 25 m.
(c) The minimum trench size shall typically be 200 mm wide and 650 mm
deep, but this shall be adjusted as required to facilitate final quantity of
ducts within a segment.
(d) The trench shall be backfilled by concrete up to asphalt level and asphalt
shall be reinstated with milling and paving as per RCJ requirements.
(e) The duct bank shall typically consist of twelve (12) HDPE ducts in a 3-
wide by 4-deep arrangement. Each duct shall have 32mm outside
diameter28.2mm inside diameter and wall thickness of1.9mm.
(f) Four (4) of the twelve (12) ducts are to be orange color and are
dedicated for use by the TSP. Likewise four (4) ducts are to be blue in
color and dedicated for use by the RCJ. In addition, four (4) ducts are
black in color and designated for common use applications. Each set of
color coded ducts are arranged adjacently in a 1-wide by 4-
highconfiguration.
(g) To facilitate efficient use of trenches, this trench is also used for routing
ducts for FTTH drop cabling from each FAT to the FTB at customer
premises. These ducts consist of twenty- five (25) x 20 mm HDPE ducts
grouped in pairs and situated in a 3-wide by 4-deep arrangement. The
ducts are positioned directly above the twelve (12) 50 mm HDPE ducts
within the trench. Each pair of ducts extends to a customer location
where one shall be used for RCJ FTTH networks and the second duct
shall be used for TSP services or spare. Each duct shall have 20 mm
outside diameter/16.2 mm inside diameter and nominal wall thickness of
1.9 mm.
(h) HDPE duct material shall conform to PE-100, PN-16, and SDR-11
construction.
(i) Spacers will be installed with the duct at every 1.5m to keep the duct
straight and in position.
3) Manholes and Hand holes
(a) Mini Manhole - Type 1
(1) The precast manhole shall have a single round cover and be provided
at network locations encountering widths of roads 30 m and more.
(2) This manhole shall also be installed at junctions where a third duct
bank will join the manhole or where determined to be required by the
network layout.
(3) The distance between manholes shall be minimum 50 m and
maximum 300 m with +/- 50 m.
(4) Outer dimension requirements: 1,550(L) x 1,550(W) x 1,990(H) mm
(5) Inner Dimension requirements: 1,200(L) x 1,200(W) x 1,200(H) mm

Rev. 1 5.5 -207
(6) Circular duct penetration openings shall be provided on two opposite

walls for main duct entrance terminations. In addition, a rectangular
opening shall be provided for poke-out termination to accommodate
a minimum of thirty (30) 20 mm ducts on two opposite walls.
(7) The cover of the hand-hole shall be rated with a minimum 350 kN
design loading.
(b) Two Cover Hand hole
(1) A two cover precast hand hole shall be provided at network locations
encountering widths of roads less than 30 m.
(2) A two cover hand hole shall be used either at the end of the trench or
in a straight duct for breaking the length.
(3) Outer dimension: 1,550(L) x 1,000(W) x 950(H) mm
(4) Inner Dimension: 1,250(L) x 800(W) x 800(H) mm
(5) Circular duct penetration openings shall be provided on two opposite
walls for main duct entrance terminations. In addition, a rectangular
opening shall be provided for poke-out termination to accommodate
a minimum of thirty (30) 20 mm ducts on two opposite walls.
design loading.
(c) Manhole - Type A
(1) Type-A manholes shall be provided front of FDTs. The maximum
distance from FDT to manhole shall be 5 m.
(2) The distribution cable shall be extended directly into the FDT cabinet.
Only joint closure shall be installed for the feeder cable to extending
to the RCJ ODF equipment at the local exchange.
(d) Manhole Covers
(1) Manhole covers shall be cast iron construction from a TSP approved
manufacturer where shared manholes are required.
design loading.
(3) The manhole cover shall have lock with unique head.
(4) Where required by the RC for telecom manholes, a clearly visible
inscription shall be provided on each cover. In addition, the
manufacturer name and load rating shall be clearly marked on the
cover.
(e) Manhole Cable Service Loops
(1) Manhole Type-A and Mini Manhole
(i) Cable service loop lengths shall be provided within each
manhole.
(ii) Distribution cable without splice - 5 m
(iii) Distribution cable with splice closure - 8 m, with 4 m for each
side

Rev. 1 5.5 -208
(iv) Drop cable from customer building - 4 m

(2) Two Cover Hand-Holes
(i) Cable service loop lengths shall be provided within each
manhole.
(ii) Distribution cable with splice closure - 5 m, with 2.5 m for each
side
(iii) Drop cable from customer building - 2.5 m
4) FDT Pedestals
(a) The pedestal of FDT shall be pre-cast and approved by the TSP where
shared colocation cabinets are to be provided.
(b) Protection posts (bollards) shall be installed around the FDT per RCJ
drawing details.
5) Microducts
(a) HDPE microducts are utilized in duct bank trenches by the RCJ to
provide enhanced cabling densities and compatibility with air blown fiber
installation techniques.
(b) Where large numbers of optical fiber cables are required within a duct
bank for backhauling of communities and districts, microducts shall be
implemented in main duct banks to enhance duct capacity. A minimum of
two ducts within the trench shall consist of microducts with additional
added as required to meet duct bank forecasted capacity requirements.
(c) Microducts may be implemented in two (2) configurations:
(1) Where service is to be provided through existing duct bank systems,
the microducts shall be provided through existing ducts.
(i) Four (4) microducts with 14 mm outside diameter/11.5 mm
inside diameter shall be installed in an existing duct of 50 mm
outside diameter/40.8 mm inside diameter.
(ii) The four microducts shall be provided either individually or
bundled with a skin jacket and installed by blowing or pulling
techniques.
(iii) To enhance the capacity to existing ducts which are already
occupied by cabling; provide a microduct with microcable
installation. Manufacturers’ recommended procedures and
practices shall be followed.
(2) Where new duct banks are provided, mini/micro ducts shall be
installed directly in the trench among other ducts.
(i) Four miniducts with 16 mm outside diameter/12 mm inside
diameter bundled with a hard jacket can be installed directly in
the trench and encased in concrete among and in lieu of other
main ducts of 50 mm outside diameter/40.8 mm inside
diameter.
(d) The microduct orientation with adjoined duct segments must be
consistent throughout trenches and entering/exiting manholes/hand

Rev. 1 5.5 -209
holes. This is critical to prevent difficult physical transitions while joining

microducts.
f. Blown Fiber Design
1) Blowing Fiber is a method where the fiber is guided through microducts using
a flow of air that evenly distributes the installation force along the entire length
of the fiber. Blown fiber installations shall be provided for extending single-
mode optical fiber through duct bank systems for implementation of RCJ FTTH
GPON and metropolitan networks.
2) The blown fiber system is an enterprise network system comprised of
interconnecting microducts and distribution hardware to provide reusable
pathways for reusable microcables, bundled fiber optic cabling containing
single-mode fiber strands.
3) Microcable Requirements
(a) Microcables shall be installed in the same color of microduct throughout
the span.
(b) The fibers used for blown fiber cables shall be a single-mode, coated
with two layers of acrylic that gives excellent protection to the fibers and
also arrange fibers in bundles for easy identification.
(c) The cable construction has outer diameter of 1.0 to 5.5 mm depending
on the number of fibers and can easily be deployed in empty microducts.
4) Microduct Requirements
(a) Microducts consist of small diameter low friction HDPE tubes providing
the dedicated pathway for the optical fiber micro cables.
(b) Microducts may be provided into existing ducts, concrete encased, or
inside buildings (internal). Select the appropriate rating for the
microducts based on the environment in which they are installed.
(c) Provide microduct tubes sizes and quantities to facilitate the quantity and
strand count of the micro cables that are to be provided, including
anticipated future growth. Microducts are available in a variety of sizes
and combinations including but not limited to, 5/3.5 mm, 7/5.5 mm, 10/8
mm, and 12/10 mm (outside/inside) diameters, loose, or with protective
layer system.
(d) Microducts may consist of bundled tubes in typical sizes of 1, 2, 4, 7, 12,
19, 24 or more tubes.
5) Microduct Accessories
(a) Microducts shall be connected together sealed from water or gas
ingress, reduced from one tube size to another, or sealed with end caps.
(b) Compact Node Closure: A closure used in manholes where blown fiber
cables are spliced (to traditional or blown fiber cables). It is supplied with
splice trays and sufficient components for installing cabling and enabling
the breakout of fibers to customer drop cables.
(c) Branching Unit (Tube Distribution Center): Used for management and
distribution of fibers to the customers. The unit provides in-line and
diversion connections with the use of "Y" and "T" tube joints.

Rev. 1 5.5 -210
(d) Entry Kit: Installed at the customer premises for termination of incoming
tube microducts and optical fibers at the Fiber Termination Box (FTB).
2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
1) A dedicated Uninterruptible Power Supplies system shall be provided where
sensitive telecommunications systems shall not experience sudden power
failures or anomalies.
(a) UPS system with independent Two (2) hours battery backup power shall
be provided for telecommunications equipment where backup power
source EPG (Emergency Power Generation) system is not available.
(b) UPS system with thirty (30) minutes battery backup power shall be
provided for telecommunication equipment where backup power source
EPG (Emergency Power Generation) system is available.
b. UPS Selection and Locations
1) The UPS shall be sized to support equipment required plus 20% spare capacity
as needed by the project.
2) UPS units shall be mounted on equipment racks or floor mounted.
3) Provide battery run time as required by the project to permit orderly shutdown,
or ride through outages of a given duration.
4) UPS shall be furnished with all the necessary inverters, rectifiers, regulators,
switching, maintenance provisions, spare capacity, and batteries required to
comply with the project requirement. In addition to selecting the inverter rating
based on loading, it shall also be selected to maintain adequate short circuit
capacity to ensure protection.
c. Management
1) UPS units shall be SNMP compatible with network connections for
management.
d. PDU Requirements
1) Determine requirements for UPS power outlets including:
(a) Quantity
(b) Amperage
(c) Voltage
(d) Device types
e. References
1) Refer to Electrical GEM Subsection 5.5.1.E Backup Power Systems
3. Earthing and Bonding
a. The grounding shall include all cable and installation hardware required. All
equipment shall be connected to earth ground via internal building wiring according
to ANSI/TIA- standards, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications.

Rev. 1 5.5 -211
b. At every discrete location where telecommunications equipment is present, the

equipment shall be bonded to an earthing bar. Equipment enclosures and the
associated metalwork shall be bonded to the electrical (protective) earthing bar.
c. Within buildings, the telecommunications panels/racks/cabinets electrical
(protective) earthing bar shall be bonded directly to the building’s primary 230 V (or
other nominal voltage as appropriate) distribution panel earthing bus at one point.
d. For outdoor equipment/installations where installation of a dedicated earthing bar
may be impractical, telecommunications equipment may be bonded directly to the
main plant earthing grid without the use of a separate bar.
e. Standards.
1) This includes:
(a) Coaxial cable shields
(b) Equipment racks and cabinets
(c) Cable ducts and trays
(d) Conduits
f. Earthing materials shall be as follows:
1) Ground Rods
(a) Ground rods shall be solid, of bounded copper or copper-clad steel, not
less than 16 mm in diameter and 3 m long, driven full length into the
earth.
(b) The copper-clad steel ground rod shall be manufactured by a fusion weld
process resulting in an electrolytic copper sheath homogeneously
welded to and inner steel core. The thickness of the copper sheath shall
be approximately 10% of the overall rod diameter. Copper electroplated
steel is not acceptable.
(c) The rod shall be of sufficient strength to be driven through the soil found
at site location. The upper end shall either be equipped with or capable
of accepting a clamp that will also be capable of accepting a 16 mm 2
ground wire.
(d) The clamp shall furnish an electrical connection between the ground wire
and the ground rod so that the electrical resistance is not more than 100
mΩ.
2) Ground Wire
(a) The ground wire shall consist of a 16 mm2 solid, annealed copper wire,
covered with a PVC outer sheath for corrosion protection. The minimum
thickness for the sheath to be 0.76 mm.
3) Grounding System Accessories
(a) Ground system accessories shall include without limitation:
(1) A connector for connecting the ground wire to the ground bus so that
the electrical resistance across the connection will be less than 100
mΩ.

Rev. 1 5.5 -212
(2) Connectors for connecting the ground conductor of each splice to the
ground bus so that the electrical resistance across the connector is
less than 100 mΩ.
(b) Ground Bus
(1) The ground bus shall consist of a tinned copper ribbon of 16 mm2
cross-sectional area. This bus shall appear in each bay equally
spaced between the cable racks. It shall begin 300 mm above the
floor and shall be mounted vertically to a height of 100 mm above the
cable rack.
(2) Each vertical bus shall be electrically connected to the other vertical
buses.
(3) Fastening shall be by drive-in anchors of 10 mm diameter, 25 mm
long at a distance of 300 mm apart for both vertical and horizontal
runs, with a drive-in at each termination and each change of direction.
The vertical runs shall have a lapped projection of 15 mm every 200
mm.
g. Building Telecommunications Grounding Systems
1) Each building shall be equipped with a grounding system.
2) A standard insulated copper lead of 16 mm2 - 7 strands shall be run from the
ground point of the protection blocks and body of the terminal boxes to ground,
connected by exothermic weld or equivalent means to the ground system.
3) The CATV and telephone boxes shall be joined by a 25 mm conduit nipple to
allow the CATV protector ground to be connected to the telephone ground lead.
The run shall be as direct as possible and contain no kinks or sharp bends. A
separate lead shall be run for each box installed within a building that contains
protector blocks, joining to the ground underground.

Rev. 1 5.5 -213
SUBSECTION 5.5.3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
5.5.3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
A. General:
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection includes automation systems (and less complex systems) that
require separate focus, and provides the basis for design and technical criteria for
the following to meet the engineering requirements of the Royal Commission Jubail
(RCJ) and other designated areas.
1) The Integrated Building Automation Systems for commercial buildings, schools,
universities, hospitals etc.
2) Instrumentation, Automation, and Process Control Systems (PCS) for other
industrial and/or treatment facilities to include sea water cooling, potable water,
sanitary waste treatment, industrial waste treatment, Fuel Pipeline etc.
3) SCADA systems
4) RTU and SCADA system for Automatic Irrigation system
5) Fire Alarm, Gas Detection and Fire Supersession Control System.
2. Scope
a. The scope of these guidelines provide:
1) The basis to be followed by all parties making calculations and/or preparing
drawings and specifications of Integrated Automation Systems within Industrial
Cities including the engineering design phase of Contracts where Engineering,
Procurement and Construction are combined (EPC Contracts).
2) The framework within which work will be performed by all A/E and/or EPC
Contractors to ensure uniformity throughout the infrastructure of the Project and
compatibility within the RCJ Boundary.
3) Mandatory, minimally acceptable requirements for the RCJ new and retrofit
projects.
4) The basis, on which the Integrated Automation Systems and Instrumentation
and Control Systems and services shall be programmed, designed and
installed.
b. This Subsection indicates the minimum level of quality required by the RCJ to:
1) Define the role of the Authorized Representatives and the responsibilities of the
A/E and/or EPC Contractors,
2) Provide a reference basis for Saudi Arabian and International Codes and
standards, and for the Guideline Specifications and Guideline Details issued by
the Royal Commission.
3) Ensure flexibility and adaptability to accommodate future developments and
expansion.
c. This Subsection does not provide information normally found in available textbooks,
handbooks, codes and standards, nor does it attempt to duplicate design criteria
within the expertise of the A/E and/or EPC Contractors.

Rev. 1 5.5 -214
d. Design decisions are to be developed for specific applications as the design

progresses. Project conditions may dictate the need for design that exceeds these
minimum requirements.
e. If a conflict is found between the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), the RCJ
standard Specification, and the typical standard drawings details, the conflict shall be
brought to the attention of the Royal Commission. The Royal Commission shall
f. In the event there is a conflict between the GEM and the requirements of the RCJ and
End Users, the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ. The Royal
Commission shall provide resolution or direction on how to proceed.
g. The design of RCJ Control system requires full coordination and integration with
other disciplines such as, but not limited to telecom, electrical, mechanical, piping,
plumbing , environmental , loss and prevention design.
3. Exclusions
a. While there are a number of similarities, the following standards/guidelines are not in
the scope of this document:
1) Engineering standards and/or procedures associated with Saudi Aramco. The
applicable standard can be located under Saudi Aramco desktop standards.
2) Telecommunication technology and/or topology is outside the scope of this
Section. The applicable design guide can be found in Subsection 5.5.2
Telecommunications; in keeping with control system architectures and Plant
Automation Network (PAN).
3) Where works interface with Saudi Electrical Company (SEC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with SEC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the SEC.
4) Where works interface with Saudi Telecommunication Company (STC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with STC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the STC.
4. References - Units of Measurement
a. Where applicable, the design, construction, commissioning and operation and
maintenance of Instrumentation and Control systems shall satisfy and comply with
the requirements and standards of the organizations and publications listed in this
Subsection.
b. References:
1) All work shall conform to the applicable industry codes, standards and
associations. Refer to Subsections 5.5.1.A.7 Codes and 5.5.1.A.8 Standards
for a listing of the codes and standards.
c. Units of Measurement
1) All new facilities shall be designed for operation in SI units. Refer to NIST
Special Publication 811 2008 Edition “Guide for the Use of the International
System of Units (SI). Section 2.3 SI Units and Conversions of this document
also has reference.
2) Exception: Upgrades or modifications to existing facilities may retain existing
operating units unless otherwise specified in project documentation.

Rev. 1 5.5 -215
3) The International System of Units (abbreviated SI) is the modern form of the
metric system. It comprises a coherent system of units of measurement built
around seven base units, 22 named and an indeterminate number of unnamed
coherent derived units, and a set of prefixes that act as decimal-based
multipliers. The standards, published in 1960 as the result of an initiative
started in 1948, are based on the meter-kilogram-second (MKS) system, rather
than the centimeter-gram-second (CGS) system, which, in turn, had several
variants. The SI has been declared to be an evolving system; thus prefixes and
units are created and unit definitions are modified through international
agreement as the technology of measurement progresses, and as the precision
of measurements improve.
4) Standard conditions for process flow and gas custody metering is defined in
Aramco Standards.
5) Standard conditions for bulk flow measurement and transfer of Sea Water
Cooling is detailed further in this Section.
TABLE 5.5.3.A: STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR SEA WATER COOLING TRANSFER METERING
SI Unit
Pressure 101.325 kPa (abs)
Temperature 15.00°C
5. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions, refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
b. The following is a list of definitions for acronyms, abbreviations, words, and terms as
they are used in this document. For definitions not listed, the latest issue of the
“Comprehensive Dictionary of Measurement and Control”, International Society of
Automation (ISA), shall apply.
1) “Address” An identifying name, label, or number for a data terminal, source, or
storage location calculation.
2) “Analog data” Data represented by scalar values.
3) “Annunciator” A unit containing one or more indicator lamps, alphanumeric
displays, or other equivalent means in which each indication provides status
information about a circuit, condition, or location.
4) “Application Software” The software written specifically to perform functional
requirements for an individual plant when standard software packages cannot
be configured to meet the requirements. Application software works with the
standard operating software to control and monitor plant process and
maintenance status through accessing the SCADA/PCS/BAS real-time and
historical database data.
5) “BACnet” A communications protocol for building automation and control
networks. It is an ASHRAE, ANSI, and ISO standard protocol. BACnet allows
communication of building automation and control systems for applications
such as heating, ventilating and air-conditioning control, lighting control, access
control, and fire detection systems and their associated equipment. BACnet is
addressed in ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135 - 2012, and became ISO 16484-5
in 2003 - is a communications protocol for building automation and control

Rev. 1 5.5 -216
networks and provides mechanisms for computerized building automation

devices to exchange information, regardless of the particular building service
they perform.
6) “Binary digit” A character used to represent one of the two digits in the binary
number system and the basic unit of information in a two-state device. The two
states of a binary digit are usually represented by “0” and “1”. Synonym: bit.
7) “Call up Time” The time between when the operator initially enters a display
request and when all objects, lines, values (good or invalid), trends and other
parts of the display have been fully presented to the operator.
8) “Computerized Data Acquisition and Control System (CDACS)” refers to an
industrial computer based control system that monitors and controls a process.
Synonymous to PCS.
9) “Command” Commands are sent by operators or by applications. Commands
can be binary or analog (set-point). Commands require reliable, secure, and
timely delivery. Command data shall be delivered to its target as quickly as
possible, typically in the order of seconds or sub-seconds. If a command cannot
be delivered or acted upon, the SCADA system shall report this to the operator.
10) “Communication channel” A facility that permits signaling between two
terminals i.e. a path between master station and an RTU, PLC or a subsystem.
11) “Communications Subsystem” The hardware and software that performs the
transmitting and receiving of digital information.
12) “Configurable” - The capability to select and connect standard hardware
modules to create a system, or the capability to change functionality or sizing
of software functions by changing parameters without having to modify or
regenerate software.
13) “Console” A collection of one or more workstations and associated equipment
such as printers and communications devices used by an individual to interact
with the SCADA and perform other functions.
14) “Cycle” The scanning of inputs, execution of algorithms and transmission of
output values to devices.
15) “Cyclic Polling (data request)” The process by which a data acquisition system
selectively requests data from one or more of its RTUs. An RTU may be
requested to respond with all, or a selected portion of, the data available.
16) “Dead Band” The range through which an input signal may be varied without
initiating an action or observable change in output signal.
17) “Dead Pair” - Within a cable, an extension of a pair that has been used, or a
pair that is not terminated at either end.
18) “Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)” The interference in signal transmission or
reception resulting from the radiation of undesirable frequency interfering
electrical or magnetic and electrical fields.
19) “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)” Is software that allows the integration of
operations and resources and manages them through one program. This
approach to management is called Integration. Most large companies in the
world use ERP to manage various aspects of their businesses. These are
product planning, parts planning, parts procurement and inventory
management, interacting with suppliers, providing customer service, and

Rev. 1 5.5 -217
tracking orders. It can also include applications to manage finance and human
resources.
20) “Faceplate” - A graphic element that mimics the front panel of an analog
controller instrument, hardwired push-button or switch.
21) “Fail-Over” Occurs automatically without user intervention, transparent to the
user.
22) Failsafe - a concept in process control that in the event of a specific type of
failure, the failsafe devices will automatically response in a way to safety
position, cause no harm, or at least a minimum of harm, to other devices,
environment or to personnel.
23) Foundation Fieldbus H1 (FF) - Fieldbus is a fully digital, serial, two-way, multi-
drop, communication system running at 31.25 Kbits/s which will be used to
connect intelligent field equipment such as sensors, actuators and controllers.
It serves as a Local Area Network (LAN) for the instrumentation used within
process plants and facilities with built-in capability to monitor and distribute
control applications across the network.
footway use only.
25) HART Communication protocol - Highway Addressable Remote Transducer is
an early implementation of Fieldbus, a digital industrial automation protocol. Its
most notable advantage is that the digital HART signal was embedded in 4-20
mA analog instrumentation loop. The HART Protocol is one of the most popular
industrial protocols today, most of the smart instrument will support the HART
Communications.
26) “Local Area Network (LAN)” A LAN is a network used for bit serial
communication of information between interconnected, independent devices
and is completely under user jurisdiction and limited to being within a user’s
premises.
27) “Logs” Files or printouts of information in chronological order.
28) “Management Information System (MIS)” Provides information which is needed
to manage organizations efficiently and effectively. Management Information
Systems involve three primary resources: people, technology, and information
or decision making. Management information systems are distinct from other
information systems in that they are used to analyze operational activities in the
organization.
30) “Master Station” Server or servers and software responsible for communicating
with the field equipment (RTUs, PLCs, etc.), and then to the HMI software
running on workstations in the control room, or elsewhere. Master station may
include multiple servers, distributed software applications, and disaster
recovery sites. The Master Station includes all networks switch and connectivity
devices required to communicate with RTUs and remote sites.
31) “Multimode Fiber (MMF)” A fiber that allows more than one optical mode to
propagate. Used for shorter distances; usually a larger diameter fiber of plastic
or other low-cost material.

Rev. 1 5.5 -218
32) “Nuisance Alarm” An alarm caused by mechanical failure, malfunction,

improper installation, or lack of proper maintenance, or an alarm activated by a
cause that cannot be determined.
33) “Operating System” Software that runs on computers and manages the
computer hardware and provides common services for execution of application
software.
34) “Process Control System (PCS)” Refers to an industrial computer based control
system that monitors and controls a process. Synonymous to CDACS.
35) “Protocol” A strict procedure required to initiate and maintain communication
with the RTU or a PLC. Open Industry Standard communication protocol is
defined as a protocol that has a published specification and available for all
suppliers to read and implement and will not lock the customer into a particular
vendor or group. The Protocol may be extended, or offered in subset form and
supported by publication of reference information.
36) “Redundant Configuration” A system and/or subsystem that provides for a
standby module with automatic switchover from the primary unit to the standby
module, in the event of a failure, without loss of a system function. Both active
and standby modules utilize diagnostics to assist in identifying and locating
failures and to permit modules to be removed for repair and/or replacement.
37) “Registered Jack (RJ)” Registered jack wiring configurations developed by Bell
System for the connection of customer premises equipment to the public
network. Registered jacks serve telephone and data applications. The most
common types are RJ45 and RJ11.
38) “Report-by-Exception” The reporting of data (e.g., from RTU to master station)
only when the data either changes state (e.g., for a status or digital input point)
or exceeds a predefined dead-band (e.g., for an analog input point).
39) “Scan” The process by which a data acquisition system interrogates remote
terminals or points for data.
40) “Security Code” A group of data bits calculated by a transmitting terminal from
the information within its message by use of a prearranged algorithm,
appended to the transmitted message, and tested by the receiving terminal to
determine the validity of the received message.
41) “Self-Diagnostic” The capability of an electronic device to monitor its own status
and indicate faults that occur within the device.
42) “Single-mode Fiber (SMF)” A fiber that supports the propagation of only one
mode. Used for maximum distances; usually a small, precise diameter (8 to 9
microns) fiber of monolithic quartz.
43) “Spare Pair” A cable pair which has been terminated at one end, but is not in
service.
damage to product.
45) “Supervisory Control” A telemetry based process control command initiated
from a Master Central Station either manually by operator or automatically by
an application to initiate an action and/or change analog set point in a remotely
located Control Stations over a bidirectional communications link using specific

Rev. 1 5.5 -219
communication protocol. Such command is dependent of having quality

process related alarm/event data and follows timely bidirectional confirmation
and acknowledgment executing sequences between the master and the station
known as select/check before Operate (CBO).
46) “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)” Refers to an industrial
computer telemetry based control system that monitors and controls remotely
connected processes.
47) “Tag” A collection of attributes that specify either a control loop or a process
variable, or a measured input, or a calculated value, or some combination of
these, and all associated control and output algorithms. Each tag is unique.
48) “Tag ID” The unique alphanumeric code assigned to inputs, outputs, equipment
items, and control blocks. The tag ID might include the plant area identifier.
49) “Twisted Pair Cable (TP)” A type of communication transmission cable in which
two individually insulated wires are twisted around each other to reduce
induction (thus interference) from one wire to other. The pair may be
surrounded by a shield, insulating jacket, to form Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)
cable, otherwise it is Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP).
6. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Subsection 2.2 Definitions and
Abbreviations.
b. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection:
3) Aramco Saudi Aramco (Saudi Arabian Oil Company). Responsible for KSA
oil and gas reserves, exploration and production.
4) ANN: Artificial Neural Networks
6) BACnet: Building Automation & Control Networks
9) CAT: Category
10) CMS: Condition Monitoring System
11) COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf
12) DC: Direct Current
13) DCS: Distributed Control System
14) DDC: Direct Digital Control
15) DNP: Distributed Network Protocol
16) EIA: Electronic Industries Association
17) EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility
18) EMCS: Energy Management and Control System

Rev. 1 5.5 -220
19) EMI: Electromagnetic Interference

21) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning
22) ESD Emergency Shutdown System
23) FAT: Factory Acceptance Test
24) FF: Foundation Fieldbus
25) FO: Fiber Optic
26) FTP: File Transfer Protocol
27) GUI: Graphic User Interface
28) HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
29) HMI: Human Machine Interface
31) HZ: Hertz
32) IAMS: Instrument Asset Management System
33) ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
35) IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
37) IMS: Information Management System
38) ISO: The International Organization for Standardization
39) IT: Information Technology
41) KSA Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
42) KW: Kilo-watts
45) LCD: Liquid Crystal Diode
47) LV: Low Voltage
48) MAC: Media Access Control (Common use is MAC Address)
49) Mbps: Megabits Per Second
50) MC: Media Converter
51) MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker
52) MCC: Motor Control Center
53) MIS: Management Information System

Rev. 1 5.5 -221
54) MMF: Multi Mode Fiber

55) MOV Motor Operated Valve
56) MTS: Manual Transfer Switch
57) MTU: Master Terminal Unit
60) OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer
61) OPC: OLE for Process Control
62) PAS: Process Automation System
63) PC: Personal Computer
64) PCS: Process Control System
65) PF: Power Factor
66) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
67) PoE: Power Over Ethernet
68) PTP(P2P): Point To Point
69) RBE: Report by Exception
72) RTU: Remote Terminal Unit
76) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
78) SDMS SEC Distribution Materials Specification
81) SMF: Single-mode Fiber
82) SMSS: Saudi Electricity Company Material Standard Specification
83) SNMP Single Network Management Protocol
84) SQL: Database Product of Microsoft Corporation
85) STP: Shielded Twisted Pair
87) SWTP: Sanitary Waste Water Treatment Plant

Rev. 1 5.5 -222
88) TE: Treated Effluent

89) TIE: Treated Industrial Effluent
90) TSE: Treated Sanitary Effluent
91) TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
92) TP: Twisted Pair
95) UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
96) VMS: Vibration Monitoring System
97) VN: Virtual Network Interface
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.4 Abbreviations for a list of additional electrical
abbreviations.
7. Codes And Standards
b. Codes for electrical equipment and material and their installation shall conform to
the current requirements of the following authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code Chapter 401 Electrical Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code Chapter 501 Mechanical Requirements.
4) Saudi Building Code Chapter 210 Architecture Requirements
5) International Fire Code
7) Saudi Building Code Chapter 801 Fire Protection Requirements
c. Standards
d. For all work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used
wherever applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate
the priority for application with regards to design of the electrical systems. In case of
conflict, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose equipment conforming to one
group of Codes and Standards.
1) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute/Steel Product Manual
3) ANSI/ISA American National Standards Institute/The International Society
of Automation
5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
6) Conditioning Engineers

Rev. 1 5.5 -223

8) BSI British Standards Institution
9) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
10) EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
11) FCI Fluid Control Institute
12) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
13) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
15) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
16) ISA The International Society of Automation
17) ISO International Organization for Standardization
18) MIL-STD Military Standard
19) NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
21) RCEC Royal Commission Electrical Code
22) RCER Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
23) SAEP Saudi Aramco Engineering Procedures
25) SAMSS Saudi Aramco Material System Specifications
27) SBC Saudi Building Code
31) STES Saudi Electricity Company Transmission Engineering
32) Standard
33) SEI Software Engineering Institute
34) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
e. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Section of the guidelines include the
following:
1) IEEE 802.3, Ethernet
2) IEEE 802.11, Wireless LANs
3) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) Engineering Standards and Specifications,
latest edition
4) AG 181 - Fieldbus Foundation, System Engineering Guidelines
5) AG 140 - Fieldbus Foundation, Wiring and Installation Application Guidelines

Rev. 1 5.5 -224
a. The following environmental conditions shall be applied to all components of the
control systems as required.
1) Air-Conditioned Building - General Purpose areas
(a) Equipment located in air-conditioned interior building areas, are subject
to ambient temperatures varying from 10°C to 35°C with ambient relative
humidity levels between 20% and 80%.
2) Unclassified Light Industrial Locations
(a) Field equipment located in unconditioned interior process areas, which
are not classified as corrosive or hazardous locations, are subject to
ambient temperatures varying from 0°C to 40°C with relative humidity
levels of 100%.
(b) There may be incidental quantities of corrosive gas and dust. Therefore,
the equipment shall be designed with materials for use in corrosive
areas.
(c) In exterior areas, ambient temperatures vary from 0°C to +55°C with
strong direct radiation from the sun. The relative humidity in these areas
may range from 85% to 100% with condensation occurring. All areas
may have trace quantities of corrosive gas with windblown dust, sand,
and rain.
(d) Due to the close proximity to the sea, there is a high level of salt in the
air which is detrimental to unfinished metals and copper wiring and
electronics.
(e) Controllers, panels, etc., shall be located in environmentally protected
enclosures or buildings wherever possible - see the following guidelines
below.
(1) Outdoor Sheltered - Maximum 55°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to
Paragraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) below.
(2) Outdoor Unsheltered - Maximum 65°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to
Paragraphs (ii) and (iii) below.
(i) "Sheltered" refers to permanent, ventilated enclosures or
buildings, or permanently fixed sunshades with a top and three
sides.
(ii) For instruments which dissipate internal heat and are installed
in custom engineered enclosures (e.g., enclosures not included
in the original manufacturer's temperature certification), an
additional 15°C shall be added to the above maximum
temperatures. An example, for "indoor air conditioned"
installation, the equipment must perform at 35 + 15 = 50°C.
Similarly, for the "outdoor unsheltered" case, the equipment
shall be designed for a maximum operating temperature of 65
+ 15 = 80°C.
(iii) For the outdoor installations only, the designer can take credit
for forced or passive cooling to eliminate or reduce the 15°C
heat rise. For example, if vortex coolers are used, the heat
removal capacity of the coolers may be subtracted from the

Rev. 1 5.5 -225
generated heat. No more than 15°C reduction in temperature

will be given as credit. The designer shall substantiate his
claim by providing the support data and calculations.
(iv) All equipment specified for outdoor installation shall be
compliant with the following contaminant levels:
• Dust Concentration - Usual airborne dust concentration is
1 mg/m³. During sandstorms, dust concentrations may
reach 500 mg/m³. Particle sizes are as follows:
o 95% of all particles are less than 20 micrometers
o 50% of all particles are less than 1.5 micrometers
• Elements present in dust include compounds of calcium,
silicon, magnesium, aluminum, potassium, chlorides and
sodium. When wetted (high humidity conditions) these
compounds function as electrolytes and can result in
severe corrosion.
• Other pollutants present in the atmosphere under the most
extreme conditions are:
o H2S 20 ppm (vol/vol)
o Hydrocarbon 150 ppm (vol/vol)
o SO2 10 ppm (vol/vol)
o CO 100 ppm (vol/vol)
o NOx 5 ppm (vol/vol)
o O3 1 ppm (vol/vol)
• Equipment which is not enclosed or hermetically sealed,
but is situated outdoors offshore or outdoors near-shore
shall be protected against corrosion and operational failure
due to wind-borne sea water spray and the accumulation of
wetted salt (sodium chloride).
• Near-shore is defined as within one kilometer from the
shoreline of the Arabian Gulf, or within three kilometers
from the shoreline of the Red Sea.
3) Classified Field Locations
(a) The equipment located in classified areas shall be designed to meet the
classification of the area in accordance with the IEC 60079 series
standards and SBC Chapter 401.
4) Corrosive Locations
(a) The equipment located in areas that are subject to corrosive fumes or
spills shall be selected and erected in accordance with the requirements
of IEC 60364-5-51 and SBC Chapter 51. Corrosive area locations for
PLCs, panels, etc., shall be avoided wherever possible. Equipment
required to be installed in corrosive locations shall be specifically
designed to withstand the conditions.
5) Noise Levels

Rev. 1 5.5 -226
(a) The noise levels for all equipment shall be less than or equal to:
(1) 55dBA for equipment installed in continuously manned areas.
(2) 60dBA for equipment installed in other areas.
6) Equipment Enclosures
(a) All equipment enclosures shall meet the following Ingress Protection
rating as defined by IEC 60529. The object of these standards is to give:
(1) Definitions for degrees of protection provided by enclosures of
electrical equipment as regards:
(i) Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts inside
the enclosure;
(ii) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against
ingress of solid foreign objects;
(iii) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against
harmful effects due to the ingress of water.
(2) Measures to protect both the enclosure and the equipment inside the
enclosure against external influences or conditions such as:
(i) Mechanical impacts
(ii) Corrosion
(iii) Corrosive solvents (for example, cutting liquids)
(iv) Fungus
(v) Vermin
(vi) Solar radiation
(vii) Icing
(viii) Moisture (for example, produced by condensation)
(ix) Explosive atmospheres
(x) And the protection against contact with hazardous moving
parts external to the enclosure
(b) All enclosures located outside which are not sheltered or made from
stainless steel shall have a white finish to lower the internal temperature.
(c) All enclosures with a lens or transparent display cover subject to direct
sunlight shall be glass or as a minimum UV resistant.
7) Sunshields
(a) All field instruments with local LCD or LED displays shall be equipped
with sunshields to allow viewing of the displays and to shield the
instrument enclosures from the heating effects of direct sunlight. In
addition, instrument displays shall be north facing where possible to
prevent direct sun exposure.
b. System Reliability
1) All Field Instruments, Instrument Control Panels, Controllers, Network and
Communication equipment, Servers and Workstations shall be provided with

Rev. 1 5.5 -227
backup power during power failure transitions with an Uninterruptible Power

Supply (UPS). The UPS shall provide a reliable source of uninterruptible power
with no break in AC output power during a complete or partial interruption of
incoming line power. The UPS shall include audio/visual alarms. The rating
shall be adequate to provide uninterrupted conditioned power under fully
loaded conditions for at least 30mins. UPS status shall be monitored by the
control system.
2) Communication links between all controllers and facilities shall be continuously
monitored and safe operating modes assumed whenever a communication
failure has occurred. Normal operation modes will only resume when
communications have been restored, depending on the process, safety issues,
etc. Restart procedures following a communication or power failure shall be
defined for each facility or process during preliminary design.
B. Control System Architectures
1. General
a. A Control System is actually an integration of several sub-systems into a functional
single platform. A Control System will ideally provide the highest level of safety for
the Community, RCJ personnel and operations staff and must incorporate the
principles of environmental safeguards, the protection of the process equipment,
economy of operation in all regards, with high reliability and expansibility.
b. The Control System Architecture shall maximize single window concept, and the
Operation Centre HMI Workstations such as PCS /SCADA/BMS shall integrate with
all sub-systems and provide a single platform to control and monitor all facilities in
the plant.
2. Scope
a. This Subsection describes the design elements and technical criteria for establishing
an appropriate Control System Architecture for each of the following systems:
1) Building Automation System (BAS) is the more recent terminology adopted by
the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) and shall be used in lieu of Building Management Systems (BMS).
BAS is a distributed control system - the computer networking of electronic
devices designed to monitor and control or interface with otherwise standalone
systems - typically security (access control, CCTV, PA), fire and flood safety,
fire pumps, fire suppression, lighting (especially emergency lighting, Energy
Efficiency Control system), Electrical equipment, such as Switchgears, Main
Distribution Panels, Transformers, ATS and generators, HVAC equipment ,
ventilation systems and mechanical packages such as potable water pumps,
lift stations, chiller package etc. in a building.
2) Process Control Systems (PCS) are typically used in industries such as water,
oil, gas, pipeline, chemicals plant. . PCS is the current general term that
encompasses several types of control systems used in industrial production,
including distributed control systems (DCS), Emergency Shutdown System
(ESD) and other third party control systems such as package programmable
logic controllers (PLC), machine conditioning monitor system, pipe leak
detection system, custody metering system, fire and gas alarm system,
analyzer etc., often found in the industrial sectors and critical infrastructures.
3) Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) describes a system
operating with telemetry communications to provide for monitoring and control

Rev. 1 5.5 -228
of remote processes and equipment. SCADA systems distinguish themselves

from other PCS systems by being processes that can include multiple sites,
and large distances.
(a) SCADA provides the means for the Operators to monitor and control
remote facilities from a central location utilizing various different forms of
data communications. The SCADA system will be either a
Master/Remote Terminal Unit MTU/RTU based system of standard (not
custom) manufacture or a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based
system incorporating PLCs communicating with a central personal
computer (PC) based Human Machine Interface (HMI) software package
of standard (not custom) manufacture.
4) Fire and Gas detection and suppression control systems are critical life safety
/ protection equipment in building or process plant. The purpose of a Fire and
Gas Alarm and Suppression Control System is to detect a fire and gas release
and automatically initiate audible and visual alarms in the building or plant and
prompt panel operator for actions and alert personnel in the vicinity of the
hazard area. Fire protection system may be able to be automatically or
manually activated by mechanical or control systems and provide protective
actions to mitigate the accident circumstance. All fire detection and fire
suppression devices shall be networked to a central Fire Workstation to display
alarms, troubleshooting, confirm fire and activate fire suppression devices.
3. Building Automation System (BAS) Architecture
a. Refer to Section 5.4.3HVAC, specifically:
1) Subsection 5.4.3. A.16 for additional requirements associated with HVAC
Software.
2) Subsection 5.4.3. B.13 for additional requirements associated with Building
Automation (Management) System.
3) Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.c for additional requirements and design details
associated with Direct Digital Control (DDC) System Controls.
b. The following is a brief description of BAS fundamentals:
1) Building automation is the goal that a Building Management System or a (more
recent terminology) Building Automation System (BAS) attempts to achieve.
BAS core functionality keeps building climate within a specified range, lights
rooms based on an occupancy schedule (in the absence of overt switches to
the contrary), monitors performance and device failures in all systems, provides
malfunction alarms (via typically email and/or text notifications) to building
engineering/maintenance staff and contractors. BAS reduce building energy
and maintenance costs compared to a non-controlled building.
2) A building controlled by a BAS is often referred to as an intelligent building,
"smart building", or (if a residence) a "smart home". Commercial and industrial
buildings have historically relied on robust proven protocols like BACnet.
3) BACnet is a network communications protocol for building automation and
control systems that has been adopted worldwide as ISO 16484-5:2003.
4) Almost all multi-story green buildings are designed to accommodate a BAS for
the energy, air and water conservation characteristics. Electrical device
demand response is a typical function of a BAS, as is the more sophisticated
ventilation and humidity monitoring required of "tight" insulated buildings. Most

Rev. 1 5.5 -229
green buildings also use as many low-power DC devices as possible, typically

integrated with power over Ethernet wiring, so by definition always accessible
to a BAS through the Ethernet connectivity.
5) The building automation server shall be able to support various communication
protocols to be integrated with other standalone systems through networks for
control and monitoring purposes, such as Fire & Gas Detection System status,
Fire Suppression Control status, Elevator and Intercom status, UPS status,
Electrical system and equipment, Access Control status, CCTV camera,
mechanical packages (pump station PLC, RTU) etc.
6) The building automation server shall collect data and interface with DDC
controllers, other standalone control system through facilities local area data
network provided by telecom.
4. Process Control System (PCS) Architecture
a. The PCS concept is to provide the RCJ with a powerful and integrated control
system platform that bundles together the operating, configuration, documentation,
and connectivity tools, to give a truly intuitive and windows compliant control
environment.
b. The term “Process Control System” is synonymous to Process Automation System
(PAS) and any one of these terms take the same meaning. It describes a computer
based control system that provides a means to monitor and control automatic
processes from a central control room.
c. A PCS is typically an integration of various computerized servers and controllers,
smart instrumentation and software applications for data acquisition and control
purposes. Control systems could include any combination of the following basic
components:
1) Distributed Control System (DCS)
2) Programmed Logic Controllers (PLC)
3) Alarm Management System (ALMS)
4) Data Acquisition and Historization System (DAHS)
5) Emergency Shutdown System (ESD)
6) FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus System (FF)
7) Condition Monitoring System (CMS)
8) Packaged - Vendor Control Panels (VCP)
9) Instrument Asset Monitoring System (IAMS)
10) Plant Automation Network (PAN)
11) Plant Information Network (PIN)
12) Gas Leak Detection system
13) Demilitarized Zone and Cyber security
14) Web Terminal and Remote Access Control
d. The Wet Utilities shall be operated and maintained by MARAFIQ with the exception
of the irrigation system which will be under the control of the Royal Commission.

Rev. 1 5.5 -230
e. Wet utilities shall be provided with a PCS or SCADA system and a dedicated control
room to monitor and manage the infrastructure controlled by DCSs, PLCs, RTUs
etc. or any combination of these controllers. The wet utilities are as follows:
1) Potable Water System
2) Sea Water Cooling System
3) Industrial Waste Water System
4) Sanitary Waste Water System
5) Irrigation Water System
6) District Chill Walter Colling Plant
f. (SCADA) systems associated with light industrial and Wet Utilities is described in
more detail under item Paragraph 5.5.3.B.4.
g. PCS shall use standard Industrial Ethernet communication protocols between
servers or workstations on the network. PCS shall incorporate redundant servers
with client workstations to provide a Graphical User Interface GUI and operator
functionality for complete monitoring and control purposes. Graphics, schedules, set
points, trends and alarms specified as per sequences of operation shall be objects.
h. Availability and Reliability - The PCS architecture including the control system
network design shall provide a 99.50% hardware and software availability and
reliability.
i. PCS shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed controllers
and operator interface terminals.
j. The PCS shall include redundant controller and redundant power supply, be
designed with no single point of failure and shall include the communication modules
and communication links to the distributed controllers and remote I/O equipment.
k. The entire PCS, including hardware and software, must be specified as
manufacturer’s standard project line. System components and subassemblies must
have proven installed base with successful track record.
l. PCS VENDOR shall be responsible for the supply of all aspects of the PCS
including design, engineering, fabrication, procurement, configuration, programming,
integration, inspection, testing, site support and documentation.
m. PCS VENDOR shall have total system responsibility for the Integration, performance
and functionality of all hardware, firmware and software items being furnished for the
PCS.
n. PCS VENDOR shall be responsible for the integrity of the overall control system
design, including the co-ordination of communications interfaces.
5. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA
a. SCADA systems are provided for various utilities within the RCJ. The various
SCADA systems can be described as follows:
1) Wet utilities - including Potable Water Systems, Sea Water Cooling Systems,
Industrial Waste Water Systems, Sanitary Waste Water Systems and Irrigation
Water Systems.

Rev. 1 5.5 -231
2) Environmental SCADA is provided to a control room with various stations

located inside RIC - operated and managed by RCJ. Data is transferred by the
fiber optic cable network from stations to the SCADA.
3) Gas SCADA - Operational responsibility for the gas supply network is currently
uncertain, although this may come under the control of Saudi Aramco. For RC
gas pipeline projects, dedicated FO cables should be provided for the Control
System, custody metering, fire and gas system and central SCADA system to
form a proprietary process control networks(PCN), the PCN should not mixed
with any other telecom data networks
4) Electrical SCADA - The electrical infrastructure systems will be operated by
SEC and incorporate a SCADA system connected through a control room.
Data is transferred by the fiber optic cable network from the substations to the
SCADA.
b. SCADA systems associated with Environmental, Gas, and Electrical Utilities, and
other heavy industrial facilities are not in the scope of this document.
c. SCADA is provided to a control room with various stations located inside RIC -
operated and managed by RCJ. Although wireless applications are available, data
is usually transferred by the fiber optic cable network from remote stations to the
central SCADA head-end. The SCADA system can support any type of
telecommunication technologies. However, the selection of the telecommunication
technology and/or topology is outside the scope of this document.
d. The following design requirements shall be complied with to provide highly efficient
and reliable SCADA system performance for each application using the provided
technology.
1) General - A detailed Performance Analysis shall be conducted for each
application (Project) to specify the optimum architecture to meet the
performance requirement expected. The analysis shall be based on the
expected data scan frequency and spare capacity, and shall address SCADA
server(s) loading, bandwidth capacity and utilization of each telecommunication
channel.
2) Design Architecture - The SCADA Host station software shall be based on fully
redundant Client/Server architecture. Processing load shall be balanced and
distributed among the system components to achieve the scalability and
highest performance levels.
3) SCADA networks shall be physically and logically isolated from all other non
SCADA network traffic. Voice, CCTV and non-process control traffic shall not
share the SCADA network hardware.
4) The SCADA server(s) shall be dedicated to perform the real time data
acquisition and telecommunication processing functionalities and shall not be
shared and/or used to perform any non-SCADA related data processing
functions.
5) For application requiring redundant RTU communication modules, the design
shall provide dedicated communication path from each communication module
to the telecommunication network.
6) For application where FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus (FF) based RTU is specified,
refer to RC specification - section 40 70 00 for the specific design requirements.

Rev. 1 5.5 -232
7) Availability and Reliability - The SCADA System architecture including the

telemetry network design shall provide a 99.50% hardware and software
availability and reliability.
8) The SCADA Host Station including the SCADA LAN shall be designed with no
single point of failure. For application where redundant RTU/PLC is required,
the no single point of failure requirement shall include the communication
modules and communication links to the RTU/PLC.
6. Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System
a. The Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression Control System concept for future
projects is to provide the RCJ complete status indication and controls for fire and
gas detection and protection systems, to form a powerful and integrated control
system platform that bundles together the monitoring, operating, diagnostic,
networking, configuration, documentation, and connectivity tools, to give a truly
intuitive and windows compliant control environment.
b. The Fire and Gas Alarm System and Fire Suppression System typical include any
combination of the following basic components:
1) Microprocessor based intelligent Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) with all necessary
accessories, such as loop isolator, backup batteries.
2) Addressable Fire Alarm Devices, such as smoke detectors, heater detectors,
and manual pull stations.
3) Duct Smoke Detectors
4) Fire Alarm Audio and Visual Alarm Devices, such as bell, horn, beacon,
strobes.
5) Gas Detection Devices, such as H2, CO2, Cl2 etc.
6) Gas Detection Control Panels
7) Smoke Control System
8) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)
9) Automatic Sprinkler System and control devices
10) Clean Agent System and Control Panels
11) Electric Fire Water Pump Control Panels
12) Fire Water Jockey Pump Control Panels
13) Diesel Fire Water pump Control Panels
14) Emergency Diesel Generator Control Panel
15) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System centralize supervisory Server
16) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System supervisory workstation
17) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System network components
18) Integration / Interface with other systems such as HVAC, Elevator, Door Access
Control, CCTV, Public Address system etc.
c. System Availability and Reliability

Rev. 1 5.5 -233
1) The F&G system shall be subjected to careful component level subsystem and
system testing, the availability of the F&G system shall then be part of the
guarantee of the system.
2) The system availability is usually expressed in terms of two factors:
(a) Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF).
(b) Mean Time to Repair (MTTR).
3) The system availability shall be guaranteed at 99.99% (Assuming average
MTTR = Four hours).
d. The Fire and Gas Alarm System and Fire Suppression System shall provide fully
autonomous control in the covered area, loss of network connection with fire
supervisory server / operator workstation shall not jeopardize the local control and
monitoring functionalities.
e. All Fire Alarm panels (FACP), Fire Protection Control Panels and Fire Water Pumps
Control Panels shall be part of the fire network to the central location for supervisory
monitoring and controls.
f. From fire supervisory server workstations, the panel operator shall be able to
monitor, program, diagnose, maintenance and inhibit the individual integrant fire
devices. Value engineering can be taken as per project discretion to determine the
feasibility of combining fire Server / workstation with BAS server / workstations in the
buildings.
C. Control Strategies
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to present the concepts and principles underlying
the design of the Plant Instrumentation and Control System.
b. A PCS is actually an integration of several sub-systems into a functional single
system. This system must provide the highest level of safety for the Community,
RCJ personnel and must incorporate the principles of environmental safeguards, the
protection of the process equipment, economy of operation in all regards, and high
reliability. This Subsection addresses each of these requirements and their
influence on design choices.
2. Principals of Automation
a. Safety in Control
1) The controlled equipment and the control system itself must include “fail-safe”
operation such that upon loss of power or control signal, the equipment will go
to the pre-determined “safe” state.
2) All equipment interlocks which are classified as “life safety” interlocks must be
“hard wired” or “mechanically interlocked” and shall not rely on data
communications or wireless transmission for their operation.
b. A typical Control System hierarchy consist of four (4) levels:
1) Level 1 - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
(a) This level includes all field-mounted instruments and equipment that
directly or indirectly have some effect on the process. This will include
temperature, pressure, flow and level transmitters, control valves, on-off

Rev. 1 5.5 -234
valves, Motor Operated Valves (MOVs), fans, heaters, pumps, blowers,

etc.
(b) This information is transferred to Level 2 and the control commands
generated at higher levels are carried out. Equipment at this level will
include local manual controls.
2) Level 2 - Controllers
(a) This is the level at which the main body of most of the control system
and the control program, resides. This level represents the gateway
between Level 1 and Level 3. All information, alerts and commands to
and from Level 1 and Level 3 must pass through this level in order for
them to be executed or used.
(b) Level 2 consists of distributed Controllers (DCS Controllers, PLCs, RTU’s
etc.) and/or a number of Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
packaged controllers.
(c) The Controller is the communication hub by which all information is
collected from the control system. The control program that resides in
these controllers is responsible for the automatic operation of the
facilities equipment and ancillary systems.
(d) The Level 2 Controllers in local areas shall be fully autonomous, with the
exception of operator-entered set points, no operator intervention is
required for the facility to operate automatically. Therefore, if there
happens to be an interruption in communication between Level 2 and
Level 3, normal system operation shall not be affected.
(e) Equipment supervision and alarm generation are tasks that are
performed at this level and reported to Level 3.
3) Level 3 - Supervisory Control and Graphical User Interface
(a) This level provides the Human-Machine Interface (HMI) and Information
Management System (IMS). The system would typically consist of
Application Object Servers (AOS) suitably located in equipment or server
rooms. Operator Workstations connect through industrial Ethernet
networks with the Server to provide a graphical representation of the
various field devices.
(b) The HMI features of the system shall enable the operators to alter
equipment set points, start/stop equipment and monitor system
operations. The IMS features of the system shall provide the user with
real-time and historical trending of important process information and
provide user initiated report generation. The system shall generate
alarms and prioritize these based upon overall importance. A Level 1
alarm is considered critical to overall process integrity and is of the
highest importance and shall initiate an alarm dialer during after hour’s
operation. Level 2 alarms, although important, are of lower priority
relative to Level 1 alarms.
(c) The complete HMI system shall operate as one integrated system based
on a single window concept. The Workstations shall provide operator
access to the system for monitoring and control purposes and reporting
programs. Where applicable Historian software shall provide the
collection and archiving of facility historical data for retrieval from the

Rev. 1 5.5 -235
historian clients for trending analysis and reporting at each operator

workstation or the view-only desktop clients in managers and supervisors
office.
(d) Historical Servers shall function as the primary means of archiving data
within a SQL database. All trends, reports and supporting data shall be
provided in electronic format for special studies and long term strategic
planning. Detailed trend data shall be kept for all important analog
process measurements.
4) Level 4 - MIS/ERP Central Monitoring
(a) The MIS/ERP for the wet systems is located in the MARAFIQ Enterprise
Facility with the exception of the irrigation system which will be under the
direct control of the Royal Commission.
(b) The PCS/SCADA systems supporting the wet systems infrastructure will
control and record activities within their remits. The MIS/ERP system
provided by others will collect data from the PCS/SCADA collate and
make available for others to interrogate and use.
(c) The system critical alarms must be monitored and annunciate abnormal
events and detrimental conditions for the systems to make the operator/s
aware of the situation and will need to be coordinated.
(d) Access is by an approved secure login. The HMIs required to access the
system will be a normal PC with the appropriate access.
(e) Cyber security technology shall be strictly studied between Level 3 local
area (LAN) PCS /SCADA and level 4 Business wide LAN (WAN)
MIS/EPR system to protect the control system from hackers, intruders,
and malicious code.
(f) The protocol, which has to be used inside the local area network
including the communication between the individual systems, shall
comply with the TCP/IP protocol stack.
3. Advanced Control Systems
a. Advanced or Intelligent Control Systems offer an enhancement to the conventional
loop-based and operator-governed controls which will be fundamental to the Plant’s
operation. Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs) which are a proven component of
existing treatment facilities will be elemental in the PCS.
b. The targets of these Intelligent Systems will be improved output water quality and
production, and cost savings through optimization of process chemicals and
consumed and produced energy.
c. The ANNs require a significant amount of historical operating data, spanning a
period typically from 18 months to 3 years or more in order to “learn” and
“understand” the process. As a result, provision for the ANN requirements will be
made, and following the startup of the Plant the data gathering and learning process
can begin, with the intent of integrating the ANNs into the Plant operation, possibly
in year two or year three.
4. Equipment Operating Modes
a. Typical local selector switch modes are designated as follows:
1) HOA - Hand, Off, and Auto.

Rev. 1 5.5 -236
2) LOR - Local, Off, and Remote.

3) Duty / Standby
4) Note that additional selector switch designations are used for certain pieces of
equipment, refer to the associated P&ID for details.
b. Local Mode - In LOCAL mode the equipment is capable of operation from the local
start/stop, on/off, or close/stop/open hand switches associated with the equipment.
This mode is applicable to most actuated equipment including valves, gates and
motors.
c. Off Mode - In OFF mode the equipment will not respond to any operator commands.
This mode is applicable to most actuated equipment including valves, gates and
motors.
d. Remote Mode - In REMOTE mode, the equipment is capable of operation from a
location other than at the local station. This is either another hand switch (i.e. Motor
Control Center (MCC) door mounted) or, if all field switches are in remote then by
Central HMI or SCADA.
e. Remote Manual - In the Remote Manual mode the operator may operate the
equipment from the HMI in the control room or an operator interface panel in the
field.
f. Remote Auto - In the AUTOMATIC mode the equipment is either automatically
controlled by programmed logic within the PCS when the selector switch is in the
AUTOMATIC or REMOTE position.
g. The Duty/assistant arrangement allows a set of devices - typically pumps or variable
speed drives - to be operated with an element of sequence of operating duty pumps
and remaining assistant pumps as backup. During normal operation, the duty
devices are running capable of matching the plant demand, should the running
device fail or the process demand is higher than the total duty pumps capacity, the
remaining devices are requested to run to fulfill the process demand requirements.
h. The Duty/Standby arrangement should have similar working philosophy as Duty/
Assistant, but the standby pumps will not start in the sequence unless the duty pump
failure or scheduled sequence to alternative the pump operation.
5. Consoles, Workstations and Control Networks
a. General
1) Consoles, including panel and HMI mounting structures shall be equipped with
tabletop work surfaces.
2) Where required, telecommunication equipment (i.e., telephones, plant paging
system, CCTV, PA system) and emergency shutdown pushbuttons shall be
incorporated in separate bay within the same console furniture.
3) Each workstation shall have access to a printer networked within the PCS
network.
4) Printers shall be free standing, or tables shall be provided. Printers that utilize
fanfold paper shall be equipped with pedestal (noise absorption enclosures)
with paper stackers.
5) PCS servers and workstations operating systems shall be configured to capture
all necessary systems related events to detect performance and availability
related information.

Rev. 1 5.5 -237
(a) System alarms and failures

(b) CPU utilization
(c) Memory utilization
(d) IO rates (i.e., physical and buffer) and device utilization
(e) File store utilization (e.g., disks, partitions, segments)
(f) Applications
(g) Databases (i.e., utilization, record locks, indexing, contention)
(h) Network utilization (i.e., transaction rates, error and retry rates)
(i) Response time for PCS and application transaction
b. Operator Consoles
1) Each station in the operator console shall have access to a networked printer(s)
for alarm logging, reporting and graphical printing.
2) Consoles that are manned on a continuous basis shall have access to a
networked graphics printer for making hard copies of active displays.
3) Each Operator Console shall be equipped with a minimum of two workstations.
4) Operator Workstations shall be equipped with annunciators / buzzers, operator
keyboard and activate in the event of alarms to gain the operator’s attention.
c. Engineering Workstation
1) Engineering consoles shall consist of a minimum of one workstation.
2) Each engineering workstation shall have access to a networked printer.
3) Each engineering workstation shall be capable of performing all operator
workstation's functions.
d. HMI Control and Monitoring System Functions will include:
1) Dynamic Authority Handling and Multiple system Access protection levels.
2) HMI views and operator dialogs
3) Dynamic process equipment coloring
4) Analogue Measurement
5) Events /Alarms processing
6) Logging, Printing, and Plotting
7) Historical information system
8) Data Archiving, outputting and Retrieval
9) Data quality attributes
10) Manual data entry and updating
11) Values calculation
12) Real-time and historical process values trending
13) Automatic generation of predefined Daily, Weekly and Monthly water flow and
energy consumption reports

Rev. 1 5.5 -238
14) Process Equipment Operation Count and maintenance Statistics

6. Redundancy - Fault Tolerance
a. The following equipment shall be supplied in redundant or fault-tolerant configuration
unless otherwise specified in the project specific Functional Specification Document:
1) All Process Controllers
2) All Power supply modules
3) All DCS Control Network Communications Equipment
4) All communications equipment required for communications between
controllers and I/O modules
5) All Input and Output modules used for critical regulatory control
6) All Foundation Fieldbus Host interface modules
7) All Foundation Fieldbus power supply and conditioning modules
8) All data storage devices (e.g., hard-drives) used to store system configuration
information or control strategy configuration information
9) All auxiliary systems communications interface modules, including
communications paths, where either the communications channel is used to
send commands from the PCS to the auxiliary system or data from the auxiliary
system is used within a regulatory control strategy within the PCS.
Commentary Note: Regulatory control refers to control which is implemented at
the PCS layer. This can be either analog (e.g., 4-20 mA to control valves) or
Foundation Fieldbus or discrete (e.g., 24 VDC to Motor starters). Critical
regulatory control refers to control of equipment which does not have an
installed spare or backup or where failure of the equipment would result in a
significant loss of production or an unsafe operating condition. Inputs and
Outputs used for regulatory control in critical applications shall be supplied with
redundant I/O modules.
b. A minimum of two electrically and electronically independent operator workstations
shall be provided for each operator's console.
7. Centralized Enterprise, MIS/ERP System
a. Various systems in RIC are required for the secure operation of the infrastructure
and the companies which will be located in the city. The infrastructure systems will
each have their own independent SCADA systems to operate, monitor and control
the equipment for which they are responsible. These systems are being designed,
installed and commissioned by others.
b. The collection of operational information is required to enable RC or Third Party
Enterprise to monitor the operations but also to provide a corporate level system to
enable access to the various systems. This system is independent of the operational
SCADA systems but will collect information from these systems and can be
described as a Management Information System (MIS) or Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP). The proposed system collects information that can assist with hydro
modelling, billing, planning, operation performance, plant running status and
measuring the operation performance etc. The information can also, with additional
work, be used to develop early warning of breakdown.

Rev. 1 5.5 -239
c. The information is secure and can be accessed from the Royal Commission building
and from anywhere with interconnection available. The Management information
system provides the monitoring of the following facilities:
1) Wet Utilities
2) Existing SCADA system of Jubail RC
3) Environmental system
4) Gas system
5) Traffic and Transportation system
6) Electrical supply
7) Security
d. Wet utilities are provided with access to the MIS/ERP system/s. The server/s are
installed inside the corporate enterprise control room provided by Marafiq The wet
utilities including PW, IWW, SWW, SWTP Plant/IWTP Plant, Sea Water Cooling
System shall be operated and maintained by Marafiq with the exception of the of the
irrigation distribution pipeline network which will be under the control of the Royal
Commission.
e. The other systems e.g. traffic, security, SEC etc. can also be provided with access
to the MIS/ERP system after agreed procedures for secure access and limitations to
what information is accessible to which parties. It might even be the case that to
ensure security of data that there are several MIS/ERP systems supporting the
different activities.
f. The wet utilities shall be provided with a SCADA system and a dedicated control
room to monitor and manage the infrastructure controlled by PLC’S and RTU’S etc.
The wet utilities are as follows:
1) Potable water system - The potable water system consists of a RO Plant,
storage tanks and pumping stations. There are bulk storage tanks as well as
distribution storage and pumping station. The storage tanks and pump stations
shall be provided with PLC’S installed at the plant for the automation to monitor
and control all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are hooked
up to the SCADA system located inside the local control room at the potable
water facility. Data is transferred by a dedicated fiber optic cable network from
PLC to the SCADA. Uplink with Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the
MIS/EPR system shall be established, for Potable Treatment Plant, data is
transferred by the fiber optic cable network from potable water facility local
control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized SCADA
system inside the corporate enterprise control room located in the potable water
premises. For distribution storage and pump station, local SCADA data is
transferred by means of fiber optic or GPRS communication to the Marafiq
centralized SCADA system.
2) Sea water cooling system - The SWC system consists of a large intake pump
station and a piped network to distribute the sea water to the industrial plots.
There shall be PLC’S installed at the plant for the automation to monitor and
control all the activities at the plant. These PLC’s and RTU’s are hooked up to
the SCADA system located inside the control room at the seawater facility. Data
is transferred by a dedicated fiber optic cable network from PLC to the SCADA,
Foundation Fieldbus technique should be deployed for all sea water cooling
facilities

Rev. 1 5.5 -240
3) Industrial waste water system - The industrial waste water system consists of
pumping stations, pressurized mains and an Industrial Waste Water Treatment
Plant (IWTP). Each pumping station shall be provided with the PLC located
inside the room to monitor and control of all the activities at the pumping station
automatically. The PLC is hooked up by the field instruments to monitor at the
PLC. There shall be PLC’S installed at the treatment plant for the automation
to monitor and control of all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S
are hooked up to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at
the waste water treatment plant facility. Data is transferred by the fiber optic
cable network from PLC to the SCADA. Uplink from IWTP plant SCADA system
with Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the MIS/EPR system shall be
established, Data is transferred by the fiber optic cable network from IWTP
facility local control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized
SCADA system inside the corporate enterprise control room.
4) Sanitary waste water system - The sanitary waste water system consists of
pumping stations, pressurized mains and a Sewage Treatment Plant (STP).
Each pumping station shall be provided with the PLC located inside the room
to monitor and control of all the activities at the pumping station automatically.
The PLC is hooked up by the field instruments to monitor at the PLC. There
shall be PLC’S installed at the treatment plant for the automation to monitor and
control of all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are hooked up
to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at the waste water
treatment plant facility. Data is transferred by the fiber optic cable network from
PLC to the SCADA. Uplink from SWTP plant SCADA system with Marafiq for
level 4 remote monitoring in the MIS/EPR system shall be established, Data is
transferred via the fiber optic cable network from SWTP facility local control
room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized SCADA system
inside the corporate enterprise control room.
5) Commentary Note: The Industry / Sanitary waste water collection system have
many lift stations geography widely distributed within the Jubail Industry city,
there shall be RTU installed at each lift station for monitoring the lift station
level, pump / odor control status. These RTUs shall hook up with Marafiq central
SCADA system by means of GPRS communication network. However if these
lift stations are located within the building compound that managed by RC, the
RTU shall be hook up to the compound BAS system for status monitoring
6) Irrigation water system - The irrigation SWTP plant pumps will be operated and
maintained by Marafiq and will consist of bulk storage tanks containing Treated
Sanitary Effluent (TSE), and main pumping stations. Provide DCS/ PCS control
system for automation, monitoring and controlling of all the pumping activities
and the transmission mains. The DCS/PCS will be connected to Marafiq’s
SCADA system located inside the control room at the SWTP/IWTP Treatment
facility.
7) The Irrigation transmission pipeline networks and associated pump stations
should be operated and controlled by RC L&I operators. All RTUs along the
main transmission pipelines should have both FO connection and Radio
communication networks to the L&I central SCADA system.
8) The irrigation distribution network will be operated and maintained by the RC,
or an RC appointed third party, and will consist of distribution storage tanks
containing Treated Sanitary Effluent (TSE), distribution pumping stations, Valve
Chambers, pressurized mains and irrigation controllers . There shall be

Rev. 1 5.5 -241
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) installed at the pump station and

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) at valve chamber for automation, monitoring and
controlling of all the activities of the irrigation network. These PLC’S and RTU’S
are connected to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at
the Irrigation pump station facility. Data is transferred by the fiber optic cable
network and radio communication from PLC / RTU to the SCADA system.
Uplink from irrigation distribution / boost pump station with RC L&I Centralized
Control Center SCADA shall be established, Data is transferred by the fiber
optic cable network and radio communication network from pump station local
SCADA / valve chamber RTU system to the RC L&I centralized SCADA
system.
9) Irrigation controller shall be used to control the solenoid valve for scheduled
irrigation activities, and shall be control and monitored directly from RC L&I
central SCADA system. Data is transferred from irrigation controller to RC L&I
central SCADA system by means of radio communication network.
10) The RTU shall be able to store and forward Data. To act as a repeater for other
RTUs in case of obstacles or more covering distances required. The
communication protocol should make the communication system between the
FIU- RTU and the RTU-RTU in Contention Transmission of events upon
change of status by the RTUs to the FIU and central control room without
interrogation of the FIU. And Transmission of the events upon change of status
by the Slave RTUs to the Master RTUs without interrogation of the Master RTU.
11) Instrumentation and RTU/FIU components of the Irrigation Water System have
been detailed further in the RC standard specifications and Standard detail
drawings.
8. Segregation - Risk Levels - Safety Integrity levels
a. Process Control Systems shall be segregated into risk areas to increase system and
process availability. Risk Areas shall be defined in three levels. Separate segregation
requirements apply to each risk level.
1) Level 1 Risk Area Segregation
(a) Level 1 (L1) segregation provides the greatest degree of segregation. L1
segregation is used to segregate plant operations based on a 50%
production loss rule.
(b) Where a plant is designed with parallel processing trains, control systems
equipment shall be segregated such that a total loss of process control
equipment contained within a single L1 risk areas shall not result in the
loss of more than 50% of the total plant processing capability.
(c) Equipment located in separate L1 Risk Areas require separate:
(1) UPS Power Circuits
(2) Power Supplies, Power Distribution circuits or panels
(3) Operator workstations and alarm panels
(4) Process controllers (DCS), Safety Instrumented Systems (ESD),
Compressor or Turbine Control Systems and associated I/O
subsystems for each.
(5) Process Control Network equipment and cabling

Rev. 1 5.5 -242
(6) System and marshalling cabinets

(7) Auxiliary systems interfaces.
(d) A double failure of any redundant component in one L1 Risk Area shall
not affect the operations of equipment in any other L1 Risk Area.
(e) Where a single operator console is used to monitor two or more L1 risk
areas, each risk area must have a dedicated Operator Workstation.
Requirements for Operator Workstation redundancy (i.e., the backup
operator workstation) can be a met using a workstation dedicated to
another risk area as long as that workstation has full monitoring and
control capabilities of both risk areas.
(f) Where a single operator console is used to monitor two or more L1 risk
areas, control network communications equipment and cables shall be
segregated between risk areas. Communications cables may terminate on
a common network switch associated with the console provided the switch
is supplied in redundant configuration and both are dedicated for the
operator console.
(a) Level 2 (L2) segregation is used to segregate parallel processing units
within a Level 1 risk area. Level 2 (L2) segregation is also used to
segregate major process equipment installed within Utilities plant areas.
(b) Process Control Equipment shall be segregated into separate Level 2 (L2)
risk areas as follows:
(1) Parallel processing trains or parallel processing units within a Level 1
risk area shall be segregated into separate L2 risk areas.
(2) Redundant or parallel processing equipment located within utilities
plant areas shall be segregated into separate L2 risk areas such that
a complete failure in any single L2 risk area will only result in a loss
of no more than 50% throughput of the utilities area.
Commentary Note: In most instances, it is impractical to segregate
equipment located in the Utilities plant area into separate L1 risk
areas. Equipment such as boilers, air compressors, nitrogen
systems, hot-oil systems, etc., feed a common header which is used
plant-wide and therefore feeds two separate L1 risk areas. For this
reason, Level 2 segregation is applied for utilities equipment using a
similar 50% production loss rule as is applied for Level 1.
(c) Equipment located in separate Level 2 (L2) Risk Areas require separate:
(1) Process Controllers and associated IO modules, IO communications
equipment and communications cabling.
(2) Marshalling Cabinets.
(d) Where two or more operator consoles are used to control equipment
within a single L1 risk area, equipment operated by each console shall be
segregated into separate L2 risk areas.
(e) Parallel processing trains within an L1 risk area which have been
segregated into separate Level 2 risk areas require separate Emergency
Shutdown Systems for each L2 risk area.

Rev. 1 5.5 -243
(f) An exception is allowed for segregation of I/O communications cables

when I/O modules are located remote from the controllers and fiber optic
(g) Cables are used for communications. In this case, controllers in two
separate L2 risk areas may share the same fiber optic cable provided that:
(1) Dedicated fiber strands are used for each controller.
(2) No Fiber optic converters are shared between controllers.
(3) Communications between the controller and I/O is redundant and the
redundant cables are installed in separate routes.
(a) Level 3 segregation is used to segregate parallel process equipment or
equipment installed in redundant configuration in order to increase
process availability. Level 3 segregation requires segregation of
equipment at the IO card level.
(b) Level 3 (L3) Risk Area Segregation shall be applied for parallel process
equipment or any equipment installed in redundant configuration.
(c) Any equipment which serves the same purpose but is provided in
redundant configuration to increase a process
Commentary Note: Redundant or parallel processing equipment are
equipment such as: Booster Pumps, Blowers, Compressors,
filters/separators, etc. which is installed in redundant configuration.
(d) Equipment located in separate L3 risk areas shall not share the same IO
card. Field cables for equipment located in separate L3 risk areas may be
terminated in a common marshalling cabinet and use a common
(redundant) external field power supply if required.
9. Spare and Expansion Capabilities
a. Each system shall be supplied with 5% spare IO points. The spare I/O shall be
licensed, installed, and wired to termination points. Spare IO shall be provided in
approximately the same ratio as that of the installed types and shall be distributed
between risk areas in the approximate ratio as the required IO.
b. Where both redundant and simplex IO models are used for a signal type, the
requirement for spare IO shall apply for both types.
c. Each system shall be installed with 10% spare slots in IO chassis or baseplates to
accommodate addition of IO modules without requiring additional chassis or
baseplates to be added to the system. Power supplies for IO modules shall be sized
to accommodate the additional 10% expansion requirement.
d. Each Foundation Fieldbus installation shall have a 20% spare capacity for Foundation
Fieldbus communication modules and power conditioners
e. Each system shall be capable of expanding the number of controllers by 20% from
that installed in the base system.
Commentary Note: Requirements for expansion capacity and spare IO do not apply
to expansion projects where control and I/O are being added to an existing system.
For expansion projects, the requirements for spare IO and expansion capability may
differ. If none are specified then the requirements above shall apply.

Rev. 1 5.5 -244
f. The average CPU Loading of any controller during normal operating conditions shall
not exceed 65% overall or 75% of the manufacturers recommended maximum loading
specification, whichever is lower. The spare capacity is required to accommodate
peak loads during upset conditions and to provide additional capacity required for
configuration of spare IO points and associated control algorithms and to enable the
utilization of the spare IO slots.
g. Servers and/or Engineering Workstations shall be configured with additional spare
capacity of 40% minimum for hard-drive space, memory, and CPU. CPU and memory
spare requirements shall be verified on the running system during steady-state
conditions with all applicable software running on the system.
D. Instrumentation - Basic Design Criteria
1. General
b. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for instrumentation
selection, and installation.
c. The design requirements for each type of instrument are covered by the individual
standards and specifications.
d. Instrumentation shall be designed consistent with the design pressure and
temperature of the proposed service. All wetted parts shall be 304 stainless steel as
a minimum. Higher corrosion resistant materials may be substituted on an application
specific basis as required.
e. Temperature and/or pressure compensation for flow or level shall be provided as
required to maintain measurement accuracy.
f. Transmitters shall have less than 0.25% shift in output with a 50 DEGC change in
ambient temperature. The accuracy shall be ±0.25% of the calibrated range or better.
Repeatability shall be ±0.1% or better.
g. Flow transmitters shall produce signals which are linear or square root with respect to
flow within ±1% of full scale flow when operating between 25% and 100% of full scale
flow.
h. Pressure transmitters shall produce a signal which is linear with respect to the
measured pressure within ±0.25% of the measured span.
i. Level transmitters shall produce a signal which is linear with respect to the measured
level within ±1% of the measured span based on a specific gravity of 1.00.
j. RTDs shall have resistance characteristic which is linear with respect to temperature
within ±0.5% of the top range value.
k. Electronic signal converters shall have an accuracy of ±0.25% of span. Electronic
signal converters for movable core transformer systems shall have an accuracy of +
0.5% of span.
l. Process measurement instrumentation shall not contain mercury.
m. The design and selection of instrumentation shall include consideration of the
following:
1) Application suitability
2) Reliability and availability
3) Quality

Rev. 1 5.5 -245
4) Accuracy
5) Repeatability
6) Life cycle cost
7) Previous acceptance as a stock item and compatibility with existing equipment
(i.e., savings on spares)
8) Compatibility with the environment (climatic and electrical classification)
Commentary Note: The priority of the above aspects will depend on the
application and equipment under consideration. Other pertinent factors and
design issues that are not listed above shall also be considered.
n. Instrument Mounting Locations
9) Field instruments shall be mounted as close as possible to the process
connection to minimize the length of instrument impulse lines. Where practically
possible, the length of the impulse line shall not exceed 6 m.
10) Instruments shall not protrude into or obstruct access ways so as to inhibit area
personnel egress.
11) All instrumentation and associated control equipment shall be readily
accessible from grade, platform, fixed walkway, fixed stairway or a fixed ladder.
Local indicating instruments shall be visible from where related equipment is
operated or primary instruments are tested or calibrated.
12) Instruments mounted outside a handrail shall be located to allow maintenance
from the walking/working surface without reaching through or leaning over the
handrail.
13) Instruments shall be located to allow performance of routine services with
unobstructed access.
Commentary Note1: Clearances shall be provided for the removal of covers
and cases and the opening of doors and enclosures. Access for appropriate
lifting equipment shall be provided when necessary for control valves or other
large in-line instruments.
Commentary Note2: For all instruments mounted inside the valve chamber,
remote indicator or universal display unit should be provided to allow the
operator have direct access the measurement reading at site.
Commentary Note3: For MOV actuators mounted inside the valve chamber, the
valve should include extended spindle and all necessary mounting accessories
to make sure the valve hand wheel and actuators are mounted outside the valve
chamber for easier operation, and can be directly accessed by the operator.
14) Pressure and D/P instruments in liquid or condensable vapor service shall be
self-venting (i.e., mounted below the process connections) with all impulse lines
sloping downward approximately 1:12 minimum toward the instrument.
15) Pressure and D/P instruments in gas service shall be self-draining (i.e.,
mounted above the process connections) with all lines sloping downward
approximately 1:12 minimum toward the process connection.
o. Instrument Process Connections
16) A line class root or isolation valve shall be provided at each process connection.
This valve shall be specified and provided by the piping discipline.

Rev. 1 5.5 -246
17) All process connected instruments shall be equipped with block and bleed
mechanism to allow isolation, drainage and maintenance.
18) Pressure and differential pressure transmitters shall be equipped with manifold
assemblies.
19) Instrument process connections shall conform to the requirements specified in
the relevant instrumentation specifications and standard drawings.
20) All online analyzer instruments should include online retackle assemblies to
make sure online replacement or maintenance of the analyzer sensors without
disturb the process operations.
p. Instrument Support
21) Direct-reading instruments such as gauges shall be supported by piping, panel
board or equipment.
22) Except for close-coupled instrument, all field instruments shall be mounted on
instrument supports designed for that purpose.
Commentary Note: Attention shall be paid to process instruments that are close
-coupled (installed directly on the piping). Effects of instrument size and weight
as well as heat or vibration in piping systems shall be carefully evaluated.
3) When pipe stand is used as an instrument support, it shall be made of a
prefabricated, 50 mm, schedule 40 pipe. The pipe stand shall be hot-dipped
galvanized. The top of the pipe shall be plugged or sealed to prevent water
entry.
4) Pipe stands shall be securely anchored. For typical details, refer to Standard
Detail.
q. Instrumentation Tagging
1) All instruments shall have engraved phenolic/ Bakelite-laminated nameplates
showing instrument tag numbers. The nameplates shall be installed with
stainless steel screws. Using glue to install nameplates is not acceptable.
2) Panel mounted instruments shall be provided with two nameplates, one on the
front and one on the back; rack mounted instruments shall have front mounted
nameplates only.
3) For RTD and thermocouple heads, stainless steel nameplates that are chained
to the head may be used.
4) All field junction boxes, other instrumentation enclosures and process
automation cabinets shall be equipped with nameplates.
r. Instrument Piping and Tubing
1) Instrument Piping
(a) When piping is used for process connection, the piping specification and
installation shall follow the relevant piping standards. From the root valve
to the instrument, the instrument piping specification, material of
construction, pressure rating, fittings, and valves shall meet or exceed
applicable piping specifications for the process service.

Rev. 1 5.5 -247
2) Instrument Tubing
(a) When tubing is used for process connection, the process sensing tubing
(impulse line), fittings, and instrument valves shall be compatible with the
process medium. The tubing and fittings shall be made of the same
material. As a minimum, the tubing shall be Type 316 seamless, annealed
stainless steel per ASTM A269, 6 mm OD, hardness B80 maximum.
(b) As a minimum, pneumatic signal (10 - 100 kPa signals) tubing shall be
Type 316 seamless, annealed stainless steel per ASTM A269, 6 mm OD,
hardness Rockwell B80 maximum. The minimum design pressure shall be
2 MPa.
(c) Tube fittings shall be, as a minimum, 316 stainless steel and shall be
compression type.
3) Instrument Piping and Tubing Support
(a) Instrument process piping and tubing shall be supported as necessary to
maintain structural integrity.
(b) All instrument piping and tubing between the instrument and process
equipment or pipeline shall be properly supported to prevent strain on the
instrument, equipment, and piping connections. The supports shall be
designed so that the effect of any equipment vibration is eliminated.
(c) Tubing shall not be routed along or supported from handrails.
(d) Tubing supports shall be spaced not more than 1.2 meters apart.
(e) In locations where mechanical damage is likely, tubing may be installed in
dedicated structural channel, angle, or in trays.
(f) Tubes and tube bundles and their support channels and trays shall not be
supported from process or utility piping.
(g) Tubing channels or trays shall not be supported by bolting to transmitter
brackets or control valves.
(h) Tubing shall be installed in a manner that allows for calibration of
instruments and easy removal of adjacent instruments, equipment, and
tubing.
2. Online Continuous Measurement or Analog Type Instrumentation
a. All continuous measurement electronic field instruments, and control valve
positioners, shall be smart.
1) Signal Ranges and Communications Protocols - Acceptable field transmission
signals are Foundation™ fieldbus, or 4-20 mA with superimposed HART.
2) Vendor proprietary digital protocols are acceptable for plant expansions when
matching existing instrumentation. In the context of this standard, field
transmission signals are defined as signals from field devices to a control
system, or signals from a control system to field devices.
3) HART communication protocol shall not be used for plant control.
4) Foundation™ fieldbus based instrumentation and control systems shall meet
the requirements detailed further in Paragraph 5.5.3.G.7.
5) Wireless process instrumentation shall not be used.

Rev. 1 5.5 -248
b. Continuous measurement systems and/or instrumentation includes but is not be

limited to - Flow, Level, Pressure, Temperature, Analytical, Environmental, and
Miscellaneous equipment.
1) Flow - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
2) Level - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
3) Pressure - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
4) Temperature - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
5) Analytical - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
6) Environmental - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
7) Miscellaneous - Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
c. Specific performance criteria and detailed specifications for each type of instrument
are provided in the standard specifications.
d. Power Monitoring
1) Power monitoring is provided under electrical package requirements under
Subsection 5.5.1.G item 9; however the interface with the control system shall
be based on standard protocols such as Modbus, Profibus, and Ethernet etc.
2) Power monitoring instrumentation shall be included to provide to support the
following minimum monitoring functions:
(a) kW
(b) kVAr
(c) V for all phases P-P and L-P
(d) I for all phases
(e) PF
(f) Circuit breaker and switch status indication for: facility main and feeder
breakers and disconnect switches, generator breakers, Auto Transfer
Switches, and electrically operated low voltage breakers.
e. Offline continuous measurement electronic field instruments shall be provided for
specific analytic sampling systems.
3. Online Discrete Type Instrumentation
a. Fail Safe Design Requirements - Unless otherwise specified in other standards, all
discrete instrumentation such as switches, solenoids, relays, etc., shall be designed
so that they are energized during normal operation and shall de-energize to initiate a
shutdown, an alarm or any other control action
b. On-line Discrete digital switching type measurement systems and/or instrumentation
includes but is not be limited to - Flow, Level, Pressure, Temperature, Analytical,
Environmental, and Miscellaneous equipment.
4. On-line Final Control Elements
a. Control Valves Actuators
1) Notwithstanding the requirements set forth in this Subsection - coordinate with
the following mechanical and civil requirements.

Rev. 1 5.5 -249
(a) Subsection 5.4.3.B. 6-8 Mechanical Piping Systems

(b) Subsection 5.7.1.B. Potable Water
(c) Subsection 5.7.2. Sanitary Sewer System
(d) Subsection 5.7.3 Recycled Water System ( Irrigation)
(e) Subsection 5.7.4Recycled Industrial Water System
(f) Subsection 5.7.5 Sea Water Cooling
2) Valve size shall be such that equal percentage valves shall be approximately
75% to 85% open and linear valves shall be approximately 50% open when
operating at normal flow and pressure drop condition.
3) Valve capacity rating (Cv) shall be calculated at maximum and normal flow
rates at their respective pressure drop to be assured that overall operating
range is satisfied. The manufacturers published "Cv’s" shall be used to
determine valve size. Valve sizing calculations shall be based on equations
and data by the manufacturer supplying control valves for the project or ISA
S75-01 "Flow Equations for Sizing Control Valves".
4) Noise-level within 1 M of any noise producing control valve shall not exceed 85
dBA. Control valve sizing shall take into account any noise attenuating devices,
such as special trim and diffusers, which may be considered to reduce the noise
level within specified limits.
5) Valves, in general, shall be globe type. Where low pressure drop or high
recovery is required, butterfly or characterized ball valves may be considered.
Special body types such as angle, "Y" etc., shall be considered when the
process fluid may be erosive, viscous or carrying suspended solids. Flushing
connections shall be provided for slurry service. Flangeless, insert type valves
may be considered for utility service or where material is other than carbon
steel.
6) Where a hand wheel is required, the shaft-mounted declutch able type shall be
furnished. "Fishtail" disc shall be considered on all high torque requirements.
Bronze "oilite" bushings shall be used for outboard bearings. Inboard bushings
shall be manufacturing standard. Roller or needle bearings shall not be used.
7) Minimum body size for flanged valves shall be 25 mm with reduced ports, as
required. Steel valves shall have at least 150 lb. body and flanges shall have
face to face dimensions in accordance with ANSI B16.10. Valve body
connections shall normally conform to ANSI B31.1. Body material shall
normally be cast or forged carbon steel for non-corrosive process applications.
Chromemoly steel shall be considered for service where temperature exceeds
343 C.
8) Packing Glands shall be equipped with flanged bolted-type gland stuffing
boxes. Packing shall be Teflon for liquid and gas service up to an inlet pressure
of 1000 psig, and a temperature not to exceed 177 C. Grafoil shall be used
for steam service with temperatures above 177 C. Packing gland followers
shall be the same as body material.
9) Control valve plugs shall normally be cage guided. Unbalanced type shall
preferably be used for tight shut off. Where balanced valves are used, the valve
shall be installed in horizontal lines only with stem vertical.

Rev. 1 5.5 -250
10) Characteristic and shape of the inner valve shall be determined by each system
characteristic. In general, equal percentage characteristic shall be used.
Linear characteristic may be used for flow control and level.
11) Plug and seat rings shall be stainless steel up to 100 psi drop and up to the
temperature rating of the body. Other conditions may require special trim
consideration and shall be in accordance with good engineering practice.
When severe corrosion is expected, or pressure drop exceeds 100 psi, full-bore
satellite or hardened stainless steel shall be furnished.
12) Special alloys, balanced plugs, soft seats, etc., shall be considered where
warranted by the application. Valves on oxygen service shall be degreased.
When tight shut off is required, soft seat trim or lapped seats shall be used,
provided temperature limits are not exceeded; soft seat trims shall be of fire
safe design.
13) Guide bushings shall normally be hardened stainless steel and preferably shall
be a minimum of 125 Brinnel harder than the trim. Control valve leakage shall
conform to ANSI B106.4 Quality Control Standard for Control Valve Seat
Leakage.
14) Control valves are used for block valves, where leakage is not permitted when
tripped, or for safety requirements, shall be specified for tight shut-off. Tight
shut-off leakage for valves with metal seats shall be Class V; 0.0005 ml/min.
per 25 mm of port diameter per psi pressure drop.
15) Self-contained control valves used pressure or temperature control of air,
water, oil, steam or process fluids in utility piping systems shall be limited to a
maximum regulated pressure of 150 psig and maximum valve size of 50 mm.
16) Self-actuated pressure reducing stations on process fluids shall conform to the
line specification in which the valve is installed. Threaded bodies may be used
if permitted by the piping specification.
17) Self-actuated temperature regulators on steam or water service shall be of the
vapor pressure type with copper bulb and copper capillary with stainless steel
armor and stainless steel thermowell.
18) Accessories such as limit switches, air sets, and solenoid valves shall be rigidly
mounted and bracketed to the valve. Valve position limit switches shall be of
the snap acting type with IP65 weatherproof housing suitable for the area
electrical classification. Switches shall be furnished with DPDT contacts.
19) Control valve data sheets shall be provided for all control valves.
b. Valve Actuators
1) A filter-regulator air set shall be provided for air-operated actuators. Air sets
shall consist of a combination air filter, pressure regulator, and integral relief
valve. Connections shall be 6mm or more if required for speed of response of
the device being supplied. An output gauge shall be supplied at the outlet of
each air set. Tubing shall be sufficiently large so as not to unduly restrict air
flow or dynamic response. Bug screens shall be installed on all open port or
piping connectors. Where air sets are required for control valves they shall be
directly mounted on the valve positioner.
2) Actuator position shall be clearly indicated.

Rev. 1 5.5 -251
3) Actuators shall fail-safe upon trip or loss of power and/or loss of power to the
controller, transmitter, and other associated logic elements. Upon restoration
of power, the actuator shall become available for operation without changing
its position.
4) The full stroke time shall not impede or limit the performance or safe operation
of the associated equipment.
5) Positioners or booster relays shall be force balance type with pneumatic output.
Positioners shall be SMART, HART compatible, and shall accept 4-20 mA
directly. Separate I/P converters are not allowed.
6) Valve actuators shall be preferably diaphragm type. Piston operators may be
used in severe pressure drop services or on rotary valves.
7) Electrical motor-operated valves shall have a torque limit switch which shall be
used as a back-up switch to stop the motor when the valve is at full limit travel.
Electrical motor operator suppliers’ recommendations shall be used for
stopping the motor. The stopping requirements will differ depending on the
type of valve. Motors and starters shall be in accordance with area electrical
classification and the specified voltage levels. Enclosures shall be weather
proof.
8) Motor actuators are commonly used; however their use as modulating final
control elements is limited due to design limitations.
9) Three-way direct acting solenoid valves shall be used to actuate control valves
when interlocked with fail safe or shutdown circuits. The coil shall be molded
design with weatherproof housing furnished to meet area electrical code
classifications. Outdoor installations shall be weatherproof. Solenoid vents
shall have bug screens. Solenoids with top mounted vents shall be piped so
that moisture does not enter the valve. Universal (reversible ports) are
preferred and shall be selected where air pressure is to be blocked at the vent
port. Pilot operated solenoid valves shall not be used.
5. Custody Metering
a. This Subsection is intended to define the minimum requirements governing the design
of custody transfer metering stations used for the measurement of Seawater Cooling
Liquid.
b. Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards SAES-Y-100; 101; 103 and 501 shall be
referenced for Custody Metering of Hydrocarbon Gases or Liquids and is not in the
scope of this document.
c. Custody Transfer Measurement is a specialized form of measurement that provides
quantity and quality information used for the physical and fiscal documentation of a
change in ownership and/or responsibility of commodities. The following
measurements are custody transfer measurements:
1) Measurement of Seawater Cooling Liquid (deliveries or receipts) between RCJ
and its customers.
d. A Meter Station shall be defined as a facility that is primarily dedicated to the
measurement of the quantity and quality of seawater cooling liquid. The facility may
include, but not be limited to pipelines, piping, regulators, valves, strainers/filters, flow
straightening and conditioning equipment, samplers, measurement elements, Remote
Terminal Units (RTU), pumps, communications (data and SA telephone), metering
shelter, UPS, area fencing, area paving, area lighting, and associated instrumentation,

Rev. 1 5.5 -252
alarms, computers with software programs, peripheral equipment and associated

control functions.
e. A Metering System shall be defined as a complete assembly of equipment that is
designed to measure the quantity and quality of seawater cooling liquid. The metering
system includes, but is not limited to, the meter skid (meters, filters, analyzers, flow
conditioning sections, valves), samplers, and control system (flow computers,
metering supervisory computers, etc.).
f. Units of Measurement - the metric (SI) system of units shall be used per Table 5.5.3.B:
TABLE 5.5.3.B: PROFESSIONAL UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
ITEM METRIC (SI)
Volume Cubic Meters, Liters, (m3, L)
Temperature Degrees Celsius (°C)
Pressure Kilopascals Gauge, (Kpa (ga))
g. Reference Conditions - Due to the nature and volumes of Seawater Cooling Liquids,
no corrections will be necessary due to liquid pressure or temperature changes as the
impact will be negligible.
h. A typical Seawater Cooling Liquid custody transfer metering station will include the
following measurements:
1) Flow
2) Pressure
3) Temperature
4) Chlorine Residual CL2
5) Dissolved Oxygen
i. The performance specifications for these measuring instruments are detailed in the
standard specifications.
E. Instrumentation and Control System Cabinets
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for instrumentation and
control system cabinet construction, selection, and installation.
b. Outdoor Environmentally Controlled - IP65
1) Typically all outdoor enclosures shall be made of stainless steel materials.
2) In outdoor plant areas, the panel/cabinet shall be IEC 60529, Type IP65.
3) In outdoor plant and other industrial areas located in severe corrosive
environments, enclosures shall be IEC 60529 Type IP66, manufactured of 316L
stainless steel. Galvanized and/or painted or coated carbon steel sheet metal
enclosures are not permitted.

Rev. 1 5.5 -253
4) Door hardware (hinges, latches, handles, bolts and nuts) shall be made of 316
stainless steel.
5) The enclosure size and dimensions shall be appropriate for the application with
a minimum of 20% spare capacity for growth. The enclosure shall include a full-
length front door to provide access to all components mounted inside.
6) Notwithstanding item 3 above - the enclosure shall be sized to ensure
maximum temperature inside the enclosure due to internal heat dissipation
pulse heat rise due to solar radiation will not exceed 55°C for sheltered cabinets
and 65°C for unsheltered cabinets. All electronic components to be mounted
inside the enclosure shall have 75°C temperature rating minimum.
7) The enclosures may be surface mounted or rack mounted depending on the
specific design.
8) The enclosures shall have locking doors. Each enclosure shall be supplied with
at least two (2) keys.
9) Enclosure shall be fitted with sufficient number of conduit entries at the bottom.
10) Terminal strips shall be provided in the enclosures to terminate instrument
cables from field signals and for power distribution.
11) Each item of equipment and accessory inside the cabinet shall be correctly
tagged, if possible, immediately below the corresponding equipment or
accessory. All nameplates on the exterior surface of the cabinet shall be
attached with stainless steel screws. Internally mounted nameplates may be
attached with two-component epoxy adhesive. Nameplates shall be made from
laminated plastic, white-black-white (information engraved into the black core
with white surface, dull finish).
12) Each cabinet design shall be appropriately laid out with sufficient workspace to
allow for installed equipment field wiring termination and access for future
maintenance and installation.
13) The panel/cabinet and all components within the panel shall be suitable for the
electrical area classification where the panel will be installed.
c. Indoor - General Purpose IP32 and IP52
1) All cabinet equipment and wiring shall be designed for continuous operation at
50°C, and relative humidity 80% maximum (non-condensing) and 20%
minimum.
Commentary Note: The temperature of 50°C allows for a 35°C room ambient
plus a 15°C rise within the cabinet.
2) The cabinets shall be rigid and self-supporting. By default, all cabinets shall be
free standing, floor mounted type.
3) Indoor cabinets shall be made of metal. When multiple cabinets are provided,
they shall be identical in construction and external appearance.
4) The cabinet shall be IP52 as a minimum prior to fitting of louvers or fans as
per IEC60529.
5) Cabinets requiring heat dissipation shall be convection-ventilated.
6) Convection-ventilated cabinets shall be provided with readily accessible,
removable filter screens inserted behind slotted louver inlets. Depending on the

Rev. 1 5.5 -254
location of the heat generating components, louvers and filters may be installed
at the top of the cabinet or within cabinet doors. Louvers installed on the sides
or back of the cabinet are not acceptable.
7) Fans may be used within Cabinets to assist in heat removal and cabinet
ventilation. If the fans are required to dissipate heat when the HVAC is running,
redundant fans shall be provided. If the fan(s) are only required to dissipate
heat when the HVAC is not running, a single fan is adequate. In both cases,
fan failure and over-temperature detection and alarm are required in the PCS.
d. Packaged - Vendor or OEM supplied with environmental rating to suit the intended
application
F. Electrical Systems for Instrumentation
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for electrical systems
for instrumentation and control systems.
b. Electrical distribution panels and motor control centers associated with control building
services and the control system UPS shall be located in the electrical equipment room.
c. The electrical equipment room shall be sized to permit top, front, side and back access
for operation and maintenance of installed equipment.
d. Where required a separate mechanical equipment room containing air handling
equipment, particle filters and chemical filters, shall be included and shall be fire
separated from all other rooms.
2. Electrical Wiring
a. Electrical and wiring up to but excluding vendors' standard cabinets shall be designed
in accordance with Section5.5.1 Electrical.
b. Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 5.5.1 the following requirements shall be
observed.
1) Analog Signals
(a) Use 300V, Copper Conductor, XLPE or PVC Insulation, individual/overall
shield cable for all low level analog signals such as 4-20 mA, 1-5 V DC, 0-
10 V DC, pulse type circuits 24 V DC and under, and other signals of a
similar nature.
(b) Use RTD cable for connections between RTD’s and transmitters.
2) Digital Communications Signals
(a) Use 300V, Copper Conductor, XLPE or PVC Insulation, overall shield
cable for all low level input (24 V and below) and output signals to the plant
control system.
(b) Use stranded wire and cable to supply power to instruments as per section
5.5.1
3) Modularized Instrument cable design
(a) All instrument cables should be modularized designs as per RC standard
pay item library, e.g. only 1/2/5/10/20 pairs of cables should be selected
in the design drawings, other multicore cables other than pay item library
will be subjected to RC approval.

Rev. 1 5.5 -255
4) Cable Installation
(a) Install instrumentation cables in conduit systems or in cable trays. Use a
maximum of 36” length of liquid tight flexible conduit to connect the field
sensors to the rigid conduit. Refer to Section 5.5.1 for conduit or cable
tray requirements.
(b) Where non-armored instrumentation cables are installed in cable trays,
provide barriers in the tray to separate instrumentation cables from power
cables.
(c) At each end of the run leave sufficient cable length for termination.
(d) Do not make splices in any of the instrumentation cable runs. Where
splices are required, obtain approval from the RC prior to installing the
cable. Do not splice cables to gas detection heads.
(e) Where splices are necessary in instrumentation cables other than coaxial
cables, perform such splices on terminal blocks in terminal boxes. Keep
splices in instrumentation cable to a minimum and separated physically
from power circuits. Cable shields shall be terminated on insulated
terminals and carried through to the extent of the cable.
(f) Where splices are made to coaxial cables, use standard coaxial cable
connectors.
(g) Ground cable shields at one end only. Unless otherwise specified, ground
the shields at the marshaling / local control panels.
(h) Protect all conductors against moisture during and after installation.
(i) Terminate armored cables with approved only connector.
3. Power Supply
a. Two separate, independent, electric circuits shall be supplied to power redundant
modules. If a simplex UPS is provided, one of the feed to system redundant power
modules shall be supplied from a raw 230 V power feed.
b. Power Supply circuits shall be clearly labeled. Branch circuits or power cords to
redundant modules shall be clearly labeled identifying the circuit that they are
connected to.
c. Redundant internal power supply modules shall be provided for the following:
14) Process controllers
15) Input and output modules
16) Communication modules
d. Redundant power supply modules shall be provided for critical field instruments.
4. Power Distribution within PCS Cabinets
a. Power supplies which feed multiple chassis' or baseplates shall have their outputs
wired to a power distribution panel within the cabinet.
Commentary Note: The term "power distribution panel" in the above requirement and
subsequent requirements of this Subsection refers to a collection of din-rail mounted
circuit breakers and/or fused terminal blocks, terminal blocks and wiring used to
distribute power to multiple loads from a single source.

Rev. 1 5.5 -256
c. Branch circuits from power supplies shall be individually fused or protected by a circuit
breaker.
b. Terminal blocks in the power distribution panel shall be segregated by voltage level.
c. Power distribution terminal block wiring shall not be daisy-chained using wires or
crimp connectors. Jumper bars or preformed jumper combs designed for the specific
terminal blocks being used are acceptable methods of distributing power supply
wiring.
d. Wiring, terminal blocks, wire tagging and terminal block coding within the power
distribution panel shall be as per the requirements defined elsewhere in this
document.
5. Power Supply and Distribution to PCS Consoles and Workstations
a. PCS workstations shall be fed from UPS power sources. This requirement applies to
the processor, monitor, and other peripheral devices associated with the workstation.
b. For redundant workstations within an operator console, it is acceptable to supply
power to the workstations using either of the configurations described below:
1) Each workstation shall be fed from a single UPS power circuit; provided that
each workstation is fed from a separate UPS power source.
2) Each workstation shall be fed from two separate power circuits utilizing a power
switching device to maintain continuous power on loss of a single circuit. One
of these circuits shall be fed from UPS power source and the other may be fed
from utility power.
c. Workstations which are not supplied in a redundant configuration shall be powered as
described above in b.2.
d. Commercially available multiple outlet power strips (i.e., Tripp-Lite model UL 24CB-
15 or similar) may be used to distribute power to multiple components of a workstation
(i.e., processor, monitor, and associated peripheral devices) provided that each power
strip feeds equipment associated with a single workstation. The power strip must have
an integral circuit breaker and switch and must carry a FM or CE marking.
6. Utility Power
a. One, duplex-type convenience outlet, rated at 230 VAC, 13 amp shall be provided
within each cabinet for utility power. Convenience outlets shall be wired to a separate
terminal strip which in turn is sourced from a non-UPS AC distribution panel.
b. Two, duplex-type convenience outlets, rated at 230 VAC, 13 amp shall be provided
within each console for utility power. Convenience outlets shall be wired to a separate
terminal strip which in turn is sourced from a non-UPS AC distribution panel. The
outlets shall be placed on opposite sides of the console to enhance availability.
7. Grounding
a. Grounding design shall be per the provisions of Subsection 5.5.1.J.
b. Notwithstanding the requirements of Subsection5.5.1.J, PCS workstations,
computers, I/O cabinets and auxiliary equipment shall be grounded in accordance
with PCS vendor's recommendations.
c. PLC based Emergency Shutdown Systems (ESD) shall be grounded in accordance
with electrical Subsection and the ESD Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
manufacturer's recommendations.

Rev. 1 5.5 -257
G. Process Automation Network (PAN)

1. General
a. Notwithstanding the requirements as set out in Section 5.5.2 Telecommunications -
The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for process
automation network design selection, and installation.
2. Process Automation Network Design
a. The PAN shall be based on IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD (Ethernet) standard or Vendor
proprietary control network standard The backbone shall be based on Layer 3 multi-
protocol switches utilizing 1 Gigabits per second (Gbps) backplane throughput as
minimum. Nodes, such as servers/ workstations, shall be connected to 10/100 Mbps
ports.
3. Physical and Logical Separation
a. The network design shall provide physical and logical separation between PAN and
all other corporate or utility networks through demilitarized zone and firewall.
b. Logical separation, at minimum, is mandatory for network connections above firewall.
c. Physical separation is mandatory for subsystems such as CCTV, telephone network
connections below firewall.
d. Physical separation utilizing dedicated fiber strands of an existing fiber optics cable is
permitted and shall include a service level agreement defining area of responsibility
for support and maintenance, including agreed response time.
e. A minimum bandwidth of 5 Megabits/s requirements shall always be made available
for any given WAN connection.
f. PAN equipment shall be deployed with the latest stable vendor supported operating
systems.
g. Network traffic through the firewall shall be limited to server-to-server connections and
through selected source/destination IP addresses and TCP/UDP ports and services.
4. Engineering and Maintenance Network (E&MN)
a. The E&MN shall be connected to the PAN.
b. The E&MN network shall be used to integrate auxiliary systems on a single network
such as Emergency shutdown systems, compressor control systems, vibration
monitoring systems, etc., for the purpose of centralizing the engineering and
maintenance activities for the plant.
5. Wireless Communications
a. Full Duplex wireless radio communications shall be provided for all new RTUs
associated with the Irrigation Control System.
b. Wireless systems will not be utilized for building automation and process automation
projects.
c. The Irrigation Central Control shall communicate in real time 2-waycommunication
with the field Remote Terminal Units (RTU) on site via radio communication through
a Field Interface Unit (FIU).The RTU shall have the capability to communicate on a
bi-directional real time basis with systems above it (RTU-To-Central),parallel to it
(RTU-To-RTU) and below it (RTU-To-Slave RTU). This shall include full control and
monitoring capabilities.

Rev. 1 5.5 -258
6. HART
a. The HART Communications Protocol (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Protocol) is an early implementation of Fieldbus, a digital industrial automation
protocol.
b. It’s most notable advantage is that it can communicate over legacy 4-20 mA analog
instrumentation wiring, sharing the pair of wires used by the older system. Due to
the huge installed base of 4-20 mA systems throughout the world, the HART
Protocol is one of the most popular industrial protocols today. HART protocol has
made a good transition protocol for users who were comfortable using the legacy 4-
20 mA signals, but wanted to implement a "smart" protocol.
c. There are two main operational modes of HART instruments: analog/digital mode,
and multidrop mode.
d. In point-to-point mode (analog/digital) the digital signals are overlaid on the 4-20 mA
loop current. Both the 4-20 mA current and the digital signal are valid output values
from the instrument. The polling address of the instrument is set to "0". Only one
instrument can be put on each instrument cable signal pair. One signal, generally
specified by the user, is specified to be the 4-20 mA signal. Other signals are sent
digitally on top of the 4-20 mA signal. For example, pressure can be sent as 4-20
mA, representing a range of pressures, and temperature can be sent digitally over
the same wires. In point-to-point mode, the digital part of the HART protocol can be
seen as a kind of digital current loop interface.
e. In multidrop mode (digital) only the digital signals are used. The analog loop current
is fixed at 4 mA. In multidrop mode it is possible to have more than one instruments
on one signal cable. HART revisions 3 through 5 allowed polling addresses of the
instruments to be in the range 1-15. HART 6 and later allowed address up to 63.
Each instrument needs to have a unique address.
f. All transmitters shall be high performance type microprocessor based Foundation
Fieldbus or ‘SMART’ type with HART protocol unless stated otherwise.
g. The PCS System shall support communication to HART devices by using Universal
and Common practice command sets using HART I/O module as the interface.
h. The system shall be capable of receiving, displaying and storing diagnostic data and
device alerts from HART devices by using HART I/O module interface. In case the
selected I/O modules are not HART compliance, a multiplexer shall be provided to
obtain the HART information.
i. The PCS system shall be capable of displaying configuration data resident in HART
devices on the IAMS workstations.
j. FOUNDATION Fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way communications system that
serves as the base-level network in a plant or factory automation environment. It is
an open architecture, developed and administered by the Fieldbus Foundation.
k. It is targeted for applications using basic and advanced regulatory control, and for
much of the discrete control associated with those functions.
l. Two related implementations of foundation fieldbus have been introduced to meet
different needs within the process automation environment. These two
implementations use different physical media and communication speeds.
1) FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 - Operates at 31.25 kbit/s and is generally used to
connect to field devices and host systems. It provides communication and

Rev. 1 5.5 -259
power over standard stranded twisted-pair wiring in both conventional and

intrinsic safety applications. H1 is currently the most common implementation.
2) HSE (High-speed Ethernet) - Operates at 100/1000 Mbit/s and generally
connects input/output subsystems, host systems, linking devices and
gateways. It doesn't currently provide power over the cable, although work is
under way to address this using the IEEE802.3af Power on Ethernet (PoE)
standard.
m. FOUNDATION Fieldbus was originally intended as a replacement for the 4-20 mA
standard.
n. FOUNDATION Fieldbus was developed over a period of many years by the
International Society of Automation, or ISA, as SP50.
o. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard on field bus, including
FOUNDATION Fieldbus, is IEC 61158. Type 1 is FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1, while
Type 5 is FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE.
p. A typical fieldbus segment consists of the following components.
1) H1 card - fieldbus interface card (It is common practice to have redundant H1
cards, but ultimately this is application specific)
2) PS - Bulk power (Vdc) to Fieldbus Power Supply
3) FPS - Fieldbus Power Supply and Signal Conditioner (Integrated power
supplies and conditioners have become the standard nowadays)
4) T - Terminators (Exactly 2 terminators are used per fieldbus segment. One at
the FPS and one at the furthest point of a segment at the device coupler)
5) LD - Linking Device, alternatively used with HSE networks to terminate 4-8 H1
segments acting as a gateway to an HSE backbone network.
6) And fieldbus devices, (e.g. transmitters, transducers, etc.)
q. The criteria for designing Foundation Fieldbus systems is detailed further in Saudi
Aramco Engineering Specification SAES-J-904.
7. Profibus
a. There are two variations of PROFIBUS in use today; the most commonly used
PROFIBUS DP, and the lesser used, application specific, PROFIBUS PA:
1) PROFIBUS DP (Decentralized Peripherals) is used to operate sensors and
actuators via a centralized controller in production (factory) automation
applications. The many standard diagnostic options, in particular, are focused
on here. Most common application of Profibus DP is in Motor Control Centers
2) PROFIBUS PA (Process Automation) is used to monitor measuring equipment
via a process control system in process automation applications. This variant
is designed for use in explosion/hazardous areas (Ex-zone 0 and 1). The
Physical Layer (i.e. the cable) conforms to IEC 61158-2, which allows power to
be delivered over the bus to field instruments, while limiting current flows so
that explosive conditions are not created, even if a malfunction occurs. The
number of devices attached to a PA segment is limited by this feature. PA has
a data transmission rate of 31.25 kbit/s. However, PA uses the same protocol
as DP, and can be linked to a DP network using a coupler device. The much
faster DP acts as a backbone network for transmitting process signals to the
controller. This means that DP and PA can work tightly together, especially in

Rev. 1 5.5 -260
hybrid applications where process and factory automation networks operate

side by side.
8. BACNET
a. The BACnet protocol defines a number of services that are used to communicate
between building devices. The protocol services include Who-Is, I-Am, Who-Has,
I-Have, which are used for Device and Object discovery. Services such as Read-
Property and Write-Property are used for data sharing. The BACnet protocol defines
a number of Objects that are acted upon by the services. The objects include Analog
Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value,
Multi-State Input, Multi-State Output, Calendar, Event-Enrollment, File, Notification-
Class, Group, Loop, Program, Schedule, Command, and Device.
b. The BACnet protocol defines a number of data link / physical layers, including
ARCNET, Ethernet, BACnet/IP, Point-To-Point over RS-232, Master-Slave/Token-
Passing over RS-485, and LonTalk, KNX/IP protocol
9. Control Network Cabling
a. Process Control Network cabling installed indoors shall be placed in ladder, trough
or solid bottom cable trays.
b. Redundant network cables installed indoors shall not be installed in the same cable
tray.
c. Installation of Fiber Optic process control network cabling shall be in accordance
with Section 5.5.2 Telecommunications and shall observe the following additional
criteria:
3) Composite cable of power and fiber optic shall not be used.
4) Aerial fiber optic cables shall not be used.
5) Multiple fiber optic cables between two locations shall be diversely routed to
provide additional reliability and survivability.
6) There shall not be more than one fiber hub between a destination location and
its originating node.
7) Fiber cables shall be sized with at least 50% additional strands above the initial
strand requirements. The following minimum strand count shall also be applied:
(a) 24 strand count for cable run to a building or a facility that is not a node or
hub.
(b) 12 strand count for cable run to small or temporary locations.
8) Fiber strand count in all fiber cable shall be an even number.
9) Spare fiber strands shall be spliced and terminated at the Fiber Distribution
Panel (FDP), and marked as spares.
H. Control System Access and Security
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to detail the requirements for access control and
security of control systems.
b. The ISA99/IEC 62443 standard is the worldwide standard for security of Industrial
Control systems and should be referenced during design.

Rev. 1 5.5 -261
c. Operators of facilities may want to begin sharing information between business and
automation systems. However, because automation and control systems equipment
connects directly to a process, loss of control and interruption in the flow of information
are not the only consequences of a security breach. The potential loss of life,
environmental damage, regulatory violation, and compromise to operational safety
are far more serious consequences. External threats are not the only concern;
knowledgeable insiders with malicious intent or even an innocent unintended act can
pose a serious security risk. Personnel from outside the control systems area
increasingly perform security testing on the systems, exacerbating the number and
consequence of these effects. Combining all these factors, it is easy to see that the
potential of someone gaining unauthorized or damaging access to an industrial
process is not trivial.
2. Foundational Requirements:
a. There are several basic or foundational requirements that have been identified for
industrial automation security. These are:
1) Access Control (AC) - Control access to selected devices, information or both
to protect against unauthorized interrogation of the device or information.
2) Use Control (UC) - Control use of selected devices, information or both to
protect against unauthorized operation of the device or use of information.
3) Timely Response to Event (TRE) - Respond to security violations by notifying
the proper authority, reporting needed forensic evidence of the violation, and
automatically taking timely corrective action in mission critical or safety critical
situations.
4) Resource Availability (RA) - Ensure the availability of all network resources to
protect against denial of service attacks.
3. Defense in Depth:
a. It is typically not possible to achieve the security objectives through the use of a
single countermeasure or technique. A superior approach is to use the concept of
defense in depth, which involves applying multiple countermeasures in a layered or
stepwise manner. For example, intrusion detection systems can be used to signal
the penetration of a firewall.
b. Physical Security - The network hardware used to provide security from offsite
intrusion and the SCADA servers used to provide internal security shall be located in
a lockable room dedicated to SCADA system. The telephone utility termination point
shall be located outside of the lockable room dedicated to SCADA system. Any
servers installed in the lockable room not associated with the SCADA system shall
be located in a separate rack with their own routers and shall utilize separate
telephone lines from the SCADA system.
c. IP address generation and translation - Automatic IP addressing software in the
router such as (DHCP) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, DNS (Domain Name
System) services BIND (Berkeley Internet Name Domain) shall be turned off and
routing of unknown networks shall be turned off in the routers at the SCADA zone
and process zone. The NAT (Network Address Translators) shall also be disabled in
the routers at the SCADA zone and process zone. This will result in additional effort
when adding or removing devices to the network but it will also reduce the possible
security leaks in the router software and will prevent casual users from gaining
access to the system thought PCs and cell phones.

Rev. 1 5.5 -262
d. Communications with remote monitoring station along shall be sent with encrypted
conduits equivalent to IPsec tunnels and the master station shall be set to block all
traffic not using the data polling port in the PLC network and not addressed to
SCADA servers.
e. Sites are located outside of the physical security zone of the plant and cannot be
made spoof proof. Data from these sites shall be used only for monitoring and shall
not be used for control.
f. Software Updates: The simplest and most secure way to make updates to the
SCADA software and PLC software is to do so manually on a regular basis. The
updates shall be checked with the software writer for authenticity and only then
implemented on the SCADA servers and PLCs at the site.
4. Countermeasures:
a. There are several countermeasures that can be used to address external threats to
the control system network. These include hardware and software built into the
control system network and include:
1) IP access controls list.
2) Intrusion detection.
3) Data conduits that use Cryptographic algorithm, Cryptographic keys,
encryption, and digital signature of IP packets with IPsec tunnels.
4) Resource isolation or segregation with security zones and conduits within the
network through routers and IP access controls list.
5) Logging commands and passwords to provide Authentication, Authorization,
and Accountability.
b. Countermeasures can also be employed on the workstations and servers and
include:
1) Virus scanning software that scans the host for malicious software.
2) Virus scanning software that will scan the system for unusual activity and log it.
3) Physical security of the workstations with password protection that times out
and locks inactive workstations from unauthorized visitors.
4) Individual passwords to authenticate the user.
5) Restrict user access by enforcing variable access privileges.
5. Security Zones:
a. A security zone is a logical grouping of physical, informational, and application
assets sharing common security requirements. This concept applies to the electronic
environment where some systems are included in the security zone and all others
are outside the zone. There can also be zones within zones, or subzones, that
provide layered security, giving defense in depth and addressing multiple levels of
security requirements. Defense in depth can also be accomplished by assigning
different properties to security zones.
b. A security zone has a border, which is the boundary between included and excluded
elements. The concept of a zone also implies the need to access the assets in a
zone from both within and without. This defines the communication and access
required to allow information and people to move within and between the security
zones. Zones may be considered to be trusted or untrusted. Security zones can be

Rev. 1 5.5 -263
defined in either a physical sense such as each pump station or in a logical manner
such as the following:
1) PLCs, ACPs, and Remote IO in a control system zone.
2) Host workstations and servers in a SCADA zone.
3) Historical data base in an Enterprise zone.
c. Email servers and other types of typical business software shall not be included
inside any of the above zones to prevent Phishing attacks.
6. Conduits:
a. Information must flow into, out of, and within a security zone. To cover the security
aspects of communication and to provide a construct to encompass the unique
requirements of communications, this standard is defining a special type of security
zone: a communications conduit.
b. A conduit is a particular type of security zone that groups communications that can
be logically organized into a grouping of information flows within and also external to
a zone. It can be a single service (i.e., a single Ethernet network) or can be made up
of multiple data carriers (multiple network cables and direct physical accesses). As
with zones, it can be made of both physical such as connecting pump stations to
remote monitoring sites and logical constructs as connection between the PLCs and
SCADA servers.
c. Trusted conduits crossing zone boundaries must use an end-to-end secure process.
Due to slow speed of response that is required, several seconds of lag can be
tolerated without notice, and the static nature of the network, simple router based
IPsec tunnels with a key coded into the router, provide an easy way to build conduits
across the a wide area network such as the public telephone networks.
d. The use of IPsec tunnels and IP access control list are mature technologies that
shall see little degradation over time. The protection provided through passwords
and virus scanning software will require constant maintenance.
7. Local and Remote Access
a. Local Access
1) Local access in the form of operator workstations and consoles shall reside on
the PAN and shall be below the plant firewall.
b. Remote Access
1) Remote access through the plant firewall, for control purposes, is not permitted.
2) Remote engineering by RCJ personnel through the firewall is permitted. The
following conditions shall apply:
(a) The Engineering station must be in a room with controlled physical access.
(b) Remote access nodes shall be placed on the corporate network for server
to server communication.
(c) A Virtual Private Network shall be used for vendor remote troubleshooting
for communication between remote access nodes.
8. Data Protection and Retention

Rev. 1 5.5 -264
a. A redundant fixed media storage device shall be provided for the storage ofall
system and control configuration, graphics, report forms, programs, etc.
Automatic/manual copying between redundant media shall be a user selectable
parameter. For security, data shall be retained using RAID or equivalent
technology, and be capable of permanent archive via CD or DVD.
b. File manipulation on or between any drive in the system shall not be constrained by
physical device location.
c. Store data to Disk, Tape etc. and retention shall be as approved by the RCJ.
d. Retention and archival of data shall be developed in accordance with the RCJ
Corporate Data Protection and Retention policy. As a minimum, the following
requirement shall be considered:
1) The retention period shall be set for 3 months as a minimum.
2) Minimum storage capacity for shall be 1 Terra Byte.
I. System Integration
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for system integration.
b. Interfaces between the PCS and associated subsystems or auxiliary systems shall
use standard hardware and software devices, which are compliant with industry
standard protocol; or proprietary protocol, which is offered as a standard product by
both the control system vendor and the subsystem vendor.
c. Redundant communication interfaces shall be supplied for:
1) Emergency Shutdown Systems.
2) Subsystems where loss of communication will result in the significant
degradation of control functions.
3) Where redundant communications are specified, no single component failure
shall result in the loss of communication to any subsystem.
d. Time Synchronization
1) Time clocks for all stations which are part of the PCS shall be synchronized to
100 milliseconds or better.
2) Time synchronization using GPS and networked time server which supports
Simple Networked Time Protocol (SNTP) is the preferred method for
synchronization of all servers connected to the PCS.
3) Synchronization shall be performed at a minimum of once every 24 hours.
e. Interface to ESD Systems
1) Emergency Shutdown Systems, interfaces, bypasses, shutdown and reset
functions shall be independent and segregated from the main PCS.
2) The interface to ESD systems shall meet the following:
(a) Communications between PCS and ESD systems for real-time process
data and operator commands shall be via dedicated, redundant
communications paths. The PCS shall NOT communicate real-time
process data or operator commands to more than one ESD system over
the same communications path.

Rev. 1 5.5 -265
(b) "First out" ESD event status, if available, shall be passed via the
communications link from the ESD logic solver to the PCS.
2. DCS, PLC and SCADA (MTU, RTU)
a. The requirements for Distributed Control Systems (DCS) is provided for in Saudi
Arabia Materials Standard Specifications (SAMSS) 23-SAMSS-010.
b. The requirements for SCADA Systems is provided for in 23-SAMSS-020.
c. The requirements for RTU Systems is provided for in 23-SAMSS-030.
d. The requirements for PLC Systems is provided for in 34-SAMSS-830.
e. Notwithstanding SAMSS documents listed above, additional detailed requirements
for DCS, PLC and SCADA can be referenced in GPCS Division 40.
3. Historian
a. All PCS configuration parameters, including tag data, workstation configurations and
controller module configurations shall be stored on redundant on-line media.
b. On-line historical data shall be stored for access via history trends, displayed
listings, and printed listings.
c. The collection rates, longevity, and scope for historical data are to be specified on a
per project basis. The minimum allowable collection rates and longevity are listed in
the following table:
TABLE 5.5.3.C: MINIMUM ALLOWABLE COLLECTION RATES AND LONGEVITY
Point type Sampling Rate Retention Time

Temperature 10 sec 4 days
Analytical 10 sec 4 days
Level 10 sec 4 days
Flow 4 sec 4 days
Pressure 4 sec 4 days
Discrete 4 sec 1 day
d. Circular files on a FIFO basis shall be implemented such that the latest records are
retained when buffer or list overflow occurs.
4. Instrumentation Asset Management Systems (IAMS)
a. This Subsection deals with the requirements governing the design of IAMS.
b. The Instrument Asset Management System (IAMS) shall automatically and
continuously monitor the status, events and operating conditions of the field-
connected devices to provide an efficient condition-based maintenance solution
without interfering with the plant control system
c. Smart field devices Foundation Fieldbus and HART shall be connected to the IAMS
system through the PCS.
d. The IAMS system shall be installed, commissioned and put into operation before the
pre-commissioning for the field instruments starts.

Rev. 1 5.5 -266
e. The IAMS database shall be fully populated with the latest device data for every
fieldbus and/or HART device on the project.
f. The criteria for IAMS are detailed further in Saudi Aramco Engineering Specification
SAES-J-905.
5. Condition Monitoring Systems (CMS)
a. This Subsection deals with the requirements governing the design of protective and
condition monitoring equipment for rotating machinery.
b. The CMS shall be a single platform software package, capable of integrating various
condition monitoring technology modules for rotating machinery and fixed asset
condition management. It shall be capable of being configured as either a
centralized or distributed database network installation with adequate provision for
worst-case real time data transfer requirements.
c. The CMS shall be connected to the plant automation network to allow import and
export of data including but not limited to, digital process control servers,
computerized maintenance management systems (CMMS), plant historians, plant
document management systems and automated reliability based maintenance
programs.
d. CMS are independent of electric motor and generator stator temperature monitoring
equipment.
e. A typical CMS will be equipped to monitor various bearing temperature and vibration
sensors to provide the following diagnostic information from each of the machine
sets. The specific requirements will be determined by the mechanical engineer.
4) Motor Free-End Thrust Bearing: Three axis of housing vibration velocity (Radial
X+Y and Axial Thrust position) two temperature and one oil level measurement.
5) Motor Winding Temperatures: 2 per phase - Phase A, Phase B, & Phase C.
6) Motor Casing Temperature
7) Motor Drive-End Bearing: one temperature and one oil level.
8) Pump pedestal: Two axis of housing vibration velocity (Radial X+Y).
9) Pump Drive-End Bearing: Three axis of housing vibration velocity (Radial X+Y
and Axial Thrust position) and one temperature.
10) Motor Shaft: One proximity probe, or Hall Effect speed sensor (key-phasor).
11) Motor Shaft: reverse rotation detection.
12) Motor Shaft: Tacho RPM measurement.
13) Seal Water Pressure and Flow.
f. The criteria for Protective and Condition Monitoring Equipment for Rotating
Machinery is detailed further in Saudi Aramco Engineering Specification SAES-J-
604.
6. Emergency Shutdown and Isolation Systems (ESD)
a. ESD systems are not normally required for building automation and /or water and
wastewater facilities. However depending on the configuration and the power
requirements for very high volume pumping stations as with seawater cooling pump
stations, it may be necessary to incorporate an ESD system into the design.

Rev. 1 5.5 -267
b. ESD systems shall be designed in accordance with Saudi Aramco Material Systems
Specification 34-SAMSS-623 Programmable Controller Based ESD Systems;
c. ESD systems shall be configured using redundant architecture, i.e., Dual Modular
Redundant (DMR), 1-out-of-2D (1oo2D) or Triple Modular Redundant (TMR), 2-out-
of-3 (2oo3) voting architecture.
7. Control System Overall Integration
a. For Wet Utility Treatment Plant such as Potable Water RO plant, IWTP treatment,
SWTP treatment and Sea Water Cooling Pump Station, the PCS is the single window
platform for control and monitoring of the process plant operations. The overall
integration shall include following minimum requirements
• The PCS shall include distributed field controllers, I/O modules, system and
marshalling cabinets, communication modules for interface with other third
party control systems, plant automation networks, Data Servers, Operator
Workstations, Engineering Workstation, Printers for process operation and
control
• The PCS shall also include subsystems such as Instrument Asset
Management System (IAMS), Alarm Management System (AMS), Data
historian, Cyber security server, time synchronization server, fire wall, web
terminal, demilitarized Zone etc. as per individual project requirements.
• If ESD system is required, The ESD system shall be fully integrated with PCS.
• CMS integration with PCS shall be connected through both hardwire and
software. For machine protection trip signals such as vibration, bearing
temperature etc. shall be hardwired to PCS/ESD for interlock. Other alarms,
diagnostics data shall be serial link to PCS through industrial standard
protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
• There will be no BAS system for these plant. The HVAC DDC control panels
in each plant building shall provide common alarm signals to be hardwired to
PCS for alarm.
• FACP from each plant building shall form the dedicated fire alarm ring network
and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the plant fire alarm status in
control room. FACP in each plant building shall also provide Common Alarm
and Common Fault signals to be hardwired to PCS to alarm the process
operators. In case no centralized fire alarm workstation is available, FACP
shall be serial link with PCS through industrial standard protocol such as
Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
b. For Wet Utility distribution piping network, such as Potable Water Distribution Pump
Stations, Valve Chambers, Sea Water Cooling Valve Chambers, lift Stations etc. the
SCADA is the single window platform for control and monitoring of the process plant
operations. The overall integration shall include following minimum requirements:
• The local SCADA will be located in Pump Station Control Room include
communication gateways, networks, data collection severs, Operator
control.
• The local SCADA system shall uplink with MARAFIQ Data Control Center by
means of FO cable and radio connection for remote monitoring purpose.

Rev. 1 5.5 -268
• PLC to be used for pump station local control and monitoring, including
controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets, communication
modules for interface with other third party control systems, networks and
gateways for uplink with SCADA system.
• RTU will be used for pump station associated distribution pipeline such as
Valve Chamber Instruments control and monitoring. Instruments such as
MOVs, Flow Meters, Pressure Transmitters, and Analyzers etc. inside valve
chamber will be connected to local RTU which is located inside an
instrumentation shelter. All RTUs shall be uplinked to the associated pump
station PLC/ SCADA control network through FO cable, and/or Radio
Communication for directly uplink with MARAFIQ Data Center for remote
monitoring by MARAFIQ Central SCADA system shall be also provided.
• RTU shall be used for control and monitoring the Sanitary Water Lift Station
and odor control unit. The RTU shall be linked with MARAFIQ Data Control
Center through Radio Communication network.
• There will be no centralized BAS system for distribution pump station plant,
the HAVC DDC control panels in each plant building shall provide common
alarm signals to be hardwired to PLC for alarm in SCADA system.
• FACP from each distribution pump plant building shall form the dedicated fire
alarm ring network and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the plant fire
alarm status in control room. FACP in each plant building shall also provide
Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be hardwired to PLC to alarm
the SCADA process operators. In case no centralized fire alarm workstation
is available, FACP shall be in serial communication link with PLC through
industrial standard protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
c. For Wet Utility Irrigation distribution piping network, such as Irrigation Water
Distribution Pump Stations, Valve Chambers etc. The SCADA is the single window
platform for control and monitoring of the process plant operations. The overall
integration shall include following minimum requirements
• The SCADA will be located in irrigation Pump Station Control Room include
communication gateways, networks, data collection severs, Operator
control.
• The SCADA system shall be uplinked with Landscape and Irrigation O&M
Data Control Center by means of FO cable and radio connection for remote
monitoring purpose.
• PLC to be used for irrigation pump station local control and monitoring,
including controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets,
communication modules for interface with other third party control systems,
networks and gateways for uplink with SCADA system.
• RTU will be used for irrigation pump station associated distribution pipeline
such as Valve Chamber Instruments control and monitoring. Instruments such
as MOVs, Flow Meters, Pressure Transmitters, and Analyzers etc. inside
valve chamber will be connected to local RTU which is located inside an
instrumentation shelter. All RTUs shall be uplinked to associated pump station
PLC/ SCADA control network through FO cable and Radio Communication
for monitoring by pump station SCADA system.

Rev. 1 5.5 -269
• There will be no centralize BAS system for irrigation distribution pump station
plant. The HAVC DDC control panels in each plant building shall provide
common alarm signals to be hardwired to PLC for alarm in SCADA system.
• FACP from each irrigation distribution pump station building shall form the
dedicated fire alarm ring network and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor
the plant fire alarm status in control room. FACP in each plant building shall
also provide Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be hardwired to
PLC to alarm the SCADA process operators. In case no centralized fire alarm
workstation is available, FACP shall be in serial communication with PLC
through industrial standard protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU
etc.
• RTU shall be used for Irrigation Controller, the RTU shall be linked with
Landscape and Irrigation O&M Data Control Center by means of radio
commination.
d. For Buildings, such as government buildings, schools, colleges, university, hospitals,
commercial center, residential compound etc. the Integrated BAS is the single
window platform for control and monitoring of the entire camp / compound facilities.
The overall integration shall include following minimum requirements
• The centralized BAS shall be provided for entire building / camp / compound,
include communication gateways, networks, data collection severs, Operator
Workstations, Engineering Workstation, and Printers for monitoring the entire
camp / compound facilities.
• The BAS shall provide a distributed control system in lieu of Building
Management Systems (BMS) - the computer networking of electronic devices
designed to monitor and control all HAVC status through BACnet protocol.
The BAS shall also provide interface and support all other communication
protocol with other widely standalone systems - typically security (access
control, CCTV, PA), fire and flood safety, fire pumps, fire suppression, lighting
(especially emergency lighting, Energy Efficiency Control system),
generators, and mechanical packages such as potable water boost pumps,
lift stations, chiller package etc. within a building / Camp / Compound.
• PLC with local monitoring and control functions to be used for potable water
boost pump, chilled water pump stations, Chlorination Package, including
controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets, communication
modules for interface with other third party control systems, networks and
gateways for uplink with central BAS system. The PLC shall be linked with
BAS through Voice / data network in the camp / compound provided by
telecom.
• When Sanitary Lift Station are located within the Camps / Compound, RTU
will be used for control and monitoring the Sanitary Water Lift Station and odor
control unit. The RTU shall be linked with BAS through Voice / data network
in the camp / compound provided by telecom.
• All electrical power distributions status such as substation, MCC, switchgear,
main distribution Board, transformer status can be monitored and controlled
from BAS
• All Special Gas System within the building shall be monitored by BAS,
including Air Compressor, Vacuum Compressor, and Gas handling Unit, Gas
Detector, and Cylinder Pressure Control etc.

Rev. 1 5.5 -270
• FACP from each building shall form the dedicated fire alarm ring network and
provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the camp / compound fire alarm
status in central control room. FACP shall also be integrated with BAS for
monitoring and recording from BAS system.
J. Control System Software
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for control system
software.
b. It is the intent to have the Contractor furnish the latest generation, standard, field
proven, fully debugged and supported PCS software package application with a
minimum of additions or changes.
c. Customized or specially written software shall only be furnished if standard software
cannot meet all of the functional requirements required. Any custom applications
software required shall be fully integrated into the basic software and shall not require
unique command structures. No attempt has been made to list all software or list all
characteristics of software required by the Instrumentation Supplier - this shall be
specified for each specific project.
d. The software package shall provide a system capable of controlling system level
activities, and a higher level process control language allowing the operator to monitor
and control the process through an interactive human interface. The software
environment shall support a multi-programming atmosphere allowing concurrent
execution of more than one program in a background/foreground mode or
multi-tasking mode.
e. Throughout the execution of all software modules, the operator shall be presented
with all of the command or operation choices available at that point in the program
using sufficient verbiage or symbols to make the choices self-explanatory and
unambiguous.
2. Standards
a. Standards are changing from time to time and it is the responsibility of the Engineer
to get the latest preferred standards from the RCJ at the time of design.
3. Licensing
a. All software provided shall be installed and used within the terms of the software
manufacturer's license agreement. All software purchased by the Instrumentation
Supplier shall be registered to the Instrumentation Supplier during the construction
phase of this project. During that time, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be
responsible for providing and incorporating minor software package updates and
patches issued by the software manufacturer. For example, if version 3.1 of a
program is purchased, and version 3.2 and 3.3 were released prior to project
completion, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be responsible for incorporating these
later versions into the final project. The Instrumentation Supplier would not be
responsible for incorporating major software revisions such as the release of a version
4.0 or 4.1.
b. Prior to substantial completion of this project, the Instrumentation Supplier shall re-
register all provided software packages to the RCJ and provide the RCJ with written
confirmation of having done so. At project completion, all software shall be registered
to the RCJ and shall include full development a runtime applications

Rev. 1 5.5 -271
c. A complete list of supported systems and software shall be obtained from the RCJ at
time of design.
K. Control Buildings and/or Control Rooms
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for design of central
control centers.
1) Local Control Buildings - In close proximity to the process facility for which it is
designed, a Local Control Building is characterized by its relatively small size.
Local Control Buildings are specifically designed to control a single process unit
or plant. Field instrumentation will be connected directly to the control building
process interface room. The building will be used to provide only the console
areas, offices and facilities necessary to support the operation of the plant or
process unit.
2) Central Control Buildings - Central Control Buildings are used to control several
interconnected process modules or plants. They provide a single focus for plant
or multi-plant wide operation and shall be used in conjunction with Process
Interface Buildings and Local Control Buildings located at each process module
or plant. The building shall be located to minimize the risk of external damage
from fires, explosions, or toxic releases per SAES-B-014 and shall provide
essential administrative facilities necessary to support the continuous operation
of the plant(s).
3) Process Interface Room (Rack Room) - The Process Interface Room is
typically a section of the Local Control Building, or Central Control Building
(such as in small facilities), used as the termination and internal distribution
point for instrumentation wiring. For Local Control Buildings, this will include
field instrument wiring terminated in marshaling cabinets for inbound
distribution to distributed control system interface modules. For Central Control
Buildings incoming wiring will mainly feature electronic or fiber optic highways
associated with the Process Control System (PCS) and ancillary control
systems.
1) Structural design of these buildings shall follow Chapter 5.2
2. Control Room requirements
a. Local and Central Control Buildings shall be designed to provide administrative and
process control facilities to support safe operations and to provide a suitable
environment for the operation and maintenance of the process unit or plant PCS.
b. Internal Layout - It is not intended to mandate control building layouts. Floor plans
shall be developed on a case by case basis to support local operating practice and
facilitate the installation and maintenance of the plant control system.
c. Access
1) The main entrance to the control building, which shall face away from the
process plant or face the plant considered to have the least risk of fire or
explosion, shall be provided with an air lock to sustain building pressurization.
Locks are not required for emergency exits and service entrances. Certain
emergency exit doors may be restricted from being opened from outside, but
personnel shall be able to open them from inside.

Rev. 1 5.5 -272
2) The floor plan shall be designed to minimize casual personnel traffic through
the control room. Offices and equipment rooms shall be connected by internal
corridors. For Central Control Buildings, the main entrance shall open onto a
lobby or corridor from which the control room, offices and other facilities are
accessed. For a Local Control Building, the main entrance may open directly
through an air lock to the control room area.
3) The computer room (when specified), engineering room and process interface
room (rack room) shall have their main access through the control room.
4) Emergency exits shall provide easy exit routes from each room and from the
control building in accordance with building program.
5) Double doors shall be installed to provide outside access to the control room,
equipment rooms and rack rooms as required. If the control room is elevated
above grade then loading platforms with stairways shall be provided to facilitate
equipment handling during installation and maintenance. Equipment access
doors shall be kept locked during normal operation and shall meet the blast
resistance requirements of the structural walls of the building.
b. General Requirements
1) The control room shall be designed so that only activities associated with plant
control are performed there.
2) The control room shall be engineered to accommodate future planned
expansion.
3) Spacing between operator workstations and walls and between workstations
must be at least 1.22 m wide to provide adequate access for routine
maintenance.
4) The control room and equipment installed therein shall be designed for lowest
practical background noise level. Maximum allowable noise levels shall be
40dBA. Equipment that cannot meet this criterion shall be installed in auxiliary
equipment rooms or shall be located in an acoustic cabinet.
3. Server (Rack) Room requirements
a. A computer room shall be provided if there are special computers or servers which
require either a specially controlled environment or a locked secure area.
b. If specified, computer rooms shall incorporate the following features:
1) A computer ID card reader or combination lock shall be fitted to the computer
room door to prevent unauthorized access.
2) Environmental conditioning shall be provided in accordance with the equipment
manufacturer's recommendations.
3) The temperature, relative humidity and environmental corrosion rate shall be
monitored and alarmed in the control room.

Rev. 1 5.5 -273
c. All field wiring with the exception of control system communication links shall be
terminated inside marshaling cabinets.
d. All incoming cables must be sealed in accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
e. Power, instrument analog and digital signal cables shall be segregated and run in
accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
f. Workstations for machinery condition diagnostic systems and auxiliary
instrumentation systems that do not need to be routinely monitored shall be installed
in the server or rack room unless stated otherwise.
4. Engineering Room requirements
a. Engineering workstations shall be installed in the engineering room.
b. Secure fire resistant storage cabinets shall be provided for storage of computer
software and documentation. This is not for storing back up system software, manuals
and documentation which shall be stored in a secure off-site location.
c. The room shall provide space for desks and filing cabinets.
5. Electrical - Power, Wiring, Lighting, Grounding requirements
a. Electrical - Power, Wiring, and Grounding requirements shall be in accordance with
Subsection 5.5.3 F and SBC 401 and IEC standards.
b. Deep parabolic reflector fluorescent tubes shall be used in combination with compact
fluorescent or LED spots to provide variable illumination, without glare or shadow, at
operator workstations and task lighting for work surfaces. Lighting details shall be in
accordance with Subsection 5.5.1.M.
c. Critical instrument and control systems shall be connected to a UPS system. These
systems include:
1) Gas Detection System
2) Fixed Fire Suppression System
3) Emergency Shutdown System
4) Process Control System
5) Emergency Lighting
6) All local and field instrumentation devices
7) Other auxiliary protection, monitoring or control systems.
d. The UPS system shall be configured and installed in accordance with Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.d.
e. Wiring
1) Under floor power distribution cable systems shall be installed in accordance
with SBC 401 and IEC 60364.
2) Data highways shall be terminated directly to PCS interface equipment.
3) Cables and conduits entering blast resistant control buildings shall be sealed in
accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical. Multi conductor instrument cables
shall be sealed around the outer jacket at the building entry point. Cable end
seals shall be applied as required by the SBC 401 and IEC standards.

Rev. 1 5.5 -274
4) Signal and power cables installed in air conditioning plenums shall conform to
SCB 401 and IEC standards.
6. UPS and Battery Room requirements
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.d Uninterruptible Power Supply for additional
information and details associated with UPS.
b. Batteries shall be located in separate battery rooms and installed in accordance with
electrical requirements.
c. Battery rooms shall be ventilated in accordance with HVAC mechanical Section.
d. Safety equipment shall be installed in accordance with Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.d.
e. Refer NFPA 111 for additional requirements.
7. Environmental requirements
a. - Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.6 Environmental Conditions.
L. Fire Alarm and Gas Detection Systems and Fire Suppression Control System
1. Fire Alarm System
a. General
1) This Subsection applies to the fire alarm and detection systems inside
residential, commercial, institutional and industrial facilities.
2) Purpose
(a) The primary purpose of a fire alarm and detection system is to notify the
appropriate personnel and to initiate the appropriate response by these
notified personnel.
(b) The secondary purpose is to initiate fire safety functions which are
building functions intended to increase the level of safety for the building
occupants or to control the spread of the harmful effects of fire.
3) An approved fire alarm and detection system shall be installed for all facilities
in accordance with the latest accepted edition of the SBC.
(a) The system and all associated components shall be designed to address
the code requirements for the building and occupancy type assigned to
the facility.
(b) The SBC identifies the minimum requirements for fire alarm and
detection systems. There may be situations which warrant protection
above these minimum requirements. The A/Eand/or EPC Contractor
shall assess the criticality of each facility and submit any recommended
system enhancements to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
(1) For fire alarm and detection provisions in excess of the code
requirements to protect special hazards or critical equipment,
features and component selection shall be coordinated and shall
(i) Evaluation of operating characteristics of each detection device
as it applies to the specific application
(ii) Ambient conditions such as temperature, humidity, and
corrosion where the devices are to be installed and operate

Rev. 1 5.5 -275
(iii) Fuel sources present

(iv) Ignition sources present
(v) Value of the contents of the facility
(c) The fire alarm and detection system shall be dedicated for that purpose
and shall not be combined with other building systems such as building
automation, energy management, or security.
(d) There are requirements for interconnection between the fire alarm and
detection system with other building systems for control functions
associated with response to a fire alarm condition. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate all required interconnections with the
manufacturers of the other systems to ensure that the fire alarm system
remains independent but has the required interface to facilitate the
desired control functions.
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare documentation to summarize the
recommended approach for the fire alarm and detection system designed for
the facility. This documentation shall be submitted to the Royal Commission
for review and approval and shall include the following:
(a) Floor plans illustrating the locations for all required fire alarm system
equipment.
(b) The Fire Alarm System Input/output Matrix. Refer to Table 5.5.2.G for
sample.
(c) List of fire alarm system enhancements which are recommended above
the minimum code requirements in response to specific occupancies or
facility characteristics. Include a description of the rationale for these
recommendations.
(d) Analysis of Fail-Safe Operation. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.D.3.c.2.
(e) Description summarizing the detection methods selected for the various
spaces throughout the facility.
(f) List of recommendations for the class and survivability characteristics for
the fire alarm and detection system wiring infrastructure.
b. System Description and Requirements
1) The fire alarm and detection system shall be a microprocessor based,
addressable system comprised of the following components:
(a) Fire alarm control panel(s)
(b) Auxiliary fire alarm control cabinet(s) required for accommodation of the
system control devices, power supplies, etc.
(c) Graphic Annunciator(s). Alphanumeric or custom graphic type as
determined to be appropriate for the facility
(d) Communication devices for transmission of alarms to central and/or
remote locations
(e) Initiation devices; manual and automatic
(f) Notification devices; audible, visual and/or combination

Rev. 1 5.5 -276
(g) Monitoring and control modules

(h) Cabling infrastructure
2) Fire alarm and detection system shall be specified with the following minimum
characteristics and features:
(a) Electrically supervised against short, ground and open wiring faults in
any of the circuits associated with the fire alarm and detection system.
(b) Capable of expansion at any time with no limitations as to the number of
automatic or manual initiation devices.
(c) Capable of supporting multiple automatic detection devices on the same
circuits.
(d) Capable to ensure that manual initiation (fire condition) overrides a
trouble signal (fault condition).
3) Equipment locations for the fire alarm and detection system shall be
coordinated with the facility design. The following list provides guidance for
locating various fire alarm equipment:
(a) Main fire alarm control panel(s):
(1) Fire Alarm Control panel should be located at the building main
entrance or vestibule area accessible by the fire operator or
authorized personnel to check the fire status before come into the
building.
(2) For buildings where a Fire Command Center is required, the main fire
alarm control panel(s) shall be located in the Fire Command Center.
(b) Auxiliary fire alarm control cabinets:
(1) These cabinets shall be located in electrical or similar utility type
rooms which will limit the access to authorized personnel.
(2) The location of these cabinets shall be coordinated with the design of
the building.
(c) Annunciator panel(s):
(1) Annunciator panel(s) shall be located at the building entrance point
where the fire response team would enter the building.
(2) Additional locations for annunciator panel(s) would be at a designated
24 hour monitored station or other operation center.
(d) Voice communications cabinet(s):
(1) Cabinets housing the equipment associated with the voice
communications system for the fire alarm and detection system shall
be located at the building entrance point where the fire response team
would enter the building.
(2) For buildings where a Fire Command Center is required, the voice
communications cabinet(s) shall be located in the Fire Command
Center.

Rev. 1 5.5 -277
(e) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall identify the proposed locations for
all of the fire alarm and detection system equipment on the preliminary
floor plans to solicit review and approval by the Royal Commission.
c. System Operation
1) The operation of any automatic or manual initiation device shall trigger various
alarm and control functions. These functions shall be in accordance with the
applicable codes and shall be summarized as part of the construction
documents. Table 5.5.2.F has been developed to provide a sample Fire Alarm
System Input/output Matrix which identifies the operation of the fire alarm and
detection system. This matrix will be unique for each facility and shall be
developed and submitted to the RCJ for review and approval.

Rev. 1 5.5 -278
TABLE 5.5.2.F: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT MATRIX (SAMPLE)
Annunciation Notification Required Control
Notify the Elevator System of Fire in Respective
Fire Alarm System Shall Interrupt Control Circuit

Activate Strobes and Announce Location of the
Immediately Notify Staff at 24 hour Monitoring

Supervisory Alert (Including Visual Signal and
Open Smoke Ventilation Windows and Doors

Transmit Condition to the Central Monitoring
Transmit all Point Status Information to the
Signal Access Control System to Required

Trouble Alert (Including Visual Signal and
General Alarm Output Notification to the

Fire Alarm Shall Activate Atrium Smoke
Fire Alarm Alert of Location and Type in
Release Smoke / Fire Door Hold Opens

Send Elevator to Alternate Recall Floor
Send Elevator to Primary Recall Floor
Lobby, Hoistway, or Machine Room
OUTPUT
Display / Print Changes of Status
Building Management System
Close Smoke / Fire Dampers
Building Security System

INPUT DEVICE
Alarm on Speakers
to Shut Down Unit

Audible Alarm)
Audible Alarm)
Exhaust Fans
Locations
Initiation
Station
Doors
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R
1 Manual Pullstations - All Locations l l l l l l l l l
2 All Area Smoke and Heat Detectors l l l l l l l l l
3 Door Release Smoke Detectors l l l l l l l l l
4 Duct Smoke Detectors and Smoke Dampers l l l l l l
5 Duct Smoke Detectors and Any Air Handling Unit l l l l l l l
6 Atrium Area Smoke & Fire Camera Detectors l l l l l l l l l l

F.A. Panel Mounted Manual Test Atrium Smoke Exhaust
7 l l
Fan Switch
Elevator Lobby Recall Smoke Detector Activated -
8 l l l l l l l l l l l
Primary Floor
Elevator Lobby Recall Smoke Detector Activated - All But
9 l l l l l l l l l l l
Primary Floor
10 Sprinkler Control Valve - Tamper - All Locations l l l l
11 Sprinkler Waterflow - All Locations l l l l l l l l l
12 Atrium Area Sprinkler Waterflow l l l l l l l l l l l
13 Fire Pump Waterflow - All Locations l l l l l l
14 Fire Alarm AC Power Failure l l l
15 Fire Alarm System Low Battery l l l
16 Trouble on Communications Link l l l
17 Trouble on Signal Line Circuit l l l
18 Trouble on Notification Appliance Circuits l l l
19 Trouble on Fireman's Communication Circuits l l l
2) Analysis of Fail-Safe Operation

(a) An analysis shall be performed for the fire alarm and detection system as
well as other interconnected systems including but not limited to building
management system, security system, access control system, lighting
control systems, smoke control systems, audio/visual systems, etc. This
analysis shall evaluate the operation of each system to establish the
operation status and condition for each in the event of fire alarm
activation. The results of the analysis and the A/E and/or EPC

Rev. 1 5.5 -279
Contractor’s recommendations shall be submitted to the Royal

(b) Relays selection and operation for the interconnected systems shall be
coordinated with the emergency power supply so that undesirable
operations will not occur upon power transfer. For example, in a power
failure, it may be acceptable if doors held open by magnetic devices are
released, but it would be totally unacceptable if a deluge system was
actuated.
d. Detector Operation Principle
1) The three most common detector devices which are generally used include
smoke detectors, heat detectors and flame detectors.
2) In addition to these three common detection devices, there are several other
specialty detection means that may be considered for application in appropriate
facilities. These specialty detection means include optical beam detection, very
early smoke detection apparatus (VESDA), and video smoke and flame
detection.
3) Smoke Detectors
(a) Smoke detectors detect the visible or invisible smoke particles from
combustion. The two main types of detectors are Ionization Detectors
and Photoelectric Detectors.
(1) Ionization Detectors
(i) Ionization detectors contain a small radioactive source that is
used to charge the air inside a small chamber. The charged air
allows a small current to cross through the chamber and
complete an electrical circuit.
(ii) When smoke enters the chamber, it shields the radiation, which
stops the current and triggers an alarm.
(iii) These detectors respond quickly to very small smoke particles
(even those invisible to the naked eye) from flaming or very hot
fires, but may respond very slowly to the dense smoke
associated with smoldering or low-temperature fires.
(2) Photoelectric Detectors
(i) Photoelectric smoke detectors contain a light source and light
sensor which are arranged so that the rays from the light
source do not hit the light sensor. When smoke particles enter
the light path, some of the light is scattered and redirected onto
the sensor, causing the detector to activate an alarm.
(ii) These detectors react quickly to visible smoke particles from
smoldering fires, but are less sensitive to the smaller particles
associated with flaming or very hot fires.
4) Heat Detectors
(a) The most common heat detectors either react to a broad temperature
change or a predetermined fixed temperature.
(b) Heat detectors use a set of temperature-sensitive resistors called
thermistors that decrease in resistance as the temperature raises. One

Rev. 1 5.5 -280
thermistor is sealed and protected from the surrounding temperature

while the other is exposed. A sharp increase in temperature reduces the
resistance in the exposed thermistor, which allows a large current to
activate the detector's alarm.
5) Flame Detectors
(a) Flame detectors are line-of-sight devices that look for specific types of
light (infrared, visible, ultraviolet) emitted by flames during combustion.
When the detector recognizes this light from a fire, it sends a signal to
activate an alarm.
(b) The optical sensors used in flame detectors works at specific spectral
ranges (usually narrow band) to record the incoming radiation at the
selected wavelengths. 30% to 40% of the energy radiated from a fire is
electromagnetic radiation that can be read at various spectral ranges
(such as UV, IR). The signals are then analyzed using a predetermined
technique for flickering frequency, threshold energy signal comparison,
mathematical correlation between several signals, correlation to
memorized spectral analysis, etc.
(c) Flame detectors are available in a number of sensor types. The most
common sensor types include UV detectors, IR detectors, and UV/IR
detectors.
(d) UV only flame detectors (ultraviolet spectral band detection) work with
wavelengths shorter than 300 nm (solar blind spectral band). They detect
flames at high speed (3 to 4 milliseconds) due to the UV high-energy
radiation emitted by fires and explosions at the instant of their ignition.
These devices are quite accurate, although they are subject to
interference (false alarms) from random UV sources such as lightning,
arc welding, radiation, and solar radiation.
(e) IR only detectors work within the infrared spectral band. The mass of hot
gases emits a specific spectral pattern in the infrared spectral region.
They are subject to interference (false alarms) by any other “hot” surface
in the area.
(f) UV and IR spectral band detectors compare the threshold signal in two
spectral ranges and their ratio to each other to confirm the reliability of
the fire signal. This style minimizes false alarms.
6) Specialty Detection Means
(a) Optical Beam Detection
(1) Optical beam detection utilizes a projected beam of light to monitor
for obscuration due to the presence of smoke.
(2) Types of beam detection include the following:
(i) End-to-End type consists of a separate light transmitter and
receiver. The transmitter and receiver are located on either
end of the protected area. They include open-area smoke
imaging detection in which ultraviolet (UV) and infrared (IR)
wavelengths of light are used to detect smoke. The
comparative differences between the UV and IR wavelengths
help to identify real smoke by comparing reflections and seeing
the difference in the profile.

Rev. 1 5.5 -281
(ii) Reflective type incorporates the transmitter and receiver in the

same enclosure. The light path is created by reflecting light off
of a specially designed reflector mounted at the opposite end of
the protected area.
(b) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)
(1) VESDA consists of a central detection unit which draws air through a
network of purpose built aspirating pipes to detect smoke. The air is
passed through a laser sampling chamber that detects the presence
of smoke particles suspended in air by detecting the light scattered
by them in the chamber.
(2) The VESDA system is an aspirating detection system that detects at
the incipient stage as opposed to the smoke, flame or intense heat
stages.
(3) Continuous air sampling associated with the VESDA approach can
detect smoke before it is visible to the human eye and provides the
earliest possible warning of an impending fire hazard.
(c) Video Smoke and Flame Detection
(1) Video smoke and flame detection utilizes video image detection (VID)
technology to detect flame and smoke. This approach consists of
video-based analytical algorithms that allow integration between
analog cameras and advanced servers to create a complete flame
and smoke detection system.
(2) Video-based analytical algorithms include:
(i) Flaming fires - looks for specific fire pattern consisting of a
bright core of the flame and flickering corona.
(ii) Smoke plumes - identifies the anomalies that are caused by
smoke and analyzes the progression over a period of time to
identify a growing smoke plume.
(iii) Ambient smoke - monitors the light diffusion from light sources
and bright objects in the video images to detect the pattern
consistent with the slow accumulation of smoke.
(3) This approach utilizes a network video recorders and management
software to support multiple detection cameras to:
(i) Record video streams
(ii) Monitor live videos
(iii) Maintain an event log for all alarm conditions
(iv) Dispatch alarms and videos to remote locations
(4) This detection means provides coverage for large areas such as
atriums. The system provides enhancements over conventional
flame and smoke detection, such as:
(i) Quick detection times
(ii) Ability to conduct immediate and remote verification

Rev. 1 5.5 -282
(iii) Avoids cost associated with regular inspection and

maintenance of conventional devices which may be difficult to
access
(iv) Ease of installation and configuration
(v) Provides convenience for system integrators
e. Detector Selection
1) The type of fire alarm detector must be selected to best suit the characteristics
of the facility. Each of the detector types have unique capabilities that must be
considered when selecting the appropriate device for a specific application. It
is common to utilize several different types of detectors throughout a facility to
provide the most effective means of protection. The following paragraphs
provide a brief overview of the various detector types along with information
regarding appropriate applications. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
assess the specific applications and provide recommendations regarding
detector type selections to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
2) Smoke Detectors
(a) Smoke detectors are usually more sensitive than heat detectors and
usually detect the fire sooner during early flame stages and will meet the
needs of most areas containing primarily wood, paper, fabric, and plastic
materials. During combustion, these materials produce a mixture of
smoke types with detectable levels of both large and small smoke
particles.
(b) Application
(1) Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be used in places where
smoldering fires may be expected.
(2) Ionization type smoke detectors shall be used where flaming fires
would be expected.
(3) If both types of fires are possible, both features are available in a
single detector.
(c) Smoke detectors are suitable for:
(1) Residential occupancies, computer rooms and other locations having
high values
(2) Indoor areas with low ceilings such as offices, closets, and restrooms
(3) Relatively clean areas with minimal amounts of dust and dirt
(d) Smoke detectors are not suitable for:
(1) Open air applications as the detectors require ceilings to direct the
smoke from the plume by convection
(2) Areas where ceiling heights exceed 10.5 m
(3) Rooms where cooking will take place, such as, kitchens, or similar
areas where steam and condensation are present
(4) Areas where exhaust fumes are present such as, car parks, etc.
3) Heat Detectors

Rev. 1 5.5 -283
(a) Heat detectors are normally used in dirty environments or where dense
smoke is produced. Heat detectors may be less sensitive, but are more
appropriate than a smoke detector in these environments.
(b) Heat detectors are ideal for areas where flammable gases and liquids
are handled or any area where a fire will quickly cause a large change in
the surrounding temperature.
(c) Heat detectors are also suitable for:
(1) Dirty, dusty or smoky environments
(2) Manufacturing areas where large quantities of vapors, gases, or
fumes may be present
(3) Areas where particles of combustion are normally present, such as in
kitchens, furnace rooms, utility rooms, and garages or where ovens,
burners or vehicle exhaust gases are present
(d) Fixed temperature detectors are suitable for the areas like boiler/plant
room, kitchen and furnace/kiln rooms.
(e) Rate of rise of temperature detectors are suitable for areas such as car
parks, loading bays etc.
4) Flame Detectors
(a) Flame detectors either ultraviolet or infrared offer the fastest response to
a freely burning fire and are well suited for protecting areas involving
flammable liquid fires.
(b) Flame detectors are best for protecting:
(1) Areas with high ceilings and open-spaces, such as warehouses and
auditoriums
(2) Outdoor or semi-enclosed areas, where winds or draughts can
prevent smoke from reaching a heat or smoke detector
(3) Areas where rapidly developing flaming fires can occur, such as
petrochemical production, fuel storage areas, paint shops, and
solvent areas
(c) Flame detectors are quite expensive and may be subject to false alarms
from radiation such as welding, reflected sunlight, electric sparks and
halogen lamps.
(d) Flame detectors performance is affected by thick smokes, vapors,
grease, and oil deposits on the detector windows resulting in blockage of
the line of sight.
5) Optical Beam Detection
(a) Optical beam detectors are used where the application of standard spot
type smoke detectors would be uneconomical or restricted due to the
height of the protected area. Where high ceilings are present, beam
smoke detectors may be more responsive to slow or smoldering fires
than a point smoke detector because they are monitoring the entire
smoke field intersecting the beam.
(b) Optical beam smoke detectors are line-of-sight devices and are subject
to interference from any object or person which may enter the beam

Rev. 1 5.5 -284
path. This limitation makes them impractical for occupied spaces with
normal ceiling heights.
(c) Several typical applications include:
(1) High ceiling areas such as atriums, lobbies, gymnasiums, sports
arenas, museums and religious sanctuaries
(2) Warehouses
(3) Manufacturing areas in factories
(d) Features to include for beam detection include:
(1) Automatic gain control to compensate for the buildup of dust, dirt and
other debris that may lower the detection threshold for the detector
(2) Motorized detector which automatically aligns itself to compensate to
changes over time due to building movement or other situations
(3) Remote test stations to facilitate the periodic electronic testing of the
detector
6) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)
(a) VESDA systems incorporate more than one level of alarm which is
configurable and allows very early warning of an event. The detection
and alarm sensitivities can be programmed to levels ranging from more
sensitive to less sensitive than conventional detectors. The detectors
work best in non-volatile environments.
(b) VESDA systems are suitable for environments where highly sensitive
rapid smoke detection capability is required. Typical applications
include:
(1) Cleanrooms
(2) Areas containing goods easily damaged by fire
(3) Telecommunications and Electronic Rooms
(c) VESDA systems are also suitable for spaces with challenging physical
characteristics or aesthetic concerns including:
(1) Large spaces with high ceilings such as atriums, lobbies,
gymnasiums
(2) Mechanical equipment spaces where ductwork, piping and other
infrastructure make the installation of spot detectors challenging or
ineffective
(d) VESDA systems can be used in dusty or dirty environments as long as
appropriate design, installation and maintenance procedures are
followed.
7) Video Image Detection (VID)
(a) VID is ideally suited for environments where spot or other types of
detection would not be efficient including large open or high-volume
areas such as atria, shopping malls, religious assembly spaces, hotels,
office buildings, airports and warehouses.

Rev. 1 5.5 -285
(b) VID provide monitoring personnel with information regarding the location
and extent of the fire which ultimately provides guidance for the
activation of the appropriate emergency response.
(c) The application of VID must consider the environmental conditions such
as lighting, background, foreground and contaminants present in the
protected areas.
f. Detector Location
1) Detectors shall be located and installed in accordance with the applicable SBC,
NFPA Codes and Standards.
2) Detector spacing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s and the listing
agency’s spacing criteria. The nominal spacing of detectors was developed
using a smooth ceiling at a predetermined height. Detector spacing shall be
adjusted for other than the standard conditions as identified in the NFPA Codes
and Standards.
3) Consideration may also be given to architectural symmetry, provided that this
does not downgrade detector function to an unacceptable level.
4) To be most effective, both smoke and heat detectors must be located on or
near the ceiling of the space to be protected because that is where smoke or
hot gases initially collect.
5) Smoke and heat detectors shall not be located near operable windows, air
supply vents, or other ventilation sources that would interfere with the natural
air currents. The detectors shall not be located in dead air spaces nor near any
obstruction that would prevent smoke or heat from reaching the detector.
6) All detectors shall be located to avoid localized sources of “false” alarms.
7) Heat detectors, though slower to respond to a fire than smoke detectors, are
not as prone to false alarms. They are thus often installed in storage rooms and
service rooms that are normally unoccupied.
8) In case of heating and ventilation system, where smoke detectors are used to
initiate signals to shut down fans or to close dampers, they shall be installed in
the return air ducts of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems, to
prevent the circulation of smoke-contaminated air.
g. Fire Alarm Control Panel
1) Control panels shall be designed to meet the unique requirements of each
building and occupancy.
2) Zoning:
(a) The building area may be divided into zones by floors or as required to
allow for accurate and rapid determination of the fire location and the
type of systems being activated.
(b) Zone configuration shall consider fire zones, means of egress and areas
of risk. Maximum area per zone shall not exceed 2000 m².
(c) The length of any zone shall not exceed 91 m in any direction.
(d) Buildings of 300 m² or less may be considered as a single zone.
3) Control panels shall have spare zone capacity. Panels shall have a minimum
of two zones, even though the building may be a single alarm zone.

Rev. 1 5.5 -286
4) The control panels shall be a multi-processor based networked system

designed specifically for fire and smoke control. The control panels shall
include all required hardware, software, and site-specific system programming
to provide a complete and operational system.
5) The control panel shall be diagnostic type and shall be designed such that
interactions between any applications can be configured and modified using
software provided by a single supplier.
6) When the panel is used with addressable detectors, the panel shall be capable
of providing a signal which shall indicate Fire/Fault zone along with the detector
which has operated by means of a digital Liquid Crystal Diode (LCD) display.
h. Fire Alarm Annunciators
1) The requirement for fire alarm annunciation panel depends upon the size and
complexity of the system.
(a) In small buildings, with a single fire department response point, a graphic
annunciator panel is unnecessary. The Main Fire Alarm Control Panel
can be strategically located to function as the annunciator at the fire
department response point.
(b) For moderate sized buildings, a remote fire alarm annunciator panel shall
be provided and shall consist of an alphanumeric screen which has the
capability to identify the alarm condition by type and location.
(c) For large and complicated facilities, a custom, graphic fire alarm
annunciator shall be provided to assist the facilities personnel and the
fire department responders to quickly determine the cause and location
of the fire alarm condition. The graphic annunciator panel shall be
provided with the following features:
(1) The panel shall show all floor plans of the building and light the floor
plan (or part of the plan if so zoned) when that area is in alarm.
(2) The annunciator panel shall be graphic type and shall have an
audible alarm and provide visual indication of the zone of the building
in which the alarm initiating detector is located.
(3) The annunciator panel shall be of modular construction, flush
mounted with the required number of LEDs for use on 24 V DC. Each
LED shall indicate one building zone.
(4) The annunciator panel shall have a visible and an audible trouble
indicator with silencing switch. The annunciator LEDs shall be
electronically supervised. Removal of LED or LED failure shall sound
the system trouble signal. LEDs shall be bright enough to be visible
in direct sunlight if the annunciator is so located.
(5) Graphic annunciator panel shall have capability to bypass audible fire
and trouble alarms. These alarms shall be bypassed if Annunciator
Panel is located next to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
i. Notification Appliances
1) The fire alarm and detection system shall be designed with sufficient notification
devices to provide ample notification for the building occupants. Notification
shall include both audible and visual devices spaced in accordance with all
applicable codes.

Rev. 1 5.5 -287
2) Audible
(a) Audible devices such as horns, bells and/or speakers, shall be located
throughout each facility as required by code to provide audible
notification of the fire alarm condition. Audible devices shall be specified
with multiple tap settings to facilitate adjustment of the sound intensity to
adapt to the final installed conditions.
(b) The type of audible device shall be determined from the requirements of
the facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop a
recommendation for the type of audible device and submit to the RCJ for
(c) Audible devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
3) Visual
(a) Strobes shall be located throughout each facility as required by code to
provide visual notification of the fire alarm condition. Strobes shall be
specified with multiple candela ratings to facilitate adjustment of the light
intensity to adapt to the final installed conditions.
(b) Flashing beacons shall be utilized in place of strobes where insufficient
coverage is available from a strobe.
(c) Flashing beacons may also be used to supplement the fire alarm strobes
where deemed necessary due to the final application.
(d) Visual devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
4) Audible/Visual Combination Devices
(a) The use of combination audible/visual devices is permitted and is the
preferred approach.
j. Signal Modules
1) These devices are addressable and allow interface with the various types of
non-addressable initiating devices such as flow switches, tamper switches,
industrial grade flame detectors, etc.
k. Control Modules
1) These devices are addressable and facilitate integration of control functions
between the fire alarm system and other building systems. Several examples
include; air handling unit shutdown, release of door hold open devices, opening
of automatic doors and gates, and initiation of fire suppression systems.
l. Power Source(s)
1) Power to the control panel must be fed from a reliable source of supply which
will not be disconnected for maintenance on other electrical systems. The
circuit breaker shall be labeled "Fire Alarm - Do Not Switch Off" and shall be
capable of being locked.
2) Standby power shall be available to the system in case of failure of the main
power source. Integral backup provision with nickel cadmium batteries shall be
located in the control panel. The backup batteries shall be sufficient to operate
the fire alarm system for a minimum of 24 hours.

Rev. 1 5.5 -288
3) Where the building is furnished with a backup power source such as generator,
battery, or UPS the fire alarm and detection system shall be supplied from the
life safety emergency power branch in addition to the integral batteries.
4) Power supplies for the fire alarm and detection system shall initially be sized
with 20% spare capacity to accommodate future system modifications.
m. Wiring Requirements
1) General
(a) The wiring network for the fire alarm and detection system must be
designed in accordance with the applicable codes and must address the
criticality of the facility. The extent of redundancy and survivability must
be determined to properly specify the appropriate wiring system. The
paragraphs below provide an overview of the characteristics for the
wiring systems commonly used for fire alarm systems.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an assessment of the
facility and develop the class and survivability recommendations for the
fire alarm system wiring including but not limited to the following:
(1) Initiating device circuits (IDC)
(2) Signaling line circuits (SLC)
(3) Notification appliance circuits (NAC)
(c) These recommendations shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for
2) Circuit and Pathway Characteristics
(a) Class
(1) Class A: Includes a redundant path and its operational capability will
continue past a single open. Any conditions that affect the intended
operation of the path will be annunciated.
(2) Class B: Pathway does not include a redundant path and its
operational capability stops at a single open. Any conditions that
affect the intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(3) Class C: Includes one or more pathways where end-to-end
communications verifies operation integrity. The integrity of individual
paths is not monitored, and loss of end-to-end communications is
annunciated.
(4) Class D: Includes pathways that have a fail-safe operation that
performs the intended function when the connection is lost. The
pathways do not have supervision of their integrity. An example for
Class D is the wiring that provides power to the door holders.
Interruption of the power results in the door closing.
(5) Class E: Includes pathways that do not require monitoring for
integrity or electrical supervision.
(6) Class X: Includes a redundant path and its operational capability will
continue past a single open or short circuit. Any conditions that affect
the intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(b) Levels of Survivability:

Rev. 1 5.5 -289
(1) Level 0: Pathways have no required level of survivability.

(2) Level 1: Include those pathways installed in buildings which are fully
protected by automatic fire protection systems. Any interconnecting
conductors, cables or other physical pathways are installed in metal
raceways.
(3) Level 2: This level consists of one or more of the following:
(i) 2-hour, fire-rated circuit integrity (CI) cable
(ii) 2-hour, fire-rated cable systems [electrical circuit protective
system(s)]
(iii) 2-hour, fire-rated enclosure or protected area
(iv) 2-hour performance alternatives approved by the authority
having jurisdiction
(4) Level 3: This is identical to Level 2 except the pathways are installed
in buildings which are fully protected by automatic fire protection
systems.
3) Installation
(a) The fire alarm and detection cabling shall be installed in a dedicated
raceway system. Under no circumstances shall cables other than fire
alarm cables be installed in fire alarm raceways.
(b) Minimum size of wire shall be 1.5 mm² stranded copper.
(c) Minimum conduit sizes shall be 20 mm.
(d) All wiring shall enter panels from the bottom to prevent moisture from
entering the panel through the conduit.
(e) All wires shall be numbered and labeled.
(f) Provide separate circuits for audible and visual devices.
n. Fire Alarm System Overall Integration
1) Fire Alarm Network within the Camp / Compound
(a) The primary manned response center for the fire alarm shall be central
control room within the camp / compound. Centralized reporting of the Fire
Alarm shall be via fire alarm network and shall be available at the Central
Control room where a dedicated Fire Alarm Workstation with Large Screen
HMI / Mimic Panel shall be provided.
(b) The secondary manned response center for the fire alarm shall be
available at guard house. Repeat mimic panels are used to supervise the
entire camps/ compound and shall be installed in all guard houses.
(c) The Fire Alarm network shall be a networked system compliant with NFPA
72, style 7, (Class A) supervised communications network requirements.
It shall be made up of nodes which consist of interfaces to intelligent Local
Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) located in all buildings within the camp
/ compound.

Rev. 1 5.5 -290
(d) Data transfer between locations shall use Highways conforming to NFPA
72, Style 7 wired, (Class A) communications with full network
communications supervision and reporting
(e) All individual fire alarm will be generated from FACP and shall be
graphically displayed at the centralized Fire Alarm Workstation.
(f) The FACP shall also be integrated with BAS. Common Fire Alarm and
Common Fault Alarm shall be available at BAS for alarm and reporting.
2) Confirmed fire alarm in each building shall give following actions:
(a) A visual alarm (red LED) on the FACP display panel in the building
(b) A general audible alarm in the building
(c) An audible and visual alarm at Fire Alarm Workstation in central control
room and Mimic panel at guard house
(d) General audible and visual alarm in BAS
(e) Auto telephone dial with associated Fire Station
(f) Interface with HVAC control panel to auto shutdown HAVC and ventilation
system. FACP will provide shutdown signal to respective HVAC DDC
control panel, but the shutdown logic shall be via DDC control panel relay
logic to directly stop the HVAC package, and shall not use the DDC
software logic. FACP common shutdown signal will be monitored by BAS,
and shall have alarm lamp on HVAC DDC Controller panel.
(g) Auto shutdown Fire Dampers
(h) Interface with elevator to lock the elevator to safety location. (option)
(i) Interface and monitoring auto sprinkler system - Each sprinkler system
shall at minimum provide following signals to FACP
- Tamper Switch for each Zone Area
- Flow Switch for each Zone Area
- Sprinkler Pressure SW
(j) Interface and monitoring clean Agent system. Each clean agent system
shall at minimum provide following signals to FACP:
- Clean Agent Common Alarm
- Clean Agent Common Fault
- Clean Agent Confirmed Discharge Alarm
(k) Interface with Access Control System to release all doors in case of fire
event
M. Documentation
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic requirements for documentation
associated with Instrumentation and Control systems.
2. Required Instrumentation Documents

Rev. 1 5.5 -291
b. Following is a complete list of instrumentation documents which are to be prepared,

as required, in the design stage of any plant. This list shall be used for the preparation
of the “J” section in the drawing control.
1) Process Flow Diagram (PFD) - Only one circle symbol shall be used for each
control loop, regardless of how many items of equipment eventually are
required for the complete control loop. The identification letters shall be
selected in accordance with Standard Detail Drawing 406000-
001/002/003/004/005.
2) Piping and Instrument Diagram (P&ID) - shall be prepared in accordance with
Standard Detail Drawing 406000-001/002/003/004/005 to cover symbols and
abbreviations. All instruments and accessory items as well as interconnecting
pneumatic and electrical lines shall be shown in accordance with Standard
Detail Drawing 406000-001/002/003/004/005.
3) Control System Design Specifications / Guideless
List of RCJ design guidelines / specifications for instrumentation and control
system design requirements, installation requirements, standards, quality
insurance, assembly stage area, testing procedure, shipment, storage, site
support, start up and commissioning, guarantee etc.
4) Instrument installation Schedules - used as the primary instrument index and
material control sheet. Each instrument shall be listed and all instruments
having the same numerical loop identifier shall be grouped together.
5) I/O List
(a) I/O List is a document containing a list of instrumentation which serves as
an input or output of a control system. Therefore, only the tag number that
physically has a cable which connects to the control system appears on
I/O List.
(b) When there is more than one control system in a plant (e.g. PCS and BAS,
FGS, CMS), the I/O list shall clearly indicate which instrument is assigned
to which control system or may separate them into different sections of the
document.
(c) In I/O lists, the following information should be stated as a minimum but
not limited to:
(1) Tag number

(2) Service description
(3) P&ID Number
(4) Type of Instrument
(5) Location
(6) I/O Type
(7) Control System
(8) Signal level
(9) Power Supply Requirement
(10) Calibration Range

Rev. 1 5.5 -292
(11) Alarm set points

6) Instrument Specification Sheets (ISS) or Data Sheets - Each instrument item is
to be detailed on a suitable ISS.
Commentary Note: Packaged unit instruments shall also be specified on
standard ISSs.
7) Instrument Calculation Sheets and Details. - These are designed to be used as
work sheets for the calculations of Pitot tube meters, orifice plates, venture
meters, control valves and relief valves. They also serve as a record of the
conditions on which the calculation was based.
Commentary Note: Calculation sheet(s) generated from workstation or vendor
software packages are acceptable.
8) Control System Architecture Drawing
(a) Control system architecture depicts the architecture of the plant control
systems and the interfaces amongst the systems required for overall
operation of process plant.
(b) The required Control System is determined by the level of functionality,
complexity and safety of a plant. This may comprise of process control
system, safety instrumented system, building automation system, fire
alarm system, fire suppression system, SACDA control system.
(c) Control system architecture drawings shall also show supervisory level
equipment such as operator workstation, engineering workstation, large
screen display, Instrument asset management server, historian server,
cyber security server, control panel type, interface with other third party
systems, fire and gas system and also network equipment.
(d) Control system architecture shall clearly define the locations, i.e. main
locations, remote I/O locations, indoor/outdoor location, control
room/building limit.
(e) The major control, Ethernet and communication cables are to be shown
and specified.
(f) The control system architecture is conceptual in nature and is used for
specifying the requirements of the control system to the PCS/SCADA
Supplier. This drawing is provided as supporting documentation for the
process control system requisition.
9) Layout Drawings.
(a) Control room layout drawings shall show in plan view the location of
consoles, panels, control racks, computer racks and peripherals, logic
racks, termination racks and boxes.
(b) Remote building (Process Interface Buildings, Analyzer House, etc.)
layout drawings shall show the position of each item of major equipment.
(c) Layout of Control Room Console, Panel, Cabinets, and/or Local Panel -
Normally these drawings serve only as a guide for the vendor. Therefore,
neither construction details nor exact dimensions are required on these
drawings. Only the overall dimensions, location of instrument items,
shape, graphic layout and general layout are required.

Rev. 1 5.5 -293
Commentary Note: In instances where the Local Panel is to be field

fabricated, and the instruments to be field mounted, complete lay-out and
construction details are required.
(d) Front of Control Room Console, Panel and/or Local Panel - Besides the
basic information as specified in (c), the layout of the panel board front
shall also indicate the cut-out dimensions and mounting details for all
instrument items.
(e) Back of Control Room Console, Panel and/or Local Panel - In addition to
the basic information as specified in (c), the layout of the panel board back
shall indicate:
(1) Exact location where signal cabling, data highway cabling, and
electrical power wiring enters the console or panel board. Instrument
air supply and pneumatic tubing must also be shown as applicable to
each installation.
(2) Panel illumination.
(3) Location and designation number of terminal strips or electrical
junction boxes.
(4) Main air supply header, if required.
(5) Schematic layout of pneumatic tubing runs, when applicable.
(f) Front and Back of Cabinet/Rack Layout - As a minimum shall show
dimensions, equipment location, wiring raceway, cable entries and
terminal strips.
(g) The Vendor's final drawings shall be used for record purposes. Drawings
which are likely to be changed later, as front of console or panel board,
back of console or panel board and terminal layout drawings, shall comply
with RCJ’s drafting requirements for engineering drawings.
10) Cable Block Diagram
A cable block diagram typically shows all the control equipment and panels and
the interconnection between them. Cable number and the number of cores or
pairs of cores are usually all that is needed to be shown.
11) Cable Schedule
The cable schedule is developed from the cable block diagram, and will show
cable length, core size, construction and type of power/signal as well as the
cable number and number of cores/pairs. It will also show if the cable is to be
provided by the installer, or whether the cable is supplied by an equipment
vendor as well.
12) Instrument Interconnection Wiring Diagrams
(a) Instrument Interconnection Wiring Diagrams shall be prepared for each of
the following enclosures:
(1) Field junction box's and field control panels.
(2) Marshalling cabinets.
(3) All instrument console/panels, cabinet/racks, junction boxes, located
in substations, equipment rooms, server rooms, control rooms, etc.

Rev. 1 5.5 -294
(b) The purpose of this drawing is to show the individual wiring between
devices (e.g., terminal blocks, indicating lights, switches, I/O modules),
and to identify cable numbers, wire tagging, terminal identification, fuse
sizes, etc. All spare termination points are to be shown on this drawing.
13) Instrument Loop Drawing
(a) Instrument Loop diagram is a detailed drawing showing a connection from
one point to a control system. It is an important engineering deliverable to
be used for checking of a correct installation and connection when testing
during pre-commissioning, commissioning and also for trouble shooting
during operation.
(b) Instrument Loop Drawing shall include connection between:
(1) Field instrument to control system (or vice versa)
(2) Signal from Local Control Panel to control system (or vice versa)
(3) Signal from MCC to control system (or vice versa)
(4) Signal form one control system to another system
(5) FF Segment allocation to Control System
(c) Loop diagram shows instrument (in a symbol) and its terminal numbers
which are to be connected, instrument cable number, junction box
number, terminal number assigned for the specified instrument, multi-
pair cable and pair number , marshaling cabinet number, terminal
number in marshaling cabinet, control system details (rack, slot, I/O
channel). It also clearly indicates location of each equipment by means
of a border line as a limit.
(d) Loop Diagram usually shows a single control loop which means it could
only contains just one input (sensor to control system), just one output
(control system to final element) or combination of both
(e) The following is a list of data required along with its source/reference:
(1) Instrument Terminal number. Most instrument could be assumed to
use (+) and (-). Terminals. Instrument which needs special
arrangement such as smoke detector or instrument which in series
loop, requires manufacturer connection detail to make the cable is
properly connected.
(2) Junction box terminal number, this information could be obtained
from JB wiring connection
(3) Marshaling terminal number, this information could be obtained from
marshaling wiring connection.
(4) I/O point detail information. Obtain this information from I/O
assignment which is produced by system integrator or control system
vendor.
14) Control System Sequence of Operation, Control Narrative, C&E or Logic
Narrative
The control narrative, sequence of operation, C&E or Logic Narrative are critical
components of design deliverables as they interpret the design intension of

Rev. 1 5.5 -295
control and interlock functional requirements, and provide all information for the
system integration supplier to configure the control system.
15) List of Nameplates for Instruments - List of Nameplates for Instruments -
Separate drawings shall be prepared to cover nameplates required for
instruments as follows:
(a) Control room panel mounted instruments
(b) Rack mounted instruments
(c) Local panel mounted instruments
(d) Local mounted instruments
(e) Annunciator
16) Instruments mounted in Control Room Console, Panel, Rack or Local Panel -
Panel mounted instruments shall be provided with two nameplates, one on the
front and one on the back; rack mounted instruments shall have front mounted
nameplates only. The front nameplate shall show service description and tag
(mark) number including plant and instrument number. In case of multipoint
instruments, this information shall be shown for each point.
17) Instrument Piping Details.
18) Instrument Mounting Details.
19) Field calibration sketches and reports.
c. The following is a list of Instrumentation documents that are to be prepared by the
system integration Supplier, in the design / procurement / Construction stage of any
plant.
1) Specification Compliance Comparison Sheet.
2) Non- Compliance Registration.
3) Scope of work
4) Bill of Quantities
Panel Equipment Schedule (Bill of Quantities) - This schedule shall be prepared
to inform the panel vendor about the types, sources, installation, etc., of the
instruments and other miscellaneous equipment that is shown on the different
panel drawings.
5) Product Catalogues, selection details
6) Product operation and installation manuals
7) Product Certificate
8) PCS Functional Design Specification
9) SCADA system Functional Specification
10) BAS system Functional Specification
11) IAMS Functional Design Specification
12) Control Panel layout Drawing
13) Control Panel Wiring Diagram

Rev. 1 5.5 -296
14) Control Panel Termination Drawing

15) System Architecture Drawing
16) Overall System Network Schematic
17) I/O Allocation Details
18) Factory Acceptance Test Procedure
19) Serial Link Database ( Mapping Table)

Rev. 1 5.5 -297
A. General
1. Introduction
a. The Design Guidelines below are intended to be general in nature. The purpose of
these guidelines is to provide the A/E and/or EPC contractors with the requirements
of the RCJ for specific building types. These guidelines are not intended to provide
design knowledge but rather to indicate additional information, provisions and
submissions for each building type.
b. The Building Types are separated into the following categories:
1) Public/Government
2) Commercial
3) Residential
4) Industrial
5) Specialty Applications
c. Each of these categories is broken down further into sub-categories for specific
building types. If the A/E and/or EPC contractor retained to design a building whose
type is not contained in this section, then they must request specific design
guidelines from RCJ prior to commencing the work.
d. The A/E and/or EPC contractors shall submit, in each of the design phase
submissions, how they have addressed each of the provisions for their respective
building type.
e. Refer to Subsection 5.3.5 Guidelines by Building Types for additional information
regarding the occupancy requirements.
2. Definitions and Abbreviations:
a. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
B. Public/Government
1. Athletic Venues
(a) Goals
(1) Define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not limited
to the following:
(i) To support the playing and viewing of a sport with all the
necessary infrastructure to support the athletes as well as the
spectators.
(1) The type of Athletic Venues may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Baseball
(ii) Soccer/Football

Rev. 1 5.5 -298
(iii) Basketball
(iv) Swimming
(v) Gymnastics
(vi) Hockey
(vii) Rugby
(viii) Cricket
(ix) Track and Field
(x) Tennis
(xi) Golf
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(1) Provisions of power to scoreboards
(2) Provision of power to video boards
(3) Provision of power to illuminated signs
(4) Provision of power to out buildings for maintenance and concessions
(5) Provision of normal power service and equipment with appropriate
redundancy for the hosted events
(6) Provision of backup power source appropriate for the venue
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate and adequate lighting to satisfy the
illumination levels required for the event type in accordance with
governing sports authority
(2) Provision of emergency lighting with instant strike operation to
facilitate egress during a power outage
(3) Provision of security lighting for exterior facilities
(4) Provision of appropriate lighting controls to facilitate manual,
automatic and/or programmed control
(a) Communications
(1) Provisions for video and scoreboards
(2) Provisions for video distribution system infrastructure
(3) Provisions for structured cabling system
(4) Provisions for wireless (WIFI)
(5) Provisions for public address system
(6) Provisions for distributed antennae system
(7) Provisions for digital signage system
(8) Provisions for Network and telephony systems

Rev. 1 5.5 -299
(b) Safety and Security

(1) Consider layered Access Control approach
(2) Security Command Center
(3) Security gates and turnstiles
(4) CCTV surveillance cameras and systems
(5) Intrusion detection zones
(6) Emergency radio communications
4) Instrumentation and Controls
(a) Irrigation controls
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the assembly occupancy of the facility
(c) Control for fire suppression system
(d) DDC Controller for HAVC / Lighting / Energy Efficiency Control
(e) BAS system
b. Submittals
1) Building Description Summary
(b) Description of features
(c) Description of security measures
c. References
1) Consult the appropriate sport governing body and adhere to all applicable
regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These include but are not
(a) IOC International Olympic Committee
(b) ITF International Tennis Federation
(c) FINA Federation Internationale de Natation
(d) NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association
(e) IAAF International Association of Athletics Federations
(f) FIFA Federation Internationale de Football Association
(g) FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball
(h) IFAF International Federation of American Football
(i) NABBP National Association of Base Ball Players
(j) IIHF International Ice Hockey Federation
2. Aviation

Rev. 1 5.5 -300
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Provide a safe and secure place for flight
(ii) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities
and function for the facility
(iii) Comply with all requirements of the General Authority of Civil
Aviation of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) The type of Aviation building may include but is not limited to the
following:
(i) Airports
(ii) Heliports/helipads
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility. Consider multiple service feeders and
redundant electrical components
(2) Provision of backup power source to supply the crucial electrical
loads throughout the facility
(3) Provision of power to out buildings for maintenance
(4) Provision of power for monitors throughout the facility
(5) Provision of power to pedestrian movement equipment
(6) Provision of power to illuminated signage
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of lighting systems (fixtures and controls) for public spaces
which maximizes the use of available daylighting to minimize the
energy associated with artificial lighting.
(2) Provision of night/security lighting throughout the facility to ensure
safe passage and security.
(3) Provision of exterior lighting to facilitate movement of aircraft and
support equipment.
(a) Communications
(1) Radio and satellite monitoring equipment
(2) Accessible outlets for personal electronic devices
(3) Provisions for structured cabling system
(4) Provisions for wireless (WIFI)
(5) Provisions for public address and General Alarm system

Rev. 1 5.5 -301
(6) Provisions for distributed antennae system

(7) Provisions for digital signage system
(8) Provisions for network and telephony systems
(1) Restrict access from unauthorized persons or vehicles to runways or
private areas from both the interior and exterior.
(2) Create controlled access points for entry into terminals for security
checks.
(3) Provide security command centers
(4) Design CCTV surveillance systems
(5) Provide parking control systems
(6) Provide emergency communications systems
(7) Layered access control approach
(8) Security command center
(9) Security gates and turnstiles
(10) CCTV surveillance cameras and systems.
(12) Emergency radio communications
(13) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice
communications to address the code requirements for the facility
(a) Irrigation Controls
(b) Provision of instrumentation and controls associated with bulk fuel off
loading and storage.
(c) Wet Utility Water controls for Potable Water and Sanitary Waste Water
(d) DDC Controller for HVAC and Electrical System Monitoring, Energy
Efficiency and Lighting Controls.
(e) Centralized Building Automation System and SCADA System.
b. Submittals
c. References/Standards
1) Federal Aviation Administration
2) UK Civil Aviation Authority
3) General Authority of Civil Aviation (GACA) KSA operation specifications

Rev. 1 5.5 -302
3. Community Center
1) Goals of the facility
(a) Define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not limited to
the following:
(1) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and
function for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical components where the facility may be utilized as
an emergency shelter during natural disaster
(3) Provision of power for fitness equipment
(4) Provision of power for electrically operated folding partitions to
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities
(5) Provision of power for displays and kiosks associated with advertising
of events
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate lighting and controls for areas for religious
use
(2) Provision of lighting for displays and kiosks associated with
advertising of events
(3) Provision of zoned lighting and associated controls to adapt to
various space configurations
(a) Communications
(1) Audio-visual and sound systems shall be adequate for the expected
uses including consideration of speakers, projection screens,
projectors, and flat panel monitors.
(2) Wired and wireless data systems shall be considered where
appropriate.
(3) Distributed antenna systems shall be considered for mobile phone
and emergency responder services.
(4) Voice over IP telephone systems
(5) Digital signage systems

Rev. 1 5.5 -303
(1) Perimeter access control systems

(2) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones
(3) Site CCTV video surveillance
(4) Public area CCTV video surveillance
(6) Security information desk
(8) Emergency communications systems
(9) Parking control systems
communications to address the code requirements for the assembly
occupancies within the facility
(a) Irrigation controls
(b) Provision of instrumentation and controls associated with automatic
water level maintenance, chemical dosing and cleaning of swimming
pools
5) Related Functions/Facilities
(a) For facilities devoted exclusively for religious gathering, refer to
Subsection 5.5.4.B.6 - Mosques. Spaces for religious usage within a
multi-use Community Center shall likewise be designed in accordance
with that Section.
(b) Athletic Functions
(1) Swimming Pools are to be designed according to Subsection
5.5.4.B.1.
(2) Outdoor athletic facilities are to be designed according to Subsection
5.5.4.B.1.
(c) Libraries
(1) Library areas within Community Centers shall conform to Subsection
5.5.4.B.5 - Libraries.
b. Submittals
4. Hospital
(a) Goals

Rev. 1 5.5 -304
to the following:
(i) Create a safe and healthy environment for the care of patients.
and function for the facility.
(1) The type of Hospital facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) General
a) Nursing Units
b) Diagnostic and Treatment Facilities
c) Freestanding Emergency Departments
d) Critical Access Hospitals
e) Rehabilitation Hospitals and Other Facilities
f) Children’s Hospitals
g) Laboratories
h) Clinics
i) Pharmacy
(ii) Outpatient Facilities
a) Primary Care Facilities
b) Freestanding Outpatient Diagnostic and Treatment
Facilities
c) Freestanding Birth Centers
d) Freestanding Urgent Care Facilities
e) Freestanding Cancer Treatment Facilities
f) Outpatient Surgical Facilities
g) Office-Based Procedure and Operating Rooms
h) Endoscopy Facilities
i) Renal Dialysis Centers
j) Outpatient Psychiatric Centers
k) Outpatient Rehabilitation Therapy Facilities
l) Mobile, Transportable, and Relocatable Units
m) Dental Facilities
2) Electrical
(a) Power

Rev. 1 5.5 -305

redundant electrical components.
loads throughout the facility. Segregation of the emergency power
distribution into multiple branches.
(3) Provision of power for medical equipment.
(4) Selection of electrical components to maximize reliability.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of energy efficient lighting which will comfort for the healing
environment.
(2) Provision of controls and dimming to enhance patient comfort during
various procedures.
(3) Provision of ample lighting in procedure and operating rooms to
support the needs of healthcare professionals.
(4) Selection of lighting fixtures in specialty areas to avoid interference
due to electrical noise which may be caused by ballasts.
(a) Communications
(1) Nurse call systems
(2) Patient monitoring systems
(3) Imaging network systems and storage
(4) Telemedicine, videoconferencing, and teleconferencing
(5) Patient television and media systems
appropriate.
and facility services

Rev. 1 5.5 -306

communications to address the code requirements for the facility.
Interface fire alarm with other communications and alarm systems
4) Instrumentation and Control
(a) Potable Water System
(b) Sanitary Water Lift Station
(c) Irrigation System
(d) Wet Chemical Control System
(e) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the facility. Interface fire alarm with
other communications and alarm systems
(f) Fire Suppression Control System
(g) Medical Gas Storage
(h) BAS System
b. Submittals
c. References
1) Facility Guidelines Institute Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health
Care Facilities
2) Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPPA)
5. Libraries
1) Goals and Purpose
the following:
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility

Rev. 1 5.5 -307
(3) Provision of power for technology equipment and computers

(4) Provision of power for electrically operated book retrieval system
(5) Consideration for provision of controls with motion sensors to power
down equipment and computers when facility is not occupied.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provide appropriate lighting levels and fixture positions in the lighting
design for stacks, reference areas, reading areas, meeting rooms,
and computer banks.
(2) Provision of controls and dimming to facilitate adjustments to lighting
levels to accommodate various space uses
(3) Provision of controls for spaces with ample daylighting to reduce
artificial light when the available natural light is sufficient
(4) Provision of motion sensors to automatically de-energize artificial
lighting when the space is not occupied
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors. Uses may include web-meetings,
teaching, and distance learning.
(2) Public-access computer space
(3) Audio books, and video resources
(4) Special consideration shall be given to the data requirements of
technology and computers including individually owned electronic
devices.
(5) Consider space for literacy training, computer technology training,
and distance learning.
appropriate.
(1) Resource check-out stations including RFID or magnetic detection
gates

Rev. 1 5.5 -308

(b) Irrigation System
(c) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility.
(d) BAS System
b. Submittals
6. Mosque
(a) Provide a safe and spiritual place to practice Islam.
(b) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for audio visual equipment
(4) There shall be no point or “spear” rising above the crescent. The Hilal
shall act as a lightning terminal removing the need for additional
lightning rods.
(b) Lighting
(1) Lighting levels shall be sufficient for reading at near floor level. The
use of chandeliers or special lighting is not needed
levels for the various activities

Rev. 1 5.5 -309

(a) Communications
(1) The sound system shall be simple in design, installation, operation,
and maintenance.
(2) Clocks shall be provided to show worshippers the proper times for
prayers.
appropriate.
(1) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones as
appropriate
(2) Site CCTV video surveillance where appropriate
(3) Intrusion detection zones for after-hours monitoring
(c) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the facility.
(d) BAS System
b. Submittals
7. Museum
1) Goals of the Museum

Rev. 1 5.5 -310
(a) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for special space conditioning equipment
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate lighting for exhibit spaces. Goals of lighting
design are to enhance the viewing experience. Lighting
considerations include: the amount of illumination; the fixture and
lamp selection; the positioning of fixtures and direction of lighting.
(2) Ambient artificial light can seriously affect paintings and artifacts and
likewise warrants professional consideration for selection of source
and controls.
(3) Lighting and illumination can create accents that draw attention to
areas or exhibits and thereby prompt movement.
levels to accommodate various space uses.
(a) Communications
(1) Technology considerations include but are not limited to visual
computer animations, flat screen presentations, video feeds, and
computer-controlled technical effects, and motion-sensor activated
exhibits.
(2) Sound and acoustic considerations include such things as audio
feeds for the above and acoustical separation from neighboring
exhibits that may be adversely impacted.
(3) For the hearing impaired, portable audio devices can enable access
to exhibit audio feeds or live presentations. Various technologies exist
for text renditions of auditory tracts.
appropriate.

Rev. 1 5.5 -311

(1) Exhibit security is typically a high priority in museums due to the value
of objects and the irreplaceability of historic treasures. Security
typically revolves around theft prevention and the prevention of
vandalism. Electronic detection devices, camera systems, motion
sensors, physical barriers and observation by security personnel are
among the ways this can be done. Restricted access, alarmed exits
with delayed egress hardware are among the possibilities.
(2) Many of the same elements are required for storage security as
exhibit security, but the physical barriers and locking arrangements
are necessarily more elaborate.
(3) Consideration shall be given to Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)
asset management of museum collections.
(4) Display case glass break detectors, laser intrusion sensors, thermal
sensors, and shock/motion sensors shall be considered for high value
museum artifacts and collections.
(6) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones.
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility
(e) BAS System
b. Submittal Requirements
(b) Describe the general systems to be employed for fire safety for
collections and storage, over-and-above code requirements.
(c) Describe entrance security.

Rev. 1 5.5 -312
8. Ports/Docks
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility.
loads throughout the facility.
(3) Provision of power for dock services and equipment.
(4) Electrical components shall be chosen with environmental durability
and water resistance as primary concerns.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of safety lighting.
(2) Lighting fixtures shall be chosen with environmental durability and
water resistance as primary concerns.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(5) Public address and General Alarm system
(6) Systems shall be chosen with environmental durability and water
resistance as primary concerns.
(7) Radio systems
(1) Security gate checkpoints

Rev. 1 5.5 -313
(5) Site CCTV video surveillance and Multi-sensor Thermal Cameras

with Continuous Zoom Lens
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements assembly occupancies in the facility.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals
9. Schools
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) To create a secure and nurturing environment for the civic,
emotional, cognitive, vocational and social development of
students.
(1) The type of Schools may include but are not limited to the following:
(i) Pre-primary (kindergarten)
(ii) Primary (grade school)
(iii) Intermediate (middle school)
(iv) Secondary (high school)
(v) Technical institutes
(vi) College/university

Rev. 1 5.5 -314
2) Electrical
(a) Power
an emergency shelter during natural disaster.
(3) Provision of power for kitchen/food service facilities. Consider
backup power for food storage.
(4) Provision of power for all educational equipment.
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities.
(b) Lighting
(1) Rooms shall be provided with individual lighting controls.
(2) Utilize diffuse, uniform lighting that eliminates glare and reduces
fatigue.
(3) Maximize day lighting while reducing glare and optimizing visual
comfort.
levels to accommodate various space uses.
artificial light when the available natural light is sufficient.
lighting when the space is not occupied.
(7) Provision of theatrical dimming system for auditoriums.
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors. Uses may include web-meetings,
teaching, and distance learning.
(2) Library requirements including student-access computer space,
audio books, and video resources.
devices.
(4) Consider space for literacy training, computer technology training,
and distance learning.
appropriate.

Rev. 1 5.5 -315

(10) Master clock systems
(11) Bell systems
(1) Safety and security of the students shall be the highest priority in the
design of schools.
(2) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized
individuals and vehicles.
(3) Provide areas for emergency shelter in areas where natural disasters
are more prominent.
(4) Library resource check-out stations including RFID or magnetic
detection gates.
(5) Entrance security gates
(10) Intercom stations
(11) Security office
(14) Vehicular control systems
to address the code requirements assembly occupancies in the facility.
(d) BAS System
b. Submittals

Rev. 1 5.5 -316
c. References
1) Consult all appropriate educational bodies for any additional applicable
regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These include but are not
(a) Ministry of Education.
(b) Ministry of Higher Education.
(c) General Organization for Technical Education and Vocational Training.
C. Commercial
1. Hospitality
(a) Goals
(b) Types of Facilities
(1) Hotel
(2) Timeshare
(3) Resort
(4) Conference Center
(5) Other
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for fitness equipment.
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities.
(5) Provision of sub-metering of electrical services for tenants of the
facility.
(6) Provision of power to equipment for pool and spa facilities.
(7) Provision of power to kitchen facilities. Include backup power as
required for food storage.
(b) Lighting
levels to accommodate various space uses. Lighting controls shall
have capability to adapt to various space configurations.

Rev. 1 5.5 -317

(a) Communications
(1) Conference Center audio-visual and sound systems shall be
adequate for the expected uses including consideration of speakers,
projection screens, projectors, and flat panel monitors.
devices.
appropriate.
(5) Voice over IP telephone systems.
(6) Digital signage systems.
(1) Room card key access control and management systems
(7) Security office
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system as necessary to address the
code requirements for the various occupancies for the facility.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals

Rev. 1 5.5 -318

2. Office
(a) Define whether the building is a single-tenant or multi-tenant building.
(b) Define the building as a low-rise (1-2 stories), mid-rise (3-10 stories), or
high-rise (11 or more stories, typically over 23 m in height). Provide
building and zoning code categorization as well.
(c) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of sub-metering for multi-tenant occupancies.
(4) Provision of normal and backup power for smoke evacuation systems
which may be required in the building.
(5) Provision of normal and backup power for systems associated with a
high rise building.
(b) Lighting
(1) Implementation of task/ambient lighting scheme to provide individual
workstation control and reduced energy consumption.
(2) Provision of zone controls to facilitate operation for various space
configurations.
(3) Provision of daylighting controls for spaces with ample natural light.
(a) Communications
devices.

Rev. 1 5.5 -319

appropriate.
(1) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized
individuals and vehicles.
(2) Emergency stairwell floor re-entry in high rise buildings where
required.
(4) Security information desks
(5) Perimeter access control systems including elevator floor access
where required
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility. Address special provisions required for high
rise buildings.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals
3. Retail/Restaurants

Rev. 1 5.5 -320

(a) Define the development as a:
(1) Single establishment
(2) Multiple service retail development
(3) Mixed-use development
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of power for kitchen/food service equipment. Consider
backup power for walk-in and bulk refrigerators and freezers
(4) Provision of power for illuminated signs, and displays associated with
advertising
(b) Lighting
(1) Ensure appropriate lighting fixtures and illumination levels are
provided for both preparation and eating areas
levels to accommodate various space uses and time of day activities
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors
devices.
appropriate.

Rev. 1 5.5 -321

(8) Point of sale systems
(7) Security office
(8) Intrusion detection zone
(9) Parking control systems.
(10) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(c) BAS System
b. Submittals
4. Theaters
(a) Define the goals of the facility in terms of theater type and prospective
audience.
(1) Theater types may include but not be limited to the following:
(i) Motion picture theaters
(ii) Theaters for live performance
2) Electrical
(a) Power

Rev. 1 5.5 -322

(3) Provision of power for audio visual and performance equipment
(4) Provision of power for illuminated signs and displays associated with
advertising of events
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider the theater type when selecting lighting systems.
(2) Provision of the appropriate control and dimming capabilities
appropriate for the theater type
(3) Provision of infrastructure for full theatrical lighting system for facilities
used for live performances
(a) Communications
(1) Sound Systems
(i) Digital sound, “surround sound”, and the character of the audio
portion of motion pictures have advanced rapidly. This
requires appropriate acoustic design within the theater and
appropriate acoustic separation.
(ii) Speaker arrays shall consider the inherent digital distribution of
film audio tracks, such as left, center, right, and multiple station
audio tracks.
(iii) Theater sound systems shall consider the appropriate sound
processor to go with the projection system.
(2) Video
(i) Digital technology: Consider provisions for the necessary digital
input including portable hard drives and encrypted files.
(ii) Older analog formats, DVD, Blu-Ray and other media may
need to be provided for.
(3) Consider the use when selecting sound systems.
(6) Security office

Rev. 1 5.5 -323

(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the assembly occupancies for the
facility. Interconnect the fire alarm notification with other sound and
communications systems.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals
D. Residential
1. Multi-Family Housing
1) Goals
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
loads in public areas of the facility
(3) Provision of power for all residential equipment
(4) Provision of power for fitness equipment
(5) Provision of power for community facilities and activity centers
(6) Penetrations through walls for electrical devices shall be located to
avoid noise transmission between housing units.
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider motion sensors for the lighting for infrequently used spaces.
(2) Selection of light sources which are appropriate for residential
occupancies.

Rev. 1 5.5 -324

levels in common spaces to accommodate various space uses and
time of day activities
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(3) IP television systems
(1) Camera system in vestibule tied to occupant television or computers,
to allow observation of entrants
(2) Intercom system to lobby with electronic access triggered by the
building occupant
(3) Emergency call stations, if appropriate
(10) Security office
to address the code requirements for the facility
(d) Address special fire alarm provisions for high rise type buildings.
(e) BAS System
b. Submittals
(b) Description of Features
(c) Description of Security measures
2. Single-Family Housing

Rev. 1 5.5 -325
1) Goals
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of power for all residential equipment
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider motion sensors for the lighting for infrequently used spaces
(2) Selection of light sources which are appropriate for residential
occupancies
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(3) IP television systems
(2) Perimeter access control systems as appropriate
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm devices to address the code
requirements for a residence
(c) BAS System
b. Submittals
E. Industrial
1. General Industrial

Rev. 1 5.5 -326
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Creating an economically optimized facility that ensures the
safety of the environment, personnel, and surrounding
community.
(1) The type of Industrial facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Distribution
(ii) Manufacturing
(iii) Warehouse
(iv) Assembly
(v) Processing
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical component
(3) Provision of power for industrial equipment
(4) Provision of power for automated storage systems
(b) Lighting
(1) Lighting shall be designed appropriately for the process of the facility
and shall consider reducing worker fatigue.
(4) Provision of fixtures with appropriate ratings for the installed
environment
(a) Communications
appropriate.
and emergency responder services

Rev. 1 5.5 -327

(7) Radio systems
with Continuous Zoom Lens (Depending of the Type of Project)
(a) Measurement and Control Systems
(b) Process Alert and Alarm Systems
(c) Reporting Systems
(d) PLC or DCS Control Systems
(e) SCADA Systems
(f) Systems Integration
(g) Management Information Systems
(h) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(i) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be
required for various occupancies
(j) Irrigation System
(k) BAS system
b. Submittals
2. Chemical Processing

Rev. 1 5.5 -328
(a) Refer to General Industrial Subsection 5.5.4.E.1.a.1) for design
considerations pertaining to goals and purpose of the facility.
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical component.
(3) Materials shall be chosen to prevent chemical corrosion.
(b) Lighting
environment.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(3) Voice over IP telephone systems.
(4) Digital signage systems.
(5) Public address and General Alarm system.
(7) Radio systems
(1) Consideration for the types of chemicals being used and or stored
and their volatility with other materials.
(3) Refer to the General Industrial Subsection 5.5.4.E.1.a.3)(b) for design
considerations pertaining to security for the facility.

Rev. 1 5.5 -329

(14) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be
(e) SCADA Systems
(g) Safety Integrity Systems
(h) Management Information Systems
(i) Industry Waste Water Lift Station
b. Submittals
c. References
(a) Chemical Engineers shall be consulted on all chemical processing
facilities.
F. Specialty Applications
1. Military

Rev. 1 5.5 -330
the following:
(1) Creating a secured and private environment for the housing and
operation of the military or one of its branches.
(1) The type of Military facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Administrative purposes.
(ii) Storage such as ammunition, vehicles, and/or equipment.
(iii) Base.
(iv) Housing.
(v) Training Facility.
(vi) Weapons and ammunition production.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
an emergency shelter during natural disaster.
(3) Provision of power for security provisions at entrances to the facility.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of ample security lighting throughout the facility.
environment.
(a) Communications
appropriate.

Rev. 1 5.5 -331

(7) Radio systems
(4) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones.
with Continuous Zoom Lens.
(a) Irrigation Systems
(c) Potable Water System
b. Submittals
2. Water Treatment and/or Power Plants (Desalination)
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Uninterrupted water supply
(ii) Create an effective distribution system
(iii) Optimize supply capacity
(iv) High water quality and protection of supplies

Rev. 1 5.5 -332

(1) The type of Water Treatment and/or Power Plants may include but
are not limited to:
(i) Water treatment facility
(ii) Wastewater treatment plant
(iii) Captive Power Plant
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(1) Coordinate all incoming or outgoing utilities with the utility
infrastructure.
redundant electrical components
(4) Provision of power for pumping and treatment equipment
(5) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(b) Lighting
environment
(5) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(a) Communications
appropriate.

Rev. 1 5.5 -333
(7) Radio systems

(1) Consideration for the types of chemicals being used/stored and their
volatility with other materials.
(2) Materials shall be chosen to prevent chemical corrosion
(e) SCADA Systems
(g) Safety Integrity Systems (SIS) / Emergency Shutdown System (ESD)
(h) Management Information Systems
(i) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(j) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be
(k) Fire Suppression Control System
(l) Package PLC / Local Control system
(m) Instrument Asset Management System
b. Submittals

Rev. 1 5.5 -334
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.6
CIVIL, SITEWORK & ROADS
1 2020 General update AR ST LAS MRC OMQ


SECTION 5.6 CIVIL, SITEWORK, AND ROADWAYS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.6.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT DESIGN.................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 1
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 1
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 1
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 1
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 1
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 1
C. Grading and Building Elevations ................................................................................... 1
D. Parking and Loading Requirements .............................................................................. 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
E. Setbacks ........................................................................................................................ 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
F. Fences and Walls .......................................................................................................... 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2
G. Open Space ................................................................................................................... 2
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
H. Land Use Compatibility .................................................................................................. 3
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
I. Pedestrian Accessibility ................................................................................................. 3
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
J. Landscaping .................................................................................................................. 3
1. Landscaping Coordination ............................................................................................. 3
K. Earthwork....................................................................................................................... 3
1. Soil Improvements ......................................................................................................... 3
2. Rock Improvements ....................................................................................................... 4
L. Erosion and Sedimentation Controls ............................................................................. 4
5.6.2 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION ............................................................................ 5
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 5

Rev. 1 5.6 - i
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 5
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 5
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 5
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 5
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 6
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 6
8. Related Subsections ...................................................................................................... 7
9. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 7
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 7
C. Traffic Analysis and Transportation Planning ................................................................ 7
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 7
2. Circulation Plan ............................................................................................................. 9
3. Methodology Report ..................................................................................................... 10
4. Traffic Impact Study (TIS) ............................................................................................. 13
5. Transportation Master Plan (TMP) ............................................................................... 21
6. Engineering Software ................................................................................................... 24
7. Environmental Impact ................................................................................................... 25
8. Roadside Safety Audits ................................................................................................ 25
D. Signalization ................................................................................................................. 25
1. Traffic Signal Design .................................................................................................... 25
2. Signalized Intersection Spacing and Driveway Spacing .............................................. 30
3. Traffic Surveillance ....................................................................................................... 30
4. Traffic Calming.............................................................................................................. 30
5. Mobility Measures ......................................................................................................... 30
6. Traffic Optimization ....................................................................................................... 30
7. Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) ...................................................................... 31
5.6.3 STREETS AND ROADWAYS ...................................................................................... 32
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 32
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 32
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 32
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 32
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 32
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 33

Rev. 1 5.6 - ii
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 33
8. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 34
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 34
C. Roadway Design .......................................................................................................... 34
1. Systems and Classifications ......................................................................................... 34
2. Road Classifications ..................................................................................................... 34
3. Geometrics and Alignment ........................................................................................... 36
4. Roadway Elements ....................................................................................................... 47
5. Interchanges, Intersections and Roundabouts ............................................................. 80
6. Flexible Pavement Design ............................................................................................ 84
7. Rigid Pavement ............................................................................................................ 87
8. Resurfacing, Restoration and Rehabilitation ................................................................ 87
9. Landscape and Irrigation .............................................................................................. 88
10. Street Furniture ............................................................................................................. 88
11. Utilities .......................................................................................................................... 88
D. Maintenance of Traffic .................................................................................................. 88
1. Work Zones .................................................................................................................. 88
5.6.4 STORMWATER DRAINAGE ........................................................................................ 89
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 89
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 89
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 90
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 90
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 91
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 91
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 91
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 92
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 92
1. Not Applicable............................................................................................................... 92
C. Storm Water Management Infrastructure ..................................................................... 92
1. Storm Water Description .............................................................................................. 92
2. Design Criteria: ............................................................................................................. 93
3. Hydraulic Modeling: ..................................................................................................... 100
4. Stormwater Quality ...................................................................................................... 101

Rev. 1 5.6 - iii
5. Overland Relief ............................................................................................................ 101

D. Drainage Systems and Structures ............................................................................... 102
1. Culverts ........................................................................................................................ 102
2. Roadway Drainage ...................................................................................................... 103
3. Drainage Structures (Storm Manholes & Catch Basins) ............................................. 103
4. Open Channels ............................................................................................................ 103
5. Detention Basins/Ponds .............................................................................................. 105
6. Outfall Structures ......................................................................................................... 105
7. Exfiltration Systems ..................................................................................................... 106

Rev. 1 5.6 - iv
SUBSECTION 5.6.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT DESIGN
5.6.1 SITE DEVELOPMENT DESIGN
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides the basis for the design of project sites. The guidelines
apply to the following planning and design activities:
1) Site Design
2) Traffic Flow Analysis in Parking Areas
3) Grading & Drainage
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection applies to all sites.
3. Definitions
a. See each Subsection for pertinent definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.
b. See each Subsection for pertinent definitions.
a. This Subsection covers the design criteria for project sites, including commercial and
industrial sites.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional codes
7. Standards
8. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2 Site Development for Buildings
b. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4 for Site Storm Water Drainage.
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.
e. Refer to Section 5.7 for Water, Sanitary & Irrigation.
9. Approvals
B. Commissioning
Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 for commissioning requirements.
C. Grading and Building Elevations

Rev. 1 5.6 - 1
1) All elevations shown must be referenced via text font to the source of the
information and the source and date of survey shall be listed in the Notes
section of the drawing. All existing or referenced elevations shall be in a
screened font.
b. All elevations referenced to existing (pre-construction) shall be in an Arial, screened,
italic font. Reference shall be made to the date and source of survey.
c. Elevations from other sources such as As Built Plans shall use a unique, screened
font and reference to the font shall include the date and source of the information. If
more than one source is used, each source shall have a unique screened font.
When referencing designs currently under design, the stage (10%, 30%, etc) of the
referenced design shall be included in the Notes section.
d. Planning documents on current and future projects in the area should be considered
before commencement of Site Development design.
e. Site Development design should be based on up to-date and frozen topographic
base maps. Avoid changes to frozen base maps.
1) Stormwater runoff for site development must be captured in an onsite system
and delivered to the JIC stormwater network through provided connections.
Surface runoff from a site into the adjoining streets is not allowed beyond a
minimal amount at the driveway
2) The Civil Site Plan will dictate the floor elevation of all buildings on all sites.
3) The grades on sites shall be designed from the elevation of surrounding roads
into the sites in order to provide for adequate drainage.
4) Surrounding road designs shall be completed first.
5) The floor elevation of buildings shall be designed from the elevation of open
channel utilities which the site shall connect to, such as sanitary sewers and
storm drainage pipes.
6) Sanitary sewer pipelines shall be designed according the Section 5.7.2,
Sanitary Sewer System.
D. Parking and Loading Requirements
1. General
b. Compliance with ‘Article 9’ of the ‘Jubail Industrial City Development Code’, Royal
Commission for Jubail and Yanbu, 15 April 2019
E. Setbacks
1. General
F. Fences and Walls
1. General
a. Walls are required in residential designs.
b. For details of the design requirements see Subsection 5.6.5, Landscaping.
G. Open Space

Rev. 1 5.6 - 2
1. General
a. Open space shall be included in the design of new sites as directed by the RCJ
when applying for use of the RCJ’s land.
b. Compliance with ‘Article 7.3’ of the ‘Jubail Industrial City Development Code’, Royal
Commission for Jubail and Yanbu, latest edition.
H. Land Use Compatibility
1. General
a. All site uses shall be approved by the RCJ.
b. New sites shall be designed to be compatibility with surrounding developments,
either existing or anticipated by zoning.
c. Compliance with the ‘Jubail Industrial City Development Code’, Royal Commission
for Jubail and Yanbu, latest edition
d. Compliance with the ‘Jubail Industrial City Development Code - Zoning Maps’, Royal
Commission for Jubail and Yanbu, latest edition
I. Pedestrian Accessibility
1. General
b. Accessibility designs shall provide for:
1) Compliance with the 1990 Americans with Disabilities Act
(a) Building Access
(b) Parking Lot Access
2) Pedestrian Paths of Travel
(a) Paths of travel shall be shown on site plans
3) Site Lighting
(a) Site lighting shall be shown on site plans
(b) Site lighting shall be designed to illuminate pedestrian paths of travel
J. Landscaping
1. Landscaping Coordination
a. Landscaping designs shall be designed to coordinate with and supplement site
plans without interfering with site distances for vehicle and pedestrian paths of
travel.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.7.3 for Recycled water/irrigation.
K. Earthwork
1. Soil Improvements
a. Soil improvements may be required prior to construction on the site. A geotechnical
report shall be submitted to the RCJ with the first design submittal.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 3
b. Soil improvement in sabkha areas shall be as directed in the site Geotechnical

Design Report and in accordance with SBC 303 Chapter 11. In no instance shall the
fill material over sabkha be less than one meter thickness.
2. Rock Improvements
a. Improvement to the rock, in Karstic areas where grouting of voids may be required,
shall be as directed in the site Geotechnical Design Report and in determined from
investigation proposals developed in accordance with SBC 303 Chapter 2
L. Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
a. Erosion and sedimentation controls are required for every project site. The
engineering plans shall reference appropriate standard details.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 4
SUBSECTION 5.6.2 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION
5.6.2 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides the evaluation of traffic and transportation prior to
preparing the design of roadway networks. The guidelines apply to the following
planning and design activities:
1) Traffic Analysis and Transportation Planning
2) Signalization
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection applies to development of road network requirements.
b. This Subsection applies to all traffic impact assessment and traffic signal design.
3. Definitions
b. Intersection is at-grade junction, two streets intersecting each other on the same
level.
c. Interchange is grade-separated junction, that two freeways or freeway and
expressway are meeting at a point:
1) Cloverleaf Interchange is for two freeways and the flow streams have
continuous movement without interruptions, no control
2) Diamond Interchange or Single Point Urban Interchange (SPUI) are junctions
for freeway and Expressway. Expressway traffic streams are controlled by
Signalization
d. See Subsection 5.6.3 C.2. for road classifications describtion
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2.A
1) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
2) AASHTO Green Book AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and
Streets
3) FHWA MUTCD Federal Highway Administration Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices
4) FHWA RSA Federal Highway Administration Roadside Safety
Audit Guideline
5) HCM Highway Capacity Manual
6) ITE DWUT ITE - Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares
7) ITS Intelligent Transportation Systems

Rev. 1 5.6 - 5
8) JIC MPU Volume 6 – Transportation Royal Commission for Jubail &

Yanbu Royal Commission in Jubail Master Plan Update Volume
VI
9) LOS Level of Service
10) NACTO National Association of City Transportation Officials Urban
Bikeway Design Guide Second Edition
11) RDG AASHTO Roadside Design Guide
12) RHGCH Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook
13) DC Jubail Industrial City Development Code
14) RIC FEED: Volume 6 – Transportation Front End Engineering and
Design of Ras Al-Khair Industrial City (RIC) Volume 6
Transportation
15) GACAR: Saudi General Authority of Civil Aviation Regulation
16) ICAO: International Civil Aviation Organisation
17) SPUI: Single-Point Urban Interchange
a. This Subsection covers the design criteria for the road network in Jubail and Ras Al-
Khair Industrial Cities. The road network will be planned, engineered and
constructed over a 10 year period. This design requirements Subsection and the
road classifications, set forth herein, are intended to provide guidance and direction
in the planning and design of roads in both community and industrial areas.
b. The governing Codes and Standards in the RCJ shall be in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding Codes and Standards, refer to Subsection 3.1.
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Subsection, refer to Chapter 3
for a list of additional Standards.
1) Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
2) AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (Greenbook)
3) AASHTO Roadside Design Guide (RDG)
4) National Cooperative Highway Research Program - NCHRP report 350
6) Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook
7) ITE - Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares
8) National Association of City Transportation Officials Urban Bikeway Design
Guide
9) FHWA Roadside Safety Audit Guidelines

Rev. 1 5.6 - 6
10) ‘Jubail Industrial City Development Code’, Royal Commission for Jubail and
Yanbu, latest edition
11) ‘Jubail Industrial City Development Code - Zoning Maps’, Royal Commission
for Jubail and Yanbu, latest edition
8. Related Subsections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3 for Streets and Roadways.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.
9. Approvals
a. The RCJ will review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications,
reference Subsection 1.1.0.
b. To avoid delays, early submission of the assumptions is recommended, in particular
the study area among other assumptions based on the level of the study.
B. Commissioning
C. Traffic Analysis and Transportation Planning
1. General
a. The Transportation Planning and Traffic Analysis must be part of the Planning and
Concept Design stage of a project. Its outcome is prerequisite to detailed design.
b. The Transportation Planning and the Traffic Analysis must be conducted by qualified
consultant approved by RCJ.
c. There are several guiding documents and models that have been developed for
Jubail Industrial City and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City. It will be the responsibility of
the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to establish the current status of the Transportation
Master Plan, District Plan and/or Area Specific Master Plan prior to commencing
work.
1) There are Transportation Master Plan for:
2) Jubail Industrial City
3) Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
4) The existing developed areas have some form of District Plan:
(a) Al Deffi Community District
(b) Al Fanateer Community District
(c) Al Hulwaylat Community District
(d) Al Khaleej Community District
(e) Al Lulu Community District
(f) Al Mutrafiah Community District
(g) Al Reggah Community District
(h) Al Shati Community District

Rev. 1 5.6 - 7
(i) Eastern Corridor

(j) Jalmudah Community District
(k) Jubail City Center
(l) Jubail Industrial Area 1
(m) Jubail Industrial Area 2
(n) Mardumah Community District
(o) Northern Corridor Buffer Zone
5) These District Plans have a number of planning documents associated with
them and shall be the source of all data regarding land use, trip generation
and roadway network needs.
6) The existing areas and those with approved plans offer a reliable source of
information for traffic forecasting. Areas without approved plans will continue
to be refined as District Plans are completed.
7) Where there is not a District Plan the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
complete the following tasks.
(a) Establish land use and employment assumptions for the District or for the
Study Area
(b) Update Jubail Industrial City Travel Demand Model (VISUM)
(c) Develop the internal road hierarchy to facilitate safe access and mobility
for the development area
(d) Develop connectivity of the internal roadway network with the external
roadway network and continuity of links to the adjacent Districts
(e) Develop a concept for public transportation network and identify
integration with any planned networks to the adjacent Districts
(f) Prepare a Microsimulation Model for the District to assess the
performance of the traffic infrastructure: Internal Intersections, External
Junctions, Roadway links and other travel modes
(g) Prepare recommendations for junction types
(h) Prepare pedestrian circulation plans
(i) Prepare a bicycle circulation plan
(j) Prepare a transit plan to be integrated into the City-Wide Transit System
(k) Prepare Evacuation Strategy Plan and Route to be linkd to the City-Wide
Strategic Plan
d. The requirements of Transportation Planning and Traffic Analysis are based on the
scale of the development. There are three categories:
1) Circulation Plan
(1) Minimal assessment is required for small developments to assess
parking requirements, internal and external circulation, service and
emergency access, provision and access to/from the development.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 8
(2) Small development typically generates less than 100 trips during
any peak hour (highest total generation during AM, Noon, PM, or
Evening peak)
2) Traffic Impact Study (TIS)
(1) For developments generating more than 100 trips during any peak
hour, usually required TIS to be conducted.
(2) However, if the development is located in sensitive area, or it is part
of larger development, RCJ may determine that TIS is required to
be conducted, even the generated trips are less than 100 trips.
(3) For development/lot that is located within approved Transportation
Master Plan (TMP), the TIS mainly focuses on consistency with the
TMP, parking requirements, circulation, provision, access/egress,
and development of the surrounding infrastructure.
(4) Methodology Report is required to be submitted and approved by
RCJ before conducting the study.
3) Transportation Master Plan (TMP)
(1) The TMP focuses on large area impacts, internal network
operations, and integration of all transport modes with the City Wide
systems.
(2) RCJ will determine whether TIS or Circulation Plan is required to be
conducted for each plot development within the master plan.
(3) Methodology Report is required to be submitted and approved by
RCJ before conducting the study.
e. The main objectives of this guidelines are to
(1) Determine if and when a Circulation Plan, Traffic Impact Study (TIS)
and/or Transportation Master Plan (TMP) is/are needed.
(2) Determine the necessary requirements for the proposed
development(s) in terms of the transportation infrastructure.
2. Circulation Plan
a. Circulation Plans must be submitted and approved by RCJ for all projects that are
generating less than 100 trips during the peak hour.
1) Based on the site nature and location, RCJ might require full TIS to be
conducted even the development generates less than 100 trips during the
peak hour.
2) RCJ might require a Circulation Plan to be conducted for small development
that proposing to have two or more access points; depending on the location
of the site and the surrounding roadway network.
b. Components of Circulation Plan
1) Project Description
(a) Include the land use type, unit, and quantity in tabular format
(b) Include the Trip Generation information (in, out, total) in tabular format.
Typically this would include AM peak, Noon, and PM peak periods.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 9
(c) The Trip Generation calculation shall not include any reductions for public
transportation, internal capture or pass-by trips.
(d) Land use class and trip rate must be approved in advance by RC.
2) Service and Emergency Access
(a) Demonstrate delivery and service routes, locations and accesses on
drawing.
(b) Illustrate drop-off and pick-up facilities for taxi and private vehicles on
drawing (as applicable).
(c) Display emergency vehicle access on drawing.
3) Site Access and Exit Provision
(a) Show on drawing the locations and proposed design of all site access and
adjacent roads. Include the road markings and traffic signage on the
drawing.
(b) Show on the drawing the pedestrian and cycling routes (as applicable).
4) Parking Demand and Supply
(a) Provide calculations for parking demand and parking supply in tabular
format.
(b) Show all parking spaces on drawings, and number them sequentially.
(1) Geometric design of the parking spaces and access including
turning radii and dimensions must comply with the RCJ design
guidelines and must be checked using Swept Path Analysis
software
(c) Show the location and design of disabled parking bays.
(d) Capacity analysis must be conducted for the vehicular access points.
5) Queuing Analysis
(a) Queuing analysis must be conducted for the entrances and exits for the
site, drop-off area as well as for the parking facilities.
(b) Analysis must take into consideration the proposed access control
systems (gates, barriers, ticketing, etc.) and their capacities.
(c) Storage must be accommodating 95 percentile of queue lengths inside the
lot for exiting traffic and on the auxiliary lane for entering traffic.
(d) Pedestrian sidewalk should remain clear and should not be considered in
the queuing length.
(e) Queue assessment is required for access points with v/c ration greater
than 0.5.
(f) Access point with v/c ratio greater than 1.0 is not acceptable.
3. Methodology Report
a. Methodology Report is required for all TIS and TMP studies.
b. The Methodology Report identifies the methods and assumptions to be utilized in
the study.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 10
c. RCJ approval is required before progressing with the Methodology Report to

establish the following:
1) Use of the Master Plan versus Manual
(a) Previous District Master Plans have been developed that may not comply
with the guidance in the Guiding Engineering Manual. These
discrepancies must be presented to the RCJ before proceeding with the
design.
(b) New District Master Plans shall be in compliance with the General
Engineering Manual. Design exceptions supported by sound engineering
principals and best practice will be considered but all exceptions must be
approved by the RCJ.
2) Utilizing Model or Manual Assignment for trip distribution and assignment
(a) For small developments (<500 trips), manual assignment may be
sufficient. However, consideration should be taken for the location,
access, and characteristics of the development
(b) TMP should be utilized for plot located within Master Plan.
3) Determine whether a surveys and field data collection is required to be
conducted
4) Identify the adjacent developments and assumptions to be included
5) Identify the study area
6) Identify the planned traffic and public transportation infrastructure to be
considered, as applicable
7) Identify the peak hours, horizon years, and phases of the development for the
assessment
d. Methodology Report should include, as a minimum:
1) Project Description
(a) Description of the project should include at least the location of the
proposed development, proposed land uses and their relation to
surrounding area, constrains and issues, phases of the development, if
any.
(b) Specify the trip generators and trip attractors, including special generators,
if any.
2) Study Area
(a) It is the A/E and/or EPC Contractor responsibility to identify and check the
Study Area for completeness and comprehensive study to include all
major facilities that will be impacted by the development.
(b) All links and junctions affected by the development by additional 10% of
traffic due to the development must be included in the assessment.
(c) All links and junctions that are directly impacted by the development must
be included.
(d) If strategic modelling is utilized, the study area might be identified at a later
stage to incorporate most changes in transport demand.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 11
(e) The Study Area must include at least the major junctions and roadways in
the vicinity of the development, even if the increase of traffic volumes due
to the development is minimal.
3) Existing Transport Infrastructure
(a) Roadway network and infrastructure for the existing and future conditions
without the development.
(b) Public transportation facilities in close proximity to the development.
(c) Pedestrian and cycling infrastructure.
4) Baseline Traffic (Existing and Future)
(a) List the traffic surveys conducted and to be utilized in the study.
(b) For future flows implement growth rate that approved by the RCJ or utilize
the modelling output considering all land uses and infrastructure for the
particular horizon year(s).
(c) Comparison of base traffic flow with the forecasted flows should be
highlighted.
(d) Horizon Years, as minimum the following scenarios should be conducted:
(1) Existing without Development
(2) Opening Year(s) including development generated traffic (for each
Phase/Stage of the Development)
(3) Opening Year(s) + 5 years increment including Future
Development(s) in the vicinity
(4) Ultimate Full Buildout of the Development including Future
Development(s) in the vicinity (RCJ approval is required)
5) Trip Generation
(a) The calculations for trip generation shall not include any reductions for
transit, internal capture or pass-by trips.
(1) The calculation of the internal capture and pass-by trips must be
(b) Trip generations rates must be approved by the RCJ.
6) Parking Demand
(a) Parking demand must be calculated for each lot based on its land use
characteristics.
(b) Parking demand should be accommodated within lot boundaries.
7) Proposed Strategic Modelling Approach
(a) RCJ requirements is to submit Modelling Synopsis Report and Model
Development Report
8) Assumptions
(a) List all factors, assumptions, attributes, parameters and default values
used in the studies.
(b) List all trip generation assumptions.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 12
(c) List all variations from standards

4. Traffic Impact Study (TIS)
a. General
1) All criteria and requirements of the Circulation Plan mentioned above must be
met in addition to the following subsections.
2) Traffic impact studies assess the transportation needs and traffic impacts of a
development on the surrounding road network. They assist RCJ and private
developers in making development and transportation decisions. Need for a
traffic impact study is based on several factors: including the type and size of
development, existing network, available network and parking capacity.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete a Traffic Impact Study for
developments generating from 100 trips up to 2500 trips during any one peak
hour (highest total generation during AM, Noon, PM or Evening Peak).
4) Master planning updates shall be required for developments that generate
more than 2500 trips during any one peak hour.
5) For any sized development that generates two or more access points shall
create and submit a circulation plan for review and approval by the RCJ.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall use the existing model data for typical
TIS for any plot within an approved District Plan.
7) All assumptions shall be submitted to the RCJ for review and approval prior to
completing the analysis of the network or intersection requirements.
8) For smaller developments the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit a
circulation plan that addresses all mobility modes (vehicle, pedestrian, cyclist
and transit) as appropriate.
b. Study Area
1) The study area limits shall be based upon the types of land use, size of
development, street system patterns, and the terrain and as otherwise
required by the RCJ.
2) A frequently used method is to carry the analysis to the locations where site-
generated traffic will represent five percent (5%) or more of the roadway’s
peak hour approach capacity.
c. Traffic Impact of the Development
1) All analysis must be conducted for all peak periods (AM, Noon, PM, and
Evening) for weekday and weekend that is agreed and approved by RCJ.
2) RCJ must approve the scenarios to be included in the TIS. As minimum, the
following scenarios must be assessed:
(a) Base year. The assessment is based on the existing condition, without the
development.
(b) Opening year.
(c) Interim years. If the development has more than one phase, assessment
must be conducted for each phase of a major development.
(d) Medium Term (5 – 10 years)

Rev. 1 5.6 - 13
(e) Long Term (10+ years) Ultimate Development

3) RCJ developed Strategic Models must be used for studies using the strategic
modelling approach.
d. Trip Generation Rates
1) Trip Generation rate is the average number of trips that are going to be
generated by a particular type of land use. Average trip generation rate
represents weighted average from studies conducted in the real world. The
rates are typically provided for morning and evening peak periods on a
weekday and also the weekend (Friday and Saturday) peak hours of
generators.
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall collect site specific data for the Jubail
Industrial City, if required. Trip rates will be established locally or if acceptable
to the RCJ using RCJ Trip Generation Plan and Riyadh Trip Generation
Manual. If there are no local examples available to establish a suitable trip
generation rate then regional, national or international trip generation
resources may be used but will require RCJ approval.
3) Trip Generation rates for the District Plans are based on the land use
distribution of population and employment. The method to be used for the
analysis must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
4) As the Jubail Industrial City developed and matured, local Trip Generation
rates should be collected.
e. Parking Generation Rates
1) Parking requirements shall be established based on Subsection 3.2.5
2) If additional analysis is required for parking, the following may be used.
(a) Parking generation focuses on data from parking occupancy studies as a
basis for a better understanding of parking demand characteristics. The
effective parking supply that a designer shall use is subject to several
factors unique to individual business, area type, turnover characteristics;
customer service desires and demand variations whether it is hourly, daily,
monthly or seasonal. Refer to the RCJ Zoning Regulations for required
parking rates associated with the site specific zoning.
(b) Mixed Use areas within a District Plan may develop a shared parking plan
that would allow the overall reduction in parking provided. Detailed
parking assumptions must be submitted to the RCJ for review and
approval prior to reducing the parking requirements established in the RCJ
Zoning Regulations
f. Capacity Analysis
1) A principal objective of capacity analysis is the estimation of maximum number
of vehicles that may be accommodated by a given facility in reasonable safety
in a given period of time. However, because facilities operate poorly at or near
capacity, they are rarely planned to operate in this range. Accordingly,
capacity analysis also provides a means of estimating the maximum amount
of traffic that may be accommodated by a facility while prescribed operational
qualities are maintained at a “Level of Service C” LOS C or greater. The
following is the assumed parameters for capacity analysis:
(a) Type of facility and its development environment
Rev. 1 5.6 - 14
(b) Lane widths

(c) Shoulder widths and lateral clearance
(d) Design speed
(e) Horizontal and vertical alignments
(f) Availability of queuing space at the intersection
(g) Presence of pedestrians
(h) Terrain and grades
2) Capacity used for analysis of facilities and intersections
(a) All capacity assumptions shall be submitted for review and approval prior
to analysis of facilities and intersections.
(b) All capacity analysis results for intersections, weaving, merging, and
diverging must be presented in tabular format for all scenarios and all
agreed peak periods.
(c) Intersection capacity analysis results should include Delay, LOS, v/c ratio,
and Queue length, as minimum, for each intersection as well as for the
worst movement in the intersection.
(d) Merging/Diverging analysis results should include the number of lanes,
Speed, Volume, Density and LOS, as minimum, for freeway and ramp
facilities.
(e) Weaving analysis results should include, as minimum, the weave type,
number of weaving lanes, weaving length, freeway speed, and LOS.
(f) Mitigation measures shall be identified for all movement that has LOS D
or worst. Any junction with an overall LOS F is not acceptable.
3) Capacity analysis must be conducted for all scenarios and the mitigation
measures for all peak periods agreed on.
4) Capacity analysis must be conducted based on the Highway Capacity
Methodology.
5) Link performance should be presented in terms of flow, v/c ratio, speed, and
LOS for all scenarios all peak periods analyzed.
6) Intersection performance should be presented in terms of flow, average delay,
stopped delay, queue lengths, and LOS.
7) Intersection performance should be presented for the entire intersection as
well as for the critical movement(s).
8) Analytical tools
(a) There is abundance of tools available for analysis falling into two main
categories:
(1) Those that consider the mass movement of the individual vehicles
(Macroscopic)
(2) Those that consider movement of individual vehicles in a group
(Microscopic)
(b) Macroscopic Tools

Rev. 1 5.6 - 15
(1) Analytical tools that are based on Highway Capacity Manual. These
include: Synchro, SIDRA and HCS software
(c) Microscopic Tools
(1) Analytical tools include VISSIM, CORSIM and Simtraffic
9) After assigning the traffic to the transportation network using the site traffic
analysis software, the level of service is calculated for all major roadways and
intersections.
g. Circulation
1) All site circulation shall be accommodated on-site, in particular, vehicles
circulating looking for parking. Adjacent roadway network shall not be used
as part of the parking circulation activities.
h. Site Access and Exit
1) Conflict of access points with pedestrian movements must be assessed for
safety, as appropriate.
2) Access with v/c ratio greater than 0.5, a queue assessment is required.
3) Access points with v/c ratio greater than 1.0 are not acceptable.
i. Parking
1) Parking requirements shall be established using typical parking requirements
– refer to Subsection 3.2.5
2) For particular circumstances where shared parking capacity is to be
considered, parking inventory is conducted for central and outlaying business
districts and for major activity centers such as universities and medical
centers. The inventory generally collects the following information:
(a) Number of legal and illegal parking space by location and type of facility
(b) Owner of parking spaces (public or private)
(c) Availability of spaces
(d) Time limit and hours of operation
(e) Rates including meter locations
(f) Special curb-use regulations
3) Parking inventory typically is done in total, although in some jurisdictions a
previous study may serve as starting point. Inventory data is preferably
recorded in a computer format for the ease of usage and updating when
conditions change.
4) Provide disabled parking spaces according to standards and codes.
5) Parking access shall be assessed for the highest peak traffic flow.
6) Comply with the RCJ Standards and Guidelines for the parking design and
dimensions, refer to subsection 5.6.3.
j. Pedestrian and Cycling

Rev. 1 5.6 - 16
1) The need to move vehicles and pedestrians efficiently and safely at the same
locations presents a significant challenge. All site circulation shall comply with
the zoning requirements – Refer to Section 3.2.
2) Assess pedestrian accessibility to the nearest public transportation facilities,
as appropriate.
3) Assess Cycling routes as applicable.
k. Public Transit
1) General
(a) Jubail Industrial City has a planned transit system in the City Center. All
District Master plans may accommodate transit. The roadways that will
ultimately accommodate transit shall be documented in the District Plan.
2) Transit Assumptions
(a) All proposed developments use of transit must be reviewed and approved
by RCJ.
(b) Changes in the modal split must be evaluated, discussed, and approved
by the RCJ.
(c) Changes to the transportation network must be approved by the RCJ.
l. Queue Analysis
1) General
(a) All intersection operations shall be reviewed and queuing analysis
performed to establish if additional queuing distances are required for left
and right turn movements.
(b) All increases in standard bay lengths must be reviewed and approved.
m. Mitigation
1) General
(a) After the initial forecast and level of service are calculated various test
street improvements and signal timing changes for mitigating the impacts
at an intersection may be completed.
(b) All intersection and network operations must be reviewed and approved
by the RCJ.
(c) For each mitigation measure, the modelling results of the “with”, “without”
and “mitigated” scenarios must be compared and highlight the critical
movement.
(d) Proposed mitigation measures must be feasible and reasonable.
n. Geometric and R.O.W
1) General
(a) The TCDD’s shall be used to establish all typical geometric and right-of-
way (ROW).
(b) Development requiring additions to ROW for site access shall be
submitted for review and approval.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 17
(c) Recommended mitigation measures must be feasible and practical.

(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall check the availability of R.O.W for
the proposed geometric mitigations.
o. Report Contents
1) The A/E and/or the EPC contractor shall be responsible for submitting a table
of contents and report outline for review and approval of the RCJ prior to
commencing the traffic study.
2) TABLE 5.6.2.A illustrates sample report contents. Outline might change
based on the details of the study.
TABLE 5.6.2.A: SAMPLE TRAFFIC STUDY OUTLINE
Sample Outline Sample Figures Sample Tables
1.0 INTRODUCTION Figure 1.1 – Location Map

1.1 Background Figure 1.2 - Site Context
1.2 Study Area Figure 1.3 - Study Area
1.3 Analysis Scope Figure 1.4 – Development
2.0 LAND USE Figure 2.1 - Development

2.1 Existing Inventory
2.2 Future
3.0 EXISTING CONDITIONS Figure 3.1 - Existing Roadway Table 3.1 - Traffic Data
3.1 Road Network Network Survey
3.2 Existing Traffic Volumes
Figure 3.2 - Turning Table 3.2 – Traffic
3.2.1 Existing Study
Movement Count Data (Traffic Volumes on Study Area
Area Traffic
Operations Study Area) Network
3.3 Parking
3.3.1 Data Collection Figure 3.3 - Turning Table 3.3 – Area Parking
3.4 Transit Service Movement Count Data Supply
3.5 Pedestrian Activity (Parking Inventory Study Area)
3.5.1 On Street Table 3.4- Weekend
Figure 3.4 - Existing Parking Occupancy
3.5.2 On Site
Conditions, Peak Hours Level
Table 3.5 - Weekday
of Service
Parking Occupancy
Figure 3.5 - Parking Area Lots
/ Blocks
Figure 3.6 - Weekend Parking
Occupancy
Figure 3.7 - Weekday Parking
Occupancy
Figure 3.8 - Weekend Parking
Occupancy: Total Study Area
On-Street vs off-Street

Rev. 1 5.6 - 18

Figure 3.10 - Pedestrian
Volumes
4.0 METHODOLOGY Figure 4.1 - Trip Generation Table 4.1 - Trips

4.1 Trip Generation Regions and Count Locations Generated by Area
4.2 Trip Distribution
Figure 4.2 – Trip Distribution Table 4.2 - Generated
4.3 Parking
to the existing network Trips
4.3.2 Parking
Availability Target Figure 4.3 - Trip Distribution Table 4.3 - Trip Rates
4.3.3 Parking to future network
Table 4.4 – Trip
Occupancy
Figure 4.4 – Parking Distribution for Phases
Distribution and Occupancy and Ultimate
Table 4.5- Weekend
Parking Occupancy
Table 4.6 - Weekday
Parking Occupancy
5.0 FUTURE CONDITIONS - Table 5.1 – Level of

METHODOLOGY Service for At-Grade
5.1 Methodology Intersections (Highway
5.2 Micro Simulation Capacity Manual)
5.2.1 Road Network
Table 5.2 – Level of
5.2.2 Forecasts –
Service for Phases and
Horizon Years
Ultimate Development
5.3 Transit Service
5.4 Pedestrian Activity
5.5 Parking
5.6 Assessment of Counter
Measures
6.0 FUTURE NETWORK Figure 6.1 - Future Network, Table 6.1 - Friday
CONDITIONS ASSESSMENT Weekday Peak Hours Forecast Parking
6.1 Road Network - Phases Volumes Occupancy
and Ultimate
Figure 6.2- Future Network, Table 6.2 - Weekday
6.2 Parking - Phases and
Weekday Peak Hours Level of Forecast Parking
Ultimate
Services Occupancy
6.3 Traffic Circulation -
Phases and Ultimate Figure 6.3 - Friday Forecast Table 6.3 - Level of
6.4 Pedestrian - Phases and Parking Occupancy Service By Walking -
Ultimate Distance in Meters
6.5 Queue Analysis- Phases Figure 6.4 - Future Weekend
and Ultimate Parking Occupancy

Rev. 1 5.6 - 19
Figure 6.5- Weekday Forecast Table 6.4 - Walking Level

Parking Occupancy of Service For Various
Site Users
Figure 6.7 – Circulation
Alternatives
7.0 ALTERNATIVES – Figure 7.1 - Existing Roadway Table 7.1 - Network

FUTURE CONDITIONS Network Alternatives Level of
ASSESSMENT Service, Weekday Peak
Figure 7.2 – Alternative
7.1 Road Network Hours
Weekday Peak Hours
7.1.1 Description of
Volumes Table 7.2 - Alternative
Alternatives
Network Evaluation
7.1.2 Assessment of Figure 7.3 – Future Weekday
Alternatives Peak Hours Volumes Table 7.3 - Alternative
7.1.3 Evaluation of Parking Area Evaluation
Figure 7.4 - Proposed Parking
Alternatives
Sites
7.2 Parking
7.2.1 Description of Figure 7.5 - Future Lot
Alternatives Alternative(s)- Accessibility
7.2.2 Assessment of
Alternatives
7.3 Evaluation of Alternatives
7.3 Preferred Scenario
8.0 IMPROVEMENTS AND Figure 8.1 – Improvement

MITIGATIONS Locations
8.1 Major Improvements Figure 8.2 – Proposed
8.2 Minor Improvements Improvements for each
location
9.0 CONCLUSIONS AND

RECOMMENDATIONS
9.1 Existing Conditions
9.1.1 Findings
/Problems/Issues
9.1.2 Opportunities
9.2 Future Conditions
9.2.1 Problems/Issues
9.2.2 Opportunities
9.3 Solutions
9.3.1 Structural
9.3.2 Non-Structural
9.4 Implementation Plan
9.4.1 Short term (0-5
years – Opening
Years)

Rev. 1 5.6 - 20
9.4.2 Medium term (5-

10 years - Phases)
9.4.3 Long Term (10+
years – Ultimate
Development)
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: Field Turning Movement Counts
APPENDIX B: Parking Data
APPENDIX C: TAZ Structures
APPENDIX D: Phased and Ultimate Traffic, Parking, Circulation and Pedestrian
Volumes
APPENDIX E: Level of Service Analysis Details
5. Transportation Master Plan (TMP)
a. General
1) All criteria and requirements for the Circulation Plan and Traffic Impact Study
shall be conducted and included as part of the TMP, unless approved by the
RCJ.
b. Demographic and Socioeconomic Data
1) Existing demographic and economic data is obtained from the census data
collection of the Ministry of Communication.
2) Local data shall be used to augment regional data.
3) Land use is inextricably linked to the distribution of population, household and
employment. These in turn are primary inputs to the regional model set. Once
a land use plan is established a set of demographic shall be submitted for
c. Traffic Analysis Zones
1) General
(a) A traffic analysis zone (TAZ) is a small, homogeneous geographic area
defined to be used in the transportation planning and analysis.
(b) A TAZ may be as small as a city block or as large as a few square miles
in the outlying reaches of transportation network. The boundaries of a
zone are typically defined by geographic barriers or by transportation
features such as rivers and roads.
(c) Zone boundaries shall follow census tract or block group boundaries
where possible to make it easier to correlate the census demographic data
to the zones. Within a zone the land use and spatial distribution shall be
fairly homogeneous.
2) Land Use Characteristics
(a) Define the local amenities (schools, shops, restaurants, mosques) for the
forecasted population.
(b) Define any special generator

Rev. 1 5.6 - 21
(c) Account for visitors parking

d. Highway Network
1) General
(a) The highway network is composed of various nodes and links. Nodes are
typically intersections or may simply be placed to give the network a proper
shape when it is plotted; while links connect various nodes together.
Roads are entered in as links.
(b) Network assumptions and attributes shall be reviewed and approved.
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall present all scenarios and peak periods
to be analyzed for approval from the RCJ before conducting the analysis.
(a) Peak periods are the AM, Noon, PM and Evening. Special events might
be analyzed upon RCJ request.
(b) Minimum scenarios include:
(1) Opening year
(2) Interim year’s corresponding to projects’ phases
(3) Horizon years in 5 years increment, to be approved by the RCJ
(4) Full build-out, ultimate development
3) Strategic modelling approach must be utilized
4) Present traffic flows and turning movements for all scenarios and all peak
periods.
5) Present link capacity analysis on links for all scenarios and all peak periods.
6) Link performance should be presented in terms of flow, v/c ratio, speed, and
LOS.
7) Links with v/c ratio of greater than 0.7, further analysis is required.
8) Major Intersections must be assessed and analyzed in details.
9) Intersection performance should be presented in terms of flow, average delay,
stopped delay, queue lengths, and LOS.
10) Intersection performance should be presented for the entire intersection as
well as for the critical movement(s).
11) Proposed mitigation must be presented at conceptual design level.
12) Analysis must include comparisons between without and with mitigations.
e. Transit Network
1) General
(a) A transit network is composed of various nodes and links. Links connect
various nodes together. Transit lines are entered as a sequence of nodes.
(b) Network assumptions shall be reviewed and approved.
(c) Account for pedestrian and bicycle network.
(d) Identify whether mode share and internal capture targets can be achieved.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 22
f. Trip Generation
1) General
(a) Trip generation is the total number of person trips that are produced (Trip
Production) by and attracted (Trip Attraction) to each defined zone in a
study area.
(b) The estimation of person trip ends is stratified by the trip purpose. It is
based on the characteristics of both trip maker and the land uses. Trip
maker characteristics are based on the household attributes like
household size, income, number of workers and vehicles owned.
(c) Land use is functionally described in terms of its character, intensity and
location of activities. It may also be described as type and quantity of
employment that it generates. Exclusive models are in use for trip
production and trip attraction.
(d) All Trip Generation assumptions shall be reviewed and approved.
2) Trip Generation Model
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall conduct technical workshop to RCJ
personnel presenting the Trip Generation Modeling methodology, aspects
and development.
(b) Upon RCJ approval on the Trip Generation Model, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall proceed with the TMP.
g. Trip Distribution
1) General
(a) Trip Distribution is connecting trip ends to one another to create and flow
of trips in each interchange.
(b) A typical trip distribution model is a gravity model as in theory number of
trips from one analysis zone to another is directly related to the magnitude
of the activity within each zone as well as the accessibility between the
zones.
(c) The inter-zonal accessibility is the inverse of the travel impedance which
may be measured by the automobile or the transit time. Or by composite
impedance, which could include times, parking fees and other costs.
(d) All Trip Distribution assumptions shall be reviewed and approved.
2) Trip Distribution Model
personnel presenting the Trip Distribution Modeling methodology, aspects
and development.
(b) Upon RCJ approval on the Trip Distribution Model, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall proceed with the TMP.
h. Mode Choice
1) General

Rev. 1 5.6 - 23
(a) Mode choice is estimate of the proportions of the travelers travelling by

different modes of transportation, such as public transportation, private
automobile, bicycling or walking.
(b) The primary modes are further subdivided in to sub modes. This could
include various types of transit modes such as commuter rail, light rail.
Express buses, local buses, trolleys and monorails. Even the carpooling
auto modes may be further divided in to a two person car pool, a three
person car pool and a four person car pool.
(c) All Mode Choice splits shall be reviewed and approved.
i. Trip Assignment
1) General
(a) In trip assignment the mode specific trips are assigned to the appropriate
network. The auto vehicle trips are assigned to the roadway network while
the transit person trips are assigned to the transit network. In case of park-
n-ride trips the highway portion of the trip is assigned to the roadway
network and the transit portion to the transit network.
(b) All Trip Assignments shall be reviewed and approved.
j. Freight Modeling
1) General
(a) Jubail Industrial City Master Plan Update addresses the freight model that
has been established for the City. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
review the assumptions used by the Master Plan Update.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit all freight usage information
for the RCJ to review and approve.
2) Freight Model
personnel presenting the Freight Modeling methodology, aspects and
development.
6. Engineering Software
a. General
1) There is a traffic model associated with the Jubail Industrial City Master Plan
Update. This model has been augmented with District Plans. All
Transportation Master planning must use the most updated Jubail
Transportation Model VISUM.
2) For the development of network requirements and intersection controls each
District Plan has a VISSIM model. The VISSIM model shall be augmented as
each plot within the District Plan is developed.
3) For corridor analysis, Synchro shall be used.
4) For isolated intersections, HCM methodology shall be used to evaluate the
traffic control needs. All assumptions shall be reviewed and approved by the
RCJ.
5) For weaving, merging, and diverging analysis, HCM methodology shall be
used.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 24
6) For roundabout analysis, SIDRA INTERSECTION shall be used.

b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit all assumptions and the original
software data files.
c. All assumptions shall be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
7. Environmental Impact
a. Highway Traffic Noise
1) General
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.9.5 Noise Management.
b. Air
1) General
(a) Refer to Subsection 4.4.3 Environmental Investigation and Studies.
8. Roadside Safety Audits
a. General
1) Majority of the crashes occurring on surface streets occur at intersections.
One of the recommendations to reduce the number of crashes is to perform
Road Safety Assessments as a regional initiative to help identify and address
safety issues at high risk intersections.
2) Roadside Safety Audits are formal examinations of particular intersections or
entire road corridors from a safety performance viewpoint. The concept of
RSAs originated in the UK in the 1990s and has been adopted by many
countries with much success.
3) Roadside Safety Audits (RSA) are performed by an independent multi-
disciplinary team and led by a person trained in performing Roadside Safety
Audits. The Roadside Safety Audits team considers the safety of all road
users, qualitatively estimates and reports on potential road safety issues, and
identifies opportunities for safety improvement. The Roadside Safety Audits
team reviews police crash reports and conducts field observations during
different times of the day, such as day/night and peak/non-peak hours.
4) The purpose of an Roadside Safety Audits is to answer the following
questions:
(a) What elements of the road may present a safety concern: to what extent,
to which road users, and under what circumstances?
(b) What opportunities exist to eliminate or mitigate identified safety
concerns?
5) All Roadside Safety Audit shall follow the approach outlined by FHWA RSA.
D. Signalization
1. Traffic Signal Design
a. Warrant Evaluation and Analysis
1) General
(a) Typical Intersection control has been established in the District Master
Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall review the traffic control

Rev. 1 5.6 - 25
proposed in the existing District Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall analyze the intersection(s) and establishing appropriate traffic control
for existing and future conditions. Any proposed signalized intersections
that do not currently meet signalization warrants must be constructed with
all underground infrastructures. In addition, future pole locations shall
remain clear of utilities that will affect the installation of pole bases in the
future.
(b) Traffic planning and assessment data shall be used to establish if
signalization of an intersection is warranted.
(c) The FHWA MUTCD has established criteria for the evaluation of
signalization needs. Signalization shall only be installed if the criterions
are met.
b. Operational Requirements (Phasing, control, detection, interconnection, etc.)
(a) The intersection phasing and corridor coordination shall be established by
the Traffic Signal Analysis study that must be reviewed and approved by
the RCJ.
(b) All signalized left turn movements shall operate as a protected phase only.
(c) All arterial networks and the portion of the collector network with future
signalization shall include conduit and the associated fixtures to allow the
installation of future traffic signal fiber.
(d) Refer to the FHWA MUTCD
(e) Follow all requirements in GPCS
(f) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
c. Signal Display and Design Configuration
1) Pole Placement
(a) General
(1) A/E or EPC Contractor shall use AASHTO RDG and the Americans
with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG)‖
(2) Poles supports shall be placed as far as practical from the edge of
the traveled way without adversely affecting the visibility of the
signal indications.
(3) Where supports cannot be located based on the recommended
AASHTO clearances, consideration shall be given to the use of
appropriate safety devices.
(4) In order to minimize hindrance to the passage of persons with
physical disabilities, a signal support or controller cabinet shall not
obstruct the sidewalk, or access from the sidewalk to the crosswalk.
(5) Controller cabinets shall be located as far as practical from the edge
of the roadway.
(6) On medians, the minimum clearances provided in above items for
signal poles shall be obtained if practical.
(b) Refer to the FHWA MUTCD

Rev. 1 5.6 - 26
(c) Follow all requirements in GPCS

(d) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
2) Traffic Signal Indications
(a) General
(1) If a signalized through movement exists on an approach, a minimum
of two primary signal faces shall be provided for the through
movement. If a signalized through movement does not exist on an
approach, a minimum of two primary signal faces shall be provided
for the signalized turning movement that is considered to be the
major movement from the approach.
(2) If the number of overhead primary signal faces for through traffic is
equal to the number of through lanes on an approach, one
overhead signal face shall be located approximately over the center
of each through lane.
(3) Except for shared left-turn and right-turn signal faces, any primary
signal face required for an exclusive turn lane shall be located
overhead approximately over the center of each exclusive turn lane.
(4) In addition to the primary signal faces, one or more supplemental
pole-mounted or overhead signal faces shall be considered to
provide added visibility for approaching traffic that is traveling
behind large vehicles.
(5) Refer to the FHWA MUTCD.
(b) Follow all requirements in GPCS
(c) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
3) Mounting Hardware
(a) Refer to the FHWA MUTCD
(b) Follow all requirements in GPCS
(c) Follow all requirements of the TCDD’s
d. Pedestrian Control Features
1) General
(a) Refer to the FHWA MUTCD
(b) The pedestrian control systems include, but not limited to: Pedestrian Light
Control Activation (PELICAN) system, Two Groups CAN cross (TOUCAN)
system and High Intensity Activated Cross Walk (HAWK).
(c) Pedestrian Push Button should be provided for all signalized intersections,
unless being proffed no need and agreed with the RCJ
(d) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
e. Lighting Requirements for Traffic Signal Installations
1) General

Rev. 1 5.6 - 27
(a) The intensity and distribution of light from each illuminated signal lens shall
comply with the ITE publications entitled ―Vehicle Traffic Control Signal
Heads and ―Traffic Signal Lamps. Research has resulted in signal optical
units that are not lenses, such as, but not limited to, light emitting diode
(LED) traffic signal modules. Some units are practical for all signal
indications, and some are practical for specific types such as visibility-
limited signal indications. If a signal indication is so bright that it causes
excessive glare during nighttime conditions, some form of automatic
dimming shall be used to reduce the brilliance of the signal indication.
(b) Refer to the FHWA MUTCD
(c) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
f. Traffic Signal Controllers (Controller Cabinet and Electrical Service Pedestal)
1) General
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the Electrical and
Communication requirements based on the requirement listed in
Subsection 5.7.6 and 5.7.7.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall show the connection from the
electrical and communication services pedestal to the controller.
(c) In District Plan areas the controller box must be sized to accommodate the
future installation of fiber. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit the
controller box racking for review and approval by the RCJ.
(d) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
g. Detectors (vehicle detection: types, guidelines, requirements)
1) General
(a) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
(b) Video Imaging Detection is required for all signalized intersections, unless
agreed with the RCJ
h. Wiring / Cabling (Conductor Cable Requirements, Conduit and Pull Box
Requirements)
1) General
(a) Follow all requirements in TCDD and GPCS SECTION related to Traffic
Signals
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.7.7. for Telecommunication requirements.
i. Signal Timing
1) General
(a) All signal timings shall be submitted and approved by the RCJ prior to
implementing them in the field.
j. Communication and Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) related issues
1) General

Rev. 1 5.6 - 28
(a) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing ITS within various District Plans.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are required to review existing systems
for the District Plan.
(b) Where ITS is being implemented the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is
required to follow all existing ITS protocols. All equipment proposals must
be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
(c) Where ITS is not being implemented in the District Plans, the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor will be required to provide and install a conduit and the
associated fixtures in a joint trench along all roadways with future
signalization.
k. Other Traffic Signal Equipment (e.g., pre-empt systems)
1) General
(a) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing pre-empt systems within various
District Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required to review
existing systems for the District Plan.
(b) Where pre-empt systems are being implemented the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor is required to follow all existing pre-empt system protocols. All
equipment proposals must be review and approved by the RCJ.
l. Other Traffic Signals
1) Intersection Control Beacons
(a) General
(1) Refer to the FHWA MUTCD
2) Warning Beacons
(a) General
(1) If a sign is installed to warn approaching road users of the traffic
control signal, the sign may be supplemented by a Warning Beacon.
(2) A Warning Beacon used in this manner shall be interconnected with
the traffic signal controller assembly in such a manner as to flash
amber during the period when road users passing this beacon at the
legal speed for the roadway might encounter a red signal indication
(or a queue resulting from the display of the red signal indication)
upon arrival at the signalized location.
(3) If the sight distance to the signal faces for an approach is limited by
horizontal or vertical alignment, supplemental signal faces aimed at
a point on the approach at which the signal indications first become
visible may be used.
(4) Supplemental signal faces shall be used if engineering judgment
has shown that they are needed to achieve intersection visibility
both in advance and immediately before the signalized location
3) Pedestrian Crossing Beacons
(a) General

Rev. 1 5.6 - 29

(2) The pedestrian control systems include, but not limited to:
Pedestrian Light Control Activation (PELICAN) system, Two Groups
CAN cross (TOUCAN) system and High Intensity Activated Cross
Walk (HAWK).
2. Signalized Intersection Spacing and Driveway Spacing
a. Reference Subsection 5.6.3. for access criteria and driveway spacing design
guidance.
3. Traffic Surveillance
a. General
1) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing traffic surveillance systems within
various District Plans. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor is required to review
existing systems for the District Plan.
2) Where traffic surveillance is being implemented the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor is required to follow all existing traffic surveillance protocols. All
equipment proposals must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
4. Traffic Calming
a. General
1) Within Urban areas and for roadway classification with 2-lanes of traffic the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor must apply the principals outlined in the ITE-
DWUT.
2) All Traffic Calming measures must be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor must accommodate the requirement for
alternate modes of travel based on context sensitive design approaches. This
is outlined in the Jubail Industrial City Master Plan Update as well as the
individual District Master Plans.
5. Mobility Measures
a. General
1) Within Urban areas the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must apply the principals
outlined in the ITE- DWUT.
2) Mobility measures should be relevant to the Jubail Industrial City and must be
reviewed and approved by RCJ.
6. Traffic Optimization
a. General
1) Within Urban areas the A/E and/or EPC Contractor must apply the principals
outlined in the ITE- DWUT as applicable to RCJ.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 30
7. Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS)
a. General
1) The Jubail Industrial City is implementing ITS within various District Plans.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor are required to review existing systems for
the District Plan.
2) In districts where an existing ITS system is being expanded, the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor is required to follow all existing protocols and connect new
ITS controllers to RC communication network that feeds into Traffic
Management Center. If an existing controller is being updated/upgraded, it
shall be connected to Traffic Management Center though RC communication
network.
3) In districts which do not have existing ITS system and not currently being
implemented in District Plans, A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide and
install a conduit and the associated fixtures in a joint trench along all
roadways. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also provide and install a conduit
for each ITS controller location connecting to RC telecom duct bank, to enable
provision for future connectivity to RC communication network.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 31
SUBSECTION 5.6.3 STREETS AND ROADWAYS
5.6.3 STREETS AND ROADWAYS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides the basis for the design of roadway network. The
guidelines apply to the following planning and design activities:
1) Roadway Design
2) Maintenance of Traffic
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection applies to all roadway construction within road right-of-way (ROW).
b. This Subsection applies to all roadway and parking construction on property.
3. Definitions
a. “Auxiliary lane” The portion of the roadway adjoining the carriageway for parking,
speed changes, or for other purposes supplementary to through traffic movement.
b. “Carriageway” The portion of the roadway for the movement of vehicles, exclusive of
shoulders and auxiliary lanes.
c. “Divided road’ a freeway or road with carriageways traveling in opposite directions
separated by a median.
d. “Freeway or road” General terms denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular
traffic, including the entire area within the right-of-way.
e. “Left-turn lane” An auxiliary lane in the median to accommodate the deceleration
and storage of vehicles making left turn maneuvers.
f. “Median” The inner portion of a divided road separating carriageways traveling in
opposite directions.
g. Parking lane” An auxiliary lane used primarily for vehicle parking.
h. “Roadside” A general term denoting the area adjoining the outer edge of the
roadway. Extensive areas between the roadways of a divided highway may also be
considered roadside.
i. “Roadway” The portion of a road including the carriageway, auxiliary lanes and
shoulders, for vehicular use.
j. “Shoulder” The portion of the roadway contiguous with the carriageway for
accommodation of stopped vehicles and for emergency use.
k. “Traffic lane” The portion of the carriageway for the movement of a single line of
vehicles.
l. “Design speed” A speed determined for design and correlation of the physical
features of a highway that influence vehicle operation. It is the maximum safe speed
that may be maintained over a specified section of highway when conditions are
favorable and the design features of the highway govern. The design speed shall be
20% greater than the posted speed limit.
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2.A.4.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 32

1) AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
2) AASHTO Green Book: AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and Streets
3) HDM: The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communications
Highway Design Manuals
4) MUTCD (FHWA) : Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices
5) RDG : AASHTO Roadside Design Guide
6) RHGCH : Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook
7) ADA : Americans with Disabilities Act
a. This Subsection covers the design criteria for the road network in Jubail and Ras Al-
Khair Industrial Cities. The road network will be planned, engineered and
constructed over a 10 year period. This design requirements Subsection and the
road classifications, set forth herein, are intended to provide guidance and direction
in the planning and design of roads in both community and industrial areas.
b. The governing Codes and Standards in the RCJ shall be in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Subsection 3.1.0.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Codes
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Subsection, refer to Chapter 3
for a list of additional Standards.
1) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual) Volume 1 – Highway Development
2) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communication Highway Design
Manual Volume 2, Book 1 Design of Roadways
3) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual Volume 2, Book 2 Design of Roadways
4) Manual on Uniform Control Devices
5) AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (Green Book)
6) AASHTO Roadside Design Guide
9) Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Handbook - Revised Second Edition
10) ADA Standards for Accessible Design

Rev. 1 5.6 - 33
11) CIE 115 International Commission on Technical Report: Lighting of Roads for
Motor and Pedestrian Traffic
12) CIE 140 International Commission on Illumination Technical Report: Road
Lighting Calculations Related Subsections
13) prCEN/Tr13201-1 road lighting Part 1 Selection of lighting classes
14) EN 13201 Road Lighting (part 2-4)
15) BS 5489-1 Code of Practice for the design of road lighting Part 1 Lighting of
Roads and Public Amenity Lighting
16) EN 12464-2 Lighting for Work Places Part 2 Outdoor work places
17) PD 6547 Guidance on the Use BS EN-40-3-1 and EN-3-3
18) EN 40 Lighting Columns
19) EN 12767 Passive Safety Support structures for road equipment –
Requirements Classification and test methods
b. Refer to Subsection 5.6.4 for Site Storm Water Drainage.
c. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.
8. Approvals
B. Commissioning
C. Roadway Design
1. Systems and Classifications
a. The roadway network classification is defined in the following paragraphs. There are
a number of elements of the roadway network terms that are used within the
following paragraphs.
2. Road Classifications
a. Freeway
1) A freeway is a high speed multi-lane divided road with grade separation of all
cross roads and complete control of access. At-grade intersections and direct
access to fronting property are prohibited. Access to and from a freeway is
permitted only by way of on/off ramps or grade separated interchanges. In
addition, all freeways shall be fenced to deter the access of pedestrians and
animals.
(a) Freeways shall be designed for speeds of 120 km/h in urbanized areas
and 140 km/h in rural areas.
b. Expressways
1) Expressways are medium speed multi-lane divided roads with at grade
intersections with other roads and interchanges with freeways. Access to

Rev. 1 5.6 - 34
expressways is controlled and direct access connections involving median

openings will only be permitted in the most exceptional circumstances.
2) Intersections shall be controlled by traffic signals with appropriate coordination
to ensure the optimum flow of traffic to the expressway. Intersections shall be
provided with full curbed channelization. Acceleration and deceleration lanes
shall be provided by widening the hard shoulder to one full lane width and
marking it as an auxiliary lane. Left turn lanes shall be provided with adequate
storage capacity to prevent turning traffic from backing up onto the through
lanes.
3) Expressways shall generally be designed for speeds of 100 km/h.
c. Collector/Boulevard Roads
1) Collector roads are medium speed divided roads which link local roads in
industrial or community areas with the freeways and expressways serving
those areas.
2) Collector road intersections shall require curbed channelization. Left-turn
lanes shall be provided with adequate storage length to provide a smooth flow
of traffic through the intersection and to prevent turning traffic backing up onto
the through lanes.
3) At intersections with divided local roads and other four lane local roads, raised
channelization shall be provided for left-turn lanes. Separate right-turn lanes
are not required.
4) Collector roads shall be designed for speeds of 90 km/h although it is
recognized that instances will arise where posted speeds may have to be
significantly lower than this.
d. Corniche
1) Corniche roads may be considered a subset of collector roads which provide
scenic drives along the water frontage. Design criteria must be presented to
the RCJ for approval.
e. Four Lane Local Road
1) Four lane local roads are divided or undivided roads which provide access to
community area or industrial plants. They shall have four lanes but no
shoulder away from intersections. Sidewalks shall be provided on both sides
of four lane local roads where pedestrians may be expected.
2) Design speeds shall be 70 km/h for four lane local roads.
3) At intersections with divided roads and other four lane local roads, raised
channelization shall be provided for left-turn lanes. Separate right-turn lanes
are not required.
f. Two Lane Local Road
1) Two lane local roads are low speed roads which provide access to industrial
plants/community areas. They have two lanes and a hard shoulder away from
intersections. Sidewalk shall be provided on both sides of two lane local roads
where pedestrians may be expected such as in the secondary industry area,
support industry area and Airport Area.
2) Design speed shall be 70 km/h for two lane local road.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 35
3) Raised channelization shall be provided for left-turn lanes at intersections with

divided roads. At intersections with four lane local roads and other two lane
local roads, left-turn lanes shall not be installed unless the intersection
requires signalization.
g. Residential Roads
1) Residential roads are low speed two-lane roads which provide access to
residences. Residential roads intersect other residential roads and local
roads. They shall not intersect collector roads or expressways.
2) The design speed of residential roads shall be 50 km/h although it is
recognized that instances will arise where posted speeds will be significantly
lower than this.
3. Geometrics and Alignment
a. Sight Distance
1) General
(a) The AASHTO GREEN BOOK Chapter 3 shows the Standards for passing
and stopping sight distance related to design speed. These are the
minimum values to be used in design.
b. Horizontal and Vertical Curves
1) Horizontal Curves
(a) Horizontal alignment shall be designed using the following methods to
meet the sight distance requirements set forth in the AASHTO GREEN
BOOK Chapter 3.
S²
M= +N
8*(R - N)
where,
S = Sight Distance in meters, m
R = Radius of center line inside lane in meters, m
M = Distance from center line inside lane in meters, m

Rev. 1 5.6 - 36
N = Driver's eye and road object displacement from center line in meters,
m (may be assumed to be 1.8 m)
(b) Instead of using the foregoing formulas, the designer may scale the sight
distances from the plans by placing a straight edge on the survey center
line and tangent to the obstruction. Then, the sight distance is taken as the
difference in stationing between one point in question and the point where
the straight edge intersects the center line on the opposite side of the
obstruction. For this procedure, high precision is not necessary. The
scaled distance may be measured to 10 m.
2) Vertical Curves
(a) Vertical alignments of roads shall be designed using the following
methods/standards to accommodate for stopping and passing sight
distances related to design speed on crest and sag vertical curves. Under
no circumstance shall the stopping and passing sight distance be less than
shown in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK Chapter 3.
(b) Stopping Sight Distance on Crest Vertical Curves
A*S²
For S < L: L=
200 *(√h1 + √h2)²
200 *(√h1 + √h2)²

For S > L: L= 2S -
A
Where,
L = Length of vertical curve in meters, m
A = Algebraic Difference in Grade Rate in %
S = Sight Distance in meters, m
h1= Driver eye height in meters normally adopted as 1.05 m above the road surface
h2= Object height in meters normally adopted as 0.20 m above the road surface

Rev. 1 5.6 - 37
(c) Passing Sight Distance on Crest Vertical Curves

Rev. 1 5.6 - 38
(d) Stopping Sight Distance on Sag Vertical Curves
3) Decision Sight Distance on Horizontal and Vertical Curves

(a) At certain locations, sight distance greater than stopping sight distance is
desirable to allow drivers time for decisions without making last minute
erratic maneuvers. Because decision sight distance offers drivers
additional margin for error and affords them sufficient length to maneuver
their vehicles at the same or reduced speed, rather than to just stop, its
values are substantially greater than stopping sight distance.
(b) The decision sight distances in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK Chapter 3
provide values for sight distances that may be appropriate at critical
locations and serve as criteria in evaluating the suitability of the available
sight distances at these locations.
c. Grades
1) Maximum Grades – Maximum Grades of about 4 percent are considered
appropriate for the design of roadways. However, this may increase up to 6
percent for interchange ramps due to limited space. Minimum Grades – Flat

Rev. 1 5.6 - 39
grades may typically provide proper surface drainage on uncurbed highways

where the cross slope is adequate to drain the pavement surface laterally.
With curbed streets, longitudinal grades shall be provided to facilitate surface
drainage. An appropriate minimum grade is typically 0.5 percent. Additional
information is presented in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
d. Superelevation
1) Standard Superelevation - Under normal circumstances, the standard
superelevation rates for various curve radii a 6% maximum rate is used to
provide the maximum safety benefit while minimizing the potential low-speed
operational problems. The actual superelevation provided is determined using
the appropriate emax table referenced in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
Exceptions must be approved by the RCJ.
2) Substandard Superelevation - Lower superelevation rates may be necessary
in areas where restricted speed zones or road intersections are controlling
factors. Such conditions may warrant, for example, a reduction in the
superelevation rate, different rates for each half of the roadbed, or both.
Substandard superelevation must be approved by the RCJ.
3) In warping road areas for drainage, adverse superelevation shall be avoided.
Exceptions must be approved by the RCJ.
4) Axis of Rotation
(a) Undivided Highways
(1) In general, for undivided highways, the axis of rotation for
superelevation shall be the centerline of the roadbed. However, in
special cases where curves are preceded by long relatively level
tangents, the plane of superelevation may be rotated about the
inside edge of the pavement to improve perception of the curve.
(2) On flat gradients, drainage pockets caused by superelevation may
be avoided by changing the axis of rotation from the centerline to
the inside edge of the pavement.
(b) Ramps and Freeway to Freeway Connection
(1) The axis of rotation may be about either edge of pavement or
centerline for multi-lane highways. Appearance and drainage
considerations shall always be taken into account for the selection
of the axis of rotation.
(c) Divided Highways
(1) The axis of rotation shall generally be taken at the median edges of
the carriageway. However, the axis of rotation may be moved to the
centerline of the median to meet particular circumstances. The
selection of the axis of rotation shall always be considered in
conjunction with the design of the profile and superelevation
transition.
5) Superelevation Transition
(a) The superelevation transition generally consists of the superelevation
runoff (length of roadway needed to accomplish the change in cross slope
from a horizontal line to a fully superelevated section or vice versa) and
the crown runoff.
Rev. 1 5.6 - 40
(b) A superelevation transition shall be designed to satisfy the requirements

of safety and comfort and be pleasing in appearance. The length of
superelevation transition shall be based upon the combination of
superelevation rate and width of rotated plane.
(c) With respect to the beginning or ending of a curve, two thirds of the
superelevation run-off is on the tangent approach and one third within the
curve. This results in two thirds of the full superelevation rate at the
beginning or ending of a curve. This may be altered to 50% transition to
occur within the curve to adjust for flat spots or unsightly sags and humps
when alignment is tight.
(d) Superelevation transitions shall be designed in accordance with the
AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
(e) In restrictive situations, such as on two lane highways in mountainous
terrain, interchange ramps, collector roads, frontage roads, etc., where
curve radius and length and tangents between curves are short, standard
superelevation rates and/or transitions may not be attainable. In such
situations, the highest possible superelevation rates and transition length
shall be used, but the rate of change of cross slope shall not exceed 4%
per 20 m.
(f) Superelevation transitions for shoulders cannot be indicated properly on
the same superelevation transition diagram with the carriageway for the
type of diagram shown. The shoulder planes rotational axis lies on the
edge of pavement of the adjacent carriageway. Shoulder superelevation
transitions shall be smooth and compatible with the transition of and shall
not have an algebraic difference greater than 3% on the higher end and
equal to the slope on the lower end of the adjacent pavement.
(g) After a superelevation transition is designed, profiles of edges of pavement
and shoulder shall be reviewed and irregularities removed by introducing
smooth curves. Flat areas which are undesirable from a drainage stand-
point shall be avoided.
(h) Pronounced and unsightly sags may develop on the low side of the
superelevation. These may be corrected by adjusting the grades on the
two edges of pavement throughout the curve.
e. Transitions: Widening and Reductions
1) For roadways that transition from an undivided to divided highway or where
the addition of turn lanes requires an alignment deflection of the approach
lanes, the length of these transitions is a function of design speed and the
horizontal deflection where:
2) L = (2/3) WS for design speed 70 km/h or greater
3) L = WS2/150 for design speed less than 70 km/h
4) Where:
5) L = transition length -m
6) S = design speed –km/hr
7) W = horizontal deflection –m

Rev. 1 5.6 - 41
8) For Temporary traffic zones, use the criteria* below to calculate the taper
length based on the type of taper:
Type of Taper Taper Length
Merging Taper at least L
Shifting Taper at least 0.5 L
Shoulder Taper at least 0.33 L
* Source: MUTCD 2009 Edition
f. Typical Cross-sections
1) General
(a) The AASHTO GREEN BOOK provides guidance on cross sectional
elements as a function the rural or urban environment and the functional
classification of the roadway.
2) Lane Widths and Number of Lanes
(a) Freeways - Standard lane widths of 3.8 m are to be used.
(b) Expressways, Collectors, Boulevards, Corniches, Local and Residential
Roads- Standard lane widths of 3.65 m are to be used.
(c) The number of lanes is generally determined through a planning study that
considers traffic growth forecasts, design period, and desired level of
service.
3) Shoulders
(a) Freeways, Expressways, Collectors and Boulevards - Hard shoulders on
the outside edge of the carriageway shall be 3.0 m wide. On freeways, 2.0
m paved shoulders shall be provided up to a median barrier.
(b) Corniches Local and Residential Roads- Parking lanes when provided
shall be 2.5 m and separated from the travel way with valley gutter.
TABLE 5.6.3.A: SHOULDER WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Inside Shoulder Outside Shoulder

Width Width
Freeway 2.0 m 3.0 m
Expressway N/A 3.0 m
Collector
Community/Industrial N/A 3.0 m
Local
4 Lane – Industrial N/A 2.5 m parking
2 Lane - Industrial N/A 2.5 m parking
4) Curbs
(a) Curb and gutter shall be used on secondary roads with design speeds of
70 km/h or less in areas of limited right-of-way or urban type land use.
(b) Curbs shall not be used on Freeways unless otherwise directed by the RC.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 42
5) Median Types and Uses

(a) In industrial area, freeway medians shall be a minimum of 14 m wide, and
with cross slopes 1:10 or flatter. In the community area, the freeway
medians shall be 8 m wide.
(b) Unpaved medians up to 20 m wide shall be sloped downward from the
adjoining shoulders to form a shallow valley in the center. Cross slopes
shall be 1:10 or flatter; 1:20 being preferred. Slopes as steep as 1:6 are
acceptable in exceptional case when necessary for drainage, stage
construction, etc. In medians that are 20 m and wider, the cross slopes
shall be treated as separate roadways.
TABLE 5.6.3.B: MEDIAN WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Median Width

Freeway
Industrial 14 m
Community 8m
Expressway 6.0 m
Collector
Community/Industrial 6.0 m
Local
4 Lane – Industrial 0 or 6.0 m
2 Lane - Industrial N/A
6) On-Street Parking
(a) Where used, a parallel parking lane a least 2.5 m wide shall be provided
on one or both sides of the street, as appropriate to the conditions and
intensity of development.
TABLE 5.6.3.C: PARKING WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Parallel parking Width

Freeway N/A N/A
Expressway N/A N/A
Collector
Community N/A N/A
Industrial
Local
4 Lane – Community Yes 2.5 m
2 Lane – Community Yes 2.5 m
Residential Yes/Yes 2.5 m
7) Cross-slopes and Side-Slopes
(a) Normal cross-slope on the carriageway shall be 2%. Except as described
below, hard shoulders may be sloped away from the carriageway up to
5% (carriageway on normal cross-slopes) to provide efficient drainage. On

Rev. 1 5.6 - 43
super elevated sections, the break in cross-slope between the hard

shoulder and carriageway shall never exceed 3%.
(b) For safety, aesthetics and erosion protection, fore slopes shall be 1V:6H
up to 3.0 m fill height. For fore slopes steeper than 1V:4H, consideration
to providing guardrail protection shall be determined based on the
AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
(c) Back slopes shall be 1V:3H or flatter to accommodate maintenance
equipment. Back slopes steeper than 1V:3H shall be evaluated with regard
to soil stability and potential crash severity. Retaining walls or slope
stabilization shall be considered where space restrictions would otherwise
result in slopes steeper than 1V:2H.
(d) Additional guidance regarding pavement cross slopes and side slopes
may be found in the AASHTO GREEN BOOK.
8) Right-of-Way Widths
(a) Roadway right-of-way is only a single component of the overall right-of-
way required. A/E and/or EPC Contractor must establish the actual right-
of-way required for each roadway segment based on the roadway
classification and configuration; as well as all master-planned utilities in
each corridor. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit these right-of-
way requirements to the RCJ for review and approval.
TABLE 5.6.3.D: MINIMUM RIGHT OF WAY WIDTHS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Minimum Width Other Considerations

Freeway 80 m Road ROW only
Expressway 80 m Including Utilities
Collector Including Utilities
Community 60 m
Industrial 60 m
Local Including Utilities
4 Lane – Community 60 m
4 Lane - Industrial 60 m
2 Lane – Community 27 m
2 Lane - Industrial 27 m
Residential 20 m Including Utilities
9) Clearances
(a) Horizontal Clearances
(1) The horizontal clearance to bridge piers, abutments and retaining
walls and other obstructions for freeways and expressways shall be
determined on the basis of engineering judgment with the objective
of eliminating fixed objects from near the edge of the shoulder
wherever economically feasible. A horizontal clearance of 9 m or
more from the edge of the carriageway is desirable, with 5 m as a
minimum. Lesser clearances may be used where span length,
median width or other controls make the desired clearance
unreasonable.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 44
(2) The following are absolute minimum horizontal clearance Standards

for bridge piers, abutments, and retaining walls and other
obstructions which, in the case of freeways and expressways, may
be used only under restrictive conditions.
(3) Clearances are measured from the edge of the carriageway.
(4) On the outer edges of all roads the minimum clearance shall be 5
m. On the median edges of multi-lane divided roads the minimum
clearance shall be 3.5 m for freeways and 2 m for other roads.
(5) Greater clearances than the above minimums shall be provided
wherever physically/economically viable and additional clearances
must be provided where dictated by sight lines.
(6) Guardrails shall be considered for all abutments and piers closer
than 6 m to the edge of carriageway.
(b) Vertical Clearances
(1) The minimum vertical clearance shall be 5.5 m over the entire width
of the carriageway including hard shoulders; clearance to overhead
power lines shall conform to Saudi Electric Company (SEC)
Standards.
(2) Lateral Clearance for Elevated Structures
(3) The minimum horizontal clearance between elevated highway
structures, such as freeway viaducts and ramps, and adjoining
buildings, or other structures, shall be 4.5 m for single-deck
structures and 6 m for double-deck structures. Spot encroachments
on this clearance shall be permissible only with approval of the RCJ.
(c) Structures Across or Adjacent to Railroads
(1) Normal Horizontal and Vertical Clearances
(i) All curbs, including median curbs, shall be designed with 3 m of
clearance from the track centerline measured normal thereto
unless otherwise instructed.
(ii) The principal minimum clearances which affect the design of
highway structures and curbs are summarized in Tables
5.6.3.E and 5.6.3.F. Those minimum horizontal and vertical
clearances shall be confirmed on a case-by-case basis at the
early design stage (Design Basis Report) and be agreed with
the RC, the operator and SAR.
(iii) The need for collision walls shall be reviewed as part of the
design at an early stage of the project and confirmed on a
case-by-case basis.
TABLE 5.6.3.E: MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCES ABOVE HIGHEST RAIL
Type of Structure
Normal Freight

Rev. 1 5.6 - 45
Highway overhead and other

structures including through 7.5 m
railroad bridges
TABLE 5.6.3.F: MIN HORIZ. CLEARANCES TO CENTERLINE OF NEAREST TRACK

1
Curved Track Clearances
1
Tangent Normal When Space is Limited
Type of Off Track
Track Curved
Structure Maintenance Curves from 0 Curves of
Clearances Track
to 12° 12° or More
Through
None 2.52 m 2.8 2 m
railroad bridge
15.5 m clear to
face of pier or 2.6 m (2.6
Highway
abutment on minimum m+1.25 cm)
overhead and 2.6 m 2.9 m
side railroad per degree of
other structures
requires for curve
equipment road
Curbs 3.0 m
Notes
1. The minimum, in general is 0.3 m greater than for tangent track.
2. Greater clearance is necessary if walkway is required.
(2) Off-Track Maintenance Clearance

(i) 5.5 m of horizontal clearance is required. This clearance is
intended for sections or railroad where the railroad company is
using or definitely plans to use off-track maintenance
equipment. This clearance is provided on one side of the
railroad ROW. The railroad is required to present a statement
that off-track maintenance equipment is being used, or is
definitely planned to be used, along that section of the railroad
ROW crossed by the overhead structure.
(3) Walkway Clearances Adjacent to Railroads
(i) All plans involving construction adjacent to railroads shall be
such that there is no encroachment on the walkway adjoining
the track. Where excavations encroach into walkway areas, the
Contractor is required to construct a temporary walkway with
handrail.
(d) Approval
(1) All plans involving clearances from a railroad track shall be
submitted to the SAR (Saudi Railway Company) for approval as to
railroad interests.
(2) To avoid delays, early consideration must be given to railroad
problems when design is started on a project.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 46
4. Roadway Elements
a. Design Criteria
(a) General
(1) Design Classes shall be established in accordance with subsection
5.6.3.C.2.
2) Design Vehicle
(a) General
(1) Design Vehicles covered under this section determine minimum
geometrical requirements to be considered for the design of the
road network. For structural (load) considerations, reference is
made to subsection 5.4.2 of these guidelines.
(2) Design Vehicle shall be established using the Design Classes and
typical distribution of traffic characteristics.
(3) Design vehicles shown in Table 5.6.3.G are standard vehicles and
may need to be adjusted to suit project specific requirements. The
design vehicle(s) proposed by the A/E or EPC Contractor shall be
documented in the first submission of the Design Basis Report for
RC review and approval.
(4) A swept path analysis with the required design vehicle(s) shall be
provided by the A/E or EPC Contractor for all critical movements or
as requested by the RC at an early design stage to confirm the
feasibility of the proposed layout prior moving onto detailed design.
TABLE 5.6.3.G: MINIMUM DESIGN VEHICLE FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Design Vehicle

Freeway WB-19
Expressway WB-19
Collector
Community WB-19
Industrial WB-19
Local
4 Lane – Community S-BUS 12
4 Lane - Industrial WB-19
2 Lane – Community S-BUS 12
2 Lane - Industrial WB-19
Residential S-BUS 12
3) Driver Performance
(a) General
(1) The Road Safety Audit will evaluate if there is any need for special
design requirements to accommodate driver performance.
4) Traffic Characteristics and Design Volume
(a) General

Rev. 1 5.6 - 47
(1) The traffic analysis completed in Subsection 5.6.2.C shall be used

to establish the design requirements; however these are not allowed
to reduce the requirements required by HDM Volume 2 Section
1.03.
5) Design Speed
(a) General
2.02. Typical design speeds are outlined TABLE 5.6.3.H.
TABLE 5.6.3.H: DESIGN AND POSTED SPEED LIMITS FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Design Speed Posted Speed

Freeway
Rural 140 Km/hr 110 Km/hr
Urban 120 Km/hr 100 Km/hr
Expressway
Community 100 Km/hr 80 Km/hr
Industrial 100 Km/hr 80 Km/hr
Collector
Community 90 Km/hr 70 Km/hr
Industrial 90 Km/hr 70 Km/hr
Local
Community 70 Km/hr Divided 60 Km/hr Undivided 50 Km/hr
Industrial 70 Km/hr Divided 60 Km/hr Undivided 50 Km/hr
Residential 50 Km/hr 40 Km/hr
6) Capacity and Level of Service
(a) General
2.02.
7) Access Management
(a) General
(1) The HDM Volume 2 shall be used to establish the level of access
control for each facility.
8) Access Criteria and Driveway Design
(a) General
(1) The HDM Volume 2 shall be used to establish the level of access
control for each facility.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 48
TABLE 5.6.3.I: ACCESS CONTROL FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Type of Access Control

Freeway Full No Direct Access
Expressway Full No Direct Access
Collector
Community Partial Turn
Industrial Restrictions possible
Local
4 Lane – Community None
4 Lane - Industrial
2 Lane – Community
2 Lane - Industrial
Residential None
(2) Access spacing shall be based on the District Master Plan.
Accesses to individual sites must comply with the roadway
classification access control and be approved by the RCJ. Access
Points shall be coordinated with adjacent development and joint
access points shall be used where ever practical.
9) Pedestrian Access
(a) General
(1) The District Master Plans illustrate the primary pedestrian circulation
routes within the Community.
10) Sidewalks
(a) General
(1) The typical sidewalk width requirements are outlined in TABLE
5.6.3.J.
(2) Requirements for sidewalks in areas with light or support industries
shall be the same as for community areas unless otherwise
instructed.
TABLE 5.6.3.J: MINIMUM SIDEWALK WIDTH FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Sidewalk Width

Freeway N/A
Expressway N/A
Collector
Community 2.0 m
Industrial N/A
Local
4 Lane – Community 1.5 m
Residential 1.5 m

Rev. 1 5.6 - 49
11) Bicycle Facilities

(a) General
(1) The District Plans have documented the bicycle systems that will be
required. TABLE 5.6.3.K summarize the typical widths.
(2) Requirements for cycleways in areas with light or support industries
shall be the same as for community areas unless otherwise
instructed.
TABLE 5.6.3.K MINIMUM BICYCLE PATH WIDTH FOR ROADWAY CLASSIFICATIONS
Classification Bicycle Path Width

Freeway N/A
Expressway N/A
Collector
Community 1.5 m
Industrial N/A
Local
Residential 1.5 m
12) Safety
(a) General
(1) The HDM and the Roadway Safety Audit shall be used to review
safety for each facility.
13) Environment
(a) Environmental requirements shall be completed in accordance with
Subsection 3.5.3 A.
14) Use of Recyclable Materials
(a) No design requirements.
b. Drainage
1) General Aspects
(a) Concentrations of sheet flow across roadways are to be avoided.
Particular attention shall be given to reversal points of superelevation
where shoulder and gutter slopes may direct flows across the roadway.
(b) Ponding of runoff along roadways is not allowed
(c) Width of Flow/Gutter Spread
(1) The width of flow/gutter spread adjacent to the curb shall not
exceed half a travel lane or the full parking lane or hard shoulders
directly adjacent to the curb. In the case of steep gradients, the
water spread shall not exceed 1 m.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 50
2) Hydrology
(a) Hydrology methodology and modeling shall be completed in accordance
with Subsection 5.6.4.C.
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.C for hydrologic methodologies required.
3) Cross Drainage
(a) Culverts
(1) Refer Subsection 5.6.4.D.
4) Roadside Drainage (Median Drainage, Ditches, Overside Drains, Curb and
Gutters, Inlet Types and Design)
(a) Median Drainage
(1) Drainage Across the Median
(i) When it is necessary for sheet flow to cross flush medians, it
shall be intercepted by the use of slotted drains or other
suitable alternative facilities
(ii) When determining the run-off from median areas, design
calculations must take into account the type of median planting
or surface cover.
(2) Grade
(i) The flattest allowable longitudinal slope or grade is 0.25% for
earthen medians and 0.2% for paved median waterways.
(ii) General Considerations: Economy in median drainage may be
achieved by locating inlets to utilize available nearby culverts or
the collector system of a roadway drainage installation. The
inlet capacity may be increased by placing it in a local
depression. Use of a slotted pipe at sag points where a local
depression might be necessary may be an alternative solution
to a grated catch basin.
(b) Ditches
(1) Ditches
(i) The flattest longitudinal slope or grade is 0.25% for earthen
ditches and 0.2% for paved ditches
(ii) Ditches shall be designed in accordance with Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design
(c) Overside Drains
(1) Overside drains shall only be utilized when roadway runoff may be
conveyed directly to an open channel.
(i) Design engineer shall provide calculations and details to
ensure that water within the overside drain and open channel
will not impact the roadway, roadway drainage system and the
earthworks.
(d) Curb and Gutters

Rev. 1 5.6 - 51
(1) Design
(i) The water spread adjacent to the curb shall not exceed half a
travel lane or the full parking lane or hard shoulders directly
adjacent to the curb. In the case of steep gradients, the water
spread shall not exceed 1 m.
(ii) Longitudinal Slope
(iii) Shall be no flatter than 0.5%
(iv) Cross Slopes
(v) The cross slope of 0.60m gutters shall be 8% toward the curb.
Pavement slopes on superelevated roadways extend the full
width of the gutter, except that the gutter on the low side shall
not be less than 8% toward the curb. Flatter cross slopes on
gutters reduce inlet efficiency and gutter capacity and shall be
avoided.
(e) Inlet Types and Design
(1) Inlet Types
(i) There are five (5) main groups of inlets, these are:
(ii) Curb opening inlets: These inlets have openings parallel to the
direction of flow
(iii) Grate inlets: These inlets have a grate opening in the pan of
the gutter or waterway.
(iv) Combination inlets: These inlets have both a curb and grate
opening
(v) Wall opening inlets: Intake into these inlets is normal to the
direction of flow
(vi) Slotted drain inlets: These inlets have a continuous slot which
is flush with the pavement
(vii) The choice of the type of inlet will be influenced, in general, by
site conditions, hydraulics and safety. Although the hydraulic
capacity of any type of inlet is closely tied to the size and type
of intake opening, the capacity is greatly increased by
depressing the opening below the normal flow line of the
waterway or gutter.
(viii) Local Depressions shall meet the following requirements:
(ix) Valley Medians: In median on a grade, the depression shall
extend a minimum of 3 m upstream, 1.8 m laterally, measured
from the edge of the inlet opening. In grade sag, the
depression shall extend a minimum of 3 m on all sides. No
median local depression, however, shall encroach on the
shoulder area. The depth of depression normally shall be 0.11
m.
(x) Paved Gutter Flares: The flow line at entrance shall be
depressed at least 150 mm below the shoulder level for
spillways and minimum of 200 mm for down drains. No change

Rev. 1 5.6 - 52
in shape which results in a depression within the shoulder shall

be made. For spillways, the minimum gutter flare length is 3 m.
(xi) Roadside Gutter and Ditch Locations: Regardless of the type of
intake, the opening of a drop inlet in a roadside gutter or ditch
shall be depressed from 0.11 to 0.15 m below the flow line of
the waterway and the paved transition shall extend 3 m
upstream.
(xii) Curb and Gutter Depressions: 1) this type of depression is
carefully proportioned in length, width, depth, and shape. To
best preserve the design shape, construction shall normally be
of concrete. No changes other than in width or depth are
permissible. Further requirements for curb and gutter
depressions are: (a) Width (parallel to road): Normally 1.2 m,
but for wide flows or a series of closely spaced inlets, 1.8 m. (b)
Depth: (i) Where traffic considerations govern, the depth
commonly used is 30 mm. Use the maximum of 80 mm
wherever feasible at locations where the resulting curb height
would not be objectionable. (c) Type of Pavement: (i) Local
depressions outside the roadbed are usually surfaced with 50
mm asphalt concrete.
(xiii) General Notes on Design: Except for traffic safety reasons, a
local depression shall be provided at every inlet even though
the waterway is unpaved. Where the size of intake opening is
in question, a depression of maximum depth shall be
considered before adding additional inlets.
(2) Location of Inlets
(i) Inlets shall be placed according to the width of flow (gutter
spread) on the pavement criteria, and at low points,
superelevation rollovers, flat areas and upstream of
intersections and driveways.
(3) Efficiency of Inlets
(i) The efficiency of inlets shall be assessed after considering the
width of flow, the size and type of inlet grating, the rainfall and
longitudinal gradient of the road. Refer to The Kingdom of
(4) Design Procedure
(i) Inlet Type Design: The efficient spacing of road inlets depends
on several factors. The main consideration is the maximum
tolerable flow of water to the approach inlet during storm
rainfall and the efficiency of the inlet when dealing with this
flow. The following design procedure shall be employed for the
design of inlet spacing
(ii) The water flow at the edge of a curbed road shall be calculated
from the empirical formula due to Manning. Refer to The
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway
Design Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design

Rev. 1 5.6 - 53
(iii) The drainage area contributing the water drained by the inlet
may then be calculated. Refer to The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,
Ministry of Communications Highway Design Manual Section
1.10 Hydraulic Design
(iv) Finally, the inlet spacing may be obtained by dividing the
drained area by the width of the road, thereby defining the
areas contributing to each storm inlet. Refer to The Kingdom of
5) Subsurface Drainage
(a) Storm drainage piping, manholes and junction structures shall be
designed in accordance with Subsection 5.6.4.C and 5.6.4.D.
(b) Groundwater
(1) During design, consideration shall be given to effects from
groundwater. The level of groundwater may fluctuate greatly, over a
period of a few months or over a period of many years.
(2) Drainage pipes located within areas where contact with groundwater
within their design life is likely shall have water tight joints. If
groundwater contact is likely and the surrounding soils are highly
erodible, consideration shall be given to wrapping the pipe joint in
filter fabric. The fabric shall cover a length of 1.2 m along the pipe,
centered on the joint. The design of groundwater control measures
must be coordinated with the RCJ.
6) Channel and Shore Protection - Erosion Control
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.D.4
7) Underground Disposal
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.D
8) Storm Water Management
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.6.4.D
c. Signage
1) All Signage shall conform to RC Standard Details.
d. Roadway Lighting
1) Street and roadway lighting shall be designed in accordance with CIE 115
International Commission on Illumination Technical Report: Lighting of Roads
for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic and the following CEN standards that are
derived from the aforementioned CIE documents. The following tables detail
the associated CEN EN and BS/BS EN standards that implement the
requirements of CIE 115.
Document
Date
Reference Title Publisher Status Remarks
Published
No.
BS5489-1 Code of practice for BS1 Acitve 2013 The general design
the design Road standard for the UK

Rev. 1 5.6 - 54
Document
Date
Published
No.
Lighting Part 1: includes variations for
Lighting of roads white light sources
and public amenity and SSL/LED and
areas control systems
BS EN 12665 Light and Lighting - BSI/CEN Active 2011
Basic terms and
criteria for
specifying lighting
requirements
BS EN Lighting of BSI/CEN Active 2007 Mentions roads but
12464-2 workplaces – Part includes
2: Outdoor work recommedations for
places all other external
workplaces
BS EN Lighting of Sports BSI/CEN Active 2007
13191-2 Facilities
prCEN/TR Road Lighting part CEN Active 2003 Currently being
1301-1 1 Selection of revised
lighting Classes
BS EN13201- Road lighting Part BSI/CEN Active 2013 Includes classification
2 2: Performance of road types and
requirements pedestrian crossings
BS EN13201- Road lighting - Part BSI/CEN Active 2008
3 3: Calculation of
performance
BS EN13201- Road lighting Part BSI/CEN Active 2003 Uses CIE
1 4: Methods of methodology
measuring lighting
performance
BS EN40 Passive safety of BSI/CEN Active 2003
Support
BS EN 12767 structures for road Active
equipment –
requirements,
classification and
test methods

Rev. 1 5.6 - 55
Document
Date
Published
No.
BS EN Luminaires- BSI/CEN Active 2008
60598-1 general
requirements and
tests
BS EN Luminaires- BSI/CEN Active 2011
60598-2- particular
3+A1 requirements-
Luminaires for road
and street Lighting
PD 6547 Guidance on the BSI/CEN Active 2009
use of BS EN 40-3-
1 & BS EN 40-3-3
GACAR 139 part 139 Saudi Active 2018 Aviation safety
‘Certification And General envelope from which
Operations: Authority the Height of
Aerodromes’ of Civil Obstacles near
Aviation airports and helipads
Regulatio can be derived
n
ICAO Annex Annex 14 volume 1 Internation Active 2018 Aviation safety
14 Aerodrome Design al Civil envelope from which
and Operations Aviation the Height of
Organisati Obstacles near
on airports and helipads
can be derived
Notes:
It should be noted that the CEN standards are the core standards and member countries often
make amendments to suit their individual situations and national road traffic policies i.e. Din and
BS EN standards.
BS 5489 is particular to the UK but includes additional information not included in euro-norms.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 56
The following table identifies best practice guidance documents which should be utilized to ensure
the correct interpretation of CIE/CEN methodology.
Document
Date
Published
No.
LG6 Lighting guide: Society of Revised 2006
The Outdoor Light and version due
environment Lighting for
Publication
- SLL Code for Society of 2013 Has an easy to read

Lighting Light and overview of the deign
Lighting procedures for CEN
methodology for road
lighting (chapter3)
- SLL Code for Society of 2012 Gives background and

Lighting Light and information on the
Lighting uses of lighting,
equipment (both
internal and external)
and recommendations
for wide range of
applications.
PLG02 The Application Institute of 2013

of Conflict Areas Lighting
on the Highways Professionals
PLG03 Lighting for Institute of 2012

Subsidiary Roads Lighting
Professionals
PLG04 Road lighting Institute of 2013

Part 4: Methods Lighting
of measuring Professionals
lighting
performance
PLG06 Passive safety of Institute of -

Support Lighting
Professionals
PLG07 High Masts for Institute of 2013

Lighting and Lighting
CCTV Professionals

Rev. 1 5.6 - 57
Document
Date
Published
No.
TR05 Brightness of Institute of 2001
Illuminated Lighting
Advertisements Professionals
TR12 Lighting of Institute of 2007

Pedestrian Lighting
Crossings Professionals
TR22 Lighting Supports Institute of 2007

Lighting
Professionals
- Lighting and Institute of 1999

Crime Lighting
Professionals
- Guide to the Institute of 1999

procurement of Lighting
street lighting Professionals
through PFI
TR23 Lighting of Cycle Institute of 1998

Tracks Lighting
Professionals
TR24 Public Lighting Institute of 2009

Policy Lighting
Professionals
TR25 Lighting for Institute of 2002

Traffic Calming Lighting
Features Professionals
TR26 Painting of Institute of 2003

Lighting Columns Lighting
Professionals
TR27 Variable Lighting Institute of -

Levels for Lighting
Highways Professionals
TR28 Measurement of Institute of 2007

Road Lighting Lighting
Performance on Professionals
Site

Rev. 1 5.6 - 58
Document
Date
Published
No.
- Lamp Institute of - Technology is old but
replacement Lighting gives an interesting
policy in Local Professionals overview to
Authority Street Operational costs
Lighting services
TR29 White Light Institute of 2008 Interesting

Lighting background to
Professionals lowering lighting levels
recommended for
white light sources but
does not consider SSL
TR30 Passive Safety Institute of 2011

Lighting
Professionals
(a) The following criteria as presented in this standard shall be utilized:

(1) Lighting applications ( CEN pd/TR 13201-1
(2) Lighting Classes for Roadways (ME S CE and G) EN 13201-2
(3) Roadway Luminance Requirements for Motorways Strategic routes
and main and secondary distributer
(4) Illuminance Requirements for subsidiary and Link Roadways
(5) Lighting Classes for Conflict Areas, Intersections and Town/City
Centres (CE)
(6) Illuminance, Uniformity and Threshold Increment Percentage
Requirements for Conflict Areas
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop recommendations for
maintained average and/or minimum illuminance/luminance uniformity
threshold increment percentage and surround ratio based on the
processes outlined by CIE 115 and the associated CEN documents.
These recommendations shall be summarized and presented to the RCJ
for review and approval at 10% design stage. This summary shall be
provided with the content and format similar to TABLE 5.6.3.L.
(c) Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information
regarding lighting for exterior applications.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 59
TABLE 5.6.3.L: ROADWAY LIGHTING LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS

Luminous
Surro
Maintained Uniformity intensity
Subsidiary Threshold und
Conflict Maintained Average Overall and cd/klm
Lighting Increment % ratio
Area minimum Illuminance longitudinal
Type of Road Class Road Class (%)
Class Luminance G class
(ME)
(C) (cd/m2)
(S)
Ul High Low
qo lx Uo min 70 80 90
min Speed Speed
Motorways -
(Freeways)
Strategic routes -
(Expressways)
Strategic routes -
(major )
Main Distributor -
(Collectors)
(to be assessed) -
Corniche
Interchanges -
Intersections -
(Secondary -
Distributor) Local
2 & 4 Lane
Secondary -
Distributor)
Divided Local
Secondary
Secondary -
Distributor) Local
2 Lane Tertiary
Subsidiary
(Residential &
Loop Roads)
Subsidiary
(Cul-de-sac)
Pedestrian
Walkways
Cycleways
(d) Light source and lamp types for roadway lighting shall be high pressure
sodium (HPS), metal halide (MH) or light emitting diode (LED) as
determined from review of existing lighting in the vicinity and as approved

Rev. 1 5.6 - 60
by the RCJ. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop

recommendations on the proposed light source and lamp type and shall
prepare a summary table of these recommendations to submit to the RCJ
for review and approval. This summary shall be provided with the content
and format similar to TABLE 5.6.3.M.
TABLE 5.6.3.M: LIGHT SOURCE AND LAMP TYPE RECOMMENDATIONS
Light Source
Type of Road LED Lamp Type(s)
HPS MH Note
Note 3
Freeways ⚫ ⚫ 2
Expressways strategic
routes ⚫ ⚫ 2
Major stratejic routes ⚫ ⚫
Collectors/Boulevard
distributers ⚫ ⚫ 2
Corniche distributers ⚫ ⚫ 2
Interchange – Cloverleaf
conflict areas ⚫ ⚫ 2
Interchange – Trumpet
conflict area ⚫ ⚫ 2
Interchange – Diamond
conflict area ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ 1, 2
Local 2 & 4 Lane link
roads ⚫ 2
Divide Local Secondary
Link roads ⚫ ⚫ 2
Local 2 Lane Tertiary link
roads ⚫ ⚫ 2
Residential & Loop
Roads subsidiary ⚫ ⚫ 2
Cul-de-sac subsidary ⚫ ⚫ 2
Pedestrian Walkways ⚫ ⚫ 2
Cycleways ⚫ ⚫ 2
Notes:

Rev. 1 5.6 - 61
1. Diamond Interchange lighting shall be HPS and transition to MH at the end of the
ramp.
2. Refer to paragraph 5.5.1.M.2 Light Source for additional information regarding the
characteristics of the various light sources.
3. LED lighting shall be utilized as first choice only with prior agreement with the RCJ.
(e) Roadway lighting mounting heights and location shall be determined from
the type of roadway and site conditions. TABLE 5.6.3.N provides
guidance for the typical mounting conditions for the various types of roads.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize this table to develop the
appropriate design for roadway lighting. It is understood that variations
from this guide may be necessary to adapt to site conditions, especially at
sites located close to airports, airfields, helipads, etc.which may require
adjustments to comply with local and international aviation safety
requirements. The proposed variations shall be presented to the RCJ for
TABLE 5.6.3.N: ROADWAY LIGHTING MOUNTING HEIGHT & LOCATION GUIDELINES
Mounting Height Mounting Location
Staggered or
Single Side
Type of Road
Opposite
One Side
Median
9-12 m
Notes
Notes
6-9 m
12 m
5m
Freeways ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Expressways ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Collectors/Boulevards ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Corniche ⚫ ⚫
Interchanges – Cloverleaf
conflict areas 1,2
Interchanges – Trumpet
conflict areas ⚫ ⚫
Interchanges – Diamond
conflict areas ⚫ ⚫
Local Roads (2 & 4 Lane) ⚫ ⚫
Residential Roads 3 ⚫ ⚫ 3
Divided Local Roads 3 ⚫ ⚫

Rev. 1 5.6 - 62
Mounting Height Mounting Location
Staggered or
Single Side
Type of Road
Opposite
One Side
Median
9-12 m
Notes
Notes
6-9 m
12 m
5m
Cul-de-sac 3 ⚫ ⚫ 3
Notes:
1. High mast lighting shall be used at cloverleaf and trumpet interchanges but not
at diamond interchanges.
2. Diamond interchange ramp lighting shall be mounted on 12 m poles.
3. Luminaire mounting height and location shall be as required. Include pole, wall
and bollard lighting as appropriate for the installation.
4. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information
regarding pole selection.
5. In cases when interchanges or roads segments are located in proximity to
airports, airfields, helipads etc., the mounting height of the street lighting should
be adjusted based on the Saudi aviation safety standards and international
aviation safety standards
2) Parking Area Lighting

(a) Refer to paragraph 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information.
(b) Car park lighting shall be assessed in accordance with EN 12464-2 2007
3) Sidewalk Lighting
(a) Refer to paragraph 5.5.1.M.4 Exterior Lighting for additional information.
4) Lighting Controls
(a) General
(1) Roadway lighting shall be Controlled and monitored by the lighting by
the Lighting Management System (LMS) .
(2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate level of
control strategy for roadway and street lighting based upon the
number of street lights to be installed.
(3) 1-50 luminaires Electronic programmable control gear set to stand
alone mode.
(4) Over 50 luminaires- local programmable outstation connected by
either wireless or power line control as defined by the RC chosen
LMS strategy.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 63
(5) Programmed for Remote monitoring and control when central system
is available.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate control
strategy for roadway lighting. The recommended control strategies shall
be summarized and submitted to the RCJ for review and approval. The
summary shall be submitted in a format and content similar to TABLE
5.6.3.O.
(c) Lighting management system (LMS) DALI requirements at luminaire
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the LMS equipment and
design philosophy based upon the design from the RC’s preferred. LMS
supplier (to be confirmed). The LMS system shall provide the following
functionality using the DALI protocol: The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
select the appropriate level of control strategy for roadway and street
lighting the LMS based upon the road classification usage of the road and
the light source technology within the luminaire. The LMS system shall be
designed by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to be comply fully with
operational protocol specification for DALI in IEC 62386. The DALI
protocol exists between the Light source and the ballast/driver the DALI 2-
way communications are to be converted by the LMS into the luminaire
to Feeder pillar communication protocol either power-line signaling or
wireless telemetry. The Dali Ballast/driver shall provide the full DALI
specification of control and feedback functionality -
(1) Dimming of the lamp within the prescribed dimming range specified
by the lamp and ballast manufacturer.
(2) No more than 10 luminaires per circuit
(3) Each luminaire shall be individually addressable and provide full 2
way communication between.
(4) Each Dali luminaire shall be able to be assigned its address from
area controller and the following
(5) Power ON, Maximum, system failure, fade time and rate groups
assigned to ballast, Light scene values assigned to ballasts.
(6) The Dali ballast communication shall include all 11 Status feedback
messages luminaire On Luminaire Off Energy level> Hours run ,
Lamp condition Ballast condition
(7) Assigning of a group of luminaires from area controller
(d) Lighting management system (LMS) control requirements at the area
controller (Located at street lighting transformer panel)
The area controller shall receive and transmit control/command functions
to and status messages received from all the individual luminaires
programmed on to the area controller. The area controller shall be able to
be pre-programmed and hold luminaire programming within its memory,
The area controller shall have its own integral CPU and non-volatile
memory. The area controller shall be able to operate in stand-alone
function and be incorporated into a city wide sever based LMS with remote
programming capabilities from prescribed terminals connected to the
servers.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 64
(e) Lighting Management system Central Control and Monitoring

The LMS shall be capable of being expanded into a full city wide system
capable of being integrated into a wider city asset management system.
The LMS shall have database management software to allow the
interrogation of the LMS for energy usage, component failures and
maintenance scheduling. The LMS shall allow the reprogramming of both
individual luminaires and groups of Luminaires. The servers are to be
located within KSA and shall be fully accessible to RC staff by
appointment.
TABLE 5.6.3.O: ROADWAY LIGHTING CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS
Central Control
Programmed Time Clock

Individual Photocell
Common Photocell
Application
Roadway ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ 2
Street ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ 2
Interchanges ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ 2
Parking ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ 2
Sidewalk ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ 2
Notes:
1. Table content is provided as an example for
content and format and does not include all
exterior applications or control means that
may be used. A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall include all appropriate applications for
the facility being designed.
2. 2. In exceptional cases, where lighting circuits
are shared with signal or irrigation loads, each
luminaire shall be equipped with a photocell.
5) Power Distribution
(a) Roadway lighting circuits shall provide power for light poles, freeway signs,
and other such lighting loads required after sunset.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 65
(b) Traffic signals and irrigation systems shall be fed from unswitched bus (i.e.
not controlled by the contactor). In exceptional cases, where lighting
circuits are shared with signal or irrigation loads, each luminaire shall be
equipped with a photocell.
(c) Roadway lighting feeders shall be direct buried armored cable, except
under road crossings where cables shall be installed in PVC conduits.
(1) Feeders shall be fed from panels included with roadway lighting
transformers.
(2) Feeder cables shall be in continuous runs without being cut at the
splices.
(3) Cables shall loop from pole to pole. Cable runs shall be connected at
the fuse block or circuit breaker terminals inside the pole.
(4) Branch circuits to individual poles shall be spliced from the feeder
cables.
(d) Street lighting cables in Community area and corniche, most of which will
be under paved areas, shall be installed in PVC conduit.
(1) Circuits shall be fed from street lighting pedestals or panels.
(2) Minimum size conduit shall be 50 mm.
(e) Voltage drop for feeders and circuits which supply roadway and street
lighting shall be considered. Cables shall be sized to limit the total (feeder
and branch circuit) voltage drop at the farthest fixture to 5% or below.
Cable size shall be uniform throughout the run for each circuit.
(f) Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 Electrical for additional information regarding
power distribution.
6) Design
(a) Luminance, illuminance, lighting uniformity, and disability glare shall be
calculated in accordance with CIE 140 International Commission on
Illumination Technical Report: Road Lighting Calculations and listed CEN
standards. Designs shall be undertaken with RC approved lighting design
software and shall cover all classifications of road within the project and
all conflict areas.
(b) Lighting calculations shall be prepared for all roadway applications and
shall be submitted to the RCJ for review and approval. Refer to paragraph
5.5.1.M.5 Lighting Calculations for additional information.
7) Environmental Condition
(a) Luminaires, control gear lighting control equipment shall be capable of
operating to the manufacturers published performance criteria in the
following arrangements.
(b) Outdoor Sheltered - Maximum 40°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to Paragraphs
(1), (2) and (3) below.
(c) Outdoor Sheltered - Maximum 40°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to Paragraphs
(1), (2) and (3) below.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 66
(1) "Sheltered" refers to permanent, ventilated enclosures or buildings,

or permanently fixed sunshades with a top and three sides.
(2) For instruments which dissipate internal heat and are installed in
custom engineered enclosures (e.g., enclosures not included in the
original manufacturer's temperature certification), an additional 15°C
shall be added to the above maximum temperatures. An example,
for "indoor air conditioned" installation, the equipment must perform
at 35 + 15 = 50°C.
(3) Similarly, for the "outdoor unsheltered" case, the equipment shall be
designed for a maximum operating temperature of 65 + 15 = 80°C.
8) For the outdoor installations only, the designer can take credit for forced or
passive cooling to eliminate or reduce the 15°C heat rise. For example, if
vortex coolers are used, the heat removal capacity of the coolers may be
subtracted from the generated heat. No more than 15°C reduction in
temperature will be given as credit. The designer shall substantiate his claim
by providing the support data and calculations.
e. Guardrails and Traffic Control Devices
1) Regulatory Measures
(a) General
(1) Highway conditions that are shielded by a roadside barrier may
generally be place into one of two basic categories: (1)
embankments or (2) roadside obstacles (fixed objects).
(2) The reason for installing guardrail on embankments and adjacent to
fixed objects is to reduce the combined effect of accident severity
and frequency of occurrence of "run-off-road" type of accidents. This
is accomplished by deflecting a vehicle away from the embankment
slope or the fixed object and by reducing the deceleration rate.
(3) Guardrails will reduce accident severity only for those conditions
where the overall severity of striking the guardrail is less than the
overall severity of going down the embankment or striking the fixed
object.
(4) Guardrails will also reduce accident frequency only if it provides
increased delineation at "run-off-road" accident locations of high
frequency. Delineation, however, is considered only an incidental
benefit stemming from other uses because delineation may be
effected by other means at less cost. Generally, it would be
expected that installing guardrail adjacent to fixed objects would
increase the frequency of occurrence because the guardrail
presents a larger obstacle.
(5) Guard railing shall generally be metal beam rail as shown on
guideline drawings. In particular circumstances, however, it may be
more desirable to use rigid concrete "safety shape" railing where the
min deflection area behind the guardrail is not free of obstacles.
(b) Guardrail on Embankments
(1) The embankment height and side slope are the basic factors in
determining barrier need. The criteria are based on studies of the

Rev. 1 5.6 - 67
relative severity of encroachments on embankments versus impacts

with roadside barriers. The height and slope criteria determining
need is demonstrated in Figure 5-1 of the AASHTO Roadside
Design Guide (RDG). Additional factors for consideration are also
discussed in the RDG.
(c) Guardrail at Roadside Obstacles
(1) Barrier recommendations for roadside obstacles are a function of
the obstacle itself and the likelihood that it will be hit. Guidelines for
non-traversable terrain and roadside obstacles are provided in
Table 5-2 of the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
(d) Barrier type selection
(1) The type of roadside barrier (i.e. guardrail or concrete barrier) shall
include consideration such as the percentage of heavy trucks and
the probability and consequences of a heavy vehicle penetrating the
barrier. Types of roadside barriers and selection considerations are
discussed in the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
(e) Barrier Placement and End Anchorages
(1) Factors determining the optimum barrier placement location relative
to the roadway and obstacle it is designed to protect include: 1)
clearance from the traveled way and obstacle, 2) lateral slope and
terrain, and 3) angle of departure and length of advance need.
Special anchorages and in particular approach end anchorages are
required for satisfactory performance. Additional discussion and
guidance is provided in the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide.
2) Operational and Control Measures for Right-Turn Maneuvers
(a) General
(1) Intersection capacity analysis shall be used establish the number of
right turn lanes required.
(2) Intersection signal analysis shall be used to establish if a right turn
phase is warranted.
(3) Traffic control needs shall be reviewed based on roadway
configuration and classification.
(4) Absolute minimum radii of the outside edge of the carriageway for
right turn movements are shown in TABLE 5.6.3.P. In any case, in
his proposal the A/E or EPC Contractor shall take into consideration
the design speeds of the intersecting roads, requirements of the
proposed design vehicle(s) and potential needs of other road users
such as pedestrians. The A/E or EPC Contractor shall also ensure
his proposal meets design vehicle(s) requirements and provide
evidence to the RC upon request.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 68
Table 5.6.3.P: ABSOLUTE MINIMUM TURNING RADII
Divided Residential,
Collector 4- Undivided
Expressway Park, or
Lane Local Local Local
Security
20 m with 20 m with
Expressway corner corner N/A N/A N/A
island Island
20 m with
Collector 4-Lane corner 15 m 10 m 10 m N/A
Local
island
Divided Local N/A 10 m 10 m 8m 8m
Undivided Local N/A 10 m 8m 8m 6m
Residential,
N/A N/A 8m 6m 6m
Park, or Security
(b) Islands
(1) Channelizing islands shall define the traffic channels to drivers and
pedestrians alike in the clearest manner possible. To prevent
confusion, the number of islands shall be kept to a minimum and the
use of small islands be avoided. The approach end of an island
shall be designed to give the driver adequate warning of its
presence and shall never require a sudden change in direction or
speed. Transverse lane shifts shall begin far enough in advance of
the intersection to show gradual transitions. Islands on horizontal or
vertical curves shall be avoided. If the use of islands on curves
cannot be avoided, adequate sight distance, illumination, and
illuminated terminal nosings shall be provided.
(2) The design must provide minimum turning radii for all types of
vehicles moving through the intersection and conform to the angles
of intersection given in Figure 5.6.3.A. Figure 5.6.3.A shows
Standard Island and curb details for a typical channelized
intersection.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 69
FIGURE 5.6.3.A: ISLAND AND CURB DETAILS
(3) Shying Distance

(i) Shy distance shall be provided in compliance with RC Standard
Details.
(4) Flaring
(i) A 14 m flare shall be used on the left and a 33 m flare on the
right wherever island length permits. Flares of 9 or 4.5 m on the
left and 15 or 7.5 m on the right may be used for shorter
islands. Islands less than 4.5 m on the left and 7.5 m on the
right need not be flared.
(5) Curbing
(i) Raised traffic curbing used for islands shall be cast-in place in
accordance with the applicable Standards.
(6) Size
(i) Triangular islands must be at least 4.7 m2 in size with legs no
less than 2.4 m long out-to-out after rounding of corners. In any
case, island sizes shall be such that all roadside features
required to be accommodated such as traffic signal poles or
cantilevers, street lighting poles, pedestrian crossing facilities,

Rev. 1 5.6 - 70
road signs, roadside barriers, manholes, etc. can be installed in

accordance with RC standards.
3) Operational and Control Measures for Left-Turn Movements
(a) General
(1) Intersection capacity analysis shall be used establish the number of
turn lanes required.
(2) Intersection signal analysis shall provide a protected turn phase.
(3) Roadway classification shall be used to establish the typical
requirements for provision of turn lanes.
(4) Median lanes are authorized for any channelization divided roads
where left turns are permitted from the through lane regardless of
whether or not traffic signals are to be installed. Where it is
necessary to store stopped vehicles, additional length of median
lane shall be provided on the basis of 7.6 m per vehicle. For a
maximum storage time of 2 minutes, this yields the storage lengths
shown in TABLE 5.6.3 Q.
TABLE 5.6.3.Q: STORAGE LENGTHS
Design Hourly Volume

25 - 150 150 - 210 210 - 240 240- 270 270 - 300
of Turning Vehicle
Storage Length (m) 45 53 61 69 76
4) Regulation of Curb Parking

(a) Parking Zones
(1) The RCJ has provided for the establishment of parking zones and
requires that roads and highways are to be marked with white lines
designating parking spaces.
(2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall furnish drawings showing the
definite location of all parking spaces on roadways.
(3) The desirable dimensions of parallel parking spaces are 2.5 by 7.3
m with a minimum length of 6.7 m.
(4) At all intersections, one space length on each side shall have
parking prohibited. Clearance also shall be provided at driveways.
(5) At signalized intersections, parking shall be prohibited for a
minimum of two stall lengths on the near side and one space length
on the far side, refer to Figure 5.6.3.B.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 71
FIGURE 5.6.3.B: TRAFFIC STRIPPING FOR PARKING DETAILS
(b) Stall Arrangement

(1) Figure 5.6.3.C shows the curb and road space required for parking
at various angles. Parking plus maneuvering space may occupy up
to 5.5 m of road width for parallel parking and will range up to 12.2
m for angle parking. The 7 m stall for parallel curb parking
accommodates the longer automobiles and permits entering or
leaving movements with one maneuver.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 72
FIGURE 5.6.3.C: SPACE AND AISLE REQUIREMENTS FOR PARKING AT VARIOUS ANGLE
(c) Parking Space Markings

(1) Parking lines when placed shall be white stripes, 100 mm wide,
painted in accordance with one of the plans shown on
Figures 5.6.3.B and 5.6.3.C
5) Directional Lane Usage
(a) Not allowed.
6) Markers, Markings and Delineations
(a) Roadway signing and marking shall comply with RC Standard Details.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 73
f. Noise Barriers
1) General
(a) The HDM Volume 2 Book 2 Section 1.14 B shall be used to determine
need for noise barriers.
(b) The noise analysis shall be used to establish the current or future need for
noise barriers.
(c) If there is a future need for noise barriers, the barrier location and type
shall be established and shown as future on all A/E and/or EPC contractor
drawings to ensure the future installation may be accommodated.
g. Fencing
1) General
(a) All freeways shall be continuously fenced to control access in accordance
with the Master Plan.
(b) Generally, roads other than freeways will not require fencing.
(c) Facilities such as transformers and load centers shall be provided with
fence enclosures.
(d) All fencing is to be chain link in accordance with RC Standard Details.
h. Bus Stops and Taxi Stops, other public transit
1) General
(a) Bus curb-loading zones normally shall have the following distinct
characteristics:
(1) The area in the roadway adjacent to the curb shall be reserved for
use by the stopped bus, plus maneuver space.
(2) Adequate uniform signs to inform pedestrians of the location of bus
stops.
2) Dimensions
(a) TABLE 5.6.3.R gives minimum desirable bus curb-loading zone sizes as
related to these factors based upon data from several sources (but mainly
from tests conducted by or for the American Transit Association in several
cities on all sizes of buses); approach speeds in their tests ranged from 24
to 32 km/h.
(b) The distances indicated in TABLE 5.6.3.R for near-side stops are the
minimum which will permit the driver to pull into the zone and position the
bus reasonably parallel to the curb and out of the flow of moving traffic.
The dimensions of far-side stops are adequate to provide stopping space
for the bus parallel to the curb with sufficient clearance between the bus
and the end of the zone so that the driver may easily pull back out into
moving traffic.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 74
TABLE 5.6.3.R: MINIMUM DESIRABLE LENGTHS FOR BUS CURB-LOADING ZONES
Length in, m for

Normal
Approximate
Bus One Bus Stop Two Bus Stop
Bus Seating
Length
Capacity Near Far Mid- Near Far Mid-
m
Side Side Block Side Side Block
30 and Less 7.6 27.5 19.8 38.0 36.5 27.5 45.5
35 9.0 29.0 21.3 39.5 39.5 30.5 48.5
40 - 45 10.7 30.5 22.9 41.0 42.5 33.5 51.5
51 12.0 32.0 24.4 42.5 45.5 36.5 55.0
3) Illumination
(a) When bus curb-loading zones are located where the general street lighting
is not sufficient to provide adequate illumination for maximum safety in
passenger boarding or disembarking and for their security adequate
supplemental lighting shall be provided. A conflict area lighting
assessment is required to establish the required illumination level, refer to
Subsection 5.5.1.M.4.
4) Signs and Markings
(a) Adequate uniform signs for prohibiting vehicular parking and for marking
the extreme limits of the zones shall be installed and properly maintained.
Solid yellow curb markings will aid in enforcing regulations prohibiting use
of these spaces by private automobiles taxicabs and trucks. Painted lines
or markings on the pavement designating the limits of the zone are
frequently used; a legend such as "BUS STOP NO PARKING" is
sometimes painted on the pavement.
5) Location
(a) Bus curb-loading stops shall not be located so as to cause hazard and
delay due to obstruction of other vehicular traffic flow. Where curbs are
recessed for bus stops approach and departure tapers shall not be less
than 8:1. It is sometimes desirable to recess the curb sufficiently to provide
a turn-out bay for the entire bus which is completely shielded from moving
lanes of traffic.
(b) Bus curb-loading zones are located on the near-side or far-side of
intersections or at a mid-block location. The selection of the location shall
be based on a consideration of bus routings number of buses the origin
and destination of transit passengers; the transfer of patrons between bus
routes traffic and pedestrian movements and the desired operation of
traffic control devices.
(c) At intersections where buses turn, a far-side or mid-block stop has some
advantages. A far-side stop is particularly advantageous where a left turn
is made. When right turns are made and the curb radius is short a mid-
block stop has definite advantages other conditions being equal.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 75
(d) At complicated intersections where streets meet at other than right angles,
far-side stops often provide better operation and less traffic interference.
(e) At bus transfer points where there is a considerable volume of transferring
passenger traffic, pedestrian travel across the intersection may be
minimized by having the buses on one route stop at the near side while
buses on the intersecting street stop on the far side.
(f) At intersections where the predominant number of arriving and leaving
passengers come from or are destined for a specific building or industrial
plant, the bus stop shall be located to minimize pedestrian traffic at the
intersection. Far-side stops are seldom found satisfactory where there is
apt to be even an occasional accumulation of buses greater than the
capacity of the bus curb-loading zone.
(g) At intersections where numerous vehicles turn right near-side bus stops
may result in conflicts and traffic accidents and thus be inferior to far-side
stops.
(h) Factors such as sidewalk obstructions inferior alighting surfaces, street
paving or roadway grades frequently may be the key in the final
determination of the proper bus stop location.
(i) Bus stops shall be located so that the maximum walking time to a bus stop
does not exceed 10 minutes.
6) Operation
(a) Where buses make right turns, it is desirable to increase the curb radii to
a degree sufficient to permit buses to make such turns without swinging
out into the adjacent traffic lanes and without climbing or rubbing the
corner curb.
(b) A desirable curve which will provide an easy right-turning movement
consists of a compound curve, the center radius of which is 7.5 m and the
radius of each end is 30 m. The equivalent simple-curve radius is 10 m.
The lengthening of the curb radii as suggested above will not lengthen the
pedestrian crosswalk materially, but such action will reduce sidewalk
capacity and therefore may not be feasible at some locations where
sidewalk space cannot be sacrificed.
i. Curb Ramps
1) General
(a) For curb ramps, reference is made to the ADA Standards for Accessible
Design and RC Standard Details.
j. Rest Areas, Scenic Overlooks, and Information Centers
1) General
(a) Roadside Development shall be consisted with the HDM Volume 2 Book
2 Section 1.14
k. Commuter Lots
1) General
(a) Location
(1) The location of parking facilities will depend upon:
Rev. 1 5.6 - 76
(i) The degree of demand in a specific area;

(ii) Location of traffic generators;
(iii) Adequacy of existing parking facilities;
(iv) Geographical area within which the demand exceeds the
supply;
(v) Land costs; AND
(vi) Location of suitable access roads.
(b) Entrances and Exits
(1) Plans for parking facilities shall be integrated with the road plan,
traffic volumes, and road capacities (vehicular and pedestrian). The
location of entrances and exits on two or more roads will distribute
the traffic load so that there is less interference with road to lot
movement. Lots having an 18.3 m frontage, or multiples of 18.3 m,
or a 7.3 m aisle side, constitute parking units which provide
sufficient maneuvering space and permits access from either
direction.
(2) Figure 5.6.3.C shows the stall and aisle dimensions recommended
for different parking angles. Acute angle parking gives fewer stalls
for a given distance and requires one-way aisles unless cars are
backed into some stalls; but entry is easier for drivers, and narrower
aisles may be used.
(3) Figure 5.6.3.D shows two variations of the herringbone parking
pattern, an efficient method of conserving space.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 77
FIGURE 5.6.3.D: HERRINGBONE PATTERN PARKING LAYOUTS
(4) Figure 5.6.3.E illustrates various methods of laying out parking

patterns in a lot 30.5 by 30.5 m; a larger lot would permit better
development of the area.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 78
FIGURE 5.6.3.E: SELF PARKING LOT
(5) Stall marking lines or curbs are recommended for all types of stalls;
wheel blocks or bumper guards are essential for the protection of
fences and elimination of collisions with parked vehicles. Every lot
shall be enclosed by a curb, guardrail, wall, fence, or hedge for
safety and landscaping. Pedestrian safety may be improved by
providing pedestrian walkways and illumination; it is frequently
difficult to confine the pedestrian to these walkways. Drainage,
grading, and dust-prevention are minimum requirements.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 79
(c) Parking Lots

(1) Most efficient use of land area in larger parking lots is obtained by
placing all vehicles perpendicular to the aisles. A perpendicular
layout is readily adaptable and is desirable, except where one way
street traffic indicates that movement shall be clockwise to reduce
conflicts.
l. Roadside Parking Areas
1) General
(a) Roadside Development shall be consistent with the Volume 2 Book 2
Section 1.14
m. Vehicle Barriers
1) General
(a) Vehicle Barriers shall be consistent with the HDM Volume 2 Book 1
Section 1.15.
5. Interchanges, Intersections and Roundabouts
1) A corridor study shall be completed based on the requirements outlined in the
HDM Volume 1 Section 2.03
b. Types of Intersections
1) The corridor study shall establish the various levels of roadway classification
and the associated intersection requirements.
c. Grade Separations
1) General
(a) Design Criteria
(1) The design criteria to be used for grade separations is given in
these guidelines and shall be used in conjunction with the standard
specifications for highway bridges adopted by the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation officials, AASHTO,
latest edition.
(b) Locations
(1) Bridges are located to conform to the general alignment of the
highway. Ideally, location for a bridge crossing shall be determined
in accordance with the following guidelines:
(i) The crossing may be made at right angles.
(ii) Alignment of the approach pavement is tangent and sufficiently
long to eliminate superelevation on the bridge.
(iii) Soil conditions are adequate for installation.
(2) Structures shall not be placed on vertical and horizontal curvature
when alternate locations are available. The final decision for
location shall be based on a complete analysis of the factors

Rev. 1 5.6 - 80
involved, including those relating to traffic safety, operating

conditions, and economics.
(3) Location and type of bridge requirements shall be recommended by
the A/E and/ EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
d. Capacity Analysis
1) Using the roadway classification,traffic volumes from the corridor study and
the operational requirements of the roadway network, intersection shall be
evaluated and any capacity deficiencies shall be addressed during the
development of corridor study.
e. Alignment and Profile
1) A center line location and preliminary design shall be completed based on the
requirements outlined in this guidelines and associated supplemental
standards.
2) Additional information is required at all intersections to ensure proper tie-in
between the intersecting roads and proper drainage is maintained.
Intersection grading details shall be prepared by the A/E or EPC Contractor
and submitted to the RC for review.
f. Islands
1) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.e.2.b for island requirements
g. Medians
1) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.3.f.5 for median requirements
h. Channelization
1) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.2 for channelization requirements
i. Acceleration and Deceleration Lanes
1) The design of acceleration and deceleration lanes shall generally follow the
guidelines set in the AASHTO Green Book as well as RC Standard Details as
applicable.
2) The length of deceleration lanes for right and left turn lanes at at-grade
intersections shall also take into consideration storage requirements for left
and through lanes determined by the associated traffic study. In urban settings
with high peak hour traffic demand, consideration shall be given to reduce the
length of the deceleration taper to maximize storage capacity of turning and
through lanes.
j. Auxiliary Lanes
1) In order to insure satisfactory operating conditions, auxiliary lanes may be
added to the basic width of carriageway.
2) Where an entrance ramp of one interchange is closely followed by an exit
ramp of another interchange, the acceleration and deceleration lanes may be
joined with an auxiliary lane. This shall be dependent upon the weaving
segment capacity which varies with configuration, number of lanes, free flow
speed of highway, length, and volume ratio. Reference is made to AASHTO
Green Book.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 81
3) Where interchanges are more widely spaced and ramp volumes are high, the
need for an auxiliary lane between the interchanges shall be determined by
an across-freeway lane volume check. This check shall include consideration
of freeway grade and volume of trucks.
4) Auxiliary lanes may be used for the orientation of traffic at two-lane ramps or
branch connections. The length and number of auxiliary lanes in advance of
two-lane exits are based on percentages of turning traffic.
k. Frontage Roads
1) The requirement for and design of frontage roads shall be based on the HDM
Volume 2 Book 1 Section 1.05 G.
l. Lighting at Intersections
1) The requirement for and design of roadway lighting shall be in compliance with
Section C.4.d of this guideline.
m. Railroad Grade Crossings
1) General
(a) Railroad Grade Crossing must be controlled in accordance with the
MUTCD (FHWA).
n. Interchanges
1) Types
(a) The location of interchanges is largely predetermined by the Work Plan. In
general full clover leaf or trumpet type interchanges are used for freeway
to freeway connections whilst compact diamond interchanges or partial
cloverleafs are used for connecting freeways to other classes of road.
2) Warrants for Interchanges and Grade Separations
(a) The design criteria to be used for grade separations is given in these
guidelines and shall be used in conjunction with the standard
specifications for highway bridges adopted by the American Association
of State Highway and Transportation officials, AASHTO, latest edition.
(b) Interchange type and layout configuration must satisfy the forecasted
traffic demand. Refer to Subsection 5.6.2.C.
3) Access Management
(a) Access control is to be exercised along interchange ramps to their junction
with the nearest "collector" road. At such a junction, access shall be
controlled to the end of the ramp pavement taper. At locations where curb
returns are used in lieu of tapers, access restrictions may extend 15 m
beyond the end of the curb return.
(b) Where traffic leaves a ramp situation and enters a local traffic situation and
the freeway ride is clearly and obviously ended, the access control shall
also end.
4) Grade Separation Structures
(a) Structures shall not be placed on vertical and horizontal curvature when
alternate locations are available. The final decision for location shall be

Rev. 1 5.6 - 82
based on a complete analysis of the factors involved, including those

relating to traffic safety, operating conditions, and economics.
(b) Location and type of bridge requirements shall be recommended by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
5) Design Standards
(a) Location and type of bridge requirements shall be recommended by the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor and approved by the RCJ.
6) Freeway Entrances and Exits
(a) General
(1) All freeway entrances and exits shall connect to the right of through
traffic.
(b) Location on a Curve
(1) Freeway entrances and exits shall be located on tangent Sections
wherever possible in order to provide maximum sight distance and
optimum traffic operation. Where ramps have to be located on
curves the ramp tapers shall also be curved. At freeway exits the
radius of the taper shall be about the same radius as the freeway
edge of pavement in order to develop the same degree of
divergence as the standard design. At freeway entrances on a
curve, the ramp alignment will vary with the radius of curvature of
the freeway.
(2) Where an exit in a cut section must be on a curve, cut widening for
visibility shall be considered.
7) Weaving Movement
(a) Design requirements for weaving sections shall be analyzed in
accordance with an internationally recognized standard
(b) Weaving between closely spaced loop ramps when adjacent to high speed
highways, will be accomplished by using Collector-Distributor
(C-D) roads. Weaving without C-D roads will be allowed on the low
speed crossroad. The following design criteria shall be used in either case:
(1) The algebraic difference between crown slopes shall not exceed
0.05 m per m.
(2) Edge of pavement profiles shall be plotted to insure smooth
transition and adequate drainage.
(3) Tangent takeoffs for off ramps are to be avoided; therefore the
proper location of the weaving sections shall preferably be on an
approximate tangent section of the collector-distributor road or
crossroad.
8) Other Design Features
(a) Testing
(1) General
(i) When a section of freeway includes a series of closely spaced
exits and entrances, it shall be tested for capacity and ease of

Rev. 1 5.6 - 83
operation from the driver’s point of view, experiencing the

signing, merging, diverging, and weaving movements involved.
This testing shall be completed as part of the concept design. It
shall be performed by tracing the paths of drivers undertaking
various origination and destination points, with the designer
visualizing traffic, signage and other features along each route
being traveled.
(b) Ramp Metering
(1) General
(i) Ramp meters are traffic signals placed on freeway entrance
ramps or freeway connectors to control the flow of vehicles
entering the freeway. They are designed to improve the
average speed of all vehicles traveling on a freeway mainline
by decreasing congestion that may result when too many cars
enter at certain points. The traffic signals may be pre-timed or
traffic-actuated to release the entering vehicles in small
platoons. Pre-timed metering releases vehicles at regular
intervals that have been determined by traffic studies and
simulation modeling.
(c) Grading
(1) General
(i) Preliminary alignment and profiles of the intersecting roads are
developed to determine the controls governing bridge design.
Alternative slopes and wall configurations shall be evaluated
before final decisions are made for the bridge and wingwall
designs. Flat slopes shall be used wherever practical to
facilitate economical maintenance and facilitate regaining of
control for vehicles that run off the road.
(d) Models
(1) General
(i) Computer software shall be used to provide 3D visualizations
and traffic simulations for the purpose of analyzing and
comparing alternatives for various interchange configurations.
Design models shall be easily adjusted, allowing the designer
to experiment with different concepts. They are also useful in
communicating the design team’s ideas to stakeholders and
public officials.
o. Railroad Highway Crossings
1) General
(a) All railroad crossing shall be evaluated using the RHGCH to establish the
necessary crossing treatment.
(b) All signing and marking shall be compliant with MUTCD (FHWA).
6. Flexible Pavement Design
(a) Flexible pavements consist of appeared roadbed underlying layers of
subbase, road base, and bituminous asphaltic concrete base and surface

Rev. 1 5.6 - 84
courses. The prepared roadbed is a layer of in-situ soils or select borrow

material which has been compacted to a specified density. The subbase
usually consists of a compacted layer of granular material, or of a layer of
soil treated with an admixture, and it shall be of significantly better material
than the roadbed soil. The asphalt concrete base course is the portion of
the pavement structure located immediately beneath the surface course.
Its major function in the pavement is structural support. It usually consists
of aggregates such as crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel and
sand, or combinations of these materials.
b. Pavement Structure Layers
1) Pavement design shall be provided by the A/E or EPC Contractor unless
otherwise agreed with the RC.
2) The methodology shall be in conformance with the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Communication Highway Design Manual (HDM) or as otherwise
instructed by the RC.
3) The values shown in Table 5.6.3.S are minimum values only and do not
release the A/E or EPC Contractor from the requirement to carry out a
pavement design as described above.
Minimum layer thickness design shall be as shown in table TABLE 5.6.3.S.
TABLE 5.6.3.S: MINIMUM PAVEMENT THICKNESS

Freeway /
Pavement 4-Lane 2-Lane
Interchange Expressway
Type Collector Local
Ramps
AC Surface
70 70 50 50
Course
AC Base
180 180 70 70
Course
Aggregate
200 200 200 200
Road Base
Aggregate
300 300 250 250
Sub Base
4) The roadbed shall be prepared by densifying underlying soils in accordance

with RC specifications (GPCS).
c. Pavement Design Life
1) A pavement design life of 20 years shall be used for flexible pavement design
and 40 years shall be used for rigid pavement design.
2) Pavement design life is defined as from construction completion and opening
of traffic to when the first major maintenance event (resurfacing) is required.
d. Traffic Considerations
1) The primary traffic input needed to design pavement thickness for freeways
and expressways in accordance with the HDM is the number of equivalent
8-tonnes single-axle loads (ESAL) that will travel over the pavement over the
design life.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 85
2) A Traffic Impact Statement shall be included for all roadway designs.

e. Soil Characteristics
1) Soil strength values to be used with the HDM design methodology shall be
(a) the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) based on MRDTM 213 test
procedures. The aforementioned thicknesses for pavement layers are
based on CBR more than or equal to 10. If CBR values for the area are
low, it may be possible to specify replacing or improving the soil in this
area by soil stabilization techniques, excavation and recompaction, dig out
and replace or other approved measures to increase the soil strength.
(b) Resilient Modulus based on AASHTO Test Method T 274.
(c) MR = 1500 (CBR)
f. Materials
1) Pavement Structure Layer materials shall be in accordance with the RC
Standard Specifications (RCSS).
2) Recycled Materials
g. Maintainability and Constructability
1) General
(a) There are various maintenance operations which are carried out for a
highway. Maintenance of pavement, shoulders, drainage, erosion,
vegetation, and structures, are some of the major categories.
Constructability of pavement is related placement and compaction of base
and sub base, and largely a function of the suitability and stability of the
underlying soils on which the pavement will be constructed.
h. Life-Cycle Cost Analysis
1) General
(a) It is essential when comparing costs of design alternatives that an
economic analysis considers all costs that will occur during the entire life
cycle of the facility. Life-cycle costs include construction costs,
maintenance costs, and rehabilitation costs.
i. Pavement Drainage
1) General
(a) Drainage of water from pavements is an important consideration in road
design. Excess water combined with increased traffic volumes and loads
may lead to early pavement distress. To obtain adequate pavement
drainage, the designer shall consider providing three types of drainage
systems: (1) surface drainage, (2) groundwater drainage, and (3)
structural drainage. Maintenance practices shall recognize the necessity
of sealing joints and cracks in the pavement surface. Removal of
subsurface water can be accomplished by designing the pavement to
drain vertically into the subgrade, or laterally through a drainage layer into
a system of pipe collectors.
j. Base and Subbase
1) General

Rev. 1 5.6 - 86
(a) When roadbed soils are of relatively poor quality and the design procedure
indicates that a substantial thickness of pavement is required, several
alternate designs shall be prepared for structural sections with and without
subbase. The selection of an alternate may then be made on the basis of
availability and relative costs of materials suitable for base and subbase.
Because lower quality materials may be used in the lower layers of a
flexible pavement structure, the use of a subbase course is often the most
economical solution for construction of pavements over poor road-bed
soils.
k. Structure Approach Slabs
1) General
(a) The highway bridge approach slab is a thick, heavily reinforced Portland
cement concrete slab that provides a transition between the roadway
pavement and the bridge. The approach slab acts as an intermediate
bridge to span the portion of embankment directly behind the
abutment/backwall which was excavated to construct the
abutment/backwall. This area is difficult to compact after construction of
the bridge abutment. By being supported on one end by the bridge
abutment, the approach slab bridges the gap between the rigid abutment
and the undisturbed embankment beyond the area excavated.
l. Superpave
1) Superpave, short for "superior performing asphalt pavement" is a pavement
method increasing stone-on-stone contact improving load bearing capacity. It
is a comprehensive method of pavement design mix toailored to the expected
performance requirements dictated by the traffic, environment (climate) and
structural section at a particular pavement site.
2) It relies on performance-based properties to designate the optimum mix
design by selecting and combining asphalt binder, aggregate and necessary
modifiers to achieve the expected pavement performance. The objective of
the superpave mix design is to define an economical blend of asphalt binder
and aggregates which yields the mix having sufficient asphalt binder, sufficient
voids (VMA) in the mineral aggregate, sufficient workability and satisfactory
performance over the service life of the pavement. For specific mix
requirements, refer to RC specifications (GPCS).
7. Rigid Pavement
a. Rigid pavements consist of a prepared roadbed underlying a layer of sub base and
pavement slab. The sub base may be stabilized or unstabilized. The subbase
consists of one or more compacted layers of granular or stabilized material placed
between the subgrade and the rigid slab. The pavement slab consists of Portland
cement concrete, reinforcing steel, load transfer devices, and joint sealing material.
Rigid pavement is generally associated with higher initial capital costs, but may
prove more cost effective that flexible pavement over the entire life cycle of the
facility.
8. Resurfacing, Restoration and Rehabilitation
a. General
1) Resurfacing, restoration and rehabilitation (RRR) work is defined as all work
undertaken to extend the service life of existing pavement, enhance

Rev. 1 5.6 - 87
operations and safety, and return an existing roadway to a condition of

structural and functional adequacy. Typical RRR work will include
rehabilitation of the pavement through slab repair/replacement and/or
installation flexible pavement overlays. RRR also often includes upgrades to
roadside safety that may include relocation of roadside hazards and
installation or upgrades to roadside barrier and hardware.
9. Landscape and Irrigation
a. Reference Subsection 5.6.5
10. Street Furniture
a. Reference Subsection 5.6.5
11. Utilities
a. Reference Section 5.7.
b. All Roadway projects shall incorporate spare sleeves
1) Sleeves shall be included at all intersections
2) On long, straight roads, spare sleeves shall be included at 500m to 1000m
intervals based on engineering requirements
D. Maintenance of Traffic
1. Work Zones
a. General
1) Reference is made to MUTCD (FHWA).

Rev. 1 5.6 - 88
SUBSECTION 5.6.4 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
5.6.4 STORMWATER DRAINAGE
A. General
1. Introduction
a. Hydrologic and hydraulic engineering shall be required for the design of all surface
and subsurface drainage systems for Jubail Industrial City (JIC) and Ras AL-Khair
(RIC). This subsection describes the required data and analysis methods which
provides the basis of design of stormwater management facilities.
b. Hydrology is a science of the interrelationship between surface water runoff, water
below grade, and in the atmosphere. For this manual, hydrology will deal with
predicting the maginitude of storm water generation and flow caused by a certain
design storm criteria.
c. Hydrologic Methods:
1) There are two basic approaches discussed in this manual used to evaluate
stormwater. These are:
(a) Rational Method: This method is used for small watersheads (< 80
Hectares) This method calculates peak discharge only (Quick and Easy)!
If used on large watersheds will result in oversizing of the storm water
facilities.
(b) SCS Method: This method is used for large watersheads (> 80 Hectares)
This method is more sophisticated than the rational approach This method
considers the time distribution of the rainfall, the initial rainfall losses to
interception and depression storage.
(c) A discharge hydrograph (hydrographs are considered terms of discharge
verses time will be needed for the design of structures that are used to
control the volume of runoff, such as detention storage and retention
seepage facilities or drainage routed through culverts.
(d) The SCS method produces both a peak discharge and a hydrograph,
which can be used to estimate runoff volume and be used in routing
procedures.
2) Classical Hydrologic Methods background information. Some of Classical
Hydrologic Methods and their application, are as follows:
Classical Hydrologic Methods and their application
Method Author Typical Application
• Urban Watersheads
• Considers the effect
EPA SWMM of storage in
U.S. - Environmental
(Stormwater channels, pipes, and
Protection Agency
Management Model) basins
• Surcharged storm
drainage systems
U.S.- Natural • Urban or rural

TR-20/TR-55
Resources watersheds

Rev. 1 5.6 - 89
Classical Hydrologic Methods and their application

Method Author Typical Application
Conservation Service • Considers effect of
(formerly SCS) storage in channels
and basins
• Urban or rural
watersheds
U.S. - Army Corps of • Considers the effect
HEC-1/HEC-HMS
Engineers of storage in
channels and
basins.
These methods are favored and promulgated by U.S. government
agencies because of familiarity. These methods are not necessarily the
current best practice or easy to use and understand. These methods
have been mentioned to aid in understanding of the hydrology concepts
and historical background. The RC prefers the use of of computer
software packages that are simple to use, comprehend, and
understand.
d. Stormwater Computer Aided Design & Analysis Modeling: The Royal Commission
(RC) uses the following software for computer aided design and analysis: Civil
Storm, Storm Cad, and Culvert Master. The Royal Commission prefers that
Consultants involved with RC projects use the same or similar-compatible software.
e. Consultants Note: The experienced engineer or designer knows that hydrologic
analysis is at best an approximation. Reasonable judgements and assumptions are
needed. Errors in the analysis will result in either undersized facilities causing
flooding and drainage problems or oversized systems that cost more than needed.
f. This Manual is intended to be a basic guide and not a regulation that must be strictly
followed. Please use sound engineering judgement in the preparation of your
designs and propose alternate methods or approaches that will improve the way we
do our work.
2. Applicability
a. This subsection applies to stormwater management facilities located in Jubail
Industrial City (JIC) and Ras AL-Khair (RIC).
3. Definitions
a. The following definitions apply to this Section (Refer to Section 2.2.0 for other
general definitions.
1) “Primary Drainage System”: The overall drainage network, generally
servicing an entire district. This system generally consists of large concrete
lined open channels.
2) “Secondary Drainage System”: The drainage network that services each
sector, this system generally consists of underground drainage pipes, catch
basins, and curb and gutter to handle overflow. Secondary drainage systems
generally discharge into primary drainage channels.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 90
3) Detention Basins: Basins that reduce peak stormwater discharges from

individual sites by temporarily storing stormwater and metering the outflow off-
site.
4) Industrial Retention Facilities: Generally, these storm water management
facilities that contain stormwater with subsurface discharge. These facilities
do not discharge to the RC drainage system. Retention facilities are generally
required in industrial area Jubail 2 as there is no discharge to the sea.
5) Rational Method: The classical or easy method for calculating the peak runoff
rates for watershed areas less than 80 hectares. This analysis method uses
rainfall intensity, runoff coefficients, and time of concentration.
6) Soil Conservation Service (SCS) Unit Hydrograph
7) Method: An empirical model for computing runoff hydrographs developed by
the US Soil Conservation Service in 1972. This technique is often used for
detailed hydrologic modeling for watershed areas larger than 80 hectares.
8) Time of Concentration, Tc: The travel time of water from the most distant
point hydraulically to reach a discharge point.
4. Abbreviations
a. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection (refer to Subsection 2.2.0 for
other general abbreviations):
1) CN: Curve Number, an empirical parameter used in hydrology for predicting
direct runoff or infiltration from rainfall excess.
2) D50: 50th-percentile rip-rap diameter, which is a specification typically
provided for rip-rap channel linings.
3) EGL: Energy Grade Line
4) HGL: Hydraulic Grade Line
5) PIA: Percent impervious area
a. Follow the design methodologies as follows:
1) Rational Method: Spreadsheets are acceptable
2) Rational Method: Civil Storm; SewerGEM
3) SCS Method: Civil Storm; SewerGEM
b. For any method used provide documentation, graphical information so that the
analysis method used can be followed and understood by RC Engineering Staff to
verify compliance with this manual.
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Subsection 3.1.0.
b. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu,
Environmental Control Department, Royal Commission Environmental Regulations,
2004, Volume I.
7. Standards

Rev. 1 5.6 - 91
a. The following is a list of Standards and references which apply to this Subsection,
refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Standards.
1) The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway Design
Manual
8. Related Sections
a. Not applicable
9. Approvals
B. Commissioning
1. Not Applicable
C. Storm Water Management Infrastructure
1. Storm Water Description
a. The following are common stormwater management drainage features:
1) Overland Flow Facilities (Curb and Gutter)
2) Closed Conduits, Underground Facilities (Pipes)
3) Open Conduits, Drainage Channels
4) See FIGURE 5.6.4.A for a sketch of typical storm drain facilities in Jubail,
Industrial City.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 92
FIGURE 5.6.4.A TYPICAL STORM DRAIN FACILITIES
2. Design Criteria:
a. Hydrologic Modeling Requirements: Hydrologic modeling for any project in Jubail
Industrial City shall consist of the following steps:
1) Drainage Area Delineation: all contributing drainage areas shall be delineated
including off-site drainage. Drainage area boundaries shall be realistic and
based on topographic conditions, grading, fill material, and other drainage
structures in the area.
2) Time of Concentration Calculation: the time of concentration of each drainage
basin shall be determined for sheet flow and shallow concentrated flow.
Alternate metods to calculate Tc are acceptable providing reference and
document the procedure that used.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 93
3) Runoff Loss Coefficient Determination: runoff loss coefficients (or Curve

Numbers) shall be determined based on soil type and land-use. Refer to the
appropriate tables and TABLE 5.6.4.F for curve numbers and runoff
coefficients based on the soil-types and land-uses found in the Jubail
Industrial City.
4) Design Rainstorm Determination: design rainstorm and return intervals shall
be determined based on drainage basin size and modeling application. Refer
to TABLE 5.6.4.A for design rainstorm applications.
TABLE 5.6.4.A: HYDROLOGIC DESIGN STORM & CRITERIA
Drainage System Criteria
Capacity for a 50-year event within the channel with no

Primary Drainage - Open freeboard.
Channels Floodplain storage up to a 100-year event with 0.3 m of
freeboard up the adjacent property lines.
Assume that the pipe is flowing full Capacity for a 100-year &
Primary Drainage Culverts assume a tailwater elevation of ¾ of Culvert Height
Provide emergency spillway or overland relief
Assume that the pipe is flowing full capacity for 25-year

event with no surcharge.
Secondary Drainage – Closed
Conduit Provide emergency spillway or overland relief to satisfy 100-
year event with 0.3 m of freeboard up the adjacent property
lines.
Designed for a 25-year event with zero freeboard. Excessive

gutter spread shall be limited to 5.6.3.C.4 (d) 1
Secondary Drainage -
Roadway curb and gutter Provide emergency spillway or overland relief to satisfy 100-
year event with 0.3 m of freeboard up the adjacent property
lines.
Onsite - upstream of
10-year storm storage capacity
Detention Basins
Designed for a 10-year event, provided an emergency

overflow outlet is available to prevent damage to any facility
Tertiary System or structure. If no emergency overflow outlet is provided, the
design period shall be determined on a cost benefit basis,
but not to exceed a 25 year storm.
100-year event with 0.3 m of freeboard up to the top of the

Onsite - Detention Basins impoundment and an emergency overflow structure to
handle the peak 100-year 24-hour inflow discharge.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 94
Drainage System Criteria
Industrial Water Quality (First Collect the first 30 mm of rainfall and maintain at least 0.3 m
Flush Basins) of freeboard up to the top of the impoundment.
b. Hydrologic Modeling and Routing: build the hydrologic model and determine design
discharges. The appropriate modeling technique must be determined based on
drainage basin size and design application. Refer to for appropriate modeling
methodologies below:
1) Rating Method: The rational method may be used for designing small sites
(less or equalt to 80 hectares). For areas larger than 80 hectares use the SCS
method, instead. This method dates back to 1889 and is still used in many
engineering offices. The Rational Method provides peak discharges and is not
intended for the computation of runoff volumes. This method requires the
following considerations:
(a) Drainage surface basin area offsite and onsite: Obtain a good topographic
information that defines the surface drainage basin area that includes both
onsite and offsite drainage areas to be evaluated. A field site inspection
needs to be made to understand the current natural drainage divides.
Restrictions to natural flow such as highway crossings and dams that exist
in the drainage area need to be considered.
(b) Runoff coefficient “C”: Thought should be given to future changes in land
use 20 years into the future.
(c) Rainfall Intensity associated with the time of concentration, Tc: The charts,
graphs, and tables included in this section are not intended to replace
prudent and reasonable engineering judgement.
2) Rational Equation for Calculating Peak Discharge
𝐶𝑖𝐴
𝑄=
360
𝑚3
𝑄 = 𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤,
𝑠
𝑖 = 𝑅𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦, 𝑚𝑚/ℎ𝑟
𝐶 = 𝑅𝑢𝑛𝑜𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡, 𝑑𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑙𝑒𝑠𝑠
𝐴 = 𝐷𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎, ℎ𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑠
Tc = Time of Concentration for sheet flow, shallow concentrated flow, and
channel flow as follows:
(a) Sheet Flow: Sheet flow is generally found in the upper reaches of a
watershed during the rainfall event and is usually 50 to 150 m in length.
0.0912(𝑛𝐿)0.8
𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑡 𝑇𝑐 =
(𝑃2 )0.5 𝑆𝑓0.4
𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑡 𝑇𝑐 = 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛, (ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠)
𝑛 = Surface roughness coefficient from Table 5.6.4C Overland
Discharge

Rev. 1 5.6 - 95
𝐿 = 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑚
𝑃2 = 2 − 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟, 24 − ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙, 𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑓 = 𝐿𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑠𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒, 𝑚/𝑚
TABLE 5.6.4.C OVERLAND DISCHARGE
Surface Description n
Smooth Surfaces (concrete, asphalt, gravel, or bare 0.011
soil)
Short Grass or Landscaping 0.15
Native Desert 0.13
(b) Shallow Concentrated Flow: Shallow concentrated flow generally consists
of concentrated drainage in gutters, channels, waterways or rills (rills are
fairly easily visible when first incised, so they are often the first indication
of an ongoing problem). There are two different equations:
Unpaved Surfaces:
𝐿𝑓 1ℎ𝑟
𝑆ℎ𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑇𝑐 = ( )( )
4.907 ∗ 𝑆𝑓0.5 3600 𝑠𝑒𝑐
Paved Surfaces:
𝐿𝑓 1ℎ𝑟
Shallow 𝑇𝑐 = ( )( )
6.1961∗𝑆𝑓0.5 3600 𝑠𝑒𝑐
𝑆ℎ𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑇𝑐 = 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛, ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠

𝐿𝑓 = 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑚
𝑆𝑓 = 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒, 𝑚/𝑚
(c) Channel Flow: The travel time within channels is calculated using
Manning’s equation for open channel discharge:
2
1
3 1 A
(1) Velocity is calculated using: V = ( ) ( ) (S)2
n P
𝑛 = 𝑀𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑔ℎ𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠

𝐴 = 𝐶𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑤 (𝑚2 )
𝑃 = 𝑊𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑤 (𝑚)
𝑆 = 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑙 (𝑚/𝑚)
𝑉 = 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑤 (𝑚/𝑠)
(2) Channel Travel Time is calculated using:
𝐋 𝟏𝐡𝐫
𝐂𝐡𝐚𝐧𝐧𝐞𝐥 𝐓𝐜 = ( ) ( )
𝐕 𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟎 𝐬𝐞𝐜
𝐿 = 𝐿𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑙 (𝑚)
𝑉 = 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑤 (𝑚/𝑠)
𝑇 = 𝑊𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑤 (𝑚)

Rev. 1 5.6 - 96
𝑆 = 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑙 (𝑚/𝑚)

(3) Total Time of Concentration:
𝑻𝒐𝒕𝒂𝒍 𝑻𝒄 = 𝑺𝒉𝒆𝒆𝒕 𝑻𝒄 + 𝑺𝒉𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒘 𝑻𝒄 + 𝑪𝒉𝒂𝒏𝒏𝒆𝒍 𝑻𝒄
3) Rational Runoff Coefficients: Refer to Table 5.6.4.D (below) for appropriate
runoff coefficients based on land-use, soil type, and return interval.
TABLE 5.6.4.D: RATIONAL METHOD RUNOFF COEFFICIENTS
CLASSIFICATION OF STORM RETURN PERIOD

DEVELOPED AREAS 5 YEAR 100 YEAR
Residential Areas 0.60 0.65

District Centers 0.65 0.70
Flood Plains (Landscaped) 0.50 0.55
Flood Plains (Graded) 0.45 0.50
CLASSIFICATION OF
PARTICULAR SURFACES
Asphalt Pavement 0.85 0.95
Concrete Pavement 0.80 0.90
Impervious Soil (Marl) 0.60 0.65
(a) Rainfall Intensity for Rational Calculations: Obtain rainfall intensity based
on time of concentration
(1) JIC - Refer to FIGURE 5.6.4.B

Rev. 1 5.6 - 97
FIGURE 5.6.4.B INTENSITY DURATION FREQUENCY CURVE - JIC
4) SCS Method: The SCS method shall be used for designing watershed areas
larger than (> 80 hectares). In general this will mean that most primary
drainage channels and some secondary systems will be designed using the
SCS method. For modeling watersheds using the SCS curve number method,
use a software package such as Civil Storm to generate hydrographs. This
method requires the following considerations:
(a) Rainfall depth and rainfall distribution.
(b) Temporal Distribution (Drainage basin curve number).
(c) Runoff Curves
(d) Time of concentration (lag time)
SCS Equation for Calculating Runoff Volumes:
(𝑃 − 𝐼𝑎)2
𝑄=
(𝑃 − 𝐼𝑎) + 𝑆
𝑄 = 𝑅𝑢𝑛𝑜𝑓𝑓(𝑚𝑚)
𝑃 = 𝑅𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙 (𝑚𝑚)
𝑆 = 𝑃𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑅𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑎𝑓𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑅𝑢𝑛𝑜𝑓𝑓 𝐵𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑛𝑠 (𝑚𝑚)
𝐼𝑎 = 𝐼𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝐴𝑏𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 (𝑚𝑚)
𝐼𝑎 = 0.2 ∗ 𝑆

Rev. 1 5.6 - 98
1000
𝑆= -10
𝐶𝑁
𝐶𝑁 = 𝐶𝑢𝑟𝑣𝑒 𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 (𝑟𝑢𝑛𝑜𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 )

Rainfall Depth: The average annual rainfall at Jubail is 91 mm, generally
falling in short, high intensity winter storms. Design rainfall depths for the
entire site may be taken to be the same table. Refer to TABLE 5.6.4E
below:
TABLE 5.6.4.E: DESIGN RAINFALL DEPTHS - JIC
Duration 10-Year mm 25-Year mm 100-Year mm
1-Hour 32.6 37.6 43.8

2-Hour 33.6 38.8 45.1
3-Hour 34.5 39.8 46.2
6-Hour 43.2 50.0 58.5
12-Hour 55.4 64.9 76.7
24-Hour 77.8 92.6 110.9
Temporal Distribution: The SCS Type II design storm temporal distribution is

characteristic of the high intensity rainfall events typical of Jubail Industrial
City. Refer to Figure 5.6.4.D for the storm distribution:
FIGURE 5.6. 4.D: SCS TYPE II STORM DISTRIBUTION
SCS Type II Storm Distribution
1.00
Fraction of Total Precipitation
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
0.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Tim e (hrs)
Curve Numbers: Refer to TABLE 5.6.4.F below for appropriate curve

numbers based on land-use and soil type.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 99
TABLE 5.6.4.F: RUNOFF CURVE NUMBERS
Cover Description PIA Curve Numbers for Soil Types1
Dense Loose
Sand Sand
Marl Sabkhah
(Compac (Natural
ted) State)
Open Space (Lawns,

79 49 49 79
Parks, etc…)
Impervious Areas:
Paved Parking Lots, 98 98 98 98
roofs, driveways
Commercial and
85 94 89 89 94
Business
Industrial 72 91 81 81 91
High Density Residential 65 90 77 77 90
Low Density Residential 20 79 51 51 79
Newly Graded Areas

(Pervious Areas, no 91 77 77 91
vegetation)
1Curve number values are adapted from the USDA Urban Hydrology for
Small Watersheds, TR-55 manual.
Lag Time - Refer to (Subsection 5.6.4.D.1.a.2 for the time of concentration calculation
requirements. The SCS method requires the input of Lag Time and not Time of
Concentration. Lag Time is calculated using the following equation:
𝐿𝑎𝑔 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 = 0.6 ∗ 𝑇𝑐; 𝑇𝑐 = 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
3. Hydraulic Modeling:
a. Refer to TABLE 5.6.4A (Above) for freeboard requirements and hydraulic design
criteria.
b. Manning’s Modified Equation for Gravity Flow
1) Manning’s equation for gravity flow may be used to design site storm drain
lines and open channels for small drainage areas.
1
𝑄= (𝐴𝑅2/3 𝑆 1/2 )
𝑛
𝑄 = 𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤, 𝑚3 /𝑠
𝐴 = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑎𝑡 𝑟𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜2𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤, 𝑚2

Rev. 1 5.6 - 100
𝑅 = 𝐻𝑦𝑑𝑟𝑎𝑢𝑙𝑖𝑐 𝑟𝑒𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠, 𝑚
𝑆 = 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑒, 𝑚/𝑚
𝑛 = 𝐶𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑔ℎ𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠, 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟 𝑡𝑜 𝑀 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑠
2) Manning’s Roughness Coefficients TABLE 5.6.4.I below:
(a) TABLE 5.6.4.I HYDRAULIC
ROUGHNESS COEFFICIENT
TYPE LINING MANNING’S “n”
Concrete – Pipes 0.013
Concrete - Cast-in-place 0.015
Sulphur A/C Pavement 0.018
Rip Rap, Large-Hand Placed 0.030
Rip Rap, Small-Dumped 0.035
Earthen – Marl 0.040
Earthen - Grass Covered 0.050
c. Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

1) For designing large primary drainage channels more detailed modeling
methods are required. Computer software models utilizing gradually varied
flow are needed for the analysis.
d. Dynamic Storm Drain Network Modeling
1) For designing large storm drain networks, dynamic flow routing models may
be used.
4. Stormwater Quality
a. First Flush Basins
1) Water quality control ponds known as first flush ponds are required for all
industrial drainage areas.
2) Ponds shall collect the first 30 mm of rainfall from each event. After the
collection of the first flush, any additional rain falling on industrial process
areas may be diverted directly into the storm drainage system.
3) First flush ponds shall be lined so that they are completely impervious.
4) Industrial areas must meet all Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
regarding drainage and stormwater retention.
5. Overland Relief
a. Overland Relief for Storm Drain Overflows

Rev. 1 5.6 - 101
1) All storm drain structures shall be designed to accommodate storm drainage

overflows which could result from an obstructed storm drain line for a 10-year
storm event.
2) Storm drainage overflows shall be routed via overland flow, drainage swales,
or roadway drainage conveyance that eventually connect to a primary
drainage channel.
3) All storm drain designs shall show the flow routes and eventual discharge
point of all drainage overflows. These flow routes must accommodate all
locations where a storm drain obstruction could occur.
4) Finished grading shall be such that any storm drain overflows are routed away
from buildings or structures.
5) Storm drain overflows which use overland flow as a conveyance shall be lined
with grass, pavement or other erosion protection measures, see TABLE
5.6.4.J for acceptable lining materials for secondary channels and overland
discharges.
D. Drainage Systems and Structures
1. Culverts
a. General Design Requirements
1) Minimize storm drain pipelines size is 300 mm.
2) Minimum burial depth to top of pipe shall be 1.0 m. Maximum burial depth
shall be 6.0 m, unless project specific approval for deeper depths is granted.
3) Buoyancy of storm drain shall be considered and flotation of the pipe shall be
prevented with appropriate means where high groundwater conditions are
anticipated.
4) All storm drain shall be designed to prevent damage from superimposed live
and dead loads. Proper allowance for loads on the storm drain shall be made
for soil and potential groundwater conditions, as well as the width and depth
of trench. Where necessary, special bedding, haunching and initial backfill,
concrete cradle, or other special construction shall be used to withstand
anticipated potential superimposed loading or loss of trench wall stability.
5) Slopes
(a) For calculations which assume that the pipe is flowing full and a tailwater
height of 3/5 the culvert diameter,
(1) A flow velocity of 1.0 m/s minimum and 4.5 m/s maximumis
required.
(i) 1.0 m/s results in a 0.6 m/s velocity when the flow depth is 25%
of the pipe diameter,
(b) Storm drains shall be laid with uniform slope between manholes.
6) Alignment
(a) Storm drains shall be laid with straight alignment between manholes.
Curvilinear storm drains are not allowed.
7) Location

Rev. 1 5.6 - 102
(a) Shall be located within roadways where possible.

8) Proximity to other utilities
(a) Refer to requirements in Subsection 5.7.1
2. Roadway Drainage
a. Highway drainage structures, road surface flow are usually evaluated in terms of
peak runoff or discharge (Rational Method).
3. Drainage Structures (Storm Manholes & Catch Basins)
1) Location
(a) Drainage structures shall be installed at:
(1) The end of each line
(2) All changes in grade, size, or alignment
(3) All intersections.
(b) Drainage structures maximum spacing:
(1) Storm pipe diameter Φ: < or = 375 mm – 120 m
(2) Storm pipe diameter Φ: 450 mm to 750 mm – 150 m
(3) Storm pipe diameter Φ: > 750 mm – 180 m
(c) Drainage structure minimum diameter:
(1) Minimum access diameter of 750 mm
(2) Storm pipe diameter Φ: < or = 450 mm – 1200 mm
(3) Storm pipe diameter Φ: 550 mm to 750 mm – 1500 m
(4) Storm pipe diameter Φ: 850 mm to 1050 mm – 1800 mm
(5) Pipes clash when penetrating manhole wall: Size the manhole
diameter to provide at least 6” of solid manhole wall between
manhole penetration openings.
b. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) Reinforced Plastic Mortar (RPM) Sewer Pipe
(a) Sizes 300 mm to 1200 mm
(b) ASTM D3754-14
(c) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
(d) ASTM D3567-11
c. Acceptable Catchbasin and Manhole Material
1) Reinforced Concrete
4. Open Channels
1) Open channels shall be used for the primary drainage system.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 103
2) Open channels that outfall to the Gulf shall be tide-locked.

3) Primary drainage open channels shall be designed to convey a 50-year event
and the 100-year event. Refer to FIGURE 5.6.4.E for a typical cross-section
of a primary drainage channel.
FIGURE 5.6.4.E PRIMARY OPEN CHANNEL CROSS-SECTION
b. Acceptable Channel Lining Materials

1) Normally it will be sufficient to prevent erosion by extending aggregate erosion
protection material on embankment side slopes across the full width of the
ditch. In addition, rip-rap shall be provided adjacent to the wing walls at the
inlet and outlet ends of drainage box culverts to prevent local scour.
(a) TABLE 5.6.4.J indicates the channel lining materials for various situations.
2) Concrete lined channels shall be required in the following situations:
(a) Where this is the only method of providing required capacity.
(b) At connections with lined primary channels. In this case the concrete lining
shall extend back from the primary channel for a length equal to 3 times
the width of the primary channel.
TABLE 5.6.4.J: CHANNEL LINING CRITERIA
Rip Rap
Sulphur Sides, Marl and
Acceptable Lining Gravel or
Concrete Asphalt Covered
System Grass
(Plain) Concrete Swales
Bottom
Primary – Standing
Water Permitted for Yes No No No
Storage Purposes
Primary – No Standing
Yes Yes No No
Water Permitted
Secondary – Channel
Yes Yes Yes No
or Overland Discharge

Rev. 1 5.6 - 104
Rip Rap
Sulphur Sides, Marl and
Acceptable Lining Gravel or
Concrete Asphalt Covered
System Grass
(Plain) Concrete Swales
Bottom
Detention/Retention
No No Yes Yes
Ponds
5. Detention Basins/Ponds
a. Surface Basins
1) Shall have side slopes of 3H:1V
2) Access must be provided for maintenance vehicles.
3) Depth of ponding for the 100-year 24-hour rainfall event shall not exceed 1000
mm.
4) The pond must maintain at least 300 mm of freeboard during the 100-year 24-
hour event.
5) The pond must have an overflow structure with the capacity to handle the peak
inflow during the 100-year 24-hour storm event.
6) Pond must be sized to reduce peak runoff discharge to 0.14 m3/s per hectare
during a 100-year 24-hour rainfall event.
b. Underground Detention Storage
1) Underground detention chambers shall not be allowed.
6. Outfall Structures
a. All outfall structures shall be protected by rip-rap aprons or concrete lined aprons.
b. Outfall structures are required where pipes are discharged into the ocean, channels,
or basins.
c. Rip-Rap shall be sized using the Isbash method based on the maximum outfall
velocity during a 100-year storm event:
692(𝐾𝑉)2
𝐷50 =
(2𝑔(𝑆𝑠 − 1))
1) 𝐷50 = 𝑅𝑖𝑝𝑟𝑎𝑝 𝑠𝑖𝑧𝑒, 𝑚𝑚

2) 𝑉 = 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦, 𝑚/𝑠
3) 𝑆𝑠 = 𝑆𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑐 𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑖𝑝𝑟𝑎𝑝 (𝑢𝑠𝑢𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑦 2.65)
4) 𝐾 = 1.0
5) The minimum D50 riprap size shall be 100 mm.
6) Rip-rap thickness shall be 1.5 times the D50 of the rip-rap.
d. All outfalls shall be evaluated for the potential for hydraulic jump and the need for an
outfall energy dissipater.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 105
e. Refer to The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of Communications Highway Design

Manual Section 1.10 Hydraulic Design for the methodology on energy dissipater
design.
7. Exfiltration Systems
a. Exfiltration systems (subsurface drainage) shall be provided for foundation walls, cut
areas, roadways, parking lots, and landscape areas etc., where it becomes
necessary to control perched water or high groundwater.
b. Exfiltration systems may tie into secondary storm drain structures or primary
c. Design Requirements
1) Requirements for hydraulic designs shall be based on the following:
(a) Soil permeability, as determined from the percolation rates in TABLE
5.6.3.K. below:
TABLE 5.6.4.K
Material mm/hr
Marl 0
Dense Sand (Compacted) 150
Loose Sand (Natural State) 300
Sabkhah 25*
*- To be determined by site specific permeability testing
(b) Area to be drained, as based on site specific evaluation and exploration

data, including in-situ permeability and laboratory test results.
(c) Anticipated head and head difference relative to the prevailing
groundwater level.
(d) Underdrain to be sized for open channel flow, using criteria defined in
Subsection 5.6.4.D.2.c.
(e) No underdrain shall have a diameter of less than 100 mm for circular
sections or any dimension of less than 200 mm for any other section.
d. System Design
1) System design shall be combined with practical considerations to assure
satisfactory performance under actual field conditions, including the following:
(a) Joints shall be soil tight. Constructed in such a manner by utilization of
opening size, gaskets and/or filter media so that the surrounding soil will
not enter the system.
(b) The maximum length between cleanouts or access holes shall be 100 m.
(c) All subsurface drains shall have a free-flowing positive outlet. Use of blind
drains, French drains or any other configuration which does not have a
positive conduit will not be permitted due to potential for sediment buildup.

Rev. 1 5.6 - 106
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.7
UTILITIES
1 2020 General update WT LAS LAS MRC OMQ


SECTION 5.7 UTILITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.7.0 UTILITIES ...................................................................................................................... 1

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
2. Location of Utilities ........................................................................................................ 1
3. Conflicting Utilities ......................................................................................................... 1
4. Utilities Shown on Civil Site Plans ................................................................................. 1
5. Roadways Shall Not Be Cut. ......................................................................................... 1
6. Instrumentation .............................................................................................................. 2
7. Masterplanning of Utilities ............................................................................................. 2
5.7.1 POTABLE WATER ........................................................................................................ 3
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 3
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 3
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................... 3
3. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 3
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 3
6. Codes ............................................................................................................................ 4
7. Standards ...................................................................................................................... 4
8. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 5
B. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 5
C. Potable Water Transmission System ............................................................................ 5
1. Potable Water Transmission System: ........................................................................... 5
D. Potable Water Distribution Systems .............................................................................. 5
1. The Potable Water Distribution System ........................................................................ 5
E. Water Quality ................................................................................................................. 7
1. Maintaining Water Quality ............................................................................................. 8
F. Projecting Water Demands ............................................................................................ 8
1. Irrigation Water Demands .............................................................................................. 8
2. Potable Water Demands ............................................................................................... 9
G. Fire Flow Requirements ............................................................................................... 11
1. Calculating Fire Flow Demands.................................................................................... 11
H. Hydraulic Modeling ....................................................................................................... 12
1. Purpose ........................................................................................................................ 12

Rev. 1 5.7 - i
2. Modeling Software ........................................................................................................ 12

3. Required Modeling Scenarios ...................................................................................... 12
4. Peak Use factors .......................................................................................................... 12
5. Model Setup.................................................................................................................. 12
6. Hydraulic Model Reporting ........................................................................................... 14
I. Water System Design Criteria ...................................................................................... 15
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 15
2. System Pressure .......................................................................................................... 16
3. Water Lines (Water Pipes) ........................................................................................... 17
4. Storage ......................................................................................................................... 17
J. Transmission and Water Distribution System Piping and Valves ................................ 17
1. Water Distribution Pipelines ......................................................................................... 17
2. Isolation Valves ............................................................................................................ 18
3. Air Valves ...................................................................................................................... 19
4. Joint Restraint ............................................................................................................... 20
5. Bends and Fittings ........................................................................................................ 21
6. Fire Hydrants ................................................................................................................ 21
7. Flow Meters and Services ............................................................................................ 22
8. Cross Connection Control ............................................................................................ 23
9. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape .............................................................. 24
10. Blow-off Assemblies ..................................................................................................... 24
K. Water Distribution Pumping Equipment ....................................................................... 24
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 24
2. Booster Pumps ............................................................................................................. 25
3. Mechanical Requirements ............................................................................................ 26
4. Chlorination................................................................................................................... 26
5. Building ......................................................................................................................... 27
L. Water Storage Tanks .................................................................................................... 27
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 27
2. Sizing ............................................................................................................................ 28
3. Piping ............................................................................................................................ 28
4. Stored Water Age ......................................................................................................... 29
5. Access .......................................................................................................................... 29
6. Vents ............................................................................................................................. 30
7. Roof and Sidewall ......................................................................................................... 30

Rev. 1 5.7 - ii
8. Safety............................................................................................................................ 30
9. Painting and/or Cathodic Protection ............................................................................. 31
5.7.2 SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL SEWER SYSTEM ...................................................... 32
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 32
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 32
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 32
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 32
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 32
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 32
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 32
9. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 32
B. Sewer Collection System .............................................................................................. 32
C. Sanitary Sewer Design Flow Criteria ............................................................................ 33
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 33
2. Sewage Production ...................................................................................................... 33
D. Hydraulic Modeling ....................................................................................................... 34
1. Modeling Software ........................................................................................................ 34
2. Hydraulic Model Reporting ........................................................................................... 34
E. Gravity Sewer Collection System Piping ...................................................................... 34
1. Gravity Sewer Lines ..................................................................................................... 34
2. Manholes ...................................................................................................................... 36
3. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape .............................................................. 37
F. Sewage Lift Stations and Pumping Stations ................................................................ 37
1. Site Selection ................................................................................................................ 37
2. Wet Wells ...................................................................................................................... 37
3. Pumps........................................................................................................................... 38
4. Electrical ....................................................................................................................... 38
5. Pump Station Piping, Valves and Flow Meters ............................................................ 39
6. Ventilation ..................................................................................................................... 39
7. Emergency Operation ................................................................................................... 39
8. Odor Control ................................................................................................................. 40
9. Force Mains .................................................................................................................. 40
G. Industrial Wastewater ................................................................................................... 40

Rev. 1 5.7 - iii
1. Design Flows ................................................................................................................ 40

2. RCER Requirements .................................................................................................... 41
3. Design Requirements ................................................................................................... 41
5.7.3 RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM (IRRIGATION) ............................................................ 42
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 42
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 42
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 42
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 42
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 42
6. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 42
7. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 42
B. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission Systems ..................................................... 43
1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission System (Primary System): ......................... 43
2. The Recycled Water Transmission Systems includes the following components: ...... 43
3. Acceptable Pipe Materials ............................................................................................ 43
C. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Distribution Systems ......................................................... 43
1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Pipelines ........................................................................... 43
2. Isolation Valves ............................................................................................................ 45
3. Storage Tanks .............................................................................................................. 45
4. Pumping Stations ......................................................................................................... 46
5.7.4 SEA WATER COOLING ............................................................................................... 47
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 47
1. Design Criteria Background.......................................................................................... 47
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 49
C. Design Criteria .............................................................................................................. 49
1. Temperatures ............................................................................................................... 49
2. Salts in Cooling Water .................................................................................................. 49
3. Heat Exchangers .......................................................................................................... 49
4. Seawater Cooling Towers (SCT) .................................................................................. 49
D. Water Quality and Treatment ....................................................................................... 50
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 50
2. Design and Approval Sequence ................................................................................... 50
E. Hydraulic Modeling ....................................................................................................... 52

Rev. 1 5.7 - iv
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 52
2. Hydraulic and Thermal Loads....................................................................................... 52
3. Modeling Report ........................................................................................................... 52
F. Distribution Piping and Valve Chambers ...................................................................... 52
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 52
2. Design and Approval .................................................................................................... 53
G. Pumping Stations ......................................................................................................... 55
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 55
2. Design and Approval Sequence ................................................................................... 55
5.7.5 FUEL GAS .................................................................................................................... 59
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 59
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 59
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 59
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 60
5. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 61
6. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 61
8. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 63
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 63
C. Natural Gas Distribution: .............................................................................................. 63
2. Underground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................... 63
3. Aboveground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................... 66
D. Liquid Fuel Distribution: ................................................................................................ 69
2. Underground Liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................ 70
3. Aboveground liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings ................................................................. 73
E. Storage Tanks: ............................................................................................................. 76
2. Underground Gas Storage Tanks ................................................................................ 76
3. Aboveground Gas Storage Tanks ................................................................................ 77
4. Underground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks ..................................................................... 77
5. Aboveground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks ..................................................................... 78
6. Tank Appurtenances .................................................................................................... 78

Rev. 1 5.7 - v
7. Under Tank Leak Detection and Sub-Grade Protection. .............................................. 79

8. Painting and Coating. ................................................................................................... 79
9. Insulation. ..................................................................................................................... 79
10. Lighting. ........................................................................................................................ 79
11. Grounding. .................................................................................................................... 79
12. Cathodic Protection. ..................................................................................................... 79
13. Foundations. ................................................................................................................. 79
F. Pumps:.......................................................................................................................... 79
1. Transfer Pumps ............................................................................................................ 79
2. Submersible Fuel Pumps ............................................................................................. 79
5.7.6 ELECTRICAL................................................................................................................ 80
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 80
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 80
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 80
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 80
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 80
6. Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................. 80
7. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 80
8. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 80
10. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 80
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 80
1. References ................................................................................................................... 80
C. Primary Electrical Distribution....................................................................................... 81
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 81
2. Community Area Primary Distribution System ............................................................. 81
3. Industrial Area Primary Distribution System ................................................................. 81
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface ............................................................. 81
D. Secondary Electrical Utility ........................................................................................... 82
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 82
2. Community Area Secondary Distribution System ........................................................ 82
3. Industrial Area Secondary Distribution System ............................................................ 84
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface ............................................................. 85
E. Design Criteria .............................................................................................................. 85

Rev. 1 5.7 - vi
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 85
F. Manholes and Handholes ............................................................................................. 86
1. Application .................................................................................................................... 86
2. Construction.................................................................................................................. 86
G. Ductbanks and Sleeves ................................................................................................ 86
1. Application .................................................................................................................... 86
2. Construction and Installation ........................................................................................ 86
3. Sleeves for Road Crossing via Horizontal Directional Drilling ...................................... 87
H. Direct Buried Installations ............................................................................................. 87
1. Application .................................................................................................................... 87
2. Routing and Clearances ............................................................................................... 87
3. Trenching ...................................................................................................................... 87
4. Cable Markers .............................................................................................................. 88
5. Cable Spacing .............................................................................................................. 88
6. Trenching ...................................................................................................................... 88
5.7.7 COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................................... 90
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 90
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 90
2. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 90
3. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 90
4. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 90
5. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 90
7. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 90
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 90
1. References ................................................................................................................... 90
C. Communications Utility ................................................................................................. 91
1. Fiber Optic Cables ........................................................................................................ 91
D. Design Criteria .............................................................................................................. 93
1. Link Loss Budget Requirements................................................................................... 93
E. Manholes and Handholes ............................................................................................. 93
1. Racking ......................................................................................................................... 93
5.7.8 HYDRONIC COOLING ................................................................................................. 95
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 95
1. Scope ............................................................................................................................ 95
2. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 95

Rev. 1 5.7 - vii
3. Applicability ................................................................................................................... 95
4. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 95
5. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 95
B. Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 96
1. Define in Part 3 of project specifications. ..................................................................... 96
C. Materials ....................................................................................................................... 96
1. Materials Selection ....................................................................................................... 96
2. Equipment Selection ..................................................................................................... 97
3. Materials and Equipment Engineering ......................................................................... 97
D. System Design.............................................................................................................. 98
1. Redundancy.................................................................................................................. 98
2. Space Requirements .................................................................................................... 99
E. Piping ........................................................................................................................... 102
1. Water Velocities in Piping ............................................................................................ 102
2. Piping Design............................................................................................................... 102
F. Equipment and Components ....................................................................................... 103
1. Valves and Accessories .............................................................................................. 103
2. Pumps.......................................................................................................................... 104
3. Mechanical Equipment Rooms .................................................................................... 104
4. Steam Systems ........................................................................................................... 105
5. High Temperature Water Systems .............................................................................. 106
6. Vibration Control .......................................................................................................... 107
5.7.9 PIPELINE CORRIDORS ............................................................................................. 110
A. General ........................................................................................................................ 110
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 110
2. Applicability .................................................................................................................. 110
3. Definitions .................................................................................................................... 110
4. Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 112
5. Codes and Standards .................................................................................................. 113
6. Related Documents: .................................................................................................... 117
B. Regulatory Requirements ............................................................................................ 117
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 117
2. General Stakeholders Responsibilities ........................................................................ 118
C. Design Requirements .................................................................................................. 120

Rev. 1 5.7 - viii
1. Design & Operating Philosophy................................................................................... 120

2. Pipeline Design Criteria ............................................................................................... 121
3. Design of Valves .......................................................................................................... 125
D. Design and Testing Factors......................................................................................... 125
1. Design and Testing Criteria ......................................................................................... 125
E. Structural Supports ...................................................................................................... 126
1. Structural Supports ...................................................................................................... 126
2. Symbols and Notations ................................................................................................ 126
3. Strength Design Load Combinations for Pipe Racks, Pipe Bridges and Pipe Supports126
4. Allowable Stress Design Load Combinations for Pipe Racks, Pipe Bridges and Pipe Supports
127
5. Exceptions to Factored and Nominal Load Combinations .......................................... 127
6. Stability against Overturning, Uplift, Sliding, and Buoyancy ....................................... 127
F. Construction and Construction Inspection ................................................................... 129
1. General ........................................................................................................................ 129
2. Material Inspection ...................................................................................................... 129
3. Qualification of Inspectors ........................................................................................... 130
4. Type and Extent of Examination Required .................................................................. 130
5. Welding: General ......................................................................................................... 130
6. Construction and As-built records ............................................................................... 133
7. Excavation Safety - Minimum Safety Requirements ................................................... 134
G. Pressure Testing of Pipelines, Components and Vessels .......................................... 135
1. Pressure Testing of Pipelines. ..................................................................................... 135
H. Pipeline Labeling ......................................................................................................... 142
1. Pipeline Labeling ......................................................................................................... 142
2. Component B -Industry Identification Numbers ........................................................... 143
3. Component C - Line Serial Number ............................................................................ 145
I. Operations, Inspection & Maintenance ....................................................................... 147
1. Industries Requirements .............................................................................................. 147
J. Criteria for Cathodic Protection and Determination of Measurements ........................ 148
1. Criteria for Performance of Cathodic Protection .......................................................... 148
K. Integrity Management .................................................................................................. 148
1. Different Factors Contributing to Pipeline Failures ...................................................... 148
2. Integrity Management Plan (IMP) ................................................................................ 148
3. The Relative Risk of a Pipeline.................................................................................... 149

Rev. 1 5.7 - ix
SUBSECTION 5.7.0 UTILITIES
5.7.0 UTILITIES
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This subsection provides the design guidelines for the design of all utilities within the
Jubail Industrial City and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City. These guidelines apply to the
following utilities:
1) Potable Water
2) Sanitary and Industrial Sewer Systems
3) Recycled Water ( Irrigation )
4) Sea Water Cooling
5) Fuel Gas
6) Electrical
7) Communications
8) Hydronic Cooling
2. Location of Utilities
a. Utilities within the Jubail Industrial City are located within utilities corridor rights of
way exclusive of the roadway rights of way. Utilities should not be located under the
asphalt travel lanes.
b. Specific utilities can be located outside of travel lanes, after RCJ approval, within the
following areas:
1) Parking (under pavement)
2) Shoulder (under pavement)
3) Sidewalk/park strip (under block pavers)
c. Locating utilities in these areas allow for installation, maintenance, repair and
replacement without disrupting vehicle travel.
3. Conflicting Utilities
a. Where the location of utilities conflict the following requirements shall be followed:
1) Horizontal separation shall be a minimum of 1.0 meters measured from edge
of utility to edge of utility.
2) Vertical separation shall be a minimum of 0.5 meters measured from edge of
utility to edge of utility.
3) When potable water pipelines are crossed by other utilities the potable water
pipeline shall be on the top.
4. Utilities Shown on Civil Site Plans
a. All utilities in this section 5.7 are required to be shown on civil site plans.
5. Roadways Shall Not Be Cut.
a. Roadways shall not be cut for crossing of existing roadways with new utilities

Rev. 1 5.7 - 1
SUBSECTION 5.7.0 UTILITIES
b. Utilities shall not be installed in existing roadways using open cut methods.
c. Directional drilling or other trenchless construction methods may be utilized to cross
existing roadways.
d. The following installation shall be presented to the RCJ for review and approval:
1) Trenchless construction methods
2) Open cut exceptions
3) Utilities installation outside of the Utilities Corridor, within Roadway Right-of-
way
6. Instrumentation
a. There are several systems within this section which use automated instrumentation
and control systems, including potable water, recycled water, sewer,
telecommunication, electrical, etc. The instrumentation and control for these utilities
are addressed in another section of the GEM
b. Refer to Section 5.5.3 for guidance on the instrumentation and control design
requirements.
7. Masterplanning of Utilities
a. As the developed area within the Royal Commission expands, the infrastructures
and utilities requires upgrading to the requirements of the newly developed areas.
The industrial area requies potable water, sanitary wastewater collection, industrial
wastewater collection,drainage, seawater cooling, electrical and telecommunication
distribution network where as the the residential area requires potable water,
sanitary wastewater collection, drainage, irrigation water and power and
telecommunication distribution network.
b. For the industrial area, the requirements would be determined by the type of
industries determined by the industrial masterplan. The residential area’s
requirements will be dependent upon population growth and landuse for the area
involved. The population projection information is available from Strategic Planning
Investment Department.
c. The sources of utilities will have to be evaluated for availability. The infrastructure to
transmit and distribute the utilities will be planned and located in the Masterplan.
The Right-of-way will be set aside.
d. However, there are considerations in planning for the utilities. In order to avoid
potential conflicts, it is important to have a basemap of the existing utilities in the
Masterplan area. It is important to provide redundancies in the electrical power and
potable water network. There may be a need to demolish existing utilities that are
no longer in use or inadequately sized and replaced with the required utilities. In
order to have a effective Masterplan, good as-builts are necessary. As builts are
available from the Document Control Section.
e. The proposed utilities are then input into the overall Jubail Industrial Citywide
Models and analyze the impact of these utilities to the overall scheme. These
analyses can then be used by the Royal Commission to plan the infrastructures
required to support the new development.
f. Masterplans for utilities are very essential to ensure the growth of Jubail Industrial
City is supported by the required infrastructures and utilities.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 2
SUBSECTION 5.7.1 POTABLE WATER
5.7.1 POTABLE WATER
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides the design guide for the design of potable water utilities. The
potable water utilities include the transmission and distribution network piping
systems.
b. The RCJ is responsible for design and construction of new potable water utility
systems.
c. Marafiq is responsible for operation, maintenance, and replacement of the potable
water utility system.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to potable water facilities downstream of water treatment
plants, including but not limited to storage tanks, pump stations, pipelines, valves,
and flow meters.
b. This Section applies to potable water utilities outside of buildings and structures.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.0.
1) ADD : Average Day Demand
3) CAD : Computer Aided Drafting
4) DIP: Ductile Iron Pipe
5) FM: Factory Mutual (see UL)
6) GIS: Geographic Information Systems
8) IFC: International Fire Code
10) IPC: International Plumbing Code
12) ISO: International Organization for Standardization
13) kVA: Kilovolt Amps
14) kW: Kilowatt
15) L: Liters
16) LPS: Liters Per Second

Rev. 1 5.7 - 3
17) Lpcd: Liters per Capita per Day

18) L/m2: Liters per Square Meter
19) m: Meter
20) mm: Millimeter
21) m/s: Meters per Second
22) O & M: Operation and Maintenance
24) NSF: NSF International
25) PDD : Peak Day Demand
26) PHD: Peak Hour Demand
28) RCJ: Royal Commission
30) UL: Underwriters Laboratory (also known as FM - Factory Mutual)
31) USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
32) UV: Ultraviolet
a. Follow the design requirements in the following publications:
1) AWWA Design Manuals - American Water Works Association Design
Manuals
6. Codes
a. For information regarding the authority having jurisdiction, refer to Section 3.1.0.
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional Codes.
c. US EPA National Drinking Water Regulations
1) http://water.epa.gov/drink/contaminants/
2) EPA - Environmental Protection Agency
7. Standards
a. The following is a list of Standards which apply to this Section, refer to Chapter 3 for
a list of additional Standards.
1) AWWA Standards - American Water Works Association Standards
(a) http://www.awwa.org/
2) Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board (GLUMRB) - 10 States Standards
(a) http://10statesstandards.com/
(b) NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and
Their Appurtances

Rev. 1 5.7 - 4
8. Approvals
a. The RCJ shall review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications, per
reference Section 1.1.0.
B. Commissioning
a. Refer to Section 4.5.9 for commissioning requirements.
C. Potable Water Transmission System
1. Potable Water Transmission System:
a. The potable water transmission system conveys water from the source of supply to
the Distribution System.
1) The Transmission System includes the following components:
(a) Suction water storage tanks (at water treatment plants)
(b) Chlorination injection facilities
(c) Pumping stations with multiple large pumps with constant speed drives
(d) Transmission pipelines
2) Operational Objective
(a) The operational objective of the potable water transmission system is to
convey water from the water sources to the Distribution System.
3) Service Connections
(a) There are no direct service connections to the Transmission System.
4) Flow Rate
(a) Typical operation of transmission system pumping stations is to operate
in constant speed conditions.
(b) The flow rate shall vary to meet demand by turning pumps on and off.
5) Pressure Range
(a) Typical operating pressure ranges from 1.0 bar to 2.0 bars at the pump
station point of discharge.
6) A typical potable water transmission system is shown in Figure 5.7.1.A.
D. Potable Water Distribution Systems
1. The Potable Water Distribution System
a. The Potable Water Distribution System conveys water from district water storage
tanks to the water users within the respective district, such as residences, schools,
restaurants, commercial businesses and industrial areas.
1) The Distribution Systems includes the following components:
(a) Chlorine injection facilities
(b) Large, multiple pumps, variable speed pumping station(s)
(c) Distribution pipelines
(d) Water storage tanks

Rev. 1 5.7 - 5
2) Service Connections
(a) The Distribution System has service connections to its pipelines.
3) Operational Objective
(a) The operational objective of the potable water distribution system is to
deliver water to the end users such as homes, schools, commercial
businesses and industrial areas and supply fire hydrants along roads and
public facilities with required flows only.
4) Flow Rate
(a) Typical operation of distribution system pumping stations is to operate
with variable speed pumps to meet potable demands at a constant
discharge pressure.
(b) The flow rate shall vary to meet variable demand by varying pump
speeds of multiple pumps and turning pumps on and off as demand
dictates to maintain a relatively constant discharge pressure.
5) Pressure Range
(a) The distribution system shall be designed to provide minimum pressures
during various scenarios. Refer to Design Criteria below. A typical
potable water distribution system is shown in Figure 5.7.1.A.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 6
FIGURE 5.7.1.A: POTABLE WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
Arabian Gulf
E. Water Quality

Rev. 1 5.7 - 7
1. Maintaining Water Quality

a. A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall provide for the following design issues:
1) Storage Tank Pre-chlorination
(a) Depending on the size of the pressure zone infrastructure and the initial
water demand when water deliveries begin, a pre-chlorination system
may be required in front of water storage tanks. These systems will likely
to be temporary in nature and abandoned after adequate water use has
developed within the pressure zone.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractors shall review the growth projections of
the water pressure zone with the RCJ and Marafiq.
(c) The RCJ, in consultation with Marafiq, will determine if pre-chlorination is
required.
2) 2) Reduced Water Tank Storage Level During Early Years
(a) (a) During the early stages of development of new distribution pressure
zones RCJ shall work with Marafiq to prevent the loss of chlorine
residual by decreasing the level of water stored in water storage tanks.
(b) (b) Storing less water shall decrease the detention time in the water
storage tanks resulting in a decreased loss of chlorine residual.
(c) The minimum water storage volume shall be fire storage plus the two
days of average day demand (ADD) storage.
3) 3) Storage Tank Post-chlorination:
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractors are required to design a post-
chlorination dose downstream of transmission discharge storage tanks,
IE for Distribution System Booster Pump Stations.
(b) The dosage will be designed to insure an adequate chlorine residual
level is in the distribution system to protect against any possible
subsequent contamination during distribution.
(1) Dosages will depend on the chlorine concentration leaving the
water storage tank upstream of the Distribution Booster Station.
(2) The chlorine residual leaving the Distribution Booster Stations shall
be 0.5 - 0.8 mg/L (ppm).
F. Projecting Water Demands
1. Irrigation Water Demands
a. Kindergartens and elementary schools shall use potable water for outdoor irrigation
of plants. Recycled water is not allowed.
b. Outdoor water use (irrigation of plants) in public spaces outside of private residential
or commercial sites of is typical accomplished with irrigation water (recycled water -
refer to 5.7.3).
1) This applies to open spaces maintained by the RCJ.
2) Reference GEM Subsection 5.6.5 Landscaping - Irrigation Systems.
3) Refer to Subsection 5.7.3 Irrigation for design guidelines of the irrigation utility
systems.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 8
4) Refer to Subsection 5.6.5.J for design guidelines for Plant Irrigation.

c. The following discusses the calculation of irrigation demands for areas required to
be served by the potable system:
1) Evaluate the irrigated area with the consumption rate of the landscaping
based on the irrigation application type such as spray, drip, and flood.
(a) For spray irrigation of lawn areas, the average weekly demand is in the
range of 50 mm per week.
(b) Drip irrigation rates shall be evaluated on a case by case basis that
considers the plant species and irrigation methods.
(c) Recycled water is allowed for drip-irrigation system in areas of public
use.
(d) With the RCJ’s approval, spray irrigation may be allowed in non-public
areas.
2. Potable Water Demands
a. Projecting Potable Water Demands
1) In order to effectively size key infrastructure associated with transmission and
distribution water systems, water demands shall be calculated for all new
projects. This includes areas where land use may have changed from a
previously approved Urban Development Plan.
2) Water demands shall be projected by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and
submitted to the RCJ for review and approval before sizing any water or
sewer infrastructure.
b. Residential Water Demands, measured in Lpcd.
1) The following offers typical unit consumptions based on typical land uses.
Project specific figures shall be determined for each project based on
available data and engineering judgment.
(a) Residential
(1) Average Day Demand = 545 Lpcd
(2) The per capita amount may be multiplied by the typical number of
residents per unit type to determine unit flow rates for a wide variety
of residential development types.
(b) Apartments
(c) Labor Camp Apartments
(i) For information only the basis for the average day residential
demand is outlined below:
(ii) Indoor Uses: 400 Lpcd
(iii) Outdoor Uses: 145 Lpcd
(iv) Total: 545 Lpcd

Rev. 1 5.7 - 9
c. Commercial.
1) The specific water use in the different categories of institutional, recreational
and commercial areas may be calculated using the values in Table 5.7.1-A.
TABLE 5.7.1.A: SPECIFIC DAILY WATER USE IN DIFFERENT CATEGORIES
Average Day Demand

Land Use
(in Liters per unit)
Mosque 10 L/worshipper
Small Business 7 L/m2
Shopping Center 37 L/m2
Restaurant 32 L/patron + 57 L/employee
Coffee House 22 L/patron + 57 L/employee
Hotel 200L/bed
Kindergarten 76 L/pupil + 50 L/employee
Elementary School 76 L/pupil + 50L/employee
Intermediate School 95 L/pupil + 50 L/employee
Secondary School 95 L/pupil + 50 L/employee
Offices 9 L/ per employee
Hospital 1230 L/bed + 57 L/employee
Clinic 378 L/patient + 57 L/employee
Sports Stadium 20 L/seat
2) For early stages of design, it may be difficult to complete a detailed

calculation using the values listed above to determine the water consumption
for commercial land uses. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate
demand assumptions with the RCJ.
d. Light and Heavy Industries
1) It is not feasible to set-up guidelines for the water consumption in areas with
light and heavy industries (being industries with an extensive consumption for
the industrial production). The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall interview the
potential industrial user then make an assessment of the expected
consumption.
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall look at historic uses of similar industries.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 10
3) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide potable water, and treated
industrial wastewater consumption projections for new light and heavy
industries for RCJ’s review and approval.
e. Physical Losses (Leakage)
1) The physical losses from pipes in the water supply system shall depend on
the age of the pipes, pipe material and joints, pressure in the system, and
construction conditions.
2) For new pipelines constructed according the materials specified in this GEM
no water loss factor shall be added.
3) For older pipelines a twenty percent (20%) increase factor for the total daily
water consumption shall be added to account for unknown water losses.
(a) Some studies of water distribution system have shown losses less than
10%. Therefore, the A/E may make an individual assessment of the
expected unaccounted water losses to substantiate the use of less than
10% for unknown losses. The minimum factor allowed by the RCJ for
unaccounted water loss is five percent (5%).
G. Fire Flow Requirements
1. Calculating Fire Flow Demands
a. The water system shall be capable of meeting the Fire Flow Demand when added to
the Peak Day Demand of the system. Fire Flow includes the required hydrant flow
as well as fire sprinkler flow.
1) Hydrant Flow - quantity and duration shall be calculated in accordance with
the International Fire Code (IFC) in conjunction with the Saudi Building Code
801 Fire Protection Requirements.
(a) Hydrant flow shall vary between residential and nonresidential areas.
(b) It shall be noted that the IFC does allow a reduction in hydrant flow
based on buildings equipped with fire sprinklers.
(c) A corresponding reduction of duration is not allowed.
(d) Coordination with other disciplines shall be required to determine the fire
flow based on the buildings planned and the type of construction.
(e) The minimum required hydrant flow is 2000 L/min at required pressures
per 5.7.1.H.
2) Fire Sprinkler Flow - The fire sprinkler flow shall be calculated by the A/E
and/or EPC’s mechanical engineer; refer to Subsection 5.4.1.D.1.
(a) The mechanical engineer shall determine appropriate sprinkler flows for
inclusion in the water system evaluation.
3) In industrial areas, each industry shall in principle be responsible for making
their own arrangements for firefighting within their boundaries, i.e. the RCJ
shall not provide firefighting services in the Industrial Areas.
(a) Each industrial facility that requires fire protection system shall provide
its own dedicated fire water storage tank and fire water pump system. As
such the primary fire water supply is via dedicated fire water storage and
pumping within the industry. Fire water via the external hydrant system is
for use by RC/Civil Defense for supplementary firefighting.
Rev. 1 5.7 - 11
(b) The hydraulic calculations of the network system shall evaluate to what
extent a major prolonged fire may be fought with water outside the
industry's boundary.
H. Hydraulic Modeling
1. Purpose
a. Hydraulic modeling shall be used as a design tool to evaluate new development as it
relates to the design of water system improvements.
1) Effects on existing systems shall be evaluated.
2) Hydraulic modeling shall illustrate that proposed improvements meet required
pressure and flow requirements of this Section.
3) See AWWA M 32 for full procedures associated with Computer Modeling of
Water Distribution Systems.
b. Urban Development Plans
1) Hydraulic modeling shall be completed based on the approved Urban
Development Plan and shall be included in the "Utility Load Requirement."
2. Modeling Software
a. Modeling may be completed in standalone, CAD integrated, or GIS integrated
modeling platforms. Acceptable modeling software include:
1) WaterCAD (Bentley)
2) Other software platforms may be allowed with prior approval from the RCJ.
3. Required Modeling Scenarios
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.G for required pressures and maximum water line
velocities. Model Scenarios shall be prepared for the following scenarios:
1) Average Day Demand
2) Peak Day Demand
3) Peak Hourly Demand
4) Peak Day + Fire Flow
4. Peak Use factors
a. To complete the design of the water system, water lines, pump stations, storage and
other key facilities shall be sized based on appropriate peak demand scenarios and
required minimum and maximum pressures. Peak use factors shall be multiplied by
the average daily demand (ADD) to determine the peak flow. The minimum allowed
peaking factors are as follows:
1) Peak Day -1.8 times ADD
2) Peak Hour -2.4 times ADD
(a) Consideration shall be given to the period of use when applying peaking
factors. For example, peaking factors shall be increased based on the
actual period of use in a given day. For example, some commercial and
industrial uses shall likely not use water at night.
5. Model Setup

Rev. 1 5.7 - 12
a. Hydraulic distribution models shall consist of pipes, nodes (including fire hydrants),
tanks, and pump stations. The following discusses the required inputs and provides
guidance for the requirements and preferences of the RCJ.
b. Pipes
1) Diameter
(a) Diameter shall be input for every pipe, refer to Subsection 5.7.1.H for
allowable sizes.
(1) Input of nominal diameters is allowable for most water line materials
including PVC.
(2) True inside diameters shall be used for evaluation of HDPE PE 100
water lines.
2) Friction Coefficient
(a) Hydraulic models shall be configured to evaluate the water system using
the Hazen-Williams formula. Use the following CH-W for model inputs:
(1) PVC, CH-W = 140
(2) HDPE, CH-W = 150
(3) RTRP, CH-W = 150
3) Minor Losses
(a) Minor losses for fittings and valves may be included in the model by
adding local minor losses to each pipe. Alternatively, a reduction of the
CH-W used in the model may provide an allowance for minor losses.
The typical reduction value is 10% of the above listed industry accepted
coefficient.
(b) If applicable, minor losses for master flow meters and backflow
protection shall be considered with the modeling scenarios.
4) Length
(a) Models shall be created to scale to ensure accurate length of water lines.
c. Nodes
1) Elevation shall be assigned to nodes at ground elevation within 0.5 m.
2) Demands shall be spatially allocated based on demand calculations for each
given land use and density.
(a) Demands shall be entered for each of the above mentioned modeling
scenarios listed above.
3) Required Fire Flow shall also be included for hydrants within the distribution
system.
d. Tanks
1) Volume: Though volume is not required for Steady State Simulations, it is
good practice to include accurate tank information for diameter, wall height,
floor elevation, etc. in the event that an extended period simulation is required
in the future. It also provides a means to document required tank volumes.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 13
2) Water Surface Elevation, the following are the required tank stage settings for
each required model scenario:
(a) Average Day Demand - Tank Full
(b) Peak Day Demand - Top of Fire Storage Elevation
(c) Peak Hour Demand - Top of Fire Storage Elevation
(d) Peak Day + Fire Flow - Bottom of Tank
e. Pump Stations
1) Floor Elevation within 0.5 m
2) Pump Curves - if using the distribution model to confirm pump selection,
actual pump curves shall be entered into the model.
6. Hydraulic Model Reporting
a. The following Table of Contents shall be used when submitting a hydraulic Modeling
Report to the RCJ:
1) Introduction - Include a project description, existing system discussion, and
proposed additions of the project.
(a) Include a system map to illustrate proposed expansion area and land
uses.
2) Water Demand Criteria & Summary
(a) Summarize demand calculations for average day demand, including
system loss, by land use for both indoor demands and outdoor demands
on the potable system; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.G. Include detailed
calculations in an Appendix.
(1) Confirm applicability of peaking factors based on specific project
requirements.
(b) Fire Flow Demands - Summarize needed fire flow for each land use
area. Document hydrant flow and sprinkler flow requirements.
3) Methodology and Analysis - Document the modeling software used, the type
of model (steady state or extended period), and field calibration, if any.
4) Results and Conclusions
(a) Document that results for scenarios meet the requirements of this
manual for pressure and velocity for each scenario.
(1) Document node or nodes with lowest pressure for each scenario
(2) Document pipe or pipes with highest velocity for each scenario
(3) Include a system map illustrating final pipe sizes based on the
model.
(4) Map shall include labels for all model elements such as nodes,
pipes, and pump stations.
(5) Map shall be color coded based on pipe diameter.
(b) Document available fire flow for each land use area while meeting
minimum pressure requirements.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 14
I. Water System Design Criteria

1. General
a. Typical Soil and Ground Water Conditions
1) For projects along the coastal zone in Saudi Arabia, the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall be aware that the coastal soils have unusual properties, and
a thorough study of those properties by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor is
essential before any designs are undertaken. In general, the soil is highly
saline.
2) In conjunction with natural sulfides and sulfites, the saline conditions could
cause serious deterioration even in Type V Portland Cement Concrete.
3) In addition, weak and unstable soils may cause uneven support for pipes,
which are then subject to unequal settlements even under light loadings
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of the likelihood for high
groundwater. Buoyancy conditions shall be accounted for with the design to
prevent flotation of pipes, buried tanks, vaults, etc.
b. Concrete External Tanking
1) External tanking membranes for concrete foundations is a common practice
on the Arabian Gulf coast. The RCJ does not always require tanking; in some
cases suitable designs in quality concrete are considered adequate, Refer to
Section 5.2.
c. Pipes, Valves and Fittings
1) The saline conditions are very corrosive to all ferrous piping, valves and
fittings. Non-metallic materials are used for pipelines.
2) In addition to the aggressive soil conditions, the presence of saline ground
water seriously intensifies electrolytic action, particularly on long metal pipe
runs and even on reinforcement in concrete structures. Further, the presence
of several independent cathodically protected facilities in the near vicinity of
each other may create interference problems.
d. Design Service Life
1) Before the design processes are commenced and the design parameters and
the design conditions are established, it is necessary to estimate the design
service lives for the key design elements in the water supply system, as the
elements shall be designed for the conditions encountered during the
expected design service life time.
2) TABLE 5.7.1 indicates the expected design service lives for different design
elements.
TABLE 5.7.1.B: DESIGN SERVICE LIFE FOR KEY ELEMENTS IN THE WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Design Element Design Service Life in Years
Transmission System Pipelines 50*
Distribution Pipelines 50

Rev. 1 5.7 - 15
Buildings and main concrete structures 60
Mechanical pumping equipment 20
Electrical equipment and monitoring systems 10
3) *Although the lowest net present cost alternative is the 50 year design life, at
the discretion of the RCJ, the design life for transmission pipelines may be
reduced to 25 years by the RCJ for the purpose of calculating capacity. This
reduction shall assume a second parallel pipeline shall be constructed after
25 years to increase capacity.
2. System Pressure
a. Transmission System Pressures
1) Minimum Pressure - To prevent intrusion of the groundwater into the
transmission main, positive pressure (2.0 bars) shall be maintained within the
transmission main. This may be accomplished through effective design of the
distribution storage tanks; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.L.
b. Distribution System Pressures
1) Typical operating pressure ranges from 1.5 bars to 3.0 bars.
2) Minimum Pressure - System pressures shall be evaluated during design by
completing a hydraulic model for the project; refer to Subsection 5.7.H. The
following pressure criteria shall be applied to the modeling scenarios during
design:
(a) Average Day Demand (ADD) = The minimum system pressure shall be
3.0 bars
(b) Peak Day Demand (PDD) = the minimum system pressure shall be 2.5
bars
(c) Peak Hour Demand (PHD) = the minimum system pressure shall be 2.0
bars
(d) Peak Day Demand + Fire Flow Demand = the minimum system pressure
shall be 1.5 bars. The minimum residual pressure at the flowing hydrant
shall be 1.5 bars.
(e) 1.5 bars is the minimum required system pressure at any point within the
distribution system under fire flow and PDD conditions.
(f) The minimum required pressures of 1 bar at fixtures with flush valves
inside buildings pursuant to the National Plumbing Code. A/E’s and/or
EPC contractor’s civil engineer shall coordinate the minimum connection
pressure with A/E’s building mechanical engineer during design.
3) Maximum Pressure
(a) The maximum pressure in the distribution system shall be 6.0 bars.
(1) Moderately higher pressures may be allowed with prior approval
from the RCJ.
(2) To maintain workable maximum pressures, it may be necessary to
divide the distribution service area into multiple districts.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 16
4) Pressure Transient/Surge Analysis

(a) 200mm diameter pipes and above shall require transient analysis
evaluation.
3. Water Lines (Water Pipes)
a. Minimum pipe size (Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.H)
b. Materials (Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.H)
c. Water line maximum velocities
1) Normal Operations - Water line velocities shall be below 1.5 m/s for all normal
operating scenarios.
2) Peak Day + Fire Flow - Water line velocities shall be below 2.0 m/s for fire
flow scenarios.
3) For systems without elevated storage, consideration shall be given for slower
maximum velocities to reduce required pumping horsepower.
4. Storage
a. Two days of ADD + fire flow is required for ground level distribution storage.
J. Transmission and Water Distribution System Piping and Valves
1. Water Distribution Pipelines
b. Pipe, joints, fittings, valves and fire hydrants shall conform to applicable sections of
ANSI/AWWA Standards, and all materials which may contact drinking water shall be
ANSI-certified as meeting the requirements of NSF Standard 61
c. In order to provide increased reliability of service and reduce head loss, dead ends
shall be minimized by making appropriate looped tie-ins whenever practical.
d. All dead ends shall have a fire hydrant.
1) Fire hydrants are used for flushing water pipelines.
e. The character of the soil and water table depth through which water mains are to be
laid shall be considered. The design engineer shall also consider the materials to be
used when corrosive soils or waters shall be encountered (coastal soils are highly
saline and corrosive, a thorough study of the conditions is essential before beginning
design).
1) All water mains shall be sized based on flow demands and minimum pressure
requirements; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.E.
2) The pressure rating for all components such as valves and fittings shall be
equal to or greater than the required pipeline pressure rating (see Subsection
5.7.1.E
3) The minimum water main size to be installed shall be 200 mm in diameter.
The minimum water lateral size to a fire hydrant shall be 150 mm in diameter.
4) Longitudinal bending of PVC pipe is not allowed.
5) Longitudinal bending of HDPE pipe shall be limited to 80% of the
manufacturer's installation recommendations.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 17
6) PVC pipe joint deflection shall be limited to 80% of the manufacturer's

installation recommendations.
7) Pipeline Location:
(a) Vertical: minimum burial depth is 1.2 m, measured from finished grade to
top of pipe. .
(b) Horizontal: 2.0 m beyond edge of pavement or back of curb, unless
otherwise approved.
(c) Pipelines shall be located at a distance of no less than 1.5 meter
horizontally from property line or fence. Refer to the Standard Details for
Roadway Cross Sections for standard utility locations.
8) Proximity to other utilities:
(a) The use of joint (combined) utility trenches is not permitted.
(b) Potable water lines shall be located at a distance no less than 3.0 m
horizontally (outside to outside) and 500 mm vertically above any non-
potable (reclaimed) water line, sewer line, or storm drain line.
(c) Potable water lines shall be located a distance of no less than 1.0 meter
horizontally from other potable water mains, gas mains, or other dry
utilities.
9) Transition of Disciplines
(a) Civil Disciplines begin at 1.5 meters from the edge of buildings and goes
away from the building.
(b) Mechanical disciplines begin at 1.5 meters from the edge of buildings
and goes into the building.
f. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
(a) Sizes 160 mm to 1400 mm:
2) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC)
(a) Up to 150 mm
3) Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe (RTRP)
(a) Sizes 200mm and above. (The use of smaller diameter pipe sizes shall
be subjected to RCJ approval).
(b) The reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe (RTRP) is also known as the
GRP (Glass reinforced plastic) or FRP (Fibergrlass reinforced plastic)
pipe.
2. Isolation Valves
1) Valve Locations: a sufficient number of isolation valves shall be provided on
water pipelines to minimize inconvenience, sanitary hazards, and degradation
of fire protection during maintenance and repairs. Valves shall be generally
located as follows, unless otherwise approved:
(a) At intervals to isolate no more than two fire hydrants at any time.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 18
(b) In residential areas to isolate a maximum of 30 services.

(c) A maximum of five valves shall be required to isolate any location.
(d) Isolation valves are required on all sides of tees, 3 valves and crosses, 4
valves, unless project specific approval is requested and approved by
the RCJ to reduce the number of valves at a specific location.
(e) For straight pipe runs in commercial and industrial areas, the maximum
spacing between isolation valves shall be 200 m.
(f) For straight pipe runs in other areas, including transmision pipelines, the
maximum spacing between isolation valves shall be 400 m.
(g) A valve immediately adjacent to the water main shall be provided for all
laterals greater than 50 mm in diameter, and for all fire hydrant laterals.
2) Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried isolation valves. Valve stem
extensions are required within 500 mm of finished grade where the distance
from the top of the valve box to the top of the operating nut exceeds 1500
mm.
3) Valve boxes and lids shall be cast iron, three sectional, and screw-type
adjustable; designed for highway traffic loads.
4) Refer to the GPCS:
b. Acceptable Valve Types
1) Gate Valves
(a) Valve sizes up to 400 mm
2) Butterfly Valves
(a) Valve sizes above 400 mm
3. Air Valves
1) Locate and size air valves per AWWA and valve manufacturer requirements.
2) Three types of air valves shall be used as appropriate:
(a) Air release valve
(b) Air/Vacuum valve
(c) CAV: Combination air valve (combines the functions of both an air
release valve and an air/vacuum valve)
3) The following types of air valves are required at the following points along a
pipeline (to exhaust air and admit air to prevent vacuum conditions and air
related surges):
(a) High Point: Combination Air Valve
(b) Long Horizontal Run: Air Release Valve or Combination Air Valve at
1000 m maximum intervals.
(c) Long Descent: Combination Air Valve at 600 m maximum intervals.
(d) Long Ascent: Air/Vacuum Valve at 600 m maximum intervals.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 19
(e) Decrease in an Up Slope: Air/Vacuum Valve.

(f) Increase in a Down Slope: Combination Air Valve.
4) Pipeline grades shall be smooth and constant, and the required number of air
valves limited to the extent practical. Pipeline grade changes shall be noted
on the construction drawings.
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.J.1 for minimum pipeline slope requirement.
5) High points and grade changes that are less than one half of the pipeline
diameter typically shall not require an air valve, because the water flow shall
flush accumulated air downstream, except as required in Subsection 5.7.1.J.
6) Sizing
(a) Air valve sizing shall be project specific, and per AWWA and valve
manufacturer requirements and recommendations.
(b) Air/Vacuum Valve and Combination Air Valve: sizing shall generally be
one tenth of the pipeline diameter.
(c) Air Release Valve sizing varies depending on the potential for entrained
air in the water source. As a minimum the Air Release Valve inlet
connection shall be as large as the air valve size.
(d) Valves 76 mm and smaller shall have threaded inlets and outlets. Valves
larger than 76 mm shall have a flanged inlet.
7) The open end of the air relief vent pipe from the air valves shall be extended
with to at least 0.5 m above grade and provided with a downward elbow which
is screened using 1.4 mm stainless steel mesh. The vent pipe shall be the
same diameter as the air valve being vented.
8) Alternately, the open end of the pipe may be extended to 0.5 m above the top
of the pipe if the air valve manhole is not subject to flooding and provided with
a drain-to-daylight. Air valves shall not be connected directly to any sewer.
9) Connection of air valves to water mains
(a) Wrap-around type bod. When installed the body shall wrap around the
main for a minimum of 160 degrees.
(b) On HDPE mains: sidewall fusion tap
(c) On PVC mains: stainless steel double strap saddle
(d) All components shall be corrosion resistant
4. Joint Restraint
1) The Consultant shall prepare a flexible pipe stress analysis that encompasses
all non-metallic pressure pipe (FRP, GRP, RTRP or any similar designation,
including PVC and HDPE, as applicable). The analysis shall incorporate the
full pipe geometry (3-Dimensional) and influences on and from fittings, valves,
meters, chambers, structures, soil media, geotechnical/soil conditions,
surface loading for buried pipes, all internal and external loads on exposed
pipes and any other conditions that impact the stress experienced by the non-
metallic pipes.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 20
2) The analysis shall be performed by an engineer suitably experienced in the

use of an industry recognized software (Caesar II, etc.) or an RC-approved
equivalent. The output shall clearly define the jointing methods to be applied
and the length of pipe requiring restrained joints, vs. ‘push-on’ or similar non-
restrained joints.
3) Thrust blocks are to be used only where site conditions or pipe geometry
require their use.
4) The Consultant shall engage the services of one of the RC-approved pipe
vendors to review and concur with the analysis and provide written
acceptance that the calculations adequately reflect the design conditions
within which their pipes and its components, including joints, can perform as
intended to, and further that the vendor sees that no further piping system
design optimization can be achieved
5) Joint restraint shall be used at all bends and fittings
b. HDPE Pipelines:
1) All bends and fittings shall be butt fusion welded or flanged using flange
adapters.
c. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipelines:
1) Joint restraint shall be using solvent cement/weld joint. Mechanical joint
restraint glad system designed for mechanical joint restraint of PVC pipes, per
ASTM F1674 is optional
d. Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipelines (RTRP):
1) All bends and fittings shall be restrained with one of the following options:
2) Laminated restrained joints.
(a) If laminated restrained joints are not suitable, concrete thrust blocks will
be considered.
5. Bends and Fittings
1) For HDPE Pipelines:
(a) Injection molded HDPE or fabricated HDPE (for the specific application).
(b) Butt fusion welded, side fusion welded, or flange adapter.
(c) Electrofusion couplings are not allowed.
2) For PVC Pipelines:
(a) Mechanical joint ductile iron. Supplier shall provide stress analysis to
prove mechanical restraint system will be adequate without the need of
thrust block.
3) All exposed components shall have corrosion protection.
6. Fire Hydrants
a. Hydrant Location Requirements
1) The locations of fire hydrants shall be included on civil site plans.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 21
2) Hydrant spacing and locations shall be per Saudi Building Code 801.
Maximum hydrant spacing shall not exceed 150 m in residential areas and
100 m in commercial/industrial areas. The maximum hose length from the
apparatus is 46m on the lay of the hose to any fire.
3) Fire hydrants shall be located relative to buildings so fire trucks may easily
locate the hydrants and connect to them.
4) Hydrants shall not be hidden within or behind landscaping.
5) Hydrants shall be a minimum of 15 m away from the building or structure
6) Hydrants shall not be located more than 10 m away from the edge of the curb
or roadway
7) Any portion of a building extending beyond 100 m from an accessible access
road to the nearest fire hydrant requires installation of an additional fire
hydrant.
8) The hydrant lateral which interconnects the pipeline and the hydrant shall be
not less than 150 mm in diameter and the maximum lateral length shall be 50
m.
b. Hydrant Design Requirements
1) Three steel bollards shall around all fire hydrants that are not protected by a
curb, and in all industrial areas whether or not a curb is present.
(a) A larger size lateral shall be required for greater distances.
2) An isolation valve shall be installed on all hydrant laterals, adjacent to the
main.
3) Water service or fire service connections are not allowed on fire hydrant
laterals.
4) All joints and fittings between the main and the hydrant shall be restrained.
7. Flow Meters and Services
1) Service Lines:
(a) All water service lines 100 mm in diameter and smaller shall be
constructed of HDPE tubing. For larger diameters, refer to the
requirements in 5.7.1.J.1.
(b) Polyethylene tubing shall be blue and have UV color stabilizers so that
the pipe is not affected in color or flexibility for a minimum of four years.
(c) Service connections and service lines shall be installed at a 90 degree
angle from the main.
(d) Each separate building supplied with water shall have its own separate
service connection and flow meter.
2) Service Line Fittings such as corporation stops, curb stops, saddles
(a) All stops shall be full port and have a flow passage area equivalent to the
fitting outlet flow area.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 22
(b) The inlet connection shall be AWWA Taper thread. The outlet connection
shall be a pack-joint outlet for HDPE tubing.
(c) Curb stops shall be ball valve, roundway, with check, and lock wing cast
on stop body and operating tee cap to provide for locking the stop in
closed position. Curb stops for use with HDPE service shall have an inlet
connection with a compression joint and an outlet connection with female
iron pipe thread.
(d) Service saddles:
(1) Wrap-around type body. When installed, the body shall wrap around
the main for a minimum of 160 degrees.
(2) On HDPE mains: sidewall fusion taps.
(3) On PVC mains: stainless steel double strap saddle.
(4) All components shall be corrosion resistant.
(e) All service saddles shall have corporation tap threads.
3) Flow Meters
(a) All flow meters shall be smart type as per RCJ Specificaiton 33 19 00
and Marafiq’s Standard Drawings.
(b) All flow meters with nominal diamerters 50 mm or less shall be ultrasonic
type meters installed together with all isolation valves and accessories in
a wall mounted lockable IP65 fiberglass box.
(c) All flow meters with nominal diameters greater than 50 mm shall be
electromagnetic type meters installed together with all isolation valves
and accessories above ground as per Marafiq’s Standard Drawings.
(d) Size flow meters per AWWA M22 and IPC. Consultant must provide flow
meter sizing calculations for RC approval.
8. Cross Connection Control
1) No physical connection shall be allowed between potable and non-potable
sources without an RC approved double check valve assembly or reduced
pressure principle backflow prevention device as per AWWA Standard 511.
2) Follow the requirements of the Saudi Building Code 701, Chapter 3.8.
3) An approved RC backflow prevention device is required on all buildings which
have fire suppression sprinklers. These devices are typically installed inside
the buildings on the ground floor.
4) Backflow prevention devices shall be installed above grade.
5) An approved backflow prevention assembly (appropriate to the degree of
hazard) shall be installed on each service line wherever one of the following
conditions exist:
(a) A building or property having an auxiliary water supply which is not or
may not be of safe bacteriological or chemical quality.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 23
(b) A building or property on which industrial fluids or other objectionable

substances are handled in such a fashion as to create an actual or
potential hazard to the potable water system.
(c) A building or property having an internal cross-connection that cannot be
permanently corrected or controlled, intricate plumbing and/or piping
arrangements, or where entry to all portions of the premises is not readily
accessible for inspection purposes, making it impracticable or impossible
to ascertain whether or not dangerous cross-connections exist.
(d) A building or property that is irrigated with potable water.
9. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape
1) Tracer Wire:
(a) Shall be installed on all non-metallic pipe main installations.
(b) The wires shall be attached to the pipeline using minimum 50 mm wide
duct tape, applied on each side of a joint and spaced every 1.5 m.
(c) Locating wires shall terminate at each valve box, manhole, and vault.
(d) Continuity tests shall be conducted on the installed tracer wire to
substantiate continuity for the tracer wire loop.
2) Underground Warning Tape:
(a) Tape shall be a minimum of 75 mm wide.
(b) Lettering shall be a minimum of 25 mm high.
(c) Color to conform to APWA color Code, and be permanently printed.
(d) Install tape at least 200mm above the pipe unless otherwise directed.
10. Blow-off Assemblies
1) Blow-off valves are required on all permanent dead-end pipe runs, major in-
line low points, and may be required at stub-out locations.
2) Fire hydrants shall be used as blow-offs and for flushing. A minimum velocity
of 0.75 m/sec in the water main being flushed is required to provide adequate
flushing.
3) Temporary blow-offs shall be provided as necessary to pressure test and
chlorinate the water mains. Temporary blow-offs shall be removed upon
acceptance of the water line.
4) Blow-off outlets and drains shall terminate in a location with an acceptable air
gap for backflow protection.
5) No blow-off assembly shall be located in roadways, or connected directly to
any sewer.
K. Water Distribution Pumping Equipment
1. General

Rev. 1 5.7 - 24
a. Pumping facilities shall be designed by an A/E and/or EPC Contractor with specific
related experience in design and construction of pumping facilities.
b. Pumping facilities shall be located so that the proposed site shall meet the
requirements for sanitary protection of water quality, hydraulics of the system and
protection against interruption of service by fire, flood or any other hazard.
c. Closed loop pumping systems are not allowed.
d. Facility designs shall consider and make provisions for long-term demands including
space for future expansion if needed, and operation and maintenance requirements.
e. All equipment and components shall be AWWA and NSF approved.
2. Booster Pumps
a. Booster pumps shall be centrifugal or vertical turbine type.
b. At least two pumps shall be provided in all potable booster pump stations. With any
pump out of service, the remaining pump or pumps shall be capable of providing the
maximum pumping demand of the system. Where two or more pumps are installed,
provisions shall be made for alternating operation.
c. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall submit and obtain approval of the following
operating conditions and performance criteria during preliminary design:
1) Required Pump Discharge
2) Total Dynamic Head at Required Discharge
3) Minimum Suction Pressure and Net Positive Suction Head Required and
Available (if applicable)
4) Maximum Pump Speed
5) Minimum Motor Horsepower
6) Minimum Efficiency
7) Proposed Pump and Motor Selection
d. Suction lift shall be avoided if possible. If required it shall be less than 4 m and
provisions shall be made for priming the pump(s).
e. Transmission Booster Pumps
1) Generally operate at a constant flow rate - pump speed, and take suction from
the transmission suction storage tanks and convey to the transmission
pipeline to the transmission discharge storage tanks. These pump motors
may typically utilize a reduced voltage soft starter (RVSS); however, see
Subsection 5.5.1 for specific electrical requirements.
2) The pumping facility shall have the capacity to provide the peak day demand
of the system or the specific portion of the system serviced.
3) The operation of the pumps shall be controlled by the level in the transmission
discharge storage tanks, via a level transducer, with sufficient tank volume
between pump start and pump stop tank levels to prevent excessive cycling.
4) A provision to maintain a minimum level in the transmission discharge storage
tanks for distribution pump station suction shall also be included in the control
logic.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 25
f. Distribution Booster Pump Stations

1) Pumps shall be installed with variable frequency drives (VFD). The pump
motors may typically utilize a reduced voltage soft starter (RVSS). See
Subsection 5.5.1 for specific electrical requirements.
2) Capacity shall be provided such that the pumping facility shall be capable of
providing the peak day demand of the system or the specific portion of the
system serviced.
3) The operation of the pumps shall be controlled by the level in the distribution
elevated storage tank (via a level transducer, with sufficient volume between
pump start and pump stop tank levels to prevent excessive cycling.
4) A provision to maintain a minimum level in the transmission storage tanks for
the pump station suction shall also be included in the control logic.
3. Mechanical Requirements
a. Pump station piping shall be designed such that each pump has an individual
suction line, or that the lines are manifold so that they shall insure similar hydraulic
and operating conditions.
b. Piping shall be welded epoxy-lined and coated steel piping with flanged joints.
c. All pumping facilities shall have sufficient surge control with surge anticipator valves
and/or surge tanks to protect piping and other equipment. Pressure fluctuations shall
be maintained within 15 percent of normal operating pressures during pump starting
and stopping. Adequate provisions shall also be made for pressure surges caused
by power outages.
d. All pumping facilities shall be equipped with pressure relief valve(s).
e. Pumps motors larger than 15 kW shall be equipped with a booster pump control
valve on the pump discharge.
f. The pump discharge line shall be equipped with a magnetic flow meter which
indicates total flow volume (liters) and rate of flow (liters/minute) with a 4-20 milli-
amp output.
g. An air vacuum valve shall be installed directly downstream of the pump discharge.
h. A pressure gauge, pressure transducer (with a 4-20 milli-amp output), and pressure
switch shall be installed downstream of the air vacuum valve and pump control valve
(if present).
i. A bypass line shall be included in the pump station, to allow the connection of
emergency pumps.
j. Sufficient isolation valves which are typically butterfly valves and restrained
dismantling couplings shall be provided.
k. Equipment shall be labeled/tagged to correspond to the maintenance record and for
proper identification.
l. Adequate clear space for access, maintenance and removal and replacement shall
be provided around all piping and equipment. At a minimum there shall be 0.75 m
clear between all piping and equipment and all obstructions.
4. Chlorination

Rev. 1 5.7 - 26
a. All pumping facilities shall be equipped with a chlorine dosing system using Cl2 gas
cylinders, located in a separate room with an exhaust fan and isolated from the rest
of the pumping facility. The design of the room shall comply with the applicable
requirements of the IBC, IFC and IMC..
b. Hypochlorite generators with a dosing pump may also be used.
c. Minimum onsite chlorine storage shall be seven days.
d. All of the system components shall be according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations to insure efficient chlorination system operation.
e. Chlorine analyzers, and sample taps shall be provided both upstream and
downstream of the injection point.
f. An emergency eye wash station, shower, and appropriate signs shall also be
provided.
5. Building
a. All booster pumps, mechanical equipment, chlorination facilities, control equipment,
electrical equipment and telemetry equipment shall be enclosed in a building. See
Section 5.2 and Subsections 5.3.4 and 5.4.2 for specific building requirements.
b. All booster pumps stations shall be equipped with a manual transfer switch and
provisions for connecting a roll-up generator to operate the pump station in the event
of a prolonged power outage. Refer to Subsection 5.3.4 for specific building
requirements.
c. Pumping stations finished floor elevations shall be graded around the station so as
to lead surface drainage away from the station. The finished floor elevation of the
pump station shall be a minimum of 150 mm above finished grade.
d. Adequate provisions shall be made for removal and replacement of the motor,
discharge column, pump, and other equipment. Provisions include roof hatches,
crane-ways, hoist beams, eyebolts, or other acceptable means.
e. Suitable HVAC shall be required. Refer to Subsection 5.4.3 for HVAC requirements.
Interior temperatures shall be maintained at no more than 40°C.
f. Emergency/back-up power shall be provided for all critical pumping facilities (life
safety services). Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E for specific back-up power
requirements.
g. Floor drains shall be provided, except in the chlorine room. The building floor shall
slope to the drains.
h. All pumping facilities shall be fenced with a minimum 2.0 m high fence. The site
access, size and layout shall provide adequate room for maintenance of the facility,
including removal of pumps; including adequate room for the removal and
replacement of all mechanical and electrical equipment.
L. Water Storage Tanks
1. General
a. Ground Surface Water Storage Tanks
1) Water storage tank design shall comply with the following AWWA Standards:
Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage AWWA Standard D100-11
and design manual M42

Rev. 1 5.7 - 27
2) Factory Coated bolted steel tanks for water storage - AWWA D103-09
3) Wire and Strand-wound circular pre-stressed concrete water tanks -AWWA
D110-95
4) Tendon- pre-stressed concrete water tanks - AWWA D115-95
b. Elevated Water Storage Tanks
1) Composite welded steel elevated tanks for water storage - AWWA D107-10
(a) The materials and designs used for finished water storage structures
shall provide stability and durability as well as protect the quality of the
stored water. Steel structures shall follow the current AWWA standards
concerning steel tanks, standpipes, reservoirs, and elevated tanks
wherever they are applicable.
(b) The lowest elevation of the floor of ground level reservoirs shall be
placed at least 0.5 m above the surrounding grade, and at least 2 m
above the groundwater table.
(c) A geotechnical investigation and foundation design shall be prepared for
all tank sites.
(d) Sewers, drains, standing water, and similar sources of possible
contamination shall be kept at least 15 m from the reservoir.
(e) All finished water storage structures shall have suitable watertight roofs
which exclude birds, animals, insects, and dust. The installation of
appurtenances, such as antenna, shall be done in a manner that ensures
no damage to the tank, coatings or water quality.
(f) Fencing, locks on access manholes, and other necessary precautions
shall be provided to prevent trespassing, vandalism, and sabotage.
2. Sizing
a. Storage facilities shall have sufficient capacity, as determined during preliminary
design, to meet domestic demands; and where fire protection is provided, fire flow
demands.
1) Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.G for system demand information.
2) Fire flow and storage requirements shall be established by the IFC in
conjunction with Saudi Building Code 801, Chapter 5.
3) Excessive storage capacity shall be avoided to prevent potential water quality
deterioration problems.
4) Transmission Ground Level Storage Tank(s) capacity: five days of average
daily demand.
5) District Distribution Ground Level Storage Tank(s) capacity: two days of
average daily demand and fire storage.
6) District Distribution Elevated Storage Tank(s): one day of average daily
demand and fire storage.
3. Piping
a. Inlet: a dedicated supply line from the distribution booster pump station to the district
distribution elevated storage tank(s) is required.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 28
b. Outlet: the discharge pipe(s) from water storage structures shall be located in a
manner that shall prevent the flow of sediment into the system. Removable silt stops
shall be provided.
c. Overflow: all water storage structures shall be provided with an overflow which is
brought down to an elevation of 0.5 m above the ground surface, and discharges
over a drainage inlet structure or a splash plate. No overflow may be connected
directly to a sewer or a storm drain. All overflow pipes shall be located so that any
discharge is visible.
1) When an internal overflow pipe is used on elevated tanks, it shall be located
in the access tube. For vertical drops on other types of storage facilities, the
overflow pipe shall be located on the outside of the structure.
2) The overflow shall open downward and be screened with 5 mm and 2 mm
stainless steel non-corrodible screens. The screen shall be installed within the
overflow pipe at a location least susceptible to damage by vandalism.
3) The overflow pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to permit waste of water in
excess of the filling rate.
d. Drains: the design shall allow draining the storage facility for cleaning or
maintenance without causing loss of pressure in the transmission and/or distribution
system. No drain on a water storage structure shall have a direct connection to a
sewer or storm drain.
e. Sampling: smooth-nosed sampling tap(s) shall be provided in the tank valve vault to
facilitate collection of water samples for both bacteriological and chemical analyses.
The sample tap(s) shall be easily accessible.
4. Stored Water Age
a. Finished water storage shall be designed with an inlet mixing and distribution
manifold to facilitate turnover of water in the finished water storage to minimize
stagnation and/or stored water age.
b. The inlet and outlet pipes shall be separated, to promote mixing. Poor water
circulation and long detention times may lead to loss of disinfectant residual,
microbial growth, formation of disinfectant byproducts, taste and odor problems, and
other water quality problems.
c. The tank design engineer shall provide a computational fluid dynamics (CFD) model
of the tank’s inlet mixing system and outlet positioning.
5. Access
a. Storage structures shall be designed with reasonably convenient access to the
interior for cleaning and maintenance. At least two access hatches or man ways
shall be provided above the high waterline for each tank compartment
b. Elevated Storage or Dome Roof Structures
1) At least one access hatch or man way shall be framed a minimum of 100 mm
above the surface of the roof at the opening. The access shall be fitted with a
solid, water tight cover which overlaps the framed opening and extends down
around the frame at least 50 mm (“shoebox style lid”), be hinged on one side,
and have a locking device.
2) All other man ways or access ports shall be water tight using bolted and
gasketed means, or shall meet the requirements above.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 29
c. Ground Level or Flat Roof Structures

1) Each access hatch or man way shall be elevated at least 0.75 m above the
top of the tank or covering, whichever is higher.
2) The accesses shall be fitted with a solid, water tight cover which overlaps the
framed opening and extends down around the frame at least 50 mm, with a
minimum 100 mm frame height (“shoebox style lid”). Each cover shall be
hinged on one side and have a locking device.
6. Vents
a. Finished water storage structures shall be vented. The overflow pipe shall not be
considered a vent. Open construction between the sidewall and roof is not
permissible. Vents:
1) A minimum of two shall be provided for each tank compartment.
2) Shall prevent the entrance of surface water and rainwater.
3) Shall exclude birds and animals; and shall exclude insects and dust, as much
as this function may be made compatible with effective venting.
4) Shall, on ground-level structures, open downward with the opening at least
0.75 m above the roof and covered with a 5 mm and 2 mm stainless steel
mesh screens. The screen shall be installed within the pipe at a location least
susceptible to vandalism.
5) Shall, on elevated tanks and standpipes, open downward, and be fitted with a
4.76 mm and 1.410 mm screens.
7. Roof and Sidewall
a. The roof and sidewalls of all water storage structures shall be watertight with no
openings except properly constructed vents, man ways, overflows, risers, drains,
pump mountings, control ports, or piping for inflow and outflow. Particular attention
shall be given to the sealing of roof structures which are not integral to the tank
body.
1) Any pipes running through the roof or sidewall of a metal storage structure
shall be welded, or properly gasketed.
2) Openings in the roof of a storage structure designed to accommodate control
apparatus or pump columns, shall be curbed and sleeved with proper
additional shielding to prevent contamination from surface or floor drainage.
3) The roof of the storage structure shall be well drained. Drainage downspout
pipes shall not enter or pass through the reservoir. Parapets, or similar
construction which would tend to hold water on the roof, are not allowed.
8. Safety
a. Safety shall be considered in the design of the water storage structure. The design
shall conform to pertinent laws and regulations of the area where the water storage
structure is constructed.
1) Ladders, ladder guards, balcony railings, and safely located entrance hatches
shall be provided where applicable.
2) Elevated tanks with riser pipes over 200 mm in diameter shall have protective
bars over the riser openings inside the tank.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 30
3) Railings or handholds shall be provided on elevated tanks where persons

shall transfer from the access tube to the water compartment.
4) Confined space entry requirements shall be considered.
9. Painting and/or Cathodic Protection
a. Proper protection shall be given to metal surfaces by cathodic protective devices
and by paints or other protective coatings, or by both.
1) Paint systems shall meet ANSI/NSF standard 61. Interior paint shall be
applied, cured, and used in a manner consistent with the ANSI/NSF approval.
After curing, the coating shall not transfer any substance to the water which
shall be toxic or cause taste or odor problems. Prior to placing into service, an
analysis for volatile organic compounds is required to establish that the
coating is properly cured. All paint systems shall be 100 % solids coatings.
2) Wax coatings for the tank interior are not allowed.
3) A corrosion specialist shall evaluate the water chemistry and provide a written
report and recommendations for a cathodic protection system. Cathodic
protection, if required, shall be designed and installed by competent technical
personnel (per AWWA), and a maintenance contract shall be provided.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 31
SUBSECTION 5.7.2 SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL SEWER SYSTEM
5.7.2 SANITARY AND INDUSTRIAL SEWER SYSTEM
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This GEM Section provides the basis for the design of sewer utilities. The sewer
utilities include the collection and conveyance systems.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to sewage collection facilities downstream of residential and
commercial users including but not limited to sewer lines manholes, laterals, waste
water pumping stations and force mains, valves, and flow meters.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Section 2.2.0.
1) ADF: Average Daily Flows
2) GIS: Geographic Information Systems
4) ISO: International Organization for Standardization
6) NSF: NSF International
8) RCJ: Royal Commission Jubail
10) UV: Ultraviolet
1) See each utility Section for general requirements.
6. Codes
7. Standards
a. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of Standards.
8. Related Sections
9. Approvals
B. Sewer Collection System
a. The Sewer Collection Systems collect sewage from residences and businesses and
convey it to the sewage lift stations.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 32
b. The Sewer Collection Systems use gravity flow and pumped systems. Gravity
systems operate in open channel flow conditions.
c. The Sewer Collection Systems include:
1) Gravity flow sewage collection pipelines
2) Sewage lift stations
3) Sewage force mains.
C. Sanitary Sewer Design Flow Criteria
1. General
a. This Section provides the general design criteria for calculation of Average Daily
Flow (ADF) rate.
1) Peaking factors shall be applied to the ADF to size key infrastructure
associated with the sewage collection system.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of the likelihood for high
groundwater. This shall be accounted for with design to prevent floatation of pipes
and manholes.
2. Sewage Production
a. Determination of Average Daily Sewer Flow (ADF)
1) ADF is to be equal to 80% of indoor Average Day Water Demand (see
Subsection 5.7.1.G).
(a) There is no infiltration factor.
(b) This applies to residential, commercial, and industrial per capita flows.
(c) Do not include industrial process flows as the industrial waste water is
collected by a separate system
b. Peak Design Flow
1) Sanitary Sewer Line Sizing Peaking Factors (PFs)
(a) For gravity line sizing calculations, the peaking factors in TABLE 5.7.2.A
shall be used.
TABLE 5.7.2.A: SEWER MODELING PEAK FACTORS
Population of
Peak Factor
Modeled Area
100 4.00
500 3.90
1,000 3.75
5,000 3.25
10,000 2.90
50,000 2.75
100,000 2.50

Rev. 1 5.7 - 33
Population of
Peak Factor
Modeled Area
500,000 2.00
D. Hydraulic Modeling
1. Modeling Software
a. Acceptable modeling software include:
1) SewerCAD or SewerGEMS (Bentley)
2. Hydraulic Model Reporting
a. Provide a copy of the native file for Sewer GEMS and a base map in AutoCAD in
Royal Commission Jubail Coordinates.
E. Gravity Sewer Collection System Piping
1. Gravity Sewer Lines
1) Gravity sewer line shall not be less than 200 mm in diameter for primary trunk
lines. Lateral lines may be 160mm.
2) In general, sewers shall be sufficiently deep to receive sewage from the
lowest floor level of adjacent development. Minimum burial depth to top of
pipe shall be 1.2 m for uPVC pipes and 1.0m for other pipes. Maximum burial
depth shall not exceed 6 m.
3) The depth of flow in the sanitary sewer pipes shall be designed to equal 0.5D
for pipes upto 200mm in diameter, where D is the nominal diameter of the
pipe. The depth of flow in a sanitary sewer greater than 200 mm in diameter
shall not exceed 0.75D. Sewage collection systems for a given area shall be
sized to carry the peak design flow from the entire tributary area at build-out,
even if the tributary area is not within the project boundaries.
4) Buoyancy of sewers shall be considered and flotation of the pipe shall be
prevented with appropriate means where high groundwater conditions are
anticipated.
5) Slopes
(a) All sewers shall be designed and constructed to give mean velocities,
when flowing half full, of not less than 0.6 m/sec, based on Manning's
formula using an "n" value of 0.013.
Table 5.7.2.B: MINIMUM SLOPES FOR GRAVITY SEWER LINES (RIGID PIPES)
Nominal Sewer Minimum Slope in

Size Percent
150 mm 0.60
200 mm 0.40
250 mm 0.30
300 mm 0.22

Rev. 1 5.7 - 34
Nominal Sewer Minimum Slope in

Size Percent
350 mm 0.17
375 mm 0.15
400 mm 0.14
450 mm 0.12
525 mm 0.10
600 mm 0.08
675 mm 0.067
750 mm 0.058
825 mm 0.052
900 mm 0.046
975 mm 0.041
(b) The pipe diameter and slope shall be selected to obtain the greatest
practical velocities to minimize settling problems. Oversize sewers shall
not be approved to justify using flatter slopes. If the proposed slope is
less than the minimum slope of the smallest pipe which may
accommodate the design peak flow, the actual depths and velocities at
minimum, average, and design (peak) maximum daily flow for each
design section of the sewer shall be calculated by the design engineer
and submitted for review.
(c) Sewers shall be laid with uniform slope between manholes.
6) Alignment
(a) Sewers shall be laid with straight alignment between manholes.
(b) Curvilinear sewers are not permitted.
7) Proximity to other utilities
(a) See requirements in Subsection 5.7.0.A.3
8) Changes in Pipe Size
(a) When a smaller sewer joins a larger one in a manhole, the invert of the
larger sewer shall be lowered to maintain the same energy gradient. To
approximate this, it is required that the crown point of both sewers be
placed at the same elevation.
(b) Invert levels, northing and easting requires coordination and integration
with other disciplines such as mechanical.
b. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) (gravity and pressure pipe)
(a) Sizes up to 315 mm
2) Reinforced Plastic Mortar (RPM) Sewer Pipe

Rev. 1 5.7 - 35
3) High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Sewer Liner (for Sliplining)

2. Manholes
1) Location
(a) Manholes shall be installed: at the end of each line; at all changes in
grade, size, or alignment; and at all intersections.
(b) Manholes shall be installed: at distances not greater than 150 m for
sewers.
(c) Cleanouts may be used only for special conditions and shall not be
substituted for manholes nor installed at the end of laterals greater than
45 m in length.
2) Drop Type
(a) A drop pipe shall be provided for a sewer entering a manhole at an
elevation of 600 mm or more above the manhole invert. Where the
difference in elevation between the incoming sewer and the manhole
invert is less than 600 mm, the invert shall be filleted to prevent solids
deposition.
(b) Drop manholes shall only be allowed with RCJ approval.
(c) Drop manholes shall be the “outside drop” style..
3) Diameter
(a) For sewer lines up to 450 mm, the minimum diameter of manholes shall
be 1200 mm.
(b) For sewer lines between 525 mm and up to 750 mm, the minimum
diameter of manholes shall be 1500 mm.
(c) For sewer lines between 825 mm and up to 1050 mm, the minimum
diameter of manholes shall be 1800 mm.
(d) A minimum access diameter of 600 mm shall be provided.
4) Water Tightness
(a) Inlet and outlet pipes shall be joined to the manhole with a gasketed
flexible watertight connection that allows differential settlement of the
pipe and manhole wall to take place.
(b) Watertight manhole covers are to be used wherever the manhole tops
may be flooded by street runoff or high water.
(c) Locked manhole covers may be desirable in isolated easement locations
or where vandalism may be a problem.
b. Acceptable Manhole Materials
1) Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Manholes
(a) Per ASTM D3753-12
(b) AASHTO H-20 wheel load rating.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 36
2) Precast Concrete Manholes

(a) Per ASTM C478
(b) AASHTO H-20 wheel load rating
3. Tracer Wire and Underground Warning Tape
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.1.H.9.
F. Sewage Lift Stations and Pumping Stations
1. Site Selection
a. The pumping station shall be readily accessible by maintenance vehicles during all
weather conditions. The facility shall be located off the traffic way of streets and
alleys. Security fencing and access hatches with locks shall be provided.
b. Sewage pumping station structures and electrical and mechanical equipment shall
be protected from physical damage by the 100 year flood. Sewage pumping stations
shall remain fully operational and accessible during the 25 year flood.
c. Where high groundwater conditions are anticipated, buoyancy of the wastewater
pumping station structures shall be considered and, if necessary, adequate
provisions shall be made for protection.
d. Lift Station or Pump Station Configuration: Submersible pump with only wet wells
are for Lift Stations having average daily flows less than 400 liters per second. The
wet well/dry well type shall be used for Lift Station having average daily flows
exceeding 400 liters per second.
e. The layout of the lift station or pump stations shall ensure that there will be available
space for maintenance purposes. Provision shall be made to facilitate removing
pumps, motors, and other mechanical and electrical equipment. Individual pump and
motor removal shall not interfere with the continued operation of remaining pumps.
f. Mechanical and electrical rooms shall be completely separated from the wet well.
Common walls shall be gas tight.
2. Wet Wells
a. Wet well shall be divided into two sections for larger pump stations to facilitate
repairs and cleaning.
b. The design fill time and minimum pump cycle time shall be considered in sizing the
wet well. The effective volume (EV) in cubic meters of the wet well shall be based on
design average flow (Qin) in cubic meters per minute and a filling time not to exceed
30 minutes. The pump(s) shall cycle between 2 and 6 times per hour. Qout is the
design pump discharge in cubic meter per minute.
c. Cycle time T= EV/Qin + EV/(Qout-Qin)
d. The “pump off” level shall be high enough to keep the pumps submerged per
Hydraulic Institute and manufacturer’s recommendation. The “pump on” level shall
be set no higher than 0.3 meters below the invert of the lowest influent pipe
e. The wet well floor shall have a minimum slope of 1 to 1 to the hopper bottom. The
horizontal area of the hopper bottom shall be no greater than necessary for proper
installation and function of the inlet.
f. Wet wells shall be lined with a material that is completely resistant to hydrogen
sulfide and sulfuric acid.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 37
g. Wet wells shall also have a corrosion resistance and waterproofing system installed
on the exterior of the wet well.
h. Provide an access hatch with safety chains above the pumps in the top of the wet
well. Hatch shall be of aluminum at least a two leaf design with enough area to
safely and easily remove the pumps
i. Covered wet wells shall have provisions for air displacement to the atmosphere,
such as an inverted "j" tube or other means.
j. Check for flotation of the wet well when it is empty
3. Pumps
a. All pumps shall be radial flow centrifugal pumps.
b. The design engineer shall use Hazen William's equation to calculate system-head
and curves.
c. Pumps shall be capable of passing spheres of at least 75 mm in diameter. Pump
suction and discharge openings shall be at least 100 mm in diameter.
d. The pump shall be so placed that under normal operating conditions it shall operate
under a positive suction head.
e. Pumps shall be readily removable and replaceable (with a dedicated, permanently
mounted motorized crane) without personnel entering or dewatering the wet well, or
disconnecting any piping in the wet well. In the mechanical room/dry well, allow for
sufficient headroom and space surrounding the equipment to allow for easy removal.
f. The minimum flow capacity of a lift station pump shall be 8.2 L/s. This is based on a
minimum pipe size of 100mm and a minimum velocity of 1 m/s. Refer to paragraph
F.9.
g. At least two pumps shall be provided in all sewage lift stations. With any pump out of
service, the remaining pump or pumps shall be capable of providing the maximum
pumping demand of the system. Where two or more pumps are installed, provisions
shall be made for alternating operation.
4. Electrical
a. Electrical systems and components (e.g., motors, lights, cables, conduits, switch
boxes, control circuits, etc.) in sewage wet wells, or in enclosed or partially enclosed
spaces where hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may be
present, shall be specified to be in rated for Zone 0 in the Saudi Building Code,
401Chapter 720, Electrical Installations in Hazardous Locations and NFPA 820,
Chapter 7.
b. Equipment located in the wet well shall be specified to be suitable for use under
corrosive conditions.
c. Electrical supply, control, and alarm circuits shall be designed to provide separate
strain relief and to allow disconnection from outside the wet well. Terminals and
connectors shall be protected from corrosion by location outside the wet well or
through use of watertight seals.
d. A fused disconnect switch located above ground shall be provided for the main
power feed for all pumping stations.
e. The motor control center shall be located outside the wet well, be readily accessible,
and be protected by a conduit seal or other appropriate measures meeting the

Rev. 1 5.7 - 38
requirements of the Saudi Buidling Code 401to prevent the atmosphere of the wet
well from gaining access to the control center. The seal shall be so located that the
motor may be removed and electrically disconnected without disturbing the seal.
When such equipment is exposed to weather, it shall meet the requirements of
weatherproof equipment. IP 65 is the preferred rating, but shall not be less than IP
55.
f. Lightning and surge protection systems shall be provided as required.
g. Phase protection and phase loss warning shall be provided for 3 phase power.
Phase protection shall prevent automatic equipment restarting attempts upon power
restoration until all three phases are restored.
h. The design electrical engineer shall provide a written description of the type of
power needed (voltage, amperage, phase, etc.)and has performed his investigation
of whether the proper power is available and when it is available for each site.
i. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for additional electrical requirements.
5. Pump Station Piping, Valves and Flow Meters
a. Piping within the pump stations shall be fusion-bonded epoxy-lined and coated steel
piping with flanged joints. All fasteners used for joining pipes shall be stainless
steel.
b. Water level control sensing devices shall be so located as not to be unduly affected
by turbulent flows entering the well or by the turbulent suction of the pumps.
c. Provision shall be made to automatically alternate the pumps in use.
6. Ventilation
a. Adequate ventilation shall be provided for all pump stations. If screens or
mechanical equipment requiring maintenance or inspection are located in the wet
well, permanently installed ventilation is required. There shall be no interconnection
between the wet well and other ventilation systems. Refer to NFPA 820, Chapters 4
and 9.
b. All intermittently operated ventilation equipment shall be interconnected with the
respective pit lighting system.
c. The fan wheel shall be fabricated from non-sparking material. Automatic heating and
dehumidification equipment shall be provided in all dry wells.
d. Ventilation may be either continuous or intermittent. Refer to NFPA 820, Chapters 4
and 9. Ventilation, if continuous, shall provide at least 12 complete air changes per
hour; if intermittent, at least 30 complete air changes per hour. Air shall be forced in
by mechanical means rather than solely exhausted. The air change requirements
shall be based on 100 percent fresh air.
7. Emergency Operation
a. Emergency pumping capability is required unless on-system overflow prevention is
provided by adequate storage capacity. Emergency pumping capability shall be
accomplished by connection of the station to at least two independent utility
substations, or by provision of portable or in-place generator that has sufficient
capacity to start up and maintain the total rated running capacity of the station.
Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E for back-up power requirements.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 39
b. Regardless of the type of emergency standby system provided, a portable pump

connection to the force main with rapid connection capabilities and appropriate
valves shall be provided outside the dry well and wet well.
c. A satisfactory plan shall be provided to prevent or minimize overflows in the event of
pump station failure.
8. Odor Control
a. Odor control unit is required to remove odors by passing through the activated
carbon bed neutralization or scrubber before being discharged to the outside air.
The system shall have a minimum 12 air changes per hour.
9. Force Mains
a. At design pumping rates, a minimum velocity of at least 1.0 m/s shall be maintained.
Maximum velocity shall not exceed 2.1 m/s.
b. The minimum force main diameter shall not be less than 100 mm.
c. Force mains shall maintain a positive uphill slope from the pump output to the
manhole receiving the force main discharge. Changes in force main slope and
direction shall be minimized.
d. Force mains shall be designed with a minimum depth of 1 m cover over the top of
the pipe.
e. The force main shall enter the receiving manhole with a smooth flow transition to the
gravity sewer system at a point not more than 0.3 m above the flow line.
f. The Consultant shall prepare a fexible stress analysis that emcompasess all non-
metallic pressure pipes as per Section 5.7.1.H.4
g. Acceptable Pipe Materials:
1) Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe
(b) ASTM D3754-14
(c) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
(d) ASTM D3567-11
2) Heat Fusion Joint High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) (pressure pipe
only)
(b) ASTM F714-13
(c) ASTM F2620-13
(d) ASTM D3035-15
3) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) (gravity and pressure pipe)
(a) Sizes up to 160 mm
G. Industrial Wastewater
1. Design Flows
a. Industrial Projects have project specific wastewater flows.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 40
b. This Subsection does not address the design flows for industrial applications
because each industrial application is anticipated to be project specific.
2. RCER Requirements
a. Industrial Wastewater Pre-treatment Requirements
1) Industrial wastewater dischargers shall meet pre-treatment requirements as
prescribed in the RCJ Environmental Regulations.
3. Design Requirements
a. All of the design requirements for sanitary wastewater infrastructure design in this
Sanitary Sewer Subsection 5.7.2 shall apply to the design of Industrial Wastewater
utility systems.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 41
SUBSECTION 5.7.3 RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM (IRRIGATION)
5.7.3 RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM (IRRIGATION)
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section provides the basis for the design of Recycled Water System (Irrigation).
The Recycled Water Systems include transmission and distribution systems.
b. Treated wastewater is recycled from both sanitary wastewater and industrial
wastewater. The treated industrial wastewater is blended with the treated sanitary
wastewater to provide irrigation water for open space landscape, roadside and park
landscaping.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to recycled water facilities downstream of sewage treatment
plants, including but not limited to storage tanks, pump stations, pipelines, valves,
and flow meters.
3. Definitions
4. Abbreviations
2) RCJ: Royal Commission
3) RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations (2010)
a. Follow the design requirements in the following publications:
1) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations 2015
2) Presidency of the Meteorology and Environment Regulations
6. Codes
7. Standards
1) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations 2015
2) Presidency of the Meteorology and Environment Regulations
8. Related Sections
a. NA

Rev. 1 5.7 - 42
B. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission Systems

1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Transmission System (Primary System):
a. The irrigation water transmission system conveys water from the Sanitary
Wastewater Treatment Plants to the transmission discharge water storage tanks.
2. The Recycled Water Transmission Systems includes the following components:
a. Suction water storage tanks,
b. Chlorine booster pumping system,
c. Large, multiple pump, constant speed pumping station(s),
d. Transmission pipeline
e. Discharge water storage tanks
3. Acceptable Pipe Materials
a. Heat Fusion Joint High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
1) Sizes 200 mm to 1050 mm:
2) ASTM F714-13
3) ASTM F2620-13
4) ASTM D3035-15
b. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Purple
1) Sizes 160 mm to 315 mm
2) AWWA C900-07
3) ASTM D1784-11 Cell Class 12454
4) ASTM F477-14
5) ASTM D3139-11
c. Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe
1) Sizes 300 mm to 1200 mm:
2) ASTM D3754-14
3) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
4) ASTM D3567-11
C. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Distribution Systems
1. Recycled Water (Irrigation) Pipelines
a. The Recycled Water (Irrigation) Distribution System conveys water from district
water storage tanks to the water users within the respective district.
b. The character of the soil and water table depth through which irrigation water mains
are to be laid shall be considered. The design engineer shall also consider the
materials to be used when corrosive soils or waters shall be encountered (coastal
soils are highly saline and corrosive, a thorough study of the conditions is essential
before beginning design).

Rev. 1 5.7 - 43
1) All open space landscape, roadside landscape and parks shall be irrigated by
reclaimed water irrigation.
2) All trees and palms shall be irrigated by bubbler system or root watering
system.
3) Ground covers and climber plants shall be irrigated by drip emitter system
and grass areas shall be irrigated by sprinkler system.
4) All recycled water mains shall be sized based on irrigation demands and
minimum pressure requirements; refer to Subsection 5.7.1.E.
5) Minimum pipeline slope shall be 0.10%. Maximum pipeline slope shall be
10%, unless project specific approval is requested and approved.
6) Longitudinal bending of PVC pipe is not allowed.
7) Longitudinal bending of HDPE pipe shall be limited to 80% of the
manufacturer's installation recommendations.
8) PVC pipe joint deflection shall be limited to 80% of the manufacturer's
installation recommendations.
9) Pipeline Location:
(a) Vertical: minimum burial depth of recycled water (irrigation) distribution
main lines not less than 110 mm is 1.0 m, measured from finished grade
to top of pipe. Maximum burial depth is 6.0 m.
(b) Irrigation piping from the solenoid valve boxes to the irrigation terminal
equipment shall have the following minimum burial depth
(1) 300 mm for lateral lines serving emitters, bubblers and sprinkler
heads.
(2) 600 mm for lines 50 mm and larger
(3) 900 mm for line 75 mm and larger.
(c) Horizontal: 2.0 m beyond edge of pavement or back of curb, unless
otherwise approved.
(d) The use of joint (combined) utility trenches is not permitted.
(e) Potable water lines shall be located at a distance no less than 3.0 m
horizontally (outside to outside) and 500 mm vertically above any non-
potable (reclaimed) water line, sewer line, or storm drain line.
c. Acceptable Pipe Materials
1) Flexible Tubing for Drip Lines
(b) Non-rigid vinyl chloride polymer and copolymer compounds.
(c) ASTM D2287
2) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Purple
(b) AWWA C900-07
(c) ASTM D1784-11 Cell Class 12454

Rev. 1 5.7 - 44
(d) ASTM F477-14

(e) ASTM D3139-11
3) Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe
(b) ASTM D3754-14
(c) ASTM D4161-14/ISO 8639
(d) ASTM D3567-11
2. Isolation Valves
1) Valve Locations: a sufficient number of isolation valves shall be provided on
irrigation water pipelines to minimize inconvenience, sanitary hazards, and
degradation of fire protection during maintenance and repairs. Valves shall be
generally located as follows, unless otherwise approved:
(a) Isolation valves are required on all sides of tees, 3 valves and crosses, 4
valves, unless project specific approval is requested and approved by
the RCJ to reduce the number of valves at a specific location.
(b) For straight pipe runs, the maximum spacing between isolation valves
shall be 400 m.
2) Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried isolation valves. Valve stem
extensions are required within 500 mm of finished grade where the distance
from the top of the valve box to the top of the operating nut exceeds 1500
mm.
3) Valve boxes and lids shall be cast iron, three sectional, and screw-type
adjustable; designed for highway traffic loads.
b. Acceptable Valve Types
1) Gate Valves
(a) Valve sizes 110 mm to 300mm
2) Butterfly Valves
3) (a) Valve sizes from 350 mm to 900 mm
4) Bubbler Solenoid Valve
5) Drip Solenoid Valve
6) Sprinkler Solenoid Valve
3. Storage Tanks
a. Welded Steel Tanks
1) Steel Plate and Structural Shapes

Rev. 1 5.7 - 45
(a) AWWA D100 Section 2

(b) API 650
2) Steel pipe and pipe fittings
(a) ASTM A-120
3) Exterior ladders, guard rails
(a) ASTM A123/153
b. Piping
1) Inlet: a dedicated supply line from the transmission booster pump station to
the district distribution elevated storage tank(s) is required.
2) Outlet: the discharge pipe(s) from water storage structures shall be located in
a manner that shall prevent the flow of sediment into the system. Removable
silt stops shall be provided.
3) Overflow: all water storage structures shall be provided with an overflow pipe.
The overflow shall not be connected to a storm drain.
4) Drains: the design shall allow draining the storage facility for cleaning or
maintenance without causing loss of pressure in the transmission and/or
distribution system
5) Sampling: smooth-nosed sampling tap(s) shall be provided in the tank valve
vault to facilitate collection of water samples for both bacteriological and
chemical analyses. The sample tap(s) shall be easily accessible.
4. Pumping Stations
a. Distribution Pump Stations
1) Generally operate at a constant flow rate and pump speed, and take suction
from the transmission discharge storage tanks and discharge to the
distribution system pipelines and distribution elevated storage tank. These
pump motors may typically utilize a reduced voltage soft starter (RVSS),
although the use of variable frequency drives (VFD) may be preferred in some
cases to meet demand requirements.
2) Capacity shall be provided such that the pumping facility shall be capable of
providing the peak day demand of the system or the specific portion of the
system serviced.
3) The operation of the pumps shall be controlled by the level in the distribution
elevated storage tank (via a level transducer, with sufficient volume between
pump start and pump stop tank levels to prevent excessive cycling.
4) A provision to maintain a minimum level in the transmission storage tanks for
the pump station suction shall also be included in the control logic.
5) Pump stations shall be designed as maximum irrigation operating hours not
more than 12 hours for Beaches and Parks. Other areas/facilities where no
human contact shall be 18 hours of pump operation.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 46
SUBSECTION 5.7.4 SEA WATER COOLING
5.7.4 SEA WATER COOLING
A. General
1. Design Criteria Background
a. Seawater cooling is provided as a utility for the industrial cities.
1) Jubail 1 has a system of seawater cooling canals divided into supply and
return channels. Seawater is pumped into the canal and flows by gravity
through the city. The return channel flows by gravity back to the sea for
dissipation. The system is designed as a once through cooling with off-take
structures and lateral pipes connected to non-contact heat exchangers of the
various industries in the City.
2) Jubail 2 seawater cooling is designed to supply make up water to industry
cooling towers and receive cooling tower blowdown.
3) Those facilities which require or are located with direct access to the sea and
plan to develop an independent seawater cooling water system, shall consult
with the RCJ for further direction and guidance.
b. Applicability
1) This Subsection applies to all projects within the cities under jurisdiction of the
RCJ.
c. Definitions
1) Refer to Section 2.2.0 for General Definitions of terms
2) “Blowdown” The discharge of accumulated dissolved minerals to control the
buildup of these minerals in recirculating cooling water systems. Also known
as draw-off and purge.
3) “Confined Space” A restricted area that has one of more of the following
characteristics: contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous
atmosphere; contains a material that has the potential to engulf an entrant;
has walls that converge inward, and/or floors that slope downward and taper
into a smaller area which could trap an entrant; or contains any other
recognized safety or health hazard, such as unguarded machinery, exposed
live wires, etc.
4) “Cooling Water” The water removing heat from a machine or system.
5) “Corrosion” The process of corroding metal, stone, or other materials.
6) “Distribution Canal” Canal used to convey cooling water to and from the sea
into the cities and to the customers.
7) “Distribution/lateral Piping” Piping used to transfer seawater from a
distribution canal / pipeline to a customer’s heat exchanger for the purpose of
providing cooling water for an industrial process. A different set of piping
returns the heated water back to the distribution canal / pipeline.
8) “Drift” The amount of total cooling tower water flow that is evaporated into the
atmosphere, dependent on whether the tower uses natural or induced draft
cooling and additional drift eliminators. Also known as windage.
9) “Non-Contact Cooling System” A cooling system that includes a heat
exchanger which separates the seawater from the process water.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 47
10) “Pump Station(s)” Facilities that lift seawater up to the distribution canal
through the use of vertical turbine or other pump types. This lift in water
elevation creates the hydraulic head necessary for the seawater to flow in the
distribution canal to the users.
11) “Valve Chambers” Sluice gates or valves used to control the rate of seawater
being transferred to and from individual customer laterals.
d. Abbreviations
1) Refer to Section 2.2 for General Abbreviations
(a) FRP: Fiber-Reinforced Plastic
(b) P&ID: Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
(c) PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
(d) RCER: Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
(e) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(f) SCT: Seawater Cooing Tower
e. General requirements
1) Projects shall comply with all applicable requirements and regulations of the
RCJ.
2) System users are responsible for complying with RCJ requirements and
environmental regulations.
f. Codes and Standards
1) Projects with coastal/marine discharges are required to comply with the
following RCER water quality regulations and Standards.
(a) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.1, Coastal Water Quality Criteria
(b) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.2, Water Quality Discharge Standards
(c) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.3, General Water Quality Regulations
(d) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.5, Seawater Cooling Regulations
(e) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.6, Seawater Cooling Tower Regulations
(f) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.10, Marine-Related Discharge Regulations
(g) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.13, Water Quality Monitoring Requirements
(h) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.14, Table 3A Ambient Water Quality Criteria
for Coastal Waters
(i) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.10
(j) RCER Volume 1 Section 3.1.4, Table 3C Water Quality Standards for
Direct Discharge to Coastal Waters
g. Related Sections
1) Section 5.9, Environmental
h. Approvals
1) The RCJ has approval authority through the Environmental Permit Program.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 48
B. Commissioning
b. The drift rate shall be confirmed as part of the acceptance testing, and shall be
tested according to the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) test codes ATC-I4O, “Drift
Testing of Wet, Wet/Dry, and Closed Circuit Cooling Towers.”
C. Design Criteria
1. Temperatures
a. Designs shall account for the seasonal variations in the seawater temperatures as
well as seasonal ambient conditions. August is generally the month of peak
temperatures.
b. Heat exchange systems shall be designed to not exceed the maximum temperature
differential between the seawater cooling intake and discharge per the regulations in
RCER Volume 1 Table 3C, Water Quality Standards for Direct Discharge to Coastal
Waters.
2. Salts in Cooling Water
a. Designs shall take into account the reduced thermal performance as well as other
physical and chemical properties of seawater.
b. Salts emissions from cooling tower drift shall be controlled with drift eliminators.
c. Corrosion resistant materials shall be used in any equipment and structures related
to the seawater cooling processes.
d. Scaling and bio-fouling shall be considered and controlled. The use of acids and
biocides shall comply with environmental regulations of the RCER.
3. Heat Exchangers
a. Connections to the seawater cooling utility shall be made only via non-contact heat
exchangers.
b. Flow and temperature sensors, indicators, and SCADA monitoring shall be provided
on all connections between heat exchanger(s) and seawater cooling utilities. Water
quality sampling ports shall also be provided on both withdrawal and discharge
connections.
c. Appropriate isolation valves, bypasses, provisions for cleaning, and related
appurtenances shall be provided on heat exchangers and their related connection
piping.
4. Seawater Cooling Towers (SCT)
a. Type, design and operation of cooling towers shall be in compliance with RCER
Volume 1 Section 3.6.0.
b. Siting of SCT shall not cause impact to downwind receptors.
c. SCT drift shall be controlled with double layer drift eliminators to keep drift loss to
<0.0005%.
d. Materials of construction shall be of corrosion resistant materials such as FRP, PVC
etc.
e. Blowdown (purge) from SCT is designated as a variance stream and shall be
managed in accordance with the RCER regulations.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 49
f. SCT shall include a plan to control and monitor biological water quality for Legionella
bacteria.
D. Water Quality and Treatment
1. General
a. Refer to Subsection 5.9.3, General, for relevant definitions, abbreviations, Codes
and Standards, and more.
2. Design and Approval Sequence
a. Establish Ambient Receiving Waters and Aquatic Environments
b. Environmental Design Criteria
1) System Layout and Configuration
(a) Proposed Discharge
(1) Type
(i) The type of discharge (submerged, deep sea, etc.) shall be
described and compared to other options not chosen.
(2) Location
(i) The proposed discharge location shall be shown on a survey
map with bathymetry. The map shall include the location of
other outfalls and intakes within potential influence of the
proposed discharge.
(b) Frequency
(1) Once Through
(i) This type of system configuration involves a single pass of
seawater through a heat exchanger to transfer the heat energy.
(2) Recirculating
(i) This type of system configuration involves multiple passes
through a heat exchanger and is not preferred due to the larger
temperature increase in the seawater.
(c) Heat Exchanger Type
(1) Contact
(i) This type of system is not allowed since it mixes seawater with
the industrial process and materials being cooled.
(2) Noncontact System
(i) This system has a barrier between the seawater and the
industrial liquid being cooled.
2) Model Types
(a) For modeling types refer to Subsection 5.7.4.E. The type of model to
meet RCJ requirements and will need to be compatible with the regional
model for the area.
3) Importance to the Environment

Rev. 1 5.7 - 50
(a) The model shall incorporate temperature and other parameters that
provide assurance that any impacts to the environment will be identified.
c. Proposed Impacts
1) Water Flow
(a) Volume / Flow rate of Seawater Needed
(1) The Applicant shall list the flow rate and volume of water that will be
needed for the proposed facility. Any variations (diurnal or
seasonal) shall be identified.
2) Thermal Load
(a) Anticipated Rise of Discharge
(1) The anticipated temperature rise in the cooling seawater shall be
calculated and supported by calculations meeting the requirements
of RCJ. The anticipated temperature rise shall not exceed the
limitations in the RCER Volume 1 Section 3.6.0, Seawater Cooling
Tower Regulations, and the associated table(s).
3) Chemical Additives
(a) Biocides
(1) Any proposed biocides shall be listed in the application in addition
to the proposed amount to be used and frequency of usage.
Proposed biocide use shall comply with RCER water quality
requirements to the satisfaction of the RCJ, and shall be
demonstrated as such to the RCJ prior to biocide use.
(b) Phosphorus and Chromium
(1) Chromium or phosphorous based water treatment chemicals are
not permitted. Sulfuric acid for scale control is also not permitted.
Refer to RCER Volume 1 Section 3.6.0 Seawater Cooling Tower
Regulations.
(c) Oxygen
(1) The dissolved oxygen level shall not be reduced in the returned
seawater.
(d) Other
(1) All additives must meet the approval requirements of the RCJ.
Records shall be kept of all chemical use and shall be supplied to
RCJ as required.
4) Submittal to and Review by RCJ
(a) Based on the application and information received, the RCJ will
determine acceptance of the proposed facility through issuance of the
Permit to Construct.
5) Long Term Monitoring
(a) Thermal
(1) Thermal rise in the cooling seawater shall be monitored and
recorded in a permanent log submitted periodically to the RCJ.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 51
(b) Biocide Concentration

(1) All Biocide use shall be monitored with a permanent log submitted
periodically to the RCJ.
(c) Aquatic Environmental Quality
(1) Species Prevalence
(i) The local aquatic species shall be inventoried with a listing of
all species and endangered species present.
(2) Reef Health and Assessment
(i) The reef (and local aquatic area) shall be monitored according
to internationally accepted criteria for the life of the project.
Reports shall be submitted to RCJ and any degradation shall
be noted.
(3) pH
(i) The pH of the local marine environment shall be monitored and
included in the reports discussed above.
E. Hydraulic Modeling
1. General
a. Hydraulic modeling is required for the design of connections to the seawater cooling
systems.
b. The model type shall be compatible with the seawater cooling system model. Model
format shall be approved by the RCJ prior to completion.
c. RCJ modeling results shall be included in the design basis report.
d. Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.A.1, General, for relevant definitions, abbreviations,
Codes and Standards, and more.
2. Hydraulic and Thermal Loads
a. The hydraulic flow rates/conditions and thermal loads shall be estimated and
projected based on the process design. Justification and future loading
considerations shall be included in the modeling report.
b. The model shall also include thermal loading at point of discharge as well as a total
aggregate for the entire City system.
c. Jubail 1 Canal System: all withdrawals and returns shall be documented and
modeled.
d. Jubail 2 Seawater Cooling: All makeup water supply requirements as well blowdown
returns, including concentration cycle calculations, shall be documented and
modeled.
3. Modeling Report
a. A complete modeling report demonstrating compliance with RCER water quality
requirements shall be submitted to the RCJ for review and approval as part of the
permit to construct and operate.
F. Distribution Piping and Valve Chambers
1. General

Rev. 1 5.7 - 52
a. This Subsection covers the design and construction of distribution piping and valve
chambers that connect to the seawater cooling utility.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.9.5.A General for relevant definitions, abbreviations, Codes
2. Design and Approval
a. Submit Overall Proposed System Description
b. Design Criteria
1) Distribution Piping and Valve Chamber Layout and Configuration
(a) Proposed Seawater Withdrawal System
(1) Piping Size and Capacity
(i) The proposed pipe sizes and flow rate capacity shall be
depicted on a drawing and described in a narrative.
(2) Location of withdrawal
(i) The proposed seawater withdrawal location shall be depicted
on a map along with the relationships to other industrial
seawater withdrawal points.
c. Pipe Material
1) Pipe Material
(a) The proposed pipe material and wall thickness shall be noted.
2) Corrosion Protection
(a) The provisions to be taken to prevent corrosion to the piping, fittings and
other components shall be described.
3) Joining type / process
(a) The proposed joint type shall be described along with the process
involved with successfully joining the pipe.
4) Pressure / Strength
(a) The pressure rating, strength and durability shall be described. It shall
meet the requirements for the associated seawater cooling utility system.
5) Pipe Bedding and thrust restraint
(a) The pipe placement bedding and the locations and types of thrust
blocking shall also be described.
d. Valve Chamber
1) Valve / Sluice Gate Type And Sizes
(a) The proposed valves / sluice gates shall be depicted and described
along with the proposed locations.
2) Corrosion protection
(a) Methods proposed to eliminate corrosion shall be described in detail.
3) Operator safety

Rev. 1 5.7 - 53
(a) Railing / Access Safety

(1) The locations of railings, ladder / stair protections shall be depicted
and discussed. Current safety regulations shall be met.
(b) Access procedure / confined space permits
(1) The number of confined spaces shall be reduced. Any spaces shall
have clear designation of required safety procedures for entering
and the necessity to have air quality monitored by others along with
other procedures such as supplemental air.
(c) Lock out procedures during maintenance
(1) Procedures to notify all others involved with the operation that a
valve / sluice gate is being inspected shall be implemented and
described.
e. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
1) Valve / sluice gate status and control
(a) Automated control valves shall be provided to control the flow through
connections to the utility. A Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)
shall be prepared and included with the design submittal.
2) Lateral Flow rate monitoring
(a) Flow rate meters shall be provided in the laterals to monitor flow rates of
seawater from and back to the seawater distribution canals and
distribution pipes.
3) Connection to RCJ Monitoring Network
(a) The SCADA system shall provide for real time monitoring by RCJ of the
applicant’s seawater cooling process (including but not limited to those
components discussed above).
f. Submittal to and Review by RCJ
1) Decision by RCJ
(a) RCJ may require more information / data to allow them to make the
decisions regarding the proposed project.
g. Long Term Monitoring
1) Flow Rate and Seawater Volume Used and Returned
(a) The seawater flow rate and volume shall be monitored, recorded and
provided periodically to the RCJ.
2) Temperature Rise Monitoring in Return Water
(a) The seawater intake temperature vs the seawater temperature leaving
the facility shall be monitored, recorded and provided to the RCJ.
3) Valve / Gate Status
(a) The valve / gate status (open / closed) shall be monitored real time and
shall be included in the reports supplied to RCJ.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 54
G. Pumping Stations
1. General
a. This Subsection covers pumping stations that supply and convey seawater cooling
water, including those pumping systems for the off-take and the return to the utility
system.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.9.3. General, for relevant definitions, abbreviations, Codes
2. Design and Approval Sequence
a. Submit Overall Pump Station Design Report to RCJ for Review
b. Pump Station Location and Configuration
1) System Layout and Configuration
(a) Proximity to Other Facilities, Jetties and Channels
(1) Type
(i) The proposed pump station type shall be described in a design
report.
(2) Location
(i) The proposed location of the pump station shall be depicted on
a map which shall also locate other seawater users in that
system.
(3) Hydraulic Lift and Relationship to Extreme Tides
(i) The proposed hydraulic lift of the pump station and the
variations with tides, seasonal changes and during storm
events shall be included in the design report.
(b) Protection of Navigation
(1) Lighting and Signage
(i) Provisions to provide navigational lighting and signage to
protect vessels and pedestrians shall be included.
(2) Floating Barriers
(i) Floating barriers to prevent vessels from approaching the pump
intakes shall be included.
(c) Proposed Pumping System
(1) Number of Pumps
(i) The number of pumps to be operated and the flow capacity at
that time shall be described in the Design Basis Report.
Redundancy and backup pumps shall be provided.
(2) Total Capacity of Station
(i) The total pump station capacity (in cubic meters per second)
shall also be included in the Design Basis Report
(3) Intake Screen Type and Maintenance

Rev. 1 5.7 - 55
(i) Methods of cleaning the intake screens and intake piping shall
be described. The process for disposal of any material
removed from the screens shall be included. A design concept
shall be proposed to the RCJ for review. Design shall not
begin until RCJ approval is obtained.
(4) Biofouling Protection
(i) Techniques of removing biofouling from the pump station
intakes, piping or other components shall be included. The
methods shall not allow for the discharge of biocide agents
directly back to the seawater. Provisions to take portions of the
pump station out of service and to treat that section with
biocides shall be included. The biocide laden water shall then
be removed and treated at a wastewater treatment plant.
(5) Fish Protection Plan
(6) Provisions to minimize the mortality to fish at the intake to the
pumps shall be included. A design concept shall be proposed to
the RCJ for review. Design shall not begin until RCJ approval is
obtained.
(7) Corrosion Protection
(i) Materials of construction shall be corrosion resistant and
designed for seawater applications.
c. Pump Station Design
1) Hydraulic design and pump equipment selection shall take into account the
physical and chemical properties of seawater. Designs should consider the
use of variable frequency drives for the sea water cooling pumps to
accommodate varying flow conditions.
2) Railing / Access Safety
(a) Provisions to meet recognized occupational safety and health codes
shall be included in the design of all railings, elevation drops, access
locations, stairways, ladders and the entire facility.
3) Access procedure / confined space permits
(a) Minimize the number of confined spaces. Spaces which are considered
“confined” shall be noted as requiring permits prior to entry. Specific
requirements include but are not limited to air monitoring, extraction
protocols and the supplying on supplemental air. All areas requiring
confined space permits shall be identified and marked.
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.7.5.A for the definition of a confined space.
4) Lock out procedures during maintenance
(a) Maintenance near any motorized or electrical equipment will likely
require a specific “Lock Out” procedure. All equipment requiring this
procedure shall be identified and marked.
5) Separation of Public and Operational Areas

Rev. 1 5.7 - 56
(a) To prevent the public from entering dangerous areas, a clear delineation
of public versus operational area shall be made. Sufficient signage and
barriers shall be provided.
d. Electrical / Power System Design
1) Power Requirements
(a) The design report shall identify the pump station power type and required
power requirements.
(b) Independent power feeds and/or backup power systems shall be
provided.
2) Confirmation of Local Capacity and Service Type
(a) The ability of the local power grid to handle the proposed power load
shall be confirmed with the local power purveyor and RCJ.
3) Anticipated Energy Use / Conservation Plan
(a) The anticipated energy use amount shall be predicted and included in
the design report. The use of energy conserving equipment such as
variable speed pumps shall be reviewed for feasibility.
e. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
1) Pump on / off / status monitoring
(a) The pumps shall each provide a Pump on /off SCADA signal to a local
and regional (RCJ) monitoring system.
2) Pump Flow Rate / Meter Monitoring
(a) The pumps shall also provide a flow rate / meter signal SCADA signal to
a local and regional (RCJ) monitoring system.
3) Emergency / Pump Alarm Signals
(a) The pumps and the pump station fire alarm system shall provide
emergency / alarm signals to a local and regional (RCJ) monitoring
system.
4) Connection to RCJ Monitoring Network
(a) Connections to the regional RCJ system shall be made in an
electronically compatible method with the applicable analog or digital
signals as requested by RCJ. The method to transfer the signals shall
be by fiber optics or other method as approved by RCJ.
f. Operation and Maintenance
1) Maintenance Schedule
(a) The proposed maintenance schedule for the pumps, impellers, valve and
gates shall be identified for review by the RCJ. The goal is to provide a
reliable pump station for the community.
2) Spare Part Inventory
(a) An inventory of parts for the pumps, motors, valves and gates shall be
provided in the amount of 10% of the installed capacity for use in an
emergency.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 57
3) Corrosion
(a) Materials for the pumps shall be corrosion resistant due to the salt water
environment they are to be placed.
4) Provide overhead crane systems and supporting repair facilities/space
needed to maintain systems on long term basis.
g. Submittal of Detailed Design To and Review by RCJ
1) RCJ may request additional information to assist with their review of the
application.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 58
SUBSECTION 5.7.5 FUEL GAS
5.7.5 FUEL GAS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. a. The intent of this Subsection is to provide the basis of design for storage and
transportation of liquid and gaseous fuels within the utility distribution system. The
Subsection requires adherence to the RCJ Environmental Regulations - Current
Edition, by reference, for the construction and operation of liquid and gas pipelines
and storage tanks.
b. b. The primary system is made up of a grid of mains and booster pumping
stations for the liquid fuels; gate stations for the gas fuels; a n d necessary storage
facilities. Further distribution to the consumers is accomplished through
secondary and tertiary systems. Pumping stations located at the storage tanks
that provide the hydraulic head for the secondary and tertiary systems are included
as part of the primary system.
c. c. The design criteria for a unique liquid fuel or gas system may differ from the
guidelines contained herein. However, all designs shall be approved by the RCJ
prior to construction.
2. Applicability
a. This Subsection provides the basis for the design of fuel gas utilities defined in
Subsection 5.7.6. The guidelines apply to the following:
1) This Subsection provides general guidelines and prescribes the requirements
for selection, furnishing, installing, testing and bringing into full satisfactory
operational conditions of the Fuel Gas Utility piping and storage tank systems.
2) These criteria provide mandatory, minimally acceptable requirements for the
RCJ new and retrofit projects for RCJ.
3) This document contains policy and designer requirements to be used in the
design and documentation of the RCJ projects.
4) The provisions of this document are not intended to prohibit the use of
alternative systems, methods or devices not specifically prescribed by this
document, provided the RCJ has approved such alternatives.
5) Project conditions may dictate the need for design that exceeds these
minimum requirements.
6) Existing and proposed fuel gas utilities shall be included on civil site plans
b. Definitions
c. Gas and Fuel Piping:
1) Refer to the RCJ Engineering Manual specific to discipline.
2) Refer to ASME B31.1, Chapter 1, Code for Power Piping.
3) Refer to ASME B31.3, Chapter 1, Code for Process Piping.
4) Refer to ASME B31.4, Chapter 1, Code for Pipeline Transportation Systems.
5) Refer to ASME B31.8, Chapter 1, Code for Gas Transmission and Distribution
Piping Systems.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 59
6) Refer to CFR 195, Subpart A, Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by

Pipeline.
7) Refer to CFR 192, Subpart A, Transportation of Natural And Other Gas by
Pipeline.
8) Refer to NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code for Pressures up to 125 psig.
9) Refer to International Fuel Gas Code, Section 3.1.6, UMC Fuel Gas Piping
Chapter and IPC Fuel Piping Chapter
d. Gas and Fuel Tanks:
1) For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.0.
2) Refer to Engineering Standard SAES-D-001, Section 4, and Design Criteria
for Pressure Vessels.
3) Refer to Engineering Standard SAES-D-100, Section 4, and Design Criteria
for Atmospheric and Low Pressure Tanks. API 620/650/651.
4) Refer to Engineering Standard SAES-D-109, Section 4, and Design of Small
Tanks.
e. c. Pumps
1) For a list of general abbreviation refer to Section 2.2.0.
3. Abbreviations
4) ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
5) AWS American Welding Society
6) GPCS General Procurement Construction Specifications
7) IMC International Mechanical Code
8) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valves & Fittings Ind.
9) NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
11) OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
12) RCJDC RCJ Design Criteria
13) RCJ RC Jubail
15) UL Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
16) UMC Uniform Mechanical Code

Rev. 1 5.7 - 60
a. Not used at this time.

5. Codes
b. Applicable Codes
1) SBC SAUDI BUILDING CODE
2) IBC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE
3) IFC INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE
4) IFGC INTERNATIONAL FUEL AND GAS CODE
5) IMC INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE
6) SBC SAUDI BUILDING CODES 201, 501 and 801
6. Standards
1) ANSI - AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
2) API - AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE
3) ASME - AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
4) ASTM - AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
5) AWS - AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY
6) NFPA - NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARDS,
specifically NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1), National Fuel Gas Code
7) SAES - SAUDI ARAMCO ENGINEERING STANDARDS
b. Pumps
1) SAES-G-007 - Submersible Pumps and Motors for water Well and Offshore
Service
2) ANSI/API 610 - Centrifugal Pumps for General Refinery Service.
3) DIN EN ISO 5199 - Technical specifications for Centrifugal Pumps.
4) ASME B73.1 - Specification for Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pumps.
5) ASME B73.2 - Specifications for Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps.
c. Tanks and Vessels
1) API 650 - Welded Tanks for Oil Storage
2) API 653 - Tank Inspection, Repair, Alteration and Reconstruction
3) API 651 - Cathodic Protection of Aboveground Storage Tanks
4) API 620 - Design and Construction of Large Welded Low Pressure Storage
Tanks
5) AES-A-005 - Safety Instruction Sheet
6) SAES-A-102 - Air Pollutant Emission Source Control

Rev. 1 5.7 - 61
7) SAES-A-112 - Meteorological and Seismic Design Data

8) SAES-B-005 - Spacing and Diking for Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Tanks
9) SAES-B-017 - Fire Water System Design
10) SAES-B-018 - Air Foam Systems for Storage Tanks
11) SAES-B-054 - Access, Egress, and Materials Handling for Plant Facilities
12) SAES-B-055 - Plant Layout
13) SAES-B-057 - Safety Requirements: Refrigerated and Pressure Storage
Vessels
14) SAES-H-001 - Selection Requirements for Industrial Coatings
15) SAES-H-101 - Approved Protective Coating Systems
16) SAES-J-300 - Level
17) SAES-J-600 - Pressure Relief Devices
18) SAES-M-001 - Structural Design Criteria for Non-Building Structures
19) SAES-N-001 - Basic Criteria, Industrial Insulation
20) SAES-P-111 - Grounding
21) SAES-P-123 - Lighting
22) SAES-Q-005 - Concrete Foundations
23) SAES-X-500 - Cathodic Protection of Vessels and Tank Internals
24) SAES-X-600 - Cathodic Protection of Plant Facilities
25) SAES-D-100 - Design Criteria of Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Tanks. API
651, API 650 and API 620.
26) SAES-D-001 - Design Criteria for Pressure Vessels
27) SAES-D-108 - Repair, Alteration and Reconstruction of Storage Tanks
28) SAES-D-109 - Design of Small Tanks
29) SAER-5800 - Use of Aluminum Geodesic Dome Roofs on External Floating
Roof Tanks
30) 32-SAMSS-005 - Manufacture of Atmospheric Tanks
31) 32-SAMSS-006 - Manufacture of Low-Pressure Tanks
32) 32-SAMSS-017 - Side-Entry Mixers
d. Pumps For Infrastructure Utilities Systems
1) SAES-G-007 - Submersible Pumps and Motors for water Well and Offshore
Service.
2) ANSI/API 610 - Centrifugal Pumps for General Refinery Service.
3) DIN EN ISO 5199 - Technical specifications for Centrifugal Pumps.
4) ASME B73.1 - Specification for Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pumps.
5) ASME B73.2 - Specifications for Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 62
7. Related Sections
a. Underground and Aboveground Liquid Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings:
1) Section 3.2 Zoning Regulations
2) Section 3.5 Environmental Protection And Preservation
3) Section 3.6 Safety Standards
4) Chapter 4 Project Submission Standards And Requirements
5) Chapter 5 Design Guidelines
8. Approvals
a. The RCJ shall review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications.
B. Commissioning
a. Refer to the Standard Specifications.
C. Natural Gas Distribution:
a. All materials used shall meet the requirements of the Contract.
b. All materials used shall be selected to meet applicable system requirements such as
exposure, temperature and pressure.
1) Refer to Chapter 5.1 - Design Guidelines
c. All material shall be selected in consideration of the environmental conditions.
d. In selecting material, special attention shall be given to corrosion resistance.
Corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or painting on
ordinary material shall be as specified.
e. All material shall also be selected in consideration of the ease of shipment,
f. All pipes aboveground and placed underground shall have external protection by
using suitable coating, or tape wrap. In addition, an impressed current or galvanic
cathodic protection system shall be considered in the design of underground piping.
g. Materials shall be selected using mechanical properties and other specifications in
the latest issue of ASTM Standards Specifications.
h. Pipe diameter shall be selected to meet the following design criteria:
1) Gas velocity.
2) Pressure drop providing required downstream gas pressure as specified by
the end use.
2. Underground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings
a. Piping shall be fabricated to transport gas fuels under a pressurized system.
b. Design criteria shall take into consideration various materials, coatings, fittings,
flanges, Valves and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the design the
manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular production
components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 63
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106 or A53M, black, Grade B, seamless
or electric resistance welded (ERW), Schedule 80 or 40 as a minimum.
(b) Establish maximum load ratings with consideration for allowable stresses
prescribed by ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.8.
2) Fittings
(a) Conform to ASTM A234M, wrought carbon steel or alloy steel or ASME
B16.11, forged steel, butt-welded joints.
(b) Conform to ASME B16.11 forged steel, socket welded joints.
(c) Joints shall be welded in conformance to ASME B31.1.
3) Flanges
(a) Flat Face Weld Neck
(b) Raised Face Weld Neck
4) Valves
(a) Ball Valve
(b) Gate Valve
5) Specialties - Refer to GPCS Section - Underground Gas Fuel Specialties.
(a) This Subsection covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping
specialties shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required
to complete the Work.
(1) Pressure Indicators and Gauges
(2) Temperature Indicators and Sensors
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(5) Pipeline Markers
(6) Cathodic Protection System
(i) Impressed Current with Rectifiers
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing.
1) Refer to Regulatory Requirements
d. Railroad Crossing.
1) This Specification shall apply to the design and construction of pipelines
carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances and casings containing
wires, cables and carrier pipes across and along railroad property and
facilities.
(a) General Requirements
(1) Use of Casing Pipe

Rev. 1 5.7 - 64
(i) A casing pipe Shall be required for all pipeline crossings

carrying liquid or gaseous substances
(ii) Pressure pipelines that are located within 8 m of the centerline
of any track shall be cased.
(2) Location of Pipeline on Railroad Right-of-Way
(i) Pipelines laid longitudinally along railroad right-of-way shall be
located as far as practicable from any tracks or other important
structures and as close to the railroad property line as possible.
Longitudinal pipelines shall not be located in earth
embankments or within ditches located on the right-of-way.
(ii) Pipelines shall be located, where practicable, to cross tracks at
approximate right angles to the track, but preferably at not less
than 45 degrees.
(iii) Pipelines shall not be placed within a culvert, under railroad
bridges, nor closer than 14 m to any portion of any railroad
bridge, buildings, or other important structure, except as
(iv) Pipelines shall not be located within the limits of a turnout
(switch) when crossing the track. The limits of the turnout
extend from the point of the switch to 5 m beyond the last
timber.
(3) Depth of Installation
(i) Casing pipes under railroad tracks shall be not less than 2 m
from base of rail to top of pipe at its closest point. On other
portions of the right-of-way, where the pipe is not directly
beneath the track, the depth from ground surface or from
bottom of ditch to top of pipe shall not be less than 1 meter.
Where 1 meter cannot be provided from bottom of ditch, a 15
centimeter thick reinforced concrete slab shall be provided over
the pipeline for protection.
(ii) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way, 15 meter
or less from centerline track shall be buried not less than 2 m
from ground surface to top of pipe. Where the pipeline is laid
more than 15 m from centerline of track, the minimum cover
shall be at least 1.5 m.
(4) Modification of Existing Facilities
(i) Any replacement or modifications of an existing carrier pipe
and/or casing shall be considered as a new installation, subject
to the requirements for new installations.
(5) Abandoned Facilities
(i) Abandoned pipelines shall be removed or completely filled with
cement grout, compacted sand, or other methods as approved
by the RCJ.
(ii) Abandoned manholes and other structures shall be removed to
a minimum depth of 1.6 m below finished grade and completely

Rev. 1 5.7 - 65
filled with cement grout, compacted sand, or other methods

(6) Insulation
(i) Pipelines and casings shall be suitably insulated from
underground conduits carrying electrical wires on the railroad
right-of-way.
(7) Corrosion Protection and Petroleum Leak Protection
(i) Pipelines on the railroad right-of-way that carry petroleum
products or hazardous liquids shall be designed in accordance
with current RCJ or industry regulations that mandate leak
detection automatic shutoff, leak monitoring, sacrificial anodes,
impressed current rectifiers, and/or exterior coatings to
minimize corrosion and prevent petroleum releases.
(8) Plastic Carrier Pipe Materials
(i) Plastic carrier pipelines shall be encased.
(ii) Plastic pipe material shall not be used to convey liquid
flammable substances.
(iii) Plastic carrier pipe may be utilized to convey flammable gas
products provided the pipe material is compatible with the type
of product conveyed and the maximum allowable operating
pressure is less than 7 kilogram/centimeter².
e. Water Crossing.
1) Refer to Regulatory Requirements and Environmental Protection and
Preservation
f. Foreign Utility Crossing
g. Miscellaneous foreign Structure Crossing
3. Aboveground Gas Fuel Pipes and Fittings
a. Piping shall be fabricated to transport gas fuels under a pressurized system. Refer
to Standard Specifications for:
1) High Pressure Piping.
2) Low Pressure Piping.
flanges, Valves, pipe supports, hangers and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the
design the manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular
production components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106, black, Grade B, seamless or electric
resistance welded (ERW), Schedule 80 or 40 as a minimum.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 66
prescribed by ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.8.
2) Fittings
3) Flanges
4) Valves
(a) Ball Valve
(b) Gate Valve
5) Specialties
(a) This specification covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(6) Pipe Supports and Hangers
(7) Expansion Joints
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing.
1) Under the road crossing
2) Over the road crossing
1) This specification shall apply to the design and construction of pipelines
carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances and casings containing
wires, cables and carrier pipes across and along railroad property and
facilities.
(1) Use of Pipe Bridge

Rev. 1 5.7 - 67

(i) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipeline crossings
(ii) Pressure pipelines that are located within 8 m of the centerline
of any track shall be cased.
(i) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way shall be
than 45 degrees.
bridge, buildings, or other important structure, except in special
cases, and then by special design, as approved by the Chief
Engineer of the RCJ.
timber.
(ii) Pipelines laid longitudinally on railroad right-of-way, 15 m or
less from centerline track shall be buried not less than 2 m from
ground surface to top of pipe. Where the pipeline is laid more
than 15 m from centerline of track, the minimum cover shall be
at least 1.5m
to the requirements of this specification.
by the RCJ.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 68

(7) Insulation
right-of-way.
with RCJ or industry standards that mandate leak detection
automatic shutoff, leak monitoring, sacrificial anodes,
e. Water Crossing.
Preservation
D. Liquid Fuel Distribution:
exposure, temperature and pressure.
1) Refer to Chapter 5 - Design Guidelines
Corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or painting on
ordinary material shall be specified.
1) Refer to requirements for Underground Piping Materials

Rev. 1 5.7 - 69

f. All pipes aboveground and placed underground shall have external protection by
using epoxy coating, or tape wrap. In addition, an impressed current or galvanic
cathodic protection system shall be considered in the design of underground piping.
1) Refer to requirements for High Performance Coatings
2) Refer to requirements for Cathodic Process Corrosion Protection.
the latest issue of ASTM Standards Specifications
h. Pipe diameter selection. Pipe diameter shall be selected to meet the following
design criteria.
1) Gas velocity.
2) Pressure drop providing required downstream gas pressure as specified by
the end use.
2. Underground Liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings
to requirements for:
flanges, Valves and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the design the
manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular production
components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106, black, Grade B, seamless or electric
prescribed by ASME B31.1 B31.4/.31.8 or MSS SP58
2) Fittings
3) Flanges
4) Valves
(a) Ball Valve
(b) Gate Valve

Rev. 1 5.7 - 70
5) Specialties
(a) This Section covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing.
1) This specification shall apply to the design and construction of pipelines
carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances and along railroad
property and facilities.
(i) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipeline crossings
(ii) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipelines within 8 m of
the centerline of any track crossings carrying liquid or gaseous
substances
than 45 degrees.
cases, and then by special design, as approved by the Chief
Engineer of the RCJ.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 71

timber.
by the RCJ.
(6) Insulation
right-of-way.
with current federal or state regulations that mandate leak
detection automatic shutoff, leak monitoring, sacrificial anodes,

Rev. 1 5.7 - 72

e. Water Crossing.
Preservation
1) Refer to Regulatory Requirements.
3. Aboveground liquid Fuel Pipes and Fittings
to requirements for:
flanges, Valves, pipe supports, hangers and gas fuel specialties. Incorporate in the
design the manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular
production components, parts and assemblies as detailed in manufacturer’s material
specifications.
1) Steel Pipe
(a) Pipe shall conform to ASTM A 106, Grade B, seamless or electric
prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS SP58
2) Fittings
3) Flanges
4) Valves
5) (a) Ball Valve
6) (b) Gate Valve
7) Specialties - Refer to Section 3352xx

Rev. 1 5.7 - 73
(a) This Section covers the furnishing, installation and testing of piping
(3) Valve Box
(4) Pipe Casing
(6) Hangers and Supports
(ii) Galvanic Anode
c. Road Crossing
1) This engineering design guideline shall apply to the design and construction
of pipelines carrying flammable fuels, non-flammable substances, liquid or
gaseous substances across and along railroad property and facilities.
(1) Use of Pipe Bridge
(i) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipeline crossings.
(ii) A casing pipe shall be required for all pipelines within 8 m of
the centerline of any track crossings.
than 45 degrees.
cases, and then by special design, as approved by the Director
of Engineering of the RCJ.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 74

timber.
by the RCJ.
a minimum depth of 2 feet below finished grade and completely
(7) Insulation
right-of-way.
with US CFR 49t Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by
Pipeline which mandates leak detection automatic shutoff, leak
monitoring, sacrificial anodes, impressed current rectifiers,
and/or exterior coatings to minimize corrosion and prevent
petroleum releases.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 75
(10) Structural design of the crossing need to follow chapter 5.2 of the
GEM
e. Water Crossing.
Preservation
Preservation
Preservation and Section 5.2 of the GEM
E. Storage Tanks:
a. This Subsection defines the minimum mandatory requirements governing the
selection and mechanical design of atmospheric and low-pressure storage tanks in
accordance with API STD 650, Latest Edition or API STD 620, Latest Edition. This
standard also defines the requirements for horizontal storage tanks in low-pressure
service. All materials used shall meet the requirements of the Contract.
1) Design Criteria for pressure vessels refer to SAES-D-001
2) Design Criteria for atmospheric and low pressure tanks refer to SAES-D-100
3) Design Criteria for small tanks refer to SAES-D-001 and API 620 and 650.
compatibility, exposure, temperature and pressure.
1) The materials of construction for pressure and non-pressure components
shall be based on the design temperature, minimum design metal
temperature and service in accordance with 32-SAMSS-004, Table 1,
Acceptable Materials for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steels.
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor may propose alternative materials to those
specified in 32-SAMSS-004, Table 1, at time of proposal, with prior approval
of RCJ. Alternative materials shall comply with all the requirements of the
applicable Code and this Subsection.
1) Refer to Section 3.5.0 - Environmental Protection and Preservation
1) Either corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or
painting on ordinary material shall be as specified in accordance with GPCS -
Painting and Coatings
e. All material shall also be selected in consideration of safety, the ease of shipment,
2. Underground Gas Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store gas fuels under a pressurized system.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 76
b. Design criteria shall take into consideration various materials and coatings.
Incorporate in the design foundations, ring walls, etc.
c. Wind and earthquake loads shall be determined by the vessel manufacturer.
d. Utilize foundations and supports to support systems under all conditions of
operation.
f. All tanks placed underground shall have external corrosion protection by using an
approved coating system.
the latest issue of ASTM Standards Specifications
3. Aboveground Gas Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store gas fuels under a pressurized or atmospheric
system
Incorporate in the design foundations, and ring walls.
c. Establish maximum wind and earthquake load ratings with consideration for
allowable stresses prescribed by API 650.
operation.
f. All tanks placed aboveground shall have external protection by using an approved
coating system.
h. Refer to requirements for Compressed Gas Storage Aboveground
4. Underground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store liquid fuels under a pressurized or atmospheric
system
Incorporate in the design foundations and ring walls.
operation.
f. All tanks placed underground shall have external protection by using an approved
coating system.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 77

h. Refer to requirements for Liquid Fuel Tanks Aboveground
5. Aboveground Liquid Fuel Storage Tanks
a. Tanks shall be fabricated to store gas fuels under a pressurized or atmospheric
system
Incorporate in the design foundations, ring walls, etc.
operation.
f. All tanks placed aboveground shall have external protection by using an approved
coating system.
h. Refer to requirements for Liquid Fuel Tanks Aboveground.
6. Tank Appurtenances
a. Refer to SAES-D-100, Section 9
b. Internal Floating Roof
c. 1) Primary and secondary seals shall be included in the design. Seals shall also
apply to column supports, gauge poles, ladders and all penetrations of the roof.
d. External Floating Roof
e. 1) Primary and secondary seals shall be included in the design. Seals shall also
apply to gauge poles and all penetrations of the roof
f. Fixed Roofs
g. Floating Suction Lines
h. Clips and Attachments
i. 1) Ladders
j. 2) Platforms
k. 3) Stairs
l. Nozzles, Man ways and Gaskets
m. 1) Pump Suction Nozzle
n. 2) Fill Nozzle
o. 3) Water Draw Off Connections
p. 4) Cleanout Fittings

Rev. 1 5.7 - 78
q. Vents
r. Mixers
s. Level Instrumentation
t. Roof Drain
u. Lighting
v. Grounding
w. Fire Protection System
x. Vessel Supports
1) Support for Vertical Vessels
2) Support for Horizontal Vessels
7. Under Tank Leak Detection and Sub-Grade Protection.
8. Painting and Coating.
9. Insulation.
10. Lighting.
11. Grounding.
12. Cathodic Protection.
a. Refer to SAES-D-100, Section 14 and API 651
13. Foundations.
F. Pumps:
1. Transfer Pumps
2. Submersible Fuel Pumps
a. This Section specifies common requirements for the system design and installation
of Submersible Liquid Fuel Pumps.
b. All material shall be selected in consideration of the environmental conditions.
c. Basis of Design Product: To satisfy demands to meet temperature and viscosity of
all well environments during the delivery of fuel from a storage vessel to a receiving
vessel.
d. Basis of Design Product: To satisfy demands to meet temperature and viscosity of
all well environments during the delivery of fuel from a storage vessel to a receiving
vessel.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 79
5.7.6 ELECTRICAL
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Section covers the RCJ’s Distribution System, which includes distribution to,
but not limited to the following: Residential, Commercial and Institutional, Healthcare
Facilities, Light Industrial Facilities large and Heavy Industrial Plants. Large and
heavy industrial plants in Jubail Industrial City and Ras Al-Khair Industrial City shall
be supplied directly by the utility high voltage substations and interface/coordination
requirements with the Saudi Electric Company - Eastern Operating Area (SEC-
EOA).
b. It is essential to follow certain safe procedures for installation of electrical wiring
system throughout the project.
2. Applicability
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.2 for electrical applicability.
b. All buried and aboveground electrical infrastructure shall be shown on civil site
plans.
1) Refer to 5.7.0 Utilities.
2) This requirement includes electrical lines, transformers, generators, etc.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.3 for electrical definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.4 for electrical abbreviations.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.5 for electrical general requirements.
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.6 for environmental conditions which shall be utilized for
design of electrical systems.
7. Codes
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.7 for a listing of the applicable Codes.
8. Standards
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.8 for a listing of the applicable standards.
9. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1 for Electrical.
10. Approvals
a. The RCJ shall review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications,
reference Section 1.1.0 Introduction.
B. Commissioning
1. References

Rev. 1 5.7 - 80

C. Primary Electrical Distribution
1. General
a. For the purposes of this Guiding Engineering Manual, the primary power distribution
shall include all medium voltage components.
2. Community Area Primary Distribution System
a. The distribution voltage to power the community area shall be determined by Saudi
Electric Company (SEC-EOA) substations in Jubail Industrial City.
3. Industrial Area Primary Distribution System
a. Primary Industries Power Sources
1) The distribution voltage to power the industrial area shall be determined by
Saudi Electric Company (SEC-EOA) substations in Jubail Industrial City.
2) Such industries provide their own local substations to supply the loads
throughout the industrial development in their boundary lot.
3) Primary industries are not within the scope of this chapter. This chapter
applies only to secondary industries, support industries and infrastructure
loads in the industrial area such as Sewage Plants, Materials Handling,
Maintenance Facilities, Street Lighting, etc.
b. Secondary Industries, Support Industries and Infrastructure Power Sources
1) Power to secondary industries, support industries, and infrastructure loads
are supplied at 115 kV, 34.5 kV, or 33 kV from strategically located RCJ
substations fed from SEC-EOA substation.
2) The principal loads shall be supplied from loop feeders extending from the
switching stations or substations. These feeders are connected to a pair of
buses at each switching station. The user receiving these feeders has the
option of using either manual or automatic load transfer.
3) General utility loads such as Street Lighting, Traffic Signals, Lift stations, and
power Service shall be supplied from loop feeders or substation.
(a) This service consists of two 34.5 kV, 33 kV, or 13.8 kV 3-phase, 4-wire,
60Hz feeders.
c. Electrical Interface
1) The electrical interfaces at the various infrastructure loads shall be at the
kWHR metering.
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface
a. General
1) This Section classifies power services, metering and interface to consumers
according to types of consumers and their supply requirements.
2) The classification of power services and associated metering configuration
are determined by SEC-EOA Standards.
(a) Revenue metering for installations with voltages up to 34.5 kV shall be in
accordance SEC-EOA Metering and Installation Standard (MIS) SDS-5.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 81
All electrical services shall be designed in accordance with this and other
applicable SEC-EOA Standards.
(b) Revenue metering for installations at transmission voltages (69 kV and
above) shall be coordinated with SEC-EOA Transmission Department.
3) Metering for services with voltages up to and including 34.5 kV are classified
into one of three designations which include:
(a) Whole current metering - 150 A and below.
(b) Low voltage CT metering - above 150 A.
(c) Medium voltage - bulk metering.
4) Provision for fiber optic for digital review kWHR Meters shall be provided in
accordance with SEC-EOA requirements.
5) These service classifications shall apply to all new services. Certain existing
services and metering installations do not conform to these Standards. Such
existing installations shall be permitted to continue, but all new installations
shall be required to meet these Standards.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall obtain the approval and stamping of the
drawings from the SEC-EOA before submission of the IFC drawings.
7) Arrangements, other than those described in this Section and in SEC SDS-5,
shall be approved by the Supplier in advance.
D. Secondary Electrical Utility
1. General
a. The secondary electrical utility is identified as the electrical distribution downstream
of the high voltage distribution system. For the purposes of the Guiding Engineering
Manual, the secondary electrical utility covers the systems 34.5 kV and below.
2. Community Area Secondary Distribution System
a. The District and distribution substations step down the voltage from 115 kV to 13.8
kV, which is distributed throughout the various zones and sectors of the district.
b. 13.8 kV Distribution Network
1) All 13.8 kV distribution feeders are routed underground. The feeders are
direct buried or reinforced concrete encased PVC or in accordance with SEC-
EOA Standard SDCS-02 under road crossings.
2) There are 3 types of 13.8 kV circuits as follows:
(a) Radial feeders.
(b) Loop feeders.
(c) Lateral feeders.
3) Radial feeders originate at a 13.8 kV bus and distribute radially to the load
served.
4) Loop feeders are fed from two different 13.8 kV buses at the substation and
distribute to form a primary loop arrangement. This loop is opened at a
midpoint of the feeder to prevent interconnection between the two 13.8 kV

Rev. 1 5.7 - 82
buses but provides redundancy of supply shall there be a problem with one of
the substation buses.
5) Lateral feeders are tapped from the loop feeders through pad mounted
switches which include the Ring Main Units (RMU) for the loop feeder and
vacuum interrupter switches to supply the electrical loads. The pad mounted
switchgear is installed at strategic locations to serve discrete Residential,
Commercial and Institutional loads.
6) Distribution feeders shall be installed in accordance with the latest SEC-EOA
Standard SDPS.
c. Residential Loads
1) The low voltage supply to residential unit is supplied from 13.8 kV to 400/230
V substations located throughout the housing scheme. Each substation is
supplied by lateral feeders connected to the primary loop arrangement. The
lateral feeders in combination with the primary loops ensure that each
transformer in the substation has at least two independent electrical paths
back to the district substation.
2) Four sizes of residential pad mounted transformers are used in the
community area. Those are 300 kVA, 500 kVA, 1000 kVA, and 1500 kVA.
3) The size and number of transformers is dependent on the number of
residential units served. Load calculations shall be completed in accordance
with the latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS to determine the size of each
transformer used.
d. Commercial, Government, Institutional, and other Facility Loads
1) Commercial, Government and Institutional facilities shall receive low voltage
or medium voltage services as required to support the loads. Small facilities
may be provided with low voltage supply while larger facilities may accept a
medium voltage service to accommodate the associated loads and desired
level of reliability.
2) Low Voltage Supply
(a) The low voltage supply to smaller commercial, government and
institutional buildings are supplied from 13.8 kV to 400/230 V substations
located adjacent to the building. Each substation is supplied by lateral
feeders connected to the primary loop arrangement. The lateral feeders
in combination with the primary loops ensure that each transformer in the
substation has at least two independent electrical paths back to the
district substation.
(b) Four sizes of commercial, government and institutional pad mounted
transformers are used in the community area. Those are 300 kVA, 500
kVA, 1000 kVA and 1500 kVA.
(c) The size and number of transformers is dependent on the loads
associated with each building. Load calculations shall be completed in
accordance with the latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS to determine the
size of each transformer used.
3) Medium Voltage Supply

Rev. 1 5.7 - 83
(a) Larger commercial, government and institutional facilities have loads

which justify the use of dedicated 13.8 kV voltage feeders for the district
substation to the facility.
(b) Where all of the service equipment (medium voltage switchgear and
transformers) is located in public areas and is accessible to the utility
company, all of the service equipment shall be operated and maintained
by SEC-EOA. With this situation, multiple 13.8 kV feeders shall supply
the larger commercial, government and institutional facilities and may be
connected in a loop feeder arrangement inside the facility.
(c) Where the service equipment is not accessible to the local utility
company, the service equipment shall be furnished and installed by the
developer of the facility. With this situation, multiple 13.8 kV feeders
shall supply the larger commercial and institutional facilities and shall
terminate at SEC-EOA Inset located at the property line. From this
interface point, the developer of the facility shall provide distribution
switchgear to allow the 13.8 kV feeders to be extended throughout the
complex to supply the various electrical loads. These feeders shall be
installed in a loop arrangement and shall supply the low voltage service
equipment as described for the smaller commercial, government and
institutional buildings described above.
(d) The size and number of feeders and transformers is dependent on the
loads associated with each building. Load calculations shall be
completed in accordance with the latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS to
determine the quantity of feeders and the sizes of each transformer
used.
(e) Infrastructure Loads
(1) Smaller, general loads such as Street Lighting, Traffic Signals,
Emergency Phones, Bus Stops, Utility Pumping Stations, and
Service Stations shall be supplied from a loop feeder.
(2) This service consists of two 13.8 kV, 3-phase, 3-wire feeders,
extending from each switching station, and routed in ducts or direct
burial throughout the Community and Industrial Areas.
(3) Street lighting transformers shall supply lighting distribution panels
either directly or via low voltage distribution pillars or main
distribution panel as per SEC-EOA.
(4) Street lighting pillars are comprised of lighting distribution
panelboards with switched and un-switched buses.
3. Industrial Area Secondary Distribution System
a. Primary Industries Power Sources
1) The distribution voltage to power the primary industries area shall be
determined by Saudi Electric Company (SEC-EOA) substations in Jubail
Industrial City.
b. Secondary Industries, Support Industries and Infrastructure Power Sources
1) Power to secondary industries, support industries, and infrastructure loads
are typically supplied at 115 kV, 34.5 kV, or 33 kV from strategically located
RCJ substations fed from SEC-EOA. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7.C.3.b. above.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 84
2) Where the most convenient power source to the secondary and support
facilities in the industrial area is the 13.8 kV electrical distribution system, it
may be permissible to supply these loads from the 13.8 kV system. The use
of the 13.8 kV source shall be discussed with the RCJ to obtain approval prior
to proceeding with this option.
3) The principal loads shall be supplied from loop feeders extending from the
switching stations or substations. These feeders are connected to a pair of
buses at each switching station. The user receiving these feeders has the
option of using either manual or automatic load transfer.
4) Smaller, general loads such as Street Lighting, Traffic Signals, Emergency
Phones, Bus Stops, Utility Pumping Stations, and Service Stations shall be
supplied from a loop feeder.
(a) With the RCJ’s approval, this service consists of two 13.8 kV, 3-phase,
3-wire feeders, extending from each switching station, and routed in
ducts or direct burial throughout the Industrial Area.
4. Service Classification, Metering and Interface
a. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7.C.4 Service Classification, Metering and Interface.
E. Design Criteria
1. General
a. The electrical source for a facility is dependent on the type of facility, estimated
electrical loads, and proximity of the available electric source.
b. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with the RCJ and SEC-EOA to
review the characteristics of the facility to determine the appropriate electrical source
for each facility.
c. The electrical service for each facility shall consider the following criteria in
establishing the appropriate source and configuration:
1) The voltage source selection is determined by the RCJ in concert with SEC-
EOA and is dependent on the magnitude of the load and availability in the
region of the development.
2) The transformer size and location is determined from the load calculations
and the size shall be selected in accordance with all applicable SEC-EOA
Standards.
3) Feeder size shall be determined from calculations in accordance with the
latest SEC-EOA Standard SDPS and the routing shall be determined from the
physical conditions at the site for the new facility. The feeders shall be routed
underground and either direct buried or encased in a ductbank depending on
the final coordinated routing. Refer to Subsections 5.7.7.G Ductbanks and
5.7.7.H Direct Buried Installations for additional guidance on the installation
requirements for service feeders.
4) Metering configuration and location is dictated by the SEC-EOA Distribution
Planning Standards and is determined by the source voltage and magnitude
of the electrical load. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7.C.4 Service Classification,
Metering and Interface for additional guidance on the metering for a facility.
5) Design criteria and calculations shall be referred to Subsection 5.5.1 Electrical
for the proper selection of electrical items.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 85
F. Manholes and Handholes

1. Application
a. Concrete manholes and handholes shall be provided for underground electrical
cables to facilitate distribution throughout the city. Manholes shall be configured to
facilitate the routing of the cables. Manholes and handholes for medium voltage and
low voltage systems shall conform to the latest SEC-EOA Standards and their
structural design shall follow recommendation from chapter 5.2 of the GEM.
b. Manholes shall be provided at the following locations:
1) At each change in direction which exceeds 45 degrees.
2) At each service tap location.
3) At 90 m intervals along the route of the electrical cables.
2. Construction
a. Manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the standard details and
specifications.
b. Handholes shall be constructed in accordance with the standard details and
specifications.
G. Ductbanks and Sleeves
1. Application
a. The majority of the electrical distribution cables shall be direct buried except where
cables cross under main roads, roads under construction, concrete slabs or paved
areas that would require extensive or impractical excavation to replace; they shall be
run in a concrete encased ductbank. Before installation of cables, the raceways
and/or concrete encased ductbank shall be cleaned by mandrel of slightly smaller
diameter than the raceway followed by brush of slightly larger diameter than
raceway to remove sand, pebbles etc. A spare capacity of 50% shall be provided for
cable entry in the building. Concrete encased ductbanks for medium voltage and low
voltage systems shall conform to the latest SEC-EOA Standards.
2. Construction and Installation
a. Ductbanks shall be concrete encased with steel reinforcement or in accordance with
SEC-EOA Standard for medium voltage and low voltage cables based on the
interface point.
b. Ductbank routed under paved areas which are not subjected to traffic shall be
concrete encased without steel reinforcing.
c. End bells or protective bushing shall be provided at the end of the raceways in the
ductbank to protect the cables from physical damages. These end bells shall be
sealed by proper sealant to prevent foreign material from entering the raceways.
d. Where cables are run in conduits or ductbanks, the following procedures shall apply:
1) DC and telecommunications wires and cables shall always be run in separate
conduits from AC wires and cables to prevent AC induction in the DC circuits.
2) When installing cables in multiple ductbanks, the design shall be such as to
facilitate installing cables of a different voltage level on opposite walls of
manholes. Where it is necessary to install cables of different voltage levels on
the same wall of a manhole, the lower voltage cables shall be on top.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 86
3) Power and telecommunication cables shall be run in separate ductbanks, with

separate manholes/handholes. Separation shall be adequate to prevent
interference on communication circuits.
3. Sleeves for Road Crossing via Horizontal Directional Drilling
H. Direct Buried Installations
1. Application
a. Electrical cables installed outside of buildings shall be direct buried to the extent
possible. The cable shall be routed preferably in unpaved areas.
2. Routing and Clearances
a. The routing selected for installation of underground cable shall be such that it shall
avoid all obstructions above as well as below the ground for easy access to the
cables for future maintenance.
b. Cables shall be installed to maintain minimum clearance of 500 mm vertically and
1000 mm horizontally from other underground utilities such as sewer lines and gas
or telephone lines.
3. Trenching
a. Before digging trenches for laying of electrical cables, investigation shall be
completed with manual excavation to ensure that no underground utilities exist in the
path of cable trench.
b. Trenches for medium voltage and low voltage cable installation shall be in
accordance with the RCJ and/or SEC-EOA Standards depending on the interface
point.
1) Trenches on the utility side of the interface point shall be in accordance with
SEC-EOA Standard SDCS-02.
2) Trenches on the customer side of the interface point shall be in accordance
with the RCJ standard details as referenced in Subsection 5.7.7.H.7.
c. Trenches shall be dug up to the depth of 900 to 1200 mm below the grade level as
required for the specific installations. The wall of the trenches shall be vertical so
that minimum of shoulder surface is disturbed.
d. Trenches for low voltage cables shall be filled with a 75 mm thick bedding of smooth
sand containing no mineral. The bedding thickness for medium voltage cables shall
be 150 mm. This sand shall be compacted approximately to the density of
surrounding soil.
e. After laying the low voltage cables, they shall be covered with 100 mm thick layer of
smooth sand compacted approximately to the density of surrounding soil. For
medium voltage cables, the thickness of layer shall be 150 mm. This layer of sand
shall be covered by concrete tiles to protect the cables from damage.
f. The tiles shall be covered by 200 mm thick layer of sand above which a PVC coated
wire mesh and/or warning tape made of PVC shall be placed as follows:
1) 69 kV or 115 kV direct buried power cable: The wire mesh shall be placed
above the first layer of sand and then the warning tape shall be placed above
the second layer of sand.
2) 0.6/1 kV, 13.8 kV, 33 kV, or 34.5 kV direct buried power cable: The warning
tape shall be placed above the first layer of sand.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 87
3) A caution warning such as “CAUTION BURIED CABLE BELOW” shall be

written on tape both in English and Arabic.
g. Remaining portion of the trench shall be filled with excavated soil and grade shall be
finished properly to obtain smooth surface same as what it was before excavation.
4. Cable Markers
a. The routing of the cables shall be marked by cable markers made of 400 x 300 mm
and 100 mm thick concrete slabs or in accordance with SEC-EOA Standard
extending approximately 25 mm above the finished surface. These cable markers
shall be placed approximately at a distance of 60 m along the route of the cable,
with additional markers at each change of direction of cable run and at each splice.
b. Cable markers shall be installed immediately above the cable. Specify that the
Contractor impress the appropriate word indicating the type of the cable and
directional arrows on each cable marking slabs.
5. Cable Spacing
a. Cables for 600 V and lower shall have horizontal center to center spacing of 150 mm
plus the diameter of the largest cable adjacent to each space. Where, 150 mm
spacing is not economical or possible, the minimum center-to-center spacing
between adjacent load carrying cables shall not be less than 75 mm plus the
diameter of the larger cable. Control and other cables intended to carry little or no
continuous load may have less than this 75 mm spacing in congested areas, if
greater spacing is not economically justified.
b. Cables to be operated above 600 V shall be spaced 300 mm center to center plus
the diameter of the largest cable. Where the 300 mm spacing is not economical or
possible, the minimum center to center spacing between adjacent load carrying
cables shall not be less than 150 mm plus the diameter of the larger cable.
6. Trenching
a. The minimum cover requirements for underground installation of cables and
conduits are given in Table 5.7.6.A. These are more restrictive than the IEC
recommendations.
TABLE 5.7.6.A: TRENCHING REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL CABLES
Minimum Burial Depth (mm)

Voltage Type of Construction
IEC Recommended
Direct Buried Cables 1000 1200
Direct Buried with Mechanical
600 750
0 - 1 kV Cover
Rigid Steel or Non-Metallic
450 600
Conduit Approved for Direct Burial
Over 1 kV 450 600
Cover
to 22 kV
450 600

Rev. 1 5.7 - 88
Minimum Burial Depth (mm)

Voltage Type of Construction
IEC Recommended
Over 22 kV 750 1000
Cover
to 66 kV
750 1000

Rev. 1 5.7 - 89
SUBSECTION 5.7.7 COMMUNICATIONS
5.7.7 COMMUNICATIONS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection covers the RCJ’s Distribution System, which includes distribution to
Residential, Commercial and Institutional, Light Industrial Facilities large and Heavy
Industrial Plants.
b. It is essential to follow certain safe procedures for installation of wiring system
throughout the project to maintain uniformity for all the projects of the RCJ. This
helps in preparing uniform operating and maintenance procedures for staff of the
RCJ involved in maintenance and construction.
2. Applicability
a. This Section applies to communication facilities including but not limited to:
1) Communications Underground Ductbank
2) Joint Boxes (Manholes and Handholes)
3) Exterior Above Ground Communication Pedestals
b. Existing and proposed communications utilities shall be included on civil site plans.
3. Definitions
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.A.2 for electrical definitions.
4. Abbreviations
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.A.3 for electrical abbreviations.
5. Standards
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.A.4 for a listing of the applicable Standards.
6. Related Sections
a. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2 for Telecommunications.
7. Approvals
reference Subsection 1.1.
B. Commissioning
1. References
b. Inspection of the Contractor’s work shall be carried out and signed records of test
shall be prepared and submitted for review by the Royal Commission.
c. After a cable splice is completed and before the splice closure is filled, each pair of
the cable shall be checked for opens, shorts, crosses, reversals, transpositions,
splits and grounds. Continuity of both pairs and shield shall be confirmed. If any
faults are found, that are not listed as manufacturing defects, the cable joint shall be
checked and the fault shall be corrected.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 90
d. On completion of the installation of an entire length of cable, as shown on the

Contractor Drawings, the appropriate tests shall be conducted and recorded. The
test record shall form part of the cable hand-over information.
e. Random sample tests may be carried out by the Royal Commission.
f. The tensile strength and elongation shall be tested as described in ISO 527.
g. The test results shall be recorded and signed by the testing technician and
forwarded to the Royal Commission with the request for Initial Acceptance.
h. Initial Acceptance shall only be granted following a satisfactory inspection of the
works by the Royal Commission and correction of any defects noted during both the
testing and inspection of the final works.
C. Communications Utility
1. Fiber Optic Cables
a. General
1) As a part of each telecommunications work order or project, detail schematic
drawings shall be prepared for each fiber optic span or cable route, showing
the following information:
(a) Cable manufacturer
(b) Vendor number
(c) Cable size (number of fibers)
(d) Cable type (filled or air core)
(e) Cable make-up (dielectric or non-dielectric)
(f) Type of fiber (multimode or single-mode)
(g) Dispersion shifted or non-dispersion shifted
(h) Transmission characteristics (dB loss/km at given wavelength and for
multimode bandwidth/km)
(i) Dispersion specification in ps/(nm.km)
(j) Fiber packaging (single fiber/loose buffer; multiple fiber/loose buffer; tight
buffer, channel/groove or ribbon type, and color code)
(k) Splice-to-splice cable lengths
(l) Location of marker posts and signs
(m) Location of splice positions in manholes
(n) Duct/subduct allocations
(o) Outdoor/indoor cable terminating points
(p) Optical fiber distribution frame allocation
2) For an individual link, the cable shall be the same type to ensure the same
performance characteristics. This is to ensure compatibility in terms of the
fiber geometrical parameters, attenuation and dispersion.
b. Exterior Fiber Optic Cables
1) Basic Design Requirements

Rev. 1 5.7 - 91
(a) The maximum attenuation of each fiber within a cable, when normalized
to a length of 1 km, shall be:
(1) 0.5 dB/km or less at wavelength = 1,300 nm.
(2) 0.3 dB/km or less at wavelength = 1,550 nm.
(b) Fiber optic cables may include an integral metallic armor if required for
direct buried applications.
(c) Underground fiber optic cables shall be all dielectric (non-metallic).
(d) The minimum bending radius for fiber optic cable is: 1) Ten times the
cable diameter when the cable is not under tension. 2) Twenty times the
cable diameter when the cable is under tension.
(e) The pulling tension on fiber optic cables shall not exceed 2.57 kN unless
greater pulling tensions are specifically approved by the cable
manufacturer. When fiber optic cable is pulled, it shall be pulled in a
straight line. The cable shall never be bent or wrapped around the hand
or any other object as it is pulled. Only vendor approved equipment or
methods shall be used.
(f) Fiber optic cable design and construction lengths shall allow sufficient
length for:
(1) Racking in pull-through manholes.
(2) Slack at splice points minimum of 3 m.
(3) Central office and other building cabling.
(4) Slack for future splice or drop points minimum of 3 m.
(g) To keep future new cable openings to a minimum, underground fiber
optic cable splices shall be located at points where future branch splices
will be required, in so far as it is practical to do so. Underground fiber
optic cables shall not be cut for splicing convenience.
(h) CAUTION: All fusion splices shall be made outside manholes and at
least 3 m away from the manhole opening. Mechanical splices may be
made either in or out of manholes.
2) Subduct Engineering
(a) A 100 mm diameter underground conduit that is being set up for fiber
optic cable placement shall contain:
(1) Three subducts, two nos. 37.5 mm - inside diameter - and one no.
25 mm - inside diameter, OR
(2) Four nos. 25 mm - inside diameter - subducts.
(3) Subducts shall have pull rope or pulling tape inside.
(b) If a subduct is to be direct buried, it shall be rigid PVC or heavy-walled
polyethylene.
(c) The 3 subducts, which are placed inside a 100 mm (4 in.) conduit, shall
be different colors. The colors shall be orange, green, and white.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 92
D. Design Criteria
1. Link Loss Budget Requirements
a. During the design stage a link loss budget shall be prepared and included with the
project proposal and design packages. The link loss budget shall include:
1) Total fiber attenuation (loss)
2) Splice loss (including pigtail splices, if pigtails are used)
3) Connector loss
4) Wave Division Multiplex (WDM) losses, if used
5) A margin for light source aging as per manufacturer's specification
6) Link loss margin of 3 dB minimum for restoration splices
b. The calculated dB loss cannot exceed the operating range of the terminal equipment
that will be installed. Measured end-to-end loss shall measure less than the
calculated loss. Fibers that measure a higher loss than the link loss budget will not
be accepted.
E. Manholes and Handholes
1. Racking
a. On completion of pulling-in, the cables shall be properly set on bearers around the
jointing chamber walls, in all jointing chambers. Proper racking is defined as leaving
sufficient cable in a jointing chamber so that a new splice may be made without
adding additional cable.
b. Cables to be jointed shall be placed on bearers of the minimum length to adequately
support the cable as delineated below:
1) The bearer closest to the duct at both ends shall be slotted to accept a
restrainer strap.
2) The cable shall be restrained on the bearers so that when the splice case is
placed either:
(a) The cable is no more than 5 mm from the vertical rack; OR
(b) The splice case is at least 25 mm but not more than 75 mm from the wall
of the jointing chamber.
(c) Sufficient length of the cable shall be placed such that after restraining,
the jointing may be done in the bay between the vertical racks.
c. Restraining of the cable shall be accomplished in such a manner as to avoid
possible injury to the cable sheath.
d. Prior to commissioning tests, the Contractor shall securely attach a tag, composed
of either lead or durable plastic, to each cable entering or leaving the jointing
chamber:
1) The proper code letter, designating the exchange from which the cable
serves.
2) The cable number.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 93
3) The complete pair count contained within the sheath. At junction or taper
points a tag bearing the above information shall be affixed to each cable
entering and leaving the splice closure.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 94
SUBSECTION 5.7.8 HYDRONIC COOLING
5.7.8 HYDRONIC COOLING
A. General
1. Scope
a. This subsection criteria addresses design of systems and equipment utilized for
hydronic cooling utility systems.
b. These criteria provide mandatory, minimally acceptable requirements for the Royal
Commission new and retrofit projects.
c. These criteria provide the basis on which the hydronic cooling and heating utility
systems and services shall be programmed, designed and installed.
d. These criteria provide planning, design, construction, sustainment, restoration, and
modernization criteria for hydronic heating and cooling utility systems.
e. This document contains policy and technical criteria to be used in the programming,
design and documentation of the RCJ projects.
f. The provisions of this document are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative
systems, methods or devices not specifically prescribed by this document, provided
the RCJ has approved such alternatives.
g. Project conditions may dictate the need for design that exceeds these minimum
requirements.
h. Any conflict between these criteria and other Division 230000 Specifications shall be
resolved at the discretion of the RCJ.
2. Introduction
a. This Section addresses hydronic heating and cooling.
3. Applicability
a. Existing and proposed hydronic heating and cooling utilities shall be included on civil
site plans.
4. Definitions
a. For General definitions refer to Section 2.2.
5. Abbreviations
a. Abbreviations
Engineers
5) IEC : International Electric Code
7) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings
Industry
8) NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau

Rev. 1 5.7 - 95

11) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
12) UMC: Uniform Mechanical Code
a. Code Authority
1) SBC Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements
3) American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE/SEI)
4) ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other structures
5) Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP STC01015-17 Structural Design Criteria
b. Associations
Engineers
c. Standards
Engineers
B. Commissioning
1. Define in Part 3 of project specifications.
C. Materials
1. Materials Selection
b. All materials used shall be selected to meet applicable system requirements
(temperature, pressure, etc.).
d. In selecting material, special attention shall be given to corrosion resistance. Either
corrosion resistant material or corrosion resistant plating, coating or painting on
ordinary material shall be as specified in accordance with Subsection 5.2.1.H,
Corrosion Control.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 96
f. Due to high ground water aggressiveness, all pipes placed underground shall have
external protection by using epoxy coating, or tape wrap.
2. Equipment Selection
a. Energy Efficiency
1) The Royal Commission is committed to energy efficient design within the limit
of budget constraints and within the bounds of good practice.
2) Energy efficiency can be achieved through use of efficient equipment and
effective computer-based control.
3) All equipment shall be selected to meet the requirements of ASHRAE Std.
90.1.
b. Life-Cycle Cost Analysis
1) Equipment shall not be selected with the lowest first cost, but based on Life-
cycle cost analysis, an analytical method that calculates costs over the
“useful” or anticipated life of equipment.
2) Equipment shall be selected to meet environmental conditions requirements.
Special provisions shall be included for equipment installed outdoors.
3) Due to high ground water table, special consideration shall be given to the
physical location of electric motor drives for pumps and valves, in order to
protect them from possible flooding. Consideration shall be given to using
vertical assemblies with drive motors mounted on top.
3. Materials and Equipment Engineering
a. Material and Equipment Qualifications
1) All materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar
material, design and workmanship.
2) Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial
use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications
of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
3) Products having less than a 2-year field service record shall be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours,
exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.
b. Service Support
1) All equipment items shall be supported by service organizations.
2) Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support
of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications.
3) These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the Contract.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 97
4) The spare parts shall be guaranteed after the warranty period.

c. Certification of Compliance
1) The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for all materials and
equipment that shall be permanently incorporated into the work.
2) Certificates shall also be required for all safety related items. No payment
shall be made for any item until the required certificates have been received.
3) The certificate shall show the following:
(a) Date of certification.
(b) Description of material supplied.
(c) Product trade name.
(d) Name of manufacturer and supplier.
(e) Name of the Contractor to whom the material is supplied.
(f) Project name and number to which the material is consigned.
(g) Contract item number and Contract item name.
(h) A statement that the material or assemblies provided fully meets the
requirements of the pertinent Contract Specification.
(i) Stamp and signature of a person having legal authority to bind the
originator of the certificate.
4) Storage and Handling of Materials and Equipment
(a) Materials and equipment shall be stored, handled and transported to
preserve their quality and fitness for the work.
(b) Materials and equipment shall be stored to facilitate prompt inspection
and shall be subject to inspection and retesting before incorporation in
the work.
5) Unacceptable Materials and Equipment
(a) Materials and equipment not meeting the requirements of the Contract
shall be considered unacceptable and shall be rejected and removed
immediately from the project.
(b) If the Contractor fails to remove defective materials or equipment within
the time indicated by the RCJ in writing, the RCJ will remove the
materials at the Contractor's expense.
D. System Design
1. Redundancy
a. General
1) Because of cost control, redundancy is mandated only in the case of critical
systems and/or equipment.
2) When a system failure would result in unusually high repair costs or
replacement of process equipment, or when activities are disrupted that is
vital to an application, redundant systems or units are recommended.
b. Redundancy Requirements

Rev. 1 5.7 - 98
1) Regardless of the system redundancy requirements of the program

document, the design shall provide for redundancy in the following items of
mechanical equipment. There is nothing in this document that prevents any
equipment redundancy dictated by particular system requirements.
(a) Chillers and Boilers
(1) For critical applications, N+1 redundancy shall be provided for
chillers and boilers in central utility plants. Critical applications
shall be defined as hospitals, laboratories and other facilities where
loss of cooling could threaten the health of humans, research or
irreplaceable work or materials.
(i) If the utility plant serves critical and non-critical applications,
the chillers and boilers shall be arranged so that in the event of
a loss of a single boiler of chiller, service to no-critical
application may be curtailed to prevent a loss of capacity for
the critical applications. If this is not possible, the N+1
redundancy shall be provided for chillers and boilers.
(2) For non-critical applications, chillers and boilers shall be sized so
that 67% capacity may be maintained in the event of a loss of a
single chiller or boiler.
(b) Chilled Water Pumps
(1) In single chiller applications, a second, full sized pump/motor
assembly shall be designed.
(c) Primary Chilled Water Pumps
(1) In multiple chiller/dedicated pump applications, one spare primary
chilled water pump motor shall be specified.
(d) Secondary Chilled Water Pumps
(1) Unless 2 pumps are needed to handle design flow, a second,
standby secondary pump is required, with a dedicated VFD.
(2) In any case, loss of a single pump shall not result in more than a
25% reduction on flow.
(e) Condenser Water Pumps
(1) In single chiller/tower applications, a second condenser water
pump, full size shall be designed.
(f) Condensate Steam Return Units
(1) Duplex pumps with automatic alternators are required. Pumps shall
be size so that a single pump with can meet the flow requirement
with 33% run time. Condensate pumps shall be powered from a
normal/emergency source, if emergency power is provided as part
of the project.
(g) Primary Hot Water Pumps
(1) In single boiler applications, a second, full sized pump/motor
assembly shall be designed.
2. Space Requirements

Rev. 1 5.7 - 99
a. General
1) The mechanical design shall be cognizant of the necessity to provide for the
replacement of major equipment over the life of the building and shall insure
that provisions are made to remove and replace, without damage to the
structure, the largest and heaviest component that cannot be further broken
down.
2) Mechanical equipment rooms shall be designed with maintenance
requirements in mind.
3) All mechanical equipment rooms shall be a minimum of 3.7 m in height.
b. Accessibility
1) Equipment must be fully accessible to allow for proper servicing, including
adequate space to disassemble all pumps, motors and chillers.
2) Chillers shall be placed to permit pulling of tubes without interrupting the
operation of or moving other equipment.
3) The mechanical rooms shall have adequate doorways or areaways and
staging areas to permit the replacement and removal of equipment without
the need to demolish walls or relocate other equipment.
4) Sufficient service access space areas as noted by outlining manufacturer’s
recommendations and in compliance with applicable code requirements for
routine maintenance and removal of mechanical system components shall be
provided.
5) In multi-stories building and to facilitate equipment access, maintenance,
removal and replacement, a freight elevator stop can be provided to serve
floors housing heavy equipment.
6) Where stairs are required, they must allow for safe transport of equipment
and components. Ship’s ladders are not permitted for access and
maintenance of any equipment.
7) Catwalks, complete with railings, toe stops and stairways, shall be provided
for all equipment that cannot be maintained from floor level.
8) Where maintenance requires the lifting of heavy parts 45 kg or more, hoists
and hatchways shall be installed.
9) The arrangement shall consider the future removal and replacement of all
equipment.
c. Clearance
1) Horizontal Clearances
(a) Mechanical rooms shall be configured with clear circulation aisles and
adequate access to all equipment. Required clearance shall be in
accordance to manufacturer written instructions.
2) Vertical Clearances
(a) Mechanical equipment rooms shall have clear ceiling heights of not less
than 3.7 m or as per manufacturer recommendation, whichever is
greater.
3) Ceiling Clearances

Rev. 1 5.7 - 100
(a) Provide adequate clearance and access for building systems installed
between ceiling and structure above.
d. Location
1) General
(a) Mechanical rooms shall be normally located at or above grade level
because of high ground water. Special provisions for water proofing and
water removal must be provided for below grade mechanical rooms, and
approval must be obtained from the RCJ.
(b) Large central equipment shall be situated to facilitate its replacement.
2) Roof Mounted Equipment
(a) When roof mounted equipment is specified, they shall be considered and
coordinated in the roof structural early design phase.
(b) Provide clearance and access as per manufacturer recommendation.
(c) Access to roof-mounted equipment shall be by permanent stairs, not by
ship’s ladders.
(d) If a door is provided, it shall be of enough size to allow equipment
replacement.
(e) Air conditioning condensate lines shall be discharged to roof drains.
Dumping of water on roofs shall be avoided.
(f) Penetrations in the roof shall be per the roof’s manufacturer’s
recommendation.
3) Below Grade Equipment
(a) Below grade equipment shall be generally avoided.
(b) Below grade equipment requires vehicular ramp, special provision to
prevent rain flooding and additional ventilations, which have adverse
impact on cost control.
(c) Exception of submersible pumps installations.
e. Drain Provision
1) Mechanical rooms shall have floor drains in proximity to the equipment they
serve to reduce water streaks or drain lines extending into aisles.
2) Provide at least 1 floor drain for every 13 m² of each equipment room.
3) Locate drains away from walking areas, but not beneath equipment.
4) Slope floor to drain.
5) Provide vent.
6) Air handling units shall be drained considering air gap above the floor/area
drain.
7) Provide trap primer at floor drain.
8) Provide access for all required trap primers.
f. Ventilation

Rev. 1 5.7 - 101
1) Provide mechanical ventilation and exhaust in all equipment rooms in

accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15, ASHRAE Standard 62 and NFPA
90A.
g. Housekeeping Pads
1) Housekeeping pads shall be at least 152 mm wider on all sides than the
equipment they support and shall be 152 mm thick minimum.
E. Piping
1. Water Velocities in Piping
a. Water velocity in HVAC piping shall not exceed the values shown in TABLE 5.7.8.A
in order to limit noise levels.
TABLE 5.7.8.A: RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM WATER VELOCITY IN HVAC PIPING
SERVICE MAXIMUM VELOCITY IN M/SEC
Hot Water
Cold Water
Pump Suction without Head 1.2
Drain Line 1.2
2. Piping Design
a. Piping design shall be in accordance with the following:
1) Water flow, especially through heat transfer equipment, shall be in direction to
permit natural air venting. Typically, the water outlet shall be higher than the
water inlet to promote air elimination.
2) Pipe friction loss for general applications shall not be more than 30 kPa per
30 m length of pipe.
3) Reverse return piping arrangements shall be avoided. Provide adequate
means for manual balancing and flow measurement.
b. Systems Components
1) Components for piping systems shall be as follows:
(a) Long radius elbows shall be used wherever possible. For offsets, 45°
elbows instead of 90° elbows shall be used.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 102
(b) Unions shall be provided for screwed pipes where equipment and piping
(c) Flanges shall be provided for welded pipes, where equipment and piping
(d) Ball, globe or butterfly valves shall be used for throttling services. 10 mm
globe valves shall be provided as bypass valves for all globe valves
above 200 mm.
(e) Recommended piping and fitting materials shall be as shown in TABLE
5.7.8. B.
TABLE 5.7.8.B: RECOMMENDED PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR VARIOUS SERVICES
SERVICE PIPE FITTINGS

Welding, cast, malleable or
Black steel pipe
black iron
Chilled Water
Cast brass, wrought copper or
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Welding, galvanized, cast or
Galvanized steel pipe
Condenser or malleable iron.
Make-Up Water Cast brass, wrought copper or
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Galvanized, cast or malleable
Drain or Galvanized steel pipe
iron
Condensate
Lines Cast brass, wrought copper or
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Black steel pipe Wrought or cast iron
Steam Cast brass, wrought copper or
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
Steam
Schedule 80 Black Steel Wrought or cast iron
Condensate
Black steel pipe Welding or cast iron
Hot Water Cast brass, wrought copper or
Hard copper tubing
wrought brass
F. Equipment and Components

1. Valves and Accessories
a. Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet of each item of HVAC equipment, including
but not limited to pumps, coils, fin-tube convectors, cabinet heaters, unit heaters,
heat exchangers, and other similar equipment.
b. Provide valves at the top and bottom of all risers.
c. Provide valves at all branch take-offs from piping mains.
d. Provide non-slam check valves as indicated at pump discharges.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 103
e. Locate valves so that the tops of the valve stems are above the horizontal.
f. Valves for equipment, coils, specialties, etc., shall meet the component's pressure
rating listed, and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
g. Valves shall be same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
h. In general and unless otherwise noted, shut-off valves 50 mm size and smaller shall
be ball valves. Shut-off valves larger than 50 mm size and larger shall be butterfly
valves.
2. Pumps
a. Pumps shall have variable speed drives and shall be arranged so that flow is
matched to the demand.
b. Pumps shall be selected so that that flow can be increased by 15% with a
corresponding increase in pump head by simply changing the impeller. Neither a
change in the pump body size or pump a motor replacement shall be required.
c. Pumps shall be selected for operation within a range of 66% to 115% of the flow at
the point of highest efficiency
d. Motors shall be selected to prevent overloading at the highest possible flow rate for
the given impeller, and motor sizes shall be one size larger than the minimum size
required for the design.
e. For pumps operating in series or parallel, the series of parallel curves shall be
plotted to confirm proper flow with multiple pumps operating.
f. The following general guidelines shall be used for selecting the pumps seal material:
1) Standard seal for open or closed system with clear water
2) Single flushed seal for closed, clear water systems operating at high
temperature or pressure
3) Double flushed seal for open or closed systems with high concentrations of
abrasives
4) Packing gland seal for open or closed systems with large volumes of make-up
water or solids build-up
3. Mechanical Equipment Rooms
a. Water Coils
1) All hydronic water coils shall have 2 - way valves. Bypass valves shall be
provided at the end of circulation circuits to provide minimum flow when all 2 -
way valves are closed.
2) A shutoff valve shall be installed on each supply and return pipe at each coil
to allow for servicing of the coil without tampering with water balance.
3) Coils shall have means for independent balancing for each coil.
4) A strainer shall be provided for each coil bank to protect the 2 - way valve.
b. Chillers
1) Wherever practical, chillers shall be arranged for variable primary flow.
Chillers shall be installed in parallel to allow for ease in maintenance.
2) Chiller controls shall interface with the Building Automation Systems.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 104
c. Hydronic Water Circulating Pumps

1) The water circulating pumps shall have a pressure gage and shut-off valve at
the pump suction. Base mounted pumps shall have a suction diffuser.
2) The discharge side shall have a strainer, a check valve and a shut-off valve.
Pressure gages shall be provided at the strainer inlet and outlet.
d. Chemical Feed and Water Make-Up
1) The system shall also have at the suction side of the pump an air separator
and closed type compression tank.
2) The make-up line to the system shall have a double check valve to prevent
cross-connection.
3) A pot feeder having a capacity of no less than 0.1% of system water volume
with two shutoff valves shall be installed between the pump suction and
discharge lines, in parallel with the pump.
e. Air Elimination
1) All hydronic systems shall have provisions for air elimination. A central air
eliminator shall be provided near the inlet of main circulating pumps. Means
for air elimination shall be provided at all high points as well. Wherever
practical, manual air vents shall be provided. If automatic air vents must be
used, they shall be accessible and shall have a manual shut-off valve
upstream to facilitate maintenance of the air vent.
f. Expansion
1) All hydronic systems shall have hydro-pneumatic tanks for addressing thermal
expansion. Tanks shall be sized to address the maximum anticipated
expansion at normal operating conditions. Tanks shall be bladder-type, and
the bladder material shall be compatible with the hydronic fluid.
g. Equipment Access
1) Where equipment or valves are situated in a high location, all necessary
operating chains, service platforms and ladders with railings and toe stops
shall be provided.
4. Steam Systems
a. Steam systems are used for heating turbine and boiler leads, and various industrial
processes.
b. Carbon steel or alloy steels shall be used for piping material.
c. Sizing of pipes shall be such as to allow reasonable velocities and friction losses.
The steam velocity shall not create objectionable noise especially for heating
systems in office buildings and dwellings.
d. Sizing of pipes for the exhaust lines from auxiliary turbines and similar services shall
be such as not to produce objectionable noise.
e. Either globe or gate valves shall be used wherever possible. In general gate valves
shall be used in locations where pressure drop through the valve is a consideration
and where the valve will be either wide open or entirely closed. Globe valves shall
be used in water, steam, and air lines for throttling purposes, as the globe valve
permits closer regulation of the flow. A gate valve shall always be installed
preceding a globe valve used for throttling purposes.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 105
f. Check valves shall be used in feed lines close to a boiler to prevent water or steam
blowing back from the boiler, if the feed line ruptures or its pressure falls. Check
valves shall also be used in individual pump or trap discharges before they join a
common header, and where different lines are joined together to discharge into a
common header. In pump discharges where the header remains under pressure
after the pump is shut down, a gate valve shall be installed in addition to the check
valve.
g. Each boiler shall have at least one safety valve and two or more safety valves, if it
has more than 46.5 m2 of heating surface or if the steam generating capacity
exceeds 1000 kg/h. The safety valve capacity for each boiler shall be such that all
the steam that can be generated shall be discharged without allowing the pressure
to rise more than 3%. The complete range of pressure settings of all the saturated
steam safety valves on a boiler shall not exceed 10% of the highest pressure to
which any valve is set.
h. All safety valves shall be of direct spring-loaded pop type. They shall operate without
chattering.
i. Except in the case of small, low-pressure boilers, vents from safety valves shall be
terminated outside of the building at least 1.8 m above the roof. To reduce the high
noise level caused by the discharge, the vent pipe end shall be fitted with a baffled
silencer, or the pipe end shall be cut on a bias to increase the discharge area and
reduce exit velocity.
j. Steam systems piping shall be insulated to reduce heat losses.
5. High Temperature Water Systems
a. High temperature water (HTW) systems are those that supply water at temperatures
above 120°C and at pressures from 4 to 25 bars.
b. The pressure in any part of a high temperature water system shall always be above
the pressure corresponding to the temperature at saturation in the system, in order
to prevent flashing of the water into steam. Pressurization to prevent the water in
system from flashing into steam shall be accomplished by steam or an inert gas
such as nitrogen.
c. This pressure shall be maintained by employing either of the following schemes:
1) An automatic pressure pump.
2) Compression tank with inert gas.
3) A steam cushion in the steam arum, the steam space of the boiler, or in a
separate expansion tank.
d. Based on load and design pressures, either water-tube, fire-tube, or scotch-marine
type boiler shall be used.
e. Water-tube boilers usually require external tanks for pressurization, while fire-tube
boilers, if pressurized by steam, have expansion space within the boiler, but require
a separate tank if pressurized by inert gas.
f. When pressurizing with pump, the pressure control shall be set to operate the boiler
feed pump, which causes feedwater to flow from the makeup tank to the boiler
whenever the pressure falls.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 106
g. Proper distribution of return water and of water flow shall be maintained in all types
of boilers, to prevent tube or tube-sheet failures due to overheating or unequal
expansion of the boiler.
h. Either iron pipe or copper tubing shall be used for high temperature water systems.
i. Sizing of piping shall take economic considerations of smaller pipe versus higher
pressure drops through the system, and therefore, higher pump requirements.
j. Control valves shall be sized for 70 to 80% stem travel at full flow. The pressure
drop across the valve shall not result in a downstream pressure below the saturation
pressure at the temperature existing at any point, or flashing into stream will result.
k. Control valves shall be located in the return lines of heating units, in order to reduce
valve operating temperature.
6. Vibration Control
a. Design Objective
1) All vibrating, reciprocating, or rotating equipment shall be mounted such that it
does not transmit significant levels of vibration into the surrounding or
supporting structure.
2) Provide vibration isolation for all attachments to a vibrating machine, including
structural mounts, cooling or drainage pipe connections, exhaust air ductwork,
and electrical connections, etc.
3) It is very important that equipment operating frequencies be isolated from
natural frequencies of the building.
4) Ensure that the supporting structure has sufficient stiffness and mass.
5) Where it might be impractical or too expensive to meet the design criteria,
then sound engineering judgment shall be applied to limit noise and vibration
effect on building occupants and to protect the equipment.
b. Vibration Criteria
1) Design Criteria shall be as per ASHRAE Fundamentals and Applications
Handbook, recommended acceptable vibration criteria for vibration in a
building structure.
2) Vibration Isolators Selection
(a) Vibration isolators must be selected not only to provide required isolation
efficiency but also to compensate for floor stiffness.
c. Vibration Control
1) General
(a) Provisions shall be made to control equipment induced vibration.
(b) Refer to and incorporate the basic design techniques as described in
ASHRAE Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control.
(c) The use of vibration isolators between equipment and foundations and/or
building structures shall be required to minimize transmitted vibration.
d. Vibration Isolators

Rev. 1 5.7 - 107
1) Vibration isolation mounts shall be used for the support of mechanical or

vibrating equipment.
2) Isolators shall be specified by type and by deflection, not by isolation
efficiency.
3) See ASHRAE Fundamentals for Selection of Vibration Isolators and ASHRAE
Application Handbook for types and minimum deflections.
4) All vibration isolators shall be selected according to ASHRAE and
manufacturer’s recommendations.
5) Isolation performance shall be within the responsibility of the equipment
supplier.
e. Piping Hangers and Isolation
1) Isolation hangers shall be used for all piping in mechanical rooms and
adjacent spaces, up to a 15.2 m distance from vibrating equipment.
2) The pipe hangers closest to the equipment shall have the same deflection
characteristics as the equipment isolators.
3) Other hangers shall be spring hangers with 19 mm deflection. Positioning
hangers shall be specified for all piping 200 mm and larger throughout the
building.
4) Spring and rubber isolators are recommended for piping 50 mm and larger
hung below noise sensitive spaces.
5) Floor supports for piping may be designed with spring mounts or rubber pad
mounts.
6) For pipes subject to large amounts of thermal movement, plates of Teflon or
graphite shall be installed above the isolator to permit horizontal sliding.
7) Anchors and guides for vertical pipe risers usually must be attached rigidly to
the structure to control pipe movement.
8) Flexible pipe connectors shall be designed into the piping before it reaches
the riser.
f. Piping Supports
1) Provide channel supports for multiple pipes and heavy duty steel trapezes to
support multiple pipes.
2) Hanger and support schedule shall have manufacturer’s number, type and
location.
3) Comply with MSS SP69 for pipe hanger selections.
4) Spring hangers and supports shall be provided in all the mechanical rooms.
g. Mechanical Equipment Isolation
1) Floating isolation bases shall be considered for major mechanical equipment
located in critical areas.
h. Concrete Inertia Bases
1) Inertia bases shall be provided for all pumps.
i. Mechanical Shafts and Chases

Rev. 1 5.7 - 108
1) Mechanical shafts and chases shall be continuous and closed at the top and
bottom.
2) Any piping and ductwork shall be isolated as it enters the shaft to prevent
propagation of vibration to the building structure.
3) All openings for piping must be sealed.
j. Pipe Insulation
1) All hydronic piping shall be insulated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
90.1 - 2010.
2) Where exposed insulation in mechanical equipment rooms is subject to
damage, provide aluminum or PVC plastic covers on all insulation.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 109
SUBSECTION 5.7.9 PIPELINE CORRIDORS
5.7.9 PIPELINE CORRIDORS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Guideline Engineering Manual (GEM) establishes minimum safety requirements
for existing and new pipeline facilities under the jurisdiction of the Royal Commission
in Jubail (RCJ). This manual provides:
1) The minimum safety criteria for locating, designing, construction, inspection,
testing, operation, maintenance, repair or replacement of the pipeline corridor
systems.
2) The policies and technical information required for review of submittals by
Industries to ensure that they are consistent with minimum pipeline safety
requirements satisfactory to the RCJ.
b. The provisions of GEM are not intended to prohibit the use of alternative design
parameters and systems, methods, or devices not specifically described. However the
use of alternative design, construction and testing systems, methods, or devices must
be reviewed and approved by the RCJ.
c. If a conflict is discovered between the Guideline Engineering Manual (GEM), the
Standard Specifications, or the Standard Details, the conflict shall be brought to the
attention of the RCJ Engineering Department who will provide resolution or direction.
d. The review of submittals for design and installation of pipeline systems in the pipeline
corridors requires coordination and integration with other disciplines such as, but not
limited to, civil, mechanical, structural, electrical design, and other disciplines.
e. Following the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) does not relieve any party from
designing and constructing a pipeline and its associated componenets adhereing to
all the required industry codes, standards and guidelines for sound engineering
design.
2. Applicability
a. This Manual is applicable to the following:
1) Pipeline assets operated by Industries in the pipeline corridors in Jubail
(including King Fahd Industrial Port (KFIP) and RIC.
2) Pipeline systems that transport hazardous liquids, petrochemicals and gases
in the pipeline corridors in Jubail (including King Fahd Industrial Port (KFIP))
and RIC. Pipeline systems also include the portion of the piping that goes
underground from the industry boundary to the pipeline corridor.
b. This Guideline Manual does not apply to any of the following pipeline facilities:
1) In-plant piping systems as defined in the Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and Utility
Corridors (UC) Regulations
2) Pipelines outside the limits of the RCJ and RIC Pipelines and Utility Corridors
3) Pipelines that have been abandoned by the Royal Commission and the
industries.
c. Existing and proposed communications utilities shall be included on civil site plans
3. Definitions

Rev. 1 5.7 - 110
a. “Assets” All support structures, sleepers, electrical conduit, etc. that have been
installed by the Industries in the PLC for use by the Industries.
b. “Cathodic Protection” A technique to prevent the corrosion of a metal surface by
making that surface the cathode of an electrochemical cell.
c. “Civil Defense” The entity that has the responsibility to respond to fire and pipeline
leaks in PLC and UC; it also conducts evacuation and drills in PLC and UC.
d. “Clearance” An unobstructed horizontal or vertical space.
e. “Coast Guard” The military entity that issues access permits and performs security
patrol in KFIP; also, reports all incidents that occur within KFIP
f. “Component” Any part of a pipeline system which may be subjected to system
pressure including, but not limited to pipe, valves, elbows, tees, flanges, launchers,
receivers and closures
g. “Contractors” The entity that performs activities in PLC and UC as authorized by the
industries or RCJ.
h. “EPCT” Engineering Pipeline Corridor Team. The team members representing the
RCJ Engineering department who perform the compliance inspections in PLC.
i. “FSF” The entity that has the responsibility for patrolling and enforcing security in the
industrial areas of RCJ.
j. “HCIS” The entity that has the overall responsibility of enforcing security in the
industrial areas of RCJ.
k. “Hydrostatic test” A pressure or tightness test where a liquid, typically water, is the
test medium.
l. “Hot tap” The process of making branch piping connections to operating pipelines,
mains, or other facilities while in operation. The connection of the branch piping to the
operating line and the tapping of the operating line is done while it is under pressure.
m. “Industries” The entity that owns and operates pipeline facilities in the Corridors
n. “In-plant piping” Piping that is located on the grounds of and inside the fence line or
battery limit of a plant that is used to transfer petrochemicals, feed stocks and gases
between plant facilities. In-plant pipelines are located totally outside the pipeline
corridors.
o. “Method Statement” A document detailing the sequence of steps taken to complete a
work task. A Method Statement shall contain information concerning the order and
method of construction with reference to work procedures and safety constraints.
p. “Maximum (Allowable) Operating Pressure (MOP/MAOP)” The maximum pressure at
which the pipeline can be safely operated in accordance with these guidelines and the
Regulations.
q. “Non-Destructive Testing (NDT)” Testing in which the part being tested is not rendered
unusable. In pipeline related NDT testing, the pipe, its welds, or even steel
components and tanks may need to be evaluated to verify their integrity. Pipeline
NDT typically consists of Radiography, Ultrasonic (UT), Magnetic particle (MT), Dye
penetrant (PT), Eddy Current (EC).
r. “Operating stress” The stress imposed on a pipe or structural member under operating
conditions. This term normally refers to the internal forces due to the pressure of the

Rev. 1 5.7 - 111
gas or liquid in the pipeline; however, any other forces such as thermal growth,
expansion, or contraction may need to be considered as well.
s. “Patrol” The activity that is performed visually for observing any abnormalities in PLC
and UC. Patrolling can be performed by walking or driving.
t. “PLC” The Pipeline Corridors are used for routing the feedstock, utilities, and
interconnected pipeline for transferring of products to and from industries and marine
ports.
u. “UC” The term “Utility Corridors” applies to all utility ROW’s for handling transporting
utilities such as power, telecommunication, and water utility systems.
v. “Pipe Racks” A framed structure with two or more columns supporting one or more
levels of piping. Pipe racks are also referred to as Expansion Loops (EL), Cross
Accesses, pipe-tracks and Intersection Support Structures (ISS).
w. “Pipeline or Pipeline System” All parts of new or existing pipe and ancillary equipment
through which petrochemicals, feed stocks, gases and hazardous liquids move in
transportation including but not limited to line pipe, valves and appurtenances
connected to line pipe.
x. “Pipe Supports” A general term used to refer to all types of structures and foundations
supporting, anchoring, and guiding one or more pipes or pipelines.
y. “Pipe Sleepers” A concrete foundation with embedded steel plates supporting one or
more pipes near finished grade.
z. “Pneumatic test” A pressure or tightness test where a gas, generally nitrogen or air,
is the test medium.
aa. “RCJ/ RCJ” The Royal Commission (in Jubail) - The entity that constructs, maintains
and owns the infrastructure and pipe supports facilities in PLC. The Royal
Commission regulates pipeline facilities in corridors.
bb. “Safe distance” The minimum distance between all personnel and the equipment
being tested.
cc. “Stored Energy” Power that has not been used or dissipated. It is the potential energy
reserved in a body. It can be converted into many forms of energy sometimes with
disastrous consequences.
dd. “Volunteer Organizations” The entity that performs volunteer services in PLC and UC,
such as JAMA’A (Jubail Area Mutual Aid Association).
4. Abbreviations
a. For a list of abbreviations refer to Section 2.2 of the following abbreviations apply to
this section.
7) IMP: Integrity Management Plan

Rev. 1 5.7 - 112
8) ISSD: Industrial Security and Safety Department

9) JAMA’A: Jubail Area Mutual Aid Association
10) JMP: Jubail Management Procedures
11) KFIP: King Fahd Industrial Port
12) LSS: Logistic Services Section
13) MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society
14) NACE: National Association of Corrosion Engineers
15) NDT: Non-Destructive Testing
17) O&M: Operation and Maintenance
18) PCCG: Pipeline Corridors Compliance Group
19) P&ID: Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
20) PL and UC: Pipeline and Utility Corridors
21) PLC and UC: Pipeline Corridors and Utility Corridors
23) RCJY: Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu
24) RCY: Royal Commission for Yanbu
25) ROW: Right-of-Way
26) SABIC: Saudi Arabian Basic Industries Standards
28) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standard Organization
29) SIS: Safety Instruction Sheets
30) YAMA: Yanbu Area Mutual Aid Association
31) YMP: Yanbu Management Procedures
32) YIC: Yanbu Industrial City
33) JIC: Jubail Industrial City
a. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of additional codes.
b. The following Codes and Standards are approved for use under this guideline. Other
codes and Standards proposed by Industries may be acceptable provided they can
be shown to be equal to the Standards in this guideline.
1) American Petroleum Institute (API) :
(a) API 1104 Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities
(b) API 1110 Pressure Testing of Steel Pipelines for the
Transportation of Gas, Petroleum Gas, Hazardous
Liquids, Highly Volatile Liquids or Carbon Dioxide

Rev. 1 5.7 - 113
(c) API 1130 Computational Pipeline Monitoring for Liquid Pipelines

(d) API 570 Piping Inspection Code: In-service Inspection, Rating,
Repair, and Alteration of Piping Systems
(e) API RP 574 Inspection practices for piping systems
(f) API RP 580 Risk-based inspection
(g) API RP 750 Management of Process Hazards
(h) API RP 1102 Steel pipelines crossing railroads and highways
(i) API RP 2201 Safe hot tapping practices in the petroleum and
petrochemical industries
(j) API SPEC 5L Specification for line pipe
(k) API SPEC 6D Specification for pipeline valves
2) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
(a) ASME B16.5 Pipe flanges and fittings
(b) ASME B16.33 Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas
Piping Systems
(c) ASME B16.34 Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
(d) ASME B31G Manual for Determining the Remaining Strength of
Corroded Pipelines
(e) ASME B31.3 Process Piping
(f) ASME B31.4 Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid
Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids
(g) ASME B31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
(h) ASME B31.8S Managing System Integrity of Gas Pipelines
(i) ASME B31.12 Hydrogen Piping and Pipelines
(j) ASME BPV Code, Section V - Nondestructive Examination
(k) ASME BPV Code, Section VIII - Rules for the Construction of Pressure
Vessels
(l) ASME BPV Code, Section IX - Qualification Standard for Welding and
Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers and Welding and
Brazing Operators
(m) ASME PCC-2, Part 5 Article 5.1 Mandatory Appendix II - Stored Energy
Calculations for Pneumatic Pressure Test
(n) ASME PCC-2, Article 5.1 Mandatory Appendix III - Safe Distance
Calculations for Pneumatic Pressure Test
(o) ASME SI-1 ASME Orientation and Guide for Use of SI (Metric) Units
3) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
(a) ASTM A 53/ A 53M SPEC - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

Rev. 1 5.7 - 114
(b) ASTM A 105/ A105M SPEC - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for
Piping Applications
(c) ASTM A 106 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
(d) ASTM A 134 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (ARC)-
Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over)
(e) ASTM A 135 Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
(f) ASTM A 139 Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel
Pipe (Sizes NPS 16 and Over)
(g) ASTM A 193/ A193M - Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel
Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service
(h) ASTM A 194/ A194M - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for
Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or
Both
(i) ASTM A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength
(j) ASTM A 320/ A320M Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting
Materials for Low- Temperature service
(k) ASTM A 333/ A333M Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel
Pipe for Low-Temperature Service
(l) ASTM A 354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Allow Steel
Bolts, Studs and other Externally Threaded Fasteners.
(m) ASTM A 372/ A372M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels
(n) ASTM A 381 Specification for Metal-Arc-Welded Steel Pipe
(o) ASTM A 395/ A395M Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-
Retaining Castings
(p) ASTM A 449 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts
and Studs
(q) ASTM A 671 Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for
Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures
(r) ASTM A 672 Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for
High-Pressure Service at Moderate Temperatures
(s) ASTM A 691 Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion Welded for
High-Pressure Service at High Temperatures
(t) ASTM A 984/ A984M - Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain-End Electric-
Resistance-Welded
(u) ASTM B 88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
(v) ASTM D 696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal
Expansion of Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C with a
Vitreous Silica Dilatometer

Rev. 1 5.7 - 115
(w) ASTM D 1599 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time

Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
(x) ASTM D 2513 Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe,
Tubing, and Fittings
(y) ASTM D 2517 Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure
Pipe and Fittings
(z) ASTM D 2837 Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design
Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure
Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products
(aa) ASTM F 1041 Standard Guide for Squeeze-Off of Polyolefin Gas
Pressure Pipe and Tubing
(bb) ASTM F 1563 Specification for Tools to Squeeze-Off Polyethylene (PE)
Gas Pipe or Tubing
4) American Welding Society (AWS):
(a) AWS A3.0 Standard Welding Terms and Definitions, Including
Terms of Adhesive Bonding, Brazing, Soldering Thermal
Cutting, and Thermal Spraying
5) High Commission for Industrial security
(a) Safety and Fire Protection Directives for Industrial facilities
(b) Security Directives for Industrial facilities
6) Manufacturers Standard Society (MSS)
(a) MSS SP-6 Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges
and Connecting-End Flanges of Valves and Fittings
(b) MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges,
and Unions
(c) MSS SP-44 Steel Pipeline Flanges
7) National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE):
(a) NACE MR0175/ ISO 15156 - Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries -
Materials for Use in H2S-Containing Environments in Oil
and Gas Production.
(b) NACE SP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or
Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
(c) NACE SP0177 Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning Effects on
Metallic Structures and Corrosion Control Systems
This standard was withdrawn in 1994.
http://www.nace.org/uploadedFiles/Committees/WITHDRAWN%20STAN
DARDS.pdf
(d) NACE SP0204 Stress Corrosion Cracking (SCC) Direct Assessment
Methodology
(e) NACE SP0102 In-Line Inspection of Pipelines

Rev. 1 5.7 - 116
(f) NACE RP0105 Liquid-Epoxy Coatings for External Repair,

Rehabilitation and Weld Joints on Buried Steel Pipelines
(g) NACE SP0106 Control of Internal Corrosion in Steel Pipelines and
Piping Systems
(h) NACE SP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or
Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
(i) NACE SP0200 Steel Cased Pipeline Practices
(j) NACE SP0206 Internal Corrosion Direct Assessment Methodology for
Pipelines Carrying Normally Dry Natural Gas
(k) NACE SP0502 Pipeline External Corrosion Direct Assessment
Methodology
8) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
(a) NFPA 58 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code
(b) NFPA 59 Utility LP-Gas Plant Code
(c) NFPA 59A Standard for the Production, Storage, and Handling of
Liquefied Natural Gas (LNS)
(d) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
(e) NFPA 220 Standard on Types of Building Construction.
(f) NFPA 704 Standard for the identification of the fire hazards of
materials for emergency response
6. Related Documents:
a. Unified Procedures for the RCJY Industrial Cities. See Subsection 1.1.3, Policies
and Procedures.
b. RCJ Guidelines for Color Scheme and Labeling of Pipeline in the Industrial Area, the
Causeway, and the Port Area.
c. Guidelines for Compliance Audit for Inspection of Industries Piping Systems in the
Pipeline Corridors.
d. Guidelines for Inspection of In-Service Industries Piping Systems in the Pipeline
Corridors.
e. RCJ Environmental Regulations.
f. Royal Commission Pipeline and Utility Corridors Regulations
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. General
a. The Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and Utility Corridors (UC), collectively referred to as the
Pipeline Corridors (PC) consist mainly of above-ground pipelines that are utilized in
the exchange, supply, transfer, import or export of petrochemicals, feed stocks,
petroleum products and fuel gases between the Industries in Jubail 1, Jubail 2 and
the King Fahad Industrial Port (KFIP), and also includes the PLC in Ras Al Khair
Industrial City (RIC). The corridors extend from the King Fahad Industrial Port (KFIP)
through Jubail 1 to Jubail 2. These pipelines serve 33 (thirty three) Industries and
consist of approximately 406 pipelines of total length 2785 kilometers, transporting 99

Rev. 1 5.7 - 117
(ninety nine) different products and occupying 210 kilometers of pipe tracks. Some
pipeline segments are buried when crossing roads or at the transition between the
battery limits of the plants and the pipeline corridors
b. The Pipeline Corridors (PLC) and Utility Corridors (UC) Regulations (the Regulations)
were approved by the Chairman of the Royal Commission on 28 January 2013. They
regulate pipeline facilities in the pipeline corridors in Jubail and Yanbu Industrial
Cities. Other utilities and systems, such as power, telecommunication, and water
utility systems which are located within the boundaries of the Corridors are also
regulated.
c. The Royal Commission Engineering Departments in Jubail and Yanbu are custodians
of the regulations and are responsible for recommending future revisions and
updates. Future revisions and updates shall be coordinated and approved by both
departments.
d. The pipeline corridors and associated infrastructure facilities are constructed by RCJ
for use by the industries.
e. Refer to FIGURE 5.7.9.D for a reference map of the pipeline corridors in JIC and RIC.
2. General Stakeholders Responsibilities
a. The roles and responsibilities of the stakeholders of pipeline and utility corridor
facilities and systems shall be in accordance with the prevailing practices, policies,
and procedures established in RCJY, and all related governmental policies and
regulations, as applicable by RCJY.
b. Responsibilities of Stakeholders in JIC and RIC
c. The Royal Commission is also responsible for the following:
1) Review the Industries design documents for all work that is planned for
construction in the pipeline and utility corridors.
2) Perform safety inspections to ensure all Industries, Contractors, and other
stakeholders comply with the safety requirements.
3) Conduct monitoring inspections and audits for regulating the stakeholder’s
works in the corridors.
4) Monitor Industries violations in the PL and UC and levying penalties and fines
in accordance with the established RCJ procedures.
5) Issue and close encroachment and work permits, and vehicle and work
personnel access permits to industries and Contractors.
6) Maintain the as-built plans for the infrastructure facilities and share the same
with other stakeholders as needed.
7) Participate with the Facility Security Force in manning access gates to PLC.
8) Record all safety and security incidents that occur in PLC and notify HCIS of
the same.
9) Provide maintenance to the grounds located with ROW of PLC
10) Provide 24 hour on-call service in case of emergency/leak inside Pipeline
Corridor (PLC) for coordination of all the stakeholders involved in the incident
to ensure safety.
d. High Commission for Industrial security (HCIS) and Industrial Security Force (ISF)

Rev. 1 5.7 - 118
1) HCIS and ISF have the responsibility of enforcing the safety and security
requirements set forth by HCIS on all users of the pipeline corridors.
e. Civil Defense
The Civil Defense has the following responsibilities:
1) Respond to all safety incidents related to leakage and fire in PLC.
2) Carry out fire-fighting, evacuation, rescue, and emergency response in PLC.
3) Maintain the PLC emergency and evacuation plans.
4) Develop and conduct emergency drills in coordination with RCJ, industries, and
volunteer organizations
f. Coast Guard
The Coast Guard has the following responsibilities:
1) Issue and close access permits to KFIP and the portions of PLC located within
the jurisdiction of KFIP.
2) Control access gates to KFIP.
3) Patrol the areas located within their jurisdiction.
4) Report all safety and security incidents in KFIP.
5) Provide assistance and facilitate operations during emergency situations
g. King Fahd Industrial Port (KFIP)
KFIP has the following responsibilities:
1) Issue and close work permits, and conduct safety inspections in the KFIP and
the portions of PLC located within the jurisdiction of KFIP.
2) Inspect work site before and after work completion.
3) Report all safety and security incidents to HCIS.
4) Provide assistance and facilitate operations during emergency situations
h. Industries
Below is a synopsis of the responsibilities of Facility Owners or Industries
1) Industries are responsible for the design, construction, inspection, testing,
operation, maintenance, repair and upgrading of their pipeline facilities.
2) Industries are also responsible for complying with all procedures, policies,
regulations and Standards that are applicable to all works located in the pipeline
corridors.
3) Industries shall prepare an Operations & Maintenance Plan of written
procedures for conducting routine activities and handling abnormal operations.
This plan shall be reviewed annually.
4) Any segment of the installed systems that becomes unsafe must be replaced,
repaired or removed from service. Hazardous conditions must be repaired
promptly or as required by RCJ.
5) Industries shall conduct surveillance of their systems by weekly patrols.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 119
6) Leakage surveys shall be conducted every 3 months. Records of leakage

surveys shall be retained for 3 years.
7) Pipelines must be visually inspected every year in accordance with the RC
Regulations.
8) Pipelines must be designed to acceptable Industry Standards to withstand
anticipated internal and external pressures and loads.
9) Pipelines must be tested to acceptable Industry Standards. A work permit must
be obtained from RCJ prior to performing the pressure testing.
10) Pipelines must be labeled in accordance with the RCJ guidelines.
11) Direct buried pipelines must be protected against external corrosion.
12) Pipelines must be designed and constructed to minimize internal corrosion.
13) Industries shall conduct risk assessments of their pipelines and establish an
Integrity Management Plan to address and mitigate the risks
i. Volunteer Agencies
1) Volunteer Agencies such as Jubail Area Mutual aid Association (JAMA’A)
provide support to the Civil Defense in updating the emergency plans for PLC
and extend assistance as requested in accordance with the regulations of
JAMA’A.
j. Contractors
1) Contractors are responsible for meeting all safety and security requirements set
forth in their contracts and in this guideline manual.
2) The design, inspection and maintenance requirements of the regulations can
be summarized as follows:
(a) Industries are responsible for the design, construction, inspection,
operation and maintenance of their pipeline facilities in the corridors.
(b) Design, construction, inspection, installation, operation and maintenance
of facilities are to be conducted in accordance with approved International
and Industry Standards.
(c) The Royal Commission allocates space in the pipeline corridors and is
responsible for approval of facilities installed in the corridors.
C. Design Requirements
1. Design & Operating Philosophy
a. Pipelines shall be designed for specified limit states to achieve the objectives of
constructability safety, safe operations, serviceability and maintenance. They are
designed to operate within specified temperature and pressure limits and parameters.
b. Pipelines shall be designed to sustain operating pressures and other external loads
that result in stresses below those calculated by appropriate design code calculations
and code allowable stresses at maximum loading conditions. Therefore the important
criteria for pipelines are, but not limited to: operating & design pressure, operating &
design temperature, compatability of the piping material with the fluid being
transported, flexibility of the piping system, ductility & resistance to cracking, and
internal & external corrosion

Rev. 1 5.7 - 120
2. Pipeline Design Criteria

a. Pipelines and components shall be designed with sufficient wall thickness and shall
be installed with adequate protection, to withstand anticipated internal and external
pressures and loads that will be imposed on the pipe during its lifetime without
impairment to its serviceability. Depending on the fluid that is being transported in the
pipeline, the design of the pipeline shall be in accordance with ASME B31.4 for
Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquids & Slurries, ASME B31.8 for Gas
Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems, or ASME B31.12 for Hydrogen Piping
and Pipelines.
b. Internal Design Pressure (per ASME B31.8)
1) The Design Pressure of steel pipelines is determined in accordance with the
following formula (refer to the applicable B31 Code for the individual factors to
be applied in the calculation of Design Pressure):
(a) P = (2St/D) x F x E x T ------------Eq. 1
Where
P = Internal Design pressure in KPa (psi) gauge
S = the Specified Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe in KPa (psi)
determined in accordance with the manufacturing standard or
specification of the pipe
D = Nominal outside diameter of the pipe in millimeters (inches)
t = Nominal wall thickness of the pipe in millimeters (inches)
F = Design factor
F = 0.72 for liquid pipelines
F = 0.60 for gas pipelines
E = Longitudinal joint factor, determined in accordance with the
appropriate B31 code or specification (not greater than 1.0)
T = Temperature derating factor (not greater than 1.0)
For pipe of unknown specification,
S = 165 MPa (24,000 psi)
E = 0.60 for pipe NPS 4 and smaller, and 0.80 for pipe over NPS 4 (or as
per the appropriate B31 code).
The Specified Minimum Yield Strength of various grades of pipe is shown in
Table 5.7.9.A.
TABLE 5.7.9.A: PIPE GRADES AND SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH
Pipe Grade SMYS psi SMYS MPa

API 5L Grades
A25 25000 172
A 30000 207
B 35000 240
X42 42000 290

Rev. 1 5.7 - 121
Pipe Grade SMYS psi SMYS MPa

X52 52000 360
X60 60000 415
X70 70000 485
A333 / A333M
Grade 1 30000 205
Grade 3/4/6/7 35000 240
Grade 8 75000 515
Grade 9 45000 315
Grade 10 65000 450
ASTM Grades
304L/316L 25000 170
A106/A53 Gr. B 35000 240
304/316/ 30000 205
c. Design temperature.
1) Pipe and system components must be compatible with the temperature
environment (both ambient and operating) in which the pipe and components
will be used so that the pipeline will maintain its structural integrity.
2) Pipelines in low temperature service must be made of materials that are suitable
for those low temperatures.
d. Variations in pressure.
1) If, within a pipeline system, two or more components are to be connected at a
place where one will operate at a higher pressure than another, the piping
system must be designed so that any component operating at the lower
pressure will not be overstressed in accordance with the applicable B31 design
code equations.
e. Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP/MAOP)
1) Pipelines shall be designed and tested such that the Maximum Allowable
Operating Pressure (MAOP) of the pipeline is the minimum of the following:
(a) The Internal Design Pressure of the pipe determined in accordance with
Eq. 1 above.
(b) The Design Pressure of any other component of the pipeline.
(c) 80% of the test pressure for a Liquid pipeline or Gas pipeline which has
been pressure tested, or
(d) 80% of the factory test pressure or of the prototype test pressure for any
individually installed component.
2) The determination of MOP / MAOP shall be made in accordance with the
appropriate B31 code.
f. Pressure during Surges

Rev. 1 5.7 - 122
1) The pressure in a pipeline during surges or other variations from normal

operations shall not exceed 110 percent of the maximum operating pressure
limit established under paragraph (e) of this Section. Each Facility Owner must
provide adequate controls and protective equipment to control the pressure
within this limit.
g. Pipe Clearances on pipe tracks and supports
1) The minimum horizontal and vertical clearances between the pipeline and other
structures or between adjacent pipelines shall be in accordance with Table
5.7.9.B. However, based on pipeline diameter, product, location and space
availability inside PLC, Table 5.7.9.B requirements can be adjusted/changed to
accommodate project requirements and/or on a case-by-case basis.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 123
TABLE 5.7.9.B: MINIMUM HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CLEARANCES FOR PIPELINES AND
STRUCTURES

Rev. 1 5.7 - 124
3. Design of Valves
a. The installation of valves is discouraged in the pipeline corridors. However, where
valves are approved for use by the RCJ, each valve installed in a pipeline system
must comply with the following:
1) The valve must be of a sound engineering design.
(a) Materials subject to the internal pressure of the pipeline system, including
welded and flanged ends, must be compatible with the pipe or fittings to
which the valve is attached.
(b) Each part of the valve that will be in contact with the petrochemicals, gases
or hazardous liquid stream must be made of materials that are compatible
with materials or each hazardous liquid that is anticipated will flow through
the pipeline system.
2) Each valve must be both hydrostatically shell tested and hydrostatically seat
tested without leakage to the requirements set forth in Section 5 of API
Standard 6D.
3) Each valve other than a check valve must be equipped with a means for clearly
indicating the position of the valve (open, closed, etc.).
4) Each valve must be marked on the body or nameplate, with at least the
following:
(a) Manufacturer’s name and trademark
(b) Class designation or the maximum working pressure to which the valve
may be subjected
(c) Body material designation (the end connection material, if more than one
type is used)
(d) Nominal valve size.
5) Manufacturer’s data and material test records must be maintained as long as
the valve is in service.
D. Design and Testing Factors
1. Design and Testing Criteria
a. RCJ Corridor Pipelines are classified as "Location Class 2" pipelines as defined in
ASME B31.8, paragraph 840.2, and in ASME B31.12, paragraph PL-3.2.2. Therefore
the following factors are applicable for calculating the design, test and maximum
operating pressures.
TABLE 5.7.9.C TABLE OF FACTORS FOR DESIGN AND TESTING
Pipeline of
Factor Liquid Pipeline Gas Pipeline Unknown
Specifications
Design Factor, F 0.72 0.6 0.5
Joint Factor, E Refer to
Applicable B31 Applicable B31
paragraph C.2.b
Code Code
of this Section

Rev. 1 5.7 - 125
Pipeline of
Factor Liquid Pipeline Gas Pipeline Unknown
Specifications
Specified Minimum Yield strength
Applicable B31 Applicable B31 165 MPa
SMYS
Code Code 24000 psi
(Table 3.1)
Hydrostatic Test Factor 1.25 1.25 1.25
Pneumatic Test Factor 1.25 1.25 1.25
Test Duration 4 hours 2 hours 4 hours
Max Stress during testing, % SMYS 90% 75% 90%
Maximum Allowable Operating Refer to Refer to Refer to
Pressure MAOP paragraph C.2.e paragraph C.2.e paragraph C.2.e
of this Section of this Section of this Section
E. Structural Supports
1. Structural Supports
a. Industries shall always remain responsible for ensuring that their designs and
construction conform to their contract obligations and all applicable regulations,
Codes, and Standards. The design of pipe supports, pipe racks, pipe sleepers, cross
access structures, expansion loops, intersection support structures, foundations, and
other related supports carrying, anchoring, and guiding pipes shall be made to
acceptable industry Standards and follow chapter 5.2 from the GEM.
b. Horizontal expansion loops may be used in the areas where such loops currently exist
and where there is sufficient space in accordance with the applicable standards to
allow their use without harming future expansion; otherwise, vertical expansion loop
systems shall be adopted by all projects throughout PLC and UC.
c. The industry is responsible for providing its own anchors that are required based on
their own analysis of load conditions on the pipeline. Anchors are not allowed to be
added to any RCJ structure.
d. All Pipe Supports shall be designed and constructed to resist stresses produced by
load combinations in accordance with ASCE 7-10, SBC 2018, PIP TC01015-17 and
the following. Note that Load Cases Di, Fa, Lr, R, S, and Wi are not enumerated as
they are typically not relevant for this climate nor for Pipe Supports in general.
e. Any new structure or extension of an existing structure (except for a cantilevered
member that can accommodate only one pipe) must be designed for full pipe load of
5KN/m2 in accordance with Section 3.1.3 of the RCJ Structural Design Bases
Guidelines for Pipeline Corridors - Final Structural version Sept 2014 (Attachment 5).
2. Symbols and Notations
a. Refer to Section 5.2.3.E.11.c.2.a
3. Strength Design Load Combinations for Pipe Racks, Pipe Bridges and Pipe Supports
a. Refer to Section 5.2.3.E.11.c.2.b
b. Refer to PIP STC01015-17 Table 11

Rev. 1 5.7 - 126
4. Allowable Stress Design Load Combinations for Pipe Racks, Pipe Bridges and Pipe
Supports
a. Refer to Section 5.2.3.E.11.c.2.c
b. Refer to PIP STC01015-17 Table 10
5. Exceptions to Factored and Nominal Load Combinations
a. Where lateral earth pressure provides resistance to structural actions from other
forces, it shall not be included in H but shall be included in the design resistance H
shall be set to zero if the structural action due to H counteracts that due to the other
load cases.
b. Effects of one or more loads not acting in whole or in part shall be investigated. This
includes patterning transient loads in continuous and cantilever framing.
c. Increases in allowable stress shall not be used with the load combinations given for
Allowable Stress Design.
d. E and W are permitted to be applied independently in each of two orthogonal
directions and orthogonal interaction effects are permitted to be neglected.
e. Minus E and minus W directions shall be investigated.
6. Stability against Overturning, Uplift, Sliding, and Buoyancy
a. Stability analyses shall demonstrate the ability of the structures to resist overturning,
uplift, sliding, and buoyancy, and that the allowable soil bearing values are not
exceeded. Stability shall be provided solely by dead load plus permanent mechanical
anchorages. In determining the safety factors, allowance shall be made for the
potential removal of resisting dead loads (i.e., excavation, erosion, etc.). Foundation
stability shall be based on the following minimum factors of safety (FS) for non-
building structures as per Royal Commission Engineering Manual, Section 5.2.
b. Retaining wall sliding resistance shall be developed by friction (and passive soil
pressure where necessary) utilizing particularly detailed shear keys to engage the
friction-resistance plane below the plane of the waterproofing and protection.
c. Deflections
1) The maximum allowable vertical deflection of Pipe Supports determined from
ASD Load Combinations shall be L/400 (where L is the beam length), except
L/600 shall be used for pipe supports for fixed service equipment and high
temperature or pressure piping.
2) Acceptable deflection shall also consider the parameters used in the design of
the piping and the pipe supports. Coordination between the structure design
and piping design is critical
d. Materials
1) All materials shall conform to the Specifications and Serial Designations herein.
All steel materials shall be new and un-spliced.
2) Structural design and material selection shall conform to the requirements of
the latest Industry Standards, Royal Commission (Royal Commission)
Engineering Manual - Chapters 3, 5.2, and 12, Royal Commission Guideline
Specifications, Standards published by the Saudi Arabian Standards
Organization (SASO), and the documents listed in Section 2.0 herein.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 127
3) Calculations shall conform to Royal Commission Engineering Manual, Chapter

5.2 without exception.
e. Civil; Reference datum for all elevations shall be based on the Royal Commission
Datum.
f. Concrete Design
1) All concrete Pipe Support elements shall be designed in accordance with ACI
318 with load factors and combinations given in this Guideline.
2) Concrete formwork, constituents, proportions, and maximum water-cement
ratios shall be in accordance with Royal Commission requirements for cast-in-
place concrete.
3) Reinforcing steel shall be fusion bonded epoxy-coated (FBEC) in accordance
with ASTM A775M and Royal Commission Guideline Specification Section
03205.
4) The classes of concrete for Pipe Support foundations shall be as follows:
TABLE 5.7.9.D: PIPE SUPPORT FOUNDATIONS
Minimum Cylinder
Structure Class of Concrete Compressive Strength
at 28 Days
Structural concrete in C35 minimum with Type I 35 MPa

contact with soil or Portland cement and silica fume
exposed to weather, pozzolanic replacement as per
salt, salt water, brackish GS 03310, Table 1C
water, seawater, or
spray from these
sources
All other structural C30a or C30b minimum with 30 MPa
concrete Type I Portland cement and
GS 03310, Table 1C
Blinding Slabs, Mud C20 with Type V Portland 20 MPa

Mats, and Lean cement as per GS 03310, Table
Concrete 1C
5) The concrete cover for reinforcing bars shall be 75 mm.

6) The height of Pipe Support foundations above adjacent, finished grade shall be
300 mm minimum.
7) The Pipe Support Drawings shall explicitly show and specify the foundation
sheet waterproofing and protection, blinding slab, sand-cement screed,
chamfers, fillets, reglets, counterflashing, coal tar epoxy coating, concrete
class, concrete mix design, cementitious material, and FBEC reinforcing
requirements

Rev. 1 5.7 - 128
TABLE 5.7.9.E: MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
Structural Steel Shapes,

ASTM A36 or A992
Plates, Bars, and Fittings
Hollow structural shapes
(HSS) square, rectangular,
and round
Pipes ASTM A500 Grade B
High-strength Bolts, Nuts, and
ASTM A53 Type E, Grade B
Washers for Joints
Anchor Rods (headed-type or
ASTM A325, Type 1; Nuts - ASTM A563, Grade DH;
threaded/netted with double
Washers - ASTM F436, Type 1; all hot-dip galvanized
nuts and plate washers)
ASTM A36 or F1554 Grade 36; Double nuts - ASTM
Welding Processes and
A563, Grade DH; Plate washers - ASTM A36; all hot-
Electrodes
dip galvanized
AWS D1.1, D1.4, and D1.6. Low hydrogen
Cementitious Materials electrodes with a minimum tensile strength of 480
MPa, (e.g., “E7018” for SMAW)
Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic ASTM C150 Type I and V Cements; ASTM C618,
Grout C989, and C1240 Pozzolanic replacements
Standard Specification for
ASTM C1107 with minimum 7 day compressive
Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- strength at least twice the base concrete strength
Cement Grout
ASTM A615, Grade 60 (414 MPa); ASTM A775M
Chemical Anchors
fusion bonded epoxy-coated reinforcing (FBECR)
Epoxy adhesives with hot-dip galvanized or stainless
steel high-strength bolt assemblies as manufacturer
by Hilti Corp. or approved equivalent
F. Construction and Construction Inspection

1. General
a. Each pipeline system must be constructed in accordance with comprehensive written
specifications that are consistent with internationally recognized codes and Industry
standards. As a minimum, the requirements of the applicable ASME B31 codes must
be followed.
b. Construction inspection provisions for pipelines and related facilities shall be adequate
to ensure compliance with the material, construction, welding, assembly, and testing
requirements of this Guideline
c. Inspection must be provided to ensure the installation of pipe or pipeline systems in
accordance with the requirements of this guideline. Only persons qualified by training
and experience in the phase of construction shall be permitted to perform inspections.
2. Material Inspection
a. Pipe

Rev. 1 5.7 - 129
1) No pipe or other component may be installed in a pipeline system unless it has

been visually inspected at the site of installation to ensure that it is not damaged
in a manner that could impair its strength or reduce its serviceability.
2) All piping components shall be visually inspected to insure that no mechanical
damage has occurred during shipment and handling prior to being connected
into the piping system.
3) On systems where pipe is telescoped by grade, wall thickness, or both,
particular care shall be taken to ensure proper placement of pipe. Permanent
records shall be kept showing the location as installed of each grade, wall
thickness, type, specification, and manufacturer of the pipe.
b. External coating
1) Pipelines shall be protected against external and atmospheric corrosion by
coating that is compatible with the environement. Coating systems shall be as
specified in this Guideline, or equivalent.
c. Buried Piping
1) Buried piping shall be protected by a cathodic protection system that has been
designed and is maintained to the requirements of NACE SP 0169.
3. Qualification of Inspectors
a. Inspection personnel shall be qualified by training and experience. Such personnel
shall be capable of performing the following inspection services:
1) right-of-way and grading
2) line up and pipe surface inspection
3) welding
4) coating
5) tie-in and lowering
6) pressure testing
7) special services for testing and inspection of facilities, such as station
construction, electrical installation, radiography, corrosion control, etc., as may
be required
4. Type and Extent of Examination Required
a. Visual inspection for detection of surface defects in the pipe shall be provided for
each job just ahead of any coating operation and during the final placement.
b. The pipe swabbing operation shall be inspected for thoroughness to provide a clean
surface inside the pipe.
5. Welding: General
a. Welding
1) Welding of all piping shall be performed by qualified, certified welders using a
qualified welding procedure in accordance with API Standard 1104 or Section
IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, as applicable to piping
system and material.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 130
2) Welding must be performed by a qualified welder in accordance with welding

procedures qualified to produce welds meeting the requirements of this
guideline. The quality of the test welds used to qualify the procedure shall be
determined by destructive testing.
3) Welding must be protected from weather conditions that would impair the
quality of the completed weld.
b. Welder and Welding Procedure Qualifications
1) Prior to any welding, a welding procedure specification shall be established and
qualified by testing to demonstrate that welds having suitable mechanical
properties and soundness can be produced. Welding Procedure Specifications
shall be qualified as required by API 1104, or Section IX of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
2) Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs) published by the
American Welding Society and listed in Appendix E of Section IX are permitted
for construction within the limitations established by Article V of ASME Section
IX. In order to avoid duplication of effort and subject to the approval of the
owner, WPSs qualified by a technically competent group or agency may be
used.
3) The welding procedure specifications shall at a minimum include the
information required by API 1104 or Section IX of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. When materials, welding consumables, mechanical
restraint, service conditions and/or weather conditions make more details
necessary to produce a sound weld, such as preheat, inter-pass temperature,
and post weld heat treatment, such details shall be provided.
4) API 1104 and Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code contain
sections entitled “Essential Variables” applicable to welding procedure
specifications, procedure qualification records, and welder qualifications.
Welding procedure qualification tests shall be conducted with the highest
strength base metal to be welded in the essential variable groups identified in
the procedure specification.
5) Industry or Facility Owner shall be responsible for qualifications of procedures
and welders. The preparation of welding procedure specifications and/or
performance of welding qualification tests may be delegated to others;
however, each company that performs welding activities is responsible for the
welding activities performed by its employees and Contractors.
6) Qualification Records. The welding procedure followed during the qualifying
tests shall be recorded in detail. Records of the tests that establish the
qualification of a welding procedure specification shall be retained as long as
that procedure is in use. A record of the welders qualified, showing the date
and results of the tests, shall be retained during the construction involved and
for six months thereafter. These records shall be available to the owner or the
owner’s agent and the inspector at the location where the welding is being
done.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 131
c. Required Inspection and Acceptance Criteria

1) Required Inspection
(a) The quality of welding shall be checked by visual inspection and
supplemental nondestructive methods or by removing completed welds as
selected and designated by the inspector for destructive testing.
(b) Each weld and welding must be inspected to insure compliance with the
requirements of this guideline or by removing completed welds as selected
and designated by the Inspector for destructive testing.
(c) A minimum of 15% of the girth welds; 100% of the welds at roads, culverts,
expansion loops and tie-in welds not hydrostatically tested shall be
nondestructively inspected according to TABLE 5.7.9.F.
(d) The inspection of girth welds shall be by radiographic or other accepted
volumetric methods. Non-volumetric methods, such as dye penetrant or
magnetic particle, may be used for other welds such as fillet welds and
structures.
(e) Each weld inspected shall be inspected completely with the selected
method
d. Welds and welding inspection:
1) Standards of acceptability.
(a) Each weld and welding must be inspected to insure compliance with the
requirements of this subpart. Visual inspection must be supplemented by
nondestructive testing. The methods used for nondestructive testing shall
be capable of producing indications of potential defects that can be
accurately interpreted and evaluated. Welds shall meet the acceptance
standards for discontinuities contained in API 1104, or the alternate
acceptance standards for girth welds in Mandatory Appendix I of API 1104.
The trepanning method of nondestructive testing is prohibited.
e. Welds: Repair or removal of defects.
1) Each weld that is unacceptable under F.5.d must be removed or repaired. A
weld must be removed if it has a crack that is more than 8 percent of the weld
length.
2) Each weld that is repaired must have the defect removed down to sound metal
and the segment to be repaired must be preheated if conditions exist which
would adversely affect the quality of the weld repair. After repair, the segment
of the weld that was repaired must be inspected to ensure its acceptability.
3) Repair of a crack, or of any defect in a previously repaired area must be in
accordance with written weld repair procedures that have been qualified under
F.5.b
4) Repair procedures must provide that the minimum mechanical properties
specified for the welding procedure used to make the original weld are met
upon completion of the final weld repair.
f. Welds: Nondestructive testing.
1) A weld may be nondestructively tested by a process that will clearly indicate
any defects that may affect the integrity of the weld.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 132
2) Any nondestructive testing of welds must be performed-

(a) In accordance with a written set of procedures for nondestructive testing;
and
(b) With personnel that have been trained in the established procedures and
in the use of the equipment employed in the testing.
3) Procedures for the proper interpretation of each weld inspection must be
established to ensure the acceptability of the weld.
4) During construction, at least 15 percent of the girth welds made by each welder
during each welding day must be nondestructively tested over the entire
circumference of the weld.
5) All girth welds installed each day in the following locations must be
nondestructively tested over their entire circumference, except that when
nondestructive testing is impracticable for a girth weld, it need not be tested if
the number of girth welds for which testing is impracticable does not exceed 15
percent of the girth welds installed that day:
(a) Within railroad or public road rights-of-way;
(b) At overhead road crossings and within tunnels or culverts;
(c) When installing used pipe, 100 percent of the old girth welds must be
nondestructively tested.
6) At pipeline tie-ins, including tie-ins of replacement sections, 100 percent of the
girth welds must be nondestructively tested.
TABLE 5.7.9.F: SUMMARY OF WELDING STANDARDS OF ACCEPTABILITY FOR RCJ CORRIDOR

PIPELINES
Visual Inspection NDT (RT)

Welds in Normal fluid Service 100% 15%
Piping under severe cyclic conditions 100% 100%
Piping in elevated temperature fluid service 100% 100%
Tie-in welds not hydrostatically tested 100% 100%
Road-railroad ROW/tunnels/bridges 100% 100%

Used pipe 100% 100%
Expansion Loops 100% 100%
6. Construction and As-built records

a. A complete record that shows the following must be maintained by each Facility
Owner for the life of each pipeline facility:
b. Pipeline attributes consisting of:
1) Pipeline ID#, Commissioning date, Nominal size, Wall thickness, Pipe Grade,
Longitudinal seam type, Pressure Test Date, Test Pressure, Type of test,
Normal Operating Pressure, Maximum Operating Pressure, Product
transported, Pipe manufacturing standard, Pipeline design standard, Northing

Rev. 1 5.7 - 133
and Easting coordinates (in the RCJ coordinate system) of each point of
intersection.
2) In addition the NFPA 704 classification for Health and Flammability as well as
MSDS data shall be provided for each material transported.
c. The total number of girth welds and the number nondestructively tested, including the
number rejected and the disposition of each rejected weld.
d. The length and coordinates of each buried section of pipe.
e. The location of each valve and corrosion control equipment.
7. Excavation Safety - Minimum Safety Requirements
a. Although the majority of pipelines are located above ground, there are instances such
as at road crossings or at transitions between the battery limits and pipeline corridors
where segments are buried or in casings that have become filled with sand or soil.
These sections are particularly susceptible to corrosion damage and eventual
leakage.
b. Response to leakages at road crossings entailed excavating the pipelines at these
locations. In these instances a hazard assessment is required prior to any work being
performed. The minimum safety requirements are as follows:
1) Industries shall use appropriate protective systems and measures to protect
pipelines and other structures in the vicinity of the excavations.
2) Protective systems (such as sloping or shoring) shall be used whenever there
is a potential of cave-in regardless of the depth of the excavation. These
systems shall be designed by a Competent Engineer.
3) Personnel working around excavations must be protected from cave-ins or
other hazards.
4) Identify underground utilities and pipelines located in the proposed excavation
areas prior to the start of excavation and take measures to protect them from
damage.
5) Edges of excavations shall be protected with substantial barriers where people
are liable to fall into them. Shoring shall extend at least 610 mm above the top
of the excavation to prevent cave-in and protect personnel working at the
bottom of the excavation.
6) Keep heavy equipment and surcharge loads at least 610 mm (2 feet) from
trench edges.
7) To assure that the atmosphere in excavations is safe for entry and hot work,
atmospheric monitoring shall be conducted for oxygen, flammable vapors and
toxic substances.
8) A Competent person who is capable of identifying potential hazards in and
around the excavation and has the authority to take prompt corrective actions
to eliminate them shall inspect the excavation at the start of every shift.
9) Co-ordinate construction activities with other industries, property owners and
utilities immediately adjacent to the proposed work areas.
10) Performance of this activity may require the individual to work in confined
spaces and under conditions requiring respiratory protection.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 134
11) Handle and dispose of the excavated material properly in accordance with RCJ
environmental requirements.
12) Industries shall submit the chemical analysis of any dewatering fluid before
discharging into the RCJ drainage system.
G. Pressure Testing of Pipelines, Components and Vessels
1. Pressure Testing of Pipelines.
a. Every pipeline, after construction and prior to initial operation, shall successfully
pass a hydrostatic test. In addition every existing pipeline that has been replaced,
repaired, relocated or otherwise changed must successfully pass a hydrostatic test.
The test manifold and ancillary piping and components attached to pipe being tested
shall be designed and constructed to meet the minimum system requirements of the
pipe being tested. Water must be used as the test medium. Whenever a
pressure/pneumatic testing is planned by an industry, industry must inform RC and a
convenient date/time for the test shall be established for RC Engineering to witness
the test.
b. Piping shall be pressure tested by following the appropriate ASME B31 code for new
construction, or the requirements of API 570 for pipeline repairs. All testing of piping
shall be done with due regard for the safety of employees and the public during the
test. A work permit shall be obtained from RCJ prior to conducting the pressure
testing. In order to obtain a work permit and RCJ approval, a Facility Owner must
submit a test methodology and procedure for testing the pipeline.
1) The following pipelines are to be pressure tested:
(a) Every pipeline, after construction and prior to initial operation
(b) Every existing pipeline that has been replaced, repaired, or relocated
(c) Every pipeline that is returned to service from inactive status or
otherwise changed.
2) The test manifold and ancillary piping and components attached to pipe being
tested shall be designed and constructed to meet the minimum system
requirements of the pipe being tested... Water must be used as the test
medium. The test manifold shall be tested at a pressure of 1.5 x test pressure.
3) The test pressure and test duration shall be determined as follows:
(a) For liquid pipelines, the test pressure shall equal 125% of the maximum
operating pressure for at least 2 continuous hours without leakage.
(b) For gas pipelines per ASME B31.8, the test pressure shall equal 125% of
the maximum operating pressure (150% of the maximum operating
pressure per ASME B31.12) for at least 2 continuous hours without
leakage.
(c) The maximum hoop stress during a hydrostatic test must not exceed
90% of the specified minimum yield strength of the pipe.
(d) The maximum hoop stress during a pneumatic test must not exceed 75%
of the specified minimum yield strength of the pipe.
4) All testing of pipelines and utility systems after construction shall be done with
due regards to the safety of the public and pipeline infrastructure.
c. Definitions

Rev. 1 5.7 - 135
1) “Hydrostatic test” A pressure test conducted using water or other approved

liquid as the test medium.
2) “Leak test” A pressure test to ensure tightness of flanged and threaded joints
at the test pressure. It is normally conducted before initial start-up and after
Tests and Inspections (T & I’s).
3) “Non-destructive testing” Non-destructive testing (NDT) includes those test
methods used to examine an object, material or system without impairing its
future usefulness.
4) “Pneumatic test” A pressure test conducted using air or other approved gas
as the test medium or in conjunction with liquid.
5) “Pressure test” A test conducted to piping or equipment by subjecting it to an
internal pressure using liquid or gas to ensure strength or tightness of the
system at the test pressure.
6) “Revalidation test” A pressure test performed to prove the integrity of existing
piping or equipment. This test is administered by the proponent organization.
7) “Service test” A leak test conducted at operating pressure using the service
fluid.
8) “Smoke test” Smoke testing involves forcing smoke-filled air through a sewer
line. The smoke under pressure will fill the main line plus any connections;
then follow the path of the leak to the ground surface, quickly revealing the
source of the problem.
9) “System test” An in-situ pressure test applied to a group of piping and
equipment tested as a system.
10) “Pressure testing” is undertaken to verify system integrity and for leak
tightness.
d. Submittals
1) The Contractor shall submit to the Royal Commission, the following items for
review and approval before commencing Work.
(a) A complete methodology or description of its proposed testing
procedures.
(b) Test data and certification of completion of testing.
(c) Calibration data for all equipment that will be included in the test.
(d) A test diagram showing all items that will be subjected to test pressure.
(e) Records of all nondestructive testing performed on the weld joints,
including certification of equipment used and personnel performing the
testing.
(f) Welding procedures (WPS & PQR) used for the welding of the joints, and
Welder qualifications.
e. Quality Control
1) The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall develop
and propose programs and methods of construction and testing such as to
achieve the specified quality to the approval of the Royal Commission.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 136
2) The Contractor shall maintain a qualified representative on-site during all

operations.
f. Health and Safety Considerations
1) All works undertaken in relation to this Guideline Specification are to be
completed in full accordance with the respective health and safety
requirements established by the following:
(a) Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) Legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes.
(b) Royal Commission Regulations
(1) Standards, Contractual Conditions, and Health & Safety systems.
(c) Contractor
(1) Health and Safety Standards and Systems as accepted by the
Royal Commission.
2) In the absence of any of the above, best accepted industry practice consistent
with this shall be employed throughout.
g. General Requirements
1) Pneumatic testing is not permitted without written approval of the Royal
Commission. This test when conducted shall be in accordance with section
for additional safety requirements.
2) Pneumatic testing with air of piping systems or equipment, which has been in
flammable service, shall be concurred with the Royal Commission. The test
procedures shall include cleaning/purging procedures to avoid explosive
flammable air mixtures.
3) The effect of the static head of the testing liquid shall be considered when
determining the effective test pressure of any elements within a tested
system.
4) Except where noted here or in the specific referenced Standards and B31
Codes, the test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient time to determine
that there are no leaks based on the criteria specified in paragraph
5.7.9.G.1.b 3).
5) All systems (piping and equipment), while being hydrostatically tested, shall
be protected from being over-pressured by the following means:
(a) Relief valves of adequate capacity set to relieve at 5% above the
hydrostatic test pressure shall be installed. Sizing of these relief valves
used for testing shall follow the requirements of API RP 520, Part 1. The
relief valves shall be tested, dated and tagged within 1 week prior to the
hydrostatic test for new construction projects and within 1 month for
maintenance operations.
(b) In addition to the pressure relieving device, a bleed valve shall be
provided to protect the piping and equipment from overpressure. The
bleed valve shall be readily accessible in case immediate
depressurization is required.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 137
(c) An isolation valve shall be provided between the pressure testing

manifold and the system being tested. The isolation valve shall be rated
for the manifold test pressure when in the closed position.
(d) Before employing the pressure testing manifold in the actual system
pressure test, it shall be separately pressure tested to at least 1.25 times
the system test pressure but not less than the discharge pressure of the
pump used for the pressure testing.
(e) Every reasonable precaution shall be taken to protect employees and the
general public during the testing. Persons not working on the testing
operation shall be kept outside of the testing area.
(f) The piping must be kept under surveillance by patrol during the test and
continuous communication must be maintained along the test section.
(g) Hydrostatic test diagrams and test procedures shall be prepared by the
responsible engineering group and made available to the Royal
Commission for approval. The test diagrams and procedures shall
include the limits of piping (including test manifold) and equipment
included in each hydrostatic test, test pressures, test temperature, test
fluid, line flushing requirements and safety precautions.
(h) A request of NDT (Non-Destructive Testing) in lieu of pressure testing
shall not be entertained unless under special circumstances as approved
by the Royal Commission and submitted for approval as permitted in the
specific listed Standards and B31 Codes.
(i) All pressure tests must be conducted using the hydrostatic method. The
Royal Commission may accept, for a specific pressure piping system,
alternative test methods that are allowed in a code or standard that is
declared in force.
(j) A pressure piping system shall not be tested at a temperature that is
colder than its minimum design temperature.
(k) When conducting pressure tests, the ductile-to-brittle transition
temperature and the possibility of brittle fracture must be considered by
the Contractor.
h. Hydrostatic Testing
1) Pressure Testing For Pipelines
(a) This Section defines specific requirements related to pressure testing of
pipilines such as test pressures, duration, etc.
(b) Unless limited by flanges, valves or other component in the line, the
hydrostatic strength test pressure for every section of the line shall
produce a hoop stress in the pipe of not greater than 90% of the
specified minimum yield strength (SMYS) at the test temperature. The
test pressure shall be calculated based on the pipe nominal wall
thickness less the mill tolerance (manufacturer’s minus tolerance). The
test pressure shall not be less than the minimum test pressure specified
in paragraph 5.7.9.G.1.b 3).
(c) The pipeline to be tested is to be filled with the testing liquid in a manner
that will insure that no air remains in the pipe. It is preferable that the
pipeline be filled from the lower end of the segment that is being tested

Rev. 1 5.7 - 138
and that a scraper or sphere be run ahead of the liquid column to purge
air from the pipeline.
(d) After the pipeline has been filled, the pressure shall be raised to 20% of
the prescribed test pressure and the test segment let to stand for a
period of time to allow the pressure to stabilize and check for leaks.
Testing to full test pressure may resume after the stabilization period.
(e) The test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient time as shown in
paragraph 5.7.9.G.1.b 3), but shall not be less than 30 minutes, to
determine that there are no leaks.
(f) The test pressure at the lowest point of the pipeline, considering the
hydrostatic head, shall not result in a hoop stress greater than the
SMYS. The strength test pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours.
(g) The strength test temperature shall not result in a combined longitudinal
stress (calculated based on 70% hoop stress at the test pressure plus
temperature stress plus bending stress) exceeding the SMYS.
(h) All joints, including welded, shall be left exposed for visual leak detection
during the strength test. Coating and priming of such joints are not
allowed unless approved by the Royal Commission. The pipe itself can
be primed and coated to a final coat.
(i) Underground process piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. The test
pressure shall be maintained for a minimum time specified for the type of
test while the joints are inspected for leakage.
(j) Existing piping if subjected to revalidation hydrostatic test, the test
pressure shall be minimum of the pressure and duration as specified in
API 570 for the type of service. The actual wall thickness of the piping
and flange rating shall be taken into consideration when calculating the
test pressure.
(k) If a new tie-in spool to the existing plant piping cannot be hydrostatically
tested prior to installation (welding ends instead of flanged ends), it can
be tested to the revalidation test pressure along with the existing piping
system after installation. This does not apply to fire water systems.
(l) Immediately after the completion of the strength test, a tightness test
shall be conducted.
(m) For FBE (Fusion-bonded Epoxy) internally coated pipelines, the test
pressure shall not exceed 1.25 times the Maximum Allowable Operating
Pressure (MAOP) or a pressure which produces a hoop stress of 90% of
SMYS whichever is lower.
(n) Existing pipelines if subjected to revalidation pressure testing, the test
pressure shall be minimum of 1.25 times the MAOP for pipelines with 0.6
and 0.72 design factors in accordance with Table 5.7.9.G. The actual
pipe wall thickness and flange rating shall be taken into consideration
when calculating the test pressure. The latest successful test pressure
shall be documented in the “Safety Instruction Sheet.”
2) Pressure Testing for Minor Repairs
(a) This Section defines testing requirements for existing facilities, which are
subjected to minor repairs.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 139
(b) In the case of small diameter threaded piping without pressure

containing welds (all services and pressures), the hydrostatic pressure
testing is not required when thread engagement and seal welding
requirements are met. However, a service test shall be conducted for
these welds.
(c) In case of socket welding piping and when it is determined that
hydrostatic testing is not practical, , the piping may be pressure tested
with its own product at its operating pressure when the following
requirements are met:
(1) A request for NDT in lieu of pressure testing is processed.
(2) Qualified welders and welding procedures are used.
(3) The weld gap verified and welding witnessed by the responsible
Operation Inspection Unit.
(4) Welds to be either magnetic particle (MT) or dye penetrant (PT)
tested
(d) Low pressure steel piping in water, instrument air, plant air, inert gas
(Nitrogen, Argon, etc.) and steam systems operating at 1210 kPa (175
psi) or lower, may be strength tested with its own product at its operating
pressure.
i. Special Requirements for Pneumatic Testing
1) Pneumatic test is widely used to achieve minimum down time and economy
and convenience of testing as compared to hydrostatic tests. It is also useful
to detect very fine leak paths which may not be found in Hydrostatic Test.
However it is not as safe as hydrostatic tests for reasons enumerated below.
2) Issues to consider when analyzing Pneumatic Testing Method Statement
(a) The acceptance of pneumatic testing is done on a case-by-case basis.
Pneumatic testing is inherently more hazardous than a hydrostatic test
for the same conditions of volume, pressure and temperature. It is
recommended that pneumatic testing be used only when one of the
following condition exists:
(1) When piping systems are so designed that they cannot be filled with
water.
(2) When piping systems are to be used in services where traces of the
liquid testing medium cannot be tolerated.
(3) The piping system will be used in gas service or for other reasons
cannot be filled with water.
(4) Traces of test liquid would be detrimental to the intended use of the
piping.
(5) When the system will be used for medical gas application.
3) Stored Energy limitations and Safe Distance Analysis must be undertaken in
conjunction with robust procedures and safety measures. The analysis must
consider the following as a minimum:
(a) Consider the rationale for using pneumatic testing instead of hydrostatic
testing.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 140
(b) Ensure that the test procedure and method statement fully addresses the
technical safety considerations to ensure the safety and protection of
personnel and equipment.
(c) Define System volume and Test fluid
(d) Calculate Test Pressure
(e) Calculate Stored Energy
(f) Calculate / Define Equivalent amount of TNT
(g) Calculate the Safe Distance
(h) Ensure that test boundaries are consistent with the Stored Energy and
Safe distance considerations
(i) If stored energy exceeds limits established in ASME PCC-2, consider
segmenting line or reducing the operating pressure of the pipeline
(j) Air / gas used for pneumatic test is compressible to large extent and has
very high potential energy stored when compressed. Any minor leak path
can lead to a rupture and blast within no time releasing total energy with
an impact of sudden explosion.
(k) Time gap between identifying a leakage and failure is very small making
it almost impossible to take remedial action. Damages associated with
failure are uncontrollable and huge.
j. Pressure Testing Records.
1) A record must be made of each pressure test and the record of the latest test
must be retained as long as the facility tested is in service.
2) The records that must be retained include:
(a) The pressure recording charts;
(b) Test instrument calibration data;
(c) The name of the Facility Owner , the name of the person responsible for
making the test, and the name of the test company used, if any;
(d) The date and time of the test;
(e) The minimum test pressure;
(f) The test medium;
(g) A description of the facility tested and the test apparatus;
(h) An explanation of any pressure discontinuities, including test failures that
appear on the pressure recording charts.
(i) The table below lists all factors for liquid and gas pipelines.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 141
TABLE 5.7.9.G: MINIMUM SAFETY FACTORS

Pipeline of Unknown
Factor Liquid Pipeline Gas Pipeline
specifications
Design Factor, F 0.72 0.6 0.5
Applicable B31 Applicable Refer to paragraph
Joint Factor, E
Code B31 Code C.2.b of this Section
Specified Minimum Yield Applicable B31 Applicable 165 MPa

strength SMYS Code B31 Code 24000 psi
Hydrostatic Test Factor 1.25 1.25 1.25
Pneumatic Test Factor 1.1 1.1 1.1
Test Duration 2 hours 2 hours 2 hours
Max Stress during testing, %

90% 75% 90%
SMYS
H. Pipeline Labeling
1. Pipeline Labeling
a. Pipelines shall be labeled in accordance with the “Guidelines for Color Scheme and
labeling of Pipelines in the Industrial Area, The Causeway and the Port Area”. A
typical pipeline label is shown below based on the standard. A sample pipeline label
is shown below. Include pipeline diameter before the line content.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 142
FIGURE 5.7.9.A: SAMPLE PIPELINE LABEL
2. Component B -Industry Identification Numbers

a. Petromin Industries 01-09
b. 01 Saudi Aramco
c. 02 SASREF
d. 03 SATORP
04 SADARA

Rev. 1 5.7 - 143
e. SABIC Industries
10 SADAF
11 PETROKEMYA
12 KEMYA
13 SHARQ
14 IBN SINA
15 AR RAZI
16 IBN AL-BAYTAR
17 AL-BAYRONI
18 HADEED
19 SAFCO
20 IBN ZAHR
21 GAS (NATIONAL INDUSTRIAL GASES CO)
22 UNITED
23 SAUDI KAYAN
f. Other Primary Industries 30-49
31 S-CHEM (Saudi Chevron Phillips)
33 TASNEE
34 SIPCHEM
35 FARABI
36 PMD
37 ADVANCED (APC)
38 SAHARA ( AL-WAHA)
39 AMINAT (ARABIAN AMINES/AAC)
40 JESCO
41 CHEMANOL
g. Secondary Industries 50-99
50 SFCL (Chemanol)
51 NAMA / JANA
52 SODA
53 ARABIAN CHEMICAL (LATEX) (ACCL)
54 UGSMC
55 GULFGUARD
56 TAYF
57 ALHAMRANI

Rev. 1 5.7 - 144
58 INDIPCO
59 EDCO
60 ARCELOMITTAL
61 POLYSILICON
62 MODECOR
63 AL-BILAD
64 UNICOIL
h. Other Industries 100-150
100 MARAFIQ
3. Component C - Line Serial Number
a. Pipeline Serial Numbers are allocated by each Industry
b. Typical Pipeline Label
c. Location of Pipeline Labels

Labels are displayed to be visible clearly from various positions around the pipe
tracks especially close to valves, flanges,, product transfer points, adjacent to
changing directions, branches, where pipes cross over or through walls, fences,
roads, culverts (both sides), risers, expansion loops, intersection support structures
or straight runs of pipes at distances not more than 330 meters.
d. Emergency Number
In addition to the pipeline label, Industries shall also put their emergency contact
number on at least one of their pipelines in each expansion loop, and on both
vertical legs of each expansion loop.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 145
FIGURE 5.7.9.B: EXAMPLE OF A PIPELINE LABEL
FIGURE 5.7.9.C: HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING LABEL TYPES

Rev. 1 5.7 - 146
I. Operations, Inspection & Maintenance

1. Industries Requirements
a. Industries operating pipelines in the corridors are required to prepare a manual of
written operating procedures. The O&M procedures may be a comprehensive set of
cross-referenced volumes set up according to functional subjects or a single
manual. They are not just for the field personnel.
b. Procedures are required for tasks normally performed at the engineering, the
operations control center, and other headquarters-type functions as applicable to
O&M tasks
c. The procedures shall be clear, straight forward, and applicable to the company’s
system.
d. Abnormal operations procedures must be included for liquid pipeline operations.
e. Personnel conducting pipeline operations need direct access (either on paper or
electronically) to procedures, without delay when emergencies arise.
f. It is acceptable to use the manufacturer’s recommended practices (engine books or
other related literature) regarding the maintenance of the specific equipment at each
location (these documents must be available at each location). It is also acceptable
to post the specific start-up and shut-down instructions for each pump unit at or near
the local control panel used for starting the equipment and having generic
procedures in their O&M Plan.
g. Fail Safe systems if installed shall automatically respond without exceeding the
MOP plus the 10% prescribed allowance for hydraulic surges.
h. The Inspection and Maintenance Plans shall include the following as a minimum:
1) Plan for making a prompt and effective response to a notice of an emergency,
fire, explosion, accidental release, operational failure or natural disaster
affecting the pipelines
2) Process for analyzing pipeline accidents to determine the immediate and root
cause and provide for a post-accident review
3) Procedure for starting up and shutting down any part of the pipeline system in
a manner designed to assure safe operation
4) Process for determining the Maximum Operating Pressure of the pipeline
system
5) Procedure for ensuring that repairs are made in a safe manner so as to
prevent damage to persons and property
6) Provide for training of employees/Contractors to ensure that they are qualified
to perform the tasks they are assigned
7) Maintain equipment in good working order including mainline and isolation
valves
8) Process for preparing and maintaining As-built construction records and maps
9) Procedures for selection of and application and maintenance of pipe line
coatings and insulation
10) Design and Maintenance of a Corrosion Protection System to protect pipes
from external, internal and atmospheric corrosion

Rev. 1 5.7 - 147
11) Process for establishing the requirements for repairing pipeline features
identified through scheduled inspections or field investigations and the criteria
for maintaining or reducing the operating pressure of a pipeline.
12) Maintain maps and records of Condition Monitoring Locations (CMLs) in
accordance with API 570 or other code requirements.
13) Maintaining Inspection and Maintenance Records for the life of the facility.
14) A Process for updating procedure
i. Examples of an inadequate procedure:
1) The procedure is of a general nature and would provide little guidance when
needed.
2) The procedure parrots the regulation.
3) There is no procedure.
4) The procedures for taking adequate precautions in excavated trenches or hot
work areas does not include the use of appropriate instruments to test the
atmosphere.
J. Criteria for Cathodic Protection and Determination of Measurements
1. Criteria for Performance of Cathodic Protection
Criteria for performance of Cathodic Protection of buried metallic pipes shall be as follows:
a. Protection shall be deemed to be achieved if one of the following criteria are met:
1) The instant off pipe-to-soil potential shall be -850 mV or more negative than
this value with respect to copper-copper sulfate electrode. The instant off
potential shall be measured between 0.1 and 1 second of switching off the
power supply.
2) The potential decay shall be no more than 100 mV in 4 hours after switching
off the power supply. Potential decay shall be measured as difference
between the instant off potential and depolarized potential after switching off
the power supply.
K. Integrity Management
1. Different Factors Contributing to Pipeline Failures
a. Many different factors contribute to pipeline failures. In general, factors such as
external and internal corrosion, third party mechanical damage, design and
operation error, construction and material defects and inadequate inspection pose a
risk to the pipeline. It is therefore necessary to consider all factors that could
possibly affect the integrity of the pipeline and attempt to fit these in a model that will
assist in predicting the probability of failure and the consequence or impact of
failure.
2. Integrity Management Plan (IMP)
a. An Integrity Management Plan (IMP) provides a means for Industries to improve the
safety of its pipeline systems by allocating resources effectively to:
1) Identify and analyze actual and precursor events that could result in a pipeline
incident.
2) Examine the likelihood and potential severity of incidents.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 148
3) Provide a structured and comprehensive means to examine the risks and risk
reduction activities available.
4) Provide a means for selecting and implementing risk reduction activities.
5) Establish measures and track performance with the goal of improving that
performance.
b. In developing and maintaining an effective IMP, the following are some guiding
principles and actions:
1) System Integrity is built on qualified personnel, defined processes and
operational excellence.
2) An effective IMP must be flexible.
3) Availability and Integration of information is a key component of an IMP.
c. Identifying risks, conducting assessments and taking mitigate actions are the
foundation of an effective IMP.
d. Regular evaluation of system integrity and the IMP are key requirements.
3. The Relative Risk of a Pipeline
a. The relative risk of a pipeline is derived from two components, namely, Probability of
Failure (POF) and Consequence of Failure (COF). The numeric risk value is
calculated as the POF multiplied by the COF. The methodology calculates the
relative risk numbers of each pipeline segment and ranks them from highest to
lowest... It also attempts to identify the type of failure modes that are prevalent in a
segment.
b. There are many kinds of risk assessments and the resulting mix matrices differ
according to data availability.
c. Results from risk assessments can be used for many purposes including but not
limited to:
1) Doing more frequent inspections such as inline inspections and corrosion
monitoring
2) Performing Spike hydrostatic testing (SHT) to remove cracks that may fail
prematurely during operations
3) Focusing on the predictive failure modes
4) Developing engineering remedies in design, construction, inspection or
operation to reduce risk
a. The RCJ Engineering Department has identified a risk matrix that may be applicable
to the pipeline corridors per TABLE 5.7.9.H below.

Rev. 1 5.7 - 149
TABLE 5.7.9.H: RISK MATRIX FOR PIPELINE CORRIDORS
Probability of Failure Risk rating Example

Inspection
Freq. yrs
Rank Probability Risk Sore Low Risk Score high Risk Ranking
5 Nearly certain 21 25 Very High 3
4 Highly likely 17 20 High 5
3 Likely 11 16 Moderate 5
2 Uncertain 6 10 Low 10
1 Not likely 0 5 Very Low 10
Impact (Consequence) of Failure For Detailed Risk Assessment

Impact Rank Property damage Safety Environmental Lower Range Upper Range Category
5 Very High >$5M Fatality Explosion 489 610 Very High
4 High <$5M Severe Injury Major Leak 367 488 High
3 Moderate <$2.5M Medical Treatment Minor Leak 245 366 Moderate
2 Low <$1M First Aid Line SD 123 244 Low
1 Very Low <$500K No injury 1 122 Very Low
Example For Detailed Risk Assessment
Probabilit, P Risk Score = P x I Lower Range Upper Range Caategory
5 5 = Low 10 = Low 15 = Medium 20 = High 25 = High 857 1070 Very High
4 4 = Very Low 8 = Low 12 = Medium 16 = medium 20 = High 643 856 High
3 3 = Very Low 6 = Low 9 = Low 12 = medium 15 = Medium 429 642 Moderate
2 2 = Very Low 4 = Very Low 6 = Low 8 = Low 10 = Low 215 428 Low
1 1 = Very Low 2 = Very Low 3 = Very Low 4 = Very Low 5 = Low 0 214 Very Low

Rev. 1 5.7 - 150
FIGURE 5.7.9.D - RC PIPELINE CORRIDORS IN JUBAIL INDUSTRIAL CITY

Rev. 1 5.7 - 151
CHAPTER 5
SECTION 5.8
COASTAL MARINE
1 2020 General update CA ME LAS MRC OMQ


SECTION 5.8 COASTAL MARINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.8.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 1
A. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1
1. Purpose and Scope ....................................................................................................... 1
2. Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 3
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 3
6. Related Guiding Procurement and Construction Specifications ................................... 4
7. References .................................................................................................................... 4
8. Approvals ....................................................................................................................... 4
B. Operational Considerations ........................................................................................... 5
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 5
2. Third Party Requirements .............................................................................................. 5
3. Design Life ..................................................................................................................... 5
4. Ship Data ....................................................................................................................... 5
5. Current Conditions ......................................................................................................... 5
6. Approach Channels ....................................................................................................... 5
7. Navigation Aids .............................................................................................................. 5
C. Geotechnical Considerations ......................................................................................... 6
1. Geotechnical investigations ........................................................................................... 6
2. Stability Analysis ............................................................................................................ 6
3. Geology ......................................................................................................................... 6
D. Loading Considerations ................................................................................................. 6
1. General .......................................................................................................................... 6
2. Water and Waves .......................................................................................................... 6
3. Live Loads ..................................................................................................................... 6
4. Continuous Live Loads .................................................................................................. 6
5. Soil Pressure and Ground Water Profiles ..................................................................... 7
6. Currents ......................................................................................................................... 7
7. Berthing and Mooring .................................................................................................... 7
E. Construction Materials ................................................................................................... 7
1. Concrete ........................................................................................................................ 7
2. Steel ............................................................................................................................... 8

Rev. 1 5.8 - i
3. Timber............................................................................................................................ 8
5.8.2 NATURAL CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 9
A. General .......................................................................................................................... 9
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 9
2. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 9
5. References ................................................................................................................... 10
6. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 10
B. Tide and Water Levels .................................................................................................. 10
1. Datums ......................................................................................................................... 10
2. Tidal Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 10
3. Extreme Water Levels .................................................................................................. 14
4. Sea Rise ....................................................................................................................... 14
5. Bathymetry.................................................................................................................... 15
C. Waves and Currents ..................................................................................................... 15
1. Waves Generated by Winds ......................................................................................... 15
2. Ship Waves in Harbor ................................................................................................... 18
3. Currents ........................................................................................................................ 18
D. Wind .............................................................................................................................. 19
1. Wind Data ..................................................................................................................... 19
2. Extreme Wind Speeds .................................................................................................. 20
3. Directional Distribution of Wind .................................................................................... 20
5.8.3 LAND RECLAMATION ................................................................................................. 21
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 21
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 21
2. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 21
5. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 22
B. Design Considerations ................................................................................................. 22
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 22
2. Site Investigation .......................................................................................................... 22
3. Layout ........................................................................................................................... 22
4. Elevation ....................................................................................................................... 23

Rev. 1 5.8 - ii
5. Reclamation Methods ................................................................................................... 23

6. Fill ................................................................................................................................. 24
7. Construction of Seawalls, Revetments or Dikes .......................................................... 25
8. Drainage ....................................................................................................................... 25
C. Stability ......................................................................................................................... 25
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 25
2. Factor of Safety ............................................................................................................ 25
3. Stability Analysis Considerations.................................................................................. 25
4. Material Strength .......................................................................................................... 26
5. Design ........................................................................................................................... 26
6. Construction.................................................................................................................. 26
7. Long-term Stability ........................................................................................................ 27
D. Settlement..................................................................................................................... 27
1. Primary consolidation ................................................................................................... 27
2. Secondary Consolidation .............................................................................................. 27
3. Residual Settlement ..................................................................................................... 28
4. Estimation of Settlement ............................................................................................... 28
E. Monitoring ..................................................................................................................... 28
1. General ......................................................................................................................... 28
2. Monitoring Instruments ................................................................................................. 28
3. Pore Water Pressure Measurement ............................................................................. 29
4. Settlement Measurement ............................................................................................. 29
5. Lateral Deformation Measurement ............................................................................... 29
6. Instrument Monitoring Locations .................................................................................. 29
7. Monitoring of Stability During Fill Placement ................................................................ 30
8. Monitoring for Dredged Reclamation ............................................................................ 30
F. Miscellaneous Design Aspects ..................................................................................... 30
1. Piling ............................................................................................................................. 30
2. Culvert Foundations ..................................................................................................... 31
3. Structures and Facilities ............................................................................................... 31
5.8.4 BREAKWATERS, JETTIES, QUAY WALLS AND REVETMENTS .............................. 33
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 33
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 33
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 33
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 34

Rev. 1 5.8 - iii
4. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 34
5. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 34
7. References ................................................................................................................... 35
8. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 35
1. Breakwaters and Jetties ............................................................................................... 36
2. Quays ........................................................................................................................... 37
3. Revetments................................................................................................................... 38
4. General Design Criteria ................................................................................................ 40
5. Structure Hydraulic Response ...................................................................................... 42
6. Rubble Mound Structure Loading and Response ........................................................ 43
7. Vertical Front Structure Loading and Response .......................................................... 45
8. Foundation Loads ......................................................................................................... 46
9. Scour Protection ........................................................................................................... 47
10. Concrete Structural Design .......................................................................................... 47
11. Quay Design Criteria .................................................................................................... 48
5.8.5 DREDGING .................................................................................................................. 49
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 49
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 49
2. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 49
3. Codes ........................................................................................................................... 49
4. Standards ..................................................................................................................... 50
6. References ................................................................................................................... 50
7. Pertinent Organizations ................................................................................................ 50
8. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 51
9. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 51
1. Planning ........................................................................................................................ 51
2. Detailed Design ............................................................................................................ 52
3. Environmental Impacts ................................................................................................. 54
4. Permits.......................................................................................................................... 56
C. Project Execution .......................................................................................................... 56
1. Surveying ...................................................................................................................... 56

Rev. 1 5.8 - iv
2. Dredging tolerances ..................................................................................................... 57

3. Water Quality Monitoring .............................................................................................. 57
5.8.6 SHORELINE PROTECTION ........................................................................................ 59
A. General ......................................................................................................................... 59
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 59
2. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 59
3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 60
6. References ................................................................................................................... 61
7. Approvals ...................................................................................................................... 61
B. Functional Design ......................................................................................................... 61
1. Seawalls and Bulkheads .............................................................................................. 61
2. Revetments................................................................................................................... 62
3. Shoreline Use ............................................................................................................... 63
4. Seasonal Variations of Shoreline Profiles .................................................................... 63
5. Design Life .................................................................................................................... 64
6. Return Period................................................................................................................ 64
7. Design Water Levels .................................................................................................... 65
8. Design Wave ................................................................................................................ 65
9. Breaking Waves ........................................................................................................... 65
10. Height of Protection ...................................................................................................... 66
11. Wave Run-up ................................................................................................................ 66
12. Wave Overtopping ........................................................................................................ 66
13. Revetments................................................................................................................... 66
14. Armor Unit Stability ....................................................................................................... 66
15. Layer Thickness ........................................................................................................... 66
16. Toe Stability .................................................................................................................. 66
17. Filters ............................................................................................................................ 66
18. Flank Protection ............................................................................................................ 66
19. Corrosion ...................................................................................................................... 67
20. Stability against sliding and overturning ....................................................................... 67
21. Scour Protection ........................................................................................................... 67
22. Concrete Structural Design .......................................................................................... 67

Rev. 1 5.8 - v
5.8.1 GENERAL
A. Introduction
1. Purpose and Scope
a. The purpose of this Subsection is to offer guidance on the planning, design and
construction of marine works and structures. Works include harbor facilities, land
reclamation, coastal protection structures, navigation, intake and outfall channels,
construction and maintenance dredging, beaches and associated facilities.
b. Section 5.8 is divided into several subsections. Those subsections include:
1) Subsection 5.8.2 Natural Conditions
(a) This Subsection provides planning and engineering design guidance for
projects including:
(1) Data for natural conditions of seawater levels, tides, waves and
winds.
(2) Requirements for analysis of natural conditions for design of coastal
and marine improvements
2) Subsection 5.8.3 Land Reclamation
coastal land reclamation projects including:
(1) design considerations
(2) stability analysis,
(3) settlement assessment
(4) monitoring of reclamation works
3) Subsection 5.8.4 Breakwaters, Jetties, Quay Walls and Revetments
(a) This Subsection provides engineering, planning and design guidance for
projects including:
(1) Breakwaters and Jetties
(2) Quay Walls
(3) Revetments
(b) This Subsection does not address the following:
(1) Floating structures
(2) Groins
4) Subsection 5.8.5 Dredging
(a) This Subsection provides engineering, planning and design guidance for
dredging projects including:
(1) Navigation
(i) Dredging to construct or extend harbors, basins, canals,
marinas and other facilities.
(ii) Dredging to maintain existing facilities.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 1
(2) Construction and Reclamation

(i) Dredging to provide construction materials such as sand,
gravel, clay to be used for filling of low lying coastal areas.
(3) Other
(i) Excavating for underwater construction.
(ii) Excavating for placement of cables, pipelines or outfalls.
(1) Clean up dredging to remove spills or contaminated sediments.
(2) Earthwork including placement and dewatering of dredged material
for disposal or for engineered fill.
5) Subsection 5.8.6 Shoreline Protection
projects including:
(1) Sea Dikes
(2) Seawalls
(3) Bulkheads
(4) Revetments
(1) Groins
(2) Beach nourishment and drains
(3) Storm surge barriers
c. Because of the variable nature of the marine environment, the design of marine
works and structures relies particularly on the use of sound engineering judgment
and experience. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of the limitations of
the assumptions employed in a particular theoretical or computational method.
d. Since the marine environment is a field where active research and development are
continuing, it is beyond the scope of this section to cover all analysis and design
methods. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be prepared to explore other
methods to suit a particular problem and should also realize that methods will
continue to evolve as more data and research findings are available.
e. This section is arranged on a topical basis. It gives guidance and recommendations
on general operational, geotechnical, loading, material, durability, and maintenance
considerations and criteria relevant to the design of those marine works and
structures mentioned previously. Readers shall refer to other sections of the Guiding
Engineering Manual on particular aspects as necessary.
f. Any civil engineering works which are subject to contact with sea water such as
artificial beach, seawall, seawater intake/outfall and bridge pier shall be designed or
reviewed by competent marine/coastal engineers. Structures shall be designed to
accommodate coastal processes and actions, including damaging effects by
erosion, scour, current, hydrodynamic forces and wave attack.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 2
2. Definitions
a. “Draft” The depth of a vessel below the waterline measured vertically to the vessel's
base line or keel.
b. “Beam” The maximum breadth of a vessel.
c. “Tidal zone” The usual range between high and low water which is periodically
immersed.
d. “Splash zone” The zone from the high water level to the upper levels attained by
spray of seawater and subject to intermittent wetting and drying as waves run up or
break on the structure
3. Abbreviations
a. For a list of general abbreviations, refer to Section 2.2.
b. The following abbreviations and acronyms apply to this section:
1) A/E: Architect / Engineer
2) BS: British Standard
3) CIRIA: Construction Industry Research and Information Association
4) MOT: Ministry of Transportation
5) PIANC: World Association for Waterborne Transport Infrastructure
6) SA: Saudi Aramco
7) MAWANI: Saudi Ports Authority
8) SGS : Saudi Geological Survey
9) MarCom: Maritime Navigation Commission
10) IALA: International Association of Lighthouse Authorities
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of Codes and Standards. (Please add to Chapter 3):
1) Saudi Ports Authority (MAWANI) Rules and Regulations
2) Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) Rules and Regulations for Seaports
3) General Authority for Meteorology and Environment Protection (GAMEP)
General Environmental Regulation (GER)
c. Wherever reference is made to specific codes and standards in this section to be
met by the design, other internationally recognized standards and guidelines such
as UFC, CUR, OCIMF, EurOtop, IMO, BS, CIRIA and PIANC will be acceptable.
5. Related Sections
a. Subsection 4.4.2.H Off-shore Geotechnical Investigations
b. Section 5.2 Structural
c. Subsection 5.2.1.I Corrosion Protection
d. Subsection 5.8.2 Natural Conditions

Rev. 1 5.8 - 3
e. Subsection 5.8.3 Land Reclamation

f. Subsection 5.8.4 Breakwaters, Jetties, Quay Walls and Revetments
g. Subsection 5.8.5 Dredging
h. Subsection 5.8.6 Shore Protection
6. Related Guiding Procurement and Construction Specifications
a. Section 350530 Common Work Requirements (Results) for Coastal Construction
b. Section 350540 Common Work Requirements (Results) for Waterway Construction
c. Section 350550 Common Work Requirements (Results) for Marine Construction
7. References
a. Hong Kong Civil Engineering Office (2002). Port Works Design Manual
b. Maritime Navigation Commission (MarCom) (2014). Harbour Approach Channels:
Design Guidelines. MarCom Report 121, MarCom Working Group 121
c. Goda Y. (2000). Random Seas and Design of Maritime Structures
d. CIRIA - The Rock Manual: The use of rock in hydraulic engineering
e. Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC)
1) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.01, Soil Mechanics
2) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.02, Foundations & Earth Structures
f. Unified Facilities Criteria
1) UFC 4-152-07 Design: Small Craft Berthing Facilities
2) UFC 4-152-01, Design: Piers and Wharves
g. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE):
1) USACE EM 1110-2-1100, Coastal Engineering Manual (CEM)
2) USACE EM 1110-2-1614, Design of Coastal Revetments, Seawalls, and
Bulkheads
3) USACE EM 1110-2-1615, Hydraulic Design of Small Boat Harbors
4) USACE EM 1110-2-5025, Dredging and Dredged Material Management
5) USACE EM 1110-1-1904, Settlement Analysis
6) USACE EM 1110-1-1905, Bearing Capacity of Soils
7) USACE EM 1110-2-1902, Stability of Earth and Rockfill Dams
8) USACE EM 1110-2-2104, Strength Design for Reinforced Concrete Hydraulic
Structures
9) USACE EM 1110-2-2302, Construction with Large Stone
10) USACE EM 1110-2-2504, Design of Sheet Pile Walls
11) USACE EM 1110-2-2906, Design of Pile Foundations
8. Approvals

Rev. 1 5.8 - 4
a. The RCJ will review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications, refer to
Section 1.1.
B. Operational Considerations
1. General
a. This section gives guidance on general aspects such as the design life of structures,
ship data, requirements of approach channel and other operational considerations.
2. Third Party Requirements
a. Many of the operational requirements of marine works and structures are specific to
their particular functions. Appropriate advice shall be obtained from the client or the
operator, or other stakeholder such as the Saudi Ports Authority (MAWANI), Ministry
of Transportation (MOT), Saudi Aramco (SA) or other concerned government
departments and parties as appropriate on all operational matters.
3. Design Life
a. Unless special circumstances apply, the design life shall be taken to be a minimum
of 50 years for all marine structures.
4. Ship Data
a. Details and dimensions shall be obtained from MAWANI port/terminal operator,
owners and operators of the vessels to be accommodated, and those likely in the
anticipated lifetime of the structure. Where this is unavailable then works shall be
designed to prevailing industrial trends, statistics, practice, standards and codes.
Vessel characteristics to be considered include type, size and shape, ship handling
requirements, cargo or passenger handling requirements, and vessel servicing
requirements.
5. Current Conditions
a. Reclamation, dredging and major sea defense such as breakwaters may cause
changes in the pattern of tidal flow and consequently affect navigation, mooring and
berthing forces, siltation and water quality. During planning of the project, advice
shall be sought from the RCJ on whether detailed mathematical or numerical
modelling studies are necessary, and on the current conditions for navigation and
other vessel operations such as berthing and mooring.
6. Approach Channels
a. The required depth of channels may be calculated taking into account (but not
limited to) the loaded draft of the design vessel, tidal variations, waves, vessel squat,
trim and under keel clearance requirements (based on internationally recognized
standards and guidelines such as UFC, PIANC etc.).
b. The required width of channels (width at the dredged level) shall take into account
(but not limited to) the beam, speed and maneuverability of the design vessel,
passing criteria, channel depth and alignment, stability of channel banks, winds,
waves and currents or cross currents and availability of navigational aids (based on
internationally recognized standards and guidelines such as UFC, PIANC etc.).
c. Refer to MarCom (2014).
7. Navigation Aids
a. Aids to navigation are used to mark limits of structures such as piers, seawalls,
breakwaters and dolphins, channel entrances, boundaries and turns, and hidden

Rev. 1 5.8 - 5
dangers such as shoals and rock outcrops, to act as a guide for vessels and to
assist with their safe movement. The type, size, location and details of fittings and
fixtures for navigation aids shall be to the requirements of International Association
of Lighthouse Authorities (IALA) or MAWANI if applicable.
C. Geotechnical Considerations
1. Geotechnical investigations
a. Geotechnical investigations shall be per the requirements of Subsection 4.4.2.H Off-
shore Geotechnical Investigations.
2. Stability Analysis
a. Details of stability and settlement analysis for seawalls, breakwaters and
reclamation are given in Subsections 5.8.3, 5.8.4 and 5.8.6.
b. Geotechnical analysis shall be as per the requirements of Subsections 5.10.
3. Geology
a. Geologic data may be obtained from the Saudi Geological Survey (SGS) Center for
Marine Geology. Site specific studies may be needed when the required geological
information is not available from SGS.
D. Loading Considerations
1. General
a. In addition to dead loads, hydrostatic loads and soil pressure, other loads to be
considered include wind, temperature variation, tides, currents, waves, earthquakes,
and those loads imposed by operational activities such as berthing, mooring and
impacts.
b. Structural and Geotechnical analysis shall be as per the requirements of
Subsections 5.2 and 5.10.
2. Water and Waves
a. Load cases for water and wave loading are given in Subsection 5.8.4.
b. For calculating hydrostatic loads, freshwater and seawater densities may be taken
as
1) Freshwater 1000 kg/m3
2) Seawater ranges between 1028 - 1035 kg/m3
3. Live Loads
a. Live loads shall be based on the expected operational and future use of the facilities.
b. Loads shall be per Section 5.2 Structural. In addition, live loads for marine structures
shall be determined after consultation with the prospective users.
4. Continuous Live Loads
a. Live Loads under Storm Conditions
1) The live loads due to continuing operations under extreme environmental
conditions from winds, currents and waves may be taken as zero for piers and
dolphins unless there is a specific need or requirement for the pier to be used
during storm conditions, such as for emergencies or storage.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 6
2) For other structures, live loads due to continuing operations under extreme
environmental conditions shall be assessed by the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor.
5. Soil Pressure and Ground Water Profiles
a. Ground pore water pressures shall be determined with reference to tidal range, soil
permeability, drainage provisions, and any artesian ground water conditions.
b. Allowance shall be made for reduced passive resistance due to over dredging, scour
or underpinning.
c. The ground water condition is a critical factor in stability analysis. It is recommended
that the design water pressures be evaluated from field observations if possible and
based on estimated parameters if field observations are not available. A detailed
analysis shall be made considering at a minimum the following:
1) Tidal variation at the seaward side of the seawall.
2) Water inflow and groundwater seepage from landward and from seaward
sides of the seawall.
3) Rate and duration of overtopping water under severe wave conditions.
4) Type and permeability of soil allowing water to seep behind, through and
under the structure.
5) Drainage measures provided for surface and ground water control around the
structure.
6. Currents
a. Where no detailed information is available from measurement or modeling, design
current velocity shall be a minimum 1 m/s.
b. Direction of the design current shall be determined based on measurement,
modeling or as determined by the designer to be the worst case loading condition.
7. Berthing and Mooring
a. Berthing and mooring loads and calculation method are given in Subsection 5.8.4.
E. Construction Materials
1. Concrete
1) Reinforced concrete for marine structures shall meet the requirements in
Subsection 5.8.4.B.10.c.
2) Corrosion protection of reinforced concrete for marine structures shall be
suitably addressed by controlling concrete and steel materials, cover
thickness, and/or providing other protection methods as per the requirements
of Subsection 5.2.6.
b. Unreinforced Concrete
1) Unreinforced concrete for marine structures shall meet the requirements in
Subsection 5.8.4.B.10.c.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 7
2) Unreinforced concrete shall have a minimum specified compressive strength

of 20 MPa and shall also fulfil the corrosion protection recommendations of
Subsection 5.2.6.
c. Underwater Concrete
1) Reinforced concrete placed under water shall be avoided. The use of
unreinforced concrete is preferred for underwater construction. Precast
elements with corrosion protection as per 5.2.6 can be also used.
2) Underwater concrete placed by tremie or any other method is affected by
washout loss and water infiltration during the casting and post-casting stages.
Compressive strength of core samples taken from concrete placed by tremie
can be significantly lower than that of standard specimen with the same mix.
Maximum design compressive strength for concrete placed underwater shall
be limited to 25 MPa. Grade of concrete specified in order to achieve this
condition shall be at least 10 MPa higher than the design compressive
strength. Additionally, the material and construction method shall meet the
requirements of ACI 304R.
2. Steel
a. Structural steel in marine structures shall be weld-able structural steel complying
with Subsection 5.2.1.
b. Corrosion Protection
1) It is recommended that all structural steelwork above sea-bed level, whether
fully immersed, within the tidal or splash zones, or generally above the splash
zone, be fully protected against corrosion for the design life of the structure as
per the requirements of Subsection 5.2.6.
2) Protective coatings are not recommended as permanent corrosion protection
except where those coated structural elements are fully exposed to allow
periodic maintenance and re-coating or replacement.
3) Cathodic protection shall be applied to protect steel below seabed,
submerged and in splash zone in addition to protective coating. The
protective coating, cathodic protection and monitoring shall be per Subsection
5.2.6.
c. Stainless Steel
1) Stainless steel may be required for elements of marine structures. Austenitic
stainless steel grade 316 is allowable. Grade 304 stainless steel shall not be
used.
2) Cathodic protection shall be applied to protect stainless steel below seabed,
submerged and in splash zone. The cathodic protection and its monitoring
shall be per Subsection 5.2.6.H.
3. Timber
a. When timber is used for permanent marine structures, whether in direct contact with
sea or brackish water or not, the designer shall advise the RC of the expected
design life. Timber structures shall only be adopted where alternative forms of
construction and materials, including use of composites, would result in a costlier
structure.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 8
SUBSECTION 5.8.2 NATURAL CONDITIONS
5.8.2 NATURAL CONDITIONS
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides planning and engineering design guidance for projects
including:
1) Data for natural conditions of seawater levels, tides, waves and winds.
2) Requirements for analysis of natural conditions for design of coastal and
marine improvements
2. Abbreviations
2) ARAMCO: Saudi Arabian Oil Company
5) HAT: Highest Astronomic Tide
7) LAT: Lowest Astronomic Tide
8) MAJAS: Madinat Al-Jubail Al-Sinaiyah
9) MHWS: Mean High Water Springs
10) MHHWS: Mean Higher High Water Springs
11) MLWS: Mean Low Water Springs
12) MLLWS: Mean Lower Low Water Springs
13) MSL: Mean Sea Level
14) RCD: Royal Commission Datum
16) UK: United Kingdom
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of Codes and Standards.
as BS, CIRIA and PIANC may be acceptable.
4. Related Sections
a. Subsection 5.8.3 Land Reclamation
b. Subsection 5.8.4 Breakwaters, Jetties, Quay Walls and Revetments

Rev. 1 5.8 - 9
c. Subsection 5.8.5 Dredging

d. Subsection 5.8.6 Shoreline Protection
5. References
a. Goda Y. (2000). Random Seas and Design of Maritime Structures
6. Approvals
reference Section 1.1.
B. Tide and Water Levels
1. Datums
a. Elevations and water levels in Jubail Industrial City shall be based on the RCD for
Jubail which is approximately the same as the Lowest Astronomic Tide (LAT)
b. Elevations and water levels in Ras Al Khair shall be based on the RIC Datum which
is based on the Ma’aden MSL.
c. Refer to Subsection 4.4.1.E for additional information on chart and land datum
measurements.
2. Tidal Characteristics
a. Time Meridian
1) The time meridian used for tidal analyses and predictions shall be 45° E
(Local Saudi Arabia Time, which is 3 hours ahead of Greenwich Mean Time).
b. Tide Predictions
1) Tidal predictions for JIC are made, updated and published yearly by the
Urban Planning Department.
(a) Predictions are made for the following areas:
(1) King Fahad Industrial Port Area
(2) Haii Al Fanateer Marina, Eastern Coastline Area of Jubail Industrial
City (MAJAS)
(b) Refer to FIGURE 5.8.2.A for the location of tide gages.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 10
FIGURE 5.8.2.A: AREA OF APPLICATION OF JIC TIDAL PREDICTION

TABLES
c. Meteorological Effects
1) Tides are mixed semi-diurnal. Large tidal range occurs twice a month during
spring tides when the moon is full or new. Small tidal range occurs during
neaps when the moon is at its first or last quarter. In general, the two high
tides and the low tides which occur each day are unequal in height.
2) Changes in meteorological conditions are considered in analysis of standard
tide predictions. These changes do not repeat themselves exactly from year
to year and hence meteorological conditions different from those assumed will
cause corresponding differences in sea level from those obtained from the
tidal prediction analyses. Variations in tidal heights are mainly caused by
strong and / or prolonged winds and by unusually high and low barometric
pressure.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 11
3) The barometric pressure in Jubail shows a seasonal variation with

consistently higher pressure being recorded in the winter months than during
the summer. Mean Sea Level is therefore correspondingly higher in summer.
4) Short term barometric changes are normal during winter shamals when
squalls associated with the passage of cold fronts moving from the northwest
end of the Gulf towards the southeast result in a slight drop in pressure with
the passage of the cold front. The water level does not, however, adjust itself
immediately to a change of pressure and, moreover, it responds to the
average change in pressure over a considerable area.
5) The effect of wind on sea level is complex and variable depending on local
topography. In general, a strong wind blowing onshore will result in a higher
water level than that expected and the reverse effect is produced by an
offshore wind.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of the effects from potential
tsunami or/and meteotsunami and they can incorporate their predictions, if
any, in the design.
7) Tidal prediction data in Jubail is produced from harmonic analysis of the tidal
data obtained at the tide gauges as shown in FIGURE 5.8.2.A. The
observation periods used for the most recent analysis are as follows:
(a) Industrial Port: 1 January 1981 to Today
(b) Al Fanateer: 23 December 1990 to Today
8) While no long term tidal observation in RIC is available, two (2) consultants,
HR Wallingford and Worley Parsons have previously carried out tidal analysis
and the results are tabulated in RIC Master Plan.
d. Tidal Prediction Tables
1) Tidal Prediction tables for JIC are given yearly by the Urban Planning
Department. An example of that information is given in TABLE 5.8.2.A.
2) Tidal predictions for Ras Al Khair are given in TABLE 5.8.2.B.
TABLE 5.8.2.A: TIDAL PREDICTIONS
Tide Industrial Port Al Fanateer

Highest Recorded Tide 2.54 m 2.55 m
Highest Astronomic Tide 2.35 m 2.29 m
Mean Higher High Water Springs* 2.12 m* 2.09 m*
Mean High Water Springs 1.89 m 1.78 m
Mean High Water Neaps 1.62 m 1.66 m
Mean Sea Level 1.27 m 1.26 m
Aramco Datum 1.14 m 1.14 m
Mean Low Water Neaps 0.88 m 0.92 m
Mean Low Water Springs 0.66 m 0.76 m
Mean Lower Low Water Springs* 0.40 m* 0.41 m*

Rev. 1 5.8 - 12
Tide Industrial Port Al Fanateer

Indian Spring Low Water 0.30 m 0.31 m
Lowest Astronomic Tide 0.18 m 0.17 m
Royal Commission Datum 0.00 m 0.00 m
Lowest Recorded Tide -0.06 m -0.09 m
Table Notes:
1) * MHHWS and MLLWS are not shown on the published table and estimated
by Engineering Department. For large scale projects, it is recommended that
A/E and/or EPC Contractor recalculate these values based on the latest tidal
data.
TABLE 5.8.2.B: TIDAL PREDICTIONS
Tide Ras Az Zawr Port

HR Wallingford Worley
Parsons
Highest Astronomic Tide 1.75 m 2.1m
Mean High High Water 1.43 m 1.9m
Mean Low High Water 1.13 m 1.17m
Mean Sea Level 0.93 m -
Mean High Low Water 0.86 m 0.93m
Mean Low Low Water 0.36 m 0.3m
Lowest Astronomic Tide 0.00 m 0.00m
Table Notes:
1) These 2 predictions show significant discrepancy. Although these levels may
be used for small scale projects, it is recommended that more detailed tidal
observations and analysis are carried out and this table is updated.
2) Tidal Levels by HR Wallingford inferred by interpolating between secondary
ports at a distance of between 35km and 60km away.
e. Tidal prediction graphs are also published, refer to FIGURE 5.8.2.B for an example
in JIC. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall use the data in the latest publication.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 13
FIGURE 5.8.2.B: EXAMPLE TIDAL PREDICTION GRAPH
3. Extreme Water Levels

a. Extreme water levels are necessary for design analysis and shall conform to the
return periods and design life of the structures analyzed. Typical extreme water level
return periods analyzed will range from 1-year up to 100-year, corresponding to a
structural design life up to 50-years. Higher values may be warranted for critical
facilities.
4. Sea Rise
a. The estimation of the future sea level rise need to be accordance to the latest/up-to-
date report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) that is related

Rev. 1 5.8 - 14
to the Sea Level Rise. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall be aware of the
limitations of the assumptions employed in the IPCC published report.
b. Sea level rise shall be included in the estimation of wave heights and water levels in
the design of all permanent marine structures.
c. Sea level rise and wave height shall be combined to produce the most severe low
and high water levels for design.
5. Bathymetry
a. Bathymetric data may be obtained from the RCJ for use in estimating water depths.
The bathymetric data needs to be recently updated and especially after a significant
change of the sea bed level (ex. dredging, underwater construction, etc.).
b. Accurate and detailed current information is normally required for design purposes
which may require that supplemental data be acquired for design.
C. Waves and Currents
1. Waves Generated by Winds
a. General
1) Estimates of extreme wave conditions shall ideally be obtained by
extrapolating a series of wave measurements made at or close to the site.
However, because of the relatively high cost of setting up a wave recording
system, and the need for records covering a suitably long period to enable
sufficiently reliable extrapolation, direct wave record may not be available for
the design of marine works or structures.
2) The most severe wave conditions are usually associated with storm waves
and, in the absence of wave records, wave forecasting from long-term wind
records, if available, may be used to predict such conditions.
3) Waves propagating into project areas are likely to be transformed by
processes such as refraction, diffraction, reflection, shoaling, breaking and
seabed friction. These processes may have significant influence on the wave
climate in the area to be studied and may require more sophisticated analysis
be carried out. Computer numerical simulation software models are available
for such analysis and are recommended for use in studying the wave
transformation in complex areas.
b. Wave Characteristics
1) Both wind waves and swells or a combination of both shall be considered in
the analysis.
2) Wave Propagation
(a) Wave propagation including deep-water propagation, shallow water
shoaling, refraction, diffraction, reflection and wave attenuation shall be
considered.
(b) The following are typical scenarios for wave propagation and shall be
investigated in design:
(1) Case 1: Sea state with wind waves and swells - A storm generates
deep water waves that propagate across shallower water while the
waves continue to grow due to wind.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 15
(2) Case 2: Sea state with wind waves only - Wind blows over the water
areas around the site of interest and generates waves that
propagate to the site. In this case, there is no propagation of waves
as swells from a remote area.
(3) Case 3: Sea state with swells only - A storm generates winds in an
area remote from the site of interest and as waves cross shallower
water with negligible wind, they propagate to the site as swells.
(c) Cases 1 and 2 shall be evaluated with a numerical model. Case 3 may
be approximated by assuming the swell is a monochromatic wave and
manual refraction and shoaling calculation methods may be used to
estimate nearshore waves.
c. Wave Parameters
1) Wave parameters may be estimated by the following methods:
(a) Wave Train
(1) Estimate the value of the significant wave height, Hs
(2) Estimate the significant wave period
(3) Estimate the mean wave period
(4) Use Rayleigh distribution for maximum deep water wave heights
(5) Use wave transformation method by Goda (2000) in the surf zone
(b) Spectral Method
(1) Estimate the value of the spectral significant wave height, H m0
(zeroth moment) and the peak period
(2) Estimate the value of the significant wave height based on the
relationship Hs = 0.95 Hm0 (deep water)
(3) Use wave transformation method by Goda (2000) in the surf zone
d. Wave Prediction
1) Wind Data
(a) Wind data may be used in wave prediction if wave data are not available.
(b) Wind speed at the level of 10 m above mean sea level shall generally be
used for wave prediction analysis.
(c) Wind speed shall be adjusted from the duration of the observation to an
averaging time appropriate for wave prediction.
(d) Wind data collected inland may not be appropriate for use in wave
prediction.
(e) Adjustments may be required by large sheltering topographical features.
2) Wave Measurement
(a) Estimates of extreme wave conditions by extrapolation of measured
wave data are only reliable if the original data are derived from a large
number of years.
3) Mathematical Modeling

Rev. 1 5.8 - 16
(a) The use of mathematical models to estimate the wave conditions is

recommended for water areas with variable bottom topography and
shoreline configuration and subject to the effect of swells and wind
waves.
(b) Where mathematical wave modelling is applied, a modelling report shall
be prepared to describe the wave spectrum employed and the modelling
approach, procedures and results, and shall include the following
information:
(1) Wave Spectrum
(i) The frequency spectrum and directional spreading function
employed shall be stated.
(2) Types of Wave Models
(i) The type of models and their principles, assumptions and
limitations shall be specified.
(3) Site Analysis
(i) This shall include the layout of shorelines, seabed irregularity,
water depth and the exposures of the site to different incoming
wind or wave directions. Special features such as presence of
shoals, seabed depressions, navigation channels, islands,
headlands and structures shall be highlighted.
(4) Model Set-up
(i) This shall include location and layout of shoreline, islands and
structures, bathymetry, water level, wind speed, duration and
direction, wave height, period and direction, model boundary
and boundary conditions, computational grid and time steps
and other modelling parameters such as bottom friction, wave
breaking index or direction spread of waves.
(5) Calibration
(i) Evidence of calibration such as comparison of modelled results
with measured data, sensitivity tests on variation of input
parameters and accuracy achieved, shall be presented in the
report.
e. Wave Breaking
1) The wave heights in the breaking wave region or the surf zone do not follow a
Rayleigh distribution as larger wave heights break under the limited water
depth. If a structure is found to be inside a surf zone, the Goda (2000) formula
may be used to estimate the significant wave height and the maximum wave
height in the surf zone.
f. Physical Wave Modelling
1) In general, mathematical wave modeling is sufficient. Physical modeling may
be recommended for the following cases:
(a) Complicated bathymetry in front of a structure causes significant
variations in the near-structure sea state.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 17
(b) Detailed structural design aspects related to run-up, overtopping, toe

scour, rock or armoring movements have to be clarified.
2. Ship Waves in Harbor
a. Design of marine facilities shall take ship waves into consideration in the design.
Waves may be estimated using mathematical modeling or by physical
measurement.
3. Currents
a. General
1) Estimation of currents will be required for sedimentation studies.
2) Existing data may be available from the RCJ for past projects. Otherwise, field
measurements are recommended.
b. Field Measurements
1) Planning of the field measurement work and the period of measurement shall
consider the meteorological and tidal characteristics of the area of interest.
2) Work plan shall include proposed measurement locations and specifications.
The plan shall consider requirements for current characteristic analysis,
estimation of tidal current ellipse parameters, reverse flow and circulation.
3) The minimum observation period shall be a complete tidal cycle which is
about 25 hours for two high tides and two low tides.
4) Field measurement shall be made in such a way as to provide full information
on the velocity profile at the monitoring point.
c. Current Prediction
1) Mathematical modelling is necessary to provide realistic estimation of the
characteristics of the flow field in coastal waters as the flow systems in these
areas are complex due to irregular shoreline, variable bathymetry and a
number of interacting tidal, wave, current, wind, pressure and density gradient
forcing conditions.
2) General principles on mathematical flow modelling are given in the following
paragraphs.
(a) Model Category
(1) Two-dimensional flow models are generally acceptable.
(b) Model Set-up
(1) Setting up a mathematical flow model involves the establishment of
the shoreline, bathymetry, model boundary and boundary flow
conditions, wind field, computational grid and values of other
physical parameters such as drainage or cooling water outfall
discharges and bottom friction of the seabed. In general, the
following aspects shall be noted:
(i) The shoreline in the model shall take into account known and
foreseeable reclamation or marine structures constructed along
the shore.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 18
(ii) The model boundaries shall be set as far away from the areas
of interest as possible.
(iii) The computational grid shall reflect the details of the shoreline
configuration, bathymetry and sized to yield the required
resolution of the current vectors in the area of interest.
(iv) The seabed bathymetry shall be accurately represented in the
model.
(i) Sensitivity testing with respect to boundary conditions, model
grid, depth resolutions and forcing functions shall be conducted
to verify the adequacy of the model performance.
3) Calibration
(a) The application of a mathematical flow model shall involve a calibration
procedure in which the model is run to compare with the hydrodynamic
flow field of a specific period in which field data have been collected.
(b) In calibration, model parameters such as boundary conditions, seabed
bottom friction or depth resolution are adjusted to optimize the
comparison of computed data to field data.
(c) Mathematical models may be calibrated using data from physical flow
measurements or modeling.
4) Simulation Conditions
(a) The flow conditions to be simulated shall take into account the variability
under different seasons and tidal periods. In general, the following
situations shall be considered in mathematical flow modelling:
(1) Flow during flood and ebb tides.
(2) Flow in spring and neap tides.
(3) Seasonal flow variation.
5) Modelling Report
(a) A mathematical modelling report shall be prepared to summarize the
modelling approach, procedures and the computation results, and shall
include the following details:
(1) Type of model employed and the principle, assumptions, limitations
and range of applicability.
(2) Model boundary and computational grid.
(3) Bathymetry of the modelled area.
(4) Input data, including boundary conditions, wind speed and direction,
drainage and outfall discharge and other physical parameters.
(5) Calibration results and accuracy achieved.
D. Wind
1. Wind Data
a. Wind data may be obtained from the various sources including, but not limited to,
the RCJ and UK Met office.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 19
b. Wind data used for estimating waves and currents shall meet the requirements in
Subsection 5.8.2.C.1.d.1).
2. Extreme Wind Speeds
a. Extreme wind speeds may be estimated from hindcast data. Wind speeds shall be
compared with local site data.
b. Wind speeds for use in wave and current analysis shall be estimated for return
periods consistent with the design life, refer to Subsection 5.8.4.B.4.a.3).
c. Design wind speeds and direction shall result in the 100-year hydrodynamic forcing,
not just the 100 year wind speed.
d. For conversion of mean hourly wind speeds to durations of less than one hour, the
following factors may be used:
Duration Conversion Factor
1 minute 1.19
5 minutes 1.11
20 minutes 1.05
Note that higher adjustment factors may be appropriate in local areas where surface
roughness and topography act to increase wind gust speeds.
3. Directional Distribution of Wind
a. Directional distribution of wind shall be estimated for use in estimation of waves and
currents.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 20
SUBSECTION 5.8.3 LAND RECLAMATION
5.8.3 LAND RECLAMATION
A. General
1. Introduction
a. This Subsection provides planning and engineering design guidance for coastal land
reclamation projects including:
1) design considerations
2) stability analysis
3) settlement assessment
4) monitoring of reclamation works
b. The following types of structures which may be used to help protect the shoreline of
the reclamation area during and after construction are discussed in Subsections
5.8.4 and 5.8.6:
1) Sea Dikes
2) Floodwalls
3) Revetments
4) Bulkheads
5) Breakwaters
2. Abbreviations
4) CPT: Cone Penetration Test
5) SPT: Standard Penetration Test
6) MHHWS: Mean Higher High Water Springs
7) MLLWS: Mean Lower Low Water Springs
b. Refer to Chapter 3 for a list of codes and standards.
as BS, CIRIA and PIANC will be acceptable.
4. Related Sections
a. Subsection 4.4.2 Geotechnical Investigations

Rev. 1 5.8 - 21
b. Subsection 4.4.3 Environmental Investigations & Studies

c. Subsection 5.8.4 Breakwaters, Jetties, Quay Walls and Revetments
d. Subsection 5.8.5 Dredging
e. Subsection 5.8.6 Shoreline Protection
f. Subsection 5.10 Geotechnical Design
5. Approvals
reference Section 1.1.
B. Design Considerations
1. General
a. This Subsection gives comments and guidance on the design of reclamation
covering such aspects as the reclamation layout, elevation, reclamation methods,
fill, treatment of fill, environmental impacts, and drainage impacts.
b. The purpose of reclamation is to provide coastal land for roadways, residential
development, beach nourishment, port and industrial uses or to improve hydraulic
conditions by modifying the coastline.
2. Site Investigation
a. Site investigation shall be carried out prior to the design of reclamation.
b. In addition to normal geotechnical investigations required for marine work, the
investigations shall cover potential sources of fill materials.
c. In-situ and laboratory testing of soil samples from within the proposed reclamation
area shall be carried out to determine the types, strength, settlement and
permeability characteristics of the underlying soils.
d. Geotechnical site investigation shall be by methods in Subsection 4.4.2.
3. Layout
a. The major factors restricting the extent of reclamation are the water depth, the need
to maintain moorings and marine traffic channels and clearances, and environmental
implications.
b. The effect of a proposed reclamation on the hydraulic regime must be considered.
Investigations shall include hydraulic study of the currents, waves and sediment
transport, environmental impact assessment and marine traffic impact assessment
to ensure that there are no unacceptable effects with respect to:
1) Change in normal and extreme wave climates
2) Tidal flushing and water quality
3) Ecology
4) Siltation and seabed scour
5) Shoreline stability of existing beaches
6) Navigation of large and small vessels
7) Operation of piers, wharves and cargo-handling areas

Rev. 1 5.8 - 22
8) Flooding due to tides combined with storm surge

c. The effect of the reclamation on the groundwater regime shall also be investigated.
d. Marine-frontage related uses, such as piers, wharves, cargo handling areas,
seawater intakes, storm water and sewerage outfalls, shall be identified at an early
stage. The proposed locations of such structures, areas and facilities will need to be
known, at least in general terms, prior to the detailed investigations referred to
above.
4. Elevation
a. Before deciding on the final elevation(s) l for a reclamation project, the following
aspects shall be considered:
1) Availability and cost of fill
2) Urgency of the land development
3) Existing ground, road and drain levels of adjacent developments
4) Residual settlement of the fill and underlying marine and alluvial soils
5) Type of seawall, dike or shoreline revetment and the extent of wave
overtopping expected
6) Normal and extreme water levels due to tides combined with storm surge
7) Proposed land use of the reclamation and the sea frontage
8) Possible long-term increase in mean sea level
9) Final reclaimed finished ground level after considering the above all factors
b. All reclamations shall be considered individually. The consequences of adopting a
particular reclamation level shall be fully investigated before determining the most
appropriate level in each case.
5. Reclamation Methods
a. Two main reclamation methods are commonly used for reclamation on soft marine
seabed layers, the drained method and the dredged method.
1) The drained method leaves the soft marine deposit in place, and
consolidation may be accelerated by the use of vertical band or wick drains
with or without surcharge preloading.
2) The dredged method involves the removal and disposal of soft marine
deposits before placing the fill.
b. A third method is placing fill directly on existing sandy in-situ deposits with no
removal or treatment of the surface. This requires the existing soils to be strong
enough to support the fill and permeable enough to consolidate/compress within the
required time period.
c. Drained Method
1) Typical sequence and requirements are:
(a) If necessary, place separation geotextile on the sea bed.
(b) Place granular blanket layer
(c) Installation of vertical drains

Rev. 1 5.8 - 23
(d) Place fill in controlled, thin lifts.

(e) Stability analysis shall be conducted to determine the need and design of
the geotextile, drainage system and lift thickness and placement rate.
(f) Monitoring of drainage, pore water pressure and settlement is required
during construction.
d. Dredged Method
1) Dredging is used to remove all or part of the soft or organic marine or alluvial
deposits below the proposed reclamation area prior to placing the fill.
2) Construction of drainage blanket and vertical drains may still be required,
however the time required for settlement of the fine grained lower layers will
be shortened.
3) Partial dredging will require closer construction control to avoid future
differential settlement.
6. Fill
a. Fill sources include borrow material from inland areas and dredged sand. Inland
borrow material may be used where it is available, however in general it may not be
readily available within short haul distances.
b. Requirements for hydraulic fill material obtained from dredging
(a) Sand shall be free from organic and other deleterious materials. Suitable
material shall have less than 10% fines. Lenses of silty or clayey material
shall be avoided.
(b) Clayey and silty sand material may be used, but may require significantly
more effort to achieve the specified compaction level to limit settlement.
(c) Contractor may be required to carry out trial dredging to identify areas
where suitable fill material can be obtained.
(d) Material placed immediately behind seawalls, dikes and bulkheads shall
be free draining granular material to avoid the unnecessary buildup of
water pressure due to tidal lag or ground water flow.
(e) The material and method for placement under water shall be capable of
achieving relatively high density fill without additional compaction.
c. Typical methods for improving the settlement characteristics of the fill, if
densification is required, include surcharge pre-loading and mechanical (vibratory or
dynamic) compaction. Surcharge pre-loading may be beneficial when the schedule
allows for the settlement to occur and where the excess material for pre-loading is
available and may be used for adjacent construction purposes. Otherwise,
mechanical compaction shall be used.
d. Confinement may be required for placement or disposal of dredged sand and fine
grained materials. Containment dikes create a confined surface area into which
dredged material may be pumped in. The dikes are designed to have sufficient
capacity to contain the volume of dredged material being added and to allow
sufficient retention time for solids to settle and for water to be discharged allowing
the dredged material to dry and consolidate. Confinement may also be used to
prevent loss of fill material due to marine erosion at the seaward perimeter of the
reclamation area.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 24
e. Requirements for fill compaction and densification shall generally be based on the
relative density. Relative density may be correlated with results of in-situ tests such
as Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and Cone Penetration Tests (CPT).
Requirements for relative density and corresponding SPT and/or CPT shall be
based on the geotechnical and structural requirements for the project.
f. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall specify minimum requirements for relative density,
and/or an approximate SPT and/or CPT resistance considering future usage of the
reclaimed land.
g. Fill design and compaction shall be by methods in Subsection 5.10.
7. Construction of Seawalls, Revetments or Dikes
a. Guidance on the design of seawalls, revetments or dikes, normally accompanying a
reclamation project, is given in Subsection 5.8.4.
b. The reclamation sequencing may be affected by the construction of the seawall at
the constructed coastline.
c. Fill placement for the seawall either for the foundation or for backfill may affect the
stability of the reclamation fill adjacent to the seawall. Seawall fill placement shall be
completed prior to placing fill adjacent behind the seawall foundation.
8. Drainage
a. A reclamation project may cause impacts on drainage and flooding by altering the
existing drainage paths and regime, or by increasing the burden on the existing
drainage system. A drainage impact assessment is necessary at an early stage of
the planning and design in order to assess potential drainage and flooding problems.
It must determine the necessary temporary drainage diversion and permanent
drainage measures to ensure acceptable drainage performance in areas upstream,
adjacent to and inside the reclamation during and after the construction of the
reclamation.
C. Stability
1. General
a. The reclamation fill sequence, dredged fill placement level, spacing of vertical
drains, magnitude and duration of surcharging are largely determined by stability
and settlement criteria.
2. Factor of Safety
1) Factor of safety for embankments against global slope stability failure shall be
kept at or above 1.3 at all stages of construction (with also at least 1.1 when
seismic loading is added) and at least 1.5 after the end of construction.
3. Stability Analysis Considerations
a. Slope stability analysis for reclamation fill embankments shall consider high ground
water levels in the fill in conjunction with high and low tide levels. Rapid drawdown
shall be considered for after storm or high tide condition.
1) High tide condition shall be based on MHHWS
2) Low tide shall be based on MLLWS
3) Maximum and minimum groundwater levels used for seepage analysis shall
be based on the estimated residual groundwater level based on transient
seepage analysis using the MHHWS and the MLLWS tide conditions.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 25
4) Groundwater levels may be based on piezo metric measurements at the

project site
b. If there are existing structures or developments adjacent to the reclamation fill site,
the stability of the temporary slopes of the dredged surface shall be checked to
ensure that the factor of safety is adequate
c. Allowance shall be made for temporary material pile and equipment loads.
d. Each project shall be assessed on its merits and, where justified, a higher factor of
safety shall be used.
e. Stability analysis shall be assessed by methods as detailed in Section 5.10. Stability
analyses of total stresses based on undrained shear strength parameters shall be
limited to those cases where short-term stability is being assessed. Long-term
stability of slopes and embankments shall be considered, and the stability in both
cohesion less and cohesive soils, shall adopt effective stress methods of analysis.
f. In cutting slopes, the analysis shall take account of the removal of overburden due
to dredging or above water excavation.
g. In construction of embankments on cohesive soils, the analysis shall consider gain
in strength due to the consolidation under load or imposed actions, including the
controlled rate of placement of fill to maintain stability.
4. Material Strength
a. Marine and alluvial deposits
1) Undrained and drained strengths shall be assessed for fine grained materials
including silts and clays.
2) Quick Undrained Triaxial (QUT) tests may be used to obtain undrained shear
strength, but if possible, should also be evaluated against vane shear testing
results which are considered to be more reliable due to sampling disturbance
for the tri-axial tests. CPT may be used for preliminary evaluation and to
provide supplemental data.
3) Consolidated undrained triaxial (CUT), consolidated drained triaxial (CDT),
ring shear or other RCJ approved laboratory tests may be used to obtain
effective stress parameters.
4) Effective stress parameters for cohesion less soils shall be assessed by
correlations with SPT and CPT, grading and shear box testing.
b. Reclamation Fill
1) For dredged sand fill, the strength used in the stability analysis shall reflect
the in-situ density of the fill at the current construction stage.
5. Design
a. The geometry of reclamation, including side slope, layer thickness and dimensions
of berms (if any) shall be designed to ensure the required factor of safety against
failure
b. The practical verification of this requires checking of the equilibrium of the soil mass
along a sufficient number of arbitrarily selected failure surfaces to find the minimum
value of the factor of safety for each reclamation stage.
6. Construction

Rev. 1 5.8 - 26
a. For drained reclamation with fill placement in shallow water onto marine mud and
silt, bearing capacity is low and is likely to cause mud waves if the bearing and
shear capacity of the foundation materials is exceeded. Stability analysis must be
completed for the design and again to account for any changes made to the design
or changes observed in the foundation conditions during construction.
b. A geotextile separation layer installed on the seabed before reclamation fill is placed
provides separation between the fill and the underlying marine mud preventing the
punching of the fill into the seabed and helps to prevent the creation of mud waves.
Geotextiles shall be installed with required lapping or seaming at the joints. Close
site supervision and careful inspection after installation is required to ensure the
proper functioning of the geotextile.
c. The reclamation sequence shall be carefully planned to make sure that the schedule
of foundation preparation and seawall or dike construction are compatible with the
intake rate of fill. Stockpiling must not be allowed where it might cause slope failure.
7. Long-term Stability
a. Where reclamation is ultimately enclosed by seawalls or dikes, the long-term
stability of a reclaimed area depends on whether the seawalls are capable of
retaining the fill. Guidance on design related to the stability of seawalls and dikes is
given in Subsection 5.8.4 and 5.8.6.
D. Settlement
1. Primary consolidation
a. Consolidation is the gradual reduction in the volume of a fully-saturated soil due to
the drainage of pore water. The speed of this process depends on the loading
condition and permeability.
b. Consolidation calculations for soft or clayey marine soils shall include the following
assumptions:
1) If vertical drains are used, the length of the effective drainage path shall be
reduced.
(a) Smear Effect shall be considered for vertical drains and shall be
estimated based on the installation method for the drains.
(b) Well resistance shall be included and appropriate for the capacity and
length of the drains.
2) If preloading is adopted, the applied loading shall include the surcharge load
and duration of application.
3) For variable soil conditions, the calculation shall be broken down into layers
representing each soil horizon with the appropriate physical properties.
4) Loading times shall be consistent with the estimated or actual construction
schedule.
c. Primary consolidation of granular and sand fill may be assumed to be complete at
the end of construction.
2. Secondary Consolidation
a. Secondary consolidation (creep) is the long-term settlement under constant effective
stress. In clay, it is due to the squeezing out of the water adsorbed on the clay
particles.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 27
b. Secondary consolidation caused by further development on the reclaimed land shall

be mitigated by design.
3. Residual Settlement
a. Residual settlement is the amount of future settlement of the in-situ soils and fill
expected to occur, from a given time.
b. For the purpose of calculating residual settlement, a period of 50 years may be
adopted to give the ultimate value.
c. Settlement of a reclaimed area will generally continue for a considerable time after
completion of filling, but at a decreasing rate. Residual settlement shall be calculated
from the following milestone dates:
1) Completion date of filling
2) Planned development date of the reclaimed land
d. Where development is anticipated to begin at the completion of filling, residual
settlement (including creep) shall be limited to the values compatible with future
development of the site.
e. In general, residual settlement after completion of construction should be limited to
not more than a maximum of 150 mm to 300 mm, depending on the type,
importance, stability and usage of the structure and site requirements. For
settlement-sensitive installations or facilities, more stringent requirements shall be
specified in accordance with the structural design and end-user requirements.
f. The amount of residual settlement estimated in the design stage shall be verified by
field monitoring data.
4. Estimation of Settlement
a. Settlement shall be assessed by assigning material properties as determined from
site investigation and laboratory testing methods, as outlined in Subsection 4.4.2.
Estimated settlements shall be determined in accordance with analysis methods
outlined in Section 5.10.
E. Monitoring
1. General
a. Instrument monitoring of reclaimed areas provides data for assessing the adequacy
of both the sub-soil and reclaimed fill with respect to stability and settlement. This
chapter gives general guidance on the planning of instrument monitoring for a
reclamation plan and outlines the functions of some typical monitoring instruments.
b. Pore water pressure, settlement and lateral deformation monitoring and
measurement may not be required for reclamation with sand material on sand sea
bed.
2. Monitoring Instruments
a. Instrument monitoring may be used to measure the following parameters at different
locations and depths in the reclamation:
1) Pore water pressure – by piezometers.
2) Settlement – by settlement plate, extensometers or surface markers.
3) Lateral deformation – by inclinometers.

Rev. 1 5.8 - 28
3. Pore Water Pressure Measurement

a. Pore pressures shall be monitored in a drained reclamation to ensure that the
excess pore pressures generated by fill placement do not exceed predictions, and to
confirm that the vertical drains are functioning properly.
b. Vibrating wire piezometers are often utilized for monitoring pore pressures in
reclamation.
c. For monitoring of pore pressure during fill placement, the effect of tidal variation on
the piezometer readings shall be measured in order to obtain the excess pore water
pressure at a given time and location.
4. Settlement Measurement
a. Settlement shall be monitored for both drained and dredged reclamation methods.
The magnitude and rate of settlement may be measured by means of settlement
plates or extensometers.
b. Settlement plates, installed either on the seabed, within the fill or at the surface of
the reclamation, measure the settlement by comparing the levels of the plates taken
at different times, with a fixed datum level.
c. Where settlement characteristics of individual subsoil layers are required,
extensometers are more suitable. The settlement of individual subsoil layers may be
determined by detecting the relative change in the vertical positions of the steel or
magnetic ring targets in the extensometers by a probe.
5. Lateral Deformation Measurement
a. Lateral deformation shall be measured by inclinometers. Lateral deformation data
are useful during fill placement in a drained reclamation, as analysis of the data
trend may reveal early signs of instability in the sub-soil.
b. In monitoring a reclaimed fill area, an inclinometer is usually combined with an
extensometer to form an inclinometer-extensometer composite installed in a pre-
drilled hole. The fill level at and around the instruments shall be recorded
simultaneously when taking the readings.
6. Instrument Monitoring Locations
a. Instrumentation shall be installed before the start of fill placement so that
measurements may be taken prior to and during the placement of the fill.
Instrumentation shall be concentrated at critical areas such as those where the
marine mud is thick or particularly weak. Since lateral deformation of the marine
mud is generally more prominent at the edge of reclamation, instrumentation shall
be placed near the leading edge of the reclamation in order to effectively monitor the
stability.
b. The location of the instruments shall be refined after finalizing the working sequence
with the reclamation contractor. Installation of monitoring instruments prior to the
commencement of reclamation may cause obstruction to the movement and
operation of marine plant on the site. The locations of the monitoring points shall be
finalized when the reclamation sequence and plant operation are known to avoid
placing instruments in locations where they won’t be utilized until a later stage.
c. If the instruments are intended to be placed at locations of future surcharge mounds,
the instruments will need to be installed in a manner that allows later vertical
extension. In general, instruments should not be installed in future building areas or
other areas where piling may be required, as the instruments may be destroyed. The

Rev. 1 5.8 - 29
ideal locations are in areas zoned for future roads, footpaths, cycle tracks, amenity
areas and open spaces.
d. Instruments may involve underwater installation and may need protection to
withstand the marine environment and fill placement operations. For instruments
installed prior to commencement of filling, protection may be achieved by housing all
the instruments of each cluster in a rigid sleeve above the seabed. Fixed temporary
staging shall be erected to support and protect the sleeve. The temporary staging
shall be rigid and strong enough to ensure that the sleeve will stand above the
seabed in a stable manner. Due care shall be exercised to avoid damaging the
instrumentation while placing fill in the vicinity. For instance, grabbing instead of
bottom dumping may be adopted adjacent to the instruments. If installation of
instruments by marine plant prior to commencement of fill placement is not feasible,
instruments shall be installed immediately after the reclamation is filled up to above
water level so that monitoring may be started at the earliest opportunity.
7. Monitoring of Stability During Fill Placement
a. This subsection discusses the methods of plotting the collected monitoring data to
assist in the assessment of the interim stability of the reclamation process. However,
other site observations will also be useful indicators of the reclamation stability such
as:
1) Tension cracks appearing at the top and side slope of the reclamation.
2) Settlement at the center of reclamation increasing rapidly.
3) Sounding survey results indicating up and down curve profiles of the seabed
near the edge of the reclamation.
4) Filling rate increasing suddenly.
5) Fill being stockpiled on the site excessively.
b. Monitoring data shall be recorded and reported at least daily, but should be given to
the RCJ immediately where anomalous behavior has been discovered together with
the Contractor’s remedial proposals to mitigate the risk to the works.
8. Monitoring for Dredged Reclamation
a. The principles described above also apply to dredged reclamation in soft, clay soils.
Settlement is the main parameter that is monitored in a fully dredged reclamation in
order to confirm prediction of settlement. For a partially dredged reclamation,
monitoring instruments similar to those in a drained reclamation may be set up to
measure the pore water pressure, settlement and lateral deformation. However,
fewer instruments may be required, depending on the type and thickness of the
remaining sub-soils. Data interpretation will be similar to that for a drained
reclamation.
b. Where the dredged reclamation is carried out adjacent to existing developments or
structures, monitoring instruments shall be installed in the existing ground to monitor
pore water pressures and soil movements, and stability of these developments or
structures.
F. Miscellaneous Design Aspects
1. Piling
a. Obstructions to piling activities at reclamation sites may result in serious cost
overruns and delays. The largest rock or boulder encountered when driving piles

Rev. 1 5.8 - 30
must be breakable by impact or be capable of being displaced. For the latter, there
must be sufficient voids in the fill to allow the displacement. Experience has shown
that 250 mm is the approximate upper size limit for boulders within the fill to avoid
problems with the installation of common pile types such as driven concrete piles,
steel H-piles, steel tubular piles and bored piles.
b. Permanent steel liners are usually necessary for bored piles to avoid necking,
particularly in crushed rock fill or where pockets of unconsolidated marine deposits
are suspected. Special shoes or reinforced sections or points are normally required
for driven piles, particularly in public fill or crushed rock fill.
2. Culvert Foundations
a. The type of foundation to be used for a culvert extension across the new reclamation
will depend on the method of reclamation used and the amount of the residual
settlement. To reduce residual settlement, surcharging may be carried out with
surplus fill over a strip two to three times the width of the culvert and about five to six
meters high until settlement has stabilized.
b. Where the marine deposits have been fully removed or where the residual
settlement has effectively been completed before culvert construction commences, a
nominal crushed rock or rubble foundation layer will usually be acceptable.
c. Where the residual settlement is not effectively complete or where variable
thicknesses of marine deposits are suspected, surcharge preloading and fill
densification measures may reduce settlement problems. However, it is
recommended that special measures are taken to allow for some differential
settlement at the culvert joints. The use of piled foundations may be considered
where differential settlement problems are expected to be particularly severe, but
the initial cost will be relatively expensive, and may result in other forms of
settlement problems, as outlined below.
d. Normally, culvert outfalls are formed in the seawalls using special concrete outfall
blocks. The difference in settlement between the seawalls and the reclamation will
cause differential movement at the junction with a piled culvert. In addition,
differential settlement will also occur along each side of a piled culvert, as the
adjacent reclamation continues to settle.
3. Structures and Facilities
a. Settlement, in particular differential settlement, may adversely affect the structural
integrity and serviceability of structures and facilities to be built on reclaimed land.
General design aspects of pavements, structures, pipes and ducts, constructed on a
reclamation are described in the following paragraphs.
b. For roads and pedestrian walkways constructed on newly reclaimed land, differential
settlement may cause non-uniform deformations and hence affect the serviceability
of the structures. These effects may be mitigated by using flexible pavement that
allows future overlay.
c. To avoid the possibility of differential settlement, buildings constructed on reclaimed
land are usually supported on pile foundations or the ground densified by vibro-
compaction or vibro-replacement methods. The possible effects of negative skin
friction on the pile due to settlement must be taken into account in the design. The
magnitude of the negative skin friction at a particular site will depend on the pile
characteristics, fill characteristics, pile movement and the settlement since
completion of the pile. Other types of foundations, such as a raft or floating
foundation, may be considered for low-rise buildings in conjunction with vibro-

Rev. 1 5.8 - 31
compaction or vibro-replacement. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall take into
account, in the design of the pile, the effect of the pile driving in the stability and
foundations of the adjacent areas or structures.
d. For underground drainage and sewer pipes built in reclamation areas, the effect of
differ

Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) - 23445509

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) - 23445509

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM) - 23445509

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ttt

Royal Commission for Jubail and Yanbu.

Royal Commission in Jubail

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Rev. 1

Sunday, September 20, 2020 Page 1 of 5

Sunday, September 20, 2020 Page 2 of 5

Sunday, September 20, 2020 Page 3 of 5

Sunday, September 20, 2020 Page 4 of 5

Sunday, September 20, 2020 Page 5 of 5

GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL

1 2020 General update TJC BAN BAN MRC OMQ

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Section Title Page No.

1.1.1 INTRODUCTION/BACKGROUND ................................................................................ 1

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.2 SCOPE AND PURPOSE OF THE GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.3 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

A. Responsibilities and Coordination

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

4) Exercise any health and safety management function over Contractors or

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.4 REGULATORY DOCUMENTS

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.5 REVISIONS TO THE MANUAL

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.6 COORDINATION WITH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.1.7 COORDINATION WITH ROYAL COMMISSION IN JUBAIL STANDARD DETAILS

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

FIGURE 1.1.A: JUBAIL INDUSTRIAL CITY DISTRICT MAP

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

FIGURE 1.1.B: RAS AL-KHAIR DISTRICT MAP

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Section Title Page No.

1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 1

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

1.2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

A. Definitions and References

A. Codes and Performance Standards

A. Project Submission Standards and Requirements

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

GUIDING ENGINEERING MANUAL

1 2020 General update TJC BAN BAN MRC OMQ

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Section Title Page No.

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Section Title Page No.

2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... 1

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

2.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS